THE GRID CODE

ISSUE 6
REVISION 21

4 March 2024

© 2024 Copyright owned by National Grid Electricity System Operator Limited, all rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced in any material form (including photocopying and restoring in
any medium or electronic means and whether or not transiently or incidentally) without the written permission
of National Grid Electricity System Operator Limited, except:

1. to the extent that any party who is required to comply (or is exempt from complying) with the provisions
under the Electricity Act 1989 reasonably needs to reproduce this publication to undertake its licence or
statutory duties within Great Britain (or any agent appointed so to act on that party’s behalf); and

2. in accordance with the provisions of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988.
 THE GRID CODE
CONTENTS

CONTENTS* (C)

PREFACE* (P)

GLOSSARY AND DEFINITIONS (GD)

PLANNING CODE (PC)

CONNECTION CONDITIONS (CC)

EUROPEAN CONNECTION CONDITIONS (ECC)

DEMAND RESPONSE SERVICES (DRS)

COMPLIANCE PROCESSES (CP)

EUROPEAN COMPLIANCE PROCESSES (ECP)

OPERATING CODES (OC)

OC1 Demand Forecasts

OC2 Operational Planning and Data Provision
OC3 Systems Incident Report
OC4 Not Used
OC5 Testing and Monitoring
OC6 Demand Control
OC7 Operational Liaison
OC8 Safety Co-ordination
OC9 Contingency Planning
OC10 Event Information Supply
OC11 Numbering and Nomenclature of HV Apparatus at Certain Sites
OC12 System Tests

BALANCING CODES (BC)

BC1 Pre Gate Closure Process

BC2 Post Gate Closure Process
BC3 Frequency Control Process
BC4 TERRE Processes
BC5

Issue 5 Revision 43 08 June 2020

DATA REGISTRATION CODE (DRC)

GENERAL CONDITIONS (GC)

GOVERNANCE RULES (GR)

REVISIONS* (R)
*does not constitute part of the Grid Code

Issue 5 Revision 43 08 June 2020

 PREFACE
(P)

(This section does not form part of the Grid Code)

P.1. The Grid Code sets out the operating procedures and principles governing the relationship
between The Company and all Users of the National Electricity Transmission System, be
they Generators, DC Converter owners, Suppliers or Non-Embedded Customers. The
Grid Code specifies day-to-day procedures for both planning and operational purposes and
covers both normal and exceptional circumstances.

P.2 The Grid Code is designed to:

(i) permit the development, maintenance and operation of an efficient, coordinated and
economical system for the transmission of electricity;
(ii) facilitate competition in the generation and supply of electricity (and without limiting the
foregoing, to facilitate the national electricity transmission system being made available
to persons authorised to supply or generate electricity on terms which neither prevent
nor restrict competition in the supply or generation of electricity);
(iii) promote the security and efficiency of the electricity generation, transmission and
distribution systems in the national electricity transmission system operator area taken
as a whole; and
(iv) efficiently discharge the obligations imposed upon the licensee by this license and to
comply with the Electricity Regulation and any relevant Legally Binding Decisions of
the European Commission and/or the Agency.
and is conceived as a statement of what is optimal (particularly from a technical point of view)
for all Users and The Company itself in relation to the planning, operation and use of the
National Electricity Transmission System. It seeks to avoid any undue discrimination
between Users and categories of Users.

P.3 The Grid Code is divided into the following sections:

(a) a Planning Code which provides generally for the supply of certain information by
Users in order for The Company to undertake the planning and development of the
National Electricity Transmission System;
(b) the Connection Conditions which specify minimum technical, design and operational
criteria which must be complied with by The Company at Connection Sites and by
Users connected to or seeking connection with the National Electricity Transmission
System or by Generators (other than in respect of Small Power Stations) or DC
Converter owners, connected to or seeking connection to a User's System;
(c) the Compliance Processes which specify the process that must be followed by The
Company and any Generator or DC Converter Station owner to demonstrate its
compliance with the Grid Code in relation to its Plant and Apparatus.

Issue 6 Revision 4 P 03 August 2021

1 of 2
 (d) an Operating Code, which is split into a number of sections and deals with Demand
forecasting (OC1); the co-ordination of the outage planning process in respect of Large
Power Stations, the National Electricity Transmission System and User Systems
for construction, repair and maintenance, and the provision of certain types of
Operating Margin data (OC2); testing and monitoring of Users (OC5); different forms
of reducing Demand (OC6); the reporting of scheduled and planned actions, and
unexpected occurrences such as faults (OC7); the co-ordination, establishment and
maintenance of Isolation and Earthing in order that work and/or testing can be carried
out safely (OC8); certain aspects of contingency planning (OC9); the provision of written
reports on occurrences such as faults in certain circumstances (OC10); the procedures
for numbering and nomenclature of HV Apparatus at certain sites (OC11); and the
procedures for the establishment of System Tests (OC12);
(e) a Balancing Code, which is split into three sections and deals with the submission of
BM Unit Data from BM Participants, and of certain other information, for the following
day and ahead of Gate Closure (BC1); the post Gate Closure process (BC2); and the
procedures and requirements in relation to System Frequency control (BC3);
(f) a Data Registration Code, which sets out a unified listing of all data required by The
Company from Users, and by Users from The Company, under the Grid Code;
(g) General Conditions, which are intended to ensure, so far as possible, that the various
sections of the Grid Code work together and work in practice and include provisions
relating to the establishment of a Grid Code Review Panel and other provisions of a
general nature.
P.4 This Preface is provided to Users and to prospective Users for information only and does not
constitute part of the Grid Code.

< END OF PREFACE >

Issue 6 Revision 4 P 03 August 2021

2 of 2
 GLOSSARY & DEFINITIONS
(GD)
GD.1 In the Grid Code the following words and expressions shall, unless the subject matter or
context otherwise requires or is inconsistent therewith, bear the following meanings:

Access Group A group of Connection Points within which a User declares under the
Planning Code
(a) An interconnection and/or
(b) A need to redistribute Demand between those Connection Points
either pre-fault or post-fault
Where a single Connection Point does not form part of an Access
Group in accordance with the above, that single Connection Point shall
be considered to be an Access Group in its own right.

Access Period A period of time in respect of which each Transmission Interface Circuit
is to be assessed as whether or not it is capable of being maintained as
derived in accordance with PC.A.4.1.4. The period shall commence and
end on specified calendar weeks.

Act The Electricity Act 1989 (as amended by the Utilities Act 2000 and the
Energy Act 2004).

Active Control Based Droop The Active Control Based Power output supplied by a Grid Forming
Power Plant through controlled means (be it manual or automatic).
For GBGF-I this is equivalent to a Synchronous Generating Unit with a
traditional governor coupled to its prime mover.
Active Control Based Droop Power is used by The Company to
control System Frequency changes through the instruction of Primary
Response and Secondary Response.

Active Control Based The Active Power output supplied by a Grid Forming Plant through
Power controlled means (be it manual or automatic) of the positive phase
sequence Root Mean Square Active Power produced at fundamental
System Frequency by the control system of a Grid Forming Unit.
For GBGF-I, this is equivalent to a Synchronous Generating Unit with
a traditional governor coupled to its prime mover.
Active Control Based Power includes Active Power changes that
results from a change to the Grid Forming Plant Owners available set
points that have a 5 Hz limit on the bandwidth of the provided response.
Active Control Based Power also includes Active Power components
produced by the normal operation of a Grid Forming Plant that comply
with the Engineering Recommendation P28 limits. These Active
Power components do not have a 5 Hz limit on the bandwidth of the
provided response.
Active Control Based Power does not include Active Power
components proportional to System Frequency, slip or deviation that
provide damping power to emulate the natural damping function provided
by a real Synchronous Generating Unit.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

1 of 84
 The Active Power naturally injected or absorbed by a Grid Forming
Active Damping Power
Plant to reduce Active Power oscillations in the Total System.

More specifically, Active Damping Power is the damped response of a

Grid Forming Plant to an oscillation between the voltage at the Grid
Entry Point or User System Entry Point and the voltage of the Internal
Voltage Source of the Grid Forming Plant.

For the avoidance of doubt, Active Damping Power is an inherent

capability of a Grid Forming Plant that starts to respond naturally, within
less than 5ms to low frequency oscillations in the System Frequency.

Active Energy The electrical energy produced, flowing or supplied by an electric circuit
during a time interval, being the integral with respect to time of the
instantaneous power, measured in units of watt-hours or standard
multiples thereof, ie:
1000 Wh = 1 kWh
1000 kWh = 1 MWh
1000 MWh = 1 GWh
1000 GWh = 1 TWh

Active Frequency The injection or absorption of Active Power by a Grid Forming Plant to
Response Power or from the Total System during a deviation of the System Frequency
away from the Target Frequency.
For a GBGF-I this is very similar to Primary Response but with a
response time to achieve the declared service capability (which could be
the Maximum Capacity or Registered Capacity) within 1 second.
For GBGF-I this can rapidly inject or absorb Active Power in addition to
the phase-based Active Inertia Power to provide a system with desirable
NFP plot characteristics.
Active Frequency Response Power can be produced by any viable
control technology.

Active Inertia Power The injection or absorption of Active Power by a Grid Forming Plant to
or from the Total System during a System Frequency change.
The transient injection or absorption of Active Power from a Grid
Forming Plant to the Total System as a result of the ROCOF value at
the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point. This requires a
sufficient energy storage capacity of the Grid Forming Plant to meet the
Grid Forming Capability requirements specified in ECC.6.3.19.
For the avoidance of doubt, this includes the rotational inertial energy of
the complete drive train of a Synchronous Generating Unit.
Active Inertia Power is an inherent capability of a Grid Forming Plant
to respond naturally, within less than 5ms, to changes in the System
Frequency.
For the avoidance of doubt, the Active Inertia Power has a slower
frequency response compared with Active Phase Jump Power.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

2 of 84
 The transient injection or absorption of Active Power from a Grid
Active Phase Jump Power
Forming Plant to the Total System as a result of changes in the phase
angle between the Internal Voltage Source of the Grid Forming Plant
and the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point.

In the event of a disturbance or fault on the Total System, a Grid

Forming Plant will instantaneously (within 5ms) inject or absorb Active
Phase Jump Power to the Total System as a result of the phase angle
change.

For GBGF-I as a minimum value this is up to the Phase Jump Angle

Limit Power.

Active Phase Jump Power is an inherent capability of a Grid Forming

Plant that starts to respond naturally, within less than 5 ms and can have
frequency components of over 1000 Hz.

Active Power The product of voltage and the in-phase component of alternating current
measured in units of watts and standard multiples thereof, ie:
1000 Watts = 1 kW
1000 kW = 1 MW
1000 MW = 1 GW
1000 GW = 1 TW

Active ROCOF Response The Active Inertia Power developed from a Grid Forming Plant plus the
Power Active Frequency Response Power that can be supplied by a Grid
Forming Plant when subject to a rate of change of the System
Frequency.

Additional BM Unit Has the meaning as set out in the BSC

Affiliate In relation to any person, any holding company or subsidiary of such

person or any subsidiary of a holding company of such person, in each
case within the meaning of Section 736, 736A and 736B of the
Companies Act 1985 as substituted by section 144 of the Companies Act
1989 and, if that latter section is not in force at the Transfer Date, as if
such section were in force at such date.

AF Rules Has the meaning given to “allocation framework” in section 13(2) of the
Energy Act 2013.

Agency As defined in The Company’s Transmission Licence.

Aggregator A BM Participant who controls one or more Additional BM Units or

Secondary BM Units.

Aggregator Impact Matrix Defined for an Additional BM Unit or a Secondary BM Unit. Provides
data allowing The Company to model the result of a Bid-Offer
Acceptance on each of the Grid Supply Points within the GSP Group
over which the Additional BM Unit or Secondary BM Unit is defined.

Alternate Member Shall mean an alternate member for the Panel Members elected or
appointed in accordance with this GR.7.2(a) or (b).

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

3 of 84
 Anchor Plant, owned and operated by a Restoration Contractor which can
Start-Up from Shutdown and energise a part of the Total System upon
instruction from The Company or a Network Operator or a relevant
Transmission Licensee within a defined time period, without an external
electrical power supply from the Total System.

Anchor DC Converter Test A test carried out by an Anchor DC Converter Owner on an Anchor DC
Converter while the Anchor DC Converter is disconnected from all
external electrical power supplies from the Total System.

Anchor Generating Unit A test carried out on an Anchor Generating Unit or a CCGT unit or a
Test Power Generating Module, as the case may be, at an Anchor Power
Station while the Anchor Power Station remains energised from the
Total System.

Anchor HVDC System Test A test carried out by an Anchor HVDC System Owner while the Anchor
HVDC System is disconnected from all external electrical power supplies
from the Total System.
The ability of a Restoration Contractor’s Plant to Start-Up from
Anchor Plant Capability
Shutdown and to energise and maintain a part of the Total System upon
instruction from The Company or Relevant Transmission Licensee (in
Scotland) or relevant Network Operator, within a defined time period,
without an external electrical power supply from the Total System. In the
case of a Local Joint Restoration Plan the defined period of time is
within 2 hours of an instruction from The Company or Relevant
Transmission Licensee. In the case of a Distribution Restoration
Zone Plan, the defined period of time is within 8 hours of an instruction
from relevant Network Operator.

Anchor Plant Test A test conducted on Plant to confirm it is capable of meeting the
requirements of an Anchor Restoration Contract.

Anchor Power Station Test A test carried out by an Anchor Generator at an Anchor Power Station
while that Anchor Power Station is disconnected from all external
electrical power supplies from the Total System.

Anchor Restoration In the case of a Local Joint Restoration Plan or Offshore Local Joint
Contract Restoration Plan, a contract between The Company and an Anchor
Restoration Contractor for the provision of an Anchor Plant Capability.
In the case of a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan is an agreement
between The Company and relevant Network Operator and Anchor
Restoration Contractor for the provision of an Anchor Plant Capability.

Anchor Restoration A Restoration Contractor with an Anchor Restoration Contract.

Contractor

Anchor Plant Unit Test A test carried out on a Generating Unit or a CCGT Unit or a Power
Generating Module, or a HVDC System or a DC Converter as the case
may be, at the site of an Anchor Plant while the Anchor Plant is supplied
from all external power supplies.

Ancillary Service A System Ancillary Service and/or a Commercial Ancillary Service,

as the case may be. An Ancillary Service may include one or more
Demand Response Services.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

4 of 84
 Ancillary Services An agreement between a User and The Company for the payment by
Agreement The Company to that User in respect of the provision by such User of
Ancillary Services.

Annual Average Cold Spell A particular combination of weather elements which gives rise to a level
Conditions or ACS of peak Demand within a Financial Year which has a 50% chance of
Conditions being exceeded as a result of weather variation alone.

Apparatus Other than in OC8, means all equipment in which electrical conductors
are used, supported or of which they may form a part. It includes Users’
equipment which imposes Demand on the System.
In OC8, it means High Voltage electrical circuits forming part of a System
on which Safety Precautions may be applied to allow work and/or testing
to be carried out on a System.

Apparent Power The product of voltage and of alternating current measured in units of
voltamperes and standard multiples thereof, ie:
1000 VA = 1 kVA
1000 kVA = 1 MVA

Approved Fast Track Has the meaning given in GR.26.7, provided that no objection is received
Proposal pursuant to GR.26.12.

Approved Grid Code Self- Has the meaning given in GR.24.10.

Governance Proposal

Approved Modification Has the meaning given in GR.22.7

Authorised Certifier An entity that issues Equipment Certificates and Power Generating
Module Documents and whose accreditation is given by the United
Kingdom Accreditation Service or such other body as may be established
from time to time to carry out the function of accreditation.

Authorised Electricity Any person (other than The Company) who is authorised under the Act
Operator to generate, participate in the transmission of, distribute or supply
electricity which shall include any Interconnector Owner or
Interconnector User.

Authority-Led Modification A Grid Code Modification Proposal in respect of a Significant Code

Review, raised by the Authority pursuant to GR.17

Authority-Led Modification Has the meaning given in GR.17.4.

Report

Authority for Access An authority which grants the holder the right to unaccompanied access
to sites containing exposed HV conductors.

Authority, The The Authority established by section 1 (1) of the Utilities Act 2000.

Automatic Voltage The continuously acting automatic equipment controlling the terminal
Regulator or AVR voltage of a Synchronous Generating Unit or Synchronous Power
Generating Module by comparing the actual terminal voltage with a
reference value and controlling by appropriate means the output of an
Exciter, depending on the deviations.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

5 of 84
 Auxiliaries Any item of Plant and/or Apparatus not directly a part of the boiler plant
or Power Generating Module or Generating Unit or DC Converter or
HVDC Equipment or Power Park Module, but required for the boiler
plant's or Power Generating Module’s or Generating Unit's or DC
Converter’s or HVDC Equipment’s or Power Park Module’s functional
operation.

Auxiliary Diesel Engine A diesel engine driving a Power Generating Module or Generating Unit
which can supply a Unit Board or Station Board, which can start without
an electrical power supply from outside the Power Station within which it
is situated.

Auxiliary Energy Supplies An electricity supply (which could be derived from an Auxiliary Diesel
Engine or Auxiliary Gas Turbine or other source of energy) that is
necessary to power the auxiliary and ancillary equipment on which a
Power Generating Module or HVDC System or DC Converter or other
item of Plant relies for it to be capable of generating Active or Reactive
Power and which is generally supplied via a Unit Board or Station
Board, or equivalent. Auxiliary Energy Supplies must beavailable
without an external electrical power supply from the Total System.
Auxiliary Energy Supplies do not include the mains-independent light
current supplies necessary to operate Critical Tools and Facilities.

Auxiliary Gas Turbine A Gas Turbine Unit, which can supply a Unit Board or Station Board,
which can start without an electrical power supply from outside the Power
Station within which it is situated.

Average Conditions That combination of weather elements within a period of time which is the
average of the observed values of those weather elements during
equivalent periods over many years (sometimes referred to as normal
weather).

Back-Up Protection A Protection system which will operate when a system fault is not cleared
by other Protection.

Balancing and Settlement The code of that title as from time to time amended.
Code or BSC

Balancing Code or BC That portion of the Grid Code which specifies the Balancing Mechanism
process.

Balancing Mechanism Has the meaning set out in The Company’s Transmission Licence

Balancing Mechanism Has the meaning set out in the BSC.

Reporting Agent or BMRA

Balancing Mechanism Has the meaning set out in the BSC.

Reporting Service or BMRS

Balancing Principles A statement prepared by The Company in accordance with Condition

Statement C16 of The Company’s Transmission Licence.

Baseline Forecast Has the meaning given to the term ‘baseline forecast’ in Section G of the
BSC.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

6 of 84
 Bid-Offer Acceptance (a) A communication issued by The Company in accordance with
BC2.7; or
(b) an Emergency Instruction to the extent provided for in BC2.9.2.3.

Bid-Offer Data Has the meaning set out in the BSC.

Bilateral Agreement Has the meaning set out in the CUSC.

The Active Power step and the time between steps (from no load to
Block Loading Capability
Rated MW),which a Generating Unit or Power Generating Module or
Power Park Module or HVDC System or DC Converter Station
(including Plant and Apparatus owned and operated by a Restoration
Contractor) can instantaneously supply without causing it to trip or go
outside the Frequency range of 47.5Hz – 52Hz assuming the Plant is
initially operating at a nominal System Frequency of 50Hz (or an
otherwise agreed Frequency range).
BM Participant A person who is responsible for and controls one or more BM Units or
where a Bilateral Agreement specifies that a User is required to be
treated as a BM Participant for the purposes of the Grid Code. For the
avoidance of doubt, it does not imply that they must be active in the
Balancing Mechanism.

BM Unit Has the meaning set out in the BSC, except that for the purposes of the
Grid Code the reference to “Party” in the BSC shall be a reference to
User.

BM Unit Data The collection of parameters associated with each BM Unit, as described
in Appendix 1 of BC1.

Boiler Time Constant Determined at Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity (as

applicable), the boiler time constant will be construed in accordance with
the principles of the IEEE Committee Report "Dynamic Models for Steam
and Hydro Turbines in Power System Studies" published in 1973 which
apply to such phrase.

British Standards or BS Those standards and specifications approved by the British Standards
Institution.

BSCCo Has the meaning set out in the BSC.

BSC Panel Has meaning set out for “Panel” in the BSC.

Business Day Any week day (other than a Saturday) on which banks are open for
domestic business in the City of London.

Cancellation of National The notification given to Users when a National Electricity

Electricity Transmission Transmission System Warning is cancelled.
System Warning

Capacity Market The Capacity Market Rules, The Electricity Capacity Regulations
Documents 2014 and any other Regulations made under Chapter 3 of Part 2 of the
Energy Act 2013 which are in force from time to time.

Capacity Market Rules The rules made under section 34 of the Energy Act 2013 as modified from
time to time in accordance with that section and The Electricity Capacity
Regulations 2014.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

7 of 84
 Cascade Hydro Scheme Two or more hydro-electric Generating Units, owned or controlled by the
same Generator, which are located in the same water catchment area
and are at different ordnance datums and which depend upon a common
source of water for their operation, known as:
(a) Moriston
(b) Killin
I Garry
(d) Conon
(e) Clunie
(f) Beauly
which will comprise more than one Power Station.

Cascade Hydro Scheme The matrix described in Appendix 1 to BC1 under the heading Cascade
Matrix Hydro Scheme Matrix.

Category 1 Intertripping A System to Generator Operational Intertripping Scheme arising from

Scheme a Variation to Connection Design following a request from the relevant
User which is consistent with the criteria specified in the Security and
Quality of Supply Standard.

Category 2 Intertripping A System to Generator Operational Intertripping Scheme which is:-

Scheme
(i) required to alleviate an overload on a circuit which connects the
Group containing the User’s Connection Site to the National
Electricity Transmission System; and
(ii) installed in accordance with the requirements of the planning
criteria of the Security and Quality of Supply Standard in order
that measures can be taken to permit maintenance access for each
transmission circuit and for such measures to be economically
justified,
and the operation of which results in a reduction in Active Power on the
overloaded circuits which connect the User’s Connection Site to the rest
of the National Electricity Transmission System which is equal to the
reduction in Active Power from the Connection Site (once any system
losses or third party system effects are discounted).

Category 3 Intertripping A System to Generator Operational Intertripping Scheme which,

Scheme where agreed by The Company and the User, is installed to alleviate an
overload on, and as an alternative to, the reinforcement of a third party
system, such as the Distribution System of a Public Distribution
System Operator.

Category 4 Intertripping A System to Generator Operational Intertripping Scheme installed to

Scheme enable the disconnection of the Connection Site from the National
Electricity Transmission System in a controlled and efficient manner in
order to facilitate the timely restoration of the National Electricity
Transmission System.

Caution Notice A notice conveying a warning against interference.

CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardisation.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

8 of 84
 Citizens Advice Means the National Association of Citizens Advice
Bureaux.

Citizens Advice Scotland Means the Scottish Association of Citizens Advice

Bureaux.

CfD Counterparty A person designated as a “CfD counterparty” under section 7(1) of the
Energy Act 2013.

CfD Documents The AF Rules, The Contracts for Difference (Allocation) Regulations
2014, The Contracts for Difference (Definition of Eligible Generator)
Regulations 2014 and The Contracts for Difference (Electricity Supplier
Obligations) Regulations 2014 and any other regulations made under
Chapter 2 of Part 2 of the Energy Act 2013 which are in force from time
to time.

CfD Settlement Services means any person:

Provider
(i) appointed for the time being and from time to time by a CfD
Counterparty; or
(ii) who is designated by virtue of Section C1.2.1B of the
Balancing and Settlement Code,
in either case to carry out any of the CFD settlement activities (or any
successor entity performing CFD settlement activities).

CCGT Module Matrix The matrix described in Appendix 1 to BC1 under the heading CCGT
Module Matrix.

CCGT Module Planning A matrix in the form set out in Appendix 3 of OC2 showing the combination
Matrix of CCGT Units within a CCGT Module which would be running in relation
to any given MW output.
Closed Distribution System A distribution system classified as a Closed Distribution System by the
or CDSO Authority which distributes electricity within a geographically confined
industrial, commercial or shared services site and does not supply
household Customers, without prejudice to incidental use by a small
number of households located within the area served by the System and
with employment or similar associations with the owner of the System.

CM Administrative Parties The Secretary of State, the CM Settlement Body, and any CM
Settlement Services Provider.

CM Settlement Body the Electricity Settlements Company Ltd or such other person as may
from time to time be appointed as Settlement Body under regulation 80 of
the Electricity Capacity Regulations 2014.

CM Settlement Services any person with whom the CM Settlement Body has entered into a
Provider contract to provide services to it in relation to the performance of its
functions under the Capacity Market Documents.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

9 of 84
 Code Administration Code Means the code of practice approved by the Authority and:
of Practice
(a) developed and maintained by the code administrators in existence
from time to time; and
(b) amended subject to the Authority’s approval from time to time;
and
(c) re-published from time to time;

Code Administrator Means The Company carrying out the role of Code Administrator in
accordance with the General Conditions.

Combined Cycle Gas A collection of Generating Units (registered as a CCGT Module (which
Turbine Module or CCGT could be within a Power Generating Module) under the PC) comprising
Module one or more Gas Turbine Units (or other gas based engine units) and
one or more Steam Units where, in normal operation, the waste heat
from the Gas Turbines is passed to the water/steam system of the
associated Steam Unit or Steam Units and where the component units
within the CCGT Module are directly connected by steam or hot gas lines
which enable those units to contribute to the efficiency of the combined
cycle operation of the CCGT Module.

Combined Cycle Gas A Generating Unit within a CCGT Module.

Turbine Unit or CCGT Unit

Commercial Ancillary Ancillary Services, other than System Ancillary Services, utilised by
Services The Company in operating the Total System if a User (or other person
such as a Demand Response Provider) has agreed to provide them
under an Ancillary Services Agreement or under a Bilateral
Agreement with payment being dealt with under an Ancillary Services
Agreement or in the case of Externally Interconnected System
Operators or Interconnector Users, under any other agreement (and in
the case of Externally Interconnected System Operators and
Interconnector Users includes Ancillary Services equivalent to or
similar to System Ancillary Services).

Commercial Boundary Has the meaning set out in the CUSC

Committed Level The expected Active Power output from a BM Unit after accepting a Bid-
Offer Acceptance or RR Instruction or a combination of Bid-Offer
Acceptances and RR Instructions.

Committed Project Data relating to a User Development once the offer for a CUSC Contract
Planning Data is accepted.

Common Collection Busbar A busbar within a Power Park Module to which the higher voltage side
of two or more Power Park Unit generator transformers are connected.

Completion Date Has the meaning set out in the Bilateral Agreement with each User to
that term or in the absence of that term to such other term reflecting the
date when a User is expected to connect to or start using the National
Electricity Transmission System. In the case of an Embedded
Medium Power Station or Embedded DC Converter Station or
Embedded HVDC System having a similar meaning in relation to the
Network Operator’s System as set out in the Embedded Development
Agreement.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

10 of 84
 Complex A Connection Site together with the associated Power Station and/or
Network Operator substation and/or associated Plant and/or
Apparatus, as appropriate.

Compliance Processes or That portion of the Grid Code which is identified as the Compliance
CP Processes.

Compliance Statement A statement completed by the relevant User confirming compliance with
each of the relevant Grid Code provisions, and the supporting evidence
in respect of such compliance, of its:
Generating Unit(s); or,
Power Generating Modules (including DC Connected Power Park
Modules and/or Electricity Storage Modules); or,
CCGT Module(s); or,
Power Park Module(s); or,
DC Converter(s); or
HVDC Systems; or
Plant and Apparatus at an EU Grid Supply Point owned or operated by
a Network Operator; or
Network Operator’s entire distribution System where such Network
Operator’s distribution System comprises solely of Plant and
Apparatus procured on or after 7 September 2018 and was connected
to the National Electricity Transmission System on or after 18 August
2019. In this case, all connections to the National Electricity
Transmission System would comprise only of EU Grid Supply Points;
or
Plant and Apparatus at an EU Grid Supply Point owned or operated by
a Non-Embedded Customer where such Non-Embedded Customer is
defined as an EU Code User;
In the form provided by The Company to the relevant User or another
format as agreed between the User and The Company.
Configuration 1 AC One or more Offshore Power Park Modules that are connected to an
Connected Offshore Power AC Offshore Transmission System and that AC Offshore
Park Module Transmission System is connected to only one Onshore substation and
which has one or more Transmission Interface Points.
Configuration 2 AC One or more Offshore Power Park Modules that are connected to a
Connected Offshore Power meshed AC Offshore Transmission System and that AC Offshore
Park Module Transmission System is connected to two or more Onshore substations
at its Transmission Interface Points.
Configuration 1 DC One or more DC Connected Power Park Modules that are connected
Connected Power Park to an HVDC System or Transmission DC Converter and that HVDC
Module System or Transmission DC Converter is connected to only one
Onshore substation and which has one or more Transmission Interface
Points.
Configuration 2 DC One or more DC Connected Power Park Modules that are connected
Connected Power Park to an HVDC System or Transmission DC Converter and that HVDC
Module System or Transmission DC Converter is connected to more than one
Onshore substation at its Transmission Interface Points.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

11 of 84
 Connection Conditions or That portion of the Grid Code which is identified as the Connection
CC Conditions being applicable to GB Code Users.

Connection Entry Capacity Has the meaning set out in the CUSC.

Connected Planning Data Data which replaces data containing estimated values assumed for
planning purposes by validated actual values and updated estimates for
the future and by updated forecasts for Forecast Data items such as
Demand.

Connection Point A Grid Supply Point or Grid Entry Point, as the case may be.

Connection Site A Transmission Site or User Site, as the case may be.

Construction Agreement Has the meaning set out in the CUSC

Consumer Representative Means the person appointed by the Citizens Advice or the Citizens
Advice Scotland (or any successor body) representing all categories of
customers, appointed in accordance with GR.4.2(b)

Contingency Reserve The margin of generation over forecast Demand which is required in the
period from 24 hours ahead down to real time to cover against
uncertainties in Large Power Station availability and against both
weather forecast and Demand forecast errors.

Control Based Reactive The Reactive Power supplied by a Grid Forming Plant through
Power controlled means based on operator adjustment selectable setpoints
(these may be manual or automatic).

Control Calls Telephone calls whose destination and/or origin is a Control Centre or
Control Point, either from dedicated control desk telephone systems or
dedicated telephone handsets, and which, for the purpose of Control
Telephony, have the right to exercise priority over (ie. disconnect) a call
of a lower status.

Control Centre A location used for the purpose of control and operation of the National
Electricity Transmission System or DC Converter Station owner's
System or HVDC System Owner’s System or a User System other than
a Generator's System or an External System.

Control Engineer A person nominated by the relevant party for the control of its Plant and
Apparatus.

Control Person The term used as an alternative to "Safety Co-ordinator" on the Site
Responsibility Schedule only.
Control Phase
The Control Phase follows on from the Programming Phase and covers
the period down to real time.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

12 of 84
 Control Point The point from which:-
(a) A Non-Embedded Customer's Plant and Apparatus is
controlled; or
(b) A BM Unit at a Large Power Station or at a Medium Power
Station or representing a Cascade Hydro Scheme or with a
Demand Capacity with a magnitude of:
(i) 50MW or more in NGET’s Transmission Area; or
(ii) 30MW or more in SPT’s Transmission Area; or
(iii) 10MW or more in SHETL’s Transmission Area,
(iv) 10MW or more which is connected to an Offshore
Transmission System
is physically controlled by a BM Participant; or
(c) In the case of any other BM Unit or Generating Unit (which could
be part of a Power Generating Module), data submission is co-
ordinated for a BM Participant and instructions are received from
The Company,
as the case may be. For a Generator, this will normally be at a Power
Station but may be at an alternative location agreed with The Company.
In the case of a DC Converter Station or HVDC System, the Control
Point will be at a location agreed with The Company. In the case of a
BM Unit of an Interconnector User, the Control Point will be the
Control Centre of the relevant Externally Interconnected System
Operator.

Control Telephony The principal method by which a User's Responsible

Engineer/Operator, the relevant Transmission Licensees’ Control
Engineers and The Company’s Control Engineers speak to one
another for the purposes of control of the Total System in both normal
and emergency operating conditions.

Core Industry Document As defined in the Transmission Licence

Core Industry Document In relation to a Core Industry Document, the body(ies) or entity(ies)
Owner responsible for the management and operation of procedures for making
changes to such document

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

13 of 84
 Critical Tools and Facilities Apparatus and tools required in relation to System Restoration:
a) In the case of The Company include, but are not limited to:
i) Tools for operating and monitoring the Transmission
System including but not limited to state estimation, the
Balancing Mechanism, Load and System Frequency
control, alarms, real time system operation and operational
security analysis including off line transmission analysis;
ii) The ability to control, protect and monitor transmission assets
including switchgear, tap changers and other Transmission
System equipment including where available auxiliary
equipment and to ensure the safe operation of Plant and
Apparatus and the safety of personnel;
iii) Control Telephony systems as provided for in CC.6.5.1 –
CC.6.5.5 and ECC.6.5.1 – ECC.6.5.5;
iv) Operational telephony as provided for in STCP 04-5; and
v) Tools and communications systems to facilitate cross border
operations.
b) In the case of Generators, HVDC System Owners, DC Converter
Station Owners, Defence Service Providers and Restoration
Contractors:
i) Tools for monitoring relevant Plant and Apparatus;
ii) The ability to control, protect and monitor their Plant and
Apparatus necessary for System Restoration including as
applicable primary Plant, switchgear, tap changers and other
auxiliary equipment and to ensure the safe operation of Plant
and personnel; and
iii) Control Telephony as provided for in CC.6.5.1 – CC.6.5.5
and ECC.6.5.1 – ECC.6.5.5.
c) In the case of BM Participants and Virtual Lead Parties who are not
Generators, HVDC System Owners, DC Converter Station
owners, Defence Service Providers or Restoration Contractors as
provided for in item b) above:
i) Tools for monitoring relevant Plant and Apparatus
(excluding Plant and Apparatus not owned by the BM
Participant or Virtual Lead Party); and
ii) Control Telephony as provided for in CC.6.5.1 – CC.6.5.5
and ECC.6.5.1 – ECC.6.5.5
d) In the case of Network Operators:
i) Control room Apparatus and tools for monitoring their
System including but not limited to, alarms, real time system
operation and operational security analysis including off line
network analysis;
ii) The ability to control, protect and monitor those assets
necessary for System Restoration including switchgear, tap
changers and other network equipment including where
available auxiliary equipment and to ensure the safe
operation of Plant and personnel; and
iii) Control Telephony as provided for in CC.6.5.1 – CC.6.5.5
and ECC.6.5.1 – ECC.6.5.5.
e) In the case of Non-Embedded Customers:
i) Tools for monitoring their System including but not
limited to, alarms and real time system operation;

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

14 of 84
 ii) The ability to control, protect and monitor those assets
necessary for System Restoration including
switchgear, tap changers and other network equipment
including where available auxiliary equipment and to
ensure the safe operation of Plant and personnel; and
iii) Control Telephony as provided for in CC.6.5.1 –
CC.6.5.5 and ECC.6.5.1 – ECC.6.5.5.

CUSC Has the meaning set out in The Company’s Transmission Licence

CUSC Contract One or more of the following agreements as envisaged in Standard

Condition C1 of The Company’s Transmission Licence:
(a) the CUSC Framework Agreement;
(b) a Bilateral Agreement;
(c) a Construction Agreement
or a variation to an existing Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction
Agreement;

CUSC Framework Has the meaning set out in The Company’s Transmission Licence.
Agreement

CUSC Party As defined in the The Company’s Transmission Licence and “CUSC
Parties” shall be construed accordingly.

Customer A person to whom electrical power is provided (whether or not they are
the same person as the person who provides the electrical power).

Customer Demand Reducing the supply of electricity to a Customer or disconnecting a

Management Customer in a manner agreed for commercial purposes between a
Supplier and its Customer.

Customer Demand The level above which a Supplier has to notify The Company of its
Management Notification proposed or achieved use of Customer Demand Management which is
Level 12 MW in England and Wales and 5 MW in Scotland.

Customer Generating Plant A Power Station or Generating Unit or Power Generating Module of a
Customer to the extent that it operates the same exclusively to supply all
or part of its own electricity requirements, and does not export electrical
power to any part of the Total System.

Damping Factor (ζ) The ratio of the actual damping to critical damping.
For a GBGF-I the open loop phase angle, for an open loop gain of one,
is measured from the systems Nichols Chart.
This angle is used to define the system’s equivalent Damping Factor that
is the same as the Damping Factor of a second order system with the
same open loop phase angle.
Alternatively, the Damping Factor refers to the damping of a specific
oscillation mode that is associated with the second order system created
by the power to angle transfer function as show in Figure PC.A.5.8.1(a)
and PCA.5.8.1(b).

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

15 of 84
 Data Publisher The person providing a reporting service, in relation to data which is
submitted to the reporting service under OC2.4.2.3 or a Transmission
Licensee, in relation to data which the Transmission Licensee is
required to publish.

Data Registration Code or That portion of the Grid Code which is identified as the Data Registration
DRC Code.

Data Validation, The rules relating to validity and consistency of data, and default data to
Consistency and Defaulting be applied, in relation to data submitted under the Balancing Codes, to
Rules be applied by The Company under the Grid Code as set out in the
document “Data Validation, Consistency and Defaulting Rules” - Issue 8,
dated 25th January 2012. The document is available on the National Grid
website or upon request from The Company.
DC Connected Power Park A Power Park Module that is connected to one or more HVDC
Module Interface Points.

DC Converter Any Onshore DC Converter or Offshore DC Converter as applicable to

GB Code User’s.

DC Converter Station An installation comprising one or more Onshore DC Converters

connecting a direct current interconnector:
to the National Electricity Transmission System; or,
(if the installation has a rating of 50MW or more) to a User System,
and it shall form part of the External Interconnection to which it relates.

DC Network All items of Plant and Apparatus connected together on the direct current
side of a DC Converter or HVDC System.

DCUSA The Distribution Connection and Use of System Agreement approved by

the Authority and required to be maintained in force by each Electricity
Distribution Licence holder.

Defence Service Provider A User with a legal or contractual obligation to provide a service
contributing to one or several measures of the System Defence Plan or
a party with a contract to meet one or more measures of the System
Defence Plan.

Defined Active Damping The Active Damping Power supplied by a GBGF-I when it is operating
Power at the Grid Oscillation Value defined in Table PC.A.5.8.2

De-Load The condition in which a Genset has reduced or is not delivering electrical
power to the System to which it is Synchronised.
𝜟𝒇 Deviation from Target Frequency

Demand The demand of MW and MVAr of electricity (i.e. both Active and Reactive
Power), unless otherwise stated.

Demand Aggregation A process where one or more Demand Facilities or Closed Distribution
Systems can be controlled by a Demand Response Provider either as
a single facility or Closed Distribution System for the purposes of
offering one or more Demand Response Services.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

16 of 84
 Demand Capacity Has the meaning as set out in the BSC.

Demand Control Any or all of the following methods of achieving a Demand reduction:
(a) Customer voltage reduction initiated by Network Operators
(other than following an instruction from The Company);
(b) Customer Demand reduction by Disconnection initiated by
Network Operators (other than following an instruction from The
Company);
(c) Demand reduction instructed by The Company;
(d) automatic low Frequency Demand Disconnection;
(e) emergency manual Demand Disconnection.

Demand Control The level above which a Network Operator has to notify The Company
Notification Level of its proposed or achieved use of Demand Control which is 12 MW in
England and Wales and 5 MW in Scotland.
Demand Facility A facility which consumes electrical energy and is connected at one or
more Grid Supply Points to the National Electricity Transmission
System or connection points to a Network Operator’s System. A
Network Operator’s System and/or auxiliary supplies of a Power
Generating Module do no constitute a Demand Facility.
Demand Facility Owner A person who owns or operates one or more Demand Units within a
Demand Facility. A Demand Facility Owner who owns or operates a
Demand Facility which is directed connected to the Transmission
System shall be treated as a Non-Embedded Customer.
Demand Response Active Demand within a Demand Facility or Closed Distribution System that
Power Control is available for modulation by The Company or Network Operator or
Relevant Transmission Licensee, which results in an Active Power
modification.
Demand Response Provider A party (other than The Company) who owns, operates, controls or
manages Main Plant and Apparatus (excluding storage equipment)
which was first connected to the Total System on or after 18 August 2019
and who had placed Purchase Contracts for its Main Plant and
Apparatus on or after 7 September 2018 or is the subject of a
Substantial Modification on or after 18 August 2019 and has an
agreement with The Company to provide a Demand Response
Service(s). The party may be one or more Customers, a Network
Operator or Non-Embedded Customer or EU Code User contracting
bilaterally with The Company for the provision of services, or may be a
third party providing Demand Aggregation from many individual
Customers.
Demand Response A Demand Response Service derived from Reactive Power or
Reactive Power Control Reactive Power compensation devices in a Demand Facility or Closed
Distribution System that are available for modulation by The Company
or Network Operator or Relevant Transmission Licensee.
Demand Response A Demand Response Service derived from Demand within a Demand
Transmission Constraint Facility or Closed Distribution System that is available for modulation
Management by The Company or Network Operator or Relevant Transmission
Licensee to manage transmission constraints within the System.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

17 of 84
 Demand Response Service A Demand Response Service includes one of more of the following
services:

(a) Demand Response Active Power Control;

(b) Demand Response Reactive Power Control;
(c) Demand Response Transmission Constraint Management;
(d) Demand Response System Frequency Control;
(e) Demand Response Very Fast Active Power Control.

The above Demand Response Services are not exclusive and do not
preclude Demand Response Providers from negotiating other services
for demand response capability with The Company. Where such
services are negotiated they would still be treated as a Demand
Response Service.

Demand Response That portion of the Grid Code which is identified as the Demand
Services Code (DRSC) Response Services Code being applicable to Demand Response
Providers.
Demand Response System A Demand Response Service derived from a Demand within one or
Frequency Control more Demand Facilities or Closed Distribution Systems that is
available for the reduction or increase in response to Frequency
fluctuations, made by an autonomous response from those Demand
Facilities or Closed Distribution Systems to diminish these
fluctuations.
Demand Response Unit A document, issued either by the Non-Embedded Customer, Demand
Document (DRUD) Facility Owner or the CDSO to The Company or the Network Operator
(as the case may be) for Demand Units with demand response and
providing a Demand Response Service which confirms the compliance
of the Demand Unit with the technical requirements set out in the Grid
Code and provides the necessary data and statements, including a
statement of compliance.
Demand Response Very A Demand Response Service derived from a Demand within a Demand
Fast Active Power Control Facility or Closed Distribution System that can be modulated very fast
in response to a Frequency deviation, which results in a very fast Active
Power modification.
Demand Unit An indivisible set of installations containing equipment which can be
actively controlled at one or more sites by a Demand Response
Provider, Demand Facility Owner, CDSO or by a Non Embedded
Customer, either individually or commonly as part of Demand
Aggregation through a third party who has agreed to provide Demand
Response Services.
Designed Minimum The output (in whole MW) below which a Genset or a DC Converter at a
Operating Level DC Converter Station (in any of its operating configurations) has no High
Frequency Response capability.

De-Synchronise (a) The act of taking a Power Generating Module (including a DC

Connected Power Park Module), Generating Unit, Power Park
Module, HVDC System or DC Converter off a System to which it
has been Synchronised, by opening any connecting circuit
breaker; or
(b) The act of ceasing to consume electricity at an importing BM Unit;
and the term "De-Synchronising" shall be construed accordingly.

De-synchronised Island A formal procedure as set out in OC9.5.4 for the purpose of
Procedure Synchronising Power Islands

Detailed Planning Data Detailed additional data which The Company requires under the PC in
support of Standard Planning Data, comprising DPD I and DPD II.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

18 of 84
 Detailed Planning Data The Detailed Planning Data categorised as such in the DRC, and
Category I or DPD I submitted in accordance with PC.4.4.2 or PC.4.4.4 as applicable.

Detailed Planning Data The Detailed Planning Data categorised as such in the DRC, and
Category II or DPD II submitted in accordance with PC.4.4.2 or PC.4.4.4 as applicable.

Disconnection The physical separation of Users (or Customers) from the National
Electricity Transmission System or a User System as the case may
be.

Discrimination The quality where a relay or protective system is enabled to pick out and
cause to be disconnected only the faulty Apparatus.

Disputes Resolution The procedure described in the CUSC relating to disputes resolution.
Procedure

Distribution Code The distribution code required to be drawn up by each Electricity

Distribution Licence holder and approved by the Authority, as from
time to time revised with the approval of the Authority.

Distribution Restoration An agreement between an Anchor Plant Owner or Top Up Restoration

Contract Contractor and The Company and a Network Operator under which
the Anchor Restoration Contractor or Top Up Restoration
Contractor, on instruction, provides a service to energise and/or
contribute to the establishment of a Distribution Restoration Zone.

Distribution Restoration Part of a Network Operator’s System which is capable of being

Zone energised by an Anchor Plant following a Total System Shutdown or
Partial System Shutdown. The Distribution Restoration Zone shall
contain an Anchor Plant and may also include one or more Top Up
Restoration Contractor’s Plants. The Distribution Restoration Zone
primarily comprises part of the Network Operator’s System but may
include relevant parts of the National Electricity Transmission System
in which case Relevant Transmission Licensees would be party to the
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan.

Distribution Restoration A mains-independent automatic control and supervisory system which

Zone Control System assesses the status and operational conditions of part of a Network
(DRZCS) Operator’s System and where relevant, part of the Transmission
System for the purposes of operating Restoration Contractor’s Plant
and Apparatus and/or modulating Restoration Contractors’ Demand
in addition to operating items of the Network Operator’s Plant and
Apparatus and relevant Transmission Licensee’s Plant and
Apparatus for the purposes of establishing and operating a Distribution
Restoration Zone.
A plan produced and agreed by a Network Operator, The Company,
Distribution Restoration
Restoration Contractors and in certain situations a Transmission
Zone Plan
Licensees under OC9.4.7.7, detailing the agreed method and procedure
by which a Network Operator will instruct a Restoration Contractor with
an Anchor Plant to energise, part of a Network Operator’s System
Total System within 8 hours of that instruction, and subsequently meet
complementary blocks of local Demand so as to form a Power Island. A
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan may require the use of Top Up
Restoration Plant.

A Distribution Restoration Zone Plan is distinct from and falls outside

the provisions of a Local Joint Restoration Plan.
Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024
19 of 84
 Droop The ratio of the per unit steady state change in speed (or Frequency), to
the per unit steady state change in Active Power output. Whilst not
mandatory, it is often common practice to express Droop in percentage
terms.

Dynamic Parameters Those parameters listed in Appendix 1 to BC1 under the heading BM Unit
Data – Dynamic Parameters.

Dynamic Reactive Plant and Apparatus capable of injecting or absorbing Reactive Power
Compensation Equipment in a controlled manner which includes but is not limited to Synchronous
Compensators, Static Var Compensators (SVC), or STATCOM devices.

E&W Offshore An Offshore Transmission System with an Interface Point in England

Transmission System and Wales.

E&W Offshore A person who owns or operates an E&W Offshore Transmission

Transmission Licensee System pursuant to a Transmission Licence.

E&W Transmission System Collectively NGET’s Transmission System and any E&W Offshore
Transmission Systems.

E&W User A User in England and Wales or any Offshore User who owns or
operates Plant and/or Apparatus connected (or which will at the OTSUA
Transfer Time be connected) to an E&W Offshore Transmission
System.

Earth Fault Factor At a selected location of a three-phase System (generally the point of
installation of equipment) and for a given System configuration, the ratio
of the highest root mean square phase-to-earth power Frequency
voltage on a sound phase during a fault to earth (affecting one or more
phases at any point) to the root mean square phase-to-earth power
Frequency voltage which would be obtained at the selected location
without the fault.

Earthing A way of providing a connection between conductors and earth by an

Earthing Device which is either:
(a) Immobilised and Locked in the earthing position. Where the
Earthing Device is Locked with a Safety Key, the Safety Key
must be secured in a Key Safe and the Key Safe Key must be,
where reasonably practicable, given to the authorised site
representative of the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator and is to
be retained in safe custody. Where not reasonably practicable the
Key Safe Key must be retained by the authorised site
representative of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator in safe
custody; or
(b) maintained and/or secured in position by such other method which
must be in accordance with the Local Safety Instructions of
NGET or the Safety Rules of the Relevant Transmission
Licensee or that User, as the case may be.

Earthing Device A means of providing a connection between a conductor and earth being
of adequate strength and capability.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

20 of 84
 Elected Panel Members Shall mean the following Panel Members elected in accordance with
GR4.2(a):
(a) the representative of the Suppliers;
(b) the representative of the Onshore Transmission Licensees;
(c) the representative of the Offshore Transmission Licensees; and
(d) the representatives of the Generators

Electrical Standard A standard listed in the Annex to the General Conditions.

Electricity Balancing as defined in the CUSC.

Regulation

Electricity Council That body set up under the Electricity Act, 1957.

Electricity Distribution The licence granted pursuant to Section 6(1) (c) of the Act.
Licence

Electricity Regulation As defined in the Transmission Licence.

Electricity Storage The conversion of electrical energy into a form of energy which can be
stored, the storing of that energy, and the subsequent reconversion of
that energy back into electrical energy.

Electricity Storage Module Is either one or more Synchronous Electricity Storage Unit(s) or Non-
Synchronous Electricity Storage Unit(s) which could also be part of a
Power Generating Module. For the avoidance of doubt, Non-
Controllable Electricity Storage Equipment would not be considered
to be classed as an Electricity Storage Module or as an Electricity
Storage Unit.

Electricity Storage Unit A Synchronous Electricity Storage Unit or Non-Synchronous

Electricity Storage Unit.

Electricity Supply Industry The unincorporated members' club of that name formed inter alia to
Arbitration Association promote the efficient and economic operation of the procedure for the
resolution of disputes within the electricity supply industry by means of
arbitration or otherwise in accordance with its arbitration rules.

Electricity Supply Licence The licence granted pursuant to Section 6(1) (d) of the Act.

Electricity System As defined in Special Condition 2.2 of The Company’s Transmission

Restoration Standard Licence.

Electromagnetic Has the meaning set out in Engineering Recommendation G5.

Compatibility Level

Electronic Power Converter Electrical Plant and Apparatus which uses switched solid state power
electronic devices to produce a real voltage waveform, that has a
fundamental component with harmonics.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

21 of 84
 Embedded Having a direct connection to a User System or the System of any other
User to which Customers and/or Power Stations are connected, such
connection being either a direct connection or a connection via a busbar
of another User or of a Relevant Transmission Licensee (but with no
other connection to the National Electricity Transmission System).

Embedded Development Has the meaning set out in PC.4.4.3(a).

Embedded Development An agreement entered into between a Network Operator and an

Agreement Embedded Person, identifying the relevant site of connection to the
Network Operator’s System and setting out other site specific details in
relation to that use of the Network Operator’s System.
Any or all of the following methods by which a Network Operator can
Embedded Generation
achieve a reduction in the Active Power output of Embedded Power
Control
Stations to implement an instruction issued by The Company:

(a) Embedded Generation De-energisation; or

(b) where this is achievable in a suitable timescale to comply with an
instruction, arranging to reduce the Active Power output
of Embedded Power Stations or Embedded
Generator Unit(s) connected to their System.
Embedded The de-energisation by Network Operators of one or more Embedded
Generation Deenergisation Power Stations or Embedded Generating Units from their System as
part of an Embedded Generation Control action.

Embedded Person The party responsible for a Medium Power Station not subject to a
Bilateral Agreement or DC Converter Station not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement or HVDC System not subject to a Bilateral Agreement
connected to or proposed to be connected to a Network Operator’s
System.

Emergency Deenergisation An Emergency Instruction issued by The Company to De-

Instruction Synchronise a Power Generating Module (including a DC Connected
Power Park Module), Generating Unit, Power Park Module, HVDC
System or DC Converter in circumstances specified in the CUSC.

Emergency Instruction An instruction issued by The Company in emergency circumstances,

pursuant to BC2.9, to the Control Point of a User. In the case of such
instructions applicable to a BM Unit, it may require an action or response
which is outside the Dynamic Parameters or Other Relevant Data, and
may include an instruction to trip a Genset.

EMR Administrative Parties Has the meaning given to “administrative parties” in The Electricity
Capacity Regulations 2014 and each CfD Counterparty and CfD
Settlement Services Provider.

EMR Documents The Energy Act 2013, The Electricity Capacity Regulations 2014, the
Capacity Market Rules, The Contracts for Difference (Allocation)
Regulations 2014, The Contracts for Difference (Definition of Eligible
Generator) Regulations 2014, The Contracts for Difference (Electricity
Supplier Obligations) Regulations 2014, The Electricity Market Reform
(General) Regulations 2014, the AF Rules and any other regulations or
instruments made under Chapter 2 (contracts for difference), Chapter 3
(capacity market) or Chapter 4 (investment contracts) of Part 2 of the
Energy Act 2013 which are in force from time to time.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

22 of 84
 EMR Functions Has the meaning given to “EMR functions” in Chapter 5 of Part 2 of the
Energy Act 2013.

Engineering The documents referred to as such and issued by the Energy Networks
Recommendations Association or the former Electricity Council.

Engineering Means Engineering Recommendation G5/5.

Recommendation G5

Energisation Operational A notification (in respect of Plant and Apparatus (including OTSUA)
Notification or EON which is directly connected to the National Electricity Transmission
System) from The Company to a User confirming that the User can in
accordance with the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction
Agreement, energise such User’s Plant and Apparatus (including
OTSUA) specified in such notification.

Equipment Certificate A document issued by an Authorised Certifier for equipment used by a

Power Generating Module, Demand Unit, Network Operators
System, Non-Embedded Customers System, Demand Facility or
HVDC System. The Equipment Certificate defines the scope of its
validity at a national level. For the purpose of replacing specific parts of
the compliance process, the Equipment Certificate may include models
or equivalent information that have been verified against actual test
results.

Estimated Registered Data Those items of Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning Data
which either upon connection will become Registered Data, or which for
the purposes of the Plant and/or Apparatus concerned as at the date of
submission are Registered Data, but in each case which for the seven
succeeding Financial Years will be an estimate of what is expected.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

23 of 84
 EU Code User A User who is any of the following:-
(a) A Generator in respect of a Power Generating Module
(excluding a DC Connected Power Park Module) or OTSDUA
(in respect of an AC Offshore Transmission System) whose
Main Plant and Apparatus is connected to the System on or
after 27 April 2019 and who concluded Purchase Contracts for
its Main Plant and Apparatus on or after 17 May 2018
(b) A Generator in respect of any Type C or Type D Power
Generating Module which is the subject of a Substantial
Modification which is effective on or after 27 April 2019.
(c) A Generator in respect of any DC Connected Power Park
Module whose Main Plant and Apparatus is connected to the
System on or after 8 September 2019 and who had concluded
Purchase Contracts for its Main Plant and Apparatus on or
after 28 September 2018.
(d) A Generator in respect of any DC Connected Power Park
Module which is the subject of a Substantial Modification
which is effective on or after 8 September 2019.
(e) An HVDC System Owner or OTSDUA (in respect of a DC
Offshore Transmission System including a Transmission DC
Converter) whose Main Plant and Apparatus is connected to
the System on or after 8 September 2019 and who had
concluded Purchase Contracts for its Main Plant and
Apparatus on or after 28 September 2018.
(f) An HVDC System Owner or OTSDUA (in respect of a DC
Offshore Transmission System including a Transmission DC
Converter) whose HVDC System or DC Offshore
Transmission System including a Transmission DC
Converter) is the subject of a Substantial Modification on or
after 8 September 2019.
(g) A User which the Authority has determined should be
considered as an EU Code User.
(h) A Network Operator whose entire distribution System was first
connected to the National Electricity Transmission System on
or after 18 August 2019 and who had placed Purchase
Contracts for its Main Plant and Apparatus in respect of its
entire distribution System on or after 7 September 2018. For the
avoidance of doubt, a Network Operator will be an EU Code
User if its entire distribution System is connected to the National
Electricity Transmission System at EU Grid Supply Points
only.
(i) A Non-Embedded Customer whose Main Plant and
Apparatus at each EU Grid Supply Point was first connected
to the National Electricity Transmission System on or after 18
August 2019 and who had placed Purchase Contracts for its
Main Plant and Apparatus at each EU Grid Supply Point on or
after 7 September 2018 or is the subject of a Substantial
Modification on or after 18 August 2019.
(j) A Storage User in respect of an Electricity Storage Module
whose Main Plant and Apparatus is connected to the System
on or after 20 May 2020 and who concluded Purchase
Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024
24 of 84
 Contracts for its Main Plant and Apparatus on or after 20 May
2019.

EU Generator A Generator or OTSDUA who is also an EU Code User.

EU Grid Supply Point A Grid Supply Point where either:-

(i) (a) the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer
had placed Purchase Contracts for all of its Plant
and Apparatus at that Grid Supply Point on or after
7 September 2018, and
(b) All of the Network Operator’s or Non-Embedded
Customer’s Plant and Apparatus at that Grid Supply
Point was first connected to the Transmission System
on or after 18 August 2019; or
(ii) the Network Operator’s or Non-Embedded Customer’s
Plant and Apparatus at a Grid Supply Point is the subject of
a Substantial Modification which is effective on or after 18
August 2019.

EU Transparency Such relevant data as Customers and Generators are required to

Availability Data provide under Articles 7.1(a) and 7.1(b) and Articles 15.1(a), 15.1(b),
15.1(c), 15.1(d) of Retained EU Law (Commission Regulation (EU)
543/2013), and which also forms part of DRC Schedule 6 (Users’ Outage
Data).

European Compliance That portion of the Grid Code which is identified as the European
Processes or ECP Compliance Processes.

European Connection That portion of the Grid Code which is identified as the European
Conditions or ECC Connection Conditions being applicable to EU Code Users.

European Specification A common technical specification, a British Standard implementing a

European standard or a European technical approval. The terms
"common technical specification", "European standard" and "European
technical approval" shall have the meanings respectively ascribed to them
in the Regulations.

Event An unscheduled or unplanned (although it may be anticipated)

occurrence on, or relating to, a System (including Embedded Power
Stations) including, without limiting that general description, faults,
incidents and breakdowns and adverse weather conditions being
experienced.

Exciter The source of the electrical power providing the field current of a
synchronous machine.

Excitation System The equipment providing the field current of a machine, including all
regulating and control elements, as well as field discharge or suppression
equipment and protective devices.

Excitation System No-Load The minimum value of direct voltage that the Excitation System is able
Negative Ceiling Voltage to provide from its terminals when it is not loaded, which may be zero or
a negative value.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

25 of 84
 Excitation System Nominal Shall have the meaning ascribed to that term in IEC 34-16-1:1991
Response [equivalent to British Standard BS4999 Section 116.1: 1992]. The time
interval applicable is the first half-second of excitation system voltage
response.

Excitation System On-Load Shall have the meaning ascribed to the term 'Excitation system on load
Positive Ceiling Voltage ceiling voltage' in IEC 34-16-1:1991[equivalent to British Standard
BS4999 Section 116.1: 1992].

Excitation System No-Load Shall have the meaning ascribed to the term 'Excitation system no load
Positive Ceiling Voltage ceiling voltage' in IEC 34-16-1:1991[equivalent to British Standard
BS4999 Section 116.1: 1992].

Exemptable Has the meaning set out in the CUSC.

Existing AGR Plant The following nuclear advanced gas cooled reactor plant (which was
commissioned and connected to the Total System at the Transfer
Date):-
(a) Dungeness B
(b) Hinkley Point B
(c) Heysham 1
(d) Heysham 2
(e) Hartlepool
(f) Hunterston B
(g) Torness

Existing AGR Plant In respect of each Genset within each Existing AGR Plant which has a
Flexibility Limit safety case enabling it to so operate, 8 (or such lower number which when
added to the number of instances of reduction of output as instructed by
The Company in relation to operation in Frequency Sensitive Mode
totals 8) instances of flexibility in any calendar year (or such lower or
greater number as may be agreed by the Nuclear Installations
Inspectorate and notified to The Company) for the purpose of assisting
in the period of low System NRAPM and/or low Localised NRAPM
provided that in relation to each Generating Unit each change in output
shall not be required to be to a level where the output of the reactor is less
than 80% of the reactor thermal power limit (as notified to The Company
and which corresponds to the limit of reactor thermal power as contained
in the "Operating Rules" or "Identified Operating Instructions" forming part
of the safety case agreed with the Nuclear Installations Inspectorate).

Existing Gas Cooled Both Existing Magnox Reactor Plant and Existing AGR Plant.
Reactor Plant

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

26 of 84
 Existing Magnox Reactor The following nuclear gas cooled reactor plant (which was commissioned
Plant and connected to the Total System at the Transfer Date):-
(a) Calder Hall
(b) Chapelcross
(c) Dungeness A
(d) Hinkley Point A
(e) Oldbury-on-Severn
(f) Bradwell
(g) Sizewell A
(h) Wylfa

Export and Import Limits Those parameters listed in Appendix 1 to BC1 under the heading BM Unit
Data – Export and Import Limits.

External Interconnection Apparatus for the transmission of electricity to or from the National
Electricity Transmission System or a User System into or out of an
External System. For the avoidance of doubt, a single External
Interconnection may comprise several circuits operating in parallel.

External Interconnection Plant or Apparatus which comprises a circuit and which operates in
Circuit parallel with another circuit and which forms part of the External
Interconnection.

Externally Interconnected A person who operates an External System which is connected to the
System Operator or EISO National Electricity Transmission System or a User System by an
External Interconnection.

External System In relation to an Externally Interconnected System Operator means the

transmission or distribution system which it owns or operates which is
located outside the National Electricity Transmission System
Operator Area any Apparatus or Plant which connects that system to
the External Interconnection and which is owned or operated by such
Externally Interconnected System Operator.
Fast Fault Current A current delivered by a Power Park Module or HVDC System during
and after a voltage deviation caused by an electrical fault within the
System with the aim of identifying a fault by network Protection systems
at the initial stage of the fault, supporting System voltage retention at a
later stage of the fault and System voltage restoration after fault
clearance.

Fault Current Interruption The time interval from fault inception until the end of the break time of the
Time circuit breaker (as declared by the manufacturers).
Fault Ride Through The capability of Power Generating Modules (including DC Connected
Power Park Modules) and HVDC Systems to be able to remain
connected to the System and operate through periods of low voltage at
the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point caused by secured
faults.
Fast Start A start by a Genset with a Fast Start Capability.

Fast Start Capability The ability of a Genset to be Synchronised and Loaded up to full Load
within 5 minutes.
Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024
27 of 84
 Fast Track Criteria A proposed Grid Code Modification Proposal that, if implemented,
(a) would meet the Self-Governance Criteria; and
(b) is properly a housekeeping modification required as a result of some
error or factual change, including but not limited to:
(i) updating names or addresses listed in the Grid Code;
(ii) correcting any minor typographical errors;
(iii) correcting formatting and consistency errors, such as
paragraph numbering; or
(iv) updating out of date references to other documents or
paragraphs

Fault Current Interruption The time interval from fault inception until the end of the break time of the
Time circuit breaker (as declared by the manufacturers).

Fault Ride Through The capability of Power Generating Modules (including DC Connected
Power Park Modules) and HVDC Systems to be able to remain
connected to the System and operate through periods of low voltage at
the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point caused by secured
faults.

Final Generation Outage An outage programme as agreed by The Company with each Generator
Programme and each Interconnector Owner at various stages through the
Operational Planning Phase and Programming Phase which does not
commit the parties to abide by it, but which at various stages will be used
as the basis on which National Electricity Transmission System
outages will be planned.

Final Operational A notification from The Company to a Generator or DC Converter

Notification or FON Station owner or HVDC System Owner or Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer confirming that the User has demonstrated
compliance:
(a) with the Grid Code, (or where they apply, that relevant derogations
have been granted), and
(b) where applicable, with Appendices F1 to F5 of the Bilateral
Agreement,
in each case in respect of the Plant and Apparatus specified in such
notification.

Final Physical Notification Has the meaning set out in the BSC.
Data

Final Report A report prepared by the Test Proposer at the conclusion of a System
Test for submission to The Company (if it did not propose the System
Test) and other members of the Test Panel.

Financial Year Bears the meaning given in Condition A1 (Definitions and Interpretation)
of The Company’s Transmission Licence.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

28 of 84
 Fixed Proposed The proposed date(s) for the implementation of a Grid Code
Implementation Date Modification Proposal or Workgroup Alternative Grid Code
Modification such date to be a specific date by reference to an assumed
date by which a direction from the Authority approving the Grid Code
Modification Proposal or Workgroup Alternative Grid Code
Modification is required in order for the Grid Code Modification
Proposal or any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification, if it
were approved, to be implemented by the proposed date.

Flicker Severity A value derived from 12 successive measurements of Flicker Severity

(Long Term) (Short Term) (over a two hour period) and a calculation of the cube root
of the mean sum of the cubes of 12 individual measurements, as further
set out in Engineering Recommendation P28 as current at the Transfer
Date.

Flicker Severity A measure of the visual severity of flicker derived from the time series
(Short Term) output of a flickermeter over a 10 minute period and as such provides an
indication of the risk of Customer complaints.

Forecast Data Those items of Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning Data
which will always be forecast.

Frequency The number of alternating current cycles per second (expressed in Hertz)
at which a System is running.
Frequency Containment means, in the context of Balancing Services, the Active Power reserves
Reserves (FCR) available to contain System Frequency after the occurrence of an
imbalance.
Frequency Response An interval used intentionally to make the Frequency control
Deadband unresponsive.
In the case of mechanical governor systems, the Frequency Response
Deadband is the same as Frequency Response Insensitivity.
Frequency Response The inherent feature of the control system specified as the minimum
Insensitivity magnitude of change in the Frequency or input signal that results in a
change of output power or output signal.
Frequency Restoration Means, in the context of Balancing Services, the Active Power reserves
Reserves (FRR) available to restore System Frequency to the nominal Frequency.

Frequency Sensitive AGR Each Generating Unit in an Existing AGR Plant for which the
Unit Generator has notified The Company that it has a safety case agreed
with the Nuclear Installations Inspectorate enabling it to operate in
Frequency Sensitive Mode, to the extent that such unit is within its
Frequency Sensitive AGR Unit Limit. Each such Generating Unit shall
be treated as if it were operating in accordance with BC3.5.1 provided
that it is complying with its Frequency Sensitive AGR Unit Limit.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

29 of 84
 Frequency Sensitive AGR In respect of each Frequency Sensitive AGR Unit, 8 (or such lower
Unit Limit number which when added to the number of instances of flexibility for the
purposes of assisting in a period of low System or Localised NRAPM
totals 8) instances of reduction of output in any calendar year as
instructed by The Company in relation to operation in Frequency
Sensitive Mode (or such greater number as may be agreed between The
Company and the Generator), for the purpose of assisting with
Frequency control, provided the level of operation of each Frequency
Sensitive AGR Unit in Frequency Sensitive Mode shall not be outside
that agreed by the Nuclear Installations Inspectorate in the relevant safety
case.

Frequency Sensitive Mode A Genset, or Type C Power Generating Module or Type D Power
Generating Module or DC Connected Power Park Module or HVDC
System operating mode which will result in Active Power output
changing, in response to a change in System Frequency, in a direction
which assists in the recovery to Target Frequency, by operating so as to
provide Primary Response and/or Secondary Response and/or High
Frequency Response.

Fuel Security Code The document of that title designated as such by the Secretary of State,
as from time to time amended.

Gas Turbine Unit A Generating Unit driven by a gas turbine (for instance by an aero-
engine).

Gas Zone Diagram A single line diagram showing boundaries of, and interfaces between,
gas-insulated HV Apparatus modules which comprise part, or the whole,
of a substation at a Connection Site (or in the case of OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus, Transmission Interface Site), together with the
associated stop valves and gas monitors required for the safe operation
of the National Electricity Transmission System or the User System,
as the case may be.

Gate Closure Has the meaning set out in the BSC.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

30 of 84
 GB Code User A User in respect of:-
(a) A Generator or OTSDUA whose Main Plant and Apparatus
(excluding a DC Connected Power Park Module) is connected
to the System before 27 April 2019, or who had concluded
Purchase Contracts for its Main Plant and Apparatus before
17 May 2018, or whose Plant and Apparatus is not the subject
of a Substantial Modification which is effective on or after 27
April 2019; or
(b) A DC Converter Station owner whose Main Plant and
Apparatus is connected to the System before 8 September
2019, or who had concluded Purchase Contracts for its Main
Plant and Apparatus before 28 September 2018, or whose
Plant and Apparatus is not the subject of a Substantial
Modification which is effective on or after 8 September 2019; or
(c) A Non-Embedded Customer whose Main Plant and
Apparatus was connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System at a GB Grid Supply Point before 18
August 2019 or who had placed Purchase Contracts for its Main
Plant and Apparatus before 7 September 2018 or that Non-
Embedded Customer is not the subject of a Substantial
Modification which is effective on or after 18 August 2019; or
(d) A Network Operator whose entire distribution System was
connected to the National Electricity Transmission System at
one or more GB Grid Supply Points before 18 August 2019 or
who had placed Purchase Contracts for its Main Plant and
Apparatus in respect of its entire distribution System before 7
September 2018 or its entire distribution System is not the
subject of a Substantial Modification which is effective on or
after 18 August 2019. For the avoidance of doubt, a Network
Operator would still be classed as a GB Code User where its
entire distribution System was connected to the National
Electricity Transmission System at one or more GB Grid
Supply Points, even where that entire distribution System may
have one or more EU Grid Supply Points but still comprises of
GB Grid Supply Points.

GB Generator A Generator, or OTSDUA, who is also a GB Code User.

GBGF Fast Fault Current The ability of a Grid Forming Plant to supply reactive current, that starts
Injection to be delivered into the Total System in less than 5ms when the voltage
falls below 90% of its nominal value at the Grid Entry Point or User
System Entry Point.

GB Grid Forming - Inverter Is any Power Park Module, HVDC System, DC Converter, OTSDUW
or GBGF-I Plant and Apparatus, Non-Synchronous Electricity Storage Module,
Dynamic Reactive Compensation Equipment or any Plant and
Apparatus (including a smart load) which is connected or partly
connected to the Total System via an Electronic Power Converter
which has a Grid Forming Capability (GBGF-I).

GB Grid Forming – Is a Synchronous Power Generating Module, Synchronous

Synchronous or GBGF-S Electricity Storage Module or Synchronous Generating Unit with a
Grid Forming Capability.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

31 of 84
 GB Grid Supply Point A Grid Supply Point which is not an EU Grid Supply Point.
GB Synchronous Area The AC power System in Great Britain which connects User’s,
Relevant Transmission Licensee’s whose AC Plant and Apparatus is
considered to operate in synchronism with each other at each
Connection Point or User System Entry Point and at the same System
Frequency.

GCDF Means the Grid Code Development Forum.

General Conditions or GC That portion of the Grid Code which is identified as the General
Conditions.

Generating Plant Demand The difference between Output Usable and forecast Demand.
Margin

Generating Unit An Onshore Generating Unit and/or an Offshore Generating Unit

which could also be part of a Power Generating Module.

Generating Unit Data The Physical Notification, Export and Import Limits and Other
Relevant Data only in respect of each Generating Unit (which could be
part of a Power Generating Module):
(a) which forms part of the BM Unit which represents that Cascade
Hydro Scheme;
(b) at an Embedded Exemptable Large Power Station, where the
relevant Bilateral Agreement specifies that compliance with BC1
and/or BC2 is required:
(i) to each Generating Unit, or
(ii) to each Power Park Module where the Power Station
comprises Power Park Modules.

Generation Capacity Has the meaning set out in the BSC.

Generation Planning Those parameters listed in Appendix 2 of OC2.

Parameters

Generator A person who generates electricity or undertakes Electricity Storage

under licence or exemption under the Act, acting in its capacity as a
generator in Great Britain or Offshore. The term Generator includes a
EU Generator and a GB Generator.

Generator Performance A diagram which shows the MW and MVAr capability limits within which
Chart a Generating Unit will be expected to operate under steady state
conditions.

Genset A Power Generating Module (including a DC Connected Power Park

Module and/or Electricity Storage Module), Generating Unit, Power
Park Module or CCGT Module at a Large Power Station or any Power
Generating Module (including a DC Connected Power Park Module),
Generating Unit, Power Park Module or CCGT Module which is directly
connected to the National Electricity Transmission System.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

32 of 84
 Good Industry Practice The exercise of that degree of skill, diligence, prudence and foresight
which would reasonably and ordinarily be expected from a skilled and
experienced operator engaged in the same type of undertaking under the
same or similar circumstances.

Governance Rules or GR That portion of the Grid Code which is identified as the Governance
Rules.

Governor Deadband An interval used intentionally to make the frequency control

unresponsive.

Great Britain or GB The landmass of England and Wales and Scotland, including internal
waters.

Grid Code Fast Track A proposal to modify the Grid Code which is raised pursuant to GR.26
Proposals and has not yet been approved or rejected by the Grid Code Review
Panel.

Grid Code Modification Fast A report prepared pursuant to GR.26

Track Report

Grid Code Modification Has the meaning given in GR.13.1.

Register

Grid Code Modification Has the meaning given in GR.22.1.

Report

Grid Code Modification The procedures for the modification of the Grid Code (including the
Procedures implementation of Approved Modifications) as set out in the
Governance Rules.

Grid Code Modification A proposal to modify the Grid Code which is not yet rejected pursuant to
Proposal GR.15.5 or GR.15.6 and has not yet been implemented.

Grid Code Modification Has the meaning given in GR.24.5

Self- Governance Report

Grid Code Objectives Means the objectives referred to in Paragraph 1b of Standard Condition
C14 of The Company’s Transmission Licence.

Grid Code Review Panel or The panel with the functions set out in GR.1.2.
Panel

Grid Code Review Panel The vote of Panel Members undertaken by the Panel Chairperson in
Recommendation Vote accordance with Paragraph GR.22.4 as to whether in their view they
believe each proposed Grid Code Modification Proposal, or
Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification would better facilitate
achievement of the Grid Code Objective(s) and so should be made.

Grid Code Review Panel The vote of Panel Members undertaken by the Panel Chairperson in
Self-Governance Vote accordance with GR.24.9 as to whether they believe each proposed Grid
Code Modification Proposal, as compared with the then existing
provisions of the Grid Code and any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code
Modification set out in the Grid Code Modification Self-Governance
Report, would better facilitate achievement of the Grid Code
Objective(s).

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

33 of 84
 Grid Code Self-Governance Grid Code Modification Proposals which satisfy the Self Governance
Proposals Criteria.

Grid Entry Point An Onshore Grid Entry Point or an Offshore Grid Entry Point.

Grid Forming Active Power Grid Forming Active Power is the inherent Active Power produced by
Grid Forming Plant that includes Active Inertia Power plus Active
Phase Jump Power plus Active Damping Power.

Grid Forming Capability Is (but not limited to) the capability a Power Generating Module, HVDC
Converter (which could form part of an HVDC System), Generating
Unit, Power Park Module, DC Converter, OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus, Electricity Storage Module, Dynamic Reactive
Compensation Equipment or any Plant and Apparatus (including a
smart load) whose supplied Active Power is directly proportional to the
difference between the magnitude and phase of its Internal Voltage
Source and the magnitude and phase of the voltage at the Grid Entry
Point or User System Entry Point and the sine of the Load Angle. As
a consequence, Plant and Apparatus which has a Grid Forming
Capability has a frequency of rotation of the Internal Voltage Source
which is the same as the System Frequency for normal operation, with
only the Load Angle defining the relative position between the two. In
the case of a GBGF-I, a Grid Forming Unit forming part of a GBGF-I
shall be capable of sustaining a voltage at its terminals irrespective of the
voltage at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point for normal
operating conditions.
For GBGF-I, the control system, which determines the amplitude and
phase of the Internal Voltage Source, shall have a response to the
voltage and System Frequency at the Grid Entry Point or User System
Entry Point) with a bandwidth that is less than a defined value as shown
by the control system’s NFP Plot. Exceptions to this requirement are only
allowed during transients caused by System faults, voltage dips/surges
and/or step or ramp changes in the phase angle which are large enough
to cause damage to the Grid Forming Plant via excessive currents.

Grid Forming Electronic A Grid Forming Plant whose output is derived from an Electronic Power
Power Converter Converter with a GBGF-I capability.

Grid Forming Plant A site which contains Plant and Apparatus which is classified as either
a GBGF-S or a GBGF-I

Grid Forming Plant Owner The owner or operator of a Grid Forming Plant.

Grid Forming Unit A Power Park Unit or Electricity Storage Unit or a Synchronous
Power Generating Unit or individual Load with a Grid Forming
Capability.

Grid Oscillation Value An injected test frequency signal applied at nominal System Frequency
with a superimposed oscillatory response overlayed onto the nominal
System Frequency with an amplitude of 0.05 Hz peak to peak at a
frequency of 1 Hz and is used for determining the rating of the Defined
Active Damping Power.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

34 of 84
 Grid Supply Point A point of supply from the National Electricity Transmission System to
Network Operators or Non-Embedded Customers which could be a
GB Grid Supply Point or an EU Grid Supply Point.

Group Those National Electricity Transmission System sub-stations

bounded solely by the faulted circuit(s) and the overloaded circuit(s)
excluding any third party connections between the Group and the rest of
the National Electricity Transmission System, the faulted circuit(s)
being a Secured Event.

GSP Group Has the meaning as set out in the BSC.

Headroom The Power Available (in MW) less the actual Active Power exported
from the Power Park Module (in MW).

High Frequency Response An automatic reduction in Active Power output in response to an

increase in System Frequency above the Target Frequency (or such
other level of Frequency as may have been agreed in an Ancillary
Services Agreement). This reduction in Active Power output must be in
accordance with the provisions of the relevant Ancillary Services
Agreement which will provide that it will be released increasingly with
time over the period 0 to 10 seconds from the time of the Frequency
increase on the basis set out in the Ancillary Services Agreement and
fully achieved within 10 seconds of the time of the start of the Frequency
increase and it must be sustained at no lesser reduction thereafter. The
interpretation of the High Frequency Response to a + 0.5 Hz frequency
change is shown diagrammatically in Figure CC.A.3.3 and Figure
ECC.A.3.3.

High Voltage or HV For E&W Transmission Systems, a voltage exceeding 650 volts. For
Scottish Transmission Systems, a voltage exceeding 1000 volts.
Historic Frequency Data System Frequency data at a maximum of one second intervals for the
whole month, published by The Company as detailed in OC3.4.4.
Houseload Operation Operation which ensures that a Power Station is able to continue to
supply its in-house load in the event of System faults resulting in Power-
Generating Modules being disconnected from the System and tripped
onto their auxiliary supplies
HP Turbine Power Fraction Ratio of steady state mechanical power delivered by the HP turbine to the
total steady state mechanical power delivered by the total steam turbine
at Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity.

HV Connections Apparatus connected at the same voltage as that of the National

Electricity Transmission System, including Users' circuits, the higher
voltage windings of Users' transformers and associated connection
Apparatus.
HVDC Converter Any EU Code User Apparatus used to convert alternating current
electricity to direct current electricity, or vice versa. An HVDC Converter
is a standalone operative configuration at a single site comprising one or
more converter bridges, together with one or more converter
transformers, reactors, converter control equipment, essential protective
and switching devices and auxiliaries, if any, used for conversion. In a
bipolar arrangement, an HVDC Converter represents the bipolar
configuration.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

35 of 84
 HVDC Converter Station Part of an HVDC System which consists of one or more HVDC
Converters installed in a single location together with buildings, reactors,
filters reactive power devices, control, monitoring, protective, measuring
and auxiliary equipment.
HVDC Equipment Collectively means an HVDC System and a DC Connected Power
Park Module and a Remote End HVDC Converter Station.
HVDC Interface Point A point at which HVDC Plant and Apparatus is connected to an AC
System at which technical specifications affecting the performance of the
Plant and Apparatus can be prescribed.
HVDC System An electrical power system which transfers energy in the form of high
voltage direct current between two or more alternating current (AC) buses
and comprises at least two HVDC Converter Stations with DC
Transmission lines or cables between the HVDC Converter Stations.
HVDC System Owner A party who owns and is responsible for an HVDC System. For the
avoidance of doubt a DC Connected Power Park Module owner would
be treated as a Generator.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission.

IEC Standard A standard approved by the International Electrotechnical Commission.

Implementation Date Is the date and time for implementation of an Approved Modification as
specified in accordance with Paragraph GR.25.3.

Implementing Safety Co- The Safety Co-ordinator implementing Safety Precautions.

ordinator

Import Usable That portion of Registered Import Capacity which is expected to be

available and which is not unavailable due to a Planned Outage.

Incident Centre A centre established by The Company or a User as the focal point in The
Company or in that User, as the case may be, for the communication
and dissemination of information between the senior management
representatives of The Company, or of that User, as the case may be,
and the relevant other parties during a Joint System Incident in order to
avoid overloading The Company's, or that User's, as the case may be,
existing operational/control arrangements.

Independent Back-Up A Back-Up Protection system which utilises a discrete relay, different
Protection current transformers and an alternate operating principle to the Main
Protection systems(s) such that it can operate autonomously in the event
of a failure of the Main Protection.

Independent Main A Main Protection system which utilises a physically discrete relay and
Protection different current transformers to any other Main Protection.

Indicated Constraint The difference between a constraint boundary transfer limit and the
Boundary Margin difference between the sum of BM Unit Maximum Export Limits and the
forecast of local Demand within the constraint boundary.

Indicated Imbalance The difference between the sum of Physical Notifications for BM Units
comprising Generating Units or CCGT Modules or Power Generating
Modules and the forecast of Demand for the whole or any part of the
System.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

36 of 84
 Indicated Margin The difference between the sum of BM Unit Maximum Export Limits
submitted and the forecast of Demand for the whole or any part of the
System.

Inertia Constant H For a GBGF-S the Inertia Constant H is measured in MWsec/MVA.

Inertia Constant He For a GBGF- I Electronic Power Converter the Inertia Constant He, is
measured in MWsec/MVA and produced by the Active ROCOF
Response Power.

Installation Document A simple structured document containing information about a Type A

Power Generating Module or a Demand Unit, with demand response
connected below 1000 V, and confirming its compliance with the relevant
requirements

Instructor Facilities A device or system which gives certain Transmission Control Centre
instructions with an audible or visible alarm, and incorporates the means
to return message acknowledgements to the Transmission Control
Centre.

Integral Equipment Test or A test on equipment, associated with Plant and/or Apparatus, which
IET takes place when that Plant and/or Apparatus forms part of a
Synchronised System and which, in the reasonable judgement of the
person wishing to perform the test, may cause an Operational Effect.

Intellectual Property" or Patents, trade marks, service marks, rights in designs, trade names,
"IPRs copyrights and topography rights (whether or not any of the same are
registered and including applications for registration of any of the same)
and rights under licences and consents in relation to any of the same and
all rights or forms of protection of a similar nature or having equivalent or
similar effect to any of the same which may subsist anywhere in the world.

Interconnection Agreement An agreement made between The Company and an Externally

Interconnected System Operator and/or an Interconnector User
and/or other relevant persons for the External Interconnection relating
to an External Interconnection and/or an agreement under which an
Interconnector User can use an External Interconnection.

Interconnector Export In relation to an External Interconnection means the (daily or weekly)

Capacity forecast value (in MW) at the time of the (daily or weekly) peak demand,
of the maximum level at which the External Interconnection can export
to the Grid Entry Point.

Interconnector Import In relation to an External Interconnection means the (daily or weekly)

Capacity forecast value (in MW) at the time of the (daily or weekly) peak demand
of the maximum level at which the External Interconnection can import
from the Grid Entry Point.

Interconnector Owner Has the meaning given to the term in the Connection and Use of
System Code.

Interconnector User Has the meaning set out in the BSC.

Interface Agreement Has the meaning set out in the CUSC.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

37 of 84
 Interface Point As the context admits or requires either;
(a) the electrical point of connection between an Offshore
Transmission System and an Onshore Transmission System,
or
(b) the electrical point of connection between an Offshore
Transmission System and a Network Operator’s User System.

Interface Point Capacity The maximum amount of Active Power transferable at the Interface
Point as declared by a User under the OTSDUW Arrangements
expressed in whole MW.

Interface Point Target The nominal target voltage/power factor at an Interface Point which a
Voltage/Power factor Network Operator requires The Company to achieve by operation of the
relevant Offshore Transmission System.

Interim Operational A notification from The Company to a Generator or DC Converter

Notification or ION Station owner or HVDC System Owner or Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer acknowledging that the User has demonstrated
compliance, except for the Unresolved Issues;
(a) with the Grid Code, and
(b) where applicable, with Appendices F1 to F5 of the Bilateral
Agreement,
in each case in respect of the Plant and Apparatus (including OTSUA)
specified in such notification and provided that in the case of the
OTSDUW Arrangements such notification shall be provided to a
Generator in two parts dealing with the OTSUA and Generator’s Plant
and Apparatus (called respectively “Interim Operational Notification
Part A” or “ION A” and “Interim Operational Notification Part B” or “ION
B”) as provided for in the CP or ECP.

Intermittent Power Source The primary source of power for a Generating Unit or Power Generating
Module that cannot be considered as controllable, e.g. wind, wave or
solar. For the avoidance of doubt, the output from an Electricity Storage
Module would not be considered to be an Intermittent Power Source.

Internal Voltage Source or For a GBGF-S, a real magnetic field, that rotates synchronously with the
IVS System Frequency under normal operating conditions, which as a
consequence induces an internal voltage (which is often referred to as
the Electro Motive Force (EMF)) in the stationary generator winding that
has a real impedance.
In a GBGF-I, switched power electronic devices are used to produce a
voltage waveform, with harmonics, that has a fundamental rotational
component called the Internal Voltage Source (IVS) that rotates
synchronously with the System Frequency under normal operating
conditions.
For a GBGF-I there must be an impedance with only real physical values,
between the Internal Voltage Source and the Grid Entry Point or User
System Entry Point.
For the avoidance of doubt, a virtual impedance, is not permitted in
GBGF-I.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

38 of 84
 Intertripping (a) The tripping of circuit-breaker(s) by commands initiated from
Protection at a remote location independent of the state of the
local Protection; or
(b) Operational Intertripping.

Intertrip Apparatus Apparatus which performs Intertripping.

IP Completion Day 31 December 2020 as defined in Section 39 of the European Union

(Withdrawal Agreement) Act 2020.

IP Turbine Power Fraction Ratio of steady state mechanical power delivered by the IP turbine to the
total steady state mechanical power delivered by the total steam turbine
at Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity.

Isolating Device A device for achieving Isolation.

Isolation The disconnection of HV Apparatus (as defined in OC8A.1.6.2 and

OC8B.1.7.2) from the remainder of the System in which that HV
Apparatus is situated by either of the following:
(a) an Isolating Device maintained in an isolating position. The
isolating position must either be:
(i) maintained by immobilising and Locking the Isolating
Device in the isolating position and affixing a Caution
Notice to it. Where the Isolating Device is Locked with a
Safety Key, the Safety Key must be secured in a Key Safe
and the Key Safe Key must be, where reasonably
practicable, given to the authorised site representative of the
Requesting Safety Co-Ordinator and is to be retained in
safe custody. Where not reasonably practicable the Key
Safe Key must be retained by the authorised site
representative of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator in
safe custody; or
(ii) maintained and/or secured by such other method which
must be in accordance with the Local Safety Instructions
or the Safety Rules of the Relevant Transmission
Licensee or that User, as the case may be; or
(b) an adequate physical separation which must be in accordance with
and maintained by the method set out in the Local Safety
Instructions or the Safety Rules of the Relevant Transmission
Licensee or that User, as the case may be.

Joint System Incident An Event wherever occurring (other than on an Embedded Medium
Power Station or an Embedded Small Power Station) which, in the
opinion of The Company or a User, has or may have a serious and/or
widespread effect, in the case of an Event on a User(s) System(s) (other
than on an Embedded Medium Power Station or Embedded Small
Power Station), on the National Electricity Transmission System, and
in the case of an Event on the National Electricity Transmission
System, on a User(s) System(s) (other than on an Embedded Medium
Power Station or Embedded Small Power Station).

Key Safe A device for the secure retention of keys.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

39 of 84
 Key Safe Key A key unique at a Location capable of operating a lock, other than a
control lock, on a Key Safe.

Large Power Station A Power Station which is

(a) directly connected to:
(i) NGET’s Transmission System where such Power Station
has a Registered Capacity of 100MW or more; or
(ii) SPT’s Transmission System where such Power Station
has a Registered Capacity of 30MW or more; or
(iii) SHETL’s Transmission System where such Power
Station has a Registered Capacity of 10MW or more; or
(iv) an Offshore Transmission System where such Power
Station has a Registered Capacity of 10MW or more;
or,
(b) Embedded within a User System (or part thereof) where such
User System (or part thereof) is connected under normal operating
conditions to:
(i) NGET’s Transmission System and such Power Station
has a Registered Capacity of 100MW or more; or
(ii) SPT’s Transmission System and such Power Station has
a Registered Capacity of 30MW or more; or
(iii) SHETL’s Transmission System and such Power Station
has a Registered Capacity of 10MW or more;
or,
(c) Embedded within a User System (or part thereof) where the User
System (or part thereof) is not connected to the National
Electricity Transmission System, although such Power Station
is in:
(i) NGET’s Transmission Area where such Power Station
has a Registered Capacity of 100MW or more; or
(ii) SPT’s Transmission Area where such Power Station has
a Registered Capacity of 30MW or more; or
(iii) SHETL’s Transmission Area where such Power Station
has a Registered Capacity of 10MW or more;
For the avoidance of doubt, a Large Power Station could comprise of
Type A, Type B, Type C or Type D Power Generating Modules.

Legally Binding Decisions Any relevant legally binding decision or decisions of the European
of the European Commission and/or the Agency, but a binding decision does not include
Commission and/or the a decision that is not, or so much of a decision as is not, Retained EU
Agency Law.

Challenge Where permitted by law, a judicial review in respect of the Authority’s

decision to approve or not to approve a Grid Code Modification
Proposal.

Licence Any licence granted to The Company or a Relevant Transmission

Licensee or a User, under Section 6 of the Act.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

40 of 84
 Licence Standards Those standards set out or referred to in Condition C17 of The
Company’s Transmission Licence and/or Condition D3 and/or
Condition E16 of a Relevant Transmission Licensee’s Transmission
Licence.

Limited Frequency A mode whereby the operation of the Genset or Power Generating
Sensitive Mode Module (or DC Converter at a DC Converter Station or HVDC Systems
exporting Active Power to the Total System) is Frequency insensitive
except when the System Frequency exceeds 50.4Hz, from which point
Limited High Frequency Response must be provided. For Power
Generating Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules)
and HVDC Systems, operation in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode
would require Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode – Overfrequency
(LFSM-O) capability and Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode –
Underfrequency (LFSM-U) capability.
Limited Frequency A Power Generating Module (including a DC Connected Power Park
Sensitive Mode – Module) or HVDC System operating mode which will result in Active
Overfrequency or LFSM-O Power output reduction in response to a change in System Frequency
above a certain value.
Limited Frequency A Power Generating Module (including a DC Connected Power Park
Sensitive Mode – Module) or HVDC System operating mode which will result in Active
Underfrequency or LFSM-U Power output increase in response to a change in System Frequency
below a certain value.

Limited High Frequency A response of a Genset (or DC Converter at a DC Converter Station

Response exporting Active Power to the Total System) to an increase in System
Frequency above 50.4Hz leading to a reduction in Active Power in
accordance with the provisions of BC3.7.2.1.
A Workgroup having less than five (5) but more than two (2) persons
Limited Membership
that have nominated themselves for membership in addition to the Code
Workgroup
Administrator representative and the chairperson of the Workgroup.

Members of a Limited Membership Workgroup where employed by

companies that are considered to be an Affiliate of each other will be
considered to be a single workgroup member for the purposes of fulfilling
this minimum requirement.

Limited Operational A notification from The Company to a Generator or DC Converter

Notification or LON Station owner or HVDC System Owner or Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer stating that the User’s Plant and/or Apparatus
specified in such notification may be, or is, unable to comply:
(a) with the provisions of the Grid Code specified in the notice, and
(b) where applicable, with Appendices F1 to F5 of the Bilateral
Agreement ,
and specifying the Unresolved Issues.

Load The Active, Reactive or Apparent Power, as the context requires,

generated, transmitted or distributed.

Loaded Supplying electrical power to the System.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

41 of 84
 Load Angle The angle in radians between the voltage of the Internal Voltage Source
and the voltage at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point.

Load Factor The ratio of the actual output of a Generating Unit or Power Generating
Module to the possible maximum output of that Generating Unit or
Power Generating Module.

Load Management Block A block of Demand controlled by a Supplier or other party through the
means of radio teleswitching or by some other means.
A plan produced and agreed by The Company, Transmission
Local Joint Restoration
Licensee, Restoration Contractors and a Network Operator under
Plan
OC9.4.7.7, detailing the agreed method and procedure by which The
Company or Transmission Licensee in Scotland will instruct
aRestoration Contractor with an Anchor Plant to energise, part of the
Total System within 2 hours of that instruction and subsequently meet
complementary blocks of local Demand so as to form a Power Island. A
Local Joint Restoration Plan may require the use of Top Up
Restoration Plant.
A Local Joint Restoration Plan is distinct from and falls outside the
provisions of a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan.

Local Safety Instructions For safety co-ordination in England and Wales, instructions on each User
Site and Transmission Site, approved by NGET’s or User's relevant
manager, setting down the methods of achieving the objectives of
NGET's or the User's Safety Rules, as the case may be, to ensure the
safety of personnel carrying out work or testing on Plant and/or
Apparatus on which their Safety Rules apply and, in the case of a User,
any other document(s) on a User Site which contains rules with regard to
maintaining or securing the isolating position of an Isolating Device, or
maintaining a physical separation or maintaining or securing the position
of an Earthing Device.

Local Switching Procedure A procedure produced under OC7.6 detailing the agreed arrangements in
respect of carrying out of Operational Switching at Connection Sites
and parts of the National Electricity Transmission System adjacent to
those Connection Sites.

Localised Negative Reserve That margin of Active Power sufficient to allow transfers to and from a
Active Power Margin or System Constraint Group (as the case may be) to be contained within
Localised NRAPM such reasonable limit as The Company may determine.

Location Any place at which Safety Precautions are to be applied.

Locked A condition of HV Apparatus that cannot be altered without the operation

of a locking device.

Locking The application of a locking device which enables HV Apparatus to be

Locked.

Low Frequency Relay Has the same meaning as Under Frequency Relay.

Low Voltage or LV For E&W Transmission Systems a voltage not exceeding 250 volts. For
Scottish Transmission Systems, a voltage exceeding 50 volts but not
exceeding 1000 volts.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

42 of 84
 LV Side of the Offshore Unless otherwise specified in the Bilateral Agreement, the busbar on the
Platform Offshore Platform (typically 33kV) at which the relevant Offshore Grid
Entry Point is located.
Main Plant and Apparatus In respect of a Power Station (including Power Stations comprising of
DC Connected Power Park Modules and Electricity Storage Modules)
is one or more of the principal items of Plant or Apparatus required to
convert or re-convert the primary source of energy into electricity.
In respect of HVDC Systems or DC Converters or Transmission DC
Converters is one of the principal items of Plant or Apparatus used to
convert high voltage direct current to high voltage alternating current or
vice versa.
In respect of a Network Operator’s equipment or a Non-Embedded
Customer’s equipment, is one of the principal items of Plant or
Apparatus required to facilitate the import or export of Active Power or
Reactive Power to or from a Network Operator’s or Non-Embedded
Customer’s System.

Main Protection A Protection system which has priority above other Protection in
initiating either a fault clearance or an action to terminate an abnormal
condition in a power system.

Manufacturer’s Data & A report submitted by a manufacturer to The Company relating to a

Performance Report specific version of a Power Park Unit demonstrating the performance
characteristics of such Power Park Unit in respect of which The
Company has evaluated its relevance for the purposes of the
Compliance Processes.

Manufacturer’s Test A certificate prepared by a manufacturer which demonstrates that its

Certificates Power Generating Module has undergone appropriate tests and
conforms to the performance requirements expected by The Company
in satisfying its compliance requirements and thereby satisfies the
appropriate requirements of the Grid Code and Bilateral Agreement.

Market Operation Data A computer system operated by The Company and made available for
Interface System (MODIS) use by Customers connected to or using the National Electricity
Transmission System for the purpose of submitting EU Transparency
Availability Data to The Company.

Market Suspension Has the meaning given to the term ‘Market Suspension Threshold’ in
Threshold Section G of the BSC.

Material Effect An effect causing The Company or a Relevant Transmission Licensee

to effect any works or to alter the manner of operation of Transmission
Plant and/or Transmission Apparatus at the Connection Site (which
term shall, in this definition and in the definition of “Modification” only,
have the meaning ascribed thereto in the CUSC) or the site of connection
or a User to effect any works or to alter the manner of operation of its
Plant and/or Apparatus at the Connection Site or the site of connection
which in either case involves that party in expenditure of more than
£10,000.

Materially Affected Party Any person or class of persons designated by the Authority as such.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

43 of 84
 Maximum Export Capability The maximum continuous Active Power that a Network Operator or
Non-Embedded Customer can export to the Transmission System at
the Grid Supply Point, as specified in the Bilateral Agreement.

Maximum Export Capacity The maximum continuous Apparent Power expressed in MVA and
maximum continuous Active Power expressed in MW which can flow
from an Offshore Transmission System connected to a Network
Operator's User System, to that User System.
Maximum Capacity or Pmax The maximum continuous Active Power which a Power Generating
Module can supply to the Total System, less any demand associated
solely with facilitating the operation of that Power Generating Module
and not fed into the System. In the case of an Electricity Storage
Module, the Maximum Capacity is the maximum continuous Active
Power which an Electricity Storage Module can export to the Total
System less any demand associated with facilitating the operation of that
Electricity Storage Module when fully charged and operating in a mode
analogous to Generation.

Maximum Generation A service utilised by The Company in accordance with the CUSC and
Service or MGS the Balancing Principles Statement in operating the Total System.

Maximum Generation An agreement between a User and The Company for the payment by
Service Agreement The Company to that User in respect of the provision by such User of a
Maximum Generation Service.

Maximum HVDC Active The maximum continuous Active Power which an HVDC System can
Power Transmission exchange with the network at each Grid Entry Point or User System
Capacity (PHmax) Entry Point as specified in the Bilateral Agreement or as agreed
between The Company and the HVDC System Owner.

Maximum Import Capability The maximum continuous Active Power that a Network Operator or
Non-Embedded Customer can import from the Transmission System
at the Grid Supply Point, as specified in the Bilateral Agreement.

Maximum Import Capacity The maximum continuous Apparent Power expressed in MVA and
maximum continuous Active Power expressed in MW which can flow to
an Offshore Transmission System connected to a Network Operator's
User System, from that User System.

Maximum Import Power The maximum continuous Active Power which an Electricity Storage
Module can import from the Total System, when fully discharged and
operating in a mode analogous to Demand.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

44 of 84
 Medium Power Station A Power Station which is
(a) directly connected to NGET’s Transmission System where such
Power Station has a Registered Capacity of 50MW or more but
less than 100MW;
or,
(b) Embedded within a User System (or part thereof) where such
User System (or part thereof) is connected under normal operating
conditions to NGET’s Transmission System and such Power
Station has a Registered Capacity of 50MW or more but less than
100MW;
or,
(c) Embedded within a User System (or part thereof) where the User
System (or part thereof) is not connected to the National
Electricity Transmission System, although such Power Station
is in NGET’s Transmission Area and such Power Station has a
Registered Capacity of 50MW or more but less than 100MW.
For the avoidance of doubt a Medium Power Station could comprise of
Type A, Type B, Type C or Type D Power Generating Modules.

Medium Voltage or MV For E&W Transmission Systems a voltage exceeding 250 volts but not
exceeding 650 volts.

Mills Milling plant which supplies pulverised fuel to the boiler of a coal fired
Power Station.

Minimum Generation The minimum output (in whole MW) which a Genset can generate or DC
Converter at a DC Converter Station or Electricity Storage Module
can import or export to the Total System under stable operating
conditions, as registered with The Company under the PC (and amended
pursuant to the PC). For the avoidance of doubt, the output may go below
this level as a result of operation in accordance with BC3.7.

Minimum Active Power The minimum continuous Active Power which an HVDC System can
Transmission Capacity exchange with the System at each Grid Entry Point or User System
(PHmin) Entry Point as specified in the Bilateral Agreement or as agreed
between The Company and the HVDC System Owner.

Minimum Import Capacity The minimum input (in whole MW) into a DC Converter at a DC
Converter Station or HVDC System at an HVDC Converter (in any of
its operating configurations) at the Onshore Grid Entry Point (or in the
case of an Embedded DC Converter or an Embedded HVDC
Converter at the User System Entry Point) at which a DC Converter or
HVDC Converter can operate in a stable manner, as registered with The
Company under the PC (and amended pursuant to the PC).

Minimum Regulating Level The minimum Active Power, as specified in the Bilateral Agreement or
as agreed between The Company and the Generator or HVDC System
Owner, down to which the Power Generating Module (including a DC
Connected Power Park Module) or HVDC System can control Active
Power.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

45 of 84
 Minimum Stable Operating The minimum Active Power, as specified in the Bilateral Agreement or
Level as agreed between The Company and the Generator, at which the
Power Generating Module can be operated stably for an unlimited time.

Modification Any actual or proposed replacement, renovation, modification, alteration

or construction by or on behalf of a User or The Company to either that
User’s Plant or Apparatus or Transmission Plant or Apparatus, as the
case may be, or the manner of its operation which has or may have a
Material Effect on The Company or a User, as the case may be, at a
particular Connection Site.

Mothballed DC Connected A DC Connected Power Park Module that has previously generated
Power Park Module which the Generator plans not to use to generate for the remainder of the
current Financial Year but which could be returned to service.

Mothballed DC Converter at A DC Converter at a DC Converter Station that has previously imported

a DC Converter Station or exported power which the DC Converter Station Owner plans not to
use to import or export power for the remainder of the current Financial
Year but which could be returned to service.

Mothballed HVDC System An HVDC System that has previously imported or exported power which
the HVDC System Owner plans not to use to import or export power for
the remainder of the current Financial Year but which could be returned
to service.

Mothballed HVDC An HVDC Converter which is part of an HVDC System that has
Converter previously imported or exported power which the HVDC System Owner
plans not to use to import or export power for the remainder of the current
Financial Year but which could be returned to service.

Mothballed Generating Unit A Generating Unit that has previously generated which the Generator
plans not to use to generate for the remainder of the current Financial
Year but which could be returned to service. For the avoidance of doubt
a Mothballed Generating Unit could be part of a Power Generating
Module.

Mothballed Power A Power Generating Module that has previously generated which the
Generating Module Generator plans not to use to generate for the remainder of the current
Financial Year but which could be returned to service.

Mothballed Power Park A Power Park Module that has previously generated which the
Module Generator plans not to use to generate for the remainder of the current
Financial Year but which could be returned to service.

Multiple Point of A double (or more) Point of Connection, being two (or more) Points of
Connection Connection interconnected to each other through the User’s System.

MSID Has the meaning a set out in the BSC, covers Metering System Identifier.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

46 of 84
 National Demand The amount of electricity supplied from the Grid Supply Points plus:-
• that supplied by Embedded Large Power Stations, and
• National Electricity Transmission System Losses,
minus:-
• the Demand taken by Station Transformers and, Pumped
Storage Units’ and Electricity Storage Modules’.
and, for the purposes of this definition, does not include:-
• any exports from the National Electricity Transmission System
across External Interconnections.

National Electricity The Onshore Transmission System and, where owned by Offshore
Transmission System Transmission Licensees, Offshore Transmission Systems.

National Electricity The amount of electricity supplied from the Grid Supply Points plus:-
Transmission System
Demand • that supplied by Embedded Large Power Stations, and
• exports from the National Electricity Transmission System
across External Interconnections, and
• National Electricity Transmission System Losses,
and, for the purposes of this definition, includes:-
• the Demand taken by Station Transformers and, Pumped
Storage Units and Electricity Storage Modules’.

National Electricity The losses of electricity incurred on the National Electricity

Transmission System Transmission System.
Losses

National Electricity Has the meaning set out in Schedule 1 of The Company's Transmission
Transmission System Licence.
Operator Area

National Electricity A computer file produced by The Company which in The Company’s
Transmission System view provides an appropriate representation of the National Electricity
Study Network Data File Transmission System for a specific point in time. The computer file will
contain information and data on Demand on the National Electricity
Transmission System and on Large Power Stations including Genset
power output consistent with Output Usable and The Company’s view
of prevailing system conditions.

National Electricity A warning issued by The Company to Users (or to certain Users only) in
Transmission System accordance with OC7.4.8.2, which provides information relating to
Warning System conditions or Events and is intended to:
(a) alert Users to possible or actual Plant shortage, System problems
and/or Demand reductions;
(b) inform of the applicable period;
(c) indicate intended consequences for Users; and
(d) enable specified Users to be in a state of readiness to receive
instructions from The Company.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

47 of 84
 National Electricity A warning issued by The Company, in accordance with OC7.4.8.7, which
Transmission System is intended to provide short term notice, where possible, to those Users
Warning - Demand Control who are likely to receive Demand reduction instructions from The
Imminent Company within 30 minutes.

National Electricity A warning issued by The Company, in accordance with OC7.4.8.5, which
Transmission System is intended to invite a response from and to alert recipients to a decreased
Warning - Electricity Margin System Margin.
Notice
National Electricity
A warning issued by The Company, in accordance with OC7.4.8.12,
Transmission System
Warning – which is intended to provide short term notice, where possible, to
Embedded Generation those Network Operators who are likely to receive Embedded
Control Imminent Generation Control instructions from The Company within 30
minutes.

National Electricity A warning issued by The Company, in accordance with OC7.4.8.6, which
Transmission System is intended to alert recipients that there is a high risk of Demand reduction
Warning - High Risk of being implemented and which may normally result from an Electricity
Demand Reduction Margin Notice.

National Electricity A warning issued by The Company, in accordance with OC7.4.8.11,

Transmission System which is intended to alert recipients that there is a high risk of Embedded
Warning - High Risk Generation Control being implemented and which may result from
of Embedded Generation a National Electricity Transmission System Warning – System
Reduction NRAPM.
National Electricity
A warning issued by The Company, in accordance with OC.7.4.8.10,
Transmission System
Warning – Localised which is intended to invite a response from and to alert recipients to a
NRAPM decreased Localised NRAPM.

National Electricity A warning issued by The Company, in accordance with OC7.4.8.8, which
Transmission System is intended to alert Users of the risk of widespread and serious System
Warning - Risk of System disturbance which may affect Users.
Disturbance

National Electricity A warning issued by The Company, in accordance with OC.7.4.8.9,

Transmission System which is intended to invite a response from and to alert recipients to a
Warning – System NRAPM decreased System NRAPM.

Network Data The data to be provided by The Company to Users in accordance with
the PC, as listed in Part 3 of the Appendix to the PC.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

48 of 84
 Network Frequency A form of Bode Plot which plots the amplitude (%) and phase (degrees)
Perturbation Plot of the resulting output oscillation responding to an applied input oscillation
across a frequency base. The plot will be used to assess the capability
and performance of a Grid Forming Plant and to ensure that it does not
pose a risk to other Plant and Apparatus connected to the Total System.
For GBGF-I, these are used to provide data to The Company which
together with the associated Nichols Chart (or equivalent) defines the
effects on a GBGF-I for changes in the frequency of the applied input
oscillation.
The input is the applied as an input oscillation and the output is the
resulting oscillations in the GBGF-I’s Active Power.
For the avoidance of doubt, Generators in respect of GBGF-S can
provide their data using the existing formats and do not need to supply
NFP plots.

Network Gas Supply Has the meaning set out in the BSC.
Emergency

Network Operator A person with a User System directly connected to the National
Electricity Transmission System to which Customers and/or Power
Stations (not forming part of the User System) are connected, acting in
its capacity as an operator of the User System, but shall not include a
person acting in the capacity of an Externally Interconnected System
Operator or a Generator in respect of OTSUA.

NGET National Grid Electricity Transmission plc (NO: 2366977) whose

registered office is at 1-3 Strand, London, WC2N 5EH.

Nichols Chart For a GBGF-I, a chart derived from the open loop Bode Plots that are
used to produce an NFP Plot. The Nichols Chart plots open loop gain
versus open loop phase angle. This enables the open loop phase for an
open loop gain of 1 to be identified for use in defining the GBGF-I’s
equivalent Damping Factor.

No-Load Field Voltage Shall have the meaning ascribed to that term in IEC 34-16-1:1991
[equivalent to British Standard BS4999 Section 116.1 : 1992].

No System Connection As defined in OC8A.1.6.2 and OC8B.1.7.2.

Non-CUSC Party A Party who does not accede to the Connection and Use of System
Code (CUSC).

Non-Synchronous A Power Park Module comprising soley of one or more Non-

Electricity Storage Module Synchronous Electricity Storage Units.

Notification of User’s A notification from a Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer to

Intention to Operate The Company informing The Company of the date upon which any
Network Operator’s or Non-Embedded Customer’s Plant and
Apparatus at an EU Grid Supply Point will be ready to be connected to
the Transmission System.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

49 of 84
 Notification of User’s A notification from a Generator or DC Converter Station owner or HVDC
Intention to Synchronise System Owner to The Company informing The Company of the date
upon which any OTSUA, a Generating Unit(s), CCGT Module(s), Power
Park Module(s), Power Generating Module(s) (including a DC
Connected Power Park Module(s)), HVDC System or DC Converter(s)
will be ready to be Synchronised to the Total System.

Non-Controllable Electricity An item of storage Plant, including but not limited to a Synchronous
Storage Equipment Flywheel or Synchronous Compensation Equipment or Regenerative
Braking whose active output power cannot be independently controlled.

Non-Dynamic Frequency A Demand Response Service in which the Demand is controlled

Response Service through discrete switching rather than through continuous load changes
in response to System Frequency changes.

Non-Embedded Customer A Customer in Great Britain, except for a Network Operator acting in
its capacity as such, receiving electricity direct from the Onshore
Transmission System irrespective of from whom it is supplied.

Non-Synchronous A Power Park Module comprising solely of one or more Non-

Electricity Storage Module Synchronous Electricity Storage Units.

Non-Synchronous A Power Park Unit which can produce electrical energy by converting or
Electricity Storage Unit re-converting another source of energy such that the frequency of the
generated voltage is not inherently in synchronism with the frequency of
the System.

Non-Synchronous An Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit or Offshore Non-

Generating Unit Synchronous Generating Unit which could form part of a Power
Generating Module.

Normal CCGT Module A CCGT Module other than a Range CCGT Module.

Novel Unit A tidal, wave, wind, geothermal, or any similar, Generating Unit.

OC9 De-synchronised Has the meaning set out in OC9.5.4.

Island Procedure

Offshore Means wholly or partly in Offshore Waters, and when used in conjunction
with another term and not defined means that the associated term is to
be read accordingly.

Offshore DC Converter Any User Apparatus located Offshore used to convert alternating
current electricity to direct current electricity, or vice versa. An Offshore
DC Converter is a standalone operative configuration at a single site
comprising one or more converter bridges, together with one or more
converter transformers, converter control equipment, essential protective
and switching devices and auxiliaries, if any, used for conversion.

Offshore HVDC Converter Any User Apparatus located Offshore used to convert alternating
current electricity to direct current electricity, or vice versa. An Offshore
HVDC Converter is a standalone operative configuration at a single site
comprising one or more converter bridges, together with one or more
converter transformers, converter control equipment, essential protective
and switching devices and auxiliaries, if any, used for conversion.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

50 of 84
 Offshore Development A statement prepared by The Company in accordance with Special
Information Statement Condition C4 of The Company’s Transmission Licence.

Offshore Generating Unit Unless otherwise provided in the Grid Code, any Apparatus located
Offshore which produces electrical energy by converting or re-converting
another source of energy, including, an Offshore Synchronous
Generating Unit or Offshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit
which could also be part of a Power Generating Module or Electricity
Storage Module

Offshore Grid Entry Point In the case of:-

(a) an Offshore Generating Unit or an Offshore Synchronous
Power Generating Module or an Offshore DC Converter or an
Offshore HVDC Converter, as the case may be, which is directly
connected to an Offshore Transmission System, the point at
which it connects to that Offshore Transmission System, or;
(b) an Offshore Power Park Module which is directly connected to an
Offshore Transmission System, the point where one Power
Park String (registered by itself as a Power Park Module) or the
collection of points where a number of Offshore Power Park
Strings (registered as a single Power Park Module) connects to
that Offshore Transmission System, or;
(c) an External Interconnection which is directly connected to an
Offshore Transmission System, the point at which it connects to
that Offshore Transmission System.
A plan produced and agreed by The Company, Offshore Transmission
Offshore Local Joint
Licensees, Restoration Contractors, a Network Operator and in some
Restoration Plan
cases an Onshore Transmission Licensee under OC9.4.7.7, detailing
the agreed method and procedure by which The Company will instruct a
Restoration Contractor with an Anchor Plant located Offshore to
energise, part of the Total System (including but not limited to parts of
the Offshore Transmission System) within 2 hours of that instruction
and subsequently meet complementary blocks of local Demand so as to
form a Power Island. An Offshore Local Joint Restoration Plan may
require the use of Top Up Restoration Plant.

An Offshore Local Joint Restoration Plan is distinct from and falls

outside the provisions of a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan
Offshore Non-Synchronous An Offshore Generating Unit that is not an Offshore Synchronous
Generating Unit Generating Unit including for the avoidance of doubt a Power Park Unit
or Non-Synchronous Electricity Storage Unit located Offshore.

Offshore Platform A single structure comprising of Plant and Apparatus located Offshore
which includes one or more Offshore Grid Entry Points.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

51 of 84
 Offshore Power Park A collection of one or more Offshore Power Park Strings (registered as
Module a Power Park Module under the PC). There is no limit to the number of
Power Park Strings within the Power Park Module, so long as they
either:
(a) connect to the same busbar which cannot be electrically split; or
(b) connect to a collection of directly electrically connected busbars of
the same nominal voltage and are configured in accordance with
the operating arrangements set out in the relevant Bilateral
Agreement.

Offshore Power Park String A collection of Offshore Generating Units or Power Park Units or Non-
Synchronous Electricity Storage Unit that are powered by an
Intermittent Power Source, joined together by cables forming part of a
User System with a single point of connection to an Offshore
Transmission System. The connection to an Offshore Transmission
System may include a DC Converter or HVDC Converter.

Offshore Synchronous A Generating Unit or Synchronous Electricity Storage Unit located

Generating Unit Offshore which could be part of an Offshore Synchronous Power
Generating Module in which, under all steady state conditions, the rotor
rotates at a mechanical speed equal to the electrical frequency of the
National Electricity Transmission System divided by the number of
pole pairs of the Generating Unit.
Offshore Synchronous A Synchronous Power Generating Module or Synchronous
Power Generating Module Electricity Storage Module located Offshore.

Offshore Tender Process The process followed by the Authority to make, in prescribed cases, a
determination on a competitive basis of the person to whom an offshore
transmission licence is to be granted.

Offshore Transmission An agreement entered into by The Company and a Network Operator
Distribution Connection in respect of the connection to and use of a Network Operator’s User
Agreement System by an Offshore Transmission System.

Offshore Transmission Such person in relation to whose Transmission Licence the standard
Licensee conditions in Section E (offshore transmission owner standard conditions)
of such Transmission Licence have been given effect, or any person in
that prospective role who has acceded to the STC.

Offshore Transmission A system consisting (wholly or mainly) of high voltage electric lines and
System used for the transmission of electricity from one Power Station to a sub-
station or to another Power Station or between sub-stations, and
includes any Plant and Apparatus (including OTSUA) and meters in
connection with the transmission of electricity but does not include any
Remote Transmission Assets. An Offshore Transmission System
extends from the Interface Point, or the Offshore Grid Entry Point(s)
and may include Plant and Apparatus located Onshore and Offshore
and, where the context permits, references to the Offshore
Transmission System includes OTSUA.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

52 of 84
 Offshore Transmission In relation to a particular User where the OTSDUW Arrangements apply,
System Development User means those activities and/or works for the design, planning, consenting
Works or OTSDUW and/or construction and installation of the Offshore Transmission
System to be undertaken by the User as identified in Part 2 of Appendix
I of the relevant Construction Agreement.

Offshore Transmission OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus constructed and/or installed by a User
System User Assets or under the OTSDUW Arrangements which form an Offshore
OTSUA Transmission System that once transferred to a Relevant
Transmission Licensee under an Offshore Tender Process will
become part of the National Electricity Transmission System.

Offshore Waters Has the meaning given to “offshore waters” in Section 90(9) of the Energy
Act 2004.

Offshore Works In relation to a particular User, means those assumptions set out in
Assumptions Appendix P of the relevant Construction Agreement as amended from
time to time.

Onshore Means within Great Britain, and when used in conjunction with another
term and not defined means that the associated term is to be read
accordingly.

Onshore DC Converter Any User Apparatus located Onshore with a Completion Date after 1st
April 2005 used to convert alternating current electricity to direct current
electricity, or vice versa. An Onshore DC Converter is a standalone
operative configuration at a single site comprising one or more converter
bridges, together with one or more converter transformers, converter
control equipment, essential protective and switching devices and
auxiliaries, if any, used for conversion. In a bipolar arrangement, an
Onshore DC Converter represents the bipolar configuration.

Onshore Generating Unit Unless otherwise provided in the Grid Code, any Apparatus located
Onshore which produces electrical energy by converting or re-converting
another source of energy, including, an Onshore Synchronous
Generating Unit or Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit
which could also be part of a Power Generating Module or an Electricity
Storage Module.

Onshore Grid Entry Point A point at which a Onshore Generating Unit or a CCGT Module or a
CCGT Unit or an Onshore Power Generating Module or a Onshore
DC Converter or an Onshore HVDC Converter or a Onshore Power
Park Module or an Onshore Electricity Storage Module or an External
Interconnection, as the case may be, which is directly connected to the
Onshore Transmission System connects to the Onshore
Transmission System.

Onshore HVDC Converter Any User Apparatus located Onshore used to convert alternating
current electricity to direct current electricity, or vice versa. An Onshore
HVDC Converter is a standalone operative configuration at a single site
comprising one or more converter bridges, together with one or more
converter transformers, converter control equipment, essential protective
and switching devices and auxiliaries, if any, used for conversion. In a
bipolar arrangement, an Onshore HVDC Converter represents the
bipolar configuration.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

53 of 84
 Onshore Non-Synchronous A Generating Unit located Onshore that is not a Synchronous
Generating Unit Generating Unit or Synchronous Electricity Storage Unit including for
the avoidance of doubt a Power Park Unit or Non-Synchronous
Electricity Storage Unit located Onshore.

Onshore Power Park A collection of Non-Synchronous Generating Units that are powered
Module by an Intermittent Power Source or connected through power electronic
conversion technology or Non-Synchronous Electricity Storage Units,
joined together by a System (registered as a Power Park Module under
the PC) with a single electrical point of connection directly to the Onshore
Transmission System (or User System if Embedded) with no
intermediate Offshore Transmission System connections. The
connection to the Onshore Transmission System (or User System if
Embedded) may include a DC Converter or HVDC Converter.

Onshore Synchronous An Onshore Generating Unit or Onshore Synchronous Electricity

Generating Unit Storage Unit (which could also be part of an Onshore Power
Generating Module) including, for the avoidance of doubt, a CCGT Unit
or Synchronous Electricity Storage Unit in which, under all steady
state conditions, the rotor rotates at a mechanical speed equal to the
electrical frequency of the National Electricity Transmission System
divided by the number of pole pairs of the Generating Unit.
Onshore Synchronous A Synchronous Power Generating Module or Synchronous
Power Generating Module Electricity Storage Module located Onshore.
Onshore Transmission NGET, SPT, or SHETL.
Licensee

Onshore Transmission The system consisting (wholly or mainly) of high voltage electric lines
System owned or operated by Onshore Transmission Licensees or operated
by The Company and used for the transmission of electricity from one
Power Station to a substation or to another Power Station or between
substations or to or from Offshore Transmission Systems or to or from
any External Interconnection, and includes any Plant and Apparatus
and meters owned or operated by any Onshore Transmission Licensee
in connection with the transmission of electricity but does not include any
Remote Transmission Assets.

On-Site Generator Site A site which is determined by the BSC Panel to be a Trading Unit under
the BSC by reason of having fulfilled the Class 1 or Class 2 requirements
as such terms are used in the BSC.

Operating Code or OC That portion of the Grid Code which is identified as the Operating Code.

Operating Margin Contingency Reserve plus Operating Reserve.

Operating Reserve The additional output from Large Power Stations or the reduction in
Demand, which must be realisable in real-time operation to respond in
order to contribute to containing and correcting any System Frequency
fall to an acceptable level in the event of a loss of generation or a loss of
import from an External Interconnection or mismatch between
generation and Demand.

Operation A scheduled or planned action relating to the operation of a System

(including an Embedded Power Station).

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

54 of 84
 Operational Data Data required under the Operating Codes and/or Balancing Codes.

Operational Day The period from 0500 hours on one day to 0500 on the following day.

Operation Diagrams Diagrams which are a schematic representation of the HV Apparatus and
the connections to all external circuits at a Connection Site (and in the
case of OTSDUW, Transmission Interface Site), incorporating its
numbering, nomenclature and labelling.

Operational Effect Any effect on the operation of the relevant other System which causes
the National Electricity Transmission System or the System of the
other User or Users, as the case may be, to operate (or be at a materially
increased risk of operating) differently to the way in which they would or
may have operated in the absence of that effect.

Operational Intertripping The automatic tripping of circuit-breakers to prevent abnormal system

conditions occurring, such as over voltage, overload, System instability,
etc. after the tripping of other circuit-breakers following power System
fault(s) which includes System to Generating Unit, System to CCGT
Module, System to Power Park Module, System to Electricity Storage
Module, System to DC Converter, System to Power Generating
Module, System to HVDC Converter and System to Demand
intertripping schemes.

Operational Notifications Any Energisation Operational Notification, Interim Operational

Notification, Final Operational Notification or Limited Operational
Notification issued from The Company to a User.

Operational Planning Planning through various timescales the matching of generation output
with forecast National Electricity Transmission System Demand
together with a reserve of generation to provide a margin, taking into
account outages of certain Generating Units or Power Generating
Modules, of parts of the National Electricity Transmission System and
of parts of User Systems to which Power Stations and/or Customers
are connected, carried out to achieve, so far as possible, the standards
of security set out in The Company’s Transmission Licence, each
Relevant Transmission Licensee’s Transmission Licence or
Electricity Distribution Licence, as the case may be.

Operational Planning An operational planning margin set by The Company.

Margin

Operational Planning Phase The period from 8 weeks to the end of the 5th year ahead of real time
operation.

Operational Procedures Management instructions and procedures, both in support of the Safety
Rules and for the local and remote operation of Plant and Apparatus,
issued in connection with the actual operation of Plant and/or Apparatus
at or from a Connection Site.

Operational Switching Operation of Plant and/or Apparatus to the instruction of the relevant
Control Engineer. For the avoidance of doubt, the operation of
Transmission Plant and/or Apparatus forming part of the National
Electricity Transmission System will be to the instruction of the
Relevant Transmission Licensee.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

55 of 84
 Other Relevant Data The data listed in BC1.4.2(f) under the heading Other Relevant Data.

OTSDUW Arrangements The arrangements whereby certain aspects of the design, consenting,
construction, installation and/or commissioning of transmission assets are
capable of being undertaken by a User prior to the transfer of those
assets to a Relevant Transmission Licensee under an Offshore
Tender Process.

OTSDUW Data and The data and information to be provided by Users undertaking OTSDUW,
Information to The Company in accordance with Appendix F of the Planning Code.

OTSDUW DC Converter A Transmission DC Converter designed and/or constructed and/or

installed by a User under the OTSDUW Arrangements and/or operated
by the User until the OTSUA Transfer Time.

OTSDUW Development and The timetable for both the delivery of OTSDUW Data and Information
Data Timetable and OTSDUW Network Data and Information as referred to in Appendix
F of the Planning Code and the development of the scope of the
OTSDUW.

OTSDUW Network Data and The data and information to be provided by The Company to Users
Information undertaking OTSDUW in accordance with Appendix F of the Planning
Code.

OTSDUW Plant and Plant and Apparatus, including any OTSDUW DC Converter, designed
Apparatus by the User under the OTSDUW Arrangements.

OTSUA Transfer Time The time and date at which the OTSUA are transferred to a Relevant
Transmission Licensee.

Out of Synchronism The condition where a System or Generating Unit or Power Generating
Module cannot meet the requirements to enable it to be Synchronised.

Output Usable or OU The forecast value (in MW), profiled across the time period affected by
the unplanned or planned Event of the level at which the Genset can
export to the Grid Entry Point, or in the case of Embedded Power
Stations, to the User System Entry Point. In addition, for a Genset
powered by an Intermittent Power Source the forecast value is based
upon the Intermittent Power Source being at a level which would enable
the Genset to generate at Registered Capacity.
For the purpose of OC2 only, the term Output Usable shall include the
terms Interconnector Export Capacity and Interconnector Import
Capacity where the term Output Usable is being applied to an External
Interconnection.

Over-excitation Limiter Shall have the meaning ascribed to that term in IEC 34-16-1:1991
[equivalent to British Standard BS4999 Section 116.1: 1992].

Panel Chairperson A person appointed as such in accordance with GR.4.1.

Panel Member Any of the persons identified as such in GR.4.

Panel Members’ The recommendation in accordance with the "Grid Code Review Panel
Recommendation Recommendation Vote".

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

56 of 84
 Panel Secretary A person appointed as such in accordance with GR.3.1.2(d).

Part 1 System Ancillary Ancillary Services which are required for System reasons and which
Services must be provided by Users in accordance with the Connection
Conditions or European Connection Conditions. An exhaustive list of
Part 1 System Ancillary Services is included in that part of CC.8.1 or
ECC.8.1 headed Part 1.

Part 2 System Ancillary Ancillary Services which are required for System reasons and which
Services must be provided by a User if the User has agreed to provide them under
a Bilateral Agreement. A non-exhaustive list of Part 2 System Ancillary
Services is included in that part of CC.8.1 or ECC.8.1 headed Part 2.

Part Load The condition of a Genset, or Cascade Hydro Scheme which is Loaded
but is not running at its Maximum Export Limit.
For a GBGF-I this is the larger of either the: -
Peak Current Rating
• The registered maximum steady-state current plus the maximum
additional current to supply the Active ROCOF Response
Power plus the Defined Active Damping Power; or.
• The registered maximum steady-state current plus the maximum
additional current to supply the Phase Jump Angle limit power,
or.
This is the maximum short term total current as declared by the Grid
Forming Plant Owner in accordance with PC.A.5.8.1.

Permit for Work for In respect of E&W Transmission Systems, a document issued by the
proximity work Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee or an E&W User in accordance
with its respective Safety Rules to enable work to be carried out in
accordance with OC8A.8 and which provides for Safety Precautions to
be applied and maintained. An example format of a Relevant E&W
Transmission Licensee’s permit for work is attached as Appendix E to
OC8A.
In respect of Scottish Transmission Systems, a document issued by a
Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee or a Scottish User in
accordance with its respective Safety Rules to enable work to be carried
out in accordance with OC8B.8 and which provides for Safety
Precautions to be applied and maintained. Example formats of Relevant
Scottish Transmission Licensees’ permits for work are attached as
Appendix E to OC8B.

Partial Shutdown The same as a Total Shutdown except that all generation has ceased in
a separate part of the Total System and there is no electricity supply from
External Interconnections or other parts of the Total System to that
part of the Total System and, therefore, that part of the Total System is
shutdown, with the result that it is not possible for that part of the Total
System to begin to function again without The Company’s directions
relating to System Restoration.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

57 of 84
 Pending Grid Code A Grid Code Modification Proposal in respect of which, at the relevant
Modification Proposal time, the Authority has not yet made a decision as to whether to direct
such Grid Code Modification Proposal to be made pursuant to the
Transmission Licence (whether or not a Grid Code Modification
Report has been submitted in respect of such Grid Code Modification
Proposal) or, in the case of a Grid Code Self Governance Proposals,
in respect of which the Grid Code Review Panel has not yet voted
whether or not to approve.

Phase Jump Angle The difference in the measured phase angle of the voltage at the Grid
Entry Point or User System Entry Point in a given mains half cycle
compared with the measured phase angle of the voltage at the Grid Entry
Point or User System Entry Point in the previous mains half cycle.

Phase Jump Angle Limit The maximum Phase Jump Angle when applied to a GBGF-I which will
result in a linear controlled response without activating current limiting
functions. This is specified for a System angle near to zero which will be
considered to be the normal operating angle under steady state
conditions.

Phase Jump Angle The maximum Phase Jump Angle change when applied to a GBGF-I
Withstand which will result in the GBGF-I remaining in stable operation with current
limiting functions activated. This is specified for a System angle near to
zero which will be considered to be the normal operating angle under
steady state conditions.

Phase (Voltage) Unbalance The ratio (in percent) between the rms values of the negative sequence
component and the positive sequence component of the voltage.

Physical Notification Data that describes the BM Participant’s best estimate of the expected
input or output of Active Power of a BM Unit and/or (where relevant)
Generating Unit, except in the instance of a Stage 2 or higher Network
Gas Supply Emergency, with the accuracy of the Physical Notification
being commensurate with Good Industry Practice.

Planning Code or PC That portion of the Grid Code which is identified as the Planning Code.

Planned Maintenance An outage of The Company’s electronic data communication facilities as

Outage provided for in CC.6.5.8 or ECC.6.5.8 and The Company’s associated
computer facilities of which normally at least 5 days notice is given, but in
any event of which at least twelve hours notice has been given by The
Company to the User and which is anticipated to last no longer than 2
hours. The length of such an outage may in exceptional circumstances
be extended where at least 24 hours notice has been given by The
Company to the User. It is anticipated that normally any planned outage
would only last around one hour.

Planned Outage An outage of a Large Power Station or of part of the National Electricity
Transmission System, or of part of a User System, co-ordinated by The
Company under OC2.

Plant Fixed and movable items used in the generation and/or supply and/or
transmission of electricity, other than Apparatus.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

58 of 84
 Point of Common Coupling That point on the National Electricity Transmission System electrically
nearest to the User installation at which either Demands or Loads are,
or may be, connected.

Point of Connection An electrical point of connection between the National Electricity

Transmission System and a User’s System.

Point of Isolation The point on Apparatus (as defined in OC8A.1.6.2 and OC8B.1.7.2) at
which Isolation is achieved.

Post-Control Phase The period following real time operation.

Power Available A signal prepared in accordance with good industry practice, representing
the instantaneous sum of the potential Active Power available from each
individual Power Park Unit within the Power Park Module calculated
using any applicable combination of electrical or mechanical or
meteorological data (including wind speed) measured at each Power
Park Unit at a specified time. Power Available shall be a value between
0MW and Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity which is the sum
of the potential Active Power available of each Power Park Unit within
the Power Park Module. A unit that is not generating or supplying power
will be considered as not available. For the avoidance of doubt, the
Power Available signal would be the Active Power output that a Power
Park Module could reasonably be expected to export at the Grid Entry
Point or User System Entry Point taking all the above criteria into
account including Power Park Unit constraints such as optimisation
modes but would exclude a reduction in the Active Power export of the
Power Park Module instructed by The Company (for example) for the
purposes selecting a Power Park Module to operate in Frequency
Sensitive Mode or when an Emergency Instruction has been issued.

Power Factor The ratio of Active Power to Apparent Power.

Power-Generating Module Either a Synchronous Power Generating Module, a Synchronous
Electricity Storage Module, a Power Park Module or a Non-
Synchronous Electricity Storage Module owned or operated by an
EU Generator.
Power-Generating Module A document provided by the Generator to The Company for a Type B
Document (PGMD) or Type C Power Generating Module which confirms that the Power
Generating Module's compliance with the technical criteria set out in the
Grid Code has been demonstrated and provides the necessary data and
statements, including a statement of compliance.
Power Generating Module A diagram showing the Active Power (MW) and Reactive Power (MVAr)
Performance Chart capability limits within which a Synchronous Power Generating Module
or Power Park Module at its Grid Entry Point or User System Entry
Point will be expected to operate under steady state conditions.
Part of the Total System which is disconnected from, and out of
Power Island
Synchronism with, the rest of the Total System containing Generating
Unit(s) at one or more Power Stations, and/or HVDC Systems and/or
DC Converters, together with complementary local Demand.
Power Park Module Any Onshore Power Park Module or Offshore Power Park Module.

Power Park Module The matrix described in Appendix 1 to BC1 under the heading Power
Availability Matrix Park Module Availability Matrix.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

59 of 84
 Power Park Module A matrix in the form set out in Appendix 4 of OC2 showing the combination
Planning Matrix of Power Park Units within a Power Park Module which would be
expected to be running under normal conditions.

Power Park Unit A Generating Unit within a Power Park Module.

Power Station An installation comprising one or more Generating Units or Power Park
Modules or Power Generating Modules or Electricity Storage
Modules (even where sited separately) owned and/or controlled by the
same Generator, which may reasonably be considered as being
managed as one Power Station.

Power System Stabiliser or Equipment controlling the Exciter output via the voltage regulator in such
PSS a way that power oscillations of the synchronous machines are
dampened. Input variables may be speed, frequency or power (or a
combination of these).

Preface The preface to the Grid Code (which does not form part of the Grid Code
and therefore is not binding).

Preliminary Notice A notice in writing, sent by The Company both to all Users identified by
it under OC12.4.2.1 and to the Test Proposer, notifying them of a
proposed System Test.

Preliminary Project Data relating to a proposed User Development at the time the User
Planning Data applies for a CUSC Contract but before an offer is made and accepted.

Primary Response The automatic increase in Active Power output of a Genset or, as the
case may be, the decrease in Active Power Demand in response to a
System Frequency fall. This increase in Active Power output or, as the
case may be, the decrease in Active Power Demand must be in
accordance with the provisions of the relevant Ancillary Services
Agreement which will provide that it will be released increasingly with
time over the period 0 to 10 seconds from the time of the start of the
Frequency fall on the basis set out in the Ancillary Services Agreement
and fully available by the latter, and sustainable for at least a further 20
seconds. The interpretation of the Primary Response to a – 0.5 Hz
frequency change is shown diagrammatically in Figure CC.A.3.2 and
Figure ECC.A.3.2
Private Network A network which connects to a Network Operator’s System and that
network belongs to a User who is not classified as a Generator, Network
Operator or Non-Embedded Customer.

Programming Phase The period between the Operational Planning Phase and the Control
Phase. It starts at the 8 weeks ahead stage and finishes at 17:00 on the
day ahead of real time.

Proposal Notice A notice submitted to The Company by a User which would like to
undertake a System Test.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

60 of 84
 Proposal Report A report submitted by the Test Panel which contains:
(a) proposals for carrying out a System Test (including the manner in
which the System Test is to be monitored);
(b) an allocation of costs (including un-anticipated costs) between the
affected parties (the general principle being that the Test Proposer
will bear the costs); and
(c) such other matters as the Test Panel considers appropriate.
The report may include requirements for indemnities to be given in
respect of claims and losses arising from a System Test.

Proposed Implementation The proposed date(s) for the implementation of a Grid Code
Date Modification Proposal or Workgroup Alternative Grid Code
Modification such date(s) to be either (i) described by reference to a
specified period after a direction from the Authority approving the Grid
Code Modification Proposal or Workgroup Alternative Grid Code
Modification or (ii) a Fixed Proposed Implementation Date.

Proposer In relation to a particular Grid Code Modification Proposal, the person

who makes such Grid Code Modification Proposal.

Protection The provisions for detecting abnormal conditions on a System and

initiating fault clearance or actuating signals or indications.

Protection Apparatus A group of one or more Protection relays and/or logic elements
designated to perform a specified Protection function.

Pumped Storage A hydro unit in which water can be raised by means of pumps and stored
to be used for the generation of electrical energy;

Pumped Storage A Generating Unit at a Pumped Storage Plant

Generating Unit

Pumped Storage Generator A Generator which owns and/or operates any Pumped Storage Plant.

Pumped Storage Plant A Power Station comprising Pumped Storage Generating Units.

Pumped Storage Unit A Generating Unit within a Pumped Storage Plant. For the avoidance
of doubt, a Pumped Storage Unit is not considered to form part of an
Electricity Storage Unit unless specifically declared by the Generator.

Purchase Contracts A final and binding contract for the purchase of the Main Plant and
Apparatus.
Q/Pmax The ratio of Reactive Power to the Maximum Capacity. The
relationship between Power Factor and Q/Pmax is given by the
formula:-
𝑸
Power Factor = Cos [arctan⁡[ ]]
𝑷𝒎𝒂𝒙

For example, a Power Park Module with a Q/P value of +0.33 would
equate to a Power Factor of Cos(arctan0.33) = 0.95 Power Factor lag.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

61 of 84
 Quick Resynchronisation The capability of a Type C or Type D Power Generating Module as
Capability defined in ECC.6.3.5.6. For the avoidance of doubt this requirement is
only mandatory for EU Code Generators who own or operate a Type C
or Type D Power Generating Module but does not preclude owners of
other generation electing to provide the capability.
Quick Resynchronisation A test undertaken on Generating Unit forming part of a Type C or Type
Unit Test D Power Generating Module as detailed in OC5.7.2.5 necessary to
determine its ability to demonstrate a Quick Resynchronisation
Capability.

Range CCGT Module A CCGT Module where there is a physical connection by way of a steam
or hot gas main between that CCGT Module and another CCGT Module
or other CCGT Modules, which connection contributes (if open) to
efficient modular operation, and which physical connection can be varied
by the operator.

Rated Field Voltage Shall have the meaning ascribed to that term in IEC 34-16-1:1991
[equivalent to British Standard BS4999 Section 116.1: 1992].

Rated MW The “rating-plate” MW output of a Power Generating Module,

Generating Unit, Power Park Module, Electricity Storage Module,
HVDC Converter or DC Converter, being:
(a) that output up to which the Generating Unit was designed to
operate (Calculated as specified in British Standard BS EN 60034
– 1: 1995); or
(b) the nominal rating for the MW output of a Power Park Module or
Power Generating Module being the maximum continuous
electric output power which the Power Park Module or Power
Generating Module was designed to achieve under normal
operating conditions; or
(c) the nominal rating for the MW import capacity and export capacity
(if at a DC Converter Station or HVDC Converter Station) of a
DC Converter or HVDC Converter.
(d) in an importing mode, is that input up to which an Electricity
Storage Module was designed to operate being the maximum
continuous electric input which the Electricity Storage Module
was designed to achieve under normal operating conditions. In an
exporting mode is:-
(i) that output up to which the Synchronous Electricity
Storage Unit was designed to operate (Calculated as
specified in British Standard BS EN 60034 – 1: 1995); or
(ii) the nominal rating for the MW output of a Non-Synchronous
Electricity Storage Module being the maximum continuous
electric output power which the Non-Synchronous
Electricity Storage Module was designed to achieve under
normal operating conditions.

Reactive Despatch Has the meaning set out in the CUSC.

Instruction

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

62 of 84
 Reactive Despatch Network A restriction placed upon an Embedded Power Generating Module,
Restriction Embedded Generating Unit, Embedded Power Park Module or DC
Converter at an Embedded DC Converter Station or HVDC Converter
at an Embedded HVDC Converter Station by the Network Operator
that prevents the Generator or DC Converter Station owner or HVDC
System Owner in question (as applicable) from complying with any
Reactive Despatch Instruction with respect to that Power Generating
Module, Generating Unit, Power Park Module or DC Converter at a
DC Converter Station or HVDC Converter at a HVDC Converter
Station, whether to provide MVArs over the range referred to in CC 6.3.2,
ECC.6.3.2 or otherwise.

Reactive Despatch to Zero A Reactive Despatch Network Restriction which prevents an

Mvar Network Restriction Embedded Power Generating Module, an Embedded Generating
Unit, Embedded Power Park Module, Embedded HVDC System,
HVDC Converter at an Embedded HVDC Converter Station or DC
Converter at an Embedded DC Converter Station from supplying
power at zero MVAr at all Active Power output levels up to and including
Rated MW at the Grid Entry Point (or User System Entry Point if
Embedded).

Reactive Energy The integral with respect to time of the Reactive Power.

Reactive Power The product of voltage and current and the sine of the phase angle
between them measured in units of voltamperes reactive and standard
multiples thereof, ie:
1000 VAr = 1 kVAr
1000 kVAr = 1 MVAr

Record of Inter-System A written record of inter-system Safety Precautions to be compiled in

Safety Precautions or accordance with the provisions of OC8.
RISSP

Regenerative Braking A method of braking in which energy is extracted from the parts braked,
which may be returned directly to the System and the purpose of the
braking is motion control.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

63 of 84
 Registered Capacity (a) In the case of a Generating Unit other than that forming part of a
CCGT Module or Power Park Module or Power Generating
Module, the normal full load capacity of a Generating Unit as
declared by the Generator, less the MW consumed by the
Generating Unit through the Generating Unit’s Unit
Transformer when producing the same (the resultant figure being
expressed in whole MW, or in MW to one decimal place).
(b) In the case of a CCGT Module or Power Park Module owned or
operated by a GB Generator, the normal full load capacity of the
CCGT Module or Power Park Module (as the case may be) as
declared by the GB Generator, being the Active Power declared
by the GB Generator as being deliverable by the CCGT Module
or Power Park Module at the Grid Entry Point (or in the case of
an Embedded CCGT Module or Power Park Module, at the User
System Entry Point), expressed in whole MW, or in MW to one
decimal place. For the avoidance of doubt Maximum Capacity
would apply to Power Generating Modules which form part of a
Large, Medium or Small Power Station.
(c) In the case of a Power Station, the maximum amount of Active
Power deliverable by the Power Station at the Grid Entry Point
(or in the case of an Embedded Power Station at the User
System Entry Point), as declared by the Generator, expressed in
whole MW, or in MW to one decimal place. The maximum Active
Power deliverable is the maximum amount deliverable
simultaneously by the Power Generating Modules and/or
Generating Units and/or CCGT Modules and/or Power Park
Modules less the MW consumed by the Power Generating
Modules and/or Generating Units and/or CCGT Modules in
producing that Active Power and forming part of a Power Station.
(d) In the case of a DC Converter at a DC Converter Station or
HVDC Converter at an HVDC Converter Station, the normal full
load amount of Active Power transferable from a DC Converter
or HVDC Converter at the Onshore Grid Entry Point (or in the
case of an Embedded DC Converter Station or an Embedded
HVDC Converter Station at the User System Entry Point), as
declared by the DC Converter Station owner or HVDC System
Owner, expressed in whole MW, or in MW to one decimal place.
(e) In the case of a DC Converter Station or HVDC Converter
Station, the maximum amount of Active Power transferable from
a DC Converter Station or HVDC Converter Station at the
Onshore Grid Entry Point (or in the case of an Embedded DC
Converter Station or Embedded HVDC Converter Station at the
User System Entry Point), as declared by the DC Converter
Station owner or HVDC System Owner, expressed in whole MW,
or in MW to one decimal place.
(f) In the case of an Electricity Storage Module, the normal full load
amount of Active Power transferable from an Electricity Storage
Module at the Grid Entry Point (or in the case of an Embedded
Electricity Storage Module at the User System Entry Point), as
declared by the Generator, expressed in whole MW, or in MW to
one decimal place.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

64 of 84
 Registered Data Those items of Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning Data
which upon connection become fixed (subject to any subsequent
changes).

Registered Import In the case of a DC Converter Station or HVDC Converter Station

Capability containing DC Converters or HVDC Converters connected to an
External System, the maximum amount of Active Power transferable
into a DC Converter Station or HVDC Converter Station at the
Onshore Grid Entry Point (or in the case of an Embedded DC
Converter Station or Embedded HVDC Converter Station at the User
System Entry Point), as declared by the DC Converter Station owner
or HVDC System Owner, expressed in whole MW.
In the case of a DC Converter or HVDC Converter connected to an
External System and in a DC Converter Station or HVDC Converter
Station, the normal full load amount of Active Power transferable into a
DC Converter or HVDC Converter at the Onshore Grid Entry Point (or
in the case of an Embedded DC Converter Station or Embedded HVDC
Converter Station at the User System Entry Point), as declared by the
DC Converter owner or HVDC System Owner, expressed in whole MW.
In the case of an Electricity Storage Module, the maximum amount of
Active Power transferable into an Electricity Storage Module at the
Grid Entry Point (or in the case of an Embedded Electricity Storage
Module at the User System Entry Point), as declared by the Generator,
expressed in whole MW.

Regulations The Utilities Contracts Regulations 1996, as amended from time to time.
Parts of the Grid Code that are referenced in Governance Rules Annex
Regulated Sections
GR.B as amended from time to time with the approval of the Authority.

Reheater Time Constant Determined at Registered Capacity, the reheater time constant will be
construed in accordance with the principles of the IEEE Committee
Report "Dynamic Models for Steam and Hydro Turbines in Power System
Studies" published in 1973 which apply to such phrase.

Rejected Grid Code A Grid Code Modification Proposal in respect of which the Authority
Modification Proposal has decided not to direct The Company to modify the Grid Code
pursuant to The Company’s Transmission Licence in the manner set
out herein or, in the case of a Grid Code Self Governance Proposals,
in respect of which the Grid Code Review Panel has voted not to
approve.

Related Person Means, in relation to an individual, any member of their immediate family,
their employer (and any former employer of theirs within the previous 12
months), any partner with whom they are in partnership, and any
company or Affiliate of a company in which they or any member of their
immediate family controls more than 20% of the voting rights in respect
of the shares of the company;

Relevant E&W As the context requires NGET and/or an E&W Offshore Transmission
Transmission Licensee Licensee.

Relevant Party Has the meaning given in GR15.10(a).

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

65 of 84
 Relevant Scottish As the context requires SPT and/or SHETL and/or a Scottish Offshore
Transmission Licensee Transmission Licensee.

Relevant Transmission Means National Grid Electricity Transmission plc (NGET) in its
Licensee Transmission Area or SP Transmission plc (SPT) in its Transmission
Area or Scottish Hydro-Electric Transmission Ltd (SHETL) in its
Transmission Area or any Offshore Transmission Licensee in its
Transmission Area.

Relevant Unit As defined in the STC, Schedule 3.

Remote End HVDC An HVDC Converter Station which forms part of an HVDC System and
Converter Station is not directly connected to the AC part of the GB Synchronous Area.

Remote Transmission Any Plant and Apparatus or meters owned by NGET which:
Assets
(a) are Embedded in a User System and which are not directly
connected by Plant and/or Apparatus owned by NGET to a sub-
station owned by NGET; and
(b) are by agreement between NGET and such User operated under
the direction and control of such User.

Replacement Reserves (RR) Means, in the context of Balancing Services, the Active Power reserves
available to restore or support the required level of FRR to be prepared
for additional system imbalances, including generation reserves;

Requesting Safety Co- The Safety Co-ordinator requesting Safety Precautions.

ordinator

Responsible Engineer/ A person nominated by a User to be responsible for System control.

Operator

Responsible Manager A manager who has been duly authorised by a User or a Relevant
Transmission Licensee to sign Site Responsibility Schedules on
behalf of that User or Relevant Transmission Licensee as the case may
be.

Restoration Contractor An Anchor Restoration Contractor or a Top Up Restoration

Contractor.

Restoration Plan Either a Local Joint Restoration Plan, a Distribution Restoration

Zone Plan or an Offshore Local Joint Restoration Plan as the context
requires.

Restoration Service A User or a party with a legal or contractual obligation to provide a service
Provider contributing to one or several measures of the System Restoration Plan.

Restoration Service Test A test carried out on a Plant to confirm it has an Anchor Plant Capablity
or Top Up Restoration Capability.

Re-synchronisation The bringing of parts of the System which have become Out of
Synchronism with any other System back into Synchronism, and like
terms shall be construed accordingly.

Retained EU Law 31 December 2020 as defined in European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018
as amended by the European Union (Withdrawal Agreement) Act 2020.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

66 of 84
 RR Acceptance The results of the TERRE auction for each BM Participant.

Restricted Applies to a TERRE Bid which has been marked so that it will be passed
to the TERRE Central Platform but will not be used in the auction.

ROCOF Rate of Change of Frequency

RR Instruction Replacement Reserve Instruction – used for instructing BM

Participants after the results of the TERRE auction. An RR Instruction
has the same format as a Bid-Offer Acceptance but has type field
indicating it is for TERRE.

Safety Co-ordinator A person or persons nominated by a Relevant E&W Transmission

Licensee and each E&W User in relation to Connection Points (or in
the case of OTSUA operational prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time,
Transmission Interface Points) on an E&W Transmission System
and/or by the Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee and each
Scottish User in relation to Connection Points (or in the case of OTSUA
operational prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time, Transmission Interface
Points) on a Scottish Transmission System to be responsible for the
co-ordination of Safety Precautions at each Connection Point (or in the
case of OTSUA operational prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time,
Transmission Interface Points) when work (which includes testing) is to
be carried out on a System which necessitates the provision of Safety
Precautions on HV Apparatus (as defined in OC8A.1.6.2 and
OC8B.1.7.2), pursuant to OC8.

Safety From The System That condition which safeguards persons when work is to be carried out
on or near a System from the dangers which are inherent in the System.

Safety Key A key unique at the Location capable of operating a lock which will cause
an Isolating Device and/or Earthing Device to be Locked.

Safety Log A chronological record of messages relating to safety co-ordination sent

and received by each Safety Co-ordinator under OC8.

Safety Precautions Isolation and/or Earthing.

Safety Rules The rules of the Relevant Transmission Licensee or a User that seek
to ensure that persons working on Plant and/or Apparatus to which the
rules apply are safeguarded from hazards arising from the System.

Scottish Offshore An Offshore Transmission System with an Interface Point in Scotland.

Transmission System

Scottish Offshore A person who owns or operates a Scottish Offshore Transmission

Transmission Licensee System pursuant to a Transmission Licence.

Scottish Transmission Collectively SPT’s Transmission System and SHETL’s Transmission

System System and any Scottish Offshore Transmission Systems.

Scottish User A User in Scotland or any Offshore User who owns or operates Plant
and/or Apparatus connected (or which will at the OTSUA Transfer Time
be connected) to a Scottish Offshore Transmission System.

Secondary BM Unit Has the same meaning set out in the BSC.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

67 of 84
 Secondary Response The automatic increase in Active Power output of a Genset or, as the
case may be, the decrease in Active Power Demand in response to a
System Frequency fall. This increase in Active Power output or, as the
case may be, the decrease in Active Power Demand must be in
accordance with the provisions of the relevant Ancillary Services
Agreement which will provide that it will be fully available by 30 seconds
from the time of the start of the Frequency fall and be sustainable for at
least a further 30 minutes. The interpretation of the Secondary
Response to a -0.5 Hz frequency change is shown diagrammatically in
Figure CC.A.3.2 or Figure ECC.A.3.2.

Secretary of State Has the same meaning as in the Act.

Secured Event Has the meaning set out in the Security and Quality of Supply
Standard.

Security and Quality of The version of the document entitled ‘Security and Quality of Supply
Supply Standard (SQSS) Standard’ established pursuant to the Transmission Licence in force at
the time of entering into the relevant Bilateral Agreement.

Self-Governance Criteria A proposed Modification that, if implemented,

(a) is unlikely to have a material effect on:
(i) existing or future electricity consumers; and
(ii) competition in the generation, storage, distribution, or supply of
electricity or any commercial activities connected with the
generation, storage, distribution or supply of electricity; and
(iii) the operation of the National Electricity Transmission System;
and
(iv) matters relating to sustainable development, safety or security of
supply, or the management of market or network emergencies;
and
(v) the Grid Code’s governance procedures or the Grid Code’s
modification procedures, and
(b) is unlikely to discriminate between different classes of Users.
(c) other than where the modification meets the Fast Track Criteria, will
not constitute an amendment to the Regulated Sections of the Grid
Code.

Self-Governance A Grid Code Modification Proposal that does not fall within the scope
Modifications of a Significant Code Review and that meets the Self-Governance
Criteria or which the Authority directs is to be treated as such any
direction under GR.24.4.

Self-Governance Statement The statement made by the Grid Code Review Panel and submitted to
the Authority:
(a) confirming that, in its opinion, the Self-Governance Criteria are met
and the proposed Grid Code Modification Proposal is suitable for the
Self-Governance route; and
(b) providing a detailed explanation of the Grid Code Review Panel’s
reasons for that opinion.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

68 of 84
 Setpoint Voltage The value of voltage at the Grid Entry Point, or User System Entry
Point if Embedded, on the automatic control system steady state
operating characteristic, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, at which
the transfer of Reactive Power between a Power Park Module, DC
Converter, HVDC Converter or Non-Synchronous Generating Unit
and the Transmission System, or Network Operator’s system if
Embedded, is zero.

Settlement Period A period of 30 minutes ending on the hour and half-hour in each hour
during a day.

Seven Year Statement A statement, prepared by The Company in accordance with the terms of
The Company’s Transmission Licence, showing for each of the seven
succeeding Financial Years, the opportunities available for connecting
to and using the National Electricity Transmission System and
indicating those parts of the National Electricity Transmission System
most suited to new connections and transport of further quantities of
electricity.

SF6 Gas Zone A segregated zone surrounding electrical conductors within a casing
containing SF6 gas.

SHETL Scottish Hydro-Electric Transmission Limited.

In the case of a Generating Unit is the condition of a Generating Unit
Shutdown
where the generator rotor is at rest or on barring or equivalent.

In the case of an HVDC System or DC Converter Station, is the

condition of an HVDC System or DC Converter Station where the HVDC
System or DC Converter Station is de-energised and therefore not
importing or exporting Apparent Power to or from the Total System.

In the case of Auxiliaries, the state where they are de-energised and not
capable of fulfilling their function until restarted or resupplied.

Significant Code Review Means the period commencing on the start date of a Significant Code
Review as stated in the notice issued by the Authority, and ending in the
circumstances described in GR.16.6 or GR.16.7, as appropriate.

Significant Code Review Means the period commencing on the start date of a Significant Code
Phase Review as stated in the notice issued by the Authority, and ending in the
circumstances described in GR.16.6 or GR.16.7, as appropriate.
Significant Event An Event, as defined in OC3.4.1.

Significant Incident An Event which either:

(a) was notified by a User to The Company under OC7, and which
The Company considers has had or may have had a significant
effect on the National Electricity Transmission System, and The
Company requires the User to report that Event in writing in
accordance with OC10 and notifies the User accordingly; or
(b) was notified by The Company to a User under OC7, and which
that User considers has had or may have had a significant effect
on that User’s System, and that User requires The Company to
report that Event in writing in accordance with the provisions of
OC10 and notifies The Company accordingly.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

69 of 84
 Simultaneous Tap Change A tap change implemented on the generator step-up transformers of
Synchronised Gensets, effected by Generators in response to an
instruction from The Company issued simultaneously to the relevant
Power Stations. The instruction, preceded by advance notice, must be
effected as soon as possible, and in any event within one minute of receipt
from The Company of the instruction.

Single Intraday Coupling The continuous process where collected orders are matched and cross-
zonal capacity is allocated simultaneously for different bidding zones in
the intraday market.

Single Line Diagram A schematic representation of a three-phase network in which the three
phases are represented by single lines. The diagram shall include (but
not necessarily be limited to) busbars, overhead lines, underground
cables, power transformers and reactive compensation equipment. It
shall also show where Large Power Stations are connected, and the
points at which Demand is supplied.

Single Point of Connection A single Point of Connection, with no interconnection through the
User’s System to another Point of Connection.

Site Common Drawings Drawings prepared for each Connection Site (and in the case of
OTSDUW, Transmission Interface Site) which incorporate Connection
Site (and in the case of OTSDUW, Transmission Interface Site) layout
drawings, electrical layout drawings, common protection/ control
drawings and common services drawings.

Site Responsibility A schedule containing the information and prepared on the basis of the
Schedule provisions set out in Appendix 1 of the CC and Appendix E1 of the ECC.

Slope The ratio of the steady state change in voltage, as a percentage of the
nominal voltage, to the steady state change in Reactive Power output, in
per unit of Reactive Power capability. For the avoidance of doubt, the
value indicates the percentage voltage reduction that will result in a 1 per
unit increase in Reactive Power generation.

Small Participant Has the meaning given in the CUSC.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

70 of 84
 Small Power Station A Power Station which is
(a) directly connected to:
(i) NGET’s Transmission System where such Power Station
has a Registered Capacity of less than 50MW; or
(ii) SPT’s Transmission System where such Power Station
has a Registered Capacity of less than 30MW; or
(iii) SHETL’s Transmission System where such a Power
Station has a Registered Capacity of less than 10 MW; or
(iv) an Offshore Transmission System where such Power
Station has a Registered Capacity of less than 10MW;
or,
(b) Embedded within a User System (or part thereof) where such
User System (or part thereof) is connected under normal operating
conditions to:
(i) NGET’s Transmission System and such Power Station
has a Registered Capacity of less than 50MW; or
(ii) SPT’s Transmission System and such Power Station has
a Registered Capacity of less than 30MW; or
(iii) SHETL’s Transmission System and such Power Station
has a Registered Capacity of less than 10MW;
or,
(c) Embedded within a User System (or part thereof) where the User
System (or part thereof) is not connected to the National
Electricity Transmission System, although such Power Station
is in:
(i) NGET’s Transmission Area and such Power Station has
a Registered Capacity of less than 50MW; or
(ii) SPT’s Transmission Area and such Power Station has a
Registered Capacity of less than 30MW; or
(iii) SHETL’s Transmission Area and such Power Station has
a Registered Capacity of less than 10MW;
For the avoidance of doubt, a Small Power Station could comprise of
Type A, Type B, Type C or Type D Power Generating Modules.

Speeder Motor Setting The minimum and maximum no-load speeds (expressed as a percentage
Range of rated speed) to which the turbine is capable of being controlled, by the
speeder motor or equivalent, when the Generating Unit terminals are on
open circuit.

SPT SP Transmission Limited plc

Standard Contract Terms
The standard terms and conditions applicable to Ancillary Services
provided by Demand Response Providers and published on the
Website from time to time.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

71 of 84
 A Grid Code Modification Proposal that does not fall within the scope
Standard Modifications
of a Significant Code Review subject to any direction by the Authority
pursuant to GR.16.3 and GR.16.4, nor meets the Self-Governance
Criteria subject to any direction by the Authority pursuant to GR.24.4
and in accordance with any direction under GR.24.2. A Grid Code
Modification Proposal that constitutes an amendment to the Regulated
Sections of the Grid Code shall be a Standard Modification except
where it is an Urgent Modification or where it meets the Fast Track
Criteria.
Standard Planning Data The general data required by The Company under the PC. It is generally
also the data which The Company requires from a User in an application
for a CUSC Contract, as reflected in the PC.

Standard Product Means a harmonised balancing product defined by all EU TSOs for the
exchange of balance services.

Specific Product Means in the context of Balancing Services a product that is not a
standard product.

Start Time The time named as such in an instruction issued by The Company
pursuant to the BC.
In the case of a Generating Unit is the action of bringing a Generating
Start-Up
Unit from Shutdown to Synchronous Speed.

In the case of an HVDC System or DC Converter Station, is the action

of bringing the HVDC System or DC Converter Station from Shutdown
to a state where it is energised.
Statement of Readiness Has the meaning set out in the Bilateral Agreement and/or
Construction Agreement.

Station Board A switchboard through which electrical power is supplied to the

Auxiliaries of a Power Station, and which is supplied by a Station
Transformer. It may be interconnected with a Unit Board.

Station Transformer A transformer supplying electrical power to the Auxiliaries of

(a) a Power Station, which is not directly connected to the
Generating Unit terminals (typical voltage ratios being 132/11kV
or 275/11kV), or
(b) a DC Converter Station or HVDC Converter Station.

STC Committee The committee established under the STC.

Steam Unit A Generating Unit whose prime mover converts the heat-energy in
steam to mechanical energy.

Storage User A Generator who owns or operates one or more Electricity Storage
Modules. For the avoidance of doubt:
(a) Retained EU Law (Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/631,
Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/1388 and Commission
Regulation (EU) 2016/1485) shall not apply to Storage
Users; and
(b) the European Connection Conditions (ECC’s) shall apply
to Storage Users on the basis set out in Paragraph
ECC1.1(d).

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

72 of 84
 Subtransmission System The part of a User’s System which operates at a single transformation
below the voltage of the relevant Transmission System.

Substantial Modification A Modification in relation to modernisation or replacement of the User’s

Main Plant and Apparatus which impacts its technical capabilities,
which, following notification by the relevant User to The Company,
results in substantial amendment to the Bilateral Agreement.

Supergrid Voltage Any voltage greater than 200kV.

Supplier (a) A person supplying electricity under an Electricity Supply

Licence; or
(b) A person supplying electricity under exemption under the Act;
in each case acting in its capacity as a supplier of electricity to Customers
in Great Britain.

Surplus A MW figure equal to the total Output Usable:

(a) minus the forecast of Active Power Demand, and
(b) minus the Operational Planning Margin.

Synchronised (a) The condition where an incoming Power Generating Module,

Generating Unit or Power Park Module or DC Converter or
HVDC Converter or System is connected to the busbars of
another System so that the Frequencies and phase relationships
of that Power Generating Module, Generating Unit, Power Park
Module, DC Converter, HVDC Converter or System, as the case
may be, and the System to which it is connected are identical, like
terms shall be construed accordingly e.g. “Synchronism”.
(b) The condition where an importing BM Unit is consuming electricity.

Synchronous Electricity A Synchronous Power Generating Module which can convert or re-
Storage Module convert electrical energy from another source of energy such that the
frequency of the generated voltage, the rotor speed and the frequency of
network voltage are in a constant ratio and thus in synchronism. For the
avoidance of doubt a Synchronous Electricity Storage Module could
comprise of one or more Synchronous Electricity Storage Units.

Synchronous Electricity A Synchronous Generating Unit which can supply or absorb electrical
Storage Unit energy such that the frequency of the generated voltage, the rotor speed
and the frequency of the equipment are in constant ratio and thus in
synchronism with the network.

Synchronising Generation The amount of MW (in whole MW) produced at the moment of
synchronising.

Synchronising Group A group of two or more Gensets) which require a minimum time interval
between their Synchronising or De-Synchronising times.
Synchronous Area An area covered by synchronously interconnected Transmission
Licensees, such as the Synchronous Areas of Continental Europe,
Great Britain, Ireland-Northern Ireland and Nordic and the power systems
of Lithuania, Latvia and Estonia, together referred to as ‘Baltic’ which are
part of a wider Synchronous Area;
Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024
73 of 84
 Synchronous The operation of rotating synchronous Apparatus for the specific purpose
Compensation of either the generation or absorption of Reactive Power.

Synchronous Apparatus which has the function of providing Synchronous

Compensation Equipment Compensation. For the avoidance of doubt, one or more Synchronous
Compensation units would not constitute an Electricity Storage
Module unless it could be operated in a controllable manner.

Synchronous Electricity A Synchronous Power Generating Module which can convert and
Storage Module reconvert electrical energy from another source of energy such that the
frequency of the generated voltage, the rotor speed and the frequency of
network voltage are in a constant ratio and thus in synchronism. For the
avoidance of doubt a Synchronous Electricity Storage Module could
comprise of one or more Synchronous Electricity Storage Units.

Synchronous Electricity A Synchronous Generating Unit which can supply and absorb electrical
Storage Unit energy such that the frequency of the generated voltage, the rotor speed
and the frequency of the equipment are in constant ratio and thus in
synchronism with the network.

Synchronous Flywheel An item of synchronously rotating Plant for the specific purpose of
contributing inertia to the System. One or more Synchronous Flywheels
would not be considered to form an Electricity Storage Module unless
it could be operated in a controllable manner for its AC input and output
power.

Synchronous Generating Any Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit or Offshore

Unit Synchronous Generating Unit.

Synchronous Generating A diagram showing the Active Power (MW) and Reactive Power (MVAr)
Unit Performance Chart capability limits within which a Synchronous Generating Unit at its
stator terminals (which is part of a Synchronous Power Generating
Module) will be expected to operate under steady state conditions.
Synchronous Power- An indivisible set of installations which can convert or re-convert electrical
Generating Module energy from another source of energy such that the frequency of the
supplied voltage, the rotor speed and the frequency of network voltage
are in a constant ratio and thus in synchronism. For the avoidance of
doubt, a Synchronous Power Generating Module could comprise of
one or more Synchronous Generating Units or one or more
Synchronous Electricity Storage Units.
Synchronous Power The matrix described in Appendix 1 to BC1 under the heading
Generating Module Matrix Synchronous Power Generating Module Matrix.
Synchronous Power A matrix in the form set out in Appendix 5 of OC2 showing the combination
Generating Module of Synchronous Generating Units within a Synchronous Power
Planning Matrix Generating Module which would be running in relation to any given MW
output.
Synchronous Power Has the same meaning as a Synchronous Generating Unit and would
Generating Unit be considered to be part of a Power Generating Module.

Synchronous Speed That speed required by a Generating Unit to enable it to be

Synchronised to a System.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

74 of 84
 System Any User System and/or the National Electricity Transmission
System, as the case may be.

System Ancillary Services Collectively Part 1 System Ancillary Services and Part 2 System
Ancillary Services.

System Constraint A limitation on the use of a System due to lack of transmission capacity
or other System conditions.

System Constrained That portion of Registered Capacity or Registered Import Capacity not
Capacity available due to a System Constraint.

System Constraint Group A part of the National Electricity Transmission System which, because
of System Constraints, is subject to limits of Active Power which can
flow into or out of (as the case may be) that part.

System Defence Plan A document prepared by The Company, as published on its Website,
outlining how the requirements of the “defence plan”, as provided for by
Retained EU Law (Commission Regulation (EU) 2017/2196), has been
implemented within the GB Synchronous Area.

System Fault Dependability A measure of the ability of Protection to initiate successful tripping of
Index or Dp circuit-breakers which are associated with a faulty item of Apparatus. It
is calculated using the formula:
Dp = 1 – F1/A
Where:
A = Total number of System faults
F1 = Number of System faults where there was a failure to trip a circuit-
breaker.
System Incidents Report A report submitted to the GCRP on a monthly basis, containing, but not
limited to, a list of Significant Events, as detailed in OC3.4.1.

System Margin The margin in any period between

(a) the sum of Maximum Export Limits and
(b) forecast Demand and the Operating Margin,
for that period.

System Negative Reserve That margin of Active Power sufficient to allow the largest loss of Load
Active Power Margin or at any time.
System NRAPM

System Operator - Has the meaning set out in The Company’s Transmission Licence
Transmission Owner Code
or STC

System Restoration The procedure necessary for a recovery from a Total Shutdown or
Partial Shutdown.

System Restoration Region Those regions of the Total System as defined in Appendix 1 of OC9.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

75 of 84
 System Restoration Plan A document prepared by The Company, as published on its Website,
outlining how the requirements of the “restoration plan”, as defined in
Retained EU Law (Commission Regulation (EU) 2017/2196), has been
implemented within the GB Synchronous Area.

System Telephony An alternative method by which a User’s Responsible

Engineer/Operator, the relevant Transmission Licensees’ Control
Engeineers and The Company’s Control Engineer(s) speak to one and
another for the purposes of control of the Total System in both normal
operating conditions and where practicable, emergency operating
conditions.

System Tests Tests which involve simulating conditions, or the controlled application of
irregular, unusual or extreme conditions, on the Total System, or any part
of the Total System, but which do not include commissioning or
recommissioning tests or any other tests of a minor nature.

System to Demand Intertrip An intertrip scheme which disconnects Demand when a System fault has
Scheme arisen to prevent abnormal conditions occurring on the System.

System to Generator A Balancing Service involving the initiation by a System to Generator

Operational Intertripping Operational Intertripping Scheme of automatic tripping of the User’s
circuit breaker(s), or Relevant Transmission Licensee’s circuit
breaker(s) where agreed by The Company, the User and the Relevant
Transmission Licensee, resulting in the tripping of BM Unit(s) or (where
relevant) Generating Unit(s) comprised in a BM Unit to prevent
abnormal system conditions occurring, such as over voltage, overload,
System instability, etc, after the tripping of other circuit-breakers following
power System fault(s).

System to Generator A System to Generating Unit or System to CCGT Module or System

Operational Intertripping to Power Park Module or System to Power Generating Module or
Scheme System to Electricity Storage Module Intertripping Scheme forming a
condition of connection and specified in Appendix F3 of the relevant
Bilateral Agreement, being either a Category 1 Intertripping Scheme,
Category 2 Intertripping Scheme, Category 3 Intertripping Scheme
or Category 4 Intertripping Scheme.

Target Frequency That Frequency determined by The Company, in its reasonable opinion,
as the desired operating Frequency of the Total System or of a relevant
Power Island. This will normally be 50.00Hz plus or minus 0.05Hz,
except in exceptional circumstances as determined by The Company for
example which may be operating the System during disputes affecting
fuel supplies or following a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown where
Power Islands are established, and each Power Island has its own
unique Frequency.

Technical Specification In relation to Plant and/or Apparatus,

(a) the relevant European Specification; or
(b) if there is no relevant European Specification, other relevant
standards which are in common use in the European Community.

TERRE Trans European Replacement Reserves Exchange – a market covering

the procurement of replacement reserves across Europe.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

76 of 84
 TERRE Activation Period A period of time lasting 15 minutes and starting at either 0, 15, 30 or 45
minutes past the hour (e.g. 10:00 to 10:15). There are 4 TERRE
Activation Periods in one TERRE Auction Period.

TERRE Auction Period A period of time lasting one hour and starting and ending on the hour (e.g.
from 10:00 to 11:00). Hence there are 24 TERRE Auction Periods in a
day.

TERRE Bid A submission by a BM Participant covering the price and MW deviation

offered into the TERRE auction (please note – in the Balancing
Mechanism the term bid has a different meaning – in this case a bid can
be an upward or downward MW change).

TERRE Central Platform An IT system which implements the TERRE auction.

TERRE Data Validation and A document produced by the central TERRE project detailing the correct
Consistency Rules format of submissions for TERRE.

TERRE Gate Closure 60 minutes before the start of the TERRE Auction Period (note still
ongoing discussions if this may become 55 minutes).

TERRE Instruction Details specific rules for creating an RR Instruction from an RR

Guide Acceptance.

Test Co-ordinator A person who co-ordinates System Tests.

Test Panel A panel, whose composition is detailed in OC12, which is responsible,

inter alia, for considering a proposed System Test, and submitting a
Proposal Report and a Test Programme.

Test Plan A document prepared by The Company, as published on its Website,

outlining how the requirements of the “Test Plan”, as provided for by
Retained EU Law (Commission Regulation (EU) 2017/2196), has been
implemented within the GB Synchronous Area.

Test Programme A programme submitted by the Test Panel to The Company, the Test
Proposer, and each User identified by The Company under OC12.4.2.1,
which states the switching sequence and proposed timings of the
switching sequence, a list of those staff involved in carrying out the
System Test (including those responsible for the site safety) and such
other matters as the Test Panel deems appropriate.

Test Proposer The person who submits a Proposal Notice.

A signal in the form of a sine wave, applied to a GBGF-I to demonstrate
Test Signal its ability to contribute to Active Damping Power.
The Company National Grid Electricity System Operator Limited (NO: 11014226) whose
registered office is at 1-3 Strand, London, WC2N 5EH as the person
whose Transmission Licence Section C of such Transmission Licence
has been given effect.

The Company Control The nominated person employed by The Company to direct the
Engineer operation of the National Electricity Transmission System or such
person as nominated by The Company.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

77 of 84
 The Company Operational The Company's operational procedures which form the guidelines for
Strategy operation of the National Electricity Transmission System.
The situation existing when all generation has ceased and there is no
Total ShutdownTop Up
electricity supply from External Interconnections and, therefore, the
Restoration Capability
Total System has shutdown with the result that it is not possible for the
Total System to begin to function again without The Company’s
directions relating to a Black Start. The ability of a Restoration
Contractor’s Plant to Start-Up from Shutdown and to be
Synchronised and remain Synchronised to a part of the Total System
upon instruction from The Company or Relevant Transmission
Licensee (in Scotland) or relevant Network Operator, within a defined
time period, pursuant to the terms of the Top Up Restoration Contract,
once external electrical power supplies are restored to that Restoration
Contractor’s site. In the case of a Local Joint Restoration Plan, an
instruction from The Company or Transmission Licensee in Scotland
to a Restoration Contractor in respect of their Top Up Restoration
Plant would generally be issued immediately after an instruction to an
Anchor Restoration Contractor with the Top Up Capability expected
to be delivered consecutively after external power supplies had been
restored to the Top Up Restoration Contractor’s site. In the case of a
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, an instruction from a Network
Operator to a Restoration Contractor in respect of their Top Up
Restoration Plant would generally be issued immediately after an
instruction to an Anchor Restoration Contractor with the Top Up
Capability expected to be delivered consecutively after external power
supplies had been restored to the Top Up Restoration Contractor’s site.
For the avoidance of doubt a Restoration Contractor with a Top Up
Restoration Capability shall have sufficent Auxiliary Energy Supplies
to be capable of delivering the service they have agreed to provide as
soon as their Connection Point or User System Entry Point is
energised.
Top Up Restoration In the case of a Local Joint Restoration Plan or Offshore Local Joint
Contract Restoration Plan is a contract between The Company and Top Up
Restoration Contractor for the provision of a Top Up Restoration
Capability. In the case of a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, an
agreement between The Company and relevant Network Operator and
Top Up Restoration Contractor for the provision of Top Up Restoration
Capability.

Top Up Restoration A Restoration Contractor with aTop Up Restoration Contract.

Contractor

Top Up Restoration Plant Plant owned and operated by a Top Up Restoration Contractor.

Top Up Restoration Plant A test conducted on a Top Up Restoration Plant to confirm it is capable
Test of meeting the requirements of a Top Up Restoration Contract.

Total Shutdown The situation existing when all generation has ceased and there is no
electricity supply from External Interconnections and, therefore, the
Total System has shutdown with the result that it is not possible for the
Total System to begin to function again without The Company’s
directions relating to System Restoration.

Total System The National Electricity Transmission System and all User Systems
in the National Electricity Transmission System Operator Area.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

78 of 84
 Trading Point A commercial and, where so specified in the Grid Code, an operational
interface between a User and The Company, which a User has notified
to The Company.

Transfer Date Such date as may be appointed by the Secretary of State by order under
section 65 of the Act.

Transmission Means, when used in conjunction with another term relating to equipment
or a site, whether defined or not, that the associated term is to be read as
being part of or directly associated with the National Electricity
Transmission System, and not of or with the User System.

Transmission Area Has the meaning set out in the Transmission Licence of a
Transmission Licensee.
Transmission Connected A Demand Facility which has a Grid Supply Point to the National
Demand Facilities Electricity Transmission System.

Transmission DC Converter Any Transmission Licensee Apparatus (or OTSUA that will become
Transmission Licensee Apparatus at the OTSUA Transfer Time) used
to convert alternating current electricity to direct current electricity, or vice
versa. A Transmission Network DC Converter (which could include an
HVDC System owned by an Offshore Transmission Licensee or
Generator in respect of OTSUA) is a standalone operative configuration
at a single site comprising one or more converter bridges, together with
one or more converter transformers, converter control equipment,
essential protective and switching devices and auxiliaries, if any, used for
conversion.

Transmission Entry Has the meaning set out in the CUSC.

Capacity

Transmission Interface In NGET’s Transmission Area, a Transmission circuit which connects

Circuit a System operating at a voltage above 132kV to a System operating at
a voltage of 132kV or below
In SHETL’s Transmission Area and SPT’s Transmission Area, a
Transmission circuit which connects a System operating at a voltage of
132kV or above to a System operating at a voltage below 132kV.

Transmission Interface Means the electrical point of connection between the Offshore
Point Transmission System and an Onshore Transmission System.

Transmission Interface Site The site at which the Transmission Interface Point is located.

Transmission Licence A licence granted under Section 6(1)(b) of the Act.

Transmission Licensee The Company and any Onshore Transmission Licensee or Offshore
Transmission Licensee.

Transmission Site Means a site owned (or occupied pursuant to a lease, licence or other
agreement) by a Relevant Transmission Licensee in which there is a
Connection Point. For the avoidance of doubt, a site owned by a User
but occupied by the Relevant Transmission Licensee as aforesaid, is a
Transmission Site.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

79 of 84
 Transmission System Has the same meaning as the term "licensee's transmission system" in
the Transmission Licence of a Transmission Licensee.

Turbine Time Constant Determined at Registered Capacity, the turbine time constant will be
construed in accordance with the principles of the IEEE Committee
Report "Dynamic Models for Steam and Hydro Turbines in Power System
Studies" published in 1973 which apply to such phrase.
Type A Power Generating A Power-Generating Module (including an Electricity Storage
Module Module) with a Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point below
110 kV and a Maximum Capacity of 0.8 kW or greater but less than
1MW;
Type B Power Generating A Power-Generating Module (including an Electricity Storage Module)
Module with a Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point below 110 kV and
a Maximum Capacity of 1MW or greater but less than 10MW;
Type C Power Generating A Power-Generating Module (including an Electricity Storage Module)
Module with a Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point below 110 kV and
a Maximum Capacity of 10MW or greater but less than 50MW;
Type D Power Generating A Power-generating Module: (including an Electricity Storage
Module Module):
with a Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point at, or greater
than, 110 kV; or
with a Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point below 110 kV and
with Maximum Capacity of 50MW or greater
Unbalanced Load The situation where the Load on each phase is not equal.

Under-excitation Limiter Shall have the meaning ascribed to that term in IEC 34-16-1:1991
[equivalent to British Standard BS4999 Section 116.1: 1992].

Under Frequency Relay An electrical measuring relay intended to operate when its characteristic
quantity (Frequency) reaches the relay settings by a decrease in
Frequency.

Unit Board A switchboard through which electrical power is supplied to the

Auxiliaries of a Generating Unit and which is supplied by a Unit
Transformer. It may be interconnected with a Station Board.

Unit Transformer A transformer directly connected to a Generating Unit’s terminals, and

which supplies power to the Auxiliaries of a Generating Unit. Typical
voltage ratios are 23/11kV and 15/6.6kV.

Unit Load Controller The time constant, expressed in units of seconds, of the power output
Response Time Constant increase which occurs in the Secondary Response timescale in
response to a step change in System Frequency.

Unresolved Issues Any relevant Grid Code provisions or Bilateral Agreement requirements
identified by The Company with which the relevant User has not
demonstrated compliance to The Company’s reasonable satisfaction at
the date of issue of the Preliminary Operational Notification and/or
Interim Operational Notification and/or Limited Operational
Notification and which are detailed in such Preliminary Operational
Notification and/or Interim Operational Notification and/or Limited
Operational Notification.

Urgent Modification A Grid Code Modification Proposal treated or to be treated as an

Urgent Modification in accordance with GR.23.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

80 of 84
 User A term utilised in various sections of the Grid Code to refer to the persons
using the National Electricity Transmission System, as more
particularly identified in each section of the Grid Code concerned. In the
Preface and the General Conditions the term means any person to
whom the Grid Code applies. The term User includes an EU Code User
and a GB Code User.

User Data File Structure The file structure given at DRC 18 which will be specified by The
Company which a Generator or DC Converter Station owner or HVDC
System Owner must use for the purposes of the CP or the ECP to submit
DRC data Schedules and information demonstrating compliance with the
Grid Code and, where applicable, with the CUSC Contract(s), unless
otherwise agreed by The Company.

User Development In the PC means either User's Plant and/or Apparatus to be connected
to the National Electricity Transmission System, or a Modification
relating to a User's Plant and/or Apparatus already connected to the
National Electricity Transmission System, or a proposed new
connection or Modification to the connection within the User System.

User Self Certification of A certificate, in the form attached at CP.A.2.(1) or ECP.A.2.(1) completed
Compliance by a Generator or DC Converter Station owner or HVDC System
Owner to which the Compliance Statement is attached which confirms
that such Plant and Apparatus complies with the relevant Grid Code
provisions and where appropriate, with the CUSC Contract(s), as
identified in the Compliance Statement and, if appropriate, identifies any
Unresolved Issues and/or any exceptions to such compliance and
details the derogation(s) granted in respect of such exceptions.

User Site A site owned (or occupied pursuant to a lease, licence or other
agreement) by a User in which there is a Connection Point. For the
avoidance of doubt, a site owned by a Relevant Transmission Licensee
but occupied by a User as aforesaid, is a User Site.

User System Any system owned or operated by a User comprising:-

(a) Power Generating Modules or Generating Units; and/or
(b) Systems consisting (wholly or mainly) of electric lines used for the
distribution of electricity from Grid Supply Points or Generating
Units or Power Generating Modules or other entry points to the
point of delivery to Customers, or other Users;
and Plant and/or Apparatus (including prior to the OTSUA Transfer
Time, any OTSUA) connecting:-
(c) The system as described above; or
(d) Non-Embedded Customers equipment;
to the National Electricity Transmission System or to the relevant other
User System, as the case may be.
The User System includes any Remote Transmission Assets operated
by such User or other person and any Plant and/or Apparatus and
meters owned or operated by the User or other person in connection with
the distribution of electricity but does not include any part of the National
Electricity Transmission System.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

81 of 84
 User System Entry Point A point at which;
a Power Generating Module,; or
a Generating Unit, ; or,
a CCGT Module;or
a CCGT Unit; or
a Power Park Module; or
an Electricity Storage Module; or
a DC Converter; or
an HVDC Converter,
and which is Embedded connects to the User System.

Virtual Lead Party As defined in the BSC.

The transient Reactive Power injected or absorbed from a Grid Forming
Voltage Jump Reactive
Plant to the Total System as a result of either a step or ramp change in
Power
the difference between the voltage magnitude and/or phase of the voltage
of the Internal Voltage Source of the Grid Forming Plant and Grid
Entry Point or User System Entry Point.

In the event of a voltage magnitude and phase change at the Grid Entry
Point or User System Entry Point, a Grid Forming Plant will
instantaneously (within 5ms) supply Voltage Jump Reactive Power to
the Total System as a result of the voltage magnitude change.

Water Time Constant Bears the meaning ascribed to the term "Water inertia time" in IEC308.

Website The site established by The Company on the World-Wide Web for the
exchange of information among Users and other interested persons in
accordance with such restrictions on access as may be determined from
time to time by The Company.

Weekly ACS Conditions Means that particular combination of weather elements that gives rise to
a level of peak Demand within a week, taken to commence on a Monday
and end on a Sunday, which has a particular chance of being exceeded
as a result of weather variation alone. This particular chance is
determined such that the combined probabilities of Demand in all weeks
of the year exceeding the annual peak Demand under Annual ACS
Conditions is 50%, and in the week of maximum risk the weekly peak
Demand under Weekly ACS Conditions is equal to the annual peak
Demand under Annual ACS Conditions.

WG Consultation Any request from an Authorised Electricity Operator; the Citizens

Alternative Request Advice or the Citizens Advice Scotland, The Company or a Materially
Affected Party for a Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification
to be developed by the Workgroup expressed as such and which
contains the information referred to at GR.20.16. For the avoidance of
doubt, any WG Consultation Alternative Request does not constitute
either a Grid Code Modification Proposal or a Workgroup Alternative
Grid Code Modification.
A Workgroup established by the Grid Code Review Panel pursuant to
Workgroup
GR.20.1;

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

82 of 84
 As defined in GR.20.13, and any further consultation which may be
Workgroup Consultation
directed by the Grid Code Review Panel pursuant to GR.20.20;
An alternative modification to the Grid Code Modification Proposal
Workgroup Alternative Grid
developed by the Workgroup under the Workgroup terms of reference
Code Modification
(either as a result of a Workgroup Consultation or otherwise) and which
is believed by a majority of the members of the Workgroup or by the
chairperson of the Workgroup to better facilitate the Grid Code
Objectives than the Grid Code Modification Proposal or the current
version of the Grid Code;
Zonal System Security That generation required, within the boundary circuits defining the
Requirements System Zone, which when added to the secured transfer capability of the
boundary circuits exactly matches the Demand within the System Zone.

A number of the terms listed above are defined in other documents, such as the Balancing and Settlement
Code and the Transmission Licence. Appendix 1 sets out the current definitions from the other documents
of those terms so used in the Grid Code and defined in other documents for ease of reference, but does not
form part of the Grid Code.
GD.2 Construction of References
GD.2.1 In the Grid Code:
(i) a table of contents, a Preface, a Revision section, headings, and the Appendix to this
Glossary and Definitions are inserted for convenience only and shall be ignored in
construing the Grid Code;
(ii) unless the context otherwise requires, all references to a particular paragraph, sub-
paragraph, Appendix or Schedule shall be a reference to that paragraph, sub-paragraph
Appendix or Schedule in or to that part of the Grid Code in which the reference is made;
(iii) unless the context otherwise requires, the singular shall include the plural and vice versa,
references to any gender shall include all other genders and references to persons shall
include any individual, body corporate, corporation, joint venture, trust, unincorporated
association, organisation, firm or partnership and any other entity, in each case whether
or not having a separate legal personality;
(iv) references to the words "include" or "including" are to be construed without limitation to
the generality of the preceding words;
(v) unless there is something in the subject matter or the context which is inconsistent
therewith, any reference to an Act of Parliament or any Section of or Schedule to, or other
provision of an Act of Parliament shall be construed at the particular time, as including a
reference to any modification, extension or re-enactment thereof then in force and to all
instruments, orders and regulations then in force and made under or deriving validity from
the relevant Act of Parliament;
(vi) where the Glossary and Definitions refers to any word or term which is more particularly
defined in a part of the Grid Code, the definition in that part of the Grid Code will prevail
(unless otherwise stated) over the definition in the Glossary & Definitions in the event
of any inconsistency;
(vii) a cross-reference to another document or part of the Grid Code shall not of itself impose
any additional or further or co-existent obligation or confer any additional or further or co-
existent right in the part of the text where such cross-reference is contained;
(viii) nothing in the Grid Code is intended to or shall derogate from The Company's statutory
or licence obligations;
(ix) a "holding company" means, in relation to any person, a holding company of such person
within the meaning of section 736, 736A and 736B of the Companies Act 1985 as
substituted by section 144 of the Companies Act 1989 and, if that latter section is not in
force at the Transfer Date, as if such latter section were in force at such date;
Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024
83 of 84
 (x) a "subsidiary" means, in relation to any person, a subsidiary of such person within the
meaning of section 736, 736A and 736B of the Companies Act 1985 as substituted by
section 144 of the Companies Act 1989 and, if that latter section is not in force at the
Transfer Date, as if such latter section were in force at such date;
(xi) references to time are to London time; and
(xii) (a) Save where (b) below applies, where there is a reference to an item of data being
expressed in a whole number of MW, fractions of a MW below 0.5 shall be rounded
down to the nearest whole MW and fractions of a MW of 0.5 and above shall be
rounded up to the nearest whole MW;
(b) In the case of the definition of Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity, fractions
of a MW below 0.05 shall be rounded down to one decimal place and fractions of a
MW of 0.05 and above shall be rounded up to one decimal place.
(xiii) For the purposes of the Grid Code, physical quantities such as current or voltage are not
defined terms as their meaning will vary depending upon the context of the obligation.
For example, voltage could mean positive phase sequence root mean square voltage,
instantaneous voltage, phase to phase voltage, phase to earth voltage. The same issue
equally applies to current, and therefore the terms current and voltage should remain
undefined with the meaning depending upon the context of the application. Retained EU
Law (Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/631) defines requirements of current and
voltage but they have not been adopted as part of EU implementation for the reasons
outlined above.
(xiv) Except where expressly stated to the contrary, reference to Commission Regulations
means the Commission Regulation (EU) as it forms part of Retained EU Law, as such
regulation may be amended.

< END OF GLOSSARY & DEFINITIONS>

Issue 6 Revision 21 GD 04 March 2024

84 of 84
 PLANNING CODE
(PC)

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

PC.1 INTRODUCTION .....................................................................................................................................2
PC.2 OBJECTIVE .............................................................................................................................................3
PC.3 SCOPE ....................................................................................................................................................4
PC.4 PLANNING PROCEDURES ....................................................................................................................7
PC.5 PLANNING DATA..................................................................................................................................10
PC.6 PLANNING STANDARDS .....................................................................................................................12
PC.7 PLANNING LIAISON .............................................................................................................................13
PC.8 OTSDUW PLANNING LIAISION ...........................................................................................................15
APPENDIX A - PLANNING DATA REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................................16
PART 1 - STANDARD PLANNING DATA .................................................................................................. 20
PC.A.2 USER’S SYSTEM (AND OTSUA) DATA ..................................................................................20
PC.A.3 GENERATING UNIT AND DC CONVERTER DATA ................................................................29
PC.A.4 DEMAND AND ACTIVE ENERGY DATA .................................................................................38
PART 2 - DETAILED PLANNING DATA .................................................................................................... 44
PC.A.5 GENERATING UNIT, POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONVERTER AND OTSDUW PLANT
AND APPARATUS DATA ........................................................................................................................44
PC.A.6 USERS’ SYSTEM DATA ...........................................................................................................67
PC.A.7 ADDITIONAL DATA FOR NEW TYPES OF POWER STATIONS, DC CONVERTER
STATIONS, OTSUA AND CONFIGURATIONS ......................................................................................72
PART 3 – DETAILED PLANNING DATA ................................................................................................... 73
APPENDIX B - SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS ......................................................................................................82
APPENDIX C - TECHNICAL AND DESIGN CRITERIA ...................................................................................85
PART 1 – SHETL’s TECHNICAL AND DESIGN CRITERIA ...................................................................... 85
PART 2 - SPT's TECHNICAL AND DESIGN CRITERIA ........................................................................... 87
APPENDIX D - DATA NOT DISCLOSED TO A RELEVANT TRANSMISSION LICENSEE ...........................88
APPENDIX E - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND OTSDUW PLANT AND
APPARATUS TECHNICAL AND DESIGN CRITERIA .....................................................................................91
APPENDIX F - OTSDUW DATA AND INFORMATION AND OTSDUW NETWORK DATA AND
INFORMATION ................................................................................................................................................92

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

i
PC.1 INTRODUCTION
PC.1.1 The Planning Code ("PC") specifies the technical and design criteria and procedures to be
applied by The Company in the planning and development of the National Electricity
Transmission System and to be taken into account by Users in the planning and
development of their own Systems. In the case of OTSUA, the PC also specifies the technical
and design criteria and procedures to be applied by the User in the planning and development
of the OTSUA. It details information to be supplied by Users to The Company, and certain
information to be supplied by The Company to Users. The Company has obligations under
the STC to inform Relevant Transmission Licensees of data required for the planning of the
National Electricity Transmission System. In respect of PC data, The Company may pass
on User data to a Relevant Transmission Licensee, as detailed in PC.3.4 and PC.3.5.
PC.1.1A Provisions of the PC which apply in relation to OTSDUW and OTSUA shall apply up to the
OTSUA Transfer Time, whereupon such provisions shall (without prejudice to any prior non-
compliance) cease to apply, without prejudice to the continuing application of provisions of the
PC applying in relation to the relevant Offshore Transmission System and/or Connection
Site.
PC.1.1B As used in the PC:
(a) National Electricity Transmission System excludes OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus
(prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time) unless the context otherwise requires;
(b) and User Development includes OTSDUW unless the context otherwise requires.
PC.1.2 The Users referred to above are defined, for the purpose of the PC, in PC.3.1.
PC.1.3 Development of the National Electricity Transmission System, involving its reinforcement
or extension, will arise for a number of reasons including, but not limited to:
(a) a development on a User System already connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System;
(b) the introduction of a new Connection Site or the Modification of an existing Connection
Site between a User System and the National Electricity Transmission System;
(c) the cumulative effect of a number of such developments referred to in (a) and (b) by one
or more Users.
PC.1.4 Accordingly, the reinforcement or extension of the National Electricity Transmission
System may involve work:
(a) at a substation at a Connection Site where User's Plant and/or Apparatus is connected
to the National Electricity Transmission System (or in the case of OTSDUW, at a
substation at an Interface Point);
(b) on transmission lines or other facilities which join that Connection Site (or in the case of
OTSDUW, Interface Point) to the remainder of the National Electricity Transmission
System;
(c) on transmission lines or other facilities at or between points remote from that Connection
Site (or in the case of OTSDUW, Interface Point).
PC.1.5 The time required for the planning and development of the National Electricity Transmission
System will depend on the type and extent of the necessary reinforcement and/or extension
work, the need or otherwise for statutory planning consent, the associated possibility of the
need for a public inquiry and the degree of complexity in undertaking the new work while
maintaining satisfactory security and quality of supply on the existing National Electricity
Transmission System.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

2 of 93
PC1.6 For the avoidance of doubt and the purposes of the Grid Code, DC Connected Power Park
Modules are treated as belonging to Generators. Generators who own DC Connected
Power Park Modules would therefore be expected to supply the same data as required under
this PC in respect of Power Stations comprising Power Park Modules other than where
specific references to DC Connected Power Park Modules are made.
PC1.7 As defined in the Glossary and Definitions, Electricity Storage Modules are treated as
belonging to Storage User’s who are a subset of Generator’s. Generators who own or
operate Electricity Storage Modules would therefore be expected to supply the same data
as required under this PC in respect of Power Stations. In general, and not withstanding the
requirements of the Glossary and Definitions and the wider requirements specified in the
Planning Code, Generators in respect of Synchronous Electricity Storage Modules would
be expected to supply the same data as required from Generators in respect of Synchronous
Power Generating Modules and Generators in respect of Non-Synchronous Electricity
Storage Modules would be expected to supply the same data as required from Generators
in respect of Power Park Modules.
PC.2 OBJECTIVE
PC.2.1 The objectives of the PC are:
(a) to promote The Company/User interaction in respect of any proposed development on
the User System which may impact on the performance of the National Electricity
Transmission System or the direct connection with the National Electricity
Transmission System;
(b) to provide for the supply of information to The Company from Users in order that
planning and development of the National Electricity Transmission System can be
undertaken in accordance with the relevant Licence Standards, to facilitate existing and
proposed connections, and also to provide for the supply of certain information from The
Company to Users in relation to short circuit current contributions and OTSUA; and
(c) to specify the Licence Standards which will be used in the planning and development of
the National Electricity Transmission System; and
(d) to provide for the supply of information required by The Company from Users in respect
of the following to enable The Company to carry out its duties under the Act and the
Transmission Licence:
(i) Mothballed Generating Units, Mothballed Power Generating Modules; and
(ii) capability of gas-fired Synchronous Power Generating Modules or Generating
Units to run using alternative fuels.
The Company will use the information provided under PC.2.1(d) in providing reports to
the Authority and the Secretary of State and, where directed by the Authority or the
Secretary of State to do so, The Company may publish the information. Where it is
known by The Company that such information is intended for wider publication the
information provided under PC.2.1(d) shall be aggregated such that individual data items
should not be identifiable.
(e) in the case of OTSUA:
(i) to specify the minimum technical and design criteria and procedures to be applied
by Users in the planning and development of OTSUA; and thereby
(ii) to ensure that the OTSUA can from the OTSUA Transfer Time be operated as part
of the National Electricity Transmission System; and
(iii) to provide for the arrangements and supply of information and data between The
Company and a User to ensure that the User is able to undertake OTSDUW; and
(iv) to promote The Company/User interaction and co-ordination in respect of any
proposed development on the National Electricity Transmission System or the
OTSUA, which may impact on the OTSUA or (as the case may be) the National
Electricity Transmission System.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

3 of 93
PC.3 SCOPE
PC.3.1 The PC applies to The Company and to Users, which in the PC means:
(a) Generators;
(b) Generators undertaking OTSDUW;
(c) Network Operators;
(d) Non-Embedded Customers;
(e) DC Converter Station owners; and
(f) HVDC System Owners.
The above categories of User will become bound by the PC prior to them generating,
operating, or consuming or importing/exporting, as the case may be, and references to the
various categories (or to the general category) of User should, therefore, be taken as referring
to them in that prospective role as well as to Users actually connected.
PC.3.2 In the case of Embedded Power Stations, Embedded DC Converter Stations and
Embedded HVDC Systems, unless provided otherwise, the following provisions apply with
regard to the provision of data under this PC:
(a) each Generator shall provide the data direct to The Company in respect of (i)
Embedded Large Power Stations, (ii) Embedded Medium Power Stations subject to
a Bilateral Agreement and (iii) Embedded Small Power Stations which form part of a
Cascade Hydro Scheme;
(b) each DC Converter owner or HVDC System Owner shall provide the data direct to The
Company in respect of Embedded DC Converter Stations and Embedded HVDC
Systems subject to a Bilateral Agreement;
(c) each Network Operator shall provide the data to The Company in respect of each
Embedded Medium Power Station not subject to a Bilateral Agreement or Embedded
DC Converter Station not subject to a Bilateral Agreement or Embedded HVDC
System not subject to a Bilateral Agreement connected, or proposed to be connected
within such Network Operator’s System;
(d) although data is not normally required specifically on Embedded Small Power Stations
or on Embedded installations of direct current converters which do not form a DC
Converter Station or HVDC System under this PC, each Network Operator in whose
System they are Embedded should provide the data (contained in the Appendix) to The
Company in respect of Embedded Small Power Stations or Embedded installations of
direct current converters which do not form a DC Converter Station or Embedded
installations of HVDC Systems if:
(i) it falls to be supplied pursuant to the application for a CUSC Contract or in the
Statement of Readiness to be supplied in connection with a Bilateral Agreement
and/or Construction Agreement, by the Network Operator; or
(ii) it is specifically requested by The Company in the circumstances provided for under
this PC.
PC.3.3 Certain data does not normally need to be provided in respect of certain Embedded Power
Stations, Embedded DC Converter Stations or Embedded HVDC Systems, as provided in
PC.A.1.12.
In summary, Network Operators are required to supply the following data in respect of
Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement or Embedded
DC Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement or Embedded HVDC Systems
not subject to a Bilateral Agreement connected, or is proposed to be connected, within such
Network Operator’s System:
PC.A.2.1.1

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

4 of 93
 PC.A.2.2.2
PC.A.2.5.5.2
PC.A.2.5.5.7
PC.A.2.5.6
PC.A.3.1.5
PC.A.3.2.2
PC.A.3.3.1
PC.A.3.4.1
PC.A.3.4.2
PC.A.5.2.2
PC.A.5.3.2
PC.A.5.4
PC.A.5.5.1
PC.A.5.6
For the avoidance of doubt Network Operators are required to supply the above data in
respect of Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and
Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded
HVDC Systems not subject to a Bilateral Agreement which are located Offshore and which
are connected or proposed to be connected within such Network Operator’s System. This
is because Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and
Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded
HVDC Systems not subject to a Bilateral Agreement are treated as Onshore Generators
or Onshore DC Converter Station owners or HVDC System Owners connected to an
Onshore User System Entry Point.
PC.3.4 The Company may provide to the Relevant Transmission Licensees any data which has
been submitted to The Company by any Users pursuant to the following paragraphs of the
PC. For the avoidance of doubt, The Company will not provide to the Relevant
Transmission Licensees, the types of data specified in Appendix D. The Relevant
Transmission Licensees’ use of such data is detailed in the STC.
PC.A.2.2
PC.A.2.5
PC.A.3.1
PC.A.3.2.1
PC.A.3.2.2
PC.A.3.3
PC.A.3.4
PC.A.4
PC.A.5.1
PC.A.5.2
PC.A.5.3.1
PC.A.5.3.2
PC.A.5.4.1
PC.A.5.4.2
PC.A.5.4.3.1

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

5 of 93
 PC.A.5.4.3.2
PC.A.5.4.3.3
PC.A.5.4.3.4
PC.A.7
(and in addition in respect of the data submitted in respect of the OTSUA)
PC.A.2.2
PC.A.2.3
PC.A.2.4
PC.A.2.5
PC.A.3.2.2
PC.A.3.3.1(d)
PC.A.4
PC.A.5.4.3.1
PC.A.5.4.3.2
PC.A.6.2
PC.A.6.3
PC.A.6.4
PC.A.6.5
PC.A.6.6
PC.A.7
PC.3.5 In addition to the provisions of PC.3.4, The Company may provide to the Relevant
Transmission Licensees any data which has been submitted to The Company by any Users
in respect of Relevant Units pursuant to the following paragraphs of the PC.
PC.A.2.3
PC.A.2.4
PC.A.5.5
PC.A.5.7
PC.A.6.2
PC.A.6.3
PC.A.6.4
PC.A.6.5
PC.A.6.6
PC.3.6 In the case of Offshore Embedded Power Stations connected to an Offshore User System
which directly connects to an Offshore Transmission System, any additional data
requirements in respect of such Offshore Embedded Power Stations may be specified in
the relevant Bilateral Agreement with the Network Operator or in any Bilateral Agreement
between The Company and such Offshore Embedded Power Station.
PC.3.7 In the case of a Generator undertaking OTSDUW connecting to an Onshore Network
Operator’s System, any additional requirements in respect of such OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus will be specified in the relevant Bilateral Agreement with the Generator. For the
avoidance of doubt, requirements applicable to Generators undertaking OTSDUW and
connecting to a Network Operator’s User System, shall be consistent with those applicable
requirements of Generators undertaking OTSDUW and connecting to a Transmission
Interface Point.
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
6 of 93
PC.3.8 For the purpose of complying with the requirements of ECC.6.3.17.1.5 and ECC.6.3.17.2.3
The Company may share relevant modelling information to a User based on the following
information submitted by a User to The Company:
PC.A.5.3.2(a), (b), (c), (d) and (g)
PC.A.5.4.2
PC.A.5.4.3
PC.A.9
PC.3.9 A User who recieves information from The Company under PC.3.8 may only use the
information to complete the analysis required by ECC.6.3.17.1 and EEC.6.3.17.2 as applicable
and the Bilateral Agreement. Further conditions on the sharing of models are detailed in
PC.A.9
PC.4 PLANNING PROCEDURES
PC.4.1 Pursuant to Condition C11 of The Company’s Transmission Licence, the means by which
Users and proposed Users of the National Electricity Transmission System are able to
assess opportunities for connecting to, and using, the National Electricity Transmission
System comprise two distinct parts, namely:
(a) a statement, prepared by The Company under its Transmission Licence, showing for
each of the seven succeeding Financial Years, the opportunities available for connecting
to and using the National Electricity Transmission System and indicating those parts
of the National Electricity Transmission System most suited to new connections and
transport of further quantities of electricity (the "Seven Year Statement"); and
(b) an offer, in accordance with its Transmission Licence, by The Company to enter into a
CUSC Contract. A Bilateral Agreement is to be entered into for every Connection Site
(and for certain Embedded Power Stations and Embedded DC Converter Stations
and Embedded HVDC Systems) within the first two of the following categories and the
existing Bilateral Agreement may be required to be varied in the case of the third
category:
(i) existing Connection Sites (and for certain Embedded Power Stations) as at the
Transfer Date;
(ii) new Connection Sites (and for certain Embedded Power Stations, Embedded DC
Converter Stations and Embedded HVDC Systems) with effect from the Transfer
Date;
(iii) a Modification at a Connection Site (or in relation to the connection of certain
Embedded Power Stations, Embedded DC Converter Stations and Embedded
HVDC Systems whether or not the subject of a Bilateral Agreement) (whether such
Connection Site or connection exists on the Transfer Date or is new thereafter)
with effect from the Transfer Date.
In this PC, unless the context otherwise requires, "connection" means any of these 3
categories.
PC.4.2 Introduction to Data
User Data
PC.4.2.1 Under the PC, two types of data to be supplied by Users are called for:
(a) Standard Planning Data; and
(b) Detailed Planning Data,
as more particularly provided in PC.A.1.4.
PC.4.2.2 The PC recognises that these two types of data, namely Standard Planning Data and
Detailed Planning Data, are considered at three different levels:
(a) Preliminary Project Planning Data;
(b) Committed Project Planning Data; and
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
7 of 93
 (c) Connected Planning Data,
as more particularly provided in PC.5
PC.4.2.3 Connected Planning Data is itself divided into:
(a) Forecast Data;
(b) Registered Data; and
(c) Estimated Registered Data,
as more particularly provided in PC.5.5
PC.4.2.4 Clearly, an existing User proposing a new Connection Site (or Embedded Power Station or
Embedded DC Converter Station or Embedded HVDC System) in the circumstances
outlined in PC.4.1) will need to supply data both in an application for a Bilateral Agreement
and under the PC in relation to that proposed new Connection Site (or Embedded Power
Station or Embedded DC Converter Station or Embedded HVDC System in the
circumstances outlined in PC.4.1) and that will be treated as Preliminary Project Planning
Data or Committed Project Planning Data (as the case may be), but the data it supplies
under the PC relating to its existing Connection Sites will be treated as Connected Planning
Data.
Network Data
PC.4.2.5 In addition, there is Network Data supplied by The Company in relation to short circuit current
contributions and in relation to OTSUA.
PC.4.3 Data Provision
PC.4.3.1 Seven Year Statement
To enable the Seven Year Statement to be prepared, each User is required to submit to The
Company (subject to the provisions relating to Embedded Power Stations and Embedded
DC Converter Stations and Embedded HVDC Systems in PC.3.2) both the Standard
Planning Data and the Detailed Planning Data as listed in parts l and 2 of the Appendix.
This data should be submitted in calendar week 24 of each year (although Network Operators
may delay the submission of data (other than that to be submitted pursuant to PC.3.2(c) and
PC.3.2(d)) until calendar week 28) and should cover each of the seven succeeding Financial
Years (and in certain instances, the current year). Where, from the date of one submission to
another, there is no change in the data (or in some of the data) to be submitted, instead of re-
submitting the data, a User may submit a written statement that there has been no change
from the data (or in some of the data) submitted the previous time. In addition, The Company
will also use the Transmission Entry Capacity and Connection Entry Capacity data from
the CUSC Contract, and any data submitted by Network Operators in relation to an
Embedded Medium Power Station not subject to a Bilateral Agreement or Embedded DC
Converter Station not subject to a Bilateral Agreement, or Embedded HVDC System not
subject to a Bilateral Agreement in the preparation of the Seven Year Statement and to that
extent the data will not be treated as confidential.
PC.4.3.2 Network Data
To enable Users to model the National Electricity Transmission System in relation to short
circuit current contributions, The Company is required to submit to Users, the Network Data
as listed in Part 3 of the Appendix. The data will be submitted in week 42 of each year and
will cover that Financial Year.
PC.4.3.3 To enable Users to model the National Electricity Transmission System in relation to
OTSUA, The Company is required to submit to Users the Network Data, as listed in Part 3
of Appendix A and Appendix F. The Company shall provide the Network Data with the offer
of a CUSC Contract in the case of the data in PC F2.1 and otherwise in accordance with the
OTSDUW Development and Data Timetable.
PC.4.4 Offer of Terms for Connection
PC.4.4.1 CUSC Contract – Data Requirements/Offer Timing

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

8 of 93
 The completed application form for a CUSC Contract to be submitted by a User when making
an application for a CUSC Contract will include:
(a) a description of the Plant and/or Apparatus (excluding OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus)
to be connected to the National Electricity Transmission System or of the
Modification relating to the User's Plant and/or Apparatus (and prior to the OTSUA
Transfer Time, any OTSUA) already connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System or, as the case may be, of the proposed new connection or
Modification to the connection within the User System of the User, each of which shall
be termed a "User Development" in the PC;
(b) the relevant Standard Planning Data as listed in Part 1 of the Appendix (except in
respect of any OTSUA); and
(c) the desired Completion Date of the proposed User Development.
(d) the desired Connection Entry Capacity and Transmission Entry Capacity.
The completed application form for a CUSC Contract will be sent to The Company as more
particularly provided in the application form.
PC.4.4.2 Any offer of a CUSC Contract will provide that it must be accepted by the applicant User
within the period stated in the offer, after which the offer automatically lapses. Except as
provided in the CUSC Contract, acceptance of the offer renders the National Electricity
Transmission System works relating to that User Development, reflected in the offer,
committed and binds both parties to the terms of the offer. The User shall then provide the
Detailed Planning Data as listed in Part 2 of the Appendix (and in the case of OTSUA the
Standard Planning Data as listed in Part 1 of Appendix A within the timeline provided in
PC.A.1.4). In respect of DPD I this shall generally be provided within 28 days (or such shorter
period as The Company may determine, or such longer period as The Company may agree,
in any particular case) of acceptance of the offer and in respect of DPD II this shall generally
be provided at least two years (or such longer period as The Company may determine, or
such shorter period as The Company may agree, in any particular case or in the case of
OTSUA such shorter period as The Company shall require) prior to the Completion Date of
the User Development.
PC.4.4.3 Embedded Development Agreement - Data Requirements
The Network Operator shall submit the following data in relation to an Embedded Medium
Power Station not subject to, or proposed to be subject to, a Bilateral Agreement or
Embedded DC Converter Station not subject to, or proposed to be subject to, a Bilateral
Agreement as soon as reasonably practicable after receipt of an application from an
Embedded Person to connect to its System:
(a) details of the proposed new connection or variation (having a similar effect on the
Network Operator’s System as a Modification would have on the National Electricity
Transmission System) to the connection within the Network Operator’s System, each
of which shall be termed an “Embedded Development” in the PC (where a User
Development has an impact on the Network Operator’s System details shall be
supplied in accordance with PC.4.4 and PC.4.5);
(b) the relevant Standard Planning Data as listed in Part 1 of the Appendix;
(c) the proposed completion date (having a similar meaning in relation to the Network
Operator’s System as Completion Date would have in relation to the National
Electricity Transmission System) of the Embedded Development; and
(d) upon the request of The Company, the relevant Detailed Planning Data as listed in Part
2 of the Appendix.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

9 of 93
PC.4.4.4 The Network Operator shall provide the Detailed Planning Data as listed in Part 2 of the
Appendix. In respect of DPD I, this shall generally be provided within 28 days (or such shorter
period as The Company may determine, or such longer period as The Company may agree,
in any particular case) of entry into the Embedded Development Agreement and in respect
to DPD II this shall generally be provided at least two years (or such longer period as The
Company may determine, or such shorter period as The Company may agree, in any
particular case) prior to the Completion Date of the Embedded Development.
PC.4.5 Complex Connections
PC.4.5.1 The magnitude and complexity of any National Electricity Transmission System extension
or reinforcement will vary according to the nature, location and timing of the proposed User
Development which is the subject of the application and it may, in the event, be necessary
for The Company to carry out additional more extensive system studies to evaluate more fully
the impact of the proposed User Development on the National Electricity Transmission
System. Where The Company judges that such additional more detailed studies are
necessary the offer may indicate the areas that require more detailed analysis and before such
additional studies are required, the User shall indicate whether it wishes The Company to
undertake the work necessary to proceed to make a revised offer within the 3 month period
normally allowed or, where relevant, the timescale consented to by the Authority.
PC.4.5.2 To enable The Company to carry out any of the above mentioned necessary detailed system
studies, the User may, at the request of The Company, be required to provide some or all of
the Detailed Planning Data listed in part 2 of the Appendix in advance of the normal timescale
referred in PC.4.4.2 provided that The Company can reasonably demonstrate that it is
relevant and necessary.
PC.4.5.3 To enable The Company to carry out any necessary detailed system studies, the relevant
Network Operator may, at the request of The Company, be required to provide some or all
of the Detailed Planning Data listed in Part 2 of the Appendix in advance of the normal
timescale referred in PC.4.4.4 provided that The Company can reasonably demonstrate that
it is relevant and necessary.

PC.5 PLANNING DATA

PC.5.1 As far as the PC is concerned, there are three relevant levels of data in relation to Users.
These levels, which relate to levels of confidentiality, commitment and validation, are
described in the following paragraphs.
Preliminary Project Planning Data
PC.5.2 At the time the User applies for a CUSC Contract but before an offer is made and accepted
by the applicant User, the data relating to the proposed User Development will be considered
as Preliminary Project Planning Data. Data relating to an Embedded Development
provided by a Network Operator in accordance with PC.4.4.3, and PC.4.4.4 if requested, will
be considered as Preliminary Project Planning Data. All such data will be treated as
confidential within the scope of the provisions relating to confidentiality in the CUSC.
PC.5.3 Preliminary Project Planning Data will normally only contain the Standard Planning Data
unless the Detailed Planning Data is required in advance of the normal timescale to enable
The Company to carry out additional detailed system studies as described in PC.4.5.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

10 of 93
 Committed Project Planning Data
PC.5.4 Once the offer for a CUSC Contract is accepted, the data relating to the User Development
already submitted as Preliminary Project Planning Data, and subsequent data required by
The Company under this PC, will become Committed Project Planning Data. Once an
Embedded Person has entered into an Embedded Development Agreement, as notified to
The Company by the Network Operator, the data relating to the Embedded Development
already submitted as Preliminary Project Planning Data, and subsequent data required by
The Company under the PC, will become Committed Project Planning Data. Such data,
together with Connection Entry Capacity and Transmission Entry Capacity data from the
CUSC Contract and other data held by The Company relating to the National Electricity
Transmission System will form the background against which new applications by any User
will be considered and against which planning of the National Electricity Transmission
System will be undertaken. Accordingly, Committed Project Planning Data, Connection
Entry Capacity and Transmission Entry Capacity data will not be treated as confidential to
the extent that The Company:
(a) is obliged to use it in the preparation of the Seven Year Statement and in any further
information given pursuant to the Seven Year Statement;
(b) is obliged to use it when considering and/or advising on applications (or possible
applications) of other Users (including making use of it by giving data from it, both orally
and in writing, to other Users making an application (or considering or discussing a
possible application) which is, in The Company's view, relevant to that other application
or possible application);
(c) is obliged to use it for operational planning purposes;
(d) is obliged under the terms of an Interconnection Agreement to pass it on as part of
system information on the Total System;
(e) is obliged to disclose it under the STC;
(f) is obliged to use and disclose it in the preparation of the Offshore Development
Information Statement;
(g) is obliged to use it in order to carry out its EMR Functions or is obliged to disclose it
under an EMR Document.

To reflect different types of data, Preliminary Project Planning Data and Committed Project
Planning Data are themselves divided into:
(a) those items of Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning Data which will always
be forecast, known as Forecast Data; and
(b) those items of Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning Data which relate to
Plant and/or Apparatus which upon connection will become Registered Data, but which
prior to connection, for the seven succeeding Financial Years, will be an estimate of what
is expected, known as Estimated Registered Data.
Connected Planning Data
PC.5.5 The PC requires that, at the time that a Statement of Readiness is submitted under the
Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement, any estimated values assumed for
planning purposes are confirmed or, where practical, replaced by validated actual values and
by updated estimates for the future and by updated forecasts for forecast data items such as
Demand. In the case of an Embedded Development the relevant Network Operator will
update any estimated values assumed for planning purposes with validated actual values as
soon as reasonably practicable after energisation. This data is then termed Connected
Planning Data.
To reflect the three types of data referred to above, Connected Planning Data is itself divided
into:

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

11 of 93
 (a) those items of Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning Data which will always
be forecast data, known as Forecast Data; and
(b) those items of Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning Data which upon
connection become fixed (subject to any subsequent changes), known as Registered
Data; and
(c) those items of Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning Data which for the
purposes of the Plant and/or Apparatus concerned as at the date of submission are
Registered Data but which for the seven succeeding Financial Years will be an estimate
of what is expected, known as Estimated Registered Data,
as more particularly provided in the Appendix.
PC.5.6 Connected Planning Data, together with Connection Entry Capacity and Transmission
Entry Capacity data from the CUSC Contract, and other data held by The Company relating
to the National Electricity Transmission System, will form the background against which
new applications by any User will be considered and against which planning of the National
Electricity Transmission System will be undertaken. Accordingly, Connected Planning
Data, Connection Entry Capacity and Transmission Entry Capacity data will not be treated
as confidential to the extent that The Company:
(a) is obliged to use it in the preparation of the Seven Year Statement and in any further
information given pursuant to the Seven Year Statement;
(b) is obliged to use it when considering and/or advising on applications (or possible
applications) of other Users (including making use of it by giving data from it, both orally
and in writing, to other Users making an application (or considering or discussing a
possible application) which is, in The Company's view, relevant to that other application
or possible application);
(c) is obliged to use it for operational planning purposes;
(d) is obliged under the terms of an Interconnection Agreement to pass it on as part of
system information on the Total System.
(e) is obliged to disclose it under the STC;
(f) is obliged to use it in order to carry out its EMR Functions or is obliged to disclose it
under an EMR Document.

PC.5.7 Committed Project Planning Data and Connected Planning Data will each contain both
Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning Data.
PC.6 PLANNING STANDARDS
PC.6.1 The Company shall apply the Licence Standards relevant to it in the planning and
development of the National Electricity Transmission System. The Company shall procure
that each Relevant Transmission Licensee shall apply the Licence Standards relevant to
planning and development, in the planning and development of the Transmission System of
each Relevant Transmission Licensee and that a User shall apply the Licence Standards
relevant to planning and development, in the planning and development of the OTSUA.
PC.6.2 In relation to Scotland, Appendix C lists the technical and design criteria applied in the planning
and development of each Relevant Transmission Licensee's Transmission System. The
criteria are subject to review in accordance with each Relevant Transmission Licensee’s
Transmission Licence conditions. Copies of these documents are available from The
Company on request. The Company will charge an amount sufficient to recover its
reasonable costs incurred in providing this service.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

12 of 93
PC.6.3 In relation to Offshore, Appendix E lists the technical and design criteria applied in the
planning and development of each Offshore Transmission System. The criteria are subject
to review in accordance with each Offshore Transmission Licensee’s Transmission
Licence conditions. Copies of these documents are available from The Company on request.
The Company will charge an amount sufficient to recover its reasonable costs incurred in
providing this service.
PC.6.4 In planning and developing the OTSUA, the User shall comply with (and shall ensure that (as
at the OTSUA Transfer Time) the OTSUA comply with):
(a) the Licence Standards; and
(b) the technical and design criteria in Appendix E.
PC.6.5 In addition the User shall, in the planning and development of the OTSUA, to the extent it is
reasonable and practicable to do so, take into account the reasonable requests of The
Company (in the context of its obligation to develop an efficient, co-ordinated and economical
system) relating to the planning and development of the National Electricity Transmission
System.
PC.6.6 In planning and developing the OTSUA the User shall take into account the Network Data
provided to it by The Company under Part 3 of Appendix A and Appendix F, and act on the
basis that the Plant and Apparatus of other Users complies with:
(a) the minimum technical design and operational criteria and performance requirements set
out in either CC.6.1, CC.6.2, CC.6.3 and CC.6.4 or ECC.6.1, ECC.6.2, ECC.6.3 and
ECC.6.4 ; or
(b) such other criteria or requirements as The Company may from time to time notify the
User are applicable to specified Plant and Apparatus pursuant to PC.6.7.
PC.6.7 Where the OTSUA are likely to be materially affected by the design or operation of another
User's Plant and Apparatus and The Company:
(a) becomes aware that such other User has or is likely to apply for a derogation under the
Grid Code;
(b) is itself applying for a derogation under the Grid Code in relation to the Connection Site
on which such other User's Plant and Apparatus is located or to which it otherwise
relates; or
(c) is otherwise notified by such other User that specified Plant or Apparatus is normally
capable of operating at levels better than those set out in CC.6.1, CC.6.2, CC.6.3 and
CC.6.4 or ECC.6.1, ECC.6.2, ECC.6.3 and ECC.6.4,
The Company shall notify the User.
PC.7 PLANNING LIAISON
PC.7.1 This PC.7 applies to The Company and Users, which in PC.7 means
(a) Network Operators
(b) Non-Embedded Customers
PC.7.2 As described in PC.2.1 (b) an objective of the PC is to provide for the supply of information to
The Company by Users in order that planning and development of the National Electricity
Transmission System can be undertaken in accordance with the relevant Licence
Standards.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

13 of 93
PC.7.3 Grid Code amendment B/07 (“Amendment B/07”) implemented changes to the Grid Code
which included amendments to the datasets provided by both The Company and Users to
inform the planning and development of the National Electricity Transmission System. The
Authority has determined that these changes are to have a phased implementation.
Consequently the provisions of Appendix A to the PC include specific years (ranging from
2009 to 2011) with effect from which certain of the specific additional obligations brought about
by Amendment B/07 on The Company and Users are to take effect. Where specific
provisions of paragraphs PC.A.4.1.4, PC.A.4.2.2 and PC.A.4.3.1 make reference to a year,
then the obligation on The Company and the Users shall be required to be met by the relevant
calendar week (as specified within such provision) in such year.
In addition to the phased implementation of aspects of Amendment B/07, Users must discuss
and agree with The Company by no later than 31 March 2009 a more detailed implementation
programme to facilitate the implementation of Grid Code amendment B/07.
It shall also be noted by The Company and Users that the dates set out in PC.A.4 are
intended to be minimum requirements and are not intended to restrict a User and The
Company from the earlier fulfilment of the new requirements prior to the specified years.
Where The Company and a User wish to follow the new requirements from earlier dates than
those specified, this will be set out in the more detailed implementation programme agreed
between The Company and the User.
The following provisions of PC.7 shall only apply with effect from 1 January 2011.
PC.7.4 Following the submission of data by a User in or after week 24 of each year The Company
will provide information to Users by calendar week 6 of the following year regarding the results
of any relevant assessment that has been made by The Company based upon such data
submissions to verify whether Connection Points are compliant with the relevant Licence
Standards.
PC.7.5 Where the result of any assessment identifies possible future non-compliance with the relevant
Licence Standards, The Company shall notify the relevant User(s) of this fact as soon as
reasonably practicable and shall agree with Users any opportunity to resubmit data to allow
for a reassessment in accordance with PC.7.6.
PC.7.6 Following any notification by The Company to a User pursuant to PC.7.5 and following any
further discussions held between the User and The Company:
(i) The Company and the User may agree revisions to the Access Periods for relevant
Transmission Interface Circuits, such revisions shall not however permit an Access
Period to be less than 4 continuous weeks in duration or to occur other than between
calendar weeks 10 and 43 (inclusive); and/or,
(ii) The User shall as soon as reasonably practicable
(a) submit further relevant data to The Company that is to The Company’s reasonable
satisfaction; and/or,
(b) modify data previously submitted pursuant to this PC, such modified data to be to
The Company’s reasonable satisfaction; and/or
(c) notify The Company that it is the intention of the User to leave the data as originally
submitted to The Company to stand as its submission.
PC.7.7 Where an Access Period is amended pursuant to PC.7.6 (i) The Company shall notify The
Authority that it has been necessary to do so.
PC.7.8 When it is agreed that any resubmission of data is unlikely to confirm future compliance with
the relevant Licence Standards the Modification process in the CUSC may apply.

PC.7.9 A User may at any time, in writing, request further specified National Electricity
Transmission System network data in order to provide The Company with viable User
network data (as required under this PC). Upon receipt of such request, The Company shall
consider, and where appropriate provide such National Electricity Transmission System
network data to the User as soon as reasonably practicable following the request.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

14 of 93
PC.8 OTSDUW PLANNING LIAISON
PC.8.1 This PC.8 applies to The Company and Users, which in PC.8 means Users undertaking
OTSDUW
PC.8.2 As described in PC.2.1 (e) an objective of the PC is to provide for the supply of information
between The Company and a User undertaking OTSDUW in order that planning and
development of the National Electricity Transmission System can be co-ordinated.
PC.8.3 Where the OTSUA also require works to be undertaken by any Relevant Transmission
Licensee on its Transmission System The Company and the User shall throughout the
construction and commissioning of such works:
(a) co-operate and assist each other in the development of co-ordinated construction
programmes or any other planning or, in the case of The Company, analysis it
undertakes in respect of the works; and
(b) provide to each other all information relating to, in the case of the User its own works
and, in the case of The Company, the works on the Transmission Systems reasonably
necessary to assist each other in the performance of that other's part of the works, and
shall use all reasonable endeavours to co-ordinate and integrate their respective part of
the works; and
the User shall plan and develop the OTSUA, taking into account to the extent that it is
reasonable and practicable to do so the reasonable requests of The Company relating to the
planning and development of the National Electricity Transmission System.
PC.8.4 Where The Company becomes aware that changes made to the investment plans of any
Relevant Transmission Licensee may have a material effect on the OTSUA, The Company
shall notify the User and provide the User with the necessary information about the relevant
Transmission Systems sufficient for the User to assess the impact on the OTSUA.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

15 of 93
 APPENDIX A - PLANNING DATA REQUIREMENTS

PC.A.1 INTRODUCTION
PC.A.1.1 The Appendix specifies data requirements to be submitted to The Company by Users, and
in certain circumstances to Users by The Company.
PC.A.1.2 Submissions by Users
(a) Planning data submissions by Users shall be:
(i) with respect to each of the seven succeeding Financial Years (other than in the
case of Registered Data which will reflect the current position and data relating to
Demand forecasts which relates also to the current year);
(ii) provided by Users in connection with a CUSC Contract (PC.4.1, PC.4.4 and PC.4.5
refer);
(iii) provided by Users on a routine annual basis in calendar week 24 of each year to
maintain an up-to-date data bank (although Network Operators may delay the
submission of data (other than that to be submitted pursuant to PC.3.2(c) and
PC.3.2(d)) until calendar week 28). In addition the structural data in DRC Schedule
5 Tables 5(a), 5(b), 5(d), 5(e) , 5(f) and DRC Schedule 13 (Lumped system
susceptance (PC.A.2.3) only) provided by Network Operators by calendar week 28
shall be updated by calendar week 50 of each year (again which may be delayed as
above until week 2 of the following calendar year). Where from the date of one
annual (or in the case of Schedule 5 or Schedule 13 the calendar week 50)
submission to another there is no change in the data (or in some of the data) to be
submitted, instead of re-submitting the data, a User may submit a written statement
that there has been no change from the data (or some of the data) submitted the
previous time; and
(iv) provided by Network Operators in connection with Embedded Development
(PC.4.4 refers).
(b) Where there is any change (or anticipated change) in Committed Project Planning Data
or a significant change in Connected Planning Data in the category of Forecast Data
or any change (or anticipated change) in Connected Planning Data in the categories of
Registered Data or Estimated Registered Data supplied to The Company under the
PC, notwithstanding that the change may subsequently be notified to The Company
under the PC as part of the routine annual update of data (or that the change may be a
Modification under the CUSC), the User shall, subject to PC.A.3.2.3 and PC.A.3.2.4,
notify The Company in writing without delay.
(c) The notification of the change will be in the form required under this PC in relation to the
supply of that data and will also contain the following information:
(i) the time and date at which the change became, or is expected to become, effective;
(ii) if the change is only temporary, an estimate of the time and date at which the data
will revert to the previous registered form.
(d) The routine annual update of data, referred to in (a)(iii) above, need not be submitted in
respect of Small Power Stations or Embedded installations of direct current converters
which do not form a DC Converter Station or HVDC System (except as provided in
PC.3.2.(c)), or unless specifically requested by The Company, or unless otherwise
specifically provided.
PC.A.1.3 Submissions by The Company
Network Data release by The Company shall be:
(a) with respect to the current Financial Year;

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

16 of 93
 (b) provided by The Company on a routine annual basis in calendar week 42 of each year.
Where from the date of one annual submission to another there is no change in the data
(or in some of the data) to be released, instead of repeating the data, The Company may
release a written statement that there has been no change from the data (or some of the
data) released the previous time.
The three parts of the Appendix
PC.A.1.4 The data requirements listed in this Appendix are subdivided into the following four parts:
(a) Standard Planning Data
This data (as listed in Part 1 of the Appendix) is first to be provided by a User at the time
of an application for a CUSC Contract or in accordance with PC.4.4.3. It comprises data
which is expected normally to be sufficient for The Company to investigate the impact
on the National Electricity Transmission System of any User Development or
Embedded Development associated with an application by the User for a CUSC
Contract. Users should note that the term Standard Planning Data also includes the
information referred to in PC.4.4.1.(a) and PC.4.4.3.(a). In the case of OTSUA, this data
is first to be provided by a User in accordance with the time line in Appendix F.
(b) Detailed Planning Data
This data (as listed in Part 2 of the Appendix) includes both DPD I and DPD II and is to
be provided in accordance with PC.4.4.2 and PC.4.4.4. It comprises additional, more
detailed, data not normally expected to be required by The Company to investigate the
impact on the National Electricity Transmission System of any User Development
associated with an application by the User for a CUSC Contract or Embedded
Development Agreement. Users and Network Operators in respect of Embedded
Developments should note that the term Detailed Planning Data also includes
Operation Diagrams and Site Common Drawings produced in accordance with the CC
and ECC.
The User may, however, be required by The Company to provide the Detailed Planning
Data in advance of the normal timescale before The Company can make an offer for a
CUSC Contract, as explained in PC.4.5.
(c) Network Data
The data requirements for The Company in this Appendix are in Part 3.
(d) Offshore Transmission System (OTSDUW) Data
Generators who are undertaking OTSDUW are required to submit data in accordance
with Appendix A as summarised in Schedule 18 of the Data Registration Code.

Forecast Data, Registered Data and Estimated Registered Data

PC.A.1.5 As explained in PC.5.4 and PC.5.5, Planning Data is divided into:
(i) those items of Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning Data known as Forecast
Data; and
(ii) those items of Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning Data known as
Registered Data; and
(iii) those items of Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning Data known as
Estimated Registered Data.
PC.A.1.6 The following paragraphs in this Appendix relate to Forecast Data:
3.2.2(b), (h), (i) and (j)
4.2.1
4.3.1
4.3.2

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

17 of 93
 4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.5
4.7.1
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.6.1
PC.A.1.7 The following paragraphs in this Appendix relate to Registered Data and Estimated
Registered Data:
2.2.1
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.3.1
2.4.1
2.4.2
3.2.2(a), (c), (d), (e), (f), (g), (i)(part) and (j)
3.4.1
3.4.2
4.2.3
4.5(a)(i), (a)(iii), (b)(i) and (b)(iii)
4.6
5.3.2
5.4
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.5
5.6.3
6.2
6.3
PC.A.1.8 The data supplied under PC.A.3.3.1, although in the nature of Registered Data, is only
supplied either upon application for a CUSC Contract, or in accordance with PC.4.4.3, and
therefore does not fall to be Registered Data, but is Estimated Registered Data.
PC.A.1.9 Forecast Data must contain the User's best forecast of the data being forecast, acting as a
reasonable and prudent User in all the circumstances.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

18 of 93
PC.A.1.10 Registered Data must contain validated actual values, parameters or other information (as
the case may be) which replace the estimated values, parameters or other information (as the
case may be) which were given in relation to those data items when they were Preliminary
Project Planning Data and Committed Project Planning Data, or in the case of changes,
which replace earlier actual values, parameters or other information (as the case may be).
Until amended pursuant to the Grid Code, these actual values, parameters or other information
(as the case may be) will be the basis upon which the National Electricity Transmission
System is planned, designed, built and operated in accordance with, amongst other things,
the Transmission Licences, the STC and the Grid Code, and on which The Company
therefore relies. In following the processes set out in the BC, The Company will use the data
which has been supplied to it under the BC and the data supplied under OC2 in relation to
Gensets, but the provision of such data will not alter the data supplied by Users under the
PC, which may only be amended as provided in the PC.
PC.A.1.11 Estimated Registered Data must contain the User's best estimate of the values, parameters
or other information (as the case may be), acting as a reasonable and prudent User in all the
circumstances.
PC.A.1.12 Certain data does not need to be supplied in relation to Embedded Power Stations or
Embedded DC Converter Stations or Embedded HVDC Systems where these are
connected at a voltage level below the voltage level directly connected to the National
Electricity Transmission System except in connection with a CUSC Contract, or unless
specifically requested by The Company.
PC.A.1.13 In the case of OTSUA, Schedule 18 of the Data Registration Code shall be construed in such
a manner as to achieve the intent of such provisions by reference to the OTSUA and the
Interface Point and all Connection Points.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

19 of 93
 PART 1 - STANDARD PLANNING DATA

PC.A.2 USER'S SYSTEM (AND OTSUA) DATA

PC.A.2.1 Introduction
PC.A.2.1.1 Each User, whether connected directly via an existing Connection Point to the National
Electricity Transmission System, or seeking such a direct connection, or providing terms
for connection of an Offshore Transmission System to its User System to The Company,
shall provide The Company with data on its User System (and any OTSUA) which relates to
the Connection Site (and in the case of OTSUA, the Interface Point) and/or which may have
a system effect on the performance of the National Electricity Transmission System. Such
data, current and forecast, is specified in PC.A.2.2 to PC.A.2.5. In addition each Generator in
respect of its Embedded Large Power Stations and its Embedded Medium Power Stations
subject to a Bilateral Agreement and each Network Operator in respect of Embedded
Medium Power Stations within its System not subject to a Bilateral Agreement connected
to the Subtransmission System, shall provide The Company with fault infeed data as
specified in PC.A.2.5.5 and each DC Converter owner with Embedded DC Converter
Stations subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded HVDC System Owner subject to
a Bilateral Agreement, or Network Operator in the case of Embedded DC Converter
Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement or Embedded HVDC Systems not subject to
a Bilateral Agreement, connected to the Subtransmission System shall provide The
Company with fault infeed data as specified in PC.A.2.5.6.
PC.A.2.1.2 Each User must reflect the system effect at the Connection Site(s) of any third party
Embedded within its User System whether existing or proposed.
PC.A.2.1.3 Although not itemised here, each User with an existing or proposed Embedded Small Power
Station, Embedded Medium Power Station, Embedded DC Converter Station or HVDC
System with a Registered Capacity of less than 100MW or an Embedded installation of
direct current converters which does not form a DC Converter Station or HVDC System in
its User System may, at The Company's reasonable discretion, be required to provide
additional details relating to the User's System between the Connection Site and the existing
or proposed Embedded Small Power Station, Embedded Medium Power Station,
Embedded DC Converter Station, Embedded HVDC System or Embedded installation of
direct current converters which does not form a DC Converter Station or Embedded
installation which does not form an HVDC System.
PC.A.2.1.4 At The Company’s reasonable request, additional data on the User’s System (or OTSUA)
will need to be supplied. Some of the possible reasons for such a request, and the data
required, are given in PC.A.6.2, PC.A.6.4, PC.A.6.5 and PC.A.6.6.
PC.A.2.2 User's System (and OTSUA) Layout
PC.A.2.2.1 Each User shall provide a Single Line Diagram, depicting both its existing and proposed
arrangement(s) of load current carrying Apparatus relating to both existing and proposed
Connection Points (including in the case of OTSUA, Interface Points).
PC.A.2.2.2 The Single Line Diagram (three examples are shown in Appendix B) must include all parts
of the User System operating at Supergrid Voltage throughout Great Britain and, in
Scotland and Offshore, also all parts of the User System operating at 132kV or greater, and
those parts of its Subtransmission System at any Transmission Site. In the case of
OTSDUW, the Single Line Diagram must also include the OTSUA. In addition, the Single
Line Diagram must include all parts of the User’s Subtransmission System (and any
OTSUA) throughout Great Britain operating at a voltage greater than 50kV, and, in Scotland
and Offshore, also all parts of the User’s Subtransmission System (and any OTSUA)
operating at a voltage greater than 30kV, which, under either intact network or Planned
Outage conditions:
(a) normally interconnects separate Connection Points, or busbars at a Connection Point
which are normally run in separate sections; or

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

20 of 93
 (b) connects Embedded Large Power Stations, or Embedded Medium Power Stations,
or Embedded DC Converter Stations, or Embedded HVDC Systems or Offshore
Transmission Systems connected to the User’s Subtransmission System, to a
Connection Point or Interface Point.
At the User’s discretion, the Single Line Diagram can also contain additional details of
the User’s Subtransmission System (and any OTSUA) not already included above,
and also details of the transformers connecting the User’s Subtransmission System to
a lower voltage. With The Company’s agreement, the Single Line Diagram can also
contain information about the User’s System (and any OTSUA) at a voltage below the
voltage of the Subtransmission System.
The Single Line Diagram for a Power Park Module (including DC Connected Power
Park Modules) must include all parts of the System connecting generating equipment to
the Grid Entry Point (or User System Entry Point if Embedded). As an alternative, the
User may choose to submit a Single Line Diagram with the equipment between the
equivalent Power Park Unit and the Common Collection Busbar reduced to an
electrically equivalent network. The format for a Single Line Diagram for a Power Park
Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) electrically equivalent system
is shown in Appendix B.
The Single Line Diagram must include the points at which Demand data (provided under
PC.A.4.3.4 and PC.A.4.3.5, or in the case of Generators, PC.A.5.) and fault infeed data
(provided under PC.A.2.5) are supplied.
PC.A.2.2.3 The above-mentioned Single Line Diagram shall include:
(a) electrical circuitry (i.e. overhead lines, identifying which circuits are on the same towers,
underground cables, power transformers, reactive compensation equipment and similar
equipment); and
(b) substation names (in full or abbreviated form) with operating voltages.
In addition, for all load current carrying Apparatus operating at Supergrid Voltage throughout
Great Britain and, in Scotland and Offshore, also at 132kV or greater, (and any OTSUA) the
Single Line Diagram shall include:
(a) circuit breakers
(b) phasing arrangements.
PC.A.2.2.3.1 For the avoidance of doubt, the Single Line Diagram to be supplied is in addition to the
Operation Diagram supplied pursuant to CC.7.4 or ECC.7.4.
PC.A.2.2.4 For each circuit shown on the Single Line Diagram provided under PC.A.2.2.1, each User
shall provide the following details relating to that part of its User System and OTSUA:
Circuit Parameters:
Rated voltage (kV)
Operating voltage (kV)
Positive phase sequence reactance
Positive phase sequence resistance
Positive phase sequence susceptance
Zero phase sequence reactance (both self and mutual)
Zero phase sequence resistance (both self and mutual)
Zero phase sequence susceptance (both self and mutual)

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

21 of 93
 In the case of a Single Line Diagram for a Power Park Module (including DC
Connected Power Park Modules) electrically equivalent system the data should be on
a 100MVA base. Depending on the equivalent system supplied an equivalent tap changer
range may need to be supplied. Similarly mutual values, rated voltage and operating
voltage may be inappropriate. Additionally in the case of OTSUA, seasonal maximum
continuous ratings and circuit lengths are to be provided in addition to the data required
under PC.A.2.2.4.

PC.A.2.2.5 For each transformer shown on the Single Line Diagram provided under PC.A.2.2.1, each
User (including those undertaking OTSDUW) shall provide the following details:
Rated MVA
Voltage Ratio
Winding arrangement
Positive sequence reactance (max, min and nominal tap)
Positive sequence resistance (max, min and nominal tap)
Zero sequence reactance
PC.A.2.2.5.1. In addition, for all interconnecting transformers between the User's Supergrid Voltage
System and the User's Subtransmission System throughout Great Britain and, in Scotland
and Offshore, also for all interconnecting transformers operating at 132kV or greater between
the User’s System and the User’s Subtransmission System (and any OTSUA) the User
shall supply the following information:-
Tap changer range
Tap change step size
Tap changer type: on load or off circuit
Earthing method: Direct, resistance or reactance
Impedance (if not directly earthed )
PC.A.2.2.6 Each User shall supply the following information about the User’s equipment installed at a
Transmission Site (or in the case of OTSUA, all OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus):-
(a) Switchgear. For all circuit breakers:-
Rated voltage (kV)
Operating voltage (kV)
Rated 3-phase rms short-circuit breaking current, (kA)
Rated 1-phase rms short-circuit breaking current, (kA)
Rated 3-phase peak short-circuit making current, (kA)
Rated 1-phase peak short-circuit making current, (kA)
Rated rms continuous current (A)
DC time constant applied at testing of asymmetrical breaking abilities (secs)
In the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus operating times for circuit breaker,
Protection, trip relay and total operating time should be provided.
(b) Substation Infrastructure. For the substation infrastructure (including, but not limited to,
switch disconnectors, disconnectors, current transformers, line traps, busbars, through
bushings, etc):-
Rated 3-phase rms short-circuit withstand current (kA)
Rated 1-phase rms short-circuit withstand current (kA).
Rated 3-phase short-circuit peak withstand current (kA)

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

22 of 93
 Rated 1- phase short-circuit peak withstand current (kA)
Rated duration of short circuit withstand (secs)
Rated rms continuous current (A)
A single value for the entire substation may be supplied, provided it represents the most
restrictive item of current carrying apparatus.
PC.A.2.2.7 In the case of OTSUA the following should also be provided
(a) Automatic switching scheme schedules including diagrams and an explanation of how
the System will operate and what plant will be affected by the schemes Operation.
(b) Intertripping schemes both Generation and Demand. In each case a diagram of the
scheme and an explanation of how the System will operate and what Plant will be
affected by the schemes Operation.
PC.A.2.3 Lumped System Susceptance
PC.A.2.3.1 For all parts of the User’s Subtransmission System (and any OTSUA) which are not
included in the Single Line Diagram provided under PC.A.2.2.1, each User shall provide the
equivalent lumped shunt susceptance at nominal Frequency.
PC.A.2.3.1.1 This should include shunt reactors connected to cables which are not normally in or out of
service independent of the cable (ie. they are regarded as part of the cable).
PC.A.2.3.1.2 This should not include:
(a) independently switched reactive compensation equipment connected to the User's
System specified under PC.A.2.4, or;
(b) any susceptance of the User's System inherent in the Demand (Reactive Power) data
specified under PC.A.4.3.1.
PC.A.2.4 Reactive Compensation Equipment
PC.A.2.4.1 For all independently switched reactive compensation equipment (including any OTSUA),
including that shown on the Single Line Diagram, not operated by The Company and
connected to the User's System at 132kV and above in England and Wales and 33kV and
above in Scotland and Offshore (including any OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus operating at
High Voltage), other than Power Factor correction equipment associated directly with
Customers' Plant and Apparatus, the following information is required:
(a) type of equipment (eg. fixed or variable);
(b) capacitive and/or inductive rating or its operating range in MVAr;
(c) details of any automatic control logic to enable operating characteristics to be determined;
(d) the point of connection to the User's System (including OTSUA) in terms of electrical
location and System voltage.
(e) In the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus the User should also provide:-
(i) Connection node, voltage, rating, power loss, tap range and connection
arrangement.
(ii) A mathematical representation in block diagram format to model the control of any
dynamic compensation plant. The model should be suitable for RMS dynamic
stability type studies where each time constant should be no less than 10ms.
(iii) For Static Var Compensation equipment the User should provide:
HV Node
LV Node
Control Node
Nominal Voltage (kV)
Target Voltage (kV)
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
23 of 93
 Maximum MVAr at HV
Minimum MVAr at HV
Slope %
Voltage dependant Q Limit
Normal Running Mode
Positive and zero phase sequence resistance and reactance
Transformer winding type
Connection arrangements
PC.A.2.4.2 DC Converter Station owners, HVDC System Owners (and a User where the OTSUA
includes an OTSDUW DC Converter) are also required to provide information about the
reactive compensation and harmonic filtering equipment required to ensure that their Plant
and Apparatus (and the OTSUA) complies with the criteria set out in CC.6.1.5 or ECC.6.1.5
(as applicable).
PC.A.2.5 Short Circuit Contribution to National Electricity Transmission System
PC.A.2.5.1 General
(a) To allow The Company to calculate fault currents, each User is required to provide data,
calculated in accordance with Good Industry Practice, as set out in the following
paragraphs of PC.A.2.5.
(b) The data should be provided for the User's System with all Generating Units (including
Synchronous Generating Units), Power Park Units, HVDC Systems and DC
Converters Synchronised to that User's System (and any OTSUA where appropriate).
The User must ensure that the pre-fault network conditions reflect a credible System
operating arrangement.
(c) The list of data items required, in whole or part, under the following provisions, is set out
in PC.A.2.5.6. Each of the relevant following provisions identifies which data items in the
list are required for the situation with which that provision deals.
The fault currents in sub-paragraphs (a) and (b) of the data list in PC.A.2.5.6 should be
based on an a.c. load flow that takes into account any pre-fault current flow across the
Point of Connection (and in the case of OTSUA, Interface Points and Connection
Points) being considered.
Measurements made under appropriate System conditions may be used by the User to
obtain the relevant data.
(d) The Company may at any time, in writing, specifically request for data to be provided for
an alternative System condition, for example minimum plant, and the User will, insofar
as such request is reasonable, provide the information as soon as reasonably practicable
following the request.
PC.A.2.5.2 Network Operators and Non-Embedded Customers are required to submit data in
accordance with PC.A.2.5.4. Generators, DC Converter Station owners, HVDC System
Owners and Network Operators, in respect of Embedded Medium Power Stations not
subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a
Bilateral Agreement and Embedded HVDC Systems within such Network Operator’s
Systems are required to submit data in accordance with PC.A.2.5.5.
PC.A.2.5.3 Where prospective short-circuit currents on Transmission equipment are close to the
equipment rating, and in The Company’s reasonable opinion more accurate calculations of
the prospective short circuit currents are required, then The Company will request additional
data as outlined in PC.A.6.6 below.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

24 of 93
PC.A.2.5.4 Data from Network Operators and Non-Embedded Customers
PC.A.2.5.4.1 Data is required to be provided at each node on the Single Line Diagram provided under
PC.A.2.2.1 at which motor loads and/or Embedded Small Power Stations and/or Embedded
Medium Power Stations and/or Embedded installations of direct current converters which
do not form a DC Converter Station or HVDC System are connected, assuming a fault at
that location, as follows:-

The data items listed under the following parts of PC.A.2.5.6:-

(a) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), (v) and (vi);
and the data items shall be provided in accordance with the detailed provisions of
PC.A.2.5.6(c) - (f).
PC.A.2.5.4.2 Network Operators shall provide the following data items in respect of each Interface Point
within their User System:
(a) Maximum Export Capacity;
(b) Maximum Import Capacity; and,
(c) Interface Point Target Voltage/Power Factor
Network Operators shall alongside these parameters include details of any manual or
automatic post fault actions to be taken by the owner / operator of the Offshore Transmission
System connected to such Interface Point that are required by the Network Operator.
PC.A.2.5.5 Data from Generators (including Generators undertaking OTSDUW and those responsible
for DC Connected Power Park Modules), DC Converter Station owners, HVDC System
Owners and from Network Operators in respect of Embedded Medium Power Stations not
subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a
Bilateral Agreement and Embedded HVDC Systems within such Network Operator’s
Systems.
PC.A.2.5.5.1 For each Generating Unit (including Synchronous Generating Units forming part of a
Synchronous Power Generating Module) with one or more associated Unit Transformers,
the Generator, or the Network Operator in respect of Embedded Medium Power Stations
not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to
a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded HVDC Systems within such Network Operator’s
System is required to provide values for the contribution of the Power Station Auxiliaries
(including Auxiliary Energy Supplies) to the fault current flowing through the Unit
Transformer(s).
The data items listed under the following parts of PC.A.2.5.6(a) should be provided:-
(i), (ii) and (v);
(iii) if the associated Generating Unit (including Synchronous Generating Units
forming part of a Synchronous Power Generating Module) step-up transformer
can supply zero phase sequence current from the Generating Unit side to the
National Electricity Transmission System;
(iv) if the value is not 1.0 p.u;
and the data items shall be provided in accordance with the detailed provisions of
PC.A.2.5.6(c) - (f), and with the following parts of this PC.A.2.5.5.
PC.A.2.5.5.2 Auxiliary motor short circuit current contribution and any Auxiliary Gas Turbine Unit
contribution through the Unit Transformers must be represented as a combined short circuit
current contribution at the Generating Unit's (including Synchronous Generating Units
forming part of a Synchronous Power Generating Module) terminals, assuming a fault at
that location.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

25 of 93
PC.A.2.5.5.3 If the Power Station or HVDC System or DC Converter Station (or OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus which provides a fault infeed) has separate Station Transformers, data should
be provided for the fault current contribution from each transformer at its high voltage
terminals, assuming a fault at that location, as follows:-
The data items listed under the following parts of PC.A.2.5.6
(a) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), (v) and (vi);
and the data items shall be provided in accordance with the detailed provisions of
PC.A.2.5.6(b) - (f).
PC.A.2.5.5.4 Data for the fault infeeds through both Unit Transformers and Station Transformers shall
be provided for the normal running arrangement when the maximum number of Generating
Units (including Synchronous Generating Units forming part of a Synchronous Power
Generating Module) are Synchronised to the System or when all the DC Converters at a
DC Converter Station or HVDC Converters within an HVDC System are transferring Rated
MW in either direction. Where there is an alternative running arrangement (or transfer in the
case of a DC Converter Station or HVDC System) which can give a higher fault infeed
through the Station Transformers, then a separate data submission representing this
condition shall be made.
PC.A.2.5.5.5 Unless the normal operating arrangement within the Power Station is to have the Station and
Unit Boards interconnected within the Power Station, no account should be taken of the
interconnection between the Station Board and the Unit Board.
PC.A.2.5.5.6 Auxiliary motor short circuit current contribution and any auxiliary DC Converter Station
contribution or HVDC System contribution through the Station Transformers must be
represented as a combined short circuit current contribution through the Station
Transformers.
PC.A.2.5.5.7 Where a Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report exists in respect of the model of the
Power Park Unit, the User may opt to reference the Manufacturer’s Data & Performance
Report as an alternative to the provision of data in accordance with this PC.A.2.5.5.7. For the
avoidance of doubt, all other data provision pursuant to the Grid Code shall still be provided
including a Single Line Diagram and those data pertaining thereto.
For each Power Park Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) and each
type of Power Park Unit (eg. a Doubly Fed Induction Generator) (and any OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus which provides a fault infeed), including any Auxiliaries, positive, negative
and zero sequence root mean square current values are to be provided of the contribution to
the short circuit current flowing at:
(i) the Power Park Unit terminals, or the Common Collection Busbar if an equivalent
Single Line Diagram and associated data as described in PC.A.2.2.2 is provided, and
(ii) the Grid Entry Point (and in case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point), or User
System Entry Point if Embedded
for the following solid faults at the Grid Entry Point (and in case of OTSUA, Interface Point),
or User System Entry Point if Embedded:
(i) a symmetrical three phase short circuit
(ii) a single phase to earth short circuit
(iii) a phase to phase short circuit
(iv) a two phase to earth short circuit
For a Power Park Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) in which one or
more of the Power Park Units utilise a protective control such as a crowbar circuit, the data
should indicate whether the protective control will act in each of the above cases and the
effects of its action shall be included in the data. For any case in which the protective control
will act, the data for the fault shall also be submitted for the limiting case in which the protective
circuit will not act, which may involve the application of a non-solid fault, and the positive,
negative and zero sequence retained voltages at;

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

26 of 93
 (i) the Power Park Unit terminals, or the Common Collection Busbar if an equivalent
Single Line Diagram and associated data is provided and
(ii) the Grid Entry Point, or User System Entry Point if Embedded
in this limiting case shall be provided.
For each fault for which data is submitted, the data items listed under the following parts of
PC.A.2.5.6(a) shall be provided:-
(iv), (vii), (viii), (ix), (x);

In addition, if an equivalent Single Line Diagram has been provided the data items listed
under the following parts of PC.A.2.5.6(a) shall be provided:-
(xi), (xii), (xiii);

In addition, for a Power Park Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) in
which one or more of the Power Park Units utilise a protective control such as a crowbar
circuit:-
the data items listed under the following parts of PC.A.2.5.6(a) shall be provided:-
(xiv), (xv);
All of the above data items shall be provided in accordance with the detailed provisions of
PC.A.2.5.6(c), (d), (f).
Should actual data in respect of fault infeeds be unavailable at the time of the application for
a CUSC Contract or Embedded Development Agreement, a limited subset of the data,
representing the maximum fault infeed that may result from all of the plant types being
considered, shall be submitted. This data will, as a minimum, represent the root mean square
of the positive, negative and zero sequence components of the fault current for both single
phase and three phase solid faults at the Grid Entry Point (or User System Entry Point if
Embedded) at the time of fault application and 50ms following fault application. Actual data
in respect of fault infeeds shall be submitted to The Company as soon as it is available, in
line with PC.A.1.2
PC.A.2.5.6 Data Items
(a) The following is the list of data utilised in this part of the PC. It also contains rules on the
data which generally apply:-
(i) Root mean square of the symmetrical three-phase short circuit current infeed at the
instant of fault, (I1");
(ii) Root mean square of the symmetrical three-phase short circuit current after the
subtransient fault current contribution has substantially decayed, (I 1');
(iii) the zero sequence source resistance and reactance values of the User's System
as seen from the node on the Single Line Diagram provided under PC.A.2.2.1 (or
Power Generating Module or Station Transformer high voltage terminals or
Generating Unit terminals or DC Converter terminals or HVDC System terminals,
as appropriate) consistent with the infeed described in PC.A.2.5.1.(b);
(iv) root mean square of the pre-fault voltage at which the maximum fault currents were
calculated;
(v) the positive sequence X/R ratio at the instant of fault;
(vi) the negative sequence resistance and reactance values of the User's System seen
from the node on the Single Line Diagram provided under PC.A.2.2.1 (or Power
Generating Module or Station Transformer high voltage terminals, or Generating
Unit terminals or DC Converter terminals or HVDC System terminals as
appropriate) if substantially different from the values of positive sequence resistance
and reactance which would be derived from the data provided above;
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
27 of 93
 (vii) A continuous trace and a table showing the root mean square of the positive,
negative and zero sequence components of the short circuit current between zero
and 140ms at 10ms intervals;
(viii) The Active Power (or Interface Point Capacity being exported pre-fault by the
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) being generated pre-fault by the Power Park
Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) and by each type of
Power Park Unit;
(ix) The reactive compensation shown explicitly on the Single Line Diagram that is
switched in;
(x) The Power Factor of the Power Park Module (including DC Connected Power
Park Modules) and of each Power Park Unit type;
(xi) The positive sequence X/R ratio of the equivalent at the Common Collection
Busbar or Interface Point in the case of OTSUA;
(xii) The minimum zero sequence impedance of the equivalent seen from the Common
Collection Busbar or Interface Point in the case of OTSUA;
(xiii) The number of Power Park Units represented in the equivalent Power Park Unit;
(xiv) The additional rotor resistance and reactance (if any) that is applied to the Power
Park Unit under a fault condition;
(xv) A continuous trace and a table showing the root mean square of the positive,
negative and zero sequence components of the retained voltage at the fault point
and Power Park Unit terminals, or the Common Collection Busbar if an equivalent
Single Line Diagram and associated data as described in PC.A.2.2.2 is provided or
Interface Point in the case of OTSUA, representing the limiting case, which may
involve the application of a non-solid fault, required to not cause operation of the
protective control;
(b) In considering this data, unless the User notifies The Company accordingly at the time
of data submission, The Company will assume that the time constant of decay of the
subtransient fault current corresponding to the change from I 1" to I1', (T") is not
significantly different from 40ms. If that assumption is not correct in relation to an item of
data, the User must inform The Company at the time of submission of the data.
(c) The value for the X/R ratio must reflect the rate of decay of the d.c. component that may
be present in the fault current and hence that of the sources of the initial fault current. All
shunt elements and loads must therefore be deleted from any system model before the
X/R ratio is calculated.
(d) In producing the data, the User may use "time step analysis" or "fixed-point-in-time
analysis" with different impedances.
(e) If a fixed-point-in-time analysis with different impedances method is used, then in relation
to the data submitted under (a) (i) above, the data will be required for "time zero" to give
I1". The figure of 120ms is consistent with a decay time constant T" of 40ms, and if that
figure is different, then the figure of 120ms must be changed accordingly.
(f) Where a "time step analysis" is carried out, the X/R ratio may be calculated directly from
the rate of decay of the d.c. component. The X/R ratio is not that given by the phase angle
of the fault current if this is based on a system calculation with shunt loads, but from the
Thévenin equivalent of the system impedance at the instant of fault with all non-source
shunts removed.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

28 of 93
PC.A.3 POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT, HVDC SYSTEM AND DC
CONVERTER DATA
PC.A.3.1 Introduction
Directly Connected
PC.A.3.1.1 Each Generator, HVDC System Owner and DC Converter Station owner (and a User
where the OTSUA includes an OTSDUW DC Converter) with an existing, or proposed,
Power Station or DC Converter Station or HVDC System directly connected, or to be
directly connected, to the National Electricity Transmission System (or in the case of
OTSUA, the Interface Point), shall provide The Company with data relating to that
Power Station or DC Converter Station or HVDC System, both current and forecast,
as specified in PC.A.3.2 to PC.A.3.4.
Embedded
PC.A.3.1.2 (a) Each Generator, HVDC System Owner and DC Converter Station owner in respect of
its existing, and/or proposed, Embedded Large Power Stations and/or Embedded
HVDC Systems and/or Embedded DC Converter Stations and/or its Embedded
Medium Power Stations subject to a Bilateral Agreement and each Network Operator
in respect of its Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement and/or Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement and/or Embedded HVDC Systems not subject to a Bilateral Agreement
within such Network Operator’s System in each case connected to the
Subtransmission System, shall provide The Company with data relating to that Power
Station or DC Converter Station or HVC System, both current and forecast, as specified
in PC.A.3.2 to PC.A.3.4.
(b) No data need be supplied in relation to any Small Power Station or any Medium Power
Station or installations of direct current converters which do not form a DC Converter
Station or HVDC System, connected at a voltage level below the voltage level of the
Subtransmission System except:-
(i) in connection with an application for, or under, a CUSC Contract, or
(ii) unless specifically requested by The Company under PC.A.3.1.4.
PC.A.3.1.3 (a) Each Network Operator shall provide The Company with the data specified in
PC.A.3.2.2(c)(i) and (ii) and PC.A.3.2.2(i).
(b) Network Operators need not submit planning data in respect of an Embedded Small
Power Station unless required to do so under PC.A.1.2(b) or unless specifically
requested under PC.A.3.1.4 below, in which case they will supply such data.
PC.A.3.1.4 (a) PC.A.4.2.4(b) and PC.A.4.3.2(a) explain that the forecast Demand submitted by each
Network Operator must be net of the output of all Small Power Stations and Medium
Power Stations and Customer Generating Plant and all installations of direct current
converters which do not form a DC Converter Station or HVDC System, Embedded
within that Network Operator’s System. The Network Operator must inform The
Company of:
(i) the number of such Embedded Power Stations and such Embedded installations
of direct current converters (including the number of Generating Units or Power
Park Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) or DC Converters
or HVDC Systems) together with their summated capacity; and
(ii) beginning from the 2015 Week 24 data submission, for each Embedded Small
Power Station of registered capacity (as defined in the Distribution Code) of 1MW
or more:
1. A reference which is unique to each Network Operator;
2. The production type as follows:
a) In the case of an Embedded Small Power Station first connected on or
after 1 January 2015, the production type must be selected from the list

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

29 of 93
 below:
- Biomass;
- Fossil brown coal/lignite;
- Fossil coal-derived gas;
- Fossil gas;
- Fossil hard coal;
- Fossil oil;
- Fossil oil shale;
- Fossil peat;
- Geothermal;
- Hydro pumped storage;
- Hydro run-of-river and poundage;
- Hydro water reservoir;
- Marine;
- Nuclear;
- Other renewable;
- Solar;
- Waste;
- Wind offshore;
- Wind onshore; or
- Other;
together with a statement as to whether the generation forms part of a
CHP scheme;
(iii) beginning from the 2019 Week 24 data submission, for Embedded Power
Stations with Registered Capacity of less than 1MW, their best estimate of
the aggregated capacity of all such Embedded Power Stations per production
type as defined in the list in PC.A.3.1.4 (a)(ii)(2)(a).

b) In the case of an Embedded Small Power Station first connected to the

Users’ System before 1 January 2015, as an alternative to the
production type, the technology type(s) used, selected from the list set
out at paragraph 2.23 in Version 2 of the Regulatory Instructions and
Guidance relating to the distributed generation incentive, innovation
funding incentive and registered power zones, reference 83/07,
published by Ofgem in April 2007;
c) In the case of an Embedded Small Power Station comprising
Electricity Storage Modules or Electricity Storage Units first
connected the User’s System on or after May 20 2020, the storage type
must be selected from the list below:
-Chemical
Ammonia
Hydrogen
Synthetic Fuels
Drop-in Fuels
Methanol
Synthetic Natural Gas

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

30 of 93
 -Electrical
Supercapacitors
Superconducting Magnetic ES (SMES)
-Mechanical
Adiabatic Compressed Air
Diabatic Compressed Air
Liquid Air Energy Storage
Pumped Hydro
Flywheels
-Thermal
Latent Heat Storage
Thermochemical Storage
Sensible Heat Storage
-Electrochemical
Classic Batteries
Lead Acid
Lithium Polymer (Li-Polymer)
Metal Air
Nickle Cadmium (Ni-Cd)
Sodium Nickle Chloride (Na-NiCl2)
Lithium Ion (Li–ion)
Sodium Ion (Na–ion)
Lithium Sulphur (Li-S)
Sodium Sulphur(Na-S
Nickle –Metal Hydride (Ni-MH)
Flow Batteries
Vanadium Red-Oxide
Zinc – Iron (Zn –Fe)
Zinc – Bromine (Zn –Br)
Other

together with a statement as to whether the storage forms part of a CHP

scheme. Where this information is not held by the Network Operator it should
provide its best view of the type of storage technology.
3. The registered capacity (as defined in the Distribution Code) in MW;
4. The lowest voltage level node that is specified on the most up-to-date Single
Line Diagram to which it connects or where it will export most of its power;
5. Where it generates electricity from wind or PV, the geographical location using
either latitude or longitude or grid reference coordinates of the primary or higher
voltage substation to which it connects;
6. The reactive power and voltage control mode, including the voltage set-point
and reactive range, where it operates in voltage control mode, or the target
Power Factor, where it operates in Power Factor mode;
7. Details of the types of loss of mains Protection in place and their relay settings
which in the case of Embedded Small Power Stations first connected to the
Users’ System before 1 January 2015 shall be provided on a reasonable
endeavours basis.
(b) On receipt of this data, the Network Operator or Generator (if the data relates to Power
Stations referred to in PC.A.3.1.2) may be further required, at The Company's
reasonable discretion, to provide details of Embedded Small Power Stations and
Embedded Medium Power Stations and Customer Generating Plant and Embedded
installations of direct current converters which do not form a DC Converter Station or
HVDC System, both current and forecast, as specified in PC.A.3.2 to PC.A.3.4. Such
requirement would arise where The Company reasonably considers that the collective
effect of a number of such Embedded Power Stations and Customer Generating
Plants and Embedded installations of direct current converters may have a significant
system effect on the National Electricity Transmission System.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

31 of 93
 Busbar Arrangements
PC.A.3.1.5 Where Generating Units, which term includes CCGT Units and Synchronous Generating
Units within a Synchronous Power Generating Module and Power Park Modules
(including DC Connected Power Park Modules), and DC Converters, and HVDC Systems
are connected to the National Electricity Transmission System via a busbar arrangement
which is or is expected to be operated in separate sections, the section of busbar to which
each Generating Unit (including Synchronous Generating Units within a Synchronous
Power Generating Module), DC Converter, HVDC System or Power Park Module
(including DC Connected Power Park Modules) is connected is to be identified in the
submission.
PC.A.3.2 Output Data
PC.A.3.2.1 (a) Large Power Stations and Gensets
Data items PC.A.3.2.2 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (f) and (h) are required with respect to each
Large Power Station and each Generating Unit (including Synchronous Generating
Units within a Synchronous Power Generating Module) and Power Park Module
(including DC Connected Power Park Modules) of each Large Power Station and for
each Genset (although (a) is not required for CCGT Units and (b), (d) and (e) are not
normally required for CCGT Units and (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (f) and (h) are not normally
required for Power Park Units).
(b) Embedded Small Power Stations and Embedded Medium Power Stations
Data item PC.A.3.2.2 (a) is required with respect to each Embedded Small Power
Station and Embedded Medium Power Station and each Generating Unit (including
Synchronous Generating Units within a Synchronous Power Generating Module)
and Power Park Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) of each
Embedded Small Power Station and Embedded Medium Power Station (although (a)
is not required for CCGT Units or Power Park Units). In addition, data item
PC.A.3.2.2(c)(ii) is required with respect to each Embedded Medium Power Station.
(c) CCGT Units/Modules
(i) Data item PC.A.3.2.2 (g) is required with respect to each CCGT Unit;
(ii) data item PC.A.3.2.2 (a) is required with respect to each CCGT Module; and
(iii) data items PC.A.3.2.2 (b), (c), (d) and (e) are required with respect to each CCGT
Module unless The Company informs the relevant User in advance of the
submission that it needs the data items with respect to each CCGT Unit for particular
studies, in which case it must be supplied on a CCGT Unit basis.
Where any definition utilised or referred to in relation to any of the data items does not
reflect CCGT Units, such definition shall be deemed to relate to CCGT Units for the
purposes of these data items. Any Schedule in the DRC which refers to these data items
shall be interpreted to incorporate the CCGT Unit basis where appropriate;
(d) Cascade Hydro Schemes
Data item PC.A.3.2.2(i) is required with respect to each Cascade Hydro Scheme.
(e) Power Park Units/Modules
Data items PC.A.3.2.2 (k) is required with respect to each Power Park Module (including
DC Connected Power Park Modules).
(f) DC Converters and HVDC Systems
Data items PC.A.3.2.2 (a), (b), (c), (d) (e) (f) (h) and (i) are required with respect of each
HVDC System, each DC Converter Station and each DC Converter in each DC
Converter Station. For installations of direct current converters which do not form a DC
Converter Station only data item PC.A.3.2.2.(a) is required.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

32 of 93
PC.A.3.2.2 Items (a), (b), (d), (e), (f), (g), (h), (i), (j) and (k) are to be supplied by each Generator, DC
Converter Station owner, HVDC System Owner or Network Operator (as the case may be)
in accordance with PC.A.3.1.1, PC.A.3.1.2, PC.A.3.1.3 and PC.A.3.1.4. Items (a), and (f)(iv)
are to be supplied (as applicable) by a User in the case of OTSUA which includes an OTSDUW
DC Converter. Item (c) is to be supplied by each Network Operator in all cases:-
(a) Registered Capacity (MW), Maximum Capacity (in the case of Power Generating
Modules in addition to Registered Capacity on a Power Station basis) or Interface
Point Capacity in the case of OTSDUW;
(b) Output Usable (MW) on a monthly basis;
(c) (i) System Constrained Capacity (MW) ie. any constraint placed on the capacity of
the Embedded Generating Unit (including a Synchronous Generating Unit within
a Synchronous Power Generating Module), Embedded Power Park Module
(including DC Connected Power Park Modules) an Offshore Transmission
System at an Interface Point, Embedded HVDC System or DC Converter at an
Embedded DC Converter Station due to the Network Operator’s System in which
it is Embedded. Where Generating Units (which term includes CCGT Units and
Synchronous Generating Units within a Synchronous Power Generating
Module), Power Park Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules),
Offshore Transmission Systems at an Interface Point, HVDC Systems or DC
Converters are connected to a Network Operator’s User System via a busbar
arrangement which is or is expected to be operated in separate sections, details of
busbar running arrangements and connected circuits at the substation to which the
Embedded Generating Unit (including Synchronous Generating Units within an
Embedded Synchronous Power Generating Module), Embedded Power Park
Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules), Offshore Transmission
System at an Interface Point, or Embedded HVDC System or Embedded DC
Converter is connected sufficient for The Company to determine where the MW
generated by each Generating Unit (including Synchronous Generating Units
within a Synchronous Power Generating Module), Power Park Module (including
DC Connected Power Park Modules), HVDC System or DC Converter at that
Power Station or DC Converter Station or Offshore Transmission System at an
Interface Point would appear onto the National Electricity Transmission System;
(ii) any Reactive Despatch Network Restrictions;
(d) Minimum Generation (MW), and in the case of Power Generating Modules only
Minimum Stable Operating Level (MW) and Minimum Regulating Level;
(e) MW obtainable from Generating Units (including Synchronous Generating Units
within a Synchronous Power Generating Module), Power Park Modules (including
DC Connected Power Park Modules), HVDC Systems or DC Converters at a DC
Converter Station in excess of Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity;
(f) Generator Performance Chart:
(i) GB Code User(s) in respect of Generating Units shall provide a Generator
Performance Chart and EU Code Users in respect of Power Generating Modules
shall provide a Power Generating Module Performance Chart and a
Synchronous Generating Unit Performance Chart.
(ii) at the electrical point of connection to the Offshore Transmission System for an
Offshore Synchronous Generating Unit and Offshore Synchronous Power
Generating Module.
(iii) at the electrical point of connection to the National Electricity Transmission
System (or User System if Embedded) for a Non Synchronous Generating Unit
(excluding a Power Park Unit), Power Park Module (including DC Connected
Power Park Modules), HVDC System and DC Converter at a DC Converter
Station;
(iv) at the Interface Point for OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

33 of 93
 Where a Reactive Despatch Network Restriction applies, its existence and details
should be highlighted on the Generator Performance Chart, in sufficient detail for The
Company to determine the nature of the restriction.
(g) a list of the CCGT Units within a CCGT Module, identifying each CCGT Unit, and the
CCGT Module of which it forms part, unambiguously. In the case of a Range CCGT
Module, details of the possible configurations should also be submitted, together:-
(i) (in the case of a Range CCGT Module connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System) with details of the single Grid Entry Point (there can only
be one) at which power is provided from the Range CCGT Module;
(ii) (in the case of an Embedded Range CCGT Module) with details of the single User
System Entry Point (there can only be one) at which power is provided from the
Range CCGT Module;
Provided that, nothing in this sub-paragraph (g) shall prevent the busbar at the relevant
point being operated in separate sections;
(h) expected running regime(s) at each Power Station, HVDC System or DC Converter
Station and type of Power Generating Module or Generating Unit (as applicable), eg.
Steam Unit, Gas Turbine Unit, Combined Cycle Gas Turbine Unit, Power Park
Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules), Novel Units (specify by type),
etc;
(i) a list of Power Stations and Generating Units within a Cascade Hydro Scheme,
identifying each Generating Unit (including Synchronous Generating Units within a
Synchronous Power Generating Module) and Power Station and the Cascade Hydro
Scheme of which each form part unambiguously. In addition:
(i) details of the Grid Entry Point at which Active Power is provided, or if
Embedded the Grid Supply Point(s) within which the Generating Unit
(including Synchronous Generating Units within a Synchronous Power
Generating Module) is connected;
(ii) where the Active Power output of a Generating Unit is split between more
than one Grid Supply Points the percentage that would appear under normal
and outage conditions at each Grid Supply Point.
(j) The following additional items are only applicable to DC Converters at DC Converter
Stations and HVDC Systems.
Registered Import Capacity (MW);
Import Usable (MW) on a monthly basis;
Minimum Import Capacity (MW);
MW that may be absorbed by a DC Converter or HVDC System in excess of
Registered Import Capacity and Maximum HVDC Active Power Transmission
Capacity under importing conditions and the duration for which this is available;
(k) the number and types of the Power Park Units within a Power Park Module (including
DC Connected Power Park Modules), identifying each Power Park Unit, the Power
Park Module of which it forms part and identifying the BM Unit of which each Power
Park Module forms part, unambiguously. In the case of a Power Station directly
connected to the National Electricity Transmission System with multiple Power Park
Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) where Power Park Units can
be selected to run in different Power Park Modules and/or Power Park Modules can be
selected to run in different BM Units, details of the possible configurations should also
be submitted. In addition, for Offshore Power Park Modules (including DC Connected
Power Park Modules), the number of Offshore Power Park Strings that are aggregated
into one Offshore Power Park Module should also be submitted.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

34 of 93
 (l) the number and types of the Synchronous Generating Units within a Synchronous
Power Generating Module, identifying each Synchronous Generating Unit, the
Synchronous Power Generating Module of which it forms part and identifying the BM
Unit of which each Synchronous Power Generating Module forms part,
unambiguously. In the case of a Power Station directly connected to the National
Electricity Transmission System with multiple Synchronous Power Generating
Modules where Synchronous Generating Units can be selected to run in different
Synchronous Power Generating Modules and/or Synchronous Power Generating
Modules can be selected to run in different BM Units, details of the possible
configurations should also be submitted.

PC.A.3.2.3 Notwithstanding any other provision of this PC, the CCGT Units within a CCGT Module,
details of which are required under paragraph (g) of PC.A.3.2.2, can only be amended in
accordance with the following provisions:-
(a) if the CCGT Module is a Normal CCGT Module, the CCGT Units within that CCGT
Module can only be amended such that the CCGT Module comprises different CCGT
Units if The Company gives its prior consent in writing. Notice of the wish to amend the
CCGT Units within such a CCGT Module must be given at least 6 months before it is
wished for the amendment to take effect;
(b) if the CCGT Module is a Range CCGT Module, the CCGT Units within that CCGT
Module and the Grid Entry Point at which the power is provided can only be amended
as described in BC1.A1.6.4.
PC.A.3.2.4 Notwithstanding any other provision of this PC, the Power Park Units within a Power Park
Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules), and the Power Park Modules
(including DC Connected Power Park Modules) within a BM Unit, details of which are
required under paragraph (k) of PC.A.3.2.2, can only be amended in accordance with the
following provisions:-
(a) if the Power Park Units within that Power Park Module can only be amended such that
the Power Park Module comprises different Power Park Units due to
repair/replacement of individual Power Park Units if The Company gives its prior
consent in writing. Notice of the wish to amend a Power Park Unit within such a Power
Park Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) must be given at least 4
weeks before it is wished for the amendment to take effect;
(b) if the Power Park Units within that Power Park Module (including DC Connected
Power Park Modules) and/or the Power Park Modules (including DC Connected
Power Park Modules) within that BM Unit can be selected to run in different Power Park
Modules and/or BM Units as an alternative operational running arrangement the Power
Park Units within the Power Park Module, the BM Unit of which each Power Park
Module forms part, and the Grid Entry Point at which the power is provided can only be
amended as described in BC1.A.1.8.4.
PC.A.3.2.5 Notwithstanding any other provision of this PC, the Synchronous Generating Units within a
Synchronous Power Generating Module, and the Synchronous Power Generating
Modules within a BM Unit, details of which are required under paragraph (l) of PC.A.3.2.2,
can only be amended in accordance with the following provisions:-
(a) if the Synchronous Generating Units within that Synchronous Power Generating
Module can only be amended such that the Synchronous Power Generating Module
comprises different Synchronous Generating Units due to repair/replacement of
individual Synchronous Generating Units if The Company gives its prior consent in
writing. Notice of the wish to amend a Synchronous Generating Unit within such a
Synchronous Power Generating Module must be given at least 4 weeks before it is
wished for the amendment to take effect;

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

35 of 93
 (b) if the Synchronous Generating Units within that Synchronous Power Generating
Module and/or the Synchronous Power Generating Modules within that BM Unit can
be selected to run in different Synchronous Power Generating Modules and/or BM
Units as an alternative operational running arrangement the Synchronous Generating
Units within the Synchronous Power Generating Module, the BM Unit of which each
Synchronous Power Generating Module forms part, and the Grid Entry Point at which
the power is provided can only be amended as described in BC1.A.1.9.4(c).The
requirements of PC.A.3.2.5 need not be satisfied if Generators have already submitted
data in respect of PC.A.3.2.3, PC.A.3.2.4 and PC.A.3.2.5 for the same Power
Generating Module.
PC.A.3.3. Rated Parameters Data
PC.A.3.3.1 The following information is required to facilitate an early assessment, by The Company, of
the need for more detailed studies;
(a) for all Generating Units (excluding Power Park Units) and Power Park Modules
(including DC Connected Power Park Modules):
Rated MVA
Rated MW;
(b) for each Synchronous Generating Unit (including Synchronous Generating Units
within a Synchronous Power Generating Module):
Short circuit ratio
Direct axis transient reactance;
Inertia constant (for whole machine), MWsecs/MVA;
(c) for each Synchronous Generating Unit step-up transformer (including the step up
transformer of a Synchronous Generating Unit within a Synchronous Power
Generating Module):
Rated MVA
Positive sequence reactance (at max, min and nominal tap);
(d) for each DC Converter at a DC Converter Station, HVDC System, DC Converter
connecting a Power Park Module (including a DC Connected Power Park Module) and
Transmission DC Converter (forming part of an OTSUA).
DC Converter or HVDC Converter type (e.g. current/voltage sourced)
Rated MW per pole for import and export
Number of poles and pole arrangement
Rated DC voltage/pole (kV)
Return path arrangement
Remote AC connection arrangement (excluding OTSDUW DC Converters)
Maximum HVDC Active Power Transmission Capacity

Minimum Active Power Transmission Capacity

(e) for each type of Power Park Unit in a Power Park Module not connected to the Total
System by a DC Converter or HVDC System:
Rated MVA
Rated MW
Rated terminal voltage
Inertia constant, (MWsec/MVA)
Additionally, for Power Park Units that are squirrel-cage or doubly-fed induction
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
36 of 93
 generators driven by wind turbines:
Stator reactance.
Magnetising reactance.
Rotor resistance (at rated running)
Rotor reactance (at rated running)
The generator rotor speed range (minimum and maximum speeds in RPM) (for
doubly-fed induction generators only)
Converter MVA rating (for doubly-fed induction generators only)
For a Power Park Unit consisting of a synchronous machine in combination with a back-
to-back DC Converter or HVDC Converter, or for a Power Park Unit not driven by a
wind turbine, the data to be supplied shall be agreed with The Company in accordance
with PC.A.7.
This information should only be given in the data supplied in accordance with PC.4.4 and
PC.4.5.
PC.A.3.4 General Generating Unit, Power Park Module (including DC Connected Power Park
Modules), Power Generating Module, HVDC System and DC Converter Data
PC.A.3.4.1 The point of connection to the National Electricity Transmission System or the Total
System, if other than to the National Electricity Transmission System, in terms of
geographical and electrical location and system voltage is also required.
PC.A.3.4.2 (a) Type of Generating Unit (ie Synchronous Power Generating Unit within a Power
Generating Module, Synchronous Generating Unit, Non-Synchronous Generating
Unit, DC Converter, Power Park Module (including DC Connected Power Park
Modules) or HVDC System).
(b) In the case of a Synchronous Generating Unit (including Synchronous Generating
Units within a Synchronous Power Generating Module) details of the Exciter
category, for example whether it is a rotating Exciter or a static Exciter or in the case of
a Non-Synchronous Generating Unit the voltage control system.
(c) Whether a Power System Stabiliser is fitted.
PC.A.3.4.3 Each Generator shall supply The Company with the production type(s) used as the primary
source of power in respect of each Generating Unit (including Synchronous Generating
Units within a Synchronous Power Generating Module), selected from the list set out below:
- Biomass
- Fossil brown coal/lignite
- Fossil coal-derived gas
- Fossil gas
- Fossil hard coal
- Fossil oil
- Fossil oil shale
- Fossil peat
- Geothermal
- Hydro pumped storage
- Hydro run-of-river and poundage
- Hydro water reservoir
- Marine
- Nuclear

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

37 of 93
 - Other renewable
- Solar
- Waste
- Wind offshore
- Wind onshore
- Other

PC.A.3.4.4 In the case of an Electricity Storage Module or Electricity Storage Unit, each Generator
shall supply The Company with the production type(s) used as the primary Electricity
Storage source (including Synchronous Electricity Storage Units within a Synchronous
Electricity Storage Module), selected from the list set out below:

-Chemical
Ammonia
Hydrogen
Synthetic Fuels
Drop-in Fuels
Methanol
Synthetic Natural Gas
-Electrical
Supercapacitors
Superconducting Magnetic ES (SMES)
-Mechanical
Adiabatic Compressed Air
Diabatic Compressed Air
Liquid Air Energy Storage
Pumped Hydro
Flywheels
-Thermal
Latent Heat Storage
Thermochemical Storage
Sensible Heat Storage
-Electrochemical
Classic Batteries
Lead Acid
Lithium Polymer (Li-Polymer)
Metal Air
Nickle Cadmium (Ni-Cd)
Sodium Nickle Chloride (Na-NiCl2)
Lithium Ion (Li–ion)
Sodium Ion (Na–ion)
Lithium Sulphur (Li-S)
Sodium Sulphur(Na-S
Nickle –Metal Hydride (Ni-MH)
Flow Batteries
Vanadium Red-Oxide
Zinc – Iron (Zn –Fe)
Zinc – Bromine (Zn –Br)
Other

PC.A.4 DEMAND AND ACTIVE ENERGY DATA

PC.A.4.1 Introduction
PC.A.4.1.1 Each User directly connected to the National Electricity Transmission System with
Demand shall provide The Company with the Demand data, historic, current and forecast,
as specified in PC.A.4.2 and PC.A.4.3. Paragraphs PC.A.4.1.2 and PC.A.4.1.3 apply equally
to Active Energy requirements as to Demand unless the context otherwise requires.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

38 of 93
PC.A.4.1.2 Data will need to be supplied by:
(a) each Network Operator, in relation to Demand and Active Energy requirements on its
User System;
(b) each Non-Embedded Customer, Pumped Storage Generators (with respect to
Pumping Demand) and Generators in relation to Electricity Storage Modules in
relation to their Demand and Active Energy requirements.
(c) each DC Converter Station owner or HVDC System Owner in relation to Demand and
Active Energy transferred (imported) to its DC Converter Station or HVDC System.
(d) each OTSDUW DC Converter in relation to the Demand at each Interface Point and
Connection Point.
Demand of Power Stations directly connected to the National Electricity Transmission
System is to be supplied by the Generator under PC.A.5.2.
PC.A.4.1.3 References in this PC to data being supplied on a half hourly basis refer to it being supplied
for each period of 30 minutes ending on the hour or half-hour in each hour.
PC.A.4.1.4 Access Periods and Access Groups
PC.A.4.1.4.1 Each Connection Point must belong to one, and only one, Access Group.
PC.A.4.1.4.2 Each Transmission Interface Circuit must have an Access Period.
PC.A.4.1.4.3 The Access Period shall
(a) normally be a minimum of 8 continuous weeks and can occur in any one of three
maintenance years during the period from calendar week 13 to calendar week 43
(inclusive) in each year; or,
(b) exceptionally and provided that agreement is reached between The Company and the
relevant User(s), such agreement to be sought in accordance with PC.7, the Access
Period may be of a period not less than 4 continuous weeks and can occur in any one
of three maintenance years during the period from calendar week 10 to calendar week
43 (inclusive) in each year.
PC.A.4.1.4.4 The Company shall submit in writing no later than calendar week 6 in each year:
(a) the calendar weeks defining the proposed start and finish of each Access Period for
each Transmission Interface Circuit; and
(b) the Connection Points in each Access Group.
The submission by The Company under PC.A.4.1.4.4 (a) above shall commence in 2010 and
shall then continue each year thereafter. The submission by The Company under
PC.A.4.1.4.4 (b) shall commence in 2009 and then continue each year thereafter.
PC.A.4.1.4.5 It is permitted for Access Periods to overlap in the same Access Group and in the same
maintenance year. However, where possible Access Periods will be sought by The
Company that do not overlap with any other Access Period within that Access Group for
each maintenance year. Where it is not possible to avoid overlapping Access Periods, The
Company will indicate to Users by calendar week 6 its initial view of which Transmission
Interface Circuits will need to be considered out of service concurrently for the purpose of
assessing compliance to Licence Standards. The obligation on The Company to indicate
which Transmission Interface Circuits will need to be considered out of service concurrently
for the purpose of assessing compliance to Licence Standards shall commence in 2010 and
shall continue each year thereafter.
PC.A.4.1.4.6 Following the submission(s) by The Company by week 6 in each year and where required by
either party, both The Company and the relevant User(s) shall use their reasonable
endeavours to agree the appropriate Access Group(s) and Access Period for each
Transmission Interface Circuit prior to week 17 in each year. The requirement on The
Company and the relevant User(s) to agree, shall commence in respect of Access Groups
only in 2010. This paragraph PC.A.4.1.4.6 shall apply in its entirety in 2011 and shall then
continue each year thereafter.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

39 of 93
PC.A.4.1.4.7 In exceptional circumstances, and with the agreement of all parties concerned, where a
Connection Point is specified for the purpose of the Planning Code as electrically
independent Subtransmission Systems, then data submissions can be on the basis of two
(or more) individual Connection Points.
PC.A.4.2 User’s User System Demand (Active Power) and Active Energy Data
PC.A.4.2.1 Forecast daily Demand (Active Power) profiles, as specified in (a), (b) and (c) below, in
respect of each of the User's User Systems (each summated over all Grid Supply Points in
each User System) are required for:
(a) peak day on each of the User's User Systems (as determined by the User) giving the
numerical value of the maximum Demand (Active Power) that in the Users' opinion
could reasonably be imposed on the National Electricity Transmission System;
(b) day of peak National Electricity Transmission System Demand (Active Power) as
notified by The Company pursuant to PC.A.4.2.2;
(c) day of minimum National Electricity Transmission System Demand (Active Power)
as notified by The Company pursuant to PC.A.4.2.2.
In addition, the total Demand (Active Power) in respect of the time of peak National
Electricity Transmission System Demand in the preceding Financial Year in respect of
each of the User's User Systems (each summated over all Grid Supply Points in each User
System) both outturn and weather corrected shall be supplied.
PC.A.4.2.2 No later than calendar week 17 each year, The Company shall notify each Network Operator
and Non-Embedded Customer in writing of the following, for the current Financial Year and
for each of the following seven Financial Years, which will, until replaced by the following
year’s notification, be regarded as the relevant specified days and times under PC.A.4.2.1:
(a) the date and time of the annual peak of the National Electricity Transmission System
Demand;
(b) the date and time of the annual minimum of the National Electricity Transmission
System Demand;
(c) the relevant Access Period for each Transmission Interface Circuit; and,
(d) concurrent Access Periods of two or more Transmission Interface Circuits (if any) that
are situated in the same Access Group.
The submissions by The Company made under PC.A.4.2.1 (c) and PC.A.4.2.1 (d) above shall
commence in 2010 and shall then continue in respect of each year thereafter.
PC.A.4.2.3 The total Active Energy used on each of the Network Operators’ or Non-Embedded
Customers’ User Systems (each summated over all Grid Supply Points in each User
System) in the preceding Financial Year, both outturn and weather corrected, together with
a prediction for the current financial year, is required. Each Active Energy submission shall
be subdivided into the following categories of Customer tariff:
LV1
LV2
LV3
HV
EHV
Traction
Lighting
In addition, the total User System losses and the Active Energy provided by Embedded
Small Power Stations and Embedded Medium Power Stations shall be supplied.
PC.A.4.2.4 All forecast Demand (Active Power) and Active Energy specified in PC.A.4.2.1 and
PC.A.4.2.3 shall:

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

40 of 93
 (a) in the case of PC.A.4.2.1(a), (b) and (c), be such that the profiles comprise average
Active Power levels in 'MW' for each time marked half hour throughout the day;
(b) in the case of PC.A.4.2.1(a), (b) and (c), be that remaining after any deductions
reasonably considered appropriate by the User to take account of the output profile of all
Embedded Small Power Stations and Embedded Medium Power Stations and
Customer Generating Plant and imports across Embedded External
Interconnections including imports across Embedded installations of direct current
converters which do not form a DC Converter Station or HVDC System and Embedded
DC Converter Stations and Embedded HVDC Systems with a Registered Capacity
or HVDC Active Power Transmission Capacity of less than 100MW;
(c) be based upon Annual ACS Conditions for times that occur during week 44 through to
week 12 (inclusive) and based on Average Conditions for weeks 13 to 43 (inclusive).
PC.A.4.3 Connection Point Demand (Active and Reactive Power)
PC.A.4.3.1 Forecast Demand (Active Power) and Power Factor (values of the Power Factor at
maximum and minimum continuous excitation may be given instead where more than 95% of
the total Demand at a Connection Point is taken by synchronous motors) to be met at each
Connection Point within each Access Group is required for:
(a) the time of the maximum Demand (Active Power) at the Connection Point (as
determined by the User) that in the User's opinion could reasonably be imposed on the
National Electricity Transmission System;
(b) the time of peak National Electricity Transmission System Demand as provided by
The Company under PC.A.4.2.2;
(c) the time of minimum National Electricity Transmission System Demand as provided
by The Company under PC.A.4.2.2;
(d) the time of the maximum Demand (Apparent Power) at the Connection Point (as
determined by the User) during the Access Period of each Transmission Interface
Circuit;
(e) at a time specified by either The Company or a User insofar as such a request is
reasonable.
Instead of such forecast Demand to be met at each Connection Point within each Access
Group the User may (subject to PC.A.4.3.4) submit such Demand at each node on the Single
Line Diagram.
In addition, the Demand in respect of each of the time periods referred to in PC.A.4.3.1 (a) to
(e) in the preceding Financial Year in respect of each Connection Point within each Access
Group both outturn and weather corrected shall be supplied. The “weather correction” shall
normalise outturn figures to Annual ACS Conditions for times that occur during calendar
week 44 through to calendar week 12 (inclusive) or Average Conditions for the period
calendar weeks 13 to calendar week 43 (inclusive) and shall be performed by the relevant
User on a best endeavours basis.
The submission by a User pursuant to PC.A.4.3.1 (d) shall commence in 2011 and shall then
continue each year thereafter.
PC.A.4.3.2 All forecast Demand specified in PC.A.4.3.1 shall:
(a) be that remaining after any deductions reasonably considered appropriate by the User to
take account of the output of all Embedded Small Power Stations and Embedded
Medium Power Stations and Customer Generating Plant and imports across
Embedded External Interconnections, including Embedded installations of direct
current converters which do not form a DC Converter Station, HVDC System and
Embedded DC Converter Stations and Embedded HVDC Systems and such
deductions should be separately stated;
(b) include any User's System series reactive losses but exclude any reactive compensation
equipment specified in PC.A.2.4 and exclude any network susceptance specified in
PC.A.2.3;
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
41 of 93
 (c) be based upon Annual ACS Conditions for times that occur during calendar week 44
through to calendar week 12 (inclusive) and based on Average Conditions for calendar
weeks 13 to calendar week 43 (inclusive), both corrections being made on a best
endeavours basis;
(d) reflect the User’s opinion of what could reasonably be imposed on the National
Electricity Transmission System.
PC.A.4.3.3 The date and time of the forecast maximum Demand (Apparent Power) at the Connection
Point as specified in PC.A.4.3.1 (a) and (d) is required.
PC.A.4.3.4 Each Single Line Diagram provided under PC.A.2.2.2 shall include the Demand (Active
Power) and Power Factor (values of the Power Factor at maximum and minimum continuous
excitation may be given instead where more than 95% of the Demand is taken by synchronous
motors) at the time of the peak National Electricity Transmission System Demand (as
provided under PC.A.4.2.2) at each node on the Single Line Diagram. These Demands shall
be consistent with those provided under PC.A.4.3.1(b) above for the relevant year.
PC.A.4.3.5 The Single Line Diagram must represent the User’s User System layout under the period
specified in PC.A.4.3.1(b) (at the time of peak National Electricity Transmission System
Demand). Should the User’s User System layout during the other times specified in
PC.A.4.3.1 be planned to be materially different from the Single Line Diagram submitted to
The Company pursuant to PC.A.2.2.1 the User shall in respect of such other times submit:
(i) an alternative Single Line Diagram that accurately reflects the revised layout and in such
case shall also include appropriate associated data representing the relevant changes,
or;
(ii) submit an accurate and unambiguous description of the changes to the Single Line
Diagram previously submitted for the time of peak National Electricity Transmission
System Demand.
Where a User does not submit any changes, The Company will assume that the Single Line
Diagram (and associated circuit and node data) provided at the time of peak National
Electricity Transmission System Demand will be valid for all other times. In respect of such
other times, where the User does not submit such nodal demands at the times defined in
PC.A.4.3.1(a), (c), (d) and (e), the nodal demands will be pro-rata, to be consistent with the
submitted Connection Point Demands.
PC.A.4.4 The Company will assemble and derive in a reasonable manner, the forecast information
supplied to it under PC.A.4.2.1, PC.A.4.3.1, PC.A.4.3.4 and PC.A.4.3.5 above into a cohesive
forecast and will use this in preparing Forecast Demand information in the Seven Year
Statement and for use in The Company's Operational Planning. If any User believes that
the cohesive forecast Demand information in the Seven Year Statement does not reflect its
assumptions on Demand, it should contact The Company to explain its concerns and may
require The Company, on reasonable request, to discuss these forecasts. In the absence of
such expressions, The Company will assume that Users concur with The Company's
cohesive forecast.
PC.A.4.5 Post Fault User System Layout
PC.A.4.5.1 Where for the purposes of The Company assessing against the Licence Standards an
Access Group, the User reasonably considers it appropriate that revised post fault User
System layouts should be taken into account by The Company, the following information is
required to be submitted by the User:
(i) the specified Connection Point assessment period (PC.A.4.3.1,(a)-(e)) that is being
evaluated;
(ii) an accurate and unambiguous description of the Transmission Interface Circuits
considered to be switched out due to a fault;
(iii) appropriate revised Single Line Diagrams and/or associated revised nodal Demand and
circuit data detailing the revised User System(s) conditions;

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

42 of 93
 (iv) where the User’s planned post fault action consists of more than one component, each
component must be explicitly identified using the Single Line Diagram and associated
nodal Demand and circuit data;
(v) the arrangements for undertaking actions (eg the time taken, automatic or manual and
any other appropriate information);.
The User must not submit any action that it does not have the capability or the intention to
implement during the assessment period specified (subject to there being no further unplanned
outages on the User’s User System).
PC.A.4.6 Control of Demand or Reduction of Pumping Load Offered as Reserve
Magnitude of Demand or pumping load or Electricty Storage MW
Module charging load which is tripped
System Frequency at which tripping is initiated Hz
Time duration of System Frequency below trip setting for tripping S
to be initiated
Time delay from trip initiation to tripping S

PC.A.4.7 General Demand Data

PC.A.4.7.1 The following information is infrequently required and should be supplied (wherever possible)
when requested by The Company:
(a) details of any individual loads (including (as applicable) the load behaviour of an
Electricity Storage Module when operating in a mode analogous to demand) which
have characteristics significantly different from the typical range of Domestic, Commercial
, Electricity Storage or Industrial loads supplied;
(b) the sensitivity of the Demand (Active and Reactive Power) to variations in voltage and
Frequency on the National Electricity Transmission System at the time of the peak
Demand (Active Power). The sensitivity factors quoted for the Demand (Reactive
Power) should relate to that given under PC.A.4.3.1 and, therefore, include any User's
System series reactive losses but exclude any reactive compensation equipment
specified in PC.A.2.4 and exclude any network susceptance specified in PC.A.2.3;
(c) details of any traction loads, e.g. connection phase pairs and continuous load variation
with time;
(d) the average and maximum phase unbalance, in magnitude and phase angle, which the
User would expect its Demand to impose on the National Electricity Transmission
System;
(e) the maximum harmonic content which the User would expect its Demand to impose on
the National Electricity Transmission System;
(f) details of all loads which may cause Demand fluctuations greater than those permitted
under Engineering Recommendation P28 Issue 2, Stage 1 at a Point of Common
Coupling including the Flicker Severity Short Term and the Flicker Severity Long
Term.
(g) In the case of Electricity Storage Modules, details of the Maximum Capacity, Maximum
Import Power, Registered Import Capability, charge time, discharge time and
operating periods.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

43 of 93
 PART 2 - DETAILED PLANNING DATA

PC.A.5 POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT, POWER PARK MODULE

(INCLUDING DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULES), DC CONVERTER, HVDC
EQUIPMENT AND OTSDUW PLANT AND APPARATUS DATA
PC.A.5.1 Introduction
Directly Connected
PC.A.5.1.1 Each Generator (including those undertaking OTSDUW), with existing or proposed Power
Stations directly connected, or to be directly connected, to the National Electricity
Transmission System, shall provide The Company with data relating to that Plant and
Apparatus, both current and forecast, as specified in PC.A.5.2, PC.A.5.3, PC.A.5.4 and
PC.A.5.7 as applicable.
Each DC Converter Station owner or HVDC System Owner, with existing or proposed DC
Converter Stations or HVDC Systems (including Generators undertaking OTSDUW which
includes an OTSDUW DC Converter) directly connected, or to be directly connected, to the
National Electricity Transmission System, shall provide The Company with data relating
to that Plant and Apparatus, both current and forecast, as specified in PC.A.5.2 and PC.A.5.4.
GB Generators, DC Converter Station owners, EU Generators and HVDC System Owners
shall ensure that the models supplied in respect of their Plant and Apparatus provide a true
and accurate behaviour of the plant as built as required under PC.A.5.3.2(c), PC.A.5.4.2(a)
and PC.A.5.4.3 and verified through the Compliance Processes (CP) or European
Compliance Processes (ECP) as applicable.

Embedded
PC.A.5.1.2 Each Generator, in respect of its existing, or proposed, Embedded Large Power Stations
and its Embedded Medium Power Stations subject to a Bilateral Agreement and each
Network Operator in respect of Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a
Bilateral Agreement within its System shall provide The Company with data relating to each
of those Large Power Stations and Medium Power Stations, both current and forecast, as
specified in PC.A.5.2, PC.A.5.3, PC.A.5.4 and PC.A.5.7 as applicable.
Each DC Converter Station owner or HVDC System Owner, or Network Operator in the
case of an Embedded DC Converter Station or Embedded HVDC System not subject to a
Bilateral Agreement within its System with existing or proposed HVDC Systems or DC
Converter Stations shall provide The Company with data relating to each of those HVDC
Systems or DC Converter Stations, both current and forecast, as specified in PC.A.5.2 and
PC.A.5.4.
However, no data need be supplied in relation to those Embedded Medium Power Stations
or Embedded DC Converter Stations or Embedded HVDC Systems if they are connected
at a voltage level below the voltage level of the Subtransmission System except in
connection with an application for, or under a, CUSC Contract or unless specifically requested
by The Company under PC.A.5.1.4.
GB Generators, DC Converter Station owners, EU Generators and HVDC System Owners
shall ensure that the models supplied in respect of their Plant and Apparatus provide a true
and accurate behaviour of the plant as built as required under PC.A.5.3.2(c), PC.A.5.4.2(a)
and PC.A.5.4.3 and verified through the Compliance Processes (CP) or European
Compliance Processes (ECP) as applicable

PC.A.5.1.3 Each Network Operator need not submit Planning Data in respect of Embedded Small
Power Stations unless required to do so under PC.A.1.2(b), PC.A.3.1.4 or unless specifically
requested under PC.A.5.1.4 below, in which case they will supply such data.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

44 of 93
PC.A.5.1.4 PC.A.4.2.4(b) and PC.A.4.3.2(a) explained that the forecast Demand submitted by each
Network Operator must be net of the output of all Medium Power Stations and Small Power
Stations and Customer Generating Plant Embedded within that User's System. In such
cases, the Network Operator must provide The Company with the relevant information
specified under PC.A.3.1.4 . On receipt of this data further details may be required at The
Company's discretion as follows:
(i) in the case of details required from the Network Operator for Embedded Medium
Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC Converter
Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded HVDC Systems not
subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded Small Power Stations and
Embedded DC Converters and Embedded HVDC Systems in each case within such
Network Operator’s System and Customer Generating Plant; and
(ii) in the case of details required from the Generator of Embedded Large Power Stations
and Embedded Medium Power Stations subject to a Bilateral Agreement; and
(iii) in the case of details required from the DC Converter Station owner of an Embedded
DC Converter or DC Converter Station or HVDC System Owner of an Embedded
HVDC System Owner subject to a Bilateral Agreement.
both current and forecast, as specified in PC.A.5.2 and PC.A.5.3. Such requirement would
arise when The Company reasonably considers that the collective effect of a number of such
Embedded Small Power Stations, Embedded Medium Power Stations, Embedded DC
Converter Stations, Embedded HVDC Systems, DC Converters and Customer
Generating Plants may have a significant system effect on the National Electricity
Transmission System.
PC.A.5.1.5 DPD I and DPD II
The Detailed Planning Data described in this Part 2 of the Appendix comprises both DPD I
and DPD II. The required data is listed and collated in the Data Registration Code. The Users
need to refer to the DRC to establish whether data referred to here is DPD I or DPD II.
PC.A.5.2 Demand
PC.A.5.2.1 For each Generating Unit (including Synchronous Generating Units within a Synchronous
Power Generating Module) which has an associated Unit Transformer, the value of the
Demand supplied through this Unit Transformer when the Generating Unit is at Rated MW
output is to be provided.
PC.A.5.2.2 Where the Power Station or DC Converter Station or HVDC System has associated
Demand additional to the unit-supplied Demand of PC.A.5.2.1 which is supplied from either
the National Electricity Transmission System or the Generator's User System the
Generator, DC Converter Station owner, HVDC System Owner or the Network Operator
(in the case of Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement
within its System), as the case may be, shall supply forecasts for each Power Station or DC
Converter Station or HVDC System of:
(a) the maximum Demand that, in the User's opinion, could reasonably be imposed on the
National Electricity Transmission System or the Generator's User System as
appropriate;
(b) the Demand at the time of the peak National Electricity Transmission System
Demand
(c) the Demand at the time of minimum National Electricity Transmission System
Demand.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

45 of 93
PC.A.5.2.3 No later than calendar week 17 each year The Company shall notify each Generator in
respect of its Large Power Stations and its Medium Power Stations and each DC
Converter owner in respect of its DC Converter Station and each HVDC System Owner in
respect of its HVDC System subject to a Bilateral Agreement and each Network Operator
in respect of each Embedded Medium Power Station not subject to a Bilateral Agreement
and each Embedded DC Converter Station or Embedded HVDC System not subject to a
Bilateral Agreement within such Network Operator’s System in writing of the following, for
the current Financial Year and for each of the following seven Financial Years, which will be
regarded as the relevant specified days and times under PC.A.5.2.2:
(a) the date and time of the annual peak of the National Electricity Transmission System
Demand at Annual ACS Conditions;
(b) the date and time of the annual minimum of the National Electricity Transmission
System Demand at Average Conditions.
PC.A.5.2.4 At its discretion, The Company may also request further details of the Demand as specified
in PC.A.4.6
PC.A.5.2.5 In the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus the following data shall be supplied:
(a) The maximum Demand that could occur at the Interface Point and each Connection
Point (in MW and MVAr);
(b) Demand at specified time of annual peak half hour of National Electricity Transmission
System Demand at Annual ACS Conditions (in MW and MVAr); and
(c) Demand at specified time of annual minimum half-hour of National Electricity
Transmission System Demand (in MW and MVAr).

For the avoidance of doubt, Demand data associated with Generators undertaking OTSDUW
which utilise an OTSDUW DC Converter should supply data under PC.A.4.
PC.A.5.3 Synchronous Power Generating Modules, Synchronous Generating Unit and Associated
Control System Data
PC.A.5.3.1 The data submitted below are not intended to constrain any Ancillary Services Agreement
PC.A.5.3.2 The following Synchronous Generating Unit (including Synchronous Generating Units
within a Synchronous Power Generating Module) and Power Station data should be
supplied:
(a) Synchronous Generating Unit Parameters
Rated terminal volts (kV)
Maximum terminal voltage set point (kV)

Terminal voltage set point step resolution – if not continuous (kV)

* Rated MVA
* Rated MW
* Minimum Generation MW
* Short circuit ratio
Direct axis synchronous reactance
* Direct axis transient reactance
Direct axis sub-transient reactance
Direct axis short-circuit transient time constant
Direct axis short-circuit sub-transient time constant
Quadrature axis synchronous reactance
Quadrature axis sub-transient reactance
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
46 of 93
 Quadrature axis short-circuit sub-transient time constant.
Stator time constant
Stator leakage reactance
Armature winding direct-current resistance.
Note: The above data item relating to armature winding direct-current resistance
need only be supplied with respect to Generating Units commissioned after
1st March 1996 and in cases where, for whatever reason, the Generator or the
Network Operator, as the case may be is aware of the value of the relevant
parameter.
* Turbogenerator inertia constant (MWsec/MVA)
Rated field current (amps) at Rated MW and MVAr output and at rated terminal
voltage.
Field current (amps) open circuit saturation curve for Generating Unit terminal
voltages ranging from 50% to 120% of rated value in 10% steps as derived from
appropriate manufacturers test certificates.
(b) Parameters for Generating Unit Step-up Transformers
* Rated MVA
Voltage ratio
* Positive sequence reactance (at max, min, & nominal tap)
Positive sequence resistance (at max, min, & nominal tap)
Zero phase sequence reactance
Tap changer range
Tap changer step size
Tap changer type: on load or off circuit
(c) Excitation Control System parameters
Note: The data items requested under Option 1 below may continue to be provided in
relation to Generating Units connected to the System at 09 January 1995 (in this
paragraph, the "relevant date") or the new data items set out under Option 2 may be
provided. Generators or Network Operators, as the case may be, must supply the data
as set out under Option 2 (and not those under Option 1) for Generating Unit excitation
control systems commissioned after the relevant date, those Generating Unit excitation
control systems recommissioned for any reason such as refurbishment after the relevant
date and Generating Unit excitation control systems where, as a result of testing or other
process, the Generator or Network Operator, as the case may be, is aware of the data
items listed under Option 2 in relation to that Generating Unit.
For any excitation control systems associated with a Generating Unit or Synchronous
Power Generating Module with a Completion Date after 1 September 2022 and any
Generating Unit or Synchronous Power Generating Module excitation control
systems subject to a control system change or Modification after 1 September 2022, the
Generator should supply the control system model in accordance with PC.A.9. For the
avoidance of doubt, excitation control system models as detailed in PC.A.9 maybe
submitted for any Generating Unit regardless of Completion Date as an alternative to
block diagrams detailed below. The control system model of the Excitation System shall
include but not limited to, the PSS if fitted, Over-excitation Limiter, Under-excitation
Limiter and should have been verified as far as reasonably practicable by simulation
studies as representing the expected behaviour of the control system. Additionally the
data items listed under Option 2 below are also required.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

47 of 93
 Option 1
DC gain of Excitation Loop
Rated field voltage
Maximum field voltage
Minimum field voltage
Maximum rate of change of field voltage (rising)
Maximum rate of change of field voltage (falling)
Details of Excitation Loop described in block diagram form showing transfer
functions of individual elements.
Dynamic characteristics of Over-excitation Limiter
Dynamic characteristics of Under-excitation Limiter

Option 2
Excitation System Nominal Response
Rated Field Voltage
No-Load Field Voltage
Excitation System On-Load Positive Ceiling Voltage
Excitation System No-Load Positive Ceiling Voltage
Excitation System No-Load Negative Ceiling Voltage
Stator Current Limiter (applicable only to Synchronous Power Generating
Modules)
Details of Excitation System (including PSS if fitted) described in block diagram
form showing transfer functions of individual elements.
Details of Over-excitation Limiter described in block diagram form showing transfer
functions of individual elements.
Details of Under-excitation Limiter described in block diagram form showing
transfer functions of individual elements.
The block diagrams submitted after 1 January 2009 in respect of the Excitation
System (including the Over-excitation Limiter and the Under-excitation Limiter)
for Generating Units with a Completion date after 1 January 2009 or subject to a
Modification to the Excitation System after 1 January 2009, should have been
verified as far as reasonably practicable by simulation studies as representing the
expected behaviour of the system.
(d) Governor Parameters
Incremental Droop values (in %) are required for each Generating Unit at six MW
loading points (MLP1 to MLP6) as detailed in PC.A.5.5.1 (this data item needs only be
provided for Large Power Stations).

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

48 of 93
 Note: The data items requested under Option 1 below may continue to be provided by
Generators in relation to Generating Units on the System at 09 January 1995 (in this
paragraph, the "relevant date") or they may provide the new data items set out under
Option 2. Generators must supply the data as set out under Option 2 (and not those
under Option 1) for Generating Unit governor control systems commissioned after the
relevant date, those Generating Unit governor control systems recommissioned for any
reason such as refurbishment after the relevant date and Generating Unit governor
control systems where, as a result of testing or other process, the Generator is aware of
the data items listed under Option 2 in relation to that Generating Unit. EU Generators
are also required to submit the data as set out in option 2. Additional data required from
EU Generators which own or operate Type C or Type D Power Generating Modules
are marked in brackets with an asterisk (eg (*)). For the avoidance of doubt, items
marked as (*) need not be supplied by GB Generators.
For any governor control systems associated with a Generating Unit or Synchronous
Power Generating Module with a Completion Date after 1 September 2022 and any
Generating Unit or Synchronous Power Generating Module governor control systems
subject to a control system change or Modification after 1 September 2022, the
Generator should supply the control system model in accordance with PC.A.9. For the
avoidance of doubt, governor control system models as detailed in PC.A.9 maybe
submitted for any Generating Unit regardless of Completion Date as an alternative to
governor block diagrams. The control system model shall include but not limited to, the
governor and prime mover dynamics such as steam flow, boiler, water flow which could
impact on representation of the requirements required by the Grid Code. Additional the
data items listed under Option 2 are also required.
Option 1
(i) Governor Parameters (for Reheat Steam Units)
HP governor average gain MW/Hz
Speeder motor setting range
HP governor valve time constant
HP governor valve opening limits
HP governor valve rate limits
Reheater time constant (Active Energy stored in reheater)

IP governor average gain MW/Hz

IP governor setting range
IP governor valve time constant
IP governor valve opening limits
IP governor valve rate limits

Details of acceleration sensitive elements in HP & IP governor loop.

A governor block diagram showing transfer functions of individual elements.

(ii) Governor Parameters (for Non-Reheat Steam Units and Gas Turbine Units)
Governor average gain
Speeder motor setting range
Time constant of steam or fuel governor valve
Governor valve opening limits
Governor valve rate limits
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
49 of 93
 Time constant of turbine
Governor block diagram

The following data items need only be supplied for Large Power Stations:
(iii) Boiler & Steam Turbine Data
Boiler Time Constant (Stored Active Energy) s
HP turbine response ratio:
proportion of Primary Response arising from HP turbine %
HP turbine response ratio:
proportion of High Frequency Response arising from HP turbine %
[End of Option 1]

Option 2
(i) Governor and associated prime mover Parameters - All Generating Units (including
Synchronous Generating Units within a Synchronous Power Generating
Module)
Governor Block Diagram showing transfer function of individual elements
including acceleration sensitive elements.
Governor Time Constant (in seconds)
Speeder Motor Setting Range (%)
Average Gain (MW/Hz)
Governor Deadband need only be provided for Large Power Stations owned
and operated by GB Generators (and both Frequency Response Deadband
and Frequency Response Insensitivity should be supplied in respect of Type
C and D Power Generating Modules within Large Power Stations and
Medium Power Stations excluding Embedded Medium Power Stations not
subject to a Bilateral Agreement*) owned and oprated by EU Code
Generators.
- Maximum Setting Hz
- Normal Setting Hz
- Minimum Setting Hz
Where the Generating Unit governor does not have a selectable Governor
Deadband (or Frequency Response Deadband and Frequency Response
Insensitivity)* facility as specified above, then the actual value of the Governor
Deadband or (Frequency Response Deadband and Frequency Response
Insensitivity)* need only be provided.
The block diagrams submitted after 1 January 2009 in respect of the governor
system for Generating Units with a Completion date after 1 January 2009 or
subject to a Modification to the governor system after 1 January 2009, should
have been verified as far as reasonably practicable by simulation studies as
representing the expected behaviour of the system.

(ii) Governor and associated prime mover Parameters - Steam Units

HP Valve Time Constant (in seconds)
HP Valve Opening Limits (%)
HP Valve Opening Rate Limits (%/second)

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

50 of 93
 HP Valve Closing Rate Limits (%/second)
HP Turbine Time Constant (in seconds)

IP Valve Time Constant (in seconds)

IP Valve Opening Limits (%)
IP Valve Opening Rate Limits (%/second)
IP Valve Closing Rate Limits (%/second)
IP Turbine Time Constant (in seconds)

LP Valve Time Constant (in seconds)

LP Valve Opening Limits (%)
LP Valve Opening Rate Limits (%/second)
LP Valve Closing Rate Limits (%/second)
LP Turbine Time Constant (in seconds)
Reheater Time Constant (in seconds)
Boiler Time Constant (in seconds)
HP Power Fraction (%)
IP Power Fraction (%)

(iii) Governor and associated prime mover Parameters - Gas Turbine Units
Inlet Guide Vane Time Constant (in seconds)
Inlet Guide Vane Opening Limits (%)
Inlet Guide Vane Opening Rate Limits (%/second)
Inlet Guide Vane Closing Rate Limits (%/second)
Fuel Valve Constant (in seconds)
Fuel Valve Opening Limits (%)
Fuel Valve Opening Rate Limits (%/second)
Fuel Valve Closing Rate Limits (%/second)
Waste Heat Recovery Boiler Time Constant (in seconds)

(iv) Governor and associated prime mover Parameters - Hydro Generating Units
Guide Vane Actuator Time Constant (in seconds)
Guide Vane Opening Limits (%)
Guide Vane Opening Rate Limits (%/second)
Guide Vane Closing Rate Limits (%/second)
Water Time Constant (in seconds)
(v) Governor Parameters – Synchronous Electricity Storage Units
For Synchronous Electricity Storage Modules which are derived from
compressed air energy storage systems, the following data should be provided.
For other Synchronous Electricity Storage Modules, data should be supplied
as required by The Company in accordance with PC.A.7
Valve Actuator Time Constant (in seconds)

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

51 of 93
 Valve Opening Limits (%)
Valve Opening Rate Limits (%/second)
Valve Closing Rate Limits (%/second)
[End of Option 2]

(e) Unit Control Options

The following data items need only be supplied with respect to Large Power Stations:
Maximum Droop %
Normal Droop %
Minimum Droop %
Maximum Governor Deadband or (maximum Frequency Response Deadband
and maximum Frequency Response Insensitivity*) Hz
Normal Governor Deadband or (normal Frequency Response Deadband and
normal Frequency Response Insensitivity*) Hz
Minimum Governor Deadband or (minimum Frequency Response Deadband and
minimum Frequency Response Insensitivity*) Hz
Maximum output Governor Deadband (or maximum output Frequency Response
Deadband and maximum Frequency Response Insensitivity*) MW
Normal output Governor Deadband (or normal output Frequency Response
Deadband and normal output Frequency Response Insensitivity*) MW
Minimum output Governor Deadband or (minimum output Frequency Response
Deadband and minimum output Frequency Response Insensitivity*) MW
Frequency settings between which Unit Load Controller Droop applies:
- Maximum Hz
- Normal Hz
- Minimum Hz
State if sustained response is normally selected.
(* GB Generators which are not required to satisfy the requirements of the European
Connection Conditions are not required to supply Frequency Response
Insensitivity or Frequency Response Deadband data but should instead supply
Governor Deadband data). For the avoidance of doubt, EU Code Generators in
respect of Type C and Type D Power Generating Modules are required to supply
Frequency Response Deadband and Frequency Response Insensitity data).

(f) Plant Flexibility Performance

The following data items need only be supplied with respect to Large Power Stations,
and should be provided with respect to each Genset:
# Run-up rate to Registered Capacity,
# Run-down rate from Registered Capacity,
# Synchronising Generation,
Regulating range
Load rejection capability while still Synchronised and able to supply Load.

Data items marked with a hash (#) should be applicable to a Genset which has been
Shutdown for 48 hours.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

52 of 93
 * Data items marked with an asterisk are already requested under partx1, PC.A.3.3.1, to
facilitate an early assessment by The Company as to whether detailed stability studies
will be required before an offer of terms for a CUSC Contract can be made. Such data
items have been repeated here merely for completeness and need not, of course, be
resubmitted unless their values, known or estimated, have changed.

(g) Generating Unit Mechanical Parameters

It is occasionally necessary for The Company to assess the interaction between the
Total System and the mechanical components of Generating Units. For Generating
Units (including Synchronous Generating Units within a Synchronous Power
Generating Module) with a Completion Date on or after 01 April 2015,
or;
with a Completion Date before 01 April 2015 when requested by The Company in
accordance with good industry practice and without undue delay,
the following data items should be supplied:
The number of turbine generator masses.
Diagram showing the Inertia and parameters for each turbine generator mass (kgm2)
and Stiffness constants and parameters between each turbine generator mass for
the complete drive train (Nm/rad).
Number of poles.
Relative power applied to different parts of the turbine (%).
Torsional mode frequencies (Hz).
Modal damping decrement factors for the different mechanical modes.

PC.A.5.4 Power Park Module, Non-Synchronous Generating Unit and Associated Control System Data
PC.A.5.4.1 The data submitted below are not intended to constrain any Ancillary Services Agreement
PC.A.5.4.2 The following Power Park Unit, Power Park Module and Power Station data should be
supplied in the case of a Power Park Module not connected to the Total System by a DC
Converter or HVDC System (and in the case of PC.A.5.4.2(f) any OTSUA):
Where a Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report exists in respect of the model of the
Power Park Unit, the User may subject to The Company’s agreement, opt to reference the
Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report as an alternative to the provision of data in
accordance with PC.A.5.4.2 except for:
(1) the section marked thus # at sub paragraph (b); and
(2) all of the harmonic and flicker parameters required under sub paragraph (h); and
(3) all of the site specific model parameters relating to the voltage or frequency control
systems required under sub paragraphs (d) and (e),
which must be provided by the User in addition to the Manufacturer’s Data & Performance
Report reference.
(a) Power Park Unit model
A mathematical model of each type of Power Park Unit (including Electricity Storage
Units) capable of representing its transient and dynamic behaviour under both small and
large disturbance conditions. The model shall include non-linear effects and represent all
equipment relevant to the dynamic performance of the Power Park Unit as agreed with
The Company. The model shall be suitable for the study of balanced, root mean square,
positive phase sequence time-domain behaviour, excluding the effects of electromagnetic
transients, harmonic and sub-harmonic frequencies.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

53 of 93
 The model shall accurately represent the overall performance of the Power Park Unit
over its entire operating range including that which is inherent to the Power Park Unit
and that which is achieved by use of supplementary control systems providing either
continuous or stepwise control. Model resolution should be sufficient to accurately
represent Power Park Unit behaviour both in response to operation of Transmission
System protection and in the context of longer-term simulations.

The overall structure of the model shall include:

(i) any supplementary control signal modules not covered by (c), (d) and (e) below.
(ii) any blocking, deblocking and protective trip features that are part of the Power Park Unit
(e.g. “crowbar”).
(iii) any other information required to model the Power Park Unit behaviour to meet the
model functional requirement described above.
The model shall be submitted in the form of a transfer function block diagram and may be
accompanied by dynamic and algebraic equations.
This model shall display all the transfer functions and their parameter values, any non wind-
up logic, signal limits and non-linearities.
The submitted Power Park Unit model and the supplementary control signal module models
covered by (c), (d) and (e) below shall have been validated and this shall be confirmed by the
Generator. The validation shall be based on comparing the submitted model simulation results
against measured test results. Validation evidence shall also be submitted and this shall
include the simulation and measured test results. The latter shall include appropriate short-
circuit tests. In the case of an Embedded Medium Power Station not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement the Network Operator will provide The Company with the validation evidence if
requested by The Company. The validation of the supplementary control signal module
models covered by (c), (d) and (e) below applies only to a Power Park Module with a
Completion Date after 1 January 2009 or Power Park Modules within a Power Generating
Module.
(b) Power Park Unit parameters
* Rated MVA
* Rated MW
* Rated terminal voltage
* Average site air density (kg/m3), maximum site air density (kg/m3) and minimum site
air density (kg/m3) for the year (as applicable)
Year for which the air density is submitted (as applicable)
Number of pole pairs (as applicable)
Blade swept area (m2) (as applicable)
Gear box ratio (as applicable)
Mechanical drive train (as applicable)
For each Power Park Unit, details of the parameters of the drive train (as applicable)
represented as an equivalent two mass model should be provided. This model
should accurately represent the behaviour of the complete drive train for the
purposes of power system analysis studies and should include the following data
items:-
Equivalent inertia constant (MWsec/MVA) of the first mass (e.g. wind turbine
rotor and blades) at minimum, synchronous and rated speeds
Equivalent inertia constant (MWsec/MVA) of the second mass (e.g. generator
rotor) at minimum, synchronous and rated speeds
Equivalent shaft stiffness between the two masses (Nm/electrical radian)
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
54 of 93
 Additionally, for Power Park Units that are induction generators (e.g. squirrel cage,
doubly-fed) driven by wind turbines:
* Stator resistance
* Stator reactance
* Magnetising reactance.
* Rotor resistance.(at starting)
* Rotor resistance.(at rated running)
* Rotor reactance (at starting)
* Rotor reactance (at rated running)
Additionally for doubly-fed induction generators only:
The generator rotor speed range (minimum and maximum speeds in RPM)
The optimum generator rotor speed versus wind speed submitted in tabular
format
Power converter rating (MVA)

The rotor power coefficient (Cp) versus tip speed ratio () curves for a range of blade
angles (where applicable) together with the corresponding values submitted in
tabular format. The tip speed ratio () is defined as R/U where  is the angular
velocity of the rotor, R is the radius of the wind turbine rotor and U is the wind speed.
The electrical power output versus generator rotor speed for a range of wind speeds
over the entire operating range of the Power Park Unit, together with the
corresponding values submitted in tabular format.
The blade angle versus wind speed curve together with the corresponding values
submitted in tabular format.
The electrical power output versus wind speed over the entire operating range of the
Power Park Unit, together with the corresponding values submitted in tabular
format.
Transfer function block diagram, including parameters and description of the
operation of the power electronic converter and fault ride through capability (where
applicable). For any Power Park Units in a Power Park Module with a Completion
Date after 1 September 2022 and any Power Park Units subject to a control system
change or Modification after 1 September 2022 control system models in
accordance with PC.A.9 should be supplied. For the avoidance of doubt, a User may
submit control system models as detailed in PC.A.9 for any Power Park Unit
regardless of Power Park Module Completion Date as an alternative to this
paragraph.

For a Power Park Unit consisting of a synchronous machine in combination with a back
to back DC Converter or HVDC System, or for a Power Park Unit not driven by a wind
turbine, the data to be supplied shall be agreed with The Company in accordance with
PC.A.7.

(c) Torque / speed and blade angle control systems and parameters
For the type of Power Park Unit (as applicable), details of the torque / speed controller
and blade angle controller in the case of a wind turbine and power limitation functions
(where applicable) described in block diagram form showing transfer functions and
parameters of individual elements.
(d) Voltage/Reactive Power/Power Factor control system parameters

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

55 of 93
 For the Power Park Unit and Power Park Module details of voltage/Reactive
Power/Power Factor controller (and PSS if fitted) described in block diagram form
showing transfer functions and parameters of individual elements.
(e) Frequency control system parameters
For the Power Park Unit and Power Park Module details of the Frequency controller
described in block diagram form showing transfer functions and parameters of individual
elements.
(f) Protection
Details of settings for the following Protection relays (to include): Under Frequency, over
Frequency, under voltage, over voltage, rotor over current, stator over current, high wind
speed shut down level.

(g) Complete Power Park Unit model, parameters and controls

(i) For any Power Park Units in a Power Park Module with a Completion Date after 1
September 2022 and any Power Park Units and/or Power Park Module(s) subject to a
control system change or Modification after 1 September 2022, control system models
in accordance with PC.A.9 should be supplied covering the full information required under
PC.A.5.4.2 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) and (f).
(ii) For any Power Park Units in a Power Park Module with a Completion Date before
1 September 2022 as an alternative to PC.A.5.4.2 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) and (f), is the
submission of a single complete model that consists of the full information required under
PC.A.5.4.2 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) and (f) provided that all the information required under
PC.A.5.4.2 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) and (f) individually is clearly identifiable. For the avoidance
of doubt, a User may submit control system models as detailed in PC.A.9 for any Power
Park Unit or Power Park Module regardless of Completion Date as an alternative to
this clause.
(h) Harmonic and flicker parameters
When connecting a Power Park Module, it is necessary for The Company to evaluate
the production of flicker and harmonics on the National Electricity Transmission
System and User's Systems. At The Company's reasonable request, the User (a
Network Operator in the case of an Embedded Power Park Module not subject to a
Bilateral Agreement) is required to submit the following data (as defined in IEC 61400-
21 (2001)) for each Power Park Unit:-
Flicker coefficient for continuous operation.
Flicker step factor.
Number of switching operations in a 10 minute window.
Number of switching operations in a 2 hour window.
Voltage change factor.
Current Injection at each harmonic for each Power Park Unit and for each Power
Park Module.

* Data items marked with an asterisk are already requested under part 1, PC.A.3.3.1, to
facilitate an early assessment by The Company as to whether detailed stability studies
will be required before an offer of terms for a CUSC Contract can be made. Such data
items have been repeated here merely for completeness and need not, of course, be
resubmitted unless their values, known or estimated, have changed.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

56 of 93
PC.A.5.4.3 DC Converter and HVDC Systems
PC.A.5.4.3.1 For a DC Converter at a DC Converter Station or an HVDC System connected to the Total
System by a DC Converter or HVDC System (or in the case of OTSUA which includes an
OTSDUW DC Converter) the following information for each DC Converter, HVDC System
and DC Network should be supplied:
(a) DC Converter and HVDC System parameters
* Rated MW per pole for transfer in each direction;
* DC Converter type (i.e. current or voltage source (including a HVDC Converter in
an HVDC System));
* Number of poles and pole arrangement;
* Rated DC voltage/pole (kV);
* Return path arrangement;

(b) DC Converter and HVDC System transformer parameters

Rated MVA
Nominal primary voltage (kV);
Nominal secondary (converter-side) voltage(s) (kV);
Winding and earthing arrangement;
Positive phase sequence reactance at minimum, maximum and nominal tap;
Positive phase sequence resistance at minimum, maximum and nominal tap;
Zero phase sequence reactance;
Tap-changer range in %;
number of tap-changer steps;
(c) DC Network parameters
Rated DC voltage per pole;
Rated DC current per pole;
Single line diagram of the complete DC Network and HVDC System;
Details of the complete DC Network, including resistance, inductance and
capacitance of all DC cables and/or DC lines and HVDC System;
Details of any DC reactors (including DC reactor resistance), DC capacitors and/or
DC-side filters that form part of the DC Network and/or HVDC System;
(d) AC filter reactive compensation equipment parameters
Note: The data provided pursuant to this paragraph must not include any contribution
from reactive compensation plant.
Total number of AC filter banks.
Type of equipment (e.g. fixed or variable)
Single line diagram of filter arrangement and connections;
Reactive Power rating for each AC filter bank, capacitor bank or operating range of
each item of reactive compensation equipment, at rated voltage;
Performance chart showing Reactive Power capability of the DC Converter and
HVDC System, as a function of MW transfer, with all filters and reactive
compensation plant, belonging to the DC Converter Station or HVDC System
working correctly.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

57 of 93
 Note: Details in PC.A.5.4.3.1 are required for each DC Converter connected to the DC
Network and HVDC System, unless each is identical or where the data has already been
submitted for an identical DC Converter or HVDC System at another Connection Point.
Note: For a Power Park Module and DC Connected Power Park Module connected to the
Grid Entry Point or (User System Entry Point if Embedded) by a DC Converter or HVDC
System the equivalent inertia and fault infeed at the Power Park Unit should be given.
DC Converter and HVDC System Control System Models
PC.A.5.4.3.2 The following data is required by The Company to represent DC Converters and associated
DC Networks and HVDC Systems (and including OTSUA which includes an OTSDUW DC
Converter) in dynamic power system simulations,
(a) For any any DC Converters and HVDC Systems with a Completion Date before 1
September 2022 in which the AC power system is typically represented by a positive
sequence equivalent, it is acceptable to represent DC Converters and HVDC Systems
by simplified equations rather than to the switching device level.
(i) Static VDC-IDC (DC voltage - DC current) characteristics, for both the rectifier and inverter
modes for a current source converter. Static VDC-PDC (DC voltage - DC power)
characteristics, for both the rectifier and inverter modes for a voltage source converter.
Transfer function block diagram including parameters representation of the control
systems of each DC Converter and of the DC Converter Station and the HVDC System,
for both the rectifier and inverter modes. A suitable model would feature the DC
Converter or HVDC Converter firing angle as the output variable.
(ii) Transfer function block diagram representation including parameters of the DC
Converter or HVDC Converter transformer tap changer control systems, including time
delays
(iii) Transfer function block diagram representation including parameters of AC filter and
reactive compensation equipment control systems, including any time delays.
(iv) Transfer function block diagram representation including parameters of any Frequency
and/or load control systems.
(v) Transfer function block diagram representation including parameters of any small signal
modulation controls such as power oscillation damping controls or sub-synchronous
oscillation damping controls, that have not been submitted as part of the above control
system data.
(vi) Transfer block diagram representation of the Reactive Power control at converter ends
for a voltage source converter.
In addition and where not provided for above, HVDC System Owners and Generators in
respect of OTSDUW DC Converters who are also EU Code Users shall also provide the
following dynamic simulation sub-models
(i) HVDC Converter unit models
(ii) AC component models
(iii) DC Grid models
(iv) Voltage and power controller
(v) Special control features if applicable (eg power oscillation damping (POD) function,
subsynchronous torsional interaction (SSTI) control;
(vi) Multi terminal control, if applicable
(vii) HVDC System protection models as agreed between The Company and the HVDC
System Owner
HVDC System Owners are also required to supply an equivalent model of the control system
when adverse control interactions may result with HVDC Converter Stations and other
connections in close proximity if requested by The Company. The equivalent model shall
contain all necessary data for the realistic simulation of the adverse control interactions.
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
58 of 93
 (b) For any DC Converters and HVDC Systems with a Completion Date after 1 September
2022 and any DC Converters and HVDC Systems subject to a control system change or
Modification after 1 September 2022, control system models in accordance with PC.A.9
should be supplied covering the full functionality required under PC.A.5.4.3.2 (a).
For the avoidance of doubt a User may submit control system models as detailed in PC.A.9
for any DC Converters and HVDC Systems regardless of Completion Date as an alternative
to PC.A.5.4.3.2(a).
Plant Flexibility Performance
PC.A.5.4.3.3 The following information on plant flexibility and performance should be supplied (and also in
respect of OTSUA which includes an OTSDUW DC Converter):
(i) Nominal and maximum (emergency) loading rate with the DC Converter or HVDC
Converter in rectifier mode.
(ii) Nominal and maximum (emergency) loading rate with the DC Converter or HVDC
Converter in inverter mode.
(iii) Maximum recovery time, to 90% of pre-fault loading, following an AC system fault or
severe voltage depression.
(iv) Maximum recovery time, to 90% of pre-fault loading, following a transient DC Network
fault.
Harmonic Assessment Information
PC.A.5.4.3.4 DC Converter owners and HVDC System Owners shall provide such additional further
information as required by The Company in order that compliance with CC.6.1.5 or ECC.6.1.5
can be demonstrated.

* Data items marked with an asterisk are already requested under part 1, PC.A.3.3.1, to
facilitate an early assessment by The Company as to whether detailed stability studies will be
required before an offer of terms for a CUSC Contract can be made. Such data items have
been repeated here merely for completeness and need not, of course, be resubmitted unless
their values, known or estimated, have changed.
PC.A.5.5 Response Data For Frequency Changes
The information detailed below is required to describe the actual frequency response capability
profile as illustrated in Figure CC.A.3.1 of the Connection Conditions or Figure ECC.A.3.1
of the European Connection Conditions, and need only be provided for each:
(i) Genset at Large Power Stations; and
(ii) Generating Unit (including Synchronous Generating Units within a Synchronous
Power Generating Module), Power Park Module (including a DC Connected Power
Park Module) or CCGT Module at a Medium Power Station or DC Converter Station
or HVDC System that has agreed to provide Frequency response in accordance with a
CUSC Contract.
In the case of (ii) above for the rest of this PC.A.5.5 where reference is made to Gensets,
it shall include such Generating Units (including Synchronous Generating Units within
a Synchronous Power Generating Module), CCGT Modules, Power Park Modules
(including DC Connected Power Park Modules), HVDC Systems and DC Converters
as appropriate, but excludes OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus utilising OTSDUW DC
Converters.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

59 of 93
 In this PC.A.5.5, for a CCGT Module with more than one Generating Unit, the phrase
Minimum Generation or Minimum Regulating Level applies to the entire CCGT Module
operating with all Generating Units (including Synchronous Generating Units within a
Synchronous Power Generating Module) Synchronised to the System. Similarly for a
Power Park Module (including a DC Connected Power Park Module) with more than one
Power Park Unit, the phrase Minimum Generation or Minimum Regulating Level applies
to the entire Power Park Module operating with all Power Park Units Synchronised to the
System.
PC.A.5.5.1 MW Loading Points At Which Data Is Required
Response values are required at six MW loading points (MLP1 to MLP6) for each Genset.
Primary and Secondary Response values need not be provided for MW loading points which
are below Minimum Generation or Minimum Stable Operating Level. MLP1 to MLP6 must
be provided to the nearest MW.
Prior to the Genset being first Synchronised, the MW loading points must take the following
values :
MLP1 Designed Minimum Operating Level or Minimum Regulating Level
MLP2 Minimum Generation or Minimum Stable Operating Level
MLP3 70% of Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity
MLP4 80% of Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity
MLP5 95% of Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity
MLP6 Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity
When data is provided after the Genset is first Synchronised, the MW loading points may
take any value between the Designed Minimum Operating Level or Minimum Regulating
Level and Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity but the value of the Designed
Minimum Operating Level or Minimum Regulating Level must still be provided if it does not
form one of the MW loading points.

PC.A.5.5.2 Primary And Secondary Response To Frequency Fall

Primary and Secondary Response values for a -0.5Hz ramp are required at six MW loading
points (MLP1 to MLP6) as detailed above
PC.A.5.5.3 High Frequency Response To Frequency Rise
High Frequency Response values for a +0.5Hz ramp are required at six MW loading points
(MLP1 to MLP6) as detailed above.
PC.A.5.5.4 Each Generator or Defence Service Provider or Restoration Contractor or Non-
Embedded Customer in respect of an Electricity Storage Module, shall provide Frequency
response curves that demonstrate the ability of their Electricity Storage Modules to transition
from a mode analogous to Demand to a mode analogous to generation (excluding Auxiliary
Supplies) within a period of 20 seconds or less in accordance with the requirements of
ECC.6.3.7.2.3, unless the provisions of ECC.6.3.7.2.3.1 apply where the requirements of
OC6.6.6. relate.
PC.A.5.6 Mothballed Power Generating Module, Mothballed Generating Unit, Mothballed Power Park
Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules), Mothballed HVDC Systems or
Mothballed DC Converter at a DC Converter Station And Alternative Fuel Information
Data identified under this section PC.A.5.6 must be submitted as required under PC.A.1.2 and
at The Company’s reasonable request.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

60 of 93
 In the case of Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement,
Embedded HVDC Systems not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC
Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement, upon request from The Company
each Network Operator shall provide the information required in PC.A.5.6.1, PC.A.5.6.2,
PC.A.5.6.3 and PC.A.5.6.4 on respect of such Embedded Medium Power Stations and
Embedded DC Converters Stations and Embedded HVDC Systems with their System.
PC.A.5.6.1 Mothballed Generating Unit Information
Generators, HVDC System Owners and DC Converter Station owners must supply with
respect to each Mothballed Power Generating Module, Mothballed Generating Unit,
Mothballed Power Park Module (including a DC Connected Power Park Module),
Mothballed HVDC System or Mothballed DC Converter at a DC Converter Station the
estimated MW output which could be returned to service within the following time periods from
the time that a decision to return was made:
< 1 month;
1-2 months;
2-3 months;
3-6 months;
6-12 months; and
>12 months.
The return to service time should be determined in accordance with Good Industry Practice
assuming normal working arrangements and normal plant procurement lead times. The MW
output values should be the incremental values made available in each time period as further
described in the DRC.

PC.A.5.6.2 Generators, HVDC System Owners and DC Converter Station owners must also notify The
Company of any significant factors which may prevent the Mothballed Power Generating
Module, Mothballed Generating Unit, Mothballed Power Park Module (including DC
Connected Power Park Modules), Mothballed HVDC Systems or Mothballed DC
Converter at a DC Converter Station achieving the estimated values provided under
PC.A.5.6.1 above, excluding factors relating to Transmission Entry Capacity.
PC.A.5.6.3 Alternative Fuel Information
The following data items must be supplied with respect to each Generating Unit (including
Synchronous Generating Units within a Synchronous Power Generating Module) whose
main fuel is gas.
For each alternative fuel type (if facility installed):
(a) Alternative fuel type e.g. oil distillate, alternative gas supply
(b) For the changeover from main to alternative fuel:
- Time to carry out off-line and on-line fuel changeover (minutes).
- Maximum output following off-line and on-line changeover (MW).
- Maximum output during on-line fuel changeover (MW).
- Maximum operating time at full load assuming typical and maximum possible stock
levels (hours).
- Maximum rate of replacement of depleted stocks (MWh electrical/day) on the basis
of Good Industry Practice.
- Is changeover to alternative fuel used in normal operating arrangements?
- Number of successful changeovers carried out in the last of The Company’s
Financial Year (choice of 0, 1-5, 6-10, 11-20, >20).

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

61 of 93
 (c) For the changeover back to main fuel:
- Time to carry out off-line and on-line fuel changeover (minutes).
- Maximum output during on-line fuel changeover (MW).
PC.A.5.6.4 Generators must also notify The Company of any significant factors and their effects which
may prevent the use of alternative fuels achieving the estimated values provided under
PC.A.5.6.3 above (e.g. emissions limits, distilled water stocks etc.)
PC.A.5.7 System Restoration Related Information
PC.A.5.7.1 Data identified under this section PC.A.5.7.1 must be submitted as required under PC.A.1.2.
This information may also be requested by The Company during System Restoration and
should be provided by Generators, HVDC System Owners and DC Converter Station
Owners where reasonably possible. For the avoidance of doubt, Generators in this section
PC.A.5.7.1 means each Generator in respect of their BM Unit at any directly connected
Power Station or Large Power Station (excluding Generators in respect of Embedded
Medium Power Stations and Embedded Small Power Stations).

The data items/text in (a) and (b) below must be supplied, by each Generator and HVDC
System Owner and DC Converter Station owner to The Company. In the case of
Generators, the data supplied should be with respect to each BM Unit at any directly
connected Power Station or Large Power Station. For the avoidance of doubt, the data
required under PC.A.5.7.1(a) and (b) below, i) does not need to be supplied in respect of
Restoration Contractors Plant and ii), only needs to be supplied in respect of each BM Unit
at a Large Power Station or any directly connected Power Station and does not need to
include Generating Unit data;

(a) The expected time for each BM Unit to be Synchronised following a Total Shutdown
or Partial Shutdown. The assessment should include the Power Stations or HVDC
Systems or DC Converter Stations ability to re-synchronise all BM Units, if all were
running immediately prior to the Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown once auxiliary
supplies have been restored, or supplies have been restored to the User’s Site where
the Plant was running immediately prior to the Shutdown) and at time intervals of 12
hours, 24 hours, 36 hours, 48 hours and 72 hours before the BM Unit had been
Shutdown. Additionally this should highlight any specific issues (i.e. those that would
have an impact on the BM Unit’s time to be Synchronised) that may arise, as time
progresses without external supplies being restored or the availability of primary fuel
supplies. In submitting this data, Generators, HVDC System Owners and DC
Converter Station owners should be aware of the requirements in CC.7.11 or
ECC.7.11.

(b) Block Loading Capability. This should be provided in either graphical or tabular
format showing the estimated block loading capability from 0MW to Registered
Capacity and the time between each incremental step. Any particular Active Power
loading points at which the BM Unit should be operated until further changes in output
can be accommodated should also be identified. The data of each BM Unit should be
provided for the condition of a Generating Unit (which was running immediately prior
to the Shutdown) and at time intervals of 12 hours, 24 hours, 36 hours, 48 hours and
72 hours before the BM Unit had been Shutdown. In the case of an HVDC System
or DC Converter Station, data should be provided when the HVDC System or DC
Converter Station (which was running immediately prior to the Shutdown) and at
time intervals of 12 hours, 24 hours, 36 hours, 48 hours and 72 hours prior to the
HVDC System or DC Converter Station had been Shutdown. The block loading
assessment should be done against a frequency variation of 47.5Hz – 52Hz.

PC.A.5.7.2 Where a Network Operator has a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan in place, the data
specified in this section shall be submitted as required under PC.A.1.2 by Network Operators
to The Company annually by calendar week 28. This information may also be requested by
The Company from the relevant Network Operator during System Restoration and should
be provided by Network Operators where reasonably practicable. Restoration Contractors
party to a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan shall, where reasonably practicable, submit
the relevant information to the Network Operator who shall then supply the relevant
information to The Company. The following data shall be provided;
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
62 of 93
 (a) The expected time for each Restoration Contractor’s Plant to Re-Synchronise to
the Network Operator’s System following a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown.
The assessment should include the Restoration Contractor’s ability to Re-
Synchronise all their Plant, if all were running immediately prior to the Total
Shutdown or Partial Shutdown. Additionally, the data and supporting text should
highlight any specific issues (eg those that would affect the time before which the
Restoration Contractor’s Plant could be energised) that may arise as time
progresses from Shutdown without external supplies being restored or the
availability of primary fuel supplies..
(b) The Restoration Contractor’s Plants Block Loading Capability as required in
PC.A.5.7.1(b).
PC.A.5.7.3 From 31st December 2026 onwards, all Users and Restoration Contractors are required to
confirm annually they comply with the applicable requirements of OC5.7. In the case of
Generators, HVDC System Owners, DC Converter owners, Non-Embedded Customers,
and Network Operators this confirmation shall be provided in their Week 24 submission.
From 1st January 2024 until 31st December 2026, evidence to support the work Generators,
HVDC System Owners, DC Converter owners, Non-Embedded Customers, and Network
Operators are carrying out to achieve these requirements on or after 31st December 2026
shall be provided in their Week 24 submission.
PC.A.5.7.4 From 1st January 2025 onwards, Restoration Contractors, Generators, HVDC System
Owners and DC Converter owners, shall supply the governor setting information in
accordance with the applicable requirements of CC.6.3.7(g), (h) and (i) or ECC.6.3.7.3.8.

PC.A.5.8 Grid Forming Related Information

PC.A.5.8.1 The following data need only be supplied by Users (be they a GB Code User or EU Code
User) or Non-CUSC Parties who wish to offer a Grid Forming Capability as provided for
ECC.6.3.19.3. Where such a Grid Forming Capability is provided then the following data
items and models are to be supplied.
(i) Each GBGF-I shall be designed so as not to interact and affect the operation,
performance, safety or capability of other User’s Plant and Apparatus connected to
the Total System. To achieve this requirement, each User shall be required to submit
a Network Frequency Perturbation Plot and Nichols Chart (or equivalent as
agreed with The Company) which shall be assessed in accordance with the
requirements of ECP.A.3.9.3.
Each User or Non-CUSC Party is required to supply a high level equivalent
architecture diagram of their Grid Forming Plant as shown in Figure PC.A.5.8.1
together with the equivalent linear classical block diagram model (using the Laplace
Operator) of their Grid Forming Plant which should preferably be in the general
form shown in Figure PC.A.5.8.1 (a) or Figure PC.A.5.8.1 (b). When submitting
either Figure PC.A.5.8.1 (a) or Figure PC.A.5.8.1 (b), each User or Non-CUSC
Party can use their own design, that may be very different to Figures PC.A.5.8.1 (a)
or PC.A.5.8.1 (b), but should contain all relevant functions that can include simulation
models and other equivalent data and documentation.
Each User or Non-CUSC Party shall provide a model of their Grid Forming Plant
which provides a true and accurate reflection of its Grid Forming Capability.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

63 of 93
 Figure PC.A.5.8.1

Figure PC.A.5.8.1 (a) Preferred simplified diagram of a GBGF-I with a Power System
Stabiliser “PSS” that can add damping to the GBGF-I’s closed loop function shown by
the solid red line and the dotted blue line.

Figure PC.A.5.8.1 (b) – Preferred simplified diagram of a system with a droop control
ability that can add Control-Based Active Droop Power. This diagram does not add
extra closed loop damping to the GBGF-I’s closed loop function shown by the solid red
line and the dotted blue line.

(ii) In order to participate in the Grid Forming Capability market, User’s and Non-
CUSC Parties are required to provide data of their GBGF-I in accordance with
Figures PC.A.5.8.1(a) and PC.A.5.8.1(b). Users and Non-CUSC Parties in respect
of Grid Forming Plants should indicate if the data is submitted on a unit or
aggregated basis. Table PC.A.5.8.1(a) defines the notation used in Figure PC.5.8.1

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

64 of 93
 Parameter Symbol Units

The primary reactance of the Grid Xin or pu on MVA Rating of Grid

Forming Unit, in pu. Xts Forming Unit

The additional reactance, in pu, Xtr pu on MVA Rating of Grid

between the terminals of the Grid Forming Unit
Forming Unit and the Grid Entry
Point or User System Entry Point
(if Embedded).

The rated angle between the radians

Internal Voltage Source and the
input terminals of the Grid Forming
Unit.
The rated angle between the radians
Internal Voltage Source and Grid
Entry Point or User System Entry
Point (if Embedded).
The rated voltage and phase of the Voltage - pu
Internal Voltage Source of the Grid
Phase - radians
Forming Unit.
The rated electrical angle between radians
current and voltage at the input to
the Grid transformer.

Table PC.A.5.8.1

(iii) In order to participate in a Grid Forming Capability market, User’s and Non-CUSC Parties
are also required to provide the data of their GBGF-I in accordance with Table PC.A.5.8.1.2
to The Company. The details and arrangements for Users and Non-CUSC Parties
participating in this market shall be published on The Company’s Website.

Quantity Units Range User Defined Parameter

(where
Applicable)
Type of Grid Forming N/A
Plant (eg Generating Unit,
Electricity Storage
Module, Dynamic
Reactive Compensation
Equipment etc)
Maximum Continuous MVA
Rating at Registered
Capacity or Maximum
Capacity
Primary reactance Xin or pu on
Xts (see Table PC.A.5.8.1) MVA
Additional reactance Xtr pu on
(See Table PC.A.5.8.1) MVA

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

65 of 93
 Maximum Capacity MW
Active ROCOF Response MW
Power (MW) injected or
absorbed at 1Hz/s System
Frequency change (which
is the maximum frequency
change for linear operation
of the Grid Forming Plant)
Phase Jump Angle degrees 60 degrees specified
Withstand
Phase Jump Angle limit degrees 5 degrees recommended
Phase Jump Power (MW) MW
at the rated angle
Defined Active Damping MW
Power for a Grid
Oscillation Value of 0.05
Hz peak to peak at 1 Hz
The cumulative energy MWs or
delivered for a 1Hz/s MJ
System Frequency fall
from 52 Hz to 47 Hz. This is
the total Active Power
transient output of the Grid
Forming Plant
Inertia Constant (H) using MWs/MVA
equation 1 or declared in
accordance with the
simulation results of
ECP.A.3.9.4
Inertia Constant (He) MWs/MVA
using equation 2 or
declared in accordance
with the simulation results
of ECP.A.3.9.4
Continuous Overload % on MVA
Capability
Short Term duration
Overload capability
Duration of Short Term s
Overload Capability
Peak Current Rating Pu
Nominal Grid Entry Point kV
or User System Entry
Point voltage
Grid Entry Point or User - Location
System Entry Point
Continuous or defined time MVA
duration MVA Rating
Continuous or defined time MW
duration MW Rating

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

66 of 93
 For a GBGF-I the inverters pu
maximum Internal Voltage
Source (IVS) for the worst
case condition – for
example operation at
maximum exporting
Reactive Power at the
maximum AC System
voltage
Maximum Three Phase kA
Short Circuit Infeed at Grid
Entry Point or User
System Entry Point
Maximum Single Phase kA
Short Circuit Infeed at Grid
Entry Point or User
System Entry Point
Will the Grid Forming Details to
Plant contribute to any be
other form of commercial provided
service – for example
Dynamic Containment, Firm
Frequency Response,
Equivalent Damping Ζ 0.2 to 5.0 allowed
Factor.

Table PC.A.5.8.2
H = Installed MWs / Rated installed MVA
(equation 1)
He = (Active ROCOF Response Power at 1 Hz / s x System Frequency) / ( Installed MVA x 2 )
(equation 2)

PC.A.6 USERS' SYSTEM DATA

PC.A.6.1 Introduction
PC.A.6.1.1 Each User, whether connected directly via an existing Connection Point to the National
Electricity Transmission System or seeking such a direct connection, or providing terms for
connection of an Offshore Transmission System to its User System to The Company or
undertaking OTSDUW, shall provide The Company with data on its User System or
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus which relates to the Connection Site containing the
Connection Point (or Interface Points or Connection Points in the case of OTSUA) both
current and forecast, as specified in PC.A.6.2 to PC.A.6.6.
PC.A.6.1.2 Each User must reflect the system effect at the Connection Site(s) of any third party
Embedded within its User System whether existing or proposed.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

67 of 93
PC.A.6.1.3 PC.A.6.2, and PC.A.6.4 to PC.A.6.7 consist of data which is only to be supplied to The
Company at The Company’s reasonable request. In the event that The Company identifies
a reason for requiring this data, The Company shall write to the relevant User(s), requesting
the data, and explaining the reasons for the request. If the User(s) wishes, The Company
shall also arrange a meeting at which the request for data can be discussed, with the objective
of identifying the best way in which The Company’s requirements can be met. In respect of
EU Code User(s) only, The Company may request the need for electromagnetic transient
simulations at The Company’s reasonable request. Users with EU Grid Supply Points may
be required to provide electromagnetic transient simulations in relation to those EU Grid
Supply Points at The Company’s reasonable request.
Where The Company makes a request to a User for dynamic models under PC.A.6.7, each
relevant User shall ensure that the models supplied in respect of their Plant and Apparatus
reflect the true and accurate behaviour of the Plant and Apparatus as built and verified
through the Compliance Processes (CP’s) or European Compliance Processes (ECP).

PC.A.6.2 Transient Overvoltage Assessment Data

PC.A.6.2.1 It is occasionally necessary for The Company to undertake transient overvoltage
assessments (e.g. capacitor switching transients, switchgear transient recovery voltages, etc).
At The Company’s reasonable request, each User is required to provide the following data
with respect to the Connection Site (and in the case of OTSUA, Interface Points and
Connection Points), current and forecast, together with a Single Line Diagram where not
already supplied under PC.A.2.2.1, as follows:
(a) busbar layout plan(s), including dimensions and geometry showing positioning of any
current and voltage transformers, through bushings, support insulators, disconnectors,
circuit breakers, surge arresters, etc. Electrical parameters of any associated current and
voltage transformers, stray capacitances of wall bushings and support insulators, and
grading capacitances of circuit breakers;
(b) Electrical parameters and physical construction details of lines and cables connected at
that busbar. Electrical parameters of all plant e.g., transformers (including neutral
earthing impedance or zig-zag transformers, if any), series reactors and shunt
compensation equipment connected at that busbar (or to the tertiary of a transformer) or
by lines or cables to that busbar;
(c) Basic insulation levels (BIL) of all Apparatus connected directly, by lines or by cables to
the busbar;
(d) characteristics of overvoltage Protection devices at the busbar and at the termination
points of all lines, and all cables connected to the busbar;
(e) fault levels at the lower voltage terminals of each transformer connected directly or
indirectly to the National Electricity Transmission System (including OTSUA at each
Interface Point and Connection Point) without intermediate transformation;
(f) the following data is required on all transformers operating at Supergrid Voltage
throughout Great Britain and, in Scotland and Offshore, also at 132kV or greater
(including OTSUA): three or five limb cores or single phase units to be specified, and
operating peak flux density at nominal voltage;
(g) an indication of which items of equipment may be out of service simultaneously during
Planned Outage conditions.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

68 of 93
PC.A.6.3 User's Protection Data
PC.A.6.3.1 Protection
The following information is required which relates only to Protection equipment which can
trip or inter-trip or close any Connection Point circuit-breaker or any Transmission circuit-
breaker (or in the case of OTSUA, any Interface Point or Connection Point circuit breaker).
This information need only be supplied once, in accordance with the timing requirements set
out in PC.A.1.4(b), and need not be supplied on a routine annual basis thereafter, although
The Company should be notified if any of the information changes;
(a) a full description, including estimated settings, for all relays and Protection systems
installed or to be installed on the User's System;
(b) a full description of any auto-reclose facilities installed or to be installed on the User's
System, including type and time delays;
(c) a full description, including estimated settings, for all relays and Protection systems or
to be installed on the generator, generator transformer, Station Transformer and their
associated connections;
(d) for Generating Units (including Synchronous Generating Units forming part of a
Synchronous Power Generating Module but excluding Power Park Units) or Power
Park Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC Systems or
DC Converters at a DC Converter Station or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus having
(or intended to have) a circuit breaker at the generator terminal voltage, clearance times
for electrical faults within the Generating Unit (including Synchronous Generating
Units forming part of a Synchronous Power Generating Module but excluding a Power
Park Unit) or Power Park Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules)
zone, or within the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus;
(e) the most probable fault clearance time for electrical faults on any part of the User's
System directly connected to the National Electricity Transmission System including
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus; and
(f) in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, synchronisation facilities and delayed
auto reclose sequence schedules (where applicable).
(g) Restoration Contractorss and Network Operators shall provide the above Protection
data where different settings are used in respect of their Plant and Apparatus which are
associated with a Restoration Plan.
PC.A.6.4 Harmonic Studies
PC.A.6.4.1 It is occasionally necessary for The Company to evaluate the production/magnification of
harmonic distortion on the National Electricity Transmission System and User’s Systems
(and OTSUA), especially when The Company is connecting equipment such as capacitor
banks. At The Company’s reasonable request, each User is required to submit data with
respect to the Connection Site (and in the case of OTSUA, each Interface Point and
Connection Point), current and forecast, and where not already supplied under PC.A.2.2.4
and PC.A.2.2.5, as follows:
PC.A.6.4.2 Overhead lines and underground cable circuits of the User's Subtransmission System must
be differentiated and the following data provided separately for each type:
Positive phase sequence resistance;
Positive phase sequence reactance;
Positive phase sequence susceptance;
and for all transformers connecting the User's Subtransmission System and OTSDUW
Plant and Apparatus to a lower voltage:
Rated MVA;
Voltage Ratio;
Positive phase sequence resistance;
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
69 of 93
 Positive phase sequence reactance;
and at the lower voltage points of those connecting transformers:
Equivalent positive phase sequence susceptance;
Connection voltage and MVAr rating of any capacitor bank and component design
parameters if configured as a filter;
Equivalent positive phase sequence interconnection impedance with other lower voltage
points;
The minimum and maximum Demand (both MW and MVAr) that could occur;
Harmonic current injection sources in Amps at the Connection voltage points. Where the
harmonic injection current comes from a diverse group of sources, the equivalent
contribution may be established from appropriate measurements;
Details of traction loads, eg connection phase pairs, continuous variation with time, etc;
An indication of which items of equipment may be out of service simultaneously during
Planned Outage conditions.
PC.A.6.5 Voltage Assessment Studies
It is occasionally necessary for The Company to undertake detailed voltage assessment
studies (e.g., to examine potential voltage instability, voltage control co-ordination or to
calculate voltage step changes). At The Company’s reasonable request, each User is
required to submit the following data where not already supplied under PC.A.2.2.4 and
PC.A.2.2.5:
For all circuits of the User’s Subtransmission System (and any OTSUA):-
Positive Phase Sequence Reactance;
Positive Phase Sequence Resistance;
Positive Phase Sequence Susceptance;
MVAr rating of any reactive compensation equipment;
and for all transformers connecting the User's Subtransmission System to a lower voltage
(and any OTSUA):
Rated MVA;
Voltage Ratio;
Positive phase sequence resistance;
Positive Phase sequence reactance;
Tap-changer range;
Number of tap steps;
Tap-changer type: on-load or off-circuit;
AVC/tap-changer time delay to first tap movement;
AVC/tap-changer inter-tap time delay;
and at the lower voltage points of those connecting transformers (and any OTSUA):-
Equivalent positive phase sequence susceptance;
MVAr rating of any reactive compensation equipment;
Equivalent positive phase sequence interconnection impedance with other lower voltage
points;
The maximum Demand (both MW and MVAr) that could occur;
Estimate of voltage insensitive (constant power) load content in % of total load at both
winter peak and 75% off-peak load conditions.
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
70 of 93
PC.A.6.6 Short Circuit Analysis
PC.A.6.6.1 Where prospective short-circuit currents on Transmission equipment are greater than 90%
of the equipment rating, and in The Company’s reasonable opinion more accurate
calculations of short-circuit currents are required, then at The Company’s request each User
is required to submit data with respect to the Connection Site (and in the case of OTSUA,
each Interface Point and Connection Point), current and forecast, and where not already
supplied under PC.A.2.2.4 and PC.A.2.2.5, as follows:
PC.A.6.6.2 For all circuits of the User’s Subtransmission System (and any OTSUA):
Positive phase sequence resistance;
Positive phase sequence reactance;
Positive phase sequence susceptance;
Zero phase sequence resistance (both self and mutuals);
Zero phase sequence reactance (both self and mutuals);
Zero phase sequence susceptance (both self and mutuals);
and for all transformers connecting the User's Subtransmission System to a lower voltage
(and any OTSUA):
Rated MVA;
Voltage Ratio;
Positive phase sequence resistance (at max, min and nominal tap);
Positive Phase sequence reactance (at max, min and nominal tap);
Zero phase sequence reactance (at nominal tap);
Tap changer range;
Earthing method: direct, resistance or reactance;
Impedance if not directly earthed;
and at the lower voltage points of those connecting transformers (and any OTSUA):
The maximum Demand (in MW and MVAr) that could occur;
Short-circuit infeed data in accordance with PC.A.2.5.6 unless the User’s lower voltage
network runs in parallel with the User’s Subtransmission System, when to prevent
double counting in each node infeed data, a  equivalent comprising the data items of
PC.A.2.5.6 for each node together with the positive phase sequence interconnection
impedance between the nodes shall be submitted.

PC.A.6.7 Dynamic Models

PC.A.6.7.1 It is occasionally necessary for The Company to evaluate the dynamic performance of User’s
Plant and Apparatus at each EU Grid Supply Point or in the case of EU Code Users, their
System. At The Company’s reasonable request and as agreed between The Company and
the relevant Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer, each User is required to
provide the following data. Where such data is required, The Company will work with the
Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer to establish the scope of the dynamic
modelling work and share the required information where it is available:-
(a) Dynamic model structure and block diagrams including parameters,
transfer functions and individual elements (as applicable);
(b) Power control functions and block diagrams including parameters,
transfer functions and individual elements (as applicable);
(c) Voltage control functions and block diagrams including parameters,
transfer functions and individual elements (as applicable);
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
71 of 93
 (d) Converter control models and block diagrams including parameters,
transfer functions and individual elements (as applicable).

PC.A.7 ADDITIONAL DATA FOR NEW TYPES OF POWER STATIONS, DC CONVERTER

STATIONS, OTSUA AND CONFIGURATIONS
Notwithstanding the Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning Data set out in this
Appendix, as new types of configurations and operating arrangements of Power Stations,
HVDC Systems, DC Converter Stations and OTSUA emerge in future, The Company may
reasonably require additional data to represent correctly the performance of such Plant and
Apparatus on the System, where the present data submissions would prove insufficient for
the purpose of producing meaningful System studies for the relevant parties.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

72 of 93
 PART 3 - DETAILED PLANNING DATA

PC.A.8 To allow a User to model the National Electricity Transmission System, The Company will
provide, upon request, the following Network Data to Users, calculated in accordance with
Good Industry Practice:
To allow a User to assess undertaking OTSDUW and except where provided for in Appendix
F, The Company will provide upon request the following Network Data to Users, calculated
in accordance with Good Industry Practice:
PC.A.8.1 Single Point of Connection
For a Single Point of Connection to a User's System (and OTSUA), as a Transmission
System voltage source, the data (as at the HV side of the Point of Connection (and in the
case of OTSUA, each Interface Point and Connection Point) reflecting data given to The
Company by Users) will be given to a User as follows:
The data items listed under the following parts of PC.A.8.3:
(a) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), (v) and (vi) and the data items shall be provided in accordance with the
detailed provisions of PC.A.8.3 (b) - (e).
PC.A.8.2 Multiple Point of Connection
For a Multiple Point of Connection to a User's System equivalents suitable for use in
loadflow and fault level analysis shall be provided. These equivalents will normally be in the
form of a π model or extension with a source (or demand for a loadflow equivalent) at each
node and a linking impedance. The boundary nodes for the equivalent shall be either at the
Connection Point (and in the case of OTSDUW, each Interface Point and Connection
Point) or (where The Company agrees) at suitable nodes (the nodes to be agreed with the
User) within the National Electricity Transmission System. The data at the Connection
Point (and in the case of OTSDUW, each Interface Point and Connection Point) will be
given to a User as follows:
The data items listed under the following parts of PC.A.8.3:-
(a) (i), (ii), (iv), (v), (vi), (vii), (viii), (ix), (x) and (xi)
and the data items shall be provided in accordance with the detailed provisions of PC.A.8.3
(b) - (e).
When an equivalent of this form is not required The Company will not provide the data items
listed under the following parts of PC.A.8.3:-
(a) (vii), (viii), (ix), (x) and (xi)
PC.A.8.3 Data Items
(a) The following is a list of data utilised in this part of the PC. It also contains rules on the
data which generally apply.
(i) symmetrical three-phase short circuit current infeed at the instant of fault from the
National Electricity Transmission System, (I1");
(ii) symmetrical three-phase short circuit current from the National Electricity
Transmission System after the subtransient fault current contribution has
substantially decayed, (I1');
(iii) the zero sequence source resistance and reactance values at the Point of
Connection (and in case of OTSUA, each Interface Point and Connection Point),
consistent with the maximum infeed below;
(iv) the pre-fault voltage magnitude at which the maximum fault currents were calculated;
(v) the positive sequence X/R ratio at the instant of fault;
(vi) the negative sequence resistance and reactance values of the National Electricity
Transmission System seen from the Point of Connection (and in case of OTSUA,
each Interface Point and Connection Point), if substantially different from the

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

73 of 93
 values of positive sequence resistance and reactance which would be derived
from the data provided above;
(vii) the initial positive sequence resistance and reactance values of the two (or more)
sources and the linking impedance(s) derived from a fault study constituting the (π)
equivalent and evaluated without the User network and load and where appropriate
without elements of the National Electricity Transmission System between the
User network and agreed boundary nodes (and in case of OTSUA, each Interface
Point and Connection Point);
(viii) the positive sequence resistance and reactance values of the two (or more) sources
and the linking impendence(s) derived from a fault study, considering the short circuit
current contributions after the subtransient fault current contribution has substantially
decayed, constituting the (π) equivalent and evaluated without the User network and
load, and where appropriate without elements of the National Electricity
Transmission System between the User network and agreed boundary nodes (and
in case of OTSUA, each Interface Point and Connection Point);
(ix) the corresponding zero sequence impedance values of the (π) equivalent produced
for use in fault level analysis;
(x) the Demand and voltage at the boundary nodes and the positive sequence
resistance and reactance values of the linking impedance(s) derived from a loadflow
study considering National Electricity Transmission System peak Demand
constituting the (π) loadflow equivalent; and,
(xi) where the agreed boundary nodes are not at a Connection Point (and in case of
OTSUA, Interface Point or Connection Point), the positive sequence and zero
sequence impedances of all elements of the National Electricity Transmission
System between the User network and agreed boundary nodes that are not
included in the equivalent (and in case of OTSUA, each Interface Point and
Connection Point).
(b) To enable the model to be constructed, The Company will provide data based on the
following conditions.
(c) The initial symmetrical three phase short circuit current and the transient period three
phase short circuit current will normally be derived from the fixed impedance studies. The
latter value should be taken as applying at times of 120ms and longer. Shorter values
may be interpolated using a value for the subtransient time constant of 40ms. These fault
currents will be obtained from a full System study based on load flow analysis that takes
into account any existing flow across the point of connection being considered.
(d) The Company will provide the appropriate supergrid transformer data for the National
Electricity Transmission System associated with equivalent voltage source data.
(e) The positive sequence X/R ratio and the zero sequence impedance value will correspond
to The Company’s source network only, that is with the section of network if any with
which the equivalent is to be used excluded. These impedance values will be derived
from the condition when all Generating Units (including Synchronous Generating
Units forming part of a Synchronous Power Generating Module) are Synchronised
to the National Electricity Transmission System or a User's System and will take
account of active sources only including any contribution from the load to the fault current.
The passive component of the load itself or other system shunt impedances should not
be included.
(f) A User may at any time, in writing, specifically request for an equivalent to be prepared
for an alternative System condition, for example where the User's System peak does
not correspond to the National Electricity Transmission System peak, and The
Company will, insofar as such request is reasonable, provide the information as soon as
reasonably practicable following the request.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

74 of 93
PC.A.9 CONTROL SYSTEM MODEL REQUIREMENTS FOR USERS
PC.A.9.1 OBJECTIVE
PC.A.9.1.1 Control and protection system models, along with other Plant and Apparatus information are
required by this PC, with supporting documentation provided to The Company in order for
The Company and Transmission Licensees to assess the impact of the User’s Plant and
Apparatus on the transient performance, security and stability of the Transmission System.
PC.A.9.1.2 The control and protection system models submitted by the User shall be representative of
the User’s Plant and Apparatus at the Connection Point appropriate to the type of model
eg. RMS or EMT. All control and protection system models must take into account all
communication, controller and processing delays relevant to modelling the performance of the
User’s Plant and Apparatus. If all Power Park Units or DC Convertors or HVDC
Converters contained within the Users Plant and Apparatus are not identical, the control
system model shall account for this by accurately representing the overall performance of the
Users Plant and Apparatus at the Connection Point.
PC.A.9.1.3 The control and protection system models shall include representation of all relevant
functionality required by the Grid Code including services provided to The Company. For
example, this includes voltage control, LFSM-O, LFSM-U, frequency response, fault ride
through, fast fault current injection, protection and automatic switching of shunt devices.
Where modes of operation are selectable, the ability to select the mode of operation shall be
included within the control system model. Additional guidance on relevant functionality will be
published on The Company website.
PC.A.9.2. SCOPE
PC.A.9.2.1 All Users shall provide root mean-square (RMS) models which represent the Users Plant and
Apparatus and controllers in balanced, RMS, positive phase-sequence, time domain studies.
PC.A.9.2.2 All Generators, HVDC Convertor Station Owners, or HVDC System Owners directly
connected to the Transmission System or Generators with Large Power Stations and
HVDC Convertor Station Owners or HVDC System Owners with DC Converter Stations
or HVDC Systems embedded within a User system which employ convertors/invertors to
import or export power to or from the System shall provide Electro-Magnetic Transient (EMT)
models which represent the Users Plant and Apparatus in electromagnetic transient studies
on the transmission and distribution system. For the avoidance of doubt this includes
Generators who own and operate a Power Park Module comprising doubly fed induction
generators and may include the excitation and governor control systems associated with
Synchronous Generating Units if these impact on the types of study described on The
Company website.
PC.A.9.2.3 The Company may specify requirements for other models in the Bilateral Agreement if
required for specific connections in accordance with good industry practice. For example Real
Time Dynamic Simulator (RTDS) Models may be required for protection co-ordination.
PC.A.9.3 Balanced Root Mean Squared (RMS) Control System Model
PC.A.9.3.1 The balanced, root mean-square positive sequence time-domain models shall be able to
calculate how aspects, (including but not limited to; Active Power and Reactive Power) of
the User’s Plant and Apparatus vary due to changes in System Frequency and voltage at
the Connection Point.
PC.A.9.3.2 The RMS models shall include all electrical and mechanical phenomena that impact on the
Active Power and/or Reactive Power of the User’s Plant and Apparatus for sub-transient,
transient and synchronous dynamics within the context of an RMS study assumptions up to
and including Primary and Secondary Response timeframes or when post-event steady
state conditions have been achieved.
PC.A.9.3.3 The User shall provide RMS models in the software package specified in PC.A.9.8.1.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

75 of 93
PC.A.9.3.4 The RMS models maybe either a User specific model or a standard open-source models, such
as a standard WECC, IEEE or IEC control system model available in the software format as
specified by The Company provided this model represents the User’s Plant and Apparatus
at the Connection Point. Where the User is referencing a standard model, the User will
submit an unambiguous reference to the model and a full set of parameters for the control
system model representing the control system performance of the real Plant and Apparatus.
PC.A.9.3.4.1 Where a User specific model is provided sufficient information shall be provided by the User
to allow for The Company to redevelop RMS models in the event of future software
environment changes or version updates. All models shall be accompanied with appropriate
documentation with sufficient detail as specified and deemed complete by The Company
(such agreement not to be unreasonably withheld).
PC.A.9.3.4.2 Where a User specific model is provided the User shall provide information:
(i) a full description of the models structure, functionality and the User’s Plant and Apparatus
represented.
(ii) inputs/outputs and functionality,
(iii) the information described in PC.A.5 relevant to the technology modelled.
PC.A.9.3.5 The Company may, when necessary, require the User to provide details of the proper
operation of its complete RMS system representation or to facilitate its understanding of the
results of a RMS dynamic simulation or request additional information concerning the RMS
control system model. This should take place no later than the issuance of the FON.
PC.A.9.3.5 The performance requirements for the RMS models are included in Appendix PC.A.9.8
PC.A.9.4 Electromagnetic Transient (EMT) Model
PC.A.9.4.1 The three-phase electromagnetic transient control and supporting informtion shall include all
material aspects of the User’s Plant and Apparatus that affect the voltage and current
outputs, including those of the control and protection response from the User’s Plant and
Apparatus. The models shall represent phenomena that materially affect the voltage and
Frequency on the Total System over timeframes of sub-cycle up to 50 cycles including, but
not limited to, switching electronic devices, transformer saturation and equipment
energisation.
PC.A.9.4.2 The User shall provide EMT models in the software package specified in PC.A.9.9.1.
PC.A.9.4.3 The performance requirements for the EMT control system model are included in Appendix
PC.A.9.9
PC.A.9.5 Replica Control Systems, RTDS, RSCAd
PC.A.9.5.1 Where required by the Bilateral Agreement, the User shall provide replica and/or suitable Real
Time Dynamic Simulator models. The details of any such rmodels will be included in the
Bilateral Agreement.
PC.A.9.6 CONFIDENTIALITY AND SHARING
PC.A.9.6.1 CONFIDENTIALITY AND SHARING RMS TYPE MODELS
PC.A.9.6.1.1 The models, supporting documentation and associated data are provided to The Company in
order to carry out its duties to meet its Transmission Licence and Grid Code obligations. In
that regard, the Company is entitled to share the models, supporting documentation and
associated data with the Transmission Licensees. The Company and/or Transmission
Licensees may share the models with companies/contractors employed by the Company or
Transmission Licensees to carry out licensed activities. Where such data is shared with third
parties working with The Company or Transmission Licensees, this data will be shared as
provided in GC.12.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

76 of 93
PC.A.9.6.1.2 It is the responsibility of the User to provide the RMS models, supporting documentation and
associated data to The Company. The Company will accept the models, supporting
documentation and associated data from a manufacturer as a Manufacturers Data and
Performance Report (See ECP.10). The Company will only accept this information from a
third party manufacturer provided the third party manufacturer agrees to enter into The
Company’s standard confidentiality agreement for Users for sharing of the model as outlined
in PC.A.9.6.1. In the event the third party manufacturer is unable to enter into The Company’s
standard confidentiality agreement, the User shall be responsible for the provision of the RMS
models, supporting documentation and associated data to The Company.
PC.A.9.6.1.3 It may also be necessary for The Company to share a representative RMS model with another
User to comply with applicable Grid Code requirements (e.g. ECC.6.3.17.1.5 and
ECC.6.3.17.2.3) and Bilateral Agreement. For these purposes the User must recorded in the
Compliance Statements either:
(i) A declaration that the models submitted for compliance purposes may be shared; or,
(ii) provide an equivalent encrypted version of the model that may be shared. In this event
the User shall demonstrate that the performance of the models and the encrypted model
are comparable.
PC.A.9.6.1.4 The User shall notify The Company of any changes to RMS models in accordance with
PC.A.1.2. Unless specified otherwise in the Bilateral Agreement, RMS models must be
submitted:
(i) at least 3 months prior to date requested for issue of the Interim Operational
Notification
(ii) at least 1 month prior to date of issue of a Limited Operational Notification
for the Users Plant and Apparatus.
PC.A.9.6.2 CONFIDENTIALITY AND SHARING EMT TYPE MODELS
PC.A.9.6.2.1 The EMT model, supporting documentation and associated data are provided to The
Company in order to carry out its duties to meet its Transmission Licence and Grid Code
obligations. In that regard, the Company is entitled to share the EMT models, supporting
documentation and associated data with the Transmission Licensees. The Company and/or
Transmission Licensees may share the EMT model with companies/contractors employed
by the Company or Transmission Licensees to carry out licensed activities. Where such
data is shared with third parties working with The Company or Transmission Licensees, this
data will be shared and protected as provided in GC.12.
PC.A.9.6.2.2 It is the responsibility of the User to provide the EMT models, supporting documentation and
associated data to The Company. The Company will accept the EMT models, supporting
documentation and associated data from a manufacturer as a Manufacturers Data and
Performance Report (See ECP.10). The Company will only accept this information from a
third party manufacturer provided the third party manufacturer agrees to enter into The
Company’s standard confidentiality agreement for Users for sharing of the model as outlined
in PC.A.9.6.2. In the event the third party manufacturer is unable to enter into The Company’s
standard confidentiality agreement, the User shall be responsible for the provision of the EMT
models, supporting documentation and associated data to The Company.
PC.A.9.6.2.3 It may be necessary for The Company to share a representative EMT model with another
User to comply with applicable Grid Code requirements (e.g. ECC.6.3.17.1.5 and
ECC.6.3.17.2.3) and Bilateral Agreement. For these purposes the User must record in the
Compliance Statements either:
(i) a declaration that the EMT model submitted for compliance purposes (PC.A.9.6.2.1)
may be shared with another User for the purpose of fulfilling relevant Grid Code
requirements; or,
(ii) provide an equivalent EMT model that maybe shared with another User for the
purpose of fulfilling relevant Grid Code requirements. In this event the User shall
declare that the performance of the equivilent EMT model is adequate for the purposes
of fulfilling relevant Grid Requirements as published on The Company website.
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
77 of 93
PC.A.9.6.2.4 Where it is necessary for The Company to share a representative EMT model with another
User, the User in receipt of the model shall:
(i) limit of the use of the EMT model to a specific purpose agreed with The Company (e.g.
simulation requirements to demonstrate compliance with Grid Code including
ECC.6.3.17.1 and ECC.6.3.17.2 and Bilateral Agreement)
(ii) control access to the EMT model to only those individuals who are strictly necessary for
the execution of the specific purpose.
(iii) establish and maintain security measures to restrict access to and prevent distribution of
the EMT model (e.g. single computer terminal containing the EMT model and restricting
access to file areas where the model resides)
(iv) ensure any publication is only for demonstrating compliance with the specific purpose
agreed with The Company and shall not include any data directly derived from the EMT
model
(v) not disclose the EMT model
(vi) destroy all copies of the EMT model and supporting material in a confidentially secure
manner after the execution of the specific purpose is complete. Destruction of the EMT
model and supporting material shall be confirmed to The Company in writing.
PC.A.9.6.2.5 The User shall notify The Company of any changes to EMT models in accordance with
PC.A.1.2. Unless specified otherwise in the Bilateral Agreement, EMT models must be
submitted:
(i) at least 3 months prior to date requested for issue of the Interim Operational
Notification
(ii) at least 1 month prior to date of issue of a Limited Operational Notification
for the Users Plant and Apparatus.
PC.A.9.7 VALIDATION
PC.A.9.7.1 The User shall submit evidence that the models have been validated demonstrating that the
models under simulation conditions is representative of the User’s Plant and Apparatus
under equivalent conditions. Validation of models before commissioning may be against test
results at other comparable sites, Factory Acceptance Tests of comparable equipment, or type
test results to show that the responses shown by the models are representative of the Users
Plant and Apparatus. Results from model validation in accordance internationaly
recommended standards (for example IEC) where applicable are also acceptable.
PC.A.9.7.2 A User may request agreement from The Company on the process for validating the models.
In particular, for Users Plant and Apparatus where Factory Acceptance Testing is to be
carried out details of any additional model validation at this stage should be agreed in a timely
manner prior to the testing being carried out. Tests should generally include steady state
Reactive Power capability, voltage control, Fault Ride Through and Frequency response.
PC.A.9.7.3 After final compliance testing as required under the CP or ECP, the User shall carry out
validation of the model simulation results against measurements from final compliance testing
in accordance with CP.A.3 or ECP.A.3, to ensure the model responses are representative of
the Users Plant and Apparatus.
PC.A.9.7.4 If these tests show the models are not representative of the User’s Plant and Apparatus, the
User shall provide updated models, supporting documentation and associated data to ensure
the responses shown by the model is representative of the responses shown by User’s Plant
and Apparatus during testing.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

78 of 93
PC.A.9.7.5 In the event The Company identifies through lifetime monitoring (OC5) that that the response
of the models are not representative of the User’s Plant and Apparatus, The Company shall
notify the User. The User shall provide the revised models, supporting documentation and
associated data whose response is representative of the Users Plant and Apparatus as soon
as reasonably practicable, but in any case no longer than 54 days after notification by The
Company. In the event of revised models not being made available a Limited Operational
Notification (as detailed in CP.9 or ECP.9 as applicable) may be issued with appropriate
restrictions.
PC.A.9.7.6 The User is responsible for ensuring the models remain representative of the User’s Plant
and Apparatus throughout the operational lifetime of the User’s Plant and Apparatus. In the
event of the User modifying hardware/software which affects the control and/or operation of
the Users Plant and Apparatus, the User shall provide The Company with updated models,
supporting documentation and associated data to enable The Company to assess the impact
of the modification of the Users Plant and Apparatus on the Total System. Such changes
may require other compliance activity as described in the CP or ECP as applicable.
PC.A.9.7.7 The User shall demonstrate that the representation of a User’s Plant and Apparatus and
models perform correctly in a sample network model published by The Company before being
accepted. The User should represent the User’s Plant and Apparatus modelled in
accordance with the Single Line Diagram and parameters submitted under the Planning
Code and DRC in Schedules 1, 5 or 18 aggregating multiple Power Park Units and the
collector grid to a single Power Park Unit representing a Power Park Module.
PC.A.9.8 RMS MODEL PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION
PC.A.9.8.1 The RMS models shall be provided in the format required by The Company. The Company
shall publish on The Company website acceptable software versions. The Company will act
reasonable in determining acceptable software versions or compatible formats. In accordance
with good industry practice The Company will consult with the industry prior to changing the
format required. Prior to the start of model development the User may request formal
agreement from The Company of the software version.The RMS models shall be compatible
with Objectives as outlined in Grid Code PC.A.9.1 Additional guidance on RMS model is
published on The Company website.
PC.A.9.8.2 GENERAL
PC.A.9.8.2.1 User RMS models shall interface with the software in a manner that is consistent with the
behaviour of standard library models.
PC.A.9.8.2.1 The models shall use standard library functional blocks representing using standard Laplace
block diagram format to the extent practicable.. Where user defined functional blocks have
been submitted the User must provide The Company with the relevant documentation for the
model including transfer block diagrams and an explanation of any coding to the satisfaction
of The Company.
PC.A.9.8.2.2 The use of any "black boxes" encrypted code or external DLLs is not acceptable. An additional
RMS model with these features maybe provided for comparison but for the avoidance of doubt
does not meet the requirements of PC.A.9.
PC.A.9.8.2.3 The User shall specify the operating ranges for the model and shall be consistent with the real
physical values and the actual performance of the Plant and Apparatus. This may include
Reactive Power limits and allowable voltage ranges with control mode and Droop settings
configured according to the usual operation. This information shall be provided either on the
appropriate per unit base or in physical units.
PC.A.9.8.2.4 The RMS model must compile without errors. Warnings must be kept to a minimum.
PC.A.9.8.3 INITIALISATION
PC.A.9.8.3.1 The RMS model shall be self contained. The combined load-flow and dynamic model shall
solve with minimal warnings without the need for manual adjustment or to run external
software routines that adjust parameters in either the load-flow case or the dynamic case or
both. External software or automation routines to integrate the model are not acceptable.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

79 of 93
PC.A.9.8.3.2 The RMS model shall automatically initialise its parameters from load flow simulations without
errors and with minimal warnings , must not result in run time errors and run with minimal
warnings , and there must not be any interactions or conflicts with other models. The RMS
models initialisation shall be invariant to simulation start time (i.e. not require the simulation to
be initialised at a particular time). External software or automation routines to initialise the
model are not acceptable.
PC.A.9.8.3.3 The RMS model is expected to be numerically stable and must adequately represent the
expected equipment behaviour over the operational range of the Plant and Apparatus at the
Connection Point. This includes the full load and Reactive Power range of the Plant and
Apparatus, the range of system voltage and frequency operating range (described in Grid
Code CC.6.1/ECC.6.1), short circuit levels and X/R ratio at the Connection Point where it
would be in operation. These values maybe requested from The Company or the
Distribution Network Owner during the compliance process. If necessary, the User shall
provide a supplementary model for specific conditions. All information on the model
capabilities shall be addressed in the model documentation provided to The Company.
PC.A.9.8.4 OUTPUT MESSAGES
PC.A.9.8.4.1 It is not acceptable for the models to crash catastrophically and provide no documentary
evidence as to why the simulation failed.
PC.A.9.8.4.2 RMS models shall allow all appropriate internal variables to be requested for output for the
duration of the simulation.
PC.A.9.8.4.3 In the case where the User’s Plant trips during simulation, the relevant RMS models shall set
the flag that indicates that the User’s Plant has tripped.
PC.A.9.8.4.4 For protection events (e.g. crow bar controller operation) the simulation events, including initial
detection, operation, and time-out, should be reported to the PowerFactory output window
during the simulation.
PC.A.9.8.5 Integration Time Step
PC.A.9.8.5.1 The dynamic model must support time domain simulations with a minimum integration step
size of 0.01 s.
PC.A.9.8.5.2 The models must not include algorithms that require use of a particular integration step size
(for example the control system model should not fail to solve, or the response be materially
different for an integration step size of 0.005 s).
PC.A.9.8.5.3 Time constants below 0.01 s should only be included if their inclusion is critical to the
performance of the dynamic model and should be agreed with The Company. In this case, an
alternative model may be requested according to PC.A.9.8.3.3, if required.
PC.A.9.8.5.4 Internal integration algorithms should only be included if their inclusion is critical to meeting
the accuracy requirements, and should not materially detract from model simulation speed
performance.
PC.A.9.9 EMT MODEL PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION
PC.A.9.9.1 The User shall provide EMT models in the format required by The Company. The Company
shall maintain a list of acceptable software versions, and compiler version which shall be
published on The Company website. The Company will act reasonable in determining
acceptable software versions or compatible formats. In accordance with good industry practice
The Company will consult with the industry prior to changing the format required. The EMT
models shall be compatible with Objectives as outlined in Grid Code PC.A.9.1 and The
Company shall also publish on The Company website a description of the types of study that
The Company and Transmission Licensees will use the EMT control system models in.
Additional guidance on EMT model is also published on The Company website.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

80 of 93
PC.A.9.9.2 The EMT models maybe encrypted. The scope, behaviour and performance of all encrypted
elements must be documented. Documentation should include behaviour and performance of
all encrypted inner and outer loop control functionality such as voltage control, frequency
control, protection systems, convertor controls and phase locked loop controllers (PLL).
Aspects of the control system may be omitted provided the study objectives published by The
Company in accordance with PC.A.9.4.2 are met in which case the documentation should
explain any functionality not included in the EMT control system model.
PC.A.9.9.3 The EMT model shall:
i) have adjustable operational control parameters. For example this would be expected to
include setpoints, control drops, operational limits, relay thresholds. The User may seek
agreement from The Company on the list of adjustable parameters prior to submission
of the model.
ii) be based on plant design and validated against testing of the Plant and Apparatus
(See Model Validation )
iii) include all control systems from outer loop control down to inner and switching functions
iv) represent all electrical, mechanical and control features appropriate for the Plant and
Apparatus including switching algorithums of power convertors applicable to studies
described by The Company.
v) Have all appropriate protection systems modelled for power system transient stability
analysis including balanced and unbalanced fault conditions, Frequency and voltage
disturbances configured to match the site specific installation of the Plant and
Apparatus. Any protections which relate to multiple disturbances should have an option
to be disabled.
vi) Allow Plant and Apparatus to be scaled where appropriate in accordance with good
industry practice. For example representation of multiple Power Park Units by a single
equivalent unit.
vii) Have time steps which must be appropriate for the accurate representation of the
switching algorithms used in the Plant and Apparatus and compatible with study time
steps down to 10us.
viii) Be portable between network models which may be any size between a single machine
infinite bus power system representation and a full multi node power system network
depending on the studies that need to be undertaken.
ix) Allow multiple instances within a network and be compatible with other control system
models within a network.
x) Be capable of self initiation to User defined terminal conditions within 4 seconds of the
simulation time when connected to an equivalent Thevenin source. In the case of
complex models The Company may agree a self initiation simulation time within 6
seconds.
xi) Warn the User by way of an output message when System conditions exceed the
operational limits of the Plant and Apparatus or are not valid for continued operation.
xii) Be able to be initialised from a snapshot of network conditions

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

81 of 93
 APPENDIX B - SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS

PC.B.1 The diagrams below show three examples of single line diagrams, showing the detail that
should be incorporated in the diagram. The first example is for an Network Operator
connection, the second for a Generator connection, the third for a Power Park Module
electrically equivalent system.

Network Operator Single Line Diagram

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

82 of 93
 Generator Single Line Diagram

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

83 of 93
 Power Park Module Single Line Diagram

Notes:
(1) The electrically equivalent Power Park Unit consists of a number of actual Power Park
Units of the same type ie. any equipment external to the Power Park Unit terminals is
considered as part of the equivalent network. Power Park Units of different types shall
be included in separate electrically equivalent Power Park Units. The total number of
equivalent Power Park Units shall represent all of the actual Power Park Units in the
Power Park Module (which could be a DC Connected Power Park Module).
(2) Separate electrically equivalent networks are required for each different type of
electrically equivalent Power Park Unit. The electrically equivalent network shall include
all equipment between the Power Park Unit terminals and the Common Collection
Busbar.
(3) All Plant and Apparatus including the circuit breakers, transformers, lines, cables and
reactive compensation plant between the Common Collection Busbar and Substation
A shall be shown.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

84 of 93
 APPENDIX C - TECHNICAL AND DESIGN CRITERIA

PC.C.1 Planning and design of the SPT and SHETL Transmission Systems is based generally, but
not totally, on criteria which evolved from joint consultation among various Transmission
Licensees responsible for design of the National Electricity Transmission System.
PC.C.2 The above criteria are set down within the standards, memoranda, recommendations and
reports and are provided as a guide to system planning. It should be noted that each scheme
for reinforcement or modification of the Transmission System is individually designed in the
light of economic and technical factors associated with the particular system limitations under
consideration.
PC.C.3 The tables below identify the literature referred to above, together with the main topics
considered within each document.
PART 1 – SHETL's TECHNICAL AND DESIGN CRITERIA

ITEM No. DOCUMENT REFERENCE No.

1 National Electricity Transmission System Security and Version [ ]
Quality of Supply Standard
2 System Phasing TPS 13/4
3 Not used
4 Voltage fluctuations and the connection of disturbing EREC P28 Issue 2
equipment to transmission systems and distribution networks
in the United Kingdom
5 EHV or HV Supplies to Induction Furnaces ER P16
(Supported by
Voltage unbalance limits. ACE Report
Harmonic current limits. No.48)
6 Planning Levels for Harmonic Voltage Distortion and the ER G5 (Supported
Connection of Non-Linear Loads to Transmission Systems by ACE Report
and Public Electricity Supply Systems in the United Kingdom No.73)

Harmonic distortion (waveform).

Harmonic voltage distortion.
Harmonic current distortion.
Stage 1 limits.
Stage 2 limits.
Stage 3 Limits
Addition of Harmonics
Short Duration Harmonics
Site Measurements
7 AC Traction Supplies to British Rail ER P24

Type of supply point to railway system.

Estimation of traction loads.
Nature of traction current.
System disturbance estimation.
Earthing arrangements.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

85 of 93
 ITEM No. DOCUMENT REFERENCE No.
8 Operational Memoranda (SOM)

Main System operating procedure. SOM 1

Operational standards of security. SOM 3

Voltage and reactive control on main system. SOM 4

System warnings and procedures for instructed load SOM 7

reduction.

Continuous tape recording of system control telephone SOM 10

messages and instructions.

Emergency action in the event of an exceptionally SOM 15

serious breakdown of the main system.
9 Planning Limits for Voltage Unbalance in the United ER P29
Kingdom.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

86 of 93
 PART 2 - SPT's TECHNICAL AND DESIGN CRITERIA

ITEM No. DOCUMENT REFERENCE

No.
1 National Electricity Transmission System Security and Version [ ]
Quality of Supply Standard
2 System Phasing TDM 13/10,002
Issue 4
3 Not used
4 Voltage fluctuations and the connection of disturbing EREC P28 Issue
equipment to transmission systems and distribution 2
networks in the United Kingdom
5 EHV or HV Supplies to Induction Furnaces ER P16
(Supported by
Voltage Unbalance limits. ACE Report
Harmonic current limits. No.48)
6 Planning Levels for Harmonic Voltage Distortion and the ER G5
Connection of Non-Linear Loads to Transmission Systems (Supported by
and Public Electricity Supply Systems in the United ACE Report
Kingdom No.73)

Harmonic distortion (waveform).

Harmonic voltage distortion.
Harmonic current distortion.
Stage 1 limits.
Stage 2 limits.
Stage 3 Limits
Addition of Harmonics
Short Duration Harmonics
Site Measurements
7 AC Traction Supplies to British Rail ER P24

Type of supply point to railway system.

Estimation of traction loads.
Nature of traction current.
System disturbance estimation.
Earthing arrangements.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

87 of 93
 APPENDIX D - DATA NOT DISCLOSED TO A RELEVANT TRANSMISSION LICENSEE

PC.D.1 Pursuant to PC.3.4, The Company will not disclose to a Relevant Transmission Licensee
data items specified in the below extract:

PC DATA
DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS
REFERENCE CATEGORY

PC.A.3.2.2 (f) (i) (i) For GB Code Users SPD

The Generator Performance Chart at the

Generating Unit stator terminals

(ii) For EU Code Users:-

The Power Generating Module

Performance Chart, and Synchronous
Generating Unit Performance Chart;

PC.A.3.2.2 (b) Output Usable (on a monthly basis) MW SPD

PC.A.5.3.2 (d) GOVERNOR AND ASSOCIATED PRIME MOVER

Option 1 (iii) PARAMETERS

Option 1

BOILER & STEAM TURBINE DATA

Boiler time constant (Stored Active Energy) S DPD II

HP turbine response ratio: (Proportion of Primary % DPD II

Response arising from HP turbine)

HP turbine response ratio: (Proportion of High % DPD II

Frequency Response arising from HP turbine)

Part of Option 2
PC.A.5.3.2 (d)
Option 2 (i) All Generating Units (including Synchronous
Generating Units forming part of a Synchronous
Power Generating Module)

Governor Deadband or
(Frequency Response Deadband and Frequency
Response Insensitivity)*

- Maximum Setting Hz DPD II

- Normal Setting Hz DPD II

- Minimum Setting Hz DPD II

*(Note GB Generators who are not required to satisfy

the requirements of the European Connection
Conditions do not need to supply Frequency
Response Deadband or Frequency Response
Insensitivity data).

Part of Steam Units

PC.A.5.3.2 (d)
Option 2 (ii)

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

88 of 93
 PC DATA
DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS
REFERENCE CATEGORY

Reheater Time Constant sec DPD II

Boiler Time Constant sec DPD II

HP Power Fraction % DPD II

IP Power Fraction % DPD II

Part of Gas Turbine Units

PC.A.5.3.2 (d)
Option 2 (iii) Waste Heat Recovery Boiler Time Constant

Part of UNIT CONTROL OPTIONS

PC.A.5.3.2 (e)

Maximum droop % DPD II

Minimum droop % DPD II

Maximum Governor Deadband or (Maximum ±Hz DPD II

Frequency Response Deadband and Maximum
Frequency Response Insensitivity)*

Normal Governor Deadband or (normal Frequency ±Hz DPD II

Response Deadband and normal Frequency
Response Insensitivity)*

Minimum Governor Deadband or (minimum ±Hz DPD II

Frequency ResponseDeadband and minimum
Frequency Response Insensitivity)*

Maximum Output Governor Deadband or (Maximum ±MW DPD II

Output Frequency Response Deadband and
Maximum Output Frequency Response Insensitivity)*

Normal Output Governor Deadband or (Normal Output ±MW DPD II

Frequency Response Deadband and Normal Output
Frequency Response Insensitivity)*

Minimum Output Governor Deadband or (Minimum ±MW DPD II

Output Frequency Response Deadband and Minimum
Output Frequency Response Insensitivity)*

(Note Generators who are not required to satisfy the

requirements of the European Connection Conditions
do not need to supply Frequency Response
Deadband and Frequency Response Insensitivity
data).

Frequency settings between which Unit Load Controller

droop applies:

Maximum Hz DPD II

Normal Hz DPD II

Minimum Hz DPD II

Sustained response normally selected Yes/No DPD II

PC.A.3.2.2 (f) Performance Chart of a Power Park Modules SPD

(ii) (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) at the
connection point

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

89 of 93
 PC DATA
DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS
REFERENCE CATEGORY

PC.A.3.2.2 (b) Output Usable (on a monthly basis) MW SPD

PC.A.3.2.2 (e) DC CONVERTER STATION AND HVDC SYSTEM

and (j) DATA

ACTIVE POWER TRANSFER CAPABILITY

(PC.A.3.2.2)

Import MW available in excess of Registered Import MW SPD

Capacity.

Time duration for which MW in excess of Registered Min SPD

Import Capacity is available

Export MW available in excess of Registered Capacity. MW SPD

Time duration for which MW in excess of Registered Min SPD

Capacity is available

Part of LOADING PARAMETERS

PC.A.5.4.3.3

MW Export MW SPD

Nominal loading rate MW/s DPD I

Maximum (emergency) loading rate MW/s DPD I

MW Import

Nominal loading rate MW/s DPD I

Maximum (emergency) loading rate MW/s DPD I

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

90 of 93
APPENDIX E - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND OTSDUW PLANT AND APPARATUS
TECHNICAL AND DESIGN CRITERIA

PC.E.1 In the absence of any relevant Electrical Standards, Offshore Transmission Licensees
and Generators undertaking OTSDUW are required to ensure that all equipment used in the
construction of their network is:
(i) Fully compliant and suitably designed to any relevant Technical Specification;
(ii) Suitable for use and operation in an Offshore environment, where such parts of the
Offshore Transmission System and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus are located in
Offshore Waters and are not installed in an area that is protected from that Offshore
environment, and
(iii) Compatible with any relevant Electrical Standards or Technical Specifications at the
Offshore Grid Entry Point and Interface Point.
PC.E.2 The table below identifies the technical and design criteria that will be used in the design and
development of an Offshore Transmission System and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus.

ITEM No. DOCUMENT REFERENCE No.

1 National Electricity Transmission System Security and Quality of Version [ ]
Supply Standard
2* Voltage fluctuations and the connection of disturbing equipment to EREC P28 Issue
transmission systems and distribution networks in the United 2
Kingdom
3* Planning Levels for Harmonic Voltage Distortion and the Connection ER G5
of Non-Linear Loads to Transmission Systems and Public Electricity
Supply Systems in the United Kingdom
4* Planning Limits for Voltage Unbalance in the United Kingdom ER P29

* Note:- Items 2, 3 and 4 above shall only apply at the Interface Point.

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

91 of 93
 APPENDIX F - OTSDUW DATA AND INFORMATION AND OTSDUW NETWORK DATA AND
INFORMATION

PC.F.1 Introduction
PC.F.1.1 Appendix F specifies data requirements to be submitted to The Company by Users and
Users by The Company in respect of OTSDUW.
PC.F.1.2 Such User submissions shall be in accordance with the OTSDUW Development and Data
Timetable in a Construction Agreement.
PC.F.1.3 Such submissions shall be issued to The Company with the offer of a CUSC Contract in the
case of the data in Part 1 and otherwise in accordance with the OTSDUW Development and
Data Timetable in a Construction Agreement.
PC.F.2. OTSDUW Network Data and Information
PC.F.2.1 With the offer of a CUSC Contract under the OTSDUW Arrangements The Company shall
provide:
(a) the site specific technical design and operational criteria for the Connection Site;
(b) the site specific technical design and operational criteria for the Interface Point, and
(c) details of The Company’s preliminary identification and consideration of the options
available for the Interface Point in the context of the User’s application for connection
or modification, the preliminary costs used by The Company in assessing such options
and the Offshore Works Assumptions including the assumed Interface Point identified
during these preliminary considerations.
PC.F.2.2 In accordance with the OTSDUW Development and Data Timetable in a Construction
Agreement The Company shall provide the following information and data to a User:
(a) equivalent of the fault infeed or fault level ratings at the Interface Point (as identified in
the Offshore Works Assumptions)
(b) notification of numbering and nomenclature of the HV Apparatus comprised in the
OTSDUW;
(i) past or present physical properties, including both actual and designed physical
properties, of Plant and Apparatus forming part of the National Electricity
Transmission System at the Interface Point at which the OTSUA will be connected
to the extent it is required for the design and construction of the OTSDUW, including
but not limited to:
(ii) the voltage of any part of such Plant and Apparatus;
(iii) the electrical current flowing in or over such Plant and Apparatus;
(iv) the configuration of any part of such Plant and Apparatus
(v) the temperature of any part of such Plant and Apparatus;
(vi) the pressure of any fluid forming part of such Plant and Apparatus
(vii) the electromagnetic properties of such Plant and Apparatus; and
(viii) the technical specifications, settings or operation of any Protection Systems
forming part of such Plant and Apparatus.
(c) information necessary to enable the User to harmonise the OTSDUW with construction
works elsewhere on the National Electricity Transmission System that could affect the
OTSDUW;
(d) information related to the current or future configuration of any circuits of the Onshore
Transmission System with which the OTSUA are to connect;

(e) any changes which are planned on the National Electricity Transmission System in
the current or following six Financial Years and which will materially affect the planning
or development of the OTSDUW.
Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024
92 of 93
PC.F.2.3 At the Users reasonable request, additional information and data in respect of the National
Electricity Transmission System shall be provided.
PC.F.2.4 OTSDUW Data And Information
PC.F.2.4.1 In accordance with the OTSDUW Development and Data Timetable in a Construction
Agreement, the User shall provide to The Company, the following information and data
relating to the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus in accordance with Appendix A of the Planning
Code.

< END OF PLANNING CODE >

Issue 6 Revision 21 PC 04 March 2024

93 of 93
 CONNECTION CONDITIONS
(CC)

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

CC.1 INTRODUCTION ...........................................................................................................................2
CC.2 OBJECTIVE ..................................................................................................................................2
CC.3 SCOPE ..........................................................................................................................................2
CC.4 PROCEDURE ...............................................................................................................................4
CC.5 CONNECTION ..............................................................................................................................4
CC.6 TECHNICAL, DESIGN AND OPERATIONAL CRITERIA .............................................................6
CC.7 SITE RELATED CONDITIONS .................................................................................................. 48
CC.8 ANCILLARY SERVICES ............................................................................................................ 56
APPENDIX 1 - SITE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULES ........................................................................ 58
PROFORMA FOR SITE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE ............................................................. 61
APPENDIX 2 - OPERATION DIAGRAMS ............................................................................................. 67
PART 1A - PROCEDURES RELATING TO OPERATION DIAGRAMS ....................................... 67
PART 1B - PROCEDURES RELATING TO GAS ZONE DIAGRAMS .......................................... 70
PART 2 - NON-EXHAUSTIVE LIST OF APPARATUS TO BE INCLUDED ON OPERATION
DIAGRAMS .................................................................................................................................... 71
APPENDIX 3 - MINIMUM FREQUENCY RESPONSE REQUIREMENT PROFILE AND OPERATING
RANGE FOR NEW POWER STATIONS AND DC CONVERTER STATIONS .................................... 73
APPENDIX 4 - FAULT RIDE THROUGH REQUIREMENTS ................................................................ 78
APPENDIX 4A - FAULT RIDE THROUGH REQUIREMENTS FOR ONSHORE SYNCHRONOUS
GENERATING UNITS, ONSHORE POWER PARK MODULES, ONSHORE DC CONVERTERS
OTSDUW PLANT AND APPARATUS AT THE INTERFACE POINT, OFFSHORE
SYNCHRONOUS GENERATING UNITS IN A LARGE POWER STATION, OFFSHORE POWER
PARK MODULES IN A LARGE POWER STATION AND OFFSHORE DC CONVERTERS IN A
LARGE POWER STATION WHICH SELECT TO MEET THE FAULT RIDE THROUGH
REQUIREMENTS AT THE INTERFACE POINT .......................................................................... 78
APPENDIX 4B - FAULT RIDE THROUGH REQUIREMENTS FOR OFFSHORE GENERATING
UNITS IN A LARGE POWER STATION, OFFSHORE POWER PARK MODULES IN A LARGE
POWER STATION AND OFFSHORE DC CONVERTERS IN A LARGE POWER STATION WHICH
SELECT TO MEET THE FAULT RIDE THROUGH REQUIREMENTS AT THE LV SIDE OF THE
OFFSHORE PLATFORM AS SPECIFIED IN CC.6.3.15.2 ........................................................... 84
APPENDIX 5 - TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS LOW FREQUENCY RELAYS FOR THE AUTOMATIC
DISCONNECTION OF SUPPLIES AT LOW FREQUENCY ................................................................. 90
APPENDIX 6 - PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTINUOUSLY ACTING AUTOMATIC
EXCITATION CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR ONSHORE SYNCHRONOUS GENERATING UNITS ...... 93
APPENDIX 7 - PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTINUOUSLY ACTING AUTOMATIC
VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR ONSHORE NON-SYNCHRONOUS GENERATING UNITS,
ONSHORE DC CONVERTERS, ONSHORE POWER PARK MODULES AND OTSDUW PLANT AND
APPARATUS AT THE INTERFACE POINT ......................................................................................... 97

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

i
CC.1 INTRODUCTION
CC.1.1 The Connection Conditions ("CC") specify both:
(a) the minimum technical, design and operational criteria which must be complied with by:
(i) any GB Code User connected to or seeking connection with the National Electricity
Transmission System, or
(ii) GB Code User’s in respect of GB Generators (other than in respect of Small Power
Stations) or GB Code User’s in respect of DC Converter Station owners connected to
or seeking connection to a User's System which is located in Great Britain or Offshore,
and
(b) the minimum technical, design and operational criteria with which The Company will comply in
relation to the part of the National Electricity Transmission System at the Connection Site
with GB Code Users. In the case of any OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, the CC also specify
the minimum technical, design and operational criteria which must be complied with by those
GB Code Users when undertaking OTSDUW.
(c) For the avoidance of doubt, the requirements of these CC’s do not apply to EU Code User’s
for whom the requirements of the ECC’s shall apply.

CC.2 OBJECTIVE
CC.2.1 The objective of the CC is to ensure that by specifying minimum technical, design and operational
criteria, the basic rules for connection to the National Electricity Transmission System and (for
certain GB Code Users) to a User's System are similar for all GB Code Users of an equivalent
category and will enable The Company to comply with its statutory and Transmission Licence
obligations.
CC.2.2 In the case of any OTSDUW, the objective of the CC is to ensure that by specifying the minimum
technical, design and operational criteria, the basic rules relating to an Offshore Transmission
System designed and constructed by an Offshore Transmission Licensee or designed and/or
constructed by an GB Code User under the OTSDUW Arrangements are equivalent.
CC.2.3 Provisions of the CC which apply in relation to OTSDUW and OTSUA, and/or a Transmission
Interface Site, shall (in any particular case) apply up to the OTSUA Transfer Time, whereupon such
provisions shall (without prejudice to any prior non-compliance) cease to apply, without prejudice to
the continuing application of provisions of the CC applying in relation to the relevant Offshore
Transmission System and/or Connection Site. It is the case therefore that in cases where the
OTSUA becomes operational prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time that a GB Generator is required
to comply with this CC both as it applies to its Plant and Apparatus at a Connection
Site\Connection Point and the OTSUA at the Transmission Interface Site/Transmission
Interface Point until the OTSUA Transfer Time and this CC shall be construed accordingly.
CC.2.4 In relation to OTSDUW, provisions otherwise to be contained in a Bilateral Agreement may be
contained in the Construction Agreement, and accordingly a reference in the CC to a relevant
Bilateral Agreement includes the relevant Construction Agreement.

CC.3 SCOPE
CC.3.1 The CC applies to The Company and to GB Code Users, which in the CC means:
(a) GB Generators (other than those which only have Embedded Small Power Stations),
including those undertaking OTSDUW;
(b) Network Operators;
(c) Non-Embedded Customers;
(d) DC Converter Station owners;
(e) BM Participants and Externally Interconnected System Operators who are also GB Code
Users in respect of CC.6.5, CC.7.9, CC.7.10 and CC.7.11 only; and

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

2 of 99
 (f) In relation to Distribution Restoration Zones, Restoration Contractors who are Non- CUSC
Parties and whose Embedded Plant needs to comply with the requirements of EREC G59,
other than those included in (a) to (e) above, shall only be required to satisfy CC.6.1.2,
CC.6.1.3, CC.6.2.2.2.1.2, CC.6.2.2.6, CC.6.3, CC.7.10, CC.7.11 and CC.8.1 unless additional
technical requirements are provided for in the Anchor Restoration Contract or Top Up
Restoration Contract. Restoration Contractors who are Non-CUSC Parties and whose
Embedded Plant needs to comply with EREC G99 are not included in the scope of the CC and
should refer to the ECC.

CC.3.2 The above categories of GB Code User will become bound by the CC prior to them generating,
distributing, supplying or consuming, as the case may be, and references to the various categories
should, therefore, be taken as referring to them in that prospective role as well as to GB Code Users
actually connected.

CC.3.3 Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC
Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement Provisions.
The following provisions apply in respect of Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a
Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement.
CC.3.3.1 The obligations within the CC that are expressed to be applicable to GB Generators in respect of
Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and DC Converter
Station Owners in respect of Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement (where the obligations are in each case listed in CC.3.3.2) shall be read and construed
as obligations that the Network Operator within whose System any such Medium Power Station
or DC Converter Station is Embedded must ensure are performed and discharged by the GB
Generator or the DC Converter Station owner. Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject
to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement which are located Offshore and which are connected to an Onshore GB Code Users
System will be required to meet the applicable requirements of the Grid Code as though they are an
Onshore GB Generator or Onshore DC Converter Station Owner connected to an Onshore User
System Entry Point.
CC.3.3.2 The Network Operator within whose System a Medium Power Station not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement is Embedded or a DC Converter Station not subject to a Bilateral Agreement is
Embedded must ensure that the following obligations in the CC are performed and discharged by
the GB Generator in respect of each such Embedded Medium Power Station or the DC Converter
Station owner in the case of an Embedded DC Converter Station:
CC.5.1
CC.5.2.2
CC.5.3
CC.6.1.3
CC.6.1.5 (b)
CC.6.3.2, CC.6.3.3, CC.6.3.4, CC.6.3.6, CC.6.3.7, CC.6.3.8, CC.6.3.9, CC.6.3.10, CC.6.3.12,
CC.6.3.13, CC.6.3.15, CC.6.3.16
CC.6.4.4
CC.6.5.6 (where required by CC.6.4.4)

In respect of CC.6.2.2.2, CC.6.2.2.3, CC.6.2.2.5, CC.6.1.5(a), CC.6.1.5(b) and CC.6.3.11

equivalent provisions as co-ordinated and agreed with the Network Operator and GB
Generator or DC Converter Station owner may be required. Details of any such requirements
will be notified to the Network Operator in accordance with CC.3.5.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

3 of 99
CC.3.3.3 In the case of Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and
Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement the requirements in:
CC.6.1.6
CC.6.3.8
CC.6.3.12
CC.6.3.15
CC.6.3.16

that would otherwise have been specified in a Bilateral Agreement will be notified to the relevant
Network Operator in writing in accordance with the provisions of the CUSC and the Network
Operator must ensure such requirements are performed and discharged by the GB Generator or
the DC Converter Station owner.
CC.3.4 In the case of Offshore Embedded Power Stations connected to an Offshore GB Code User’s
System which directly connects to an Offshore Transmission System, any additional
requirements in respect of such Offshore Embedded Power Stations may be specified in the
relevant Bilateral Agreement with the Network Operator or in any Bilateral Agreement between
The Company and such Offshore Embedded Power Station.
CC.3.5 In the case of a GB Generator undertaking OTSDUW connecting to an Onshore Network
Operator’s System, any additional requirements in respect of such OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus
will be specified in the relevant Bilateral Agreement with the GB Generator. For the avoidance of
doubt, requirements applicable to GB Generators undertaking OTSDUW and connecting to a
Network Operator’s System, shall be consistent with those applicable requirements of GB
Generators undertaking OTSDUW and connecting to a Transmission Interface Point.

CC.4 PROCEDURE
CC.4.1 The CUSC contains certain provisions relating to the procedure for connection to the National
Electricity Transmission System or, in the case of Embedded Power Stations or Embedded DC
Converter Stations, becoming operational and includes provisions relating to certain conditions to
be complied with by GB Code Users prior to and during the course of The Company notifying the
GB Code User that it has the right to become operational. The procedure for a GB Code User to
become connected is set out in the Compliance Processes.

CC.5 CONNECTION
CC.5.1 The provisions relating to connecting to the National Electricity Transmission System (or to a
User's System in the case of a connection of an Embedded Large Power Station or Embedded
Medium Power Station or Embedded DC Converter Station) are contained in:
(a) the CUSC and/or CUSC Contract (or in the relevant application form or offer for a CUSC
Contract);
(b) or, in the case of an Embedded Development, the relevant Distribution Code and/or the
Embedded Development Agreement for the connection (or in the relevant application form or
offer for an Embedded Development Agreement),
and include provisions relating to both the submission of information and reports relating to
compliance with the relevant Connection Conditions for that GB Code User, Safety Rules,
commissioning programmes, Operation Diagrams and approval to connect (and their equivalents
in the case of Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement or
Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement). References in the CC
to the "Bilateral Agreement” and/or “Construction Agreement" and/or “Embedded Development
Agreement” shall be deemed to include references to the application form or offer therefor.
CC.5.2 Items For Submission

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

4 of 99
CC.5.2.1 Prior to the Completion Date (or, where the GB Generator is undertaking OTSDUW, any later date
specified) under the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement, the following is
submitted pursuant to the terms of the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement:
(a) updated Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning
Data), with any estimated values assumed for planning purposes confirmed or, where practical,
replaced by validated actual values and by updated estimates for the future and by updated
forecasts for Forecast Data items such as Demand, pursuant to the requirements of the Planning
Code;
(b) details of the Protection arrangements and settings referred to in CC.6;
(c) copies of all Safety Rules and Local Safety Instructions applicable at Users' Sites which will
be used at the Transmission/User interface (which, for the purpose of OC8, must be to The
Company’s satisfaction regarding the procedures for Isolation and Earthing. The Company
will consult the Relevant Transmission Licensee when determining whether the procedures
for Isolation and Earthing are satisfactory);
(d) information to enable the preparation of the Site Responsibility Schedules on the basis of the
provisions set out in Appendix 1;
(e) an Operation Diagram for all HV Apparatus on the User side of the Connection Point as
described in CC.7;
(f) the proposed name of the User Site (which shall not be the same as, or confusingly similar to,
the name of any Transmission Site or of any other User Site);
(g) written confirmation that Safety Co-ordinators acting on behalf of the User are authorised and
competent pursuant to the requirements of OC8;
(h) Such RISSP prefixes pursuant to the requirements of OC8. Prefixes shall be circulated utilising
a proforma in accordance with OC8;
(i) a list of the telephone numbers for Joint System Incidents at which senior management
representatives nominated for the purpose can be contacted and confirmation that they are fully
authorised to make binding decisions on behalf of the User, pursuant to OC9;
(j) a list of managers who have been duly authorised to sign Site Responsibility Schedules on
behalf of the User;
(k) information to enable the preparation of the Site Common Drawings as described in CC.7;
(l) a list of the telephone numbers for the Users facsimile machines referred to in CC.6.5.9; and
(m) for Sites in Scotland and Offshore a list of persons appointed by the User to undertake
operational duties on the User’s System (including any OTSDUW prior to the OTSUA Transfer
Time) and to issue and receive operational messages and instructions in relation to the User’s
System (including any OTSDUW prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time); and an appointed person
or persons responsible for the maintenance and testing of User’s Plant and Apparatus.
CC.5.2.2 Prior to the Completion Date the following must be submitted to The Company by the Network
Operator in respect of an Embedded Development:
(a) updated Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning Data),
with any estimated values assumed for planning purposes confirmed or, where practical,
replaced by validated actual values and by updated estimates for the future and by updated
forecasts for Forecast Data items such as Demand, pursuant to the requirements of the
Planning Code;
(b) details of the Protection arrangements and settings referred to in CC.6;
(c) the proposed name of the Embedded Medium Power Station or Embedded DC Converter
Station Site (which shall be agreed with The Company unless it is the same as, or confusingly
similar to, the name of other Transmission Site or User Site);

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

5 of 99
CC.5.2.3 Prior to the Completion Date contained within an Offshore Transmission Distribution
Connection Agreement, the following must be submitted to The Company by the Network
Operator in respect of a proposed new Interface Point within its User System:
(a) updated Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning Data),
with any estimated values assumed for planning purposes confirmed or, where practical,
replaced by validated actual values and by updated estimates for the future and by updated
forecasts for Forecast Data items such as Demand, pursuant to the requirements of the
Planning Code;
(b) details of the Protection arrangements and settings referred to in CC.6;
(c) the proposed name of the Interface Point (which shall not be the same as, or confusingly similar
to, the name of any Transmission Site or of any other User Site);
CC.5.2.4 In the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus (in addition to items under CC.5.2.1 in respect of the
Connection Site), prior to the Completion Date (or any later date specified) under the
Construction Agreement the following must be submitted to The Company by the GB Code User
in respect of the proposed new Connection Point and Interface Point:
(a) updated Planning Code data (Standard Planning Data, Detailed Planning Data and
OTSDUW Data and Information), with any estimated values assumed for planning purposes
confirmed or, where practical, replaced by validated actual values and by updated estimates for
the future and by updated forecasts for Forecast Data items such as Demand, pursuant to the
requirements of the Planning Code;
(b) details of the Protection arrangements and settings referred to in CC.6;
(c) information to enable preparation of the Site Responsibility Schedules at the Transmission
Interface Site on the basis of the provisions set out in Appendix 1.
(d) the proposed name of the Interface Point (which shall not be the same as, or confusingly similar
to, the name of any Transmission Site or of any other User Site);
CC.5.3 (a) Of the items CC.5.2.1 (c), (e), (g), (h), (k) and (m) need not be supplied in respect of Embedded
Power Stations or Embedded DC Converter Stations,
(b) item CC.5.2.1(i) need not be supplied in respect of Embedded Small Power Stations and
Embedded Medium Power Stations or Embedded DC Converter Stations with a Registered
Capacity of less than 100MW, and
(c) items CC.5.2.1(d) and (j) are only needed in the case where the Embedded Power Station or
the Embedded DC Converter Station is within a Connection Site with another User.

CC.6 TECHNICAL, DESIGN AND OPERATIONAL CRITERIA

CC.6.1 National Electricity Transmission System Performance Characteristics
CC.6.1.1 The Company shall ensure that, subject as provided in the Grid Code, the National Electricity
Transmission System complies with the following technical, design and operational criteria in
relation to the part of the National Electricity Transmission System at the Connection Site with
a GB Code User and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, a Transmission Interface
Point (unless otherwise specified in CC.6) although in relation to operational criteria The Company
may be unable (and will not be required) to comply with this obligation to the extent that there are
insufficient Power Stations or User Systems are not available, or Users do not comply with The
Company's instructions or otherwise do not comply with the Grid Code and each GB Code User
shall ensure that its Plant and Apparatus complies with the criteria set out in CC.6.1.5.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

6 of 99
 Grid Frequency Variations
CC.6.1.2 The Frequency of the National Electricity Transmission System shall be nominally 50Hz and
shall be controlled within the limits of 49.5 - 50.5Hz unless exceptional circumstances prevail, for
example but not limited to, situations such as System Restoration.
CC.6.1.3 The System Frequency could rise to 52Hz or fall to 47Hz in exceptional circumstances. Design of
GB Code User's Plant and Apparatus, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus and Restoration
Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus must enable operation of that Plant and Apparatus within that
range in accordance with the following:
Frequency Range Requirement
51.5Hz - 52Hz Operation for a period of at least 15 minutes is required each
time the Frequency is above 51.5Hz.
51Hz - 51.5Hz Operation for a period of at least 90 minutes is required each
time the Frequency is above 51Hz.
49.0Hz - 51Hz Continuous operation is required
47.5Hz - 49.0Hz Operation for a period of at least 90 minutes is required each
time the Frequency is below 49.0Hz.
47Hz - 47.5Hz Operation for a period of at least 20 seconds is required each
time the Frequency is below 47.5Hz.

For the avoidance of doubt, disconnection, by frequency or speed based relays is not permitted within
the frequency range 47.5Hz to 51.5Hz, unless agreed with The Company in accordance with
CC.6.3.12.
Grid Voltage Variations
CC.6.1.4 Subject as provided below, the voltage on the 400kV part of the National Electricity Transmission
System at each Connection Site with a GB Code User (and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus, a Transmission Interface Point) will normally remain within 5% of the nominal value
unless abnormal conditions prevail. The minimum voltage is -10% and the maximum voltage is +10%
unless abnormal conditions prevail, but voltages between +5% and +10% will not last longer than 15
minutes unless abnormal conditions prevail. Voltages on the 275kV and 132kV parts of the National
Electricity Transmission System at each Connection Site with a User (and in the case of
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, a Transmission Interface Point) will normally remain within the
limits 10% of the nominal value unless abnormal conditions prevail for example but not limited to,
situations such as during System Restoration. At nominal System voltages below 132kV the
voltage of the National Electricity Transmission System at each Connection Site with a User
(and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, a Transmission Interface Point) will normally
remain within the limits 6% of the nominal value unless abnormal conditions prevail for example but
not limited to, situations such as during System Restoration. Under fault conditions, voltage may
collapse transiently to zero at the point of fault until the fault is cleared. The normal operating ranges
of the National Electricity Transmission System are summarised below:

National Electricity Transmission System Normal Operating Range

Nominal Voltage
400kV 400kV 5%
275kV 275kV 10%
132kV 132kV 10%

The Company and a GB Code User may agree greater or lesser variations in voltage to those set
out above in relation to a particular Connection Site, and insofar as a greater or lesser variation is
agreed, the relevant figure set out above shall, in relation to that GB Code User at the particular
Connection Site, be replaced by the figure agreed.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

7 of 99
 Voltage Waveform Quality
CC.6.1.5 All Plant and Apparatus connected to the National Electricity Transmission System, and that
part of the National Electricity Transmission System at each Connection Site or, in the case of
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, at each Interface Point, should be capable of withstanding the
following distortions of the voltage waveform in respect of harmonic content and phase unbalance:
(a) Harmonic Content
The Electromagnetic Compatibility Levels for harmonic distortion on the Onshore
Transmission System from all sources under both Planned Outage and fault outage
conditions, (unless abnormal conditions prevail) shall comply with Engineering
Recommendation G5. The Electromagnetic Compatibility Levels for harmonic distortion on
an Offshore Transmission System will be defined in relevant Bilateral Agreements.
Engineering Recommendation G5 contains planning criteria which The Company will apply
to the connection of non-linear Load to the National Electricity Transmission System, which
may result in harmonic emission limits being specified for these Loads in the relevant Bilateral
Agreement. The application of the planning criteria will take into account the position of GB
Code Users’ and EU Code Users’ Plant and Apparatus (and OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus) in relation to harmonic emissions. GB Code Users must ensure that connection
of distorting loads to their User Systems do not cause any harmonic emission limits specified
in the Bilateral Agreement, or where no such limits are specified, the relevant planning levels
specified in Engineering Recommendation G5 to be exceeded.
(b) Phase Unbalance
Under Planned Outage conditions, the weekly 95 percentile of Phase (Voltage) Unbalance,
calculated in accordance with IEC 61000-4-30 and IEC 61000-3-13, on the National Electricity
Transmission System for voltages above 150kV should remain, in England and Wales, below
1.5%, and in Scotland, below 2%, and for voltages of 150kV and below, across GB below 2%,
unless abnormal conditions prevail and Offshore (or in the case of OTSDUW, OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus) will be defined in relevant Bilateral Agreements.
The Phase (Voltage) Unbalance is calculated from the ratio of root mean square (rms) of
negative phase sequence voltage to rms of positive phase sequence voltage, based on 10-
minute average values, in accordance with IEC 61000-4-30.
CC.6.1.6 Across GB, under the Planned Outage conditions stated in CC.6.1.5(b) infrequent short duration
peaks with a maximum value of 2% are permitted for Phase (Voltage) Unbalance, for voltages
above 150kV, subject to the prior agreement of The Company under the Bilateral Agreement and
in relation to OTSDUW, the Construction Agreement. The Company will only agree following a
specific assessment of the impact of these levels on Transmission Apparatus and other Users
Apparatus with which it is satisfied.
Voltage Fluctuations
CC.6.1.7 Voltage changes at a Point of Common Coupling on the Onshore Transmission System shall
not exceed:
(a) The limits specified in Table CC.6.1.7(a) with the stated frequency of occurrence, where:
(i)

Vsteadystate
%Vsteadystate = │100 x │
Vn
and

Vmax
%Vmax =100 x ;
Vn
(ii) Vn is the nominal system voltage;

(iii) Vsteadystate is the voltage at the end of a period of 1 s during which the rate of change of
system voltage over time is ≤ 0.5%;
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
8 of 99
 (iv) Vsteadystate is the difference in voltage between the initial steady state voltage prior to the
RVC (V0) and the final steady state voltage after the RVC (V0’);
(v) Vmax is the absolute change in the system voltage relative to the initial steady state
system voltage (V0);
(vi) All voltages are the r.m.s. of the voltage measured over one cycle refreshed every half a
cycle as per BS EN 61000-4-30; and
(vii) The applications in the ‘Example Applicability’ column are examples only and are not
definitive.

Cat- Maximum number Limits

Title Example Applicability
egory of occurrence %Vmax & %Vsteadystate

Any single or repetitive RVC

Frequent
1 (see NOTE 1) As per Figure CC.6.1.7 (1) that falls inside Figure
events
CC.6.1.7 (1)

As per Figure CC.6.1.7 (2)

│%Vsteadystate │≤ 3%
For decrease in voltage: Infrequent motor starting,
4 events in 1 transformer energisation,
2
Infrequent
calendar month │%Vmax │≤ 10%
events (see NOTE 3) re-energisation
(see NOTE 2)
For increase in voltage: (see NOTE 7)
│%Vmax │≤ 6%
(see NOTE 4)

As per Figure CC.6.1.7 (3) Commissioning, maintenance

& post fault switching
│%Vsteadystate │≤ 3%
(see NOTE 7)
For decrease in voltage:
Very 1 event in 3
3 infrequent calendar months │%Vmax │≤ 12%
events (see NOTE 2) (see NOTE 5)
For increase in voltage:
│%Vmax │≤ 6%
(see NOTE 6)

NOTE 1: 6% is permissible for 100 ms reduced to 3% thereafter as per Figure CC.6.1.7 (1).
If the profile of repetitive voltage change(s) falls within the envelope given in Figure CC.6.1.7 (1) , the
assessment of such voltage change(s) shall be undertaken according to the recommendations for
assessment of flicker and shall conform to the planning levels provided for flicker.
If any part of the voltage change(s) falls outside the envelope given in Figure CC.6.1.7(1), the assessment
of such voltage changes, repetitive or not, shall be done according to the guidance and limits for RVCs.
NOTE 2: No more than 1 event is permitted per day, consisting of up to 4 RVCs, each separated by at least 10
minutes with all switching completed within a two-hour window.
NOTE 3: −10% is permissible for 100 ms reduced to -6% until 2 s then reduced to -3% thereafter as per Figure
CC.6.1.7 (2).
NOTE 4: +6% is permissible for 0.8 s from the instant the event begins then reduced to +3% thereafter as per Figure
CC.6.1.7 (2).
NOTE 5: −12% is permissible for 100 ms reduced to −10% until 2 s then reduced to -3% thereafter as per Figure
CC.6.1.7 (3).

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

9 of 99
 NOTE 6: +6% is permissible for 0.8 s from the instant the event begins then reduced to +3% thereafter as per Figure
CC.6.1.7 (3).
NOTE 7: These are examples only. Customers may opt to conform to the limits of another category providing the
frequency of occurrence is not expected to exceed the ‘Maximum number of occurrence’ for the chosen
category.

Table CC.6.1.7 (a) – Planning levels for RVC

(b) The voltage change limit is the absolute maximum allowed of either the phase-to-earth voltage
change or the phase-to-phase voltage change, whichever is the highest. The limits do not apply
to single phasor equivalent voltages, e.g. positive phase sequence (PPS) voltages. For high
impedance earthed systems, the maximum phase-to-phase, i.e. line voltage, should be used for
assessment.
(c) The RVCs in Category 2 and 3 should not exceed the limits depicted in the time dependent
characteristic shown in Figure CC.6.1.7 (2) and Figure CC.6.1.7 (3) respectively. These limits
do not apply to: 1) fault clearance operations; or 2) immediate operations in response to fault
conditions; or 3) operations relating to post fault system restoration (for the avoidance of doubt
this third exception pertains to a fault that is external to the Users Plant and Apparatus).
(d) Any RVCs permitted in Category 2 and Category 3 should be at least 10 minutes apart.
(e) The value of Vsteadystate should be established immediately prior to the start of a RVC. Following
a RVC, the voltage should remain within the relevant envelope, as shown in Figures CC.6.1.7
(1), CC.6.1.7 (2), CC.6.1.7 (3), until a Vsteadystate condition has been satisfied.

Figure CC.6.1.7 (1) — Voltage characteristic for frequent events

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

10 of 99
 V0+6%

V0+3%

V0

V0−3%

V0−6%

V0−10%

t=0 100 ms 0.8 s 2s

Figure CC.6.1.7 (2) — Voltage characteristic for infrequent events

V0+6%

V0+3%

V0

V0−3%

V0−10%
V0−12%

t=0 100 ms 0.8 s 2s t

Figure CC.6.1.7 (3) — Voltage characteristic for very infrequent events

(f) The voltage change between two steady state voltage conditions should not exceed 3%. (The limit is based
on 3% of the nominal voltage of the system (Vn) as measured at the Point of Common Coupling. The step
voltage change as measured at the customer’s supply terminals or equipment terminals could be greater.
For example: The step voltage change limit stated in BS EN 61000-3-3 and BS EN 61000-3-11 is 3.3%
when measured at the equipment terminals.)
(g) The limits apply to voltage changes measured at the Point of Common Coupling.
(h) Category 3 events that are planned should be notified to The Company in advance.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

11 of 99
 (i) For connections with a Completion Date after 1st September 2015 and where voltage changes would
constitute a risk to the National Electricity Transmission System or, in The Company’s view, the
System of any GB Code User, Bilateral Agreements may include provision for The Company to
reasonably limit the number of voltage changes in Category 2 or 3 to a lower number than specified in
Table CC.6.1.7(a) to ensure that the total number of voltage changes at the Point of Common Coupling
across multiple Users remains within the limits of Table CC.6.1.7(a).
(j) The planning levels applicable to Flicker Severity Short Term (Pst) and Flicker Severity Long Term (Plt)
are set out in Table CC.6.1.7(b).

Supply system Planning level

Nominal voltage
Flicker Severity Short Term Flicker Severity Long Term
(Pst) (Plt)
3.3 kV, 6.6 kV, 11 kV, 20 kV, 33 kV 0.9 0.7
66 kV, 110 kV, 132 kV, 150 kV, 200 kV, 0.8 0.6
220 kV, 275 kV, 400 kV

NOTE 1: The magnitude of Pst is linear with respect to the magnitude of the voltage changes giving rise to it.
NOTE 2: Extreme caution is advised in allowing any excursions of P st and Plt above the planning level.

Table CC.6.7.1(b) — Planning levels for flicker

The values and figures referred to in this paragraph CC.6.1.7 are derived from Engineering
Recommendation P28 Issue 2.

CC.6.1.8 Voltage fluctuations at a Point of Common Coupling with a fluctuating Load directly connected to
an Offshore Transmission System (or in the case of OTSDUW, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus)
shall not exceed the limits set out in the Bilateral Agreement.
Sub-Synchronous Resonance and Sub-Synchronous Torsional Interaction
CC.6.1.9 The Company shall ensure that GB Code Users' Plant and Apparatus will not be subject to
unacceptable Sub-Synchronous Oscillation conditions as specified in the relevant Licence
Standards.
CC.6.1.10 The Company shall ensure where necessary, and in consultation with Relevant Transmission
Licensees where required, that any relevant site specific conditions applicable at a GB Code User's
Connection Site, including a description of the Sub-Synchronous Oscillation conditions considered
in the application of the relevant License Standards, are set out in the GB Code User's Bilateral
Agreement.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

12 of 99
CC.6.2 Plant and Apparatus relating to Connection Site and Interface Point
The following requirements apply to Plant and Apparatus relating to the Connection Point, and
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus relating to the Interface Point (until the OTSUA Transfer Time)
and Connection Point which (except as otherwise provided in the relevant paragraph) each GB
Code User must ensure are complied with in relation to its Plant and Apparatus and which in the
case of CC.6.2.2.2.2, CC.6.2.3.1.1 and CC.6.2.1.1(b) only, The Company must ensure are complied
with in relation to Transmission Plant and Apparatus, as provided in those paragraphs.
CC.6.2.1 General Requirements
CC.6.2.1.1 (a) The design of connections between the National Electricity Transmission System and:
(i) any Generating Unit (other than a CCGT Unit or Power Park Unit), DC Converter,
Power Park Module or CCGT Module, or
(ii) any Network Operator’s System, or
(iii) Non-Embedded Customers equipment;
will be consistent with the Licence Standards.
In the case of OTSDUW, the design of the OTSUA’s connections at the Interface Point and
Connection Point will be consistent with Licence Standards.
(b) The National Electricity Transmission System (and any OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) at
nominal System voltages of 132kV and above is/shall be designed to be earthed with an Earth
Fault Factor of, in England and Wales or Offshore, below 1.4 and in Scotland, below 1.5.
Under fault conditions the rated Frequency component of voltage could fall transiently to zero
on one or more phases or, in England and Wales, rise to 140% phase-to-earth voltage, or in
Scotland, rise to 150% phase-to-earth voltage. The voltage rise would last only for the time that
the fault conditions exist. The fault conditions referred to here are those existing when the type
of fault is single or two phase-to-earth.
(c) For connections to the National Electricity Transmission System at nominal System voltages
of below 132kV the earthing requirements and voltage rise conditions will be advised by The
Company as soon as practicable prior to connection and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus shall be advised to The Company by the GB Code User.

CC.6.2.1.2 Substation Plant and Apparatus

(a) The following provisions shall apply to all Plant and Apparatus which is connected at the
voltage of the Connection Point (and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface Point)
and which is contained in equipment bays that are within the Transmission busbar Protection
zone at the Connection Point. This includes circuit breakers, switch disconnectors,
disconnectors, Earthing Devices, power transformers, voltage transformers, reactors, current
transformers, surge arresters, bushings, neutral equipment, capacitors, line traps, coupling
devices, external insulation and insulation co-ordination devices. Where necessary, this is as
more precisely defined in the Bilateral Agreement.
(i) Plant and/or Apparatus prior to 1st January 1999
Each item of such Plant and/or Apparatus which at 1st January 1999 is either :
installed; or
owned (but is either in storage, maintenance or awaiting installation); or
ordered;
and is the subject of a Bilateral Agreement with regard to the purpose for which it is in
use or intended to be in use, shall comply with the relevant standards/specifications
applicable at the time that the Plant and/or Apparatus was designed (rather than
commissioned) and any further requirements as specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
(ii) Plant and/or Apparatus post 1st January 1999 for a new Connection Point (including
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface Point)
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
13 of 99
 Each item of such Plant and/or Apparatus installed in relation to a new Connection Point
(or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface Point) after 1st January 1999 shall
comply with the relevant Technical Specifications and any further requirements identified
by The Company, acting reasonably, to reflect the options to be followed within the
Technical Specifications and/or to complement if necessary the Technical
Specifications so as to enable The Company to comply with its obligations in relation to
the National Electricity Transmission System or the Relevant Transmission Licensee
to comply with its obligations in relation to its Transmission System. This information,
including the application dates of the relevant Technical Specifications, will be as
specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
(iii) New Plant and/or Apparatus post 1st January 1999 for an existing Connection Point
(including OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface Point)
Each new additional and/or replacement item of such Plant and/or Apparatus installed in
relation to a change to an existing Connection Point (or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus
at the Interface Point and Connection Point) after 1st January 1999 shall comply with
the standards/specifications applicable when the change was designed, or such other
standards/specifications as necessary to ensure that the item of Plant and/or Apparatus
is reasonably fit for its intended purpose having due regard to the obligations of The
Company, the relevant GB Code User and the Relevant Transmission Licensee under
their respective Licences. Where appropriate this information, including the application
dates of the relevant standards/specifications, will be as specified in the varied Bilateral
Agreement.
(iv) Used Plant and/or Apparatus being moved, re-used or modified
If, after its installation, any such item of Plant and/or Apparatus is subsequently:
moved to a new location; or
used for a different purpose; or
otherwise modified;
then the standards/specifications as described in (i), (ii), or (iii) above or in ECC.6.2.1.2 (as
applicable) will apply as appropriate to such Plant and/or Apparatus, which must be
reasonably fit for its intended purpose having due regard to the obligations of The
Company, the relevant GB Code User or EU Code User (as applicable) and the Relevant
Transmission Licensee under their respective Licences.
(b) The Company shall at all times maintain a list of those Technical Specifications and additional
requirements which might be applicable under this CC.6.2.1.2 and which may be referenced by
The Company in the Bilateral Agreement. The Company shall provide a copy of the list upon
request to any User.
(c) Where the GB Code User provides The Company with information and/or test reports in
respect of Plant and/or Apparatus which the GB Code User reasonably believes demonstrate
the compliance of such items with the provisions of a Technical Specification, then The
Company shall promptly and without unreasonable delay give due and proper consideration to
such information.
(d) Plant and Apparatus shall be designed, manufactured and tested in premises with an
accredited certificate in accordance with the quality assurance requirements of the relevant
standard in the BS EN ISO 9000 series (or equivalent as reasonably approved by The
Company) or in respect of test premises which do not include a manufacturing facility premises
with an accredited certificate in accordance with BS EN 45001.
(e) Each connection between an GB Code User and the National Electricity Transmission
System must be controlled by a circuit-breaker (or circuit breakers) capable of interrupting the
maximum short circuit current at the point of connection. The Seven Year Statement gives
values of short circuit current and the rating of Transmission circuit breakers at existing and
committed Connection Points for future years.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

14 of 99
 (f) Each connection between a GB Generator undertaking OTSDUW or an Onshore
Transmission Licensee, must be controlled by a circuit breaker (or circuit breakers) capable
of interrupting the maximum short circuit current at the Transmission Interface Point. The
Seven Year Statement gives values of short circuit current and the rating of Transmission
circuit breakers at existing and committed Transmission Interface Points for future years.
CC.6.2.2 Requirements at Connection Points or, in the case of OTSDUW at Interface Points that relate to GB
Generators or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or DC Converter Station owners
CC.6.2.2.1 Not Used.
CC.6.2.2.2 Generating Unit, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus and Power Station Protection Arrangements
CC.6.2.2.2.1 Minimum Requirements
CC.6.2.2.2.1.1 Protection of Generating Units (other than Power Park Units), DC Converters, OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus or Power Park Modules and their connections to the National Electricity
Transmission System shall meet the requirements given below. These are necessary to reduce
the impact on the National Electricity Transmission System of faults on OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus circuits or circuits owned by GB Generators or DC Converter Station owners.
CC.6.2.2.2.1.2 Restoration Contractors shall, if required in a Restoration Plan, have the ability to switch:-
a) From the normal to the alternative Protection settings on their Plant and Apparatus and:-
b) From the alternative to the normal Protection settings whilst their Plant remains in service.

Any alternative Protection settings shall be included in the Restoration Plan. Normal and
alternative Protection settings shall be agreed between The Company and/or Relevant
Transmission Licensee and/or Network Operator and Restoration Contractor as part of
developing a Restoration Plan.

CC.6.2.2.2.2 Fault Clearance Times

(a) The required fault clearance time for faults on the GB Generator's or DC Converter Station
owner’s equipment directly connected to the National Electricity Transmission System or
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus and for faults on the National Electricity Transmission
System directly connected to the GB Generator or DC Converter Station owner's equipment
or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, from fault inception to the circuit breaker arc extinction,
shall be set out in the Bilateral Agreement. The fault clearance time specified in the Bilateral
Agreement shall not be shorter than the durations specified in (i), (ii) and (iii) below:
(i) 80ms at 400kV
(ii) 100ms at 275kV
(iii) 120ms at 132kV and below
but this shall not prevent the GB Code User or the Relevant Transmission Licensee or the
GB Generator (including in respect of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) from selecting a shorter
fault clearance time on their own Plant and Apparatus provided Discrimination is achieved.
A longer fault clearance time may be specified in the Bilateral Agreement for faults on the
National Electricity Transmission System. A longer fault clearance time for faults on the GB
Generator or DC Converter Station owner's equipment or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus
may be agreed with The Company in accordance with the terms of the Bilateral Agreement
but only if System requirements, in The Company's view, permit. The probability that the fault
clearance time stated in the Bilateral Agreement will be exceeded by any given fault, must be
less than 2%.
(b) In the event that the required fault clearance time is not met as a result of failure to operate on
the Main Protection System(s) provided, GB Generators or DC Converter Station owners
or GB Generators in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus shall, except as specified
below provide Independent Back-Up Protection. The Relevant Transmission Licensee will
also provide Back-Up Protection; and the Relevant Transmission Licensee’s and the GB
Code User’s Back-Up Protections will be co-ordinated so as to provide Discrimination.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

15 of 99
 On a Generating Unit (other than a Power Park Unit), DC Converter or Power Park Module
or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus in respect of which the Completion Date is after 20 January
2016 and connected to the National Electricity Transmission System at 400kV or 275kV and
where two Independent Main Protections are provided to clear faults on the HV Connections
within the required fault clearance time, the Back-Up Protection provided by GB Generators
(including in respect of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) and DC Converter Station owner
shall operate to give a fault clearance time of no longer than 300ms at the minimum infeed for
normal operation for faults on the HV Connections. Where two Independent Main
Protections are installed, the Back-Up Protection may be integrated into one (or both) of the
Independent Main Protection relays.
On a Generating Unit (other than a Power Park Unit), DC Converter or Power Park Module
or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus in respect of which the Completion Date is after 20 January
2016 and connected to the National Electricity Transmission System at 132 kV and where
only one Main Protection is provided to clear faults on the HV Connections within the required
fault clearance time, the Independent Back-Up Protection provided by the GB Generator
(including in respect of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) and the DC Converter Station owner
shall operate to give a fault clearance time of no longer than 300ms at the minimum infeed for
normal operation for faults on the HV Connections.
On a Generating Unit (other than a Power Park Unit), DC Converter or Power Park Module
or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus connected to the National Electricity Transmission
System and on Generating Units (other than a Power Park Unit), DC Converters or Power
Park Modules or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System at 400 kV or 275 kV or 132 kV, in respect of which the Completion
Date is before the 20 January 2016, the Back-Up Protection or Independent Back-Up
Protection shall operate to give a fault clearance time of no longer than 800ms in England and
Wales or 300ms in Scotland at the minimum infeed for normal operation for faults on the HV
Connections.
A Generating Unit (other than a Power Park Unit), DC Converter or Power Park Module or
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) with Back-Up Protection or Independent Back-Up
Protection will also be required to withstand, without tripping, the loading incurred during the
clearance of a fault on the National Electricity Transmission System by breaker fail
Protection at 400kV or 275kV or of a fault cleared by Back-Up Protection where the GB
Generator (including in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) or DC Converter is
connected at 132kV and below. This will permit Discrimination between GB Generator in
respect of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or DC Converter Station owners’ Back-Up
Protection or Independent Back-Up Protection and the Back-Up Protection provided on the
National Electricity Transmission System and other Users' Systems.
(c) When the Generating Unit (other than Power Park Units), or the DC Converter or Power
Park Module or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus is connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System at 400kV or 275kV, and in Scotland and Offshore also at 132kV, and a
circuit breaker is provided by the GB Generator (including in respect of OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus) or the DC Converter Station owner, or the Relevant Transmission Licensee, as
the case may be, to interrupt fault current interchange with the National Electricity
Transmission System, or GB Generator's System, or DC Converter Station owner’s
System, as the case may be, circuit breaker fail Protection shall be provided by the GB
Generator (including in respect of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) or DC Converter Station
owner, or the Relevant Transmission Licensee as the case may be, on this circuit breaker. In
the event, following operation of a Protection system, of a failure to interrupt fault current by
these circuit-breakers within the Fault Current Interruption Time, the circuit breaker fail
Protection is required to initiate tripping of all the necessary electrically adjacent circuit-
breakers so as to interrupt the fault current within the next 200ms.
(d) The target performance for the System Fault Dependability Index shall be not less than 99%.
This is a measure of the ability of Protection to initiate successful tripping of circuit breakers
which are associated with the faulty item of Apparatus.
CC.6.2.2.3 Equipment to be provided
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
16 of 99
CC.6.2.2.3.1 Protection of Interconnecting Connections
The requirements for the provision of Protection equipment for interconnecting connections will be
specified in the Bilateral Agreement. In this CC, the term "interconnecting connections" means the
primary conductors from the current transformer accommodation on the circuit side of the circuit
breaker to the Connection Point or the primary conductors from the current transformer
accommodation on the circuit side of the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus of the circuit breaker to
the Transmission Interface Point.
CC.6.2.2.3.2 Circuit-breaker fail Protection
The GB Generator or DC Converter Station owner will install circuit breaker fail Protection
equipment in accordance with the requirements of the Bilateral Agreement. The GB Generator or
DC Converter Station owner will also provide a back-trip signal in the event of loss of air from its
pressurised head circuit breakers, during the Generating Unit (other than a CCGT Unit or Power
Park Unit) or CCGT Module or DC Converter or Power Park Module run-up sequence, where
these circuit breakers are installed.
CC.6.2.2.3.3 Loss of Excitation
The GB Generator must provide Protection to detect loss of excitation on a Generating Unit and
initiate a Generating Unit trip.
CC.6.2.2.3.4 Pole-Slipping Protection
Where, in The Company's reasonable opinion, System requirements dictate, The Company will
specify in the Bilateral Agreement a requirement for GB Generators to fit pole-slipping Protection
on their Generating Units.
CC.6.2.2.3.5 Signals for Tariff Metering
GB Generators and DC Converter Station owners will install current and voltage transformers
supplying all tariff meters at a voltage to be specified in, and in accordance with, the Bilateral
Agreement.
CC.6.2.2.4 Work on Protection Equipment
No busbar Protection, mesh corner Protection, circuit-breaker fail Protection relays, AC or DC
wiring (other than power supplies or DC tripping associated with the Generating Unit, DC Converter
or Power Park Module itself) may be worked upon or altered by the GB Generator or DC Converter
Station owner personnel in the absence of a representative of the Relevant Transmission
Licensee, or written authority from the Relevant Transmission Licensee to perform such work or
alterations in the absence of a representative of the Relevant Transmission Licensee.
CC.6.2.2.5 Relay Settings
Protection and relay settings will be co-ordinated (both on connection and subsequently) across the
Connection Point in accordance with the Bilateral Agreement and in relation to OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus, across the Interface Point in accordance with the Bilateral Agreement to ensure
effective disconnection of faulty Apparatus.
CC.6.2.2.6 Control Schemes and Settings
CC.6.2.2.6.1 The schemes and settings of the different control devices on a Generating Unit, Power Park
Module or DC Converter that are necessary for Transmission System stability and for taking
emergency action shall be agreed with The Company in coordination with the Relevant
Transmission Licensee and the GB Generator or DC Converter owner or Restoration
Contractor. Restoration Contractors shall have the ability to switch from alternative control
schemes and settings on their Plant and Apparatus and to be capable of switching from the agreed
alternative settings to normal settings whilst remaining in service if they are required to satisfy their
obligations in a Restoration Plan. Changes to any control schemes and settings shall be agreed
between The Company and/or Relevant Transmission Licensee and/or Network Operator as
part of developing a Restoration Plan.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

17 of 99
CC.6.2.2.6.2 Subject to the requirements of CC.6.2.2.6.1, any changes to the schemes and settings, defined in
CC.6.2.2.6.1, of the different control devices of the Generating Unit or Power Park Module or
Restoration Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus or DC Converter shall be coordinated and agreed
between the Relevant Transmission Licensee, the GB Generator, Restoration Contractor and
DC Converter owner.
CC.6.2.3 Requirements at Connection Points relating to Network Operators and Non-Embedded Customers
CC.6.2.3.1 Protection Arrangements for Network Operators and Non-Embedded Customers
CC.6.2.3.1.1 Protection of Network Operator and Non-Embedded Customers Systems directly connected to
the National Electricity Transmission System, shall meet the requirements given below:
Fault Clearance Times
(a) The required fault clearance time for faults on Network Operator and Non-Embedded
Customer equipment directly connected to the National Electricity Transmission System,
and for faults on the National Electricity Transmission System directly connected to the
Network Operator’s or Non-Embedded Customer's equipment, from fault inception to the
circuit breaker arc extinction, shall be set out in each Bilateral Agreement. The fault clearance
time specified in the Bilateral Agreement shall not be shorter than the durations specified in
(i), (ii) and (iii) below:
(i) 80ms at 400kV
(ii) 100ms at 275kV
(iii) 120ms at 132kV and below
but this shall not prevent the GB Code User or the Relevant Transmission Licensee from
selecting a shorter fault clearance time on its own Plant and Apparatus provided
Discrimination is achieved.
For the purpose of establishing the Protection requirements in accordance with CC.6.2.3.1.1
only, the point of connection of the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer
equipment to the National Electricity Transmission System shall be deemed to be the low
voltage busbars at a GB Grid Supply Point, irrespective of the ownership of the equipment at
the GB Grid Supply Point.
A longer fault clearance time may be specified in the Bilateral Agreement for faults on the
National Electricity Transmission System. A longer fault clearance time for faults on the
Network Operator and Non-Embedded Customers equipment may be agreed with The
Company in accordance with the terms of the Bilateral Agreement but only if System
requirements in The Company's view permit. The probability that the fault clearance time stated
in the Bilateral Agreement will be exceeded by any given fault must be less than 2%.
(b) (i) For the event of failure of the Protection systems provided to meet the above fault
clearance time requirements, Back-Up Protection shall be provided by the Network
Operator or Non-Embedded Customer as the case may be.
(ii) The Relevant Transmission Licensee will also provide Back-Up Protection, which will
result in a fault clearance time longer than that specified for the Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer Back-Up Protection so as to provide Discrimination.
(iii) For connections with the National Electricity Transmission System at 132kV and below,
it is normally required that the Back-Up Protection on the National Electricity
Transmission System shall discriminate with the Network Operator or Non-Embedded
Customer's Back-Up Protection.
(iv) For connections with the National Electricity Transmission System at 400kV or 275kV,
the Back-Up Protection will be provided by the Network Operator or Non-Embedded
Customer, as the case may be, with a fault clearance time not longer than 300ms for faults
on the Network Operator’s or Non-Embedded Customer's Apparatus.
(v) Such Protection will also be required to withstand, without tripping, the loading incurred
during the clearance of a fault on the National Electricity Transmission System by

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

18 of 99
 breaker fail Protection at 400kV or 275kV. This will permit Discrimination between
Network Operator’s Back-Up Protection or Non-Embedded Customer’s Back-Up
Protection, as the case may be, and Back-Up Protection provided on the National
Electricity Transmission System and other User Systems. The requirement for and
level of Discrimination required will be specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
(c) (i) Where the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer is connected to the National
Electricity Transmission System at 400kV or 275kV, and in Scotland also at 132kV, and
a circuit breaker is provided by the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer, or
the Relevant Transmission Licensee, as the case may be, to interrupt the interchange of
fault current with the National Electricity Transmission System or the System of the
Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer, as the case may be, circuit breaker fail
Protection will be provided by the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer, or
the Relevant Transmission Licensee, as the case may be, on this circuit breaker.
(ii) In the event, following operation of a Protection system, of a failure to interrupt fault current
by these circuit-breakers within the Fault Current Interruption Time, the circuit breaker
fail Protection is required to initiate tripping of all the necessary electrically adjacent circuit-
breakers so as to interrupt the fault current within the next 200ms.
(d) The target performance for the System Fault Dependability Index shall be not less than 99%.
This is a measure of the ability of Protection to initiate successful tripping of circuit breakers
which are associated with the faulty items of Apparatus.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

19 of 99
CC.6.2.3.2 Fault Disconnection Facilities
(a) Where no Transmission circuit breaker is provided at the GB Code User's connection voltage,
the GB Code User must provide The Company with the means of tripping all the GB Code
User's circuit breakers necessary to isolate faults or System abnormalities on the National
Electricity Transmission System. In these circumstances, for faults on the GB Code User's
System, the GB Code User's Protection should also trip higher voltage Transmission circuit
breakers. These tripping facilities shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in the
Bilateral Agreement.
(b) The Company may require the installation of a System to Generator Operational
Intertripping Scheme in order to enable the timely restoration of circuits following power
System fault(s). These requirements shall be set out in the relevant Bilateral Agreement.
CC.6.2.3.3 Automatic Switching Equipment
Where automatic reclosure of Transmission circuit breakers is required following faults on the GB
Code User's System, automatic switching equipment shall be provided in accordance with the
requirements specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
CC.6.2.3.4 Relay Settings
Protection and relay settings will be co-ordinated (both on connection and subsequently) across the
Connection Point in accordance with the Bilateral Agreement to ensure effective disconnection of
faulty Apparatus.
CC.6.2.3.5 Work on Protection equipment
Where a Transmission Licensee owns the busbar at the Connection Point, no busbar Protection,
mesh corner Protection relays, AC or DC wiring (other than power supplies or DC tripping
associated with the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer’s Apparatus itself) may be
worked upon or altered by the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer personnel in the
absence of a representative of the Relevant Transmission Licensee or written authority from the
Relevant Transmission Licensee to perform such work or alterations in the absence of a
representative of the Relevant Transmission Licensee.
CC.6.2.3.6 Equipment to be provided
CC.6.2.3.6.1 Protection of Interconnecting Connections
The requirements for the provision of Protection equipment for interconnecting connections will be
specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
CC.6.2.3.7 Network Operators Systems
Network Operators shall, if required in a Restoration Plan, have the ability to switch:-

a) From the normal to the alternative Protection settings and control settings on their Plant
and Apparatus; and:-
b) From the alternative to the normal Protection settings and control settings whilst their Plant
remains in service,

Any alternative Protection settings or control settings shall be included in the Restoration Plan.
Normal and alternative Protection settings and control settings shall be agreed between The
Company and the Network Operator as part of developing a Restoration Plan.

CC.6.3 GENERAL GENERATING UNIT (AND OTSDUW) REQUIREMENTS

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

20 of 99
CC.6.3.1 This section sets out the technical and design criteria and performance requirements for Generating
Units, DC Converters and Power Park Modules (whether directly connected to the National
Electricity Transmission System or Embedded) and (where provided in this section) OTSDUW
Plant and Apparatus which each GB Generator or DC Converter Station owner must ensure are
complied with in relation to its Generating Units, DC Converters and Power Park Modules and
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus but does not apply to Small Power Stations or individually to
Power Park Units. References to Generating Units, DC Converters and Power Park Modules in
this CC.6.3 should be read accordingly. The performance requirements that OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus must be capable of providing at the Interface Point under this section may be provided
using a combination of GB Generator Plant and Apparatus and/or OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus.
Plant Performance Requirements
CC.6.3.2 (a) When supplying Rated MW all Onshore Synchronous Generating Units must be capable of
continuous operation at any point between the limits 0.85 Power Factor lagging and 0.95
Power Factor leading at the Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit terminals. At Active
Power output levels other than Rated MW, all Onshore Synchronous Generating Units must
be capable of continuous operation at any point between the Reactive Power capability limits
identified on the Generator Performance Chart.
In addition to the above paragraph, where Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit(s):
(i) have a Connection Entry Capacity which has been increased above Rated MW (or the
Connection Entry Capacity of the CCGT module has increased above the sum of the
Rated MW of the Generating Units compromising the CCGT module), and such increase
takes effect after 1st May 2009, the minimum lagging Reactive Power capability at the
terminals of the Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit(s) must be 0.9 Power Factor
at all Active Power output levels in excess of Rated MW. Further, the User shall comply
with the provisions of and any instructions given pursuant to BC1.8 and the relevant
Bilateral Agreement; or
(ii) have a Connection Entry Capacity in excess of Rated MW (or the Connection Entry
Capacity of the CCGT module exceeds the sum of Rated MW of the Generating Units
comprising the CCGT module) and a Completion Date before 1st May 2009, alternative
provisions relating to Reactive Power capability may be specified in the Bilateral
Agreement and where this is the case such provisions must be complied with.
The short circuit ratio of Onshore Synchronous Generating Units with an Apparent Power
rating of less than 1600MVA shall be not less than 0.5. The short circuit ratio of Onshore
Synchronous Generating Units with a rated Apparent Power of 1600MVA or above shall be
not less than 0.4.
(b) Subject to paragraph (c) below, all Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Units, Onshore
DC Converters and Onshore Power Park Modules must be capable of maintaining zero
transfer of Reactive Power at the Onshore Grid Entry Point (or User System Entry Point if
Embedded) at all Active Power output levels under steady state voltage conditions. For
Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Units and Onshore Power Park Modules the
steady state tolerance on Reactive Power transfer to and from the National Electricity
Transmission System expressed in MVAr shall be no greater than 5% of the Rated MW. For
Onshore DC Converters the steady state tolerance on Reactive Power transfer to and from
the National Electricity Transmission System shall be specified in the Bilateral Agreement.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

21 of 99
 (c) Subject to the provisions of CC.6.3.2(d) below, all Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating
Units, Onshore DC Converters (excluding current source technology) and Onshore Power
Park Modules (excluding those connected to the Total System by a current source Onshore
DC Converter) and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface Point with a Completion
Date on or after 1 January 2006 must be capable of supplying Rated MW output or Interface
Point Capacity in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at any point between the limits
0.95 Power Factor lagging and 0.95 Power Factor leading at the Onshore Grid Entry Point
in England and Wales or Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or at
the HV side of the 33/132kV or 33/275kV or 33/400kV transformer for GB Generators directly
connected to the Onshore Transmission System in Scotland (or User System Entry Point if
Embedded). With all Plant in service, the Reactive Power limits defined at Rated MW or
Interface Point Capacity in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at Lagging Power
Factor will apply at all Active Power output levels above 20% of the Rated MW or Interface
Point Capacity in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus output as defined in Figure 1.
With all Plant in service, the Reactive Power limits defined at Rated MW at Leading Power
Factor will apply at all Active Power output levels above 50% of the Rated MW output or
Interface Point Capacity in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus as defined in Figure
1. With all Plant in service, the Reactive Power limits will reduce linearly below 50% Active
Power output as shown in Figure 1 unless the requirement to maintain the Reactive Power
limits defined at Rated MW or Interface Point Capacity in the case of OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus at Leading Power Factor down to 20% Active Power output is specified in the
Bilateral Agreement. These Reactive Power limits will be reduced pro rata to the amount of
Plant in service.

Figure 1

Point A is equivalent 0.95 leading Power Factor at Rated MW output or Interface Point
(in MVAr) to Capacity in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus

Point B is equivalent 0.95 lagging Power Factor at Rated MW output or Interface Point
(in MVAr) to: Capacity in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus

Point C is equivalent -5% of Rated MW output or Interface Point Capacity in the case
(in MVAr) to: of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus

Point D is equivalent +5% of Rated MW output or Interface Point Capacity in the case
(in MVAr) to: of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

22 of 99
 Point E is equivalent -12% of Rated MW output or Interface Point Capacity in the case
(in MVAr) to: of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus

(d) All Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Units and Onshore Power Park Modules in
Scotland with a Completion Date after 1 April 2005 and before 1 January 2006 must be capable
of supplying Rated MW at the range of power factors either:
(i) from 0.95 lead to 0.95 lag as illustrated in Figure 1 at the User System Entry Point for
Embedded GB Generators or at the HV side of the 33/132kV or 33/275kV or 33/400kV
transformer for GB Generators directly connected to the Onshore Transmission System.
With all Plant in service, the Reactive Power limits defined at Rated MW will apply at all
Active Power output levels above 20% of the Rated MW output as defined in Figure 1.
These Reactive Power limits will be reduced pro rata to the amount of Plant in service, or
(ii) from 0.95 lead to 0.90 lag at the Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit (including
Power Park Unit) terminals. For the avoidance of doubt GB Generators complying with
this option (ii) are not required to comply with CC.6.3.2(b).
(e) The short circuit ratio of Offshore Synchronous Generating Units at a Large Power Station
shall be not less than 0.5. At a Large Power Station all Offshore Synchronous Generating
Units, Offshore Non-Synchronous Generating Units, Offshore DC Converters and
Offshore Power Park Modules must be capable of maintaining:
(i) zero transfer of Reactive Power at the Offshore Grid Entry Point for all GB Generators
with an Offshore Grid Entry Point at the LV Side of the Offshore Platform at all Active
Power output levels under steady state voltage conditions. The steady state tolerance on
Reactive Power transfer to and from an Offshore Transmission System expressed in
MVAr shall be no greater than 5% of the Rated MW, or
(ii) a transfer of Reactive Power at the Offshore Grid Entry Point at a value specified in the
Bilateral Agreement that will be equivalent to zero at the LV Side of the Offshore
Platform. In addition, the steady state tolerance on Reactive Power transfer to and from
an Offshore Transmission System expressed in MVAr at the LV Side of the Offshore
Platform shall be no greater than 5% of the Rated MW, or
(iii) the Reactive Power capability (within an associated steady state tolerance) specified in
the Bilateral Agreement if any alternative has been agreed with the GB Generator
Offshore Transmission Licensee and The Company. In the case of Generators and/or
DC Converter owners who are GB Code User’s and also Restoration Contractors who
own and operate Anchor Plant and/or Top Up Restoration Plant, or GB Code Users
who own and operate Plant and Apparatus which is operating with a Grid Forming
Capability in service, the Reactive Power capability requirements at the Offshore Grid
Entry Point shall be agreed between the Restoration Contractor or GB Code User the
Offshore Transmission Licensee and The Company in order to facilitate the operation
of an Offshore Local Joint Restoration Plan.
(f) In addition, a Genset shall meet the operational requirements as specified in BC2.A.2.6.
CC.6.3.3 Each Generating Unit, DC Converter (including an OTSDUW DC Converter), Power Park Module
and/or CCGT Module must be capable of:
(a) continuously maintaining constant Active Power output for System Frequency changes within
the range 50.5 to 49.5 Hz; and

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

23 of 99
 (b) (subject to the provisions of CC.6.1.3) maintaining its Active Power output at a level not lower
than the figure determined by the linear relationship shown in Figure 2 for System Frequency
changes within the range 49.5 to 47 Hz, such that if the System Frequency drops to 47 Hz the
Active Power output does not decrease by more than 5%. In the case of a CCGT Module, the
above requirement shall be retained down to the Low Frequency Relay trip setting of 48.8 Hz,
which reflects the first stage of the automatic low Frequency Demand Disconnection scheme
notified to Network Operators under OC6.6.2. For System Frequency below that setting, the
existing requirement shall be retained for a minimum period of 5 minutes while System
Frequency remains below that setting, and special measure(s) that may be required to meet
this requirement shall be kept in service during this period. After that 5 minute period, if System
Frequency remains below that setting, the special measure(s) must be discontinued if there is
a materially increased risk of the Gas Turbine tripping. The need for special measure(s) is
linked to the inherent Gas Turbine Active Power output reduction caused by reduced shaft
speed due to falling System Frequency.
Figure 2

(c) For the avoidance of doubt, in the case of a Generating Unit or Power Park Module (or
OTSDUW DC Converters at the Interface Point) using an Intermittent Power Source where
the mechanical power input will not be constant over time, the requirement is that the Active
Power output shall be independent of System Frequency under (a) above and should not drop
with System Frequency by greater than the amount specified in (b) above.
(d) A DC Converter Station must be capable of maintaining its Active Power input (i.e. when
operating in a mode analogous to Demand) from the National Electricity Transmission
System (or User System in the case of an Embedded DC Converter Station) at a level not
greater than the figure determined by the linear relationship shown in Figure 3 for System
Frequency changes within the range 49.5 to 47 Hz, such that if the System Frequency drops
to 47.8 Hz the Active Power input decreases by more than 60%.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

24 of 99
 47 47.8 Frequency (Hz) 49.5 52.0

100% of Active
Power Input

40% of Active
Power Input
Figure 3

(e) At a Large Power Station, in the case of an Offshore Generating Unit, Offshore Power Park
Module, Offshore DC Converter and OTSDUW DC Converter, the GB Generator shall
comply with the requirements of CC.6.3.3. GB Generators should be aware that Section K of
the STC places requirements on Offshore Transmission Licensees which utilise a
Transmission DC Converter as part of their Offshore Transmission System to make
appropriate provisions to enable GB Generators to fulfil their obligations.
(f) In the case of an OTSDUW DC Converter the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus shall provide a
continuous signal indicating the real time frequency measured at the Interface Point to the
Offshore Grid Entry Point.

CC.6.3.4 At the Grid Entry Point, the Active Power output under steady state conditions of any Generating
Unit, DC Converter or Power Park Module directly connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System or in the case of OTSDUW, the Active Power transfer at the Interface Point,
under steady state conditions of any OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus should not be affected by
voltage changes in the normal operating range specified in paragraph CC.6.1.4 by more than the
change in Active Power losses at reduced or increased voltage. In addition:
(a) For any Onshore Generating Unit, Onshore DC Converter and Onshore Power Park
Module or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, the Reactive Power output under steady state
conditions should be fully available within the voltage range 5% at 400kV, 275kV and 132kV
and lower voltages, except for an Onshore Power Park Module or Onshore Non-
Synchronous Generating Unit if Embedded at 33kV and below (or directly connected to the
Onshore Transmission System at 33kV and below) where the requirement shown in Figure
4 applies.
(b) At a Large Power Station, in the case of an Offshore Generating Unit, Offshore DC
Converter and Offshore Power Park Module where an alternative reactive capability has been
agreed with the GB Generator, as specified in CC.6.3.2(e) (iii), the voltage / Reactive Power
requirement shall be specified in the Bilateral Agreement. The Reactive Power output under
steady state conditions shall be fully available within the voltage range 5% at 400kV, 275kV
and 132kV and lower voltages.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

25 of 99
 Voltage at an Onshore Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point if Embedded
(% of Nominal) at 33 kV and below

105%

100%

95%

Power Factor 0.95 Lead at Rated 1.0 Power Factor 0.95 lag at Rated MW
MW output or Onshore Grid output or Onshore Grid Entry Point
Entry Point equivalent Power equivalent Power Factor if connected
Factor if connected to the to the Onshore Transmission
Onshore Transmission System System in Scotland or optionally in
in Scotland Scotland for Plant with a Completion
Date before 1 January 2006 Power
Factor 0.9 lag at an Onshore Non-
synchronous Generating Unit or
Onshore Power Park Unit Terminals

Figure 4

CC.6.3.5 System Restoration

CC.6.3.5.1 It is an essential requirement that The Company has a means of implementing System Restoration
in accordance with the requirements of the Electricity System Restoration Standard. This is
facilitated by agreeing contracts with Restoration Contractors who have Plant at a number of
strategically located sites. In the case of Restoration Contractors who are party to a Distribution
Restoration Zone Plan, The Company shall agree the requirements with the relevant Network
Operator and Restoration Contractors.
CC.6.3.5.2 A GBGF-I designed with an Anchor Plant Capability will also be capable of satisfying the relevant
Grid Forming Capability requirements defined in ECC.6.3.19 as agreed with The Company.
CC.6.3.5.3 Restoration Contractors who are Offshore Generators and Transmission DC Converter owners
who are part of an Offshore Local Joint Restoration Plan, shall ensure their Plant and Apparatus
is designed to satisfy the requirements of CC.7.10 and CC.7.11.

Control Arrangements
CC.6.3.6 (a) Each:
(i) Offshore Generating Unit in a Large Power Station or Onshore Generating Unit; or,
(ii) Onshore DC Converter with a Completion Date on or after 1 April 2005 or Offshore DC
Converter at a Large Power Station; or,
(iii) Onshore Power Park Module in England and Wales with a Completion Date on or after
1 January 2006; or,
(iv) Onshore Power Park Module in operation in Scotland on or after 1 January 2006 (with a
Completion Date after 1 July 2004 and in a Power Station with a Registered Capacity
of 50MW or more); or,
(v) Offshore Power Park Module in a Large Power Station with a Registered Capacity of
50MW or more;

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

26 of 99
 must be capable of contributing to Frequency control by continuous modulation of Active
Power supplied to the National Electricity Transmission System or the User System in
which it is Embedded. For the avoidance of doubt, each OTSDUW DC Converter shall provide
each GB Code User in respect of its Offshore Power Stations connected to and/or using an
Offshore Transmission System a continuous signal indicating the real time Frequency
measured at the Transmission Interface Point.
(b) Each:
(i) Onshore Generating Unit; or,
(ii) Onshore DC Converter (with a Completion Date on or after 1 April 2005 excluding current
source technologies); or
(iii) Onshore Power Park Module in England and Wales with a Completion Date on or after
1 January 2006; or,
(iv) Onshore Power Park Module in Scotland irrespective of Completion Date; or,
(v) Offshore Generating Unit at a Large Power Station, Offshore DC Converter at a Large
Power Station or Offshore Power Park Module at a Large Power Station which provides
a reactive range beyond the minimum requirements specified in CC.6.3.2(e) (iii); or,
(vi) OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at a Transmission Interface Point
must be capable of contributing to voltage control by continuous changes to the Reactive Power
supplied to the National Electricity Transmission System or the User System in which it is
Embedded.

CC.6.3.7 (a) Each Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power Park Module (excluding Onshore Power
Park Modules in Scotland with a Completion Date before 1 July 2004 or Onshore Power Park
Modules in a Power Station in Scotland with a Registered Capacity less than 50MW or
Offshore Power Park Modules in a Large Power Station located Offshore with a Registered
Capacity less than 50MW) must be fitted with a fast acting proportional Frequency control
device (or turbine speed governor) and unit load controller or equivalent control device to
provide Frequency response under normal operational conditions in accordance with
Balancing Code 3 (BC3). In the case of a Power Park Module the Frequency or speed
control device(s) may be on the Power Park Module or on each individual Power Park Unit or
be a combination of both. The Frequency control device(s) (or speed governor(s)) must be
designed and operated to the appropriate:
(i) European Specification; or
(ii) in the absence of a relevant European Specification, such other standard which is in
common use within the European Community (which may include a manufacturer
specification);
as at the time when the installation of which it forms part was designed or (in the case of
modification or alteration to the Frequency control device (or turbine speed governor)) when
the modification or alteration was designed.
The European Specification or other standard utilised in accordance with sub-paragraph
CC.6.3.7 (a) (ii) will be notified to The Company by the GB Generator or DC Converter Station
owner or, in the case of an Embedded Medium Power Station not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement or Embedded DC Converter Station not subject to a Bilateral Agreement, the
relevant Network Operator:
(i) as part of the application for a Bilateral Agreement; or
(ii) as part of the application for a varied Bilateral Agreement; or
(iii) in the case of an Embedded Development, within 28 days of entry into the Embedded
Development Agreement (or such later time as agreed with The Company); or
(iv) as soon as possible prior to any modification or alteration to the Frequency control device
(or governor); and
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
27 of 99
 (b) The Frequency control device (or speed governor) in co-ordination with other control devices
must control the Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power Park Module Active Power Output
with stability over the entire operating range of the Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power
Park Module; and
(c) The Frequency control device (or speed governor) must meet the following minimum
requirements:
(i) Where a Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power Park Module becomes isolated from
the rest of the Total System but is still supplying Customers, the Frequency control
device (or speed governor) must also be able to control System Frequency below 52Hz
unless this causes the Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power Park Module to operate
below its Designed Minimum Operating Level when it is possible that it may, as detailed
in BC 3.7.3, trip after a time. For the avoidance of doubt, the Generating Unit, DC
Converter or Power Park Module is only required to operate within the System
Frequency range 47 - 52 Hz as defined in CC.6.1.3;
(ii) the Frequency control device (or speed governor) must be capable of being set so that it
operates with an overall speed Droop of between 3% and 5%. For the avoidance of doubt,
in the case of a Power Park Module the speed Droop should be equivalent of a fixed
setting between 3% and 5% applied to each Power Park Unit in service;
(iii) in the case of all Generating Units, DC Converter or Power Park Module other than the
Steam Unit within a CCGT Module the Frequency control device (or speed governor)
deadband should be no greater than 0.03Hz (for the avoidance of doubt, ±0.015Hz). In the
case of the Steam Unit within a CCGT Module, the speed Governor Deadband should
be set to an appropriate value consistent with the requirements of CC.6.3.7(c)(i) and the
requirements of BC3.7.2 for the provision of Limited High Frequency Response;
For the avoidance of doubt, the minimum requirements in (ii) and (iii) for the provision of System
Ancillary Services do not restrict the negotiation of Commercial Ancillary Services between
The Company and the GB Code User using other parameters; and
(d) A facility to modify, so as to fulfil the requirements of the Balancing Codes, the Target
Frequency setting either continuously or in a maximum of 0.05 Hz steps over at least the range
50 0.1 Hz should be provided in the unit load controller or equivalent device.
(e) (i) Each Onshore Generating Unit and/or CCGT Module which has a Completion Date
after 1 January 2001 in England and Wales, and after 1 April 2005 in Scotland, must be
capable of meeting the minimum Frequency response requirement profile subject to and
in accordance with the provisions of Appendix 3.
(ii) Each DC Converter at a DC Converter Station which has a Completion Date on or after
1 April 2005 and each Offshore DC Converter at a Large Power Station must be capable
of meeting the minimum Frequency response requirement profile subject to and in
accordance with the provisions of Appendix 3.
(iii) Each Onshore Power Park Module in operation in England and Wales with a Completion
Date on or after 1 January 2006 must be capable of meeting the minimum Frequency
response requirement profile subject to and in accordance with the provisions of Appendix
3.
(iv) Each Onshore Power Park Module in operation on or after 1 January 2006 in Scotland
(with a Completion Date on or after 1 April 2005 and a Registered Capacity of 50MW or
more) must be capable of meeting the minimum Frequency response requirement profile
subject to and in accordance with the provisions of Appendix 3.
(v) Each Offshore Generating Unit in a Large Power Station must be capable of meeting
the minimum Frequency response requirement profile subject to and in accordance with
the provisions of Appendix 3.
(vi) Each Offshore Power Park Module in a Large Power Station with a Registered
Capacity of 50 MW or greater, must be capable of meeting the minimum Frequency
response requirement profile subject to and in accordance with the provisions of Appendix
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
28 of 99
 3.
(vii) Subject to the requirements of CC.6.3.7(e), Offshore Generating Units at a Large Power
Station, Offshore Power Park Modules at a Large Power Station and Offshore DC
Converters in a Large Power Station shall comply with the requirements of CC.6.3.7. GB
Generators should be aware that Section K of the STC places requirements on Offshore
Transmission Licensees which utilise a Transmission DC Converter as part of their
Offshore Transmission System to make appropriate provisions to enable GB
Generators to fulfil their obligations.
(viii) Each OTSDUW DC Converter must be capable of providing a continuous signal indicating
the real time frequency measured at the Interface Point to the Offshore Grid Entry Point.
(f) For the avoidance of doubt, the requirements of Appendix 3 do not apply to:
(i) Generating Units and/or CCGT Modules which have a Completion Date before 1
January 2001 in England and Wales, and before 1 April 2005 in Scotland, for whom the
remaining requirements of this clause CC.6.3.7 shall continue to apply unchanged: or
(ii) DC Converters at a DC Converter Station which have a Completion Date before 1 April
2005; or
(iii) Onshore Power Park Modules in England and Wales with a Completion Date before 1
January 2006 for whom only the requirements of Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode
(BC3.5.2) operation shall apply; or
(iv) Onshore Power Park Modules in operation in Scotland before 1 January 2006 for whom
only the requirements of Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode (BC3.5.2) operation shall
apply; or
(v) Onshore Power Park Modules in operation after 1 January 2006 in Scotland which have
a Completion Date before 1 April 2005 for whom the remaining requirements of this clause
CC.6.3.7 shall continue to apply unchanged; or
(vi) Offshore Power Park Modules which are in a Large Power Station with a Registered
Capacity less than 50MW for whom only the requirements of Limited Frequency
Sensitive Mode (BC3.5.2) operation shall apply; or
(g) Restoration Contractors shall be capable of operating their Generating Units or DC Converters
or Power Park Modules such that the Frequency control device (or turbine speed governor) and
unit load controller or equivalent control device can be switched to Frequency control only with no
load influence, during the early stages of a System Restoration whilst in island operation.
(h) Generators and DC Converter owners shall advise The Company of the capability of operating
their Generating Units or Power Park Modules or DC Converters such that the Frequency
control device (or turbine speed governor) and unit load controller or equivalent control device can
be switched to Frequency control only with no load influence, during the early stages of System
Restoration whilst in island operation. If there is a suitable capability, The Company and the User
shall agree on how it shall be used and kept available.
(i) In addition to the requirements of CC.6.3.7 (g) and CC.6.3.7(h) the following shall apply:-
(i) Changes to any control schemes and settings identified from CC.6.3.7(g) and (h) shall be
agreed between The Company and/or Relevant Transmission Licensee and/or Network
Operator as recorded in the Restoration Plan.
(ii) During System Restoration, any changes to the schemes and settings defined in
CC.6.3.7(g) and (h) of the different control devices of the Generating Unit or Power Park
Module or Restoration Contractor’s Plant or DC Converter shall be coordinated and
agreed between the Relevant Transmission Licensee, the GB Generator, Restoration
Contractor and DC Converter owner as part of a Restoration Plan.
Excitation and Voltage Control Performance Requirements

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

29 of 99
CC.6.3.8 (a) Excitation and voltage control performance requirements applicable to Onshore Generating
Units, Onshore Power Park Modules, Onshore DC Converters and OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus.
(i) A continuously-acting automatic excitation control system is required to provide constant
terminal voltage control of the Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit without instability
over the entire operating range of the Onshore Generating Unit.
(ii) In respect of Onshore Synchronous Generating Units with a Completion Date before 1
January 2009, the requirements for excitation control facilities, including Power System
Stabilisers, where in The Company's view these are necessary for system reasons, will
be specified in the Bilateral Agreement. If any Modification to the excitation control
facilities of such Onshore Synchronous Generating Units is made on or after 1 January
2009 the requirements that shall apply may be specified in the Bilateral Agreement as
varied. To the extent that the Bilateral Agreement does not specify, the requirements
given or referred to in CC.A.6 shall apply. The performance requirements for a continuously
acting automatic excitation control system that shall be complied with by the GB Code
User in respect of such Onshore Synchronous Generating Units with a Completion
Date on or after 1 January 2009 are given or referred to in CC.A.6. Reference is made to
on-load commissioning witnessed by The Company in BC2.11.2.
(iii) In the case of an Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore DC Converter,
Onshore Power Park Module or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface Point
a continuously-acting automatic control system is required to provide control of the voltage
(or zero transfer of Reactive Power as applicable to CC.6.3.2) at the Onshore Grid Entry
Point or User System Entry Point or in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at
the Interface Point without instability over the entire operating range of the Onshore Non-
Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore DC Converter, Onshore Power Park Module
or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus. Any Plant or Apparatus used in the provisions of such
voltage control within an Onshore Power Park Module may be located at the Power Park
Unit terminals, an appropriate intermediate busbar or the Connection Point. OTSDUW
Plant and Apparatus used in the provision of such voltage control may be located at the
Offshore Grid Entry Point, an appropriate intermediate busbar or at the Interface Point.
In the case of an Onshore Power Park Module in Scotland with a Completion Date
before 1 January 2009, voltage control may be at the Power Park Unit terminals, an
appropriate intermediate busbar or the Connection Point as specified in the Bilateral
Agreement. When operating below 20% Rated MW the automatic control system may
continue to provide voltage control utilising any available reactive capability. If voltage
control is not being provided, the automatic control system shall be designed to ensure a
smooth transition between the shaded area bound by CD and the non-shaded area bound
by AB in Figure 1 of CC.6.3.2 (c).
(iv) The performance requirements for a continuously acting automatic voltage control system
in respect of Onshore Power Park Modules, Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating
Units and Onshore DC Converters with a Completion Date before 1 January 2009 will
be specified in the Bilateral Agreement. If any Modification to the continuously acting
automatic voltage control system of such Onshore Power Park Modules, Onshore Non-
Synchronous Generating Units and Onshore DC Converters is made on or after 1
January 2009 the requirements that shall apply may be specified in the Bilateral
Agreement as varied. To the extent that the Bilateral Agreement does not specify, the
requirements given or referred to in CC.A.7 shall apply. The performance requirements for
a continuously acting automatic voltage control system that shall be complied with by the
GB Code User in respect of Onshore Power Park Modules, Onshore Non-
Synchronous Generating Units and Onshore DC Converters or OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus at the Interface Point with a Completion Date on or after 1 January 2009 are
given or referred to in CC.A.7.
(v) Unless otherwise required for testing in accordance with OC5.A.2, the automatic excitation
control system of an Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit shall always be operated
such that it controls the Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit terminal voltage to a
value that is
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
30 of 99
 - equal to its rated value; or
- only where provisions have been made in the Bilateral Agreement, greater than its rated
value.

(vi) In particular, other control facilities, including constant Reactive Power output control
modes and constant Power Factor control modes (but excluding VAr limiters) are not
required. However, if present in the excitation or voltage control system they will be
disabled unless the Bilateral Agreement records otherwise. Operation of such control
facilities will be in accordance with the provisions contained in BC2.
(b) Excitation and voltage control performance requirements applicable to Offshore Generating
Units at a Large Power Station, Offshore Power Park Modules at a Large Power Station
and Offshore DC Converters at a Large Power Station.
A continuously acting automatic control system is required to provide either:
(i) control of Reactive Power (as specified in CC.6.3.2(e) (i) (ii)) at the Offshore Grid Entry
Point without instability over the entire operating range of the Offshore Generating Unit,
Offshore DC Converter or Offshore Power Park Module. The performance requirements
for this automatic control system will be specified in the Bilateral Agreement or;
(ii) where an alternative reactive capability has been specified in the Bilateral Agreement, in
accordance with CC.6.3.2 (e) (iii), the Offshore Generating Unit, Offshore Power Park
Module or Offshore DC Converter will be required to control voltage and / or Reactive
Power without instability over the entire operating range of the Offshore Generating Unit,
Offshore Power Park Module or Offshore DC Converter. The performance requirements
of the control system will be specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
In addition to CC.6.3.8(b) (i) and (ii) the requirements for excitation control facilities, including
Power System Stabilisers, where in The Company’s view these are necessary for system
reasons, will be specified in the Bilateral Agreement. Reference is made to on-load
commissioning witnessed by The Company in BC2.11.2.
Steady state Load Inaccuracies
CC.6.3.9 The standard deviation of Load error at steady state Load over a 30 minute period must not exceed
2.5 per cent of a Genset’s Registered Capacity. Where a Genset is instructed to Frequency
sensitive operation, allowance will be made in determining whether there has been an error
according to the governor droop characteristic registered under the PC.
For the avoidance of doubt in the case of a Power Park Module allowance will be made for the full
variation of mechanical power output.
Negative Phase Sequence Loadings
CC.6.3.10 In addition to meeting the conditions specified in CC.6.1.5(b), each Synchronous Generating Unit
will be required to withstand, without tripping, the negative phase sequence loading incurred by
clearance of a close-up phase-to-phase fault, by System Back-Up Protection on the National
Electricity Transmission System or User System located Onshore in which it is Embedded.
Neutral Earthing
CC.6.3.11 At nominal System voltages of 132kV and above the higher voltage windings of a transformer of a
Generating Unit, DC Converter, Power Park Module or transformer resulting from OTSDUW must
be star connected with the star point suitable for connection to earth. The earthing and lower voltage
winding arrangement shall be such as to ensure that the Earth Fault Factor requirement of
paragraph CC.6.2.1.1 (b) will be met on the National Electricity Transmission System at nominal
System voltages of 132kV and above.
Frequency Sensitive Relays

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

31 of 99
CC.6.3.12 As stated in CC.6.1.3, the System Frequency could rise to 52Hz or fall to 47Hz. Each Generating
Unit, DC Converter, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, Power Park Module or any constituent
element must continue to operate within this Frequency range for at least the periods of time given
in CC.6.1.3 unless The Company has agreed to any Frequency-level relays and/or rate-of-change-
of-Frequency relays which will trip such Generating Unit, DC Converter, OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus, Power Park Module and any constituent element within this Frequency range, under
the Bilateral Agreement.
CC.6.3.13 GB Generators (including in respect of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) and DC Converter Station
owners will be responsible for protecting all their Generating Units (and OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus), DC Converters or Power Park Modules against damage should Frequency
excursions outside the range 52Hz to 47Hz ever occur. Should such excursions occur, it is up to the
GB Generator or DC Converter Station owner to decide whether to disconnect their Apparatus for
reasons of safety of Apparatus, Plant and/or personnel.
CC.6.3.14 It may be agreed in the Bilateral Agreement that a Genset shall have a Fast-Start Capability.
Such Gensets may be used for Operating Reserve and their Start-Up may be initiated by
Frequency-level relays with settings in the range 49Hz to 50Hz as specified pursuant to OC2.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

32 of 99
CC.6.3.15 Fault Ride Through
This section sets out the fault ride through requirements on Generating Units, Power Park
Modules, DC Converters and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus. Onshore Generating Units,
Onshore Power Park Modules, Onshore DC Converters (including Embedded Medium Power
Stations and Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and with an
Onshore User System Entry Point (irrespective of whether they are located Onshore or Offshore))
and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus are required to operate through System faults and
disturbances as defined in CC.6.3.15.1 (a), CC.6.3.15.1 (b) and CC.6.3.15.3. Offshore GB
Generators in respect of Offshore Generating Units at a Large Power Station, Offshore Power
Park Modules at a Large Power Station and DC Converter Station owners in respect of Offshore
DC Converters at a Large Power Station shall have the option of meeting either:
(i) CC.6.3.15.1 (a), CC.6.3.15.1 (b) and CC.6.3.15.3, or:
(ii) CC.6.3.15.2 (a), CC.6.3.15.2 (b) and CC.6.3.15.3
Offshore GB Generators and Offshore DC Converter owners, should notify The Company which
option they wish to select within 28 days (or such longer period as The Company may agree, in any
event this being no later than 3 months before the Completion Date of the offer for a final CUSC
Contract which would be made following the appointment of the Offshore Transmission
Licensee).
For up to 30 minutes following such a fault or disturbance Generating Units, Power Park Modules,
DC Converters and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus are required to remain connected and stable
provided System operating conditions have returned within those specified in CC.6.1.
CC.6.3.15.1 Fault Ride through applicable to Generating Units, Power Park Modules and DC Converters and
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus
(a) Short circuit faults on the Onshore Transmission System (which may include an Interface
Point) at Supergrid Voltage up to 140ms in duration.
(i) Each Generating Unit, DC Converter, or Power Park Module and any constituent Power
Park Unit thereof and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus shall remain transiently stable and
connected to the System without tripping of any Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power
Park Module and / or any constituent Power Park Unit, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus,
and for Plant and Apparatus installed on or after 1 December 2017, reactive
compensation equipment, for a close-up solid three-phase short circuit fault or any
unbalanced short circuit fault on the Onshore Transmission System (including in respect
of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, the Interface Point) operating at Supergrid Voltages
for a total fault clearance time of up to 140 ms. A solid three-phase or unbalanced earthed
fault results in zero voltage on the faulted phase(s) at the point of fault. The duration of zero
voltage is dependent on local Protection and circuit breaker operating times. This duration
and the fault clearance times will be specified in the Bilateral Agreement. Following fault
clearance, recovery of the Supergrid Voltage on the Onshore Transmission System to
90% may take longer than 140ms as illustrated in Appendix 4A Figures CC.A.4A.1 (a) and
(b). It should be noted that in the case of an Offshore Generating Unit, Offshore DC
Converter or Offshore Power Park Module (including any Offshore Power Park Unit
thereof) which is connected to an Offshore Transmission System which includes a
Transmission DC Converter as part of that Offshore Transmission System, the
Offshore Grid Entry Point voltage may not indicate the presence of a fault on the
Onshore Transmission System. The fault will affect the level of Active Power that can
be transferred to the Onshore Transmission System and therefore subject the Offshore
Generating Unit, Offshore DC Converter or Offshore Power Park Module (including
any Offshore Power Park Unit thereof) to a load rejection.
(ii) Each Generating Unit, Power Park Module and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, shall
be designed such that upon both clearance of the fault on the Onshore Transmission
System as detailed in CC.6.3.15.1 (a) (i) and within 0.5 seconds of the restoration of the
voltage at the Onshore Grid Entry Point (for Onshore Generating Units or Onshore
Power Park Modules) or Interface Point (for Offshore Generating Units, Offshore
Power Park Modules or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) to the minimum levels specified
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
33 of 99
 in CC.6.1.4 (or within 0.5 seconds of restoration of the voltage at the User System Entry
Point to 90% of nominal or greater if Embedded), Active Power output or in the case of
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, Active Power transfer capability, shall be restored to at
least 90% of the level available immediately before the fault. Once the Active Power
output, or in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, Active Power transfer capability,
has been restored to the required level, Active Power oscillations shall be acceptable
provided that:
- the total Active Energy delivered during the period of the oscillations is at least that
which would have been delivered if the Active Power was constant
- the oscillations are adequately damped
During the period of the fault as detailed in CC.6.3.15.1 (a) (i) for which the voltage at the
Grid Entry Point (or Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) is
outside the limits specified in CC.6.1.4, each Generating Unit or Power Park Module or
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus shall generate maximum reactive current without
exceeding the transient rating limit of the Generating Unit, OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus or Power Park Module and / or any constituent Power Park Unit or reactive
compensation equipment. For Plant and Apparatus installed on or after 1 December 2017,
switched reactive compensation equipment (such as mechanically switched capacitors and
reactors) shall be controlled such that it is not switched in or out of service during the fault
but may act to assist in post fault voltage recovery.
(iii) Each DC Converter shall be designed to meet the Active Power recovery characteristics
(and OTSDUW DC Converter shall be designed to meet the Active Power transfer
capability at the Interface Point) as specified in the Bilateral Agreement upon clearance
of the fault on the Onshore Transmission System as detailed in CC.6.3.15.1 (a) (i).
(b) Supergrid Voltage dips on the Onshore Transmission System greater than 140ms in
duration
(1b) Requirements applicable to Synchronous Generating Units subject to Supergrid Voltage
dips on the Onshore Transmission System greater than 140ms in duration.

In addition to the requirements of CC.6.3.15.1 (a) each Synchronous Generating Unit, each
with a Completion Date on or after 1 April 2005 shall:
(i) remain transiently stable and connected to the System without tripping of any
Synchronous Generating Unit for balanced Supergrid Voltage dips and associated
durations on the Onshore Transmission System (which could be at the Interface Point)
anywhere on or above the heavy black line shown in Figure 5a. Appendix 4A and Figures
CC.A.4A.3.2 (a), (b) and (c) provide an explanation and illustrations of Figure 5a; and,

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

34 of 99
 Figure 5a
(ii) provide Active Power output at the Grid Entry Point, during Supergrid Voltage dips on
the Onshore Transmission System as described in Figure 5a, at least in proportion to
the retained balanced voltage at the Onshore Grid Entry Point (for Onshore
Synchronous Generating Units) or Interface Point (for Offshore Synchronous
Generating Units) (or the retained balanced voltage at the User System Entry Point if
Embedded) and shall generate maximum reactive current (where the voltage at the Grid
Entry Point is outside the limits specified in CC.6.1.4) without exceeding the transient
rating limits of the Synchronous Generating Unit and,
(iii) restore Active Power output following Supergrid Voltage dips on the Onshore
Transmission System as described in Figure 5a, within 1 second of restoration of the
voltage to 1.0p.u of the nominal voltage at the:
Onshore Grid Entry Point for directly connected Onshore Synchronous
Generating Units or,
Interface Point for Offshore Synchronous Generating Units or,
User System Entry Point for Embedded Onshore Synchronous Generating Units
or,
User System Entry Point for Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a
Bilateral Agreement which comprise Synchronous Generating Units and with an
Onshore User System Entry Point (irrespective of whether they are located
Onshore or Offshore)
to at least 90% of the level available immediately before the occurrence of the dip. Once
the Active Power output has been restored to the required level, Active Power oscillations
shall be acceptable provided that:
- the total Active Energy delivered during the period of the oscillations is at least that
which would have been delivered if the Active Power was constant
- the oscillations are adequately damped.
For the avoidance of doubt a balanced Onshore Transmission System Supergrid Voltage
meets the requirements of CC.6.1.5 (b) and CC.6.1.6.
(2b) Requirements applicable to OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus and Power Park Modules subject
to Supergrid Voltage dips on the Onshore Transmission System greater than 140ms in
duration

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

35 of 99
 In addition to the requirements of CC.6.3.15.1 (a) each OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or each
Power Park Module and / or any constituent Power Park Unit, each with a Completion Date
on or after the 1 April 2005 shall:
(i) remain transiently stable and connected to the System without tripping of any OTSDUW
Plant and Apparatus, or Power Park Module and / or any constituent Power Park Unit,
for balanced Supergrid Voltage dips and associated durations on the Onshore
Transmission System (which could be at the Interface Point) anywhere on or above the
heavy black line shown in Figure 5b. Appendix 4A and Figures CC.A.4A.3.4 (a), (b) and (c)
provide an explanation and illustrations of Figure 5b; and,
Supergrid Voltage Level
(% of Nominal)
90
85
80

15

0.14s 1.2s 2.5s 3 minutes

Supergrid Voltage Duration

Figure 5b

(ii) provide Active Power output at the Grid Entry Point or in the case of an OTSDUW, Active
Power transfer capability at the Transmission Interface Point, during Supergrid Voltage
dips on the Onshore Transmission System as described in Figure 5b, at least in
proportion to the retained balanced voltage at the Onshore Grid Entry Point (for Onshore
Power Park Modules) or Interface Point (for OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus and
Offshore Power Park Modules) (or the retained balanced voltage at the User System
Entry Point if Embedded) except in the case of a Non-Synchronous Generating Unit or
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Power Park Module where there has been a reduction
in the Intermittent Power Source or in the case of OTSDUW Active Power transfer
capability in the time range in Figure 5b that restricts the Active Power output or in the
case of an OTSDUW Active Power transfer capability below this level and shall generate
maximum reactive current (where the voltage at the Grid Entry Point, or in the case of an
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, the Interface Point voltage, is outside the limits specified
in CC.6.1.4) without exceeding the transient rating limits of the OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus or Power Park Module and any constituent Power Park Unit; and,

(iii) restore Active Power output (or, in the case of OTSDUW, Active Power transfer
capability), following Supergrid Voltage dips on the Onshore Transmission System as
described in Figure 5b, within 1 second of restoration of the voltage at the:
Onshore Grid Entry Point for directly connected Onshore Power Park Modules or,
Interface Point for OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus and Offshore Power Park
Modules or,
User System Entry Point for Embedded Onshore Power Park Modules or,
User System Entry Point for Embedded Medium Power Stations which comprise
Power Park Modules not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and with an Onshore
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
36 of 99
 User System Entry Point (irrespective of whether they are located Onshore or
Offshore)
to the minimum levels specified in CC.6.1.4 to at least 90% of the level available
immediately before the occurrence of the dip except in the case of a Non-Synchronous
Generating Unit, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Power Park Module where there
has been a reduction in the Intermittent Power Source in the time range in Figure 5b that
restricts the Active Power output or, in the case of OTSDUW, Active Power transfer
capability below this level. Once the Active Power output or, in the case of OTSDUW,
Active Power transfer capability has been restored to the required level, Active Power
oscillations shall be acceptable provided that:
- the total Active Energy delivered during the period of the oscillations is at least that
which would have been delivered if the Active Power was constant
- the oscillations are adequately damped.
For the avoidance of doubt a balanced Onshore Transmission System Supergrid Voltage
meets the requirements of CC.6.1.5 (b) and CC.6.1.6.
CC.6.3.15.2 Fault Ride Through applicable to Offshore Generating Units at a Large Power Station, Offshore
Power Park Modules at a Large Power Station and Offshore DC Converters at a Large Power
Station who choose to meet the fault ride through requirements at the LV side of the Offshore
Platform
(a) Requirements on Offshore Generating Units, Offshore Power Park Modules and Offshore
DC Converters to withstand voltage dips on the LV Side of the Offshore Platform for up to
140ms in duration as a result of faults and / or voltage dips on the Onshore Transmission
System operating at Supergrid Voltage.
(i) Each Offshore Generating Unit, Offshore DC Converter, or Offshore Power Park
Module and any constituent Power Park Unit thereof shall remain transiently stable and
connected to the System without tripping of any Offshore Generating Unit, or Offshore
DC Converter or Offshore Power Park Module and / or any constituent Power Park Unit
or, in the case of Plant and Apparatus installed on or after 1 December 2017, reactive
compensation equipment, for any balanced or unbalanced voltage dips on the LV Side of
the Offshore Platform whose profile is anywhere on or above the heavy black line shown
in Figure 6. For the avoidance of doubt, the profile beyond 140ms in Figure 6 shows the
minimum recovery in voltage that will be seen by the Generator’s Plant and Apparatus
following clearance of the fault at 140ms. Appendix 4B and Figures CC.A.4B.2 (a) and (b)
provide further illustration of the voltage recovery profile that may be seen. It should be
noted that in the case of an Offshore Generating Unit, Offshore DC Converter or
Offshore Power Park Module (including any Offshore Power Park Unit thereof) which
is connected to an Offshore Transmission System which includes a Transmission DC
Converter as part of that Offshore Transmission System, the Offshore Grid Entry Point
voltage may not indicate the presence of a fault on the Onshore Transmission System.
The voltage dip will affect the level of Active Power that can be transferred to the Onshore
Transmission System and therefore subject the Offshore Generating Unit, Offshore
DC Converter or Offshore Power Park Module (including any Offshore Power Park Unit
thereof) to a load rejection.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

37 of 99
 V/VN(%)

100%

94%

60%

15%

0 140ms 500ms Time

Figure 6

V/VN is the ratio of the actual voltage on one or more phases at the LV Side of the Offshore
Platform to the nominal voltage of the LV Side of the Offshore Platform.
(ii) Each Offshore Generating Unit, or Offshore Power Park Module and any constituent
Power Park Unit thereof shall provide Active Power output, during voltage dips on the LV
Side of the Offshore Platform as described in Figure 6, at least in proportion to the
retained voltage at the LV Side of the Offshore Platform except in the case of an
Offshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit or Offshore Power Park Module where
there has been a reduction in the Intermittent Power Source in the time range in Figure
6 that restricts the Active Power output below this level and shall generate maximum
reactive current without exceeding the transient rating limits of the Offshore Generating
Unit or Offshore Power Park Module and any constituent Power Park Unit or, in the
case of Plant and Apparatus installed on or after 1 December 2017, reactive
compensation equipment. Once the Active Power output has been restored to the
required level, Active Power oscillations shall be acceptable provided that:
- the total Active Energy delivered during the period of the oscillations is at least that
which would have been delivered if the Active Power was constant
- the oscillations are adequately damped
and;
(iii) Each Offshore DC Converter shall be designed to meet the Active Power recovery
characteristics as specified in the Bilateral Agreement upon restoration of the voltage at
the LV Side of the Offshore Platform.

(b) Requirements of Offshore Generating Units, Offshore Power Park Modules, to withstand
voltage dips on the LV Side of the Offshore Platform greater than 140ms in duration.
(1b) Requirements applicable to Offshore Synchronous Generating Units to withstand voltage dips
on the LV Side of the Offshore Platform greater than 140ms in duration.
In addition to the requirements of CC.6.3.15.2. (a) each Offshore Synchronous Generating Unit
shall:

(i) remain transiently stable and connected to the System without tripping of any Offshore
Synchronous Generating Unit for any balanced voltage dips on the LV side of the
Offshore Platform and associated durations anywhere on or above the heavy black line
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
38 of 99
 shown in Figure 7a. Appendix 4B and Figures CC.A.4B.3.2 (a), (b) and (c) provide an
explanation and illustrations of Figure 7a. It should be noted that in the case of an Offshore
Synchronous Generating Unit which is connected to an Offshore Transmission
System which includes a Transmission DC Converter as part of that Offshore
Transmission System, the Offshore Grid Entry Point voltage may not indicate the
presence of a voltage dip on the Onshore Transmission System. The voltage dip will
affect the level of Active Power that can be transferred to the Onshore Transmission
System and therefore subject the Offshore Generating Unit, to a load rejection.

(ii) provide Active Power output, during voltage dips on the LV Side of the Offshore Platform
as described in Figure 7a, at least in proportion to the retained balanced or unbalanced
voltage at the LV Side of the Offshore Platform and shall generate maximum reactive
current (where the voltage at the Offshore Grid Entry Point is outside the limits specified
in CC.6.1.4) without exceeding the transient rating limits of the Offshore Synchronous
Generating Unit and,
(iii) within 1 second of restoration of the voltage to 1.0p.u of the nominal voltage at the LV Side
of the Offshore Platform, restore Active Power to at least 90% of the Offshore
Synchronous Generating Unit's immediate pre-disturbed value, unless there has been a
reduction in the Intermittent Power Source in the time range in Figure 7a that restricts the
Active Power output below this level. Once the Active Power output has been restored
to the required level, Active Power oscillations shall be acceptable provided that:
- the total Active Energy delivered during the period of the oscillations is at least that
which would have been delivered if the Active Power was constant
- the oscillations are adequately damped

(2b) Requirements applicable to Offshore Power Park Modules to withstand voltage dips on the
LV Side of the Offshore Platform greater than 140ms in duration.

In addition to the requirements of CC.6.3.15.2. (a) each Offshore Power Park Module and / or
any constituent Power Park Unit, shall:
(i) remain transiently stable and connected to the System without tripping of any Offshore
Power Park Module and / or any constituent Power Park Unit, for any balanced voltage

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

39 of 99
 dips on the LV side of the Offshore Platform and associated durations anywhere on or
above the heavy black line shown in Figure 7b. Appendix 4B and Figures CC.A.4B.5. (a),
(b) and (c) provide an explanation and illustrations of Figure 7b. It should be noted that in
the case of an Offshore Power Park Module (including any Offshore Power Park Unit
thereof) which is connected to an Offshore Transmission System which includes a
Transmission DC Converter as part of that Offshore Transmission System, the
Offshore Grid Entry Point voltage may not indicate the presence of a voltage dip on the
Onshore Transmission System. The voltage dip will affect the level of Active Power that
can be transferred to the Onshore Transmission System and therefore subject the
Offshore Power Park Module (including any Offshore Power Park Unit thereof) to a load
rejection.
Voltage at LV Side of Offshore Platform
(% of Nominal)
90
85
80

15

0.14s 1.2s 2.5s 3 minutes

Offshore Platform LV Voltage Duration

Figure 7b

(ii) provide Active Power output, during voltage dips on the LV Side of the Offshore Platform
as described in Figure 7b, at least in proportion to the retained balanced or unbalanced
voltage at the LV Side of the Offshore Platform except in the case of an Offshore Non-
Synchronous Generating Unit or Offshore Power Park Module where there has been
a reduction in the Intermittent Power Source in the time range in Figure 7b that restricts
the Active Power output below this level and shall generate maximum reactive current
(where the voltage at the Offshore Grid Entry Point is outside the limits specified in
CC.6.1.4) without exceeding the transient rating limits of the Offshore Power Park Module
and any constituent Power Park Unit or reactive compensation equipment. For Plant and
Apparatus installed on or after 1 December 2017, switched reactive compensation
equipment (such as mechanically switched capacitors and reactors) shall be controlled
such that it is not switched in or out of service during the fault but may act to assist in post
fault voltage recovery; and,
(iii) within 1 second of the restoration of the voltage at the LV Side of the Offshore Platform
(to the minimum levels specified in CC.6.1.4) restore Active Power to at least 90% of the
Offshore Power Park Module's immediate pre-disturbed value, unless there has been a
reduction in the Intermittent Power Source in the time range in Figure 7b that restricts the
Active Power output below this level. Once the Active Power output has been restored
to the required level, Active Power oscillations shall be acceptable provided that:
- the total Active Energy delivered during the period of the oscillations is at least that
which would have been delivered if the Active Power was constant
- the oscillations are adequately damped
CC.6.3.15.3 Other Requirements

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

40 of 99
 (i) In the case of a Power Park Module (comprising of wind-turbine generator units), the
requirements in CC.6.3.15.1 and CC.6.3.15.2 do not apply when the Power Park Module is
operating at less than 5% of its Rated MW or during very high wind speed conditions when more
than 50% of the wind turbine generator units in a Power Park Module have been shut down
or disconnected under an emergency shutdown sequence to protect GB Code User’s Plant
and Apparatus.
(ii) In addition to meeting the conditions specified in CC.6.1.5(b) and CC.6.1.6, each Non-
Synchronous Generating Unit, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Power Park Module with
a Completion Date after 1 April 2005 and any constituent Power Park Unit thereof will be
required to withstand, without tripping, the negative phase sequence loading incurred by
clearance of a close-up phase-to-phase fault, by System Back-Up Protection on the Onshore
Transmission System operating at Supergrid Voltage.
(iii) In the case of an Onshore Power Park Module in Scotland with a Completion Date before 1
January 2004 and a Registered Capacity less than 30MW, the requirements in CC.6.3.15.1
(a) do not apply. In the case of an Onshore Power Park Module in Scotland with a Completion
Date on or after 1 January 2004 and before 1 July 2005 and a Registered Capacity less than
30MW the requirements in CC.6.3.15.1 (a) are relaxed from the minimum Onshore
Transmission System Supergrid Voltage of zero to a minimum Onshore Transmission
System Supergrid Voltage of 15% of nominal. In the case of an Onshore Power Park Module
in Scotland with a Completion Date before 1 January 2004 and a Registered Capacity of
30MW and above the requirements in CC.6.3.15.1 (a) are relaxed from the minimum Onshore
Transmission System Supergrid Voltage of zero to a minimum Onshore Transmission
System Supergrid Voltage of 15% of nominal.
(iv) To avoid unwanted island operation, Non-Synchronous Generating Units in Scotland (and
those directly connected to a Scottish Offshore Transmission System), Power Park
Modules in Scotland (and those directly connected to a Scottish Offshore Transmission
System), or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus with an Interface Point in Scotland shall be
tripped for the following conditions:
(1) Frequency above 52Hz for more than 2 seconds
(2) Frequency below 47Hz for more than 2 seconds
(3) Voltage as measured at the Onshore Connection Point or Onshore User System Entry
Point or Offshore Grid Entry Point or Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus is below 80% for more than 2.5 seconds
(4) Voltage as measured at the Onshore Connection Point or Onshore User System Entry
Point or Offshore Grid Entry Point or Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus is above 120% (115% for 275kV) for more than 1 second.
The times in sections (1) and (2) are maximum trip times. Shorter times may be used to protect
the Non-Synchronous Generating Units, or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Power Park
Modules.

Additional Damping Control Facilities for DC Converters

CC.6.3.16 (a) DC Converter owners, or GB Generators in respect of OTSDUW DC Converters or Network
Operators in the case of an Embedded DC Converter Station not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement must ensure that any of their Onshore DC Converters or OTSDUW DC
Converters will not cause a sub-synchronous resonance problem on the Total System. Each
DC Converter or OTSDUW DC Converter is required to be provided with sub-synchronous
resonance damping control facilities.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

41 of 99
 (b) Where specified in the Bilateral Agreement, each DC Converter or OTSDUW DC Converter
is required to be provided with power oscillation damping or any other identified additional
control facilities.
System to Generator Operational Intertripping Scheme
CC.6.3.17 The Company may require that a System to Generator Operational Intertripping Scheme be
installed as part of a condition of the connection of the GB Generator. Scheme specific details shall
be included in the relevant Bilateral Agreement and shall, in respect of Bilateral Agreements
entered into on or after 16th March 2009 include the following information:
(1) the relevant category(ies) of the scheme (referred to as Category 1 Intertripping Scheme,
Category 2 Intertripping Scheme, Category 3 Intertripping Scheme and Category 4 Intertripping
Scheme);
(2) the Generating Unit(s) or CCGT Module(s) or Power Park Module(s) to be either permanently
armed or that can be instructed to be armed in accordance with BC2.8;
(3) the time within which the Generating Unit(s) or CCGT Module(s) or Power Park Module(s)
circuit breaker(s) are to be automatically tripped;
(4) the location to which the trip signal will be provided by The Company. Such location will be
provided by The Company prior to the commissioning of the Generating Unit(s) or CCGT
Module(s) or Power Park Module(s).
Where applicable, the Bilateral Agreement shall include the conditions on the National Electricity
Transmission System during which The Company may instruct the System to Generator
Operational Intertripping Scheme to be armed and the conditions that would initiate a trip signal.
CC.6.3.18 The time within which the Generating Unit(s) or CCGT Module or Power Park Module circuit
breaker(s) need to be automatically tripped is determined by the specific conditions local to the GB
Generator. This ‘time to trip’ (defined as time from provision of the trip signal by The Company to
the specified location, to circuit breaker main contact opening) can typically range from 100ms to
10sec. A longer time to trip may allow the initiation of an automatic reduction in the Generating
Unit(s) or CCGT Module(s) or Power Park Module(s) output prior to the automatic tripping of the
Generating Unit(s) or CCGT Module(s) or Power Park Module(s) circuit breaker. Where applicable
The Company may provide separate trip signals to allow for either a longer or shorter ‘time to trip’
to be initiated.
CC.6.4 General Network Operator And Non-Embedded Customer Requirements
CC.6.4.1 This part of the Grid Code describes the technical and design criteria and performance requirements
for Network Operators and Non-Embedded Customers.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

42 of 99
 Neutral Earthing
CC.6.4.2 At nominal System voltages of 132kV and above the higher voltage windings of three phase
transformers and transformer banks connected to the National Electricity Transmission System
must be star connected with the star point suitable for connection to earth. The earthing and lower
voltage winding arrangement shall be such as to ensure that the Earth Fault Factor requirement of
paragraph CC.6.2.1.1 (b) will be met on the National Electricity Transmission System at nominal
System voltages of 132kV and above.
Frequency Sensitive Relays
CC.6.4.3 As explained under OC6, each Network Operator, will make arrangements that will facilitate
automatic low Frequency Disconnection of Demand (based on Annual ACS Conditions).
CC.A.5.5. of Appendix 5 includes specifications of the local percentage Demand that shall be
disconnected at specific frequencies. The manner in which Demand subject to low Frequency
disconnection will be split into discrete MW blocks is specified in OC6.6. Technical requirements
relating to Low Frequency Relays are also listed in Appendix 5.
Operational Metering
CC.6.4.4 Where The Company can reasonably demonstrate that an Embedded Medium Power Station or
Embedded DC Converter Station has a significant effect on the National Electricity
Transmission System, it may require the Network Operator within whose System the Embedded
Medium Power Station or Embedded DC Converter Station is situated to ensure that the
operational metering equipment described in CC.6.5.6 is installed such that The Company can
receive the data referred to in CC.6.5.6. In the case of an Embedded Medium Power Station
subject to, or proposed to be subject to a Bilateral Agreement, The Company shall notify such
Network Operator of the details of such installation in writing within 3 months of being notified of the
application to connect under CUSC and in the case of an Embedded Medium Power Station not
subject to, or not proposed to be subject to a Bilateral Agreement in writing as a Site Specific
Requirement in accordance with the timescales in CUSC 6.5.5. In either case the Network
Operator shall ensure that the data referred to in CC.6.5.6 is provided to The Company.
CC.6.4.5 System Restoration
CC.6.4.5.1 Distribution Restoration Zone Plans are dependent upon Restoration Contractors who have an
Anchor Restoration Contract which requires the capability to Start-Up from Shutdown within 8
hours and to energise a part of a Network Operator’s System (and in some cases could extend to
energisation of parts of the Transmission System) upon instruction from a relevant Network
Operator without an external electrical power supply. Distribution Restoration Zone Plans may
also be dependent upon Top Up Restoration Contractors. Network Operators shall be
responsible for instructing Restoration Contractors in accordance with a Distribution Restoration
Zone Plan once The Company has issued an instruction to the Network Operator to activate a
Distribution Restoration Zone as provided for in OC9.4.7.8.1.
CC.6.4.5.2. Where a need for a Distribution Restoration Zone is agreed in accordance with OC9, the following
requirements shall apply:-
(a) Where there is a requirement for two adjacent Distribution Restoration Zones to be
Synchronised as part of the wider System Restoration process, and as catered for in the
relevant Distribution Restoration Zone Plans, appropriate Synchronising facilities shall exist,
or shall be installed by the Network Operator or Relevant Transmission Licensee as set out
in OC9.4.7.6.3(d). Such Synchronising facilities shall be identified as part of the development
of the Restoration Plan as set out in OC9.4.7.6.1. Where a Distribution Restoration Zone
extends to Transmission Plant and Apparatus as provided for in OC9.4.7.8.15, the
responsibility for the provision of these facilities on Transmission equipment is the responsibility
of the Relevant Transmission Licensee.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

43 of 99
 (b) The Company and the Network Operator and Relevant Transmission Licensee (where
necessary) shall agree the monitoring and operational metering which shall be installed in the
Network Operator’s System, including but not limited to, operational metering signals, status
indications, and the topology of the Network Operator’s System falling within the scope of the
Local Joint Restoration Plan or Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, and the output and
status of Restoration Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus. Where appropriate, some of this
information may be supplied as outputs from the Distribution Restoration Zone Control
System within the Distribution Restoration Zone where one is installed. This data shall be
provided to The Company and Relevant Transmission Licensee (where necessary) through
appropriate data links as agreed between The Company and the Network Operator.
(c) Network Operators shall have secure, robust and power resilient communications systems
between their Control Centres and the point at which Restoration Contractor’s Plant and
Apparatus is connected to the Network Operator’s System as provided for in CC.7.10 and
CC.7.11.
CC.6.5 Communications Plant
CC.6.5.1 In order to ensure control of the National Electricity Transmission System, telecommunications
between GB Code Users and The Company must (including in respect of any OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus at the OTSUA Transfer Time), if required by The Company, be established in
accordance with the requirements set down below.
CC.6.5.2 Control Telephony and System Telephony
CC.6.5.2.1 Control Telephony provides secure point to point telephony for routine Control Calls, priority
Control Calls and emergency Control Calls.
CC.6.5.2.2 System Telephony uses an appropriate public communications network to provide telephony for
Control Calls, inclusive of emergency Control Calls. For the avoidance of doubt, System
Telephony could include, but shall not be limited to: an analogue or digital telephone line; a mobile
telephone or an internet-based voice communication system, all of which shall be connected to an
appropriate public communications network.
CC.6.5.2.3 Calls made and received over Control Telephony and System Telephony may be recorded and
subsequently replayed for commercial and operational reasons.
CC.6.5.4 Obligations in respect of Control Telephony and System Telephony
CC.6.5.4.1 Where The Company requires Control Telephony, Users are required to use the Control
Telephony to communicate with The Company and / or the Transmission Licensees’ in respect
of all Connection Points with the National Electricity Transmission System, all Embedded
Large Power Stations, all Embedded DC Converter Stations and Network Operators Control
Centres as appropriate. The Company shall provide Control Telephony interface equipment at
the GB Code User’s Control Point or the Network Operators Control Centre as appropriate.
Where the GB Code User’s or Network Operators Control Centre telephony equipment is not
capable of providing the required facilities or is otherwise incompatible with the Transmission
Control Telephony, The Company shall provide a Control Telephony handset(s). Details of the
Control Telephony required are contained in the Bilateral Agreement with GB Code User’s.
CC.6.5.4.2 Where in The Company’s sole opinion the installation of Control Telephony is not practicable at a
GB Code User’s Control Point(s), The Company shall specify in the Bilateral Agreement whether
System Telephony is required. Where System Telephony is required by The Company, the GB
Code User shall ensure that System Telephony is installed.
CC.6.5.4.3 Where System Telephony is installed, GB Code Users are required to use the System Telephony
for communication with The Company and the relevant Transmission Licensees’ Control
Engineers in respect of those Control Point(s) for which it has been installed. Details of and relating
to the System Telephony required are contained in the Bilateral Agreement.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

44 of 99
CC.6.5.4.4 Where Control Telephony or System Telephony is installed, routine testing of such facilities may
be required by The Company (not normally more than once in any calendar month). The GB Code
User and The Company shall use reasonable endeavours to agree a test programme and where
The Company requests the assistance of the GB Code User in performing the agreed test
programme the User shall provide such assistance. The Company requires the GB Code User to
test the backup power supplies feeding its Control Telephony facilities at least once every 5 years.
CC.6.5.4.5 Control Telephony and System Telephony shall only be used for the purposes of operational voice
communication between The Company and the relevant User.
CC.6.5.4.6 Control Telephony contains emergency calling functionality to be used for operational
communication only under normal and emergency conditions. Functionality enables The Company
and Users to prioritise a call in the event of an emergency. The Company and GB Code Users
shall only use such priority call functionality for urgent operational communications.
CC.6.5.5 Technical Requirements for Control Telephony and System Telephony
CC.6.5.5.1 Detailed information on the technical interfaces and support requirements for Control Telephony is
provided in the Control Telephony Electrical Standard identified in the Annex to the General
Conditions. Where additional information, or information in relation to Control Telephony
applicable in Scotland, is requested by GB Code Users, this will be provided, where possible, by
The Company.
CC.6.5.5.2 System Telephony shall consist of a dedicated telephone connected to an appropriate public
communications network, that shall be configured by the relevant GB Code User. The Company
shall provide a dedicated free phone number (UK only), for the purposes of receiving incoming calls
to The Company, which GB Code Users shall utilise for System Telephony. System Telephony
shall only be utilised by The Company Control Engineer the relevant Transmission Licensees’
Control Engineers and the GB Code User’s Responsible Engineer/Operator for the purposes of
operational communications.
Operational Metering
CC.6.5.6 (a) The Company or The Relevant Transmission Licensee, as applicable, shall provide system
control and data acquisition (SCADA) outstation interface equipment. The GB Code User shall
provide such voltage, current, Frequency, Active Power and Reactive Power measurement
outputs and plant status indications and alarms to the Transmission SCADA outstation
interface equipment as required by The Company in accordance with the terms of the Bilateral
Agreement. In the case of OTSDUW, the GB Code User shall provide such SCADA outstation
interface equipment and voltage, current, Frequency, Active Power and Reactive Power
measurement outputs and plant status indications and alarms to the SCADA outstation interface
equipment as required by The Company in accordance with the terms of the Bilateral
Agreement.
(b) For the avoidance of doubt, for Active Power and Reactive Power measurements, circuit
breaker and disconnector status indications from:
(i) CCGT Modules at Large Power Stations, the outputs and status indications must each
be provided to The Company on an individual CCGT Unit basis. In addition, where
identified in the Bilateral Agreement, Active Power and Reactive Power measurements
from Unit Transformers and/or Station Transformers must be provided.
(ii) DC Converters at DC Converter Stations and OTSDUW DC Converters, the outputs
and status indications must each be provided to The Company on an individual DC
Converter basis. In addition, where identified in the Bilateral Agreement, Active Power
and Reactive Power measurements from converter and/or station transformers must be
provided.
(iii) Power Park Modules at Embedded Large Power Stations and at directly connected
Power Stations, the outputs and status indications must each be provided to The
Company on an individual Power Park Module basis. In addition, where identified in the
Bilateral Agreement, Active Power and Reactive Power measurements from station
transformers must be provided.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

45 of 99
 (iv) In respect of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, the outputs and status indications must be
provided to The Company for each piece of electrical equipment. In addition, where
identified in the Bilateral Agreement, Active Power and Reactive Power measurements
at the Interface Point must be provided.
(c) For the avoidance of doubt, the requirements of CC.6.5.6(a) in the case of a Cascade Hydro
Scheme will be provided for each Generating Unit forming part of that Cascade Hydro
Scheme. In the case of Embedded Generating Units forming part of a Cascade Hydro
Scheme the data may be provided by means other than the SCADA outstation located at the
Power Station, such as, with the agreement of the Network Operator in whose system such
Embedded Generating Unit is located, from the Network Operator’s SCADA system to The
Company. Details of such arrangements will be contained in the relevant Bilateral Agreements
between The Company and the GB Generator and the Network Operator.
(d) In the case of a Power Park Module, additional energy input signals (e.g. wind speed, and wind
direction) may be specified in the Bilateral Agreement. For Power Park Modules with a
Completion Date on or after 1st April 2016, a Power Available signal will also be specified in
the Bilateral Agreement. The signals would be used to establish the potential level of energy
input from the Intermittent Power Source for monitoring pursuant to CC.6.6.1 and Ancillary
Services and will, in the case of a wind farm, be used to provide The Company with advanced
warning of excess wind speed shutdown and to determine the level of Headroom available from
Power Park Modules for the purposes of calculating response and reserve. For the avoidance
of doubt, the Power Available signal would be automatically provided to The Company and
represent the sum of the potential output of all available and operational Power Park Units
within the Power Park Module. The refresh rate of the Power Available signal shall be
specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
(e) In addition to the above requirements, Restoration Contractors shall be capable of providing
the operational metering requirements specified in the Anchor Restoration Contract or Top
Up Restoration Contract during System Restoration. In particular for renewable generation,
the volume of primary energy such as wind speed and in the case of storage, storage capacity
shall be provided.

Instructor Facilities
CC.6.5.7 The User shall accommodate Instructor Facilities provided by The Company for the receipt of
operational messages relating to System conditions.
Electronic Data Communication Facilities
CC.6.5.8 (a) All BM Participants must ensure that appropriate electronic data communication facilities are
in place to permit the submission of data, as required by the Grid Code, to The Company.
(b) In addition,
(1) any GB Code User that wishes to participate in the Balancing Mechanism;
or
(2) any BM Participant in respect of its BM Units at a Power Station where the Construction
Agreement and/or a Bilateral Agreement has a Completion Date on or after 1 January
2013 and the BM Participant is required to provide all Part 1 System Ancillary Services
in accordance with CC.8.1 (unless The Company has otherwise agreed)
must ensure that appropriate automatic logging devices are installed at the Control Points of
its BM Units to submit data to and to receive instructions from The Company, as required by
the Grid Code. For the avoidance of doubt, in the case of an Interconnector User, the Control
Point will be at the Control Centre of the appropriate Externally Interconnected System
Operator.

(c) Detailed specifications of these required electronic facilities will be provided by The Company
on request and they are listed as Electrical Standards in the Annex to the General Conditions.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

46 of 99
 Facsimile Machines
CC.6.5.9 Each GB Code User and The Company shall provide a facsimile machine or machines:
(a) in the case of GB Generators, at the Control Point of each Power Station and at its Trading
Point;
(b) in the case of The Company and Network Operators, at the Control Centre(s); and
(c) in the case of Non-Embedded Customers and DC Converter Station owners at the Control
Point.
Each GB Code User shall notify, prior to connection to the System of the GB Code User's Plant
and Apparatus, The Company of its or their telephone number or numbers, and will notify The
Company of any changes. Prior to connection to the System of the GB Code User's Plant and
Apparatus, The Company shall notify each GB Code User of the telephone number or numbers of
its facsimile machine or machines and will notify any changes.
CC.6.5.10 Busbar Voltage
The Relevant Transmission Licensee shall, subject as provided below, provide each GB
Generator or DC Converter Station owner at each Grid Entry Point where one of its Power
Stations or DC Converter Stations is connected with appropriate voltage signals to enable the GB
Generator or DC Converter Station owner to obtain the necessary information to permit its Gensets
or DC Converters to be Synchronised to the National Electricity Transmission System. The
term "voltage signal" shall mean in this context, a point of connection on (or wire or wires from) a
relevant part of Transmission Plant and/or Apparatus at the Grid Entry Point, to which the GB
Generator or DC Converter Station owner, with The Company's agreement (not to be
unreasonably withheld) in relation to the Plant and/or Apparatus to be attached, will be able to attach
its Plant and/or Apparatus (normally a wire or wires) in order to obtain measurement outputs in
relation to the busbar.
CC.6.5.11 Bilingual Message Facilities
(a) A Bilingual Message Facility is the method by which the User’s Responsible
Engineer/Operator, the Externally Interconnected System Operator and The Company’s
Control Engineers communicate clear and unambiguous information in two languages for the
purposes of control of the Total System in both normal and emergency operating conditions.
(b) A Bilingual Message Facility, where required, will provide up to two hundred pre-defined
messages with up to five hundred and sixty characters each. A maximum of one minute is
allowed for the transmission to, and display of, the selected message at any destination. The
standard messages must be capable of being displayed at any combination of locations and
can originate from any of these locations. Messages displayed in the UK will be displayed in the
English language.
(c) Detailed information on a Bilingual Message Facility and suitable equipment required for
individual GB Code User applications will be provided by The Company upon request.
CC.6.6 System Monitoring
CC.6.6.1 Monitoring equipment is provided on the National Electricity Transmission System to enable The
Company to monitor its power system dynamic performance conditions. Where this monitoring
equipment requires voltage and current signals on the Generating Unit (other than Power Park
Unit), DC Converter or Power Park Module circuit from the GB Code User or from OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus, The Company will inform the GB Code User and they will be provided by the GB
Code User with both the timing of the installation of the equipment for receiving such signals and its
exact position being agreed (the GB Code User's agreement not to be unreasonably withheld) and
the costs being dealt with, pursuant to the terms of the Bilateral Agreement.
CC.6.6.2 For all on site monitoring by The Company of witnessed tests pursuant to the CP or OC5 the GB
Code User shall provide suitable test signals as outlined in OC5.A.1.
CC.6.6.2.1 The signals which shall be provided by the GB Code User to The Company for onsite monitoring
shall be of the following resolution, unless otherwise agreed by The Company:

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

47 of 99
 (i) 1 Hz for reactive range tests
(ii) 10 Hz for frequency control tests
(iii) 100 Hz for voltage control tests
CC.6.6.2.2 The GB Code User will provide all relevant signals for this purpose in the form of d.c. voltages within
the range -10V to +10V. In exceptional circumstances, some signals may be accepted as d.c.
voltages within the range -60V to +60V with prior agreement between the GB Code User and The
Company. All signals shall:
(i) in the case of an Onshore Power Park Module, DC Convertor Station or Synchronous
Generating Unit, be suitably terminated in a single accessible location at the GB Generator or
DC Converter Station owner’s site.
(ii) in the case of an Offshore Power Park Module and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, be
transmitted onshore without attenuation, delay or filtering which would result in the inability to
fully demonstrate the objectives of the test, or identify any potential safety or plant instability
issues, and be suitably terminated in a single robust location normally located at or near the
onshore Interface Point of the Offshore Transmission System to which it is connected.
CC.6.6.2.3 All signals shall be suitably scaled across the range. The following scaling would (unless The
Company notify the GB Code User otherwise) be acceptable to The Company:
(a) 0MW to Registered Capacity or Interface Point Capacity 0-8V dc
(b) Maximum leading Reactive Power to maximum lagging Reactive Power -8 to 8V dc
(c) 48 – 52Hz as -8 to 8V dc
(d) Nominal terminal or connection point voltage -10% to +10% as -8 to 8V dc
CC.6.6.2.4 The GB Code User shall provide to The Company a 230V power supply adjacent to the signal
terminal location.

CC.7 SITE RELATED CONDITIONS

CC.7.1 Not used.
CC.7.2 Responsibilities For Safety
CC.7.2.1 Any User entering and working on its Plant and/or Apparatus (including, until the OTSUA Transfer
Time, any OTSUA) on a Transmission Site will work to the Safety Rules of the Relevant
Transmission Licensee, as advised by The Company.
CC.7.2.2 For User Sites, The Company shall procure that the Relevant Transmission Licensee entering
and working on Transmission Plant and/or Apparatus on a User Site will work to the User’s Safety
Rules.
CC.7.2.3 A User may, with a minimum of six weeks notice, apply to The Company for permission to work
according to that Users own Safety Rules when working on its Plant and/or Apparatus on a
Transmission Site rather than those set out in CC.7.2.1. If The Company is of the opinion that the
User's Safety Rules provide for a level of safety commensurate with those set out in CC.7.2.1, The
Company will notify the User, in writing, that, with effect from the date requested by the User, the
User may use its own Safety Rules when working on its Plant and/or Apparatus on the
Transmission Site. In forming its opinion, The Company will seek the opinion of the Relevant
Transmission Licensee. Until receipt of such written approval from The Company, the GB Code
User will continue to use the Safety Rules as set out in CC.7.2.1.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

48 of 99
CC.7.2.4 In the case of a User Site, The Company may, with a minimum of six weeks notice, apply to a User
for permission for the Relevant Transmission Licensee to work according to the Relevant
Transmission Licensee’s Safety Rules when working on Transmission Plant and/or Apparatus
on that User Site, rather than the User’s Safety Rules. If the User is of the opinion that the Relevant
Transmission Licensee’s Safety Rules, provide for a level of safety commensurate with that of
that User’s Safety Rules, it will notify The Company, in writing, that, with effect from the date
requested by The Company, that the Relevant Transmission Licensee may use its own Safety
Rules when working on its Transmission Plant and/or Apparatus on that User’s Site. Until receipt
of such written approval from the User, The Company shall procure that the Relevant
Transmission Licensee shall continue to use the User’s Safety Rules.
CC.7.2.5 For a Transmission Site, if The Company gives its approval for the User’s Safety Rules to apply
to the User when working on its Plant and/or Apparatus, that does not imply that the User’s Safety
Rules will apply to entering the Transmission Site and access to the User’s Plant and/or
Apparatus on that Transmission Site. Bearing in mind the Relevant Transmission Licensee’s
responsibility for the whole Transmission Site, entry and access will always be in accordance with
the Relevant Transmission Licensee’s site access procedures. For a User Site, if the User gives
its approval for Relevant Transmission Licensee Safety Rules to apply to the Relevant
Transmission Licensee when working on its Plant and Apparatus, that does not imply that the
Relevant Transmission Licensee’s Safety Rules will apply to entering the User Site, and access
to the Transmission Plant and Apparatus on that User Site. Bearing in mind the User’s
responsibility for the whole User Site, entry and access will always be in accordance with the User’s
site access procedures.
CC.7.2.6 For User Sites, Users shall notify The Company of any Safety Rules that apply to the Relevant
Transmission Licensee’s staff working on User Sites. The Company shall procure that the
Relevant Transmission Licensee shall notify Users of any Safety Rules that apply to the User’s
staff working on the Transmission Site.
CC.7.2.7 Each Site Responsibility Schedule must have recorded on it the Safety Rules which apply to each
item of Plant and/or Apparatus.
CC.7.2.8 In the case of OTSUA a User Site or Transmission Site shall, for the purposes of this CC.7.2,
include a site at which there is an Interface Point until the OTSUA Transfer Time when it becomes
part of the National Electricity Transmission System.
CC.7.3 Site Responsibility Schedules
CC.7.3.1 In order to inform site operational staff and The Company’s Control Engineers of agreed
responsibilities for Plant and/or Apparatus at the operational interface, a Site Responsibility
Schedule shall be produced for Connection Sites (and in the case of OTSUA, until the OTSUA
Transfer Time, Interface Sites) for The Company, the Relevant Transmission Licensee and
Users with whom they interface.
CC.7.3.2 The format, principles and basic procedure to be used in the preparation of Site Responsibility
Schedules are set down in Appendix 1.
CC.7.4 Operation And Gas Zone Diagrams
Operation Diagrams
CC.7.4.1 An Operation Diagram shall be prepared for each Connection Site at which a Connection Point
exists (and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, by User’s for each Interface Point)
using, where appropriate, the graphical symbols shown in Part 1A of Appendix 2. Users should also
note that the provisions of OC11 apply in certain circumstances.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

49 of 99
CC.7.4.2 The Operation Diagram shall include all HV Apparatus and the connections to all external circuits
and incorporate numbering, nomenclature and labelling, as set out in OC11. At those Connection
Sites (or in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, Interface Points) where gas-insulated
metal enclosed switchgear and/or other gas-insulated HV Apparatus is installed, those items must
be depicted within an area delineated by a chain dotted line which intersects gas-zone boundaries.
The nomenclature used shall conform with that used on the relevant Connection Site and circuit
(and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, Interface Point and circuit). The Operation
Diagram (and the list of technical details) is intended to provide an accurate record of the layout and
circuit interconnections, ratings and numbering and nomenclature of HV Apparatus and related
Plant.
CC.7.4.3 A non-exhaustive guide to the types of HV Apparatus to be shown in the Operation Diagram is
shown in Part 2 of Appendix 2, together with certain basic principles to be followed unless equivalent
principles are approved by The Company.
Gas Zone Diagrams
CC.7.4.4 A Gas Zone Diagram shall be prepared for each Connection Site at which a Connection Point
(and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, by User’s for an Interface Point) exists where
gas-insulated switchgear and/or other gas-insulated HV Apparatus is utilised. They shall use, where
appropriate, the graphical symbols shown in Part 1B of Appendix 2.
CC.7.4.5 The nomenclature used shall conform with that used in the relevant Connection Site and circuit
(and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, relevant Interface Point and circuit).
CC.7.4.6 The basic principles set out in Part 2 of Appendix 2 shall be followed in the preparation of Gas Zone
Diagrams unless equivalent principles are approved by The Company.
Preparation of Operation and Gas Zone Diagrams for Users' Sites and Transmission Interface Sites
CC.7.4.7 In the case of a User Site, the User shall prepare and submit to The Company, an Operation
Diagram for all HV Apparatus on the User side of the Connection Point (and in the case of
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, on what will be the Offshore Transmission side of the
Connection Point and the Interface Point) and The Company shall provide the User with an
Operation Diagram for all HV Apparatus on the Transmission side of the Connection Point (and
in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus on what will be the Onshore Transmission side of
the Interface Point), in accordance with the timing requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and/or
Construction Agreement prior to the Completion Date under the Bilateral Agreement and/or
Construction Agreement.
CC.7.4.8 The User will then prepare, produce and distribute, using the information submitted on the User's
Operation Diagram and The Company Operation Diagram, a composite Operation Diagram for
the complete Connection Site (and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, Interface
Point), also in accordance with the timing requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and/or
Construction Agreement .
CC.7.4.9 The provisions of CC.7.4.7 and CC.7.4.8 shall apply in relation to Gas Zone Diagrams where gas-
insulated switchgear and/or other gas-insulated HV Apparatus is utilised.
Preparation of Operation and Gas Zone Diagrams for Transmission Sites
CC.7.4.10 In the case of an Transmission Site, the User shall prepare and submit to The Company an
Operation Diagram for all HV Apparatus on the User side of the Connection Point, in accordance
with the timing requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement.
CC.7.4.11 The Company will then prepare, produce and distribute, using the information submitted on the
User's Operation Diagram, a composite Operation Diagram for the complete Connection Site,
also in accordance with the timing requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction
Agreement.
CC.7.4.12 The provisions of CC.7.4.10 and CC.7.4.11 shall apply in relation to Gas Zone Diagrams where
gas-insulated switchgear and/or other gas-insulated HV Apparatus is utilised.
CC.7.4.13 Changes to Operation and Gas Zone Diagrams

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

50 of 99
CC.7.4.13.1 When the Relevant Transmission Licensee has decided that it wishes to install new HV Apparatus
or it wishes to change the existing numbering or nomenclature of Transmission HV Apparatus at
a Transmission Site, The Company, in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee
will (unless it gives rise to a Modification under the CUSC, in which case the provisions of the CUSC
as to the timing apply) one month prior to the installation or change, send to each such User a revised
Operation Diagram of that Transmission Site, incorporating the new Transmission HV
Apparatus to be installed and its numbering and nomenclature or the changes, as the case may be.
OC11 is also relevant to certain Apparatus.
CC.7.4.13.2 When a User has decided that it wishes to install new HV Apparatus, or it wishes to change the
existing numbering or nomenclature of its HV Apparatus at its User Site, the User will (unless it
gives rise to a Modification under the CUSC, in which case the provisions of the CUSC as to the
timing apply) one month prior to the installation or change, send to The Company a revised
Operation Diagram of that User Site incorporating the new User HV Apparatus to be installed and
its numbering and nomenclature or the changes as the case may be. OC11 is also relevant to certain
Apparatus.
CC.7.4.13.3 The provisions of CC.7.4.13.1 and CC.7.4.13.2 shall apply in relation to Gas Zone Diagrams where
gas-insulated switchgear and/or other gas-insulated HV Apparatus is installed.
Validity
CC.7.4.14 (a) The composite Operation Diagram prepared by The Company or the User, as the case may
be, will be the definitive Operation Diagram for all operational and planning activities
associated with the Connection Site. If a dispute arises as to the accuracy of the composite
Operation Diagram, a meeting shall be held at the Connection Site, as soon as reasonably
practicable, between The Company and the User, to endeavour to resolve the matters in
dispute.
(b) The composite Operation Diagram prepared by The Company or the User, as the case may
be, will be the definitive Operation Diagram for all operational and planning activities
associated with the Interface Point until the OTSUA Transfer Time. If a dispute arises as to
the accuracy of the composite Operation Diagram prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time, a
meeting shall be held at the Interface Point, as soon as reasonably practicable, between The
Company and the User, to endeavour to resolve the matters in dispute.
(c) An equivalent rule shall apply for Gas Zone Diagrams where they exist for a Connection Site.
CC.7.4.15 In the case of OTSUA, a User Site and Transmission Site shall, for the purposes of this CC.7.4,
include a site at which there is an Interface Point until the OTSUA Transfer Time when it becomes
part of the National Electricity Transmission System and references to HV Apparatus in this
CC.7.4 shall include references to HV OTSUA.
CC.7.5 Site Common Drawings
CC.7.5.1 Site Common Drawings will be prepared for each Connection Site (and in the case of OTSDUW,
each Interface Point) and will include Connection Site (and in the case of OTSDUW, Interface
Point) layout drawings, electrical layout drawings, common Protection/control drawings and
common services drawings.
Preparation of Site Common Drawings for a User Site and Transmission Interface Site
CC.7.5.2 In the case of a User Site, The Company shall prepare and submit to the User, Site Common
Drawings for the Transmission side of the Connection Point (and in the case of OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus, on what will be the Onshore Transmission side of the Interface Point,) and the
User shall prepare and submit to The Company, Site Common Drawings for the User side of the
Connection Point (and in the case of OTSDUW, on what will be the Offshore Transmission side
of the Interface Point) in accordance with the timing requirements of the Bilateral Agreement
and/or Construction Agreement.
CC.7.5.3 The User will then prepare, produce and distribute, using the information submitted on the
Transmission Site Common Drawings, Site Common Drawings for the complete Connection
Site (and in the case of OTSDUW, Interface Point) in accordance with the timing requirements of
the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement .
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
51 of 99
 Preparation of Site Common Drawings for a Transmission Site
CC.7.5.4 In the case of a Transmission Site, the User will prepare and submit to The Company Site
Common Drawings for the User side of the Connection Point in accordance with the timing
requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement.
CC.7.5.5 The Company will then prepare, produce and distribute, using the information submitted in the
User's Site Common Drawings, Site Common Drawings for the complete Connection Site in
accordance with the timing requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction
Agreement.
CC.7.5.6 When a User becomes aware that it is necessary to change any aspect of the Site Common
Drawings at a Connection Site (and in the case of OTSDUW, Interface Point) it will:
(a) if it is a User Site, as soon as reasonably practicable, prepare, produce and distribute revised
Site Common Drawings for the complete Connection Site (and in the case of OTSDUW,
Interface Point); and
(b) if it is a Transmission Site, as soon as reasonably practicable, prepare and submit to The
Company revised Site Common Drawings for the User side of the Connection Point (and in
the case of OTSDUW, Interface Point) and The Company will then, as soon as reasonably
practicable, prepare, produce and distribute, using the information submitted in the User's Site
Common Drawings, revised Site Common Drawings for the complete Connection Site (and
in the case of OTSDUW, Interface Point).
In either case, if in the User's reasonable opinion the change can be dealt with by it notifying The
Company in writing of the change and for each party to amend its copy of the Site Common
Drawings (or where there is only one set, for the party holding that set to amend it), then it shall so
notify and each party shall so amend. If the change gives rise to a Modification under the CUSC,
the provisions of the CUSC as to timing will apply.
CC.7.5.7 When The Company becomes aware that it is necessary to change any aspect of the Site Common
Drawings at a Connection Site (and in the case of OTSDUW, Interface Point) it will:
(a) if it is a Transmission Site, as soon as reasonably practicable, prepare, produce and distribute
revised Site Common Drawings for the complete Connection Site (and in the case of
OTSDUW, Interface Point); and
(b) if it is a User Site, as soon as reasonably practicable, prepare and submit to the User revised
Site Common Drawings for the Transmission side of the Connection Point (in the case of
OTSDUW, Interface Point) and the User will then, as soon as reasonably practicable, prepare,
produce and distribute, using the information submitted in the Transmission Site Common
Drawings, revised Site Common Drawings for the complete Connection Site (and in the case
of OTSDUW, Interface Point).
In either case, if in The Company's reasonable opinion the change can be dealt with by it notifying
the User in writing of the change and for each party to amend its copy of the Site Common Drawings
(or where there is only one set, for the party holding that set to amend it), then it shall so notify and
each party shall so amend. If the change gives rise to a Modification under the CUSC, the
provisions of the CUSC as to timing will apply.
Validity
CC.7.5.8 (a) The Site Common Drawings for the complete Connection Site prepared by the User or The
Company, as the case may be, will be the definitive Site Common Drawings for all operational
and planning activities associated with the Connection Site. If a dispute arises as to the
accuracy of the Site Common Drawings, a meeting shall be held at the Site, as soon as
reasonably practicable, between The Company and the User, to endeavour to resolve the
matters in dispute.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

52 of 99
 (b) The Site Common Drawing prepared by The Company or the User, as the case may be, will
be the definitive Site Common Drawing for all operational and planning activities associated
with the Interface Point until the OTSUA Transfer Time. If a dispute arises as to the accuracy
of the composite Operation Diagram prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time, a meeting shall be
held at the Interface Point, as soon as reasonably practicable, between The Company and
the User, to endeavour to resolve the matters in dispute.
CC.7.5.9 In the case of OTSUA, a User Site and Transmission Site shall, for the purposes of this CC.7.5,
include a site at which there is an Interface Point until the OTSUA Transfer Time when it becomes
part of the National Electricity Transmission System.
CC.7.6 Access
CC.7.6.1 The provisions relating to access to Transmission Sites by Users, and to Users' Sites by Relevant
Transmission Licensees, are set out in each Interface Agreement (or in the case of Interfaces
Sites prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time agreements in similar form) with, the Relevant
Transmission Licensee and each User.
CC.7.6.2 In addition to those provisions, where a Transmission Site contains exposed HV conductors,
unaccompanied access will only be granted to individuals holding an Authority for Access issued
by the Relevant Transmission Licensee.
CC.7.6.3 The procedure for applying for an Authority for Access is contained in the Interface Agreement.
CC.7.7 Maintenance Standards
CC.7.7.1 It is the User's responsibility to ensure that all its Plant and Apparatus (including, until the OTSUA
Transfer Time, any OTSUA) on a Transmission Site is tested and maintained adequately for the
purpose for which it is intended, and to ensure that it does not pose a threat to the safety of any
Transmission Plant, Apparatus or personnel on the Transmission Site. The Company will have
the right to inspect the test results and maintenance records relating to such Plant and Apparatus
at any time
CC.7.7.2 For User Sites, The Company shall procure that the Relevant Transmission Licensee has a
responsibility to ensure that all Transmission Plant and Apparatus on a User Site is tested and
maintained adequately for the purposes for which it is intended and to ensure that it does not pose
a threat to the safety of any User’s Plant, Apparatus or personnel on the User Site.
The User will have the right to inspect the test results and maintenance records relating to such
Plant and Apparatus on its User Site at any time.
CC.7.8 Site Operational Procedures
CC.7.8.1 Where there is an interface with National Electricity Transmission System, The Company and
Users, must make available staff to take necessary Safety Precautions and carry out operational
duties as may be required to enable work/testing to be carried out and for the operation of Plant and
Apparatus (including, prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time, any OTSUA) connected to the Total
System.
CC.7.9 GB Generators, DC Converter Station owners and BM Participants (including Virtual Lead
Parties) shall provide a Control Point.
a) In the case of GB Generators and DC Converter Station owners, for each Power Station
or DC Converter Station directly connected to the National Electricity Transmission
System and for each Embedded Large Power Station or Embedded DC Converter
Station, the Control Point shall receive and act upon instructions pursuant to OC7 and BC2
at all times that Generating Units or Power Park Modules at the Power Station are
generating or available to generate or DC Converters at the DC Converter Station are
importing or exporting or available to do so. In the case of all BM Participants, the Control
Point shall be continuously staffed except where the Bilateral Agreement specifies that
compliance with BC2 is not required, in which case the Control Point shall be staffed
between the hours of 0800 and 1800 each day.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

53 of 99
 b) In the case of BM Participants, the BM Participant’s Control Point shall be capable of
receiving and acting upon instructions from The Company and the relevant Transmission
Licensees’ Control Engineers.
The Company will normally issue instructions via automatic logging devices in accordance
with the requirements of CC.6.5.8(b).
Where the BM Participant’s Plant and Apparatus does not respond to an instruction from
The Company via automatic logging devices, or where it is not possible for The Company
to issue the instruction via automatic logging devices, The Company shall issue the
instruction by telephone.
In the case of BM Participants who own and/or operate a Power Station or DC Converter
Station with an aggregated Registered Capacity or BM Participants with BM Units with
an aggregated Demand Capacity per Control Point of less than 50MW, or, where a site is
not part of a Virtual Lead Party as defined in the BSC, a Registered Capacity or Demand
Capacity per site of less than 10MW:
a) where this situation arises, a representative of the BM Participant is required to be
available to respond to instructions from The Company via the Control Telephony or
System Telephony system, as provided for in CC.6.5.4, between the hours of 0800-
1800 each day.
b) Outside the hours of 0800-1800 each day, the requirements of BC2.9.7 shall apply.

For the avoidance of doubt, where The Company has agreed with a BM Participant that Control
Telephony is not required and where the BM Participant does not have a continuously staffed
Control Point the BM Participant may be unable to act as a Defence Service Provider and shall
be unable to act as a Restoration Contractor where these require Control Telephony or a Control
Point in respect of the specification of any such services falling into these categories.

CC.7.10 Obligations on Users in respect of Critical Tools and Facilities

CC.7.10.1 From 04/09/2024 The Company, each Generator, DC Converter Station owner, Network
Operator, Non-Embedded Customer and each Restoration Contractor with a continuously
staffed Control Point or Control Centre as provided for in CC.7.9 shall

(i) Ensure they have the appropriate Critical Tools and Facilities necessary to control their assets
during System Restoration, from their Control Point or Control Centre as appropriate for a
minimum period of 72 hours (or such longer period as agreed between the Generator, DC
Converter Station owner, Network Operator, Non-Embedded Customer and/or Restoration
Contractor and The Company) following a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown.

(ii) Ensure as far as reasonably practical that they have adequate control equipment redundancy
in place so that in the event of a failure of one or more components of the control system its
function is unimpaired.

(iii) Report on the results of their management and testing for their Critical Tools and Facilities on
request by The Company.

CC.7.10.2 From 04/09/2024 each BM Participant including a Virtual Lead Party with a continuously staffed
Control Point as provided for in CC.7.9 (excluding those BM Participants covered by the
requirements of CC.7.10.1), shall:-

(i) Ensure they have the appropriate Critical Tools and Facilities (as defined in clause (c) of
the definition of Critical Tools and Facilities in the Grid Code Glossary and Definitions) for
a minimum period of 72 hours (or such longer period as agreed between the BM Participant
including a Virtual Lead Party and The Company) following a Total Shutdown or Partial
Shutdown.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

54 of 99
 (ii) Ensure as far as reasonably practical that they have adequate control equipment redundancy
in place at their Control Point so that in the event of a failure of one or more components of
their Critical Tools and Facilities its function is unimpaired.

(iii) Report on the results of their management and testing for their Critical Tools and Facilities
on request by The Company.

CC.7.10.3 In the case of a BM Participant or Virtual Lead Party which has an Anchor Restoration Contract
or Top Up Restoration Contract in respect of one or more of its aggregated Plants, the
requirements of CC.7.10.1 shall only apply between the Control Point of the BM Participant or
Virtual Lead Party and that Plant with an Anchor Plant Capability or Top Up Restoration
Capability. For other non-contracted Plants under the control of the BM Participant or Virtual
Lead Party, the requirements of CC.7.10.2 shall continue to apply.

CC.7.10.4 Where a Network Operator installs a Distribution Restoration Zone Control System to facilitate
operation of a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, the high level functional requirements of the
Distribution Restoration Zone Control System shall be in accordance with the guidance provided
in the applicable Electrical Standard listed in the annex to the General Conditions.

CC.7.10.5 Network Operators shall ensure that their substations which are required to be operable during
System Restoration have 72 hour electrical supply resilience to facilitate Network Operators being
able to:
• restore auxiliary supplies to Transmission substations;
• switch Demand in accordance with a Restoration Plan;
• support The Company in satisfying the requirements of the Electricity System Restoration
Standard.

CC.7.10.6 The Company, each GB Code User and Restoration Contractor shall ensure their Critical Tools
and Facilities are cyber secure accordance with the Security of Network and Information System
(NIS) Regulations. This requirement applies to The Company, GB Code Users and Restoration
Contractors at all times.

CC.7.10.7 Notwithstanding the requirements of CC.7.10.1, The Company, each GB Code User and
Restoration Contractor shall ensure that their Critical Tools and Facilities are sufficiently robust
and reliable such that they are capable of handling, processing and prioritising the significant
volumes of data that could reasonably be expected to occur during System Restoration.

CC.7.10.8 Where an Offshore Generator is connected to an Offshore Transmission System and the
Offshore Transmission Licensee does not have Critical Tools and Facilities installed on its
Offshore Transmission System, The Company will make an allowance for the Critical Tools and
Facilities required to be installed by the Offshore Generator.

CC.7.11 Obligations on and Assurance from The Company, GB Code Users and Restoration Contractors
during Total Shutdown and Partial Shutdown conditions

CC.7.11.1 In respect of The Company, its Apparatus shall be designed such that it can safely shutdown and
does not pose a risk to personnel or Apparatus in the event of a total loss of supply.

CC.7.11.2 All GB Code Users and Restoration Contractors shall ensure their Plant and Apparatus can
safely shut down and does not pose a risk to Plant and/or personnel in the event of a total loss of
supplies at a GB Code User’s Site(s) or Restoration Contractor’s site be it caused by a Total
Shutdown, Partial Shutdown or such other event. In satisfying this requirement, Generators, DC
Converter owners and Restoration Contractors shall be able to demonstrate to The Company
that in the event supplies were to be lost to their Site, then on the restoration of supplies, their Plant
can be made operational and begin to operate in at least the same way and as quickly as would be
expected for a cold start following a Total System Shutdown or Partial System Shutdown in
accordance with the data submitted in PC.A.5.7 in accordance with the Week 24 process. For GB
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
55 of 99
 Code Users where they believe this requirement is cost prohibitive or technically impossible, such
GB Code Users shall discuss the issue with The Company, and The Company shall inform The
Authority of the details agreed. Where such an issue cannot be agreed by The Company, following
all reasonable attempts, or where the capability provided by the GB Code User cannot be agreed
by The Company as being sufficient after examining all reasonable alternative solutions through the
Compliance Processes, the GB Code User may apply for a derogation from the Grid Code.

CC.7.11.3 The requirements of CC.7.11.1 and CC.7.11.2 shall apply for a period of total loss of supplies to The
Company’s operational sites or a GB Code User’s Site or Restoration Contractor’s site of up to
72 hours. GB Code Users and Restoration Contractors shall confirm to The Company that the
total loss of supplies to their Site for a period of up to 72 hours shall not result in damage to Plant
and Apparatus such that it would then be unable to operate upon the restoration of electrical supplies
to the site.

CC.7.11.4 Network Operators shall ensure that in coordination with The Company and relevant
Transmission Licensees, they have the capability to switch Demand at sufficient speed to support
The Company in satisfying the requirements of the Electricity System Restoration Standard. This
requirement assumes:
• the successful implementation of Restoration Plans,
• the successful delivery of the obligations of Restoration Contractors who are parties to
these plans; and
• the further requirements of OC9 have been implemented.

CC.8 ANCILLARY SERVICES

CC.8.1 System Ancillary Services
The CC’s contain requirements for the capability for certain Ancillary Services, which are needed
for System reasons ("System Ancillary Services"). There follows a list of these System Ancillary
Services, together with the paragraph number of the CC (or other part of the Grid Code) in which
the minimum capability is required or referred to. The list is divided into two categories: Part 1 lists
the System Ancillary Services which
(a) GB Generators in respect of Large Power Stations are obliged to provide (except GB
Generators in respect of Large Power Stations which have a Registered Capacity of less
than 50MW and comprise Power Park Modules); and,
(b) GB Generators in respect of Large Power Stations with a Registered Capacity of less than
50MW and comprise Power Park Modules are obliged to provide in respect of Reactive Power
only; and,
(c) DC Converter Station owners are obliged to have the capability to supply; and

(d) GB Generators in respect of Medium Power Stations (except Embedded Medium Power
Stations) are obliged to provide in respect of Reactive Power only:
and Part 2 lists the System Ancillary Services which GB Generators or Restoration Contractors
will provide only if agreement to provide them is reached with The Company or in the case where a
Restoration Contractor is party to a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, agreement is reached
with The Company and Network Operator:

Part 1
(a) Reactive Power supplied (in accordance with CC.6.3.2) otherwise than by means of
synchronous or static compensators (except in the case of a Power Park Module where
synchronous or static compensators within the Power Park Module may be used to provide
Reactive Power)
(b) Frequency Control by means of Frequency sensitive generation - CC.6.3.7 and BC3.5.1
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
56 of 99
 Part 2
(c) Frequency Control by means of Fast Start - CC.6.3.14.
(d) Anchor Plant Capability or Top Up Restoration Capability - CC.6.3.5
(e) System to Generator Operational Intertripping.
(f) Services provided by Restoration Contractors.

CC.8.2 Commercial Ancillary Services

Other Ancillary Services are also utilised by The Company in operating the Total System if these
have been agreed to be provided by a GB Code User (or other person) under an Ancillary Services
Agreement or under a Bilateral Agreement, with payment being dealt with under an Ancillary
Services Agreement or in the case of Externally Interconnected System Operators or
Interconnector Users, under any other agreement (and in the case of Externally Interconnected
System Operators and Interconnector Users includes Ancillary Services equivalent to or similar
to System Ancillary Services) ("Commercial Ancillary Services"). The capability for these
Commercial Ancillary Services is set out in the relevant Ancillary Services Agreement or
Bilateral Agreement (as the case may be).

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

57 of 99
 APPENDIX 1 - SITE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULES
FORMAT, PRINCIPLES AND BASIC PROCEDURE TO BE USED IN THE PREPARATION OF SITE
RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULES

CC.A.1.1 Principles
Types of Schedules
CC.A.1.1.1 At all Complexes (which in the context of this CC shall include, Interface Sites until the OTSUA
Transfer Time) the following Site Responsibility Schedules shall be drawn up using the relevant
proforma attached or with such variations as may be agreed between The Company and Users, but
in the absence of agreement the relevant proforma attached will be used. In addition, in the case of
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, and in readiness for the OTSUA Transfer Time, the User shall
provide The Company with the necessary information such that Site Responsibility Schedules in
this form can be prepared by the Relevant Transmission Licensees for the Transmission
Interface Site:
(a) Schedule of HV Apparatus
(b) Schedule of Plant, LV/MV Apparatus, services and supplies;
(c) Schedule of telecommunications and measurements Apparatus.
Other than at Generating Unit, DC Converter, Power Park Module and Power Station locations,
the schedules referred to in (b) and (c) may be combined.
New Connection Sites
CC.A.1.1.2 In the case of a new Connection Site each Site Responsibility Schedule for a Connection Site
shall be prepared by The Company in consultation with relevant GB Code Users at least 2 weeks
prior to the Completion Date (or, where the OTSUA is to become Operational prior to the OTSUA
Transfer Time, an alternative date) under the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction
Agreement for that Connection Site (which may form part of a Complex). In the case of a new
Interface Site where the OTSUA is to become Operational prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time each
Site Responsibility Schedule for an Interface Site shall be prepared by The Company in
consultation with relevant GB Code Users at least 2 weeks prior to the Completion Date under the
Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement for that Interface Site (which may form part
of a Complex) (and references to and requirements placed on “Connection Site” in this CC shall
also be read as “Interface Site” where the context requires and until the OTSUA Transfer Time).
Each GB Code User shall, in accordance with the timing requirements of the Bilateral Agreement
and/or Construction Agreement, provide information to The Company to enable it to prepare the
Site Responsibility Schedule.
Sub-division
CC.A.1.1.3 Each Site Responsibility Schedule will be subdivided to take account of any separate Connection
Sites on that Complex.
Scope
CC.A.1.1.4 Each Site Responsibility Schedule shall detail for each item of Plant and Apparatus:
(a) Plant/Apparatus ownership;
(b) Site Manager (Controller) (except in the case of Plant/Apparatus located in SPT’s
Transmission Area);
(c) Safety issues comprising applicable Safety Rules and Control Person or other responsible
person (Safety Co-ordinator), or such other person who is responsible for safety;
(d) Operations issues comprising applicable Operational Procedures and Control Engineer;
(e) Responsibility to undertake statutory inspections, fault investigation and maintenance.
Each Connection Point shall be precisely shown.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

58 of 99
 Detail
CC.A.1.1.5 (a) In the case of Site Responsibility Schedules referred to in CC.A.1.1.1(b) and (c), with the
exception of Protection Apparatus and Intertrip Apparatus operation, it will be sufficient to
indicate the responsible User or Transmission Licensee, as the case may be.
(b) In the case of the Site Responsibility Schedule referred to in CC.A.1.1.1(a) and for Protection
Apparatus and Intertrip Apparatus, the responsible management unit must be shown in
addition to the User or Transmission Licensee, as the case may be.
CC.A.1.1.6 The HV Apparatus Site Responsibility Schedule for each Connection Site must include lines and
cables emanating from or traversing1 the Connection Site.
Issue Details
CC.A.1.1.7 Every page of each Site Responsibility Schedule shall bear the date of issue and the issue number.
Accuracy Confirmation
CC.A.1.1.8 When a Site Responsibility Schedule is prepared it shall be sent by The Company to the Users
involved for confirmation of its accuracy.
CC.A.1.1.9 The Site Responsibility Schedule shall then be signed on behalf of The Company by its
Responsible Manager (see CC.A.1.1.16) and on behalf of each User involved by its Responsible
Manager (see CC.A.1.1.16), by way of written confirmation of its accuracy. The Site Responsibility
Schedule will also be signed on behalf of the Relevant Transmission Licensee by its Responsible
Manager.
Distribution and Availability
CC.A.1.1.10 Once signed, two copies will be distributed by The Company, not less than two weeks prior to its
implementation date, to each User which is a party on the Site Responsibility Schedule,
accompanied by a note indicating the issue number and the date of implementation.
CC.A.1.1.11 The Company and Users must make the Site Responsibility Schedules readily available to
operational staff at the Complex and at the other relevant control points.
Alterations to Existing Site Responsibility Schedules
CC.A 1.1.12 Without prejudice to the provisions of CC.A.1.1.15 which deals with urgent changes, when a User
identified on a Site Responsibility Schedule becomes aware that an alteration is necessary, it must
inform The Company immediately and in any event 8 weeks prior to any change taking effect (or as
soon as possible after becoming aware of it, if less than 8 weeks remain when the User becomes
aware of the change). This will cover the commissioning of new Plant and/or Apparatus at the
Connection Site, whether requiring a revised Bilateral Agreement or not, de-commissioning of
Plant and/or Apparatus, and other changes which affect the accuracy of the Site Responsibility
Schedule.
CC.A 1.1.13 Where The Company has been informed of a change by an GB Code User, or itself proposes a
change, it will prepare a revised Site Responsibility Schedule by not less than six weeks prior to
the change taking effect (subject to it having been informed or knowing of the change eight weeks
prior to that time) and the procedure set out in CC.A.1.1.8 shall be followed with regard to the revised
Site Responsibility Schedule.
CC.A 1.1.14 The revised Site Responsibility Schedule shall then be signed in accordance with the procedure
set out in CC.A.1.1.9 and distributed in accordance with the procedure set out in CC.A.1.1.10,
accompanied by a note indicating where the alteration(s) has/have been made, the new issue
number and the date of implementation.
Urgent Changes

1 Details of circuits traversing the Connection Site are only needed from the date which is the earlier of the date when the Site Responsibility
Schedule is first updated and 15th October 2004. In Scotland or Offshore, from a date to be agreed between The Company and the
Relevant Transmission Licensee.
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
59 of 99
CC.A.1.1.15 When an GB Code User identified on a Site Responsibility Schedule, or The Company, as the
case may be, becomes aware that an alteration to the Site Responsibility Schedule is necessary
urgently to reflect, for example, an emergency situation which has arisen outside its control, the GB
Code User shall notify The Company, or The Company shall notify the GB Code User, as the case
may be, immediately and will discuss:
(a) what change is necessary to the Site Responsibility Schedule;
(b) whether the Site Responsibility Schedule is to be modified temporarily or permanently;
(c) the distribution of the revised Site Responsibility Schedule.
The Company will prepare a revised Site Responsibility Schedule as soon as possible, and in any
event within seven days of it being informed of or knowing the necessary alteration. The Site
Responsibility Schedule will be confirmed by GB Code Users and signed on behalf of The
Company and GB Code Users and the Relevant Transmission Licensee (by the persons referred
to in CC.A.1.1.9) as soon as possible after it has been prepared and sent to GB Code Users for
confirmation.
Responsible Managers
CC.A.1.1.16 Each GB Code User shall, prior to the Completion Date under each Bilateral Agreement and/or
Construction Agreement, supply to The Company a list of Managers who have been duly
authorised to sign Site Responsibility Schedules on behalf of the GB Code User and The
Company shall, prior to the Completion Date under each Bilateral Agreement and/or
Construction Agreement, supply to that GB Code User the name of the Relevant Transmission
Licensee’s Responsible Manager and each shall supply to the other any changes to such list six
weeks before the change takes effect where the change is anticipated, and as soon as possible after
the change, where the change was not anticipated.
De-commissioning of Connection Sites
CC.A.1.1.17 Where a Connection Site is to be de-commissioned, whichever of The Company or the GB Code
User who is initiating the de-commissioning must contact the other to arrange for the Site
Responsibility Schedule to be amended at the relevant time.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

60 of 99
 PROFORMA FOR SITE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE

AREA

COMPLEX: SCHEDULE:

CONNECTION SITE:

SAFETY OPERATIONS PARTY

RESPONSIBLE
FOR
UNDERTAKING
CONTROL OR STATUTORY
OTHER CONTROL OR INSPECTIONS,
RESPONSIBLE OTHER FAULT
ITEM OF PLANT PERSON RESPONSIBLE INVESTIGATION
PLANT/ APPARATUS SITE SAFETY (SAFETY CO- OPERATIONAL ENGINEER & REMARKS
APPARATUS OWNER MANAGER RULES ORDINATOR PROCEDURES MAINTENANCE

PAGE: ISSUE NO: DATE:

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

61 of 99
 PROFORMA FOR SITE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE

AREA

COMPLEX: SCHEDULE:

CONNECTION SITE:

SAFETY OPERATIONS PARTY

RESPONSIBLE
FOR
UNDERTAKING
CONTROL OR STATUTORY
OTHER CONTROL OR INSPECTIONS,
RESPONSIBLE OTHER FAULT
ITEM OF PLANT PERSON RESPONSIBLE INVESTIGATION
PLANT/ APPARATUS SITE SAFETY (SAFETY CO- OPERATIONAL ENGINEER & REMARKS
APPARATUS OWNER MANAGER RULES ORDINATOR PROCEDURES MAINTENANCE

NOTES:

SIGNED: NAME: COMPANY: DATE:

SIGNED: NAME: COMPANY: DATE:

SIGNED: NAME: COMPANY: DATE:

SIGNED: NAME: COMPANY: DATE:

PAGE: ISSUE NO: DATE:

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

62 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
63 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
64 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
65 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
66 of 99
 APPENDIX 2 - OPERATION DIAGRAMS

PART 1A - PROCEDURES RELATING TO OPERATION DIAGRAMS

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

67 of 104
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
68 of 104
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
69 of 104
 PART 1B - PROCEDURES RELATING TO GAS ZONE DIAGRAMS

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

70 of 104
 PART 2 - NON-EXHAUSTIVE LIST OF APPARATUS
TO BE INCLUDED ON OPERATION DIAGRAMS

Basic Principles
(1) Where practicable, all the HV Apparatus on any Connection Site shall be shown on one
Operation Diagram. Provided the clarity of the diagram is not impaired, the layout shall
represent as closely as possible the geographical arrangement on the Connection Site.
(2) Where more than one Operation Diagram is unavoidable, duplication of identical information
on more than one Operation Diagram must be avoided.
(3) The Operation Diagram must show accurately the current status of the Apparatus e.g.
whether commissioned or decommissioned. Where decommissioned, the associated
switchbay will be labelled "spare bay".
(4) Provision will be made on the Operation Diagram for signifying approvals, together with
provision for details of revisions and dates.
(5) Operation Diagrams will be prepared in A4 format or such other format as may be agreed
with The Company.
(6) The Operation Diagram should normally be drawn single line. However, where appropriate,
detail which applies to individual phases shall be shown. For example, some HV Apparatus
is numbered individually per phase.

Apparatus To Be Shown On Operation Diagram

(1) Busbars
(2) Circuit Breakers
(3) Disconnector (Isolator) and Switch Disconnecters (Switching Isolators)
(4) Disconnectors (Isolators) - Automatic Facilities
(5) Bypass Facilities
(6) Earthing Switches
(7) Maintenance Earths
(8) Overhead Line Entries
(9) Overhead Line Traps
(10) Cable and Cable Sealing Ends
(11) Generating Unit
(12) Generator Transformers
(13) Generating Unit Transformers, Station Transformers, including the lower voltage circuit-
breakers.
(14) Synchronous Compensators
(15) Static Variable Compensators
(16) Capacitors (including Harmonic Filters)
(17) Series or Shunt Reactors (Referred to as "Inductors" at nuclear power station sites)
(18) Supergrid and Grid Transformers
(19) Tertiary Windings
(20) Earthing and Auxiliary Transformers
(21) Three Phase VT's

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

71 of 104
(22) Single Phase VT & Phase Identity
(23) High Accuracy VT and Phase Identity
(24) Surge Arrestors/Diverters
(25) Neutral Earthing Arrangements on HV Plant
(26) Fault Throwing Devices
(27) Quadrature Boosters
(28) Arc Suppression Coils
(29) Single Phase Transformers (BR) Neutral and Phase Connections
(30) Current Transformers (where separate plant items)
(31) Wall Bushings
(32) Combined VT/CT Units
(33) Shorting and Discharge Switches
(34) Thyristor
(35) Resistor with Inherent Non-Linear Variability, Voltage Dependent
(36) Gas Zone

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

72 of 104
 APPENDIX 3 - MINIMUM FREQUENCY RESPONSE REQUIREMENT
PROFILE AND OPERATING RANGE FOR NEW POWER STATIONS AND
DC CONVERTER STATIONS
CC.A.3.1 Scope
The Frequency response capability is defined in terms of Primary Response, Secondary
Response and High Frequency Response. This appendix defines the minimum Frequency
response requirement profile for:
(a) each Onshore Generating Unit and/or CCGT Module which has a Completion Date
after 1 January 2001 in England and Wales and 1 April 2005 in Scotland and Offshore
Generating Unit in a Large Power Station,
(b) each DC Converter at a DC Converter Station which has a Completion Date on or
after 1 April 2005 or each Offshore DC Converter which is part of a Large Power
Station.
(c) each Onshore Power Park Module in England and Wales with a Completion Date on
or after 1 January 2006.
(d) each Onshore Power Park Module in operation in Scotland after 1 January 2006 with a
Completion Date after 1 April 2005 and in Power Stations with a Registered Capacity
of 50MW or more.
(e) each Offshore Power Park Module in a Large Power Station with a Registered
Capacity of 50MW or more.
For the avoidance of doubt, this appendix does not apply to:
(i) Generating Units and/or CCGT Modules which have a Completion Date before 1
January 2001 in England and Wales and before 1 April 2005 in Scotland,
(ii) DC Converters at a DC Converter Station which have a Completion Date before 1
April 2005.
(iii) Power Park Modules in England and Wales with a Completion Date before 1 January
2006.
(iv) Power Park Modules in operation in Scotland before 1 January 2006.
(v) Power Park Modules in Scotland with a Completion Date before 1 April 2005.
(vi) Power Park Modules in Power Stations with a Registered Capacity less than 50MW.
(vii) Small Power Stations or individually to Power Park Units; or.
(viii) an OTSDUW DC Converter where the Interface Point Capacity is less than 50MW.
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus should facilitate the delivery of Frequency response services
provided by Offshore Generating Units and Offshore Power Park Modules at the Interface
Point.
The functional definition provides appropriate performance criteria relating to the provision of
Frequency control by means of Frequency sensitive generation in addition to the other
requirements identified in CC.6.3.7.
In this Appendix 3 to the CC, for a CCGT Module or a Power Park Module with more than
one Generating Unit, the phrase Minimum Generation applies to the entire CCGT Module
or Power Park Module operating with all Generating Units Synchronised to the System.
The minimum Frequency response requirement profile is shown diagrammatically in Figure
CC.A.3.1. The capability profile specifies the minimum required levels of Primary Response,
Secondary Response and High Frequency Response throughout the normal plant
operating range. The definitions of these Frequency response capabilities are illustrated
diagrammatically in Figures CC.A.3.2 & CC.A.3.3.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

73 of 104
CC.A.3.2 Plant Operating Range
The upper limit of the operating range is the Registered Capacity of the Generating Unit or
CCGT Module or DC Converter or Power Park Module.
The Minimum Generation level may be less than, but must not be more than, 65% of the
Registered Capacity. Each Generating Unit and/or CCGT Module and/or Power Park
Module and/or DC Converter must be capable of operating satisfactorily down to the
Designed Minimum Operating Level as dictated by System operating conditions, although
it will not be instructed to below its Minimum Generation level. If a Generating Unit or CCGT
Module or Power Park Module or DC Converter is operating below Minimum Generation
because of high System Frequency, it should recover adequately to its Minimum Generation
level as the System Frequency returns to Target Frequency so that it can provide Primary
and Secondary Response from Minimum Generation if the System Frequency continues
to fall. For the avoidance of doubt, under normal operating conditions steady state operation
below Minimum Generation is not expected. The Designed Minimum Operating Level must
not be more than 55% of Registered Capacity.
In the event of a Generating Unit or CCGT Module or Power Park Module or DC Converter
load rejecting down to no less than its Designed Minimum Operating Level it should not trip
as a result of automatic action as detailed in BC3.7. If the load rejection is to a level less than
the Designed Minimum Operating Level then it is accepted that the condition might be so
severe as to cause it to be disconnected from the System.
CC.A.3.3 Minimum Frequency Response Requirement Profile
Figure CC.A.3.1 shows the minimum Frequency response requirement profile
diagrammatically for a 0.5 Hz change in Frequency. The percentage response capabilities
and loading levels are defined on the basis of the Registered Capacity of the Generating
Unit or CCGT Module or Power Park Module or DC Converter. Each Generating Unit
and/or CCGT Module and/or Power Park Module and/or DC Converter must be capable of
operating in a manner to provide Frequency response at least to the solid boundaries shown
in the figure. If the Frequency response capability falls within the solid boundaries, the
Generating Unit or CCGT Module or Power Park Module or DC Converter is providing
response below the minimum requirement which is not acceptable. Nothing in this appendix
is intended to prevent a Generating Unit or CCGT Module or Power Park Module or DC
Converter from being designed to deliver a Frequency response in excess of the identified
minimum requirement.
The Frequency response delivered for Frequency deviations of less than 0.5 Hz should be
no less than a figure which is directly proportional to the minimum Frequency response
requirement for a Frequency deviation of 0.5 Hz. For example, if the Frequency deviation is
0.2 Hz, the corresponding minimum Frequency response requirement is 40% of the level
shown in Figure CC.A.3.1. The Frequency response delivered for Frequency deviations of
more than 0.5 Hz should be no less than the response delivered for a Frequency deviation of
0.5 Hz.
Each Generating Unit and/or CCGT Module and/or Power Park Module and/or DC
Converter must be capable of providing some response, in keeping with its specific
operational characteristics, when operating between 95% to 100% of Registered Capacity
as illustrated by the dotted lines in Figure CC.A.3.1.
At the Minimum Generation level, each Generating Unit and/or CCGT Module and/or
Power Park Module and/or DC Converter is required to provide high and low frequency
response depending on the System Frequency conditions. Where the Frequency is high,
the Active Power output is therefore expected to fall below the Minimum Generation level.
The Designed Minimum Operating Level is the output at which a Generating Unit and/or
CCGT Module and/or Power Park Module and/or DC Converter has no High Frequency
Response capability. It may be less than, but must not be more than, 55% of the Registered
Capacity. This implies that a Generating Unit or CCGT Module or Power Park Module or
DC Converter is not obliged to reduce its output to below this level unless the Frequency is
at or above 50.5 Hz (cf BC3.7).
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
74 of 104
CC.A.3.4 Testing of Frequency Response Capability
The response capabilities shown diagrammatically in Figure CC.A.3.1 are measured by taking
the responses as obtained from some of the dynamic response tests specified by The
Company and carried out by GB Generators and DC Converter Station owners for
compliance purposes and to validate the content of Ancillary Services Agreements using an
injection of a Frequency change to the plant control system (i.e. governor and load controller).
The injected signal is a linear ramp from zero to 0.5 Hz Frequency change over a ten second
period, and is sustained at 0.5 Hz Frequency change thereafter, as illustrated
diagrammatically in figures CC.A.3.2 and CC.A.3.3. In the case of an Embedded Medium
Power Station not subject to a Bilateral Agreement or Embedded DC Converter Station
not subject to a Bilateral Agreement, The Company may require the Network Operator
within whose System the Embedded Medium Power Station or Embedded DC Converter
Station is situated, to ensure that the Embedded Person performs the dynamic response
tests reasonably required by The Company in order to demonstrate compliance within the
relevant requirements in the CC.
The Primary Response capability (P) of a Generating Unit or a CCGT Module or Power
Park Module or DC Converter is the minimum increase in Active Power output between 10
and 30 seconds after the start of the ramp injection as illustrated diagrammatically in Figure
CC.A.3.2. This increase in Active Power output should be released increasingly with time
over the period 0 to 10 seconds from the time of the start of the Frequency fall as illustrated
by the response from Figure CC.A.3.2.
The Secondary Response capability (S) of a Generating Unit or a CCGT Module or Power
Park Module or DC Converter is the minimum increase in Active Power output between 30
seconds and 30 minutes after the start of the ramp injection as illustrated diagrammatically in
Figure CC.A.3.2.
The High Frequency Response capability (H) of a Generating Unit or a CCGT Module or
Power Park Module or DC Converter is the decrease in Active Power output provided 10
seconds after the start of the ramp injection and sustained thereafter as illustrated
diagrammatically in Figure CC.A.3.3. This reduction in Active Power output should be
released increasingly with time over the period 0 to 10 seconds from the time of the start of
the Frequency rise as illustrated by the response in Figure CC.A.3.2.
CC.A.3.5 Repeatability Of Response
When a Generating Unit or CCGT Module or Power Park Module or DC Converter has
responded to a significant Frequency disturbance, its response capability must be fully
restored as soon as technically possible. Full response capability should be restored no later
than 20 minutes after the initial change of System Frequency arising from the Frequency
disturbance.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

75 of 104
Figure CC.A.3.1 - Minimum Frequency Response Requirement Profile for a 0.5 Hz frequency change from
Target Frequency

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

76 of 104
 Figure CC.A.3.2 - Interpretation of Primary and Secondary Response Values

Figure CC.A.3.3 - Interpretation of High Frequency Response Values

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

77 of 104
 APPENDIX 4 - FAULT RIDE THROUGH REQUIREMENTS

APPENDIX 4A - FAULT RIDE THROUGH REQUIREMENTS FOR ONSHORE

SYNCHRONOUS GENERATING UNITS, ONSHORE POWER PARK MODULES,
ONSHORE DC CONVERTERS OTSDUW PLANT AND APPARATUS AT THE
INTERFACE POINT, OFFSHORE SYNCHRONOUS GENERATING UNITS IN A LARGE
POWER STATION, OFFSHORE POWER PARK MODULES IN A LARGE POWER
STATION AND OFFSHORE DC CONVERTERS IN A LARGE POWER STATION WHICH
SELECT TO MEET THE FAULT RIDE THROUGH REQUIREMENTS AT THE
INTERFACE POINT

CC.A.4A.1 Scope
The fault ride through requirement is defined in CC.6.3.15.1 (a), (b) and CC.6.3.15.3. This
Appendix provides illustrations by way of examples only of CC.6.3.15.1 (a) (i) and further
background and illustrations to CC.6.3.15.1 (1b) (i) and CC.6.3.15.1 (2b) (i) and is not intended
to show all possible permutations.

CC.A.4A.2 Short Circuit Faults At Supergrid Voltage On The Onshore Transmission System Up To 140ms
In Duration
For short circuit faults at Supergrid Voltage on the Onshore Transmission System (which
could be at an Interface Point) up to 140ms in duration, the fault ride through requirement is
defined in CC.6.3.15.1 (a) (i). Figures CC.A.4A.1 (a) and (b) illustrate two typical examples of
voltage recovery for short-circuit faults cleared within 140ms by two circuit breakers (a) and
three circuit breakers (b) respectively.

Figure CC.A.4A.1 (a)

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

78 of 104
 Figure CC.A.4A.1 (b)

CC.A.4A.3 Supergrid Voltage Dips On The Onshore Transmission System Greater Than 140ms In
Duration
CC.A.4A3.1 Requirements applicable to Synchronous Generating Units subject to Supergrid Voltage
dips on the Onshore Transmission System greater than 140ms in duration.
For balanced Supergrid Voltage dips on the Onshore Transmission System having
durations greater than 140ms and up to 3 minutes, the fault ride through requirement is defined
in CC.6.3.15.1 (1b) and Figure 5a which is reproduced in this Appendix as Figure CC.A.4A3.1
and termed the voltage–duration profile.
This profile is not a voltage-time response curve that would be obtained by plotting the
transient voltage response at a point on the Onshore Transmission System (or User
System if located Onshore) to a disturbance. Rather, each point on the profile (i.e. the heavy
black line) represents a voltage level and an associated time duration which connected
Synchronous Generating Units must withstand or ride through.
Figures CC.A.4A3.2 (a), (b) and (c) illustrate the meaning of the voltage-duration profile for
voltage dips having durations greater than 140ms.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

79 of 104
 Figure CC.A.4A3.1

Figure CC.A.4A3.2 (a)

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

80 of 104
 Figure CC.A.4A3.2 (b)

Figure CC.A.4A3.2 (c)

CC.A.4A3.2 Requirements applicable to Power Park Modules or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus subject
to Supergrid Voltage dips on the Onshore Transmission System greater than 140ms in
duration.
For balanced Supergrid Voltage dips on the Onshore Transmission System (which could
be at an Interface Point) having durations greater than 140ms and up to 3 minutes the fault
ride through requirement is defined in CC.6.3.15.1 (2b) and Figure 5b which is reproduced in
this Appendix as Figure CC.A.4A3.3 and termed the voltage–duration profile.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

81 of 104
 This profile is not a voltage-time response curve that would be obtained by plotting the
transient voltage response at a point on the Onshore Transmission System (or User
System if located Onshore) to a disturbance. Rather, each point on the profile (i.e. the heavy
black line) represents a voltage level and an associated time duration which connected Power
Park Modules or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus must withstand or ride through.
Figures CC.A.4A.4 (a), (b) and (c) illustrate the meaning of the voltage-duration profile for
voltage dips having durations greater than 140ms.

Figure CC.A.4A3.3

Figure CC.A.4A3.4 (a)

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

82 of 104
 Figure CC.A.4A3.4 (b)

Figure CC.A.4A3.4 (c)

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

83 of 104
 APPENDIX 4B - FAULT RIDE THROUGH REQUIREMENTS FOR OFFSHORE
GENERATING UNITS IN A LARGE POWER STATION, OFFSHORE POWER PARK
MODULES IN A LARGE POWER STATION AND OFFSHORE DC CONVERTERS IN A
LARGE POWER STATION WHICH SELECT TO MEET THE FAULT RIDE THROUGH
REQUIREMENTS AT THE LV SIDE OF THE OFFSHORE PLATFORM AS SPECIFIED
IN CC.6.3.15.2

CC.A.4B.1 Scope
The fault ride through requirement is defined in CC.6.3.15.2 (a), (b) and CC.6.3.15.3. This
Appendix provides illustrations by way of examples only of CC.6.3.15.2 (a) (i) and further
background and illustrations to CC.6.3.15.2 (1b) and CC.6.3.15.2 (2b) and is not intended to
show all possible permutations.
CC.A.4B.2 Voltage Dips On The LV Side Of The Offshore Platform Up To 140ms In Duration
For voltage dips on the LV Side of the Offshore Platform which last up to 140ms in duration,
the fault ride through requirement is defined in CC.6.3.15.2 (a) (i). This includes Figure 6
which is reproduced here in Figure CC.A.4B.1. The purpose of this requirement is to translate
the conditions caused by a balanced or unbalanced fault which occurs on the Onshore
Transmission System (which may include the Interface Point) at the LV Side of the
Offshore Platform.

V/VN is the ratio of the voltage at the LV side of the Offshore Platform to the nominal voltage
of the LV side of the Offshore Platform.
Figure CC.A.4B.1

Figures CC.A.4B.2 (a) and CC.A.4B.2 (b) illustrate two typical examples of the voltage
recovery seen at the LV Side of the Offshore Platform for a short circuit fault cleared within
140ms by (a) two circuit breakers and (b) three circuit breakers on the Onshore Transmission
System.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

84 of 104
 Figure CC.A.4B.2 (a)

Figure CC.A.4B.2 (b)

CCA.4B.3 Voltage Dips Which Occur On The LV Side Of The Offshore Platform Greater Than 140ms
In Duration
CC.A.4B.3.1 Requirements applicable to Offshore Synchronous Generating Units subject to voltage dips
which occur on the LV Side of the Offshore Platform greater than 140ms in duration.
In addition to CC.A.4B.2 the fault ride through requirements applicable to Offshore
Synchronous Generating Units during balanced voltage dips which occur at the LV Side of
the Offshore Platform and having durations greater than 140ms and up to 3 minutes are
defined in CC.6.3.15.2 (1b) and Figure 7a which is reproduced in this Appendix as Figure
CC.A.4B3.1 and termed the voltage–duration profile.
This profile is not a voltage-time response curve that would be obtained by plotting the
transient voltage response at the LV Side of the Offshore Platform to a disturbance. Rather,
each point on the profile (i.e. the heavy black line) represents a voltage level and an associated
time duration which connected Offshore Synchronous Generating Units must withstand or
ride through.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

85 of 104
 Figures CC.A.4B3.2 (a), (b) and (c) illustrate the meaning of the voltage-duration profile for
voltage dips having durations greater than 140ms.

Figure CC.A.4B3.1

Figure CC.A.4B3.2 (a)

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

86 of 104
 Figure CC.A.4B3.2 (b)

Figure CC.A.4B3.2 (c)

CC.A.4B.3.2 Requirements applicable to Offshore Power Park Modules subject to Voltage which occur
on The LV Side Of The Offshore Platform greater than 140ms in duration.
In addition to CCA.4B.2 the fault ride through requirements applicable for Offshore Power
Park Modules during balanced voltage dips which occur at the LV Side of the Offshore
Platform and have durations greater than 140ms and up to 3 minutes are defined in
CC.6.3.15.2 (2b) (i) and Figure 7b which is reproduced in this Appendix as Figure CC.A.4B.4
and termed the voltage–duration profile.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

87 of 104
 This profile is not a voltage-time response curve that would be obtained by plotting the
transient voltage response at the LV Side of the Offshore Platform to a disturbance. Rather,
each point on the profile (i.e. the heavy black line) represents a voltage level and an associated
time duration which connected Offshore Power Park Modules must withstand or ride
through.
Figures CC.A.4B.5 (a), (b) and (c) illustrate the meaning of the voltage-duration profile for
voltage dips having durations greater than 140ms.

Figure CC.A.4B.4

Figure CC.A.4B.5 (a)

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

88 of 104
 Figure CC.A.4B.5(b)

Figure CC.A.4B.5(c)

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

89 of 104
 APPENDIX 5 - TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
LOW FREQUENCY RELAYS FOR THE AUTOMATIC
DISCONNECTION OF SUPPLIES AT LOW FREQUENCY
CC.A.5.1 Low Frequency Relays
CC.A.5.1.1 The Low Frequency Relays to be used shall have a setting range of 47.0 to 50Hz and be
suitable for operation from a nominal AC input of 63.5, 110 or 240V. The following general
parameters specify the requirements of approved Low Frequency Relays for automatic
installations installed and commissioned after 1st April 2007 and provide an indication, without
prejudice to the provisions that may be included in a Bilateral Agreement, for those installed
and commissioned before 1st April 2007:

(a) Frequency settings: 47-50Hz in steps of 0.05Hz or better, preferably 0.01Hz;

(b) Operating time: Relay operating time shall not be more than 150 ms;

(c) Voltage lock-out: Selectable within a range of 55 to 90% of nominal voltage;

(d) Facility stages: One or two stages of Frequency operation;

(e) Output contacts: Two output contacts per stage to be capable of repetitively
making and breaking for 1000 operations:

(f) Accuracy: 0.01 Hz maximum error under reference environmental and

system voltage conditions.
0.05 Hz maximum error at 8% of total harmonic distortion
Electromagnetic Compatibility Level.

CC.A.5.2 Low Frequency Relay Voltage Supplies

CC.A.5.2.1 It is essential that the voltage supply to the Low Frequency Relays shall be derived from the
primary System at the supply point concerned so that the Frequency of the Low Frequency
Relays input voltage is the same as that of the primary System. This requires either:
(a) the use of a secure supply obtained from voltage transformers directly associated with
the grid transformer(s) concerned, the supply being obtained where necessary via a
suitable automatic voltage selection scheme; or
(b) the use of the substation 240V phase-to-neutral selected auxiliary supply, provided that
this supply is always derived at the supply point concerned and is never derived from a
standby supply Generating Unit or from another part of the User System.
CC.A.5.3 Scheme Requirements
CC.A.5.3.1 The tripping facility should be engineered in accordance with the following reliability
considerations:
(a) Dependability
Failure to trip at any one particular Demand shedding point would not harm the overall
operation of the scheme. However, many failures would have the effect of reducing the
amount of Demand under low Frequency control. An overall reasonable minimum
requirement for the dependability of the Demand shedding scheme is 96%, i.e. the
average probability of failure of each Demand shedding point should be less than 4%.
Thus the Demand under low Frequency control will not be reduced by more than 4%
due to relay failure.
(b) Outages
Low Frequency Demand shedding schemes will be engineered such that the amount of
Demand under control is as specified in Table CC.A.5.5.1a and is not reduced
unacceptably during equipment outage or maintenance conditions.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

90 of 104
CC.A.5.3.2 The total operating time of the scheme, including circuit breakers operating time, shall where
reasonably practicable, be less than 200ms. For the avoidance of doubt, the replacement of
plant installed prior to October 2009 will not be required in order to achieve lower total scheme
operating times.
CC.A.5.4 Low Frequency Relay Testing
CC.A.5.4.1 Low Frequency Relays installed and commissioned after 1st January 2007 shall be type
tested in accordance with and comply with the functional test requirements for Frequency
Protection contained in Energy Networks Association Technical Specification 48-6-5 Issue 1
dated 2005 “ENA Protection Assessment Functional Test Requirements – Voltage and
Frequency Protection”.
For the avoidance of doubt, Low Frequency Relays installed and commissioned before 1st
January 2007 shall comply with the version of CC.A.5.1.1 applicable at the time such Low
Frequency Relays were commissioned.
CC.A.5.4.2 Each Non-Embedded Customer shall aim to execute testing on its low frequency demand
disconnection relays installed within its network and in service at least once every three years,
although this may be extended to no more than every five years if considered to be required
for operational purposes.

CC.A.5.4.3 Each Network Operator and Relevant Transmission Licensee shall aim to execute testing
on its low frequency demand disconnection relays installed within its network and in service
at least once every three years, although this may be extended to no more than every five
years if considered to be required for operational purposes.

CC.A.5.5 Scheme Settings

CC.A.5.5.1 Table CC.A.5.5.1a shows, for each Transmission Area, the percentage of Demand (based
on Annual ACS Conditions) at the time of forecast National Electricity Transmission
System peak Demand that each Network Operator whose System is connected to the
Onshore Transmission System within such Transmission Area shall disconnect by Low
Frequency Relays at a range of frequencies. Where a Network Operator’s System is
connected to the National Electricity Transmission System in more than one Transmission
Area, the settings for the Transmission Area in which the majority of the Demand is
connected shall apply.

Frequency Hz % Demand disconnection for each Network Operator in

Transmission Area

NGET SPT SHETL

48.8 5

48.75 5

48.7 10

48.6 7.5 10

48.5 7.5 10

48.4 7.5 10 10

48.2 7.5 10 10

48.0 5 10 10

47.8 5

Total % Demand 60 40 40
Table CC.A.5.5.1a

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

91 of 104
 Note – the percentages in table CC.A.5.5.1a are cumulative such that, for example, should
the frequency fall to 48.6 Hz in the NGET Transmission Area, 27.5% of the total Demand
connected to the National Electricity Transmission System in the NGET Transmission
Area shall be disconnected by the action of Low Frequency Relays.
The percentage Demand at each stage shall be allocated as far as reasonably practicable.
The cumulative total percentage Demand is a minimum.
CC.A.5.5.2 During System Restoration, the Total System may be operated outside of Licence
Standards as provided for in OC9.4.3. During such periods, on or after 31 December 2026,
Transmission Licensees in accordance with the requirements of the STC, Network
Operators and Non-Embedded Customers shall have the remote capability to inhibit and
restore the operation of their Low Frequency Relays upon instruction from The Company as
provided for in OC9.5.7(a).

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

92 of 104
 APPENDIX 6 - PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTINUOUSLY
ACTING AUTOMATIC EXCITATION CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR
ONSHORE SYNCHRONOUS GENERATING UNITS
CC.A.6.1 Scope
CC.A.6.1.1 This Appendix sets out the performance requirements of continuously acting automatic
excitation control systems for Onshore Synchronous Generating Units that must be
complied with by the GB Code User. This Appendix does not limit any site specific
requirements that may be included in a Bilateral Agreement where in The Company's
reasonable opinion these facilities are necessary for system reasons.
CC.A.6.1.2 Where the requirements may vary the likely range of variation is given in this Appendix. It may
be necessary to specify values outside this range where The Company identifies a system
need, and notwithstanding anything to the contrary The Company may specify in the Bilateral
Agreement values outside of the ranges provided in this Appendix 6. The most common
variations are in the on-load excitation ceiling voltage requirements and the response time
required of the Exciter. Actual values will be included in the Bilateral Agreement.
CC.A.6.1.3 Should a GB Generator anticipate making a change to the excitation control system it shall
notify The Company under the Planning Code (PC.A.1.2(b) and (c)) as soon as the GB
Generator anticipates making the change. The change may require a revision to the Bilateral
Agreement.
CC.A.6.2 Requirements
CC.A.6.2.1 The Excitation System of an Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit shall include an
excitation source (Exciter), a Power System Stabiliser and a continuously acting Automatic
Voltage Regulator (AVR) and shall meet the following functional specification.
CC.A.6.2.2 In respect of Onshore Synchronous Generating Units with a Completion Date on or after
1 January 2009, and Onshore Synchronous Generating Units with a Completion Date
before 1 January 2009 subject to a Modification to the excitation control facilities where the
Bilateral Agreement does not specify otherwise, the continuously acting automatic excitation
control system shall include a Power System Stabiliser (PSS) as a means of supplementary
control. The functional specification of the Power System Stabiliser is included in CC.A.6.2.5.
CC.A.6.2.3 Steady State Voltage Control
CC.A.6.2.3.1 An accurate steady state control of the Onshore Generating Unit pre-set terminal voltage is
required. As a measure of the accuracy of the steady-state voltage control, the Automatic
Voltage Regulator shall have static zero frequency gain, sufficient to limit the change in
terminal voltage to a drop not exceeding 0.5% of rated terminal voltage, when the Onshore
Generating Unit output is gradually changed from zero to rated MVA output at rated voltage,
Active Power and Frequency.
CC.A.6.2.4 Transient Voltage Control
CC.A.6.2.4.1 For a step change from 90% to 100% of the nominal Onshore Generating Unit terminal
voltage, with the Onshore Generating Unit on open circuit, the Excitation System response
shall have a damped oscillatory characteristic. For this characteristic, the time for the Onshore
Generating Unit terminal voltage to first reach 100% shall be less than 0.6 seconds. Also, the
time to settle within 5% of the voltage change shall be less than 3 seconds.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

93 of 104
CC.A.6.2.4.2 To ensure that adequate synchronising power is maintained, when the Onshore Generating
Unit is subjected to a large voltage disturbance, the Exciter whose output is varied by the
Automatic Voltage Regulator shall be capable of providing its achievable upper and lower
limit ceiling voltages to the Onshore Generating Unit field in a time not exceeding that
specified in the Bilateral Agreement. This will normally be not less than 50ms and not greater
than 300ms. The achievable upper and lower limit ceiling voltages may be dependent on the
voltage disturbance.
CC.A.6.2.4.3 The Exciter shall be capable of attaining an Excitation System On Load Positive Ceiling
Voltage of not less than a value specified in the Bilateral Agreement that will be:
not less than 2 per unit (pu)
normally not greater than 3 pu
exceptionally up to 4 pu
of Rated Field Voltage when responding to a sudden drop in voltage of 10 percent or more
at the Onshore Generating Unit terminals. The Company may specify a value outside the
above limits where The Company identifies a System need.
CC.A.6.2.4.4 If a static type Exciter is employed:
(i) the field voltage should be capable of attaining a negative ceiling level specified in the
Bilateral Agreement after the removal of the step disturbance of CC.A.6.2.4.3. The
specified value will be 80% of the value specified in CC.A.6.2.4.3. The Company may
specify a value outside the above limits where The Company identifies a system need.
(ii) the Exciter must be capable of maintaining free firing when the Onshore Generating
Unit terminal voltage is depressed to a level which may be between 20% to 30% of rated
terminal voltage
(iii) the Exciter shall be capable of attaining a positive ceiling voltage not less than 80% of
the Excitation System On Load Positive Ceiling Voltage upon recovery of the
Onshore Generating Unit terminal voltage to 80% of rated terminal voltage following
fault clearance. The Company may specify a value outside the above limits where The
Company identifies a system need.
(iv) The requirement to provide a separate power source for the Exciter will be specified in
the Bilateral Agreement if The Company, in coordination with the Relevant
Transmission Licensee, identifies a Transmission System need.
CC.A.6.2.5 Power Oscillations Damping Control
CC.A.6.2.5.1 To allow the Onshore Generating Unit to maintain second and subsequent swing stability
and also to ensure an adequate level of low frequency electrical damping power, the
Automatic Voltage Regulator shall include a Power System Stabiliser as a means of
supplementary control.
CC.A.6.2.5.2 Whatever supplementary control signal is employed, it shall be of the type which operates into
the Automatic Voltage Regulator to cause the field voltage to act in a manner which results
in the damping power being improved while maintaining adequate synchronising power.
CC.A.6.2.5.3 The arrangements for the supplementary control signal shall ensure that the Power System
Stabiliser output signal relates only to changes in the supplementary control signal and not
the steady state level of the signal. For example, if generator electrical power output is chosen
as a supplementary control signal then the Power System Stabiliser output should relate
only to changes in generator electrical power output and not the steady state level of power
output. Additionally the Power System Stabiliser should not react to mechanical power
changes in isolation for example during rapid changes in steady state load or when providing
frequency response.
CC.A.6.2.5.4 The output signal from the Power System Stabiliser shall be limited to not more than ±10%
of the Onshore Generating Unit terminal voltage signal at the Automatic Voltage Regulator
input. The gain of the Power System Stabiliser shall be such that an increase in the gain by
a factor of 3 shall not cause instability.
Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024
94 of 104
CC.A.6.2.5.5 The Power System Stabiliser shall include elements that limit the bandwidth of the output
signal. The bandwidth limiting must ensure that the highest frequency of response cannot
excite torsional oscillations on other plant connected to the network. A bandwidth of 0-5Hz
would be judged to be acceptable for this application.
CC.A.6.2.5.6 The GB Generator will agree Power System Stabiliser settings with The Company, in
coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee prior to the on-load commissioning
detailed in BC2.11.2(d). To allow assessment of the performance before on-load
commissioning the GB Generator will provide to The Company a report covering the areas
specified in CP.A.3.2.1.
CC.A.6.2.5.7 The Power System Stabiliser must be active within the Excitation System at all times when
Synchronised including when the Under Excitation Limiter or Over Excitation Limiter are
active. When operating at low load when Synchronising or De-Synchronising an Onshore
Generating Unit, the Power System Stabiliser may be out of service.
CC.A.6.2.5.8 Where a Power System Stabiliser is fitted to a Pumped Storage Unit it must function when
the Pumped Storage Unit is in both generating and pumping modes.
CC.A.6.2.6 Overall Excitation System Control Characteristics
CC.A.6.2.6.1 The overall Excitation System shall include elements that limit the bandwidth of the output
signal. The bandwidth limiting must be consistent with the speed of response requirements
and ensure that the highest frequency of response cannot excite torsional oscillations on other
plant connected to the network. A bandwidth of 0-5 Hz will be judged to be acceptable for this
application.
CC.A.6.2.6.2 The response of the Automatic Voltage Regulator combined with the Power System
Stabiliser shall be demonstrated by injecting similar step signal disturbances into the
Automatic Voltage Regulator reference as detailed in OC5A.2.2 and OC5.A.2.4. The
Automatic Voltage Regulator shall include a facility to allow step injections into the
Automatic Voltage Regulator voltage reference, with the Onshore Generating Unit
operating at points specified by The Company (up to rated MVA output). The damping shall
be judged to be adequate if the corresponding Active Power response to the disturbances
decays within two cycles of oscillation.
CC.A.6.2.6.3 A facility to inject a band limited random noise signal into the Automatic Voltage Regulator
voltage reference shall be provided for demonstrating the frequency domain response of the
Power System Stabiliser. The tuning of the Power System Stabiliser shall be judged to be
adequate if the corresponding Active Power response shows improved damping with the
Power System Stabiliser in combination with the Automatic Voltage Regulator compared
with the Automatic Voltage Regulator alone over the frequency range 0.3Hz – 2Hz.
CC.A.6.2.7 Under-Excitation Limiters
CC.A.6.2.7.1 The security of the power system shall also be safeguarded by means of MVAr Under
Excitation Limiters fitted to the generator Excitation System. The Under Excitation Limiter
shall prevent the Automatic Voltage Regulator reducing the generator excitation to a level
which would endanger synchronous stability. The Under Excitation Limiter shall operate
when the excitation system is providing automatic control. The Under Excitation Limiter shall
respond to changes in the Active Power (MW) and the Reactive Power (MVAr), and to the
square of the generator voltage in such a direction that an increase in voltage will permit an
increase in leading MVAr. The characteristic of the Under Excitation Limiter shall be
substantially linear from no-load to the maximum Active Power output of the Onshore
Generating Unit at any setting and shall be readily adjustable.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

95 of 104
CC.A.6.2.7.2 The performance of the Under Excitation Limiter shall be independent of the rate of change
of the Onshore Generating Unit load and shall be demonstrated by testing as detailed in
OC5.A.2.5. The resulting maximum overshoot in response to a step injection which operates
the Under Excitation Limiter shall not exceed 4% of the Onshore Generating Unit rated
MVA. The operating point of the Onshore Generating Unit shall be returned to a steady state
value at the limit line and the final settling time shall not be greater than 5 seconds. When the
step change in Automatic Voltage Regulator reference voltage is reversed, the field voltage
should begin to respond without any delay and should not be held down by the Under
Excitation Limiter. Operation into or out of the preset limit levels shall ensure that any
resultant oscillations are damped so that the disturbance is within 0.5% of the Onshore
Generating Unit MVA rating within a period of 5 seconds.
CC.A.6.2.7.3 The GB Generator shall also make provision to prevent the reduction of the Onshore
Generating Unit excitation to a level which would endanger synchronous stability when the
Excitation System is under manual control.
CC.A.6.2.8 Over-Excitation Limiters
CC.A.6.2.8.1 The settings of the Over-Excitation Limiter, where it exists, shall ensure that the Generating
Unit’s excitation is not limited to less than the maximum value that can be achieved whilst
ensuring the Onshore Generating Unit is operating within its design limits. If the Generating
Unit’s excitation is reduced following a period of operation at a high level, the rate of reduction
shall not exceed that required to remain within any time dependent operating characteristics
of the Onshore Generating Unit.
CC.A.6.2.8.2 The performance of the Over-Excitation Limiter, where it exists, shall be demonstrated by
testing as described in OC5.A.2.6. Any operation beyond the Over-Excitation Limit shall be
controlled by the Over-Excitation Limiter without the operation of any Protection that could
trip the Onshore Generating Unit.

CC.A.6.2.8.3 The GB Generator shall also make provision to prevent any over-excitation restriction of the
generator when the Excitation System is under manual control, other than that necessary to
ensure the Onshore Generating Unit is operating within its design limits.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

96 of 104
 APPENDIX 7 - PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTINUOUSLY
ACTING AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR ONSHORE
NON-SYNCHRONOUS GENERATING UNITS, ONSHORE DC
CONVERTERS, ONSHORE POWER PARK MODULES AND OTSDUW
PLANT AND APPARATUS AT THE INTERFACE POINT

CC.A.7.1 Scope
CC.A.7.1.1 This Appendix sets out the performance requirements of continuously acting automatic voltage
control systems for Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Units, Onshore DC
Converters, Onshore Power Park Modules and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the
Interface Point that must be complied with by the GB Code User. This Appendix does not
limit any site specific requirements that may be included in a Bilateral Agreement where in
The Company's reasonable opinion these facilities are necessary for system reasons.
CC.A.7.1.2 Proposals by GB Generators to make a change to the voltage control systems are required
to be notified to The Company under the Planning Code (PC.A.1.2(b) and (c)) as soon as
the GB Generator anticipates making the change. The change may require a revision to the
Bilateral Agreement.
CC.A.7.2 Requirements
CC.A.7.2.1 The Company requires that the continuously acting automatic voltage control system for the
Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore DC Converter or Onshore Power
Park Module or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus shall meet the following functional
performance specification. If a Network Operator has confirmed to The Company that its
network to which an Embedded Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore
DC Converter, Onshore Power Park Module or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus is
connected is restricted such that the full reactive range under the steady state voltage control
requirements (CC.A.7.2.2) cannot be utilised, The Company may specify in the Bilateral
Agreement alternative limits to the steady state voltage control range that reflect these
restrictions. Where the Network Operator subsequently notifies The Company that such
restriction has been removed, The Company may propose a Modification to the Bilateral
Agreement (in accordance with the CUSC contract) to remove the alternative limits such that
the continuously acting automatic voltage control system meets the following functional
performance specification. All other requirements of the voltage control system will remain as
in this Appendix.
CC.A.7.2.2 Steady State Voltage Control
CC.A.7.2.2.1 The Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore DC Converter, Onshore
Power Park Module or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus shall provide continuous steady state
control of the voltage at the Onshore Grid Entry Point (or Onshore User System Entry
Point if Embedded) (or the Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus)
with a Setpoint Voltage and Slope characteristic as illustrated in Figure CC.A.7.2.2a. It
should be noted that where the Reactive Power capability requirement of a directly connected
Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore DC Converter, Onshore Power
Park Module in Scotland, or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus in Scotland as specified in
CC.6.3.2 (c), is not at the Onshore Grid Entry Point or Interface Point, the values of Qmin
and Qmax shown in this figure will be as modified by the 33/132kV or 33/275kV or 33/400kV
transformer.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

97 of 104
 Figure CC.A.7.2.2a

CC.A.7.2.2.2 The continuously acting automatic control system shall be capable of operating to a Setpoint
Voltage between 95% and 105% with a resolution of 0.25% of the nominal voltage. For the
avoidance of doubt, values of 95%, 95.25%, 95.5% … may be specified, but not intermediate
values. The initial Setpoint Voltage will be 100%. The tolerance within which this Setpoint
Voltage shall be achieved is specified in BC2.A.2.6. For the avoidance of doubt, with a
tolerance of 0.25% and a Setpoint Voltage of 100%, the achieved value shall be between
99.75% and 100.25%. The Company may request the GB Generator to implement an
alternative Setpoint Voltage within the range of 95% to 105%. For Embedded GB
Generators the Setpoint Voltage will be discussed between The Company and the relevant
Network Operator and will be specified to ensure consistency with CC.6.3.4.
CC.A.7.2.2.3 The Slope characteristic of the continuously acting automatic control system shall be
adjustable over the range 2% to 7% (with a resolution of 0.5%). For the avoidance of doubt
values of 2%, 2.5%, 3% may be specified, but not intermediate values. The initial Slope setting
will be 4%. The tolerance within which this Slope shall be achieved is specified in BC2.A.2.6.
For the avoidance of doubt, with a tolerance of 0.5% and a Slope setting of 4%, the achieved
value shall be between 3.5% and 4.5%. The Company may request the GB Generator to
implement an alternative slope setting within the range of 2% to 7%. For Embedded GB
Generators the Slope setting will be discussed between The Company and the relevant
Network Operator and will be specified to ensure consistency with CC.6.3.4.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

98 of 104
 Figure CC.A.7.2.2b

Figure CC.A.7.2.2c

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

99 of 104
CC.A.7.2.2.4 Figure CC.A.7.2.2b shows the required envelope of operation for Onshore Non-
Synchronous Generating Units, Onshore DC Converters, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus
and Onshore Power Park Modules except for those Embedded at 33kV and below or directly
connected to the National Electricity Transmission System at 33kV and below. Figure
CC.A.7.2.2c shows the required envelope of operation for Onshore Non-Synchronous
Generating Units, Onshore DC Converters and Onshore Power Park Modules Embedded
at 33kV and below or directly connected to the National Electricity Transmission System
at 33kV and below. Where the Reactive Power capability requirement of a directly connected
Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore DC Converter, OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module in Scotland, as specified in CC.6.3.2 (c), is
not at the Onshore Grid Entry Point or Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus, the values of Qmin and Qmax shown in this figure will be as modified by the
33/132kV or 33/275kV or 33/400kV transformer. The enclosed area within points ABCDEFGH
is the required capability range within which the Slope and Setpoint Voltage can be changed.
CC.A.7.2.2.5 Should the operating point of the Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore
DC Converter, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module deviate so
that it is no longer a point on the operating characteristic (figure CC.A.7.2.2a) defined by the
target Setpoint Voltage and Slope, the continuously acting automatic voltage control system
shall act progressively to return the value to a point on the required characteristic within 5
seconds.
CC.A.7.2.2.6 Should the Reactive Power output of the Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit,
Onshore DC Converter, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module
reach its maximum lagging limit at an Onshore Grid Entry Point voltage (or Onshore User
System Entry Point voltage if Embedded or Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus) above 95%, the Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore
DC Converter, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module shall
maintain maximum lagging Reactive Power output for voltage reductions down to 95%. This
requirement is indicated by the line EF in figures CC.A.7.2.2b and CC.A.7.2.2c. Should the
Reactive Power output of the Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore DC
Converter, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module reach its
maximum leading limit at an Onshore Grid Entry Point voltage (or Onshore User System
Entry Point voltage if Embedded or Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus) below 105%, the Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore DC
Converter, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module shall maintain
maximum leading Reactive Power output for voltage increases up to 105%. This requirement
is indicated by the line AB in figures CC.A.7.2.2b and CC.A.7.2.2c.

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

100 of 104
CC.A.7.2.2.7 For Onshore Grid Entry Point voltages (or Onshore User System Entry Point voltages if
Embedded or Interface Point voltages) below 95%, the lagging Reactive Power capability of
the Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore DC Converter, OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module should be that which results from the supply
of maximum lagging reactive current whilst ensuring the current remains within design
operating limits. An example of the capability is shown by the line DE in figures CC.A.7.2.2b
and CC.A.7.2.2c. For Onshore Grid Entry Point voltages (or User System Entry Point
voltages if Embedded or Interface Point voltages) above 105%, the leading Reactive Power
capability of the Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore DC Converter,
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module should be that which
results from the supply of maximum leading reactive current whilst ensuring the current
remains within design operating limits. An example of the capability is shown by the line AH in
figures CC.A.7.2.2b and CC.A.7.2.2c. Should the Reactive Power output of the Onshore
Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore DC Converter, OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module reach its maximum lagging limit at an Onshore
Grid Entry Point voltage (or Onshore User System Entry Point voltage if Embedded or
Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) below 95%, the Onshore
Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore DC Converter or Onshore Power Park
Module shall maintain maximum lagging reactive current output for further voltage decreases.
Should the Reactive Power output of the Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit,
Onshore DC Converter, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module
reach its maximum leading limit at a Onshore Grid Entry Point voltage (or User System
Entry Point voltage if Embedded or Interface Point voltage in the case of an OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus) above 105%, the Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore
DC Converter, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module shall
maintain maximum leading reactive current output for further voltage increases.
CC.A.7.2.2.8 All OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus must be capable of enabling GB Code Users undertaking
OTSDUW to comply with an instruction received from The Company relating to a variation of
the Setpoint Voltage at the Interface Point within 2 minutes of such instruction being
received.
CC.A.7.2.2.9 For OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus connected to a Network Operator’s System where the
Network Operator has confirmed to The Company that its System is restricted in accordance
with CC.A.7.2.1, clause CC.A.7.2.2.8 will not apply unless The Company can reasonably
demonstrate that the magnitude of the available change in Reactive Power has a significant
effect on voltage levels on the Onshore National Electricity Transmission System.
CC.A.7.2.3 Transient Voltage Control
CC.A.7.2.3.1 For an on-load step change in Onshore Grid Entry Point or Onshore User System Entry
Point voltage, or in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus an on-load step change in
Transmission Interface Point voltage, the continuously acting automatic control system shall
respond according to the following minimum criteria:
(i) the Reactive Power output response of the Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating
Unit, Onshore DC Converter, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park
Module shall commence within 0.2 seconds of the application of the step. It shall progress
linearly although variations from a linear characteristic shall be acceptable provided that
the MVAr seconds delivered at any time up to 1 second are at least those that would
result from the response shown in figure CC.A.7.2.3.1a.
(ii) the response shall be such that 90% of the change in the Reactive Power output of the
Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore DC Converter, OTSDUW
Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module, will be achieved within
− 1 second, where the step is sufficiently large to require a change in the steady
state Reactive Power output from zero to its maximum leading value or
maximum lagging value, as required by CC.6.3.2 (or, if appropriate,
CC.A.7.2.2.6 or CC.A.7.2.2.7); and

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

101 of 104
 − 2 seconds, for Plant and Apparatus installed on or after 1 December 2017,
where the step is sufficiently large to require a change in the steady state
Reactive Power output from its maximum leading value to its maximum lagging
value or vice versa.

(iii) the magnitude of the Reactive Power output response produced within 1 second shall
vary linearly in proportion to the magnitude of the step change.
(iv) within 2 seconds from achieving 90% of the response as defined in CC.A.7.2.3.1 (ii), the
peak to peak magnitude of any oscillations shall be less than 5% of the change in steady
state Reactive Power.
(v) following the transient response, the conditions of CC.A.7.2.2 apply.

MVArs

Required response at 1
second

0.2 1 Seconds
Figure CC.A.7.2.3.1a

CC.A.7.2.3.2 An Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, Onshore DC Converter, OTSDUW

Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module installed on or after 1 December
2017 shall be capable of;

(a) changing its Reactive Power output from its maximum lagging value to its maximum
leading value, or vice versa, then reverting back to the initial level of Reactive Power
output once every 15 seconds for at least 5 times within any 5 minute period; and

(b) changing its Reactive Power output from zero to its maximum leading value then
reverting back to zero Reactive Power output at least 25 times within any 24 hour
period and from zero to its maximum lagging value then reverting back to zero
Reactive Power output at least 25 times within any 24 hour period. Any subsequent
restriction on reactive capability shall be notified to The Company in accordance with
BC2.5.3.2, and BC2.6.1.

In all cases, the response shall be in accordance to CC.A.7.2.3.1 where the change in
Reactive Power output is in response to an on-load step change in Onshore Grid Entry
Point or Onshore User System Entry Point voltage, or in the case of OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus an on-load step change in Transmission Interface Point voltage.

CC.A.7.2.4 Power Oscillation Damping

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

102 of 104
CC.A.7.2.4.1 The requirement for the continuously acting voltage control system to be fitted with a Power
System Stabiliser (PSS) shall be specified in the Bilateral Agreement if, in The Company’s
view, this is required for system reasons. However if a Power System Stabiliser is included
in the voltage control system its settings and performance shall be agreed with The Company
and commissioned in accordance with BC2.11.2. To allow assessment of the performance
before on-load commissioning the GB Generator will provide to The Company a report
covering the areas specified in CP.A.3.2.2.
CC.A.7.2.5 Overall Voltage Control System Characteristics
CC.A.7.2.5.1 The continuously acting automatic voltage control system is required to respond to minor
variations, steps, gradual changes or major variations in Onshore Grid Entry Point voltage
(or Onshore User System Entry Point voltage if Embedded or Interface Point voltage in
the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus).
CC.A.7.2.5.2 The overall voltage control system shall include elements that limit the bandwidth of the output
signal. The bandwidth limiting must be consistent with the speed of response requirements
and ensure that the highest frequency of response cannot excite torsional oscillations on other
plant connected to the network. A bandwidth of 0-5Hz would be judged to be acceptable for
this application. All other control systems employed within the Onshore Non-Synchronous
Generating Unit, Onshore DC Converter, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore
Power Park Module should also meet this requirement
CC.A.7.2.5.3 The response of the voltage control system (including the Power System Stabiliser if
employed) shall be demonstrated by testing in accordance with OC5A.A.3.

< END OF CONNECTION CONDITIONS >

Issue 6 Revision 21 CC 04 March 2024

103 of 104
 EUROPEAN CONNECTION CONDITIONS
(ECC)

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

ECC.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................2
ECC.2 OBJECTIVE ................................................................................................................................3
ECC.3 SCOPE .......................................................................................................................................3
ECC.4 PROCEDURE .............................................................................................................................5
ECC.5 CONNECTION ............................................................................................................................5
ECC.6 TECHNICAL, DESIGN AND OPERATIONAL CRITERIA ..........................................................7
ECC.7 SITE RELATED CONDITIONS ................................................................................................ 90
ECC.8 ANCILLARY SERVICES .......................................................................................................... 98
APPENDIX E1 - SITE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULES .................................................................... 100
PROFORMA FOR SITE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE ........................................................... 103
APPENDIX E2 - OPERATION DIAGRAMS ........................................................................................ 108
PART 1A - PROCEDURES RELATING TO OPERATION DIAGRAMS ..................................... 108
PART E1B - PROCEDURES RELATING TO GAS ZONE DIAGRAMS ...................................... 111
PART E2 - NON-EXHAUSTIVE LIST OF APPARATUS TO BE INCLUDED ON OPERATION
DIAGRAMS .................................................................................................................................. 112
APPENDIX E3 - MINIMUM FREQUENCY RESPONSE CAPABILITY REQUIREMENT PROFILE AND
OPERATING RANGE FOR POWER GENERATING MODULES AND HVDC EQUIPMENT ........... 114
APPENDIX 4 - FAULT RIDE THROUGH REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 120
APPENDIX E5 - TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS LOW FREQUENCY RELAYS FOR THE AUTOMATIC
DISCONNECTION OF SUPPLIES AT LOW FREQUENCY ............................................................... 126
APPENDIX E6 - PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTINUOUSLY ACTING AUTOMATIC
EXCITATION CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR ONSHORE SYNCHRONOUS POWER GENERATING
MODULES, .......................................................................................................................................... 130
APPENDIX E7 - PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTINUOUSLY ACTING AUTOMATIC
VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR AC CONNECTED ONSHORE POWER PARK MODULES AND
OTSDUW PLANT AND APPARATUS AT THE INTERFACE POINT HVDC SYSTEMS AND REMOTE
END HVDC CONVERTER STATIONS ............................................................................................... 134
APPENDIX E8 - PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTINUOUSLY ACTING AUTOMATIC
VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR CONFIGURATION 2 AC CONNECTED OFFSHORE POWER
PARK MODULES AND CONFIGURATION 2 DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULES .......... 141

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

i
ECC.1 INTRODUCTION
ECC.1.1 The European Connection Conditions ("ECC") specify both:
(a) the minimum technical, design and operational criteria which must be complied with by:
(i) any EU Code User connected to or seeking connection with the National
Electricity Transmission System, or
(ii) EU Generators or HVDC System Owners connected to or seeking connection to
a User's System which is located in Great Britain or Offshore, or
(iii) Network Operators who are EU Code Users
(iv) Network Operators who are GB Code Users but only in respect of:-
(a) Their obligations in respect of Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject
to a Bilateral Agreement for whom the requirements of ECC.3.1(b)(iii) apply
alone; and/or
(b) The requirements of this ECC only in relation to each EU Grid Supply
Point. Network Operators in respect of all other Grid Supply Points should
continue to satisfy the requirements as specified in the CCs.
(v) Non-Embedded Customers who are EU Code Users

(b) the minimum technical, design and operational criteria with which The Company will
comply in relation to the part of the National Electricity Transmission System at the
Connection Site with Users. In the case of any OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, the
ECC also specify the minimum technical, design and operational criteria which must be
complied with by the User when undertaking OTSDUW.
(c ) The requirements of Retained EU Law (Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/631) shall
not apply to
(i) Power Generating Modules that are installed to provide backup power and
operate in parallel with the Total System for less than 5 minutes per calendar
month while the System is in normal state. Parallel operation during
maintenance or commissioning of tests of that Power Generating Module shall
not count towards that five minute limit.
(ii) Power Generating Modules connected to the Transmission System or
Network Operators System which are not operated in synchronism with a
Synchronous Area.
(iii) Power Generating Modules that do not have a permanent Connection Point
or User System Entry Point and used by The Company to temporarily provide
power when normal System capacity is partly or completely unavailable.
(iv) Electricity Storage Modules.
(d) Storage Users are required to comply with the entirety of the ECC but are not subject
to the requirements of Retained EU Law (Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/631,
Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/1388 and Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/1485).
The requirements of the ECC shall therefore be enforceable against Storage Users
under the Grid Code only (and not under any of the aforementioned Retained EU Law)
and any derogation sought by a Storage User in respect of the ECC shall be deemed
a derogation from the Grid Code only (and not from the aforementioned Retained EU
Law).

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

2 of 147
ECC.2 OBJECTIVE
ECC.2.1 The objective of the ECC is to ensure that by specifying minimum technical, design and
operational criteria the basic rules for connection to the National Electricity Transmission
System and (for certain Users) to a User's System are similar for all Users of an equivalent
category and will enable The Company to comply with its statutory and Transmission
Licence obligations and the applicable Retained EU Law.
ECC.2.2 In the case of any OTSDUW the objective of the ECC is to ensure that by specifying the
minimum technical, design and operational criteria the basic rules relating to an Offshore
Transmission System designed and constructed by an Offshore Transmission Licensee
and designed and/or constructed by a User under the OTSDUW Arrangements are
equivalent.
ECC.2.3 Provisions of the ECC which apply in relation to OTSDUW and OTSUA, and/or a
Transmission Interface Site, shall (in any particular case) apply up to the OTSUA Transfer
Time, whereupon such provisions shall (without prejudice to any prior non-compliance) cease
to apply, without prejudice to the continuing application of provisions of the ECC applying in
relation to the relevant Offshore Transmission System and/or Connection Site. It is the
case therefore that in cases where the OTSUA becomes operational prior to the OTSUA
Transfer Time that a EU Generator is required to comply with this ECC both as it applies to
its Plant and Apparatus at a Connection Site\Connection Point and the OTSUA at the
Transmission Interface Site/Transmission Interface Point until the OTSUA Transfer Time
and this ECC shall be construed accordingly.
ECC.2.4 In relation to OTSDUW, provisions otherwise to be contained in a Bilateral Agreement may
be contained in the Construction Agreement, and accordingly a reference in the ECC to a
relevant Bilateral Agreement includes the relevant Construction Agreement.

ECC.3 SCOPE
ECC.3.1 The ECC applies to The Company and to Users, which in the ECC means:
(a) EU Generators (other than those which only have Embedded Small Power Stations),
including those undertaking OTSDUW including Power Generating Modules, and DC
Connected Power Park Modules. For the avoidance of doubt, Electricity Storage
Modules are included within the definition of Power Generating Modules for which the
requirements of the ECC would be equally applicable.
(b) Network Operators but only in respect of:-
(i) Network Operators who are EU Code Users
(ii) Network Operators who only have EU Grid Supply Points
(iii) Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement as
provided for in ECC.3.2, ECC.3.3, EC3.4, EC3.5, ECC5.1, ECC.6.4.4 and
ECA.3.4;
(iv) Notwithstanding the requirements of ECC3.1(b)(i)(ii) and (iii), Network
Operators who own and/or operate EU Grid Supply Points, are only required
to satisfy the requirements of this ECC in relation to each EU Grid Supply Point.
Network Operators in respect of all other Grid Supply Points should continue
to satisfy the requirements as specified in the CCs.
(c) Non-Embedded Customers who are also EU Code Users;
(d) HVDC System Owners who are also EU Code Users;
(e) BM Participants and Externally Interconnected System Operators who are also EU
Code Users in respect of ECC.6.5, ECC.7.9, ECC.7.10 and ECC.7.11 only; and.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

3 of 147
 (f) In relation to Distribution Restoration Zones, Restoration Contractors who are Non-
CUSC Parties and whose Embedded Plant needs to comply with the requirements of
EREC G99, other than those included in (a) to (e) above, shall only be required to satisfy
ECC.6.1.2, ECC.6.2.2.2.1.2, ECC.6.2.2.7, ECC.6.3, ECC.6.6, ECC.7.10, ECC.7.11 and
ECC.8.1 unless additional technical requirements are provided for in the Anchor
Restoration Contract or Top Up Restoration Contract. Restoration Contractors who
are Non-CUSC Parties and whose Embedded Plant needs to comply with EREC G59
are not included in the scope of the ECC and should refer to the CC.

ECC.3.2 The above categories of User will become bound by the applicable sections of the ECC prior
to them generating, distributing, storing, supplying or consuming, as the case may be, and
references to the various categories should, therefore, be taken as referring to them in that
prospective role.
ECC.3.3 Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded
HVDC Systems not subject to a Bilateral Agreement Provisions.
The following provisions apply in respect of Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject
to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded HVDC Systems not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement.
ECC.3.3.1 The obligations within the ECC that are expressed to be applicable to EU Generators in
respect of Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and
HVDC System Owners in respect of Embedded HVDC Systems not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement (where the obligations are in each case listed in ECC.3.3.2) shall be read and
construed as obligations that the Network Operator within whose System any such Medium
Power Station or HVDC System is Embedded must ensure are performed and discharged
by the EU Generator or the HVDC Owner. Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject
to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded HVDC Systems not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement which are located Offshore and which are connected to an Onshore User
System will be required to meet the applicable requirements of the Grid Code as though they
are an Onshore Generator or Onshore HVDC System Owner connected to an Onshore
User System Entry Point.
ECC.3.3.2 The Network Operator within whose System a Medium Power Station not subject to a
Bilateral Agreement is Embedded or a HVDC System not subject to a Bilateral Agreement
is Embedded must ensure that the following obligations in the ECC are performed and
discharged by the EU Generator in respect of each such Embedded Medium Power Station
or the HVDC System Owner in the case of an Embedded HVDC System:
ECC.5.1
ECC.5.2.2
ECC.5.3
ECC.6.1.3
ECC.6.1.5 (b)
ECC.6.3.2, ECC.6.3.3, ECC.6.3.4, ECC.6.3.6, ECC.6.3.7, ECC.6.3.8, ECC.6.3.9,
ECC.6.3.10, ECC.6.3.12, ECC.6.3.13, ECC.6.3.15, ECC.6.3.16
ECC.6.4.4
ECC.6.5.6 (where required by ECC.6.4.4)

In respect of ECC.6.2.2.2, ECC.6.2.2.3, ECC.6.2.2.5, ECC.6.1.5(a), ECC.6.1.5(b) and

ECC.6.3.11 equivalent provisions as co-ordinated and agreed with the Network
Operator and EU Generator or HVDC System Owner may be required. Details of any
such requirements will be notified to the Network Operator in accordance with ECC.3.5.
ECC.3.3.3 In the case of Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and
Embedded HVDC Systems not subject to a Bilateral Agreement the requirements in:
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
4 of 147
 ECC.6.1.6
ECC.6.3.8
ECC.6.3.12
ECC.6.3.15
ECC.6.3.16
ECC.6.3.17

that would otherwise have been specified in a Bilateral Agreement will be notified to the
relevant Network Operator in writing in accordance with the provisions of the CUSC and the
Network Operator must ensure such requirements are performed and discharged by the
Generator or the HVDC System owner.
ECC.3.4 In the case of Offshore Embedded Power Generating Modules connected to an Offshore
User’s System which directly connects to an Offshore Transmission System, any
additional requirements in respect of such Offshore Embedded Power Generating Modules
may be specified in the relevant Bilateral Agreement with the Network Operator or in any
Bilateral Agreement between The Company and such Offshore Generator.
ECC.3.5 In the case of a Generator undertaking OTSDUW connecting to an Onshore Network
Operator’s System, any additional requirements in respect of such OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus will be specified in the relevant Bilateral Agreement with the EU Generator. For
the avoidance of doubt, requirements applicable to EU Generators undertaking OTSDUW
and connecting to a Network Operator’s User System, shall be consistent with those
applicable requirements of Generators undertaking OTSDUW and connecting to a
Transmission Interface Point.
ECC.3.6 The requirements of this ECC shall apply to EU Code Users in respect of Power
Generating Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules and Electricity
Storage Modules) and HVDC Systems.

ECC.4 PROCEDURE
ECC.4.1 The CUSC contains certain provisions relating to the procedure for connection to the National
Electricity Transmission System or, in the case of Embedded Power Stations or
Embedded HVDC Systems, becoming operational and includes provisions relating to certain
conditions to be complied with by EU Code Users prior to and during the course of The
Company notifying the User that it has the right to become operational. The procedure for an
EU Code User to become connected is set out in the Compliance Processes.

ECC.5 CONNECTION
ECC.5.1 The provisions relating to connecting to the National Electricity Transmission System (or
to a User's System in the case of a connection of an Embedded Large Power Station or
Embedded Medium Power Stations or Embedded HVDC System) are contained in:
(a) the CUSC and/or CUSC Contract (or in the relevant application form or offer for a CUSC
Contract);
(b) or, in the case of an Embedded Development, the relevant Distribution Code and/or
the Embedded Development Agreement for the connection (or in the relevant
application form or offer for an Embedded Development Agreement),

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

5 of 147
 and include provisions relating to both the submission of information and reports relating to
compliance with the relevant European Connection Conditions for that EU Code User,
Safety Rules, commissioning programmes, Operation Diagrams and approval to connect
(and their equivalents in the case of Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a
Bilateral Agreement or Embedded HVDC Systems not subject to a Bilateral Agreement).
References in the ECC to the "Bilateral Agreement” and/or “Construction Agreement"
and/or “Embedded Development Agreement” shall be deemed to include references to the
application form or offer therefor.
ECC.5.2 Items For Submission
ECC.5.2.1 Prior to the Completion Date (or, where the EU Generator is undertaking OTSDUW, any
later date specified) under the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement, the
following is submitted pursuant to the terms of the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction
Agreement:
(a) updated Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning
Data), with any estimated values assumed for planning purposes confirmed or, where
practical, replaced by validated actual values and by updated estimates for the future and
by updated forecasts for Forecast Data items such as Demand, pursuant to the
requirements of the Planning Code;

(b) details of the Protection arrangements and settings referred to in ECC.6;

(c) copies of all Safety Rules and Local Safety Instructions applicable at Users' Sites
which will be used at the Transmission/User interface (which, for the purpose of OC8,
must be to The Company’s satisfaction regarding the procedures for Isolation and
Earthing. The Company will consult the Relevant Transmission Licensee when
determining whether the procedures for Isolation and Earthing are satisfactory);
(d) information to enable the preparation of the Site Responsibility Schedules on the basis
of the provisions set out in Appendix 1;
(e) an Operation Diagram for all HV Apparatus on the User side of the Connection Point
as described in ECC.7;
(f) the proposed name of the User Site (which shall not be the same as, or confusingly
similar to, the name of any Transmission Site or of any other User Site);
(g) written confirmation that Safety Co-ordinators acting on behalf of the User are
authorised and competent pursuant to the requirements of OC8;
(h) Such RISSP prefixes pursuant to the requirements of OC8. Such RISSP prefixes shall
be circulated utilising a proforma in accordance with OC8;
(i) a list of the telephone numbers for Joint System Incidents at which senior management
representatives nominated for the purpose can be contacted and confirmation that they
are fully authorised to make binding decisions on behalf of the User, pursuant to OC9;
(j) a list of managers who have been duly authorised to sign Site Responsibility Schedules
on behalf of the User;
(k) information to enable the preparation of the Site Common Drawings as described in
ECC.7;
(l) a list of the telephone numbers for the Users facsimile machines referred to in ECC.6.5.9;
and
(m) for Sites in Scotland and Offshore a list of persons appointed by the User to undertake
operational duties on the User’s System (including any OTSDUW prior to the OTSUA
Transfer Time) and to issue and receive operational messages and instructions in
relation to the User’s System (including any OTSDUW prior to the OTSUA Transfer
Time); and an appointed person or persons responsible for the maintenance and testing
of User’s Plant and Apparatus.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

6 of 147
ECC.5.2.2 Prior to the Completion Date the following must be submitted to The Company by the
Network Operator in respect of an Embedded Development:
(a) updated Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning
Data), with any estimated values assumed for planning purposes confirmed or, where
practical, replaced by validated actual values and by updated estimates for the future and
by updated forecasts for Forecast Data items such as Demand, pursuant to the
requirements of the Planning Code;
(b) details of the Protection arrangements and settings referred to in ECC.6;
(c) the proposed name of the Embedded Medium Power Station or Embedded HVDC
System (which shall be agreed with The Company unless it is the same as, or
confusingly similar to, the name of other Transmission Site or User Site);
ECC.5.2.3 Prior to the Completion Date contained within an Offshore Transmission Distribution
Connection Agreement the following must be submitted to The Company by the Network
Operator in respect of a proposed new Interface Point within its User System:
(a) updated Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning
Data), with any estimated values assumed for planning purposes confirmed or, where
practical, replaced by validated actual values and by updated estimates for the future and
by updated forecasts for Forecast Data items such as Demand, pursuant to the
requirements of the Planning Code;
(b) details of the Protection arrangements and settings referred to in ECC.6;
(c) the proposed name of the Interface Point (which shall not be the same as, or confusingly
similar to, the name of any Transmission Site or of any other User Site);
ECC.5.2.4 In the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus (in addition to items under ECC.5.2.1 in respect
of the Connection Site), prior to the Completion Date (or any later date specified) under the
Construction Agreement the following must be submitted to The Company by the User in
respect of the proposed new Connection Point and Interface Point:
(a) updated Planning Code data (Standard Planning Data, Detailed Planning Data and
OTSDUW Data and Information), with any estimated values assumed for planning
purposes confirmed or, where practical, replaced by validated actual values and by
updated estimates for the future and by updated forecasts for Forecast Data items such
as Demand, pursuant to the requirements of the Planning Code;
(b) details of the Protection arrangements and settings referred to in ECC.6;
(c) information to enable preparation of the Site Responsibility Schedules at the
Transmission Interface Site on the basis of the provisions set out in Appendix E1.
(d) the proposed name of the Interface Point (which shall not be the same as, or confusingly
similar to, the name of any Transmission Site or of any other User Site);
ECC.5.3 (a) Of the items ECC.5.2.1 (c), (e), (g), (h), (k) and (m) need not be supplied in respect of
Embedded Power Stations or Embedded HVDC Systems,
(b) item ECC.5.2.1(i) need not be supplied in respect of Embedded Small Power Stations
and Embedded Medium Power Stations or Embedded HVDC Systems with a
Registered Capacity of less than 100MW, and
(c) items ECC.5.2.1(d) and (j) are only needed in the case where the Embedded Power
Station or the Embedded HVDC System is within a Connection Site with another User.

ECC.6 TECHNICAL, DESIGN AND OPERATIONAL CRITERIA

ECC.6.1 National Electricity Transmission System Performance Characteristics

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

7 of 147
ECC.6.1.1 The Company shall ensure that, subject as provided in the Grid Code, the National
Electricity Transmission System complies with the following technical, design and
operational criteria in relation to the part of the National Electricity Transmission System at
the Connection Site with a User and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, a
Transmission Interface Point (unless otherwise specified in ECC.6) although in relation to
operational criteria The Company may be unable (and will not be required) to comply with this
obligation to the extent that there are insufficient Power Stations or User Systems are not
available or Users do not comply with The Company's instructions or otherwise do not comply
with the Grid Code and each User shall ensure that its Plant and Apparatus complies with
the criteria set out in ECC.6.1.5.
ECC.6.1.2 Grid Frequency Variations
ECC.6.1.2.1 Grid Frequency Variations
ECC.6.1.2.1.1 The Frequency of the National Electricity Transmission System shall be nominally 50Hz
and shall be controlled within the limits of 49.5 - 50.5Hz unless exceptional circumstances
prevail, for example but not limited to, situations such as during System Restoration.
ECC.6.1.2.1.2 The System Frequency could rise to 52Hz or fall to 47Hz in exceptional circumstances.
Design of User's Plant and Apparatus and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus must enable
operation of that Plant and Apparatus within that range in accordance with the following:
Frequency Range Requirement
51.5Hz - 52Hz Operation for a period of at least 15 minutes is required each
time the Frequency is above 51.5Hz.
51Hz - 51.5Hz Operation for a period of at least 90 minutes is required each
time the Frequency is above 51Hz.
49.0Hz - 51Hz Continuous operation is required
47.5Hz - 49.0Hz Operation for a period of at least 90 minutes is required each
time the Frequency is below 49.0Hz.
47Hz - 47.5Hz Operation for a period of at least 20 seconds is required
each time the Frequency is below 47.5Hz.

ECC.6.1.2.1.3 For the avoidance of doubt, disconnection, by frequency or speed based relays is not
permitted within the frequency range 47.5Hz to 51.5Hz. EU Generators should however be
aware of the combined voltage and frequency operating ranges as defined in ECC.6.3.12 and
ECC.6.3.13.
ECC.6.1.2.1.4 The Company in co-ordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee and/or Network
Operator and a User may agree on wider variations in frequency or longer minimum operating
times to those set out in ECC.6.1.2.1.2 or specific requirements for combined frequency and
voltage deviations, for example but not limited to, situations such as during System
Restoration. Any such requirements in relation to Power Generating Modules shall be in
accordance with ECC.6.3.12 and ECC.6.3.13. A User shall not unreasonably withhold
consent to apply wider frequency ranges or longer minimum times for operation taking account
of their economic and technical feasibility.
ECC.6.1.2.2 Grid Frequency variations for HVDC Systems and Remote End HVDC Converter Stations
ECC.6.1.2.2.1 HVDC Systems and Remote End HVDC Converter Stations shall be capable of staying
connected to the System and remaining operable within the frequency ranges and time
periods specified in Table ECC.6.1.2.2 below. This requirement shall continue to apply during
the Fault Ride Through conditions defined in ECC.6.3.15

Frequency Range (Hz) Time Period for Operation (s)

47.0 – 47.5Hz 60 seconds
47.5 – 49.0Hz 90 minutes and 30 seconds
49.0 – 51.0Hz Unlimited

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

8 of 147
 51.0 – 51.5Hz 90 minutes and 30 seconds
51.5Hz – 52 Hz 20 minutes

Table ECC.6.1.2.2 – Minimum time periods HVDC Systems and Remote End HVDC Converter Stations
shall be able to operate for different frequencies deviating from a nominal value without
disconnecting from the National Electricity Transmission System
ECC.6.1.2.2.2 The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee and a HVDC
System Owner may agree wider frequency ranges or longer minimum operating times if
required to preserve or restore system security, for example but not limited to, situations such
as during System Restoration. If wider frequency ranges or longer minimum times for
operation are economically and technically feasible, the HVDC System Owner shall not
unreasonably withhold consent.
ECC.6.1.2.2.3 Not withstanding the requirements of ECC.6.1.2.2.1, an HVDC System or Remote End HVDC
Converter Station shall be capable of automatic disconnection at frequencies specified by
The Company and/or Relevant Network Operator.
ECC.6.1.2.2.4 In the case of Remote End HVDC Converter Stations where the Remote End HVDC
Converter Station is operating at either nominal frequency other than 50Hz or a variable
frequency, the requirements defined in ECC6.1.2.2.1 to ECC.6.1.2.2.3 shall apply to the
Remote End HVDC Converter Station other than in respect of the frequency ranges and
time periods.
ECC.6.1.2.3 Grid Frequency Variations for DC Connected Power Park Modules
ECC.6.1.2.3.1 DC Connected Power Park Modules shall be capable of staying connected to the Remote
End DC Converter network at the HVDC Interface Point and operating within the Frequency
ranges and time periods specified in Table ECC.6.1.2.3 below. Where a nominal frequency
other than 50Hz, or a Frequency variable by design is used as agreed with The Company
and the Relevant Transmission Licensee the applicable Frequency ranges and time
periods shall be specified in the Bilateral Agreement which shall (where applicable) reflect
the requirements in Table ECC.6.1.2.3 .

Frequency Range (Hz) Time Period for Operation (s)

47.0 – 47.5Hz 20 seconds
47.5 – 49.0Hz 90 minutes
49.0 – 51.0Hz Unlimited
51.0 – 51.5Hz 90 minutes
51.5Hz – 52 Hz 15 minutes

Table ECC.6.1.2.3 – Minimum time periods a DC Connected Power Park Module shall be able to operate
for different frequencies deviating from a nominal value without disconnecting from the
System
ECC.6.1.2.3.2 The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee and a Generator
may agree wider frequency ranges or longer minimum operating times if required to preserve
or restore system security and to ensure the optimum capability of the DC Connected Power
Park Module, for example but not limited to, situations such as during System Restoration.
If wider frequency ranges or longer minimum times for operation are economically and
technically feasible, the EU Generator shall not unreasonably withhold consent.
ECC.6.1.3 Not used
ECC.6.1.4 Grid Voltage Variations

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

9 of 147
ECC.6.1.4.1 Grid Voltage Variations for Users excluding DC Connected Power Park Modules and
Remote End HVDC Converters
The voltage on part of the National Electricity Transmission System operating at nominal
voltages of greater than 300kV at each Connection Site with a User (and in the case of
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, a Transmission Interface Point, excluding DC Connected
Power Park Modules and Remote End HVDC Converters) will normally remain within 5%
of the nominal value unless abnormal conditions prevail. The minimum voltage is -10% and
the maximum voltage is +10% unless abnormal conditions prevail, for example, but not limited
to, situations such as during System Restoration, but voltages between +5% and +10% will
not last longer than 15 minutes unless abnormal conditions prevail. For nominal voltages of
110kV and up to and including 300kV voltages on the parts of the National Electricity
Transmission System at each Connection Point (and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus, a Transmission Interface Point) will normally remain within the limits 10% of
the nominal value unless abnormal conditions prevail for example, but not limited to, situations
such as during System Restoration. At nominal System voltages below 110kV the voltage
of the National Electricity Transmission System at each Connection Site with a User (and
in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, a Transmission Interface Point), excluding
Connection Sites for DC Connected Power Park Modules and Remote End HVDC
Converters) will normally remain within the limits 6% of the nominal value unless abnormal
conditions prevail for example but not limited to, situations such as during System
Restoration. Under fault conditions, the voltage may collapse transiently to zero at the point
of fault until the fault is cleared. The normal operating ranges of the National Electricity
Transmission System are summarised below:
National Electricity Normal Operating Range Time period
Transmission System for Operation
Nominal Voltage Voltage Pu (1pu relates to
(percentage of the Nominal
Nominal Voltage) Voltage)
Greater than 300kV V -10% to +5% 0.90pu- 1.05pu Unlimited
V +5% to +10% 1.05pu- 1.10pu 15 minutes
110kV up to 300kV V 10% 0.90- 1.10pu Unlimited

Below 110kV ±6% 0.94pu- 1.06pu Unlimited

The Company and a User may agree greater variations or longer minimum time periods of
operation in voltage to those set out above in relation to a particular Connection Site, and
insofar as a greater variation is agreed, the relevant figure set out above shall, in relation to
that User at the particular Connection Site, be replaced by the figure agreed.
ECC.6.1.4.2 Grid Voltage Variations for all DC Connected Power Park Modules
ECC.6.1.4.2.1 All DC Connected Power Park Modules shall be capable of staying connected to the Remote
End HVDC Converter Station at the HVDC Interface Point and operating within the voltage
ranges and time periods specified in Tables ECC.6.1.4.2(a) and ECC.6.1.4.2(b) below. The
applicable voltage range and time periods specified are selected based on the reference 1pu
voltage.

Voltage Range (pu) Time Period for Operation (s)

0.85pu – 0.9pu 60 minutes
0.9pu – 1.1pu Unlimited
1.1pu – 1.15pu 15 minutes

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

10 of 147
 Table ECC.6.1.4.2(a) – Minimum time periods for which DC Connected Power Park Modules shall be
capable of operating for different voltages deviating from reference 1pu without
disconnecting from the network where the nominal voltage base is 110kV or above and less
than 300kV.
Voltage Range (pu) Time Period for Operation (s)
0.85pu – 0.9pu 60 minutes
0.9pu – 1.05pu Unlimited
1.05pu – 1.15pu 15 minutes

Table ECC.6.1.4.2(b) – Minimum time periods for which DC Connected Power Park Modules shall be
capable of operating for different voltages deviating from reference 1pu without
disconnecting from the network where the nominal voltage base is from 300kV up to and
including 400kV.
ECC.6.1.4.2.2 The Company and a EU Generator in respect of a DC Connected Power Park Module may
agree greater voltage ranges or longer minimum operating times. If greater voltage ranges
or longer minimum times for operation are economically and technically feasible, the EU
Generator shall not unreasonably withhold any agreement .
ECC.6.1.4.2.3 For DC Connected Power Park Modules which have an HVDC Interface Point to the
Remote End HVDC Converter Station, The Company in coordination with the Relevant
Transmission Licensee may specify voltage limits at the HVDC Interface Point at which the
DC Connected Power Park Module is capable of automatic disconnection.
ECC.6.1.4.2.4 For HVDC Interface Points which fall outside the scope of ECC.6.1.4.2.1, ECC.6.1.4.2.2 and
ECC.6.1.4.2.3, The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee
shall specify any applicable requirements at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry
Point.
ECC.6.1.4.2.5 Where the nominal frequency of the AC collector System which is connected to an HVDC
Interface Point is at a value other than 50Hz, the voltage ranges and time periods specified
by The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee shall be
proportional to the values specified in Table ECC.6.1.4.2(a) and Table ECC.6.1.4.2(b)
ECC.6.1.4.3 Grid Voltage Variations for all Remote End HVDC Converters
ECC.6.1.4.3.1 All Remote End HVDC Converter Stations shall be capable of staying connected to the
HVDC Interface Point and operating within the voltage ranges and time periods specified in
Tables ECC.6.1.4.3(a) and ECC.6.1.4.3(b) below. The applicable voltage range and time
periods specified are selected based on the reference 1pu voltage.

Voltage Range (pu) Time Period for Operation (s)

0.85pu – 0.9pu 60 minutes
0.9pu – 1.1pu Unlimited
1.1pu – 1.15pu 15 minutes

Table ECC.6.1.4.3(a) – Minimum time periods for which a Remote End HVDC Converter shall be capable
of operating for different voltages deviating from reference 1pu without disconnecting from
the network where the nominal voltage base is 110kV or above and less than 300kV.
Voltage Range (pu) Time Period for Operation (s)
0.85pu – 0.9pu 60 minutes
0.9pu – 1.05pu Unlimited

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

11 of 147
 1.05pu – 1.15pu 15 minutes

Table ECC.6.1.4.3(b) – Minimum time periods for which a Remote End HVDC Converter shall be capable
of operating for different voltages deviating from reference 1pu without disconnecting from
the network where the nominal voltage base is from 300kV up to and including 400kV.
ECC.6.1.4.3.2 The Company and a HVDC System Owner may agree greater voltage ranges or longer
minimum operating times which shall be in accordance with the requirements of ECC.6.1.4.2.
ECC.6.1.4.3.4 For HVDC Interface Points which fall outside the scope of ECC.6.1.4.3.1 The Company in
coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee shall specify any applicable
requirements at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point.
ECC.6.1.4.3.5 Where the nominal frequency of the AC collector System which is connected to an HVDC
Interface Point is at a value other than 50Hz, the voltage ranges and time periods specified
by The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee shall be
proportional to the values specified in Table ECC.6.1.4.3(a) and Table ECC.6.1.4.3(b)
Voltage Waveform Quality
ECC.6.1.5 All Plant and Apparatus connected to the National Electricity Transmission System, and
that part of the National Electricity Transmission System at each Connection Site or, in
the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, at each Interface Point, should be capable of
withstanding the following distortions of the voltage waveform in respect of harmonic content
and phase unbalance:
(a) Harmonic Content
The Electromagnetic Compatibility Levels for harmonic distortion on the Onshore
Transmission System from all sources under both Planned Outage and fault outage
conditions, (unless abnormal conditions prevail) shall comply with Engineering
Recommendation G5. The Electromagnetic Compatibility Levels for harmonic
distortion on an Offshore Transmission System will be defined in relevant Bilateral
Agreements.
Engineering Recommendation G5 contains planning criteria which The Company will
apply to the connection of non-linear Load to the National Electricity Transmission
System, which may result in harmonic emission limits being specified for these Loads in
the relevant Bilateral Agreement. The application of the planning criteria will take into
account the position of existing GB Code User’s and EU Code Users’ Plant and
Apparatus (and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) in relation to harmonic emissions. EU
Code Users must ensure that connection of distorting loads to their User Systems do
not cause any harmonic emission limits specified in the Bilateral Agreement, or where
no such limits are specified, the relevant planning levels specified in Engineering
Recommendation G5 to be exceeded.
(b) Phase Unbalance
Under Planned Outage conditions, the weekly 95 percentile of Phase (Voltage)
Unbalance, calculated in accordance with IEC 61000-4-30 and IEC 61000-3-13, on the
National Electricity Transmission System for voltages above 150kV should remain, in
England and Wales, below 1.5%, and in Scotland, below 2%, and for voltages of 150kV
and below, across GB below 2%, unless abnormal conditions prevail and Offshore (or in
the case of OTSDUW, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) will be defined in relevant
Bilateral Agreements.
The Phase Unbalance is calculated from the ratio of root mean square (rms) of negative
phase sequence voltage to rms of positive phase sequence voltage, based on 10-minute
average values, in accordance with IEC 61000-4-30.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

12 of 147
ECC.6.1.6 Across GB, under the Planned Outage conditions stated in ECC.6.1.5(b) infrequent short
duration peaks with a maximum value of 2% are permitted for Phase (Voltage) Unbalance,
for voltages above 150kV, subject to the prior agreement of The Company under the Bilateral
Agreement and in relation to OTSDUW, the Construction Agreement. The Company will
only agree following a specific assessment of the impact of these levels on Transmission
Apparatus and other Users Apparatus with which it is satisfied.

Voltage Fluctuations
ECC.6.1.7 Voltage changes at a Point of Common Coupling on the Onshore Transmission System
shall not exceed:
(a) The limits specified in Table ECC.6.1.7(a) with the stated frequency of occurrence, where:
(i)

Vsteadystate
%Vsteadystate = │100 x │ and
Vn
Vmax
%Vmax =100 x ;
Vn
(ii) Vn is the nominal system voltage;

(iii) Vsteadystate is the voltage at the end of a period of 1 s during which the rate of change
of system voltage over time is ≤ 0.5%;
(iv) Vsteadystate is the difference in voltage between the initial steady state voltage prior
to the RVC (V0) and the final steady state voltage after the RVC (V0’);
(v) Vmax is the absolute change in the system voltage relative to the initial steady state
system voltage (V0);
(vi) All voltages are the r.m.s. of the voltage measured over one cycle refreshed every
half a cycle as per BS EN 61000-4-30; and
(vii) The applications in the ‘Example Applicability’ column are examples only and are
not definitive.

Cat- Maximum number Limits

Title Example Applicability
egory of occurrence %Vmax & %Vsteadystate

Any single or repetitive RVC

Frequent As per Figure ECC.6.1.7
1 (see NOTE 1) that falls inside Figure
events (1)
ECC.6.1.7 (1)

As per Figure ECC.6.1.7

(2)
│%Vsteadystate │≤ 3%
Infrequent motor starting,
4 events in 1 For decrease in voltage: transformer energisation,
Infrequent
2 calendar month │%Vmax │≤ 10%
events re-energisation
(see NOTE 2) (see NOTE 3)
(see NOTE 7)
For increase in voltage:
│%Vmax │≤ 6%
(see NOTE 4)

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

13 of 147
 As per Figure ECC.6.1.7 Commissioning, maintenance
(3) & post fault switching
│%Vsteadystate │≤ 3% (see NOTE 7)
Very 1 event in 3 For decrease in voltage:
3 infrequent calendar months │%Vmax │≤ 12%
events (see NOTE 2) (see NOTE 5)
For increase in voltage:
│%Vmax │≤ 6%
(see NOTE 6)

NOTE 1: 6% is permissible for 100 ms reduced to 3% thereafter as per Figure ECC.6.1.7 (1) .
If the profile of repetitive voltage change(s) falls within the envelope given in Figure ECC.6.1.7 (1) , the
assessment of such voltage change(s) shall be undertaken according to the recommendations for
assessment of flicker and shall conform to the planning levels provided for flicker.
If any part of the voltage change(s) falls outside the envelope given in Figure ECC.6.1.7(1), the
assessment of such voltage changes, repetitive or not, shall be done according to the guidance and limits
for RVCs.
NOTE 2: No more than 1 event is permitted per day, consisting of up to 4 RVCs, each separated by at least 10
minutes with all switching completed within a two-hour window.
NOTE 3: −10% is permissible for 100 ms reduced to -6% until 2 s then reduced to -3% thereafter as per Figure
ECC.6.1.7 (2).
NOTE 4: +6% is permissible for 0.8 s from the instant the event begins then reduced to +3% thereafter as per Figure
ECC.6.1.7 (2).
NOTE 5: −12% is permissible for 100 ms reduced to −10% until 2 s then reduced to -3% thereafter as per Figure
ECC.6.1.7 (3).
NOTE 6: +6% is permissible for 0.8 s from the instant the event begins then reduced to +3% thereafter as per Figure
ECC.6.1.7 (3).
NOTE 7: These are examples only. Customers may opt to conform to the limits of another category providing the
frequency of occurrence is not expected to exceed the ‘Maximum number of occurrence’ for the chosen
category.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

14 of 147
 Table ECC.6.1.7 (a) – Planning levels for RVC

(b) The voltage change limit is the absolute maximum allowed of either the phase-to-earth
voltage change or the phase-to-phase voltage change, whichever is the highest. The limits
do not apply to single phasor equivalent voltages, e.g. positive phase sequence (PPS)
voltages. For high impedance earthed systems, the maximum phase-to-phase, i.e. line
voltage, should be used for assessment.
(c) The RVCs in Category 2 and 3 should not exceed the limits depicted in the time dependent
characteristic shown in Figure ECC.6.1.7 (2) and Figure ECC.6.1.7 (3) respectively.
These limits do not apply to: 1) fault clearance operations; or 2) immediate operations in
response to fault conditions; or 3) operations relating to post fault system restoration (for
the avoidance of doubt this third exception pertains to a fault that is external to the Users
plant and apparatus).
(d) Any RVCs permitted in Category 2 and Category 3 should be at least 10 minutes apart.
(e) The value of Vsteadystate should be established immediately prior to the start of a RVC.
Following a RVC, the voltage should remain within the relevant envelope, as shown in
Figures ECC.6.1.7 (1), ECC.6.1.7 (2), ECC.6.1.7 (3), until a Vsteadystate condition has been
satisfied.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

15 of 147
 Figure ECC.6.1.7 (1) — Voltage characteristic for frequent events

V0+6%

V0+3%

V0

V0−3%

V0−6%

V0−10%

t=0 100 ms 0.8 s 2s t

Figure ECC.6.1.7 (2) — Voltage characteristic for infrequent events

V0+6%

V0+3%

V0

V0−3%

V0−10%
V0−12%

t=0 100 ms 0.8 s 2s t

Figure ECC.6.1.7 (3) — Voltage characteristic for very infrequent events

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

16 of 147
 (f) The voltage change between two steady state voltage conditions should not exceed 3%.
(The limit is based on 3% of the nominal voltage of the system (Vn) as measured at the
PCC. The step voltage change as measured at the customer’s supply terminals or
equipment terminals could be greater. For example: The step voltage change limit stated
in BS EN 61000-3-3 and BS EN 61000-3-11 is 3.3% when measured at the equipment
terminals.)
(g) The limits apply to voltage changes measured at the Point of Common Coupling.
(h) Category 3 events that are planned should be notified to the Company in advance.
(i) For connections where voltage changes would constitute a risk to the National Electricity
Transmission System or, in The Company’s view, the System of any GB Code User,
Bilateral Agreements may include provision for The Company to reasonably limit the
number of voltage changes in Category 2 or 3 to a lower number than specified in Table
ECC.6.1.7(a) to ensure that the total number of voltage changes at the Point of Common
Coupling across multiple Users remains within the limits of Table ECC.6.1.7(a).
(j) The planning levels applicable to Flicker Severity Short Term (Pst) and Flicker Severity
Long Term (Plt) are set out in Table ECC.6.1.7(b).

Planning level
Supply system Flicker Severity Short Flicker Severity Long Term
Nominal voltage Term (Pst) (Plt)
Up to and including 33 kV 0.9 0.7
66kV and greater 0.8 0.6

NOTE 1: The magnitude of Pst is linear with respect to the magnitude of the voltage changes giving rise to it.
NOTE 2: Extreme caution is advised in allowing any excursions of Pst and Plt above the planning level.

Table ECC.6.7.1(b) — Planning levels for flicker

The values and figures referred to in this paragraph ECC.6.1.7 are derived from Engineering
Recommendation P28 Issue 2.

ECC.6.1.8 Voltage fluctuations at a Point of Common Coupling with a fluctuating Load directly
connected to an Offshore Transmission System (or in the case of OTSDUW, OTSDUW
Plant and Apparatus) shall not exceed the limits set out in the Bilateral Agreement.

Sub-Synchronous Resonance and Sub-Synchronous Torsional Interaction (SSTI)

ECC.6.1.9 The Company shall ensure that Users' Plant and Apparatus will not be subject to
unacceptable Sub-Synchronous Oscillation conditions as specified in the relevant License
Standards.
ECC.6.1.10 The Company shall ensure where necessary, and in consultation with Relevant
Transmission Licensees where required, that any relevant site specific conditions applicable
at a User's Connection Site, including a description of the Sub-Synchronous Oscillation
conditions considered in the application of the relevant License Standards, are set out in the
User's Bilateral Agreement.
.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

17 of 147
ECC.6.2 Plant and Apparatus relating to Connection Sites and Interface Points and HVDC Interface
Points
The following requirements apply to Plant and Apparatus relating to the Connection Point
and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus relating to the Interface Point (until the OTSUA
Transfer Time), HVDC Interface Points relating to Remote End HVDC Converters and
Connection Points which (except as otherwise provided in the relevant paragraph) each EU
Code User must ensure are complied with in relation to its Plant and Apparatus and which
in the case of ECC.6.2.2.2.2, ECC.6.2.3.1.1 and ECC.6.2.1.1(b) only, The Company must
ensure are complied with in relation to Transmission Plant and Apparatus, as provided in
those paragraphs.
ECC.6.2.1 General Requirements
ECC.6.2.1.1 (a) The design of connections between the National Electricity Transmission System and:
(i) any Power Generating Module Generating Unit (other than a CCGT Unit or
Power Park Unit) HVDC Equipment, Power Park Module or CCGT Module, or
(ii) any Network Operator’s User System, or
(iii) Non-Embedded Customers equipment;
will be consistent with the Licence Standards.
In the case of OTSDUW, the design of the OTSUA’s connections at the Interface Point
and Connection Point will be consistent with Licence Standards.
(b) The National Electricity Transmission System (and any OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus) at nominal System voltages of 132kV and above is/shall be designed to be
earthed with an Earth Fault Factor of, in England and Wales or Offshore, below 1.4 and
in Scotland, below 1.5. Under fault conditions the rated Frequency component of voltage
could fall transiently to zero on one or more phases or, in England and Wales, rise to
140% phase-to-earth voltage, or in Scotland, rise to 150% phase-to-earth voltage. The
voltage rise would last only for the time that the fault conditions exist. The fault conditions
referred to here are those existing when the type of fault is single or two phase-to-earth.
(c) For connections to the National Electricity Transmission System at nominal System
voltages of below 132kV the earthing requirements and voltage rise conditions will be
advised by The Company as soon as practicable prior to connection and in the case of
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus shall be advised to The Company by the EU Code
User.

ECC.6.2.1.2 Substation Plant and Apparatus

(a) The following provisions shall apply to all Plant and Apparatus which is connected at the
voltage of the Connection Point (and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface
Point ) and which is contained in equipment bays that are within the Transmission
busbar Protection zone at the Connection Point. This includes circuit breakers, switch
disconnectors, disconnectors, Earthing Devices, power transformers, voltage
transformers, reactors, current transformers, surge arresters, bushings, neutral
equipment, capacitors, line traps, coupling devices, external insulation and insulation co-
ordination devices. Where necessary, this is as more precisely defined in the Bilateral
Agreement.
(i) Plant and/or Apparatus in respect of EU Code Users connecting to a new Connection
Point (including OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface Point )
Each item of such Plant and/or Apparatus installed in relation to a new Connection
Point (or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface Point or Remote End
HVDC Converter Station at the HVDC Interface Point) shall comply with the
relevant Technical Specifications and any further requirements identified by The
Company, acting reasonably, to reflect the options to be followed within the
Technical Specifications and/or to complement if necessary the Technical
Specifications so as to enable The Company to comply with its obligations in
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
18 of 147
 relation to the National Electricity Transmission System or the Relevant
Transmission Licensee to comply with its obligations in relation to its
Transmission System. This information, including the application dates of the
relevant Technical Specifications, will be as specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
(ii) EU Code User’s Plant and/or Apparatus connecting to an existing Connection Point
(including OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface Point )
Each new additional and/or replacement item of such Plant and/or Apparatus
installed in relation to a change to an existing Connection Point (or OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus at the Interface Point and Connection Point or Remote End
HVDC Converter Stations at the HVDC Interface Point) shall comply with the
standards/specifications applicable when the change was designed, or such other
standards/specifications as necessary to ensure that the item of Plant and/or
Apparatus is reasonably fit for its intended purpose having due regard to the
obligations of The Company, the relevant User the Relevant Transmission
Licensee under their respective Licences. Where appropriate this information,
including the application dates of the relevant standards/specifications, will be as
specified in the varied Bilateral Agreement.
(iii) Used Plant and/or Apparatus being moved, re-used or modified
If, after its installation, any such item of Plant and/or Apparatus is subsequently:
moved to a new location; or
used for a different purpose; or
otherwise modified;
then the standards/specifications as described in (i) or (ii) above as applicable will
apply as appropriate to such Plant and/or Apparatus, which must be reasonably fit
for its intended purpose having due regard to the obligations of The Company, the
relevant User and the Relevant Transmission Licensee under their respective
Licences.
(b) The Company shall at all times maintain a list of those Technical Specifications and
additional requirements which might be applicable under this ECC.6.2.1.2 and which may
be referenced by The Company in the Bilateral Agreement. The Company shall
provide a copy of the list upon request to any EU Code User. The Company shall also
provide a copy of the list to any EU Code User upon receipt of an application form for a
Bilateral Agreement for a new Connection Point.
(c) Where the EU Code User provides The Company with information and/or test reports
in respect of Plant and/or Apparatus which the EU Code User reasonably believes
demonstrate the compliance of such items with the provisions of a Technical
Specification then The Company shall promptly and without unreasonable delay give
due and proper consideration to such information.
(d) Plant and Apparatus shall be designed, manufactured and tested in premises with an
accredited certificate in accordance with the quality assurance requirements of the
relevant standard in the BS EN ISO 9000 series (or equivalent as reasonably approved
by The Company) or in respect of test premises which do not include a manufacturing
facility premises with an accredited certificate in accordance with BS EN 45001.
(e) Each connection between a User and the National Electricity Transmission System
must be controlled by a circuit-breaker (or circuit breakers) capable of interrupting the
maximum short circuit current at the point of connection. The Seven Year Statement
gives values of short circuit current and the rating of Transmission circuit breakers at
existing and committed Connection Points for future years.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

19 of 147
 (f) Each connection between a Generator undertaking OTSDUW or an Onshore
Transmission Licensee, must be controlled by a circuit breaker (or circuit breakers)
capable of interrupting the maximum short circuit current at the Transmission Interface
Point. The Seven Year Statement gives values of short circuit current and the rating of
Transmission circuit breakers at existing and committed Transmission Interface
Points for future years.
ECC.6.2.2 Requirements at Connection Points or, in the case of OTSDUW at Interface Points that
relate to Generators or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus
ECC.6.2.2.1 Not Used.
ECC.6.2.2.2 Power Generating Module, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, HVDC Equipment and Power
Station Protection Arrangements
ECC.6.2.2.2.1 Minimum Requirements
ECC.6.2.2.2.1.1 Protection of Power Generating Modules (other than Power Park Units), HVDC
Equipment, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus and their connections to the National
Electricity Transmission System shall meet the requirements given below. These are
necessary to reduce the impact on the National Electricity Transmission System of faults
on OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus circuits or circuits owned by Generators (including DC
Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC System Owners.
ECC.6.2.2.2.1.2 Restoration Contractors shall, if required by a Restoration Plan, have the ability to switch:-
a) From the normal to the alternative Protection settings on their Plant and Apparatus
and:-
b) From the alternative to the normal Protection settings whilst their Plant remains in
service.

Any alternative Protection settings shall be included in the Restoration Plan. Normal and
alternative Protection settings shall be agreed between The Company and/or Relevant
Transmission Licensee and/or Network Operator as part of developing a Restoration Plan.

ECC.6.2.2.2.2 Fault Clearance Times

(a) The required fault clearance time for faults on the Generator's (including DC Connected
Power Park Modules) or HVDC System Owner’s equipment directly connected to the
National Electricity Transmission System or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus and for
faults on the National Electricity Transmission System directly connected to the EU
Generator (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC System Owner's
equipment or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, from fault inception to the circuit breaker
arc extinction, shall be set out in the Bilateral Agreement. The fault clearance time
specified in the Bilateral Agreement shall not be shorter than the durations specified in
(i), (ii) and (iii) below:
(i) 80ms for connections operating at a nominal voltage of greater than 300kV
(ii) 100ms for connections operating at a nominal voltage of greater than 132kV and up
to 300kV
(iii) 120ms for connections operating at a nominal voltage of 132kV and below
but this shall not prevent the User or The Company or the Relevant Transmission
Licensee or the EU Generator (including in respect of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus
and DC Connected Power Park Modules) from selecting a shorter fault clearance time
on their own Plant and Apparatus provided Discrimination is achieved.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

20 of 147
 A longer fault clearance time may be specified in the Bilateral Agreement for faults on
the National Electricity Transmission System. A longer fault clearance time for faults
on the EU Generator or HVDC System Owner's equipment or OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus may be agreed with The Company in accordance with the terms of the
Bilateral Agreement but only if System requirements, in The Company's view, permit.
The probability that the fault clearance time stated in the Bilateral Agreement will be
exceeded by any given fault, must be less than 2%.
(b) In the event that the required fault clearance time is not met as a result of failure to operate
on the Main Protection System(s) provided, the Generators or HVDC System Owners
or Generators in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus shall, except as specified
below provide Independent Back-Up Protection. The Relevant Transmission
Licensee will also provide Back-Up Protection and the Relevant Transmission
Licensee’s and the User’s Back-Up Protections will be co-ordinated so as to provide
Discrimination.
On a Power Generating Module (other than a Power Park Unit), HVDC Equipment or
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus and connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System operating at a nominal voltage of greater than 132kV and where
two Independent Main Protections are provided to clear faults on the HV Connections
within the required fault clearance time, the Back-Up Protection provided by EU
Generators (including in respect of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus and DC Connected
Power Park Modules) and HVDC System Owners shall operate to give a fault
clearance time of no longer than 300ms at the minimum infeed for normal operation for
faults on the HV Connections. Where two Independent Main Protections are installed
the Back-Up Protection may be integrated into one (or both) of the Independent Main
Protection relays.
On a Power Generating Module (other than a Power Park Unit), HVDC Equipment or
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus and connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System at 132 kV and below and where only one Main Protection is
provided to clear faults on the HV Connections within the required fault clearance time,
the Independent Back-Up Protection provided by the Generator (including in respect
of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus and DC Connected Power Park Modules) and the
HVDC System Owner shall operate to give a fault clearance time of no longer than
300ms at the minimum infeed for normal operation for faults on the HV Connections.

A Power Generating Module (other than a Power Park Unit), HVDC Equipment or
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) with Back-Up Protection or Independent Back-Up
Protection will also be required to withstand, without tripping, the loading incurred during
the clearance of a fault on the National Electricity Transmission System by breaker
fail Protection at a nominal voltage of greater than 132kV or of a fault cleared by Back-
Up Protection where the EU Generator (including in the case of OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus or DC Connected Power Park Module) or HVDC System is connected at
132kV and below. This will permit Discrimination between the Generator in respect of
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or DC Connected Power Park Modules or HVDC
System Owners’ Back-Up Protection or Independent Back-Up Protection and the
Back-Up Protection provided on the National Electricity Transmission System and
other Users' Systems.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

21 of 147
 (c) When the Power Generating Module (other than Power Park Units), or the HVDC
Equipment or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus is connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System operating at a nominal voltage of greater than 132kV, and in
Scotland and Offshore also at 132kV, and a circuit breaker is provided by the Generator
(including in respect of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or DC Connected Power Park
Modules) or the HVDC System owner, or the Relevant Transmission Licensee, as the
case may be, to interrupt fault current interchange with the National Electricity
Transmission System, or Generator's System, or HVDC System Owner’s System,
as the case may be, circuit breaker fail Protection shall be provided by the Generator
(including in respect of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or DC Connected Power Park
Modules) or HVDC System Owner, or the Relevant Transmission Licensee, as the
case may be, on this circuit breaker. In the event, following operation of a Protection
system, of a failure to interrupt fault current by these circuit-breakers within the Fault
Current Interruption Time, the circuit breaker fail Protection is required to initiate
tripping of all the necessary electrically adjacent circuit-breakers so as to interrupt the
fault current within the next 200ms.
(d) The target performance for the System Fault Dependability Index shall be not less than
99%. This is a measure of the ability of Protection to initiate successful tripping of circuit
breakers which are associated with the faulty item of Apparatus.
ECC.6.2.2.3 Equipment including Protection equipment to be provided
The Relevant Transmission Licensee shall specify the Protection schemes and settings
necessary to protect the National Electricity Transmission System, taking into account the
characteristics of the Power Generating Module or HVDC Equipment.
The protection schemes needed for the Power Generating Module or HVDC Equipment and
the National Electricity Transmission System as well as the settings relevant to the Power
Generating Module and/or HVDC Equipment shall be coordinated and agreed between The
Company and the EU Generator or HVDC System Owner. The agreed Protection schemes
and settings will be specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
The protection schemes and settings for internal electrical faults must not prevent the Power
Generating Module or HVDC Equipment from satisfying the requirements of the Grid Code
although EU Generators should be aware of the requirements of ECC.6.3.13.1. ;
electrical Protection of the Power Generating Module or HVDC Equipment shall take
precedence over operational controls, taking into account the security of the National
Electricity Transmission System and the health and safety of personnel, as well as
mitigating any damage to the Power Generating Module or HVDC Equipment.
ECC.6.2.2.3.1 Protection of Interconnecting Connections
The requirements for the provision of Protection equipment for interconnecting connections
will be specified in the Bilateral Agreement. In this ECC the term "interconnecting
connections" means the primary conductors from the current transformer accommodation on
the circuit side of the circuit breaker to the Connection Point or the primary conductors from
the current transformer accommodation on the circuit side of the OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus of the circuit breaker to the Transmission Interface Point.
ECC.6.2.2.3.2 Circuit-breaker fail Protection
The EU Generator or HVDC System Owner will install circuit breaker fail Protection
equipment in accordance with the requirements of the Bilateral Agreement. The EU
Generator or HVDC System Owner will also provide a back-trip signal in the event of loss of
air from its pressurised head circuit breakers, during the Power Generating Module (other
than a CCGT Unit or Power Park Unit) or HVDC Equipment run-up sequence, where these
circuit breakers are installed.
ECC.6.2.2.3.3 Loss of Excitation
The EU Generator must provide Protection to detect loss of excitation in respect of each of
its Generating Units within a Synchronous Power Generating Module to initiate a
Generating Unit trip.
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
22 of 147
ECC.6.2.2.3.4 Pole-Slipping Protection
Where, in The Company's reasonable opinion, System requirements dictate, The Company
will specify in the Bilateral Agreement a requirement for EU Generators to fit pole-slipping
Protection on their Generating Units within each Synchronous Power Generating Module.
ECC.6.2.2.3.5 Signals for Tariff Metering
EU Generators and HVDC System Owners will install current and voltage transformers
supplying all tariff meters at a voltage to be specified in, and in accordance with, the Bilateral
Agreement.
ECC.6.2.2.3.6 Commissioning of Protection Systems
No EU Generator or HVDC System Owner equipment shall be energised until the Protection
settings have been finalised. The EU Generator or HVDC System Owner shall agree with
The Company (in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee) and carry out a
combined commissioning programme for the Protection systems, and generally, to a
minimum standard as specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.6.2.2.4 Work on Protection Equipment
No busbar Protection, mesh corner Protection, circuit-breaker fail Protection relays, AC or
DC wiring (other than power supplies or DC tripping associated with the Power Generating
Module, HVDC Equipment itself) may be worked upon or altered by the EU Generator or
HVDC System Owner personnel in the absence of a representative of the Relevant
Transmission Licensee or written authority from the Relevant Transmission Licensee to
perform such work or alterations in the absence of a representative of the Relevant
Transmission Licensee.
ECC.6.2.2.5 Relay Settings
Protection and relay settings will be co-ordinated (both on connection and subsequently)
across the Connection Point in accordance with the Bilateral Agreement and in relation to
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, across the Interface Point in accordance with the Bilateral
Agreement to ensure effective disconnection of faulty Apparatus.
ECC.6.2.2.6 Changes to Protection Schemes and HVDC System Control Modes
ECC.6.2.2.6.1 Any subsequent alterations to the protection settings (whether by The Company, the
Relevant Transmission Licensee, the EU Generator, or the HVDC System Owner) shall
be agreed between The Company (in co-ordination with the Relevant Transmission
Licensee) and the EU Generator or HVDC System Owner in accordance with the Grid Code
(ECC.6.2.2.5). No alterations are to be made to any protection schemes unless agreement
has been reached between The Company, the Relevant Transmission Licensee, the EU
Generator or HVDC System Owner.

ECC.6.2.2.6.2 The parameters of different control modes of the HVDC System shall be able to be changed
in the HVDC Converter Station, if required by The Company in coordination with the
Relevant Transmission Licensee and in accordance with ECC.6.2.2.6.4.
ECC.6.2.2.6.3 Any change to the schemes or settings of parameters of the different control modes and
protection of the HVDC System including the procedure shall be agreed with The Company
in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee and the HVDC System Owner.
ECC.6.2.2.6.4 The control modes and associated set points shall be capable of being changed remotely, as
specified by The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee.
ECC.6.2.2.7 Control Schemes and Settings

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

23 of 147
ECC.6.2.2.7.1 The schemes and settings of the different control devices on the Power Generating Module
and HVDC Equipment that are necessary for Transmission System stability and for taking
emergency action shall be agreed with The Company in coordination with the Relevant
Transmission Licensee and the EU Generator or HVDC System Owner. Restoration
Contractors shall have the ability to switch from alternative control schemes and settings on
their Plant and Apparatus whilst remaining in service if they are required to satisfy their
obligations in a Restoration Plan. Changes to any control schemes and settings shall be
agreed between The Company and/or Relevant Transmission Licensee and/or Network
Operator as part of developing a Restoration Plan which shall be in accordance with the
requirements of ECC.6.2.2.6.
ECC.6.2.2.7.2 Subject to the requirements of ECC.6.2.2.7.1 any changes to the schemes and settings,
defined in ECC.6.2.2.7.1, of the different control devices of the Power Generating Module or
Restoration Contractor or HVDC Equipment shall be coordinated and agreed between the
Relevant Transmission Licensee, the EU Generator, Restoration Contractor and HVDC
System Owner.
ECC.6.2.2.8 Ranking of Protection and Control
ECC.6.2.2.8.1 The Company in coordination with Relevant Transmission Licensees, shall agree and
coordinate the protection and control devices of EU Generators Plant and Apparatus in
accordance with the following general priority ranking (from highest to lowest):
(i) The interface between the National Electricity Transmission System and
the Power Generating Module or HVDC Equipment Protection equipment;
(ii) frequency control (active power adjustment);
(iii) power restriction; and
(iv) power gradient constraint;
ECC.6.2.2.8.2 A control scheme, specified by the HVDC System Owner consisting of different control
modes, including the settings of the specific parameters, shall be coordinated and agreed
between The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee and the
HVDC System Owner. These details would be specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.6.2.2.8.3 The Company in coordination with Relevant Transmission Licensees, shall agree and
coordinate the protection and control devices of HVDC System Owners Plant and Apparatus
in accordance with the following general priority ranking (from highest to lowest)
(i) The interface between the National Electricity Transmission System and
HVDC System Protection equipment;
(ii) Active Power control for emergency assistance
(iii) automatic remedial actions as specified in ECC.6.3.6.1.2.5
(iv) Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode (LFSM) of operation;
(v) Frequency Sensitive Mode of operation and Frequency control; and
(vi) power gradient constraint.

ECC.6.2.2.9 Synchronising
ECC.6.2.2.9.1 For any Power Generating Module directly connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System or Type D Power Generating Module, synchronisation shall be
performed by the EU Generator only after instruction by The Company in accordance with
the requirements of BC.2.5.2.
ECC.6.2.2.9.2 Each Power Generating Module directly connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System or Type D Power Generating Module shall be equipped with the
necessary synchronisation facilities. Synchronisation shall be possible within the range of
frequencies specified in ECC.6.1.2.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

24 of 147
ECC.6.2.2.9.3 The requirements for synchronising equipment shall be specified in accordance with the
requirements in the Electrical Standards listed in the annex to the General Conditions. The
synchronisation settings shall include the following elements below. Any variation to these
requirements shall be pursuant to the terms of the Bilateral Agreement.
(a) voltage
(b) Frequency
(c) phase angle range
(d) phase sequence
(e) deviation of voltage and Frequency
ECC.6.2.2.9.4 HVDC Equipment shall be required to satisfy the requirements of ECC.6.2.2.9.1 –
ECC.6.2.2.9.3. In addition, unless otherwise specified by The Company, during the
synchronisation of a DC Connected Power Park Module to the National Electricity
Transmission System, any HVDC Equipment shall have the capability to limit any steady
state voltage changes to the limits specified within ECC.6.1.7 or ECC.6.1.8 (as applicable)
which shall not exceed 5% of the pre-synchronisation voltage. The Company in coordination
with the Relevant Transmission Licensee shall specify any additional requirements for the
maximum magnitude, duration and measurement of the voltage transients over and above
those defined in ECC.6.1.7 and ECC.6.1.8 in the Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.6.2.2.9.5 EU Generators in respect of DC Connected Power Park Modules shall also provide output
synchronisation signals specified by The Company in co-ordination with the Relevant
Transmission Licensee.
ECC.6.2.2.9.6 In addition to the requirements of ECC.6.2.2.9.1 to ECC.6.2.2.9.5, EU Generators and HVDC
System Owners should also be aware of the requirements of ECC.6.5.10 relating to busbar
voltage
ECC.6.2.2.9.10 HVDC Parameters and Settings
ECC.6.2.2.9.10.1 The parameters and settings of the main control functions of an HVDC System shall
be agreed between the HVDC System owner and The Company , in coordination
with the Relevant Transmission Licensee. The parameters and settings shall be
implemented within such a control hierarchy that makes their modification possible if
necessary. Those main control functions are at least:

(b) Frequency Sensitive Modes (FSM, LFSM-O, LFSM-U);

(c) Frequency control, if applicable;
(d) Reactive Power control mode, if applicable;
(e) power oscillation damping capability;
(f) subsynchronous torsional interaction damping capability,.
ECC.6.2.2.11 Automatic Reconnection
ECC.6.2.2.11.1 EU Generators in respect of Type A, Type B, Type C and Type D Power Generating
Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) which have signed a CUSC
Contract with The Company are not permitted to automatically reconnect to the Total
System without instruction from The Company. The Company will issue instructions for re-
connection or re-synchronisation in accordance with the requirements of BC2.5.2. Where
synchronising is permitted in accordance with BC2.5.2, the voltage and frequency at the Grid
Entry Point or User System Entry Point shall be within the limits defined in ECC.6.1.2 and
ECC.6.1.4 and the ramp rate limits pursuant to BC1.A.1.1. For the avoidance of doubt this
requirement does not apply to EU Generators who are not required to satisfy the requirements
of the Balancing Codes.
ECC.6.2.2.12 Automatic Disconnection

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

25 of 147
ECC.6.2.2.12.1 No Power Generating Module or HVDC Equipment shall disconnect within the frequency
range or voltage range defined in ECC.6.1.2 and ECC.6.1.4.
ECC.6.2.2.13 Special Provisions relating to Power Generating Modules embedded within Industrial Sites
which supply electricity as a bi-product of their industrial process
ECC.6.2.2.13.1 Generators in respect of Power Generating Modules which form part of an industrial
network, where the Power Generating Module is used to supply critical loads within the
industrial process shall be permitted to operate isolated from the Total System if agreed with
The Company in the Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.6.2.2.13.2 Except for the requirements of ECC.6.3.3 and ECC.6.3.7.1, Power Generating Modules
which are embedded within industrial sites are not required to satisfy the requirements of
ECC.6.3.6.2.1 and ECC.6.3.9. In this case this exception would only apply to Power
Generating Modules on industrial sites used for combined heat and power production which
are embedded in the network of an industrial site where all the following criteria are met.
(a) The primary purpose of these sites is to produce heat for production processes of the
industrial site concerned,
(b) Heat and power generation is inextricably interlinked, that is to say any change to heat
generation results inadvertently in a change of active power generating and vica versa.
(c) The Power Generating Modules are of Type A, Type B or Type C.
(d) Combined heat and power generating facilities shall be assessed on the basis of their
electrical Maximum Capacity.

ECC.6.2.3 Requirements at EU Grid Supply Points relating to Network Operators and Non-Embedded
Customers
ECC.6.2.3.1 Protection Arrangements for EU Code Users in respect of Network Operators and Non-
Embedded Customers
ECC.6.2.3.1.1 Protection arrangements for EU Code Users in respect of Network Operators and Non-
Embedded Customers User Systems directly connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System, shall meet the requirements given below:
Fault Clearance Times
(a) The required fault clearance time for faults on Network Operator and Non-Embedded
Customer equipment directly connected to the National Electricity Transmission
System, and for faults on the National Electricity Transmission System directly
connected to the Network Operator’s or Non-Embedded Customer's equipment, from
fault inception to the circuit breaker arc extinction, shall be set out in each Bilateral
Agreement. The fault clearance time specified in the Bilateral Agreement shall not be
shorter than the durations specified in (i), (ii) and (iii) below:
(i) 80ms for connections operating at a nominal voltage of greater than 300kV
(ii) 100ms for connections operating at a nominal voltage of greater than 132kV and up
to 300kV
(iii) 120ms for connections operating at a nominal voltage of greater than 132kV and
below
but this shall not prevent the User or The Company or Relevant Transmission
Licensee from selecting a shorter fault clearance time on its own Plant and Apparatus
provided Discrimination is achieved.
For the purpose of establishing the Protection requirements in accordance with
ECC.6.2.3.1.1 only, the point of connection of the Network Operator or Non-Embedded
Customer equipment to the National Electricity Transmission System shall be
deemed to be the low voltage busbars at an EU Grid Supply Point, irrespective of the
ownership of the equipment at the EU Grid Supply Point.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

26 of 147
 A longer fault clearance time may be specified in the Bilateral Agreement for faults on
the National Electricity Transmission System. A longer fault clearance time for faults
on the Network Operator and Non-Embedded Customers equipment may be agreed
with The Company in accordance with the terms of the Bilateral Agreement but only if
System requirements in The Company's view permit. The probability that the fault
clearance time stated in the Bilateral Agreement will be exceeded by any given fault
must be less than 2%.
(b) (i) For the event of failure of the Protection systems provided to meet the above fault
clearance time requirements, Back-Up Protection shall be provided by the Network
Operator or Non-Embedded Customer as the case may be.
(ii) The Relevant Transmission Licensee will also provide Back-Up Protection,
which will result in a fault clearance time longer than that specified for the Network
Operator or Non-Embedded Customer Back-Up Protection so as to provide
Discrimination.
(iii) For connections with the National Electricity Transmission System at 132kV and
below, it is normally required that the Back-Up Protection on the National
Electricity Transmission System shall discriminate with the Network Operator or
Non-Embedded Customer's Back-Up Protection.
(iv) For connections with the National Electricity Transmission System operating at a
nominal voltage greater than 132kV, the Back-Up Protection will be provided by
the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer, as the case may be, with a
fault clearance time not longer than 300ms for faults on the Network Operator’s or
Non-Embedded Customer's Apparatus.
(v) Such Protection will also be required to withstand, without tripping, the loading
incurred during the clearance of a fault on the National Electricity Transmission
System by breaker fail Protection operating at a nominal voltage of greater than
132kV. This will permit Discrimination between Network Operator’s Back-Up
Protection or Non-Embedded Customer’s Back-Up Protection, as the case may
be, and Back-Up Protection provided on the National Electricity Transmission
System and other User Systems. The requirement for and level of Discrimination
required will be specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
(c) (i) Where the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer is connected to part of
the National Electricity Transmission System operating at a nominal voltage
greater than 132kV and in Scotland also at 132kV, and a circuit breaker is provided
by the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer, or the Relevant
Transmission Licensee, as the case may be, to interrupt the interchange of fault
current with the National Electricity Transmission System or the System of the
Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer, as the case may be, circuit
breaker fail Protection will be provided by the Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer, or the Relevant Transmission Licensee, as the case may
be, on this circuit breaker.
(ii) In the event, following operation of a Protection system, of a failure to interrupt fault
current by these circuit-breakers within the Fault Current Interruption Time, the
circuit breaker fail Protection is required to initiate tripping of all the necessary
electrically adjacent circuit-breakers so as to interrupt the fault current within the next
200ms.
(d) The target performance for the System Fault Dependability Index shall be not less than
99%. This is a measure of the ability of Protection to initiate successful tripping of circuit
breakers which are associated with the faulty items of Apparatus.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

27 of 147
ECC.6.2.3.2 Fault Disconnection Facilities
(a) Where no Transmission circuit breaker is provided at the User's connection voltage, the
User must provide The Company with the means of tripping all the User's circuit
breakers necessary to isolate faults or System abnormalities on the National Electricity
Transmission System. In these circumstances, for faults on the User's System, the
User's Protection should also trip higher voltage Transmission circuit breakers. These
tripping facilities shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in the Bilateral
Agreement.
(b) The Company may require the installation of a System to Generator Operational
Intertripping Scheme in order to enable the timely restoration of circuits following power
System fault(s). These requirements shall be set out in the relevant Bilateral
Agreement.
ECC.6.2.3.3 Automatic Switching Equipment
Where automatic reclosure of Transmission circuit breakers is required following faults on
the User's System, automatic switching equipment shall be provided in accordance with the
requirements specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.6.2.3.4 Relay Settings
Protection and relay settings will be co-ordinated (both on connection and subsequently)
across the Connection Point in accordance with the Bilateral Agreement to ensure effective
disconnection of faulty Apparatus.
ECC.6.2.3.5 Work on Protection equipment
Where a Transmission Licensee owns the busbar at the Connection Point, no busbar
Protection, mesh corner Protection relays, AC or DC wiring (other than power supplies or
DC tripping associated with the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer’s
Apparatus itself) may be worked upon or altered by the Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer personnel in the absence of a representative of the Relevant
Transmission Licensee or written authority from the Relevant Transmission Licensee to
perform such work or alterations in the absence of a representative of the Relevant
Transmission Licensee.
ECC.6.2.3.6 Equipment including Protection equipment to be provided
The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee shall specify and
agree the Protection schemes and settings at each EU Grid Supply Point required to protect
the National Electricity Transmission System in accordance with the characteristics of the
Network Operator’s or Non Embedded Customer’s System. The Company in coordination
with the Relevant Transmission Licensee and the Network Operator or Non Embedded
Customer shall agree on the protection schemes and settings in respect of the busbar
protection zone in respect of each EU Grid Supply Point.
Protection of the Network Operator’s or Non Embedded Customer’s System shall take
precedence over operational controls whilst respecting the security of the National Electricity
Transmission System and the health and safety of staff and the public.
ECC.6.2.3.6.1 Protection of Interconnecting Connections
The requirements for the provision of Protection equipment for interconnecting connections
will be specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.6.2.3.7 Changes to Protection Schemes
ECC.6.2.3.7.1 At EU Grid Supply Points

Any alterations to the busbar protection settings at the EU Grid Supply Point (whether by
The Company, the Relevant Transmission Licensee, the Network Operator or the Non
Embedded Customer) shall be agreed between The Company (in co-ordination with the
Relevant Transmission Licensee) and the Network Operator or Non Embedded
Customer in accordance with the Grid Code (ECC.6.2.3.4). No alterations are to be made to
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
28 of 147
 any busbar protection schemes unless agreement has been reached between The Company,
the Relevant Transmission Licensee, the Network Operator or Non Embedded
Customer.

No Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer equipment shall be energised until the

Protection settings have been agreed prior to commissioning. The Network Operator or
Non-Embedded Customer shall agree with The Company (in coordination with the Relevant
Transmission Licensee) and carry out a combined commissioning programme for the
Protection systems, and generally, to a minimum standard as specified in the Bilateral
Agreement.
ECC.6.2.3.7.2 Network Operators Systems
Network Operators shall, if required in a Restoration Plan, have the ability to switch:-

a) From the normal to the alternative Protection settings on their Plant and Apparatus;
and:-
b) From the alternative to the normal Protection settings whilst their Plant remains in
service,

Any alternative Protection settings shall be included in the Restoration Plan. Normal and
alternative Protection settings shall be agreed between The Company and the Network
Operator as part of developing a Restoration Plan.

ECC.6.2.3.8 Control Requirements

ECC.6.2.3.8.1 The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee and the Network
Operator or Non Embedded Customer shall agree on the control schemes and settings at
each EU Grid Supply Point of the different control devices of the Network Operator’s or Non
Embedded Customer’s System relevant for security of the National Electricity
Transmission System. Such requirements would be pursuant to the terms of the Bilateral
Agreement which shall also cover at least the following elements:
(a) Isolated (National Electricity Transmission System) operation;
(b) Damping of oscillations;
(c) Disturbances to the National Electricity Transmission System;
(d) Automatic switching to emergency supply and restoration to normal topology;
(e) Automatic circuit breaker re-closure (on 1-phase faults).

ECC.6.2.3.8.2 Subject to the requirements of ECC.6.2.3.8.1, any changes to the schemes and settings,
defined in ECC.6.2.3.8.1 of the different control devices of the Network Operator’s or Non-
Embedded Customer’s System at the EU Grid Supply Point shall be coordinated and
agreed between The Company, the Relevant Transmission Licensee, the Network
Operator or Non Embedded Customer. Network Operators shall have the ability to switch
between alternative control settings on their Plant and Apparatus if they are required to do
so to be able to satisfy their obligations of a Restoration Plan. Any alternative control settings
shall be included in the Restoration Plan.
ECC.6.2.3.9 Ranking of Protection and Control
ECC.6.2.3.9.1 The Network Operator or the Non Embedded Customer who owns or operates an EU Grid
Supply Point shall set the Protection and control devices of its System, in compliance with
the following priority ranking, organised in decreasing order of importance:
(a) National Electricity Transmission System Protection;
(b) Protection equipment at each EU Grid Supply Point;
(c) Frequency control (Active Power adjustment);

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

29 of 147
 (d) Power restriction.
ECC.6.2.3.10 Synchronising
ECC.6.2.3.10.1 Each Network Operator or Non Embedded Customer at each EU Grid Supply Point shall
be capable of synchronisation within the range of frequencies specified in ECC.6.1.2 unless
otherwise agreed with The Company.
ECC.6.2.3.10.2 The Company and the Network Operator or Non Embedded Customer shall agree on the
settings of the synchronisation equipment at each EU Grid Supply Point prior to the
Completion Date. The Company and the relevant Network Operator or Non-Embedded
Customer shall agree the synchronisation settings which shall include the following elements.
(a) Voltage;
(b) Frequency;
(c) phase angle range;
(d) deviation of voltage and Frequency.
ECC.6.3 GENERAL POWER GENERATING MODULE, OTSDUW AND HVDC EQUIPMENT
REQUIREMENTS
ECC.6.3.1 This section sets out the technical and design criteria and performance requirements for
Power Generating Modules (which includes Electricity Storage Modules) and HVDC
Equipment (whether directly connected to the National Electricity Transmission System
or Embedded) and (where provided in this section) OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus which
each Generator or HVDC System Owner must ensure are complied with in relation to its
Power Generating Modules, HVDC Equipment and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus.
References to Power Generating Modules, HVDC Equipment in this ECC.6.3 should be
read accordingly. For the avoidance of doubt, the requirements applicable to Synchronous
Power Generating Modules also apply to Synchronous Electricity Storage Modules and
the requirements applicable to Power Park Modules apply to Non-Synchronous Electricity
Storage Modules. In addition, the requirements applicable to Electricity Storage Modules
also apply irrespective of whether the Electricity Storage Module operates in such a mode
as to import or export power from the Total System.

Plant Performance Requirements

ECC.6.3.2 REACTIVE CAPABILITY
ECC.6.3.2.1 Reactive Capability for Type B Synchronous Power Generating Modules
ECC.6.3.2.1.1 When operating at Maximum Capacity, all Type B Synchronous Power Generating
Modules must be capable of continuous operation at any points between the limits of 0.95
Power Factor lagging and 0.95 Power Factor leading at the Grid Entry Point or User
System Entry Point unless otherwise agreed with The Company or relevant Network
Operator. At Active Power output levels other than Maximum Capacity, all Generating
Units within a Type B Synchronous Power Generating Module must be capable of
continuous operation at any point between the Reactive Power capability limits identified on
the HV Generator Performance Chart unless otherwise agreed with The Company or
relevant Network Operator.
ECC.6.3.2.2 Reactive Capability for Type B Power Park Modules
ECC.6.3.2.2.1 When operating at Maximum Capacity all Type B Power Park Modules must be capable of
continuous operation at any points between the limits of 0.95 Power Factor lagging and 0.95
Power Factor leading at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point unless otherwise
agreed with The Company or relevant Network Operator. At Active Power output levels
other than Maximum Capacity, each Power Park Module must be capable of continuous
operation at any point between the Reactive Power capability limits identified on the HV
Generator Performance Chart unless otherwise agreed with The Company or Network
Operator.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

30 of 147
ECC.6.3.2.3 Reactive Capability for Type C and D Synchronous Power Generating Modules
ECC.6.3.2.3.1 In addition to meeting the requirements of ECC.6.3.2.3.2 – ECC.6.3.2.3.5, EU Generators
which connect a Type C or Type D Synchronous Power Generating Module(s) to a Non
Embedded Customers System or private network, may be required to meet additional
reactive compensation requirements at the point of connection between the System and
the Non Embedded Customer or private network where this is required for System
reasons.
ECC.6.3.2.3.2 All Type C and Type D Synchronous Power Generating Modules shall be capable of
satisfying the Reactive Power capability requirements at the Grid Entry Point or User
System Entry Point as defined in Figure ECC.6.3.2.3 when operating at Maximum
Capacity.
ECC.6.3.2.3.3 At Active Power output levels other than Maximum Capacity, all Generating Units within
a Synchronous Power Generating Module must be capable of continuous operation at
any point between the Reactive Power capability limit identified on the HV Generator
Performance Chart at least down to the Minimum Stable Operating Level. At reduced
Active Power output, Reactive Power supplied at the Grid Entry Point (or User System
Entry Point if Embedded) shall correspond to the HV Generator Performance Chart of
the Synchronous Power Generating Module, taking the auxiliary supplies and the Active
Power and Reactive Power losses of the Generating Unit transformer or Station
Transformer into account.

Figure ECC.6.3.2.3
ECC.6.3.2.3.4 In addition, to the requirements of ECC.6.3.2.3.1 – ECC.6.3.2.3.3 the short circuit ratio of
all Onshore Synchronous Generating Units with an Apparent Power rating of less than
1600MVA shall not be less than 0.5. The short circuit ratio of Onshore Synchronous
Generating Units with a rated Apparent Power of 1600MVA or above shall be not less
than 0.4.
ECC.6.3.2.4 Reactive Capability for Type C and D Power Park Modules, HVDC Equipment and
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface Point
ECC.6.3.2.4.1 EU Generators or HVDC System Owners which connect an Onshore Type C or
Onshore Type D Power Park Module or HVDC Equipment to a Non Embedded
Customers System or private network, may be required to meet additional reactive
compensation requirements at the point of connection between the System and the Non
Embedded Customer or private network where this is required for System reasons.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

31 of 147
ECC.6.3.2.4.2 All Onshore Type C Power Park Modules and Onshore Type D Power Park Modules
or HVDC Converters at an HVDC Converter Station with a Grid Entry Point or User
System Entry Point voltage above 33kV, or Remote End HVDC Converters with an
HVDC Interface Point voltage above 33kV, or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus with an
Interface Point voltage above 33kV shall be capable of satisfying the Reactive Power
capability requirements at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point (or Interface
Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, or HVDC Interface Point in the case
of a Remote End HVDC Converter Station) as defined in Figure ECC.6.3.2.4(a) when
operating at Maximum Capacity (or Interface Point Capacity in the case of OTSUW
Plant and Apparatus). In the case of Remote End HVDC Converters and DC Connected
Power Park Modules, The Company in co-ordination with the Relevant Transmission
Licensee may agree to alternative reactive capability requirements to those specified in
Figure ECC.6.3.2.4(a), where it is demonstrated that it is uneconomic and inefficient to do
so, for example in the case of new technologies or advanced control strategies. For the
avoidance of doubt, the requirements for Offshore Power Park Modules and DC
Connected Power Park Modules are defined in ECC.6.3.2.5 and ECC.6.3.2.6.

Figure ECC.6.3.2.4(a)
ECC.6.3.2.4.3 All Onshore Type C or Type D Power Park Modules or HVDC Converters at a HVDC
Converter Station with a Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point voltage at or
below 33kV or Remote End HVDC Converter Station with an HVDC Interface Point
Voltage at or below 33kV shall be capable of satisfying the Reactive Power capability
requirements at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point as defined in Figure
ECC.6.3.2.4(b) when operating at Maximum Capacity. In the case of Remote End HVDC
Converters The Company in co-ordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee
may agree to alternative reactive capability requirements to those specified in Figure
ECC.6.3.2.4(b), where it is demonstrated that it is uneconomic and inefficient to do so, for
example in the case of new technologies or advanced control strategies. For the avoidance
of doubt, the requirements for Offshore Power Park Modules and DC Connected Power
Park Modules are defined in ECC.6.3.2.5 and ECC.6.3.2.6.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

32 of 147
 Figure ECC.6.3.2.4(b)
ECC.6.3.2.4.4 All Type C and Type D Power Park Modules, HVDC Converters at a HVDC Converter
Station including Remote End HVDC Converters or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus,
shall be capable of satisfying the Reactive Power capability requirements at the Grid
Entry Point or User System Entry Point (or Interface Point Capacity in the case of
OTSUW Plant and Apparatus or HVDC Interface Point in the case of Remote End
HVDC Converter Stations) as defined in Figure ECC.6.3.2.4(c) when operating below
Maximum Capacity. With all Plant in service, the Reactive Power limits will reduce
linearly below 50% Active Power output as shown in Figure ECC.6.3.2.4(c) unless the
requirement to maintain the Reactive Power limits defined at Maximum Capacity (or
Interface Point Capacity in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) under absorbing
Reactive Power conditions down to 20% Active Power output has been specified by The
Company. These Reactive Power limits will be reduced pro rata to the amount of Plant
in service. In the case of Remote End HVDC Converters, The Company in co-ordination
with the Relevant Transmission Licensee may agree to alternative reactive capability
requirements to those specified in Figure ECC.6.3.2.4(a), where it is demonstrated that it
is uneconomic and inefficient to do so, for example in the case of new technologies or
advanced control strategies. For the avoidance of doubt, the requirements for Offshore
Power Park Modules and DC Connected Power Park Modules are defined in
ECC.6.3.2.5 and ECC.6.3.2.6.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

33 of 147
 Figure ECC.6.3.2.4(c)
ECC.6.3.2.5 Reactive Capability for Offshore Synchronous Power Generating Modules,
Configuration 1 AC connected Offshore Power Park Modules and Configuration 1 DC
Connected Power Park Modules.
ECC.6.3.2.5.1 The short circuit ratio of any Offshore Synchronous Generating Units within a
Synchronous Power Generating Module shall not be less than 0.5. Notwithstanding the
requirements of ECC.6.3.2.5.2 and ECC.6.3.2.5.3, all Offshore Synchronous
Generating Units, Configuration 1 AC Connected Offshore Power Park Modules or
Configuration 1 DC Connected Power Park Modules must be capable of maintaining
zero transfer of Reactive Power at the Offshore Grid Entry Point. The steady state
tolerance on Reactive Power transfer to and from an Offshore Transmission System
expressed in MVAr shall be no greater than 5% of the Maximum Capacity.
ECC.6.3.2.5.2 If an EU Generator (including those in respect of DC Connected Power Park Modules
or those which are Restoration Contractors), wish to provide a Reactive Power capability
in excess of the minimum requirements defined in ECC.6.3.2.5.1, then such capability
(including steady state tolerance) shall be agreed between the Generator, Offshore
Transmission Licensee and The Company and/or the relevant Network Operator.
ECC.6.3.2.5.3 In the case of EU Code Users and Restoration Contractors who own and operate
Anchor Plant and/or Top Up Restoration Plant or EU Code Users who own and operate
Plant and Apparatus which is operating with a Grid Forming Capability in service, the
Reactive Power capability requirements (including steady state tolerance) at the Offshore
Grid Entry Point shall be agreed between the Restoration Contractor or EU Code User,
the Offshore Transmission Licensee and The Company in order to facilitate the
operation of an Offshore Local Joint Restoration Plan.
ECC.6.3.2.6 Reactive Capability for Configuration 2 AC Connected Offshore Power Park Modules
and Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park Modules.
ECC.6.3.2.6.1 All Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore Power Park Modules and Configuration 2
DC Connected Power Park Modules shall be capable of satisfying the minimum Reactive
Power capability requirements at the Offshore Grid Entry Point as defined in Figure
ECC.6.3.2.6(a) when operating at Maximum Capacity. The Company in co-ordination
with the Relevant Transmission Licensee may agree to alternative reactive capability
requirements to those specified in Figure ECC.6.3.2.6(a), where it is demonstrated that it
is uneconomic and inefficient to do so, for example in the case of new technologies or
advanced control strategies.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

34 of 147
 Figure ECC.6.3.2.6(a)

ECC.6.3.2.6.2 All AC Connected Configuration 2 Offshore Power Park Modules and Configuration
2 DC Connected Power Park Modules shall be capable of satisfying the Reactive Power
capability requirements at the Offshore Grid Entry Point as defined in Figure
ECC.6.3.2.6(b) when operating below Maximum Capacity. With all Plant in service, the
Reactive Power limits will reduce linearly below 50% Active Power output as shown in
Figure ECC.6.3.2.6(b) unless the requirement to maintain the Reactive Power limits
defined at Maximum Capacity (or Interface Point Capacity in the case of OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus) under absorbing Reactive Power conditions down to 20% Active Power
output has been specified with The Company. These Reactive Power limits will be
reduced pro rata to the amount of Plant in service. The Company in co-ordination with the
Relevant Transmission Licensee may agree to alternative reactive capability
requirements to those specified in Figure ECC.6.3.2.6(b), where it is demonstrated that it
is uneconomic and inefficient to do so, for example in the case of new technologies or
advanced control strategies.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

35 of 147
 Figure ECC.6.3.2.6(b)

ECC.6.3.2.6.3 For the avoidance of doubt, if an EU Generator (including Generators in respect of DC

Connected Power Park Modules or those which are Restoration Contractors referred to in
ECC.6.3.2.6.2) wishes to provide a Reactive Power capability in excess of the minimum
requirements defined in ECC.6.3.2.6.1, then such capability (including any steady state
tolerance) shall be agreed between the EU Generator, Offshore Transmission Licensee
and The Company and/or the relevant Network Operator.
ECC.6.3.2.6.4 In addition to the requirements of ECC.6.3.2.6.2, EU Generators and HVDC System Owners
and Restoration Contractors who own and operate Anchor Plant and/or Top Up
Restoration Plant, then the Reactive Power capability requirements (including steady state
tolerance) at the Offshore Grid Entry Point shall be agreed between the Generator,
Offshore Transmission Licensee and The Company in order to facilitate the operation of
an Offshore Local Joint Restoration Plan.
ECC.6.3.3 OUTPUT POWER WITH FALLING FREQUENCY
ECC.6.3.3.1 Output power with falling frequency for Power Generating Modules and HVDC Equipment
ECC.6.3.3.1.1 Each Power Generating Module and HVDC Equipment must be capable of:
(a) continuously maintaining constant Active Power output for System Frequency changes
within the range 50.5 to 49.5 Hz; and

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

36 of 147
 (b) (subject to the provisions of ECC.6.1.2) maintaining its Active Power output at a level
not lower than the figure determined by the linear relationship shown in Figure
ECC.6.3.3(a) for System Frequency changes within the range 49.5 to 47 Hz for all
ambient temperatures up to and including 25⁰C, such that if the System Frequency
drops to 47 Hz the Active Power output does not decrease by more than 5%. In the case
of a CCGT Module, the above requirement shall be retained down to the Low Frequency
Relay trip setting of 48.8 Hz, which reflects the first stage of the Automatic Low
Frequency Demand Disconnection scheme notified to Network Operators under
OC6.6.2. For System Frequency below that setting, the existing requirement shall be
retained for a minimum period of 5 minutes while System Frequency remains below that
setting, and special measure(s) that may be required to meet this requirement shall be
kept in service during this period. After that 5 minutes period, if System Frequency
remains below that setting, the special measure(s) must be discontinued if there is a
materially increased risk of the Gas Turbine tripping. The need for special measure(s) is
linked to the inherent Gas Turbine Active Power output reduction caused by reduced
shaft speed due to falling System Frequency. Where the need for special measures is
identified in order to maintain output in line with the level identified in Figure ECC.6.3.3(a)
these measures should be still continued at ambient temperatures above 25⁰C
maintaining as much of the Active Power achievable within the capability of the plant.
For the avoidance of doubt, Generators in respect of Pumped Storage shall also be
required to satisfy the requirements of OC6.6.6.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

37 of 147
 Figure ECC.6.3.3(a) Active Power Output with falling frequency for Power Generating
Modules and HVDC Systems and Electricity Storage Modules when operating in an
exporting mode of operation

(c) For the avoidance of doubt, in the case of a Power Generating Module including a DC
Connected Power Park Module using an Intermittent Power Source where the
mechanical power input will not be constant over time, the requirement is that the Active
Power output shall be independent of System Frequency under (a) above and should
not drop with System Frequency by greater than the amount specified in (b) above.
(d) An HVDC System must be capable of maintaining its Active Power input (i.e. when
operating in a mode analogous to Demand) from the National Electricity Transmission
System (or User System in the case of an Embedded HVDC System) at a level not
greater than the figure determined by the linear relationship shown in Figure ECC.6.3.3(b)
for System Frequency changes within the range 49.5 to 47 Hz, such that if the System
Frequency drops to 47.8 Hz the Active Power input decreases by more than 60%.

47 47.8 Frequency (Hz) 49.5 52.0

100% of Active
Power Input

40% of Active
Power Input

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

38 of 147
 Figure ECC.6.3.3(b) Active Power input with falling frequency for HVDC Systems
(e) In the case of an Offshore Generating Unit or Offshore Power Park Module or DC
Connected Power Park Module or Remote End HVDC Converter or Transmission
DC Converter, the EU Generator shall comply with the requirements of ECC.6.3.3. EU
Generators should be aware that Section K of the STC places requirements on Offshore
Transmission Licensees which utilise a Transmission DC Converter as part of their
Offshore Transmission System to make appropriate provisions to enable EU
Generators to fulfil their obligations.
(f) Transmission DC Converters and Remote End HVDC Converters shall provide a
continuous signal indicating the real time frequency measured at the Interface Point to
the Offshore Grid Entry Point or HVDC Interface Point for the purpose of Offshore
Generators or DC Connected Power Park Modules to respond to changes in System
Frequency on the Main Interconnected Transmission System. A DC Connected
Power Park Module or Offshore Power Generating Module shall be capable of
receiving and processing this signal within 100ms.
(g) For HVDC Systems with a Completion Date on or after 31 December 2026, HVDC
System Owners shall ensure that each HVDC System has the capability to provide a
continuous signal indicating the real time frequency measured at the Grid Entry Point
and HVDC Interface Point and other signals as agreed with The Company for the
purpose of participating in a Local Joint Restoration Plan or wider System Restoration
event. The frequency signal at the Interface Point shall be capable of being received and
processed within 100ms.
(h) For Transmission DC Converters with a Completion Date on or after 31 December
2026, Offshore Transmission Licensees shall ensure that each Transmission DC
Converter has the capability to provide a continuous signal indicating the real time
frequency measured at the Offshore Grid Entry Point and HVDC Interface Point to the
Interface Point for the purpose of participating in an Offshore Local Joint Restoration
Plan or wider System Restoration event. The frequency signal at the Interface Point
shall be capable of being received and processed within 100ms. This requirement shall
be necessary where one or more Offshore Generators are part of an Offshore Local
Joint Restoration Zone Plan.

ECC.6.3.4 ACTIVE POWER OUTPUT UNDER SYSTEM VOLTAGE VARIATIONS

ECC.6.3.4.1 At the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point , the Active Power output under steady
state conditions of any Power Generating Module or HVDC Equipment directly connected
to the National Electricity Transmission System or in the case of OTSDUW, the Active
Power transfer at the Interface Point, under steady state conditions of any OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus should not be affected by voltage changes in the normal operating range
specified in paragraph ECC.6.1.4 by more than the change in Active Power losses at reduced
or increased voltage.
ECC.6.3.5 SYSTEM RESTORATION
ECC.6.3.5.1 It is not a mandatory requirement for Generators, or HVDC System Owners to provide an
Anchor Plant Capability or Top Up Restoration Capability, however EU Code Users may
wish to notify The Company of their ability to provide such a facility and the cost of the service.
The Company will then consider whether it wishes to contract with the EU Code User for the
provision of such a service which would be specified via an Anchor Restoration Contract or
Top Up Restoration Contract. Where an EU Code User does not offer to provide a cost for
the provision of an Anchor Plant Capability, The Company may make such a request if it
considers System security to be at risk due to a lack of Anchor Plant capability.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

39 of 147
ECC.6.3.5.2 It is an essential requirement that The Company has a means of implementing System
Restoration in accordance with the requirements of the Electricity System Restoration
Standard. This is facilitated by agreeing contracts with Restoration Contractors who have
Plant at a number of strategically located sites. In the case of Restoration Contractors who
are party to a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, The Company shall agree the
requirements with the relevant Network Operator and Restoration Contractors.
ECC.6.3.5.3 The following requirements shall apply in respect of each Type C Power Generating Module,
Type D Power Generating Module and DC Connected Power Park Module which have an
Anchor Restoration Contract.
(i) The Power-Generating Module or DC Connected Power Park Module shall be
capable of starting from a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown without any external
electrical energy supply within either 2 hours of receiving an instruction from The
Company in the case of Local Joint Restoration Plan or alternatively 8 hours of
receiving an instruction from a Network Operator in the case of a Distribution
Restoration Zone Plan;
(ii) Each Power Generating Module or DC Connected Power Park Module shall be
able to synchronise within the frequency limits defined in ECC.6.1.2 and, where
applicable, voltage limits specified in ECC.6.1.4;
(iii) The Power Generating Module or DC Connected Power Park Module shall be
capable of energising an unenergised part of the System;
(iv) The Power-Generating Module or DC Connected Power Park Module shall be
capable of automatically regulating dips in voltage caused by connection of demand;
(v) The Power Generating Module or DC Connected Power Park Module shall;
be capable of a Block Load Capability,
be capable of operating in LFSM-O and LFSM-U, as specified in ECC.6.3.7.1 and
ECC.6.3.7.2,
control Frequency in case of overfrequency and underfrequency within the whole
Active Power output range between the Minimum Regulating Level and
Maximum Capacity as well as at Houseload Operation levels, and
be capable of parallel operation together with other Power Generating Modules
including DC Connected Power Park Modules within an isolated part of the Total
System that is still supplying Customers, and controlling voltage automatically
during the system restoration phase;
(vi) Power Park Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) and
HVDC Equipment which provide an Anchor Plant Capability, shall also be
capable of satisfying the relevant Grid Forming Capability requirements defined
in ECC.6.3.19 as agreed with The Company.
ECC.6.3.5.4 Each HVDC System or Remote End HVDC Converter Station which has Anchor Plant
Capability and an Anchor Restoration Contract shall be capable of energising the busbar
of an AC substation to which another HVDC Converter Station is connected. The timeframe
after shutdown of the HVDC System prior to energisation of the AC substation shall be
pursuant to the terms of the Anchor Restoration Contract. The HVDC System shall be able
to synchronise within the Frequency limits defined in ECC.6.1.2.1.2 and voltage limits defined
in ECC.6.1.4.1 unless otherwise specified in the Anchor Restoration Contract. Wider
Frequency and voltage ranges can be specified in the Anchor Restoration Contract in order
to restore System security.
ECC.6.3.5.5 With regard to the capability to take part in operation of an isolated part of the Total System
that is still supplying Customers:
i Power Generating Modules including DC Connected Power Park Modules shall be
capable of taking part in island operation if specified in the Anchor Restoration
Contract or Top Up Restoration Contract and:

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

40 of 147
 ii the Frequency limits for island operation shall be those specified in ECC.6.1.2;
iii the voltage limits for island operation shall be those defined in ECC.6.1.4;
iv Power Generating Modules including DC Connected Power Park Modules shall be able to
operate in Frequency Sensitive Mode during island operation, as specified in
ECC.6.3.7.3. In the event of a power surplus, Power Generating Modules including
DC Connected Power Park Modules shall be capable of reducing the Active Power
output from a previous operating point to any new operating point within the Power
Generating Module Performance Chart. Power Generating Modules including DC
Connected Power Park Modules shall be capable of reducing Active Power output
as much as inherently technically feasible, but to at least 55 % of Maximum Capacity;
v The method for detecting a change from interconnected system operation to island
operation shall be agreed between the EU Generator, The Company and the Relevant
Transmission Licensee. The agreed method of detection must not rely solely on The
Company, Relevant Transmission Licensee’s or Network Operators switchgear
position signals;
vi Power Generating Modules including DC Connected Power Park Modules shall be
able to operate in LFSM-O and LFSM-U during island operation, as specified in
ECC.6.3.7.1 and ECC.6.3.7.2;
ECC.6.3.5.6 With regard to quick re-synchronisation capability:
(i) In case of disconnection of the Power Generating Module including DC Connected
Power Park Modules from the System, the Power Generating Module shall be
capable of quick re-synchronisation in line with the Protection strategy agreed
between The Company and/or Network Operator in co-ordination with the Relevant
Transmission Licensee and the Generator;
(ii) A Power Generating Module including a DC Connected Power Park Module with
a minimum re-synchronisation time greater than 15 minutes after its disconnection
from any external power supply must be capable of Houseload Operation from any
operating point on its Power Generating Module Performance Chart. In this case,
the identification of Houseload Operation must not be based solely on the Total
System’s switchgear position signals;
(iii) Power Generating Modules including DC Connected Power Park Modules shall
be capable of Houseload Operation, irrespective of any auxiliary connection to the
Total System. The minimum operation time shall be specified by The Company,
taking into consideration the specific characteristics of prime mover technology.
ECC.6.3.5.7 Restoration Contractors who are Offshore Generators and Transmission DC Converter
owners who are part of an Offshore Local Joint Restoration Plan shall ensure their Plant
and Apparatus is designed to satisfy the requirements of ECC.7.10 and ECC.7.11.

ECC.6.3.6 CONTROL ARRANGEMENTS

ECC.6.3.6.1 ACTIVE POWER CONTROL
ECC.6.3.6.1.1 Active Power control in respect of Power Generating Modules including DC Connected
Power Park Modules
ECC.6.3.6.1.1.1 Type A Power Generating Modules shall be equipped with a logic interface (input port) in
order to cease Active Power output within five seconds following receipt of a signal from The
Company. The Company shall specify the requirements for such facilities, including the
need for remote operation, in the Bilateral Agreement where they are necessary for System
reasons .
ECC.6.3.6.1.1.2 Type B Power Generating Modules shall be equipped with an interface (input port) in order
to be able to reduce Active Power output following receipt of a signal from The Company.
The Company shall specify the requirements for such facilities, including the need for remote
operation, in the Bilateral Agreement where they are necessary for System reasons.
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
41 of 147
ECC.6.3.6.1.1.3 Type C and Type D Power Generating Modules and DC Connected Power Park Modules
shall be capable of adjusting the Active Power setpoint in accordance with instructions issued
by The Company.

ECC.6.3.6.1.2 Active Power control in respect of HVDC Systems and Remote End HVDC Converter
Stations
ECC.6.3.6.1.2.1 HVDC Systems shall be capable of adjusting the transmitted Active Power upon receipt of
an instruction from The Company which shall be in accordance with the requirements of
BC2.6.1.
ECC.6.3.6.1.2.2 The requirements for fast Active Power reversal (if required) shall be specified by The
Company. Where Active Power reversal is specified in the Bilateral Agreement, each
HVDC System and Remote End HVDC Converter Station shall be capable of operating
from maximum import to maximum export in a time which is as fast as technically feasible or
in a time that is no greater than 2 seconds except where a HVDC Converter Station Owner
has justified to The Company that a longer reversal time is required.
ECC.6.3.6.1.2.3 Where an HVDC System connects various Control Areas or Synchronous Areas, each
HVDC System or Remote End HVDC Converter Station shall be capable of responding to
instructions issued by The Company under the Balancing Code to modify the transmitted
Active Power for the purposes of cross-border balancing.
ECC.6.3.6.1.2.4 An HVDC System shall be capable of adjusting the ramping rate of Active Power variations
within its technical capabilities in accordance with instructions issued by The Company . In
case of modification of Active Power according to ECC.6.3.15 and ECC.6.3.6.1.2.2, there
shall be no adjustment of ramping rate.
ECC.6.3.6.1.2.5 If specified by The Company, in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensees,
the control functions of an HVDC System shall be capable of taking automatic remedial
actions including, but not limited to, stopping the ramping and blocking FSM, LFSM-O, LFSM-
U and Frequency control. The triggering and blocking criteria shall be specified by The
Company.

ECC.6.3.6.2 MODULATION OF ACTIVE POWER

ECC.6.3.6.2.1 Each Power Generating Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) and
Onshore HVDC Converters at an Onshore HVDC Converter Station must be capable of
contributing to Frequency control by continuous modulation of Active Power supplied to the
National Electricity Transmission System. For the avoidance of doubt each Onshore
HVDC Converter at an Onshore HVDC Converter Station and/or OTSDUW DC Converter
shall provide each EU Code User in respect of its Offshore Power Stations connected to
and/or using an Offshore Transmission System a continuous signal indicating the real time
Frequency measured at the Transmission Interface Point. A DC Connected Power Park
Module or Offshore Power Generating Module shall be capable of receiving and processing
this signal within 100ms.
ECC.6.3.6.3 MODULATION OF REACTIVE POWER
ECC.6.3.6.3.1 Notwithstanding the requirements of ECC.6.3.2, each Power Generating Module or HVDC
Equipment (and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at a Transmission Interface Point and
Remote End HVDC Converter at an HVDC Interface Point) (as applicable) must be capable
of contributing to voltage control by continuous changes to the Reactive Power supplied to
the National Electricity Transmission System or the User System in which it is Embedded.
ECC.6.3.7 FREQUENCY RESPONSE
ECC.6.3.7.1 Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode – Overfrequency (LFSM-O)

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

42 of 147
ECC.6.3.7.1.1 Each Power Generating Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) and
HVDC Systems shall be capable of reducing Active Power output in response to Frequency
on the Total System when this rises above 50.4Hz. For the avoidance of doubt, the provision
of this reduction in Active Power output is not an Ancillary Service. Such provision is known
as Limited High Frequency Response. The Power Generating Module (including DC
Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC Systems shall be capable of operating stably
during LFSM-O operation. However for a Power Generating Module (including DC
Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC Systems operating in Frequency Sensitive
Mode the requirements of LFSM-O shall apply when the frequency exceeds 50.5Hz.
ECC.6.3.7.1.2 (i) The rate of change of Active Power output must be at a minimum a rate of 2 percent
of output per 0.1 Hz deviation of System Frequency above 50.4Hz (ie a Droop of 10%)
as shown in Figure ECC.6.3.7.1 below. This would not preclude a EU Generator or
HVDC System Owner from designing their Power Generating Module with a Droop
of less than 10% but in all cases the Droop should be 2% or greater.
(ii) The reduction in Active Power output must be continuously and linearly proportional,
as far as is practicable, to the excess of Frequency above 50.4 Hz and must be
provided increasingly with time over the period specified in (iii) below.
(iii) As much as possible of the proportional reduction in Active Power output must result
from the frequency control device (or speed governor) action and must be achieved
within 10 seconds of the time of the Frequency increase above 50.4 Hz. The Power
Generating Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC
Systems shall be capable of initiating a power Frequency response with an initial delay
that is as short as possible. If the delay exceeds 2 seconds the EU Generator or HVDC
System Owner shall justify the variation, providing technical evidence to The
Company.
(iii) The residue of the proportional reduction in Active Power output which results from
automatic action of the Power Generating Module (including DC Connected Power
Park Modules) or HVDC System output control devices other than the frequency
control devices (or speed governors) must be achieved within 3 minutes for the time of
the Frequency increase above 50.4Hz.
(iv) For the avoidance of doubt, the LFSM-O response must be reduced when the
Frequency falls again and, when to a value less than 50.4Hz, as much as possible of
the increase in Active Power must be achieved within 10 seconds.
(v) For Type A and Type B Power Generating Modules which are not required to
have Frequency Sensitive Mode (FSM) as described in ECC.6.3.7.3 for
deviations in Frequency up to 50.9Hz at least half of the proportional reduction
in Active Power output must be achieved in 10 seconds of the time of the
Frequency increase above 50.4Hz. For deviations in Frequency beyond 50.9Hz
the measured rate of change of Active Power reduction must exceed 0.5%/sec
of the initial output. The LFSM-O response must be reduced when the
Frequency subsequently falls again and when to a value less than 50.4Hz, at
least half the increase in Active Power must be achieved in 10 seconds. For a
Frequency excursion returning from beyond 50.9Hz the measured rate of
change of Active Power increase must exceed 0.5%/second.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

43 of 147
 Figure ECC.6.3.7.1 – Pref is the reference Active Power to which ΔP is related and ΔP is the
change in Active Power output from the Power Generating Module (including DC
Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC System. The Power Generating Module
(including DC Connected Power Park Modules or HVDC Systems) has to provide a negative
Active Power output change with a droop of 10% or less based on Pref.

ECC.6.3.7.1.3 Each Power Generating Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC
Systems which is providing Limited High Frequency Response (LFSM-O) must continue to
provide it until the Frequency has returned to or below 50.4Hz or until otherwise instructed by
The Company. EU Generators in respect of Gensets and HVDC Converter Station
Owners in respect of an HVDC System should also be aware of the requirements in
BC.3.7.2.2.

ECC.6.3.7.1.4 Steady state operation below the Minimum Stable Operating Level in the case of Power
Generating Modules including DC Connected Power Park Modules or Minimum Active
Power Transmission Capacity in the case of HVDC Systems is not expected but if System
operating conditions cause operation below the Minimum Stable Operating Level or
Minimum Active Power Transmission Capacity which could give rise to operational
difficulties for the Power Generating Module including a DC Connected Power Park Module
or HVDC Systems then the EU Generator or HVDC System Owner shall be able to return
the output of the Power Generating Module including a DC Connected Power Park Module
to an output of not less than the Minimum Stable Operating Level or HVDC System to an
output of not less than the Minimum Active Power Transmission Capacity.

ECC.6.3.7.1.5 All reasonable efforts should in the event be made by the EU Generator or HVDC System
Owner to avoid such tripping provided that the System Frequency is below 52Hz in
accordance with the requirements of ECC.6.1.2. If the System Frequency is at or above
52Hz, the requirement to make all reasonable efforts to avoid tripping does not apply and the
EU Generator or HVDC System Owner is required to take action to protect its Power
Generating Modules including DC Connected Power Park Modules or HVDC Converter
Stations.

ECC.6.3.7.2 Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode – Underfrequency (LFSM-U)

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

44 of 147
ECC.6.3.7.2.1 Each Type C Power Generating Module and Type D Power Generating Module (including
DC Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC Systems operating in Limited Frequency
Sensitive Mode shall be capable of increasing Active Power output in response to System
Frequency when this falls below 49.5Hz. For the avoidance of doubt, the provision of this
increase in Active Power output is not a mandatory Ancillary Service and it is not anticipated
Power Generating Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC
Systems are operated in an inefficient mode to facilitate delivery of LFSM-U response, but
any inherent capability (where available) should be made without undue delay. The Power
Generating Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC Systems
shall be capable of stable operation during LFSM-U Mode. For example, an EU Generator
which is operating with no headroom (eg it is operating at maximum output or is de-loading as
part of a run down sequence and has no headroom) would not be required to provide LFSM-
U.
ECC.6.3.7.2.2 (i) The rate of change of Active Power output must be at a minimum a rate of 2 percent
of output per 0.1 Hz deviation of System Frequency below 49.5Hz (ie a Droop of 10%)
as shown in Figure ECC.6.3.7.2.2 below. This requirement only applies if the Power
Generating Module has headroom and the ability to increase Active Power output. In
the case of a Power Park Module or DC Connected Power Park Module the
requirements of Figure ECC.6.3.7.2.2 shall be reduced pro-rata to the amount of Power
Park Units in service and available to generate. For the avoidance of doubt, this would
not preclude an EU Generator or HVDC System Owner from designing their Power
Generating Module with a lower Droop setting, for example between 3 – 5%.
(ii) As much as possible of the proportional increase in Active Power output must result
from the Frequency control device (or speed governor) action and must be achieved
for Frequencies below 49.5 Hz. The Power Generating Module (including DC
Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC Systems shall be capable of initiating a
power Frequency response with minimal delay. If the delay exceeds 2 seconds the EU
Generator or HVDC System Owner shall justify the delay, providing technical
evidence to The Company).

(iii) The actual delivery of Active Power Frequency Response in LFSM-U mode shall take
into account

The ambient conditions when the response is to be triggered

The operating conditions of the Power Generating Module (including DC Connected

Power Park Modules) or HVDC Systems in particular limitations on operation near
Maximum Capacity or Maximum HVDC Active Power Transmission Capacity at
low frequencies and the respective impact of ambient conditions as detailed in
ECC.6.3.3.

The availability of primary energy sources.

(iv) In LFSM_U Mode, the Power Generating Module (including DC Connected Power
Park Modules) and HVDC Systems, shall be capable of providing a power increase
up to its Maximum Capacity or Maximum HVDC Active Power Transmission
Capacity (as applicable).

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

45 of 147
 Figure ECC.6.3.7.2.2 – Pref is the reference Active Power to which ΔP is related and ΔP is
the change in Active Power output from the Power Generating Module (including DC
Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC System. The Power Generating Module
(including DC Connected Power Park Modules or HVDC Systems) has to provide a positive
Active Power output change with a droop of 10% or less based on Pref.
ECC.6.3.7.2.3 Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode Electricity Storage Modules when operating in an
importing mode of operation
ECC.6.3.7.2.3.1 Each Generator or Defence Service Provider or Restoration Contractor or Non-
Embedded Customer in respect of an Electricity Storage Module is required to meet the
requirements of ECC.6.3.7.2.3.1 (a) – (f) except where it has been agreed with The Company
that such an Electricity Storage Module is unable to meet these requirements in which case
the requirements of OC6.6.6 shall apply:-
(a) Be capable of automatically maintaining its Active Power output within the shaded
operating region shown in Figure ECC.6.3.7.2.3(a) until the stored energy has been
depleted, except in the case of a Restoration Contractor which shall not deplete its
stored energy below the level required to meet its contractual obligations. The Electricity
Storage Module could initially be operating at any level of import between zero Active
Power and the Maximum Import Power within a System Frequency range of 50Hz and
49.5Hz as shown in Figure ECC.6.3.7.2.3(a). For the avoidance of doubt, the Electricity
Storage Module would only be required to reach its Maximum Capacity if the Electricity
Storage Module has headroom and the ability to increase Active Power output. A typical
value of the Droop would be 0.6% where this does not result in control system instability
or plant difficulties. In all cases the Droop shall be between 0.6% and 1.2% and shall be
agreed with The Company.
(b) Automatically respond in accordance with the characteristic of Figure ECC.6.3.7.2.3(a)
when the System Frequency falls to 49.5Hz and below.
(c) The reduction in Active Power import (during an import mode of operation), and the
transition to the final value of Active Power output shall be continuously and linearly
proportional, as far as is practicable, to the reduction in Frequency below 49.5 Hz. Active
Power output must be provided increasingly with time as required by ECC.6.3.7.2.3.1 (d)
below.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

46 of 147
 (d) As much as possible of the proportional reduction in Active Power import (when the
Electricity Storage Module is in a mode analogous to Demand) must result from the
Frequency control device (or speed governor) action and must be achieved within 10
seconds of the time of the Frequency decreases below 49.5 Hz. The Electricity Storage
Module shall be capable of initiating a power Frequency response with an initial delay
that is as short as possible. Delays that exceed 2 seconds shall be justified by the
Generator or Defence Service Provider or Restoration Contractor or Non-Embedded
Customer providing technical evidence to The Company and in any event as much as
possible of the proportional reduction in Active Power import shall be achieved within 10
seconds. This performance requirement is to be maintained when the Electricity Storage
Module makes the transition to an Active Power export mode of operation unless the
energy store is depleted, in which case it shall be required to operate at zero Active Power
output.
(e) Where the Electricity Storage Module is not capable of making a transition from import
operation to export operation within 20 seconds of the System Frequency falling to
49.2Hz, then it shall then immediately reduce its Active Power import to zero.
(f) If the Electricity Storage Module has not achieved at least a zero Active Power import
when the System Frequency has reached 48.9Hz, it shall be instantaneously tripped.
Where a Electricity Storage Module trips, it shall not be permitted to reconnect to the
System until instructed by The Company in accordance with BC2.5.2 and as provided
for in ECC.6.2.2.11.

Figure ECC.6.3.7.2.3(a) Active Power performance with falling frequency

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

47 of 147
ECC.6.3.7.2.3.2 Where an Electricity Storage Module has been importing and has responded in
accordance with the requirements of ECC.6.3.7.2.3.1, its performance, once the System
Frequency starts to rise above the minimum reached, shall be in accordance with Figure
ECC.6.3.7.2.3(b) in respect of the Active Power output and Active Power import. For
example, Figure ECC.6.3.7.2.3(b), illustrates the four operating points W, X, Y and Z. If
points W, X, Y and Z denotes the minimum frequency that the Total System reached
during a particular low System Frequency event, as the System Frequency starts to rise,
the Active Power output of the Electricity Storage Module should remain at a constant
level (where the energy source has not been depleted) until 49.5Hz is reached as denoted
by the dashed black lines. Once the System Frequency has risen above 49.5Hz the
Electricity Storage Module is permitted to reduce Active Power output so long as it is
operates within the shaded area above 49.5Hz shown in Figure ECC.6.3.7.2.3(b), unless
the Electricity Storage Module has insufficient capability in which case it shall operate at
zero Active Power.

Figure ECC.6.3.7.2.3(b) Active Power performance with increasing frequency

ECC.6.3.7.2.3.3 Where an Electricity Storage Module is exporting Active Power to the Total System
(including zero) and the System Frequency falls below 49.5Hz the requirements of
ECC.6.3.7.2.1 and ECC.6.3.7.2.2 shall apply.

ECC.6.3.7.3 Frequency Sensitive Mode – (FSM)

ECC.6.3.7.3.1 In addition to the requirements of ECC.6.3.7.1 and ECC.6.3.7.2 each Type C Power
Generating Module and Type D Power Generating Module (including DC Connected
Power Park Modules) or HVDC Systems must be fitted with a fast acting proportional
Frequency control device (or turbine speed governor) and unit load controller or equivalent
control device to provide Frequency response under normal operational conditions in
accordance with Balancing Code 3 (BC3). In the case of a Power Park Module including a
DC Connected Power Park Module, the Frequency or speed control device(s) may be on
the Power Park Module (including a DC Connected Power Park Module) or on each
individual Power Park Unit (including a Power Park Unit within a DC Connected Power
Park Module) or be a combination of both. The Frequency control device(s) (or speed
governor(s)) must be designed and operated to the appropriate:
(i) European Specification: or
(ii) in the absence of a relevant European Specification, such other standard which is
in common use within the European Community (which may include a manufacturer
specification);

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

48 of 147
 as at the time when the installation of which it forms part was designed or (in the case of
modification or alteration to the Frequency control device (or turbine speed governor)) when
the modification or alteration was designed.
The European Specification or other standard utilised in accordance with sub paragraph
ECC.6.3.7.3.1 (a) (ii) will be notified to The Company by the EU Generator or HVDC System
Owner:
(i) as part of the application for a Bilateral Agreement; or
(ii) as part of the application for a varied Bilateral Agreement; or
(iii) in the case of an Embedded Development, within 28 days of entry into the Embedded
Development Agreement (or such later time as agreed with The Company) or
(iv) as soon as possible prior to any modification or alteration to the Frequency control
device (or governor); and
ECC.6.3.7.3.2 The Frequency control device (or speed governor) in co-ordination with other control devices
must control each Type C Power Generating Module and Type D Power Generating
Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC Systems Active Power
Output or Active Power transfer capability with stability over the entire operating range of the
Power Generating Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC
Systems ; and
ECC.6.3.7.3.3 Type C and Type D Power Generating Modules and DC Connected Power Park Modules
shall also meet the following minimum requirements:
(i) capable of providing Active Power Frequency response in accordance with the
performance characteristic shown in Figure 6.3.7.3.3(a) and parameters in Table
6.3.7.3.3(a)

Figure 6.3.7.3.3(a) – Frequency Sensitive Mode capability of Power Generating

Modules and DC Connected Power Park Modules
Parameter Setting
Nominal System Frequency 50Hz
Active Power as a percentage of 10%
ǀ𝜟𝑷𝟏 ǀ
Maximum Capacity ( )
𝑷𝒎𝒂𝒙

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

49 of 147
 Frequency Response Insensitivity in ±15mHz
mHz (ǀ𝛥𝑓𝑖 ǀ)
Frequency Response Insensitivity as ±0.03%
ǀ𝛥𝑓𝑖 ǀ
a percentage of nominal frequency ( )
𝑓𝑛

Frequency Response Deadband in 0 (mHz)

mHz
Droop (%) 3 – 5%

Table 6.3.7.3.3(a) – Parameters for Active Power Frequency response in

Frequency Sensitive Mode including the mathematical expressions in Figure
6.3.7.3.3(a).
(ii) In satisfying the performance requirements specified in ECC.6.3.7.3(i) EU
Generators in respect of each Type C and Type D Power Generating Modules and
DC Connected Power Park Module should be aware:-
in the case of overfrequency, the Active Power Frequency response is
limited by the Minimum Regulating Level,
in the case of underfrequency, the Active Power Frequency response is
limited by the Maximum Capacity,
the actual delivery of Active Power frequency response depends on the
operating and ambient conditions of the Power Generating Module
(including DC Connected Power Park Modules) when this response is
triggered, in particular limitations on operation near Maximum Capacity at
low Frequencies as specified in ECC.6.3.3 and available primary energy
sources.
The frequency control device (or speed governor) must also be capable of
being set so that it operates with an overall speed Droop of between 3 – 5%.
The Frequency Response Deadband and Droop must be able to be
reselected repeatedly. For the avoidance of doubt, in the case of a Power
Park Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) the speed
Droop should be equivalent of a fixed setting between 3% and 5% applied to
each Power Park Unit in service.
(iii) In the event of a Frequency step change, each Type C and Type D Power
Generating Module and DC Connected Power Park Module shall be capable of
activating full and stable Active Power Frequency response (without undue power
oscillations), in accordance with the performance characteristic shown in Figure
6.3.7.3.3(b) and parameters in Table 6.3.7.3.3(b).

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

50 of 147
 Figure 6.3.7.3.3(b) Active Power Frequency Response capability.
Parameter Setting
Active Power as a percentage of 10%
Maximum Capacity (frequency
ǀ𝜟𝑷𝟏 ǀ
response range) ( )
𝑷𝒎𝒂𝒙

Maximum admissible initial delay t1 for 2 seconds

Power Generating Modules (including
DC Connected Power Park Modules)
with inertia unless justified as specified
in ECC.6.3.7.3.3 (iv)
Maximum admissible initial delay t1 for 1 second
Power Generating Modules (including
DC Connected Power Park Modules)
which do not contribute to System
inertia unless justified as specified in
ECC.6.3.7.3.3 (iv)
Activation time t2 10 seconds

Table 6.3.7.3.3(b) – Parameters for full activation of Active Power Frequency

response resulting from a Frequency step change. Table 6.3.7.3.3(b) also includes
the mathematical expressions used in Figure 6.3.7.3.3(b).

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

51 of 147
 (iv) The initial activation of Active Power Primary Frequency response shall not be
unduly delayed. For Type C and Type D Power Generating Modules (including DC
Connected Power Park Modules) with inertia the delay in initial Active Power
Frequency response shall not be greater than 2 seconds. For Type C and Type D
Power Generating Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules)
without inertia, the delay in initial Active Power Frequency response shall not be
greater than 1 second. If the Generator cannot meet this requirement they shall
provide technical evidence to The Company demonstrating why a longer time is
needed for the initial activation of Active Power Frequency response.
(v) in the case of Type C and Type D Power Generating Modules (including DC
Connected Power Park Modules) other than the Steam Unit within a CCGT Module
the combined effect of the Frequency Response Insensitivity and Frequency
Response Deadband of the Frequency control device (or speed governor) should
be no greater than 0.03Hz (for the avoidance of doubt, ±0.015Hz). In the case of the
Steam Unit within a CCGT Module, the Frequency Response Deadband should
be set to an appropriate value consistent with the requirements of ECC.6.3.7.3.5(ii)
and the requirements of BC3.7.2.2 for the provision of LFSM-O taking account of any
Frequency Response Insensitivity of the Frequency control device (or speed
governor);

ECC.6.3.7.3.4 HVDC Systems shall also meet the following minimum requirements:
(i) HVDC Systems shall be capable of responding to Frequency deviations in each
connected AC System by adjusting their Active Power import or export as shown in
Figure 6.3.7.3.4(a) with the corresponding parameters in Table 6.3.7.3.4(a).

Figure 6.3.7.3.4(a) – Active Power frequency response capability of a HVDC System

operating in Frequency Sensitive Mode (FSM). ΔΡ is the change in active power output
from the HVDC System..
Parameter Setting
Frequency Response Deadband 0

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

52 of 147
 Droop S1 and S2 (upward and 3 – 5%
downward regulation) where S1=S2.
Frequency Response Insensitivity ±15mHz

Table 6.3.7.3.4(a) – Parameters for Active Power Frequency response in FSM

including the mathematical expressions in Figure 6.3.7.3.4.
(ii) Each HVDC System shall be capable of adjusting the Droop for both upward and
downward regulation and the Active Power range over which Frequency Sensitive
Mode of operation is available as defined in ECC.6.3.7.3.4.
(iii) In addition to the requirements in ECC.6.3.7.4(i) and ECC.6.3.7.4(ii) each HVDC
System shall be capable of:-
delivering the response as soon as technically feasible
delivering the response on or above the solid line in Figure 6.3.7.3.4(b) in
accordance with the parameters shown in Table 6.3.7.3.4(b)
initiating the delivery of Primary Response in no less than 0.5 seconds
unless otherwise agreed with The Company. Where the initial delay time (t1
– as shown in Figure 6.3.7.3.4(b)) is longer than 0.5 seconds the HVDC
Converter Station Owner shall reasonably justify it to The Company.

Figure 6.3.7.3.4(b) Active Power Frequency Response capability of a HVDC System. ΔP

is the change in Active Power triggered by the step change in frequency

Parameter Setting
Active Power as a percentage of 10%
Maximum Capacity (frequency
ǀ𝜟𝑷𝟏 ǀ
response range) ( )
𝑷𝒎𝒂𝒙

Maximum admissible delay t1 0.5 seconds

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

53 of 147
 Maximum admissible time for full 10 seconds
activation t2, unless longer activation
times are agreed with The Company

Table 6.3.7.3.4(b) – Parameters for full activation of Active Power Frequency

response resulting from a Frequency step change.
(iv) For HVDC Systems connecting various Synchronous Areas, each HVDC System
shall be capable of adjusting the full Active Power Frequency Response when
operating in Frequency Sensitive Mode at any time and for a continuous time period.
In addition, the Active Power controller of each HVDC System shall not have any
adverse impact on the delivery of frequency response.
ECC.6.3.7.3.5 For HVDC Systems and Type C and Type D Power Generating Modules (including
DC Connected Power Park Modules), other than the Steam Unit within a CCGT
Module the combined effect of the Frequency Response Insensitivity and
Frequency Response Deadband of the Frequency control device (or speed
governor) should be no greater than 0.03Hz (for the avoidance of doubt, ±0.015Hz).
In the case of the Steam Unit within a CCGT Module, the Frequency Response
Deadband should be set to an appropriate value consistent with the requirements of
ECC.6.3.7.3.5(ii) and the requirements of BC3.7.2.2 for the provision of LFSM-O
taking account of any Frequency Response Insensitivity of the Frequency control
device (or speed governor);

(i) With regard to disconnection due to underfrequency, EU Generators responsible for

Type C and Type D Power Generating Modules (including DC Connected Power
Park Modules) capable of acting as a load, including but not limited to Pumped
Storage and tidal Power Generating Modules, HVDC Systems and Remote End
HVDC Converter Stations , shall be capable of disconnecting their load in case of
underfrequency which will be agreed with The Company. For the avoidance of doubt
this requirement does not apply to station auxiliary supplies; EU Generators in
respect of Type C and Type D Pumped Storage Power Generating Modules should
also be aware of the requirements in OC.6.6.6.
(ii) Where a Type C or Type D Power Generating Module, DC Connected Power Park
Module or HVDC System becomes isolated from the rest of the Total System but is
still supplying Customers, the Frequency control device (or speed governor) must
also be able to control System Frequency below 52Hz unless this causes the Type
C or Type D Power Generating Module or DC Connected Power Park Module to
operate below its Minimum Regulating Level or Minimum Active Power
Transmission Capacity when it is possible that it may, as detailed in BC 3.7.3, trip
after a time. For the avoidance of doubt Power Generating Modules (including DC
Connected Power Park Modules) and HVDC Systems are only required to operate
within the System Frequency range 47 - 52 Hz as defined in ECC.6.1.2 and for
converter based technologies, the remaining island contains sufficient fault level for
effective commutation;
(iii) Each Type C and Type D Power Generating Module and HVDC Systems shall have
the facility to modify the Target Frequency setting either continuously or in a
maximum of 0.05Hz steps over at least the range 50 ±0.1Hz should be provided in
the unit load controller or equivalent device.
ECC.6.3.7.3.6 In addition to the requirements of ECC.6.3.7.3 each Type C and Type D Power Generating
Module and HVDC System shall be capable of meeting the minimum Frequency response
requirement profile subject to and in accordance with the provisions of Appendix A3.
ECC.6.3.7.3.7 For the avoidance of doubt, the requirements of Appendix A3 do not apply to Type A and
Type B Power Generating Modules.
ECC.6.3.7.3.8 Frequency control device (or speed governor) requirements during System Restoration

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

54 of 147
ECC.6.3.7.3.8.1 Restoration Contractors shall be capable of operating their Generating Units or Power
Generating Modules or HVDC Systems such that the Frequency control device (or
turbine speed governor) and unit load controller or equivalent control device can be
switched to Frequency control only with no load influence, during the early stages of a
System Restoration whilst in island operation.
ECC.6.3.7.8.3.2 Generators and HVDC System Owners shall advise The Company of the capability of
operating their Generating Units or Power Generating Modules or HVDC Systems such
that the Frequency control device (or turbine speed governor) and unit load controller or
equivalent control device can be switched to Frequency control only with no load influence
during the early stages of System Restoration whilst in island operation. If there is a
suitable capability, The Company and the User shall agree on how it shall be used and
kept available.
ECC.6.3.7.8.3.3 In addition to the requirements of ECC.6.3.7.8.3.1 and ECC.6.3.7.8.3.2 the following shall
apply:-
(i) Changes to any control schemes and settings identified from ECC.6.3.7.8.3.1, and
ECC.6.3.7.8.3.2 shall be agreed between The Company and/or Relevant
Transmission Licensee and/or Network Operator as recorded in the
Restoration Plan.
(ii) During System Restoration, any changes to the schemes and settings defined in
ECC.6.3.7.8.3.1 and ECC.6.3.7.8.3.2, of the different control devices of the
Generating Unit or Power Generating Module or Restoration Contractor’s
Plant or HVDC System shall be coordinated and agreed between the Relevant
Transmission Licensee, the EU Generator, Restoration Contractor and HVDC
System Owner as part of a Restoration Plan.

ECC.6.3.8 EXCITATION AND VOLTAGE CONTROL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

ECC.6.3.8.1 Excitation Performance Requirements for Type B Synchronous Power Generating Modules
ECC.6.3.8.1.1 Each Synchronous Generating Unit within a Type B Synchronous Power Generating
Module shall be equipped with a permanent automatic excitation control system that shall
have the capability to provide constant terminal voltage control at a selectable setpoint
without instability over the entire operating range of the Type B Synchronous Power
Generating Module.
ECC.6.3.8.1.2 In addition to the requirements of ECC.6.3.8.1.1, The Company or the relevant Network
Operator will specify if the control system of the Type B Synchronous Power Generating
Module shall contribute to voltage control or Reactive Power control or Power Factor
control at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point (or other defined busbar).
The performance requirements of the control system including slope (where applicable)
shall be agreed between The Company and/or the relevant Network Operator and the
EU Generator.
ECC.6.3.8.2 Voltage Control Requirements for Type B Power Park Modules
ECC.6.3.8.2.1 The Company or the relevant Network Operator will specify if the control system of the
Type B Power Park Module shall contribute to voltage control or Reactive Power control
or Power Factor control at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point (or other
defined busbar). The performance requirements of the control system including slope
(where applicable) shall be agreed between The Company and/or the relevant Network
Operator and the EU Generator.
ECC.6.3.8.3 Excitation Performance Requirements for Type C and Type D Onshore Synchronous
Power Generating Modules

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

55 of 147
ECC.6.3.8.3.1 Each Synchronous Generating Unit within a Type C and Type D Onshore
Synchronous Power Generating Modules shall be equipped with a permanent automatic
excitation control system that shall have the capability to provide constant terminal voltage
control at a selectable setpoint without instability over the entire operating range of the
Synchronous Power Generating Module.
ECC.6.3.8.3.2 The requirements for excitation control facilities are specified in ECC.A.6. Any site specific
requirements shall be specified by The Company or the relevant Network Operator.
ECC.6.3.8.3.3 Unless otherwise required for testing in accordance with OC5.A.2, the automatic excitation
control system of an Onshore Synchronous Power Generating Module shall always be
operated such that it controls the Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit terminal
voltage to a value that is
- equal to its rated value: or
- only where provisions have been made in the Bilateral Agreement, greater than its
rated value.
ECC.6.3.8.3.4 In particular, other control facilities including constant Reactive Power output control
modes and constant Power Factor control modes (but excluding VAR limiters) are not
required. However if present in the excitation or voltage control system they will be disabled
unless otherwise agreed with The Company or the relevant Network Operator. Operation
of such control facilities will be in accordance with the provisions contained in BC2.
ECC.6.3.8.3.5 The excitation performance requirements for Offshore Synchronous Power Generating
Modules with an Offshore Grid Entry Point shall be specified by The Company.
ECC.6.3.8.4 Voltage Control Performance Requirements for Type C and Type D Onshore Power Park
Modules, Onshore HVDC Converters and OTSUW Plant and Apparatus at the
Interface Point
ECC.6.3.8.4.1 Each Type C and Type D Onshore Power Park Module, Onshore HVDC Converter and
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus shall be fitted with a continuously acting automatic control
system to provide control of the voltage at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry
Point (or Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) without instability
over the entire operating range of the Onshore Power Park Module, or Onshore HVDC
Converter or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus. Any Plant or Apparatus used in the
provisions of such voltage control within an Onshore Power Park Module may be located
at the Power Park Unit terminals, an appropriate intermediate busbar or the Grid Entry
Point or User System Entry Point. In the case of an Onshore HVDC Converter at a
HVDC Converter Station any Plant or Apparatus used in the provisions of such voltage
control may be located at any point within the User’s Plant and Apparatus including the
Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point. OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus used in
the provision of such voltage control may be located at the Offshore Grid Entry Point an
appropriate intermediate busbar or at the Interface Point. When operating below 20%
Maximum Capacity the automatic control system may continue to provide voltage control
using any available reactive capability. If voltage control is not being provided, the
automatic control system shall be designed to ensure a smooth transition between the
shaded area below 20% of Active Power output and the non-shaded area above 20% of
Active Power output in Figure ECC.6.3.2.4(c) and Figure ECC.6.3.2.6(b) The performance
requirements for a continuously acting automatic voltage control system that shall be
complied with by the User in respect of Onshore Power Park Modules, Onshore HVDC
Converters at an Onshore HVDC Converter Station, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at
the Interface Point are defined in ECC.A.7.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

56 of 147
ECC.6.3.8.4.3 In particular, other control facilities, including constant Reactive Power output control
modes and constant Power Factor control modes (but excluding VAR limiters) are not
required. However if present in the voltage control system they will be disabled unless
otherwise agreed with The Company or the relevant Network Operator. Operation of such
control facilities will be in accordance with the provisions contained in BC2. Where
Reactive Power output control modes and constant Power Factor control modes have
been fitted within the voltage control system they shall be required to satisfy the
requirements of ECC.A.7.3 and ECC.A.7.4.
ECC.6.3.8.5 Excitation Control Performance requirements applicable to AC Connected Offshore
Synchronous Power Generating Modules and voltage control performance
requirements applicable to AC connected Offshore Power Park Modules, DC Connected
Power Park Modules and Remote End HVDC Converters
ECC.6.3.8.5.1 A continuously acting automatic control system is required to provide control of Reactive
Power (as specified in ECC.6.3.2.5 and ECC.6.3.2.6) at the Offshore Grid Entry Point
(or HVDC Interface Point in the case of Configuration 1 DC Connected Power Park
Modules and Remote End HVDC Converters) without instability over the entire operating
range of the AC connected Offshore Synchronous Power Generating Module or
Configuration 1 AC connected Offshore Power Park Module or Configuration 1 DC
Connected Power Park Modules or Remote End HVDC Converter. The performance
requirements for this automatic control system will be specified by The Company which
would be consistent with the requirements of ECC.6.3.2.5 and ECC.6.3.2.6.
ECC.6.3.8.5.2 A continuously acting automatic control system is required to provide control of Reactive
Power (as specified in ECC.6.3.2.8) at the Offshore Grid Entry Point (or HVDC Interface
Point in the case of Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park Modules) without
instability over the entire operating range of the Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore
Power Park Module or Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park Modules. otherwise
the requirements of ECC.6.3.2.6 shall apply. The performance requirements for this
automatic control system are specified in ECC.A.8
ECC.6.3.8.5.3 In addition to ECC.6.3.8.5.1 and ECC.6.3.8.5.2 the requirements for excitation or voltage
control facilities, including Power System Stabilisers, where these are necessary for
system reasons, will be specified by The Company. Reference is made to on-load
commissioning witnessed by The Company in BC2.11.2.
ECC.6.3.9 STEADY STATE LOAD INACCURACIES
ECC.6.3.9.1 The standard deviation of Load error at steady state Load over a 30 minute period must not
exceed 2.5 per cent of a Type C or Type D Power Generating Modules (including a DC
Connected Power Park Module) Maximum Capacity. Where a Type C or Type D Power
Generating Module (including a DC Connected Power Park Module) is instructed to
Frequency sensitive operation, allowance will be made in determining whether there has been
an error according to the governor droop characteristic registered under the PC.
For the avoidance of doubt in the case of a Power Park Module (excluding a Non-
Synchronous Electricity Storage Module) an allowance will be made for the full variation
of mechanical power output.

In the case of an Electricity Storage Module, an allowance will be made for the storage
reserve capability of the Electricity Storage Module.

ECC.6.3.10 NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE LOADINGS

ECC.6.3.10.1 In addition to meeting the conditions specified in ECC.6.1.5(b), each Synchronous Power
Generating Module will be required to withstand, without tripping, the negative phase
sequence loading incurred by clearance of a close-up phase-to-phase fault, by System Back-
Up Protection on the National Electricity Transmission System or User System located
Onshore in which it is Embedded.
ECC.6.3.11 NEUTRAL EARTHING

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

57 of 147
ECC.6.3.11 At nominal System voltages of 110kV and above the higher voltage windings of a transformer
of a Power Generating Module or HVDC Equipment or transformer resulting from OTSDUW
must be star connected with the star point suitable for connection to earth. The earthing and
lower voltage winding arrangement shall be such as to ensure that the Earth Fault Factor
requirement of paragraph ECC.6.2.1.1 (b) will be met on the National Electricity
Transmission System at nominal System voltages of 110kV and above.
ECC.6.3.12 FREQUENCY AND VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS
ECC.6.3.12.1 As stated in ECC.6.1.2, the System Frequency could rise to 52Hz or fall to 47Hz. Each Power
Generating Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) must continue to
operate within this Frequency range for at least the periods of time given in ECC.6.1.2 unless
The Company has specified any requirements for combined Frequency and voltage
deviations which are required to ensure the best use of technical capabilities of Power
Generating Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) if required to preserve
or restore system security. Notwithstanding this requirement, EU Generators should also be
aware of the requirements of ECC.6.3.13.
ECC.6.3.13 FREQUENCY, RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY AND VOLATGE PROTECTION
SETTING ARRANGEMENTS
ECC.6.3.13.1 EU Generators (including in respect of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) and HVDC System
Owners will be responsible for protecting all their Power Generating Modules (and OTSDUW
Plant and Apparatus) or HVDC Equipment against damage should Frequency excursions
outside the range 52Hz to 47Hz ever occur. Should such excursions occur, it is up to the EU
Generator or HVDC System Owner to decide whether to disconnect their Apparatus for
reasons of safety of Apparatus, Plant and/or personnel.
ECC.6.3.13.2 Each Power Park Module with a Grid Forming Capability as provided for in ECC.6.3.19,
when connected and synchronised to the System, is required to be capable of withstanding
without tripping a rate of change of Frequency up to and including 2 Hz per second as
measured over a rolling 500 milliseconds period. All other Power Generating Modules when
connected and synchronised to the System, shall be capable of withstanding without tripping
a rate of change of Frequency up to and including 1 Hz per second as measured over a rolling
500 milliseconds period. Voltage dips may cause localised rate of change of Frequency
values in excess of 1 Hz per second (or 2Hz/s in the case of Power Park Modules with a Grid
Forming Capability) for short periods, and in these cases, the requirements under
ECC.6.3.15 (fault ride through) supersedes this clause. For the avoidance of doubt, this
requirement relates to the capabilities of Power Generating Modules only and does not
impose the need for rate of change of Frequency protection nor does it impose a specific
setting for anti-islanding or loss-of-mains protection relays.

ECC.6.3.13.3 Each HVDC System and Remote End HVDC Converter Station when connected and
synchronised to the System, shall be capable of withstanding without tripping a rate of change
of Frequency up to and including ±2.5Hz per second as measured over the previous 1 second
period. Voltage dips may cause localised rate of change of Frequency values in excess of
±2.5 Hz per second for short periods, and in these cases, the requirements under ECC.6.3.15
(fault ride through) supersedes this clause. For the avoidance of doubt, this requirement
relates to the capabilities of HVDC Systems and Remote End HVDC Converter Stations
only and does not impose the need for rate of change of Frequency protection nor does it
impose a specific setting for anti-islanding or loss-of-mains protection relays.

ECC.6.3.13.4 Each DC Connected Power Park Module when connected to the System, shall be capable
of withstanding without tripping a rate of change of Frequency up to and including ±2.0Hz per
second as measured over the previous 1 second period. Voltage dips may cause localised
rate of change of Frequency values in excess of ±2.0 Hz per second for short periods, and in
these cases, the requirements under ECC.6.3.15 (fault ride through) supersedes this clause.
For the avoidance of doubt, this requirement relates to the capabilities of DC Connected
Power Park Modules only and does not impose the need for rate of change of Frequency
protection nor does it impose a specific setting for anti-islanding or loss-of-mains protection
relays.
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
58 of 147
ECC.6.3.13.5 As stated in ECC.6.1.2, the System Frequency could rise to 52Hz or fall to 47Hz and the
System voltage at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point could rise or fall within
the values outlined in ECC.6.1.4. Each Type C and Type D Power Generating Module
(including DC Connected Power Park Modules) or any constituent element must continue to
operate within this Frequency range for at least the periods of time given in ECC.6.1.2 and
voltage range as defined in ECC.6.1.4 unless The Company has agreed to any simultaneous
overvoltage and underfrequency relays and/or simultaneous undervoltage and over frequency
relays which will trip such Power Generating Module (including DC Connected Power Park
Modules), and any constituent element within this Frequency or voltage range. In the case
of Grid Forming Plant, Grid Forming Plant Owners are also required to satisfy the System
Frequency and System voltage requirements as defined in ECC.6.3.19.

ECC.6.3.14 FAST START CAPABILITY

ECC.6.3.14.1 It may be agreed in the Bilateral Agreement that a Genset shall have a Fast-Start
Capability. Such Gensets may be used for Operating Reserve and their Start-Up may be
initiated by Frequency-level relays with settings in the range 49Hz to 50Hz as specified
pursuant to OC2.

ECC.6.3.15 FAULT RIDE THROUGH

ECC.6.3.15.1 General Fault Ride Through requirements, principles and concepts applicable to Type B,
Type C and Type D Power Generating Modules and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus
subject to faults up to 140ms in duration

ECC.6.3.15.1.1 ECC.6.3.15.1 – ECC.6.3.15.8 section sets out the Fault Ride Through requirements on
Type B, Type C and Type D Power Generating Modules, OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus and HVDC Equipment that shall apply in the event of a fault lasting up to
140ms in duration.

ECC.6.3.15.1.2 Each Power Generating Module, Power Park Module, HVDC Equipment and OTSDUW
Plant and Apparatus is required to remain connected and stable for any balanced and
unbalanced fault where the voltage at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point
or (HVDC Interface Point in the case of Remote End DC Converter Stations or
Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) remains on or above the
heavy black line defined in sections ECC.6.3.15.2 – ECC.6.3.15.7 below. For up to 30
minutes following such a fault event each Power Generating Module, Power Park
Module, HVDC Equipment and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus is required to remain
connected and stable provided System operating conditions have returned within those
specified in ECC.6.1.

ECC.6.3.15.1.3 The voltage against time curves defined in ECC.6.3.15.2 – ECC.6.3.15.7 expresses the
lower limit (expressed as the ratio of its actual value and its reference 1pu) of the actual
course of the phase to phase voltage (or phase to earth voltage in the case of
asymmetrical/unbalanced faults) on the System voltage level at the Grid Entry Point or
User System Entry Point (or HVDC Interface Point in the case of Remote End HVDC
Converter Stations or Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus)
during a symmetrical or asymmetrical/unbalanced fault, as a function of time before, during
and after the fault.

ECC.6.3.15.2 Voltage against time curve and parameters applicable to Type B Synchronous Power
Generating Modules

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

59 of 147
 Figure ECC.6.3.15.2 - Voltage against time curve applicable to Type B Synchronous
Power Generating Modules

Voltage parameters (pu) Time parameters (seconds)

Uret 0.3 tclear 0.14
Uclear 0.7 trec1 0.14
Urec1 0.7 trec2 0.45
Urec2 0.9 trec3 1.5

Table ECC.6.3.15.2 Voltage against time parameters applicable to Type B

Synchronous Power Generating Modules

ECC.6.3.15.3 Voltage against time curve and parameters applicable to Type C and D Synchronous
Power Generating Modules connected below 110kV

Figure ECC.6.3.15.3 - Voltage against time curve applicable to Type C and D Synchronous
Power Generating Modules connected below 110kV

Voltage parameters (pu) Time parameters (seconds)

Uret 0.1 tclear 0.14
Uclear 0.7 trec1 0.14
Urec1 0.7 trec2 0.45
Urec2 0.9 trec3 1.5

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

60 of 147
 Table ECC.6.3.15.3 Voltage against time parameters applicable to Type C and D
Synchronous Power Generating Modules connected below 110kV

ECC.6.3.15.4 Voltage against time curve and parameters applicable to Type D Synchronous Power
Generating Modules connected at or above 110kV

Figure ECC.6.3.15.4 - Voltage against time curve applicable to Type D Synchronous

Power Generating Modules connected at or above 110kV

Voltage parameters (pu) Time parameters (seconds)

Uret 0 tclear 0.14
Uclear 0.25 trec1 0.25
Urec1 0.5 trec2 0.45
Urec2 0.9 trec3 1.5

Table ECC.6.3.15.4 Voltage against time parameters applicable to Type D Synchronous

Power Generating Modules connected at or above 110kV

ECC.6.3.15.5 Voltage against time curve and parameters applicable to Type B, C and D Power Park
Modules connected below 110kV

Figure ECC.6.3.15.5 - Voltage against time curve applicable to Type B, C and D Power
Park Modules connected below 110kV

Voltage parameters (pu) Time parameters (seconds)

Uret 0.10 tclear 0.14

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

61 of 147
 Uclear 0.10 trec1 0.14
Urec1 0.10 trec2 0.14
Urec2 0.85 trec3 2.2

Table ECC.6.3.15.5 Voltage against time parameters applicable to Type B, C and D

Power Park Modules connected below 110kV

ECC.6.3.15.6 Voltage against time curve and parameters applicable to Type D Power Park Modules with
a Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point at or above 110kV, DC Connected Power
Park Modules at the HVDC Interface Point or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the
Interface Point.

Figure ECC.6.3.15.6 - Voltage against time curve applicable to Type D Power Park Modules with a Grid
Entry Point or User System Entry Point at or above 110kV, DC Connected Power Park
Modules at the HVDC Interface Point or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface
Point.

Voltage parameters (pu) Time parameters (seconds)

Uret 0 tclear 0.14
Uclear 0 trec1 0.14
Urec1 0 trec2 0.14
Urec2 0.85 trec3 2.2

Table ECC.6.3.15.6 Voltage against time parameters applicable to a Type D Power Park Modules with a
Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point at or above 110kV, DC Connected Power
Park Modules at the HVDC Interface Point or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the
Interface Point.

ECC.6.3.15.7 Voltage against time curve and parameters applicable to HVDC Systems and Remote End
HVDC Converter Stations

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

62 of 147
Figure ECC.6.3.15.7 - Voltage against time curve applicable to HVDC Systems and Remote End HVDC
Converter Stations

Voltage parameters (pu) Time parameters (seconds)

Uret 0 tclear 0.14
Uclear 0 trec1 0.14
Urec1 0 trec2 0.14
Urec2 0.85 trec3 2.2

Table ECC.6.3.15.7 Voltage against time parameters applicable to HVDC Systems and Remote End HVDC
Converter Stations

ECC.6.3.15.8 In addition to the requirements in ECC.6.3.15.1 – ECC.6.3.15.7:

(i) Each Type B, Type C and Type D Power Generating Module at the Grid Entry
Point or User System Entry Point, HVDC Equipment (or OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus at the Interface Point) shall be capable of satisfying the above
requirements when operating at Rated MW output and maximum leading Power
Factor.
(ii) The Company will specify upon request by the User the pre-fault and post fault short
circuit capacity (in MVA) at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point (or
HVDC Interface Point in the case of a remote end HVDC Converter Stations or
Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus).
(iii) The pre-fault voltage shall be taken to be 1.0pu and the post fault voltage shall not be
less than 0.9pu.
(iv) To allow a User to model the Fault Ride Through performance of its Type B, Type
C and/or Type D Power Generating Modules or HVDC Equipment, The Company
will provide additional network data as may reasonably be required by the EU Code
User to undertake such study work in accordance with PC.A.8. Alternatively, The
Company may provide generic values derived from typical cases.
(v) The Company will publish fault level data under maximum and minimum demand
conditions in the Electricity Ten Year Statement.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

63 of 147
 (vi) Each EU Generator (in respect of Type B, Type C, Type D Power Generating
Modules and DC Connected Power Park Modules) and HVDC System Owners
(in respect of HVDC Systems) shall satisfy the requirements in ECC.6.3.15.8(i) –
(vii) unless the protection schemes and settings for internal electrical faults trips
the Type B, Type C and Type D Power Generating Module, HVDC Equipment
(or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) from the System. The protection schemes
and settings should not jeopardise Fault Ride Through performance as specified
in ECC.6.3.15.8(i) – (vii). The undervoltage protection at the Grid Entry Point or
User System Entry Point (or HVDC Interface Point in the case of a Remote
End HVDC Converter Stations or Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus) shall be set by the EU Generator (or HVDC System Owner or
OTSDUA in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) according to the widest
possible range unless The Company and the EU Code User have agreed to
narrower settings. All protection settings associated with undervoltage protection
shall be agreed between the EU Generator and/or HVDC System Owner with The
Company and Relevant Transmission Licensee’s and relevant Network
Operator (as applicable).

(vii) Each Type B, Type C and Type D Power Generating Module, HVDC System and
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface Point shall be designed such that
upon clearance of the fault on the Onshore Transmission System and within 0.5
seconds of restoration of the voltage at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry
Point or HVDC Interface Point in the case of a Remote End HVDC Converter
Stations or Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus to 90% of
nominal voltage or greater, Active Power output (or Active Power transfer capability
in the case of OTSDW Plant and Apparatus or Remote End HVDC Converter
Stations) shall be restored to at least 90% of the level immediately before the fault.
Once Active Power output (or Active Power transfer capability in the case of
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Remote End HVDC Converter Stations) has
been restored to the required level, Active Power oscillations shall be acceptable
provided that:
- The total Active Energy delivered during the period of the oscillations is at least
that which would have been delivered if the Active Power was constant
- The oscillations are adequately damped.
- In the event of power oscillations, Power Generating Modules shall retain
steady state stability when operating at any point on the Power Generating
Module Performance Chart.
For AC Connected Onshore and Offshore Power Park Modules comprising
switched reactive compensation equipment (such as mechanically switched capacitors
and reactors), such switched reactive compensation equipment shall be controlled
such that it is not switched in or out of service during the fault but may act to assist in
post fault voltage recovery.

ECC.6.3.15.9 General Fault Ride Through requirements for faults in excess of 140ms in duration.

ECC.6.3.15.9.1 General Fault Ride Through requirements applicable to HVDC Equipment and OTSDUW
DC Converters subject to faults and voltage dips in excess of 140ms.

ECC.6.3.15.9.1.1 The requirements applicable to HVDC Equipment including OTSDUW DC Converters

subject to faults and voltage disturbances at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry
Point or Interface Point or HVDC Interface Point, including Active Power transfer
capability shall be specified in the Bilateral Agreement.

ECC.6.3.15.9.2 Fault Ride Through requirements for Type C and Type D Synchronous Power Generating
Modules and Type C and Type D Power Park Modules and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus
subject to faults and voltage disturbances on the Onshore Transmission System in excess
of 140ms

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

64 of 147
ECC.6.3.15.9.2.1 The Fault Ride Through requirements for Type C and Type D Synchronous Power
Generating Modules subject to faults and voltage disturbances on the Onshore
Transmission System in excess of 140ms are defined in ECC.6.3.15.9.2.1(a) and the
Fault Ride Through Requirements for Type C and Type D Power Park Modules and
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus subject to faults and voltage disturbances on the
Onshore Transmission System greater than 140ms in duration are defined in
ECC.6.3.15.9.2.1(b).

(a) Requirements applicable to Synchronous Power Generating Modules subject to

Supergrid Voltage dips on the Onshore Transmission System greater than 140ms in
duration.

In addition to the requirements of ECC.6.3.15.1 – ECC.6.3.15.8 each Synchronous

Power Generating Module shall:

(i) remain transiently stable and connected to the System without tripping of any
Synchronous Power Generating Module for balanced Supergrid Voltage dips
and associated durations on the Onshore Transmission System (which could be
at the Interface Point) anywhere on or above the heavy black line shown in Figure
ECC.6.3.15.9(a) Appendix 4 and Figures EA.4.3.2(a), (b) and (c) provide an
explanation and illustrations of Figure ECC.6.3.15.9(a); and,

Figure ECC.6.3.15.9(a)

(ii) provide Active Power output at the Grid Entry Point, during Supergrid Voltage
dips on the Onshore Transmission System as described in Figure
ECC.6.3.15.9(a), at least in proportion to the retained balanced voltage at the
Onshore Grid Entry Point (for Onshore Synchronous Power Generating
Modules) or Interface Point (for Offshore Synchronous Power Generating
Modules) (or the retained balanced voltage at the User System Entry Point if
Embedded) and shall generate maximum reactive current (where the voltage at the
Grid Entry Point is outside the limits specified in ECC.6.1.4) without exceeding the
transient rating limits of the Synchronous Power Generating Module and,
(iii) restore Active Power output following Supergrid Voltage dips on the Onshore
Transmission System as described in Figure ECC.6.3.15.9(a), within 1 second of
restoration of the voltage to 1.0pu of the nominal voltage at the:

Onshore Grid Entry Point for directly connected Onshore Synchronous

Power Generating Modules or,

Interface Point for Offshore Synchronous Power Generating Modules

or,
User System Entry Point for Embedded Onshore Synchronous Power
Generating Modules
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
65 of 147
 or,
User System Entry Point for Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject
to a Bilateral Agreement which comprise Synchronous Generating Units
and with an Onshore User System Entry Point (irrespective of whether they
are located Onshore or Offshore)

to at least 90% of the level available immediately before the occurrence of the dip.
Once the Active Power output has been restored to the required level, Active
Power oscillations shall be acceptable provided that:

- the total Active Energy delivered during the period of the oscillations is at
least that which would have been delivered if the Active Power was constant
- the oscillations are adequately damped.

For the avoidance of doubt a balanced Onshore Transmission System Supergrid

Voltage meets the requirements of ECC.6.1.5 (b) and ECC.6.1.6.

(iv) For up to 30 minutes following such a Supergrid Voltage dip on the Onshore
Transmission System each Synchronous Power Generating Module is required to
remain connected and stable provided System operating conditions have returned
within those specified in ECC.6.1

(b) Requirements applicable to Type C and Type D Power Park Modules and OTSDUW
Plant and Apparatus (excluding OTSDUW DC Converters) subject to Supergrid
Voltage dips on the Onshore Transmission System greater than 140ms in duration.

In addition to the requirements of ECC.6.3.15.5, ECC.6.3.15.6 and ECC.6.3.15.8 (as

applicable) each OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or each Power Park Module and / or
any constituent Power Park Unit, shall:

(i) remain transiently stable and connected to the System without tripping of any
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, or Power Park Module and / or any constituent
Power Park Unit, for balanced Supergrid Voltage dips and associated durations
on the Onshore Transmission System (which could be at the Interface Point)
anywhere on or above the heavy black line shown in Figure ECC.6.3.15.9(b).
Appendix 4 and Figures EA.4.3.4 (a), (b) and (c) provide an explanation and
illustrations of Figure ECC.6.3.15.9(b) ; and,

Supergrid Voltage Level

(% of Nominal)
90
85
80

15

0.14s 1.2s 2.5s 3 minutes

Supergrid Voltage Duration

Figure ECC.6.3.15.9(b)

(ii) be required to satisfy the requirements of ECC.6.3.16. In the case of a Non-

Synchronous Generating Unit or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Power Park
Module where there has been a reduction in the Intermittent Power Source or in
the case of OTSDUW Active Power transfer capability in the time range in Figure
ECC.6.3.15.9(b) an allowance shall be made for the fall in input power and the
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
66 of 147
 corresponding reduction of real and reactive current.

(iii) restore Active Power output (or, in the case of OTSDUW, Active Power transfer
capability), following Supergrid Voltage dips on the Onshore Transmission
System as described in Figure ECC.6.3.15.9(b), within 1 second of restoration of
the voltage to 0.9 pu of the nominal voltage at the:

Onshore Grid Entry Point for directly connected Onshore Power Park
Modules or,

Interface Point for OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus and Offshore Power
Park Modules or,

User System Entry Point for Embedded Onshore Power Park Modules or ,

User System Entry Point for Embedded Medium Power Stations which
comprise Power Park Modules not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and with
an Onshore User System Entry Point (irrespective of whether they are
located Onshore or Offshore)

to at least 90% of the level available immediately before the occurrence of the dip
except in the case of a Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus or Power Park Module where there has been a reduction in the
Intermittent Power Source in the time range in Figure ECC.6.3.15.9(b) that
restricts the Active Power output or, in the case of OTSDUW, Active Power transfer
capability below this level. Once the Active Power output or, in the case of
OTSDUW, Active Power transfer capability has been restored to the required level,
Active Power oscillations shall be acceptable provided that:

- the total Active Energy delivered during the period of the oscillations is at
least that which would have been delivered if the Active Power was constant
- the oscillations are adequately damped.

For the avoidance of doubt a balanced Onshore Transmission System Supergrid

Voltage meets the requirements of ECC.6.1.5 (b) and ECC.6.1.6.

(iv) For up to 30 minutes following such a Supergrid Voltage dip on the Onshore
Transmission System each Power Park Module and / or any constituent Power Park
Unit and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus is required to remain connected and stable
provided System operating conditions have returned within those specified in ECC.6.1.

ECC.6.3.15.10 Other Fault Ride Through Requirements

(i) In the case of a Power Park Module (excluding Non-Synchronous Electricity Storage
Modules), the requirements in ECC.6.3.15.9 do not apply when the Power Park Module
(excluding Non-Synchronous Electricity Storage Modules) is operating at less than
5% of its Rated MW or during very high primary energy source conditions when more
than 50% of the Power Park Units in a Power Park Module have been shut down or
disconnected under an emergency shutdown sequence to protect User’s Plant and
Apparatus.
(ii) In addition to meeting the conditions specified in ECC.6.1.5(b) and ECC.6.1.6, each Non-
Synchronous Generating Unit, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Power Park
Module and any constituent Power Park Unit thereof will be required to withstand,
without tripping, the negative phase sequence loading incurred by clearance of a close-
up phase-to-phase fault, by System Back-Up Protection on the Onshore
Transmission System operating at Supergrid Voltage.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

67 of 147
 (iii) Generators in respect of Type B, Type C and Type D Power Park Modules and HVDC
System Owners are required to confirm to The Company, their repeated ability to
operate through balanced and unbalanced faults and System disturbances each time the
voltage at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point falls outside the limits
specified in ECC.6.1.4. Demonstration of this capability would be satisfied by EU
Generators and HVDC System Owners supplying the protection settings of their plant,
informing The Company of the maximum number of repeated operations that can be
performed under such conditions and any limiting factors to repeated operation such as
protection or thermal rating; and
(iv) Notwithstanding the requirements of ECC.6.3.15(v), Power Generating Modules shall
be capable of remaining connected during single phase or three phase auto-reclosures
to the National Electricity Transmission System and operating without power reduction
as long as the voltage and frequency remain within the limits defined in ECC.6.1.4 and
ECC.6.1.2; and
(v) For the avoidance of doubt the requirements specified in ECC.6.3.15 do not apply to
Power Generating Modules connected to either an unhealthy circuit and/or islanded
from the Transmission System even for delayed auto reclosure times.
(vi) To avoid unwanted island operation, Non-Synchronous Generating Units in Scotland
(and those directly connected to a Scottish Offshore Transmission System), Power
Park Modules in Scotland (and those directly connected to a Scottish Offshore
Transmission System), or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus with an Interface Point in
Scotland shall be tripped for the following conditions:
(1) Frequency above 52Hz for more than 2 seconds
(2) Frequency below 47Hz for more than 2 seconds
(3) Voltage as measured at the Onshore Connection Point or Onshore User
System Entry Point or Offshore Grid Entry Point or Interface Point in the
case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus is below 80% for more than 2.5
seconds
Voltage as measured at the Onshore Connection Point or Onshore User System
Entry Point or Offshore Grid Entry Point or Interface Point in the case of
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus is above 120% (115% for 275kV) for more than 1
second. The times in sections (1) and (2) are maximum trip times. Shorter times
may be used to protect the Non-Synchronous Generating Units, or OTSDUW
Plant and Apparatus.

ECC.6.3.15.11 HVDC System Robustness

ECC.6.3.15.11.1 The HVDC System shall be capable of finding stable operation points with a minimum
change in Active Power flow and voltage level, during and after any planned or
unplanned change in the HVDC System or AC System to which it is connected. The
Company shall specify the changes in the System conditions for which the HVDC
Systems shall remain in stable operation.

ECC.6.3.15.11.2 The HVDC System owner shall ensure that the tripping or disconnection of an HVDC
Converter Station, as part of any multi-terminal or embedded HVDC System, does not
result in transients at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point beyond the limit
specified by The Company in co-ordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee.

ECC.6.3.15.11.3 The HVDC System shall withstand transient faults on HVAC lines in the network adjacent
or close to the HVDC System, and shall not cause any of the equipment in the HVDC
System to disconnect from the network due to autoreclosure of lines in the System.

ECC.6.3.15.11.4 The HVDC System Owner shall provide information to The Company on the resilience
of the HVDC System to AC System disturbances.

ECC.6.3.16 FAST FAULT CURRENT INJECTION

ECC.6.3.16.1 General Fast Fault Current injection, principles and concepts applicable to Type B, Type
C and Type D Power Park Modules and HVDC Equipment
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
68 of 147
ECC.6.3.16.1.1 In addition to the requirements of ECC.6.1.4, ECC.6.3.2, ECC.6.3.8 and ECC.A.7, each
Type B, Type C and Type D Power Park Module or each Power Park Unit within a Type
B, Type C and Type D Power Park Module or HVDC Equipment shall be required to
satisfy the following requirements unless operating in a Grid Forming Capability mode in
which case the requirements of ECC.6.3.19 shall apply instead. For the purposes of this
requirement, current and voltage are assumed to be positive phase sequence values.
ECC.6.3.16.1.2 For any balanced fault which results in the positive phase sequence voltage falling below
the voltage levels specified in ECC.6.1.4 at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry
Point (if Embedded), each Type B, Type C and Type D Power Park Module or each
Power Park Unit within a Type B, Type C and Type D Power Park Module or HVDC
Equipment shall, as a minimum (unless an alternative type registered solution has
otherwise been agreed with The Company), be required to inject a reactive current above
the heavy black line shown in Figure ECC.16.3.16(a)

Figure ECC.6.3.16(a)

ECC.6.3.16.1.3 Figure ECC.6.3.16(a) defines the reactive current (IR) to be supplied under a faulted condition
which shall be dependent upon the pre-fault operating condition and the retained voltage at
the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point voltage. For the avoidance of doubt, each
Power Park Module (and any constituent element thereof) or HVDC Equipment, shall be
required to inject a reactive current (IR) which shall be not less than its pre-fault reactive current
and which shall as a minimum increase with the fall in the retained voltage each time the
voltage at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point (if Embedded) falls below 0.9pu
whilst ensuring the overall rating of the Power Park Module (or constituent element thereof)
or HVDC Equipment shall not be exceeded.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

69 of 147
ECC.6.3.16.1.4 In addition to the requirements of ECC.6.3.16.1.2 and ECC.6.3.16.1.3, each Type B, Type C
and Type D Power Park Module or each Power Park Unit within a Type B, Type C and
Type D Power Park Module or HVDC Equipment shall be required to inject reactive current
above the shaded area shown in Figure ECC.6.3.16(b) and Figure ECC.6.3.16(c) which
illustrates how the reactive current shall be injected over time from fault inception in which the
value of IR is determined from Figure ECC.6.3.16(a). In figures ECC.6.3.16(b) and
ECC.6.3.16(c) IR is the value of the reactive current (IR) less the prefault current. In this
context fault inception is taken to be when the voltage at the Grid Entry Point or User System
Entry Point falls below 0.9pu.

Figure ECC.16.3.16(b)

Figure ECC.16.3.16(c)

ECC.6.3.16.1.5 The injected reactive current (IR)shall be above the shaded area shown in Figure
ECC.6.3.16(b) and Figure ECC.6.3.16(c) with priority being given to reactive current injection
with any residual capability being supplied as active current. Under any faulted condition,
where the voltage falls outside the limits specified in ECC.6.1.4, there would be no requirement
for each Power Park Module or constituent Power Park Unit or HVDC Equipment to exceed
its transient or steady state rating of 1.0pu as defined in ECC.6.3.16.1.7.
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
70 of 147
ECC.6.3.16.1.6 For any planned or switching events (as outlined in ECC.6.1.7 of the Grid Code) or unplanned
events which results in temporary power frequency over voltages (TOV’s), each Type B, Type
C and Type D Power Generating Module or each Power Park Unit within a Type B, Type
C or Type D Power Park Module or HVDC Equipment will be required to satisfy the transient
overvoltage limits specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.6.3.16.1.7 For the purposes of this requirement, the maximum rated current is taken to be the maximum
current each Power Park Module (or the sum of the constituent Power Park Units which
are connected to the System at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point) or HVDC
Converter is capable of supplying. In the case of a Power Park Module this would be the
maximum rated current at the Grid Entry Point (or User System Entry Point if Embedded)
when the Power Park Module is operating at rated Active Power and rated Reactive
Power (as required under ECC.6.3.2) whilst operating over the nominal voltage range as
required under ECC.6.1.4 at the Grid Entry Point (or User System Entry Point if
Embedded). In the case of a Power Park Unit forming part of a Type B, Type C and Type
D Power Park Module, the maximum rated current expected would be the maximum current
supplied from each constituent Power Park Unit when the Power Park Module is operating
at rated Active Power and rated Reactive Power over the nominal voltage operating range
as defined in ECC.6.1.4 less the contribution from the reactive compensation equipment.
For example, in the case of a 100MW Power Park Module (consisting of 50 x 2MW Power
Park Units and +10MVAr reactive compensation equipment) the Rated Active Power at the
Grid Entry Point (or User System Entry Point if Embedded) would be taken as 100MW
and the rated Reactive Power at the Grid Entry Point or (User System Entry Point if
Embedded) would be taken as 32.8MVArs (ie Rated MW output operating at 0.95 Power
Factor lead or 0.95 Power Factor lag as required under ECC.6.3.2.4). In this example, the
maximum rating of each constituent Power Park Unit is obtained when the Power Park
Module is operating at 100MW, and +32.8MVAr less 10MVAr equal to 22.8MVAr or
– 32.8MVAr (less the reactive compensation equipment component of 10MVAr (ie -
22.8MVAr) when operating within the normal voltage operating range as defined under
ECC.6.1.4 (allowing for any reactive compensation equipment or losses in the Power Park
Module array network).
For the avoidance of doubt, the total current of 1.0pu would be assumed to be on the MVA
rating of the Power Park Module or HVDC Equipment (less losses). Under all normal and
abnormal conditions, the steady state or transient rating of the Power Park Module (or
any constituent element including the Power Park Units) or HVDC Equipment,
would not be required to exceed the locus shown in Figure 16.3.16(d).

Figure ECC.16.3.16(d)

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

71 of 147
ECC.6.3.16.1.7 Each Type B, Type C and Type D Power Park Module or HVDC Equipment shall be
designed to ensure a smooth transition between voltage control mode and fault ride
through mode in order to prevent the risk of instability which could arise in the transition
between the steady state voltage operating range as defined under ECC.6.1.4 and
abnormal conditions where the retained voltage falls below 90% of nominal voltage. Such
a requirement is necessary to ensure adequate performance between the pre-fault
operating condition of the Power Park Module or HVDC Equipment and its subsequent
behaviour under faulted conditions. EU Generators and HVDC System Owners are
required to both advise and agree with The Company the control strategy employed to
mitigate the risk of such instability.
ECC.6.3.16.1.8 Each Type B, Type C and Type D Power Park Module or HVDC Equipment shall be
designed to reduce the risk of transient over voltage levels arising following clearance of
the fault and in order to mitigate the risk of any form of instability which could result. EU
Generators or HVDC System Owners shall be permitted to block or employ other means
where the anticipated transient overvoltage would otherwise exceed the maximum
permitted values specified in ECC.6.1.7. Figure ECC.16.3.16(b) and Figure
ECC.16.3.16(c) shows the impact of variations in fault clearance time. For main
protection operating times this would not exceed 140ms. The requirements for the
maximum transient overvoltage withstand capability and associated time duration, shall
be agreed between the EU Code User and The Company as part of the Bilateral
Agreement. Where the EU Code User is able to demonstrate to The Company that
blocking or other control strategies are required in order to prevent the risk of transient
over voltage excursions as specified in ECC.6.3.16.1.5, EU Generators and HVDC
System Owners are required to both advise and agree with The Company the control
strategy, which must also include the approach taken to de-blocking

ECC.6.3.16.1.9 In addition to the requirements of ECC.6.3.15, Generators in respect of Type B, Type C

and Type D Power Park Modules or each Power Park Unit within a Type B, Type C
and Type D Power Park Module or DC Connected Power Park Modules and HVDC
System Owners in respect of HVDC Systems are required to confirm to The Company,
their repeated ability to supply Fast Fault Current to the System each time the voltage
at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point falls outside the limits specified in
ECC.6.1.4. EU Generators and HVDC Equipment Owners should inform The
Company of the maximum number of repeated operations that can be performed under
such conditions and any limiting factors to repeated operation such as protection or
thermal rating.
ECC.6.3.16.1.10 To permit additional flexibility for example from Power Park Modules made up of full
converter machines, DFIG machines, induction generators or HVDC Systems or Remote
End HVDC Converters, The Company will permit transient or marginal deviations below
the shaded area shown in Figures ECC.16.3.16(b) or ECC.16.3.16(c) provided the
injected reactive current supplied exceeds the area bound in Figure ECC.6.3.16(b) or
ECC.6.3.16(c). Such agreement would be confirmed and agreed between The Company
and Generator.
ECC.6.3.16.1.11 In the case of a Power Park Module or DC Connected Power Park Module, where it is
not practical to demonstrate the compliance requirements of ECC.6.3.16.1.1 to
ECC.6.3.16.1.6 at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point, The Company will
accept compliance of the above requirements at the Power Park Unit terminals.
ECC.6.3.16.1.12 For the avoidance of doubt, Generators in respect of Type C and Type D Power Park
Modules and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus are also required to satisfy the
requirements of ECC.6.3.15.9.2.1(b) which specifies the requirements for fault ride
through for voltage dips in excess of 140ms.
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
72 of 147
ECC.6.3.16.1.13 In the case of an unbalanced fault, each Type B, Type C and Type D Power Park Module
or each Power Park Unit within a Type B, Type C and Type D Power Park Module or HVDC
Equipment shall be required to inject reactive current (IR) which shall as a minimum increase
with the fall in the retained unbalanced voltage up to its maximum reactive current without
exceeding the transient rating of the Power Park Module (or constituent element thereof) or
HVDC Equipment.

ECC.6.3.16.1.14 In the case of a unbalanced fault, the Generator or HVDC System Owner shall confirm
to The Company their ability to prevent transient overvoltages arising on the remaining
healthy phases and the control strategy employed.

ECC.6.3.17 SUBSYNCHRONOUS TORSIONAL INTERACTION DAMPING CAPABILITY, POWER

OSCILLATION DAMPING CAPABILITY AND CONTROL FACILITIES FOR HVDC SYSTEMS
ECC.6.3.17.1 Subsynchronous Torsional Interaction Damping Capability
ECC.6.3.17.1.1 HVDC System Owners, or Generators in respect of OTSDUW DC Converters or Network
Operators in the case of an Embedded HVDC Systems not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement must ensure that any of their Onshore HVDC Systems or OTSDUW DC
Converters will not cause a sub-synchronous resonance problem on the Total System. Each
HVDC System or OTSDUW DC Converter is required to be provided with sub-synchronous
resonance damping control facilities. HVDC System Owners and EU Generators in respect
of OTSDUW DC Converters should also be aware of the requirements in ECC.6.1.9 and
ECC.6.1.10.
ECC.6.3.17.1.2 Where specified in the Bilateral Agreement, each OTSDUW DC Converter is required to be
provided with power oscillation damping or any other identified additional control facilities.
ECC.6.3.17.1.3 Each HVDC System shall be capable of contributing to the damping of power oscillations on
the National Electricity Transmission System. The control system of the HVDC System
shall not reduce the damping of power oscillations. The Company in coordination with the
Relevant Transmission Licensee (as applicable) shall specify a frequency range of
oscillations that the control scheme shall positively damp and the System conditions when
this occurs, at least accounting for any dynamic stability assessment studies undertaken by
the Relevant Transmission Licensee or The Company (as applicable) to identify the stability
limits and potential stability problems on the National Electricity Transmission System. The
selection of the control parameter settings shall be agreed between The Company in
coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee and the HVDC System Owner.
ECC.6.3.17.1.4 The Company shall specify the necessary extent of SSTI studies and provide input
parameters, to the extent available, related to the equipment and relevant system conditions
on the National Electricity Transmission System. The SSTI studies shall be provided by
the HVDC System Owner. The studies shall identify the conditions, if any, where SSTI exists
and propose any necessary mitigation procedure. The responsibility for undertaking the
studies in accordance with these requirements lies with the Relevant Transmission Licensee
in co-ordination with The Company. All parties shall be informed of the results of the studies.
ECC.6.3.17.1.5 All parties identified by The Company as relevant to each Grid Entry Point or User System
Entry Point (if Embedded) , including the Relevant Transmission Licensee, shall contribute
to the studies and shall provide all relevant data and models as reasonably required to meet
the purposes of the studies. The Company shall collect this data and, where applicable, pass
it on to the party responsible for the studies in accordance with Retained EU Law (Article 10
of Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/1447). Specific information relating to the interface
schedules, input/output requirements, timing and submission of any studies or data would be
agreed between the User and The Company and specified (where applicable) in the Bilateral
Agreement.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

73 of 147
ECC.6.3.17.1.6 The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee shall assess the
result of the SSTI studies. If necessary for the assessment, The Company in coordination
with the Relevant Transmission Licensee may request that the HVDC System Owner
perform further SSTI studies in line with this same scope and extent.
ECC.6.3.17.1.7 The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee may review or
replicate the study. The HVDC System Owner shall provide The Company with all relevant
data and models that allow such studies to be performed. Submission of this data to Relevant
Transmission Licensee’s shall be in accordance with the requirements of Retained EU Law
(Article 10 of Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/1447).
ECC.6.3.17.1.8 Any necessary mitigating actions identified by the studies carried out in accordance with
paragraphs ECC.6.3.17.1.4 or ECC.6.3.17.1.6, and reviewed by The Company in
coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensees, shall be undertaken by the HVDC
System Owner as part of the connection of the new HVDC Converter Station.
ECC.6.3.17.1.9 As part of the studies and data flow in respect of ECC.6.3.17.1 – ECC.6.3.17.8 the following
data exchange would take place with the time scales being pursuant to the terms of the
Bilateral Agreement.
Information supplied by The Company and Relevant Transmission Licensees
Studies provided by the User
User review
The Company review
Changes to studies and agreed updates between The Company, the Relevant
Transmission Licensee and User
Final review
ECC.6.3.17.2 Interaction between HVDC Systems or other User’s Plant and Apparatus
ECC.6.3.17.2.1 Notwithstanding the requirements of ECC6.1.9 and ECC.6.1.10, when several HVDC
Converter Stations or other User’s Plant and Apparatus are within close electrical proximity,
The Company may specify that a study is required, and the scope and extent of that study, to
demonstrate that no adverse interaction will occur. If adverse interaction is identified, the
studies shall identify possible mitigating actions to be implemented to ensure compliance with
the requirements of ECC.6.1.9
ECC.6.3.17.2.2 The studies shall be carried out by the connecting HVDC System Owner with the participation
of all other User’s identified by The Company in coordination with Relevant Transmission
Licensees as relevant to each Connection Point.
ECC.6.3.17.2.3 All User’s identified by The Company as relevant to the connection , and where applicable
Relevant Transmission Licensee’s, shall contribute to the studies and shall provide all
relevant data and models as reasonably required to meet the purposes of the studies. The
Company shall collect this input and, where applicable, pass it on to the party responsible for
the studies in accordance with Retained EU Law (Article 10 of Commission Regulation (EU)
2016/1447). Specific information relating to the interface schedules, input/output
requirements, timing and submission of any studies or data would be agreed between the
User and The Company and specified (where applicable) in the Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.6.3.17.2.4 The Company in coordination with Relevant Transmission Licensees shall assess the
result of the studies based on their scope and extent as specified in accordance with
ECC.6.3.17.2.1. If necessary for the assessment, The Company in coordination with the
Relevant Transmission Licensee may request the HVDC System Owner to perform further
studies in line with the scope and extent specified in accordance with ECC.6.3.17.2.1.
ECC.6.3.17.2.5 The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee may review or
replicate some or all of the studies. The HVDC System Owner shall provide The Company
all relevant data and models that allow such studies to be performed.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

74 of 147
ECC.6.3.17.2.6 The EU Code User and The Company, in coordination with the Relevant Transmission
Licensee, shall agree any mitigating actions identified by the studies carried out following the
site specific requirements and works, including any transmission reinforcement works and / or
User works required to ensure that all sub-synchronous oscillations are sufficiently damped.
ECC.6.1.17.3 Fast Recovery from DC faults
ECC.6.1.17.3.1 HVDC Systems, including DC overhead lines, shall be capable of fast recovery from transient
faults within the HVDC System. Details of this capability shall be subject to the Bilateral
Agreement and the protection requirements specified in ECC.6.2.2 .
ECC.6.1.17.4 Maximum loss of Active Power
ECC.6.1.14.4.1 An HVDC System shall be configured in such a way that its loss of Active Power injection in
the GB Synchronous Area shall be in accordance with the requirements of the SQSS.

ECC.6.3.18 SYSTEM TO GENERATOR OPERATIONAL INTERTRIPPING SCHEMES

ECC.6.3.18.1 The Company may require that a System to Generator Operational Intertripping Scheme
be installed as part of a condition of the connection of the EU Generator. Scheme specific
details shall be included in the relevant Bilateral Agreement and shall, include the following
information:
(1) the relevant category(ies) of the scheme (referred to as Category 1 Intertripping
Scheme, Category 2 Intertripping Scheme, Category 3 Intertripping Scheme and
Category 4 Intertripping Scheme);
(2) the Power Generating Module to be either permanently armed or that can be instructed
to be armed in accordance with BC2.8;
(3) the time within which the Power Generating Module circuit breaker(s) are to be
automatically tripped;
(4) the location to which the trip signal will be provided by The Company. Such location will
be provided by The Company prior to the commissioning of the Power Generating
Module.
Where applicable, the Bilateral Agreement shall include the conditions on the National
Electricity Transmission System during which The Company may instruct the System to
Generator Operational Intertripping Scheme to be armed and the conditions that would
initiate a trip signal.
ECC.6.3.18.2 The time within which the Power Generating Module(s) circuit breaker(s) need to be
automatically tripped is determined by the specific conditions local to the EU Generator. This
‘time to trip’ (defined as the time from provision of the trip signal by The Company to the
specified location, to circuit breaker main contact opening) can typically range from 100ms to
10sec. A longer time to trip may allow the initiation of an automatic reduction in the Power
Generating Module(s) output prior to the automatic tripping of the Power Generating
Module(s) circuit breaker. Where applicable The Company may provide separate trip signals
to allow for either a longer or shorter ‘time to trip’ to be initiated.

ECC.6.3.19 GRID FORMING CAPABILITY

ECC.6.3.19.1 In order for the National Electricity Transmission System to satisfy the stability
requirements defined in the National Electricity Transmission System Security and
Quality of Supply Standards, it is an essential requirement that an appropriate volume of
Grid Forming Plant is available and capable of providing a Grid Forming Capability.
ECC.6.3.19.2 Grid Forming Capability is not a mandatory requirement but one which will be delivered
through market arrangements, the details of which shall be published on The Company’s
Website. Grid Forming Capability can be implemented by any technology including
Electronic Power Converters with a GBGF- I ability, rotating Synchronous Generating
Units or a combination of the two.
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
75 of 147
ECC.6.3.19.3 As noted in ECC.6.3.19.2, Grid Forming Capability is not a mandatory requirement, however
where a User (be they a GB Code User or EU Code User) or Non-CUSC Party wishes to
offer a Grid Forming Capability, then they will be required to ensure their Grid Forming
Plant meets the following requirements.

(i) The Grid Forming Plant must fully comply with the applicable requirements of the
Grid Code including but not limited to the Planning Code (PC), Connection
Conditions (CC’s) or European Connection Conditions (ECC’s) (as applicable),
Compliance Processes (CP’s) or European Compliance Processes (ECP’s) (as
applicable), Operating Codes (OC’s), Balancing Codes (BC’s) and Data
Registration Code (DRC).
(ii) Each GBGF-I shall comprise an Internal Voltage Source and reactance. For the
avoidance of doubt, the reactance between the Internal Voltage Source and Grid
Entry Point or User System Entry Point (if Embedded) within the Grid Forming
Plant can only be made by a combination of several physical discrete reactances.
This could include the reactance of the Synchronous Generating Unit or Power
Park Unit or HVDC System or Electricity Storage Unit or Dynamic Reactive
Compensation Equipment and the electrical Plant and Apparatus connecting the
Synchronous Generating Unit or Power Park Unit or HVDC System or Electricity
Storage Unit (such as a transformer) to the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry
Point (if Embedded).
(iii) In addition to meeting the requirements of CC.6.3.15 or ECC.6.3.15, each Grid
Forming Plant is required to remain in synchronism with the Total System and
maintain a Load Angle whose value can vary between 0 and 90 degrees (π/2
radians).
(iv) When subject to a fault or disturbance, or System Frequency change, each Grid
Forming Plant shall be capable of supplying Active ROCOF Response Power,
Active Phase Jump Power, Active Damping Power, Active Control Based
Power, Control Based Reactive Power, Voltage Jump Reactive Power and
GBGF Fast Fault Current Injection.
(v) Each GBGF-I shall be capable of:-
(a) Providing a symmetrical ability for importing and exporting Active ROCOF
Response Power, Active Phase Jump Power, Active Damping Power and
Active Control Based Power under both rising and falling System Frequency
conditions. Such requirements will apply over the full System Frequency range
as detailed in CC.6.1.2 and CC.6.1.3 or ECC.6.1.2 (as applicable). In satisfying
these requirements, User’s and Non-CUSC Parties should be aware of (but not
limited to) the exclusions in CC.6.3.3, CC.6.3.7 and BC3.7.2.1 (as applicable for
GB Code User’s) or ECC.6.1.2, ECC.6.3.3, ECC.6.3.7 and BC3.7.2.1(b)(i) (as
applicable for EU Code User’s and Non-CUSC Parties) during System
Frequencies between 47Hz – 52Hz, excluding CC.6.1.3 or ECC.6.1,2.1,2 for a
Grid Forming Plant with time limited output ratings. For the avoidance of doubt,
an asymmetrical response is permissible as agreed with The Company when
required to protect User’s and Non-CUSC Parties Plant and Apparatus or
asymmetry in energy availability.
(b) Operating as a voltage source behind a real reactance.
(c) being designed so as not to cause any undue interactions which could cause
damage to the Total System or other User’s Plant and Apparatus.
(d) include an Active Control Based Power part of the control system that can
respond to changes in the Grid Forming Plant or external signals from the Total
System available at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point but with
a bandwidth below 5 Hz to avoid AC System resonance problems.
(e) meeting the requirements of ECC.6.3.13 irrespective of being owned or operated
by a GB Code User, EU Code User or Non-CUSC Party.
(f) GBGF-I with an importing capability mode of operation such as DC Converters,
HVDC Systems and Electricity Storage Modules are required to have a
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
76 of 147
 predefined frequency response operating characteristic over the full import and
export range which is contained within the envelope defined by the red and blue
lines shown in Figure ECC.6.3.19.3. This characteristic shall be submitted to The
Company. For the avoidance of doubt, Grid Forming Plants which are only
capable of exporting Active Power to the Total System are only required to
operate over the exporting power region

.
Figure ECC.6.3.19.3
(vi) Each User or Non-CUSC Party shall design their GBGF-I system with an equivalent
Damping Factor of between 0.2 and 5.0. It is down to the User or Non-CUSC Party
to determine the Damping Factor, whose value shall be agreed with The Company.
It is typical for the Damping Factor to be less than 1.0, though this will be dependent
upon the parameters of the Grid Forming Plant and the equivalent System
impedance at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point.
The output of the Grid Forming Plant shall be designed such that following a
disturbance on the System, the Active Power output and Reactive Power output
shall be adequately damped. The damping shall be judged to be adequate if the
corresponding Active Power response to a disturbance decays with a response that
is in line with the response of second order system that has the same equivalent
Damping Factor.

(vii) Each GBGF-I shall be designed so as not to interact and affect the operation,
performance, safety or capability of other User’s Plant and Apparatus connected to
the Total System. To achieve this requirement, each User and Non-CUSC Party
shall be required to submit the data required in PC.A.5.8
ECC.6.3.19.4 In addition to the requirements of ECC.6.3.19.1 – ECC.6.3.19.3 each Grid Forming Plant
shall also be capable of: -
(i) satisfying the requirements of ECC.6.3.19.5.
(ii) operating at a minimum short circuit level of zero MVA at the Grid Entry Point or User
System Entry Point.
(iii) providing any additional quality of supply requirements, including but not limited to
reductions in the permitted frequency of Temporary Power System Over-voltage
events (TOV’s) and System Frequency bandwidth limitations, as agreed with The
Company. Such requirements will be pursuant to the terms of the Bilateral Agreement.
For the avoidance of doubt, this requirement is in addition the minimum quality of supply
requirements detailed in CC.6.1.5, CC.6.1.6 and CC.6.1.7 (as applicable) or ECC.6.1.5,
ECC.6.1.6 and ECC.6.1.7 (as applicable),
ECC.6.3.19.5 GBGF Fast Fault Current Injection

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

77 of 147
ECC.6.3.19.5.1 For any balanced fault which results in the positive phase sequence voltage falling below the
voltage levels specified in CC.6.1.4 or ECC.6.1.4 (as applicable) at the Grid Entry Point or
User System Entry Point (if Embedded), a Grid Forming Plant shall, as a minimum be
required to inject a reactive current of at least their Peak Current Rating when the voltage at
the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point drops to zero. For intermediate retained
voltages at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point, the injected reactive current
shall be on or above a line drawn from the bottom left hand corner of the normal voltage control
operating zone (shown in the rectangular green shaded area of Figure ECC.6.3.19.5(a)) and
the specified Peak Current Rating at a voltage of zero at the Grid Entry Point or User
System Entry Point as shown in Figure ECC.16.3.19.5(a). Typical examples of limit lines are
shown in Figure ECC.16.3.19.5(a) for a Peak Current Rating of 1.0pu where the injected
reactive current must be on or above the black line and a Peak Current Rating of 1.5pu where
injected reactive current must be on or above the red line.

Figure ECC.6.3.19.5(a)

ECC.6.3.19.5.2 Figure ECC.6.3.19.5(a) defines the reactive current to be supplied under a faulted condition
which shall be dependent upon the pre-fault operating condition and the retained voltage at
the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point voltage. For the avoidance of doubt, each
Grid Forming Plant (and any constituent element thereof), shall be required to inject a
reactive current which shall be not less than its pre-fault reactive current and which shall as a
minimum, increase each time the voltage at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point
(if Embedded) falls below 0.9pu whilst ensuring the overall rating of the Grid Forming Plant
(or constituent element thereof) shall not be exceeded.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

78 of 147
ECC.6.3.19.5.3 In addition to the requirements of ECC.6.3.19.5.1 and ECC.6.3.19.5.2, each Grid Forming
Plant shall be required to inject reactive current above the shaded area shown in Figure
ECC.6.3.19.5(b) when the retained voltage at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry
Point falls to 0pu. Where the retained voltage at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry
Point is below 0.9pu but above 0pu (for example when significant active current is drawn by
loads and/or resistive components arising from both local and remote faults or disturbances
from other Plant and Apparatus connected to the Total System) the injected reactive current
component shall be in accordance with Figure ECC.6.3.19.5(a).

Figure ECC.6.3.19.5(b)
ECC.6.3.19.5.4 The injected current shall be above the shaded area shown in Figure ECC.6.3.19.5(b) for
the duration of the fault clearance time which for faults on the Transmission System cleared
in Main Protection operating times shall be up to 140ms. Under any faulted condition,
where the voltage falls outside the limits specified in CC.6.1.4 or ECC.6.1.4 (as applicable),
there will be no requirement for each Grid Forming Plant or constituent part to exceed its
transient or steady state rating as defined in Table PC.A.5.8.2.
ECC.6.3.19.5.5 For any planned or switching events (as outlined in CC.6.1.7 or ECC.6.1.7 of the Grid Code)
or unplanned events which results in Temporary Power System Over Voltages (TOV’s),
each Grid Forming Plant will be required to satisfy the transient overvoltage limits specified
in the Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.6.3.19.5.6 For the purposes of this requirement, the maximum rated current will be the Peak Current
Rating declared by the Grid Forming Plant Owner in accordance with Table PC.A.5.8.2.
ECC.6.3.19.5.7 Each Grid Forming Plant shall be designed to ensure a smooth transition between voltage
control mode and Fault Ride Through mode in order to prevent the risk of instability which
could arise in the transition between the steady state voltage operating range as defined
under CC.6.1.4 or ECC.6.1.4 (as applicable) and abnormal conditions where the retained
voltage falls below 90% of nominal voltage. Such a requirement is necessary to ensure
adequate performance between the pre-fault operating condition of the Grid Forming Plant
and its subsequent behaviour under faulted conditions. Grid Forming Plant Owners are
required to both advise and agree with The Company the control strategy employed to
mitigate the risk of such instability.
ECC.6.3.19.5.8. Each Grid Forming Plant shall be designed to reduce the risk of transient over voltage
levels arising following clearance of the fault and in order to mitigate the risk of any form of
instability which could result. The requirements for the maximum transient overvoltage
withstand capability and associated time duration, shall be agreed between the User or Non-
CUSC Party and The Company as part of the Bilateral Agreement.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

79 of 147
ECC.6.3.19.5.9 In addition to the requirements of CC.6.3.15 or ECC.6.3.15, each Grid Forming Plant
Owner is required to confirm to The Company, their repeated ability to supply GBGF Fast
Fault Current Injection to the System each time the voltage at the Grid Entry Point or
User System Entry Point falls outside the limits specified in CC.6.1.4 or ECC.6.1.4 (as
applicable). Grid Forming Plant Owners should inform The Company of the maximum
number of repeated operations that can be performed under such conditions and any limiting
factors to repeated operation such as protection or thermal rating.
ECC.6.3.19.5.10 In the case of a Power Park Module or DC Connected Power Park Module, where it is not
practical to demonstrate the compliance requirements of ECC.6.3.19.5.1 to ECC.6.3.19.5.5
at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point, The Company will accept compliance
of the above requirements at the Power Park Unit terminals.
ECC.6.3.19.5.11 In the case of an unbalanced fault, each Grid Forming Plant, shall be required to inject
current which shall as a minimum increase with the fall in the unbalanced voltage without
exceeding the transient Peak Current Rating of the Grid Forming Plant (or constituent
element thereof).
ECC.6.3.19.5.12 In the case of an unbalanced fault, the User or Non-CUSC Party shall confirm to The
Company their ability to prevent transient overvoltages arising on the remaining healthy
phases and the control strategy employed.

ECC.6.4 General Network Operator And Non-Embedded Customer Requirements

ECC.6.4.1 This part of the Grid Code describes the technical and design criteria and performance
requirements for Network Operators and Non-Embedded Customers.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

80 of 147
 Neutral Earthing
ECC.6.4.2 At nominal System voltages of 132kV and above the higher voltage windings of three phase
transformers and transformer banks connected to the National Electricity Transmission
System must be star connected with the star point suitable for connection to earth. The
earthing and lower voltage winding arrangement shall be such as to ensure that the Earth
Fault Factor requirement of paragraph ECC.6.2.1.1 (b) will be met on the National Electricity
Transmission System at nominal System voltages of 132kV and above.
Frequency Sensitive Relays
ECC.6.4.3 As explained under OC6, each Network Operator and Non Embedded Customer, will make
arrangements that will facilitate automatic low Frequency Disconnection of Demand (based
on Annual ACS Conditions). ECC.A.5.5. of Appendix E5 includes specifications of the local
percentage Demand that shall be disconnected at specific frequencies. The manner in which
Demand subject to low Frequency disconnection will be split into discrete MW blocks is
specified in OC6.6. Technical requirements relating to Low Frequency Relays are also listed
in Appendix E5.
Operational Metering
ECC.6.4.4 Where The Company can reasonably demonstrate that an Embedded Medium Power
Station or Embedded HVDC System has a significant effect on the National Electricity
Transmission System, it may require the Network Operator within whose System the
Embedded Medium Power Station or Embedded HVDC System is situated to ensure that
the operational metering equipment described in ECC.6.5.6 is installed such that The
Company can receive the data referred to in ECC.6.5.6. In the case of an Embedded
Medium Power Station subject to, or proposed to be subject to a Bilateral Agreement, The
Company shall notify such Network Operator of the details of such installation in writing
within 3 months of being notified of the application to connect under CUSC and in the case of
an Embedded Medium Power Station not subject to, or not proposed to be subject to a
Bilateral Agreement in writing as a Site Specific Requirement in accordance with the
timescales in CUSC 6.5.5. In either case the Network Operator shall ensure that the data
referred to in ECC.6.5.6 is provided to The Company.
ECC.6.4.5 Reactive Power Requirements at each EU Grid Supply Point
ECC.6.4.5.1 At each EU Grid Supply Point, Non-Embedded Customers and Network Operators who
are EU Code Users shall ensure their Systems are capable of steady state operation within
the Reactive Power limits as specified in ECC.6.4.5.1(a) and ECC.6.4.5.1(b). Where The
Company requires a Reactive Power range which is broader than the limits defined in
ECC.6.4.5.1(a) and ECC.6.4.5.1(b), this will be agreed as a reasonable requirement through
joint assessment between the relevant EU Code User and The Company and justified in
accordance with the requirements of ECC.6.4.5.1(c), (d), (e) and (f). For Non-Embedded
Customers who are EU Code Users, the Reactive Power range at each EU Grid Supply
Point, under both importing and exporting conditions, shall not exceed 48% of the larger of
the Maximum Import Capability or Maximum Export Capability (0.9 Power Factor import
or export of Active Power), except in situations where either technical or financial system
benefits are demonstrated for Non-Embedded Customers and accepted by The Company
in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee.
(a) For Network Operators who are EU Code Users at each EU Grid Supply Point, the
Reactive Power range shall not exceed:
(i) 48 percent (i.e. 0.9 Power Factor) of the larger of the Maximum Import
Capability or Maximum Export Capability during Reactive Power import
(consumption); and
(ii) 48 percent (i.e. 0.9 Power Factor) of the larger of the Maximum Import
Capability or Maximum Export Capability during Reactive Power export
(production);

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

81 of 147
 Except in situations where either technical or financial system benefits are proved by The
Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee and the relevant
Network Operator through joint analysis.
(b) The Company in co-ordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee shall agree
with the Network Operator on the scope of the analysis, which shall determine the
optimal solution for Reactive Power exchange between their Systems at each EU Grid
Supply Point, taking adequately into consideration the specific System characteristics,
variable structure of power exchange, bidirectional flows and the Reactive Power
capabilities of the Network Operator’s System. Any proposed solutions shall take the
above issues into account and shall be agreed as a reasonable requirement through joint
assessment between the relevant Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer and
The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee. In the event
of a shared site between a GB Code User and EU Code User, the requirements would
generally be allocated to each User on the basis of their Demand in the case of a
Network Operator who is a GB Code User and applied on the basis of the Maximum
Import Capability or Maximum Export Capability as specified in ECC.6.4.5.1 in the
case of a Network Operator who is an EU Code User.
(c) The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee may specify
the Reactive Power capability range at the EU Grid Supply Point in another form other
than Power Factor.
(d) Notwithstanding the ability of Network Operators or Non Embedded Customers to
apply for a derogation from ECC.6.4.5.1 (e), where an EU Grid Supply Point is shared
between a Power Generating Module and a Non-Embedded Customers System, the
Reactive Power range would be apportioned to each EU Code User at their Connection
Point.
ECC.6.4.5.2 Where agreed with the Network Operator who is an EU Code User and justified though
appropriate System studies, The Company may reasonably require the Network
Operator not to export Reactive Power at the EU Grid Supply Point (at nominal
voltage) at an Active Power flow of less than 25 % of the Maximum Import Capability.
Where applicable, the Authority may require The Company in coordination with the
Relevant Transmission Licensee to justify its request through a joint analysis with the
relevant Network Operator and demonstrate that any such requirement is reasonable. If
this requirement is not justified based on the joint analysis, The Company in coordination
with the Relevant Transmission Licensee and the Network Operator shall agree on
necessary requirements according to the outcomes of a joint analysis.
ECC.6.4.5.3 Notwithstanding the requirements of ECC.6.4.5.1(b) and subject to agreement between
The Company and the relevant Network Operator there may be a requirement to
actively control the exchange of Reactive Power at the EU Grid Supply Point for the
benefit of the Total System. The Company and the relevant Network Operator shall
agree on a method to carry out this control, to ensure the justified level of security of
supply for both parties. Any such solution including joint study work and timelines would
be agreed between The Company and the relevant Network Operator as reasonable,
efficient and proportionate.
ECC.6.4.5.4 In accordance with ECC.6.4.5.3, the relevant Network Operator may require The
Company to consider its Network Operator’s System for Reactive Power
management. Any such requirement would need to be agreed between The Company
and the relevant Network Operator and justified by The Company.
ECC.6.4.6 System Restoration

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

82 of 147
ECC.6.4.6.1 Distribution Restoration Zone Plans are dependent upon Restoration Contractors who,
have an Anchor Restoration Contract which requires the capability to Start-Up from
Shutdown within 8 hours and to energise a part of a Network Operator’s System (and in
some cases could extend to energisation of parts of the Transmission System) upon
instruction from a relevant Network Operator, without an external electrical power supply.
Distribution Restoration Zone Plans may also be dependent upon Top Up Restoration
Contractors. Network Operators shall be responsible for instructing Restoration
Contractors in accordance with a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan once The Company
has issued an instruction to the Network Operator to activate a Distribution Restoration
Zone as provided for in OC9.4.7.8.1.
ECC.6.4.6.2. Where a need for a Distribution Restoration Zone is agreed in accordance with OC9, the
following requirements shall apply:-
(a) Where there is a requirement for two adjacent Distribution Restoration Zones to be
Synchronised as part of the wider System Restoration process and as catered for in
the relevant Distribution Restoration Zone Plans, appropriate Synchronising facilities
shall exist or shall be installed by the Network Operator or Relevant Transmission
Licensee as set out in OC9.4.7.6.3(d). Such Synchronising facilities shall be identified
as part of the development of the Restoration Plan as set out in OC9.4.7.6.1. Where a
Distribution Restoration Zone extends to Transmission Plant and Apparatus as
provided for in OC9.4.7.8.15, the responsibility for the provision of these facilities on
Transmission equipment is the responsibility of the Relevant Transmission Licensee.
(b) The Company and the Network Operator and Relevant Transmission Licensee
(where necessary) shall agree the monitoring and operational metering which shall be
installed in the Network Operator’s System, including but not limited to, operational
metering signals, status indications and the topology of the Network Operator’s System
falling within the scope of the Local Joint Restoration Plan or Distribution Restoration
Zone Plan, and the output and status of Restoration Contractor’s Plant and
Apparatus. Where appropriate, some of this information may be supplied as outputs from
the Distribution Restoration Zone Control System within the Distribution Restoration
Zone where one is installed. This data shall be provided to The Company and Relevant
Transmission Licensee (where necessary) through appropriate data links as agreed
between The Company and the Network Operator.
(c) Network Operators shall have secure, robust and power resilient communications
systems between their Control Centres and the point at which Restoration Contractor’s
Plant and Apparatus is connected to the Network Operator’s System as provided for in
ECC.7.10 and ECC.7.11.

ECC.6.5 Communications Plant

ECC.6.5.1 In order to ensure control of the National Electricity Transmission System,
telecommunications between Users and The Company must (including in respect of any
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the OTSUA Transfer Time), if required by The Company,
be established in accordance with the requirements set down below.
ECC.6.5.2 Control Telephony and System Telephony
ECC.6.5.2.1 Control Telephony provides secure point to point telephony for routine Control Calls, priority
Control Calls and emergency Control Calls.
ECC.6.5.2.2 System Telephony uses an appropriate public communications network to provide telephony
for Control Calls, inclusive of emergency Control Calls. For the avoidance of doubt, System
Telephony could include but shall not be limited to: an analogue or digital telephone line; a
mobile telephone or an internet-based voice communication system, all of which would be
connected to an appropriate public communications network.

ECC.6.5.2.3 Calls made and received over Control Telephony and System Telephony may be recorded
and subsequently replayed for commercial and operational reasons.
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
83 of 147
ECC.6.5.3 Not Used
ECC.6.5.4 Obligations in respect of Control Telephony and System Telephony
ECC.6.5.4.1 Where The Company requires Control Telephony, Users are required to use the Control
Telephony to communicate with The Company and / or the Transmission Licensees’ in
respect of all Connection Points with the National Electricity Transmission System, all
Embedded Large Power Stations, Embedded HVDC Systems and Network Operator’s
Control Centres as appropriate. The Company shall provide Control Telephony interface
equipment at the User’s Control Point or the Network Operators Control Centre as
appropriate. Where the EU Code User’s or Network Operators Control Centre telephony
equipment is not capable of providing the required facilities or is otherwise incompatible with
the Transmission Control Telephony, The Company shall provide a Control Telephony
handset(s). Details of and relating to the Control Telephony requirements are contained in
the Bilateral Agreement with EU Code User’s.
ECC.6.5.4.2 Where in The Company’s sole opinion the installation of Control Telephony is not
practicable at a User’s Control Point(s), The Company shall specify in the Bilateral
Agreement whether System Telephony is required. Where System Telephony is required
by The Company, the User shall ensure that System Telephony is installed.
ECC.6.5.4.3 Where System Telephony is installed, EU Code Users are required to use the System
Telephony for communication with The Company and the relevant Transmission
Licensees’ Control Engineers in respect of those Control Point(s) for which it has been
installed. Details of and relating to the System Telephony required are contained in the
Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.6.5.4.4 Where Control Telephony or System Telephony is installed, routine testing of such facilities
may be required by The Company (not normally more than once in any calendar month). The
User and The Company shall use reasonable endeavours to agree a test programme and
where The Company requests the assistance of the User in performing the agreed test
programme the User shall provide such assistance. The Company requires the EU Code
User to test the backup power supplies feeding its Control Telephony facilities at least once
every 5 years.

ECC.6.5.4.5 Control Telephony and System Telephony shall only be used for the purposes of
operational voice communication between The Company and the relevant User.
ECC.6.5.4.6 Control Telephony contains emergency calling functionality to be used for operational
communication only under normal and emergency conditions. Functionality enables The
Company and Users to utilise a priority call in the event of an emergency. The Company
and EU Code Users shall only use such priority call functionality for urgent operational
communications.
ECC.6.5.5 Technical Requirements for Control Telephony and System Telephony
ECC.6.5.5.1 Detailed information on the technical interfaces and support requirements for Control
Telephony is provided in the Control Telephony Electrical Standard identified in the Annex
to the General Conditions. Where additional information, or information in relation to Control
Telephony applicable in Scotland, is requested by Users, this will be provided, where
possible, by The Company.
ECC.6.5.5.2 System Telephony shall consist of a dedicated telephone connected to an appropriate public
communications network that shall be configured by the relevant User. The Company shall
provide a dedicated free phone number (UK only), for the purposes of receiving incoming calls
to The Company, which Users shall utilise for System Telephony. System Telephony shall
only be utilised by The Company’s Control Engineer and the User’s Responsible
Engineer/Operator for the purposes of operational communications.
ECC.6.5.6 Operational Metering

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

84 of 147
ECC.6.5.6.1 It is an essential requirement for The Company and Network Operators to have visibility of
the real time output and status of indications of User’s Plant and Apparatus so they can
control the operation of the System.
ECC.6.5.6.2 Type B, Type C and Type D Power Park Modules, HVDC Equipment, Network Operators
and Non Embedded Customers are required to be capable of exchanging operational
metering data with The Company and Relevant Transmission Licensees (as applicable)
with time stamping. Time stamping would generally be to a sampling rate of 1 second or better
unless otherwise specified by The Company in the Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.6.5.6.3 The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee shall specify in the
Bilateral Agreement the operational metering signals to be provided by the EU Generator,
HVDC System Owner, Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer. In the case of
Network Operators and Non-Embedded Customers, detailed specifications relating to the
operational metering standards at EU Grid Supply Points and the data required are published
as Electrical Standards in the Annex to the General Conditions.
ECC.6.5.6.4 (a) The Company or The Relevant Transmission Licensee, as applicable, shall provide
system control and data acquisition (SCADA) outstation interface equipment. Each EU
Code User shall provide such voltage, current, Frequency, Active Power and Reactive
Power measurement outputs and plant status indications and alarms to the
Transmission SCADA outstation interface equipment as required by The Company in
accordance with the terms of the Bilateral Agreement. In the case of OTSDUW, the
User shall provide such SCADA outstation interface equipment and voltage, current,
Frequency, Active Power and Reactive Power measurement outputs and plant status
indications and alarms to the SCADA outstation interface equipment as required by The
Company in accordance with the terms of the Bilateral Agreement.
(b) For the avoidance of doubt, for Active Power and Reactive Power measurements,
circuit breaker and disconnector status indications from:
(i) CCGT Modules from Type B, Type C and Type D Power Generating Modules,
the outputs and status indications must each be provided to The Company on an
individual CCGT Unit basis. In addition, where identified in the Bilateral
Agreement, Active Power and Reactive Power measurements from Unit
Transformers and/or Station Transformers must be provided.
(ii) For Type B, Type C and Type D Power Park Modules the outputs and status
indications must each be provided to The Company on an individual Power Park
Module basis. In addition, where identified in the Bilateral Agreement, Active
Power and Reactive Power measurements from station transformers must be
provided.
(iii) In respect of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, the outputs and status indications
must be provided to The Company for each piece of electrical equipment. In
addition, where identified in the Bilateral Agreement, Active Power and Reactive
Power measurements at the Interface Point must be provided.
(c) For the avoidance of doubt, the requirements of ECC.6.5.6.4(a) in the case of a Cascade
Hydro Scheme will be provided for each Generating Unit forming part of that Cascade
Hydro Scheme. In the case of Embedded Generating Units forming part of a Cascade
Hydro Scheme the data may be provided by means other than the SCADA outstation
located at the Power Station, such as, with the agreement of the Network Operator in
whose system such Embedded Generating Unit is located, from the Network
Operator’s SCADA system to The Company. Details of such arrangements will be
contained in the relevant Bilateral Agreements between The Company and the
Generator and the Network Operator.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

85 of 147
 (d) In the case of a Power Park Module, additional energy input signals (e.g. wind speed,
and wind direction) may be specified in the Bilateral Agreement. A Power Available
signal will also be specified in the Bilateral Agreement. The signals would be used to
establish the potential level of energy input from the Intermittent Power Source for
monitoring pursuant to ECC.6.6.1 and Ancillary Services and will, in the case of a wind
farm, be used to provide The Company with advanced warning of excess wind speed
shutdown and to determine the level of Headroom available from Power Park Modules
for the purposes of calculating response and reserve. For the avoidance of doubt, the
Power Available signal would be automatically provided to The Company and represent
the sum of the potential output of all available and operational Power Park Units within
the Power Park Module. The refresh rate of the Power Available signal shall be
specified in the Bilateral Agreement. In the case of an Electricity Storage Module, the
requirement to provide a Power Available Signal when the Plant is in both an importing
and exporting mode of operation would be specified in the Bilateral Agreement.
(e) In the case of an Electricity Storage Module, additional input signals (e.g. state of energy
(MWhr, and system availability) may be specified in the Bilateral Agreement. A Power
Available signal will also be specified in the Bilateral Agreement in accordance with the
requirements of ECC.6.5.6.4(d).
ECC.6.5.6.5 In addition to the requirements of the Balancing Codes, each HVDC Converter unit of an
HVDC system shall be equipped with an automatic controller capable of receiving instructions
from The Company. This automatic controller shall be capable of operating the HVDC
Converter units of the HVDC System in a coordinated way. The Company shall specify the
automatic controller hierarchy per HVDC Converter unit.
ECC.6.5.6.6 The automatic controller of the HVDC System referred to in paragraph ECC.6.5.6.5 shall be
capable of sending the following signal types to The Company (where applicable) :
(a) operational metering signals, providing at least the following:
(i) start-up signals;
(ii) AC and DC voltage measurements;
(iii) AC and DC current measurements;
(iv) Active and Reactive Power measurements on the AC side;
(v) DC power measurements;
(vi) HVDC Converter unit level operation in a multi-pole type HVDC Converter;
(vii) elements and topology status; and
(viii) Frequency Sensitive Mode, Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode Overfrequency and
Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode Underfrequency Active Power ranges (where
applicable).
(b) alarm signals, providing at least the following:
(i) emergency blocking;
(ii) ramp blocking;
(iii) fast Active Power reversal (where applicable)
ECC.6.5.6.7 The automatic controller referred to in ECC.6.5.6.5 shall be capable of receiving the following signal
types from The Company (where applicable) :
(a) operational metering signals, receiving at least the following:
(i) start-up command;
(ii) Active Power setpoints;
(iii) Frequency Sensitive Mode settings;
(iv) Reactive Power, voltage or similar setpoints;

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

86 of 147
 (v) Reactive Power control modes;
(vi) power oscillation damping control; and

(b) alarm signals, receiving at least the following:

(i) emergency blocking command;
(ii) ramp blocking command;
(iii) Active Power flow direction; and
(iv)) fast Active Power reversal command.
ECC.6.5.6.8 With regards to operational metering signals, the resolution and refresh rate required would be 1
second or better unless otherwise agreed with The Company
ECC.6.5.6.9 In addition to the above requirements, Restoration Contractors shall be capable of providing
the operational metering requirements specified in the Anchor Restoration Contract or Top Up
Restoration Contract during System Restoration. In particular for renewable generation, the
volume of primary energy such as wind speed and in the case of storage, storage capacity shall
be provided.
Instructor Facilities
ECC.6.5.7 The EU Code User shall accommodate Instructor Facilities provided by The Company for
the receipt of operational messages relating to System conditions.
Electronic Data Communication Facilities
ECC.6.5.8 (a) All BM Participants must ensure that appropriate electronic data communication facilities
are in place to permit the submission of data, as required by the Grid Code, to The
Company.
(b) In addition,
(1) any User that wishes to participate in the Balancing Mechanism;
or
(2) any BM Participant in respect of its BM Units at a Power Station and the BM
Participant is required to provide all Part 1 System Ancillary Services in
accordance with ECC.8.1 (unless The Company has otherwise agreed)
must ensure that appropriate automatic logging devices are installed at the Control
Points of its BM Units to submit data to and to receive instructions from The Company,
as required by the Grid Code. For the avoidance of doubt, in the case of an
Interconnector User the Control Point will be at the Control Centre of the appropriate
Externally Interconnected System Operator.

(c) Detailed specifications of these required electronic facilities will be provided by The
Company on request and they are listed as Electrical Standards in the Annex to the
General Conditions.
Facsimile Machines
ECC.6.5.9 Each User and The Company shall provide a facsimile machine or machines:
(a) in the case of Generators, at the Control Point of each Power Station and at its Trading
Point;
(b) in the case of The Company and Network Operators, at the Control Centre(s); and
(c) in the case of Non-Embedded Customers and HVDC Equipment owners at the Control
Point.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

87 of 147
 Each User shall notify, prior to connection to the System of the User's Plant and Apparatus,
The Company of its or their telephone number or numbers, and will notify The Company of
any changes. Prior to connection to the System of the User's Plant and Apparatus The
Company shall notify each User of the telephone number or numbers of its facsimile machine
or machines and will notify any changes.
ECC.6.5.10 Busbar Voltage
The Relevant Transmission Licensee shall, subject as provided below, provide each
Generator or HVDC System Owner at each Grid Entry Point where one of its Power
Stations or HVDC Systems is connected with appropriate voltage signals to enable the
Generator or HVDC System owner to obtain the necessary information to permit its Power
Generating Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) or HVDC System to
be Synchronised to the National Electricity Transmission System. The term "voltage
signal" shall mean in this context, a point of connection on (or wire or wires from) a relevant
part of Transmission Plant and/or Apparatus at the Grid Entry Point, to which the
Generator or HVDC System Owner, with The Company's agreement (not to be
unreasonably withheld) in relation to the Plant and/or Apparatus to be attached, will be able
to attach its Plant and/or Apparatus (normally a wire or wires) in order to obtain measurement
outputs in relation to the busbar.
ECC.6.5.11 Bilingual Message Facilities
(a) A Bilingual Message Facility is the method by which the User’s Responsible
Engineer/Operator, the Externally Interconnected System Operator and The
Company’s Control Engineers communicate clear and unambiguous information in two
languages for the purposes of control of the Total System in both normal and emergency
operating conditions.
(b) A Bilingual Message Facility, where required, will provide up to two hundred pre-defined
messages with up to five hundred and sixty characters each. A maximum of one minute
is allowed for the transmission to, and display of, the selected message at any destination.
The standard messages must be capable of being displayed at any combination of
locations and can originate from any of these locations. Messages displayed in the UK
will be displayed in the English language.
(c) Detailed information on a Bilingual Message Facility and suitable equipment required for
individual User applications will be provided by The Company upon request.
ECC.6.6 Monitoring
ECC.6.6.1 System Monitoring
ECC.6.6.1.1 Each Type C and Type D Power Generating Module including DC Connected Power Park
Modules shall be equipped with a facility to provide fault recording and monitoring of dynamic
system behaviour. These requirements are necessary to record conditions during System
faults and detect poorly damped power oscillations. This facility shall record the following
parameters:
— voltage,
— Active Power,
— Reactive Power, and
— Frequency.
ECC.6.6.1.2 Detailed specifications for fault recording and dynamic system monitoring equipment including
triggering criteria and sample rates are listed as Electrical Standards in the Annex to the
General Conditions. For Dynamic System Monitoring, the specification for the
communication protocol and recorded data shall also be included in the Electrical Standard.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

88 of 147
ECC.6.6.1.3 The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee shall specify any
requirements for Power Quality Monitoring in the Bilateral Agreement. The power quality
parameters to be monitored, the communication protocols for the recorded data and the time
frames for compliance shall be agreed between The Company, the Relevant Transmission
Licensee and EU Generator.
ECC.6.6.1.4 HVDC Systems shall be equipped with a facility to provide fault recording and dynamic system
behaviour monitoring of the following parameters for each of its HVDC Converter Stations:
(a) AC and DC voltage;
(b) AC and DC current;
(c) Active Power;
(d) Reactive Power; and
(e) Frequency.
ECC.6.6.1.5 The Company in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee may specify
quality of supply parameters to be complied with by the HVDC System, provided a reasonable
prior notice is given.
ECC.6.6.1.6 The particulars of the fault recording equipment referred to in ECC.6.6.1.4, including analogue
and digital channels, the settings, including triggering criteria and the sampling rates, shall be
agreed between the HVDC System Owner and The Company in coordination with the
Relevant Transmission Licensee.
ECC.6.6.1.7 All dynamic system behaviour monitoring equipment shall include an oscillation trigger,
specified by The Company, in coordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee, with
the purpose of detecting poorly damped power oscillations.
ECC.6.6.1.8 The facilities for quality of supply and dynamic system behaviour monitoring shall include
arrangements for the HVDC System Owner and The Company and/or Relevant
Transmission Licensee to access the information electronically. The communications
protocols for recorded data shall be agreed between the HVDC System Owner, The
Company and the Relevant Transmission Licensee.
ECC.6.6.1.9 In order to accurately monitor the performance of a Grid Forming Plant, each Grid Forming
Plant shall be equipped with a facility to accurately record the following parameters at a rate
of 10ms : -
- System Frequency using a nominated algorithm as defined by The Company
- The ROCOF rate using a nominated algorithm as defined by The Company
based on a 500ms rolling average
- A technique for recording the Grid Phase Jump Angle by using either a
nominated algorithm as defined by The Company or an algorithm that records
the time period of each half cycle with a time resolution of 10 microseconds. For
a 50Hz System, a 1 degree phase jump is a time period change of 55.6
microseconds.

ECC.6.6.1.10 Detailed specifications for Grid Forming Capability Plant dynamic performance including
triggering criteria, sample rates, the communication protocol and recorded data shall be
specified by The Company in the Bilateral Agreement.

ECC.6.6.2 Frequency Response Monitoring

ECC.6.6.2.1 Each Type C and Type D Power Generating Module including DC Connected Power Park
Modules shall be fitted with equipment capable of monitoring the real time Active Power
output of a Power Generating Module when operating in Frequency Sensitive Mode.
ECC.6.6.2.2
Detailed specifications of the Active Power Frequency response requirements including the
communication requirements are listed as Electrical Standards in the Annex to the General
Conditions.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

89 of 147
ECC.6.6.2.3 The Company in co-ordination with the Relevant Transmission Licensee shall specify
additional signals to be provided by the EU Generator by monitoring and recording devices in
order to verify the performance of the Active Power Frequency response provision of
participating Power Generating Modules.

ECC.6.6.3 Compliance Monitoring

ECC.6.6.3.1 For all on site monitoring by The Company of witnessed tests pursuant to the CP or OC5 or
ECP the User shall provide suitable test signals as outlined in either OC5.A.1or ECP.A.4 (as
applicable).
ECC.6.6.3.2 The signals which shall be provided by the User to The Company for onsite monitoring shall
be of the following resolution, unless otherwise agreed by The Company:
(i) 1 Hz for reactive range tests
(ii) 10 Hz for frequency control tests
(iii) 100 Hz for voltage control tests
(iv) 1 kHz for Grid Forming Plant signals including fast fault current measurements
(v) 100Hz for the other Grid Forming Plant tests carried out in accordance with ECC.6.6.1.9

ECC.6.6.3.3 The User will provide all relevant signals for this purpose in the form of d.c. voltages within the
range -10V to +10V. In exceptional circumstances some signals may be accepted as d.c.
voltages within the range -60V to +60V with prior agreement between the User and The
Company. All signals shall:
(i) in the case of an Onshore Power Generating Module or Onshore HVDC Convertor
Station, be suitably terminated in a single accessible location at the Generator or HVDC
Converter Station owner’s site.
(ii) in the case of an Offshore Power Generating Module and OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus, be transmitted onshore without attenuation, delay or filtering which would
result in the inability to fully demonstrate the objectives of the test, or identify any potential
safety or plant instability issues, and be suitably terminated in a single robust location
normally located at or near the onshore Interface Point of the Offshore Transmission
System to which it is connected.
ECC.6.6.3.4 All signals shall be suitably scaled across the range. The following scaling would (unless The
Company notify the User otherwise) be acceptable to The Company:
(a) 0MW to Maximum Capacity or Interface Point Capacity 0-8V dc
(b) Maximum leading Reactive Power to maximum lagging Reactive Power -8 to 8V dc
(c) 48 – 52Hz as -8 to 8V dc
(d) Nominal terminal or connection point voltage -10% to +10% as -8 to 8V dc
ECC.6.6.3.5 The User shall provide to The Company a 230V power supply adjacent to the signal terminal
location.

ECC.7 SITE RELATED CONDITIONS

ECC.7.1 Not used.
ECC.7.2 Responsibilities For Safety
ECC.7.2.1 Any User entering and working on its Plant and/or Apparatus (including, until the OTSUA
Transfer Time, any OTSUA) on a Transmission Site will work to the Safety Rules of the
Relevant Transmission Licensee, as advised by The Company.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

90 of 147
ECC.7.2.2 For User Sites, The Company shall procure that the Relevant Transmission Licensee
entering and working on Transmission Plant and/or Apparatus on a User Site will work to
the User’s Safety Rules.
ECC.7.2.3 A User may, with a minimum of six weeks notice, apply to The Company for permission to
work according to that Users own Safety Rules when working on its Plant and/or Apparatus
on a Transmission Site rather than those set out in ECC.7.2.1. If The Company is of the
opinion that the User's Safety Rules provide for a level of safety commensurate with those
set out in ECC.7.2.1, The Company will notify the User, in writing, that, with effect from the
date requested by the User, the User may use its own Safety Rules when working on its
Plant and/or Apparatus on the Transmission Site. For a Transmission Site, in forming its
opinion, The Company will seek the opinion of the Relevant Transmission Licensee. Until
receipt of such written approval from The Company, the User will continue to use the Safety
Rules as set out in ECC.7.2.1.
ECC.7.2.4 In the case of a User Site, The Company may, with a minimum of six weeks notice, apply to
a User for permission for the Relevant Transmission Licensee to work according to the
Relevant Transmission Licensee’s Safety Rules when working on Transmission Plant
and/or Apparatus on that User Site, rather than the User’s Safety Rules. If the User is of
the opinion that the Relevant Transmission Licensee’s Safety Rules, provide for a level of
safety commensurate with that of that User’s Safety Rules, it will notify The Company, in
writing, that, with effect from the date requested by The Company, that the Relevant
Transmission Licensee may use its own Safety Rules when working on its Transmission
Plant and/or Apparatus on that User’s Site. Until receipt of such written approval from the
User, The Company shall procure that the Relevant Transmission Licensee shall continue
to use the User’s Safety Rules.
ECC.7.2.5 For a Transmission Site, if The Company gives its approval for the User’s Safety Rules to
apply to the User when working on its Plant and/or Apparatus, that does not imply that the
User’s Safety Rules will apply to entering the Transmission Site and access to the User’s
Plant and/or Apparatus on that Transmission Site. Bearing in mind the Relevant
Transmission Licensee’s responsibility for the whole Transmission Site, entry and access
will always be in accordance with the Relevant Transmission Licensee’s site access
procedures. For a User Site, if the User gives its approval for Relevant Transmission
Licensee Safety Rules to apply to the Relevant Transmission Licensee when working on
its Plant and Apparatus, that does not imply that the Relevant Transmission Licensee’s
Safety Rules will apply to entering the User Site, and access to the Transmission Plant and
Apparatus on that User Site. Bearing in mind the User’s responsibility for the whole User
Site, entry and access will always be in accordance with the User’s site access procedures.
ECC.7.2.6 For User Sites, Users shall notify The Company of any Safety Rules that apply to the
Relevant Transmission Licensee’s staff working on User Sites. The Company shall
procure that the Relevant Transmission Licensee shall notify Users of any Safety Rules
that apply to the User’s staff working on the Transmission Site.
ECC.7.2.7 Each Site Responsibility Schedule must have recorded on it the Safety Rules which apply
to each item of Plant and/or Apparatus.
ECC.7.2.8 In the case of OTSUA a User Site or Transmission Site shall, for the purposes of this
ECC.7.2, include a site at which there is an Interface Point until the OTSUA Transfer Time
when it becomes part of the National Electricity Transmission System.
ECC.7.3 Site Responsibility Schedules
ECC.7.3.1 In order to inform site operational staff and The Company’s Control Engineers of agreed
responsibilities for Plant and/or Apparatus at the operational interface, a Site Responsibility
Schedule shall be produced for Connection Sites (and in the case of OTSUA, until the
OTSUA Transfer Time, Interface Sites) for The Company, the Relevant Transmission
Licensee and Users with whom they interface.
ECC.7.3.2 The format, principles and basic procedure to be used in the preparation of Site
Responsibility Schedules are set down in Appendix 1.
ECC.7.4 Operation And Gas Zone Diagrams
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
91 of 147
 Operation Diagrams
ECC.7.4.1 An Operation Diagram shall be prepared for each Connection Site at which a Connection
Point exists (and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, by User’s for each Interface
Point) using, where appropriate, the graphical symbols shown in Part 1A of Appendix 2.
Users should also note that the provisions of OC11 apply in certain circumstances.
ECC.7.4.2 The Operation Diagram shall include all HV Apparatus and the connections to all external
circuits and incorporate numbering, nomenclature and labelling, as set out in OC11. At those
Connection Sites (or in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, Interface Points)
where gas-insulated metal enclosed switchgear and/or other gas-insulated HV Apparatus is
installed, those items must be depicted within an area delineated by a chain dotted line which
intersects gas-zone boundaries. The nomenclature used shall conform with that used on the
relevant Connection Site and circuit (and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus,
Interface Point and circuit). The Operation Diagram (and the list of technical details) is
intended to provide an accurate record of the layout and circuit interconnections, ratings and
numbering and nomenclature of HV Apparatus and related Plant.
ECC.7.4.3 A non-exhaustive guide to the types of HV Apparatus to be shown in the Operation Diagram
is shown in Part 2 of Appendix 2, together with certain basic principles to be followed unless
equivalent principles are approved by The Company.
Gas Zone Diagrams
ECC.7.4.4 A Gas Zone Diagram shall be prepared for each Connection Site at which a Connection
Point (and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, by User’s for an Interface Point)
exists where gas-insulated switchgear and/or other gas-insulated HV Apparatus is utilised.
They shall use, where appropriate, the graphical symbols shown in Part 1B of Appendix 2.
ECC.7.4.5 The nomenclature used shall conform with that used in the relevant Connection Site and
circuit (and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, relevant Interface Point and
circuit).
ECC.7.4.6 The basic principles set out in Part 2 of Appendix 2 shall be followed in the preparation of Gas
Zone Diagrams unless equivalent principles are approved by The Company.
Preparation of Operation and Gas Zone Diagrams for Users' Sites and Transmission Interface
Sites
ECC.7.4.7 In the case of a User Site, the User shall prepare and submit to The Company, an Operation
Diagram for all HV Apparatus on the User side of the Connection Point (and in the case of
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, on what will be the Offshore Transmission side of the
Connection Point and the Interface Point) and The Company shall provide the User with
an Operation Diagram for all HV Apparatus on the Transmission side of the Connection
Point (and in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus on what will be the Onshore
Transmission side of the Interface Point, in accordance with the timing requirements of the
Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement prior to the Completion Date under
the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement.
ECC.7.4.8 The User will then prepare, produce and distribute, using the information submitted on the
User's Operation Diagram and The Company’s Operation Diagram, a composite
Operation Diagram for the complete Connection Site (and in the case of OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus, Interface Point), also in accordance with the timing requirements of the
Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement .
ECC.7.4.9 The provisions of ECC.7.4.7 and ECC.7.4.8 shall apply in relation to Gas Zone Diagrams
where gas-insulated switchgear and/or other gas-insulated HV Apparatus is utilised.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

92 of 147
 Preparation of Operation and Gas Zone Diagrams for Transmission Sites
ECC.7.4.10 In the case of an Transmission Site, the User shall prepare and submit to The Company an
Operation Diagram for all HV Apparatus on the User side of the Connection Point, in
accordance with the timing requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction
Agreement.
ECC.7.4.11 The Company will then prepare, produce and distribute, using the information submitted on
the User's Operation Diagram, a composite Operation Diagram for the complete
Connection Site, also in accordance with the timing requirements of the Bilateral Agreement
and/or Construction Agreement .
ECC.7.4.12 The provisions of ECC.7.4.10 and ECC.7.4.11 shall apply in relation to Gas Zone Diagrams
where gas-insulated switchgear and/or other gas-insulated HV Apparatus is utilised.
ECC.7.4.13 Changes to Operation and Gas Zone Diagrams
ECC.7.4.13.1 When The Company has decided that it wishes to install new HV Apparatus or it wishes to
change the existing numbering or nomenclature of Transmission HV Apparatus at a
Transmission Site, The Company will (unless it gives rise to a Modification under the
CUSC, in which case the provisions of the CUSC as to the timing apply) one month prior to
the installation or change, send to each such User a revised Operation Diagram of that
Transmission Site, incorporating the new Transmission HV Apparatus to be installed and
its numbering and nomenclature or the changes, as the case may be. OC11 is also relevant
to certain Apparatus.
ECC.7.4.13.2 When a User has decided that it wishes to install new HV Apparatus, or it wishes to change
the existing numbering or nomenclature of its HV Apparatus at its User Site, the User will
(unless it gives rise to a Modification under the CUSC, in which case the provisions of the
CUSC as to the timing apply) one month prior to the installation or change, send to The
Company a revised Operation Diagram of that User Site incorporating the EU Code User
HV Apparatus to be installed and its numbering and nomenclature or the changes as the case
may be. OC11 is also relevant to certain Apparatus.
ECC.7.4.13.3 The provisions of ECC.7.4.13.1 and ECC.7.4.13.2 shall apply in relation to Gas Zone
Diagrams where gas-insulated switchgear and/or other gas-insulated HV Apparatus is
installed.
Validity
ECC.7.4.14 (a) The composite Operation Diagram prepared by The Company or the User, as the case
may be, will be the definitive Operation Diagram for all operational and planning activities
associated with the Connection Site. If a dispute arises as to the accuracy of the
composite Operation Diagram, a meeting shall be held at the Connection Site, as soon
as reasonably practicable, between The Company and the User, to endeavour to resolve
the matters in dispute.
(b) The composite Operation Diagram prepared by The Company or the User, as the case
may be, will be the definitive Operation Diagram for all operational and planning activities
associated with the Interface Point until the OTSUA Transfer Time. If a dispute arises
as to the accuracy of the composite Operation Diagram prior to the OTSUA Transfer
Time, a meeting shall be held at the Interface Point, as soon as reasonably practicable,
between The Company and the User, to endeavour to resolve the matters in dispute.
(c) An equivalent rule shall apply for Gas Zone Diagrams where they exist for a Connection
Site.
ECC.7.4.15 In the case of OTSUA, a User Site and Transmission Site shall, for the purposes of this
ECC.7.4, include a site at which there is an Interface Point until the OTSUA Transfer Time
when it becomes part of the National Electricity Transmission System and references to
HV Apparatus in this ECC.7.4 shall include references to HV OTSUA.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

93 of 147
ECC.7.5 Site Common Drawings
ECC.7.5.1 Site Common Drawings will be prepared for each Connection Site (and in the case of
OTSDUW, each Interface Point) and will include Connection Site (and in the case of
OTSDUW, Interface Point) layout drawings, electrical layout drawings, common
Protection/control drawings and common services drawings.
Preparation of Site Common Drawings for a User Site and Transmission Interface Site
ECC.7.5.2 In the case of a User Site, The Company shall prepare and submit to the User, Site Common
Drawings for the Transmission side of the Connection Point (and in the case of OTSDUW
Plant and Apparatus, on what will be the Onshore Transmission side of the Interface
Point,) and the User shall prepare and submit to The Company, Site Common Drawings
for the User side of the Connection Point (and in the case of OTSDUW, on what will be the
Offshore Transmission side of the Interface Point) in accordance with the timing
requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement.
ECC.7.5.3 The User will then prepare, produce and distribute, using the information submitted on the
Transmission Site Common Drawings, Site Common Drawings for the complete
Connection Site (and in the case of OTSDUW, Interface Point) in accordance with the timing
requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement .
Preparation of Site Common Drawings for a Transmission Site
ECC.7.5.4 In the case of a Transmission Site, the User will prepare and submit to The Company Site
Common Drawings for the User side of the Connection Point in accordance with the timing
requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement.
ECC.7.5.5 The Company will then prepare, produce and distribute, using the information submitted in
the User's Site Common Drawings, Site Common Drawings for the complete Connection
Site in accordance with the timing requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and/or
Construction Agreement.
ECC.7.5.6 When a User becomes aware that it is necessary to change any aspect of the Site Common
Drawings at a Connection Site (and in the case of OTSDUW, Interface Point) it will:
(a) if it is a User Site, as soon as reasonably practicable, prepare, produce and distribute
revised Site Common Drawings for the complete Connection Site (and in the case of
OTSDUW, Interface Point); and
(b) if it is a Transmission Site, as soon as reasonably practicable, prepare and submit to
The Company revised Site Common Drawings for the User side of the Connection
Point (and in the case of OTSDUW, Interface Point) and The Company will then, as
soon as reasonably practicable, prepare, produce and distribute, using the information
submitted in the User's Site Common Drawings, revised Site Common Drawings for
the complete Connection Site (and in the case of OTSDUW, Interface Point).
In either case, if in the User's reasonable opinion the change can be dealt with by it notifying
The Company in writing of the change and for each party to amend its copy of the Site
Common Drawings (or where there is only one set, for the party holding that set to amend
it), then it shall so notify and each party shall so amend. If the change gives rise to a
Modification under the CUSC, the provisions of the CUSC as to timing will apply.
ECC.7.5.7 When The Company becomes aware that it is necessary to change any aspect of the Site
Common Drawings at a Connection Site(and in the case of OTSDUW, Interface Point) it
will:
(a) if it is a Transmission Site, as soon as reasonably practicable, prepare, produce and
distribute revised Site Common Drawings for the complete Connection Site (and in the
case of OTSDUW, Interface Point); and

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

94 of 147
 (b) if it is a User Site, as soon as reasonably practicable, prepare and submit to the User
revised Site Common Drawings for the Transmission side of the Connection Point (in
the case of OTSDUW, Interface Point) and the User will then, as soon as reasonably
practicable, prepare, produce and distribute, using the information submitted in the
Transmission Site Common Drawings, revised Site Common Drawings for the
complete Connection Site (and in the case of OTSDUW, Interface Point).
In either case, if in The Company's reasonable opinion the change can be dealt with by it
notifying the User in writing of the change and for each party to amend its copy of the Site
Common Drawings (or where there is only one set, for the party holding that set to amend
it), then it shall so notify and each party shall so amend. If the change gives rise to a
Modification under the CUSC, the provisions of the CUSC as to timing will apply.
Validity
ECC.7.5.8 (a) The Site Common Drawings for the complete Connection Site prepared by the User
or The Company, as the case may be, will be the definitive Site Common Drawings for
all operational and planning activities associated with the Connection Site. If a dispute
arises as to the accuracy of the Site Common Drawings, a meeting shall be held at the
Site, as soon as reasonably practicable, between The Company and the User, to
endeavour to resolve the matters in dispute.
(b) The Site Common Drawing prepared by The Company or the User, as the case may
be, will be the definitive Site Common Drawing for all operational and planning activities
associated with the Interface Point until the OTSUA Transfer Time. If a dispute arises
as to the accuracy of the composite Operation Diagram prior to the OTSUA Transfer
Time, a meeting shall be held at the Interface Point, as soon as reasonably practicable,
between The Company and the User, to endeavour to resolve the matters in dispute.
ECC.7.5.9 In the case of OTSUA, a User Site and Transmission Site shall, for the purposes of this
ECC.7.5, include a site at which there is an Interface Point until the OTSUA Transfer Time
when it becomes part of the National Electricity Transmission System.
ECC.7.6 Access
ECC.7.6.1 The provisions relating to access to Transmission Sites by Users, and to Users' Sites by
Relevant Transmission Licensees, are set out in each Interface Agreement (or in the case
of Interfaces Sites prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time agreements in similar form) with, the
Relevant Transmission Licensee and each User.
ECC.7.6.2 In addition to those provisions, where a Transmission Site contains exposed HV conductors,
unaccompanied access will only be granted to individuals holding an Authority for Access
issued by the Relevant Transmission Licensee.
ECC.7.6.3 The procedure for applying for an Authority for Access is contained in the Interface
Agreement.
ECC.7.7 Maintenance Standards
ECC.7.7.1 It is the User's responsibility to ensure that all its Plant and Apparatus (including, until the
OTSUA Transfer Time, any OTSUA) on a Transmission Site is tested and maintained
adequately for the purpose for which it is intended, and to ensure that it does not pose a threat
to the safety of any Transmission Plant, Apparatus or personnel on the Transmission Site.
The Company will have the right to inspect the test results and maintenance records relating
to such Plant and Apparatus at any time
ECC.7.7.2 For User Sites, The Company shall procure that the Relevant Transmission Licensee has
a responsibility to ensure that all Transmission Plant and Apparatus on a User Site is tested
and maintained adequately for the purposes for which it is intended and to ensure that it does
not pose a threat to the safety of any User’s Plant, Apparatus or personnel on the User Site.
The User will have the right to inspect the test results and maintenance records relating to
such Plant and Apparatus on its User Site at any time.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

95 of 147
ECC.7.8 Site Operational Procedures
ECC.7.8.1 Where there is an interface with National Electricity Transmission System The Company
and Users must make available staff to take necessary Safety Precautions and carry out
operational duties as may be required to enable work/testing to be carried out and for the
operation of Plant and Apparatus (including, prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time, any
OTSUA) connected to the Total System.
ECC.7.9 Generators, HVDC System owners and BM Participants (including Virtual Lead Parties)
shall provide a Control Point.
a) In the case of EU Generators and HVDC System owners, for each Power
Station or HVDC System directly connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System and for each Embedded Large Power Station or
Embedded HVDC System, the Control Point shall receive and act upon
instructions pursuant to OC7 and BC2 at all times that Power Generating
Modules at the Power Station are generating or available to generate or HVDC
Systems are importing or exporting or available to do so. In the case of all BM
Participants, the Control Point shall be continuously staffed except where the
Bilateral Agreement specifies that compliance with BC2 is not required, in which
case the Control Point shall be staffed between the hours of 0800 and 1800
each day.
b) In the case of BM Participants, the BM Participant’s Control Point shall be
capable of receiving and acting upon instructions from The Company and the
relevant Transmission Licensees’ Control Engineers.
The Company will normally issue instructions via automatic logging devices in
accordance with the requirements of ECC.6.5.8(b).
Where the BM Participant’s Plant and Apparatus does not respond to an instruction from The
Company via automatic logging devices, or where it is not possible for The Company to issue
the instruction via automatic logging devices, The Company shall issue the instruction by
telephone.
In the case of BM Participants who own and/or operate a Power Station or HVDC System with
an aggregated Registered Capacity or BM Participants with BM Units with an aggregated
Demand Capacity per Control Point of less than 50MW, or, where a site is not part of a Virtual
Lead Party as defined in the BSC, a Registered Capacity or Demand Capacity per site of less
than 10MW
a) where this situation arises, a representative of the BM Participant is required to
be available to respond to instructions from The Company via the Control
Telephony or System Telephony system, as provided for in ECC.6.5.4,
between the hours of 0800-1800 each day.
b) Outside the hours of 0800-1800 each day, the requirements of BC2.9.7 shall
apply.
For the avoidance of doubt, BM Participants who are unable to provide Control Telephony
and do not have a continuously staffed Control Point may be unable to act as a Defence
Service Provider and shall be unable to act as a Restoration Contractor where these
require Control Telephony or a Control Point in respect of the specification of any such
services falling into these categories.

ECC.7.10 Obligations on Users in respect of Critical Tools and Facilities

ECC.7.10.1 From 04/09/2024 The Company, each Generator, HVDC System Owner, Network
Operator, Non-Embedded Customer and each Restoration Contractor with a continuously
staffed Control Point or Control Centre as provided for in ECC.7.9 shall:-

(i) Ensure they have the appropriate Critical Tools and Facilities, necessary to control their
assets for System Restoration, from their Control Point or Control Centre, as
appropriate, for a minimum period of 72 hours (or such longer period as agreed between
the Generator, HVDC System Owner, Network Operator, Non-Embedded Customer
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
96 of 147
 and/or Restoration Contractor and The Company) following a Total Shutdown or
Partial Shutdown.
(ii) Ensure as far as reasonably practical that they have adequate control equipment
redundancy in place so that in the event of a failure of one or more components of the
control system its function is unimpaired.

(iii) Report on the results of their management and testing for their Critical Tools and
Facilities on request from The Company.

ECC.7.10.2 From 04/09/2024 each BM Participant including a Virtual Lead Party with a continuously
staffed Control Point as provided for in ECC.7.9 (excluding those BM Participants covered
by the requirements of ECC.7.10.1), shall:-

(i) Ensure they have the appropriate Critical Tools and Facilities (as defined in clause
(c) of the definition of Critical Tools and Facilities in the Grid Code Glossary and
Definitions) for a minimum period of 72 hours (or such longer period as agreed
between the BM Participant including a Virtual Lead Party and The Company)
following a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown.

(ii) Ensure as far as reasonably practical that they have adequate control equipment
redundancy in place at their Control Point so that in the event of a failure of one or
more components of their Critical Tools and Facilities its function is unimpaired.

(iii) Report on the results of their management and testing for their Critical Tools and
Facilities on request by The Company.

ECC.7.10.3 In the case of a BM Participant or Virtual Lead Party which has an Anchor Restoration
Contract or Top Up Restoration Contract in respect of one or more of its aggregated Plants,
the requirements of ECC.7.10.1 shall only apply between the Control Point of the BM
Participant or Virtual Lead Party and that Plant with an Anchor Plant Capability or Top Up
Restoration Capability. For other non-contracted Plants under the control of the BM
Participant or Virtual Lead Party, the requirements of ECC.7.10.2 shall continue to apply.

ECC.7.10.4 Where a Network Operator installs a Distribution Restoration Zone Control System to
facilitate operation of a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, the high level functional
requirements of the Distribution Restoration Zone Control System shall be in accordance
with the guidance provided in the applicable electrical standard listed in the annex to the
General Conditions.

ECC.7.10.5 Network Operators shall ensure that their substations which are required to be operable
during System Restoration have 72 hour electrical supply resilience to facilitate Network
Operators being able to:
• restore auxiliary supplies to Transmission substations;
• switch Demand in accordance with a Restoration Plan;
• support The Company in satisfying the requirements of the Electricity System
Restoration Standard.

ECC.7.10.6 The Company, each EU Code User and Restoration Contractor shall ensure their Critical
Tools and Facilities are cyber secure accordance with the Security of Network and
Information System (NIS) Regulations. This requirement applies to The Company, EU Code
Users and Restoration Contractors at all times.

ECC.7.10.7 Notwithstanding the requirements of ECC.7.10.1, The Company, each EU Code User and
Restoration Contractor shall ensure that their control systems, communications systems,
operational metering and telemetry systems including SCADA, are sufficiently robust and
reliable such that they are capable of handling, processing and prioritising the significant
volumes of data that could reasonably be expected to occur during System Restoration.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

97 of 147
ECC.7.10.8 Where an Offshore Generator is connected to an Offshore Transmission System and the
Offshore Transmission Licensee does not have Critical Tools and Facilities installed on
its Offshore Transmission System, The Company will make an allowance for the Critical
Tools and Facilities required to be installed by the Offshore Generator.

ECC.7.11 Obligations on and Assurance from The Company, EU Code Users and Restoration
Contractors during Total Shutdown and Partial Shutdown conditions

ECC.7.11.1 In respect of The Company, its Apparatus shall be designed such that it can safely shutdown
and does not pose a risk to personnel or Apparatus in the event of a total loss of supply.

ECC.7.11.2 All EU Code Users and Restoration Contractors shall ensure their Plant and Apparatus
can safely shut down and does not pose a risk to Plant and/or personnel in the event of a total
loss of supplies at a EU Code User’s Site(s) or Restoration Contractor’s site be it caused
by a Total Shutdown, Partial Shutdown or such other event. In satisfying this requirement,
Generators, HVDC System Owners and Restoration Contractors shall be able to
demonstrate to The Company that in the event supplies were to be lost to their Site, then on
the restoration of supplies, their Plant can be made operational and begin to operate in at
least the same way and as quickly as would be expected for a cold start following a Total
System Shutdown or Partial System Shutdown in accordance with the data submitted in
PC.A.5.7 in accordance with the Week 24 process. For EU Code Users where they believe
this requirement is cost prohibitive or technically impossible, such EU Code Users shall
discuss the issue with The Company, and The Company shall inform The Authority of the
details agreed. Where such an issue cannot be agreed by The Company following all
reasonable attempts or where the capability provided by the EU Code User cannot be agreed
by The Company as being sufficient after examining all reasonable alternative solutions
through the Compliance Processes, the EU Code User may apply for a derogation from the
Grid Code.

ECC.7.11.3 The requirements of ECC.7.11.1 and ECC.7.11.2 shall apply for a period of total loss of
supplies to The Company’s operational sites or an EU Code User’s Site or Restoration
Contractor’s site of up to 72 hours. EU Code Users and Restoration Contractors shall
confirm to The Company that the total loss of supplies to their Site for a period of up to 72
hours shall not result in damage to Plant and Apparatus such that it would then be unable to
operate upon restoration of electrical supplies to the site.

ECC.7.11.4 Network Operators shall ensure that in coordination with The Company and relevant
Transmission Licensees, they have the capability to switch Demand at sufficient speed to
support The Company in satisfying the requirements of the Electricity System Restoration
Standard. This requirement assumes:
• the successful implementation of Restoration Plans;
• the successful delivery of the obligations of Restoration Contractors who are
parties to these plans; and
• the further requirements of OC9 have been implemented.

ECC.8 ANCILLARY SERVICES

ECC.8.1 System Ancillary Services
The ECC contain requirements for the capability for certain Ancillary Services, which are
needed for System reasons ("System Ancillary Services"). There follows a list of these
System Ancillary Services, together with the paragraph number of the ECC (or other part of
the Grid Code) in which the minimum capability is required or referred to. The list is divided
into two categories: Part 1 lists the System Ancillary Services which
(a) Generators in respect of Type C and Type D Power Generating Modules (including
DC Connected Power Park Modules and Electricity Storage Modules) are obliged to
provide; and,
(b) HVDC System Owners are obliged to have the capability to supply;

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

98 of 147
 (c) Generators in respect of Medium Power Stations (except Embedded Medium Power
Stations) are obliged to provide in respect of Reactive Power only:
and Part 2 lists the System Ancillary Services which Generators or Restoration
Contractors will provide only if agreement to provide them is reached with The Company or
in the case where a Restoration Contractor is party to a Distribution Restoration Zone
Plan, agreement is reached with The Company and Network Operator:
Part 1
(a) Reactive Power supplied (in accordance with ECC.6.3.2)
(b) Frequency Control by means of Frequency sensitive generation - ECC.6.3.7 and
BC3.5.1.
Part 2
(c) Frequency Control by means of Fast Start - ECC.6.3.14.
(d) Anchor Plant Capability or Top Up Restoration Capability - ECC.6.3.5.
(e) System to Generator Operational Intertripping.
(f) Services provided by Restoration Contractors.

ECC.8.2 Commercial Ancillary Services

Other Ancillary Services are also utilised by The Company in operating the Total System if
these have been agreed to be provided by a User (or other person) under an Ancillary
Services Agreement or under a Bilateral Agreement, with payment being dealt with under
an Ancillary Services Agreement or in the case of Externally Interconnected System
Operators or Interconnector Users, under any other agreement (and in the case of
Externally Interconnected System Operators and Interconnector Users includes ancillary
services equivalent to or similar to System Ancillary Services) ("Commercial Ancillary
Services"). The capability for these Commercial Ancillary Services is set out in the relevant
Ancillary Services Agreement or Bilateral Agreement (as the case may be).

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

99 of 147
 APPENDIX E1 - SITE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULES

FORMAT, PRINCIPLES AND BASIC PROCEDURE TO BE USED IN THE PREPARATION

OF SITE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULES

ECC.A.1.1 Principles
Types of Schedules
ECC.A.1.1.1 At all Complexes (which in the context of this ECC shall include, Interface Sites until the
OTSUA Transfer Time) the following Site Responsibility Schedules shall be drawn up using
the relevant proforma attached or with such variations as may be agreed between The
Company and EU Code Users, but in the absence of agreement the relevant proforma
attached will be used. In addition, in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, and in
readiness for the OTSUA Transfer Time, the User shall provide The Company with the
necessary information such that Site Responsibility Schedules in this form can be prepared
by the Relevant Transmission Licensees for the Transmission Interface Site:
(a) Schedule of HV Apparatus
(b) Schedule of Plant, LV/MV Apparatus, services and supplies;
(c) Schedule of telecommunications and measurements Apparatus.
Other than at Power Generating Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules)
and Power Station locations, the schedules referred to in (b) and (c) may be combined.
New Connection Sites
ECC.A.1.1.2 In the case of a new Connection Site each Site Responsibility Schedule for a Connection
Site shall be prepared by The Company in consultation with relevant Users at least 2 weeks
prior to the Completion Date (or, where the OTSUA is to become Operational prior to the
OTSUA Transfer Time, an alternative date) under the Bilateral Agreement and/or
Construction Agreement for that Connection Site (which may form part of a Complex). In
the case of a new Interface Site where the OTSUA is to become Operational prior to the
OTSUA Transfer Time each Site Responsibility Schedule for an Interface Site shall be
prepared by The Company in consultation with relevant Users at least 2 weeks prior to the
Completion Date under the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement for that
Interface Site (which may form part of a Complex) (and references to and requirements
placed on “Connection Site” in this ECC shall also be read as “Interface Site” where the
context requires and until the OTSUA Transfer Time). Each User shall, in accordance with
the timing requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement ,
provide information to The Company to enable it to prepare the Site Responsibility
Schedule.
Sub-division
ECC.A.1.1.3 Each Site Responsibility Schedule will be subdivided to take account of any separate
Connection Sites on that Complex.
Scope
ECC.A.1.1.4 Each Site Responsibility Schedule shall detail for each item of Plant and Apparatus:
(a) Plant/Apparatus ownership;
(b) Site Manager (Controller) (except in the case of Plant/Apparatus located in SPT’s
Transmission Area);
(c) Safety issues comprising applicable Safety Rules and Control Person or other
responsible person (Safety Co-ordinator), or such other person who is responsible for
safety;
(d) Operations issues comprising applicable Operational Procedures and control engineer;
(e) Responsibility to undertake statutory inspections, fault investigation and maintenance.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

100 of 147
 Each Connection Point shall be precisely shown.
Detail
ECC.A.1.1.5 (a) In the case of Site Responsibility Schedules referred to in ECC.A.1.1.1(b) and (c), with
the exception of Protection Apparatus and Intertrip Apparatus operation, it will be
sufficient to indicate the responsible User or Transmission Licensee, as the case may
be.
(b) In the case of the Site Responsibility Schedule referred to in ECC.A.1.1.1(a) and for
Protection Apparatus and Intertrip Apparatus, the responsible management unit must
be shown in addition to the User or Transmission Licensee, as the case may be.
ECC.A.1.1.6 The HV Apparatus Site Responsibility Schedule for each Connection Site must include
lines and cables emanating from or traversing1 the Connection Site.
Issue Details
ECC.A.1.1.7 Every page of each Site Responsibility Schedule shall bear the date of issue and the issue
number.
Accuracy Confirmation
ECC.A.1.1.8 When a Site Responsibility Schedule is prepared it shall be sent by The Company to the
Users involved for confirmation of its accuracy.
ECC.A.1.1.9 The Site Responsibility Schedule shall then be signed on behalf of The Company by its
Responsible Manager (see ECC.A.1.1.16) and on behalf of each User involved by its
Responsible Manager (see ECC.A.1.1.16), by way of written confirmation of its accuracy.
The Site Responsibility Schedule will also be signed on behalf of the Relevant
Transmission Licensee by its Responsible Manager.
Distribution and Availability
ECC.A.1.1.10 Once signed, two copies will be distributed by The Company, not less than two weeks prior
to its implementation date, to each User which is a party on the Site Responsibility
Schedule, accompanied by a note indicating the issue number and the date of
implementation.
ECC.A.1.1.11 The Company and Users must make the Site Responsibility Schedules readily available
to operational staff at the Complex and at the other relevant control points.
Alterations to Existing Site Responsibility Schedules
ECC.A 1.1.12 Without prejudice to the provisions of ECC.A.1.1.15 which deals with urgent changes, when a
User identified on a Site Responsibility Schedule becomes aware that an alteration is
necessary, it must inform The Company immediately and in any event 8 weeks prior to any
change taking effect (or as soon as possible after becoming aware of it, if less than 8 weeks
remain when the User becomes aware of the change). This will cover the commissioning of
new Plant and/or Apparatus at the Connection Site, whether requiring a revised Bilateral
Agreement or not, de-commissioning of Plant and/or Apparatus, and other changes which
affect the accuracy of the Site Responsibility Schedule.
ECC.A 1.1.13 Where The Company has been informed of a change by a User, or itself proposes a change,
it will prepare a revised Site Responsibility Schedule by not less than six weeks prior to the
change taking effect (subject to it having been informed or knowing of the change eight weeks
prior to that time) and the procedure set out in ECC.A.1.1.8 shall be followed with regard to
the revised Site Responsibility Schedule.
ECC.A 1.1.14 The revised Site Responsibility Schedule shall then be signed in accordance with the
procedure set out in ECC.A.1.1.9 and distributed in accordance with the procedure set out in
ECC.A.1.1.10, accompanied by a note indicating where the alteration(s) has/have been made,
the new issue number and the date of implementation.

1 Details of circuits traversing the Connection Site are only needed from the date which is the earlier of the date when the Site
Responsibility Schedule is first updated and 15th October 2004. In Scotland or Offshore, from a date to be agreed between The
Company and the Relevant Transmission Licensee.
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
101 of 147
 Urgent Changes
ECC.A.1.1.15 When a User identified on a Site Responsibility Schedule, or The Company, as the case
may be, becomes aware that an alteration to the Site Responsibility Schedule is necessary
urgently to reflect, for example, an emergency situation which has arisen outside its control,
the User shall notify The Company, or The Company shall notify the User, as the case may
be, immediately and will discuss:
(a) what change is necessary to the Site Responsibility Schedule;
(b) whether the Site Responsibility Schedule is to be modified temporarily or permanently;
(c) the distribution of the revised Site Responsibility Schedule.
The Company will prepare a revised Site Responsibility Schedule as soon as possible, and
in any event within seven days of it being informed of or knowing the necessary alteration.
The Site Responsibility Schedule will be confirmed by Users and signed on behalf of The
Company and Users and the Relevant Transmission Licensee (by the persons referred to
in ECC.A.1.1.9) as soon as possible after it has been prepared and sent to Users for
confirmation.
Responsible Managers
ECC.A.1.1.16 Each User shall, prior to the Completion Date under each Bilateral Agreement and/or
Construction Agreement, supply to The Company a list of Managers who have been duly
authorised to sign Site Responsibility Schedules on behalf of the User and The Company
shall, prior to the Completion Date under each Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction
Agreement, supply to that User the name of its Responsible Manager and the name of the
Relevant Transmission Licensee’s Responsible Manager and each shall supply to the
other any changes to such list six weeks before the change takes effect where the change is
anticipated, and as soon as possible after the change, where the change was not anticipated.
De-commissioning of Connection Sites
ECC.A.1.1.17 Where a Connection Site is to be de-commissioned, whichever of The Company or the User
who is initiating the de-commissioning must contact the other to arrange for the Site
Responsibility Schedule to be amended at the relevant time.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

102 of 147
 PROFORMA FOR SITE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE

AREA

COMPLEX: SCHEDULE:

CONNECTION SITE:

SAFETY OPERATIONS PARTY

RESPON
SIBLE
FOR
UNDERT
AKING
CONTRO STATUT
L OR ORY
OTHER INSPECTI
CONTRO
RESPON ONS,
L OR
SIBLE FAULT
OTHER
ITEM PLANT PERSON INVESTI
RESPON
OF APPAR SAF (SAFETY OPERATI GATION
SIBLE
PLANT/ ATUS SITE ETY CO- ONAL &
ENGINEE REMARK
APPAR OWNE MANA RUL ORDINAT PROCED MAINTEN
R S
ATUS R GER ES OR URES ANCE

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

103 of 147
 PAGE: ISSUE NO: DATE:

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

104 of 147
 PROFORMA FOR SITE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE

AREA

COMPLEX: SCHEDULE:

CONNECTION SITE:

SAFETY OPERATIONS PARTY

RESPON
SIBLE
FOR
UNDERT
AKING
CONTRO STATUT
L OR ORY
OTHER INSPECTI
CONTRO
RESPON ONS,
L OR
SIBLE FAULT
OTHER
ITEM PLANT PERSON INVESTI
RESPON
OF APPAR SAF (SAFETY OPERATI GATION
SIBLE
PLANT/ ATUS SITE ETY CO- ONAL &
ENGINEE REMARK
APPAR OWNE MANA RUL ORDINAT PROCED MAINTEN
R S
ATUS R GER ES OR URES ANCE

NOTES:

SIGNE NAM COMPAN DAT

D: E: Y: E:

SIGNE NAM COMPAN DAT

D: E: Y: E:

SIGNE NAM COMPAN DAT

D: E: Y: E:

SIGNE NAM COMPAN DAT

D: E: Y: E:

PAGE: ISSUE NO: DATE:

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
105 of 147
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
106 of 147
Issue 6 Revision 12 ECC 09 March 2022
107 of 140
 APPENDIX E2 - OPERATION DIAGRAMS

PART 1A - PROCEDURES RELATING TO OPERATION DIAGRAMS

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

108 of 140
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
109 of 140
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
110 of 140
 PART E1B - PROCEDURES RELATING TO GAS ZONE DIAGRAMS

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

111 of 140
 PART E2 - NON-EXHAUSTIVE LIST OF APPARATUS
TO BE INCLUDED ON OPERATION DIAGRAMS

Basic Principles
(1) Where practicable, all the HV Apparatus on any Connection Site shall be shown on one
Operation Diagram. Provided the clarity of the diagram is not impaired, the layout shall
represent as closely as possible the geographical arrangement on the Connection Site.
(2) Where more than one Operation Diagram is unavoidable, duplication of identical information
on more than one Operation Diagram must be avoided.
(3) The Operation Diagram must show accurately the current status of the Apparatus e.g.
whether commissioned or decommissioned. Where decommissioned, the associated
switchbay will be labelled "spare bay".
(4) Provision will be made on the Operation Diagram for signifying approvals, together with
provision for details of revisions and dates.
(5) Operation Diagrams will be prepared in A4 format or such other format as may be agreed
with The Company.
(6) The Operation Diagram should normally be drawn single line. However, where appropriate,
detail which applies to individual phases shall be shown. For example, some HV Apparatus
is numbered individually per phase.

Apparatus To Be Shown On Operation Diagram

(1) Busbars
(2) Circuit Breakers
(3) Disconnector (Isolator) and Switch Disconnecters (Switching Isolators)
(4) Disconnectors (Isolators) - Automatic Facilities
(5) Bypass Facilities
(6) Earthing Switches
(7) Maintenance Earths
(8) Overhead Line Entries
(9) Overhead Line Traps
(10) Cable and Cable Sealing Ends
(11) Generating Unit
(12) Generator Transformers
(13) Generating Unit Transformers, Station Transformers, including the lower voltage circuit-
breakers.
(14) Synchronous Compensators
(15) Static Variable Compensators
(16) Capacitors (including Harmonic Filters)
(17) Series or Shunt Reactors (Referred to as "Inductors" at nuclear power station sites)
(18) Supergrid and Grid Transformers
(19) Tertiary Windings
(20) Earthing and Auxiliary Transformers
(21) Three Phase VT's
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
112 of 140
(22) Single Phase VT & Phase Identity
(23) High Accuracy VT and Phase Identity
(24) Surge Arrestors/Diverters
(25) Neutral Earthing Arrangements on HV Plant
(26) Fault Throwing Devices
(27) Quadrature Boosters
(28) Arc Suppression Coils
(29) Single Phase Transformers (BR) Neutral and Phase Connections
(30) Current Transformers (where separate plant items)
(31) Wall Bushings
(32) Combined VT/CT Units
(33) Shorting and Discharge Switches
(34) Thyristor
(35) Resistor with Inherent Non-Linear Variability, Voltage Dependent
(36) Gas Zone

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

113 of 140
 APPENDIX E3 - MINIMUM FREQUENCY RESPONSE CAPABILITY REQUIREMENT PROFILE AND
OPERATING RANGE FOR POWER GENERATING MODULES AND HVDC EQUIPMENT

ECC.A.3.1 Scope
The frequency response capability is defined in terms of Primary Response, Secondary
Response and High Frequency Response. In addition to the requirements defined in
ECC.6.3.7 this appendix defines the minimum frequency response requirements for:-
(a) each Type C and Type D Power Generating Module
(b) each DC Connected Power Park Module
(c) each HVDC System

For the avoidance of doubt, this appendix does not apply to Type A and Type B Power
Generating Modules.
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus should facilitate the delivery of frequency response services
provided by Offshore Generating Units and Offshore Power Park Units.
The functional definition provides appropriate performance criteria relating to the provision of
Frequency control by means of Frequency sensitive generation in addition to the other
requirements identified in ECC.6.3.7.
In this Appendix 3 to the ECC, for a Power Generating Module including a CCGT Module or
a Power Park Module or DC Connected Power Park Module, the phrase Minimum
Regulating Level applies to the entire CCGT Module or Power Park Module or DC
Connected Power Park Module operating with all Generating Units Synchronised to the
System.
The minimum Frequency response requirement profile is shown diagrammatically in Figure
ECC.A.3.1. The capability profile specifies the minimum required level of Frequency
Response Capability throughout the normal plant operating range.
ECC.A.3.2 Plant Operating Range
The upper limit of the operating range is the Maximum Capacity of the Power Generating
Module or Generating Unit or CCGT Module or HVDC Equipment.
The Minimum Stable Operating Level may be less than, but must not be more than, 65%
of the Maximum Capacity. Each Power Generating Module and/or Generating Unit and/or
CCGT Module and/or Power Park Module or HVDC Equipment must be capable of
operating satisfactorily down to the Minimum Regulating Level as dictated by System
operating conditions, although it will not be instructed to below its Minimum Stable Operating
Level . If a Power Generating Module or Generating Unit or CCGT Module or Power Park
Module, or HVDC Equipment is operating below Minimum Stable Operating Level because
of high System Frequency, it should recover adequately to its Minimum Stable Operating
Level as the System Frequency returns to Target Frequency so that it can provide Primary
and Secondary Response from its Minimum Stable Operating Level if the System
Frequency continues to fall. For the avoidance of doubt, under normal operating conditions
steady state operation below the Minimum Stable Operating Level is not expected. The
Minimum Regulating Level must not be more than 55% of Maximum Capacity.
In the event of a Power Generating Module or Generating Unit or CCGT Module or Power
Park Module or HVDC Equipment load rejecting down to no less than its Minimum
Regulating Level it should not trip as a result of automatic action as detailed in BC3.7. If the
load rejection is to a level less than the Minimum Regulating Level then it is accepted that
the condition might be so severe as to cause it to be disconnected from the System.
ECC.A.3.3 Minimum Frequency Response Requirement Profile

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

114 of 140
 Figure ECC.A.3.1 shows the minimum Frequency response capability requirement profile
diagrammatically for a 0.5 Hz change in Frequency. The percentage response capabilities
and loading levels are defined on the basis of the Maximum Capacity of the Power
Generating Module or CCGT Module or Power Park Module or HVDC Equipment. Each
Power Generating Module or and/or CCGT Module or Power Park Module (including a DC
Connected Power Park Module) and/or HVDC Equipment must be capable of operating in
a manner to provide Frequency response at least to the solid boundaries shown in the figure.
If the Frequency response capability falls within the solid boundaries, the Power Generating
Module or CCGT Module or Power Park Module or HVDC Equipment is providing response
below the minimum requirement which is not acceptable. Nothing in this appendix is intended
to prevent a Power Generating Module or CCGT Module or Power Park Module or HVDC
Equipment from being designed to deliver a Frequency response in excess of the identified
minimum requirement.
The Frequency response delivered for Frequency deviations of less than 0.5 Hz should be
no less than a figure which is directly proportional to the minimum Frequency response
requirement for a Frequency deviation of 0.5 Hz. For example, if the Frequency deviation is
0.2 Hz, the corresponding minimum Frequency response requirement is 40% of the level
shown in Figure ECC.A.3.1. The Frequency response delivered for Frequency deviations of
more than 0.5 Hz should be no less than the response delivered for a Frequency deviation of
0.5 Hz.
Each Power Generating Module and/or CCGT Module and/or Power Park Module or HVDC
Equipment must be capable of providing some response, in keeping with its specific
operational characteristics, when operating between 95% to 100% of Maximum Capacity as
illustrated by the dotted lines in Figure ECC.A.3.1.
At the Minimum Stable Operating level, each Power Generating Module and/or CCGT
Module and/or Power Park Module and/or HVDC Equipment is required to provide high
and low frequency response depending on the System Frequency conditions. Where the
Frequency is high, the Active Power output is therefore expected to fall below the Minimum
Stable Operating level.
The Minimum Regulating Level is the output at which a Power Generating Module and/or
CCGT Module and/or Power Park Module and/or HVDC Equipment has no High
Frequency Response capability. It may be less than, but must not be more than, 55% of the
Maximum Capacity. This implies that a Power Generating Module or CCGT Module or
Power Park Module ) or HVDC Equipment is not obliged to reduce its output to below this
level unless the Frequency is at or above 50.5 Hz (cf BC3.7).
ECC.A.3.4 Testing of Frequency Response Capability
The frequency response capabilities shown diagrammatically in Figure ECC.A.3.1 are
measured by taking the responses as obtained from some of the dynamic step response tests
specified by The Company and carried out by Generators and HVDC System owners for
compliance purposes. The injected signal is a step of 0.5Hz from zero to 0.5 Hz Frequency
change, and is sustained at 0.5 Hz Frequency change thereafter, the latter as illustrated
diagrammatically in figures ECC.A.3.4 and ECC.A.3.5.
In addition to provide and/or to validate the content of Ancillary Services Agreements a
progressive injection of a Frequency change to the plant control system (i.e. governor and
load controller) is used. The injected signal is a ramp of 0.5Hz from zero to 0.5 Hz Frequency
change over a ten second period, and is sustained at 0.5 Hz Frequency change thereafter,
the latter as illustrated diagrammatically in figures ECC.A.3.2 and ECC.A.3.3. In the case of
an Embedded Medium Power Station not subject to a Bilateral Agreement or Embedded
HVDC System not subject to a Bilateral Agreement, The Company may require the
Network Operator within whose System the Embedded Medium Power Station or
Embedded HVDC System is situated, to ensure that the Embedded Person performs the
dynamic response tests reasonably required by The Company in order to demonstrate
compliance within the relevant requirements in the ECC.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

115 of 140
 The Primary Response capability (P) of a Power Generating Module or a CCGT Module or
Power Park Module or HVDC Equipment is the minimum increase in Active Power output
between 10 and 30 seconds after the start of the ramp injection as illustrated diagrammatically
in Figure ECC.A.3.2. This increase in Active Power output should be released increasingly
with time over the period 0 to 10 seconds from the time of the start of the Frequency fall as
illustrated by the response from Figure ECC.A.3.2.
The Secondary Response capability (S) of a Power Generating Module or a CCGT Module
or Power Park Module or HVDC Equipment is the minimum increase in Active Power output
between 30 seconds and 30 minutes after the start of the ramp injection as illustrated
diagrammatically in Figure ECC.A.3.2.
The High Frequency Response capability (H) of a Power Generating Module or a CCGT
Module or Power Park Module or HVDC Equipment is the decrease in Active Power output
provided 10 seconds after the start of the ramp injection and sustained thereafter as illustrated
diagrammatically in Figure ECC.A.3.3. This reduction in Active Power output should be
released increasingly with time over the period 0 to 10 seconds from the time of the start of
the Frequency rise as illustrated by the response in Figure ECC.A.3.2.
ECC.A.3.5 Repeatability of Response
When a Power Generating Module or CCGT Module or Power Park Module or HVDC
Equipment has responded to a significant Frequency disturbance, its response capability
must be fully restored as soon as technically possible. Full response capability should be
restored no later than 20 minutes after the initial change of System Frequency arising from
the Frequency disturbance.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

116 of 140
Figure ECC.A.3.1 - Minimum Frequency Response requirement profile for a 0.5 Hz frequency change from
Target Frequency

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

117 of 140
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
118 of 140
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
119 of 140
 ECC.4 - APPENDIX 4 - FAULT RIDE THROUGH REQUIREMENTS

FAULT RIDE THROUGH REQUIREMENTS FOR TYPE B, TYPE C AND TYPE D POWER GENERATING
MODULES (INCLUDING OFFSHORE POWER PARK MODULES WHICH ARE EITHER AC CONNECTED
POWER PARK MODULES OR DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULES), HVDC SYSTEMS AND
OTSDUW PLANT AND APPARATUS

ECC.A.4A.1 Scope

The Fault Ride Through requirements are defined in ECC.6.3.15. This Appendix provides
illustrations by way of examples only of ECC.6.3.15.1 to ECC.6.3.15.10 and further
background and illustrations and is not intended to show all possible permutations.

ECC.A.4A.2 Short Circuit Faults At Supergrid Voltage On The Onshore Transmission System Up To
140ms In Duration

For short circuit faults at Supergrid Voltage on the Onshore Transmission System (which
could be at an Interface Point) up to 140ms in duration, the Fault Ride Through requirement
is defined in ECC.6.3.15. In summary any Power Generating Module (including a DC
Connected Power Park Module) or HVDC System is required to remain connected and
stable whilst connected to a healthy circuit. Figure ECC.A.4.A.2 illustrates this principle.

Figure ECC.A.4.A.2

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

120 of 146
 In Figure ECC.A.4.A.2 a solid three phase short circuit fault is applied adjacent to substation
A resulting in zero voltage at the point of fault. All circuit breakers on the faulty circuit (Lines
ABC) will open within 140ms resulting in Gen X tripping. The effect of this fault, due to the low
impedance of the network, will be the observation of a low voltage at each substation node
across the Total System until the fault has been cleared. In this example, Gen Y and Gen Z
(an Embedded Generator) would need to remain connected and stable as both are still
connected to the Total System and remain connected to healthy circuits .

The criteria for assessment is based on a voltage against time curve at each Grid Entry Point
or User System Entry Point. The voltage against time curve at the Grid Entry Point or User
System Entry Point varies for each different type and size of Power Generating Module as
detailed in ECC.6.3.15.2. – ECC.6.3.15.7.

The voltage against time curve represents the voltage profile at a Grid Entry Point or User
System Entry Point that would be obtained by plotting the voltage at that Grid Entry Point
or User System Entry Point before during and after the fault. This is not to be confused with
a voltage duration curve (as defined under ECC.6.3.15.9) which represents a voltage level
and associated time duration.

The post fault voltage at a Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point is largely influenced
by the topology of the network rather than the behaviour of the Power Generating Module
itself. The EU Generator therefore needs to ensure each Power Generating Module remains
connected and stable for a close up solid three phase short circuit fault for 140ms at the Grid
Entry Point or User System Entry Point.

Two examples are shown in Figure EA.4.2(a) and Figure EA4.2(b). In Figure EA.4.2(a) the
post fault profile is above the heavy black line. In this case the Power Generating Module
must remain connected and stable. In Figure EA4.2(b) the post fault voltage dips below the
heavy black line in which case the Power Generating Module is permitted to trip.

Figure EA.4.2(a)

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

121 of 146
 Figure EA.4.2(b)

The process for demonstrating Fault Ride Through compliance against the requirements of
ECC.6.3.15 is detailed in ECP.A.3.5 and ECP.A.6.7 (as applicable).

ECC.A.4A.3 Supergrid Voltage Dips On The Onshore Transmission System Greater Than 140ms In
Duration

ECC.A.4A3.1 Requirements applicable to Synchronous Power Generating Modules subject to Supergrid

Voltage dips on the Onshore Transmission System greater than 140ms in duration.

For balanced Supergrid Voltage dips on the Onshore Transmission System having
durations greater than 140ms and up to 3 minutes, the Fault Ride Through requirement is
defined in ECC.6.3.15.9.2.1(a) and Figure ECC.6.3.15.9(a) which is reproduced in this
Appendix as Figure EA.4.3.1 and termed the voltage–duration profile.

This profile is not a voltage-time response curve that would be obtained by plotting the
transient voltage response at a point on the Onshore Transmission System (or User
System if located Onshore) to a disturbance. Rather, each point on the profile (ie the heavy
black line) represents a voltage level and an associated time duration which connected
Synchronous Power Generating Modules must withstand or ride through.

Figures EA.4.3.2 (a), (b) and (c) illustrate the meaning of the voltage-duration profile for
voltage dips having durations greater than 140ms.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

122 of 146
 Figure EA.4.3.1

Figure EA.4.3.2 (a)

Figure EA.4.3.2 (b)

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

123 of 146
 Figure EA.4.3.2 (c)

ECC.A.4A3.2 Requirements applicable to Power Park Modules or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus subject
to Supergrid Voltage dips on the Onshore Transmission System greater than 140ms in
duration

For balanced Supergrid Voltage dips on the Onshore Transmission System (which could
be at an Interface Point) having durations greater than 140ms and up to 3 minutes the Fault
Ride Through requirement is defined in ECC.6.3.15.9.2.1(b) and Figure ECC.6.3.15.9(b)
which is reproduced in this Appendix as Figure EA.4.3.3 and termed the voltage–duration
profile.

This profile is not a voltage-time response curve that would be obtained by plotting the
transient voltage response at a point on the Onshore Transmission System (or User
System if located Onshore) to a disturbance. Rather, each point on the profile (ie the heavy
black line) represents a voltage level and an associated time duration which connected Power
Park Modules or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus must withstand or ride through.

Figures EA.4.3.4 (a), (b) and (c) illustrate the meaning of the voltage-duration profile for
voltage dips having durations greater than 140ms.

Figure EA.4.3.3

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

124 of 146
 Figure EA.4.3.4(a)

Figure EA.4.3.4 (b)

Figure EA.4.3.4 (c)

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

125 of 146
 APPENDIX E5 - TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
LOW FREQUENCY RELAYS FOR THE AUTOMATIC
DISCONNECTION OF SUPPLIES AT LOW FREQUENCY

ECC.A.5.1 Low Frequency Relays

ECC.A.5.1.1 The Low Frequency Relays to be used shall have a setting range of 47.0 to 50Hz and be
suitable for operation from a nominal AC input of 63.5, 110 or 240V. The following parameters
specify the requirements of approved Low Frequency Relays:

(a) Frequency settings: 47-50Hz in steps of 0.05Hz or better, preferably 0.01Hz;

(b) Operating time: Relay operating time shall not be more than 150 ms;

(c) Voltage lock-out: Selectable within a range of 55 to 90% of nominal voltage;

(d) Direction Tripping interlock for forward or reverse power flow capable of
being set in either position or off

(e) Facility stages: One or two stages of Frequency operation;

(f) Output contacts: Two output contacts per stage to be capable of repetitively

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

126 of 146
 making and breaking for 1000 operations:

(g) Accuracy: 0.01 Hz maximum error under reference environmental and

system voltage conditions.
0.05 Hz maximum error at 8% of total harmonic distortion
Electromagnetic Compatibility Level.

In the case of Network Operators who are GB Code Users, the above requirements only apply
to a relay (if any) installed at the EU Grid Supply Point. Network Operators who are also GB
Code Users should continue to satisfy the requirements for low frequency relays as specified in
the CCs as applicable to their System.

ECC.A.5.2 Low Frequency Relay Voltage Supplies

ECC.A.5.2.1 It is essential that the voltage supply to the Low Frequency Relays shall be derived from the
primary System at the supply point concerned so that the Frequency of the Low Frequency
Relays input voltage is the same as that of the primary System. This requires either:
(a) the use of a secure supply obtained from voltage transformers directly associated with
the grid transformer(s) concerned, the supply being obtained where necessary via a
suitable automatic voltage selection scheme; or
(b) the use of the substation 240V phase-to-neutral selected auxiliary supply, provided that
this supply is always derived at the supply point concerned and is never derived from a
standby supply Power Generating Module or from another part of the User System.
ECC.A.5.3 Scheme Requirements
ECC.A.5.3.1 The tripping facility should be engineered in accordance with the following reliability
considerations:
(a) Dependability
Failure to trip at any one particular Demand shedding point would not harm the overall
operation of the scheme. However, many failures would have the effect of reducing the
amount of Demand under low Frequency control. An overall reasonable minimum
requirement for the dependability of the Demand shedding scheme is 96%, i.e. the
average probability of failure of each Demand shedding point should be less than 4%.
Thus the Demand under low Frequency control will not be reduced by more than 4%
due to relay failure.
(b) Outages
Low Frequency Demand shedding schemes will be engineered such that the amount of
Demand under control is as specified in Table ECC.A.5.5.1a and is not reduced
unacceptably during equipment outage or maintenance conditions.
ECC.A.5.3.2 The total operating time of the scheme, including circuit breakers operating time, shall where
reasonably practicable, be less than 200 ms. For the avoidance of doubt, the replacement of
plant installed prior to October 2009 will not be required in order to achieve lower total scheme
operating times.
ECC.A.5.4 Low Frequency Relay Testing
ECC.A.5.4.1 Low Frequency Relays installed and commissioned after 1st January 2007 shall be type
tested in accordance with and comply with the functional test requirements for Frequency
Protection contained in Energy Networks Association Technical Specification 48-6-5 Issue 1
dated 2005 “ENA Protection Assessment Functional Test Requirements – Voltage and
Frequency Protection”.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

127 of 146
 For the avoidance of doubt, Low Frequency Relays installed and commissioned before 1st
January 2007 shall comply with the version of ECC.A.5.1.1 applicable at the time such Low
Frequency Relays were commissioned.
ECC.A.5.4.2 Each Non-Embedded Customer shall aim to execute testing on its low frequency demand
disconnection relays installed within its network and in service at least once every three years,
although this may be extended to no more than every five years if considered to be required
for operational purposes.
ECC.A.5.4.3 Each Network Operator and Relevant Transmission Licensee shall aim to execute testing
on its low frequency demand disconnection relays installed within its network and in service
at least once every three years, although this may be extended to no more than every five
years if considered to be required for operational purposes.

ECC.A.5.5 Scheme Settings

ECC.A.5.5.1 Table CC.A.5.5.1a shows, for each Transmission Area, the percentage of Demand (based
on Annual ACS Conditions) at the time of forecast National Electricity Transmission
System peak Demand that each Network Operator whose System is connected to the
Onshore Transmission System within such Transmission Area shall disconnect by Low
Frequency Relays at a range of frequencies. Where a Network Operator’s System is
connected to the National Electricity Transmission System in more than one Transmission
Area, the settings for the Transmission Area in which the majority of the Demand is
connected shall apply.

Frequency Hz % Demand disconnection for each Network Operator in

Transmission Area

NGET SPT SHETL

48.8 5

48.75 5

48.7 10

48.6 7.5 10

48.5 7.5 10

48.4 7.5 10 10

48.2 7.5 10 10

48.0 5 10 10

47.8 5

Total % Demand 60 40 40
Table ECC.A.5.5.1a
Note – the percentages in table ECC.A.5.5.1a are cumulative such that, for example, should
the frequency fall to 48.6 Hz in NGET’s Transmission Area, 27.5% of the total Demand
connected to the National Electricity Transmission System in NGET’s Transmission Area
shall be disconnected by the action of Low Frequency Relays.
The percentage Demand at each stage shall be allocated as far as reasonably practicable.
The cumulative total percentage Demand is a minimum.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

128 of 146
ECC.A.5.5.2 In the case of a Non-Embedded Customer (who is also an EU Code User) the percentage
of Demand (based on Annual ACS Conditions) at the time of forecast National Electricity
Transmission System peak Demand that each Non-Embedded Customer whose System
is connected to the Onshore Transmission System which shall be disconnected by Low
Frequency Relays shall be in accordance with OC6.6 and the Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.A.5.6 Connection and Reconnection
ECC.A.5.6.1 As defined under OC.6.6 once automatic low Frequency Demand Disconnection has taken
place, the Network Operator on whose User System it has occurred, will not reconnect until
The Company instructs that Network Operator to do so in accordance with OC6. The same
requirement equally applies to Non-Embedded Customers.
ECC.A.5.6.2 Once The Company instructs the Network Operator or Non Embedded Customer to
reconnect to the National Electricity Transmission System following operation of the Low
Frequency Demand Disconnection scheme it shall do so in accordance with the
requirements of ECC.6.2.3.10 and OC6.6.
ECC.A.5.6.3 Network Operators or Non Embedded Customers shall be capable of being remotely
disconnected from the National Electricity Transmission System when instructed by The
Company. Any requirement for the automated disconnection equipment for reconfiguration of
the National Electricity Transmission System in preparation for block loading and the time
required for remote disconnection shall be specified by The Company in accordance with the
terms of the Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.A.5.6.4 During System Restoration, the Total System may be operated outside of Licence
Standards as provided for in OC9.4.3. During such periods, on or after 31 December 2026,
Transmission Licensees in accordance with the requirements of the STC, Network
Operators and Non-Embedded Customers shall have the remote capability to inhibit and
restore the operation of their Low Frequency Relays upon instruction from The Company as
provided for in OC9.5.7(a).

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

129 of 146
 APPENDIX E6 - PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTINUOUSLY ACTING AUTOMATIC
EXCITATION CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR ONSHORE SYNCHRONOUS POWER GENERATING
MODULES,

ECC.A.6.1 Scope
ECC.A.6.1.1 This Appendix sets out the performance requirements of continuously acting automatic
excitation control systems for Type C and Type D Onshore Synchronous Power
Generating Modules that must be complied with by the User. This Appendix does not limit
any site specific requirements where in The Company's reasonable opinion these facilities
are necessary for system reasons.
ECC.A.6.1.2 Where the requirements may vary the likely range of variation is given in this Appendix. It may
be necessary to specify values outside this range where The Company identifies a system
need, and notwithstanding anything to the contrary The Company may specify values outside
of the ranges provided in this Appendix 6. The most common variations are in the on-load
excitation ceiling voltage requirements and the response time required of the Exciter. Actual
values will be included in the Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.A.6.1.3 Should an EU Generator anticipate making a change to the excitation control system it shall
notify The Company under the Planning Code (PC.A.1.2(b) and (c)) as soon as the EU
Generator anticipates making the change. The change may require a revision to the Bilateral
Agreement.
ECC.A.6.2 Requirements
ECC.A.6.2.1 The Excitation System of a Type C or Type D Onshore Synchronous Power Generating
Module shall include an excitation source (Exciter), and a continuously acting Automatic
Voltage Regulator (AVR) and shall meet the following functional specification. Type D
Synchronous Power Generating Modules are also required to be fitted with a Power
System Stabiliser in accordance with the requirements of ECC.A.6.2.5.
ECC.A.6.2.3 Steady State Voltage Control
ECC.A.6.2.3.1 An accurate steady state control of the Onshore Synchronous Power Generating Module
pre-set Synchronous Generating Unit terminal voltage is required. As a measure of the
accuracy of the steady-state voltage control, the Automatic Voltage Regulator shall have
static zero frequency gain, sufficient to limit the change in terminal voltage to a drop not
exceeding 0.5% of rated terminal voltage, when the output of a Synchronous Generating
Unit within an Onshore Synchronous Power Generating Module is gradually changed from
zero to rated MVA output at rated voltage, Active Power and Frequency.
ECC.A.6.2.4 Transient Voltage Control
ECC.A.6.2.4.1 For a step change from 90% to 100% of the nominal Onshore Synchronous Generating
Unit terminal voltage, with the Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit on open circuit, the
Excitation System response shall have a damped oscillatory characteristic. For this
characteristic, the time for the Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit terminal voltage to
first reach 100% shall be less than 0.6 seconds. Also, the time to settle within 5% of the voltage
change shall be less than 3 seconds.

ECC.A.6.2.4.2 To ensure that adequate synchronising power is maintained, when the Onshore Power
Generating Module is subjected to a large voltage disturbance, the Exciter whose output is
varied by the Automatic Voltage Regulator shall be capable of providing its achievable upper
and lower limit ceiling voltages to the Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit field in a time
not exceeding that specified in the Bilateral Agreement. This will normally be not less than
50 ms and not greater than 300 ms. The achievable upper and lower limit ceiling voltages may
be dependent on the voltage disturbance.
ECC.A.6.2.4.3 The Exciter shall be capable of attaining an Excitation System On Load Positive Ceiling
Voltage of not less than a value specified in the Bilateral Agreement that will be:
not less than 2 per unit (pu)

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

130 of 146
 normally not greater than 3 pu
exceptionally up to 4 pu
of Rated Field Voltage when responding to a sudden drop in voltage of 10 percent or more
at the Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit terminals. The Company may specify a value
outside the above limits where The Company identifies a system need.
ECC.A.6.2.4.4 If a static type Exciter is employed:
(i) the field voltage should be capable of attaining a negative ceiling level specified in the
Bilateral Agreement after the removal of the step disturbance of ECC.A.6.2.4.3. The
specified value will be 80% of the value specified in ECC.A.6.2.4.3. The Company may
specify a value outside the above limits where The Company identifies a system need.
(ii) the Exciter must be capable of maintaining free firing when the Onshore Synchronous
Generating Unit terminal voltage is depressed to a level which may be between 20% to
30% of rated terminal voltage
(iii) the Exciter shall be capable of attaining a positive ceiling voltage not less than 80% of
the Excitation System On Load Positive Ceiling Voltage upon recovery of the
Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit terminal voltage to 80% of rated terminal
voltage following fault clearance. The Company may specify a value outside the above
limits where The Company identifies a system need.
(iv) the requirement to provide a separate power source for the Exciter will be specified if
The Company identifies a Transmission System need.
ECC.A.6.2.5 Power Oscillations Damping Control
ECC.A.6.2.5.1 To allow Type D Onshore Power Generating Modules to maintain second and subsequent
swing stability and also to ensure an adequate level of low frequency electrical damping power,
the Automatic Voltage Regulator of each Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit within
each Type D Onshore Synchronous Power Generating Module shall include a Power
System Stabiliser as a means of supplementary control.
ECC.A.6.2.5.2 Whatever supplementary control signal is employed, it shall be of the type which operates into
the Automatic Voltage Regulator to cause the field voltage to act in a manner which results
in the damping power being improved while maintaining adequate synchronising power.
ECC.A.6.2.5.3 The arrangements for the supplementary control signal shall ensure that the Power System
Stabiliser output signal relates only to changes in the supplementary control signal and not
the steady state level of the signal. For example, if generator electrical power output is chosen
as a supplementary control signal then the Power System Stabiliser output should relate
only to changes in the Synchronous Generating Unit electrical power output and not the
steady state level of power output. Additionally the Power System Stabiliser should not react
to mechanical power changes in isolation for example during rapid changes in steady state
load or when providing frequency response.
ECC.A.6.2.5.4 The output signal from the Power System Stabiliser shall be limited to not more than ±10%
of the Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit terminal voltage signal at the Automatic
Voltage Regulator input. The gain of the Power System Stabiliser shall be such that an
increase in the gain by a factor of 3 shall not cause instability.
ECC.A.6.2.5.5 The Power System Stabiliser shall include elements that limit the bandwidth of the output
signal. The bandwidth limiting must ensure that the highest frequency of response cannot
excite torsional oscillations on other plant connected to the network. A bandwidth of 0-5Hz
would be judged to be acceptable for this application.
ECC.A.6.2.5.6 The EU Generator in respect of its Type D Synchronous Power Generating Modules will
agree Power System Stabiliser settings with The Company prior to the on-load
commissioning detailed in BC2.11.2(d). To allow assessment of the performance before on-
load commissioning the EU Generator will provide to The Company a report covering the
areas specified in ECP.A.3.2.1.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

131 of 146
ECC.A.6.2.5.7 The Power System Stabiliser must be active within the Excitation System at all times when
Synchronised including when the Under Excitation Limiter or Over Excitation Limiter are
active. When operating at low load when Synchronising or De-Synchronising an Onshore
Synchronous Generating Unit, within a Type D Synchronous Power Generating Module,
the Power System Stabiliser may be out of service.
ECC.A.6.2.5.8 Where a Power System Stabiliser is fitted to a Pumped Storage Unit within a Type D
Synchronous Power Generating Module it must function when the Pumped Storage Unit
is in both generating and pumping modes. In addition, where a Power System Stabiliser is
fitted to an Electricity Storage Unit within a Type D Synchronous Electricity Storage
Module, it must function when the Synchronous Electricity Storage Unit is in both importing
and exporting modes of operation.
ECC.A.6.2.6 Overall Excitation System Control Characteristics
ECC.A.6.2.6.1 The overall Excitation System shall include elements that limit the bandwidth of the output
signal. The bandwidth limiting must be consistent with the speed of response requirements
and ensure that the highest frequency of response cannot excite torsional oscillations on other
plant connected to the network. A bandwidth of 0-5 Hz will be judged to be acceptable for this
application.
ECC.A.6.2.6.2 The response of the Automatic Voltage Regulator combined with the Power System
Stabiliser shall be demonstrated by injecting similar step signal disturbances into the
Automatic Voltage Regulator reference as detailed in ECPA.5.2 and ECPA.5.4. The
Automatic Voltage Regulator shall include a facility to allow step injections into the
Automatic Voltage Regulator voltage reference, with the Onshore Type D Power
Generating Module operating at points specified by The Company (up to rated MVA output).
The damping shall be judged to be adequate if the corresponding Active Power response to
the disturbances decays within two cycles of oscillation.
ECC.A.6.2.6.3 A facility to inject a band limited random noise signal into the Automatic Voltage Regulator
voltage reference shall be provided for demonstrating the frequency domain response of the
Power System Stabiliser. The tuning of the Power System Stabiliser shall be judged to be
adequate if the corresponding Active Power response shows improved damping with the
Power System Stabiliser in combination with the Automatic Voltage Regulator compared
with the Automatic Voltage Regulator alone over the frequency range 0.3Hz – 2Hz.
ECC.A.6.2.7 Under-Excitation Limiters
ECC.A.6.2.7.1 The security of the power system shall also be safeguarded by means of MVAr Under
Excitation Limiters fitted to the Synchronous Power Generating Module Excitation
System. The Under Excitation Limiter shall prevent the Automatic Voltage Regulator
reducing the Synchronous Generating Unit excitation to a level which would endanger
synchronous stability. The Under Excitation Limiter shall operate when the excitation system
is providing automatic control. The Under Excitation Limiter shall respond to changes in the
Active Power (MW) the Reactive Power (MVAr) and to the square of the Synchronous
Generating Unit voltage in such a direction that an increase in voltage will permit an increase
in leading MVAr. The characteristic of the Under Excitation Limiter shall be substantially
linear from no-load to the maximum Active Power output of the Onshore Power Generating
Module at any setting and shall be readily adjustable.
ECC.A.6.2.7.2 The performance of the Under Excitation Limiter shall be independent of the rate of change
of the Onshore Synchronous Power Generating Module load and shall be demonstrated
by testing as detailed in ECP.A.5.5. The resulting maximum overshoot in response to a step
injection which operates the Under Excitation Limiter shall not exceed 4% of the Onshore
Synchronous Generating Unit rated MVA. The operating point of the Onshore
Synchronous Generating Unit shall be returned to a steady state value at the limit line and
the final settling time shall not be greater than 5 seconds. When the step change in Automatic
Voltage Regulator reference voltage is reversed, the field voltage should begin to respond
without any delay and should not be held down by the Under Excitation Limiter. Operation
into or out of the preset limit levels shall ensure that any resultant oscillations are damped so
that the disturbance is within 0.5% of the Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit MVA
rating within a period of 5 seconds.
Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024
132 of 146
ECC.A.6.2.7.3 The EU Generator shall also make provision to prevent the reduction of the Onshore
Synchronous Generating Unit excitation to a level which would endanger synchronous
stability when the Excitation System is under manual control.
ECC.A.6.2.8 Over-Excitation and Stator Current Limiters
ECC.A.6.2.8.1 The settings of the Over-Excitation Limiter and stator current limiter, shall ensure that the
Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit excitation is not limited to less than the maximum
value that can be achieved whilst ensuring the Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit is
operating within its design limits. If the Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit excitation is
reduced following a period of operation at a high level, the rate of reduction shall not exceed
that required to remain within any time dependent operating characteristics of the Onshore
Synchronous Power Generating Module.
ECC.A.6.2.8.2 The performance of the Over-Excitation Limiter, shall be demonstrated by testing as
described in ECP.A.5.6. Any operation beyond the Over-Excitation Limit shall be controlled
by the Over-Excitation Limiter or stator current limiter without the operation of any
Protection that could trip the Onshore Synchronous Power Generating Module.

ECC.A.6.2.8.3 The EU Generator shall also make provision to prevent any over-excitation restriction of the
Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit when the Excitation System is under manual
control, other than that necessary to ensure the Onshore Power Generating Module is
operating within its design limits.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

133 of 146
 APPENDIX E7 - PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTINUOUSLY ACTING AUTOMATIC
VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR AC CONNECTED ONSHORE POWER PARK MODULES AND
OTSDUW PLANT AND APPARATUS AT THE INTERFACE POINT HVDC SYSTEMS AND REMOTE END
HVDC CONVERTER STATIONS

ECC.A.7.1 Scope
ECC.A.7.1.1 This Appendix sets out the performance requirements of continuously acting automatic voltage
control systems for Onshore Power Park Modules, Onshore HVDC Converters Remote
End HVDC Converter Stations and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface Point
that must be complied with by the User. This Appendix does not limit any site specific
requirements where in The Company's reasonable opinion these facilities are necessary for
system reasons. The control performance requirements applicable to Configuration 2 AC
Connected Offshore Power Park Modules and Configuration 2 DC Connected Power
Park Modules are defined in Appendix E8.
ECC.A.7.1.2 Proposals by EU Generators or HVDC System Owners to make a change to the voltage
control systems are required to be notified to The Company under the Planning Code
(PC.A.1.2(b) and (c)) as soon as the Generator or HVDC System Owner anticipates making
the change. The change may require a revision to the Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.A.7.1.3 In the case of a Remote End HVDC Converter at a HVDC Converter Station, the control
performance requirements shall be specified in the Bilateral Agreement. These requirements
shall be consistent with those specified in ECC.6.3.2.4. In the case where the Remote End
HVDC Converter is required to ensure the zero transfer of Reactive Power at the HVDC
Interface Point then the requirements shall be specified in the Bilateral Agreement which
shall be consistent with those requirements specified in ECC.A.8 . In the case where a wider
reactive capability has been specified in ECC.6.3.2.4, then the requirements consistent with
those specified in ECC.A.7.2 shall apply with any variations being agreed between the User
and The Company.
ECC.A.7.2 Requirements
ECC.A.7.2.1 The Company requires that the continuously acting automatic voltage control system for the
Onshore Power Park Module, Onshore HVDC Converter or OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus shall meet the following functional performance specification. If a Network
Operator has confirmed to The Company that its network to which an Embedded Onshore
Power Park Module or Onshore HVDC Converter or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus is
connected is restricted such that the full reactive range under the steady state voltage control
requirements (ECC.A.7.2.2) cannot be utilised, The Company may specify alternative limits
to the steady state voltage control range that reflect these restrictions. Where the Network
Operator subsequently notifies The Company that such restriction has been removed, The
Company may propose a Modification to the Bilateral Agreement (in accordance with the
CUSC contract) to remove the alternative limits such that the continuously acting automatic
voltage control system meets the following functional performance specification. All other
requirements of the voltage control system will remain as in this Appendix.
ECC.A.7.2.2 Steady State Voltage Control
ECC.A.7.2.2.1 The Onshore Power Park Module, Onshore HVDC Converter or OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus shall provide continuous steady state control of the voltage at the Onshore Grid
Entry Point (or Onshore User System Entry Point if Embedded) (or the Interface Point in
the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus ) with a Setpoint Voltage and Slope
characteristic as illustrated in Figure ECC.A.7.2.2a.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

134 of 146
 Figure ECC.A.7.2.2a

ECC.A.7.2.2.2 The continuously acting automatic control system shall be capable of operating to a Setpoint
Voltage between 95% and 105% with a resolution of 0.25% of the nominal voltage. For the
avoidance of doubt values of 95%, 95.25%, 95.5% … may be specified, but not intermediate
values. The initial Setpoint Voltage will be 100%. The tolerance within which this Setpoint
Voltage shall be achieved is specified in BC2.A.2.6. For the avoidance of doubt, with a
tolerance of 0.25% and a Setpoint Voltage of 100%, the achieved value shall be between
99.75% and 100.25%. The Company may request the EU Generator or HVDC System
Owner to implement an alternative Setpoint Voltage within the range of 95% to 105%. For
Embedded Generators and Embedded HVDC System Owners the Setpoint Voltage will
be discussed between The Company and the relevant Network Operator and will be
specified to ensure consistency with ECC.6.3.4.
ECC.A.7.2.2.3 The Slope characteristic of the continuously acting automatic control system shall be
adjustable over the range 2% to 7% (with a resolution of 0.5%). For the avoidance of doubt
values of 2%, 2.5%, 3% may be specified, but not intermediate values. The initial Slope setting
will be 4%. The tolerance within which this Slope shall be achieved is specified in BC2.A.2.6.
For the avoidance of doubt, with a tolerance of 0.5% and a Slope setting of 4%, the achieved
value shall be between 3.5% and 4.5%. The Company may request the EU Generator or
HVDC System Owner to implement an alternative slope setting within the range of 2% to 7%.
For Embedded Generators and Onshore Embedded HVDC Converter Station Owners the
Slope setting will be discussed between The Company and the relevant Network Operator
and will be specified to ensure consistency with ECC.6.3.4.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

135 of 146
 Figure ECC.A.7.2.2b

Figure ECC.A.7.2.2c
ECC.A.7.2.2.4 Figure ECC.A.7.2.2b shows the required envelope of operation for -, OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus, Onshore Power Park Modules and Onshore HVDC Converters except for
those Embedded at 33kV and below or directly connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System at 33kV and below. Figure ECC.A.7.2.2c shows the required envelope
of operation for Onshore Power Park Modules Embedded at 33kV and below, or directly
connected to the National Electricity Transmission System at 33kV and below. The
enclosed area within points ABCDEFGH is the required capability range within which the
Slope and Setpoint Voltage can be changed.
ECC.A.7.2.2.5 Should the operating point of the, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park
Module, or Onshore HVDC Converter deviate so that it is no longer a point on the operating
characteristic (figure ECC.A.7.2.2a) defined by the target Setpoint Voltage and Slope, the
continuously acting automatic voltage control system shall act progressively to return the value
to a point on the required characteristic within 5 seconds.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

136 of 146
ECC.A.7.2.2.6 Should the Reactive Power output of the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power
Park Module or Onshore HVDC Converter reach its maximum lagging limit at a Onshore
Grid Entry Point voltage (or Onshore User System Entry Point voltage if Embedded (or
Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus ) above 95%, the OTSDUW
Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module or HVDC System shall maintain
maximum lagging Reactive Power output for voltage reductions down to 95%. This
requirement is indicated by the line EF in figures ECC.A.7.2.2b and ECC.A.7.2.2c as
applicable. Should the Reactive Power output of the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or
Onshore Power Park Module, or Onshore HVDC Converter reach its maximum leading limit
at a Onshore Grid Entry Point voltage (or Onshore User System Entry Point voltage if
Embedded or Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) below 105%,
the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module, or Onshore HVDC
Converter shall maintain maximum leading Reactive Power output for voltage increases up
to 105%. This requirement is indicated by the line AB in figures ECC.A.7.2.2b and
ECC.A.7.2.2c as applicable.
ECC.A.7.2.2.7 For Onshore Grid Entry Point voltages (or Onshore User System Entry Point voltages if
Embedded or Interface Point voltages) below 95%, the lagging Reactive Power capability of
the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module or Onshore HVDC
Converters should be that which results from the supply of maximum lagging reactive current
whilst ensuring the current remains within design operating limits. An example of the capability
is shown by the line DE in figures ECC.A.7.2.2b and ECC.A.7.2.2c. For Onshore Grid Entry
Point voltages (or User System Entry Point voltages if Embedded or Interface Point
voltages) above 105%, the leading Reactive Power capability of the OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module or Onshore HVDC System Converter should
be that which results from the supply of maximum leading reactive current whilst ensuring the
current remains within design operating limits. An example of the capability is shown by the
line AH in figures ECC.A.7.2.2b and ECC.A.7.2.2c as applicable. Should the Reactive Power
output of the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module or Onshore
HVDC Converter reach its maximum lagging limit at an Onshore Grid Entry Connection
Point voltage (or Onshore User System Entry Point voltage if Embedded or Interface Point
in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) below 95%, the Onshore Power Park
Module, Onshore HVDC Converter shall maintain maximum lagging reactive current output
for further voltage decreases. Should the Reactive Power output of the OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module or Onshore HVDC Converter reach its
maximum leading limit at a Onshore Grid Entry Point voltage (or User System Entry Point
voltage if Embedded or Interface Point voltage in the case of an OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus) above 105%, the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park
Module or Onshore HVDC Converter shall maintain maximum leading reactive current
output for further voltage increases.
ECC.A.7.2.2.8 All OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus must be capable of enabling EU Code Users undertaking
OTSDUW to comply with an instruction received from The Company relating to a variation of
the Setpoint Voltage at the Interface Point within 2 minutes of such instruction being
received.
ECC.A.7.2.2.9 For OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus connected to a Network Operator’s System where the
Network Operator has confirmed to The Company that its System is restricted in accordance
with ECC.A.7.2.1, clause ECC.A.7.2.2.8 will not apply unless The Company can reasonably
demonstrate that the magnitude of the available change in Reactive Power has a significant
effect on voltage levels on the Onshore National Electricity Transmission System.
ECC.A.7.2.3 Transient Voltage Control
ECC.A.7.2.3.1 For an on-load step change in Onshore Grid Entry Point or Onshore User System Entry
Point voltage, or in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus an on-load step change in
Transmission Interface Point voltage, the continuously acting automatic control system shall
respond according to the following minimum criteria:

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

137 of 146
 (i) the Reactive Power output response of the, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or
Onshore Power Park Module or Onshore HVDC Converter shall commence within
0.2 seconds of the application of the step. It shall progress linearly although variations
from a linear characteristic shall be acceptable provided that the MVAr seconds delivered
at any time up to 1 second are at least those that would result from the response shown
in figure ECC.A.7.2.3.1a.
(ii) the response shall be such that 90% of the change in the Reactive Power output of the,
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module, or Onshore HVDC
Converter will be achieved within
− 2 seconds, where the step is sufficiently large to require a change in the steady
state Reactive Power output from its maximum leading value to its maximum
lagging value or vice versa and

− 1 second where the step is sufficiently large to require a change in the steady
state Reactive Power output from zero to its maximum leading value or
maximum lagging value as required by ECC.6.3.2 (or, if appropriate
ECC.A.7.2.2.6 or ECC.A.7.2.2.7);

(iii) the magnitude of the Reactive Power output response produced within 1 second shall
vary linearly in proportion to the magnitude of the step change.
(iv) within 5 seconds from achieving 90% of the response as defined in ECC.A.7.2.3.1 (ii),
the peak to peak magnitude of any oscillations shall be less than 5% of the change in
steady state maximum Reactive Power.
(v) following the transient response, the conditions of ECC.A.7.2.2 apply.

MVArs

Required response at 1
second

0.2 1 Seconds
Figure ECC.A.7.2.3.1a

ECC.A.7.2.3.2 OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Modules or Onshore HVDC
Converters shall be capable of

(a) changing its Reactive Power output from its maximum lagging value to its maximum
leading value, or vice versa, then reverting back to the initial level of Reactive Power
output once every 15 seconds for at least 5 times within any 5 minute period; and

(b) changing its Reactive Power output from zero to its maximum leading value then
reverting back to zero Reactive Power output at least 25 times within any 24 hour
period and from zero to its maximum lagging value then reverting back to zero Reactive

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

138 of 146
 Power output at least 25 times within any 24 hour period. Any subsequent restriction
on reactive capability shall be notified to The Company in accordance with BC2.5.3.2,
and BC2.6.1.

In all cases, the response shall be in accordance to ECC.A.7.2.3.1 where the change in
Reactive Power output is in response to an on-load step change in Onshore Grid Entry
Point or Onshore User System Entry Point voltage, or in the case of OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus an on-load step change in Transmission Interface Point voltage.

ECC.A.7.2.4 Power Oscillation Damping

ECC.A.7.2.4.1 The requirement for the continuously acting voltage control system to be fitted with a Power
System Stabiliser (PSS) shall be specified if, in The Company’s view, this is required for
system reasons. However if a Power System Stabiliser is included in the voltage control
system its settings and performance shall be agreed with The Company and commissioned
in accordance with BC2.11.2. To allow assessment of the performance before on-load
commissioning the Generator will provide to The Company a report covering the areas
specified in ECP.A.3.2.2.
ECC.A.7.2.5 Overall Voltage Control System Characteristics
ECC.A.7.2.5.1 The continuously acting automatic voltage control system is required to respond to minor
variations, steps, gradual changes or major variations in Onshore Grid Entry Point voltage
(or Onshore User System Entry Point voltage if Embedded or Interface Point voltage in
the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus).
ECC.A.7.2.5.2 The overall voltage control system shall include elements that limit the bandwidth of the output
signal. The bandwidth limiting must be consistent with the speed of response requirements
and ensure that the highest frequency of response cannot excite torsional oscillations on other
plant connected to the network. A bandwidth of 0-5Hz would be judged to be acceptable for
this application. All other control systems employed within the OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus or Onshore Power Park Module or Onshore HVDC Converter should also meet
this requirement
ECC.A.7.2.5.3 The response of the voltage control system (including the Power System Stabiliser if
employed) shall be demonstrated by testing in accordance with ECP.A.6.
ECC.A.7.3 Reactive Power Control
ECC.A.7.3.1 As defined in ECC.6.3.8.3.4, Reactive Power control mode of operation is not required in
respect of Onshore Power Park Modules or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore
HVDC Converters unless otherwise specified by The Company in coordination with the
relevant Network Operator. However where there is a requirement for Reactive Power
control mode of operation, the following requirements shall apply.

ECC.A.7.3.2 The Onshore Power Park Module or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore HVDC
Converter shall be capable of setting the Reactive Power setpoint anywhere in the Reactive
Power range as specified in ECC.6.3.2.4 with setting steps no greater than 5 MVAr or 5%
(whichever is smaller) of full Reactive Power, controlling the reactive power at the Grid Entry
Point or User System Entry Point if Embedded to an accuracy within plus or minus 5MVAr
or plus or minus 5% (whichever is smaller) of the full Reactive Power.

ECC.A.7.3.3 Any additional requirements for Reactive Power control mode of operation shall be specified
by The Company in coordination with the relevant Network Operator..

ECC.A.7.4 Power Factor Control

ECC.A.7.4.1 As defined in ECC.6.3.8.4.3, Power Factor control mode of operation is not required in
respect of Onshore Power Park Modules or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore
HVDC Converters unless otherwise specified by The Company in coordination with the
relevant Network Operator. However where there is a requirement for Power Factor control

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

139 of 146
 mode of operation, the following requirements shall apply.

ECC.A.7.4.2 The Onshore Power Park Module or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Onshore HVDC
Converter shall be capable of controlling the Power Factor at the Grid Entry Point or User
System Entry Point (if Embedded) within the required Reactive Power range as specified
in ECC.6.3.2.2.1 and ECC.6.3.2.4 to a specified target Power Factor. The Company shall
specify the target Power Factor value (which shall be achieved within 0.01 of the set Power
Factor), its tolerance and the period of time to achieve the target Power Factor following a
sudden change of Active Power output. The tolerance of the target Power Factor shall be
expressed through the tolerance of its corresponding Reactive Power. This Reactive Power
tolerance shall be expressed by either an absolute value or by a percentage of the maximum
Reactive Power of the Onshore Power Park Module or OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or
Onshore HVDC Converter. The details of these requirements being pursuant to the terms of
the Bilateral Agreement.

ECC.A.7.4.3 Any additional requirements for Power Factor control mode of operation shall be specified by
The Company in coordination with the relevant Network Operator.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

140 of 146
 APPENDIX E8 - PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTINUOUSLY ACTING AUTOMATIC
VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR CONFIGURATION 2 AC CONNECTED OFFSHORE POWER
PARK MODULES AND CONFIGURATION 2 DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULES

ECC.A.8.1 Scope
ECC.A.8.1.1 This Appendix sets out the performance requirements of continuously acting automatic voltage
control systems for Configuration 2 AC Connected Offshore Power Park Modules and
Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park Modules that must be complied with by the EU
Code User. This Appendix does not limit any site specific requirements that may be specified
where in The Company's reasonable opinion these facilities are necessary for system
reasons.
ECC.A.8.1.2 These requirements also apply to Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park Modules. In
the case of a Configuration 1 DC Connected Power Park Module the technical performance
requirements shall be specified by The Company. Where the EU Generator in respect of a
DC Connected Power Park Module has agreed to a wider reactive capability range as
defined under ECC.6.3.2.5 and ECC.6.2.3.6 then the requirements that apply will be specified
by The Company and which shall reflect the performance requirements detailed in ECC.A.8.2
below but with different parameters such as droop and Setpoint Voltage.
ECC.A.8.1.3 Proposals by EU Generators to make a change to the voltage control systems are required
to be notified to The Company under the Planning Code (PC.A.1.2(b) and (c)) as soon as
the Generator anticipates making the change. The change may require a revision to the
Bilateral Agreement.
ECC.A.8.2 Requirements
ECC.A.8.2.1 The Company requires that the continuously acting automatic voltage control system for the
Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore Power Park Module and Configuration 2 DC
Connected Power Park Module shall meet the following functional performance
specification.
ECC.A.8.2.2 Steady State Voltage Control
ECC.A.8.2.2.1 The Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore Power Park Module and Configuration 2 DC
Connected Power Park Module shall provide continuous steady state control of the voltage
at the Offshore Connection Point with a Setpoint Voltage and Slope characteristic as
illustrated in Figure ECC.A.8.2.2a.

Figure ECC.A.8.2.2a

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

141 of 146
ECC.A.8.2.2.2 The continuously acting automatic control system shall be capable of operating to a Setpoint
Voltage between 95% and 105% with a resolution of 0.25% of the nominal voltage. For the
avoidance of doubt values of 95%, 95.25%, 95.5% … may be specified, but not intermediate
values. The initial Setpoint Voltage will be 100%. The tolerance within which this Setpoint
Voltage shall be achieved is specified in BC2.A.2.6. For the avoidance of doubt, with a
tolerance of 0.25% and a Setpoint Voltage of 100%, the achieved value shall be between
99.75% and 100.25%. The Company may request the EU Generator to implement an
alternative Setpoint Voltage within the range of 95% to 105%.
ECC.A.8.2.2.3 The Slope characteristic of the continuously acting automatic control system shall be
adjustable over the range 2% to 7% (with a resolution of 0.5%). For the avoidance of doubt
values of 2%, 2.5%, 3% may be specified, but not intermediate values. The initial Slope setting
will be 4%. The tolerance within which this Slope shall be achieved is specified in BC2.A.2.6.
For the avoidance of doubt, with a tolerance of 0.5% and a Slope setting of 4%, the achieved
value shall be between 3.5% and 4.5%. The Company may request the EU Generator to
implement an alternative slope setting within the range of 2% to 7%.

Figure ECC.A.8.2.2b

ECC.A.8.2.2.4 Figure ECC.A.8.2.2b shows the required envelope of operation for Configuration 2 AC
connected Offshore Power Park Module and Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park
Module. The enclosed area within points ABCDEFGH is the required capability range within
which the Slope and Setpoint Voltage can be changed.
ECC.A.8.2.2.5 Should the operating point of the Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore Power Park or
Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park Module deviate so that it is no longer a point
on the operating characteristic (Figure ECC.A.8.2.2a) defined by the target Setpoint Voltage
and Slope, the continuously acting automatic voltage control system shall act progressively to
return the value to a point on the required characteristic within 5 seconds.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

142 of 146
ECC.A.8.2.2.6 Should the Reactive Power output of the Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore Power
Park Module or Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park Module reach its maximum
lagging limit at an Offshore Grid Entry Point or Offshore User System Entry Point or HVDC
Interface Point voltage above 95%, the Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore Power
Park Module or Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park Module shall maintain
maximum lagging Reactive Power output for voltage reductions down to 95%. This
requirement is indicated by the line EF in figure ECC.A.8.2.2b. Should the Reactive Power
output of the Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore Power Park Module or
Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park Module reach its maximum leading limit at the
Offshore Grid Entry Point or Offshore User System Entry Point or HVDC Interface Point
voltage below 105%, the Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore Power Park Module or
Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park Module shall maintain maximum leading
Reactive Power output for voltage increases up to 105%. This requirement is indicated by the
line AB in figures ECC.A.8.2.2b.
ECC.A.8.2.2.7 For Offshore Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point or HVDC Interface Point
voltages below 95%, the lagging Reactive Power capability of the Configuration 2 AC
connected Offshore Power Park Module or Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park
Module should be that which results from the supply of maximum lagging reactive current
whilst ensuring the current remains within design operating limits. An example of the capability
is shown by the line DE in figures ECC.A.8.2.2b. For Offshore Grid Entry Point or Offshore
User System Entry Point voltages or HVDC Interface Point voltages above 105%, the
leading Reactive Power capability of the Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore Power
Park Module or Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park Module should be that which
results from the supply of maximum leading reactive current whilst ensuring the current
remains within design operating limits. An example of the capability is shown by the line AH in
figures ECC.A.8.2.2b. Should the Reactive Power output of the Configuration 2 AC
connected Offshore Power Park Module or Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park
Module reach its maximum lagging limit at an Offshore Grid Entry Point or Offshore User
System Entry voltage or HVDC Interface Point voltage below 95%, the Configuration 2 AC
connected Offshore Power Park Module or Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park
Module shall maintain maximum lagging reactive current output for further voltage decreases.
Should the Reactive Power output of the Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore Power
Park Module or Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park Module reach its maximum
leading limit at an Offshore Grid Entry Point or Offshore User System Entry voltage or
HVDC Interface Point voltage above 105%, the Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore
Power Park Module or Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park Module shall maintain
maximum leading reactive current output for further voltage increases.
ECC.A.8.2.3 Transient Voltage Control
ECC.A.8.2.3.1 For an on-load step change in Offshore Grid Entry Point or Offshore User System Entry
Point voltage or HVDC Interface Point voltage, the continuously acting automatic control
system shall respond according to the following minimum criteria:
(i) the Reactive Power output response of the Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore
Power Park Module or Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park Module shall
commence within 0.2 seconds of the application of the step. It shall progress linearly
although variations from a linear characteristic shall be acceptable provided that the MVAr
seconds delivered at any time up to 1 second are at least those that would result from the
response shown in figure ECC.A.8.2.3.1a.
(ii) the response shall be such that 90% of the change in the Reactive Power output of the
Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore Power Park Module or Configuration 2 DC
Connected Power Park Module will be achieved within
− 2 seconds, where the step is sufficiently large to require a change in the steady
state Reactive Power output from its maximum leading value to its maximum
lagging value or vice versa and

− 1 second where the step is sufficiently large to require a change in the steady
state Reactive Power output from zero to its maximum leading value or

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

143 of 146
 maximum lagging value as required by ECC.6.3.2 (or, if appropriate
ECC.A.8.2.2.6 or ECC.A.8.2.2.7);

(iii) the magnitude of the Reactive Power output response produced within 1 second shall
vary linearly in proportion to the magnitude of the step change.
(iv) within 5 seconds from achieving 90% of the response as defined in ECC.A.8.2.3.1 (ii),
the peak to peak magnitude of any oscillations shall be less than 5% of the change in
steady state maximum Reactive Power.
(v) following the transient response, the conditions of ECC.A.8.2.2 apply.

MVArs

Required response at 1
second

0.2 1 Seconds
Figure ECC.A.8.2.3.1a

ECC.A.8.2.3.2 Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore Power Park Module or Configuration 2 DC

Connected Power Park Module shall be capable of

(a) changing their Reactive Power output from maximum lagging value to maximum
leading value, or vice versa, then reverting back to the initial level of Reactive Power
output once every 15 seconds for at least 5 times within any 5 minute period; and

(b) changing Reactive Power output from zero to maximum leading value then reverting
back to zero Reactive Power output at least 25 times within any 24 hour period and
from zero to its maximum lagging value then reverting back to zero Reactive Power
output at least 25 times within any 24 hour period. Any subsequent restriction on
reactive capability shall be notified to The Company in accordance with BC2.5.3.2,
and BC2.6.1.

In all cases, the response shall be in accordance to ECC.A.8.2.3.1 where the change in
Reactive Power output is in response to an on-load step change in Offshore Grid Entry
Point or Offshore User System Entry Point voltage or HVDC Interface Point voltage.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

144 of 146
ECC.A.8.2.4 Power Oscillation Damping
ECC.A.8.2.4.1 The requirement for the continuously acting voltage control system to be fitted with a Power
System Stabiliser (PSS) shall be specified if, in The Company’s view, this is required for
system reasons. However if a Power System Stabiliser is included in the voltage control
system its settings and performance shall be agreed with The Company and commissioned
in accordance with BC2.11.2. To allow assessment of the performance before on-load
commissioning the Generator or HVDC System Owner will provide to The Company a report
covering the areas specified in ECP.A.3.2.2.
ECC.A.8.2.5 Overall Voltage Control System Characteristics
ECC.A.8.2.5.1 The continuously acting automatic voltage control system is required to respond to minor
variations, steps, gradual changes or major variations in Offshore Grid Entry Point or
Offshore User System Entry Point or HVDC Interface Point voltage.
ECC.A.8.2.5.2 The overall voltage control system shall include elements that limit the bandwidth of the output
signal. The bandwidth limiting must be consistent with the speed of response requirements
and ensure that the highest frequency of response cannot excite torsional oscillations on other
plant connected to the network. A bandwidth of 0-5Hz would be judged to be acceptable for
this application. All other control systems employed within the Configuration 2 AC
connected Offshore Power Park Module or Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park
Module should also meet this requirement
ECC.A.8.2.5.3 The response of the voltage control system (including the Power System Stabiliser if
employed) shall be demonstrated by testing in accordance with ECP.A.6.
ECC.A.8.3 Reactive Power Control
ECC.A.8.3.1 Reactive Power control mode of operation is not required in respect of Configuration 2 AC
connected Offshore Power Park Modules or Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park
Modules unless otherwise specified by The Company. However where there is a
requirement for Reactive Power control mode of operation, the following requirements shall
apply.

ECC.A.8.3.2 Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore Power Park Modules or Configuration 2 DC

Connected Power Park Modules shall be capable of setting the Reactive Power setpoint
anywhere in the Reactive Power range as specified in ECC.6.3.2.8.2 with setting steps no
greater than 5 MVAr or 5% (whichever is smaller) of full Reactive Power, controlling the
Reactive Power at the Offshore Grid Entry Point or Offshore User System Entry Point or
HVDC Interface Point to an accuracy within plus or minus 5MVAr or plus or minus 5%
(whichever is smaller) of the full Reactive Power.

ECC.A.8.3.3 Any additional requirements for Reactive Power control mode of operation shall be specified
by The Company.

ECC.A.8.4 Power Factor Control

ECC.A.8.4.1 Power Factor control mode of operation is not required in respect of Configuration 2 AC
connected Offshore Power Park Modules or Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park
Modules unless otherwise specified by The Company. However where there is a
requirement for Power Factor control mode of operation, the following requirements shall
apply.

ECC.A.8.4.2 Configuration 2 AC connected Offshore Power Park Modules or Configuration 2 DC

Connected Power Park Modules shall be capable of controlling the Power Factor at the
Offshore Grid Entry Point or Offshore User System Entry Point or HVDC Interface Point
within the required Reactive Power range as specified in ECC.6.3.2.8.2 with a target Power
Factor. The Company shall specify the target Power Factor (which shall be achieved to
within 0.01 of the set Power Factor), its tolerance and the period of time to achieve the target
Power Factor following a sudden change of Active Power output. The tolerance of the target
Power Factor shall be expressed through the tolerance of its corresponding Reactive Power.

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

145 of 146
 This Reactive Power tolerance shall be expressed by either an absolute value or by a
percentage of the maximum Reactive Power of the Configuration 2 AC connected
Offshore Power Park Module or Configuration 2 DC Connected Power Park Module. The
details of these requirements being specified by The Company.

ECC.A.8.4.3 Any additional requirements for Power Factor control mode of operation shall be specified by
The Company.

< END OF EUROPEAN CONNECTION CONDITIONS >

Issue 6 Revision 21 ECC 04 March 2024

146 of 146
 DEMAND RESPONSE SERVICES CODE
(DRSC)

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

DRSC.1 INTRODUCTION 2
DRSC.2 OBJECTIVE 2
DRSC.3 SCOPE 2
DRSC.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS 3
DRSC.5 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS FOR DEMAND UNITS WITH DEMAND 3
RESPONSE ACTIVE POWER CONTROL AND TRANSMISSION
CONSTRAINT MANAGEMENT
DRSC.6 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS FOR DEMAND UNITS WITH DEMAND 4
RESPONSE FREQUENCY CONTROL
DRSC.7 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS FOR DEMAND UNITS WITH DEMAND 4
RESPONSE VERY FAST ACTIVE POWER CONTROL
DRSC.8 DATA REQUIRED BY THE COMPANY FROM DEMAND RESPONSE PROVIDER’S 5
DRSC.9 OPERATIONAL METERING REQUIREMENTS 5

DRSC.10 INSTRUCTIONS ISSUED TO DEMAND RESPONSE PROVIDER’S 5

DRSC.11 OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION PROCEDURE 5

DRSC.11.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 5

DRSC 11.2 OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION PROCEDURES FOR DEMAND RESPONSE 6

PROVIDERS

DRSC.11.3 COMPLIANCE 6

DRSC.11.4 COMPLIANCE TESTING 7

DRSC.11.5 COMPLIANCE TESTING FOR DEMAND RESPONSE PROVIDER’S 8

WITH DEMAND RESPONSE ACTIVE POWER CONTROL, REACTIVE POWER
CONTROL AND TRANSMISSION CONSTRAINT MANAGEMENT

DRSC.11.6 COMPLIANCE SIMULATION 9

APPENDIX I - DRSC.A.2 - DEMAND RESPONSE UNIT DOCUMENT (DRUD) STATEMENT OF 10

COMPLIANCE FOR DEMAND RESPONSE PROVIDER’S

PART I

Issue 6 Revision 4 DRS 03 August 2021

1 of 11
DRSC.1 INTRODUCTION
DRSC.1.1 The Demand Response Services Code is concerned with Demand Response Providers
who contract with The Company for the provision of Ancillary Services.
DRSC.1.2 Ancillary Services are non-mandatory services used by The Company in operating the
System. They are provided by Demand Response Providers with payment being dealt with
under the terms of the relevant agreement for the Ancillary Service.
DRSC.1.3 Where a Demand Response Provider is interested in offering an Ancillary Service to The
Company, then further details and additional information of the Ancillary Services are
available from the Balancing Services section of the Website.
DRSC.1.4 Where The Company and a Demand Response Provider enter into an Ancillary Services
agreement, it shall be in accordance with Transmission Licence condition C16 and the
Standard Contract Terms.
DRSC 1.5 The Demand Response Services Code which would form part of an Ancillary Services
agreement between a Demand Response Provider and The Company and to discharge the
obligations under Retained EU Law (Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/1388). The Ancillary
Services agreement will include an obligation on the Demand Response Provider to satisfy
the applicable requirements of this Demand Response Services Code.
DRSC.1.6 The Demand Response Services Code applies only to Demand Response Providers who
have entered into an agreement with The Company to provide an Ancillary Service. This
Demand Response Services Code does not apply to Users who are not Demand Response
Providers.
DRSC.1.7 For the avoidance of doubt, Network Operators and Non Embedded Customers in respect
of EU Grid Supply Points are required to satisfy the compliance requirements in section
DRSC.11 of this code in addition to the European Compliance Processes only if they are
also a Demand Response Provider.
DRSC.2 OBJECTIVE
The objectives of the DRSC are to
DRSC.2.1 Ensure the obligations of Retained EU Law (Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/1388) have
been discharged; and
DRSC.2.2 Complement the requirements of the Ancillary Services agreement between The Company
and a Demand Response Provider; and
DRSC.2.3 Define the minimum technical and compliance requirements Demand Response Providers
are required to satisfy if they provide a Demand Response Service to The Company under
an Ancillary Services agreement.
DRSC.3 SCOPE
DRSC.3.1 The DRSC applies to any Demand Response Provider who has entered into an agreement
to provide Ancillary Services with The Company.
DRSC.3.2 The DRSC does not apply to Users, BM Participants or other parties unless they are also a
Demand Response Provider.

DRSC.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS

DRSC.4.1 Demand Response Services shall be based on the following categories.

(a) Controlled by instruction from The Company
(i) Demand Response Active Power Control
(ii) Demand Response Reactive Power Control
(iii) Demand Response Transmission Constraint Management

Issue 6 Revision 4 DRS 03 August 2021

2 of 11
 (b) Automatic operation once the facility has been instructed into operation upon instruction
from The Company pursuant to the terms of the Ancillary Services agreement.
(i) Demand Response System Frequency Control
(ii) Demand Response Very Fast Active Power Control

DRSC.4.2 Demand Response Providers who own, operate, control or manage Plant and Apparatus
or Demand Unit(s) within a Demand Facility and/or Closed Distribution System(s) or on
an aggregated basis may provide Demand Response Services to The Company. Demand
Response Providers can offer Demand Response Services on an individual or collective
basis and increase or decrease their Demand in accordance with the terms of their Ancillary
Services agreement.
DRSC.4.3 The Demand Response Services specified in DRSC.4.1 are not exclusive and do not preclude
Demand Response Providers from negotiating other services with The Company. These
services would be pursuant to the terms of the Ancillary Services agreement.

DRSC.5 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS FOR DEMAND UNITS WITH DEMAND RESPONSE ACTIVE
POWER CONTROL AND TRANSMISSION CONSTRAINT MANAGEMENT
DRSC.5.1 Where a Demand Response Provider provides Demand Response Active Power Control,
Demand Response Reactive Power Control or Demand Response Transmission
Constraint Management to The Company, then the following requirements as detailed below
shall apply. For the avoidance of doubt, these requirements shall apply either individually or
where it is not part of a Demand Facility, collectively as part of a Demand Aggregation
scheme through a Demand Response Provider. Demand Response Providers shall
ensure that any Demand Unit which they own, operate, control or manage and which is used
to provide Demand Response Services shall:-
(a) Be capable of satisfying the Frequency range requirements as specified in ECC.6.1.2.1.
(b) Be capable of satisfying the voltage range requirements as specified in ECC.6.1.4.1.
(c) Be capable of controlling the power consumption from the Total System in accordance
with the terms of the Ancillary Services agreement.
(d) Be capable of receiving instructions from The Company either directly or through a third
party to modify their demand in accordance with the Demand Response Service they
have agreed to provide..
(e) Be capable of adjusting its Real Power or Reactive Power flow within a time period
pursuant to the terms of the Ancillary Services agreement.
(f) Be capable of full execution of an instruction issued by The Company to modify its power
flow.
(g) Be capable of further demand changes as instructed by The Company, following the
execution of a previous instruction issued by The Company in accordance with the
Ancillary Services agreement. Any such instruction shall not exceed the normal safe
operating conditions of the Demand Response Provider’s Plant and Apparatus or
Demand Unit(s) which could cause such equipment to trip. Instructions to modify Active
Power or Reactive Power flow may have immediate or delayed effects but in any event
would need to comply with the requirements of the Ancillary Services agreement.
(h) Notify The Company of any change in the available capacity in accordance with the
relevant Ancillary Services agreement.
(i) Be capable of withstanding a rate of change of System Frequency of up to a maximum
of 1Hz/s measured over a 500ms time frame.

Issue 6 Revision 4 DRS 03 August 2021

3 of 11
DRSC.5.2 In addition to the requirements of DRSC.5.1, where a Demand Response Provider
automatically modifies its Demand in response to changes in System Frequency or System
voltage or both, The Company will have previously instructed the Demand Response
Provider to switch these facilities into service in accordance with the terms of the Ancillary
Services agreement prior to any automatic action taking place. The ability for The Company
to issue instructions, receive acknowledgement of those instructions and receive operational
metering data (for example voltage, current, Active Power and Reactive Power signals) from
the Demand Response Provider will be dependent upon the type of Demand Response
Service provided and shall be defined in the Ancillary Services agreement which shall be
pursuant to the Standard Contract Terms.
DRSC.5.3 Non Embedded Customers who are also Demand Response Provider’s shall be capable
of providing Demand Response Reactive Power Control by switching static compensation
equipment into or out of service.
DRSC.6 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS FOR DEMAND UNITS WITH DEMAND RESPONSE FREQUENCY
CONTROL
DRSC.6.1 Where a Demand Response Provider provides Demand Response System Frequency
Control to The Company, then the following requirements as detailed below shall apply. For
the avoidance of doubt, these requirements apply either individually or where it is not part of
a Demand Facility, collectively as part of a Demand Aggregation scheme through a
Demand Response Provider. Demand Response Providers shall ensure that any Plant
and Apparatus or Demand Unit(s) which they own, operate, control or manage, and which
is used to provide Demand Response System Frequency Control shall:-
(a) Be capable of satisfying the Frequency range requirements as specified in ECC.6.1.2.1.
(b) Be capable of satisfying the voltage range requirements as specified in ECC.6.1.4.1.
(c) Be fitted with a deadband facility no greater than 0.03Hz unless otherwise specified in the
Ancillary Services agreement. This requirement shall not apply to Demand Response
Providers where only a Non–Dynamic Frequency Response Service is provided.
(d) The envelope of operation of the Demand Response System Frequency Control shall
be in accordance with the terms of the Ancillary Services agreement. For the avoidance
of doubt, continuous operation would not be required in respect of a static Frequency
response service.
(e) Be fitted with a control system which is capable of responding to changes in System
Frequency outside the nominal value of 50Hz. A deadband either side of nominal
Frequency shall be permitted which shall be in accordance with the requirement of the
Ancillary Services agreement.
(f) Be equipped with a controller that measures the actual System Frequency. The refresh
rate for this controller shall be no longer than 0.2 seconds.
(g) Be able to detect a change in System Frequency of 0.01Hz. Each Demand Unit owned,
operated, controlled or managed by a Demand Response Provider shall be capable of
a rapid detection and respond to changes in System Frequency which shall be pursuant
to the terms of the Ancillary Services agreement. An offset in the steady state
measurement of Frequency shall be acceptable up to 0.05Hz. Frequency measurements
must be recorded at each Demand Facility and must not be derived on an aggregated
basis.
DRSC.7 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS FOR DEMAND UNITS WITH DEMAND RESPONSE VERY FAST
ACTIVE POWER CONTROL
DRSC.7.1 Where a Demand Response Provider provides Demand Response Very Fast Active
Power Control to The Company, then the applicable requirements shall be pursuant to the
terms of the Ancillary Services agreement which shall specify:-
(a) The relationship between the change in Active Power and the rate of change of System
Frequency over the Demand range of the Demand Response Provider’s Demand
Unit(s) which they own, operate, control or manage.

Issue 6 Revision 4 DRS 03 August 2021

4 of 11
 (b) The operating principles of the Demand Response Very Fast Active Power Control and
associated performance parameters.
(c) The response time of the Demand Response Very Fast Active Power Control which
shall be no longer than 2 seconds from the inception of the System Frequency change.
DRSC.8 DATA REQUIRED BY THE COMPANY FROM DEMAND RESPONSE PROVIDER’S
DRSC.8.1 The data required to be submitted to The Company by a Demand Response Provider will
vary depending upon the type of Demand Response Service provided and will be set out in
the Ancillary Services agreement.

DRSC.9 OPERATIONAL METERING REQUIREMENTS

DRSC.9.1 The operational metering data required to be submitted to The Company will vary depending
upon the type of Demand Response Service provided. Demand Response Providers may
be required to install such operational metering equipment in accordance with the Ancillary
Services agreement.

DRSC.10 INSTRUCTIONS ISSUED TO DEMAND RESPONSE PROVIDER’S

DRSC.10.1 Demand Response Providers may be required to be fitted with communication and instruction
facilities to enable The Company to instruct them in the operational timeframe. These
requirements will vary depending upon the type of Demand Response Service provided and
will be set out in the Ancillary Services agreement.

PART II

COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR DEMAND RESPONSE SERVICES

DRSC.11 OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION PROCEDURE

DRSC.11.1 General Provisions

DRSC.11.1.1 Demand Response Providers who enter into an agreement with The Company to provide
Ancillary Services are required to undertake a compliance process to ensure the Plant and
Apparatus or Demand Unit(s) which they own, operate, control or manage, satisfies the
requirements of the Ancillary Services agreement and the Demand Response Services
Code. For the avoidance of doubt, Demand Response Providers who are also EU Code
Users, will also be required to satisfy the requirements of the applicable requirements of the
European Compliance Processes (ECP’s).

DRSC.11.1.2 Each Demand Response Provider, shall confirm to The Company its ability to comply with
the requirements of the Ancillary Services agreement.

DRSC.11.1.3 Each Demand Response Provider shall notify The Company of any change to the Plant or
Apparatus which they own, operate, control or manage such they are no longer able to
satisfy the conditions specified in the Ancillary Services agreement and/or the relevant
provisions of the DRSC. Such changes shall be notified to The Company in accordance
with the terms of the Ancillary Services agreement.

DRSC.11.2 Operational Notification Procedures for Demand Response Providers

DRSC.11.2.1 All Demand Response Providers are required to undertake an Operational

Notification procedure which shall comprise a Demand Response Unit Document
(DRUD).

DRSC.11.2.2 The format of the Demand Response Unit Document (DRUD) shall take the form shown
Issue 6 Revision 4 DRS 03 August 2021
5 of 11
 in DRSC.A.1 and shall provide sufficient information to demonstrate the Plant and
Apparatus or Demand Unit(s) which a Demand Response Provider owns, operates,
controls or manages, is capable of satisfying the full requirements of the Ancillary
Services agreement and the applicable requirements of the DRSC. The compliance
requirements can be simplified to a single operational notification stage as well as be
reduced as agreed with The Company. Demand Response Providers shall be required
to submit a new DRUD for each subsequent Demand Unit added to its portfolio.

DRSC.11.2.3 When the Demand Response Provider has submitted a final DRUD to the satisfaction
of The Company, which clearly demonstrates full compliance with the Ancillary
Services agreement, The Company shall issue a Final Operational Notification to the
Demand Response Provider.

DRSC.11.3 COMPLIANCE

DRSC.11.3.1 Responsibility of the Demand Response Provider

DRSC.11.3.1.1 Demand Response Providers are required to satisfy the requirements of the Ancillary
Services agreement which shall include satisfying the applicable requirements of this
Demand Response Services Code.

DRSC.11.3.1.2 Should the Demand Response Provider wish to modify the technical capability of the
Plant and Apparatus or Demand Unit(s) which it owns, operates, controls or manages
and which affects its compliance with the Ancillary Services agreement, it should notify
and agree any timescales for the change with The Company prior to making any change.

DRSC.11.3.1.3 Any operational incidents or failure of the Plant and Apparatus or Demand Unit(s)
owned, operated, controlled or managed by the Demand Response Provider which
impacts its ability to satisfy the compliance requirements detailed in this Demand
Response Services Code shall be notified to The Company as soon as possible after
occurrence of the incident.

DRSC.11.3.1.4 Any planned test schedules and procedures to verify compliance of the Plant and
Apparatus or Demand Unit(s) owned, operated, controlled or managed by the Demand
Response Provider shall be submitted to The Company in advance of the tests. The
Company shall assess the test schedules and procedures in a timely manner prior to
agreeing that the Demand Response Provider can carry out the tests.

DRSC.11.3.1.5 The Company may witness such tests and record the performance of the Plant and
Apparatus owned, operated, controlled or managed by the Demand Response
Provider to verify compliance with the Ancillary Services agreement and the Demand
Response Services Code.

DRSC.11.3.2 Role of The Company

DRSC.11.3.2.1 The Company shall assess the compliance of the Demand Response Provider and
shall undertake monitoring throughout the life time of the Plant and Apparatus or
Demand Unit(s) owned, operated, controlled or managed by the Demand Response
Provider to ensure compliance with the requirements of the Ancillary Services
agreement. The Company shall inform the Demand Response Provider of the
outcome of such assessment.

DRSC.11.3.2.2 The Company may require Demand Response Providers to carry out compliance
tests and simulations according to a repeat plan or general scheme or replacement of
equipment which may have an impact on the compliance of the Plant and Apparatus
or Demand Units owned, operated, controlled or managed by the Demand Response
Provider as detailed in DRSC.11.3.1.3 and DRSC.11.3.1.4. The Company shall
inform the Demand Response Provider of the results of these tests.
Issue 6 Revision 4 DRS 03 August 2021
6 of 11
DRSC.11.3.2.3 As part of this compliance process, the Demand Response Provider shall provide the
following items:-

(a) Relevant documentation and certificates associated with the compliance process.
(b) Details of the technical data required to ensure compliance with the Ancillary
Services agreement.
(c) Steady state and dynamic models (as applicable) of their Demand Units or Plant and
Apparatus (or equivalent) as required and agreed with The Company.
(d) Timelines for the submission of system data required to perform System studies.
(e) Study results showing the expected steady state and dynamic performance of the
Plant and Apparatus or Demand Unit(s) or the performance of their Demand
Response Service on an aggregated basis as required and agreed with The
Company.
(f) Submission of registered Equipment Certificates or otherwise as agreed with The
Company.
(g) Conditions and procedures for the use of relevant Equipment Certificates issued by
an Authorised Certifier to a Demand Response Provider or equivalent to the
satisfaction of The Company.

DRSC.11.3.2.4 If compliance tests or simulations cannot be carried out as agreed between the Demand
Response Provider and The Company due to reasons attributable to The Company, then
The Company shall not unreasonably withhold the Operational Notification referred to in
DRSC.11.2.3.

DRSC.11.4 Compliance Testing

DRSC.11.4.1 Common Provisions for Compliance Testing

DRSC.11.4.1.1 The purpose of compliance testing is to ensure that the Plant and Apparatus or Demand
Unit(s) owned, operated, controlled or managed by a Demand Response Provider is
capable of satisfying the requirements of the Ancillary Services agreement and applicable
sections of this Demand Response Services Code in addition to verifying that the models
and data submitted provide a true and accurate representation of the Plant as built.

DRSC.11.4.1.2 Notwithstanding the minimum requirements for compliance testing detailed in DRSC.11.4 of
this Demand Response Services Code, The Company shall:-

(a) Allow the Demand Response Provider to carry out an alternative set of tests provided
that they are efficient and sufficient to demonstrate that the Plant and Apparatus or
Demand Unit(s) owned, operated, controlled or managed by a Demand Response
Provider is capable of satisfying the requirements of the Ancillary Services agreement
and the applicable sections of the Demand Response Services Code.

(b) Require the Demand Response Provider to carry out additional or alternative tests
(where reasonable) to those specified in DRSC.11.5 where they would otherwise be
insufficient to demonstrate compliance with the Ancillary Services agreement.

(c) Require the Demand Response Provider to be responsible for carrying out the tests
in accordance with the requirements specified in DRSC.11.4 and DRSC.11.5 of the
Demand Response Services Code. The Company shall cooperate with the Demand
Response Provider and will not unduly delay the scheduling of the tests.

DRSC.11.4.1.3 The Company may witness such tests (either on site or remotely from The Company’s
control room) to record the performance of the Demand Response Providers
Issue 6 Revision 4 DRS 03 August 2021
7 of 11
 capability to verify compliance with the Ancillary Services agreement and the Demand
Response Services Code. Where The Company witnesses the tests remotely, the
Demand Response Provider shall provide the monitoring equipment necessary to
record all relevant test signals and measurements in addition to ensuring that necessary
representatives from the Demand Response Provider are available on site for the
entire testing period. Signals specified by The Company shall be provided, if for
selected tests, The Company wishes to use its own equipment to record performance.
The Company will inform the Demand Response Provider if it wishes to witness the
tests.

DRSC.11.5 Compliance Testing for Demand Response Providers with Demand Response Active
Power Control, Reactive Power Control and Transmission Constraint Management.

DRSC.11.5.1 Demand Modification Tests

DRSC.11.5.1.1 Demand Response Providers who have signed an Ancillary Services agreement
with The Company to provide Demand Response Active Power Control, Demand
Response Reactive Power Control or Demand Response Transmission
Constraint Management, are required to demonstrate (through site tests) the
capability of the Plant and Apparatus or Demand Unit(s) they own, operate, control
or manage to satisfy the requirements of the Ancillary Services agreement and the
applicable requirements of DRSC.5. The site tests should demonstrate the capability
of the Demand Response Providers ability to operate with instruction over the agreed
timeframes, Demand range and duration pursuant to the terms of the Ancillary
Services agreement. The tests can be completed individually or as part of a Demand
aggregation scheme.

DRSC.11.5.1.2 The tests shall be carried out either by instruction from The Company’s Control Centre
or by site tests through injections applied to the Plant and Apparatus or Demand
Unit(s) owned, operated, controlled or managed by the Demand Response Provider.

DRSC.11.5.1.3 The test shall be deemed as passed if the requirements of the Ancillary Services
agreement have been satisfied and the applicable requirements of DRSC.5
demonstrated to the satisfaction of The Company.

DRSC.11.5.1.4 A list of references to Equipment Certificates issued by an Authorised Certifier (or

otherwise) as agreed with The Company, which can be supplied by the Demand
Response Provider to demonstrate part of the evidence of compliance;

DRSC.11.5.2 Disconnection and Reconnection of Static Compensation Facilities

DRSC.11.5.2.1 Demand Response Providers who have signed an Ancillary Services agreement
with The Company to provide Demand Response Active Power Control, Demand
Response Reactive Power Control or Demand Response Transmission
Constraint Management and have also agreed to disconnect or reconnect (or both)
static compensation facilities when receiving an instruction from The Company in
accordance with the requirements of the Ancillary Services agreement and DRSC.5.3,
shall be required to demonstrate the performance of the Plant and Apparatus or
Demand Unit(s) they own, operate, control or manage to satisfy these requirements.
These requirements can be demonstrated individually or collectively as part of a
demand aggregation scheme.

DRSC.11.5.2.2 The tests shall be carried out either by instruction from The Company’s Control Centre
or by site tests resulting in the disconnection and subsequent re-connection of the static
compensation facilities.

DRSC.11.5.2.3 The test shall be deemed as passed if the requirements of the Ancillary Services agreement
have been satisfied and the applicable requirements of DRSC.5.3 demonstrated to the
satisfaction of The Company.
Issue 6 Revision 4 DRS 03 August 2021
8 of 11
DRSC.11.6 Compliance Simulation

DRSC.11.6.1 Common Provisions on Compliance Simulations

DRSC.11.6.1.1 Demand Response Providers who agree to provide Demand Response Very Fast Active
Power Control are required to demonstrate their ability to satisfy the requirements of the
Ancillary Services agreement and DRSC.7 through necessary simulation studies to the
satisfaction of The Company.

DRSC.11.6.1.2 Demand Response Providers who have contracted to provide a Demand Response Very
Fast Active Power Control service, are required to submit further simulation studies where
there has been a development, replacement or modernisation of the Plant and Apparatus or
Demand Unit(s)_ owned, operated, controlled or managed by the Demand Response
Provider, or The Company has identified a non–compliance with the Demand Response
Provider’s ability to satisfy the requirements of the Ancillary Services agreement or
DRSC.7.

DRSC.11.6.1.3 Notwithstanding the requirements of DRSC.11.6.1.1 and DRSC.11.6.1.2 The Company shall
be entitled to:-

(a) Allow the Demand Response Provider to carry out an alternative set of simulations
provided that they are efficient and sufficient to demonstrate that the Plant and Apparatus
or Demand Unit(s) owned, operated, controlled or managed by the Demand Response
Provider is capable of satisfying the requirements of the Ancillary Services agreement
and the applicable sections of the Demand Response Services Code.

(b) Require the Demand Response Provider to carry out additional or alternative
simulations to those specified in DRSC11.6.1.1 and DRSC.11.6.1.28 where they would
otherwise be insufficient to demonstrate compliance with the Ancillary Services
agreement.

DRSC.11.6.1.4 The Company may check that the Demand Response Provider complies with the
requirements of the Ancillary Services agreement and the applicable sections of the
Demand Response Services Code by carrying out its own compliance simulations based on
the simulation reports, models and test measurements.

DRSC.11.6.1.5 The Company will supply upon request from the Demand Response Provider, data to enable
the Demand Response Provider to carry out the required simulations in accordance with the
requirements of the Ancillary Services agreement and DRSC.11.6.

DRSC.11.7 Additional Testing requirements for Non-Embedded Customers and CUSC Parties who are also
Demand Response Providers

DRSC.11.7.1 Non-Embedded Customers and CUSC Parties who are also Demand Response
Providers shall be required to execute a demand modification test after two consecutive
unsuccessful responses in the operational environment or at least every year as agreed
with The Company.

DRSC.11.7.2 Each Non-Embedded Customer and CUSC Party who are also Demand Response
Providers and provide demand response low frequency demand disconnection shall execute a
low frequency demand disconnection test at least once every three years.

Issue 6 Revision 4 DRS 03 August 2021

9 of 11
 APPENDIX I – DRSC.A.1
Format of the Demand Response Unit Document (DRUD)

Demand Response Unit Document (DRUD)

Statement of Compliance for Demand Response Providers

Contract company details

Contracted company name
Primary contact name
Contact number /s
Email address

Demand Response Service Details

Contract ID
Type of Demand Response Service type,
Asset type,
Unit make up
Aggregation methodology (if appropriate)
Maximum capacity of the Demand Response
Service (MW)
Equipment Certificates (as applicable)_
Unit location/ connection point / ID
Contract signed date
Service start date
Desired test date

Compliance Requirements
DRSC Requirement Compliance Demand Response Provider
Y/N Statement

All documentation and certificates demonstrating

compliance with the DRSC.
Details of the technical data required to ensure
compliance with the Ancillary Services agreement.
Steady state and dynamic models (or equivalent
information) of Plant and Apparatus or Demand
Unit(s).
Timelines for the submission of system studies or
equivalent data.
Study results showing the expected steady state
and dynamic performance of the Plant and
Apparatus or Demand Unit(s)
Conditions and procedures including the scope for
registering Equipment Certificates or otherwise as
agreed with The Company.
Conditions and procedures for the use of relevant
Equipment Certificates issued by an Authorised
Certifier to a Demand Response Provider.
Operational Metering Data to be submitted in
accordance with Ancillary Services agreement.
Ability to receive instructions to and from The
Company accordance with the Ancillary Services
agreement.

Issue 6 Revision 4 DRS 03 August 2021

10 of 11
 DRSC Requirement Compliance Demand Response Provider
Y/N Statement

Ability to operate over Frequency range as

specified in DRSC.5.1(a).
Ability to operate over voltage range as specified in
DRSC.5.1(b).
Ability to withstand a rate of change of system
frequency up to a maximum of 1Hz per second as
measured over a 500ms timeframe as specified in
DRSC.5.1(i).
Non-Embedded Customers who are also Demand
Response Providers ability to switch static
compensation equipment into or out of service in
accordance with DRSC5.3 as applicable.
Deadband settings as applicable.
Control system block diagrams, parameters and
settings as applicable.

Declaration

Declaration – to be completed by Customer or the Demand Response Provider’s appointed technical

representative

I declare that for all the Demand Response Provider’s information associated with this contract:
1. Compliance with the requirements of the Demand Response Services Code is achieved.
2. The commissioning checks have been successfully completed.

Name:

Signature:

Company Name:

Position:

Declaration – to be completed by The Company Witnessing Representative if applicable. Delete if not

witnessed by the The Company.

I confirm that I have witnessed the commissioning checks in this document on behalf of

____________________________ and that the results are an accurate record of the checks

Name:

Signature:

Company Name:

< END OF DEMAND RESPONSE SERVICES CODE >

Issue 6 Revision 4 DRS 03 August 2021

11 of 11
 COMPLIANCE PROCESSES
(CP)

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

CP.1 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................2

CP.2 OBJECTIVE ...............................................................................................................................................2
CP.3 SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................................2
CP.4 CONNECTION PROCESS ........................................................................................................................3
CP.5 ENERGISATION OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION ..................................................................................3
CP.6 INTERIM OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION...............................................................................................4
CP.7 FINAL OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION ...................................................................................................7
CP.8 COMPLIANCE REPORT PLAN ................................................................................................................9
CP.9 LIMITED OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION .............................................................................................10
CP.10 PROCESSES RELATING TO DEROGATIONS .....................................................................................13
CP.11 MANUFACTURER’S DATA & PERFORMANCE REPORT ....................................................................13
APPENDIX 1 - ILLUSTRATIVE PROCESS DIAGRAMS ...................................................................................16
APPENDIX 2 - USER SELF CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE ...................................................................21
APPENDIX 3 - SIMULATION STUDIES ............................................................................................................22

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

i
CP.1 INTRODUCTION
CP.1.1 The Compliance Processes ("CP") specifies:
the process (leading to an Energisation Operational Notification) which must be followed
by The Company and any GB Code User to demonstrate its compliance with the Grid Code
in relation to its Plant and Apparatus (including OTSUA) prior to the relevant Plant and
Apparatus (including any OTSUA) being energised.
the process (leading to an Interim Operational Notification and Final Operational
Notification) which must be followed by The Company and any Generator or DC
Converter Station owner to demonstrate its compliance with the Grid Code in relation to its
Plant and Apparatus (including any dynamically controlled OTSUA). This process shall be
followed prior to and during the course of the relevant Plant and Apparatus (including
OTSUA) being energised and Synchronised.
the process (leading to a Limited Operational Notification) which must be followed by The
Company and each Generator and DC Converter Station owner where any of its Plant
and/or Apparatus (including any OTSUA) becomes unable to comply with relevant
provisions of the Grid Code, and where applicable with Appendices F1 to F5 (and in the case
of OTSUA, Appendices OF1 to OF5 of the Bilateral Agreement). This process also includes
when changes or Modifications are made to Plant and/or Apparatus (including OTSUA).
This process applies to such Plant and/or Apparatus after the Plant and/or Apparatus has
become Operational and until Disconnected from the Total System, (or until, in the case
of OTSUA, the OTSUA Transfer Time), when changes or Modifications are made.
CP.1.2 As used in this CP, references to OTSUA means OTSUA to be connected or connected to
the National Electricity Transmission System prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time.
CP1.3 Where the Generator or DC Convertor Station Owner and/or The Company are required
to apply for a derogation from the Authority, this is not in respect of the OTSUA.

CP.2 OBJECTIVE
CP.2.1 The objective of the CP is to ensure that there is a clear and consistent process for
demonstration of compliance by GB Code Users with the Connection Conditions and
Bilateral Agreement which are similar for all GB Code Users of an equivalent category and
will enable The Company to comply with its statutory and Transmission Licence
obligations.
CP.2.2 Provisions of the CP which apply in relation to OTSDUW and OTSUA shall (in any particular
case) apply up to the OTSUA Transfer Time, whereupon such provisions shall (without
prejudice to any prior non-compliance) cease to apply.
CP.2.3 In relation to OTSDUW, provisions otherwise to be contained in a Bilateral Agreement may
be contained in the Construction Agreement, and accordingly a reference in the CP to a
relevant Bilateral Agreement includes the relevant Construction Agreement.

CP.3 SCOPE
CP.3.1 The CP applies to The Company and to GB Code Users, which in the CP means:
(a) GB Generators (other than in relation to Embedded Small Power Stations or
Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement) including
those undertaking OTSDUW.
(b) Network Operators;
(c) Non-Embedded Customers;
(d) DC Converter Station owners (other than those which only have Embedded DC
Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement).

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

2 of 29
CP.3.2 The above categories of GB Code User will become bound by the CP prior to them
generating, distributing, supplying or consuming, or in the case of OTSUA, transmitting, as
the case may be, and references to the various categories should, therefore, be taken as
referring to them in that prospective role as well as to Users actually connected.
CP3.3 This CP does not apply to EU Code Users for whom the requirements of the ECP applies.

CP.4 CONNECTION PROCESS

CP.4.1 The CUSC Contract(s) contain certain provisions relating to the procedure for connection to
the National Electricity Transmission System or, in the case of Embedded Power
Stations or Embedded DC Converter Stations, becoming operational and include
provisions to be complied with by GB Code Users prior to and during the course of The
Company notifying the User that it has the right to become operational. In addition to such
provisions, this CP sets out in further detail the processes to be followed to demonstrate
compliance. Whilst this CP does not expressly address the processes to be followed in the
case of OTSUA connecting to a Network Operator’s User System prior to the OTSUA
Transfer Time, the processes to be followed by The Company and the Generator in
respect of OTSUA in such circumstances shall be consistent with those set out below by
reference OTSUA directly connected to the National Electricity Transmission System.
CP.4.2 The provisions contained in CP.5 to CP.7 detail the process to be followed in order for the
GB Code User’s Plant and Apparatus (including OTSUA) to become operational. This
process includes EON (energisation) ION (interim synchronising) and FON (final).
CP.4.2.1 The provisions contained in CP.5 relate to the connection and energisation of User’s Plant
and Apparatus (including OTSUA) to the National Electricity Transmission System or
where Embedded, to a User’s System and is shown diagrammatically at CP.A.1.1.
CP.4.2.2 The provisions contained in CP.6 and CP.7 provide the process for Generators and DC
Converter Station owners to demonstrate compliance with the Grid Code and with, where
applicable, the CUSC Contract(s) prior to and during the course of such Generator’s or DC
Converter Station owner’s Plant and Apparatus (including OTSUA up to the OTSUA
Transfer Time) becoming operational and is shown diagrammatically at CP.A.1.2 and
CP.A.1.3.
CP.4.2.3 The provisions in CP.8 detail the process to be followed to confirm continued compliance
(the Compliance Repeat Plan).
CP.4.2.4 The provisions contained in CP.9 detail the process to be followed when:
(a) a Generator or DC Converter Station owner’s Plant and/or Apparatus (including the
OTSUA) is unable to comply with any provisions of the Grid Code and Bilateral
Agreement; or,
(b) following any notification by a Generator or a DC Converter Station owner under the
PC of any change to its Plant and Apparatus (including any OTSUA); or,
(c) a Modification to a Generator or a DC Converter Station owner’s Plant and/or
Apparatus.
The process is shown diagrammatically at Appendix CP.A.1.4 for condition (a) and Appendix
CP.A.1.5 for conditions (b) and (c)
CP.4.3 Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC
Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement
CP.4.3.1 For the avoidance of doubt, the process in this CP does not apply to Embedded Medium
Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC Converter
Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement.

CP.5 ENERGISATION OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

3 of 29
CP.5.1 The following provisions apply in relation to the issue of an Energisation Operational
Notification.
CP.5.1.1 Certain provisions relating to the connection and energisation of the GB Code User’s Plant
and Apparatus at the Connection Site and OTSUA at the Transmission Interface Point
and in certain cases of Embedded Plant and Apparatus are specified in the CUSC and/or
CUSC Contract(s). For other Embedded Plant and Apparatus, the Distribution Code,
the DCUSA and the Embedded Development Agreement for the connection specify
equivalent provisions. Further detail on this is set out in CP.5 below.
CP.5.2 The items for submission prior to the issue of an Energisation Operational Notification are
set out in CC.5.2
CP.5.3 In the case of a Generator or DC Converter Station owner, the items referred to in CC.5.2
shall be submitted using the User Data File Structure.
CP.5.4 Not less than 28 days, or such shorter period as may be acceptable in The Company’s
reasonable opinion, prior to the GB Code User wishing to energise its Plant and Apparatus
(including passive OTSUA) for the first time, the GB Code User will submit to The
Company, a Certificate of Readiness to Energise High Voltage Equipment which specifies
the items of Plant and Apparatus (including OTSUA) ready to be energised in a form
acceptable to The Company.
CP.5.5 If the relevant obligations under the provisions of the CUSC and/or CUSC Contract(s) and
the conditions of CP.5 have been completed to The Company’s reasonable satisfaction,
then The Company shall issue an Energisation Operational Notification. Any
dynamically controlled reactive compensation OTSUA (including Statcoms or Static Var
Compensators) shall not be Energised until the appropriate Interim Operational
Notification has been issued in accordance with CP.6.

CP.6 INTERIM OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION

CP.6.1 The following provisions apply in relation to the issue of an Interim Operational
Notification.
CP.6.2 Not less than 28 days, or such shorter period as may be acceptable in The Company’s
reasonable opinion, prior to the Generator or DC Converter Station owner wishing to
Synchronise its Plant and Apparatus or dynamically controlled OTSUA for the first time,
the Generator or DC Converter Station owner will:
(i) submit to The Company, a Notification of User’s Intention to Synchronise; and
(iI) submit to The Company the items referred to at CP.6.3.
CP.6.3 Items for submission prior to issue of the Interim Operational Notification.
CP.6.3.1 Prior to the issue of an Interim Operational Notification in respect of the GB Code User’s
Plant and Apparatus or dynamically controlled OTSUA.
the Generator or DC Converter Station owner must submit to The Company to The
Company’s satisfaction:
(a) updated Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning
Data), with any estimated values assumed for planning purposes confirmed or, where
practical, replaced by validated actual values and by updated estimates for the future
and by updated forecasts for Forecast Data items such as Demand;
(b) details of any special Power Station, Generating Unit(s), Power Park Module(s) or
DC Converter Station(s) protection as applicable. This may include Pole Slipping
protection and islanding protection schemes;
(c) any items required by CP.5.2, updated by the GB Code User as necessary;
(d) simulation study provisions of Appendix CP.A.3 and the results demonstrating
compliance with Grid Code requirements of:

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

4 of 29
 PC.A.5.4.2
PC.A.5.4.3.2,
CC.6.3.4,
CC.6.3.7(c)(i),
CC.6.3.15,
CC.A.6.2.5.6,
CC.A.7.2.3.1,
as applicable to the Power Station, Generating Unit(s), Power Park Module(s) or DC
Converter(s) or dynamically controlled OTSUA unless agreed otherwise by The
Company;
(e) a detailed schedule of the tests and the procedures for the tests required to be carried
out by the Generator or DC Converter Station owner under CP.7.2 to demonstrate
compliance with relevant Grid Code requirements. Such schedule to be consistent with
Appendix OC5.A.2 (in the case of Generating Units other than Power Park Modules)
or Appendix OC5.A.3 (in the case of Generating Units comprising Power Park
Modules) and OTSUA as applicable); and
(f) an interim Compliance Statement and a User Self Certification of Compliance
completed by the GB Code User (including any Unresolved Issues) against the
relevant Grid Code requirements including details of any requirements that the
Generator or DC Converter Station owner has identified that will not or may not be
met or demonstrated.
CP.6.3.2 The items referred to in CP.6.3 shall be submitted by the Generator or DC Converter
Station owner using the User Data File Structure.
CP.6.4 No Generating Unit, CCGT Module, Power Park Module or DC Converter or dynamically
controlled OTSUA shall be Synchronised to the Total System (and for the avoidance of
doubt, dynamically controlled OTSUA will not be able to transmit), until the later of:
(a) the date specified by The Company in the Interim Operational Notification issued in
respect of the Generating Unit(s), CCGT Module(s), Power Park Module(s) or DC
Converter(s) or dynamically controlled OTSUA; and,
(b) if Embedded, the date of receipt of a confirmation from the Network Operator in
whose System the Plant and Apparatus is connected that it is acceptable to the
Network Operator that the Plant and Apparatus be connected and Synchronised;
and,
(c) in the case of Synchronous Generating Unit(s) only after the date of receipt by a
Generator of written confirmation from The Company that the Generating Unit or
CCGT Module as applicable, has completed the following tests to demonstrate
compliance with the relevant provisions of the Connection Conditions to The
Company’s satisfaction:
(i) those tests required to establish the open and short circuit saturation
characteristics of the Generating Unit (as detailed in Appendix OC5.A.2.3) to
enable assessment of the short circuit ratio in accordance with CC.6.3.2. Such
tests may be carried out at a location other than the Power Station site; and
(ii) open circuit step response tests (as detailed in Appendix OC5.A.2.2) to
demonstrate compliance with CC.A.6.2.4.1.
CP.6.5 The Company shall assess the schedule of tests submitted by the Generator or DC
Converter Station owner with the Notification of User’s Intention to Synchronise under
CP.6.1 and shall determine whether such schedule has been completed to The Company’s
satisfaction.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

5 of 29
CP.6.6 When the requirements of CP.6.2 to CP.6.5 have been met, The Company will notify the
Generator or DC Converter Station owner that the:
Generating Unit,
CCGT Module,
Power Park Module,
Dynamically controlled OTSUA or
DC Converter,
as applicable may (subject to the Generator or DC Converter Station owner having fulfilled
the requirements of CP.6.3 where that applies) be Synchronised to the Total System
through the issue of an Interim Operational Notification. Where the Generator is
undertaking OTSDUW, then the Interim Operational Notification will be in two parts, with
the “Interim Operational Notification Part A” applicable to the OTSUA and the “Interim
Operational Notification Part B” applicable to the GB Code Users Plant and Apparatus.
For the avoidance of doubt, the Interim Operational Notification Part A and the Interim
Operational Notification Part B can be issued together or at different times. In respect of
an Embedded Power Station or Embedded DC Converter Station (other than Embedded
Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC
Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement), The Company will notify the
Network Operator that an Interim Operational Notification has been issued.
CP.6.6.1 The Interim Operational Notification will be time limited, the expiration date being specified
at the time of issue. The Interim Operational Notification may be renewed by The
Company.
CP.6.6.2 The Generator or DC Converter Station owner must operate the Generating Unit, CCGT
Module, Power Park Module, OTSUA or DC Converter in accordance with the terms,
arising from the Unresolved Issues, of the Interim Operational Notification. Where
practicable, The Company will discuss such terms with the Generator or DC Converter
Station owner prior to including them in the Interim Operational Notification.
CP.6.6.3 The Interim Operational Notification will include the following limitations:
(a) In the case of OTSUA, the Interim Operational Notification Part A permits
Synchronisation of the dynamically controlled OTSUA to the Total System only for
the purposes of active control of voltage and Reactive Power and not for the purpose
of exporting Active Power.
(b) In the case of a Power Park Module, the Interim Operational Notification (and where
OTSDUW Arrangements apply, this reference will be to the Interim Operational
Notification Part B) will limit the proportion of the Power Park Module which can be
simultaneously Synchronised to the Total System such that neither of the following
figures are exceeded:
(i) 20% of the Registered Capacity of the Power Park Module (or the output of a
single Power Park Unit, where this exceeds 20% of the Power Station’s
Registered Capacity); nor
(ii) 50MW
until the Generator has completed the voltage control tests (detailed in OC5.A.3.2)
(including in respect of any dynamically controlled OTSUA) to The Company’s
reasonable satisfaction. Following successful completion of this test, each additional
Power Park Unit should be included in the voltage control scheme as soon as is
technically possible (unless The Company agrees otherwise).

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

6 of 29
 (b) In the case of a Power Park Module with a Registered Capacity greater or equal to
100MW, the Interim Operational Notification (and where OTSDUW Arrangements
apply, this reference will be to the Interim Operational Notification Part B) will limit
the proportion of the Power Park Module which can be simultaneously Synchronised
to the Total System to 70% of Registered Capacity until the Generator has
completed the Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode control tests with at least 50% of
the Registered Capacity of the Power Park Module in service (detailed in OC5.A.3.3)
to The Company’s reasonable satisfaction.
(c) In the case of a Synchronous Generating Unit, employing a static Excitation System
the Interim Operational Notification (and where OTSDUW Arrangements apply, this
reference will be to the Interim Operational Notification Part B) may if applicable limit
the maximum Active Power output and reactive power output of the Synchronous
Generating Unit or CCGT module prior to the successful commissioning of the Power
System Stabiliser to The Company’s satisfaction.
CP.6.6.4 When a GB Code User and The Company are acting/operating in accordance with the
provisions of an Interim Operational Notification, whilst it is in force, the relevant
provisions of the Grid Code to which that Interim Operational Notification relates will not
apply to the GB Code User or The Company to the extent and for the period set out in the
Interim Operational Notification.
CP.6.7 Other than Unresolved Issues that are subject to tests required under CP.7.2 to be
witnessed by The Company, the Generator or DC Converter Station owner must resolve
any Unresolved Issues prior to the commencement of the tests, unless The Company
agrees to a later resolution. The Generator or DC Converter Station owner must liaise with
The Company in respect of such resolution. The tests that may be witnessed by The
Company are specified in CP.7.2.
CP.6.8 Not less than 28 days, or such shorter period as may be acceptable in The Company’s
reasonable opinion, prior to the Generator or DC Converter Station owner wishing to
commence tests required under CP.7 to be witnessed by The Company, the Generator or
DC Converter Station owner will notify The Company that the Generating Unit(s), CCGT
Module(s), Power Park Module(s) or DC Converter(s) as applicable, is ready to
commence such tests.
CP.6.9 The items referred to at CP.7.3 shall be submitted by the Generator or the DC Converter
Station owner after successful completion of the tests required under CP.7.2.

CP.7. FINAL OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION

CP.7.1 The following provisions apply in relation to the issue of a Final Operational Notification.
CP.7.2 Tests to be carried out prior to issue of the Final Operational Notification
CP.7.2.1 Prior to the issue of a Final Operational Notification, the Generator or DC Converter
Station owner must have completed the tests specified in this CP.7.2.2 to The Company’s
satisfaction to demonstrate compliance with the relevant Grid Code provisions.
CP.7.2.2 In the case of any Generating Unit, CCGT Module, Power Park Module, OTSUA (if
applicable) and DC Converter these tests will comprise one or more of the following:
(a) reactive capability tests to demonstrate that the Generating Unit, CCGT Module,
Power Park Module, OTSUA (if applicable) and DC Converter can meet the
requirements of CC.6.3.2. These may be witnessed by The Company on site if there is
no metering to The Company Control Centre.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

7 of 29
 (b) voltage control system tests to demonstrate that the Generating Unit, CCGT Module,
Power Park Module, OTSUA (if applicable) and DC Converter can meet the
requirements of CC.6.3.6, CC.6.3.8 and, in the case of a Power Park Module, OTSUA
(if applicable) and DC Converter, the requirements of CC.A.7 and, in the case of a
Generating Unit and/or CCGT Module, the requirements of CC.A.6, and any terms
specified in the Bilateral Agreement as applicable. These tests may also be used to
validate the Excitation System model (PC.A.5.3) or voltage control system model
(PC.A.5.4) as applicable. These tests may be witnessed by The Company.
(c) governor or frequency control system tests to demonstrate that the Generating Unit,
CCGT Module, OTSUA (if applicable) and Power Park Module can meet the
requirements of CC.6.3.6, CC.6.3.7, where applicable CC.A.3, and BC.3.7. The results
will also validate the Mandatory Service Agreement required by CC.8.1. These tests
may also be used to validate the Governor model (PC.A.5.3) or frequency control
system model (PC.A.5.4) as applicable. These tests may be witnessed by The
Company.
(d) fault ride through tests in respect of a Power Station with a Registered Capacity of
100MW or greater, comprised of one or more Power Park Modules, to demonstrate
compliance with CC.6.3.15 (a), (b) and (c), CC.A.4.1, CC.A.4.2 and CC.A.4.3. Where
test results from a Manufacturers Data & Performance Report as defined in CP.11
have been accepted this test will not be required.
(e) any further tests reasonably required by The Company, and agreed with the GB Code
User to demonstrate any aspects of compliance with the Grid Code and the CUSC
Contract.
CP.7.2.3 The Company’s preferred range of tests to demonstrate compliance with the CC are
specified in Appendix OC5.A.2 (in the case of Generating Units other than Power Park
Modules) or Appendix OC5.A.3 (in the case of Generating Units comprising Power Park
Modules or OTSUA if applicable) or Appendix OC5.A.4 (in the case of DC Converters) and
are to be carried out by the GB Code User with the results of each test provided to The
Company. The GB Code User may carry out an alternative range of tests if this is agreed
with The Company. The Company may agree a reduced set of tests where there is a
relevant Manufacturers Data & Performance Report as detailed in CP.11.
CP.7.2.4 In the case of Offshore Power Park Modules which do not contribute to Offshore
Transmission Licensee Reactive Power capability as described in CC.6.3.2(e)(i) or
CC.6.3.2(e)(ii) or Voltage Control as described in CC.6.3.8(b)(i), the tests outlined in
CP.7.2.2 (a) and CP.7.2.2 (b) are not required. However, the offshore Reactive Power
transfer tests outlined in OC5.A.2.8 shall be completed in their place.
CP.7.2.5 Following completion of each of the tests specified in this CP.7.2, The Company will notify
the Generator or DC Converter Station owner whether, in the opinion of The Company,
the results demonstrate compliance with the relevant Grid Code conditions.
CP.7.2.6 The Generator or DC Converter Station owner is responsible for carrying out the tests and
retains the responsibility for safety and personnel during the test.
CP.7.3 Items for submission prior to issue of the Final Operational Notification
CP.7.3.1 Prior to the issue of a Final Operational Notification, the Generator or DC Converter
Station owner must submit to The Company to The Company’s satisfaction:
(a) updated Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning
Data), with validated actual values and updated estimates for the future including
Forecast Data items such as Demand;
(b) any items required by CP.5.2 and CP.6.3, updated by the GB Code User as necessary;

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

8 of 29
 (c) evidence to The Company’s satisfaction that demonstrates that the controller models
and/or parameters (as required under PC.A.5.3.2(c) option 2, PC.A.5.3.2(d) option 2,
PC.A.5.4.2, and/or PC.A.5.4.3.2) supplied to The Company provide a reasonable
representation of the behaviour of the GB Code User’s Plant and Apparatus and
OTSUA if applicable;
(d) results from the tests required in accordance with CP.7.2 carried out by the Generator
to demonstrate compliance with relevant Grid Code requirements including the tests
witnessed by The Company; and
(e) the final Compliance Statement and a User Self Certification of Compliance signed
by the GB Code User and a statement of any requirements that the Generator or DC
Converter Station owner has identified that have not been met together with a copy of
the derogation in respect of the same from the Authority.
CP.7.3.2 The items in CP.7.3 should be submitted by the Generator (including in respect of any
OTSUA if applicable) or DC Converter Station owner using the User Data File Structure.
CP.7.4 If the requirements of CP.7.2 and CP.7.3 have been successfully met, The Company will
notify the Generator or DC Converter Station owner that compliance with the relevant Grid
Code provisions has been demonstrated for the Generating Unit(s), CCGT Module(s),
Power Park Module(s), OTSUA, if applicable or DC Converter(s) as applicable through the
issue of a Final Operational Notification. In respect of an Embedded Power Station or
Embedded DC Converter Station other than Embedded Medium Power Stations not
subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a
Bilateral Agreement, The Company will notify the Network Operator that a Final
Operational Notification has been issued, subject to the requirement to confirm continued
compliance as per CP.8.2 as part of the Compliance Repeat Plan.
CP.7.5 If a Final Operational Notification cannot be issued because the requirements of CP.7.2
and CP.7.3 have not been successfully met prior to the expiry of an Interim Operational
Notification, then the Generator or DC Converter Station owner (where licensed in
respect of its activities) and/or The Company, shall apply to the Authority for a derogation.
The provisions of CP.10 shall then apply.

CP.8 COMPLIANCE REPEAT PLAN

CP.8.1 No later than 4 calendar years and 6 months after the issue of a Final Operational
Notification, The Company will notify the Generator or DC Converter Station owner that
confirmation of continued compliance with the requirements of the Grid Code and/or the
Bilateral Agreement is required.

CP.8.2 No later than 5 calendar years after the issue of a Final Operational Notification the
Generator or DC Converter Station owner shall confirm that the Plant and/or Apparatus
(including OTSUA if applicable) is fully compliant with the requirements of the Grid Code
and/or the Bilateral Agreement. The confirmation of compliance will include:
(a) a Compliance Statement and a User Self Certification of Compliance signed by the
GB Code User and a statement of any requirements that the Generator or DC
Converter Station owner has identified that have not been met together with a copy of
the derogation in respect of the same from the Authority.
(b) complete set of relevant Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and
Detailed Planning Data), with validated actual values and updated estimates for the
future including Forecast Data items such as Demand. Simulation studies and results
from tests detailed in Appendix CP.A.3 and OC5 are not required as part of the
Compliance Repeat Plan.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

9 of 29
 For the avoidance of doubt the Generator or DC Converter Station owner is responsible for
ensuring that Plant and/or Apparatus (including OTSUA if applicable) remains compliant
with the relevant clauses of the Grid Code and/or the Bilateral Agreement and/or changes
to connection site conditions notified by The Company.
CP.8.3 If the requirements of CP.8.2 have been completed to The Company’s satisfaction, The
Company will notify the Generator or DC Converter Station owner that compliance with
the relevant Grid Code provisions has been demonstrated for the Generating Unit(s),
CCGT Module(s), Power Park Module(s), OTSUA, if applicable or DC Converter(s) as
applicable through the issue of a Final Operational Notification subject to Compliance
Repeat Plan (CP.8) no later than 5 years from the date of issue. In respect of an Embedded
Power Station or Embedded DC Converter Station other than Embedded Medium
Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC Converter
Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement, The Company will notify the Network
Operator that a Final Operational Notification has been issued.
CP.8.4 If a Final Operational Notification cannot be issued because the requirements of CP.8.2
have not been successfully met prior to the date 5 years from the date of issue of the Final
Operational Notification, then The Company will issue the Generator or DC Converter
Station owner (where licensed in respect of its activities) a Limited Operational
Notification with respect to the Unresolved Issues. The provisions of CP.9 shall then
apply.

CP.9 LIMITED OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION

CP.9.1 Following the issue of a Final Operational Notification if:
(i) the Generator or DC Converter Station owner becomes aware, that the capability of
its Plant and/or Apparatus’ (including OTSUA if applicable) to meet any provisions of
the Grid Code, or where applicable the Bilateral Agreement is not fully available, then
the Generator or DC Converter Station owner shall follow the process in CP.9.2 to
CP.9.11; or,
(ii) a Network Operator becomes aware, that the capability of Plant and/or Apparatus’
belonging to an Embedded Power Station or Embedded DC Converter Station
(other than Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement
and Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement) is
failing to meet any provisions of the Grid Code, or where applicable the Bilateral
Agreement, then the Network Operator shall inform The Company and The
Company shall inform the Generator or DC Converter Station owner to then follow
the process in CP.9.2 to CP.9.11; or,
(iii) The Company becomes aware through monitoring as described in OC5.4, that a
Generator or DC Converter Station owner Plant and/or Apparatus’ (including
OTSUA if applicable) capability to meet any provisions of the Grid Code, or where
applicable the Bilateral Agreement is not fully available, then The Company shall
inform the other party. Where The Company and the Generator or DC Converter
Station owner cannot agree from the monitoring as described in OC5.4 whether the
Plant and/or Apparatus (including OTSUA if applicable) is fully available and/or is
compliant with the requirements of the Grid Code and where applicable the Bilateral
Agreement, the parties shall first apply the process in OC5.5.1, before applying the
process defined in CP.9 (LON) if applicable. Where the testing instructed in accordance
with OC.5.5.1 indicates that the Plant and/or Apparatus (including OTSUA if
applicable) is not fully available and/or is not compliant with the requirements of the Grid
Code and/or the Bilateral Agreement, or if the parties so agree, the process in CP.9.2
to CP.9.11 shall be followed.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

10 of 29
CP.9.2 Immediately upon a Generator or DC Converter Station owner becoming aware that its
Generating Unit, CCGT Module, Power Park Module, OTSUA (if applicable) or DC
Converter Station as applicable may be unable to comply with certain provisions of the Grid
Code or (where applicable) the Bilateral Agreement, the Generator or DC Converter
Station owner shall notify The Company in writing. Additional details of any operating
restrictions or changes in applicable data arising from the potential non-compliance and an
indication of the date from when the restrictions will be removed and full compliance
demonstrated shall be provided as soon as reasonably practical.
CP.9.3 If the nature of any unavailability and/or potential non-compliance described in CP.9.1
causes or can reasonably be expected to cause a material adverse effect on the business or
condition of The Company or other Users or the National Electricity Transmission
System or any User Systems, then The Company may, notwithstanding the provisions of
this CP.9, follow the provisions of Paragraph 5.4 of the CUSC.
CP.9.4 Except where the provisions of CP.9.3 apply, where the restriction notified in CP.9.2 is not
resolved in 28 days, then the Generator or DC Converter Station owner with input from
and discussion of conclusions with The Company, and the Network Operator where the
Generating Unit, CCGT Module, Power Park Module or Power Station as applicable is
Embedded, shall undertake an investigation to attempt to determine the causes of and
solution to the non-compliance. Such investigation shall continue for no longer than 56 days.
During such investigation, the Generator or DC Converter Station owner shall provide to
The Company, the relevant data which has changed due to the restriction in respect of
CP.7.3.1 as notified to the Generator or DC Converter Station owner by The Company as
being required to be provided.
CP.9.5 Issue and Effect of LON
CP.9.5.1 Following the issue of a Final Operational Notification, The Company will issue to the
Generator or DC Converter Station owner, a Limited Operational Notification if:
(a) by the end of the 56 day period referred to at CP.9.4, the investigation has not resolved
the non-compliance to The Company’s satisfaction; or
(b) The Company is notified by a Generator or DC Converter Station owner of a
Modification to its Plant and Apparatus (including OTSUA if applicable); or
(c) The Company receives a submission of data, or a statement from a Generator or DC
Converter Station owner indicating a change in Plant or Apparatus (including OTSUA
if applicable) or settings (including but not limited to governor and excitation control
systems) that may in The Company’s reasonable opinion, acting in accordance with
Good Industry Practice be expected to result in a material change of performance.
In the case of an Embedded Generator or Embedded DC Converter Station owner, The
Company will issue a copy of the Limited Operational Notification to the Network
Operator.
CP.9.5.2 The Limited Operational Notification will be time limited to expire no later than 12 months
from the start of the non-compliance or restriction or from reconnection following a change.
The Company may agree a longer duration in the case of a Limited Operational
Notification following a Modification or whilst the Authority is considering the application
for a derogation in accordance with CP.10.1.
CP.9.5.3 The Limited Operational Notification will notify the Generator or DC Converter Station
owner of any restrictions on the operation of the Generating Unit(s), CCGT Module(s),
Power Park Module(s), OTSUA (if applicable) or DC Converter(s) and will specify the
Unresolved Issues. The Generator or DC Converter Station owner must operate in
accordance with any notified restrictions and must resolve the Unresolved Issues.
CP.9.5.4 When a GB Code User and The Company are acting/operating in accordance with the
provisions of a Limited Operational Notification, whilst it is in force, the relevant provisions
of the Grid Code to which that Limited Operational Notification relates will not apply to the
GB Code User or The Company to the extent and for the period set out in the Limited
Operational Notification.
Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023
11 of 29
CP.9.5.5 The Unresolved Issues included in a Limited Operational Notification will show the
extent that the provisions of CP.7.2 (testing) and CP.7.3 (final data submission) shall apply.
In respect of selecting the extent of any tests which may in The Company’s view reasonably
be needed to demonstrate the restored capability and in agreeing the time period in which
the tests will be scheduled, The Company shall, where reasonably practicable, take account
of the Generator or DC Converter Station owner’s input to contain its costs associated with
the testing.
CP.9.5.6 In the case of a change or Modification the Limited Operational Notification may specify
that the affected Plant and/or Apparatus (including OTSUA if applicable) or associated
Generating Unit(s) or Power Park Unit(s) must not be Synchronised until all of the
following items, that in The Company’s reasonable opinion are relevant, have been
submitted to The Company to The Company’s satisfaction:
(a) updated Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and Detailed Planning
Data);
(b) details of any relevant special Power Station, Generating Unit(s), Power Park
Module(s), OTSUA (if applicable) or DC Converter Station(s) protection as applicable.
This may include Pole Slipping protection and islanding protection schemes; and
(c) simulation study provisions of Appendix CP.A.3 and the results demonstrating
compliance with Grid Code requirements relevant to the change or Modification as
agreed by The Company; and
(d) a detailed schedule of the tests and the procedures for the tests required to be carried
out by the Generator or DC Converter Station to demonstrate compliance with
relevant Grid Code requirements as agreed by The Company. The schedule of tests
shall be consistent with Appendix OC5.A.2 or Appendix OC5.A.3 as appropriate; and
(e) an interim Compliance Statement and a User Self Certification of Compliance
completed by the GB Code User (including any Unresolved Issues) against the
relevant Grid Code requirements including details of any requirements that the
Generator or DC Converter Station owner has identified that will not or may not be
met or demonstrated; and
(f) any other items specified in the LON.
CP.9.5.7 The items referred to in CP.9.5.6 shall be submitted by the Generator (including in respect
of any OTSUA if applicable) or DC Converter Station owner using the User Data File
Structure.
CP.9.5.8 In the case of Synchronous Generating Unit(s) only, the Unresolved Issues of the LON
may require that the Generator must complete the following tests to The Company’s
satisfaction to demonstrate compliance with the relevant provisions of the CCs prior to the
Generating Unit being Synchronised to the Total System:
(a) those tests required to establish the open and short circuit saturation characteristics of
the Generating Unit (as detailed in Appendix OC5.A.2.3) to enable assessment of the
short circuit ratio in accordance with CC.6.3.2. Such tests may be carried out at a
location other than the Power Station site; and
(b) open circuit step response tests (as detailed in Appendix OC5.A.2.2) to demonstrate
compliance with CC.A.6.2.4.1.
CP.9.6 In the case of a change or Modification, not less than 28 days, or such shorter period as
may be acceptable in The Company’s reasonable opinion, prior to the Generator or DC
Converter Station owner wishing to Synchronise its Plant and Apparatus (including
OTSUA if applicable) for the first time following the change or Modification, the Generator
or DC Converter Station owner will:
(i) submit a Notification of User’s Intention to Synchronise; and
(ii) submit to The Company the items referred to at CP.9.5.6.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

12 of 29
CP.9.7 Other than Unresolved Issues that are subject to tests to be witnessed by The Company,
the Generator or DC Converter Station owner must resolve any Unresolved Issues prior
to the commencement of the tests, unless The Company agrees to a later resolution. The
Generator or DC Converter Station owner must liaise with The Company in respect of
such resolution. The tests that may be witnessed by The Company are specified in
CP.7.2.2.
CP.9.8 Not less than 28 days, or such shorter period as may be acceptable in The Company’s
reasonable opinion, prior to the Generator or DC Converter Station owner wishing to
commence tests listed as Unresolved Issues to be witnessed by The Company, the
Generator or DC Converter Station owner will notify The Company that the Generating
Unit(s), CCGT Module(s), Power Park Module(s), OTSUA (if applicable) or DC
Converter(s) as applicable is ready to commence such tests.
CP.9.9 The items referred to at CP.7.3 and listed as Unresolved Issues shall be submitted by the
Generator or the DC Converter Station owner after successful completion of the tests.
CP.9.10 Where the Unresolved Issues have been resolved, a Final Operational Notification will
be issued to the GB Code User.
CP.9.11 If a Final Operational Notification has not been issued by The Company within the 12
month period referred to at CP.9.5.2 (or where agreed following a Modification by the expiry
time of the LON) then the Generator or DC Converter Station owner (where licensed in
respect of its activities) and The Company shall apply to the Authority for a derogation.

CP.10 PROCESSES RELATING TO DEROGATIONS

CP.10.1 Whilst the Authority is considering the application for a derogation, the Interim Operational
Notification or Limited Operational Notification will be extended to remain in force until
the Authority has notified The Company and the Generator or DC Converter Station
owner of its decision. Where the Generator or DC Converter Station owner is not licensed,
The Company may propose any necessary changes to the Bilateral Agreement with such
unlicensed Generator or DC Converter Station owner.
CP.10.2 If the Authority:
(a) grants a derogation in respect of the Plant and/or Apparatus, then The Company shall
issue a Final Operational Notification once all other Unresolved Issues are resolved;
or
(b) decides a derogation is not required in respect of the Plant and/or Apparatus, then The
Company will reconsider the relevant Unresolved Issues and may issue a Final
Operational Notification once all other Unresolved Issues are resolved; or
(c) decides not to grant any derogation in respect of the Plant and/or Apparatus, then
there will be no Operational Notification in place and The Company and the GB
Code User shall consider its rights pursuant to the CUSC.
CP.10.3 Where an Interim Operational Notification or Limited Operational Notification is so
conditional upon a derogation and such derogation includes any conditions (including any
time limit to such derogation), the Generator or DC Converter Station owner will progress
the resolution of any Unresolved Issues and / or progress and / or comply with any
conditions upon such derogation and the provisions of CP.6.9 to CP.7.4 shall apply and shall
be followed.

CP.11 MANUFACTURER’S DATA & PERFORMANCE REPORT

CP.11.1.1 Data and performance characteristics in respect of certain Grid Code requirements may be
registered with The Company by Power Park Unit manufacturers in respect of specific
models of Power Park Units by submitting information in the form of a Manufacturer’s Data
and Performance Report to The Company.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

13 of 29
CP.11.1.2 A GB Generator planning to construct a Power Station containing the appropriate version
of Power Park Units in respect of which a Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report
has been submitted to The Company may reference the Manufacturer’s Data &
Performance Report in its submissions to The Company. Any Generator considering
referring to a Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report for any aspect of its Plant and
Apparatus may contact The Company to discuss the suitability of the relevant
Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report to its project to determine if, and to what
extent, the data included in the Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report contributes
towards demonstrating compliance with those aspects of the Grid Code applicable to the
Generator. The Company will inform the Generator if the reference to the Manufacturer’s
Data & Performance Report is not appropriate or not sufficient for its project.
CP.11.1.3 The process to be followed by Power Park Unit manufacturers submitting a Manufacturer’s
Data & Performance Report is agreed by The Company. CP.11.2 indicates the specific
Grid Code requirement areas in respect of which a Manufacturer’s Data & Performance
Report may be submitted.
CP.11.1.4 The Company will maintain and publish a register of those Manufacturer’s Data &
Performance Reports which The Company has received and accepted as being an
accurate representation of the performance of the relevant Plant and / or Apparatus. Such
register will identify the manufacturer, the model(s) of Power Park Unit(s) to which the
report applies and the provisions of the Grid Code in respect of which the report contributes
towards the demonstration of compliance. The inclusion of any report in the register does
not in any way confirm that any Power Park Modules which utilise any Power Park Unit(s)
covered by a report is or will be compliant with the Grid Code.
CP.11.2 A Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report in respect of Power Park Units may cover
one (or part of one) or more of the following provisions of the Grid Code:
(a) Fault Ride Through capability CC.6.3.15
(b) Power Park Module mathematical model PC.A.5.4.2
CP.11.3 Reference to a Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report in a GB Code User’s
submissions does not by itself constitute compliance with the Grid Code.
CP.11.4 A Generator referencing a Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report should insert the
relevant Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report reference in the appropriate place in
the DRC data submission and / or in the User Data File Structure. The Company will
consider the suitability of a Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report:
(a) in place of DRC data submissions, a mathematical model suitable for representation of
the entire Power Park Module as per CP.A.3.4.4. For the avoidance of doubt only the
relevant sections as specified in PC.A.2.5.5.7 apply. Site specific parameters will still
need to be submitted by the Generator.
(b) in place of fault simulation studies as follows;
The Company will not require Fault Ride Through simulation studies to be conducted
as per CP.A.3.5.1 and qualified in CP.A.3.5.2 provided that;
(i) Adequate and relevant Power Park Unit data is included in respect of Fault Ride
Through testing covered in CP.A.14.7.1 in the relevant Manufacturer’s Data &
Performance Report, and
(ii) For each type and duration of fault as detailed in CP.A.3.5.1, the expected
minimum retained voltage is greater than the corresponding minimum voltage
achieved and successfully ridden through in the fault ride through tests covered by
the Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report.
(c) to reduce the scope of compliance site tests as follows;
(i) Where there is a Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report in respect of a
Power Park Unit which covers Fault Ride Through, The Company may agree that
no Fault Ride Through testing is required.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

14 of 29
CP.11.5 It is the responsibility of the GB Code User to ensure that the correct reference for the
Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report is used and the GB Code User by using that
reference accepts responsibility for the accuracy of the information. The GB Code User shall
ensure that the manufacturer has kept The Company informed of any relevant variations in
plant specification since the submission of the relevant Manufacturer’s Data &
Performance Report which could impact on the validity of the information.
CP.11.6 The Company may contact the Power Park Unit manufacturer directly to verify the
relevance of the use of such Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report. If The
Company believe the use some or all of such Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report
information is incorrect or the referenced data is inappropriate then the reference to the
Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report may be declared invalid by The Company.
Where, and to the extent possible, the data included in the Manufacturer’s Data &
Performance Report is appropriate, the compliance assessment process will be continued
using the data included in the Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

15 of 29
 APPENDIX 1 - ILLUSTRATIVE PROCESS DIAGRAMS

CP.A.1.1 Illustrative Compliance Process for Energisation of a User

The process illustrated in CP.A.1.1 applies to all GB Code Users energising passive network Plant and
Apparatus including Distribution Network Operators, Non-Embedded Customers, Generators and DC
Converter Station owners. This process is a subset of the full process for Generators and DC Converter
Station owners shown in CP.A.1.2. This diagram illustrates the process in the CP and includes references in
brackets to specific Grid Code clauses.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

16 of 29
 CP.A.1.2 Illustrative Compliance Process for Power Stations/DC Converter Stations

This diagram illustrates the process in the CP and includes references in brackets to specific Grid Code
clauses. For the avoidance of doubt this process does not apply to Embedded Medium Power Stations not
subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

17 of 29
 CP.A.1.3 Illustrative Compliance Process for Offshore Power Stations and OTSUA

This diagram illustrates the process in the CP and includes references in brackets to specific Grid Code
clauses.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

18 of 29
 CP.A.1.4 Illustrative Compliance Process for Ongoing Compliance

This diagram illustrates the process in the CP and includes references in brackets to specific Grid Code
clauses. For the avoidance of doubt this process does not apply to Embedded Medium Power Stations not
subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

19 of 29
 CP.A.1.5 Illustrative Compliance Process for Modification or change

This diagram illustrates the process in the CP and includes references in brackets to specific Grid Code
clauses. For the avoidance of doubt this process does not apply to Embedded Medium Power Stations not
subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

20 of 29
 APPENDIX 2 - USER SELF CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE

USER SELF CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE (Interim/Final)

Power Station/ DC
[Name of Connection Site/site of connection]
Converter Station:
OTSUA [Name of Interface Site]

GB Code User: [Full User name]

Registered Capacity
(MW) of Plant:

This User Self Certification of Compliance records the compliance by the GB Code User in respect of
[NAME] Power Station/DC Converter Station [and, in the case of OTSDUW Arrangements, OTSUA] with
the Grid Code and the requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and Construction Agreement dated [ ]
with reference number [ ]. It is completed by the Power Station/DC Converter Station owner in the case of
Plant and/or Apparatus (including OTSUA) connected to the National Electricity Transmission System
and for Embedded Plant.
We have recorded our compliance against each requirement of the Grid Code which applies to the Power
Station/DC Converter Station/OTSUA, together with references to supporting evidence and a commentary
where this is appropriate, and have provided this to The Company. A copy of the Compliance Statement is
attached.
Supporting evidence, in the form of simulation results, test results, manufacturer’s data and other
documentation, is attached in the User Data File Structure.
The GB Code User hereby certifies that, to the best of its knowledge and acting in accordance with Good
Industry Practice, [the Power Station is compliant with the Grid Code and the Bilateral Agreement] [the
OTSUA is compliant with the Grid Code and the Construction Agreement] in all aspects [with the following
Unresolved Issues*] [with the following derogation(s)**]:

Connection
Requirement Ref: Issue
Condition

Compliance Name: Title:

certified by: [PERSON] [PERSON DESIGNATION]
Signature: Of
[PERSON] [GB CODE USER DETAILS]
Date:

* Include for Interim User Self Certification of Compliance ahead of Interim Operational Notification.

** Include for final User Self Certification of Compliance ahead of Final Operational Notification where derogation(s) have been granted.
If no derogation(s) required delete wording and Table.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

21 of 29
 APPENDIX 3 - SIMULATION STUDIES
CP.A.3.1.1 This Appendix sets out the simulation studies required to be submitted to The Company to
demonstrate compliance with the Connection Conditions unless otherwise agreed with
The Company. This Appendix should be read in conjunction with CP.6 with regard to the
submission of the reports to The Company. Where there is any inconsistency in the
technical requirements in respect of which compliance is being demonstrated by simulation
in this Appendix and CC.6.3 and the Bilateral Agreement, the provisions of the Bilateral
Agreement and CC.6.3 prevail. The studies specified in this Appendix will normally be
sufficient to demonstrate compliance. However The Company may agree an alternative set
of studies proposed by the Generator or DC Converter Station owner provided The
Company deem the alternative set of studies sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the
Grid Code and the Bilateral Agreement.
CP.A.3.1.2 The Generator or DC Converter Station owner shall submit simulation studies in the form
of a report to demonstrate compliance. In all cases, the simulation studies must utilise
models applicable to the Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power Park Module with
proposed or actual parameter settings. Reports should be submitted in English with all
diagrams and graphs plotted clearly with legible axes and scaling provided to ensure any
variations in plotted values is clear.
CP.A.3.1.3 In the case of an Offshore Power Station where OTSDUW Arrangements apply,
simulation studies by the Generator should include the action of any relevant OTSUA where
applicable to demonstrate compliance with the Grid Code and the Bilateral Agreement at
the Interface Point.
CP.A.3.2 Power System Stabiliser Tuning
CP.A.3.2.1 In the case of a Synchronous Generating Unit, the Power System Stabiliser tuning
simulation study report required by CC.A.6.2.5.6 or required by the Bilateral Agreement
shall contain:
(i) the Excitation System model including the Power System Stabiliser with settings as
required under the Planning Code (PC.A.5.3.2(c)).
(ii) open circuit time series simulation study of the response of the Excitation System to a
+10% step change from 90% to 100% terminal voltage.
(iii) on load time series dynamic simulation studies of the response of the Excitation
System with and without the Power System Stabiliser to 2% and 10% steps in the
reference voltage and a three phase short circuit fault applied to the higher voltage side
of the Generating Unit transformer for 100ms. The simulation studies should be carried
out with the Generating Unit operating at full Active Power and maximum leading
Reactive Power import with the fault level at the Supergrid HV Connection Point at
minimum or as otherwise agreed with The Company. The results should show
Generating Unit field voltage, Generating Unit terminal voltage, Power System
Stabiliser output, Generating Unit Active Power and Generating Unit Reactive
Power output.
(iv) gain and phase Bode diagrams for the open loop frequency domain response of the
Generating Unit Excitation System with and without the Power System Stabiliser.
These should be in a suitable format to allow assessment of the phase contribution of
the Power System Stabiliser and the gain and phase margin of the Excitation
System with and without the Power System Stabiliser in service.
(v) an eigenvalue plot to demonstrate that all modes remain stable when the Power
System Stabiliser gain is increased by at least a factor of 3 from the designed
operating value.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

22 of 29
 (vi) gain Bode diagram for the closed loop on load frequency domain response of the
Generating Unit Excitation System with and without the Power System
Stabiliser with the Generating Unit operating at full load and at unity Power
Factor. These diagrams should be in a suitable format to allow comparison of the
Active Power damping across the frequency range specified in CC.A.6.2.6.3 with
and without the Power System Stabiliser in service
In the case of a Synchronous Generating Unit that may operate as demand (eg. Pump
Storage) the on load simulations (ii) to (vi) should also be carried out in both modes of
operation.
CP.A.3.2.2 In the case of Onshore Non-Synchronous Generating Units, Onshore DC Converters
and Onshore Power Park Modules and OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface
Point the Power System Stabiliser tuning simulation study report required by CC.A.7.2.4.1
or required by the Bilateral Agreement shall contain:
(i) the Voltage Control System model including the Power System Stabiliser with
settings as required under the Planning Code (PC.A.5.4) and Bilateral Agreement.
(ii) on load time series dynamic simulation studies of the response of the Voltage Control
System with and without the Power System Stabiliser to 2% and 10% steps in the
reference voltage and a three phase short circuit fault applied to the Grid Entry Point
or the Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus for 100ms. The
simulation studies should be carried out operating at full Active Power and maximum
leading Reactive Power (import condition) with the fault level at the Supergrid HV
Connection Point at minimum or as otherwise agreed with The Company. The results
should show appropriate signals to demonstrate the expected damping performance of
the Power System Stabiliser.
(iii) any other simulation as specified in the Bilateral Agreement or agreed between the
Generator or DC Converter Owner or Offshore Transmission Licensee and The
Company.
CP.A.3.3 Reactive Capability across the Voltage Range
CP.A.3.3.1 The Generator or DC Converter station owner shall supply simulation studies to
demonstrate the capability to meet CC.6.3.4 by submission of a report containing:
(i) a load flow simulation study result to demonstrate the maximum lagging Reactive
Power capability of the Synchronous Generating Unit, DC Converter, OTSUA or
Power Park Module at Rated MW when the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry
Point if Embedded or Interface Point (in case of OTSUA) voltage is at 105% of
nominal.
(ii) a load flow simulation study result to demonstrate the maximum leading Reactive
Power capability of the Synchronous Generating Unit, DC Converter, OTSUA or
Power Park Module at Rated MW when the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry
Point if Embedded or Interface Point (in case of OTSUA) voltage is at 95% of
nominal.
CP.A.3.3.2 In the case of a Synchronous Generating Unit the terminal voltage in the simulation should
be the nominal voltage for the machine. Where necessary to demonstrate compliance with
CC.6.3.4 and subject to compliance with CC.6.3.8 (a) (v), the Generator shall repeat the two
simulation studies with the terminal voltage being greater than the nominal voltage and less
than or equal to the maximum terminal voltage. The two additional simulations do not need
to have the same terminal voltage.
CP.A.3.3.3 In the case of a Synchronous Generating Unit, the Generator shall supply two sets of
simulation studies to demonstrate the capability to meet the operational requirements of
BC2.A.2.6 and CC.6.1.7 at the minimum and maximum short circuit levels when changing
tap position. Each set of simulation studies shall be at the same System conditions. None of
the simulation studies shall include the Synchronous Generating Unit operating at the
limits of its Reactive Power output.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

23 of 29
 The simulation results shall include the Reactive Power output of the Synchronous
Generating Unit and the voltage at the Grid Entry Point or, if Embedded, the User
System Entry Point with the Generating Unit transformer at two adjacent tap positions with
the greatest interval between them and the terminal voltage of the Synchronous
Generating Unit equal to
- its nominal value; and
- subject to compliance with CC.6.3.8 (a) (v), its maximum value.

CP.A.3.3.4 In the case of a Power Park Module where the load flow simulation studies show that the
individual Power Park Units deviate from nominal voltage to meet the Reactive Power
requirements, then evidence must be provided from factory (e.g. in a Manufacturer’s Data
& Performance Report) or site testing that the Power Park Unit is capable of operating
continuously at the operating points determined in the load flow simulation studies.
CP.A.3.4 Voltage Control and Reactive Power Stability
CP.A.3.4.1 In the case of a Power Station containing Power Park Modules and/or OTSUA the
Generator shall provide a report to demonstrate the dynamic capability and control stability
of the Power Park Module. The report shall contain:
(i) a dynamic time series simulation study result of a sufficiently large negative step in
System voltage to cause a change in Reactive Power from zero to the maximum
lagging value at Rated MW.
(ii) a dynamic time series simulation study result of a sufficiently large positive step in
System voltage to cause a change in Reactive Power from zero to the maximum
leading value at Rated MW.
(iii) a dynamic time series simulation study result to demonstrate control stability at the
lagging Reactive Power limit by application of a -2% voltage step while operating within
5% of the lagging Reactive Power limit.
(iv) a dynamic time series simulation study result to demonstrate control stability at the
leading Reactive Power limit by application of a +2% voltage step while operating
within 5% of the leading Reactive Power limit.
(v) a dynamic time series simulation study result of a sufficiently negative step in System
voltage to cause a change in Reactive Power from the maximum leading value to the
maximum lagging value at Rated MW.
The Generator should also provide the voltage control study specified in CP.A.3.7.4.
CP.A.3.4.2 All the above studies should be completed with a nominal network voltage for zero Reactive
Power transfer at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point if Embedded or, in the
case of OTSUA, Interface Point unless stated otherwise and the fault level at the HV
connection point at minimum as agreed with The Company.
CP.A.3.4.3 The Company may permit relaxation from the requirements of CP.A.3.4.1(i) and (ii) for
voltage control if the Power Park Modules are comprised of Power Park Units in respect of
which the GB Code User has in its submissions to The Company, referenced an
appropriate Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report which is acceptable to The
Company for voltage control.
CP.A.3.4.4 In addition, The Company may permit a further relaxation from the requirements of
CP.A.3.4.1(iii) and (iv) if the GB Code User has in its submissions to The Company
referenced an appropriate Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report for a Power Park
Module mathematical model for voltage control acceptable to The Company.
CP.A.3.5 Fault Ride Through
CP.A.3.5.1 The Generator, (including where undertaking OTSDUW) or DC Converter Station owner
shall supply time series simulation study results to demonstrate the capability of Non-
Synchronous Generating Units, DC Converters, Power Park Modules and OTSUA to
meet CC.6.3.15 by submission of a report containing:

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

24 of 29
 (i) a time series simulation study of a 140ms solid three phase short circuit fault applied on
the nearest point of the National Electricity Transmission System operating at
Supergrid voltage to the Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, DC Converter, Power
Park Module or OTSUA.
(ii) time series simulation study of 140ms unbalanced short circuit faults applied on the
nearest point of the National Electricity Transmission System operating at
Supergrid voltage to the Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, DC Converter, Power
Park Module or OTSUA. The unbalanced faults to be simulated are:
1. a phase to phase fault
2. a two phase to earth fault
3. a single phase to earth fault.
For a Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, DC Converter, Power Park Module or OTSUA,
the simulation study should be completed with the Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, DC
Converter, Power Park Module or OTSUA operating at full Active Power and maximum
leading Reactive Power import and the fault level at the Supergrid HV Connection Point
at minimum or as otherwise agreed with The Company.
(iii) time series simulation studies of balanced Supergrid voltage dips applied on the
nearest point of the National Electricity Transmission System operating at
Supergrid voltage to the Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, DC Converter, Power
Park Module or OTSUA. The simulation studies should include:
1. 30% retained voltage lasting 0.384 seconds
2. 50% retained voltage lasting 0.71 seconds
3. 80% retained voltage lasting 2.5 seconds
4. 85% retained voltage lasting 180 seconds.
For a Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, DC Converter, Power Park Module or OTSUA,
the simulation study should be completed with the Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, DC
Converter, Power Park Module or OTSUA operating at full Active Power and zero
Reactive Power output and the fault level at the Supergrid HV Connection Point at
minimum or as otherwise agreed with The Company. Where the Non-Synchronous
Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power Park Module is Embedded the minimum
Network Operator’s System impedance to the Supergrid HV Connection Point shall be
used which may be calculated from the maximum fault level at the User System Entry
Point.
For DC Converters the simulations should include the duration of each voltage dip 1 to 4
above for which the DC Converter will remain connected.
CP.A.3.5.2 In the case of Power Park Modules comprised of Power Park Units in respect of which the
GB Code User’s reference to a Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report has been
accepted by The Company for Fault Ride Through, CP.A.3.5.1 will not apply provided:
(i) the Generator or DC Converter Station owner demonstrates by load flow simulation
study result that the faults and voltage dips at either side of the Power Park Unit
transformer corresponding to the required faults and voltage dips in CP.A.3.5.1 applied
at the nearest point of the National Electricity Transmission System operating at
Supergrid voltage are less than those included in the Manufacturer’s Data &
Performance Report,
or;
(ii) the same or greater percentage faults and voltage dips in CP.A.3.5.1 have been applied
at either side of the Power Park Unit transformer in the Manufacturer’s Data &
Performance Report.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

25 of 29
CP.A.3.5.3 In the case of an Offshore Power Park Module or Offshore DC Converter, the studies
may instead be completed at the LV Side of the Offshore Platform. For fault simulation
studies described in CCA.8.5.1(i) and CCA.8.5.1(ii) a retained voltage of 15% or lower may
be applied at the LV Side of the Offshore Platform on the faulted phases. For voltage dip
simulation studies described in CP.A.3.5.1(iii) the same voltage levels and durations as
normally applied at the National Electricity Transmission System operating at Supergrid
Voltage will be applied at the LV Side of the Offshore Platform.
CP.A.3.5.4 In the case of a Power Park Module, the studies detailed in CP.A.3.5.1 should be repeated
to demonstrate compliance during foreseeable running arrangements resulting from outages
of major Plant and Apparatus (for example outage of the main export cable in the case of
OTSDUW or module step up transformer where alternative export connections are possible).
For these conditions, the Power Park Module Active Power output may be reduced to
levels appropriate to the planned operating regime proposed by the Generator. The
Generator shall consult The Company on alternative running arrangements and agree with
The Company the running arrangements that will be studied prior to the Generator
undertaking the studies. For the avoidance of doubt, compliance of a Power Park Module
with Fault Ride Through requirements remains the responsibility of the Generator under all
operating conditions.

CP.A.3.5.5 In the case of a Power Park Module with a Registered Capacity greater or equal to
100MW, the studies detailed in CP.A.3.5.1 should be repeated with 50% of the Power Park
Units Synchronised to the Total System. In the case of a Power Station containing
multiple Power Park Modules or multiple Offshore Power Park Modules connected to an
Offshore Transmission System or OTSDUW the study should include all Power Park
Modules with 50% of the Power Park Units Synchronised to the Total System.
CP.A.3.5.6 In the case of DC Networks the studies detailed in CP.A.3.5.1 should be repeated to
demonstrate compliance during foreseeable running arrangements resulting from outages of
major Plant and Apparatus (for example outage of an HVDC cable or converter). For these
conditions, the DC Converter Active Power transfer may be reduced to levels appropriate
to the planned operating regime. The Generator or DC Converter Station Owner shall
consult The Company on alternative running arrangements and agree with The Company
the running arrangements that will be studied prior to the DC Converter Station Owner
undertaking the studies. For the avoidance of doubt, compliance of DC Converter Station
with Fault Ride Through requirements remains the responsibility of the DC Converter
Station Owner under all operating conditions.

CP.A.3.6 Load Rejection

CP.A.3.6.1 In respect of Generating Units or DC Converters or Power Park Modules with a
Completion Date on or after 1 January 2012, the Generator or DC Converter Station
owner shall demonstrate the speed control performance of the plant under a part load
rejection condition as required by CC.6.3.7(c)(i), through simulation study. In respect of
Generating Units or DC Converters or Power Park Modules, including those with a
Completion Date before 1 January 2013, the load rejection capability while still supplying
load must be stated in accordance with PC.A.5.3.2(f).
CP.A.3.6.2 For Power Park Modules comprised of Power Park Units having a corresponding
generically verified and validated model included in the Manufacturer’s Data &
Performance Report, this study may not be required by The Company if the correct
Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report reference has been submitted in the
appropriate location in the Data Registration Code.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

26 of 29
CP.A.3.6.3 The simulation study should comprise of a Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power Park
Module connected to the total System with a local load shown as “X” in figure CP.A.3.6.1.
The load “X” is in addition to any auxiliary load of the Power Station connected directly to
the Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power Park Module and represents a small portion
of the System to which the Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power Park Module is
attached. The value of “X” should be the minimum for which the Generating Unit, DC
Converter or Power Park Module can control the power island Frequency to less than
52Hz. Where transient excursions above 52Hz occur the Generator or DC Converter
Owner should ensure that the duration above 52Hz is less than any high frequency
protection system applied to the Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power Park Module.
CP.A.3.6.4 At the start of the simulation study the Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power Park
Module will be operating maximum Active Power output. The Generating Unit, DC
Converter or Power Park Module will then be islanded from the Total System but still
supplying load “X” by the opening of a breaker, which is not the Generating Unit, DC
Converter or Power Park Module connection circuit breaker (the governor should therefore,
not receive any signals that the breaker has opened other than the reduction in load and
subsequent increase in speed). A schematic arrangement of the simulation study is
illustrated by Figure CP.A.3.6.1.

Figure CP.A.3.6.1 – Diagram of Load Rejection Study

CP.A.3.6.5 The simulation study shall be performed for both control modes, Frequency Sensitive
Mode (FSM) and Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode (LFSM). The simulation study results
should indicate Active Power and Frequency in the island system that includes the
Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power Park Module.
CP.A.3.6.6 To allow validation of the model used to simulate load rejection in accordance with
CC.6.3.7(c)(i) as described, a further simulation study is required to represent the largest
positive Frequency injection step or fast ramp (BC1 and BC3 of Figure 2) that will be applied
as a test as described in OC5.A.2.8 and OC5.A.3.6.
CP.A.3.7 Voltage and Frequency Controller Model Verification and Validation

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

27 of 29
CP.A.3.7.1 For Generating Units, DC Converters or Power Park Modules with a Completion Date
after 1 January 2012 or subject to a Modification to a Excitation System, voltage control
system, governor control system or Frequency control system after 1 January 2012 the
Generator or DC Converter Station owner shall provide simulation studies to verify that the
proposed controller models supplied to The Company under the Planning Code are fit for
purpose. These simulation study results shall be provided in the timescales stated in the
Planning Code. For Power Park Modules comprised of Power Park Units having a
corresponding generically verified and validated model in a Manufacturer’s Data &
Performance Report, The Company may permit the simulation studies detailed in
CP.A.3.7.2, CP.A.3.7.4 and CP.A.3.7.5 to be replaced by submission of the correct
Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report reference in the appropriate location in the
Data Registration Code.
CP.A.3.7.2 To demonstrate the Frequency control or governor/load controller/plant model, the
Generator or DC Converter Station owner shall submit a simulation study representing the
response of the Synchronous Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power Park Module
operating at 80% of Registered Capacity. The simulation study event shall be equivalent to:
(i) a ramped reduction in the measured System Frequency of 0.5Hz in 10 seconds
followed by
(ii) 20 seconds of steady state with the measured System Frequency depressed by 0.5Hz
followed by
(iii) a ramped increase in measured System Frequency of 0.3Hz over 30 seconds followed
by
(iv) 60 seconds of steady state with the measured System Frequency depressed by 0.2Hz
as illustrated in Figure CP.A.3.7.2 below.

Figure CP.A.3.7.2

The simulation study shall show Active Power output (MW) and the equivalent of
Frequency injected.
CP.A.3.7.3 To demonstrate the Excitation System model the Generator shall submit simulation studies
representing the response of the Synchronous Generating Unit as follows:
(i) operating open circuit at rated terminal voltage and subjected to a 2% step increase in
terminal voltage reference.
(ii) operating at Rated MW, nominal terminal voltage and unity Power Factor subjected to
a 2% step increase in the voltage reference. Where a Power System Stabiliser is
included within the Excitation System this shall be in service.
The simulation study shall show the terminal voltage, field voltage of the Generating Unit,
Active Power, Reactive Power and Power System Stabiliser output signal as appropriate.

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

28 of 29
CP.A.3.7.4 To demonstrate the Voltage Controller model, the Generator or DC Converter Station
owner shall submit a simulation study representing the response of the Non-Synchronous
Generating Unit, DC Converter or Power Park Module operating at Rated MW and unity
Power Factor at the connection point to a 2% step increase in the voltage reference. The
simulation study shall show the terminal voltage, Active Power, Reactive Power and
Power System Stabiliser output signal as appropriate.
CP.A.3.7.5 To validate that the excitation and voltage control models submitted under the Planning
Code are a reasonable representation of the dynamic behaviour of the Synchronous
Generating Unit, DC Converter Station or Power Park Module as built, the Generator or
DC Converter Station owner shall repeat the simulation studies outlined above but using
the operating conditions of the equivalent tests. The simulation study results shall be
displayed overlaid on the actual test results.
CP.A.3.7.6 For Generating Units or DC Converters with a Completion Date after 1 January 2012 or
subject to a Modification to the governor system or Frequency control system after 1
January 2013 to validate that the governor/load controller/plant or Frequency control models
submitted under the Planning Code is a reasonable representation of the dynamic
behaviour of the Synchronous Generating Unit or DC Converter Station as built, the
Generator or DC Converter Station owner shall repeat the simulation studies outlined
above but using the operating conditions of the equivalent tests. The simulation study results
shall be displayed overlaid on the actual test results.
CP.A.3.8 Sub-synchronous Resonance Control and Power Oscillation Damping Control for DC
Converters
CP.A.3.8.1 To demonstrate the compliance of the sub-synchronous control function with CC.6.3.16(a)
and the terms of the Bilateral Agreement, the DC Converter Station owner or Generator
undertaking OTSDUW shall submit a simulation study report.
CP.A.3.8.2 Where power oscillation damping control function is specified on a DC Converter the DC
Converter Station owner or Generator undertaking OTSDUW shall submit a simulation
study report to demonstrate the compliance with CC.6.3.16(b) and the terms of the Bilateral
Agreement.
CP.A.3.8.3 The simulation studies should utilise the DC Converter control system models including the
settings as required under the Planning Code (PC.A.5.3.2). The network conditions for the
above simulation studies should be discussed with The Company prior to commencing any
simulation studies.

< END OF COMPLIANCE PROCESSES >

Issue 6 Revision 16 CP 05 January 2023

29 of 29
 EUROPEAN COMPLIANCE PROCESSES
(ECP)

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page No

ECP.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 3

ECP.2 OBJECTIVE ............................................................................................. 4
ECP.3 SCOPE ..................................................................................................... 5
ECP.4 CONNECTION PROCESS ....................................................................... 5
ECP.5 ENERGISATION OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION .................................. 7
ECP.6 OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION PROCESSES ....................................... 7
ECP.6.1 OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION PROCESS (Type A) ............................. 7
ECP.6.2 INTERIM OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION (Type B and Type C) ............. 9
ECP.6.3 INTERIM OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION (Type D and HVDC
Equipment) ............................................................................................. 12
ECP.6.4 INTERIM OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION (Network Operator’s or Non-
Embedded Customer’s Plant and Apparatus) ......................................... 16
ECP.7 FINAL OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION ................................................. 18
ECP.8 COMPLIANCE REPEAT PLAN .............................................................. 21
ECP.9 LIMITED OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION ............................................. 22
ECP.10 PROCESSES RELATING TO DEROGATIONS...................................... 27
ECP.11 MANUFACTURER’S DATA & PERFORMANCE REPORT .................... 27
APPENDIX 1 29
NOT USED 29
APPENDIX 2 30
USER SELF CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE (Interim/Final) ................................. 30
APPENDIX 3 31
SIMULATION STUDIES ................................................................................................ 31
APPENDIX 4 50
ONSITE SIGNAL PROVISION FOR WITNESSING TESTS .......................................... 50
APPENDIX 5 57
COMPLIANCE TESTING OF SYNCHRONOUS POWER GENERATING MODULES .. 57
ECP.A.5.2 Excitation System Open Circuit Step Response Tests ....... 58
ECP.A.5.3 Open & Short Circuit Saturation Characteristics ................ 58
ECP.A.5.6 Over-excitation Limiter Performance Test .......................... 61
ECP.A.5.8 Governor and Load Controller Response Performance ...... 62
ECP.A.5.9 Compliance with ECC.6.3.3 Functionality Test ................... 67

ECP
Page 1 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
APPENDIX 6 69
COMPLIANCE TESTING OF POWER PARK MODULES ............................................. 69
APPENDIX 7 82
COMPLIANCE TESTING FOR HVDC EQUIPMENT ..................................................... 82
APPENDIX 8 92
SIMULATION STUDIES AND COMPLIANCE TESTING FOR NETWORK OPERATORS
AND NON-EMBEDDED CUSTOMERS PLANT AND APPARATUS ....... 92

ECP
Page 2 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 EUROPEAN COMPLIANCE PROCESSES

ECP.1 INTRODUCTION

ECP.1.1 The European Compliance Processes ("ECP") specifies the compliance

process in relation to directly connected and Embedded Power Stations
(subject to a Bilateral Agreement), HVDC Systems, Grid Forming Plant and
Network Operator’s or Non-Embedded Customer’s Plant and Apparatus.
For the avoidance of doubt, the requirements of the European Compliance
Processes do not apply to Demand Response Providers unless they are
also an EU Code User and have entered into a CUSC Contract with The
Company. Generators in respect of Electricity Storage Modules are
required to meet the requirements of this ECC but are not required to satisfy
the requirements of Retained EU Law (Commission Regulation (EU)
2016/631, Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/1388 or Commission Regulation
(EU) 2016/1485). Any derogation in respect of Electricity Storage Modules
would therefore be against the GB Grid Code as the requirements applicable
to Electricity Storage Modules are not enforceable by EU Law:

(i) Type A Power Generating Modules:

the process for issuing and receiving an Installation Document

which must be followed by The Company and any User with a Type
A Power Generating Module to demonstrate its compliance with the
Grid Code in relation to its Plant and Apparatus prior to the relevant
Plant and Apparatus being energised.

(ii) Type B, Type C or Type D Power Generating Modules and HVDC

Systems:

the process (leading to an Energisation Operational Notification)

which must be followed by The Company and any User with a Type
B, Type C or Type D Power Generating Module or HVDC System
to demonstrate its compliance with the Grid Code in relation to its
Plant and Apparatus (including OTSUA) prior to the relevant Plant
and Apparatus (including any OTSUA) being energised.

the process (leading to an Interim Operational Notification and

Final Operational Notification) which must be followed by The
Company and any User with a Type B, Type C or Type D Power
Generating Module or HVDC System or HVDC System Owner to
demonstrate its compliance with the Grid Code in relation to its Plant
and Apparatus (including and dynamically controlled OTSUA). This
process shall be followed prior to and during the course of the
relevant Plant and Apparatus (including OTSUA) being energised
and Synchronised.

the process (leading to a Limited Operational Notification) which

must be followed by The Company and each User with a Type B,
Type C or Type D Power Generating Module or HVDC System
where any of its Plant and/or Apparatus (including any OTSUA)
becomes unable to comply with relevant provisions of the Grid Code,
and where applicable with Appendices F1 to F5 of the Bilateral
Agreement (and in the case of OTSUA Appendices OF1 to OF5 of
the Bilateral Agreement). This process also includes when changes
or Modifications are made to Plant and/or Apparatus (including
OTSUA). This process applies to such Plant and/or Apparatus after
the Plant and/or Apparatus has become Operational and until
Disconnected from the Total System, (or until, in the case of

ECP
Page 3 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 OTSUA, the OTSUA Transfer Time) when changes or
Modifications are made.

(iii) Network Operator’s or Non-Embedded Customer’s Plant and

Apparatus:

the process (leading to an Energisation Operational Notification)

which must be followed by The Company and any Network
Operator or Non-Embedded Customer to demonstrate its
compliance with the Grid Code in relation to its Plant and Apparatus
prior to the relevant Plant and Apparatus being energised.

the process (leading to an Interim Operational Notification and

Final Operational Notification) which must be followed by The
Company and any Network Operator or Non-Embedded
Customer to demonstrate its compliance with the Grid Code in
relation to its Plant and Apparatus. This process shall be followed
prior to and during the course of the relevant Plant and Apparatus
being energised and operated by using the grid connection.

the process (leading to a Limited Operational Notification) which

must be followed by The Company and each Network Operator or
Non-Embedded Customer where any of its Plant and/or Apparatus
becomes unable to comply with relevant provisions of the Grid Code,
and where applicable with Appendices F1 to F5 of the Bilateral
Agreement. This process also includes changes or Modifications
made to the Plant and/or Apparatus. This process applies to such
Plant and/or Apparatus after the Plant and/or Apparatus has
become operational and until Disconnected from the Transmission
System.

ECP.1.2 As used in the ECP, references to OTSUA means OTSUA to be connected

or connected to the National Electricity Transmission System prior to the
OTSUA Transfer Time.

ECP.1.3 Where a Generator or HVDC System Owner and/or The Company are
required to apply for a derogation to the Authority, this is not in respect of
OTSUA.

ECP.1.4 In the case of an Electricity Storage Plant comprising of separate

generating units and demand taking plant (eg a pump) then compliance would
be assessed individually on the generating units and the demand taking
elements.

ECP.2 OBJECTIVE

ECP.2.1 The objective of the ECP is to ensure that there is a clear and consistent
process for demonstration of compliance by Users with the European
Connection Conditions and Bilateral Agreement and will enable The
Company to comply with its statutory and Transmission Licence
obligations. For the avoidance of doubt, the requirements of the European
Compliance Processes do not apply to Demand Response Providers
unless they are also an EU Code User and have entered into a CUSC
Contract with The Company.

ECP.2.2 Provisions of the ECP which apply in relation to OTSDUW and OTSUA shall
(in any particular case) apply up to the OTSUA Transfer Time, whereupon
such provisions shall (without prejudice to any prior non-compliance) cease
to apply.

ECP
Page 4 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.2.3 In relation to OTSDUW, provisions otherwise to be contained in a Bilateral
Agreement may be contained in the Construction Agreement, and
accordingly a reference in the ECP to a relevant Bilateral Agreement
includes the relevant Construction Agreement.

ECP.3 SCOPE

ECP.3.1 The ECP applies to The Company and to Users, which in the ECP means:

(a) EU Generators (other than in relation to Embedded Power Stations

not subject to a Bilateral Agreement) including those undertaking
OTSDUW.

(b) Network Operators who are either;

(i) EU Code Users in respect of their entire distribution

System; or
(ii) GB Code Users in respect of their EU Grid Supply Points
only

(c) Non-Embedded Customers who are EU Code Users;

(d) HVDC System Owners (other than those which only have
Embedded HVDC Systems not subject to a Bilateral Agreement).

(e) Grid Forming Plant Owners who own and operate a Grid Forming
Plant and intend to satisfy the requirements of ECC.6.3.19

ECP.3.2 The above categories of User will become bound by the ECP prior to them
generating, distributing, supplying or consuming, or in the case of OTSUA,
transmitting, as the case may be, and references to the various categories
should, therefore, be taken as referring to them in that prospective role.

ECP.3.3 For the avoidance of doubt, Demand Response Providers do not need to
satisfy the requirements of this ECP unless they are also defined as an EU
Code User and have a CUSC Contract with The Company. Where a
Demand Response Provider is not an EU Code User and does not have a
CUSC Contract with The Company, the requirements of the Demand
Response Services Code shall only apply.

ECP.3.4 For the avoidance of doubt, this ECP does not apply to GB Code Users other
than in respect of Network Operator’s EU Grid Supply Points.

ECP.4 CONNECTION PROCESS

ECP.4.1 The CUSC Contract(s) contain certain provisions relating to the procedure
for connection to the National Electricity Transmission System or, in the
case of Embedded Power Stations or Embedded HVDC Systems,
becoming operational and include provisions to be complied with by Users
prior to and during the course of The Company notifying the User that it has
the right to become operational. In addition to such provisions, this ECP sets
out in further detail the processes to be followed to demonstrate compliance.
While this ECP does not expressly address the processes to be followed in
the case of OTSUA connecting to a Network Operator’s User System prior
to OTSUA Transfer Time, the processes to be followed by The Company
and the Generator in respect of the OTSUA in such circumstances shall be

ECP
Page 5 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 consistent with those set out below by reference to OTSUA directly
connected to the National Electricity Transmission System.

ECP.4.2 The provisions contained in ECP.5 to ECP.7 detail the process to be followed
in order for the User’s Plant and Apparatus (including OTSUA) to become
operational. This process includes

(i) the acceptance of an Installation Document for a Type A Power

Generating Module;

(ii) for energisation an EON for Type B, Type C or Type D Power

Generating Modules, or HVDC Equipment, Grid Forming Plant or
Network Operator’s or Non-Embedded Customer’s Plant and
Apparatus;

(iii) for synchronising an ION for Type B, Type C or Type D Power

Generating Modules or HVDC Equipment;

(iv) for operating by using the Grid Supply Point an ION for;

a. Network Operators who are EU Code Users in respect of their

entire distribution System;
b. Network Operators who are GB Code Users in respect of their
EU Grid Supply Points only; or
c. Non-Embedded Customers who are EU Code Users;

(v) for final certification a FON.

ECP.4.2.1 The provisions contained in ECP.5 relate to the connection and energisation
of User’s Plant and Apparatus (including OTSUA) to the National
Electricity Transmission System or where Embedded, to a User’s
System.

ECP.4.2.2 The provisions contained in ECP.6 and ECP.7 provide the process for
Generators, HVDC System Owners, Grid Forming Plant Owners,
Network Operators and Non-Embedded Customers to demonstrate
compliance with the Grid Code and with, where applicable, the CUSC
Contract(s) prior to and during the course of such Generator’s, HVDC
System Owner’s (including OTSUA up to the OTSUA Transfer Time),
Network Operator’s and Non-Embedded Customer’s Plant and
Apparatus) becoming operational.

ECP.4.2.3 The provisions contained in ECP.8 detail the process to be followed to confirm
continued compliance (the “Compliance Repeat Plan”).

ECP.4.2.4 The provisions contained in ECP.9 detail the process to be followed when:
(a) a Generator’s or HVDC System Owner’s, or Grid Forming Plant
Owner’s, or Network Operator’s or Non-Embedded Customer’s
Plant and/or Apparatus (including the OTSUA) is unable to comply
with any provisions of the Grid Code and Bilateral Agreement; or,
(b) following any notification by a Generator or a HVDC System Owner
or a Grid Forming Plant Owner or a Network Operator or a Non-
Embedded Customer under the PC of any change to its Plant and
Apparatus (including any OTSUA); or,
(c) a Modification to a Generator’s or a HVDC System Owner’s or a
Grid Forming Plant Owner’s or a Network Operator’s or a Non-
Embedded Customer’s Plant and/or Apparatus.

ECP
Page 6 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.4.2.4 For Grid Forming Plant Owners, the Operational Notification Process of
this ECP shall apply in relation to the type of Plant to which the Grid Forming
Capability is provided (be it a GBGF-S or GBGF-I),

ECP.4.3 Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement

and Embedded HVDC Equipment not subject to a Bilateral Agreement

ECP.4.3.1 In the case of Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement and Embedded HVDC Systems not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement, ensuring the obligations of the ECC and Appendix E of the
relevant Bilateral Agreement between The Company and the host Network
Operator are performed and discharged by the relevant party. For the
avoidance of doubt the process in this ECP does not apply to Embedded
Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and
Embedded HVDC Equipment not subject to a Bilateral Agreement.

ECP.5 ENERGISATION OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION

ECP.5.1 The following provisions apply in relation to the issue of an Energisation

Operational Notification in respect of a Power Station consisting of Type
B, Type C or Type D Power Generating Modules or an HVDC System or
a Network Operator’s or a Non-Embedded Customer’s Plant and
Apparatus.

ECP.5.1.1 Certain provisions relating to the connection and energisation of the User’s
Plant and Apparatus at the Connection Site and OTSUA at the
Transmission Interface Point and in certain cases of Embedded Plant and
Apparatus are specified in the CUSC and/or CUSC Contract(s). For other
Embedded Plant and Apparatus, the Distribution Code, the DCUSA and
the Embedded Development Agreement for the connection specify
equivalent provisions. Further detail on this is set out in ECP.5 below.

ECP.5.2 The items for submission prior to the issue of an Energisation Operational
Notification are set out in ECC.5.2.

ECP.5.3 In the case of a Generator or HVDC System Owner the items referred to in
ECC.5.2 shall be submitted using the Power Generating Module Document
or User Data File Structure as applicable.

ECP.5.4 Not less than 28 days, or such shorter period as may be acceptable in The
Company’s reasonable opinion, prior to the User wishing to energise its
Plant and Apparatus (including passive OTSUA) for the first time, the User
will submit to The Company a Certificate of Readiness to Energise High
Voltage Equipment which specifies the items of Plant and Apparatus
(including OTSUA) ready to be energised in a form acceptable to The
Company.

ECP.5.5 If the relevant obligations under the provisions of the CUSC and/or CUSC
Contract(s) and the conditions of ECP.5 have been completed to The
Company’s reasonable satisfaction then The Company shall issue an
Energisation Operational Notification. Any dynamically controlled reactive
compensation OTSUA (including Statcoms or Static Var Compensators) shall
not be Energised until the appropriate Interim Operational Notification has
been issued in accordance with ECP.6.

ECP.6 OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION PROCESSES

ECP.6.1 OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION PROCESS (Type A)

ECP
Page 7 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.6.1.1 The following provisions apply in relation to the notification process in in
respect of a Power Station consisting of Type A Power Generating
Modules.

ECP.6.1.2 Not less than 7 days, or such shorter period as may be acceptable in The
Company’s reasonable opinion, prior to the Generator wishing to
Synchronise its Plant and Apparatus for the first time, the Generator will:

submit to The Company, a Notification of the User’s Intention to

Connect; and

submit to The Company an Installation Document containing at

least but not limited to the items referred to at ECP.6.1.3.

ECP.6.1.3 Items for submission prior to connection.

ECP.6.1.3.1 Prior to the issue of an acknowledgment to connect, the Generator must

submit to The Company, to The Company’s satisfaction, an Installation
Document containing at least but not limited to:

(i) The location at which the connection is made;

(ii) The date of the connection;

(iii) The Maximum Capacity of the installation in kW;

(iv) The type of primary energy source;

(v) The classification of the Power Generating Module as an emerging

technology;

(vi) A list of references to Equipment Certificates issued by an

authorised certifier or otherwise agreed with The Company used for
equipment that is installed at the site or copies of the relevant
Equipment Certificates issued by an Authorised Certifier or
otherwise where these are relied upon as part of the evidence of
compliance;

(vii) As regards equipment used, for which an Equipment Certificate

has not been received, information shall be provided as directed by
The Company or the Relevant Network Operator; and

(viii) The contact details of the Generator and the installer and their
signatures.

ECP.6.1.3.2 The items referred to in ECP.6.1.3 shall be submitted by the Generator in the
form of an Installation Document for each applicable Power Generating
Module.

ECP.6.1.4 No Power Generating Module shall be Synchronised to the Total System

until the later of:

(a) the date specified by the Generator in the Installation Document

issued in respect of each applicable Power Generating Module(s);
and,

(b) acknowledgement is received from The Company confirming receipt

of the Installation Document.

ECP
Page 8 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.6.1.5 When the requirements of ECP.6.1.2 to ECP.6.1.4 have been met, The
Company will notify the Generator that the Power Generating Module may
(subject to the Generator having fulfilled the requirements of ECP.6.1.3
where that applies) be Synchronised to the Total System.

ECP.6.1.6 Not less than 7 days, or such shorter period as may be acceptable in The
Company’s reasonable opinion, prior to the Generator wishing to
decommission its Plant and Apparatus, the Generator will submit to The
Company a Notification of User’s Intention to Disconnect.

ECP.6.2 INTERIM OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION (Type B and Type C)

ECP.6.2.1 The following provisions apply in relation to the issue of an Interim

Operational Notification in respect of a Power Station consisting of Type
B and(or) Type C Power Generating Modules.

ECP.6.2.2 Not less than 28 days, or such shorter period as may be acceptable in The
Company’s reasonable opinion, prior to the Generator wishing to
Synchronise its Plant and Apparatus or dynamically controlled OTSUA for
the first time the Generator or HVDC Equipment owner will:

(i) submit to The Company a Notification of User’s Intention to

Synchronise; and

(ii) submit to The Company an initial Power Generating Module

Document containing at least but not limited to the items referred to
at ECP.6.2.3.

ECP.6.2.3 Items for submission prior to issue of the Interim Operational Notification.

ECP.6.2.3.1 Prior to the issue of an Interim Operational Notification in respect of the EU

Code User’s Plant and Apparatus or dynamically controlled OTSUA, the
Generator must submit to The Company to The Company’s satisfaction an
Interim Power Generating Module Document containing at least but not
limited to:

(i) updated Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and
Detailed Planning Data), with any estimated values assumed for
planning purposes confirmed or, where practical, replaced by
validated actual values and by updated estimates for the future and
by updated forecasts for Forecast Data items such as Demand;

(ii) for Type C Power Generating Modules the simulation models;

(iii) details of any special Power Generating Module(s) protection as

required by ECC.6.2.2.3. This may include Pole Slipping protection
and islanding protection schemes as applicable;

(iv) simulation study provisions of Appendix ECP.A.3 and the results

demonstrating compliance with Grid Code requirements of:

PC.A.5.4.2
PC.A.5.4.3.2,
ECC.6.3.4,
ECC.6.3.7.3.1 to ECC.6.3.7.3.6,
ECC.6.3.15, ECC.6.3.16
ECC.A.6.2.5.6
ECC.A.7.2.3.1

ECP
Page 9 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 as applicable to the Power Generating Module(s) or dynamically
controlled OTSUA unless agreed otherwise by The Company;

(v) a detailed schedule of the tests and the procedures for the tests
required to be carried out by the Generator under ECP.7.2 to
demonstrate compliance with relevant Grid Code requirements.
Such schedule to be consistent with Appendix ECP.A.5 (in the case
of a Synchronous Power Generating Module) or Appendix
ECP.A.6 (in the case of a Power Park Modules) and OTSUA as
applicable);

(vi) copies of Manufacturer’s Test Certificates or Equipment

Certificates issued by an Authorised Certifier or equivalent as
agreed with The Company where these are relied upon as part of
the evidence of compliance; and

(vii) a Compliance Statement and a User Self Certification of

Compliance completed by the EU Code User (including any
Unresolved Issues) against the relevant Grid Code requirements
including details of any requirements that the Generator has
identified that will not or may not be met or demonstrated.

ECP.6.2.3.2 The items referred to in ECP.6.2.3 shall be submitted by the Generator in the
form of a Power Generating Module Document (PGMD) for each applicable
Power Generating Module.

ECP.6.2.4 No Generating Unit or dynamically controlled OTSUA shall be

Synchronised to the Total System (and for the avoidance of doubt,
dynamically controlled OTSUA will not be able to transmit) until the later of:

(a) the date specified by The Company in the Interim Operational

Notification issued in respect of each applicable Power Generating
Module(s) or dynamically controlled OTSUA; and,

(b) in the case of Synchronous Power Generating Module(s) only after

the date of receipt by the Generator of written confirmation from The
Company that the Synchronous Power Generating Module or
CCGT Module as applicable has completed the following tests to
demonstrate compliance with the relevant provisions of the
Connection Conditions to The Company’s satisfaction:

(i) those tests required to establish the open and short circuit
saturation characteristics of the Synchronous Power
Generating Module (as detailed in Appendix ECP.A.4.3) to
enable assessment of the short circuit ratio in accordance
with ECC.6.3.2. Such tests may be carried out at a location
other than the Power Station site and supplied in the form of
an Equipment Certificate or as otherwise agreed by The
Company; and

(ii) open circuit step response tests (as detailed in Appendix

ECP.A.5.2) to demonstrate compliance with ECC.A.6.2.4.1.

ECP.6.2.5 The Company shall assess the schedule of tests submitted by the Generator
with the Notification of User’s Intention to Synchronise under ECP.6.2.3
and shall determine whether such schedule has been completed to The
Company’s satisfaction.

ECP.6.2.6 When the requirements of ECP.6.2.2 to ECP.6.2.5 have been met, The
Company will notify the Generator that the:

ECP
Page 10 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 Synchronous Power Generating Module,
CCGT Module,
Power Park Module or
Dynamically controlled OTSUA

as applicable may (subject to the Generator having fulfilled the requirements

of ECP.6.2.3 where that applies) be Synchronised to the Total System
through the issue of an Interim Operational Notification. Where the
Generator is undertaking OTSDUW then the Interim Operational
Notification will be in two parts, with the “Interim Operational Notification
Part A” applicable to OTSUA and the Interim Operational Notification Part
B” applicable to the EU Code Users Plant and Apparatus. For the avoidance
of doubt, the “Interim Operational Notification Part A” and the “Interim
Operational Notification Part B” can be issued together or at different times.
In respect of an Embedded Power Station or Embedded HVDC Equipment
Station (other than an Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a
Bilateral Agreement and Embedded HVDC Equipment Stations not
subject to a Bilateral Agreement), The Company will notify the Network
Operator that an Interim Operational Notification has been issued.

ECP.6.2.6.1 The Interim Operational Notification will be time limited, the expiration date
being specified at the time of issue. The Interim Operational Notification
may be renewed by The Company.

ECP.6.2.6.2 The Generator must operate the Power Generating Module or OTSUA in
accordance with the terms, arising from the Unresolved Issues, of the
Interim Operational Notification. Where practicable, The Company will
discuss such terms with the Generator prior to including them in the Interim
Operational Notification.

ECP.6.2.6.3 The Interim Operational Notification will include the following limitations:

(a) In the case of OTSUA, the Interim Operational Notification Part A

permits Synchronisation of the dynamically controlled OTSUA to the
Total System only for the purposes of active control of voltage and
reactive power and not for the purpose of exporting Active Power.

(b) In the case of a Power Park Module the Interim Operational

Notification (and where OTSDUW Arrangements apply, this
reference will be to the Interim Operational Notification Part B) will
limit the proportion of the Power Park Module which can be
simultaneously Synchronised to the Total System such that neither
of the following figures is exceeded:

(i) 20% of the Maximum Capacity of the Power Park Module (or
the output of a single Power Park Unit where this exceeds 20%
of the Power Station’s Maximum Capacity)

until the Generator has completed the voltage control tests (detailed
in ECP.A.6.2) (including in respect of any dynamically controlled
OTSUA) to The Company’s reasonable satisfaction. Following
successful completion of this test each additional Power Park Unit
should be included in the voltage control scheme as soon as is
technically possible (unless The Company agrees otherwise).

(c) In the case of a Synchronous Power Generating Module employing

a static Excitation System the Interim Operational Notification (and
where OTSDUW Arrangements apply, this reference will be to the
Interim Operational Notification Part B) may, if applicable, limit the

ECP
Page 11 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 maximum Active Power output and Reactive Power output of the
Synchronous Power Generating Module or CCGT module prior to
the successful commissioning of the Power System Stabiliser to The
Company’s satisfaction, if applicable.

ECP.6.2.6.4 Operation in accordance with the Interim Operational Notification whilst it

is in force will meet the requirements for compliance by the Generator and
The Company of all the relevant provisions of the European Connection
Conditions.

ECP.6.2.7 Other than Unresolved Issues that are subject to tests required under
ECP.7.2 to be witnessed by The Company, the Generator must resolve any
Unresolved Issues prior to the commencement of the tests, unless The
Company agrees to a later resolution. The Generator must liaise with The
Company in respect of such resolution. The tests that may be witnessed by
The Company are specified in ECP.7.2.

ECP.6.2.8 Not less than 28 days, or such shorter period as may be acceptable in The
Company’s reasonable opinion, prior to the Generator wishing to
commence tests required under ECP.7 to be witnessed by The Company,
the Generator will notify The Company that the Power Generating
Module(s) as applicable is ready to commence such tests.

ECP.6.2.9 The items referred to at ECP.7.3 shall be submitted by the Generator after
successful completion of the tests required under ECP.7.2.

ECP.6.3 INTERIM OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION (Type D and HVDC Equipment)

ECP.6.3.1 The following provisions apply in relation to the issue of an Interim

Operational Notification in respect of a Power Station consisting of Type
D Power Generating Modules or an HVDC System.

ECP.6.3.2 Not less than 28 days, or such shorter period as may be acceptable in The
Company’s reasonable opinion, prior to the Generator or HVDC System
Owner wishing to Synchronise its Plant and Apparatus or dynamically
controlled OTSUA for the first time the Generator or HVDC System Owner
will:

i. submit to The Company a Notification of User’s Intention to

Synchronise; and

ii. submit to The Company the items referred to at ECP.6.3.3.

ECP.6.3.3 Items for submission prior to issue of the Interim Operational Notification.

ECP.6.3.3.1 Prior to the issue of an Interim Operational Notification in respect of the EU

Code User’s Plant and Apparatus or dynamically controlled OTSUA the
Generator or HVDC System Owner must submit to The Company to The
Company’s satisfaction:

(a) updated Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and
Detailed Planning Data), with any estimated values assumed for
planning purposes confirmed or, where practical, replaced by
validated actual values and by updated estimates for the future and
by updated forecasts for Forecast Data items such as Demand;

(b) details of any special Power Generating Module(s) or HVDC

Equipment protection as applicable. This may include Pole Slipping
protection and islanding protection schemes;

ECP
Page 12 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (c) any items required by ECP.5.2, updated by the EU Code User as
necessary;

(d) simulation study provisions of Appendix ECP.A.3 and the results

demonstrating compliance with Grid Code requirements of:

PC.A.5.4.2
PC.A.5.4.3.2,
ECC.6.3.4,
ECC.6.3.7.3.1 to ECC.6.3.7.3.6,
ECC.6.3.15, ECC.6.3.16
ECC.A.6.2.5.6
ECC.A.7.2.3.1

as applicable to the Power Station, Synchronous Power

Generating Module(s), Power Park Module(s), HVDC Equipment
or dynamically controlled OTSUA unless agreed otherwise by The
Company;

(e) a detailed schedule of the tests and the procedures for the tests
required to be carried out by the Generator or HVDC System Owner
under ECP.7.2 to demonstrate compliance with relevant Grid Code
requirements. Such schedule to be consistent with Appendix
ECP.A.5 (in the case of Synchronous Power Generating Modules)
or Appendix ECP.A.6 (in the case of Power Park Modules and
OTSUA as applicable) or Appendix ECP.A.7 (in the case of HVDC
Equipment; and

(f) an interim Compliance Statement and a User Self Certification of

Compliance completed by the EU Code User (including any
Unresolved Issues) against the relevant Grid Code requirements
including details of any requirements that the Generator or HVDC
System Owner has identified that will not or may not be met or
demonstrated.

ECP.6.3.3.2 The items referred to in ECP.6.3.3 shall be submitted by the Generator or

HVDC System Owner using the User Data File Structure.

ECP.6.3.4 No Power Generating Module or HVDC Equipment shall be Synchronised

to the Total System (and for the avoidance of doubt, dynamically controlled
OTSUA will not be able to transmit) until the later of:

(a) the date specified by The Company in the Interim Operational

Notification issued in respect of the Power Generating Module(s)
or HVDC Equipment or dynamically controlled OTSUA; and,

(b) if Embedded, the date of receipt of a confirmation from the Network

Operator in whose System the Plant and Apparatus is connected
that it is acceptable to the Network Operator that the Plant and
Apparatus be connected and Synchronised; and,

(c) in the case of Synchronous Power Generating Module(s) only after

the date of receipt by Generator of written confirmation from The
Company that the Synchronous Power Generating Module has
completed the following tests to demonstrate compliance with the
relevant provisions of the Connection Conditions to The
Company’s satisfaction:

ECP
Page 13 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (i) those tests required to establish the open and short circuit
saturation characteristics of the Synchronous Power
Generating Module (as detailed in Appendix ECP.A.5.3) to
enable assessment of the short circuit ratio in accordance
with ECC.6.3.2. Such tests may be carried out at a location
other than the Power Station site; and

(ii) open circuit step response tests (as detailed in Appendix

ECP.A.5.2) to demonstrate compliance with ECC.A.6.2.4.1.

ECP.6.3.5 The Company shall assess the schedule of tests submitted by the Generator
or HVDC System Owner with the Notification of User’s Intention to
Synchronise under ECP.6.3.1 and shall determine whether such schedule
has been completed to The Company’s satisfaction.

ECP.6.3.6 When the requirements of ECP.6.3.2 to ECP.6.3.5 have been met, The
Company will notify the Generator or HVDC System Owner that the:
Synchronous Power Generating Module,
CCGT Module,
Power Park Module
Dynamically controlled OTSUA or
HVDC Equipment,

as applicable may (subject to the Generator or HVDC System Owner having

fulfilled the requirements of ECP.6.3.3 where that applies) be Synchronised
to the Total System through the issue of an Interim Operational
Notification. Where the Generator is undertaking OTSDUW then the
Interim Operational Notification will be in two parts, with the “Interim
Operational Notification Part A” applicable to OTSUA and the “Interim
Operational Notification Part B” applicable to the EU Code Users Plant
and Apparatus. For the avoidance of doubt, the “Interim Operational
Notification Part A” and the “Interim Operational Notification Part B” can
be issued together or at different times. In respect of an Embedded Power
Station or Embedded HVDC Equipment Station (other than Embedded
Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and
Embedded HVDC Equipment not subject to a Bilateral Agreement), The
Company will notify the Network Operator that an Interim Operational
Notification has been issued.

ECP.6.3.6.1 The Interim Operational Notification will be time limited, the expiration date
being specified at the time of issue. The Interim Operational Notification
may be renewed by The Company for up to a maximum of 24 months from
the date of the first issue of the Interim Operational Notification. The
Company may only issue an extension to an Interim Operational
Notification beyond 24 months provided the Generator or HVDC System
Owner has applied for a derogation for any remaining Unresolved Issues
to the Authority as detailed in ECP.10.

ECP.6.3.6.2 The Generator or HVDC System Owner must operate the Power
Generating Module or HVDC Equipment in accordance with the terms,
arising from the Unresolved Issues, of the Interim Operational
Notification. Where practicable, The Company will discuss such terms with
the Generator or HVDC System Owner prior to including them in the
Interim Operational Notification.

ECP.6.3.6.3 The Interim Operational Notification will include the following limitations:

(a) In the case of OTSUA, the Interim Operational Notification Part A

permits Synchronisation of the dynamically controlled OTSUA to the

ECP
Page 14 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 Total System only for the purposes of active control of voltage and
Reactive Power and not for the purpose of exporting Active Power.

(b) In the case of a Power Park Module the Interim Operational

Notification (and where OTSDUW Arrangements apply, this reference
will be to the Interim Operational Notification Part B) will limit the
proportion of the Power Park Module which can be simultaneously
Synchronised to the Total System such that neither of the following
figures is exceeded:

(i) 20% of the Maximum Capacity of the Power Park Module

(or the output of a single Power Park Unit where this exceeds
20% of the Power Station’s Maximum Capacity); nor

(ii) 50MW

until the Generator has completed the voltage control tests (detailed
in ECP.A.6.3.2) to The Company’s reasonable satisfaction. Following
successful completion of this test, each additional Power Park Unit
should be included in the voltage control scheme as soon as is
technically possible (unless The Company agrees otherwise).

(c) In the case of a Power Park Module with a Maximum Capacity

greater or equal to 100MW, the Interim Operational Notification (and
where OTSDUW Arrangements apply, this reference will be to the
Interim Operational Notification Part B) will limit the proportion of the
Power Park Module which can be simultaneously Synchronised to
the Total System to 70% of Maximum Capacity until the Generator
has completed the Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode (LFSM-O)
control tests with at least 50% of the Maximum Capacity of the Power
Park Module in service (detailed in ECP.A.6.3.1) to The Company’s
reasonable satisfaction.

(d) In the case of a Synchronous Power Generating Module employing

a static Excitation System or a Power Park Module employing a
Power System Stabiliser, the Interim Operational Notification (and
where OTSDUW Arrangements apply, this reference will be to the
Interim Operational Notification Part B) may if applicable limit the
maximum Active Power output and Reactive Power output of the
Synchronous Power Generating Module or CCGT module prior to
the successful commissioning of the Power System Stabiliser to The
Company’s satisfaction.

ECP.6.3.6.4 Operation in accordance with the Interim Operational Notification whilst it

is in force will meet the requirements for compliance by the Generator or
HVDC System Owner and The Company of all the relevant provisions of the
European Connection Conditions.

ECP.6.3.7 Other than Unresolved Issues that are subject to tests required under
ECP.7.2 to be witnessed by The Company, the Generator or HVDC System
Owner must resolve any Unresolved Issues prior to the commencement of
the tests, unless The Company agrees to a later resolution. The Generator
or HVDC System Owner must liaise with The Company in respect of such
resolution. The tests that may be witnessed by The Company are specified
in ECP.7.2.

ECP.6.3.8 Not less than 28 days, or such shorter period as may be acceptable in The
Company’s reasonable opinion, prior to the Generator or HVDC System
Owner wishing to commence tests required under ECP.7 to be witnessed by
The Company, the Generator or HVDC System Owner will notify The

ECP
Page 15 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 Company that the Power Generating Module(s) or HVDC Equipment(s)
as applicable is ready to commence such tests.

ECP.6.3.9 The items referred to at ECP.7.3 shall be submitted by the Generator or the
HVDC System Owner after successful completion of the tests required under
ECP.7.2.

ECP.6.4 INTERIM OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION (Network Operator’s or Non-

Embedded Customer’s Plant and Apparatus)

ECP.6.4.1 The following provisions apply in relation to the issue of an Interim

Operational Notification in respect of Network Operator’s or Non-
Embedded Customer’s Plant and Apparatus.

ECP.6.4.2 Not less than 28 days, or such shorter period as may be acceptable in The
Company’s reasonable opinion, prior to the Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer wishing to operate its Plant and Apparatus by using
the EU Grid Supply Point for the first time, the Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer will:

i. submit to The Company a Notification of User’s Intention to

Operate; and

ii. submit to The Company the items referred to at ECP.6.4.3.

ECP.6.4.3 Items for submission prior to issue of the Interim Operational Notification.

ECP.6.4.3.1 Prior to the issue of an Interim Operational Notification in respect of the

User’s Plant and Apparatus at an EU Grid Supply Point, the Network
Operator or Non-Embedded Customer must submit to The Company to
The Company’s satisfaction:

(a) updated Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and
Detailed Planning Data), with any estimated values assumed for
planning purposes confirmed or, where practical, replaced by
validated actual values and by updated estimates for the future and
by updated forecasts for Forecast Data items such as Demand;

(b) details of any special protection as applicable;

(c) any items required by ECP.5.2, updated as necessary;

(d) data submission and results required by Appendix ECP.A.8

demonstrating compliance with Grid Code requirements of:

PC.A.2.2
PC.A.2.3
PC.A.2.4
PC.A.2.5.2
PC.A.2.5.3
PC.A.2.5.4
PC.A.2.5.6
PC.A.4
PC.A.6.1.3
PC.A.6.3
PC.A.6.7.1

as applicable to the Network Operator’s or Non-Embedded

Customer’s Plant and Apparatus unless agreed otherwise by The
Company;

ECP
Page 16 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (e) a detailed schedule of the tests and the procedures for the tests
required to be carried out by the Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer under ECP.7.8 (or Equipment Certificates
as relevant) to demonstrate compliance with relevant Grid Code
requirements. Such schedule is to be consistent with Appendix
ECP.A.8.

(f) an interim Compliance Statement and a User Self Certification of

Compliance completed by the User (including any Unresolved
Issues) against the relevant Grid Code requirements including
details of any requirements that the Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer has identified that will not or may not be met
or demonstrated.

ECP.6.4.4 No Network Operator’s or Non-Embedded Customer’s Plant and

Apparatus shall be operated by using the EU Grid Supply Point until the
date specified by The Company in the Interim Operational Notification.

ECP.6.4.5 The Company shall assess the schedule of tests submitted by the Network
Operator or Non-Embedded Customer with the Notification of User’s
Intention to Operate under ECP.6.4.1 and shall determine whether such
schedule has been completed to The Company’s satisfaction.

ECP.6.4.6 When the requirements of ECP.6.4.2 to ECP.6.4.5 have been met, The
Company will notify the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer
that the Plant and Apparatus may (subject to the Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer having fulfilled the requirements of ECP.6.4.3 where
that applies) be operated by using the EU Grid Supply Point through the
issue of an Interim Operational Notification.

ECP.6.4.6.1 The Interim Operational Notification will be time limited, the expiration date
being specified at the time of issue. The Interim Operational Notification
may be renewed by The Company for up to a maximum of 24 months from
the date of the first issue of the Interim Operational Notification. The
Company may only issue an extension to an Interim Operational
Notification beyond 24 months provided the Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer has applied for a derogation for any remaining
Unresolved Issues to the Authority as detailed in ECP.10.

ECP.6.4.6.2 The Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer must operate the

Plant and Apparatus in accordance with the terms, arising from the
Unresolved Issues, of the Interim Operational Notification. Where
practicable, The Company will discuss such terms with the Network
Operator or Non-Embedded Customer prior to including them in the
Interim Operational Notification.

ECP.6.4.7 The Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer must resolve any

Unresolved Issues prior to the commencement of the tests, unless The
Company agrees to a later resolution. The Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer must liaise with The Company in respect of such
resolution.

ECP.6.4.8 Not less than 28 days, or such shorter period as may be acceptable in The
Company’s reasonable opinion, prior to the Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer wishing to commence tests required under
ECP.7.8(e) and ECP.A.8 to be witnessed by The Company the Network
Operator or Non-Embedded Customer will notify The Company that the
Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer as applicable is ready to
commence such tests.

ECP
Page 17 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.7 FINAL OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION

Final Operational Notification in respect of Generators and HVDC System

Owners

ECP.7.1 The following provisions apply in relation to the issue of a Final Operational
Notification in respect of a Power Station consisting of Type B, Type C and
Type D Power Generating Modules or an HVDC System.

ECP.7.2 Tests to be carried out prior to issue of the Final Operational Notification.

ECP.7.2.1 Prior to the issue of a Final Operational Notification the Generator or

HVDC System Owner must have completed the tests specified in this
ECP.7.2.2 to The Company’s satisfaction to demonstrate compliance with
the relevant Grid Code provisions.

ECP.7.2.2 In the case of any Power Generating Module, OTSUA (if applicable) or
HVDC Equipment these tests will reflect the relevant technical requirements
and will comprise one or more of the following:

(a) Reactive capability tests to demonstrate that the Power Generating

Module, OTSUA (if applicable) or HVDC Equipment can meet the
requirements of ECC.6.3.2. These may be witnessed by The
Company on site if there is no metering to The Company Control
Centre.

(b) voltage control system tests to demonstrate that the Power

Generating Module, OTSUA (if applicable) or HVDC Equipment
can meet the requirements of ECC.6.3.6.3, ECC.6.3.8 and, in the
case of a Power Park Module, OTSUA (if applicable) and HVDC
Equipment, the requirements of ECC.A.7 or ECC.A.8 and, in the
case of Synchronous Power Generating Module and CCGT
Module, the requirements of ECC.A.6, and any terms specified in
the Bilateral Agreement as applicable. These tests may also be
used to validate the Excitation System model (PC.A.5.3) or voltage
control system model (PC.A.5.4) as applicable. These tests may be
witnessed by The Company.

(c) governor or frequency control system tests to demonstrate that the

Power Generating Module, OTSUA (if applicable) or HVDC
Equipment can meet the requirements of ECC.6.3.6.2, ECC.6.3.7,
where applicable ECC.A.3, and BC.3.7. In the case of a Type B
Power Generating Module only tests BC3 and BC4 in ECP.A.5.8
Figure 2 or ECP.A.6.6 Figure 2 must be completed. The results will
also validate the Mandatory Service Agreement required by
ECC.8.1. These tests may also be used to validate the governor
model (PC.A.5.3) or frequency control system model (PC.A.5.4) as
applicable. These tests may be witnessed by The Company.

(d) fault ride through tests in respect of a Power Station with a

Maximum Capacity of 100MW or greater, comprised of one or more
Power Park Modules, to demonstrate compliance with ECC.6.3.15,
ECC.6.3.16 and ECC.A.4. Where test results from a Manufacturers
Data & Performance Report as defined in ECP.11 have been
accepted this test will not be required.

ECP
Page 18 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (e) any further tests reasonably required by The Company and agreed
with the EU Code User to demonstrate any aspects of compliance
with the Grid Code and the CUSC Contracts.

ECP.7.2.3 The Company’s preferred range of tests to demonstrate compliance with the
ECCs are specified in Appendix ECP.A.5 (in the case of Synchronous
Power Generating Modules) or Appendix ECP.A.6 (in the case of a Power
Park Modules or OTSUA (if applicable)) or Appendix ECP.A.7 (in the case
of HVDC Equipment and are to be carried out by the EU Code User with the
results of each test provided to The Company. The EU Code User may carry
out an alternative range of tests if this is agreed with The Company. The
Company may agree a reduced set of tests where there is a relevant
Manufacturers Data & Performance Report as detailed in ECP.10 or an
applicable Equipment Certificate has been accepted.

ECP.7.2.4 In the case of Offshore Power Park Modules which do not contribute to
Offshore Transmission Licensee Reactive Power capability as described
in ECC.6.3.2.5 or ECC.6.3.2.6 or Voltage Control as described in
ECC.6.3.8.5 the tests outlined in ECP.7.2.2 (a) and ECP.7.2.2 (b) are not
required. However, the offshore Reactive Power transfer tests outlined in
ECP.A.5.8 shall be completed in their place.

ECP.7.2.5 Following completion of each of the tests specified in this ECP.7.2, The
Company will notify the Generator or HVDC System Owner whether, in the
opinion of The Company, the results demonstrate compliance with the
relevant Grid Code conditions. When the Generator or HVDC System
Owner submits test results to The Company, the Generator or HVDC
System Owner may request The Company to advise when the notification
is expected to be provided. The Company should not unduly delay the
notification.

ECP.7.2.6 The Generator or HVDC System Owner is responsible for carrying out the
tests and retains the responsibility for safety and personnel during the test.

ECP.7.3 Items for submission prior to issue of the Final Operational Notification

ECP.7.3.1 Prior to the issue of a Final Operational Notification the Generator or

HVDC System Owner must submit to The Company to The Company’s
satisfaction:

(a) updated Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and
Detailed Planning Data), with validated actual values and updated
estimates for the future including Forecast Data items such as
Demand;

(b) any items required by ECP.5.2 and ECP.6.2.3 or ECP.6.3.3 as

applicable, updated by the EU Code User as necessary;

(c) evidence to The Company’s satisfaction that demonstrates that the

controller models and/or parameters (as required under
PC.A.5.3.2(c) option 2, PC.A.5.3.2(d) option 2, PC.A.5.4.2, and/or
PC.A.5.4.3.2) supplied to The Company provide a reasonable
representation of the behaviour of the EU Code User’s Plant and
Apparatus and OTSUA if applicable;

(d) copies of Manufacturer’s Test Certificates or Equipment

Certificates issued by an Authorised Certifier or equivalent where
these are relied upon as part of the evidence of compliance;

ECP
Page 19 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (e) results from the tests required in accordance with ECP.7.2 carried
out by the Generator to demonstrate compliance with relevant Grid
Code requirements including the tests witnessed by The Company;
and

(f) the final Compliance Statement and a User Self Certification of

Compliance signed by the EU Code User and a statement of any
requirements that the Generator or HVDC System Owner has
identified that have not been met together with a copy of the
derogation in respect of the same from the Authority.

ECP.7.3.2 The items in ECP.7.3 should be submitted by the Generator (including in

respect of any OTSUA if applicable) or HVDC System Owner using the User
Data File Structure.
ECP.7.4 If the requirements of ECP.7.2 and ECP.7.3 have been successfully met, The
Company will notify the Generator or HVDC System Owner that compliance
with the relevant Grid Code provisions has been demonstrated for the Power
Generating Module(s), OTSUA if applicable or HVDC Equipment as
applicable through the issue of a Final Operational Notification. In respect
of an Embedded Power Station or Embedded HVDC Equipment other than
an Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement and Embedded HVDC Equipment not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement, The Company will notify the Network Operator that a Final
Operational Notification has been issued, subject to the requirement to
confirm continued compliance as per CP.8.2 as part of the Compliance
Repeat Plan.

ECP.7.5 If a Final Operational Notification cannot be issued because the

requirements of ECP.7.2 and ECP.7.3 have not been successfully met prior
to the expiry of an Interim Operational Notification then the Generator or
HVDC System Owner (where licensed in respect of its activities) and/or The
Company shall apply to the Authority for a derogation. The provisions of
ECP.10 shall then apply.

Final Operational Notification in respect of Network Operator’s and Non-

Embedded Customer’s Plant and Apparatus

ECP.7.6 The following provisions apply in relation to the issue of a Final Operational
Notification in respect of Network Operators and Non-Embedded
Customers Plant and Apparatus.

ECP.7.7 Prior to the issue of a Final Operational Notification the Network Operator
and Non-Embedded Customer must have addressed the Unresolved
Issues to The Company’s satisfaction to demonstrate compliance with the
relevant Grid Code provisions.

ECP.7.8 Prior to the issue of a Final Operational Notification the Network Operator
and Non-Embedded Customer must submit to The Company to The
Company’s satisfaction:

(a) updated Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and
Detailed Planning Data), with validated actual values and updated
estimates for the future including Forecast Data items such as
Demand;

(b) any items required by ECP.5.2 and ECP.6.4 updated by the User as
necessary;

ECP
Page 20 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (c) evidence to The Company’s reasonable satisfaction that
demonstrates that the models and/or parameters as required under
PC.A.2.2, PC.A.2.3, PC.A.2.4, PC.A.2.5, PC.A.4 and PC.A.6 (as
applicable), supplied to The Company provide a reasonable
representation of the behaviour of the User’s Plant and Apparatus;

(d) copies of Manufacturer’s Test Certificates or Equipment

Certificates issued by an Authorised Certifier or equivalent where
these are relied upon as part of the evidence of compliance;

(e) results from the tests and simulations required in accordance with
ECP.A.8 carried out by the Network Operator or Non-Embedded
Customer to demonstrate compliance with relevant Grid Code
requirements including any tests witnessed by The Company; and

(f) the final Compliance Statement and a User Self Certification of

Compliance signed by the User and a statement of any
requirements that the Network Operator or Non-Embedded
Customer has identified that have not been met together with a copy
of the derogation in respect of the same from the Authority.

ECP.7.9 The items referred to at ECP.7.8 shall be submitted by the Network Operator
or Non-Embedded Customer after successful completion of the tests
required under ECP.7.8.

ECP.7.10 If the requirements of ECP.7.8 have been successfully met, The Company
will notify the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer that
compliance with the relevant Grid Code provisions has been demonstrated
for Network Operators or Non-Embedded Customers Plant and
Apparatus as applicable through the issue of a Final Operational
Notification.

ECP.7.11 If a Final Operational Notification cannot be issued because the

requirements of ECP.7.8 have not been successfully met prior to the expiry of
an Interim Operational Notification, then the Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer and/or The Company shall apply to the Authority for
a derogation. The provisions of ECP.10 shall then apply.

ECP.8 COMPLIANCE REPEAT PLAN

ECP.8.1 No later than 4 calendar years and 6 months after the issue of a Final
Operational Notification, The Company will notify the Generator or HVDC
System Owner that confirmation of continued compliance with the
requirements of the Grid Code and/or the Bilateral Agreement.
ECP.8.2 No later than 5 calendar years after the issue of a Final Operational
Notification, the Generator or HVDC System Owner shall confirm that the
Plant and/or Apparatus (including OTSUA if applicable) is fully compliant with
the requirements of the Grid Code and/or the Bilateral Agreement. The
confirmation of compliance will include:
(a) a Compliance Statement and a User Self Certification of Compliance
signed by the EU Code User and a statement of any requirements that
the Generator or HVDC System Owner has identified that have not been
met together with a copy of the derogation in respect of the same from
The Authority.

ECP
Page 21 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (b) complete set of relevant Planning Code data (both Standard Planning
Data and Detailed Planning Data), with validated actual values and
updated estimates for the future including Forecast Data items such as
Demand. Simulation Studies and results from tests detailed in Appendix
ECP.A.3 – ECP.A.8 inclusive are not required as part of the Compliance
Repeat Plan.
For the avoidance of doubt the Generator or HVDC System Owner is
responsible for ensuring that Plant and/or Apparatus (including OTSUA if
applicable) remains compliant with the relevant clauses of the Grid Code and/or
the Bilateral Agreement and/or connection site conditions notified by The
Company.
ECP.8.3 If the requirements of ECP.8.2 have been completed to The Company’s
satisfaction, The Company will notify the Generator or HVDC System Owner
that compliance with the relevant Grid Code provisions has been demonstrated
for the Power Generating Module(s), including DC Connected Power Park
Module(s) and OTSUA, if applicable or HVDC Equipment as applicable
through the issue of a Final Operational Notification subject to Compliance
Repeat Plan (ECP.8) no later than 5 years from the date of issue. In respect of
an Embedded Power Station or Embedded DC Converter Station other
than Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement and Embedded HVDC Systems not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement, The Company will notify the Network Operator that a Final
Operational Notification has been issued.
ECP.8.4 If a Final Operational Notification cannot be issued because the
requirements of ECP.8.2 have not been successfully met prior to 5 years from
the date of issue of the Final Operational Notification, then The Company
will issue the Generator or HVDC System Owner (where licensed in respect
of its activities) a Limited Operational Notification with respect to the
Unresolved Issues. The provisions of ECP.9 shall then apply.

ECP.9 LIMITED OPERATIONAL NOTIFICATION

ECP.9.1 Following the issue of a Final Operational Notification for a Power Station
consisting of Type B, Type C or Type D Power Generating Module or an
HVDC System or Network Operators or Non-Embedded Customers
Plant and Apparatus if:

(i) the Generator or HVDC System Owner or Network Operator or

Non-Embedded Customer becomes aware, that its Plant and/or
Apparatus’ (including OTSUA if applicable) capability to meet any
provisions of the Grid Code, or where applicable the Bilateral
Agreement is not fully available then the Generator or HVDC
System Owner or Network Operator or Non-Embedded
Customer shall follow the process in ECP.9.2 to ECP.9.11; or,

(ii) a Network Operator becomes aware, that the capability of Plant

and/or Apparatus belonging to an Embedded Power Station or
Embedded HVDC Equipment Station (other than Embedded
Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and
Embedded HVDC Equipment Stations not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement) is failing to meet any provisions of the Grid Code, or
where applicable the Bilateral Agreement, then the Network
Operator shall inform The Company and The Company shall inform

ECP
Page 22 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 the Generator or HVDC System Owner to then follow the process
in ECP.9.2 to ECP.9.11; or,

(iii) The Company becomes aware through monitoring as described in

OC5.4, that a Generator or HVDC System Owner Plant and/or
Apparatus (including OTSUA if applicable) capability to meet any
provisions of the Grid Code, or where applicable the Bilateral
Agreement is not fully available then The Company shall inform the
other party. Where The Company and the Generator or HVDC
System Owner cannot agree from the monitoring as described in
OC5.4 whether the Plant and/or Apparatus (including OTSUA if
applicable) is fully available and/or is compliant with the requirements
of the Grid Code and where applicable the Bilateral Agreement, the
parties shall first apply the process in OC5.5.1, before applying the
process defined in ECP.9 (LON) if applicable. Where the testing
instructed in accordance with OC.5.5.1 indicates that the Plant
and/or Apparatus (including OTSUA if applicable) is not fully
available and/or is not compliant with the requirements of the Grid
Code and/or the Bilateral Agreement, or if the parties so agree, the
process in ECP.9.2 to ECP.9.11 shall be followed.

(iv) The Company becomes aware that a Network Operator’s or Non-

Embedded Customer’s Plant and Apparatus capability to meet any
provisions of the Grid Code, or where applicable the Bilateral
Agreement, is not fully available then The Company shall inform the
other party and the process in ECP.9.2 to ECP.9.11 shall be followed.

ECP.9.2 Immediately upon a Generator, HVDC System Owner, Network Operator or

Non-Embedded Customer becoming aware that its Power Generating
Module, OTSUA (if applicable), HVDC Equipment or Plant and Apparatus,
as applicable may be unable to comply with certain provisions of the Grid Code
or (where applicable) the Bilateral Agreement, the Generator, HVDC System
Owner Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer shall notify The
Company in writing. Additional details of any operating restrictions or changes
in applicable data arising from the potential non-compliance and an indication
of the date from when the restrictions will be removed and full compliance
demonstrated shall be provided as soon as reasonably practical.

ECP.9.3 If the nature of any unavailability and/or potential non-compliance described in

ECP.9.1 causes or can reasonably be expected to cause a material adverse
effect on the business or condition of The Company or other Users or the
National Electricity Transmission System or any User Systems, then The
Company may, notwithstanding the provisions of this ECP.9, follow the
provisions of Paragraph 5.4 of the CUSC.

ECP.9.4 Except where the provisions of ECP.9.3 apply, where the restriction notified in
ECP.9.2 is not resolved in 28 days, then

(i) the Generator or HVDC System Owner with input from and
discussion of conclusions with The Company, and the Network
Operator where the Synchronous Power Generating Module,
CCGT Module, Power Park Module or Power Station as applicable
is Embedded, shall undertake an investigation to attempt to determine
the causes of and determine a solution to the non-compliance. Such
investigation shall continue for no longer than 56 days. During such
investigation, the Generator or HVDC System Owner shall provide to
The Company the relevant data which has changed due to the
restriction in respect of ECP.7.3.1 as notified to the Generator or

ECP
Page 23 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 HVDC System Owner by The Company as being required to be
provided; or

(ii) the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer in discussion

with The Company, shall undertake an investigation to attempt to
determine the causes of and a solution to the non-compliance. Such
investigation shall continue for no longer than 56 days. During such
investigation the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer
shall provide to The Company the relevant data which has changed
due to the restriction in respect of ECP.7.8 as being required to be
provided by The Company.

ECP.9.5 Issue and Effect of LON

ECP.9.5.1 Following the issue of a Final Operational Notification, The Company will
issue to the Generator, HVDC System Owner, Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer a Limited Operational Notification if:

(a) by the end of the 56 day period referred to at ECP.9.4, the investigation
has not resolved the non-compliance to The Company’s satisfaction; or

(b) The Company is notified by a Generator, HVDC System Owner

(including OTSUA if applicable), Network Operator or Non-Embedded
Customer of a Modification to its Plant and Apparatus; or

(c) The Company receives a submission of data, or a statement from a

Generator, HVDC System Owner (including OTSUA if applicable),
Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer indicating a change
in Plant or Apparatus or settings (including but not limited to governor
and excitation control systems) that may in The Company’s reasonable
opinion, acting in accordance with Good Industry Practice be expected
to result in a material change of performance.

In the case of an Embedded Generator or Embedded HVDC System Owner,

The Company will issue a copy of the Limited Operational Notification to
the Network Operator.

ECP.9.5.2 The Limited Operational Notification will be time limited (in the case of Type
D Power Generating Modules, HVDC Systems, Network Operator’s or
Non-Embedded Customer’s Plant and Apparatus to expire no later than 12
months from the start of the non-compliance or restriction or from reconnection
following a change). The Company may agree a longer duration in the case of
a Limited Operational Notification following a Modification or whilst the
Authority is considering the application for a derogation in accordance with
ECP.10.1.

ECP.9.5.3 The Limited Operational Notification will notify the Generator, HVDC
System Owner, Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer of any
restrictions on the operation of the Synchronous Power Generating
Module(s), CCGT Module(s), Power Park Module(s), OTSUA if applicable,
HVDC Equipment or Plant and Apparatus and will specify the Unresolved
Issues. The Generator, HVDC System Owner, Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer must operate in accordance with any notified
restrictions and must resolve the Unresolved Issues.

ECP.9.5.4 The User and The Company will be deemed compliant with all the relevant
provisions of the Grid Code provided operation is in accordance with the
Limited Operational Notification, whilst it is in force, and that the provisions
of and referred to in ECP.9 are complied with.

ECP
Page 24 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.9.5.5 The Unresolved Issues included in a Limited Operational Notification will
show the extent that the provisions of ECP.7.2 (testing) and ECP.7.3 (final data
submission) or ECP.7.8 (d) - (e) (testing) and ECP7.8 (a) – (c) (data
submission, as applicable, shall apply. In respect of selecting the extent of any
tests which may in The Company’s view reasonably be needed to
demonstrate the restored capability and in agreeing the time period in which
the tests will be scheduled, The Company shall, where reasonably practicable,
take account of the Generator or HVDC System Owner’s input to contain its
costs associated with the testing.

ECP.9.5.6 In the case of a change or Modification, the Limited Operational Notification

may specify that the affected Plant and Apparatus (including OTSUA if
applicable) or associated Synchronous Power Generating Module(s) or
Power Park Unit(s) must not be Synchronised or, in the case of Network
Operator’s or Non-Embedded Customer’s Plant and Apparatus, operated
until all of the following items, that in The Company’s reasonable opinion are
relevant, have been submitted to The Company to The Company’s
satisfaction:

(a) updated Planning Code data (both Standard Planning Data and
Detailed Planning Data);

(b) details of any relevant special Power Station, Synchronous Power

Generating Module(s), Power Park Module(s), OTSUA (if
applicable), HVDC Equipment Station(s) or Network Operator’s or
Non-Embedded Customer’s Plant and Apparatus protection as
applicable. This may include Pole Slipping protection and islanding
protection schemes; and

(c) simulation study provisions of Appendix ECP.A.3 or Appendix

ECP.A.8 as appropriate and the results demonstrating compliance
with Grid Code requirements relevant to the change or Modification
as agreed by The Company; and

(d) a detailed schedule of the tests and the procedures for the tests
required to be carried out by the Generator, HVDC Equipment
Station, Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer to
demonstrate compliance with relevant Grid Code requirements as
agreed by The Company. The schedule of tests shall be consistent
with Appendix ECP.A.5, Appendix ECP.A.6 or Appendix ECP.A.8 as
appropriate; and

(e) an interim Compliance Statement and a User Self Certification of

Compliance completed by the User (including any Unresolved
Issues) against the relevant Grid Code requirements including
details of any requirements that the Generator, HVDC System
Owner, Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer has
identified that will not or may not be met or demonstrated; and

(f) any other items specified in the LON.

ECP.9.5.7 The items referred to in ECP.9.5.6 shall be submitted by the Generator

(including in respect of any OTSUA if applicable) or HVDC System Owner
using the User Data File Structure or Power Generation Module
Document as applicable.

ECP.9.5.8 In the case of Synchronous Power Generating Module(s) only, the

Unresolved Issues of the LON may require that the Generator must complete
the following tests to The Company’s satisfaction to demonstrate compliance

ECP
Page 25 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 with the relevant provisions of the ECCs prior to the Synchronous Power
Generating Module being Synchronised to the Total System:

(a) those tests required to establish the open and short circuit saturation
characteristics of the Synchronous Power Generating Module (as
detailed in Appendix ECP.A.5.3) to enable assessment of the short
circuit ratio in accordance with ECC.6.3.2.3.4 or ECC.6.3.2.5. Such
tests may be carried out at a location other than the Power Station
site; and

(b) open circuit step response tests (as detailed in Appendix ECP.A.5.2)
to demonstrate compliance with ECC.A.6.2.4.1.

ECP.9.6 In the case of a change or Modification, not less than 28 days, or such
shorter period as may be acceptable in The Company’s reasonable opinion:

(a) prior to the Generator or HVDC System Owner (including OTSUA if

applicable) wishing to Synchronise its Plant and Apparatus for the first
time following the change or Modification, the Generator or HVDC
System Owner will:

(i) submit a Notification of User’s Intention to Synchronise; and

(ii) submit to The Company the items referred to at ECP.9.5.6.

(b) prior to the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer wishing to

operate its Plant and Apparatus for the first time following the change or
Modification, the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer will;

(i) submit a Notification of User’s intention to operate; and

(ii) submit to The Company the items referred to at ECP.9.5.6

ECP.9.7 Other than Unresolved Issues that are subject to tests to be witnessed by
The Company, the Generator, HVDC System Owner, Network Operator
or Non-Embedded Customer must resolve any Unresolved Issues prior to
the commencement of the tests, unless The Company agrees to a later
resolution. The Generator, HVDC System Owner, Network Operator or
Non-Embedded Customer must liaise with The Company in respect of such
resolution. The tests that may be witnessed by The Company are specified
in ECP.7.2.2.

ECP.9.8 Not less than 28 days, or such shorter period as may be acceptable in The
Company’s reasonable opinion, prior to the Generator or HVDC System
Owner wishing to commence tests listed as Unresolved Issues to be
witnessed by The Company, the Generator or HVDC System Owner will
notify The Company that the Synchronous Power Generating Module(s),
CCGT Module(s), Power Park Module(s), OTSUA if applicable or HVDC
Equipment as applicable is ready to commence such tests.

ECP.9.9 The items referred to at ECP.7.3 or ECP.7.8 as applicable and listed as

Unresolved Issues shall be submitted by the Generator, HVDC System
Owner, Network Operator or Embedded Customer after successful
completion of the tests.

ECP.9.10 Where the Unresolved Issues have been resolved a Final Operational
Notification will be issued to the User.

ECP.9.11 If a Final Operational Notification has not been issued by The Company as
referred to at ECP.9.5.2 (or where agreed following a Modification by the

ECP
Page 26 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 expiry time of the LON) then the Generator, HVDC System Owner, Network
Operator or Non-Embedded Customer (where licensed in respect of its
activities) and The Company shall apply to the Authority for a derogation.

ECP.10 PROCESSES RELATING TO DEROGATIONS

ECP.10.1 Whilst the Authority is considering the application for a derogation, the
Interim Operational Notification or Limited Operational Notification will
be extended to remain in force until the Authority has notified The Company
and the Generator, HVDC System Owner, Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer of its decision. Where the Generator or HVDC
System Owner is not licensed, The Company may propose any necessary
changes to the Bilateral Agreement with such unlicensed Generator or
HVDC System Owner.

ECP.10.2 If the Authority:

(a) grants a derogation in respect of the Plant and/or Apparatus, then The
Company shall issue Final Operational Notification once all other
Unresolved Issues are resolved; or
(b) decides a derogation is not required in respect of the Plant and/or
Apparatus then The Company will reconsider the relevant Unresolved
Issues and may issue a Final Operational Notification once all other
Unresolved Issues are resolved; or
(c) decides not to grant any derogation in respect of the Plant and/or
Apparatus, then there will be no Operational Notification in place and
The Company and the User shall consider its rights pursuant to the
CUSC.

ECP.10.3 Where an Interim Operational Notification or Limited Operational

Notification is so conditional upon a derogation and such derogation
includes any conditions (including any time limit to such derogation) the
Generator, HVDC System Owner, Network Operator or Non-Embedded
Customer will progress the resolution of any Unresolved Issues and / or
progress and / or comply with any conditions upon such derogation and the
provisions of ECP.6 to ECP.7.11 shall apply and shall be followed.

ECP.11 MANUFACTURER’S DATA & PERFORMANCE REPORT

ECP.11.1.1 Data and performance characteristics in respect of certain Grid Code

requirements may be registered with The Company by Power Park Unit
manufacturers in respect of specific models of Power Park Units by submitting
information in the form of a Manufacturer’s Data and Performance Report
to The Company.

ECP.11.1.2 A Generator planning to construct a new Power Station containing the

appropriate version of Power Park Units in respect of which a Manufacturer’s
Data & Performance Report has been submitted to The Company may
reference the Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report in its submissions
to The Company. Any Generator considering referring to a Manufacturer’s
Data & Performance Report for any aspect of its Plant and Apparatus may
contact The Company to discuss the suitability of the relevant Manufacturer’s
Data & Performance Report to its project to determine if, and to what extent,
the data included in the Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report
contributes towards demonstrating compliance with those aspects of the Grid
Code applicable to the Generator. The Company will inform the Generator
if the reference to the Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report is not
appropriate or not sufficient for its project.

ECP
Page 27 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.11.1.3 The process to be followed by Power Park Unit manufacturers submitting a
Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report is agreed by The Company.
ECP.11.2 indicates the specific Grid Code requirement areas in respect of
which a Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report may be submitted.

ECP.11.1.4 The Company will maintain and publish a register of those Manufacturer’s
Data & Performance Reports which The Company has received and
accepted as being an accurate representation of the performance of the
relevant Plant and / or Apparatus. Such register will identify the manufacturer,
the model(s) of Power Park Unit(s) to which the report applies and the
provisions of the Grid Code in respect of which the report contributes towards
the demonstration of compliance. The inclusion of any report in the register
does not in any way confirm that any Power Park Modules which utilise any
Power Park Unit(s) covered by a report is or will be compliant with the Grid
Code.

ECP.11.2 A Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report in respect of Power Park

Units may cover one (or part of one) or more of the following provisions of the
Grid Code:

(a) Fault Ride Through capability ECC.6.3.15, ECC.6.3.16.

(b) Power Park Module mathematical model PC.A.5.4.2.

ECP.11.3 Reference to a Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report in a EU Code

User’s submissions does not by itself constitute compliance with the Grid
Code.

ECP.11.4 A Generator referencing a Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report

should insert the relevant Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report
reference in the appropriate place in the DRC data submission, Power
Generating Module Document and / or in the User Data File Structure. The
Company will consider the suitability of a Manufacturer’s Data &
Performance Report:

(a) in place of DRC data submissions, a mathematical model suitable for

representation of the entire Power Park Module as per ECP.A.3.4.4.
For the avoidance of doubt only the relevant sections as specified in
PC.A.2.5.5.7 apply. Site specific parameters will still need to be
submitted by the Generator.

(b) Not Used.

(c) to reduce the scope of compliance site tests as follows;

(i) Where there is a Manufacturer’s Data & Performance

Report in respect of a Power Park Unit which covers Fault
Ride Through, The Company may agree that no Fault Ride
Through testing is required.

ECP.11.5 It is the responsibility of the EU Code User to ensure that the correct reference
for the Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report is used and the EU Code
User by using that reference accepts responsibility for the accuracy of the
information. The EU Code User shall ensure that the manufacturer has kept
The Company informed of any relevant variations in plant specification since
the submission of the relevant Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report
which could impact on the validity of the information.

ECP
Page 28 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.11.6 The Company may contact the Power Park Unit manufacturer directly to
verify the relevance of the use of such Manufacturer’s Data & Performance
Report. If The Company believe the use some or all of such Manufacturer’s
Data & Performance Report information is incorrect or the referenced data is
inappropriate, then the reference to the Manufacturer’s Data & Performance
Report may be declared invalid by The Company. Where, and to the extent
possible, the data included in the Manufacturer’s Data & Performance
Report is appropriate, the compliance assessment process will be continued
using the data included in the Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report.

ECP.11.7 In the case of a co-located site, for example Electricity Storage Modules or
Grid Forming Plant connected within a new or existing Power Station, The
Company will accept demonstration of compliance at the Grid Entry Point or
User System Entry Point (if Embedded) through a combination of the
capabilities of the Power Generating Modules and Electricity Storage
Modules (which could include Grid Forming Plant) or Electricity Storage
Modules and Generating Units or Power Park Modules (which could include
Grid Forming Plant). Generators or Grid Forming Plant Owners should
however be aware that for the purposes of compliance, full Grid Code
compliance should be demonstrated when, for example, the Electricity
Storage Module or Grid Forming Plant is out of service and the remaining
Power Generating Module is in service or the Electricity Storage Module or
Grid Forming Plant is in service and the Power Generating Module is out of
service. Equally, The Company will accept Manufacturer’s Data &
Performance Reports for the purposes of proving compliance at co-located
sites.

APPENDIX 1
NOT USED

ECP
Page 29 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 APPENDIX 2

USER SELF CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE (Interim/Final)

Power
Station/ [Name of Maximum
HVDC Connection Site/site User: [Full User name] Capacity (MW)
Equipment of connection] of Plant:
Station

This User Self Certification of Compliance records the compliance by the EU Code User in
respect of [NAME] Power Station/HVDC Equipment Station with the Grid Code and the
requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and Construction Agreement dated [ ] with
reference number [ ]. It is completed by the Power Station/HVDC System Owner in the case
of Plant and/or Apparatus connected to the National Electricity Transmission System and
for Embedded Plant.

We have recorded our compliance against each requirement of the Grid Code which applies
to the Power Station/HVDC Equipment Station, together with references to supporting
evidence and a commentary where this is appropriate, and have provided this to The
Company. A copy of the Compliance Statement is attached.

Supporting evidence, in the form of simulation results, test results, manufacturer’s data and
other documentation, is attached in the User Data File Structure.

The EU Code User hereby certifies that, to the best of its knowledge and acting in accordance
with Good Industry Practice, the Power Station is compliant with the Grid Code and the
Bilateral Agreement in all aspects [with the following Unresolved Issues*] [with the following
derogation(s)**]:

Connection
Requirement Ref: Issue
Condition

Compliance Name: Title:

certified by: [PERSON] [PERSON DESIGNATION]
Signature: Of
[PERSON] [User details]
Date:

* Include for Interim User Self Certification of Compliance ahead of Interim Operational
Notification.
** Include for final User Self Certification of Compliance ahead of Final Operational
Notification where derogation(s) have been granted. If no derogation(s) required delete
wording and Table.

ECP
Page 30 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 APPENDIX 3

SIMULATION STUDIES

ECP.A.3.1 SCOPE

ECP.A.3.1.1 This Appendix sets out the simulation studies required to be submitted to The
Company to demonstrate compliance with the European Connection
Conditions unless otherwise agreed with The Company. This Appendix
should be read in conjunction with ECP.6 with regard to the submission of the
reports to The Company. Where there is any inconsistency in the technical
requirements in respect of which compliance is being demonstrated by
simulation in this Appendix and ECC.6.3 and the Bilateral Agreement, the
provisions of the Bilateral Agreement and ECC.6.3 prevail. The studies
specified in this Appendix will normally be sufficient to demonstrate
compliance. However, The Company may agree an alternative set of studies
proposed by the Generator or HVDC System Owner provided The Company
deem the alternative set of studies sufficient to demonstrate compliance with
the Grid Code and the Bilateral Agreement.

ECP.A.3.1.2 The Generator or HVDC System Owner shall submit simulation studies in the
form of a report to demonstrate compliance. In all cases the simulation studies
must utilise models applicable to the Synchronous Power Generating
Module, HVDC Equipment or Power Park Module with proposed or actual
parameter settings. Reports should be submitted in English with all diagrams
and graphs plotted clearly with legible axes and scaling provided to ensure any
variations in plotted values is clear. In all cases, the simulation studies must be
presented over a sufficient time period to demonstrate compliance with all
applicable requirements.

ECP.A.3.1.3 In the case of an Offshore Power Station where OTSDUW Arrangements

apply simulation studies, the Generator should include the action of any
relevant OTSUA where applicable to demonstrate compliance with the Grid
Code and the Bilateral Agreement at the Interface Point.

ECP.A.3.1.4 The Company will permit relaxation from the requirement ECP.A.3.2 to
ECP.A.3.8 where an Equipment Certificate for the Power Generating
Module or HVDC Equipment has been provided which details the
characteristics from appropriate simulations on a representative installation
with the same equipment and settings and the performance of the Power
Generating Module or HVDC Equipment can, in The Company’s opinion,
reasonably represent that of the installed Power Generating Module or HVDC
Equipment.

ECP.A.3.1.5 For Type B, Type C and Type D Power Generating Modules the relevant
Equipment Certificate must be supplied in the Power Generating Module
Document or Users Data File structure as applicable. For HVDC Equipment
the relevant Equipment Certificates must be supplied in the Users Data File
structure.

ECP.A.3.1.6 In the case of a co-located site, for example Electricity Storage Modules or
Grid Forming Plant connected within a new or existing Power Station, The
Company will accept simulation studies to demonstrate compliance at the Grid
Entry Point or User System Entry Point (if Embedded) through a
combination of the capabilities of the Power Generating Modules (which
could include Grid Forming Plant) and Electricity Storage Modules or
Electricity Storage Modules (which could include Grid Forming Plant) and
Generating Units or Power Park Modules. Generators should however be
aware that for the purposes of simulations, full Grid Code compliance should
be demonstrated when, for example, the Electricity Storage Module or Grid

ECP
Page 31 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 Forming Plant is out of service and the remaining Power Generating Module
is in service or the Electricity Storage Module or Grid Forming Plant is in
service and the Power Generating Module is out of service.

ECP.A.3.2 Power System Stabiliser Tuning

ECP.A.3.2.1 In the case of a Synchronous Power Generating Module with an Excitation

System Power System Stabiliser the Power System Stabiliser tuning
simulation study report required by ECC.A.6.2.5.6 or required by the Bilateral
Agreement shall contain:

(i) the Excitation System model including the Power System

Stabiliser with settings as required under the Planning Code
(PC.A.5.3.2(c)).

(ii) open circuit time series simulation study of the response of the
Excitation System to a +10% step change from 90% to 100%
terminal voltage.

(iii) on load time series dynamic simulation studies of the response of

the Excitation System with and without the Power System
Stabiliser to 2% and 10% steps in the reference voltage and a three
phase short circuit fault applied to the higher voltage side of the
Synchronous Power Generating Module transformer for 100ms.
The simulation studies should be carried out with the Synchronous
Power Generating Module operating at full Active Power and
maximum leading Reactive Power import with the fault level at the
Supergrid HV connection point at minimum or as otherwise agreed
with The Company. The results should show the Synchronous
Power Generating Module field voltage, terminal voltage, Power
System Stabiliser output, Active Power and Reactive Power
output.

(iv) gain and phase Bode diagrams for the open loop frequency domain
response of the Synchronous Power Generating Module
Excitation System with and without the Power System Stabiliser.
These should be in a suitable format to allow assessment of the
phase contribution of the Power System Stabiliser and the gain
and phase margin of the Excitation System with and without the
Power System Stabiliser in service.

(v) an eigenvalue plot to demonstrate that all modes remain stable when
the Power System Stabiliser gain is increased by at least a factor
of 3 from the designed operating value.

(vi) gain Bode diagram for the closed loop on load frequency domain
response of the Synchronous Power Generating Module
Excitation System with and without the Power System Stabiliser.
The Synchronous Power Generating Module operating at full load
and at unity power factor. These diagrams should be in a suitable
format to allow comparison of the Active Power damping across the
frequency range specified in ECC.A.6.2.6.3 with and without the
Power System Stabiliser in service.

In the case of a Synchronous Power Generating Module that may operate

as Demand (e.g. Pump Storage) the on-load simulations (ii) to (vi) should also
carried out in both modes of operation.

ECP.A.3.2.2 In the case of Onshore Non-Synchronous Power Generating Module,

Onshore HVDC Equipment and Onshore Power Park Modules and

ECP
Page 32 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface Point the Power System
Stabiliser tuning simulation study report required by ECC.A.7.2.4.1 or
ECC.A.8.2.4 or required by the Bilateral Agreement shall contain:

(i) the Voltage Control System model including the Power System
Stabiliser with settings as required under the Planning Code
(PC.A.5.4) and Bilateral Agreement.

(ii) on load time series dynamic simulation studies of the response of the
Voltage Control System with and without the Power System
Stabiliser to 2% and 10% steps in the reference voltage and a three
phase short circuit fault applied to the Grid Entry Point or the
Interface Point in the case of OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus for
100ms. The simulation studies should be carried out operating at full
Active Power and maximum leading Reactive Power import
condition with the fault level at the Supergrid HV connection point at
minimum or as otherwise agreed with The Company. The results
should show appropriate signals to demonstrate the expected
damping performance of the Power System Stabiliser.

(iii) any other simulation as specified in the Bilateral Agreement or

agreed between the Generator or HVDC System Owner or
Offshore Transmission Licensee and The Company.

ECP.A.3.3 Reactive Capability across the Voltage Range

ECP.A.3.3.1 (a) For a Synchronous Power Generating Module, the Generator shall
supply simulation studies to demonstrate the capability to meet
ECC.6.3.2 by submission of a report containing load flow simulation
study results to demonstrate:

(i) the maximum lagging Reactive Power capability at Maximum

Capacity when the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry
Point if Embedded or Interface Point (in the case of OTSUA)
voltage is at 105% of nominal.

(ii) the maximum leading Reactive Power capability at Maximum

Capacity when the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry
Point if Embedded or Interface Point (in the case of OTSUA)
voltage is at 95% of nominal.

(iii) the maximum lagging Reactive Power capability at the

Minimum Stable Operating Level when the Grid Entry Point
or User System Entry Point if Embedded or Interface Point
(in the case of OTSUA) voltage is at 105% of nominal.

(iv) the maximum leading Reactive Power capability at the

Minimum Stable Operating Level when the Grid Entry Point
or User System Entry Point if Embedded or Interface Point
(in the case of OTSUA) voltage is at 95% of nominal.

(b) For an OSTUA with an Interface Point above 33kV or Power Park
Modules with a Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point above
33kV, the Generator shall demonstrate the capability to meet ECC.6.3.2
by submission of a report containing load flow simulation study results to
demonstrate operation at points A, B, E and F in accordance with Figure
ECC.A.7.2.2(b) or Figure ECC.A.8.2.2(b). The studies should be run with
both the OTSUA and Power Park Module operating at Maximum
Capacity and at the Minimum Stable Operating Level.

ECP
Page 33 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (c) For an OSTUA with an Interface Point at or below 33kV or Power Park
Modules with a Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point at or
below 33kV, a load flow simulation study results to demonstrate operation
at points A, B, E and F in accordance with Figure ECC.A.7.2.2(c) or
Figure ECC.A.8.2.2(b). The studies should be run with both the OTSUA
and Power Park Module operating at Maximum Capacity and at the
Minimum Stable Operating Level.

(d) For an HVDC system, the HVDC System Owner shall supply simulation
studies to demonstrate the capability to meet ECC.6.3.2 by submission
of a report containing load flow simulation study results to demonstrate
operation at points A, B, E and F in accordance with Figure
ECC.A.7.2.2(b). The studies should be run with both the HVDC System
operating at the Maximum HVDC Active Power Transmission
Capacity and Minimum HVDC Active Power Transmission Capacity.:

ECP.A.3.3.2 In the case of a Synchronous Power Generating Module the terminal voltage
in the simulation should be the nominal voltage for the machine.

ECP.A.3.3.3 In the case of a Power Park Module where the load flow simulation studies
show that the individual Power Park Units deviate from nominal voltage to
meet the Reactive Power requirements then evidence must be provided from
factory (e.g. in a Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report) or site testing
that the Power Park Unit is capable of operating continuously at the operating
points determined in the load flow simulation studies.

ECP.A.3.4 Voltage Control and Reactive Power Stability

ECP.A.3.4.1 This section applies to HVDC Equipment; and Type C & Type D Power Park
Modules to demonstrate the voltage control capability and Type B Power Park
Modules to demonstrate the voltage control capability if specified by The
Company.

In the case of a Power Station containing Power Park Modules and/or

OTSUA, the Generator shall provide a report to demonstrate the dynamic
capability and control stability of the Power Park Module. The report shall
contain:

(i) a dynamic time series simulation study result of a sufficiently large

negative step in System voltage to cause a change in Reactive Power
from zero to the maximum lagging value at Rated MW.

(ii) a dynamic time series simulation study result of a sufficiently large positive
step in System voltage to cause a change in Reactive Power from zero
to the maximum leading value at Rated MW.

(iii) a dynamic time series simulation study result to demonstrate control

stability at the lagging Reactive Power limit by application of a -2%
voltage step while operating within 5% of the lagging Reactive Power
limit.

(iv) a dynamic time series simulation study result to demonstrate control

stability at the leading Reactive Power limit by application of a +2%
voltage step while operating within 5% of the leading Reactive Power
limit.

ECP
Page 34 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (v) a dynamic time series simulation study result of a sufficiently large
negative step in System voltage to cause a change in Reactive Power
from the maximum leading value to the maximum lagging value at Rated
MW.

The Generator should also provide the voltage control study specified in
ECP.A.3.7.4.

ECP.A.3.4.2 All the above studies should be completed with a network operating at the
voltage applicable for zero Reactive Power transfer at the Grid Entry Point
or User System Entry Point if Embedded or, in the case of OTSUA, Interface
Point unless stated otherwise. The fault level at the HV connection point should
be set at the minimum level as agreed with The Company.

ECP.A.3.5 Fault Ride Through and Fast Fault Current Injection

ECP.A.3.5.1 This section applies to Type B, Type C and Type D Power Generating
Modules and HVDC Equipment to demonstrate the modules Fault Ride
Through and Fast Fault Current injection capability.

The Generator or HVDC System Owner shall supply time series simulation
study results to demonstrate the capability of Synchronous Power
Generating Module, HVDC Equipment, and Power Park Modules and
OTSUA to meet ECC.6.3.15 and ECC.6.3.16 by submission of a report
containing:

(i) a time series simulation study of a 140ms three phase short circuit fault
with a retained voltage as detailed in table A.3.5.1 below applied at the
Grid Entry Point or (User System Entry Point if Embedded) of the
Power Generating Module or HVDC Equipment or OTSUA.

(ii) a time series simulation study of 140ms unbalanced short circuit faults
with a retained voltage as detailed in table 1 on the faulted phase(s)
applied at the Grid Entry Point or (User System Entry Point if
Embedded) of the Power Generating Module or HVDC Equipment
or OTSUA. The unbalanced faults to be simulated are:

1. a phase to phase fault

2. a two phase to earth fault
3. a single phase to earth fault.

Power Generating Module Retained

Voltage
Synchronous Power Generating Module
Type B 30%
Type C or Type D with Grid connection point 10%
voltage <110kV
Type D with connection point voltage >110kV 0%
Power Park Module
Type B or Type C or Type D with connection point 10%
voltage < 110kV
Type D with connection point voltage >110kV 0%
HVDC Equipment 0%
Table A.3.5.1

For a Power Generating Module or HVDC Equipment or OTSUA the

simulation study should be completed with the Power Generating
Module or HVDC Equipment or OTSUA operating at full Active
Power and maximum leading Reactive Power and the fault level at

ECP
Page 35 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 the Supergrid HV connection point at minimum or as otherwise agreed
with The Company as detailed in ECC.6.3.15.8.

(iii) time series simulation studies of balanced Supergrid voltage dips

applied on the nearest point of the National Electricity Transmission
System operating at Supergrid voltage to the Synchronous Power
Generating Module or OTSUA. The simulation studies should include:

1. 50% retained voltage lasting 0.45 seconds

2. 70% retained voltage lasting 0.81 seconds
3. 80% retained voltage lasting 1.00 seconds
4. 85% retained voltage lasting 180 seconds.

For a Synchronous Power Generating Module or OTSUA, the

simulation study should be completed with the Synchronous Power
Generating Module or OTSUA operating at full Active Power and
zero Reactive Power output and the fault level at the Supergrid HV
connection point at minimum or as otherwise agreed with The
Company. Where the Synchronous Power Generating Module is
Embedded, the minimum Network Operator’s System impedance
to the Supergrid HV Connection Point shall be used which may be
calculated from the maximum fault level at the User System Entry
Point.

(iv) time series simulation studies of balanced Supergrid voltage dips

applied on the nearest point of the National Electricity Transmission
System operating at Supergrid voltage to the HVDC Equipment or
Power Park Module. The simulation studies should include:

1. 30% retained voltage lasting 0.384 seconds

2. 50% retained voltage lasting 0.71 seconds
3. 80% retained voltage lasting 2.5 seconds
4. 85% retained voltage lasting 180 seconds.

For Power Park Modules the simulation study should be completed

with the HVDC Equipment or Power Park Module operating at full
Active Power and zero Reactive Power output and the fault level at
the Supergrid HV Connection Point at minimum or as otherwise
agreed with The Company. Where the Power Park Module is
Embedded the minimum Network Operator’s System impedance
to the Supergrid HV Connection Point shall be used which may be
calculated from the maximum fault level at the User System Entry
Point.

(v) time series simulation studies of balanced Supergrid voltage dips

applied on the nearest point of the National Electricity
Transmission System operating at Supergrid voltage to the HVDC
Equipment. The simulation studies should include:

1. 30% retained voltage

2. 50% retained voltage
3. 80% retained voltage
4. 85% retained voltage

For HVDC Equipment the simulation study should be completed with

the HVDC Equipment operating at full Active Power transfer and
zero Reactive Power output and the fault level at the Supergrid HV
connection point at minimum or as otherwise agreed with The
Company. Where the HVDC Equipment is Embedded the minimum
Network Operator’s System impedance to the Supergrid HV

ECP
Page 36 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 connection point shall be used which may be calculated from the
maximum fault level at the User System Entry Point.

For HVDC Equipment the duration of each voltage dip 1 to 4 above

should demonstrate the requirements of the Bilateral Agreement.

ECP.A.3.5.2 Not Used.

ECP.A.3.5.3 In the case of a Power Park Module the studies detailed in ECP.A.3.5.1 should
be repeated to demonstrate compliance during foreseeable running
arrangements resulting from outages of major Plant and Apparatus (for
example outage of the main export cable in the case of OTSDUW or module
step up transformer where alternative export connections are possible). For
these conditions, the Power Park Module Active Power output may be
reduced to levels appropriate to the planned operating regime proposed by the
Generator. The Generator shall consult The Company on alternative running
arrangements and agree with The Company the running arrangements that
will be studied prior to the Generator undertaking the studies. For the
avoidance of doubt, compliance of a Power Park Module with Fault Ride
Through requirements remains the responsibility of the Generator under all
operating conditions.
ECP.A.3.5.4 In the case of a Power Park Module with a Registered Capacity greater or
equal to 100MW, the studies detailed in ECP.A.3.5.1 should be repeated with
50% of the Power Park Units Synchronised to the Total System. In the case
of a Power Station containing multiple Power Park Modules or multiple
Offshore Power Park Modules connected to an Offshore Transmission
System or OTSDUW the study should include all Power Park Modules with
50% of the Power Park Units Synchronised to the Total System.
ECP.A.3.5.5 In the case of HVDC Equipment the studies detailed in ECP.A.3.5.1 should be
repeated to demonstrate compliance during foreseeable running arrangements
resulting from outages of major Plant and Apparatus (for example outage of
an HVDC cable or convertor. For these conditions, the HVDC Equipment
Active Power transfer may be reduced to levels appropriate to the planned
operating regime. The Generator or HVDC System Owner shall consult The
Company on alternative running arrangements and agree with The Company
the running arrangements that will be studied prior to the Generator or HVDC
System Owner undertaking the studies. For the avoidance of doubt,
compliance of HVDC Equipment with Fault Ride Through requirements
remains the responsibility of the Generator or HVDC System Owner under all
operating conditions.

ECP.A.3.6 Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode – Over Frequency (LFSM-O)

ECP.A.3.6.1 This section applies to Type B, Type C and Type D Power Generating
Modules, HVDC Equipment to demonstrate the capability to modulate Active
Power at high frequency as required by ECC6.3.7.3.5(ii).

ECP.A.3.6.2 The simulation study should comprise of a Power Generating Module or

HVDC Equipment connected to the total System with a local load shown as
“X” in figure ECP.A.3.6.1. The load “X” is in addition to any auxiliary load of the
Power Station connected directly to the Power Generating Module or HVDC
Equipment and represents a small portion of the System to which the Power
Generating Module or HVDC Equipment is attached. The value of “X” should
be the minimum for which the Power Generating Module or HVDC

ECP
Page 37 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 Equipment can control the power island Frequency to less than 52Hz
consistent with ECC.6.3.7.3.5(ii). Where transient excursions above 52Hz
occur the Generator or HVDC Equipment Owner should ensure that the
duration above 52Hz is less than any high Frequency protection system
applied to the Power Generating Module or HVDC Equipment.

ECP.A.3.6.3 For HVDC Equipment and Power Park Modules consisting of units
connected wholly by power electronic devices the simulation methodology may
be modified by the addition of a Synchronous Power Generating Module
(G2) connected as indicated in Figure ECP.A.3.6.2. This additional
Synchronous Power Generating Module should have an inertia constant of
3.5MWs/MVA, be initially operating at rated power output and unity Power
Factor. The mechanical power of the Synchronous Power Generating
Module (G2) should remain constant throughout the simulation.

ECP.A.3.6.4 At the start of the simulation study the Power Generating Module or HVDC
Equipment will be operating maximum Active Power output. The Power
Generating Module or HVDC Equipment will then be islanded from the Total
System but still supplying load “X” by the opening of a breaker, which is not
the Power Generating Module or HVDC Equipment connection circuit
breaker (the governor should therefore, not receive any signals that the breaker
has opened other than the reduction in load and subsequent increase in
speed). A schematic arrangement of the simulation study is illustrated by
Figure ECP.A.3.6.1.

Figure ECP.A.3.6.1 – Diagram of Load Rejection Study

Figure ECP.A.3.6.2 – Addition of Generator G2 if applicable

ECP
Page 38 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 ECP.A.3.6.5 A simulation study shall be performed for Type B, C & D Power Generating
Modules in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode (LFSM) and Frequency
Sensitive Mode (FSM) for Type C & D Power Generating Modules. The
simulation study results should indicate Active Power and Frequency.

ECP.A.3.6.6 To allow validation of the model used to simulate load rejection in accordance
with ECC.6.3.7.3.5 as described, a further simulation study is required to
represent the largest positive Frequency injection step or fast ramp (BC1 and
BC3 of Figure 2) that will be applied as a test as described in ECP.A.5.8 and
ECP.A.6.6.

ECP.A.3.6.7 The above suite of simulation studies equally apply for Electricity Storage
Modules when in an export mode of operation and should also demonstrate
transition to an import mode of operation in line with the stated Droop
characteristics of the Electricity Storage Module when in an import mode of
operation. Three simulation studies need to be carried out:

i) The Electricity Storage Module should initially be operating at zero

Active Power output and have sufficient capability so that it is possible
to operate the Electricity Storage Module at Maximum Capacity
and Maximum Import Power. The above suite of simulation studies
as detailed in ECP.A.3.6.1 – ECP.A.3.6.6 should then be conducted to
ensure the Electricity Storage Modules Active Power output
achieves its Maximum Import Power in line with the Droop and
response time settings as declared by the Generator.
ii) The Electricity Storage Module should be operating at 50% of its
Maximum Import Power and have sufficient capability so that it is
possible to operate the Electricity Storage Module at Maximum
Capacity and Maximum Import Power. The above suite of
simulation studies should then be conducted to ensure the Electricity
Storage Modules Active Power output achieves its Maximum
Import Power in line with the Droop and response time settings as
declared by the Generator.
iii) The Electricity Storage Module should be operating at its Maximum
Import Power. The above suite of simulation studies should then be
conducted to ensure the Electricity Storage Modules Active Power
remains at its Maximum Import Power, unless it is in Frequency
Sensitive Mode and the tested Frequency falls below 50.5Hz.

Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode – Under Frequency (LFSM-U)

ECP.A.3.6.7 This section applies to:

Synchronous Power Generating Modules, Type C & D; or,
HVDC Equipment; or,
Power Park Modules, Type C & D to demonstrate the modules capability to
modulate Active Power at low frequency.

ECP.A.3.6.8 To demonstrate the LFSM-U low Frequency control when operating in Limited
Frequency Sensitive Mode the Generator or HVDC System Owner shall
submit a simulation study representing the response of the Power Generating
Module or HVDC Equipment operating at 80% of Maximum Capacity. The
simulation study event shall be equivalent to:

(i) a sufficiently large reduction in the measured System Frequency

ramped over 10 seconds to cause an increase in Active Power output
to the Maximum Capacity followed by

ECP
Page 39 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (ii) 60 seconds of steady state with the measured System Frequency
depressed to the same level as in ECP.A.3.6.8.1 (i) as illustrated in
Figure ECP.A.3.6.1 below.
(iii) then increase of the measured System Frequency ramped over 10
seconds to cause a reduction in Active Power output back to the
original Active Power level followed by at least 60 seconds of steady
output.

Frequency (Hz)

∆F

10 60 10 60

Time (seconds)
Figure ECP.A.3.6.1
Operation of Electricity Storage Modules in an import mode of operation
during low System Frequencies
ECP.A.3.6.9 For Generators in respect of Electricity Storage Modules who are unable to
deload from an import mode of operation to an export mode of operation during
low System Frequencies as defined in ECC.6.3.7.2.3 and have agreed with
The Company that they can comply with the requirements of OC6.6.6 as
provided for in ECC.6.3.7.2.3.1, the simulation studies as detailed in
ECP.A.3.6.10 shall apply.
For Generators in respect of Electricity Storage Modules who can satisfy the
requirements of ECC.6.3.7.2.3 (except ECC.6.3.7.2.3.1 to which OC6.6.6
refers) the simulation studies as detailed in ECP.A.3.6.11 shall apply.
ECP.A.3.6.10 The Generator shall submit a simulation study representing the response of
the Electricity Storage Module operating at Maximum Import Power
followed by a simulated fall in System Frequency. The simulation study shall
demonstrate that:-

(i) For a sufficiently large reduction in the simulated System Frequency

ramped over 10 seconds over the Frequency range 49.5 Hz to 48.85
Hz, the simulation shall be sufficient to demonstrate the tripping of each
Demand block (as specified in the Bilateral Agreement).
(ii) The simulation study shall demonstrate the tripping of each Demand
block at the specified Frequency and time of disconnection following
the Frequency excursion at the specified setting. The simulation study
results shall be assessed against the settings in the Bilateral
Agreement.

ECP.A.3.6.11 For Generators in respect of Electricity Storage Modules who can satisfy the
Droop requirements of ECC.6.3.7.2.3, the Generator shall submit simulation
studies representing the response of the Electricity Storage Module. The
simulation studies shall comprise:-

ECP
Page 40 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (i) Initial conditions where the Electricity Storage Module shall be
operating at its Maximum Import Power with the Electricity Storage
Module in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode.
(ii) A simulation signal shall be applied which ramps the System
Frequency from 50Hz to 49.0Hz at a rate of 2Hz/s. The System
Frequency shall be held at 49.0Hz for 60s and the then ramped back
to 50Hz in 10s as shown in Figure ECP.3.6.4.

(iii) The simulated results should show a reduction in Active Power in

accordance with the requirement of ECC.6.3.7.2.3.1. When the test
injection signal is held at 49.0Hz, the Active Power output of the
Electricity Storage Module should achieve a steady state operating
point in no more than 10s and this should be maintained whilst the test
frequency signal is held at 49.0Hz.
(iv) The above simulation described (i) – (iii) above shall be repeated but
the minimum test frequency applied shall be to 48.8Hz as shown in
Figure ECP.3.6.5.
(v) The above tests shall be repeated when the Electricity Storage
Module is operating at 40% of its Maximum Import Power.

Figure ECP.A.3.6.4

ECP
Page 41 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 Figure ECP.A.3.6.5

ECP.A.3.6.12 In addition to the requirements of ECP.A.3.6.11 a set of simulation studies shall

be submitted to demonstrate the performance of the Electricity Storage
Module during extreme Frequency conditions. The simulated studies shall
comprise:-
(i) Initial conditions where the Electricity Storage Module shall be
operating at its Maximum Import Power with the Electricity Storage
Module in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode.
(ii) A simulation signal which ramps the System Frequency from 50Hz to
48.3Hz over 20s. The System Frequency shall be held at 48.3Hz for
60s and the then ramped back to 50Hz in 20s as shown in Figure
ECP.3.6.6.

(iii) The simulation shall demonstrate of the ability of the Electricity

Storage Module to reach its Maximum Capacity (or otherwise) in
accordance with the requirements of ECC.6.3.7.2.3. When the test
injection signal is held at 48.3Hz, the Active Power output of the
Electricity Storage Module should achieve a steady state operating
point in no more than 10s and this should be maintained whilst the test
frequency signal is held at 48.3Hz.
(iv) An applied simulated signal which ramps from 48.3Hz to 50Hz over a
20s period. The Electricity Storage Module should return back to its
Maximum Import Power at 49.5Hz in line with the performance
requirements of ECC.6.3.7.2.3.
The above test shall be repeated with the Electricity Storage Module is
operating at 50% of its Maximum Import Power.

ECP
Page 42 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 Figure ECP.A.3.6.6

ECP.A.3.7 Voltage and Frequency Controller Model Verification and Validation

ECP.A.3.7.1 For Type C and Type D Synchronous Power Generating Modules, HVDC
Equipment, OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus or Power Park Modules, the
Generator (including those undertaking OTSDUW) or HVDC System Owner
shall provide simulation studies to verify that the proposed controller models
supplied to The Company under the Planning Code are fit for purpose. These
simulation study results shall be provided in the timescales stated in the
Planning Code.

ECP.A.3.7.2 To demonstrate the Frequency control or governor/load controller/plant model

the Generator or HVDC System Owner shall submit a simulation study
representing the response of the Synchronous Power Generating Module,
HVDC Equipment or Power Park Module operating at 80% of Maximum
Capacity. The simulation study event shall be equivalent to:

(i) a ramped reduction in the measured System Frequency of 0.5Hz in 10

seconds followed by
(ii) 20 seconds of steady state with the measured System Frequency
depressed by 0.5Hz followed by
(iii) a ramped increase in measured System Frequency of 0.3Hz over 30
seconds followed by
(iv) 60 seconds of steady state with the measured System Frequency
depressed by 0.2Hz as illustrated in Figure ECP.A.3.7.2 below.

Frequency (Hz)

-0.2

-0.5

10 20 30 60

Time (seconds)

ECP
Page 43 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 Figure ECP.A.3.7.2

The simulation study shall show Active Power output (MW) and the equivalent
of Frequency injected.

ECP.A.3.7.3 To demonstrate the Excitation System model the Generator shall submit
simulation studies representing the response of the Synchronous Power
Generating Module as follows:

(i) operating open circuit at rated terminal voltage and subjected to a 10%
step increase in terminal voltage reference from 90% to 100%.
(ii) operating at Rated MW, nominal terminal voltage and unity Power
Factor subjected to a 2% step increase in the voltage reference. Where
a Power System Stabiliser is included within the Excitation System
this shall be in service.

The simulation study shall show the Synchronous Power Generating Module
terminal voltage, field voltage, Active Power, Reactive Power and Power
System Stabiliser output signal as appropriate.

ECP.A.3.7.4 To demonstrate the Voltage Controller model the Generator (including those
undertaking OTSDUW) or HVDC System Owner shall submit a simulation
study representing the response of the HVDC Equipment, OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus or Power Park Module operating at Rated MW and unity
Power Factor at the connection point to a 2% step increase in the voltage
reference. The simulation study shall show the terminal voltage, Active
Power, Reactive Power and Power System Stabiliser output signal as
appropriate.

ECP.A.3.7.5 To validate that the excitation and voltage control models submitted under the
Planning Code are a reasonable representation of the dynamic behaviour of
the Synchronous Power Generating Module, OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus, HVDC Equipment or Power Park Module as built, the Generator
or HVDC System Owner shall repeat the simulation studies outlined above but
using the operating conditions of the equivalent tests. The simulation study
results shall be displayed overlaid on the actual test results.

ECP.A.3.7.6 For Type C and Type D Synchronous Power Generating Modules or HVDC
Equipment to validate that the governor/load controller/plant or Frequency
control models submitted under the Planning Code is a reasonable
representation of the dynamic behaviour of the Synchronous Power
Generating Module or HVDC Equipment Station as built, the Generator or
HVDC System Owner shall repeat the simulation studies outlined above but
using the operating conditions of the equivalent tests. The simulation study
results shall be displayed overlaid on the actual test results.

ECP.A.3.8 Sub-synchronous Resonance control and Power Oscillation Damping control

for HVDC System.

ECP.A.3.8.1 To demonstrate the compliance of the sub-synchronous control capability with

ECC.6.3.17.1) and the terms of the Bilateral Agreement, the HVDC System
Owner shall submit a simulation study report.

ECP.A.3.8.2 Where power oscillation damping control function is specified on a HVDC

Equipment the HVDC System Owner shall submit a simulation study report
to demonstrate the compliance with ECC.6.3.17.2 and the terms of the
Bilateral Agreement.

ECP.A.3.8.3 The simulation studies should utilise the HVDC Equipment control system
models including the settings as required under the Planning Code

ECP
Page 44 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (PC.A.5.3.2). The network conditions for the above simulation studies should
be discussed with The Company prior to commencing any simulation studies.

ECP.A.3.9 Grid Forming Plant verification and validation

ECP.A.3.9.1 This section applies to Users and Non-CUSC Parties who own and operate
GBGF-I Plant to demonstrate the ability of their Grid Forming Plant to satisfy
the requirements of ECC.6.3.19. For the avoidance of doubt these
requirements are not necessary from owner and operators of GBGF-S Plant.

ECP.A.3.9.2 For initial approval Users and Non-CUSC Parties are required to submit the
following data of their Grid Forming Plant to The Company: -
a) The representation of their Grid Forming Plant in a format either the same
as Figure PC.A.5.8.1 of PC.A.5.8.1 or in an equivalent format.

b) The data associated with their Grid Forming Plant as required in

PC.A.5.8.1

c) A linearised model and parameters of the Grid Forming Plant in the

frequency domain in the same format as required in PC.A.5.8.1 or
equivalent.

d) A Network Frequency Perturbation Plot with a Nichols Chart

demonstrating the equivalent Damping Factor.

e) For the items a) to d) the User or Non-CUSC Party can submit the data in
any equivalent format as agreed with The Company.

ECP.A.3.9.3 For GBGF-I, the User or Non-CUSC Party may be required to supply other
versions of the Network Frequency Perturbation Plot for different input and
output signals as defined by The Company.

ECP.A.3.9.4 For final approval, Users and Non-CUSC Parties are required to demonstrate
that the GBGF_I model is capable of supplying Active ROCOF Response
Power, and Active Phase Jump Power, and submit a full 3 phase simulation
study in the time domain representing the response of the Grid Forming Plant
over a range of operating conditions. The simulation study shall comprise of
the following stages.

i) A simulation study to the equivalent shown in Figure ECP.A.3.9.4.

Figure ECP.A.3.9.4

ii) The first simulation test is to demonstrate that the GBGF-I model is
capable of supplying Active ROCOF Response Power to the Total
System as a result of a System Frequency change. In this
simulation, with the Grid Forming Plant initially running at Registered
Capacity or Maximum Capacity, the Grid System Frequency is
increased from 50Hz to 51Hz at a rate of 1Hz/s with measurements of

ECP
Page 45 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 the Grid Forming Plant’s Active ROCOF Response Power, System
Frequency and time in (ms). The simulation is required to assess
correct operation of the Grid Forming Plant without saturating.
Repeat for 50Hz to 49Hz at 1Hz.s
iii) The second simulation test is to demonstrate the GBGF-I’s ability to
supply Active ROCOF Response Power and asses its withstand
capability under extreme System Frequencies. The Grid System
Frequency is increased from 50Hz to 52Hz at a rate of 1Hz/s with
measurements of the Active ROCOF Response Power, System
Frequency and time in (ms). This is repeated when the Grid System
Frequency is increased from 50Hz to 52Hz at a rate of 2 Hz/s with
measurements of the Active ROCOF Response Power, System
Frequency and time in (ms). Repeat for 50Hz to 48 Hz at 1 Hz/s and
50Hz to 48 Hz at 2 Hz/s.
iv) The third simulation is to demonstrate the Grid Forming Plant’s ability
to supply Active ROCOF Response Power over the full System
Frequency range.

(a) With the System Frequency set to 50Hz, the Grid Forming Plant
should be initially running at 75% Maximum Capacity or 75%
Registered Capacity, zero MVAr output and both Limited
Frequency Sensitive Mode and Frequency Sensitive Mode
disabled.
(b) The System Frequency is then increased from 50Hz to 52Hz at
a rate of 1Hz/s over a 2 second period. Allow conditions to
stabilise for 5 seconds and then decrease the System Frequency
from 52Hz to 47Hz at a rate of 1Hz/s over a 5 second period. Allow
conditions to stabilise.
(c) Record results of phase based Active ROCOF Response Power,
Reactive Power, voltage and System Frequency.
(d) The simulation now needs to be re-run in the opposite direction.
The same initial conditions should be applied as per
ECP.A.3.9.2iv) (a).
(e) The System Frequency is then decreased from 50Hz to 47Hz at
a rate of 1Hz/s over a 3 second period. Allow conditions to
stabilise for 5 seconds and then increase the System Frequency
from 47Hz to 52Hz at a rate of 1Hz/s over a 5 second period. Allow
conditions to stabilise.
(f) Record results of Active ROCOF Response Power, Reactive
Power, voltage and System Frequency.
(g) The simulation is required to ensure the Grid Forming Plant can
deliver Active ROCOF Response Power without going into
saturation and that a behaviour that is equivalent to pole slipping
does not occur.
v) The fourth simulation is to demonstrate the Grid Forming Plant’s
ability to supply Active Phase Jump Power under normal operation.

(a) With the System Frequency set to 50Hz, the Grid Forming Plant
should initially be running at Maximum Capacity or Registered
Capacity or a suitable loading point to demonstrate Grid Forming
Capability as agreed with The Company, zero MVAr output and
all control actions (e.g. Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode,
Frequency Sensitive Mode and voltage control) disabled.
(b) Apply a positive phase jump of the Phase Jump Angle Limit
value at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point.

ECP
Page 46 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (c) Record traces of Active Power, Reactive Power, voltage, current
and System Frequency for a period of 10 seconds after the step
change in phase has been applied. Repeat with a negative phase
jump.

vi) The fifth simulation is to demonstrate the Grid Forming Plant’s ability
to supply Active Phase Jump Power under extreme conditions.

(a) With the System Frequency set to 50Hz, the Grid Forming Plant
should be initially running at its Minimum Stable Operating Level
or Minimum Stable Generation, zero MVAr output and all control
actions (e.g. Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode, Frequency
Sensitive Mode and voltage control) disabled.
(b) Apply a phase jump equivalent to the positive Phase Jump Angle
Withstand value at the Grid.
(c) Record traces of Active Power, Reactive Power, voltage, current
and System Frequency for a period of 10 seconds after the step
change in phase has been applied. Repeat with a negative phase
jump.
(d) Repeat steps (a), (b) and (c) of ECP.A.3.9.4(vi) but on this
occasion apply a phase jump equivalent to the positive Phase
Jump Angle Limit at the Grid.

vii) The sixth simulation is to demonstrate the Grid Forming Plant’s

ability to supply Fault Ride Through and GBGF Fast Fault Current
Injection during a faulted condition

(a) With the System Frequency set to 50Hz, the Grid Forming Plant
should be initially running at its Maximum Capacity or Registered
Capacity, zero MVAr output and all control actions (e.g., Limited
Frequency Sensitive Mode, Frequency Sensitive Mode, GBGF
Fast Fault Current Injection, Fault Ride Through and voltage
control other than current limiters) disabled.
(b) Apply a solid three phase short circuit fault at the Grid Entry Point
or User System Entry Point for 140ms.
(c) Record traces of Active Power, Reactive Power, voltage, current
and System Frequency for a period of 10 seconds after the fault
has been applied. The GBGF-I’s current limit should be observed
to operate.
(d) Repeat steps (a) to (c) but on this occasion with Fault Ride
Through, GBGF Fast Fault Current Injection, Limited
Frequency Sensitive Mode and voltage control switched into
service.
(e) Record traces of Active Power, Reactive Power, voltage, current
and System Frequency for a period of 10 seconds after the fault
has been applied and confirm correct operation.

ECP.A.3.9.5 To demonstrate the GBGF-I model is capable of supplying Active ROCOF

Response Power and Active Phase Jump Power, under extreme conditions
the Grid Forming Plant Owner shall submit a simulation study representing
the response of the Grid Forming Plant. To demonstrate the performance of
the Grid Forming Plant under these conditions, the simulation study shall
represent the following scenario.

ECP
Page 47 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 i) The User or Non-CUSC Party in respect of GBGF-I should supply a
simulation study to The Company equivalent to Figure ECP.A.3.9.5.

Figure ECP.A.3.9.5

ii) In this simulation (as shown in Figure ECP.A.3.9.5) the parameters of

the variable frequency Grid shall be supplied by The Company. The
Load Y is also defined by The Company.
iii) With the system running in steady state the GBGF-I and the variable
frequency AC Grid should each be running at load Y/2 with the System
Frequency of the test network being 50Hz. All control actions (e.g.,
Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode, Frequency Sensitive Mode
and voltage control) should be disabled.
iv) With the system in steady state, apply a solid (zero impedance) three
phase short circuit fault at point A of Figure ECP.A.3.9.3 and then open
circuit breaker B, 140ms after the fault has been applied.
v) Record traces of Active Power, Reactive Power, voltage and System
Frequency and record for a period of time after fault inception after
allowing conditions to stabilise.
ECP.A.3.9.6 To demonstrate the Grid Forming Plant model is capable of contributing to
Active Damping Power, the GBGF-I owner is required to supply a simulation
study by injecting a Test Signal in the time domain into the model of the
GBGF-I.

The GBGF-I model should take the equivalent form shown in either Figure
ECP.A.3.9.6(a) or Figure ECP.A.3.9.6(b) as applicable. Each User or Non-
CUSC Party can use their own design, that may be very different to Figures
ECP.A.3.9.6(a) or ECP.A.3.9.6 (b) but should contain all relevant functions. In
either case the following tests should be completed, and results supplied to

ECP
Page 48 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 verify the following criteria: -

Figure ECP.A.3.9.6(a)

Figure ECP.A.3.9.6(b)

i) Demonstration of Damping by injecting a Test Signal in the time

domain at the Grid Oscillation Value and frequency into the model of
the GBGF-I . An acceptable performance will be judged when the result
matches the NFP Plot declared by the Grid Forming Plant Owner as
submitted in PC.A.5.8.1(i)
ii) Test i) is repeated with variations in the frequency of the Test Signal.
An acceptable performance will be judged when the result matches the
NFP Plot declared by the Grid Forming Plant Owner as submitted in
PC.A.5.8.1(i).
iii) Demonstration of phase based Active Control Output Power (or Pc)
by injecting a Test Signal into the Grid Forming Plant controller to
demonstrate that the Active Control Based Power output is supplied
below the 5Hz bandwidth limit. An acceptable performance will be
judged where the overshoot and decay matches the Damping Factor
declared by the Grid Forming Plant Owner as submitted in
PC.A.5.8.1 in addition to assessment against the requirements of
CC.A.6.2.6.1 or ECC.A.6.2.6.1 or CC.A.7.2.2.5 or ECC.A.7.2.5.2 as
applicable.

ECP
Page 49 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 APPENDIX 4

ONSITE SIGNAL PROVISION FOR WITNESSING TESTS

ECP.A.4.1 During any tests witnessed on-site by The Company, the following signals
shall be provided to The Company by the Generator undertaking OTSDUW
or HVDC System Owner in accordance with ECC.6.6.3.

ECP.A.4.2 Synchronous Power Generating Modules

ECP.A.4.2(a) • MW - Active Power at Synchronous

All Tests Generating Unit terminals
ECP.A.4.2(b) • MVAr - Reactive Power at terminals
Reactive & • Vt - Synchronous Generating Unit terminal
Excitation voltage
System • Efd- Synchronous Generating Unit field
voltage and/or main exciter field voltage
• Ifd – Synchronous Generating Unit Field
current (where possible)
• Power System Stabiliser output, where
applicable.
• Noise – Injected noise signal (where applicable
and possible)
ECP.A.4.2(c) • Fsys - System Frequency
Governor System • Finj - Injected Speed Setpoint
& Frequency • Logic - Stop / Start Logic Signal
Response For Gas Turbines:
• GT Fuel Demand
• GT Fuel Valve Position
• GT Inlet Guide Vane Position
• GT Exhaust Gas Temperature
For Steam Turbines at >= 1Hz:
• Pressure before Turbine Governor Valves
• Turbine Governor Valve Positions
• Governor Oil Pressure*
• Boiler Pressure Set Point *
• Superheater Outlet Pressure *
• Pressure after Turbine Governor Valves*
• Boiler Firing Demand*
*Where applicable (typically not in CCGT module)
For Hydro Plant:
• Speed Governor Demand Signal
• Actuator Output Signal
• Guide Vane / Needle Valve Position
ECP.A.4.2(d) • Fsys - System Frequency
Compliance with • Finj - Injected Speed Setpoint
ECC.6.3.3 • Appropriate control system parameters as
agreed with The Company (See ECP.A.5.9)

ECP.A.4.2(e) • MW - Synchronous Power Generating

Real Time on site Module Active Power at the Grid Entry
or Down- Point or (User System Entry Point if
loadable Embedded).
• MVAr - Synchronous Power Generating
Module Reactive Power at the Grid Entry
Point or (User System Entry Point if
Embedded).

ECP
Page 50 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 • Line-line Voltage (kV) at the Grid Entry
Point or (User System Entry Point if
Embedded).

ECP.A.4.3 Power Park Modules, OTSDUA and HVDC Equipment

Each Power Park Module and HVDC Equipment

at Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point
ECP.A.4.3.1(a) • Total Active Power (MW)
Real Time on site. • Total Reactive Power (MVAr)
• Line-line Voltage (kV)
• System Frequency (Hz)
ECP.A.4.3.1(b) • Injected frequency signal (Hz) or test logic signal
Real Time on site or (Boolean) when appropriate
Down- • Injected voltage signal (per unit voltage) or test logic
loadable signal (Boolean) when appropriate
• In the case of an Onshore Power Park Module the
Onshore Power Park Module site voltage (MV) (kV)
• Power System Stabiliser output, where appropriate
• In the case of a Power Park Module or HVDC
Equipment where the Reactive Power is provided by
more than one Reactive Power source, the individual
Reactive Power contributions from each source, as
agreed with The Company.
• In the case of HVDC Equipment appropriate control
system parameters as agreed with The Company (See
ECP.A.7)
• In the case of an Offshore Power Park Module the
Total Active Power (MW) and the Total Reactive
Power (MVAr) at the offshore Grid Entry Point
ECP.A.4.3.1(c) • Available power for Power Park Module (MW)
Real Time on site or • Power source speed for Power Park Module (e.g.
Down- wind speed) (m/s) when appropriate
loadable • Power source direction for Power Park Module
(degrees) when appropriate
See ECP.A.4.3.2

ECP.A.4.3.2 The Company accept that the signals specified in ECP.A.4.3.1(c) may have
lower effective sample rates than those required in ECC.6.6.3 although any
signals supplied for connection to The Company’s recording equipment which
do not meet at least the sample rates detailed in ECC.6.6.3 should have the
actual sample rates indicated to The Company before testing commences.

ECP.A.4.3.3 For all The Company witnessed testing either;

(i) the Generator or HVDC System Owner shall provide to The

Company all signals outlined in ECP.A.4.3.1 direct from the Power
Park Module control system without any attenuation, delay or filtering
which would result in the inability to fully demonstrate the objectives of
the test, or identify any potential safety or plant instability issues, and
with a signal update rate corresponding to ECC.6.6.3.2; or

(ii) in the case of Onshore Power Park Modules, the Generator or

HVDC System Owner shall provide signals ECP.A.4.3.1(a) direct from
one or more transducer(s) connected to current and voltage
transformers for monitoring in real time on site; or,

ECP
Page 51 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (iii) In the case of Offshore Power Park Modules and OTSDUA signals
ECP.A.4.3.1(a) will be provided at the Interface Point by the Offshore
Transmission Licensee pursuant to the STC or by the Generator
when OTSDUW Arrangements apply.

ECP.A.4.3.4 Options ECP.A.4.3.3 (ii) and (iii) will only be available on condition that;

(a) all signals outlined in ECP.A.4.3.1 are recorded and made available to
The Company by the Generator or HVDC System Owner from the
Power Park Module or OTSDUA or HVDC Equipment control
systems as a download once the testing has been completed; and

(b) the full test results are provided by the Generator HVDC System
Owner within 2 working days of the test date to The Company unless
The Company agrees otherwise; and

(c) all data is provided with a sample rate in accordance with ECC.6.6.3.3
unless The Company agrees otherwise; and

(d) in The Company’s reasonable opinion, the solution does not

unreasonably add a significant delay between tests or impede the
volume of testing which can take place on the day.

ECP.A.4.3.5 In the case of where transducers connected to current and voltage

transformers are installed (ECP.A.4. 3.3(ii) and (iii)), the transducers shall meet
the following specification

(a) The transducer(s) shall be permanently installed to easily allow safe

testing at any point in the future, and to avoid a requirement for
recalibration of the current transformers and voltage transformers.

(b) The transducer(s) should be directly connected to the metering quality

current transformers and voltage transformers or similar.

(c) The transducers shall either have a response time no greater than
50ms to reach 90% of output, or no greater than 300ms to reach
99.5%.

ECP.A.4.3.6 In the case of a GBGF-I system, the following signals shall be supplied to The
Company by the Grid Forming Plant Owner in accordance with ECC.6.6.3.
For the avoidance of doubt, User’s and Non-CUSC Parties will also be
required to undertake the necessary testing of their Plant in accordance with
the requirements of ECC.A.4 and OC5 as applicable.

Each Grid Forming Plant

at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point
ECP.A.4.3.6(a) Signals required shall be agreed with The Company in
Real Time accordance with ECC.6.6.3.2(iv) and ECC.6.6.3.2(v)
Downloadable

ECP
Page 52 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.A.4.3.7 Testing not witnessed by The Company on-site
ECP.A.4.3.7.1.1 Where The Company has decided not to witness testing on-site, the results
shall be submitted to The Company in spreadsheet format with the signal
data in columns arranged as follows. Signal data denoted by “#” is not
essential but if not provided the column should remain in place but without
values entered. Where two signal names are given in a column these are
alternatives related to the type of plant under test.
ECP.A.4.3.7.1.2 Where The Company has requested addition signals to be recorded prior
to the testing these signals shall be placed in columns to the right of the
spreadsheet.
ECP.A.4.3.7.2.1 Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit Excitation System and Reactive
Capability

Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Col 8

1 Time Active Reactive Terminal Speed Freq Logic / Field
Power Power Voltage /Frequency Injection Test Voltage
# # Start
#
Col 9 Col 10 Col 11 Col 12 Col 13 Col 14 Col 15 Col 16
1 Field PSS Noise
Current Output Injection
# #
# Columns may be left blank but the column must still be included in the files

ECP.A.4.3.7.2.2 Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit Frequency Response and

ECC.6.3.3

Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Col 8

1 Fuel
Reactive Terminal Logic / Demand
Time Active Speed Freq
2 Power Voltage Test Guide
Power /Frequency Injection
# # Start Vane
Setpoint
Col 9 Col 10 Col 11 Col 12 Col 13 Col 14 Col 15 Col 16
1 Inlet Exhaust
IP LP
Guide Gas ST Fuel
HP Steam Steam Steam
Vane Temp Valve Valve
Valve Pos Valve Valve
2 Guide Head Pos Pos
Pos Pos
Vane
Position
# Columns may be left blank but must still be included in the files

ECP.A.4.3.7.3.1 Onshore Power Park Modules Voltage Control & Reactive Capability
Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Col 8
1 Time Active Reactive Connectio Speed Freq Logic / Statcom or
Power Power n Point /Frequenc Injectio Test Windfarm
Voltage y n Start Reactive
# # # Power
#

ECP
Page 53 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 Col 9 Col 10 Col 11 Col 12 Col 13 Col 14 Col 15 Col 16
1 Power
Availa
ble
Wind Wind Voltage
2 State
Speed Direction Setpoint
of
Charg
e
# Columns may be left blank but the column must still be included in the files

ECP.A.4.3.7.3.2 Offshore Power Park Modules Voltage Control & Reactive Capability

Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Col 8

1 Time Onshore Onshore Onshore Speed Freq Logic Statcom
Interface Interface Interface /Frequency Injection / or
Point Point Point # # Test Windfarm
Active Reactive Voltage Start Reactive
Power Power # Power
#
Col 9 Col 10 Col 11 Col 12 Col 13 Col 14 Col Col 16
15
1 Power
Wind
Available Wind Voltage
Speed
2 State of Direction Setpoint
m/s
Charge
# Columns may be left blank but the column must still be included in the files

ECP.A.4.3.7.3.3 Power Park Module Frequency Control

Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Col 8

1 Time GEP GEP GEP Speed Freq Logi Statcom
Active Reactive Connectio /Frequenc Injectio c/ or
Power Power n y n Test Windfar
# Voltage Start m
# Reactive
Power
#
Col 9 Col Col 11 Col 12 Col 13 Col 14 Col Col 16
10 15
1 Power
Wind
Availabl Wind
Spee
e Directio
d
2 State of n
m/s
Charge
# Columns may be left blank but must still be included in the files

ECP.A.4.3.8.1 Where test results are completed without the presence of The Company but
are relied upon as evidence of the compliance they should be accompanied by
a logsheet. This sheet should be legible, in English and detail the items as
indicated below:
Time and Date of test;
ECP
Page 54 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 Name of Power Station and Power Generating Module if applicable;
Name of Test engineer(s) and company name;
Name of Users representative(s) and company name;
Type of testing being undertake eg Voltage Control;
Ambient conditions eg. temperature, pressure, wind speed, wind direction;
and
Controller settings, eg voltage slope, frequency droop, voltage setpoint, UEL
& OEL settings

ECP.A.4.3.8.2 For each test the following items should be recorded as relevant to the type of
test being undertaken. Where there is uncertainty on the information to be
recorded this should be discussed with The Company in advance of the test.

ECP.A.4.3.8.2 .1 Voltage Control Tests

Start time of each test step;
Active Power;
Reactive Power;
Connection voltage;
Voltage Control Setpoint, if applicable or changed;
Voltage Control Slope, if applicable or changed;
Terminal Voltage if applicable;
Generator transformer tap position or grid transformer tap position, as
applicable;
Number of Power Park Units in service in each Power Park Module, if
applicable; and
For offshore connections Offshore Grid Entry Point voltage.

ECP.A.4.3.8.2.2 Reactive Power Capability Tests

Start time of test;
Active Power;
Reactive Power;
Connection Voltage;
Terminal Voltage if applicable;
Generating Unit transformer tap position or grid transformer tap position
as applicable;
Number of Power Park Units in service in each Power Park Module, if
applicable; and
For offshore connections Offshore Grid Entry Point voltage.

ECP.A.4.3.8.2.3 Frequency Response Capability Tests

Start time of test;
Active Power;

ECP
Page 55 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 System Frequency;
For CCGT Modules, Active Power for the individual units (GT &ST);
For boiler plant, HP steam pressure;
Droop setting of controller if applicable;
Number of Power Park Units in service in each Power Park Module, if
applicable; and
For offshore connections Offshore Grid Entry Point Active Power for
each Power Park Module.

ECP.A.4.3.8.3 Material changes during the test period should be recorded e.g. Generating
Units tripping / starting, changes to tapchange positions.

ECP
Page 56 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 APPENDIX 5

COMPLIANCE TESTING OF SYNCHRONOUS POWER GENERATING MODULES

ECP.A.5.1 SCOPE

ECP.A.5.1.1 This Appendix sets out the tests contained therein to demonstrate compliance
with the relevant clauses of the European Connection Conditions of the Grid
Code. This Appendix shall be read in conjunction with the ECP with regard to
the submission of the reports to The Company.

ECP.A.5.1.2 The tests specified in this Appendix will normally be sufficient to demonstrate
compliance however The Company may:

(i) agree an alternative set of tests provided The Company deem the
alternative set of tests sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the
Grid Code and Bilateral Agreement; and/or

(ii) require additional or alternative tests if information supplied to The

Company during the compliance process suggests that the tests in
this Appendix will not fully demonstrate compliance with the relevant
section of the Grid Code or Bilateral Agreement.

(iii) Agree a reduced set of tests for subsequent Synchronous Power

Generating Module following successful completion of the first
Synchronous Power Generating Module tests in the case of a
Power Station comprised of two or more Synchronous Power
Generating Modules which The Company reasonably considers to
be identical.

If:

(a) the tests performed pursuant to ECP.A.5.1.2(iii) in respect of

subsequent Synchronous Power Generating Modules do not
replicate the full tests for the first Synchronous Power Generating
Module, or

(b) any of the tests performed pursuant to ECP.A.5.1.2(iii) do not fully

demonstrate compliance with the relevant aspects of the Grid Code,
Ancillary Services Agreement and / or Bilateral Agreement,

then notwithstanding the provisions above, the full testing requirements set out
in this Appendix will be applied.

ECP.A.5.1.3 The Generator is responsible for carrying out the tests set out in and in
accordance with this Appendix and the Generator retains the responsibility for
the safety of personnel and plant during the test. The Company will witness
all of the tests outlined or agreed in relation to this Appendix unless The
Company decides and notifies the Generator otherwise. Reactive Capability
tests may be witnessed by The Company remotely from The Company
control centre. For all on site, The Company witnessed tests the Generator
should ensure suitable representatives from the Generator and manufacturer
(if appropriate) are available on site for the entire testing period. In all cases
the Generator shall provide suitable monitoring equipment to record all
relevant test signals as outlined below in ECP.A.6.1.5.

ECP.A.5.1.4 The Generator shall submit a schedule of tests to The Company in

accordance with CP.4.3.1.

ECP.A.5.1.5 Prior to the testing of a Synchronous Power Generating Module the

ECP
Page 57 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 Generator shall complete the Integral Equipment Test procedure in
accordance with OC.7.5.

ECP.A.5.1.6 Full Synchronous Power Generating Module testing as required by CP.7.2

is to be completed as defined in ECP.A.5.2 through to ECP.A.5.9.

ECP.A.5.1.7 The Company will permit relaxation from the requirement ECP.A.5.2 to
ECP.A.5.9 where an Equipment Certificate for the Synchronous Power
Generating Module has been provided which details the characteristics from
tests on a representative machine with the same equipment and settings and
the performance of the Synchronous Power Generating Module can, in The
Company’s opinion, reasonably represent that of the installed Synchronous
Power Generating Module at that site. For Type B, Type C and Type D
Power Generating Modules the relevant Equipment Certificate must be
supplied in the Power Generating Module Document or Users Data File
structure as applicable.

ECP.A.5.1.8 In the case of a co-located site, for example Electricity Storage Modules or
Grid Forming Plant connected within a new or existing Power Station, The
Company will accept test results to demonstrate compliance at the Grid Entry
Point or User System Entry Point (if Embedded) through a combination of
the capabilities of the Power Generating Modules (which could include Grid
Forming Plant) and Electricity Storage Modules or Electricity Storage
Modules (which could include a Grid Forming Plant) and Generating Units
or Power Park Modules. Generators should however be aware that for the
purposes of testing, full Grid Code compliance should be demonstrated when,
for example, the Electricity Storage Module or Grid Forming Plant is out of
service and the remaining Power Generating Module is in service or the
Electricity Storage Module or Grid Forming Plant is in service and the
Power Generating Module is out of service. In the case of a Synchronous
Electricity Storage Module, The Company would expect the full set of tests
to be completed as detailed in ECP.A.5.2 to ECP.A.5.9.

ECP.A.5.2 Excitation System Open Circuit Step Response Tests

ECP.A.5.2.1 The open circuit step response of the Excitation System will be tested by
applying a voltage step change from 90% to 100% of the nominal
Synchronous Power Generating Module terminal voltage, with the
Synchronous Power Generating Module on open circuit and at rated speed.

ECP.A.5.2.2 The test shall be carried out prior to synchronisation in accordance with CP.6.4.
This is not witnessed by The Company unless specifically requested by The
Company. Where The Company is not witnessing the tests, the Generator
shall supply the recordings of the following signals to The Company in an
electronic spreadsheet format:

Vt - Synchronous Generating Unit terminal voltage

Efd - Synchronous Generating Unit field voltage or main exciter field voltage
Ifd- Synchronous Generating Unit field current (where possible)
Step injection signal

ECP.A.5.2.3 Results shall be legible, identifiable by labelling, and shall have appropriate
scaling.

ECP.A.5.3 Open & Short Circuit Saturation Characteristics

ECP.A.5.3.1 The test shall normally be carried out prior to synchronisation in accordance
with ECP.6.2.4 or ECP.6.3.4 Equipment Certificates or Manufacturer’s Test
Certificates may be used where appropriate may be used if agreed by The
Company.

ECP
Page 58 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.A.5.3.2 This is not witnessed by The Company. Graphical and tabular representations
of the results in an electronic spreadsheet format showing per unit open circuit
terminal voltage and short circuit current versus per unit field current shall be
submitted to The Company.

ECP.A.5.3.3 Results shall be legible, identifiable by labelling, and shall have appropriate
scaling.

ECP.A.5.4 Excitation System On-Load Tests

ECP.A.5.4.1 The time domain performance of the Excitation System shall be tested by
application of voltage step changes corresponding to 1% and 2% of the nominal
terminal voltage.

ECP.A.5.4.2 Where a Power System Stabiliser is present:

(i) The PSS must only be commissioned in accordance with BC2.11.2.

When a PSS is switched on for the first time as part of on-load
commissioning or if parameters have been adjusted the Generator
should consider reducing the PSS output gain by at least 50% and
should consider reducing the limits on PSS output by at least a factor of
5 to prevent unexpected PSS action affecting the stability of the
Synchronous Generating Unit or the National Electricity
Transmission System.

(ii) The time domain performance of the Excitation System shall be tested
by application of voltage step changes corresponding to 1% and 2% of
the nominal terminal voltage, repeating with and without the PSS in
service.

(iii) The frequency domain tuning of the PSS shall also be demonstrated by
injecting a 0.2Hz-3Hz band limited random noise signal into the
Automatic Voltage Regulator Setpoint with the Synchronous
Generating Unit operating at points specified by The Company (up to
rated MVA output).

(iv) The PSS gain margin shall be tested by increasing the PSS gain
gradually to threefold and observing the Synchronous Generating Unit
steady state Active Power output.

(v) The interaction of the PSS with changes in Active Power shall be tested
by application of a +0.5Hz frequency injection to the governor while the
Synchronous Generating Unit is selected to Frequency Sensitive
Mode.

(vi) If the Synchronous Power Generating Module is of the Pumped

Storage type then the step tests shall be carried out, with and without
the PSS, in the pumping mode in addition to the generating mode. In the
case of a Synchronous Electricity Storage Module the tests shall be
carried out with and without the PSS in both importing and exporting
modes of operation.

(vii) Where the Bilateral Agreement requires that the PSS is in service, at a
specified loading level, additional testing witnessed by The Company
will be required during the commissioning process before the
Synchronous Power Generating Module may exceed this output level.

(viii) Where the Excitation System includes a PSS, the Generator shall
provide a suitable noise source to facilitate noise injection testing.

ECP
Page 59 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.A.5.4.3 The following typical procedure is provided to assist Generators in drawing up
their own site specific procedures for The Company witnessed PSS Tests.

Test Injection Notes

Synchronous Generating Unit running at Maximum
Capacity, unity pf, PSS Switched Off
1 • Record steady state for 10 seconds
• Inject +1% step to AVR voltage setpoint and hold for at least
10 seconds until stabilised
• Remove step returning AVR voltage setpoint to nominal and
hold for at least 10 seconds
2 • Record steady state for 10 seconds
• Inject +2% step to AVR voltage setpoint and hold for at least
10 seconds until stabilised
• Remove step returning AVR voltage setpoint to nominal and
hold for at least 10 seconds
3 • Inject band limited (0.2-3Hz) random noise signal into voltage
Setpoint and measure frequency spectrum of Real Power.
• Remove noise injection.
• Switch On Power System Stabiliser
4 • Record steady state for 10 seconds
• Inject +1% step to AVR voltage setpoint and hold for at least
10 seconds until stabilised
• Remove step returning AVR voltage setpoint to nominal and
hold for at least 10 seconds
5 • Record steady state for 10 seconds
• Inject +2% step to AVR Voltage Setpoint and hold for at least
10 seconds until stabilised
• Remove step returning AVR Voltage Setpoint to nominal and
hold for at least 10 seconds
6 • Increase PSS gain at 30second intervals. i.e.
x1 – x1.5 – x2 – x2.5 – x3
• Return PSS gain to initial setting
7 • Inject band limited (0.2-3Hz) random noise signal into voltage
Setpoint and measure frequency spectrum of Real Power.
• Remove noise injection.
8 • Select the governor to FSM
• Inject +0.5 Hz step into governor.
• Hold until generator MW output is stabilised
• Remove step

ECP.A.5.5 Under-excitation Limiter Performance Test

ECP.A.5.5.1 Initially the performance of the Under-excitation Limiter should be checked

by moving the limit line close to the operating point of the Synchronous
Generating Unit when operating close to unity Power Factor. The operating
point of the Synchronous Generating Unit is then stepped into the limit by
applying a 2% decrease in Automatic Voltage Regulator Setpoint voltage.

ECP.A.5.5.2 The final performance of the Under-excitation Limiter shall be demonstrated

by testing its response to a step change corresponding to a 2% decrease in
Automatic Voltage Regulator Setpoint voltage when the Synchronous
Generating Unit is operating just off the limit line, at the designed setting as
indicated on the Performance Chart [P-Q Capability Diagram] submitted to
The Company under OC2.

ECP.A.5.5.3 Where possible the Under-excitation Limiter should also be tested by

operating the tap- changer when the Synchronous Generating Unit is
ECP
Page 60 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 operating just off the limit line, as set up.

ECP.A.5.5.4 The Under-excitation Limiter will normally be tested at low active power
output and at maximum Active Power output.

ECP.A.5.5.5 The following typical procedure is provided to assist Generators in drawing up

their own site specific procedures for The Company witnessed Under-
excitation Limiter Tests.

Test Injection Notes

Synchronous Generating Unit running at
Maximum Capacity and unity Power Factor.
Under-excitation limit temporarily moved close to the
operating point of the Synchronous Generating
Unit.
1 • PSS on.
• Inject -2% voltage step into AVR voltage setpoint and
hold at least for 10 seconds until stabilised
• Remove step returning AVR voltage setpoint to
nominal and hold for at least 10 seconds
Under-excitation limit moved to normal position.
Synchronous Generating Unit running at Maximum
Capacity and at leading Reactive Power close to
Under-excitation limit.
2 • PSS on.
• Inject -2% voltage step into AVR voltage setpoint and
hold at least for 10 seconds until stabilised
• Remove step returning AVR voltage setpoint to
nominal and hold for at least 10 seconds

ECP.A.5.6 Over-excitation Limiter Performance Test

ECP.A.5.6.1 The performance of the Over-excitation Limiter, where it exists, shall be

demonstrated by testing its response to a step increase in the Automatic
Voltage Regulator Setpoint Voltage that results in operation of the Over-
excitation Limiter. Prior to application of the step the Synchronous
Generating Unit shall be generating Maximum Capacity and operating within
its continuous Reactive Power capability. The size of the step will be
determined by the minimum value necessary to operate the Over-excitation
Limiter and will be agreed by The Company and the Generator. The resulting
operation beyond the Over-excitation Limit shall be controlled by the Over-
excitation Limiter without the operation of any protection that could trip the
Synchronous Power Generating Module. The step shall be removed
immediately on completion of the test.

ECP.A.5.6.2 If the Over-excitation Limiter has multiple levels to account for heating
effects, an explanation of this functionality will be necessary and if appropriate,
a description of how this can be tested.

ECP.A.5.6.3 The following typical procedure is provided to assist Generators in drawing up

their own site specific procedures for The Company witnessed Under-
excitation Limiter Tests.

Test Injection Notes

Synchronous Generating Unit running at Maximum
Capacity and maximum lagging Reactive Power.
Over-excitation Limit temporarily set close to this operating
point. PSS on.
1 • Inject positive voltage step into AVR voltage setpoint and

ECP
Page 61 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 hold
• Wait until Over-excitation Limiter operates after sufficient
time delay to bring back the excitation back to the limit.
• Remove step returning AVR voltage setpoint to nominal.
Over-excitation Limit restored to its normal operating value.
PSS on.

ECP.A.5.7 Reactive Capability

ECP.A.5.7.1 The Reactive Power capability on each Synchronous Power Generating

Module will normally be demonstrated by:

(a) operation of the Synchronous Power Generating Module at

maximum lagging Reactive Power and Maximum Capacity for 1 hour

(b) operation of the Synchronous Power Generating Module at

maximum leading Reactive Power and Maximum Capacity for 1
hour.

(c) operation of the Synchronous Power Generating Module at

maximum lagging Reactive Power and Minimum Stable Operating
Level for 1 hour

(d) operation of the Synchronous Power Generating Module at

maximum leading Reactive Power and Minimum Stable Operating
Level for 1 hour.

(e) operation of the Synchronous Power Generating Module at

maximum lagging Reactive Power and a power output between
Maximum Capacity and Minimum Stable Operating Level.

(f) operation of the Synchronous Power Generating Module at

maximum leading Reactive Power and a power output between
Maximum Capacity and Minimum Stable Operating Level.

In the case of a Synchronous Electricity Storage Module, The Company

shall have discretion to reduce the durations of the tests set out in ECP.A.5.7.1
(a) – (f), depending upon the capacity of the energy store.

ECP.A.5.7.2 In the case of an Embedded Synchronous Power Generating Module

where distribution network considerations restrict the Synchronous Power
Generating Module Reactive Power output, The Company will only require
demonstration within the acceptable limits of the Network Operator’s System.

ECP.A.5.7.3 The test procedure, time and date will be agreed with The Company and will
be to the instruction of The Company control centre and shall be monitored
and recorded at both The Company control centre and by the Generator.

ECP.A.5.7.4 Where the Generator is recording the voltage, Active Power and Reactive
Power at the HV connection point the voltage for these tests Active Power
and Reactive Power at the Synchronous Power Generating Module
terminals may also be included. The results shall be supplied in an electronic
spreadsheet format. Where applicable the Synchronous Power Generating
Module transformer tapchanger position should be noted throughout the test
period.

ECP.A.5.8 Governor and Load Controller Response Performance

ECP
Page 62 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.A.5.8.1 The governor and load controller response performance will be tested by
injecting simulated frequency deviations into the governor and load controller
systems. Such simulated frequency deviation signals must be injected
simultaneously at both speed governor and load controller setpoints. For
CCGT modules, simultaneous injection into all gas turbines, steam turbine
governors and module controllers is required.

ECP.A.5.8.2 Prior to witnessing the governor tests set out in ECP.A.5.8.6, The Company
requires the Generator to conduct the preliminary tests detailed in
ECP.A.5.8.4 and send the results to The Company for assessment unless
agreed otherwise by The Company. The results should be supplied in an
electronic spreadsheet format. These tests shall be completed at least two
weeks prior to the witnessed governor response tests.

ECP.A.5.8.3 Where a CCGT module or Synchronous Power Generating Module is

capable of operating on alternative fuels, tests will be required to demonstrate
performance when operating on each fuel. The Company may agree a
reduction from the tests listed in ECP.A.5.8.6 for demonstrating performance
on the alternative fuel. This includes the case where a main fuel is
supplemented by bio-fuel.

Preliminary Governor Frequency Response Testing

ECP.A.5.8.4 Prior to conducting the full set of tests as per ECP.A.5.8.6, Generators are
required to conduct a preliminary set of tests below to confirm the frequency
injection method is correct and the plant control performance is within
expectation. The test numbers refer to Figure 1 below. With the plant running
at 80% of full load, the following frequency injections shall be applied.

Test No Frequency Injection Notes

(Figure1)
8 • Inject -0.5Hz frequency fall over 10 sec
• Hold for a further 20 sec
• At 30 sec from the start of the test, Inject a +0.3Hz frequency
rise over 30 sec.
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal as a ramp over 10 seconds
13 • Inject - 0.5Hz frequency fall over 10 sec
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal as a ramp over 10 seconds
14 • Inject +0.5Hz frequency rise over 10 sec
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal as a ramp over 10 seconds
H • Inject - 0.5Hz frequency fall as a stepchange
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal as a stepchange
I • Inject +0.5Hz frequency rise as a stepchange
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal as a stepchange

ECP.A.5.8.5 The recorded results (e.g. Finj, MW and control signals) should be sampled at
a minimum rate of 1 Hz to allow The Company to assess the plant
performance from the initial transients (seconds) to the final steady state
conditions (5-15 minutes depending on the plant design). This is not witnessed
by The Company. The Generator shall supply the recordings including data
to The Company in an electronic spreadsheet format. Results shall be legible,
identifiable by labelling, and shall have appropriate scaling.

Full Frequency Response Testing Schedule Witnessed by The Company

ECP
Page 63 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.A.5.8.6 The tests are to be conducted at a number of different Module Load Points
(MLP). The load points are conducted as shown below unless agreed
otherwise by The Company.

Module Load Point 6 100% MEL

(Maximum Export Limit)
Module Load Point 5 95% MEL
Module Load Point 4 80% MEL
(Mid-point of Operating Range)
Module Load Point 3 70% MEL
Module Load Point 2 MRL+10% or
(Lower of MRL+10% or Minimum Stable Operating Level MSOL
Module Load Point 1 MRL
(Minimum Regulating Level)

ECP.A.5.8.7 The tests are divided into the following three types;

(i) Frequency response compliance and volume tests as per ECP.A.5.8.

Figure 1. These tests consist of frequency profile and ramp tests and
adjustments to the target frequency setpoint as per ECP.5.8 Figure 3.
(ii) System islanding and step response tests as shown by ECP.A.5.8.
Figure 2.
(iii) Frequency response tests in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode
(LFSM) to demonstrate LFSM-O and LFSM-U capability as shown by
ECP.A.5.8 Figure 2.

ECP.A.5.8.8 There should be sufficient time allowed between tests for control systems to
reach steady state. Where the diagram states ‘HOLD’ the current injection
should be maintained until the Active Power (MW) output of the Synchronous
Power Generating Module or CCGT Module has stabilised or 90 seconds,
whichever is the longer. The frequency response capability test (see Figure 1)
injection signal shall be returned to zero at the same rate at which it was
applied. The Company may require repeat tests should the tests give
unexpected results. When witnessed by the Company each test should be
carried out as a separate injection, when not witnessed by the Company there
must be sufficient time allowed between tests for the Plant to have reached a
stable steady state operating condition or 90 seconds, whichever is the longer.

ECP
Page 64 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 0.6
HOLD

Frequency (Hz) 0.4

HOLD
0.2
HOLD
0 10s 30s 60s 10s 10s 10s 0 10s 30s 60s
0
10s 10s 10s
HOLD
-0.2
HOLD

HOLD
-0.4
HOLD

HOLD
-0.6

-0.8
Response (MW)

+
Typical

HF Ramp
HF Ramp

HF Ramp
LF Ramp
LF Ramp

LF Ramp
LF Event

LF Event
Profile 1

Profile 2
+0.5Hz
+0.1Hz

+0.2Hz
-0.2Hz
-0.1Hz

-0.5Hz
Load
Point

MLP6 * * 1 2 3 * 4 *
MLP5 5 * * 6 * * 7 *
MLP4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 *
MLP3 15 * * * * * 16 17
MLP2 18 * * 19 20 21 * 22
MLP1 23 * * 24 25 * * 26

Figure 1: Frequency Response Capability FSM Ramp Response Tests

ECP
Page 65 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 HOLD*
1.6

1.2

0.8
HOLD BC2/ BC4
Frequency (Hz)

HOLD

HOLD
0.4
HOLD
0 2s (J) 32s
0
0 1s 0 30s

HOLD
HOLD
-0.4
BC5
HOLD
-0.8 BC6
HOLD*
-1.2
HOLD
-1.6 -2Hz
Response (MW)

BC6
+
BC5
Typical

_ BC4

BC2

Load Point +2.0* +0.02 -0.2 +0.2 -0.5 +0.5 +/-0.6 -1.0 -2.0 0**
MLP6 BC1 O BC2 L
MLP6 LFSM BC3 BC4
MLP5 A
MLP4 D/E F G *H I J M
MLP4 LFSM BC5/6 N
MLP3
MLP2 P Q
MLP1 K

Figure 2: Frequency Response Capability LFSM-O, LFSM-U and FSM Step Response Tests

* This will generally be +2.0Hz unless an injection of this size causes a

reduction in plant output that takes the operating point below the Minimum
Regulating Level in which case an appropriate injection should be calculated
in accordance with the following:
For example, 0.9Hz is needed to take an initial output 65% to a final output of
20%. If the initial output was not 65% and the Minimum Regulating Level is
not 20% then the injected step should be adjusted accordingly as shown in the
example given below

Initial Output 65%

Minimum Regulating Level 20%
Frequency Controller Droop 4%
Frequency to be injected = (0.65-0.20)x0.04x50 = 0.9Hz

** Tests L and M in Figure 2 shall be conducted if in this range of tests the

System Frequency feedback signal is replaced by the injection signal rather
than the injection signal being added to the system frequency signal. The tests
will consist of monitoring the Synchronous Power Generating Module and
CCGT Module in Frequency Sensitive Mode during normal system
frequency variations without applying any injection. Test N in figure 2 shall be
ECP
Page 66 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 conducted in all cases. All three tests should be conducted for a period of at
least 10 minutes.

ECP.A.5.8.9 The Target Frequency adjustment facility should be demonstrated from the
normal control point within the range of 49.9Hz to 50.1Hz by step changes to
the Target Frequency setpoint as indicated in ECP.A.5.8 Figure 3 while
operating at MLP4.

ECP.A.5.8 Figure 3 – Target Frequency setting changes

ECP.A.5.9 Compliance with ECC.6.3.3 Functionality Test

ECP.A.5.9.1 Where the plant design includes active control function or functions to deliver
ECC.6.3.3 compliance, the Generator will propose and agree a test procedure
with The Company, which will demonstrate how the Synchronous Power
Generating Module Active Power output responds to changes in System
Frequency and ambient conditions (e.g. by Frequency and temperature
injection methods).

ECP.A.5.9.2 The Generator shall inform The Company if any load limiter control is
additionally employed.

ECP.A.5.9.3 With the setpoint to the signals specified in ECP.A.4, The Company will agree
with the Generator which additional control system parameters shall be
monitored to demonstrate the functionality of ECC.6.3.3 compliance systems.
Where The Company recording equipment is not used, results shall be
supplied to The Company in an electronic spreadsheet format

ECP.A.5.10 Compliance of Synchronous Electricity Storage Modules during low

System Frequencies

In order to assess the capability of the Synchronous Electricity Storage

Module the following steps shall be undertaken:
(i) Prior to the test, the Synchronous Electricity Storage Module shall
be operating at its Maximum Import Power with the Synchronous
Electricity Storage Module in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode.
(ii) A test signal shall be applied which ramps the System Frequency
from 50Hz to 49.0Hz at a rate of 2Hz/s. The System Frequency shall
be held at 49.0Hz for 60s and the then ramped back to 50Hz in 10s as
shown in Figure 4.

ECP
Page 67 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (iii) The test result shall demonstrate the ability of the Electricity Storage
Module to meet the requirements of ECC.6.3.7.2.3. When the test
injection signal is held at 49.0Hz, the Active Power output of the
Synchronous Electricity Storage Module should achieve a steady
state operating point in no more than 0.5 seconds and this should be
maintained whilst the test Frequency signal is held at 49.0Hz.
(iv) The above tests described (i) – (iii) above shall be repeated but the
minimum test frequency applied shall be to 48.8Hz as shown in Figure
5.
(v) The above tests shall be repeated when the Synchronous Electricity
Storage Module is operating at 40% of its Maximum Import Power.

ECP.A.5.8 Figure 4

ECP.A.5.8 Figure 5

ECP
Page 68 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 APPENDIX 6

COMPLIANCE TESTING OF POWER PARK MODULES

ECP.A.6.1 SCOPE

ECP.A.6.1.1 This Appendix outlines the general testing requirements for Power Park
Modules and OTSDUA to demonstrate compliance with the relevant aspects
of the Grid Code, Ancillary Services Agreement and Bilateral Agreement.
The tests specified in this Appendix will normally be sufficient to demonstrate
compliance however The Company may:

i) agree an alternative set of tests provided The Company deem the

alternative set of tests sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the Grid
Code, Ancillary Services Agreement and Bilateral Agreement;
and/or

ii) require additional or alternative tests if information supplied to The

Company during the compliance process suggests that the tests in this
Appendix will not fully demonstrate compliance with the relevant section
of the Grid Code, Ancillary Services Agreement or Bilateral
Agreement; and/or

iii) require additional tests if a Power System Stabiliser is fitted; and/or

iv) agree a reduced set of tests if a relevant Manufacturer's Data &

Performance Report has been submitted to and deemed to be
appropriate by The Company; and/or

v) agree a reduced set of tests for subsequent Power Park Modules or

OTSDUA following successful completion of the first Power Park
Module or OTSDUA tests in the case of a Power Station comprised of
two or more Power Park Modules or OTSDUA which The Company
reasonably considers to be identical.

If:

(a) the tests performed pursuant to ECP.A.6.1.1(iv) do not replicate the

results contained in the Manufacturer’s Data & Performance
Report, or

(b) the tests performed pursuant to ECP.A.6.1.1(v) in respect of

subsequent Power Park Modules or OTSDUA do not replicate the full
tests for the first Power Park Module or OTSDUA, or

(c) any of the tests performed pursuant to ECP.A.6.1.1(iv) or

ECP.A.6.1.1(v) do not fully demonstrate compliance with the relevant
aspects of the Grid Code, Ancillary Services Agreement and / or
Bilateral Agreement,

then notwithstanding the provisions above, the full testing requirements set out
in this Appendix will be applied.

ECP.A.6.1.2 The Generator is responsible for carrying out the tests set out in and in
accordance with this Appendix and the Generator retains the responsibility for
the safety of personnel and plant during the test. The Company will witness
all of the tests outlined or agreed in relation to this Appendix unless The
Company decides and notifies the Generator otherwise. Reactive Capability
tests may be witnessed by The Company remotely from The Company
control centre. For all on site The Company witnessed tests the Generator

ECP
Page 69 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 must ensure suitable representatives from the Generator and / or Power Park
Module manufacturer (if appropriate) and/or OTSDUA manufacturer (if
appropriate) are available on site for the entire testing period. In all cases and
in addition to any recording of signals conducted by The Company, the
Generator shall record all relevant test signals as outlined in ECP.A.4.

ECP.A.6.1.3 In addition to the dynamic signals supplied in ECP.A.4 the Generator shall
inform The Company of the following information prior to the commencement
of the tests and any changes to the following, if any values change during the
tests:

(i) All relevant transformer tap numbers; and

(ii) Number of Power Park Units in operation

ECP.A.6.1.4 The Generator shall submit a detailed schedule of tests to The Company in
accordance with CP.6.3.1, and this Appendix.

ECP.A.6.1.5 Prior to the testing of a Power Park Module or OTSDUA, the Generator shall
complete the Integral Equipment Tests procedure in accordance with
OC.7.5.

ECP.A.6.1.6 Partial Power Park Module or OTSDUA testing as defined in ECP.A.6.2 and
ECP.A.6.3 is to be completed at the appropriate stage in accordance with
ECP.6, ECP6.4A, ECP6.4B.

ECP.A.6.1.7 Full Power Park Module or OTSDUA testing as required by CP.7.2 is to be

completed as defined in ECP.A.6.4 through to ECP.A.6.7.

ECP.A.6.1.8 Where OTSDUW Arrangements apply and prior to the OTSUA Transfer
Time any relevant OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus shall be considered within
the scope of testing described in this Appendix. Performance shall be
assessed against the relevant Grid Code requirements for OTSDUW Plant
and Apparatus at the Interface Point and other Generator Plant and
Apparatus at the Offshore Grid Entry Point. This Appendix should be read
accordingly.

ECP.A.6.1.9 The Company will permit relaxation from the requirement ECP.A.6.2 to
ECP.A.6.8 where an Equipment Certificate for the Power Park Module has
been provided which details the characteristics from tests on a representative
installation with the same equipment and settings and the performance of the
Power Park Module can, in The Company’s opinion, reasonably represent
that of the installed Power Park Module at that site. For Type B, Type C and
Type D Power Park Modules, the relevant Equipment Certificate must be
supplied in the Power Generating Module Document or Users Data File
structure as applicable.

ECP.A.6.1.10 In the case of a co-located site, for example Electricity Storage Modules or
Grid Forming Plant connected within a new or existing Power Station, The
Company will accept test results to demonstrate compliance at the Grid Entry
Point or User System Entry Point (if Embedded) through a combination of
the capabilities of the Power Generating Modules (which could include a Grid
Forming Plant) and Electricity Storage Modules or Electricity Storage
Modules (which could include a Grid Forming Plant) and Generating Units
or Power Park Modules. Generators should however be aware that for the
purposes of testing, full Grid Code compliance should be demonstrated when,
for example, the Electricity Storage Module or Grid Forming Plant is out of
service and the remaining Power Generating Module is in service or the
Electricity Storage Module or Grid Forming Plant is in service and the Power
Generating Module is out of service. In the case of a Non-Synchronous

ECP
Page 70 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 Electricity Storage Module, The Company would expect the full set of tests
to be completed as detailed in ECP.A.6.2 to ECP.A.6.8.

ECP.A.6.2 Pre 20% (or <50MW) Synchronised Power Park Module Basic Voltage
Control Tests

ECP.A.6.2.1 Before 20% of the Power Park Module (or 50MW if less) has commissioned,
either voltage control test ECP.A.6.5.6(i) or (ii) must be completed in
accordance with ECP.6, ECP.6A or ECP.6B. In the case of an Offshore
Power Park Module the test must be completed by the Generator undertaking
OTSDUW or the Offshore Transmission Licencee under STCP19-5.

ECP.A.6.2.2 In the case of an Offshore Power Park Module which provides all or a portion
of the Reactive Power capability as described in ECC.6.3.2.5.2 or
ECP.6.3.2.6.3 and / or voltage control requirements as described in
ECC.6.3.8.5 to enable an Offshore Transmission Licensee to meet the
requirements of STC Section K, the Generator is required to cooperate with
the Offshore Transmission Licensee to conduct the 20% voltage control test.
The results in relation to the Offshore Power Park Module will be assessed
against the requirements in the Bilateral Agreement.

ECP.A.6.3 Power Park Modules with Maximum Capacity ≥100MW Pre 70% Power
Park Module Tests

ECP.A.6.3.1 Before 70% but with at least 50% of the Power Park Module commissioned
the following Limited Frequency Sensitive tests as detailed in ECP.A.6.6.2
must be completed.

(a) BC3
(b) BC4

ECP.A.6.4 Reactive Capability Test

ECP.A.6.4.1 This section details the procedure for demonstrating the reactive capability of
an Onshore Power Park Module or an Offshore Power Park Module or
OTSDUA which provides all or a portion of the Reactive Power capability as
described in ECC.6.3.2.5.2 or ECP.6.3.2.6.3 as applicable (for the avoidance
of doubt, an Offshore Power Park Module which does not provide part of the
Offshore Transmission Licensee Reactive Power capability as described in
ECC.6.3.2.5.1 and ECP.6.3.2.6.1 should complete the Reactive Power
transfer / voltage control tests as per section ECP.A.6.8). These tests should
be scheduled at a time where there are at least 95% of the Power Park Units
within the Power Park Module in service. There should be sufficient MW
resource forecasted in order to generate at least 85% of Maximum Capacity
of the Power Park Module.

ECP.A.6.4.2 The tests shall be performed by modifying the voltage set-point of the voltage
control scheme of the Power Park Module or OTSDUA by the amount
necessary to demonstrate the required reactive range. This is to be conducted
for the operating points and durations specified in ECP.A.6.4.5.

ECP.A.6.4.3 An Embedded Generator or Embedded Generator undertaking OTSDUW

should liaise with the relevant Network Operator to ensure the following tests
will not have an adverse impact upon the Network Operator’s System as per
OC.7.5. In situations where the tests have an adverse impact upon the
Network Operator’s System, The Company will only require demonstration
within the acceptable limits of the Network Operator. For the avoidance of
doubt, these tests do not negate the requirement to produce a complete Power
Park Module or OTSDUA performance chart as specified in OC2.4.2.1

ECP
Page 71 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.A.6.4.4 In the case where the Reactive Power metering point is not at the same
location as the Reactive Power capability requirement, then an equivalent
Reactive Power capability for the metering point shall be agreed between the
Generator and The Company.

ECP.A.6.4.5 The following tests shall be completed:

(i) Operation in excess of 60% Maximum Capacity and maximum

continuous lagging Reactive Power for 30 minutes. For the avoidance
of doubt this test must start with Active Power output in excess of 85%
of Maximum Capacity of the Power Park Module as ECP.A.6.4.1
and must not fall below 60% of Maximum Capacity of the Power Park
Module during the 30 minutes.

(ii) Operation in excess of 60% Maximum Capacity and maximum

continuous leading Reactive Power for 30 minutes. For the avoidance
of doubt this test must start with Active Power output in excess of 85%
of Maximum Capacity of the Power Park Module as ECP.A.6.4.1
and must not fall below 60% of Maximum Capacity of the Power Park
Module during the 30 minutes.

(iii) Operation at 50% Maximum Capacity and maximum continuous

leading Reactive Power for 30 minutes.

(iv) Operation at 50% Maximum Capacity and maximum continuous

lagging Reactive Power for 30 minutes.

(v) Operation at 20% Maximum Capacity and maximum continuous

leading Reactive Power for 60 minutes.

(vi) Operation at 20% Maximum Capacity and maximum continuous

lagging Reactive Power for 60 minutes.

(vii) Operation at less than 20% Maximum Capacity and unity Power
Factor for 5 minutes. This test only applies to systems which do not
offer voltage control below 20% of Maximum Capacity.

(viii) Operation at the lower of the Minimum Regulating Level or 0%

Maximum Capacity and maximum continuous leading Reactive
Power for 5 minutes. This test only applies to systems which offer
voltage control below 20% and hence establishes actual capability
rather than required capability.

(ix) Operation at the lower of the Minimum Regulating Level or 0%

Maximum Capacity and maximum continuous lagging Reactive
Power for 5 minutes. This test only applies to systems which offer
voltage control below 20% and hence establishes actual capability
rather than required capability.

In the case of a Non-Synchronous Electricity Storage Module, The

Company shall have discretion to reduce the duration of the tests required in
ECP.A.6.4.5 (i) – (viii) depending upon the capability of the energy store.

ECP.A.6 Within this ECP, lagging Reactive Power is the export of Reactive Power
from the Power Park Module to the Total System and leading Reactive
Power is the import of Reactive Power from the Total System to the Power
Park Module or OTSDUA.

ECP.A.6.5 Voltage Control Tests

ECP
Page 72 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.A.6.5.1 This section details the procedure for conducting voltage control tests on
Onshore Power Park Modules or OTSDUA or an Offshore Power Park
Module which provides all or a portion of the voltage control capability as
described in ECC.6.3.8.5 (for the avoidance of doubt, Offshore Power Park
Modules which do not provide part of the Offshore Transmission Licensee
voltage control capability as described in CC6.3.8.5 should complete the
Reactive Power transfer / voltage control tests as per section ECP.A.6.8).
These tests should be scheduled at a time when there are at least 95% of the
Power Park Units within the Power Park Module in service. There should be
sufficient MW resource forecasted in order to generate at least 65% of
Maximum Capacity of the Onshore Power Park Module. An Embedded
Generator or Embedded Generators undertaking OTSDUW should also
liaise with the relevant Network Operator to ensure all requirements covered
in this section will not have a detrimental effect on the Network Operator’s
System.

ECP.A.6.5.2 The voltage control system shall be perturbed with a series of step injections
to the Power Park Module voltage setpoint, and where possible, multiple up-
stream transformer taps. In the case of an Offshore Power Park Module
providing part of the Offshore Transmission Licensee voltage control
capability this may require a series of step injections to the voltage setpoint of
the Offshore Transmission Licensee control system.

ECP.A.6.5.3 For steps initiated using network tap changers, the Generator will need to
coordinate with The Company or the relevant Network Operator as
appropriate. The time between transformer taps shall be at least 10 seconds
as per ECP.A.6.5 Figure 1.

ECP.A.6.5.4 For a step injection into the Power Park Module or OTSDUA voltage setpoint,
steps of ±1%, ±2% and ±4% (or larger if required by The Company) shall be
applied to the voltage control system setpoint summing junction. The injection
shall be maintained for a minimum of 10 seconds as per ECP.A.6.5 Figure 2.

ECP.A.6.5.5 Where the voltage control system comprises of discretely switched Plant and
Apparatus (eg. mechanically switched shunt reactors or capacitors) additional
tests will be required to demonstrate that overall performance of the voltage
control system when switching these devices as part of the response is in
accordance with Grid Code and Bilateral Agreement requirements.

ECP.A.6.5.6 Tests to be completed:

(i)
Voltage

Time
1 tap

10s
minimum

ECP.A.6.5 Figure 1 – Transformer tap sequence for voltage control tests

ECP
Page 73 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (ii)

Applied
Voltage
Step 4%
2%
1% Time

10s
minimum
ECP.A.6.5 Figure 2 – Step injection sequence for voltage control tests

ECP.A.6.5.7 In the case of OTSDUA, where the Bilateral Agreement specifies additional
damping facilities, additional testing to demonstrate these damping facilities
may be required.

ECP.A.6.5.8 In the case of Power Park Modules that do not provide voltage control down
to zero Active Power a test to demonstrate the smooth transition from voltage
control mode to unity Power Factor shall be carried out. The Power Park
Module voltage setpoint should be altered to produce lagging Reactive Power
or absorbing leading Reactive Power at a low Active Power level where
voltage control is provided. The Power Park Module Active Power should
then be reduced to zero Active Power as a ramp over a short period (60
seconds is suggested).

ECP.A.6.6 Frequency Response Tests

ECP.A.6.6.1 This section describes the procedure for performing frequency response
testing on a Power Park Module. These tests should be scheduled at a time
where there are at least 95% of the Power Park Units within the Power Park
Module in service. There should be sufficient MW resource forecasted in order
to generate at least 65% of Maximum Capacity of the Power Park Module.

ECP.A.6.6.2 The frequency controller shall be in Frequency Sensitive Mode or Limited

Frequency Sensitive Mode as appropriate for each test. Simulated frequency
deviation signals shall be injected into the frequency controller
setpoint/feedback summing junction. If the injected frequency signal replaces
rather than sums with the real System Frequency signal then the additional
tests outlined in ECP.A.6.6.6 shall be performed with the Power Park Module
or Power Park Unit in normal Frequency Sensitive Mode monitoring actual
System Frequency, over a period of at least 10 minutes. The aim of this
additional test is to verify that the control system correctly measures the real
System Frequency for normal variations over a period of time.

ECP.A.6.6.3 In addition to the frequency response requirements it is necessary to

demonstrate the Power Park Module ability to deliver a requested steady
state power output which is not impacted by power source variation as per
ECC.6.3.9. This test shall be conducted in Limited Frequency Sensitive
Mode at a part-loaded output for a period of 10 minutes as per ECP.A.6.6.6.

Preliminary Frequency Response Testing

ECP.A.6.6.4 Prior to conducting the full set of tests as per ECP.A.6.6.6, Generators are
ECP
Page 74 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 required to conduct the preliminary set of tests below to confirm the frequency
injection method is correct and the plant control performance is within
expectation. The test numbers refer to Figure 1 below. The test should be
conducted when sufficient MW resource is forecast in order to generate at least
65% of Maximum Capacity of the Power Park Module. The following
frequency injections shall be applied when operating at module load point 4.

Test No Frequency Injection Notes

(Figure1)
8 • Inject -0.5Hz frequency fall over 10 sec
• Hold for a further 20 sec
• At 30 sec from the start of the test, Inject a +0.3Hz
frequency rise over 30 sec.
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal as a ramp over 10 seconds
13 • Inject - 0.5Hz frequency fall over 10 sec
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal as a ramp over 10 seconds
14 • Inject +0.5Hz frequency rise over 10 sec
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal as a ramp over 10 seconds
H • Inject - 0.5Hz frequency fall as a stepchange
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal as a stepchange
I • Inject +0.5Hz frequency rise as a stepchange
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal as a stepchange

ECP.A.6.6.5 The recorded results (e.g. Finj, MW and control signals) should be sampled at
a minimum rate of 1 Hz to allow The Company to assess the plant
performance from the initial transients (seconds) to the final steady state
conditions (5-15 minutes depending on the plant design). This is not witnessed
by The Company. The Generator shall supply the recordings including data
to The Company in an electronic spreadsheet format. Results shall be legible,
identifiable by labelling, and shall have appropriate scaling.

Full Frequency Response Testing Schedule Witnessed by The Company.

ECP.A.6.6.6 The tests are to be conducted at a number of different Module Load Points
(MLP). In the case of a Power Park Module the module load points are
conducted as shown below unless agreed otherwise by The Company.

Module Load Point 6 100% MEL

(Maximum Export Limit)
Module Load Point 5 90% MEL
Module Load Point 4 80% MEL
Module Load Point 3 MRL+0.6 x (MEL – MRL)
Module Load Point 2 MRL+0.3 X (MEL – MRL)
Lower of MRL + 0.3 x (MEL – MRL) or Minimum Stable or MSOL
Operating Level
Module Load Point 1 MRL
(Minimum Regulating Level)

ECP.A.6.6.7 The tests are divided into the following two types;

(i) Frequency response compliance and volume tests as per ECP.A.6.6.

Figure 1. These tests consist of frequency profile and ramp tests and
adjustments to target frequency setpoint as per ECP.A.6.6 Figure 3.

ECP
Page 75 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (ii) System islanding and step response tests as shown by ECP.A.6.6.
Figure 2.
(iii) Frequency response tests in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode
(LFSM) to demonstrate LFSM-O and LFSM-U capability as shown by
ECP.A.6.6 Figure 2.

ECP.A.6.6.8 There should be sufficient time allowed between tests for control systems to
reach steady state (depending on available power resource). Where the
diagram states ‘HOLD’ the current injection should be maintained until the
Active Power (MW) output of the Power Park Module has stabilised or 90
seconds, whichever is the longer. All frequency response tests should be
removed over the same timescale for which they were applied. The Company
may require repeat tests should the response volume be affected by the
available power, or if tests give unexpected results. When witnessed by The
Company each test should be carried out as a separate injection, when not
witnessed by The Company there must be sufficient time allowed between
tests for the Active Power (MW) output of the Power Park Module to have
stabilised or 90 seconds, whichever is the longer.

0.6
HOLD

0.4
Frequency (Hz)

HOLD
0.2
HOLD
0 10s 30s 60s 10s 10s 10s 0 10s 30s 60s
0
10s 10s 10s
HOLD
-0.2
HOLD
HOLD

-0.4
HOLD

HOLD
-0.6

-0.8
Response (MW)

+
Typical

_
HF Ramp
HF Ramp

HF Ramp
LF Ramp
LF Ramp

LF Ramp
LF Event

LF Event
Profile 1

Profile 2
+0.5Hz
+0.1Hz

+0.2Hz
-0.2Hz
-0.1Hz

-0.5Hz

Load
Point

MLP6 * * 1 2 3 * 4 *
MLP5 5 * * 6 * * 7 *
MLP4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 *
MLP3 15 * * * * * 16 17
MLP2 18 * * 19 20 21 * 22
MLP1 23 * * 24 25 * * 26

ECP.A.6.6. Figure 1 – Frequency Response Capability FSM Ramp Response tests

ECP
Page 76 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 HOLD*
1.6

1.2

0.8
HOLD BC2/ BC4

Frequency (Hz)
HOLD

HOLD
0.4
HOLD
0 2s (J) 32s
0
0 1s 0 30s

HOLD
HOLD
-0.4
BC5
HOLD
-0.8 BC6
HOLD*
-1.2
HOLD
-1.6 -2Hz
Response (MW)

BC6
+
BC5
Typical

_ BC4

BC2

Load Point +2.0* +0.02 -0.2 +0.2 -0.5 +0.5 +/-0.6 -1.0 -2.0 0**
MLP6 BC1 O BC2 L
MLP6 LFSM BC3 BC4
MLP5 A
MLP4 D/E F G *H I J M
MLP4 LFSM BC5/6 N
MLP3
MLP2 P Q
MLP1 K

ECP.A.6.6. Figure 2 – Frequency Response Capability LFSM-O, LFSM-U,

FSM Step Response tests

* This will generally be +2.0Hz unless an injection of this size causes a

reduction in plant output that takes the operating point below the Minimum
Regulating Level in which case an appropriate injection should be calculated
in accordance with the following:
For example 0.9Hz is needed to take an initial output 65% to a final output of
20%. If the initial output was not 65% and the Minimum Regulating Level is
not 20% then the injected step should be adjusted accordingly as shown in the
example given below

Initial Output 65%

Minimum Regulating Level 20%
Frequency Controller Droop 4%
Frequency to be injected = (0.65-0.20)x0.04x50 = 0.9Hz

** Tests L and M in Figure 2 shall be conducted if in this range of tests the

System Frequency feedback signal is replaced by the injection signal rather
than the injection signal being added to the system frequency signal. The tests
will consist of monitoring the Power Park Module in Frequency Sensitive
Mode during normal System Frequency variations without applying any
injection. Test N in Figure 2 shall be conducted in all cases. All three tests
should be conducted for a period of at least 10 minutes.

ECP.A.6.6.9 The Target Frequency adjustment facility should be demonstrated from the

ECP
Page 77 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 normal control point within the range of 49.9Hz to 50.1Hz by step changes to
the Target Frequency setpoint as indicated in ECP.A.6.6 Figure 3 while
operating at MLP4.

ECP.A.6.6. Figure 3 – Target Frequency setting changes

ECP.A.6.6.10 Compliance of Non-Synchronous Electricity Storage Modules during low

System Frequencies
In order to assess the capability of the Non-Synchronous Electricity Storage
Module the following steps shall be undertaken.
(i) Prior to the test, the Non-Synchronous Electricity Storage Module
shall be operating at its Maximum Import Power with the Non-
Synchronous Electricity Storage Module in Limited Frequency
Sensitive Mode.
(ii) A test signal shall be applied which ramps the System Frequency
from 50Hz to 49.0Hz at a rate of 2Hz/s. The System Frequency shall
be held at 49.0Hz for 60s and the then ramped back to 50Hz in 10s as
shown in Figure 4.

(iii) The test result shall demonstrate the ability of the Electricity Storage
Module to meet the requirements of ECC.6.3.7.2.3. When the test
injection signal is held at 49.0Hz, the Active Power output of the Non-
Synchronous Electricity Storage Module should achieve a steady
state operating point in no more than 0.5 seconds and this should be
maintained whilst the test Frequency signal is held at 49.0Hz.
(iv) The above tests described (i) – (iii) above shall be repeated but the
minimum test frequency applied shall be to 48.8Hz as shown in Figure
5.
(v) The above tests shall be repeated when the Non-Synchronous
Electricity Storage Module is operating at 40% of its Maximum
Import Power.

ECP
Page 78 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 ECP.A.6.6 Figure 4

ECP.A.6.6 Figure 5

ECP.A.6.7 Fault Ride Through Testing

ECP.A.6.7.1 This section describes the procedure for conducting Fault Ride Through tests
on a single Power Park Unit as required by ECP.7.2.2(d).

ECP.A.6.7.2 The test circuit will utilise the full Power Park Unit (e.g. in the case of a wind
turbine it would include the full wind turbine nacelle structure, all inverters and
converters along with step up transformer to medium voltage, all control
systems including pitch control emulation) and shall be conducted with
sufficient power input resource available to produce at least 95% of the
Maximum Capacity of the Power Park Unit. The test will comprise of a
number of controlled short circuits applied to a test network to which the Power
Park Unit is connected, typically comprising of the Power Park Unit
transformer and a test impedance or other decoupling equipment to shield the
connected network from voltage dips at the Power Park Unit terminals.

ECP
Page 79 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.A.6.7.3 In each case, the tests should demonstrate the minimum voltage at the Power
Park Unit terminals or High Voltage side of the Power Park Unit transformer
which the Power Park Unit can withstand for the length of time specified in
ECP.A.6.7.5. Any test results provided to The Company should contain
sufficient data pre and post fault in order to determine steady state values of
all signals, and the power recovery timescales.

ECP.A.6.7.4 In addition to the signals outlined in ECP.A.4.2. the following signals from either
the Power Park Unit terminals or High Voltage side of the Power Park Unit
transformer should be provided for this test only:

(i) Phase voltages

(ii) Positive phase sequence and negative phase sequence voltages
(iii) Phase currents
(iv) Positive phase sequence and negative phase sequence currents
(v) Estimate of Power Park Unit negative phase sequence impedance
(vi) MW – Active Power at the Power Generating Module.
(vii) MVAr – Reactive Power at the Power Generating Module.
(viii) Mechanical Rotor Speed
(ix) Real / reactive, current / power Setpoint as appropriate
(x) Fault Ride Through protection operation (e.g. a crowbar in the case
of a doubly fed induction generator)
(xi) Any other signals relevant to the control action of the Fault Ride
Through control deemed applicable for model validation.

At a suitable frequency rate for fault ride through tests as agreed with The
Company.

ECP.A.6.7.5 The tests should be conducted for the times and fault types indicated in
ECC.6.3.15 as applicable.

ECP.A.6.8 Reactive Power Transfer / Voltage Control Tests for Offshore Power Park
Modules

ECP.A.6.8.1 In the case of an Offshore Power Park Module which provides all or a portion
of the Reactive Power capability as described in ECP.6.3.2.5.2 or ECP.6.3.6.3
and / or voltage control requirements as described in ECC.6.3.8.5 to enable an
Offshore Transmission Licensee to meet the requirements of STC Section
K, the testing, will comprise of the entire control system responding to changes
at the onshore Interface Point. Therefore, the tests in this section ECP.A.6.8
will not apply. The Generator shall cooperate with the relevant Offshore
Transmission Licensee to facilitate these tests as required by The Company.
The testing may be combined with testing of the corresponding Offshore
Transmission Licensee requirements under the STC. The results in relation
to the Offshore Power Park Module will be assessed against the
requirements in the Bilateral Agreement.

ECP.A.6.8.2 In the case of an Offshore Power Park Module which does not provide part
of the Offshore Transmission Licensee Reactive Power capability the
following procedure for conducting Reactive Power transfer control tests on
Offshore Power Park Modules and / or voltage control system as per
ECC.6.3.2.5 and ECC.6.3.2.6 apply. These tests should be carried out prior to
20% of the Power Park Units within the Offshore Power Park Module being
synchronised, and again when at least 95% of the Power Park Units within
the Offshore Power Park Module in service. There should be sufficient power
resource forecast to generate at least 85% of the Maximum Capacity of the
Offshore Power Park Module.

ECP
Page 80 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.A.6.8.3 The Reactive Power control system shall be perturbed by a series of system
voltage changes and changes to the Active Power output of the Offshore
Power Park Module.

ECP.A.6.8.4 System voltage changes should be created by a series of multiple upstream

transformer taps. The Generator should coordinate with The Company or the
relevant Network Operator in order to conduct the required tests. The time
between transformer taps should be at least 10 seconds as per ECP.A.6.8
Figure 1.

ECP.A.6.8.5 The Active Power output of the Offshore Power Park Module should be
varied by applying a sufficiently large step to the frequency controller
Setpoint/feedback summing junction to cause a 10% change in output of the
Maximum Capacity of the Offshore Power Park Module in a time not
exceeding 10 seconds. This test does not need to be conducted provided that
the frequency response tests as outlined in ECP.A.6.6 are completed.

ECP.A.6.8.6 The following diagrams illustrate the tests to be completed:

Voltage

Time
1 tap
>10s
ECP.A.6.8 Figure 1 – Transformer tap sequence for reactive transfer tests

<=10s

Time
Active
Power
Change 10% of
Registered Capacity

ECP.A.6.8 Figure 2 – Active Power ramp for reactive transfer tests

ECP
Page 81 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 APPENDIX 7

COMPLIANCE TESTING FOR HVDC EQUIPMENT

ECP.A.7.1 SCOPE

ECP.A.7.1.1 This Appendix outlines the general testing requirements for HVDC System
Owners to demonstrate compliance with the relevant aspects of the Grid
Code, Ancillary Services Agreement and Bilateral Agreement. The tests
specified in this Appendix will normally be sufficient to demonstrate compliance
however The Company may:

i) agree an alternative set of tests provided The Company deem the

alternative set of tests sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the Grid
Code, Ancillary Services Agreement and Bilateral Agreement; and/or

ii) require additional or alternative tests if information supplied to The

Company during the compliance process suggests that the tests in this
Appendix will not fully demonstrate compliance with the relevant section of
the Grid Code, Ancillary Services Agreement or Bilateral Agreement;
and/or

iii) require additional tests if control functions to improve damping of power

system oscillations and/or subsynchronous resonance torsional oscillations
required by the Bilateral Agreement or included in the control scheme and
active; and/or

iv) agree a reduced set of tests for subsequent HVDC Equipment following
successful completion of the first HVDC Equipment tests in the case of an
installation comprising of two or more HVDC Systems or DC Connected
Power Park Modules which The Company reasonably considers to be
identical.

If:

(a) the tests performed pursuant to ECP.A.7.1.1(iv) in respect of

subsequent HVDC Systems or DC Connected Power Park Modules
do not replicate the full tests for the first HVDC Equipment, or

(b) any of the tests performed pursuant to ECP.A.7.1.1(iv) do not fully

demonstrate compliance with the relevant aspects of the Grid Code,
Ancillary Services Agreement and / or Bilateral

ECP.A.7.1.2 The HVDC System Owner is responsible for carrying out the tests set out in
and in accordance with this Appendix and the HVDC System Owner retains
the responsibility for the safety of personnel and plant during the test. The
HVDC System Owner is responsible for ensuring that suitable arrangements
are in place with the Externally Interconnected System Operator to facilitate
testing. The Company will witness all of the tests outlined or agreed in relation
to this Appendix unless The Company decides and notifies the HVDC System
Owner otherwise. Reactive Capability tests if required, may be witnessed by
The Company remotely from The Company control centre. For all on site at
The Company witnessed tests, the HVDC System Owner must ensure
suitable representatives from the HVDC System Owner and / or HVDC
Equipment manufacturer (if appropriate) are available on site for the entire
testing period. In all cases and in addition to any recording of signals
conducted by The Company, the HVDC System Owner shall record all
relevant test signals as outlined in ECP.A.4.

ECP
Page 82 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.A.7.1.3 In addition to the dynamic signals supplied in ECP.A.4 the HVDC System
Owner shall inform The Company of the following information prior to the
commencement of the tests and any changes to the following, if any values
change during the tests:

(i) All relevant transformer tap numbers.

ECP.A.7.1.4 The HVDC System Owner shall submit a detailed schedule of tests to The
Company in accordance with CP.6.3.1, and this Appendix.

ECP.A.7.1.5 Prior to the testing of HVDC Equipment, the HVDC System Owner shall
complete the Integral Equipment Tests procedure in accordance with
OC.7.5.

ECP.A.7.1.6 Full HVDC Equipment testing as required by ECP.7.2 is to be completed as

defined in ECP.A.7.2 through to ECP.A.7.5.

ECP.A.7.1.7 The Company will permit relaxation from the requirement ECP.A.7.2 to
ECP.A.7.5 where an Equipment Certificate for HVDC Equipment has been
provided which details the characteristics from tests on a representative
installation with the same equipment and settings and the performance of the
HVDC Equipment can, in The Company’s opinion, reasonably represent that
of the installed HVDC Equipment at that site. The relevant Equipment
Certificate must be supplied in the Users Data File structure.

ECP.A.7.1.8 The Company may agree a reduction from the requirement ECP.A.7.2 to
ECP.A.7.5 for on-site testing where suitable factory acceptance testing on a
representative installation with the same equipment and settings of the HVDC
Equipment that can, in The Company’s opinion, reasonably represent the
performance of the installed HVDC Equipment at that site. This is also
conditional on The Company and the DC Converter Station owner agreeing
sufficient on site testing of the fully commissioned DC Converter Station to
demonstrate that the factory acceptance tests are valid. If in the reasonable
opinion of The Company, the on-site testing does not demonstrate the factory
acceptance tests are valid then the full set of on-site tests should be carried
out.

ECP.A.7.2 Reactive Capability Test

ECP.A.7.2.1 This section details the procedure for demonstrating the reactive capability of
HVDC Equipment. These tests should be scheduled at a time where there are
sufficient MW resource forecasted in order to import and export full Maximum
Capacity of the HVDC Equipment.

ECP.A.7.2.2 The tests shall be performed by modifying the voltage set-point of the voltage
control scheme of the HVDC Equipment by the amount necessary to
demonstrate the required reactive range. This is to be conducted for the
operating points and durations specified in ECP.A.7.2.5.

ECP.A.7.2.3 Embedded HVDC System Owners should liaise with the relevant Network
Operator to ensure the following tests will not have an adverse impact upon
the Network Operator’s System as per OC.7.5. In situations where the tests
have an adverse impact upon the Network Operator’s System, The
Company will only require demonstration within the acceptable limits of the
Network Operator. For the avoidance of doubt, these tests do not negate the
requirement to produce a complete HVDC Equipment performance chart as
specified in OC2.4.2.1

ECP.A.7.2.4 In the case where the Reactive Power metering point is not at the same

ECP
Page 83 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 location as the Reactive Power capability requirement, then an equivalent
Reactive Power capability for the metering point shall be agreed between the
HVDC System Owner and The Company.

ECP.A.7.2.5 The following tests shall be completed for both importing and exporting of Active
Power for a DC Converter:

(i) Operation at Maximum Capacity and maximum continuous lagging

Reactive Power for 60 minutes.

(ii) Operation at Maximum Capacity and maximum continuous leading

Reactive Power for 60 minutes.

(iii) Operation at 50% Maximum Capacity and maximum continuous

leading Reactive Power for 60 minutes.

(iv) Operation at 50% Maximum Capacity and maximum continuous

lagging Reactive Power for 60 minutes.

(v) Operation at Minimum Capacity and maximum continuous leading

Reactive Power for 60 minutes.

(vi) Operation at Minimum Capacity and maximum continuous lagging

Reactive Power for 60 minutes.

ECP.A.7.2.6 For the avoidance of doubt, lagging Reactive Power is the export of Reactive
Power from the HVDC Equipment to the Total System and leading Reactive
Power is the import of Reactive Power from the Total System to the HVDC
Equipment.

ECP.A.7.3 Not used

ECP
Page 84 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.A.7.4 Voltage Control Tests

ECP.A.7.4.1 This section details the procedure for conducting voltage control tests on
HVDC Equipment. These tests should be scheduled at a time where there is
sufficient MW resource in order to import and export Maximum Capacity of
the HVDC Equipment. An Embedded HVDC System Owner should also
liaise with the relevant Network Operator to ensure all requirements covered
in this section will not have a detrimental effect on the Network Operator’s
System.

ECP.A.7.4.2 The voltage control system shall be perturbed with a series of step injections
to the HVDC Equipment voltage Setpoint, and where possible, multiple up-
stream transformer taps.

ECP.A.7.4.3 For steps initiated using network tap changers the HVDC System Owner will
need to coordinate with The Company or the relevant Network Operator as
appropriate. The time between transformer taps shall be at least 10 seconds
as per ECP.A.7.4 Figure 1.

ECP.A.7.4.4 For step injection into the HVDC Equipment voltage setpoint, steps of ±1%,
±2% and ±4% shall be applied to the voltage control system setpoint summing
junction. The injection shall be maintained for 10 seconds as per ECP.A.7.4
Figure 2.

ECP.A.7.4.5 Where the voltage control system comprises of discretely switched plant and
apparatus, additional tests will be required to demonstrate that its performance
is in accordance with Grid Code and Bilateral Agreement requirements.

ECP.A.7.4.6 Tests to be completed:

(i)

Voltage

Time
1 tap

10s
minimum

ECP.A.7.4 Figure 1 – Transformer tap sequence for voltage control tests

ECP
Page 85 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (ii)

Applied
Voltage
Step 4%
2%
1% Time

10s
minimum
ECP.A.7.4 Figure 2 – Step injection sequence for voltage control tests

ECP.A.7.5 Frequency Response Tests

ECP.A.7.5.1 This section describes the procedure for performing frequency response
testing on HVDC Equipment. These tests should be scheduled at a time where
there is sufficient MW resource in order to import and export full Maximum
Capacity of the HVDC Equipment. The HVDC System Owner is responsible
for ensuring that suitable arrangements are in place with the Externally
Interconnected System Operator to facilitate the Active Power changes
required by these tests

ECP.A.7.5.2 The frequency controller shall be in Frequency Sensitive Mode or Limited

Frequency Sensitive Mode as appropriate for each test. Simulated frequency
deviation signals shall be injected into the frequency controller
Setpoint/feedback summing junction. If the injected frequency signal replaces
rather than sums with the real System Frequency signal, then the additional
tests outlined in ECP.A.7.5.6 shall be performed with the HVDC Equipment in
normal Frequency Sensitive Mode monitoring actual System Frequency,
over a period of at least 10 minutes. The aim of this additional test is to verify
that the control system correctly measures the real System Frequency for
normal variations over a period of time.

ECP.A.7.5.3 In addition to the frequency response requirements, it is necessary to

demonstrate the HVDC Equipment ability to deliver a requested steady state
power output which is not impacted by power source variation as per
ECC.6.3.9. This test shall be conducted in Limited Frequency Sensitive
Mode at a part-loaded output for a period of 10 minutes as per ECP.A.7.5.6.

Preliminary Frequency Response Testing

ECP.A.7.5.4 Prior to conducting the full set of tests as per ECP.A.7.5.6, HVDC System
Owners are required to conduct a preliminary set of tests below to confirm the
frequency injection method is correct and the plant control performance is
within expectation. The test numbers refer to Figure 1 below. These tests
should be scheduled at a time where there is sufficient MW resource in order
to export full Maximum Capacity from the HVDC Equipment. The following
frequency injections shall be applied when operating at module load point 4.

Test No Frequency Injection Notes

ECP
Page 86 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (Figure1)
8 • Inject -0.5Hz frequency fall over 10 sec
• Hold for a further 20 sec
• At 30 sec from the start of the test, Inject a +0.3Hz
frequency rise over 30 sec.
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal as a ramp over 10
seconds
13 • Inject - 0.5Hz frequency fall over 10 sec
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal as a ramp over 10
seconds
14 • Inject +0.5Hz frequency rise over 10 sec
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal as a ramp over 10
seconds
H • Inject - 0.5Hz frequency fall as a stepchange
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal as a stepchange
I • Inject +0.5Hz frequency rise as a stepchange
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal as a stepchange

ECP.A.7.5.5 The recorded results (e.g. Finj, MW and control signals) should be sampled at
a minimum rate of 1Hz to allow The Company to assess the plant performance
from the initial transients (seconds) to the final steady state conditions (5-15
minutes depending on the plant design). This is not witnessed by The
Company. The HVDC System Owner shall supply the recordings including
data to The Company in an electronic spreadsheet format. Results shall be
legible, identifiable by labelling, and shall have appropriate scaling.

Full Frequency Response Testing Schedule Witnessed by The Company

ECP.A.7.5.6 The tests are to be conducted at a number of different Module Load Points
(MLP). In the case of HVDC Equipment the load points are conducted as
shown below unless agreed otherwise by The Company.

Module Load Point 6 100% MaxHAPTC

(Maximum HVDC Active Power Transmission Capacity)
Module Load Point 5 90% MaxHAPTC
Module Load Point 4 80% MaxHAPTC
Module Load Point 3 MinHAPTC+0.6 x (80%
MaxHAPTC–MinHAPTC)
Module Load Point 2 MinHAPTC+0.3 x (80%
MaxHAPTC–MinHAPTC)
Module Load Point 1 MinHAPTC
(Minimum HVDC Active Power Transmission Capacity)

ECP
Page 87 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.A.7.5.7 The tests are divided into the following two types;

(i) Frequency response compliance and volume tests as per ECP.A.7.5.

Figure 1. These tests consist of frequency profile and ramp tests and
adjustments to Target Frequency setpoint as per ECP.A.7.5 Figure 3.
(ii) System islanding and step response tests as shown by ECP.A.7.5 Figure
2

ECP.A.7.5. Fig 1 and 2 are shown for the Importing of Active Power, simulated
frequency polarity should be reversed when exporting Active Power.

ECP.A.7.5.8 There should be sufficient time allowed between tests for control systems to
reach steady state (depending on available power resource). Where the
diagram states ‘HOLD’ the current injection should be maintained until the
Active Power (MW) output of the HVDC Equipment has stabilised or 90
seconds whichever is the longer. All frequency response tests should be
removed over the same timescale for which they were applied. The Company
may require repeat tests should the response volume be affected by the
available power, or if tests give unexpected results. When witnessed by The
Company each test should be carried out as a separate injection, when not
witnessed by The Company there must be sufficient time allowed between
tests for the Active Power (MW) output of the HVDC Equipment to have
stabilised or 90 seconds, whichever is the longer.

ECP.A.7.5. Figure 1 – Frequency Response Capability FSM Ramp Response tests

ECP
Page 88 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 ECP
Page 89 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 ECP.A.7.5. Figure 2 – Frequency Response Capability LFSM-O, LFSM-U,
FSM Step Response tests

* This will generally be +2.0Hz unless an injection of this size causes a

reduction in plant output that takes the operating point below the Minimum
Regulating Level in which case an appropriate injection should be calculated
in accordance with the following:
For example 0.9Hz is needed to take an initial output 65% to a final output of
20%. If the initial output was not 65% and the Minimum Regulating Level is
not 20%, then the injected step should be adjusted accordingly as shown in
the example given below

Initial Output 65%

Minimum Regulating Level 20%
Frequency Controller Droop 4%
Frequency to be injected = (0.65-0.20)x0.04x50 = 0.9Hz

** Tests L and M in Figure 2 shall be conducted if in this range of tests the

System Frequency feedback signal is replaced by the injection signal rather
than the injection signal being added to the System Frequency signal. The
tests will consist of monitoring the HVDC Equipment in Frequency Sensitive
Mode during normal System Frequency variations without applying any
injection. Test N in Figure 2 shall be conducted in all cases. All three tests
should be conducted for a period of at least 10 minutes.

ECP.A.7.5.9 The target frequency adjustment facility should be demonstrated from the
normal control point within the range of 49.9Hz to 50.1Hz by step changes to

ECP
Page 90 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 the Target Frequency setpoint as indicated in ECP.A.7.5 Figure 3 while
operating at MLP4.

ECP.A.7.5. Figure 3 – Target Frequency setting changes

ECP
Page 91 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 APPENDIX 8
SIMULATION STUDIES AND COMPLIANCE TESTING FOR NETWORK OPERATORS AND
NON-EMBEDDED CUSTOMERS PLANT AND APPARATUS

ECP.A.8.1 Compliance testing for disconnection and reconnection of Network Operator’s

Plant and Apparatus

ECP.A.8.1.1 Network Operators shall comply with the following applicable requirements in
respect of EU Grid Supply Points:
(i) Demand disconnection schemes;
(ii) Synchronising; and/or
(iii) low frequency demand disconnection;

ECP.A.8.1.2 The requirements for demand disconnection, other than low frequency demand
disconnection, are pursuant to the requirements of the Bilateral Agreement.
Any requirements for testing shall be agreed with the User where such
requirements are applicable.

ECP.A.8.1.3 The requirements for synchronising (where applicable) shall be pursuant to the
requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and ECC.6.2.3.10. Any
requirements for testing (as applicable) shall be agreed with the User and
carried out during the commissioning process.

ECP.A.8.1.4 Network Operators who are EU Code Users must demonstrate compliance
with the low frequency demand disconnection requirements of ECC.6.4.3,
ECC.A.5 and OC.6.6 for their entire distribution System.

ECP.A.8.1.5 An equipment certificate may be submitted to The Company instead of part of

the tests provided for in ECP.A.8.1.1.

ECP.A.8.2 Compliance testing for operational metering at EU Grid Supply Points

ECP.A.8.2.1 The requirements for operational metering (where required) shall be pursuant
to the requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and ECC.6.5.6. Any applicable
requirements for testing shall be agreed with the User and carried out during
the commissioning process. An Equipment Certificate may be used for this
purpose where agreed with The Company.

ECP.A.8.3 Compliance testing for disconnection and reconnection of Non-Embedded

Customers Plant and Apparatus

ECP.A.8.3.1 Non-Embedded Customers shall comply with the following requirements

where applicable:

(i) Demand disconnection schemes;

(ii) Synchronising; and/or
(iii) low frequency demand disconnection;

ECP.A.8.3.2 The requirements for demand disconnection, other than low frequency demand
disconnection, are pursuant to the requirements of the Bilateral Agreement.
Any requirements for testing shall be agreed with the User.

ECP.A.8.3.3 The requirements for synchronising (where applicable) shall be pursuant to the
requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and ECC.6.2.3.10. Any
requirements for testing (as applicable) shall be agreed with the User and
carried out during the commissioning process.

ECP
Page 92 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
ECP.A.8.3.4 Non-Embedded Customers who are EU Code Users must demonstrate
compliance with the low frequency demand disconnection requirements of
ECC.6.4.3, ECC.A.5 and OC.6.6 of their System.

ECP.A.8.3.5 An equipment certificate may be submitted to The Company instead of part of

the tests provided for in ECP.A.8.3.1.

ECP.A.8.4 Compliance testing for operational metering on Non-Embedded Customers

Plant and Apparatus

ECP.A.8.4.1 The requirements for operational metering (where required)) shall be pursuant
to the requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and ECC.6.5.6. Any applicable requirements
for testing shall be agreed with the User and carried out during the commissioning process. An
Equipment Certificate may be used for this purpose where agreed with The
Company.ECP.A.8.5 Common Provisions on Compliance Simulations

ECP.A.8.5.1 Users are required to provide simulation studies or equivalent information to the
satisfaction of The Company in the following circumstances.

(i) a new connection to the Transmission System is required forming part

of an EU Grid Supply Point;
(ii) a Substantial Modification takes place at an EU Grid Supply Point
(iii) The Company becomes aware of a potential non-compliance by the
Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer at an EU Grid
Supply Point.

ECP.A.8.5.2 Notwithstanding the requirements of ECP.A.8.5.1, The Company shall be

entitled to:-

(a) Allow the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer to carry out an

alternative set of simulations (or equivalent information) provided that they
demonstrate that the Network Operators or Non-Embedded Customers
Plant and Apparatus is capable of satisfying the applicable requirements of
the Data Registration Code.

(b) Require the Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer to carry out

additional or alternative simulations (or equivalent information) to those
specified in ECP.A.8.5.1 where they would otherwise be insufficient to
demonstrate compliance.

(c) The Company may check that the Network Operator or Non-Embedded
Customer complies with the requirements of the Grid Code by carrying out
its own compliance simulations based on the simulation reports, models and
test measurements submitted under the Data Registration Code.
.

ECP.A.8.5.3 The Company will supply (under PC.A.8) upon request to the Network
Operator or Non-Embedded Customer, data to enable the Network
Operator or Non-Embedded Customer to carry out the required simulations
or supply the equivalent information required under the Data Registration
Code.

ECP.A.8.6 Compliance simulations for EU Grid Supply Points

ECP.A.8.6.1 Networks Operators who are also EU Code Users, are required to provide
simulation studies (or make available equivalent information) at each EU Grid
Supply Point to demonstrate compliance with the Reactive Power capability
requirements set out in ECC.6.4.5. The study or equivalent information
provided shall include a steady state simulation model under both maximum

ECP
Page 93 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 and minimum demand conditions. In addition, the model or equivalent
information provided shall include the conditions when the Reactive Power
export is at an Active Power flow of less than 25% of the Maximum Import
Capability as detailed under ECC.6.4.5.2. In all cases the models or equivalent
information submitted shall be agreed and approved with The Company.

ECP.A.8.7 Compliance simulations for Non-Embedded Customers Plant and Apparatus

ECP.A.8.7.1 None Embedded Customers who are also EU Code Users are required at
each EU Grid Supply Point to provide simulation studies (or equivalent
information) to demonstrate compliance with the Reactive Power capability
requirements set out in ECC.6.4.5. The study or equivalent information
provided shall include a steady state simulation model under both maximum
and minimum demand conditions and with and without on-site generation. In
all cases the models or equivalent information submitted shall be agreed and
approved with The Company.

ECP.A.8.8 Compliance monitoring at EU Grid Supply Points

ECP.A.8.8.1 To satisfy the requirements of ECC.6.4.5, EU Code Users who are either
Network Operators or Non-Embedded Customers shall ensure their Plant
and Apparatus is equipped (where applicable), with the necessary equipment
to measure the Active Power and Reactive Power, at each EU Grid Supply
Point. The requirement for and time frame for compliance monitoring shall be
agreed between The Company and the EU Code User for each EU Grid
Supply Point.

ECP
Page 94 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 APPENDIX 9
COMPLIANCE TESTING FOR GRID FORMING PLANT

ECP.A.9.1 SCOPE

ECP.A.9.1.1 This Appendix outlines the general testing requirements for Users or Non-
CUSC Parties to demonstrate compliance with the relevant aspects of the Grid
Code, Ancillary Services Agreement and Bilateral Agreement. The tests
specified in this Appendix will normally be sufficient to demonstrate compliance
of a GBGF-I, however The Company may:

i) agree to an alternative set of tests provided The Company deem the

alternative set of tests sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the Grid
Code, Ancillary Services Agreement and Bilateral Agreement; and/or

ii) require additional or alternative tests if information supplied to The Company

during the compliance process suggests that the tests in this Appendix will
not fully demonstrate compliance with the relevant section of the Grid Code,
Ancillary Services Agreement or Bilateral Agreement; and/or

iii) require additional tests if control functions to improve damping of power

system oscillations or additional functions to prove the capability of the
GBGF-I is required by the Bilateral Agreement or included in the control
scheme; and/or

iv) agree a reduced set of tests for the subsequent GBGF-I following successful
completion of the first Grid Forming tests in the case of an installation
comprising of two or more GBGF-Is which The Company reasonably
considers to be identical if: -

(a) the tests performed pursuant to ECP.A.9.1.9 in respect of subsequent

GBGF-I Plants do not replicate the full tests for the first GBGF-I; or
(b) any of the tests performed pursuant to ECP.A.9.1.9 do not fully
demonstrate compliance with the relevant aspects of the Grid Code,
Ancillary Services Agreement and / or Bilateral Agreement.

ECP.A.9.1.2 The User or Non-CUSC Party is responsible for carrying out the tests set out
in and in accordance with this Appendix and the User or Non-CUSC Party
retains the responsibility for the safety of personnel and plant during the test.
The Company will witness all of the tests outlined or agreed in relation to this
Appendix unless The Company decides and notifies the User or Non-CUSC
Party otherwise. For all on site at The Company witnessed tests, the User or
Non-CUSC Party must ensure suitable representatives from the Grid
Forming Plant’s manufacturer (if appropriate) are available on site for the
entire testing period. In all cases and in addition to any recording of signals
conducted by The Company, the User or Non-CUSC Party shall record all
relevant test signals as outlined in ECP.A.4.

ECP.A.9.1.3 In addition to the dynamic signals supplied in ECP.A.4, the User or Non-CUSC
Party shall inform The Company of the following information prior to the
commencement of the tests and any changes to the following, if any values
change during the tests:

(i) All relevant transformer tap numbers, if used.

(ii) Number of Grid Forming Units in operation.

ECP.A.9.1.4 The User or Non-CUSC Party shall submit a detailed schedule of tests to The
Company in accordance with ECP.6.3.1, and this Appendix.

ECP.A.9.1.5 Prior to the testing of the GBGF-I the User or Non-CUSC Party shall complete

ECP
Page 95 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 the Integral Equipment Tests procedure in accordance with OC.7.5.

ECP.A.9.1.6 Full GBGF-I testing as required by ECP.7.2 is to be completed as defined in

ECP.A.9.1.9.

ECP.A.9.1.7 The Company will permit relaxation from the requirements in ECP.A.9.1.9
where an Equipment Certificate for GBGF-I has been provided which details
the characteristics from tests on a representative installation with the same
equipment and settings and the performance of the GBGF-I can, in The
Company’s opinion, reasonably represent that of the installed GBGF-I at that
site. The relevant Equipment Certificate must be supplied in the Users Data
File Structure.

ECP.A.9.1.8 Prior to any GBGF-I tests taking place, the User or Non-CUSC Party shall
have completed the relevant compliance tests on the GBGF-I, Power
Generating Module or Generating Unit as required under ECP.A.5 or OC5.
A.2 (as relevant) or Power Park Module as required under ECP.A.6 or OC5.
A.3 (as applicable) or HVDC Systems or DC Converters as required under
ECP.A.7 or OC5. A.4 (as applicable).

ECP.A.9.1.9 Demonstration of Grid Forming Capability

ECP.A.9.1.9.1 This section details the procedure for demonstrating Active ROCOF
Response Power. Ideally if the test is being completed as part of a type test
on an isolated network and it is possible to change the frequency of the isolated
network then the tests should be completed using a variable network
Frequency. The Company recognise that it is not possible in a large number
of cases to adjust the network frequency of the network to which the Grid
Forming Plant is connected. If a suitable test network is not available,
performance of the GBGF-I will need to be demonstrated through online
monitoring as detailed in CC.6.6 or ECC.6.6 and simulation studies as required
under ECP.A.3.9.4 will be required during the Interim Operational
Notification Process as provided for under CP.6 or ECP.6 (as applicable).

ECP.A.9.1.9.2 In this test, with the Grid Forming Plant initially running at full load, the test
network frequency is ideally increased from 50Hz to 51 Hz at a rate of 1Hz/s
with measurements of the Grid Forming Plant’s Active ROCOF Response
Power, System Frequency and time in (ms). The test is required to assess
correct operation of the Grid Forming Plant without saturating. This test is
then repeated for a 50 Hz to 49 Hz at a rate of 1Hz/s.

ECP.A.9.1.9.3 These tests are required to assess the Grid Forming Plant’s withstand
capabilities under extreme System Frequencies.

(i) For Grid Forming Plant comprising a GBGF-I the frequency of the test
network is increased from 50Hz to 52Hz at a rate of 2Hz/s with
measurements of the Grid Forming Plant’s Active ROCOF Response
Power, System Frequency and time in (ms).

(ii) For a Grid Forming Plant comprising a GBGF-I the frequency of the
test network is increased from 50Hz to 52Hz at a rate of 1Hz/s with
measurements of the Grid Forming Plant’s Active ROCOF Response
Power, System Frequency and time in (ms).

(iii) For Grid Forming Plant comprising a GBGF-I the frequency of the test
network is decreased from 50Hz to 47 Hz at a rate of 2Hz/s with
measurements of the Grid Forming Plant’s Active ROCOF Response
Power, System Frequency and time in (ms).

ECP
Page 96 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 (iii) For Grid Forming Plant comprising a GBGF-I the frequency of the test
network is decreased from 50Hz to 47 Hz at a rate of 1Hz/s with
measurements of the Grid Forming Plant’s Active ROCOF Response
Power, System Frequency and time in (ms).

ECP.A.9.1.9.4 This test is to demonstrate the Grid Forming Plant’s ability to supply Active
ROCOF Response Power over the full System Frequency range.

(a) With the frequency of the test network set to 50Hz, the GBGF-I
should be initially running at 75% Maximum Capacity or
Registered Capacity, zero MVAr output and both Limited
Frequency Sensitive Mode and Frequency Sensitive Mode
disabled.
(b) The frequency is then increased from 50Hz to 52Hz at a rate of
1Hz/s over a 2 second period. Allow conditions to stabilise for 5
seconds and then decrease the frequency from 52Hz to 47Hz at
a rate of 1Hz/s over a 5 second period. Allow conditions to
stabilise.
(c) Record results of Active ROCOF Response Power, Reactive
Power, voltage and frequency.
(d) The test now needs to be re-run in the opposite direction. The
same initial conditions should be applied as per ECP.A.9.1.9.4(a).
(e) The frequency is then decreased from 50Hz to 47Hz at a rate of
1Hz/s over a 3 second period. Allow conditions to stabilise for 5
seconds and then increase the frequency from 47Hz to 52Hz at a
rate of 1Hz/s over a 5 second period. Allow conditions to stabilise.
(f) Record results of Active ROCOF Response Power, Reactive
Power, voltage and frequency.
ECP.A.9.1.9.5 This test is to demonstrate the Grid Forming Plant’s ability to supply Active
Phase Jump Power under normal operation.

(a) With the frequency of the test network set to 50Hz, the GBGF-I
should be initially running at Maximum Capacity or Registered
Capacity or at its agreed deloaded point, zero MVAr output and
all control actions (e.g. Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode,
Frequency Sensitive Mode and voltage control) disabled.
(b) Apply a positive phase jump of up to the Phase Jump Angle Limit
at the Grid Entry Point or User System Entry Point (if
Embedded).
(c) This test can then be repeated by injecting the same angle into the
Grid Forming Plant’s control system (as indicatively shown in
Figure ECP.A.9.1.9.5). This specific test can be repeated on site
as required for a routine performance evaluation test. It should be
noted that Figure ECP.A.9.1.9.5 is a simplified representation.
Each Grid Forming Plant Owner can use their own design, that
may be very different to Figure ECP.A.9.1.9.5 but should contain
all relevant functions that can include test points and other
equivalent data and documentation. Any additional signals,
measurements, parameters and tests shall be agreed between the
Grid Forming Plant Owner and The Company.
(d) Repeat tests (b) and (c) with a negative injection up to the Phase
Jump Angle Limit.
(e) Record traces of Active Power, Reactive Power, voltage, current
and frequency for a period of 10 seconds after the step change in
phase has been applied.

ECP
Page 97 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 Figure ECP.A.9.1.9.5

As part of these tests, the corresponding Active Power change resulting from
a phase shift will be a function of the local reactance and the location of where
the phase shift is applied in addition to any additional upstream impedance
between the GBGF-I and phase step location.

ECP.A.9.1.9.6 This test is to demonstrate the Grid Forming Plant’s ability to supply Active
Phase Jump Power under extreme conditions. Where it is not possible to
undertake this test as part of a type test, The Company will accept
demonstration through a combination of simulation studies as required under
ECP.A.3.9.4(vi) and online monitoring as required under ECC.6.6.1.9.

(a) With the frequency of the test network set to 50Hz, the Grid
Forming Plant should be initially running at its Minimum Stable
Operating Level or Minimum Stable Generation, zero MVAr
output and all control actions (e.g., Limited Frequency Sensitive
Mode, Frequency Sensitive Mode and voltage control) disabled.
(b) Apply a phase jump of 60 degrees at the connection point of the
GBGF-I or into the Grid Forming Plant’s control system as shown
in Figure ECP.A.9.1.9.5.
(c) Record traces of Active Power, Reactive Power, voltage, current
and frequency for a period of 10 seconds after the step change in
phase has been applied.
(d) Repeat steps (a), (b) and (c) of ECP.A.9.1.9.6 but on this occasion
apply a phase jump equivalent to the positive Phase Jump Angle
Limit at the Grid.

ECP.A.9.1.9.7 This test is to demonstrate the GBGF-Is ability to supply Active Phase Jump
Power, Fault Ride Through and GBGF Fast Fault Current Injection during
a faulted condition. Where it is not possible to undertake this test as part of
a type test, The Company will accept demonstration through a combination
of simulation studies as required under ECP.A.3.9.4(vii) and online
monitoring as required under CC.6.6 and ECC.6.6.1.9.

(a) With the frequency set to 50Hz, the Grid Forming Plant should
be initially running at its Maximum Capacity or Registered
Capacity or at an alternative loading point as agreed with The
Company, zero MVAr output and all control actions (e.g., Limited

ECP
Page 98 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 Frequency Sensitive Mode, Frequency Sensitive Mode and
voltage control) disabled.
(b) Apply a solid three phase short circuit fault at the connection point
in the test network forming part of the type test for 140ms or
alternatively the equivalent of a zero retained voltage for 140ms.
(c) Record traces of Active Power, Reactive Power, voltage, current
and frequency for a period of 10 seconds after the fault has been
applied.
(d) Repeat steps (a) to (c) but on this occasion with fault ride through,
GBGF Fast Fault Current Injection Limited Frequency
Sensitive Mode and voltage control switched into service.
(e) Record traces of Active Power, Reactive Power, voltage, current
and frequency for a period of 10 seconds after the step change in
phase has been applied and confirm correct operation.
ECP.A.9.1.9.8 The final test required is to demonstrate the GBGF-I is capable of contributing
to Active Damping Power. The Grid Forming Plant Owner should configure
their Grid Forming Plant in form or equivalent (as agreed with The Company)
as shown in Figure ECP.A.3.9.6(a) or Figure ECP.A.3.9.6(b) as applicable.
Each Grid Forming Plant Owner can use their own design, that may be very
different to Figures ECP.A.3.9.6(a) or ECP.A.3.9.6 (b) but should contain all
relevant functions.

As part of this test, the Grid Forming Plant Owner is required to inject a signal
into the Grid Forming Plant controller. The results supplied need to verify the
following criteria:-

i) Inject a Test Signal into the Grid Forming Plant controller to

demonstrate the Active Control Based Power output is supplied
below the 5Hz bandwidth limit An acceptable performance will be
judged where the overshoot or decay matches the Damping Factor
declared by the Grid Forming Plant Owner as submitted in
PC.A.5.8.1 in addition to assessment against the requirements of
CC.A.6.2.6.1 or ECC.A.6.2.6.1 or CC.A.7.2.2.5 or ECC.A.7.2.5.2 as
applicable.

<END OF ECP>

ECP
Page 99 of 99
Issue 6 Revision 17 04 September 2023
 OPERATING CODE NO. 1
(OC1)

DEMAND FORECASTS

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

OC1.1 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................................2
OC1.2 OBJECTIVE ................................................................................................................................2
OC1.3 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................2
OC1.4 DATA REQUIRED BY THE COMPANY IN THE OPERATIONAL PLANNING PHASE .............2
OC1.5 DATA REQUIRED BY THE COMPANY IN THE PROGRAMMING PHASE, CONTROL PHASE
AND POST-CONTROL PHASE ...............................................................................................................3
OC1.6 THE COMPANY FORECASTS ...................................................................................................5

OC1.7 SYSTEM RESTORATION…………………………………………………………………………….. 5

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC1 04 March 2024

i
OC1.1 INTRODUCTION
OC1.1.1 Operating Code No.1 ("OC1") is concerned with Demand forecasting for operational
purposes. In order to match generation output with Demand for electricity it is necessary to
undertake Demand forecasting. It is also necessary to undertake Demand forecasting of
Reactive Power.
OC1.1.2 In the Operational Planning Phase, Demand forecasting shall be conducted by The
Company taking account of Demand forecasts furnished by Network Operators, who shall
provide The Company with information in the form set out in this OC1. The data supplied
under the PC is also taken into account.
OC1.1.3 In the Programming Phase and Control Phase, The Company will conduct its own Demand
forecasting taking into account information to be furnished by Suppliers and Network
Operators and the other factors referred to in OC1.6.1.
OC1.1.4 In this OC1, the point of connection of the External Interconnection to the National
Electricity Transmission System shall be considered as a Grid Supply Point. Reactive
Power Demand includes the series Reactive losses of the User's System but excludes any
network susceptance and any Reactive compensation on the User's System. The Company
will obtain the lumped network susceptance and details of Reactive compensation from the
requirements to submit data under the PC.
OC1.1.5 Data relating to Demand Control should include details relating to MW.
OC1.1.6 OC1 deals with the provision of data on Demand Control in the Operational Planning
Phase, the Programming Phase and the Post-Control Phase, whereas OC6 (amongst other
things) deals with the provision of data on Demand Control following the Programming
Phase and in the Control Phase.
OC1.1.7 In this OC1, Year 0 means the current Financial Year at any time, Year 1 means the next
Financial Year at any time, Year 2 means the Financial Year after Year 1, etc.
OC1.1.8 References in OC1 to data being supplied on a half hourly basis refer to it being supplied for
each period of 30 minutes ending on the hour and half-hour in each hour.

OC1.2 OBJECTIVE
The objectives of OC1 are to:
OC1.2.1 enable the provision of data to The Company by Users in the Programming Phase, Control
Phase and Post-Control Phase; and
OC1.2.2 provide for the factors to be taken into account by The Company when Demand forecasting
in the Programming Phase and Control Phase.

OC1.3 SCOPE
OC1 applies to The Company and to Users which in this OC1 means:
(a) Network Operators, and
(b) Suppliers.

OC1.4 DATA REQUIRED BY THE COMPANY IN THE OPERATIONAL PLANNING PHASE

OC1.4.1 (a) Each User, as specified in (b) below, shall provide The Company with the data
requested in OC1.4.2 below.
(b) The data will need to be supplied by each Network Operator directly connected to the
National Electricity Transmission System in relation to Demand Control and in
relation each Generator with respect to the output of Embedded Medium Power
Stations within its System.
OC1.4.2 (a) Data

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC1 04 March 2024

2 of 5
 By calendar week 28 each year each Network Operator will provide to The Company
in writing the forecast information listed in (c) below for the current Financial Year and
each of the succeeding five Financial Years.
(b) Data Providers
In circumstances when the busbar arrangement at a Grid Supply Point is expected to
be operated in separate sections, separate sets of forecast information for each section
will be provided to The Company.
(c) Embedded Medium Power Station Output and Demand Control
For the specified time of the annual peak half hour National Electricity Transmission
System Demand, as specified by The Company under PC.A.5.2.2, the output of
Embedded Medium Power Stations and forecasts of Demand to be relieved by
Demand Control on a Grid Supply Point basis giving details of the amount and
duration of the Demand Control.

OC1.5 DATA REQUIRED BY THE COMPANY IN THE PROGRAMMING PHASE, CONTROL

PHASE AND POST-CONTROL PHASE
OC1.5.1 Programming Phase
For the period of 2 to 8 weeks ahead the following will be supplied to The Company in writing
by 1000 hours each Monday:
(a) Demand Control
Each Network Operator will supply MW profiles of the amount and duration of their
proposed use of Demand Control which may result in a Demand change equal to or
greater than the Demand Control Notification Level (averaged over any half hour on
any Grid Supply Point) on a half hourly and Grid Supply Point basis;
(b) Medium Power Station Operation
Each Network Operator will, if reasonably required by The Company, supply MW
schedules for the operation of Embedded Medium Power Stations within its System
on a half hourly and Grid Supply Point basis.
OC1.5.2 For the period 2 to 12 days ahead the following will be supplied to The Company in writing by
1200 hours each Wednesday:
(a) Demand Control
Each Network Operator will supply MW profiles of the amount and duration of their
proposed use of Demand Control which may result in a Demand change equal to or
greater than the Demand Control Notification Level (averaged over any half hour on
any Grid Supply Point) on a half hourly and Grid Supply Point basis;
(b) Medium Power Station Operation
Each Network Operator will, if reasonably required by The Company, supply MW
schedules for the operation of Embedded Medium Power Stations within its System
on a half hourly and Grid Supply Point basis.
OC1.5.3 Medium Power Station Output
Each Network Operator will, if reasonably required by The Company, supply The Company
with MW schedules for the operation of Embedded Medium Power Stations within its
System on a half hourly and Grid Supply Point basis in writing by 1000 hours each day (or
such other time specified by The Company from time to time) for the next day (except that it
will be for the next 3 days on Fridays and 2 days on Saturdays and may be longer (as specified
by The Company at least one week in advance) to cover holiday periods);
OC1.5.4 Other Codes

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC1 04 March 2024

3 of 5
 Under OC6 each Network Operator will notify The Company of their proposed use of
Demand Control (which may result in a Demand change equal to or greater than the Demand
Control Notification Level), and under BC1, each Supplier will notify The Company of their
proposed use of Customer Demand Management (which may result in a Demand change
equal to or greater than the Customer Demand Management Notification Level) in this
timescale.
OC1.5.5 Control Phase
OC1.5.5.1 Demand Control
Under OC6, each Network Operator will notify The Company of any Demand Control
proposed by itself which may result in a Demand change equal to or greater than the Demand
Control Notification Level averaged over any half hour on any Grid Supply Point which is
planned after 1000 hours, and of any changes to the planned Demand Control notified to The
Company prior to 1000 hours as soon as possible after the formulation of the new plans;
OC1.5.5.2 Customer Demand Management
(a) Each Supplier will notify The Company of any Customer Demand Management
proposed by itself which may result in a Demand change equal to or greater than the
Customer Demand Management Notification Level averaged over any half hour on
any Grid Supply Point which is planned to occur at any time in the Control Phase and
of any changes to the planned Customer Demand Management already notified to The
Company as soon as possible after the formulation of the new plans.
(b) The following information is required on a Grid Supply Point and half-hourly basis:
(i) the proposed date, time and duration of implementation of Customer Demand
Management; and
(ii) the proposed reduction in Demand by use of Customer Demand Management.
OC1.5.5.3 Load Management Blocks
In Scotland, by 11:00 each day, each Supplier who controls a Load Management Block of
Demand with a capacity of 5MW or more shall submit to The Company a schedule of its
proposed switching times and profiles in respect of each block for the next day.
OC1.5.6 Post-Control Phase
The following will be supplied to The Company in writing by 0600 hours each day in respect
of Active Power data and by 1000 hours each day in respect of Reactive Power data:
(a) Demand Control
Each Network Operator will supply MW profiles for the previous calendar day of the
amount and duration of Demand reduction achieved by itself from the use of Demand
Control equal to or greater than the Demand Control Notification Level (averaged
over any half hour on any Grid Supply Point), on a half hourly and Grid Supply Point
basis.
(b) Customer Demand Management
Each Supplier will supply MW profiles of the amount and duration of Demand reduction
achieved by itself from the use of Customer Demand Management equal to or greater
than the Customer Demand Management Notification Level (averaged over any half
hour on any Grid Supply Point) on a half hourly and Grid Supply Point basis during
the previous calendar day.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC1 04 March 2024

4 of 5
OC1.6 THE COMPANY FORECASTS
OC1.6.1 The following factors will be taken into account by The Company when conducting National
Electricity Transmission System Demand forecasting in the Programming Phase and
Control Phase:
(a) Historic Demand data (this includes National Electricity Transmission System
Losses).
(b) Weather forecasts and the current and historic weather conditions.
(c) The incidence of major events or activities which are known to The Company in
advance.
(d) Anticipated interconnection flows across External Interconnections.
(e) Demand Control equal to or greater than the Demand Control Notification Level
(averaged over any half hour at any Grid Supply Point) proposed to be exercised by
Network Operators and of which The Company has been informed.
(f) Customer Demand Management equal to or greater than the Customer Demand
Management Notification Level (averaged over any half hour at any Grid Supply
point) proposed to be exercised by Suppliers and of which The Company has been
informed.
(g) Other information supplied by Users.
(h) Anticipated Pumped Storage Unit demand.
(i) the sensitivity of Demand to anticipated market prices for electricity.
(j) BM Unit Data submitted by BM Participants to The Company in accordance with the
provisions of BC1 and BC2.
(k) Demand taken by Station Transformers
(l) Anticipated Electricity Storage Module demand
OC1.6.2 Taking into account the factors specified in OC1.6.1 The Company uses Demand forecast
methodology to produce forecasts of National Electricity Transmission System Demand.
A written record of the use of the methodology must be kept by The Company for a period of
at least 12 months.
OC1.6.3 The methodology will be based upon factors (a), (b) and (c) above to produce, by statistical
means, unbiased forecasts of National Demand. National Electricity Transmission System
Demand will be calculated from these forecasts but will also take into account factors (d), (e),
(f), (g), (h), (i) and (j) above. No other factors are taken into account by The Company, and it
will base its National Electricity Transmission System Demand forecasts on those factors
only.
OC1.7 SYSTEM RESTORATION
OC1.7.1 From 31 December 2026 and during normal system operation, The Company shall publish
on a daily basis, 60% and 100% of the peak National Demand, under pre System shutdown
conditions for the following day, based on the latests forecast that would feed into the System
Restoration Regional targets by means of messages inputted by The Company to the
Balancing Mechanism Reporting Service (BMRS).
OC1.7.2 From 31 December 2026 and during System Restoration, The Company shall publish for
each System Restoration Region, the Demand that is used to calculate the National
Demand on an hourly basis on a reasonable endeavours basis by means of messages
inputted by The Company to the Balancing Mechanism Reporting Service (BMRS).

< END OF OPERATING CODE NO. 1 >

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC1 04 March 2024

5 of 5
 OPERATING CODE NO. 2
(OC2)

OPERATIONAL PLANNING AND DATA PROVISION

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

OC2.1 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................................2
OC2.2 OBJECTIVE ................................................................................................................................3
OC2.3 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................4
OC2.4 PROCEDURE .............................................................................................................................4
OC2.4.1 Co-ordination of outages ..................................................................................................4
OC2.4.2 Data Requirements ....................................................................................................... 15
OC2.4.3 Negative Reserve Active Power Margins ...................................................................... 17
OC2.4.4 Frequency Sensitive Operation ..................................................................................... 19
OC2.4.6 Operating Margin Data Requirements .......................................................................... 19
APPENDIX 1 - PERFORMANCE CHART EXAMPLES ........................................................................ 21
APPENDIX 2 - GENERATION PLANNING PARAMETERS ................................................................. 24
APPENDIX 3 - CCGT MODULE PLANNING MATRIX ......................................................................... 26
APPENDIX 4 - POWER PARK MODULE PLANNING MATRIX ........................................................... 27
APPENDIX 5 - SYNCHRONOUS POWER GENERATNG MODULE PLANNING MATRIX ................ 28

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

i
OC2.1 INTRODUCTION
OC2.1.1 Operating Code No. 2 ("OC2") is concerned with:
(a) the co-ordination of the release of Power Generating Modules (including DC
Connected Power Park Modules), Synchronous Generating Units and Power Park
Modules, External Interconnections, Restoration Contractors Plant and Apparatus,
the National Electricity Transmission System and Network Operators' Systems for
construction, repair and maintenance;
(b) provision by The Company of the Surplus for the National Electricity Transmission
System;
(c) the provision by Generators of Generation Planning Parameters for Gensets,
including Synchronous Power Generating Module Planning Matrices, CCGT Module
Planning Matrices and Power Park Module Planning Matrices, to The Company for
planning purposes only; and
(d) the agreement for release of Existing Gas Cooled Reactor Plant for outages in certain
circumstances.
(e) the co-ordianation of outages on Plant and Apparatus necessary for the operation of
RestorationPlans.
OC2.1.2 (a) Operational Planning involves planning, through various timescales, the matching of
generation output with forecast National Electricity Transmission System Demand
together with a reserve of generation to provide a margin, in addition to the ability to
restore the Total System, in accordance with the requirements of the Electricity System
Restoration Standard, following a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown, taking into
account outages of certain Power Generating Modules (including DC Connected
Power Park Modules), Generating Units, Power Park Modules, External
Interconnections, HVDC Systems and DC Converters, Restoration Contractor’s
Plant and Apparatus, and of parts of the National Electricity Transmission System
and of parts of Network Operators' Systems which is carried out to achieve, so far as
possible, the standards of security and the Electricity System Restoration Standard
set out in The Company’s Transmission Licence, each Relevant Transmission
Licensee’s Transmission Licence or Electricity Distribution Licence as the case may
be.
(b) In general terms, there is an "envelope of opportunity" for the release of Power
Generating Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules), Synchronous
Generating Units, Power Park Modules, Restoration Contractor’s Plant and
Apparatus and External Interconnections, and for the release of parts of the National
Electricity Transmission System and parts of the Network Operator’s User Systems
for outages. The envelope is defined by:-
i) The difference between the total generation output expected from Large Power
Stations, Medium Power Stations and Demand, the operational planning
margin and taking into account External Interconnections and outages on the
Total System whilst planning for the System operating under normal conditions;
and
ii) The avaibility and location of Plant and Apparatus required to discharge the
requiremements of the Electricity System Restoration Standard following a
Total System Shutdown or Partial System Shutdown.
OC2.1.3 In this OC2, for the purpose of Generator and Interconnector Owner and Restoration
Contractor outage co-ordination, Year 0 means the current calendar year at any time, Year 1
means the next calendar year at any time, Year 2 means the calendar year after Year 1, etc.
For the purpose of Transmission outage planning, Year 0 means the current Financial Year
at any time, Year 1 means the next Financial Year at any time, Year 2 means the Financial
Year after Year 1, etc. References to ‘weeks’ in OC2 are to calendar weeks as defined in ISO
8601.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

2 of 28
OC2.1.4 References in OC2 to a Generator's and Interconnector Owner’s and Restoration
Contractor’s "best estimate" shall be that Generator's or Interconnector Owner’s or
Restoration Contractor’s best estimate acting as a reasonable and prudent Generator or
Interconnector Owner in all the circumstances.
OC2.1.5 References to The Company planning the National Electricity Transmission System
outage programme on the basis of the Final Generation Outage Programme, are to The
Company planning against the Final Generation Outage Programme current at the time it
so plans.
OC2.1.6 Where in OC2, data is required to be submitted or information is to be given on a particular
weekday, that data does not need to be submitted and that information does not need to be
given on that day if it is not a Business Day or it falls within a holiday period (the occurrence
and length of which shall be determined by The Company, in its reasonable discretion, and
notified to Users). Instead, that data shall be submitted and/or that information shall be given
on such other Business Day as The Company shall, in its reasonable discretion, determine.
However, The Company may determine that that data and/or information need not be
submitted or given at all, in which case it shall notify each User as appropriate.
OC2.1.7 In Scotland, it may be possible with the agreement of The Company to reduce the
administrative burden for Users in producing planning information where either the output or
demand is small.
OC2.1.8 Generators and Interconnector Owners who have a CUSC Contract and who are also
Restoration Contractors, need only submit the data once in respect of their Plant and
Apparatus. Generators and Interconnector Owners who are also Restoration
Contractors are required to state for which Plant they have a Restoration Contract.
Network Operators who have a Distribution Restoration Zone in place, shall notify The
Company whenever an outage of a Restoration Contractor’s Plant or Apparatus which
contributes to a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan is unavailable or a circuit forming part
of that Distribution Restoration Zone Plan is unavailable making the operation of that
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan unviable.
OC2.2 OBJECTIVE
OC2.2.1 (a) The objective of OC2 is to seek to enable The Company to harmonise outages of Power
Generating Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules), Generating
Units, Power Park Modules and External Interconnections in order that such outages
are co-ordinated (taking account of Embedded Medium Power Stations) between
Generators and Network Operators, and that such outages are co-ordinated taking into
account National Electricity Transmission System outages and other System
outages, so far as possible to minimise the number and effect of constraints on the
National Electricity Transmission System or any other System and ensure sufficient
provisions are in place to restore the Total System in the event of a Total Shutdown or
Partial Shutdown.
(b) In the case of Network Operator’ User Systems directly connected to the National
Electricity Transmission System, this means in particular that there will also need to
be harmonisation of outages of Embedded Power Generating Modules, Embedded
Synchronous Generating Units and Embedded Power Park Modules, and National
Electricity Transmission System outages, with Network Operators in respect of their
outages on those Systems. Outages of Plant and Apparatus of Restoration
Contractor’s and Plant and Apparatus of a Network Operator’s System associated
with a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan also need to be co-ordinated with outages
on the National Electricity Transmission System.
OC2.2.2 The objective of OC2 is also to enable the provision by The Company of the Surplus for the
National Electricity Transmission System and the means necessary to restore the System
following a Total System Shutdown or Partial System Shutdown.
OC2.2.3 A further objective of OC2 is to provide for the agreement for outages for Existing Gas Cooled
Reactor Plant in certain circumstances and to enable a process to be followed in order to
provide for that.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

3 of 28
OC2.3 SCOPE
OC2.3.1 OC2 applies to The Company, and to Users which in OC2 means:
(a) Generators, only in respect of their Large Power Stations or their Power Stations
which are directly connected to National Electricity Transmission System (and the
term Generator in this OC2 shall be construed accordingly);
(b) Network Operators; and
(c) Non-Embedded Customers; and
(d) HVDC System Owners and DC Converter Station owners; and
(e) Interconnector Owners in respect of their External Interconnections.
(f) Restoration Contractors who are party to a Local Joint Restoration Zone Plan and
who have a CUSC Contract where such data has not already been provided in
OC2.3.1(a), (c), (d) or (e).
OC2.3.2 The Company may provide to the Relevant Transmission Licensees any data which has
been submitted to The Company by any Users in respect of Relevant Units pursuant to the
following paragraphs of the OC2.
OC2.4.1.2.1
OC2.4.1.3.2 (a)
OC2.4.1.3.2 (b)
OC2.4.1.3.3
OC2.4.2.1 (a)
OC2.3.3 For the purpose of OC2 only, the term Output Usable shall include the terms Interconnector
Export Capacity and Interconnector Import Capacity where the term Output Usable is
being applied to an External Interconnection.
OC2.4 PROCEDURE
OC2.4.1 Co-ordination of Outages
OC2.4.1.1 Under OC2 the interaction between The Company and Users will be as follows:

(a) Each Generator, and each In respect of outages of Power Generating

Interconnector Owner and Modules (including DC Connected Power Park
The Company Modules), Synchronous Generating Units, Power
Park Modules and External Interconnection
Circuits and in respect of outages of other Plant
and/or Apparatus directly connected to the
National Electricity Transmission System;

(b) The Company and each in respect of National Electricity Transmission

Generator and each System outages relevant to each Generator (other
Inteconnector Owner than in respect of Embedded Small Power
Stations or Embedded Medium Power Stations)
and Interconnector Owner;

(c) The Company and each in respect of outages of all Embedded Large Power
Network Operator Stations and in respect of outages of other Plant
and/or Apparatus relating to such Embedded
Large Power Stations;

(d) The Company and each in respect of National Electricity Transmission

Network Operator and each System outages relevant to the particular Network
Non-Embedded Customer Operator or Non-Embedded Customers;

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

4 of 28
 (e) Each Network Operator and in respect of User System outages relevant to The
each Non-Embedded Company; and
Customer and The in respect of Network Operators only, outages of
Company the Network Operator’s User System that may
affect:
• an Offshore Transmission System
connected to that Network Operator’s
User System;
• that Network Operator’s ability to operate
a Local Joint Restoration Plan or
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan.

OC2.4.1.2 Data Provison of Output Usable of Power Generating Modules, Generating Units,
External Interconnection Circuits and Power Park Modules and the Publication of National
Surplus.
OC2.4.1.2.1 In the event that:
a) a Generator referred to in OC2.3.1(a) experiences any unplanned change to the
availability of a Generating Unit and/or Power-Generating Module and/or Power
Park Module or makes a future plan which would impact the availability of a Generating
Unit and/or Power-Generating Module and/or Power Park Module resulting in a
change of level in the Output Usable of that Generating Unit and/or Power-
Generating Module and/or Power Park Module below or above its previously notified
availability, which is expected to last one Settlement Period or longer and up to three
years ahead; or
b) an Interconnector Owner referred to in OC2.3.1(e) experiences any unplanned
change to the availability of an External Interconnection Circuit or makes a future
plan which would impact the availability of an External Interconnection Circuit
resulting in any change in the Output Usable of that External Interconnection Circuit
below or above its previously notified availability, which is expected to last one
Settlement Period or longer and up to three years ahead; or
c) a Restoration Contractors referred to in OC2.3.1(f) experiences any unplanned
change to the availability of their Plant and Apparatus or makes a future plan which
would impact the availability of their Plant and Apparatus which would affect their ability
to contribute to a Local Joint Restoration Plan.
The Generator, Interconnector Owner or Restoration Contractor as provided for in
OC2.3.1(f) shall provide The Company with the best estimate of the revised available Output
Usable profile using one of The Company’s recommended platforms.
For Generators subject to EU Transparency Regulations the Generator shall provide the data
within 1 hour of the unplanned change in availability occurring, and for a planned change to
the availability, the Generator shall provide the data within 1 hour of planning the availability
change in line with EU Transparency Regulations. For Generators not subject to EU
Transparency Regulations the Generator shall provide the data within 24 hours of the
unplanned change in availabiity occurring, and for a planned change to the availability, the
Generator shall provide the data within 24 hours of planning the availability change.
For an unplanned change in availability, the Interconnector Owner shall provide the data
within 1 hour of the unplanned change in availability occurring, and for a planned change to
the availability, the Interconnector Owner shall provide the data within 1 hour of planning the
availability change in line with EU Transparency Regulations.
If the Generator referred to in OC2.3.1(a) provides information relating to multi-shaft
Generating Units then the detail of the individual shaft availability levels, that have been
summed to produce the Output Usable should also be defined within 24 hours.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

5 of 28
 In the case of an External Interconnection Circuit, the details of the individual pole-capacity
levels that have been summed to produce the Output Usable should also be defined within
24 hours.
In the case of Restoration Contractors, referred to in OC2.3.1(f), Restoration Contractors
which are subject to an unplanned change in availability shall provide the data within 1 hour
of the unplanned change and for a planned change to the availability, the Restoration
Contractor shall provide the data within 1 hour of planning the availability change.
The Company may, as appropriate, contact each Generator and each Interconnector
Owner and each Restoration Contractor referred to in OC2.3.1(f) who has supplied
information to seek clarification on their Output Usable submissions.
OC2.4.1.2.2 At a regular time interval, at least once per day (by 1600 hours) and up to every hour:
The Company will:
(i) having taken into account the information notified to it by Generators and Interconnector
Owners and Restoration Contractor as provided for in OC2.3.1(f) via the process
defined in OC2.4.1.2.1 and taking into account:
(1) Demand forecasts and details of proposed use of Demand Control received under
OC1, and an Operational Planning Margin requirement set by The Company (the
"OPMR"),
(2) National Electricity Transmission System constraints and outages,
(3) Network Operator System constraints and outages, known to The Company, and
(4) the Output Usable required, in its view, to meet daily total MW requirements,
Provide each Generator and each Interconnector Owner and each Restoration
Contractoras provided for in OC2.3.1(f) (where required by The Company) in writing
with any suggested amendments to the provisional Output Usable supplied by the
Generator and Interconnector Owner and Restoration Contractor as provided for in
OC2.3.1(f) which The Company believes necessary, and will advise Generators with
Large Power Stations of the Surpluses for the National Electricity Transmission
System and potential export limitations, which would occur without such amendments;
(ii) calculate and submit to BMRA:
1. total generating Output Usable from Generating Units assumed to be available to
the Total System (National Output Useable);
2. generating Output Usable by fuel type from Generating Units assumed to be
available to the Total System (Output Useable by fuel type);
3. generating Output Usable by individual Generating Units assumed to be available
to the Total System (Output Useable by Generating Unit);
4. total Generating Plant Demand Margin assumed to be available to the Total System
(National Margin);
5. total Generating Surplus assumed to be available to the Total System (National
Surplus);
with daily resolution, for at least the peak Demand of each day for 2 day-ahead to 14
day-ahead time scope, and
with weekly resolution, for at least peak Demand of each week for 2 week-ahead up to 3
year-ahead time scope.
The calculation under (ii) will effectively define the envelope of opportunity for outages of
Power Generating Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules),
Synchronous Generating Units and Power Park Modules covering both Embedded
and directly connected Large Power Stations.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

6 of 28
 The Company may, as appropriate, contact each Generator and each
Interconnector Owner and Restoration Contractor (as provided for in OC2.3.1(f))
who has supplied information to seek clarification on outages and suggest
amendments.
(iii) Where a Generator or Interconnector Owner or a Network Operator or
Restoration Contractor (as provided for in OC2.3.1(f)) is unhappy with the
suggested amendments to its provisional outage programme (in the case of a
Generator or Interconnector Owner or in the case of a Restoration Contractor
as provided for in OC2.3.1(f)) or such potential outages (in the case of a Network
Operator) it may contact The Company to explain its concerns and The Company
and that Generator, Interconnector Owner, Restoration Contractor (as provided
for in OC2.3.1(f)) or Network Operator will then discuss the problem and seek to
resolve it.
(iv) The possible resolution of the problem may require The Company or a User to
contact other Generators, Interconnector Owners, Restoration Contractors (as
provided for in OC2.3.1(f)) or Network Operators, and joint meetings of all parties
may, if any User feels it would be helpful, be convened by The Company. The need
for further discussions, be they on the telephone or at meetings, can only be
determined at the time.
Each Generator will provide The Company with updated Output Usable as per OC2.4.1
resulting from the above for Generating Unit, Power Generating Module, and Power
Part Module outage programme covering both Embedded and non-Embedded Large
Power Stations.

The Company will then consider the updated Output Usable and takes this into account
in the next calculation and submission to BMRA.
OC2.4.1.2.3 The Company retains the right to contact Generators with Large Power Stations,
Interconnector Owners and Network Operators in reference to planned outages of their
assets in timescales beyond the European Requirements (3 years) up to the 5 year ahead
period to assist in the operational planning of National Electricity Transmisson System
outages.
OC2.4.1.3 Planning of National Electricity Transmission System Outages
OC2.4.1.3.1 Operational Planning Phase - Planning for Financial Years 2 to 5 inclusive ahead
The Company shall plan National Electricity Transmission System outages required in
Years 2 to 5 inclusive required as a result of construction or refurbishment works. This
contrasts with the planning of National Electricity Transmission System outages required
in Years 0 and 1 ahead, when The Company also takes into account National Electricity
Transmission System outages required as a result of maintenance.

Users should bear in mind that The Company will plan the National Electricity
Transmission System outage programme on the basis of the previous year's Final
Generation Outage Programme and if in the event a Generator's, an Interconnector
Owner’s or Network Operator's outages differ from those contained in the Final Generation
Outage Programme, or in the case of Network Operators, those known to The Company,
in any way conflict with the National Electricity Transmission System outage programme,
The Company need not alter the National Electricity Transmission System outage
programme.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

7 of 28
OC2.4.1.3.2 In each calendar year:
(a) By the end of week 8
Each Network Operator will notify The Company in writing of details of proposed
outages in Years 2-5 ahead in its User System which may affect the performance of the
Total System (which includes but is not limited to outages of User System Apparatus
at Grid Supply Points and outages which constrain the output of Power Generating
Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) and/or Synchronous
Generating Units and/or Power Park Modules Embedded within that User System)
and outages of its Plant and Apparatus that may affect the ability to activate and / or
operate a Distributed Restoration Zone Plan.
Each Network Operator will notify The Company in writing of details of proposed
outages in Years 2-5 ahead in its User System which may affect the declared values of
Maximum Export Capacity and/or Maximum Import Capacity for each Interface Point
within its User System together with the Network Operator’s revised best estimate of
the Maximum Export Capacity and/or Maximum Import Capacity during such outages.
Network Operators will also notify The Company of any automatic and/or manual post
fault actions that it intends to utilise or plans to utilise during such outages.
(b) By the end of week 13
Each Generator will inform The Company in writing of proposed outages in Years 2 - 5
ahead of Generator owned Apparatus (eg. busbar selectors) other than Power
Generating Modules (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) and/or
Synchronous Generating Units, and/or Power Park Modules, at each Grid Entry
Point.
The Company will provide to each Network Operator and to each Generator and each
Interconnector Owner, a copy of the information given to The Company under
paragraph (a) above (other than the information given by that Network Operator). In
relation to a Network Operator, the data must only be used by that User in planning and
operating that Network Operator’s User System and must not be used for any other
purpose or passed on to, or used by, any other business of that User or to, or by, any
person within any other such business or elsewhere.
(c) By the end of week 28
The Company will provide each Network Operator in writing with details of proposed
outages in Years 2-5 ahead which may, in The Company’s reasonable judgement, affect
the performance of that Network Operator’s User System.
(d) By the end of week 30
Where The Company or a Network Operator is unhappy with the proposed outages
notified to it under (a), (b) or (c) above, as the case may be, equivalent provisions to those
set out in OC2.4.1.2.1 (d) will apply.
(e) By the end of week 34
The Company will draw up a draft National Electricity Transmission System outage
plan covering the period Years 2 to 5 ahead and The Company will notify each
Generator, Interconnector Owner, Restoration Contractor (as provided for in
OC2.3.1(f)) and Network Operator in writing of those aspects of the plan which may
operationally affect such Generator (other than those aspects which may operationally
affect Embedded Small Power Stations or Embedded Medium Power Stations)
unless they are Restoration Contractors (as provided for in OC2.3.1(f)),
Interconnector Owner or Network Operator. The Company will also indicate where a
need may exist to issue other operational instructions or notifications (including but not
limited to the requirement for the arming of an Operational Intertripping scheme) or
Emergency Instructions to Users in accordance with BC2 to allow the security of the
National Electricity Transmission System to be maintained within the Licence
Standards.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

8 of 28
OC2.4.1.3.3 Operational Planning Phase - Planning for Financial Year 1 ahead
Each calendar year, The Company shall update the draft National Electricity Transmission
System outage plan prepared under OC2.4.1.3.2 above and shall in addition take into account
outages required as a result of maintenance work.
In each calendar year:
(a) By the end of week 13
Generators and Non-Embedded Customers will inform The Company in writing of
proposed outages for Year 1 of Generator owned Apparatus at each Grid Entry Point
(e.g. busbar selectors) other than Power Generating Modules (including DC Connected
Power Park Modules), Synchronous Generating Units and/or Power Park Modules
or Non-Embedded Customer owned Apparatus, as the case may be, at each Grid
Supply Point.
(b) By the end of week 28
The Company will provide each Network Operator and each Non-Embedded
Customer in writing with details of proposed outages in Year 1 ahead which may, in The
Company’s reasonable judgement, affect the performance of its User System or the
Non-Embedded Customer Apparatus at the Grid Supply Point.
(c) By the end of week 32
Each Network Operator will notify The Company in writing with details of proposed
outages in Year 1 in its User System which may affect the performance of the Total
System (which includes but is not limited to outages of User System Apparatus at Grid
Supply Points and outages which constrain the output of Power Generating Modules
(including DC Connected Power Park Modules), Synchronous Generating Units
and/or Power Park Modules Embedded within that User System) and outages of its
Plant and Apparatus that may affect the ability to activate and/or operate a Distribution
Restoration Zone Plan.
Each Network Operator will notify The Company in writing of details of proposed
outages in Year 1 in its User System which may affect the declared values of Maximum
Export Capacity and/or Maximum Import Capacity for each Interface Point within its
User System together with the Network Operator’s revised best estimate of the
Maximum Export Capacity and/or Maximum Import Capacity during such outages.
Network Operators will also notify The Company of any automatic and/or manual post
fault actions that it intends to utilise or plans to utilise during such outages.
Each Network Operator will also notify The Company in writing of any revisions to
Interface Point Target Voltage/Power Factor data submitted pursuant to PC.A.2.5.4.2.
(d) Between the end of week 32 and the end of week 34
The Company will draw up a revised National Electricity Transmission System outage
plan (which for the avoidance of doubt includes Transmission Apparatus at the
Connection Points).
(e) By the end of week 34
The Company will notify each Generator, Interconnector Owner, Restoration
Contractor (as provided for in OC2.3.1(f)) and Network Operator, in writing, of those
aspects of the National Electricity Transmission System outage programme which
may, in The Company’s reasonable opinion, operationally affect that Generator (other
than those aspects which may operationally affect Embedded Small Power Stations or
Embedded Medium Power Stations unless they are owned and/or operated by a
Restoration Contractor), Interconnector Owner, or Network Operator including in
particular proposed start dates and end dates of relevant National Electricity
Transmission System outages.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

9 of 28
 The Company will provide to each Network Operator and to each Generator and each
Interconnector Owner and each Restoration Contractor (as provided for in OC2.3.1(f))
a copy of the information given to The Company under paragraph (c) above (other than
the information given by that Network Operator). In relation to a Network Operator, the
data must only be used by that User in planning and operating that Network Operator’s
User System and must not be used for any other purpose or passed on to, or used by,
any other business of that User or to, or by, any person within any other such business
or elsewhere.
(f) By the end of week 36
Where a Generator, Interconnector Owner, Restoration Contractor (as provided for
in OC2.3.1(f)) or Network Operator is unhappy with the proposed aspects notified to it
under (e) above, equivalent provisions to those set out in OC2.4.1.2.1 (d) will apply.
(g) Between the end of week 34 and 49
The Company will draw up a final National Electricity Transmission System outage
plan covering Year 1.
(h) By the end of week 49
(i) The Company will complete the final National Electricity Transmission System
outage plan for Year 1. The plan for Year 1 becomes the final plan for Year 0 when
by expiry of time Year 1 becomes Year 0.
(ii) The Company will notify each Generator, each Interconnector Owner, each
Restoration Contractor (as provided for in OC2.3.1(f)) and each Network
Operator in writing of those aspects of the plan which may operationally affect such
Generator (other than those aspects which may operationally affect Embedded
Small Power Stations or Embedded Medium Power Stations unless they are
owned and/or operated by a Restoration Contractor (as provided for in
OC2.3.1(f))s), Interconnector Owner or Network Operator including in particular
proposed start dates and end dates of relevant National Electricity Transmission
System outages. The Company will also indicate where a need may exist to issue
other operational instructions or notifications (including but not limited to the
requirement for the arming of an Operational Intertripping scheme) or Emergency
Instructions to Users in accordance with BC2 to allow the security of the National
Electricity Transmission System to be maintained within the Licence Standards.
The Company will also inform each relevant Non-Embedded Customer of the
aspects of the plan which may affect it.
(iii) In addition, in relation to the final National Electricity Transmission System
outage plan for Year 1, The Company will provide to each Generator and each
Interconnector Owner and each Restoration Contractor (as provided for in
OC2.3.1(f)) a copy of the final National Electricity Transmission System outage
plan for that year. OC2.4.1.3.4 contains provisions whereby updates of the final
National Electricity Transmission System outage plan are provided. The plan
and the updates will be provided in writing. It should be noted that the final National
Electricity Transmission System outage plan for Year 1 and the updates will not
give a complete understanding of how the National Electricity Transmission
System will operate in real time, where the National Electricity Transmission
System operation may be affected by other factors which may not be known at the
time of the plan and the updates. Therefore, Users should place no reliance on the
plan or the updates showing a set of conditions which will actually arise in real time.
(i) Information Release Or Exchange
This paragraph (i) contains alternative requirements on The Company, paragraph (z)
being an alternative to a combination of paragraphs (x) and (y). Paragraph (z) will only
apply in relation to a particular User if The Company and that User agree that it should
apply, in which case paragraphs (x) and (y) will not apply. In the absence of any relevant
agreement between The Company and the User, The Company will only be required to
comply with paragraphs (x) and (y).
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024
10 of 28
 Information Release To Each Network Operator And Non-Embedded Customer
Between the end of Week 34 and 49 The Company will upon written request:
(x) for radial systems, provide each Network Operator and Non Embedded Customer
with data to allow the calculation by the Network Operator, and each Non
Embedded Customer, of symmetrical and asymmetrical fault levels; and
(y) for interconnected Systems, provide to each Network Operator an equivalent
network, sufficient to allow the identification of symmetrical and asymmetrical fault
levels, and power flows across interconnecting User Systems directly connected to
the National Electricity Transmission System; or
System Data Exchange
(z) as part of a process to facilitate understanding of the operation of the Total System,
(1) The Company will make available to each Network Operator, the National
Electricity Transmission System Study Network Data Files covering Year 1
which are of relevance to that User's System;
(2) where The Company and a User have agreed to the use of data links between
them, the making available will be by way of allowing the User access to take
a copy of the National Electricity Transmission System Study Network Data
Files once during that period. The User may, having taken that copy, refer to
the copy as often as it wishes. Such access will be in a manner agreed by The
Company and may be subject to separate agreements governing the manner
of access. In the absence of agreement, the copy of the National Electricity
Transmission System Study Network Data Files will be given to the User on
a disc, or in hard copy, as determined by The Company;
(3) the data contained in the National Electricity Transmission System Study
Network Data Files represents The Company's view of operating conditions
although the actual conditions may be different;
(4) The Company will notify each Network Operator, as soon as reasonably
practicable after it has updated the National Electricity Transmission System
Study Network Data Files covering Year 1 that it has done so, when this
update falls before the next annual update under this OC2.4.1.3.3(i). The
Company will then make available to each Network Operator who has
received an earlier version (and in respect of whom the agreement still exists),
the updated National Electricity Transmission System Study Network Files
covering the balance of Years 1 and 2 which remain given the passage of time,
and which are of relevance to that User's System. The provisions of
paragraphs (2) and (3) above shall apply to the making available of these
updates;
(5) the data from the National Electricity Transmission System Study Network
Data Files received by each Network Operator must only be used by that User
in planning and operating that Network Operator’s User System and must not
be used for any other purpose or passed on to, or used by, any other business
of that User or to, or by, any person within any other such business or
elsewhere.
OC2.4.1.3.4 Operational Planning Phase - Planning in Financial Year 0 down to the Programming Phase
(and in The case of Load Transfer Capability, also during the Programming Phase)
(a) The National Electricity Transmission System outage plan for Year 1 issued under
OC2.4.1.3.3 shall become the plan for Year 0 when by expiry of time Year 1 becomes
Year 0.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

11 of 28
 (b) Each Generator or Interconnector Owner or Restoration Contractor (as provided for
in OC2.3.1(f)) or Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer may at any time
during Year 0, request The Company in writing for changes to the outages requested by
them under OC2.4.1.3.3. In relation to that part of Year 0, excluding the period 1-7 weeks
from the date of request, The Company shall determine whether the changes are
possible and shall notify the Generator, Interconnector Owner, Restoration
Contractor (as provided for in OC2.3.1(f)), Network Operator or Non-Embedded
Customer in question whether this is the case as soon as possible, and in any event
within 14 days of the date of receipt by The Company of the written request in question.
Where The Company determines that any change so requested is possible and notifies
the relevant User accordingly, The Company will provide to each Network Operator,
each Interconnector Owner, and each Generator and each Restoration Contractor
(as provided for in OC2.3.1(f)) a copy of the request to which The Company has agreed
which relates to outages on Systems of Network Operators (other than any request
made by that Network Operator). The information must only be used by that Network
Operator in planning and operating that Network Operator’s User System and must
not be used for any other purpose or passed on to, or used by, any other business of that
User or to, or by, any person within any other such business or elsewhere.
(c) During Year 0 (including the Programming Phase) each Network Operator shall at The
Company's request, make available to The Company, such details of automatic and
manual load transfer capability of:
(i) 12MW or more (averaged over any half hour) for England and Wales
(ii) 10MW or more (averaged over any half hour) for Scotland
between Grid Supply Points.
During Year 0 (including the Programming Phase) each Network Operator shall notify
The Company of any revisions to the information provided pursuant to OC2.4.1.3.3 (c)
for Interface Points as soon as reasonably practicable after the Network Operator
becomes aware of the need to make such revisions.
(d) When necessary during Year 0, The Company will notify each Generator, each
Interconnector Owner, each Restoration Contractor (as provided for in OC2.3.1(f))
and Network Operator and each Non-Embedded Customer, in writing of those aspects
of the National Electricity Transmission System outage programme in the period from
the 8th week ahead to the 52nd week ahead, which may, in The Company 's reasonable
opinion, operationally affect that Generator (other than those aspects which may
operationally affect Embedded Small Power Stations or Embedded Medium Power
Stations unless they are owned and/or operated by a Restoration Contractors (as
provided for in OC2.3.1(f)) Interconnector Owner or Network Operator or Non-
Embedded Customer including in particular proposed start dates and end dates of
relevant National Electricity Transmission System outages.
The Company will also notify changes to information supplied by The Company
pursuant to OC2.4.1.3.3(i)(x) and (y) except where in relation to a User information was
supplied pursuant to OC2.4.1.3.3(i)(z). In that case:-
(i) The Company will, by way of update of the information supplied by it pursuant to
OC2.4.1.3.3(i)(z), make available at the first time in Year 0 that it updates the
National Electricity Transmission System Study Network Data Files in respect
of Year 0 (such update being an update on what was shown in respect of Year 1
which has then become Year 0) to each Network Operator who has received an
earlier version under OC2.4.1.3.3(i)(z) (and in respect of whom the agreement still
exists), the National Electricity Transmission System Study Network Data Files
covering Year 0 which are of relevance to that User's System.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

12 of 28
 (ii) The Company will notify each relevant Network Operator, as soon as reasonably
practicable after it has updated the National Electricity Transmission System
Study Network Data Files covering Year 0, that it has done so. The Company will
then make available to each such Network Operator, the updated National
Electricity Transmission System Study Network Data Files covering the balance
of Year 0 which remains given the passage of time, and which are of relevance to
that User's System.
(iii) The provisions of OC2.4.1.3.3(i)(z)(2), (3) and (5) shall apply to the provision of data
under this part of OC2.4.1.3.4(d) as if set out in full.
The Company will also indicate where a need may exist to issue other operational
instructions or notifications (including but not limited to the requirement for the arming of
an Operational Intertripping scheme) or Emergency Instructions to Users in
accordance with BC2 to allow the security of the National Electricity Transmission
System to be maintained within the Licence Standards except in the case of a Total
Shutdown or Partial Shutdown as provided for in OC9 4.3.
(e) In addition, by the end of each month during Year 0, The Company will provide to each
Generator and each Interconnector Owner and each Restoration Contractor (as
provided for in OC2.3.1(f)) a notice containing any revisions to the final National
Electricity Transmission System outage plan for Year 1, provided to the Generator or
the Interconnector Owner or Restoration Contractor (as provided for in OC2.3.1(f))
under OC2.4.1.3.3 or previously under this provision, whichever is the more recent.
OC2.4.1.3.5 Programming Phase
(a) By 1600 hours each Thursday
(i) The Company shall continue to update a preliminary National Electricity
Transmission System outage programme for the eighth week ahead, a provisional
National Electricity Transmission System outage programme for the next week
ahead and a final day ahead National Electricity Transmission System outage
programme for the following day.
(ii) The Company will notify each Generator, Interconnector Owner, Restoration
Contractor (as provided for in OC2.3.1(f)) and Network Operator and each Non-
Embedded Customer, in writing of those aspects of the preliminary National
Electricity Transmission System outage programme which may operationally
affect each Generator (other than those aspects which may operationally affect
Embedded Small Power Stations or Embedded Medium Power Stations unless
they are owned and/or operated by a Restoration Contractor (as provided for in
OC2.3.1(f)) or Interconnector Owner or Network Operator and each Non-
Embedded Customer including in particular proposed start dates and end dates of
relevant National Electricity Transmission System outages.
The Company will also notify changes to information supplied by The Company
pursuant to OC2.4.1.3.3(i)(x) and (y) except where in relation to a User information
was supplied pursuant to OC2.4.1.3.3(i)(z). In that case:
(1) The Company will, by way of update of the information supplied by it pursuant
to OC2.4.1.3.3(i)(z), make available the National Electricity Transmission
System Study Network Data Files for the next week ahead and
(2) The Company will notify each relevant Network Operator, as soon as
reasonably practicable after it has updated the National Electricity
Transmission System Study Network Data Files covering the next week
ahead that it has done so, and
(3) The provisions of OC2.4.1.3.3(i)(z)(2), (3) and (5) shall apply to the provision of
data under this part of OC2.4.1.3.5(a)(ii) as if set out in full.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

13 of 28
 The Company may make available, the National Electricity Transmission
System Study Network Data Files for the next week ahead where The Company
and a particular User agree, and in such case the provisions of OC2.4.1.1.3.3(i)(x)
and (y) and the provisions of OC2.4.1.3.4(d) and OC2.4.1.3.5(a) which relate to
OC2.4.1.1.3.3(i)(x) and (y) shall not apply. In such case, the provisions of this
OC2.4.1.3.5(a)(ii)2 and 3 shall apply to the provision of the data under this part of
OC2.4.1.3.5(a)(ii) as if set out in full.
The Company will also indicate where a need may exist to arm an Operational
Intertripping scheme, emergency switching, emergency Demand management or
other measures including the issuing of other operational instructions or notifications
or Emergency Instructions to Users in accordance with BC2 to allow the security
of the National Electricity Transmission System to be maintained within the
Licence Standards.
(b) By 1000 hours each Friday
Generators, Interconnector Owners, Restoration Contractors (as provided for in
OC2.3.1(f)) and Network Operators will discuss with The Company and confirm in
writing to The Company, acceptance or otherwise of the requirements detailed under
OC2.4.1.3.5.
Network Operators shall confirm for the following week:
(i) the details of any outages of its User System that will restrict the Maximum Export
Capacity and/or Maximum Import Capacity at any Interface Points within its User
System for the following week; and
(ii) any changes to the previously declared values of the Interface Point Target
Voltage/Power Factor.
(c) By 1600 hours each Friday
(i) The Company shall finalise the preliminary National Electricity Transmission
System outage programme up to the seventh week ahead. The Company will
endeavour to give as much notice as possible to a Generator with nuclear Large
Power Stations which may be operationally affected by an outage which is to be
included in such programme.
(ii) The Company shall finalise the provisional National Electricity Transmission
System outage programme for the next week ahead.
(iii) The Company shall finalise the National Electricity Transmission System outage
programme for the weekend through to the next normal working day.
(iv) In each case, The Company will indicate the factors set out in (a)(ii) above (other
than those aspects which may operationally affect Embedded Small Power
Stations or Embedded Medium Power Stations unless they are owned and/or
operated by a Restoration Contractor (as provided for in OC2.3.1(f)) to the relevant
Generators and Network Operators and Non-Embedded Customers.
(v) Where a Generator with nuclear Large Power Stations which may be operationally
affected by the preliminary National Electricity Transmission System outage
programme referred to in (i) above (acting as a reasonable operator) is concerned
on grounds relating to safety about the effect which an outage within such outage
programme might have on one or more of its nuclear Large Power Stations, it may
contact The Company to explain its concerns and discuss whether there is an
alternative way of taking that outage (having regard to technical feasibility). If there
is such an alternative way, but The Company refuses to adopt that alternative way
in taking that outage, that Generator may involve the Disputes Resolution
Procedure to decide on the way the outage should be taken. If there is no such
alternative way, then The Company may take the outage despite that Generator's
concerns.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

14 of 28
 (d) By 1600 hours each Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday
(i) The Company shall prepare a final National Electricity Transmission System
outage programme for the following day.
(ii) The Company shall notify each Generator and each Restoration Contractor (as
provided for in OC2.3.1(f)) and Network Operator and Non-Embedded Customer
in writing of the factors set out in (a)(ii) above (other than those aspects which may
operationally affect Embedded Small Power Stations or Embedded Medium
Power Stations unless they are owned and/or operated by a Restoration
Contractor (as provided for in OC2.3.1(f)).
OC2.4.2 DATA REQUIREMENTS
OC2.4.2.1 When a Statement of Readiness under the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction
Agreement is submitted, and thereafter in calendar week 24 in each calendar year,
(a) each Generator shall (subject to OC2.4.2.1(k)) in respect of each of its:-
(i) Gensets (in the case of the Generation Planning Parameters); and
(ii) CCGT Units within each of its CCGT Modules at a Large Power Station (in the
case of the Generator Performance Chart)
(iii) Generating Units within each of its Synchronous Power Generating Modules at
a Large Power Station (in the case of the Power-Generating Module
Performance Chart and Synchronous Generating Unit Performance Chart)
submit to The Company in writing the Generation Planning Parameters and the
Generator Performance Charts as required.
(b) Each shall meet the requirements of CC.6.3.2 or ECC.6.3.2 (as applicable) and shall
reasonably reflect the true operating characteristics of the Genset.
(c) They shall be applied (unless revised under this OC2 or (in the case of the Generator
Performance Chart only) BC1 in relation to Other Relevant Data) from the Completion
Date, in the case of the ones submitted with the Statement of Readiness, and in the
case of the ones submitted in calendar week 24, from the beginning of week 25 onwards.
(d) They shall be in the format indicated in Appendix 1 for these charts and as set out in
Appendix 2 for the Generation Planning Parameters.
(e) Any changes to the Generator Performance Chart or Generation Planning
Parameters should be notified to The Company promptly.
(f) Generators should note that amendments to the composition of the Power Generating
Module, CCGT Module or Power Park Module at Large Power Stations may only be
made in accordance with the principles set out in PC.A.3.2.3 or PC.A.3.2.4 respectively.
If in accordance with PC.A.3.2.3 or PC.A.3.2.4 an amendment is made, any
consequential changes to the Generation Planning Parameters should be notified to
The Company promptly.
(g) The Generator Performance Chart must be as described below and demonstrate the
limitation on reactive capability of the System voltage at 3% above nominal. It must also
include any limitations on output due to the prime mover (both maximum and minimum),
Generating Unit step up transformer or User System.
(i) For a Synchronous Generating Unit on a Generating Unit specific basis at the
Generating Unit stator terminals. It must include details of the Generating Unit
transformer parameters.
(ii) For a Non-Synchronous Generating Unit (excluding a Power Park Unit) on a
Generating Unit specific basis at the Grid Entry Point (or User System Entry
Point if Embedded).
(iii) For a Power Park Module, on a Power Park Module specific basis at the Grid
Entry Point (or User System Entry Point if Embedded).

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

15 of 28
 (iv) For a DC Converter on a DC Converter specific basis at the Grid Entry Point (or
User System Entry Point if Embedded).
(v) For a Synchronous Generating Unit within a Synchronous Power Generating
Module, both the Power-Generating Module Performance Chart and
Synchronous Generating Unit Performance Chart should be provided.
(h) For each CCGT Unit, and any other Generating Unit or Power Park Module or Power
Generating Module whose performance varies significantly with ambient temperature,
the Generator Performance Chart (including the Power-Generating Module
Performance Chart and Synchronous Generating Unit Performance Chart in the
case of Synchronous Power Generating Modules) shall show curves for at least two
values of ambient temperature so that The Company can assess the variation in
performance over all likely ambient temperatures by a process of linear interpolation or
extrapolation. One of these curves shall be for the ambient temperature at which the
Generating Unit's output, or CCGT Module or Power-Generating Module at a Large
Power Station output or Power Park Module’s output, as appropriate, equals its
Registered Capacity.
(i) The Generation Planning Parameters supplied under OC2.4.2.1 shall be used by The
Company for operational planning purposes only and not in connection with the operation
of the Balancing Mechanism (subject as otherwise permitted in the BC).
(j) Each Generator shall in respect of each of its Synchronous Power Generating
Modules or CCGT Modules (including those which are part of a Synchronous Power
Generating Module) at Large Power Stations submit to The Company in writing a
CCGT Module Planning Matrix and/or a Synchronous Power-Generating Module
Planning Matrix. It shall be prepared on a best estimate basis relating to how it is
anticipated the Synchronous Power-Generating Module or CCGT Module will be
running and which shall reasonably reflect the true operating characteristics of the Power-
Generating Module or CCGT Module. It will be applied (unless revised under this OC2)
from the Completion Date, in the case of the one submitted with the Statement of
Readiness, and in the case of the one submitted in calendar week 24, from the beginning
of week 31 onwards. It must show the combination of CCGT Units or Synchronous
Power Generating Units which would be running in relation to any given MW output, in
the format indicated in Appendix 3.
Any changes must be notified to The Company promptly. Generators should note that
amendments to the composition of the CCGT Module or Synchronous Power-
Generating Module at Large Power Stations may only be made in accordance with the
principles set out in PC.A.3.2.3. If in accordance with PC.A.3.2.3 an amendment is made,
an updated CCGT Module Planning Matrix or Synchronous Power-Generating
Module Planning Matrix must be immediately submitted to The Company in
accordance with this OC2.4.2.1(b).
The CCGT Module Planning Matrix or Synchronous Power-Generating Module
Planning Matrix will be used by The Company for operational planning purposes only
and not in connection with the operation of the Balancing Mechanism.
(k) Each Generator shall in respect of each of its Cascade Hydro Schemes also submit the
Generation Planning Parameters detailed at OC2.A.2.6 to OC2.A.2.10 for each
Cascade Hydro Scheme. Such parameters need not also be submitted for the individual
Gensets within such Cascade Hydro Scheme.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

16 of 28
 (l) Each Generator shall in respect of each of its Power Park Modules at Large Power
Stations submit to The Company in writing a Power Park Module Planning Matrix. It
shall be prepared on a best estimate basis relating to how it is anticipated the Power
Park Module will be running and which shall reasonably reflect the operating
characteristics of the Power Park Module and the BM Unit of which it forms part. It will
be applied (unless revised under this OC2) from the Completion Date, in the case of the
one submitted with the Statement of Readiness, and in the case of the one submitted
in calendar week 24, from the beginning of week 31 onwards. It must show the number
of each type of Power Park Unit in the Power Park Module typically expected to be
available to generate and the BM Unit of which it forms part, in the format indicated in
Appendix 4. The Power Park Module Planning Matrix shall be accompanied by a graph
showing the variation in MW output with Intermittent Power Source (e.g. MW vs wind
speed) for the Power Park Module. The graph shall indicate the typical value of the
Intermittent Power Source for the Power Park Module.
Any changes must be notified to The Company promptly. Generators should note that
amendments to the composition of the Power Park Module at Large Power Stations
may only be made in accordance with the principles set out in PC.A.3.2.4. If in
accordance with PC.A.3.2.4 an amendment is made, an updated Power Park Module
Planning Matrix must be immediately submitted to The Company in accordance with
this OC2.4.2.1(a).
The Power Park Module Planning Matrix will be used by The Company for operational
planning purposes only and not in connection with the operation of the Balancing
Mechanism.
(m) For each Synchronous Generating Unit (including Synchronous Generating Units
within a Power Generating Module) where the Generator intends to adjust the
Generating Unit terminal voltage in response to a MVAr output Instruction or a Target
Voltage Level instruction in accordance with BC2.A.2.6 the Generator Performance
Chart including the Synchronous Generating Unit Performance Chart shall show
curves corresponding to the Generating Unit terminal voltage being controlled to its rated
value and to its maximum value.
In the case of Restoration Contractors (as provided for in OC2.3.1(f)) who are Generators,
it would expected that the above data required in OC2.4.2.1 (a) – (m) would apply.
OC2.4.2.2 Each Network Operator shall by 1000 hrs on the day falling seven days before each
Operational Day inform The Company in writing of any changes to the circuit details called
for in PC.A.2.2.1 which it is anticipated will apply on that Operational Day (under BC1
revisions can be made to this data). This requirement shall also apply to circuits associated
with a Distributed Restoration Zone Plan.
OC2.4.2.3 Under Retained EU Law (Commission Regulation (EU) 543/2013), Users are required to
submit certain data to the Data Publisher for publication. The Company is required to
facilitate the collection, verification and processing of data from Users for onward transmission
to the Data Publisher.
Each Generator and Restoration Contractor (as provided for in OC2.3.1(f)) and each Non-
Embedded Customer connected to or using the National Electricity Transmission System
shall provide The Company with such information as required by and set out in DRC Schedule
6 (Users’ Outage Data EU Transparency Availability Data) in the timescales detailed therein.

OC2.4.3 NEGATIVE RESERVE ACTIVE POWER MARGINS

OC2.4.3.1 At a regular time interval, at least once each day (by 1600 hours) and up to every hour The
Company will, taking into account the Generation Outage Programme and forecast of
Output Usable supplied by each Generator and by each Interconnector Owner defined in
OC2.4.1.2.1 and forecast Demand for the minimum Demand period, calculate and publish:-
(1) the level of the System NRAPM each day within the period 2 to 14 days ahead
(inclusive) and for each week the level of risk of System NRAPM within the 2-
52 week ahead period; and
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024
17 of 28
 (2) the level of the Localised NRAPM (currently for the main constraint between
England and Scotland only) for each day within the period 2 to 14 days ahead
(inclusive) having taken into account the appropriate limit on transfers to and
from the System Constraint Group and for each week the level of risk of
Localised NRAPM within the 2-52 week ahead period.
Outages Adjustments
(a) Under the necessary circumstances The Company will then contact Generators in
respect of their Large Power Stations and Interconnector Owners to discuss
outages as set out in the following paragraphs of this OC2.4.3.1.
(b) The Company will contact all Generators and Interconnector Owners in the case
of low System NRAPM and will contact Generators in relation to relevant Large
Power Stations and Interconnector Owners in the case of low Localised NRAPM.
The Company will raise with each Generator and Interconnector Owner the
problems it is anticipating due to the low System NRAPM or Localised NRAPM and
will discuss:
(1) whether any change is possible to the estimate of Genset inflexibility; and
(2) whether Genset or External Interconnection outages can be taken to coincide
with the periods of low System NRAPM or Localised NRAPM (as the case
may be).
In relation to Generators with nuclear Large Power Stations the discussions on
outages can include the issue of whether outages can be taken for re-fuelling
purposes to coincide with the relevant low System NRAPM and/or Localised
NRAPM periods.
(c) If agreement is reached with a Generator or an Interconnector Owner, then such
Generator or Interconnector Owner will take such outage, as agreed with The
Company, and the Generator or an Interconnector Owner will issue updates to its
Output Usable via the data provision process defined in OC2.4.1.2.1 and The Company
will process the updated data which will then be included in the next published update of
the System NRAPM and/or Localised NRAPM.
(d) If on the day prior to an Operational Day, it is apparent from the BM Unit Data submitted
by Users under BC1 that System NRAPM and/or Localised NRAPM (as the case may
be) is, in The Company's reasonable opinion, too low, then in accordance with the
procedures and requirements set out in BC1.5.5 The Company may contact Users to
discuss whether changes to Physical Notifications are possible, and if they are, will
reflect those in the operational plans for the next following Operational Day or will, in
accordance with BC2.9.4 instruct Generators to De-Synchronise a specified Genset for
such period. In determining which Genset to so instruct, BC2 provides that The
Company will not (other than as referred to below) consider in such determination (and
accordingly shall not instruct to De-Synchronise) any Genset within an Existing Gas
Cooled Reactor Plant. BC2 further provides that:-
(i) The Company is permitted to instruct to De-Synchronise any Gensets within an
Existing AGR Plant if those Gensets within an Existing AGR Plant have failed to
offer to be flexible for the relevant instance at the request of The Company provided
the request is within the Existing AGR Plant Flexibility Limit.
(ii) The Company will only instruct to De-Synchronise any Gensets within an Existing
Magnox Reactor Plant or within an Existing AGR Plant (other than under (i) above)
if the level of System NRAPM (taken together with System constraints) and/or
Localised NRAPM is such that it is not possible to avoid De-Synchronising such
Generating Unit or Power Generating Module, and provided the power flow across
each External Interconnection is either at zero or results in an export of power from
the Total System. This proviso applies in all cases in the case of System NRAPM
and in the case of Localised NRAPM, only when the power flow would have a
relevant effect.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

18 of 28
OC2.4.4 FREQUENCY SENSITIVE OPERATION
By 1600 hours each Wednesday
OC2.4.4.1 Using such information as The Company shall consider relevant including, if appropriate,
forecast Demand, any estimates provided by Generators of Genset inflexibility and
anticipated plant mix relating to operation in Frequency Sensitive Mode, The Company shall
determine for the period 2 to 7 weeks ahead (inclusive) whether it is possible that there will be
insufficient Gensets (other than those Gensets within Existing Gas Cooled Reactor Plant
which are permitted to operate in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode at all times under
BC3.5.3) to operate in Frequency Sensitive Mode for all or any part of that period.
OC2.4.4.2 BC3.5.3 explains that The Company permits Existing Gas Cooled Reactor Plant other than
Frequency Sensitive AGR Units to operate in a Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode at all
times.
OC2.4.4.3 If The Company foresees that there will be an insufficiency in Gensets operating in a
Frequency Sensitive Mode, it will contact Generators in order to seek to agree (as soon as
reasonably practicable) that all or some of the Gensets (the MW amount being determined by
The Company but the Gensets involved being determined by the Generator) will take
outages to coincide with such period as The Company shall specify to enable replacement
by other Gensets which can operate in a Frequency Sensitive Mode. If agreement is
reached (which unlike the remainder of OC2 will constitute a binding agreement) then such
Generator will take such outage as agreed with The Company. If agreement is not reached,
then the provisions of BC2.9.5 may apply.
OC2.4.5 If in The Company 's reasonable opinion it is necessary for both the procedure set out in
OC2.4.3 (relating to System NRAPM and Localised NRAPM) and in OC2.4.4 (relating to
operation in Frequency Sensitive Mode) to be followed in any given situation, the procedure
set out in OC2.4.3 will be followed first, and then the procedure set out in OC2.4.4. For the
avoidance of doubt, nothing in this paragraph shall prevent either procedure from being
followed separately and independently of the other.
OC2.4.6 OPERATING MARGIN DATA REQUIREMENTS
OC2.4.6.1 Modifications to relay settings
‘Relay settings’ in this OC2.4.6.1 refers to the settings of Low Frequency Relays in respect
of Gensets that are available for start from standby by Low Frequency Relay initiation with
Fast Start Capability agreed pursuant to the Bilateral Agreement.
By 1600 hours each Wednesday
A change in relay settings will be sent by The Company no later than 1600 hours on a
Wednesday to apply from 1000 hours on the Monday following. The settings allocated to
particular Large Power Stations may be interchanged between 49.70Hz and 49.60Hz
(or such other System Frequencies as The Company may have specified) provided the
overall capacity at each setting and System requirements can, in The Company 's view,
be met.
Between 1600 hours each Wednesday and 1200 hours each Friday
If a Generator wishes to discuss or interchange settings it should contact The Company
by 1200 hours on the Friday prior to the Monday on which it would like to institute the
changes to seek The Company 's agreement. If The Company agrees, The Company
will then send confirmation of the agreed new settings.
By 1500 hours each Friday
If any alterations to relay settings have been agreed, then the updated version of the
current relay settings will be sent to affected Users by 1500 hours on the Friday prior to
the Monday on which the changes will take effect. Once accepted, each Generator (if
that Large Power Station is not subject to forced outage or Planned Outage) will abide
by the terms of its latest relay settings.
In addition, The Company will take account of any Large Power Station unavailability
(as notified under OC2.4.1.2 submissions) in its total Operating Reserve policy.
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024
19 of 28
 The Company may from time to time, for confirmation purposes only, issue the latest
version of the current relay settings to each affected Generator
OC2.4.6.2 Operational Planning Margin Requirements (OPMR)
At a regular time interval, at least once each day (by 1600 hours) and up to every hour
The Company will provide an indication of the level of Operating Reserve to be utilised by
The Company in connection with the operation of the Balancing Mechanism covering a 2-
14 day ahead period (with a daily peak demand resolution) and the 2-52 week resolution (with
a weekly resolution focusing on the peak demand of the week). This level shall be purely
indicative.

This Operational Planning Margin requirements indication will also note the possible level of
High Frequency Response to be utilised by The Company in connection with the operation
of the Balancing Mechanism in the week beginning with the Operational Day commencing
during the subsequent Monday, which level shall be purely indicative.
OC2.4.7 In the event that:

a) a Non-Embedded Customer experiences the planned unavailability of its Apparatus

resulting in the reduction of Demand of 100MW or more, or a change to the planned
unavailability of its Apparatus resulting in a change in Demand of 100MW or more, for
one Settlement Period or longer; or
b) a Non-Embedded Customer experiences a change in the actual availability of its
Apparatus resulting in a change in Demand of 100MW or greater; or
c) a Generator experiences a planned unavailability of a Generating Unit and/or Power-
Generating Module resulting in a change of 100MW or more in the Output Usable of
that Generating Unit and/or Power-Generating Module below its previously notified
availability, which is expected to last one Settlement Period or longer and up to three
years ahead; or
d) a Generator experiences a change of 100MW or more in the Maximum Export Limit of
a Generating Unit which is expected to last one Settlement Period or longer; or
e) a Generator experiences a planned unavailability resulting in a change of 100MW or
more in its aggregated Output Usable below its previously notified availability for a
Power Station with a Registered Capacity of 200MW or more and which is expected
to last one Settlement Period or longer and up to three years ahead, save where data
has been provided pursuant to OC.2.4.7(c) above; or
f) a Generator experiences a change of 100MW or more in the aggregated Maximum
Export Limit of a Power Station with a Registered Capacity of 200MW or more, which
is expected to last one Settlement Period or longer, save where data has been
provided pursuant to OC.2.4.7(d) above;
such Non-Embedded Customer or Generator shall provide The Company with the EU
Transparency Availability Data in accordance with DRC Schedule 6 (Users’ Outage Data)
using MODIS and, with reference to points OC2.4.7(a) to (f), Retained EU Law (Commission
Regulation (EU) 543/2013) articles 7.1(a), 7.1(b), 15.1(a), 15.1(b), 15.1(c) and 15.1(d).

OC2.4.8 The Company will for each day publish the actual largest secured loss of generation (i.e. the
loss of generation against which, as a requirement of the Licence Standards, the National
Electricity Transmission System must be secured) or loss of import from External
Interconnections for each settlement period on The Company’s website.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

20 of 28
 APPENDIX 1 - PERFORMANCE CHART EXAMPLES

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

21 of 28
 (E)

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

22 of 28
POWER PARK MODULE PERFORMANCE CHART AT THE CONNECTION POINT OR USER’S SYSTEM
ENTRY POINT

MW
Rated MW F G
Output
100%

50%

20%

MVAr
A E C D B

LEADING LAGGING

Point A is equivalent (in MVAr) to: 0.95 leading Power Factor at Rated MW output

Point B is equivalent (in MVAr) to: 0.95 lagging Power Factor at Rated MW output

Point C is equivalent (in MVAr) to: -5% of Rated MW output

Point D is equivalent (in MVAr) to: +5% of Rated MW output

Point E is equivalent (in MVAr) to: -12% of Rated MW output

Line F is equivalent (in MVAr) to: Leading Power Factor Reactive Despatch Network Restriction

Line G is equivalent (in MVAr) to: Lagging Power Factor Reactive Despatch Network Restriction

Where a Reactive Despatch Network Restriction is in place which requires

following of local voltage conditions, alternatively to Line F and G, please check
this box.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

23 of 28
 APPENDIX 2 - GENERATION PLANNING PARAMETERS
OC2.A.2 Generation Planning Parameters
The following parameters are required in respect of each Genset.

OC2.A.2.1 Regime Unavailability

Where applicable the following information must be recorded for each Genset.
- Earliest synchronising time:
Monday
Tuesday to Friday
Saturday to Sunday
- Latest de-synchronising time:
Monday to Thursday
Friday
Saturday to Sunday

OC2.A.2.2 Synchronising Intervals

(a) The synchronising interval between Gensets in a Synchronising Group assuming all
Gensets have been Shutdown for 48 hours;
(b) The Synchronising Group within the Power Station to which each Genset should be
allocated.

OC2.A.2.3 De-Synchronising Interval

A fixed value De-Synchronising interval between Gensets within a Synchronising Group.

OC2.A.2.4 Synchronising Generation

The amount of MW produced at the moment of Synchronising assuming the Genset has
been Shutdown for 48 hours.

OC2.A.2.5 Minimum Non-zero time (MNZT)

The minimum period on-load between Synchronising and De-Synchronising assuming the
Genset has been Shutdown for 48 hours.

OC2.A.2.6 Run-Up rates

A run-up characteristic consisting of up to three stages from Synchronising Generation to
Output Usable with up to two intervening break points assuming the Genset has been
Shutdown for 48 hours.

OC2.A.2.7 Run-down rates

A run down characteristic consisting of up to three stages from Output Usable to De-
Synchronising with breakpoints at up to two intermediate load levels.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

24 of 28
OC2.A.2.8 Notice to Deviate from Zero (NDZ)
The period of time normally required to Synchronise a Genset following instruction from The
Company assuming the Genset has been Shutdown for 48 hours.

OC2.A.2.9 Minimum Zero time (MZT)

The minimum interval between De-Synchronising and Synchronising a Genset.

OC2.A.2.10 Not used.

OC2.A.2.11 Gas Turbine Units loading parameters

- Loading rate for fast starting
- Loading rate for slow starting

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

25 of 28
 APPENDIX 3 - CCGT MODULE PLANNING MATRIX
CCGT Module Planning Matrix Example Form

CCGT MODULE CCGT GENERATING UNITS AVAILABLE

1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 1st 2nd 3rd

GT GT GT GT GT GT ST ST ST
OUTPUT USABLE
OUTPUT USABLE

150 150 150 100

MW

0MW to 150MW
/

151MW to 250MW
/ /

251MW to 300MW
/ /

301MW to 400MW
/ / /

401MW to 450MW
/ / /

451MW to 550MW
/ / / /

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

26 of 28
 APPENDIX 4 - POWER PARK MODULE PLANNING MATRIX
Power Park Module Planning Matrix Example Form
BM Unit Name
Power Park Module [unique identifier]
POWER PARK POWER PARK UNITS
UNIT AVAILABILITY Type A Type B Type C Type D
Description
(Make/Model)

Number of units
Power Park Module [unique identifier]
POWER PARK POWER PARK UNITS
UNIT AVAILABILITY Type A Type B Type C Type D
Description
(Make/Model)
Number of units

The Power Park Module Planning Matrix may have as many columns as are required to provide information
on the different make and model for each type of Power Park Unit in a Power Park Module and as many
rows as are required to provide information on the Power Park Modules within each BM Unit. The description
is required to assist identification of the Power Park Units within the Power Park Module and correlation with
data provided under the Planning Code.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

27 of 28
 APPENDIX 5 – SYNCHRONOUS POWER GENERATNG MODULE
PLANNING MATRIX
Synchronous Power Generating Module Planning Matrix Example Form

SYNCHRONOUS SYNCHRONOUS POWER GENERATING UNITS AVAILABLE

POWER 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 1st 2nd 3rd
GENERATING GT GT GT GT GT GT ST ST ST
MODULE
OUTPUT USABLE

150 150 150 100

OUTPUT USABLE

MW

0MW to 150MW
/

151MW to 250MW
/ /

251MW to 300MW
/ /

301MW to 400MW
/ / /

401MW to 450MW
/ / /

451MW to 550MW
/ / / /

< END OF OPERATING CODE NO. 2 >

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC2 04 March 2024

28 of 28
 OPERATING CODE NO. 3
(OC3)

SYSTEM INCIDENTS REPORT

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

OC3.1 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................................2
OC3.2 OBJECTIVE ................................................................................................................................2
OC3.3 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................2
OC3.4 SYSTEM INCIDENTS REPORT .................................................................................................2
OC3.5 REPORTING ON FAULT EVENTS ………………………………………………………………….3
OC3.6 REPORTING ON LEARNING…………………………………………………………………………3

Issue 6 Revision 8 OC3 08 November 2021

i
OC3.1 INTRODUCTION
OC3.1.1 Operating Code No.3 ("OC3") is concerned with the monthly publication by The Company of an
incident report and Frequency data for the National Electricity Transmission System.

OC3.2 OBJECTIVE
OC3.2.1 The objective of OC3 is for The Company to produce a monthly report of incidents and
frequency data. The report and data are important to industry and the Grid Code Review
Panel as they help monitor the effectiveness of the technical requirements in the Grid Code
and Distribution Code.

OC3.3 SCOPE
OC3 applies to The Company.
OC3.4 SYSTEM INCIDENTS REPORT
OC3.4.1 The Company shall prepare and submit to the Grid Code Review Panel monthly a report
titled the System Incidents Report, which shall contain:
(a) a record of each and all of any of the following Events, defined as Significant Events, on
the National Electricity Transmission System:
(i) a loss of infeed or exfeed (import or export including generation, Demand and
interconnection) of =>250MW;
(ii) a Frequency excursion outside the limits 49.7-50.3Hz;
(iii) a fault on the National Electricity Transmission System which:
A. could be linked to the known or reported tripping of 250MW or more as
reported in (i) above; and/or
B. (as detailed in section CC6.1.4) is linked to a change in the Transmission
System voltage of
I. 300kV or greater: > +/-5% for >15min; or
II. 132kV up to 300kV: > +/- 10% for >15min;
(iv) any known demand disconnected >=50MW from the National Electricity
Transmission System or other lesser demand if notified to The Company; and
(v) any Demand Control action taken;
(b) a report of each such Significant Event including the following data in relation to each
Significant Event as appropriate and available:
(i) the time(s) in hh.mm.ss of the Significant Event and any potentially related
occurrences;
(ii) any known or reported loss of Embedded Power Station(s) with locations and
ratings where available;
(iii) the Frequency record (in table and graphical format) at <=1 second intervals for
1 minute before and 1 minute after the Significant Event;
(iv) the Frequency (to 2 decimal places) immediately before the Significant Event;
(v) the Frequency (to 2 decimal places) immediately after the Significant Event;
(vi) the maximum rate of change of Frequency recorded during the Significant
Event over a specified time period of 500ms;

Issue 6 Revision 8 OC3 08 November 2021

ii
 (vii) where known, the MW of all individual losses or trips related to the Significant
Event;
(viii) where known, the identity of the Users and Network Operator of all demand
losses or trips related to the Significant Event;
(ix) the location of any reported Transmission fault on the network diagram and
geographically;
(x) the extent of any voltage dip associated with the Significant Event;
(xi) an estimate of system inertia in MWs at the time of the Significant Event along
with how it has been calculated; and
(xii) any other data available that is of value to gain a clearer understanding of the
Significant Event and its potential implications; and
(c) an outline of progress towards reporting events and associated data on the National
Electricity Transmission System including:
(i) three phase faults;
(ii) three phase to earth faults;
(iii) phase to phase faults;
(iv) phase to earth faults;
(v) the associated voltage dips – durations and spreads;
(vi) over-voltages;
(vii) under-voltages;
(viii) voltage dips of >50%; and
(ix) lightning strikes.
OC3.4.2 To obtain, manage, present, communicate and report the data in OC3.4.1 The Company
shall:
(a) present the System Incidents Report and provide, in an annex, associated data in
spreadsheet format;
(b) maintain an area of the Website with a list of all historic System Incidents Reports and
information on any process required for legitimate parties to obtain the reports (if reports are
not available to download); and
(c) notify all Electricity Distribution Licence holders and Network Operators of every
Significant Event and request information to fulfil its duties in OC3.4.1.
OC3.4.3 The Company shall prepare and publish the System Incidents Report monthly in
accordance with the following timescales:
(a) a data cut-off date of the end of each month for that reporting month;
(b) data is collated, reviewed and processed in the subsequent two months for a reporting
month;
(c) System Incidents Report to be published at latest on the last working day of the second
month after each reporting month (in other words the report for January would be
published on the last working day of March, and so on) and submitted to the next regular
Grid Code Review Panel. For the avoidance of doubt, if there are no incidents arising
under OC3.4.1 (a)- (c) a System Incidents Report would, nevertheless, still be published
stating that ‘No System Incident occurred in month [X]’.

OC3.4.4 The Company shall prepare and publish monthly on the Website, in a spreadsheet form,
System Frequency data at a maximum of one second intervals for the whole month
(Historic Frequency Data) in accordance with the following timescales:

Issue 6 Revision 8 OC3 08 November 2021

2
 (a) a data cut-off date of the end of each month for that reporting month;
(b) data is collated, reviewed and processed in the subsequent ten working days after the
end of the reporting month;
(c) Historic Frequency Data to be published on the eleventh working day after each
reporting month (in other words the report for January would be published on the eleventh
working day of February, and so on).

OC3.4.5 The Company will use best endeavours to provide a report or reports (based on either the
historic reporting methodology, or on the Significant Incidents Reports methodology, or a
mix of the two), on events for the period from 1 November 2017 until the first System
Incidents Report pursuant to this Operating Code, such a report or reports to be made
available within 4 months of implementation date of the modification.

OC3.5 REPORTING ON FAULT EVENTS

OC.3.5.1 The Company shall prepare and publish on their website a report giving date, time and
location of actual three phase, three phase to earth, phase to phase and phase to earth fault
events on the National Electricity Transmission System. Information shall be published as
soon as reasonably practicable following such an event. For faults in which a fault ride through
issue was found, where available, appropriate waveform information will be provided.

OC3.6 REPORTING ON LEARNING

OC3.6.1 Where the analysis of events occurring on the National Electricity Transmission System as
set out in OC3.5.1 gives rise to learning points which The Company believes are relevant to
the industry, The Company will publish a report explaining the events, the analysis and
information gained as applicable. The contents of the report will be anonymised to avoid
identification of Users, connection sites and manufacturers of Plant and Apparatus except in
circumstances where OC3.6.2 applies. Where information sourced from Users or
manufacturers is included, permission will be sought before publication.

OC3.6.2 Where The Company believes that it is appropriate to identify a particular User, connection
site or Plant and Apparatus, The Company shall in the first instance consult the relevant
User and/or manufacturer as applicable to seek agreement for publication.

OC3.6.3 If permission for publication is not granted by the User and/or manufacturer and The
Company believes that it is appropriate to identify a particular User, connection site or Plant
and Apparatus, The Company may ask the Authority for guidance regarding publication.

< END OF OPERATING CODE NO. 3 >

Issue 6 Revision 8 OC3 08 November 2021

3
 OPERATING CODE NO. 4
(OC4)

NOT USED

< END OF OPERATING CODE NO. 4 >

Issue 5 Revision 0 OC4 17 August 2012

i
 OPERATING CODE NO. 5
(OC5)

TESTING AND MONITORING

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

OC5.1 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................................2
OC5.2 OBJECTIVE ................................................................................................................................2
OC5.3 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................3
OC5.4 MONITORING .............................................................................................................................3
OC5.4.1 Parameters To Be Monitored ...........................................................................................3
OC5.4.2 Procedure for Monitoring ..................................................................................................3
OC5.5 PROCEDURE FOR TESTING ....................................................................................................4
OC5.5.1 The Company’s Instruction for Testing ............................................................................4
OC5.5.2 User Request for Testing .................................................................................................5
OC5.5.3 Conduct of Test ................................................................................................................6
OC5.5.4 Test and Monitoring Assessment .....................................................................................6
OC5.5.5 Test Failure / Re-test ......................................................................................................10
OC5.5.6 Dispute Following Re-test ..............................................................................................10
OC5.6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION ..........................................................................................................10
OC5.7 SYSTEM RESTORATION TESTING ........................................................................................11
OC5.7.1 General ...........................................................................................................................11
OC5.7.2 Procedures for Restoration Service Tests .....................................................................12
OC5.7.2.1 Anchor Generating Unit Tests ..............................................................................12
OC5.7.2.2 Anchor Power Station Test ..................................................................................13
OC5.7.2.3 Anchor HVDC Test or Anchor DC Converter Test ..............................................14
OC5.7.2.4 Top up Restoration Plant Tests ...........................................................................15
OC5.7.2.5 Quick Re-synchronisation Unit Test ....................................................................16
OC5.7.2.6 Distribution Restoration Zone Control System Tests ..........................................16
OC5.7.3 Failure of Restoration Service Tests ..............................................................................16
OC5.8 PROCEDURES APPLYING TO EMBEDDED MEDIUM POWER STATION NOT SUBJECT TO
A BILATERAL AGREEMENT AND EMBEDDED DC CONVERTER STATIONS NOT SUBJECT TO A
BILATERAL AGREEMENT ....................................................................................................................18
APPENDIX 1 - ONSITE SIGNAL PROVISION FOR WITNESSING TESTS .........................................21
APPENDIX 2 - COMPLIANCE TESTING OF SYNCHRONOUS PLANT ..............................................27
APPENDIX 3 - COMPLIANCE TESTING OF POWER PARK MODULES (AND OTSUA)....................38
APPENDIX 4 - COMPLIANCE TESTING FOR DC CONVERTERS AT A DC CONVERTER STATION
................................................................................................................................................................49

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

i
OC5.1 INTRODUCTION
Operating Code No. 5 ("OC5") specifies the procedures to be followed by The Company in
carrying out:
(a) monitoring
(i) of BM Units against their expected input or output;
(ii) of compliance by Users with the CC or ECC as applicable and in the case of
response to Frequency, BC3; and
(iii) of the provision by Users of Ancillary Services which they are required or have
agreed to provide; and
(b) the following tests (which are subject to System conditions prevailing on the day):
(i) tests on Gensets, CCGT Modules, Power Generating Modules, Power Park
Modules, DC Converters, HVDC Equipment, OTSUA (prior to the OTSUA
Transfer Time) and Generating Units (excluding Power Park Units) to test that
they have the capability to comply with the CC and ECC, and in the case of response
to Frequency, BC3 and to provide the Ancillary Services that they are either
required or have agreed to provide;
(ii) tests on BM Units, to ensure that the BM Units are available in accordance with
their submitted Export and Import Limits and Dynamic Parameters.
The tests specified in OC5.7 include the procedures relating to System Restoration Tests.
OC5 also specifies in OC5.8 the procedures which apply to the monitoring and testing of
Embedded Medium Power Stations not subject to a Bilateral Agreement and Embedded
DC Converter Stations (or Embedded HVDC Equipment) not subject to a Bilateral
Agreement.
In respect of a Cascade Hydro Scheme the provisions of OC5 shall be applied as follows:
(a) in respect of the BM Unit for the Cascade Hydro Scheme the parameters referred to at
OC5.4.1 (a) and (c) in respect of Commercial Ancillary Services will be monitored and
tested;
(b) in respect of each Genset forming part of the Cascade Hydro Scheme the parameters
referred to at OC5.4.1 (a), (b) and (c) will be tested and monitored. In respect of OC5.4.1
(a) the performance of the Gensets will be tested and monitored against their expected
input or output derived from the data submitted under BC1.4.2(a)(2). Where necessary
to give effect to the requirements for Cascade Hydro Schemes in the following
provisions of OC5, the term Genset will be read and construed in the place of BM Unit.
In respect of Embedded Exemptable Large Power Stations the provisions of OC5 shall be
applied as follows:
(a) where there is a BM Unit registered in the BSC in respect of Generating Units the
provisions of OC5 shall apply as written;
(b) in all other cases, in respect of each Power Generating Module, and/or Generating Unit
and HVDC Equipment the parameters referred to at OC5.4.1(a), (b) and (c) will be tested
and monitored. In respect of OC5.4.1(a) the performance of the Power Generating
Module and/or Generating Unit and HVDC Equipment will be tested and monitored
against their expected input or output derived from the data submitted under
BC1.4.2(a)(2). Where necessary to give effect to the requirements for such Embedded
Exemptable Large Power Stations in the provisions of OC5, the term Generating Unit
will be read and construed in place of BM Unit.

OC5.2 OBJECTIVE
The objectives of OC5 are to establish:
(a) that Users comply with the CC or ECC as applicable (including in the case of OTSUA
prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time);

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

2 of 58
 (b) whether BM Units operate in accordance with their expected input or output derived from
their Final Physical Notification Data and agreed Bid-Offer Acceptances issued under
BC2;
(c) whether each BM Unit is available as declared in accordance with its submitted Export
and Import Limits and Dynamic Parameters; and
(d) whether Generators, DC Converter Station owners, HVDC Equipment Owners and
Suppliers can provide those Ancillary Services which they are either required or have
agreed to provide.
In certain limited circumstances as specified in this OC5, the output of CCGT Units may be
verified, namely the monitoring of the provision of Ancillary Services and the testing of
Reactive Power and automatic Frequency Sensitive Operation.

OC5.3 SCOPE
OC5 applies to The Company and to Users, which in OC5 means:
(a) Generators (including those undertaking OTSDUW);
(b) Network Operators;
(c) Non-Embedded Customers;
(d) Suppliers; and
(e) DC Converter Station owners or HVDC Equipment Owners.

OC5.4 MONITORING
OC5.4.1 Parameters to be monitored
The Company will monitor the performance of:
(a) BM Units against their expected input or output derived from their Final Physical
Notification Data and agreed Bid-Offer Acceptances issued under BC2;
(b) compliance by Users with the CC or ECC as applicable; and
(c) the provision by Users of Ancillary Services which they are required or have agreed to
provide.
OC5.4.2 Procedure for Monitoring
OC5.4.2.1 In the event that a BM Unit fails persistently, in The Company's reasonable view, to follow,
in any material respect, its expected input or output or a User fails persistently to comply with
the CC or ECC as applicable, or fails to comply in the case of CC.6.3.15 or ECC 6.3.15 as
applicable, and in the case of response to Frequency, BC3 or to provide the Ancillary
Services it is required, or has agreed, to provide, The Company shall notify the relevant User
giving details of the failure and of the monitoring that The Company has carried out.
OC5.4.2.2 The relevant User will, as soon as possible, and in the case of a failure to comply with the
requirements of CC.6.3.15 or ECC.6.3.15 as applicable, within 2 hours in respect of a
notification to this effect under OC10 or a longer time period only where agreed by The
Company, provide The Company with an explanation of the reasons for the failure and details
of the action that it proposes to take to:
(a) enable the BM Unit to meet its expected input or output or to provide the Ancillary
Services it is required or has agreed to provide, within a reasonable period, or
(b) in the case of a Power Generating Module, Generating Unit (excluding a Power Park
Unit), CCGT Module, Power Park Module, OTSUA (prior to the OTSUA Transfer
Time), HVDC Equipment or DC Converter to comply with the CC or ECC as applicable
and in the case of response to Frequency, BC3 or to provide the Ancillary Services it
is required or has agreed to provide, within a reasonable period.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

3 of 58
 (c) in the case of a Power Generating Module, Generating Unit (excluding a Power Park
Unit), CCGT Module, Power Park Module, OTSUA (prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time),
HVDC Equipment or DC Converter which has tripped off or de-loaded coincident with a fault
as described in CC.6.3.15 or ECC.6.3.15, resolve any non-compliance, within a reasonable
period.
For the avoidance of doubt in the case of CC.6.3.15 or ECC.6.3.15 as applicable, the
explanation may indicate that the User has complied with CC.6.3.15 or ECC.6.3.15 on the
basis that:
(i) the User had complied with CC.6.3.15 or ECC.6.3.15 as applicable on the basis
that the User has provided recordings to show the voltage waveform during the
fault was beyond the conditions specified in CC.6.3.15 or ECC.6.3.15 as
applicable; or
(ii) the User’s Connection Point had been de-energised by receipt of an intertrip
signal from the National Electricity Transmission System; or
(iii) that other information has been shared between the User and The Company
enabling agreement between them that compliance with CC.6.3.15 or
ECC.6.3.15 as applicable has been confirmed.
Data relating to a fault on the Transmission System that The Company believes has led to
Users to co-incidentally trip or de-load is to be provided by The Company, where available,
in a file structure as agreed with the User. Where waveform data is available, this will be
obtained from the recorder electrically closest to the User’s Connection Point.
OC5.4.2.3 In the event of a User being notified under OC5.4.2.1 by The Company of a potential failure
to comply with CC6.3.15 or ECC6.3.15 as applicable and where the User is required to provide
an explanation as described in OC5.4.2.2(c), the User shall take action to restrict the output
of their Power Generating Module, Generating Unit (excluding a Power Park Unit), CCGT
Module, Power Park Module, OTSUA (prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time), HVDC
Equipment or DC Converter to a level and for a period as agreed with The Company or until
an explanation has been provided by the User and agreed between the User and The
Company as set out under OC5.4.2.2(c).
OC5.4.2.4 The Company and the User will discuss any action the User proposes to take and will
endeavour to reach agreement as to:
(a) any short term operational measures necessary to protect other Users; and
(b) the parameters which are to be submitted for the BM Unit and the effective time(s) and
date(s) for the application of the agreed parameters. For the avoidance of doubt in the case of
a failure to comply with CC.6.3.15 or ECC.6.3.15 as applicable which requires the User to
provide an explanation as described in OC5.4.2.2(c), this may be to zero MW or another value
if agreed between the User and The Company.
OC5.4.2.5 In the event that agreement cannot be reached within 10 days of notification of the failure by
The Company to the User, The Company or the User shall be entitled to require a test, as
set out in OC5.5 and OC5.6, to be carried out, except in respect of CC.6.3.15 or ECC.6.3.15,
as applicable, where testing is impractical and OC.5.4.2.6 shall apply instead.
OC5.4.2.6 In the case of a Power Generating Module, Generating Unit (excluding a Power Park Unit),
CCGT Module, Power Park Module, OTSUA (prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time), HVDC
Equipment or DC Converter identifying their non-compliance with CC.6.3.15 or ECC.6.3.15
as applicable by completion of their report into this as set out in OC10, The Company will as
soon as reasonably practicable, issue a Limited Operational Notification or amend any
Interim Operational Notification.
OC5.4.2.7 The requirements of OC5.4.2.1 – OC5.4.2.6 shall not apply during System Restoration,
unless The Company expressly notifies the User.
OC5.5 PROCEDURE FOR TESTING
OC5.5.1 The Company’s Instruction for Testing

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

4 of 58
OC5.5.1.1 The Company may at any time (although not normally more than twice in any calendar year
in respect of any particular BM Unit) issue an instruction requiring a User to carry out a test,
provided The Company has reasonable grounds of justification based upon:
(a) a failure to agree arising from the process in CP.8.1 or ECP.8.1; or
(b) monitoring carried out in accordance with OC5.4.2.
OC5.5.1.2 The test, referred to in OC5.5.1.1 and carried out at a time no sooner than 48 hours from the
time that the instruction was issued, on any one or more of the User’s BM Units should only
be to demonstrate that the relevant BM Unit:
(a) if active in the Balancing Mechanism, meets the ability to operate in accordance with its
submitted Export and Import Limits and Dynamic Parameters and achieve its
expected input or output which has been monitored under OC5.4; and
(b) meets the requirements of the paragraphs in the CC and ECC which are applicable to
such BM Units; and
in the case of a BM Unit comprising a Generating Unit, a CCGT Module, a Power Park
Module, a Power Generating Module, HVDC System or a DC Converter meets,
(c) the requirements for operation in Frequency Sensitive Mode and compliance with the
requirements for operation in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode in accordance with
CC.6.3.3, ECC.6.3.3, CC.6.3.7, ECC.6.3.7, BC3.5.2, BC.3.7.1 and BC3.7.2; or
(d) the terms of the applicable Bilateral Agreement agreed with the Generator to have a
Fast Start Capability; or
(e) the Reactive Power capability registered with The Company under OC2 which shall
meet the requirements set out in CC.6.3.2 or ECC.6.3.2 as applicable. In the case of a
test on a Generating Unit within a CCGT Module the instruction need not identify the
particular CCGT Unit within the CCGT Module which is to be tested, but instead may
specify that a test is to be carried out on one of the CCGT Units within the CCGT Module.
OC5.5.1.3 (a) The instruction referred to in OC5.5.1.1 may only be issued if the relevant User has
submitted Export and Import Limits which notify that the relevant BM Unit is available
in respect of the Operational Day current at the time at which the instruction is issued.
The relevant User shall then be obliged to submit Export and Import Limits with a
magnitude greater than zero for that BM Unit in respect of the time and the duration that
the test is instructed to be carried out, unless that BM Unit would not then be available
by reason of forced outage or Planned Outage expected prior to this instruction.
(b) In the case of a CCGT Module the Export and Import Limits data must relate to the
same CCGT Units which were included in respect of the Operational Day current at the
time at which the instruction referred to in OC5.5.1.1 is issued and must include, in relation
to each of the CCGT Units within the CCGT Module, details of the various data set out
in BC1.A.1.3 and BC1.A.1.5, which parameters The Company will utilise in instructing in
accordance with this OC5 in issuing Bid-Offer Acceptances. The parameters shall
reasonably reflect the true operating characteristics of each CCGT Unit.
(c) The test referred to in OC5.5.1.1 will be initiated by the issue of instructions, which may
be accompanied by a Bid-Offer Acceptance, under BC2 (in accordance with the Export
and Import Limits and Dynamic Parameters which have been submitted for the day on
which the test was called, or in the case of a CCGT Unit, in accordance with the
parameters submitted under OC5.5.1.3(b)). The instructions in respect of a CCGT Unit
within a CCGT Module will be in respect of the CCGT Unit, as provided in BC2.
OC5.5.2 User Request for Testing
OC5.5.2.1 Where a GB Code User undertakes a test to demonstrate compliance with the Grid Code
and Bilateral Agreement in accordance with CP.6 or CP.7 or CP.8 (other than a failure
between The Company and a GB Code User to agree in CP.8.1 where OC5.5.1.1 applies)
the GB Code User shall request permission to test using the process laid out in OC7.5.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

5 of 58
OC5.5.2.2 Where an EU Code User undertakes a test to demonstrate compliance with the Grid Code
and Bilateral Agreement in accordance with ECP.6.1, ECP.6.2, ECP.6.3 or ECP.7 or ECP.8
(other than a failure between The Company and a EU Code User to agree in ECP.8.1 where
OC5.5.1.1 applies) the EU Code User shall request permission to test using the process laid
out in OC7.5.
OC5.5.3 Conduct of Test
OC5.5.3.1 The performance of the BM Unit will be recorded at Transmission Control Centres notified
by The Company with monitoring at site when necessary, from voltage and current signals
provided by the User for each BM Unit under CC.6.6.1 or ECC.6.6.1 as applicable.
OC5.5.3.2 If monitoring at site is undertaken, the performance of the BM Unit will be recorded on a
suitable recorder (with measurements, in the case of a Synchronous Generating Unit (which
could be part of a Synchronous Power Generating Module), taken on the Generating Unit
stator terminals / on the LV side of the generator transformer) or in the case of a Non-
Synchronous Generating Unit (excluding Power Park Units), Power Generating Module,
Power Park Module or HVDC Equipment or DC Converter at the point of connection
(including where the OTSUA is operational prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time, the
Transmission Interface Point) in the relevant User’s Control Room, in the presence of a
reasonable number of representatives appointed and authorised by The Company. If The
Company or the User requests, monitoring at site will include measurement of the parameters
set out in OC5.A.1.2 or OC5.A.1.3 or ECP.A4.2 or ECP.A.4.3 as appropriate.
OC5.5.3.3 The User is responsible for carrying out the test on their Plant and retains the responsibility
for the safety of personnel and their Plant during the test.
OC5.5.4 Test and Monitoring Assessment
The criteria must be read in conjunction with the full text under the Grid Code reference. The
BM Unit, Power Generating Module, CCGT Module, Power Park Module or Generating
Unit (excluding Power Park Units), HVDC Equipment and DC Converters and OTSUA will
pass the test the criteria below are met:

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

6 of 58
 Criteria against which the test results will be assessed
Capability to be Tested
by The Company.

Harmonic Content CC.6.1.5(a) or ECC.6.1.5(a) Measured harmonic

emissions do not exceed the limits specified in the
Bilateral Agreement or where no such limits are
specified, the relevant planning level specified in
Engineering Recommendation G5.

Phase Unbalance CC.6.1.5(b) or ECC.6.1.5(b), The measured maximum

Phase (Voltage) Unbalance on the National Electricity
Transmission System should remain, in England and
Wales, below 1% and, in Scotland, below 2% and
Offshore will be defined in relevant Bilateral
Agreement.
CC.6.1.6 or ECC.6.1.6 In England and Wales, measured
Voltage Quality

infrequent short duration peaks in Phase (Voltage)

Unbalance should not exceed the maximum value
stated in the Bilateral Agreement.

Rapid Voltage Change CC.6.1.7(a) or ECC.6.1.7(a) The measured Rapid

Voltage Change at the Point of Common Coupling
shall not exceed the Planning Levels specified in
CC.6.1.7(a) or ECC 6.1.7.(i)

Flicker Severity CC.6.1.7(j) or ECC.6.1.7(j) The measured Flicker

Severity at the Point of Common Coupling shall not
exceed the limits specified in the table of CC.6.1.7(j) or
ECC 6.1.7(j).

Voltage Fluctuation CC.6.1.8 or ECC.6.1.8 Offshore, measured voltage

fluctuations at the Point of Common Coupling shall not
exceed the limits set out in the Bilateral Agreement.

Fault Clearance Times CC.6.2.2.2.2(a), CC.6.2.3.1.1(a), ECC.6.2.2.2.2(a),

ECC.6.2.3.1.1(a), Bilateral Agreement
Fault Clearance

Back Up Protection CC.6.2.2.2.2(b), CC.6.2.3.1.1(b), ECC.6.2.2.2.2(a),

ECC.6.2.3.1.1(a), Bilateral Agreement

Circuit Breaker Fail CC.6.2.2.2.2(c), CC.6.2.3.1.1(c), ECC.6.2.2.2.2(c),

Protection ECC.6.2.3.1.1(c)

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

7 of 58
 Criteria against which the test results will be assessed
Capability to be Tested
by The Company.

Reactive Capability CC.6.3.2 or ECC.6.3.2 (and in the case of CC.6.3.2(e)(iii)

and ECC.6.3.2.5 and ECC.6.3.2.6, the Bilateral
Agreement), CC.6.3.4, Ancillary Services Agreement.
For a test initiated under OC.5.5.1.1 the Power
Generating Module, Generating Unit, HVDC
Equipment, DC Converter or Power Park Module or
(prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time) OTSUA will pass
the test if it is within ±5% of the reactive capability
registered with The Company under OC2. The duration
of the test will be for a period of up to 60 minutes during
which period the System voltage at the Grid Entry Point
for the relevant Power Generating Module, Generating
Unit, HVDC Equipment, DC Converter or Power Park
Module or Interface Point in the case of OTSUA will be
maintained by the Generator or HVDC System Owner,
DC Converter Station owner at the voltage specified
pursuant to BC2.8 by adjustment of Reactive Power on
the remaining Power Generating Module, Generating
Unit, HVDC Equipment, DC Converter or Power Park
Modules or OTSUA, if necessary. Any test performed in
respect of an Embedded Medium Power Station not
subject to a Bilateral Agreement or, an Embedded DC
Converter Station or Embedded HVDC System not
subject to a Bilateral Agreement shall be as confirmed
pursuant to OC5.8.3.
Measurements of the Reactive Power output under
steady state conditions should be consistent with Grid
Code requirements i.e. fully available within the voltage
range ±5% at all voltages.

Primary Secondary and Ancillary Services Agreement, CC.6.3.7 and where

High Frequency applicable CC.A.3 or ECC.6.3.7 and where applicable
Response ECC.A.3.
For a test initiated under OC.5.5.1.1 the measured
response in MW/Hz is within ±5% of the level of response
specified in the Ancillary Services Agreement for that
Governor / Frequency Control

Genset.

Stability with Voltage CC.6.3.4 or ECC.6.3.4

Governor / Load / CC.6.3.6(a), CC.6.3.7, CC.6.3.9, CC8.1, where

Frequency Controller applicable CC.A.3, BC3.5, BC3.6, BC3.7 or ECC.6.3.6,
System Compliance ECC.6.3.7, ECC.6.3.9, ECC8.1, where applicable
ECC.A.3, BC3.5, BC3.6, BC3.7

Output at Reduced CC.6.3.3 or ECC.6.3.3 - For variations in System

System Frequency Frequency exceeding 0.1Hz within a period of less than
10 seconds, the Active Power output is within ±0.2% of
the requirements of CC.6.3.3 or ECC.6.3.3 when
monitored at prevailing external air temperatures of up to
25ºC., BC3.5.1

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

8 of 58
 Criteria against which the test results will be assessed
Capability to be Tested
by The Company.

Fast Start Ancillary Services Agreement requirements

System Restoration OC5.7

Excitation/Voltage Control CC.6.3.6(b), CC.6.3.8, CC.A.6 or CC.A.7 as applicable,

System BC2.11.2, and the Bilateral Agreement or ECC.6.3.6,
ECC.6.3.8, ECC.A.6 or ECC.A.7 or ECC.A.8 and the
Bilateral Agreement as applicable

Fault Ride Through and CC.6.3.15, CC.A.4.A or CC.A.4.B as applicable or

Fast Fault Current ECC.6.3.15, ECC.6.3.16, ECC.A.4 as applicable
Injection

Export and Import Limits BC2

and Dynamic Parameters
The Export and Import Limits and Dynamic
Parameters under test are within 2½% of the declared
value being tested.

Synchronisation time BC2.5.2.3

Synchronisation takes place within ±5 minutes of the
time it should have achieved Synchronisation.
Dynamic Parameters

Run-up rates BC2

Achieves the instructed output and, where applicable,
the first and/or second intermediate breakpoints, each
within ±3 minutes of the time it should have reached such
output and breakpoints from Synchronisation (or break
point, as the case may be), calculated from the run-up
rates in its Dynamic Parameters.

Run-down rates BC2

Achieves the instructed output and, where applicable,
the first and/or second intermediate breakpoints, each
within ±5 minutes of the time it should have reached such
output and breakpoints from Synchronisation (or break
point, as the case may be), calculated from the run-up
rates in its Dynamic Parameters.

Demand Response DRSC.11.7

Non-Embedded Customers and BM Participants who

are also Demand Response Providers shall execute a
demand modification test when requested as per
DRSC.11.7 to ensure the requirements of the Ancillary
Services agreement and Demand Response Services
Code are satisfied.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

9 of 58
OC5.5.4.1 The duration of the Dynamic Parameter tests in the above table will be consistent with and
sufficient to measure the relevant expected input or output derived from the Final Physical
Notification Data and Bid-Offer Acceptances issued under BC2 which are still in dispute
following the procedure in OC5.4.2.
OC5.5.4.2 Due account will be taken of any conditions on the System which may affect the results of the
test. The relevant User must, if requested, demonstrate, to The Company's reasonable
satisfaction, the reliability of the suitable recorders, disclosing calibration records to the extent
appropriate.
OC5.5.5 Test Failure / Re-test
OC5.5.5.1 If the BM Unit, Power Generating Module, CCGT Module, Power Park Module, OTSUA,
or Generating Unit (excluding Power Park Units), HVDC Equipment or DC Converter
Station concerned fails to pass the test instructed by The Company under OC5.5.1.1, the
User must provide The Company with a written report specifying in reasonable detail the
reasons for any failure of the test so far as they are then known to the User after due and
careful enquiry. This must be provided within five Business Days of the test.
OC5.5.5.2 If in The Company’s reasonable opinion, the failure to pass the test relates to compliance
with the CC or ECC as applicable, then The Company may invoke the process detailed in
CP.8.2 to CP.9, or ECP.8.2 to ECP.9
OC5.5.5.3 If a dispute arises relating to the failure, The Company and the relevant User shall seek to
resolve the dispute by discussion, and, if they fail to reach agreement, the User may by notice
require The Company to carry out a re-test on 48 hours' notice which shall be carried out
following the procedure set out in OC5.5.3 and OC5.5.4 and subject as provided in OC5.5.1.3,
as if The Company had issued an instruction at the time of notice from the User.
OC5.5.6 Dispute Following Re-Test
If the BM Unit, Power Generating Module, CCGT Module, Power Park Module, OTSUA,
or Generating Unit (excluding Power Park Units), HVDC Equipment or DC Converter in
The Company's view fails to pass the re-test and a dispute arises on that re-test, either party
may use the Disputes Resolution Procedure for a ruling in relation to the dispute, which
ruling shall be binding.

OC5.6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION

OC5.6.1 If following the procedure set out in OC5.5 it is accepted that the BM Unit, Power Generating
Module, CCGT Module, Power Park Module, OTSUA (prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time)
or Generating Unit (excluding Power Park Units) ), HVDC Equipment or DC Converter has
failed the test or re-test (as applicable), the User shall within 14 days, or such longer period
as The Company may reasonably agree, following such failure, submit in writing to The
Company for approval the date and time by which the User shall have brought the BM Unit
concerned to a condition where it complies with the relevant requirement. The Company will
not unreasonably withhold or delay its approval of the User’s proposed date and time
submitted. Should The Company not approve the User’s proposed date or time (or any
revised proposal), the User should amend such proposal having regard to any comments The
Company may have made and re-submit it for approval.
OC5.6.2 If a BM Unit fails the test, the User shall submit revised Export and Import Limits and/or
Dynamic Parameters, or in the case of a BM Unit comprising a Generating Unit, Power
Generating Module, CCGT Module, HVDC Equipment, DC Converter, OTSUA (prior to the
OTSUA Transfer Time) or Power Park Module, the User may amend, with The Company's
approval, the relevant registered parameters of that Generating Unit, Power Generating
Module, CCGT Module, HVDC Equipment, DC Converter, OTSUA (prior to the OTSUA
Transfer Time) or Power Park Module, as the case may be, relating to the criteria, for the
period of time until the BM Unit can achieve the parameters previously registered, as
demonstrated in a re-test.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

10 of 58
OC5.6.3 Once the User has indicated to The Company the date and time that the BM Unit, Power
Generating Module, CCGT Module, Power Park Module, Generating Unit (excluding
Power Park Units) or OTSUA (prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time), HVDC Equipment or DC
Converter Station can achieve the parameters previously registered or submitted, The
Company shall either accept this information or require the User to demonstrate the
restoration of the capability by means of a repetition of the test referred to in OC5.5.3 by an
instruction requiring the User on 48 hours notice to carry out such a test. The provisions of
this OC5.6 will apply to such further test.
OC5.7 SYSTEM RESTORATION TESTING

OC5.7.1 General

As provided for in OC9.1.1 there are two ways in which the Total System (or disconnected
part of the Total System in the case of a Partial Shutdown) can be re-established. These
being a top-down approach using Local Joint Restoration Plans or a bottom-up approach
using Distribution Restoration Zone Plans which are necessary in order to satisfy the
requirements of the Electricity System Restoration Standard.
To help achieve this objective, it is essential that Restoration Contractors test their Plant
and Apparatus at regular intervals to demonstrate that there is a high level of confidence that
they will be able to satisfy the requirements of the Grid Code and their Anchor Restoration
Contracts or Top Up Restoration Contracts.

(a) The Company and/or relevant Network Operator shall require a Restoration
Contractor to carry out testing in order to demonstrate that its Plant and Apparatus has
the appropriate capability.
(i) In the case of an Anchor Generating Unit, The Company and/or relevant Network
Operator shall require the Restoration Contractor to carry out a test (either a
Anchor Generating Unit Test or a Anchor Power Station Test) in order to
demonstrate that an Anchor Plant has Anchor Plant Capability.
(ii) In the case of either an Anchor HVDC System or Anchor DC Converter, The
Company or relevant Network Operator shall require the Restoration Contractor
to carry out a test (an Anchor HVDC System Test or Anchor DC Converter Test),
in order to demonstrate that an Anchor HVDC System or Anchor DC Converter has
Anchor Plant Capability.
(iii) In the case of an EU Generator with an Anchor Plant Capability who is also a
Restoration Contractor, The Company and/or relevant Network Operator may also
require the Restoration Contractor to carry out a test (a Quick Resynchronisation
Unit Test) in order to demonstrate that its Anchor Power Station has Quick Re-
Synchronisation Capability.
(iv) In the case of a Top Up Restoration Plant, The Company and/or relevant Network
Operator shall require the Top Up Restoration Contractor to demonstrate that the
requirements of their Top Up Restoration Contract can be fulfilled.
(b) Where The Company and/or relevant Network Operator requires a Restoration
Contractor to undertake testing, the following requirements shall apply:-

(i) Each Anchor Generating Unit within an Anchor Power Station shall be required
to undertake an Anchor Generating Unit Test at least once every three years. The
Company and/or relevant Network Operator shall not require the Anchor
Generating Unit Test to be carried out on more than one Generating Unit at that
Anchor Power Station at the same time, and would not, in the absence of
exceptional circumstances, expect any of the other Generating Units at the Anchor
Power Station to be directly affected by the Anchor Generating Unit Test.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

11 of 58
 (ii) The Company and/or relevant Network Operator may occasionally require the
Anchor Generator to carry out an Anchor Power StationTest at any time (but will
not require a Anchor Power Station Test to be carried out more than once in every
three calendar years in respect of any particular Generating Unit unless it can justify
on reasonable grounds the necessity for further tests or unless the further test is a
re-test). If successful, this Anchor Power Station Test shall count as a successful
Anchor Generating Unit Test for the Generating Unit used in the test.
(iii) The Company and/or relevant Network Operator shall require the Anchor HVDC
System Owner or Anchor DC Converter Owner to carry out an Anchor HVDC
System Test at least once every three years which could be at any time (but such a
test will not be required to be carried out more than once in every three calendar
years unless it can justify on reasonable grounds the necessity for further tests or
unless the further test is a re-test).
(iv) The Company and/or relevant Network Operator may require the EU Generator
to carry out a Quick Re-Synchronisation Test at any time, but this will generally
only be required where the EU Generator has made a change to its Plant and
Apparatus which has an impact on its Houseload Operation or after two
unsuccessful tripping Events in the operational environment. The timing of the test
shall be agreed by the relevant parties.
(v) The Company and/or relevant Network Operator shall require the Restoration
Contractor to carry out testing on its Top Up Restoration Plant at least once every
three years which could be at any time (but such a test will not be required to be
carried out more than once in every three calendar years unless it can justify on
reasonable grounds the necessity for further tests or unless the further test is a
retest).
The above tests will be deemed a success where starting from Shutdown is achieved within
a time frame specified by The Company and/or relevant Network Operator and which will
be agreed in the Restoration Contract.

(c) When The Company and/or relevant Network Operator wishes a Restoration
Contractor to carry out either an Anchor Generating Unit Test, an Anchor Power
Station Test, an Anchor System HVDC Test, Quick Re-Synchronisation Test or Top
Up Restoration Test, it shall notify the relevant Restoration Contractor at least 7 days
prior to the time of the test with details of the proposed test.
OC5.7.2 Procedures for Restoration Service Tests
OC5.7.2.1 Anchor Generating Unit Tests
(a) The relevant Generating Unit shall be Synchronised and Loaded.
(b) All the Auxiliary Energy Supplies in the Anchor Power Station in which that
Generating Unit is situated, shall be Shutdown.
(c) The Generating Unit shall be De-Loaded and De-Synchronised and all alternating
current electrical supplies to its Auxiliaries shall be disconnected.
(d) The Auxiliary Energy Supplies to the relevant Generating Unit shall be started, and
shall re-energise the Unit Board of the relevant Generating Unit.
(e) The Auxiliaries of the relevant Generating Unit shall be fed by the Auxiliary Energy
Supplies, via the Unit Board, to enable the relevant Generating Unit to return to
Synchronous Speed.
(f) The relevant Generating Unit shall be Synchronised to the System but not Loaded,
unless a subsequent instruction is issued by The Company or relevant Network
Operator under BC2.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

12 of 58
 (g) Where required by The Company and/or relevant Network Operator and technically
feasible, the test may be arranged such that the relevant Generating Unit shall energise
the dead sections of the System as required in the relevant Restoration Plan. As part
of these tests, The Company (in the case of an Local Joint Restoration Plan) or
Network Operator (in the case of a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan) may require
the Anchor Generator to undertake a:
a) A dead line charge test only; or
b) A dead line charge and a remote synchronisation test.

A dead line charge test would require the steps detailed in (i) and (ii) below to be
undertaken. A remote synchronisation test would require the steps detailed in (i) – (iii)
below to be undertaken.
i) Start-Up of one or more of the Generating Units at the Anchor Power Station
under normal operational conditions;
ii) Re-energisation of a dead test section of the Total System as defined in the
Local Joint Restoration Plan or Distribution Restoration Zone Plan as
appropriate; and
iii) Demonstration of the ability to synchronise to a section of the Total System at a
location remote from the Anchor Power Station’s Grid Entry Point or User
System Entry Point (as the case may be).
A dead line charge test is to demonstrate the Anchor Generating Unit’s ability to charge
a pre-defined dead part of the Total System and its ability to control the voltage on that
part of the Total System.
A remote synchronisation test is used to demonstrate the successful operation of a
Transmission Licensee’s or Network Operator’s system synchronising facilities across
individual circuit breakers which are either i) a necessary part of a Local Joint
Restoration Plan or ii) defined in a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan.
When planning a dead line charge test, consideration shall be given to the effect the test
will have on Customers supplied from the part of the Total System that needs to be de-
energised, including whether their supplies would need to be interrupted to undertake the
test. Where possible, tests should be conducted to avoid interruption to Customer
supplies however where this is not possible, alternative tests or computer simulation
exercises can be agreed between The Company, Relevant Transmission Licensee (as
applicable), the Network Operator (as applicable) and the Restoration Contractor.
Where it is identified that routine testing cannot be undertaken which is critical to
restoration of the Total System, from a strategic perspective, as a result of interruption
to Customer supplies, consideration should be given to System reconfiguration where
such a change is technically and economically viable which would be agreed between
The Company, Relevant Transmission Licnesee and Network Operator (as
appropriate).
(h) In respect of EU Generators, the above tests defined in OC5.7.2.1(a) – (g) shall be
assessed against the requirements of ECC.6.3.5.3.
(i) The Company and/or Network Operator shall agree with Anchor Restoration
Contractor when the above tests have been completed.

OC5.7.2.2 Anchor Power Station Test

(a) All Generating Units at the Anchor Power Station, other than the Generating Unit on
which the Anchor Plant Test is to be carried out, and all the Auxiliary Energy Supplies
at the Anchor Power Station, shall be Shutdown.
(b) The relevant Generating Unit shall be Synchronised and Loaded.
(c) The relevant Generating Unit shall be De-Loaded and De-Synchronised.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

13 of 58
 (d) All external alternating current electrical supplies to the Unit Board of the relevant
Generating Unit, and to the Station Board of the relevant Anchor Power Station, shall
be disconnected.
(e) Auxiliary Energy Supplies at the Anchor Power Station shall be started, and shall re-
energise either directly, or via the Station Board or the Unit Board of the relevant
Generating Unit.
(f) The provisions of OC5.7.2.1 (e) to (i) in respect of the Generating Units in the Anchor
Power Station shall thereafter be followed.
(g) In respect of EU Generators, the above tests defined in OC5.7.2.2(a) – (f) shall be
assessed against the requirements of ECC.6.3.5.3.

OC5.7.2.3 Anchor HVDC Test or Anchor DC Converter Test

a) The HVDC System or DC Converter shall demonstrate its technical capability to energise
the busbar of the disconnected AC substation to which it is connected, within the GB
Synchronous Area within a timeframe specified by The Company and/or relevant
Network Operator in the Anchor Restoration Contract or Top Up Restoration
Contract. In the case of HVDC Systems this shall be in accordance with the
requirements of ECC.6.3.5.4. As part of this test, all Auxiliaries are required to be derived
from within the HVDC System or DC Converter Station;
b) The test shall be carried out while the HVDC System or DC Converter Station starts from
Shutdown;
c) The test shall be deemed to have been successfully completed when the following
conditions are cumulatively fulfilled:
i) The HVDC System Owner has demonstrated its HVDC System or DC Converter
Station is able to energise the busbar of the isolated AC-substation to which it is
connected within the GB Synchronous Area.
ii) The HVDC System or DC Converter Station can achieve a stable operating point at
an agreed capacity as agreed with The Company and/or relevant Network Operator.
The relevant HVDC System or DC Converter Station can be connected to the Total
System but not Loaded, unless appropriate instructions are given by The Company
under BC2 which would also be in accordance with the requirements of the Anchor
Restoration Contract.
iii) In respect of HVDC Systems and Remote End HVDC Converter Stations, the above
tests defined in OC5.7.2.3(a) – (c) shall be assessed against the requirements of
ECC.6.1.2, ECC.6.1.4, ECC.6.2.2.9.4 and ECC.6.3.5.4.
iv) In respect of DC Converter Stations, the above tests defined in OC5.7.2.3(a) – (c)
shall be assessed against the requirements of, CC.6.1.2, CC.6.1.3 and CC.6.1.4.
(d) As part of these tests, The Company (in the case of an Local Joint Restoration Plan)
or Network Operator (in the case of a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan) may require
the Anchor HVDC System Owner or Anchor DC Converter Owner to undertake a:
a) A dead line charge test only; or
b) A dead line charge and a remote synchronisation test.

A dead line charge test would require the steps detailed in OC5.7.2.3(d) (i) and (ii) to be
undertaken. A remote synchronisation test would require the steps detailed in
OC5.7.2.3(d) (i) – (iii) to be undertaken.
i) Start-Up of the HVDC System or DC Converter Station under normal
operational conditions.
ii) Re-energisation of a dead test section of the Total System as defined in the
Local Joint Restoration Plan or Distribution Restoraion Zone Plan as
appropriate.
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024
14 of 58
 iii) Demonstration of the ability to synchronise to a section of the Total System at a
location remote from the HVDC System or DC Converter Station Grid Entry
Point or User System Entry Point (as the case may be).
A dead line charge test is to demonstrate the HVDC System or DC Converter Stations
ability to charge a pre-defined dead part of the Total System and its ability to control the
voltage on that part.
A remote synchronisation test is used to demonstrate the successful operation of a
Transmission Licensee’s or Network Operator’s system synchronising facilities across
individual circuit breakers which are either necessary part of a Local Joint Restoration
Plan or defined in a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan.
When planning a dead line charge test, consideration shall be given to the effect the test
will have on Customers supplied from the part of the Total System that needs to be de-
energised, including whether their supplies would need to be interrupted to undertake the
test. Where possible, tests should be conducted to avoid interruption to Customer
supplies however where this is not possible, alternative tests or computer simulation
exercises can be agreed between The Company, Relevant Transmission Licensee (as
applicable), Network Operator (as applicable) and Restoration Contractor. Where it
is identified that routine testing cannot be undertaken which is critical to restoration of the
Total System, from a strategic perspective, as a result of interruption to Customer
supplies, consideration should be given to System reconfiguration where such a change
is technically and economically viable which would be agreed between the The
Company, Relevant Transmission Licnesee and Network Operator (as appropriate).
OC5.7.2.4 Top Up Restoration Plant Tests
Top Up Restoration Contractors have contracts with The Company and where appropriate
Network Operators, to provide a service in respect of their Top Up Plant to contribute to a
Local Joint Restoration Plan or Distribution Restoration Zone Plan. As provided for in
OC9.4.7.7.4 and OC9.4.7.8.4, Top Up Restoration Contractors will be generally be
instructed to prepare their Top Up Restoration Plant immediately after instructions are issued
to Restoration Contractors in respect of their Anchor Plant such that a Top Up Restoration
Contractor can deliver the service they have agreed to provide, without delay, upon
restoration of external site supplies. The purpose of these tests is to demonstrate that Top
Up Restoration Plant has the capability in accordance with the requirements of the Top Up
Restoration Contract.
(a) Prior to the test, the relevant Transmission Licensee and/or Network Operator shall
reconfigure its System as necessary to enable the test of the relevant Plant and
Apparatus to be completed whilst having due regard for the safety of Plant and
Apparatus and personnel on or adjacent to its System, and for the public.
(b) The relevant Plant and/or Apparatus shall be operating normally, i.e. in the operational
state it is anticipated to be in if a Shutdown were to occur.
(c) All the Auxiliary Energy Supplies which relate to the relevant Plant and/or Apparatus
shall be Shutdown.
(d) The Plant and/or Apparatus shall be de-loaded, De-Synchronised and Shutdown as
appropriate and all alternating current electrical supplies to its Auxiliaries shall be
disconnected.
(e) Auxiliary Energy Supplies at the Top Up Plant shall be started, and shall re-energise
either directly, or via the Station Board or the Unit Board of the relevant Plant.
(f) With the Auxiliaries available the relevant Plant and/or Apparatus should be in a
position to return to a condition when it is ready to be reconnected and/or Synchronised
to the System.
(g) Relevant Top Up Restoration Plant shall be Synchronised to the System and shall be
Loaded with Active Power and/or Reactive Power as agreed with The Company and/or
the Network Operator, unless an overriding instruction has been given directly by The
Company or from The Company to the Network Operator under BC2.
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024
15 of 58
 (h) The Company and/or Network Operator shall agree with the Top Up Restoration
Contractor when the test has been completed.
OC5.7.2.5 Quick Re-synchronisation Unit Test

(a) The relevant Generating Unit shall be Synchronised and Loaded;

(b) All the Auxiliary Energy Supplies in the Anchor Power Station in which that
Generating Unit is situated, shall be Shutdown;
(c) The Generating Unit shall tripped to house load;
(d) The relevant Generating Unit shall be Synchronised to the System but not Loaded,
unless the appropriate instruction has been given by The Company and/or relevant
Network Operator under BC2 which would also be in accordance with the
requirements of the Anchor Restoration Contract;
In respect of EU Generators, the above tests defined in OC5.7.2.5(a) – (c) shall be assessed
against the requirements of ECC.6.3.5.6.
OC5.7.2.6 Distribution Restoration Zone Control System Tests
Where a Network Operator uses a Distribution Restoration Zone Control System as part
of the implementation of a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, the Network Operator shall
undertake tests or otherwise demonstrate the correct functioning of the Distribution
Restoration Zone Control System. The tests shall be in accordance with the applicable
electrical standard as listed in the annex to the General Conditions.

OC5.7.2.7 General Testing Arrangments

All the above tests listed in OC5.7.2.1 to OC5.7.2.6, shall be carried out at the time agreed by
The Company and/or relevant Network Operator in the notice given under OC5.7.1 and shall
be undertaken in the presence of a reasonable number of representatives appointed and
authorised by The Company and/or relevant Network Operator, who shall be given access
to all information relevant to the Test. In the case of a Restoration Contractor who wishes
to undertake their own tests independently of a test requested by The Company and/or
Relevant Network Operator, then they shall be undertaken in accordance with OC7.5.
OC5.7.3. Failure of Restoration Service Tests
OC5.7.3.1 An Anchor Restotion Contractor shall fail an Anchor Plant Test if it fails to enerigse parts
of the System and to provide the Active Power or Reactive Power output in accordance with
that specified in the Anchor Restoration Contract.
OC5.7.3.2 A Top Up Restoration Contractor shall fail a Top Up Restoration Plant Test if it fails to be
Synchronised to the System and to provide the Active Power or Reactive Power output in
accordance with that specified in the Top Up Restoration Contract.
OC5.7.3.4 If a Restoration Contractor’s Plant fails to pass a Restoration Service Test the
Restoration Contractor must provide The Company and/or relevant Network Operator with
a written report specifying in reasonable detail the reasons for any failure of the test so far as
they are then known to the Restoration Contractor after due and careful enquiry. This must
be provided within five Business Days of the test. If a dispute arises relating to the failure,
The Company and/or relevant Network Operator and the relevant Restoration Contractor
shall seek to resolve the dispute by discussion. To aid resolution of the dispute the
Restoration Contractor may request The Company and/or relevant Network Operator to
help facilitate a further Restoration Service Test with 48 hours notice which shall be carried
out following the applicable procedure set out in OC5.7.2.1 to OC5.7.2.7 as the case may be.
OC5.7.3.5 If the Restoration Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus concerned fails to pass the re-test and
a dispute arises on that re-test, the parties may use the Disputes Resolution Procedure for
a ruling in relation to the dispute, which shall be binding.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

16 of 58
OC5.7.3.6 If, following the procedure in OC5.7.3.4 and OC5.7.3.5, it is accepted that the Restoration
Contractor has failed the Restoration Service Test (or a re-test carried out under
OC5.7.2.7), within 14 days, or such longer period as The Company and/or relevant Network
Operator may reasonably agree, following such failure, the relevant Restoration Contractor
shall submit to The Company and/or relevant Network Operator in writing for approval, the
date and time by which that Restoration Contractor shall have brought the relevant Plant
and/or Apparatus back to a suitable state that it would pass a Restoration Service Test, and
The Company and/or relevant Network Operator will not unreasonably withhold or delay its
approval of the Restoration Contractor’s proposed date and time submitted. Should The
Company and/or relevant Network Operator not approve the Restoration Contractor’s
proposed date and time (or any revised proposal) the Restoration Contractor shall revise
such proposal, having regard to any comments The Company and/or relevant Network
Operators may have made, and resubmit it for approval.
OC5.7.3.7 Once the Restoration Contractor has indicated to The Company and/or relevant Network
Operator that the Restoration Contractor’s Plant and/or Apparatus has been restored to a
suitlable state, The Company and/or relevant Network Operator shall either accept this
information or require the Restoration Contractor to demonstrate that the relevant Plant
and/or Apparatus has its capability restored, by means of a repetition of the Restoration
Service Test referred to in OC5.7.1 following the same procedure as for the initial Restoration
Service Test. The provisions of this OC5.7.2 will apply to such test.
OC5.7.4 System Restoration Assurance, Awareness and Training
OC5.7.4.1 The Company will coordinate with Users and Restoration Contractors for undertaking
regular exercises with Users and Restoration Contractors to ensure System Restoration
plans are capable of meeting the Electricity System Restoration Standard.
OC5.7.4.2 The Company in coordination with Users and Restoration Contractors, from 31st December
2026, will undertake desk top and computer exercises and tests at the specified frequencies
defined in Part III of DRC Schedule 16 to confirm:-
i) That The Company’s plans for System Restoration are robust and sufficiently able
to satisfy the requirements of the Electricity System Restoration Standard.
ii) There is a high level of confidence that Restoration Contractors will be able to
deliver the service they have contracted to provide.
iii) There is a high level of confidence that User’s Critical Tools and Facilites will be
able to satisfy the requirements of CC7.10 and/or ECC.7.10 in addition to the
requirements of CC7.11 and/or ECC.7.11.
iv) There is a high level of assurance that Local Joint Restoration Plans and
Distribution Restoration Zone Plans will be capable of contributing to the restoration
of those sections of the System they have been designed to re-establish.
v) That Restoration Contractors and Users have arrangements in place in order for
them to receive and act upon instructions issued by The Company or relevant
Transmission Licensee in Scotland or relevant Network Operator for a period of
upto 72 hours following the loss of site supplies.
vi) All communications systems used satisfy the minimum requirements of CC6.5.1 –
CC.6.5.5 and/or ECC.6.5.1 – ECC.6.5.5.
vii) Network Operators can satisfy the requirements of CC.6.4.5 and/or ECC.6.4.6.
viii) The Company in coordination with Network Operators involved in planning the wider
System Restoration process shall work collaboratively to ensure the balance of
generation and demand, and minimise the risk of actions which could have a
destabilising effect on the Total System.
ix) Demonstrate their control systems will remain functional and can handle incidents
when the Total System is in a de-energised state including client applications and
server architecture.

x) Demonstrate the cyber-security of their voice and control systems in accordance

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024
17 of 58
 with CC.7.10.6 or ECC.7.10.6.

xi) Report the service level agreement compliance of their telephony systems including
infrastructure and service provision as provided for CC.6.5.4 or ECC.6.5.4.
xii) The resilience of voice systems including power supplies by its ability to withstand a
minimum of 72 hours during System Restoration.

As part of these exercises, Restoration Contractors and Users are required to inform The
Company of any assumptions they make and any reasons why they would be unable to fufil
their obligations.
In addition, from 1st January 2024 until 31st December 2026 desk top and computer exercises
and tests in relation to items i) to xii) may be carried out by agreement with The Company,
Users and Restoration Contractors.
OC.5.7.4.3 In addition to the above requirements, from 31 December 2026 onwards, Users and
Restoration Contractors are also required to provide an annual statement confirming that
their Plant and Apparatus has the capability to satisfy the requirements of OC.5.7 through
their Week 24 data submission.
OC5.7.5 In addition to the requirements of OC5.7.4.2 the following assurance tests shall be undertaken
at least once every three years.
i) Users, BM Participants and Restoration Contractors shall undertake tests or
otherwise demonstrate their Critical Tools and Facilities satisfy the requirements of
CC.6.5.4.4, CC.6.5.5.1, CC.7.10 and CC.7.11 or ECC.6.5.4.4, ECC.6.5.5.1, ECC.7.10
and ECC.7.11 as applicable.
ii) User’s, BM Participants and Restoration Contractors shall undertake tests or
otherwise demonstrate that their Critical Tools and Faciliaties are sufficiently robust
and reliable enough to manage the high volumes of data and alarms that are expected
to be generated during System Restoration in accordance with the requirements of
CC.7.10.7 and/or ECC.7.10.7.
OC5.7.6 The Company, as part of its regular System Restoration assurance activities, will ensure
Users and Restoration Contractors are capable of satisfying the applicable requirements of
OC5.7.
OC5.8 PROCEDURES APPLYING TO EMBEDDED MEDIUM POWER STATIONS NOT SUBJECT
TO A BILATERAL AGREEMENT AND EMBEDDED DC CONVERTER STATIONS NOT
SUBJECT TO A BILATERAL AGREEMENT
OC5.8.1 Compliance Statement
Each Network Operator shall ensure that each Embedded Person provides to the Network
Operator upon The Company's request:
(a) written confirmation that each such Power Generating Module, Generating Unit, Power
Park Module, HVDC Equipment, or DC Converter complies with the requirements of
the CC and ECC; and
(b) evidence, where requested, reasonably satisfactory to The Company, of such
compliance. Such a request shall not normally be made by The Company more than
twice in any calendar year in respect of any Generator’s Power Generating Module,
Generating Unit or Power Park Module or HVDC System Owner’s HVDC System, or
DC Converter owner's DC Converter.
The Network Operator shall provide the evidence or written confirmation required under
OC5.8.1 (a) and (b) forthwith upon receipt to The Company.
OC5.8.2 Network Operator’s Obligations To Facilitate Tests
If:
(a) the Network Operator fails to procure the confirmation referred to at OC5.8.1(a); or
(b) the evidence of compliance is not to The Company’s reasonable satisfaction,
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024
18 of 58
 then, The Company shall be entitled to require the Network Operator to procure access upon
terms reasonably satisfactory to The Company to enable The Company to witness the
Embedded Person carrying out the tests referred to in OC5.8.3 in respect of the relevant
Embedded Medium Power Station or Embedded DC Converter Station or Embedded
HVDC System.
OC5.8.3 Testing Of Embedded Medium Power Stations Not Subject To A Bilateral Agreement Or
Embedded DC Converter Stations Not Subject To A Bilateral Agreement or Embedded HVDC
Equipment Not Subject To A Bilateral Agreement
The Company may, in accordance with the provisions of OC5.8.2, at any time (although not
normally more than twice in any calendar year in respect of any particular Embedded Medium
Power Station not subject to a Bilateral Agreement or Embedded DC Converter Station
or Embedded HVDC Equipment not subject to a Bilateral Agreement) issue an instruction
requiring the Network Operator within whose System the relevant Medium Power Station
not subject to a Bilateral Agreement or DC Converter Station or HVDC Equipment not
subject to a Bilateral Agreement is Embedded, to require the Embedded Person to carry
out a test.
Such test shall be carried out at a time no sooner than 48 hours from the time that the
instruction was issued, on any one or more of the Generating Units, Power Generating
Modules, Power Park Modules or DC Converters or HVDC Equipment comprising part of
the relevant Embedded Medium Power Station or Embedded DC Converter Station or
HVDC System and should only be to demonstrate that:
(a) the relevant Generating Unit, Power Generating Module, Power Park Module or DC
Converter or HVDC Equipment meets the requirements of the paragraphs in the CC or
ECC which are applicable to such Generating Units, Power Generating Modules,
Power Park Module or DC Converter or HVDC Equipment;
(b) the Reactive Power capability registered with The Company under OC2 meets the
requirements set out in CC.6.3.2 or ECC.6.3.2 as applicable.
The instruction may only be issued where, following consultation with the relevant Network
Operator, The Company has:
(c) confirmed to the relevant Network Operator the manner in which the test will be
conducted, which shall be consistent with the principles established in OC5.5.3; and
(d) received confirmation from the relevant Network Operator that the relevant Generating
Unit, Power Generating Module, Power Park Module or DC Converter or HVDC
Equipment would not then be unavailable by reason of forced outage or Planned
Outage expected prior to the instruction.
The relevant Network Operator is responsible for ensuring the performance of any test so
required by The Company and the Network Operator shall ensure that the Embedded
Person retains the responsibility for ensuring the safety of personnel and plant during the test.
OC5.8.4 Test Failures/Re-Tests and Disputes
The relevant Network Operator shall:
(a) ensure that provisions equivalent to OC5.5.5, OC5.5.6 and OC5.6 apply to Embedded
Medium Power Stations not the subject of a Bilateral Agreement, Embedded DC
Converter Stations not the subject of a Bilateral Agreement or Embedded HVDC
Equipment not the subject of a Bilateral Agreement within its System in respect of test
failures, re-tests and disputes as to test failures and re-tests;
(b) ensure that the provisions equivalent to OC5.5.5, OC5.5.6 and OC5.6 referred to in
OC5.8.4(a) are effective so that The Company may require, if it so wishes, the provision
to it of any reports or other information equivalent to those or that to which The Company
would be entitled in relation to test failures, re-tests and disputes as to test failures and
re-tests under the provisions of OC5.5.5, OC5.5.6 and OC5.6; and

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

19 of 58
 (c) the provisions equivalent to OC5.5.5, OC5.5.6 and OC5.6 referred to in OC5.8.4(a) are
effective to permit The Company to conduct itself and take decisions in such a manner
in relation to test failures, re-tests and disputes as to test failures and re-tests in respect
of Embedded Medium Power Stations not the subject of a Bilateral Agreement,
Embedded DC Converter Stations not the subject of a Bilateral Agreement or
Embedded HVDC Equipment not the subject of a Bilateral Agreement as it is able to
conduct itself and take decisions in relation to test failures, re-tests and disputes as to
test failures and re-tests under OC5.5.5, OC5.5.6 and OC5.6.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

20 of 58
 APPENDIX 1 - ONSITE SIGNAL PROVISION FOR WITNESSING TESTS
OC5.A.1.1 During tests witnessed on-site by The Company, the following signals shall be provided to
The Company by the GB Generator, GB Generator undertaking OTSDUW or DC Converter
Station owner in accordance with CC.6.6.2:
OC5.A.1.2 Synchronous Generating Units

(a) All Tests • MW - Active Power at Generating Unit terminals

(b) Reactive & • MVAr - Reactive Power at Generating Unit terminals

Excitation System
• Vt - Generating Unit terminal voltage
• Efd- Generating Unit field voltage and/or main exciter field
voltage
• Ifd – Generating Unit field current (where possible)
• Power System Stabiliser output, where applicable.
• Noise – Injected noise signal (where applicable and
possible)

(c) Governor System & • Fsys - System Frequency

Frequency Response
• Finj - Injected Speed Reference
• Logic - Stop / Start Logic Signal

For Gas Turbines:

• GT Fuel Demand
• GT Fuel Valve Position
• GT Inlet Guide Vane Position
• GT Exhaust Gas Temperature

For Steam Turbines at >= 1Hz:

• Pressure before Turbine Governor Valves
• Turbine Governor Valve Positions
• Governor Oil Pressure*
• Boiler Pressure Set Point *
• Superheater Outlet Pressure *
• Pressure after Turbine Governor Valves*
• Boiler Firing Demand*
*Where applicable (typically not in CCGT Module)

For Hydro Plant:

• Speed Governor Demand Signal
• Actuator Output Signal
• Guide Vane / Needle Valve Position

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

21 of 58
 (d) Compliance with • Fsys - System Frequency
CC.6.3.3
• Finj - Injected Speed Reference
• Appropriate control system parameters as agreed with The
Company (See OC5.A.2.9)

OC5.A.1.3 Power Park Modules, OTSUA and DC Converters

Each Power Park Module and DC Converter at a Grid Entry

Point or User System Entry Point
(a) Real Time on • Total Active Power (MW)
site.
• Total Reactive Power (MVAr)
• Line-line Voltage (kV)
• System Frequency (Hz)
(b) Real Time on site • Injected frequency signal (Hz) or test logic signal (Boolean)
or Downloadable when appropriate
• Injected voltage signal (per unit voltage) or test logic signal
(Boolean) when appropriate
• In the case of an Onshore Power Park Module the Onshore
Power Park Module site voltage (MV) (kV)
• Power System Stabiliser output, where appropriate
• In the case of a Power Park Module or DC Converter where
the Reactive Power is provided from more than one Reactive
Power source, the individual Reactive Power contributions
from each source, as agreed with The Company.
• In the case of DC Converters appropriate control system
parameters as agreed with The Company (See OC5.A.4)
• In the case of an Offshore Power Park Module the total
Active Power (MW) and the total Reactive Power (MVAr) at
the Offshore Grid Entry Point
(c) Real Time on site • Available power for Power Park Module (MW)
or Downloadable
• Power source speed for Power Park Module (e.g. wind
speed) (m/s) when appropriate
• Power source direction for Power Park Module (degrees)
when appropriate
See OC5.A.1.3.1

OC5.A.1.3.1 The Company accept that the signals specified in OC5.A.1.3(c) may have lower effective
sample rates than those required in CC.6.6.2 although any signals supplied for connection to
The Company’s recording equipment which do not meet at least the sample rates detailed in
CC.6.6.2 should have the actual sample rates indicated to The Company before testing
commences.
OC5.A.1.3.2 For all The Company witnessed testing either;
(i) the Generator or DC Converter Station owner shall provide to The Company all signals
outlined in OC5.A.1.3 direct from the Power Park Module control system without any
attenuation, delay or filtering which would result in the inability to fully demonstrate the
objectives of the test, or identify any potential safety or plant instability issues, and with a
signal update rate corresponding to CC.6.6.2.1; or

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

22 of 58
 (ii) in the case of Onshore Power Park Modules, the Generator or DC Converter Station
owner shall provide signals OC5.A.1.3(a) direct from one or more transducer(s)
connected to current and voltage transformers for monitoring in real time on site; or,
(iii) In the case of Offshore Power Park Modules and OTSUA signals OC5.A.1.3(a) will be
provided at the Interface Point by the Offshore Transmission Licensee pursuant to the
STC or by the Generator when OTSDUW Arrangements apply.
OC5.A.1.3.3 Options OC5.A.1.3.2 (ii) and (iii) will only be available on condition that;
(a) all signals outlined in OC5.A.1.3 are recorded and made available to The Company by
the Generator or DC Converter Station owner from the Power Park Module or OTSUA
or DC Converter control systems as a download once the testing has been completed;
and
(b) the full test results are provided by the Generator or DC Converter Station owner within
2 working days of the test date to The Company unless The Company agrees otherwise;
and
(c) all data is provided with a sample rate in accordance with CC.6.6.2.2 or ECC.6.6.3.3
unless The Company agrees otherwise; and
(d) in The Company’s reasonable opinion the solution does not unreasonably add a
significant delay between tests or impede the volume of testing which can take place on
the day.
OC5.A.1.3.4 In the case of where transducers connected to current and voltage transformers are installed
(OC5.A.1.3.3 (ii) and (iii)), the transducers shall meet the following specification
(a) The transducer(s) shall be permanently installed to easily allow safe testing at any point
in the future, and to avoid a requirement for recalibration of the current transformers and
voltage transformers.
(b) The transducer(s) should be directly connected to the metering quality current
transformers and voltage transformers or similar.
(c) The transducers shall either have a response time no greater than 50ms to reach 90% of
output, or no greater than 300ms to reach 99.5%.
OC5.A.1.4 Testing not witnessed by The Company on-site
OC5.A.1.4.1.1 Where The Company has decided not to witness testing on-site, the results shall be submitted
to The Company in spreadsheet format with the signal data in columns arranged as follows.
Signal data denoted by “#” is not essential but if not provided the column should remain in
place but without values entered. Where two signal names are given in a column these are
alternatives related to the type of plant under test.
OC5.A.1.4.1.2. Where The Company has requested addition signals to be recorded prior to the testing these
signals shall be placed in columns to the right of the spreadsheet.
OC5.A.1.4.2.1 Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit Excitation System and Reactive Capability

Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Col 8

1 Time Active Reactive Terminal Speed Freq Logic / Field
Power Power Voltage /Frequency Injection Test Voltage
# # Start
#
Col 9 Col 10 Col 11 Col 12 Col 13 Col 14 Col 15 Col 16
1 Field PSS Noise
Current Output Injection
# #
# Columns may be left blank but the column must still be included in the files

OC5.A.1.4.2.2 Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit Frequency Response and CC.6.3.3

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

23 of 58
 Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Col 8
1 Fuel
Reactive Terminal Demand
Time Active Speed Freq Logic /
2 Power Voltage Guide
Power /Frequency Injection Test Start
# # Vane
Setpoint
Col 9 Col 10 Col 11 Col 12 Col 13 Col 14 Col 15 Col 16
1 Inlet Exhaust
Guide Gas ST LP Steam
Fuel HP Steam IP Steam
Vane Temp Valve Valve
Valve Pos Valve Pos Valve Pos
2 Guide Head Pos Pos
Vane
Position
# Columns may be left blank but must still be included in the files

OC5.A.1.4.3.1 Onshore Power Park Modules Voltage Control & Reactive Capability
Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Col 8
1 Time Active Reactive Connection Speed Freq Logic / Statcom
Power Power Point /Frequency Injection Test or
Voltage # # Start Windfarm
# Reactive
Power #
Col 9 Col 10 Col 11 Col 12 Col 13 Col 14 Col 15 Col 16
1 Power
Available Wind Wind Voltage
2 State of Speed Direction Setpoint
Charge
# Columns may be left blank but the column must still be included in the files

OC5.A.1.4.3.2 Offshore Power Park Modules Voltage Control & Reactive Capability

Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Col 8

1 Time Onshore Onshore Onshore Speed Freq Logic / Statcom
Interface Interface Interface /Frequency Injection Test or
Point Point Point # # Start Windfarm
Active Reactive Voltage # Reactive
Power Power Power #

Col 9 Col 10 Col 11 Col 12 Col 13 Col 14 Col 15 Col 16

1 Power
Wind
Available Wind Voltage
Speed
2 State of Direction Setpoint
m/s
Charge
# Columns may be left blank but the column must still be included in the files

OC5.A.1.4.3.3 Power Park Modules Frequency Control

Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Col 8

1 Time GEP GEP GEP Speed Freq Logic / Statcom
Active Reactive Connection /Frequency Injection Test or
Power Power Voltage Start Windfarm
# # Output
#
Col 9 Col 10 Col 11 Col 12 Col 13 Col 14 Col 15 Col 16
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024
24 of 58
 1 Power
Wind
Available Wind
Speed
2 State of Direction
m/s
Charge
# Columns may be left blank but must still be included in the files

OC5.A.1.5.1 Where test results are completed without any prescence of The Company but are relied upon
as evidence of the compliance they should be accompanied by a logsheet. This sheet should
be legible, in English and detail the items as indicated below:

• Time and date of test;

• Name of Power Station and module if applicable;
• Name of test engineer(s) and company name;
• Name of User representative(s) and company name;
• Type of testing being undertake eg voltage control;
• Ambient conditions eg. temperature, pressure, wind speed, wind direction; and
• Controller settings, eg voltage slope, frequency droop, voltage setpoint, UEL & OEL
settings.

OC5.A.1.5.2 For each test the following items should be recorded as relevant to the type of test being
undertaken. Where there is uncertainty on the information to be recorded this should be
discussed with The Company in advance of the test.

OC5.A.1.5.2 .1 Voltage Control Tests

• Start time of each test step;
• Active Power;
• Reactive Power;
• Connection voltage;
• Voltage vontrol setpoint, if applicable or changed;
• Voltage control slope, if applicable or changed;
• Terminal voltage if applicable;
• Generating Unit transformer tap position or grid transformer tap position, as
applicable;
• Number of Power Park Units in service in each Power Park Module, if applicable;
and
• For Offshore Connections, Offshore Grid Entry Point voltage.

OC5.A.1.5.2.2 Reactive Power Capability Tests

• Start time of test;
• Active Power;
• Reactive Power;
• Connection voltage;
• Terminal voltage if applicable;
• Generating Unit transformer tap position or grid transformer tap position as
applicable;

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

25 of 58
 • Number of Power Park Units in service in each Power Park Module, if
applicable and
• For Offshore Connections, Offshore Grid Entry Point voltage.

OC5.A.1.5.2.3 Frequency Response Capability Tests

• Start time of test;
• Active Power;
• System Frequency;
• For CCGT Modules, Active Power for the individual units (GT &ST);
• For boiler plant, HP steam pressure;
• Droop setting of controller if applicable;
• Number of Power Park Units in service in each Power Park Module, if
applicable.; and
• For Offshore Connections, Offshore Grid Entry Point Active Power for each
Power Park Module.

OC5.A.1.5.3 Material changes during the test period should be recorded e.g. Generating Units tripping /
starting, changes to tapchange positions.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

26 of 58
 APPENDIX 2 - COMPLIANCE TESTING OF SYNCHRONOUS PLANT
OC5.A.2.1 Scope
OC5.A.2.1.1 This Appendix sets out the tests contained therein to demonstrate compliance with the relevant
clauses of the Connection Conditions of the Grid Code and apply only to GB Generators.
This Appendix shall be read in conjunction with the CP with regard to the submission of the
reports to The Company. The testing requirements applicable to EU Generators are
specified in ECP.A.5.
OC5.A.2.1.2 The tests specified in this Appendix will normally be sufficient to demonstrate compliance
however The Company may:
(i) agree an alternative set of tests provided The Company deem the alternative set of tests
sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the Grid Code and Bilateral Agreement;
and/or
(ii) require additional or alternative tests if information supplied to The Company during the
compliance process suggests that the tests in this Appendix will not fully demonstrate
compliance with the relevant section of the Grid Code or Bilateral Agreement.
(iii) Agree a reduced set of tests for subsequent Generating Units following successful
completion of the first Generating Unit tests in the case of a Power Station comprised
of two or more Generating Units which The Company reasonably considers to be
identical.
If:
(a) the tests performed pursuant to OC5.A.2.1.2(iii) in respect of subsequent Generating
Units do not replicate the full tests for the first Generating Unit, or
(b) any of the tests performed pursuant to OC5.A.2.1.2(iii) do not fully demonstrate
compliance with the relevant aspects of the Grid Code, Ancillary Services Agreement
and / or Bilateral Agreement,
then notwithstanding the provisions above, the full testing requirements set out in this
Appendix will be applied.
OC5.A.2.1.3 The Generator is responsible for carrying out the tests set out in and in accordance with this
Appendix and the Generator retains the responsibility for the safety of personnel and plant
during the test. The Company will witness all of the tests outlined or agreed in relation to this
Appendix unless The Company decides and notifies the Generator otherwise. Reactive
Capability tests may be witnessed by The Company remotely from the The Company control
centre. During The Company witnessed tests, the Generator should ensure suitable
representatives from the Generator and manufacturer (if appropriate) are available on site for
the entire testing period. In all cases the Generator shall provide suitable monitoring
equipment to record all relevant test signals as outlined below in OC5.A.3.1.5.
OC5.A.2.1.4 The Generator shall submit a schedule of tests to The Company in accordance with CP.4.3.1
OC5.A.2.1.5 Prior to the testing of a Generating Unit, the Generator shall complete the Integral
Equipment Test procedure in accordance with OC.7.5
OC5.A.2.1.6 Full Generating Unit testing as required by CP.7.2 is to be completed as defined in OC5.A.2.2
through to OC5.A.2.9
OC5.A.2.2 Excitation System Open Circuit Step Response Tests
OC5.A.2.2.1 The open circuit step response of the Excitation System will be tested by applying a voltage
step change from 90% to 100% of the nominal Generating Unit terminal voltage, with the
Generating Unit on open circuit and at rated speed.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

27 of 58
OC5.A.2.2.2 The test shall be carried out prior to synchronisation in accordance with CP.6.4. This is not
witnessed by The Company unless specifically requested by The Company. Where The
Company is not witnessing the tests, the Generator shall supply the recordings of the
following signals to The Company in an electronic spreadsheet format:
Vt - Generating Unit terminal voltage
Efd - Generating Unit field voltage or main exciter field voltage
Ifd- Generating Unit field current (where possible)
Step injection signal
OC5.A.2.2.3 Results shall be legible, identifiable by labelling, and shall have appropriate scaling.
OC5.A.2.3 Open & Short Circuit Saturation Characteristics
OC5.A.2.3.1 The test shall normally be carried out prior to synchronisation in accordance with CP.6.4.
Manufacturer factory test results may be used where appropriate or manufacturers factory
type test results may be used if agreed by The Company.
OC5.A.2.3.2 This is not witnessed by The Company. Graphical and tabular representations of the results
in an electronic spreadsheet format showing per unit open circuit terminal voltage and short
circuit current versus per unit field current shall be submitted to The Company.
OC5.A.2.3.3 Results shall be legible, identifiable by labelling, and shall have appropriate scaling.
OC5.A.2.4 Excitation System On-Load Tests
OC5.A.2.4.1 The time domain performance of the Excitation System shall be tested by application of
voltage step changes corresponding to 1% and 2% of the nominal terminal voltage.
OC5.A.2.4.2 Where a Power System Stabiliser is present:
(i) The PSS must only be commissioned in accordance with BC2.11.2. When a PSS is
switched on for the first time as part of on-load commissioning or if parameters have been
adjusted, the Generator should consider reducing the PSS output gain by at least 50%
and should consider reducing the limits on the PSS output by at least a factor of 5 to
prevent unexpected PSS action affecting the stability of the Generating Unit or the
National Electricity Transmission System.
(ii) The time domain performance of the Excitation System shall be tested by application of
voltage step changes corresponding to 1% and 2% of the nominal terminal voltage,
repeating with and without the PSS in service.
(iii) The frequency domain tuning of the PSS shall also be demonstrated by injecting a 0.2Hz-
3Hz band limited random noise signal into the Automatic Voltage Regulator reference
with the Generating Unit operating at points specified by The Company (up to rated
MVA output).
(iv) The PSS gain margin shall be tested by increasing the PSS gain gradually to threefold
and observing the Generating Unit steady state Active Power output.
(v) The interaction of the PSS with changes in Active Power shall be tested by application
of a +0.5Hz frequency injection to the governor while the Generating Unit is selected to
Frequency Sensitive Mode.
(vi) If the Generating Unit is of the pump storage type, then the step tests shall be carried
out, with and without the PSS, in the pumping mode in addition to the generating mode.
(vii) Where the Bilateral Agreement requires that the PSS is in service at a specified loading
level, additional testing witnessed by The Company will be required during the
commissioning process before the Generating Unit or CCGT Module may exceed this
output level.
(viii) Where the Excitation System includes a PSS, the Generator shall provide a suitable
noise source to facilitate noise injection testing.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

28 of 58
OC5.A.2.4.3 The following typical procedure is provided to assist Generators in drawing up their own site
specific procedures for the The Company witnessed PSS Tests.

Test Injection Notes

Synchronous Generator running rated MW, unity pf,

PSS Switched Off

1 • Record steady state for 10 seconds

• Inject +1% step to AVR Voltage Reference and
hold for at least 10 seconds until stabilised
• Remove step returning AVR Voltage Reference
to nominal and hold for at least 10 seconds

2 • Record steady state for 10 seconds

• Inject +2% step to AVR Voltage Reference and
hold for at least 10 seconds until stabilised
• Remove step returning AVR Voltage Reference
to nominal and hold for at least 10 seconds

3 • Inject band limited (0.2-3Hz) random noise

signal into voltage reference and measure
frequency spectrum of Real Power.
• Remove noise injection.

Switch On Power System Stabiliser

4 • Record steady state for 10 seconds

• Inject +1% step to AVR Voltage Reference and
hold for at least 10 seconds until stabilised
• Remove step returning AVR Voltage Reference
to nominal and hold for at least 10 seconds

5 • Record steady state for 10 seconds

• Inject +2% step to AVR Voltage Reference and
hold for at least 10 seconds until stabilised
• Remove step returning AVR Voltage Reference
to nominal and hold for at least 10 seconds

6 • Increase PSS gain at 30 second intervals. i.e.

x1 – x1.5 – x2 – x2.5 – x3
• Return PSS gain to initial setting

7 • Inject band limited (0.2-3Hz) random noise

signal into voltage reference and measure
frequency spectrum of Real Power.
• Remove noise injection.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

29 of 58
 8 • Select the governor to Frequency Senstive
Mode (FSM)
• Inject +0.5 Hz step into governor.
• Hold until generator MW output is stabilised
• Remove step

OC5.A.2.5 Under-excitation Limiter Performance Test

OC5.A.2.5.1 Initially the performance of the Under-excitation Limiter should be checked by moving the
limit line close to the operating point of the Generating Unit when operating close to unity
power factor. The operating point of the Generating Unit is then stepped into the limit by
applying a 2% decrease in Automatic Voltage Regulator reference voltage.
OC5.A.2.5.2 The final performance of the Under-excitation Limiter shall be demonstrated by testing its
response to a step change corresponding to a 2% decrease in Automatic Voltage Regulator
reference voltage when the Generating Unit is operating just off the limit line, at the designed
setting as indicated on the Performance Chart submitted to The Company under OC2.
OC5.A.2.5.3 Where possible, the Under-excitation Limiter should also be tested by operating the tap-
changer when the Generating Unit is operating just off the limit line, as set up.
OC5.A.2.5.4 The Under-excitation Limiter will normally be tested at low Active Power output and at
maximum Active Power output (Registered Capacity).
OC5.A.2.5.5 The following typical procedure is provided to assist Generators in drawing up their own site
specific procedures for the The Company witnessed Under-excitation Limiter Tests.

Test Injection Notes

Synchronous generator running rated MW at

unity Power Factor. Under-excitation limit
temporarily moved close to the operating point of
the generator.
1 • PSS on.
• Inject -2% voltage step into AVR voltage
reference and hold at least for 10 seconds
until stabilised
• Remove step returning AVR Voltage
Reference to nominal and hold for at least 10
seconds
Under-excitation limit moved to normal position.
Synchronous generator running at rated MW and
at leading MVArs close to Under-excitation limit.
2 • PSS on.
• Inject -2% voltage step into AVR voltage
reference and hold at least for 10 seconds
until stabilised
• Remove step returning AVR Voltage
Reference to nominal and hold for at least 10
seconds

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

30 of 58
OC5.A.2.6 Over-excitation Limiter Performance Test
Description & Purpose of Test
OC5.A.2.6.1 The performance of the Over-excitation Limiter, where it exists, shall be demonstrated by
testing its response to a step increase in the Automatic Voltage Regulator reference voltage
that results in operation of the Over-excitation Limiter. Prior to application of the step the
Generating Unit shall be generating Rated Active Power and operating within its continuous
Reactive Power capability. The size of the step will be determined by the minimum value
necessary to operate the Over-excitation Limiter and will be agreed by The Company and
the Generator. The resulting operation beyond the Over-excitation Limit shall be controlled
by the Over-excitation Limiter without the operation of any protection that could trip the
Generating Unit. The step shall be removed immediately on completion of the test.
OC5.A.2.6.2 If the Over-excitation Limiter has multiple levels to account for heating effects, an
explanation of this functionality will be necessary and if appropriate, a description of how this
can be tested.
OC5.A.2.6.3 The following typical procedure is provided to assist Generators in drawing up their own site
specific procedures for the The Company witnessed Under-excitation Limiter Tests.

Test Injection Notes

Synchronous Generator running Rated MW and

maximum lagging MVAr.
Over-excitation Limit temporarily set close to this
operating point. PSS on.
1 • Inject positive voltage step into AVR voltage
reference and hold
• Wait till Over-excitation Limiter operates
after sufficient time delay to bring back the
excitation back to the limit.
• Remove step returning AVR Voltage
Reference to nominal.
Over-excitation Limit restored to its normal
operating value. PSS on.

OC5.A.2.7 Reactive Capability

OC5.A.2.7.1 The leading and lagging Reactive Power capability on each Generating Unit will normally be
demonstrated by operation of the Generating Unit at 0.85 power factor lagging for 1 hour and
0.95 power factor leading for 1 hour.
OC5.A.2.7.2 In the case of an Embedded Generating Unit where distribution network considerations
restrict the Generating Unit Reactive Power output then the maximum leading and lagging
capability will be demonstrated without breaching the host network operators limits.
OC5.A.2.7.3 The test procedure, time and date will be agreed with The Company and will be to the
instruction of The Company control centre and shall be monitored and recorded at both the
The Company control centre and by the Generator.
OC5.A.2.7.4 Where the Generator is recording the voltage and Reactive Power at the Generating Unit
terminals, the results shall be supplied in an electronic spreadsheet format.
OC5.A.2.7.5 The ability of the Generating Unit to comply with the operational requirements specified in
BC2.A.2.6 and CC.6.1.7 will normally be demonstrated by changing the tap position and,
where agreed in the Bilateral Agreement, the Generating Unit terminal voltage.

OC5.A.2.8 Governor and Load Controller Response Performance

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

31 of 58
OC5.A.2.8.1 The governor and load controller response performance will be tested by injecting simulated
frequency deviations into the governor and load controller systems. Such simulated frequency
deviation signals must be injected simultaneously at both speed governor and load controller
references. For CCGT modules, simultaneous injection into all gas turbines, steam turbine
governors and module controllers is required.
OC5.A.2.8.2 Prior to witnessing the governor tests set out in OC5.A.2.8.6, The Company requires the
Generator to conduct the preliminary tests detailed in OC5.A.2.8.4 and send the results to
The Company for assessment unless agreed otherwise by The Company. The results should
be supplied in an electronic spreadsheet format. These tests shall be completed at least two
weeks prior to the witnessed governor response tests.
OC5.A.2.8.3 Where a CCGT Module or Generating Unit is capable of operating on alternative fuels, tests
will be required to demonstrate performance when operating on each fuel. The Company may
agree a reduction from the tests listed in OC5.A.2.8.6 for demonstrating performance on the
alternative fuel. This includes the case where a main fuel is supplemented by bio-fuel.
Preliminary Governor Frequency Response Testing
OC5.A.2.8.4 Prior to conducting the full set of tests as per OC5.A.2.8.6, Generators are required to conduct
a preliminary set of tests below to confirm the frequency injection method is correct and the
plant control performance is within expectation. The test numbers refer to Figure 1 below. With
the plant running at 80% of full load, the following frequency injections shall be applied.

Test No Frequency Injection Notes

(Figure 1)
8 • Inject - 0.5Hz frequency fall over 10 sec
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal
14 • Inject +0.5Hz frequency rise over 10 sec
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal
13 • Inject -0.5Hz frequency fall over 10 sec
• Hold for a further 20 sec
• At 30 sec from the start of the test, Inject a
+0.3Hz frequency rise over 30 sec.
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal

OC5.A.2.8.5 The recorded results (e.g. Finj, MW and control signals) should be sampled at a minimum rate
of 1 Hz to allow The Company to assess the plant performance from the initial transients
(seconds) to the final steady state conditions (5-15 minutes depending on the plant design).
This is not witnessed by The Company. The Generator shall supply the recordings including
data to The Company in an electronic spreadsheet format. Results shall be legible, identifiable
by labelling, and shall have appropriate scaling.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

32 of 58
 Full Frequency Response Testing Schedule Witnessed by The Company
OC5.A.2.8.6 The tests are to be conducted at a number of different Module Load Points (MLP). The load
points are conducted as shown below unless agreed otherwise by The Company.

Module Load Point 6

100% MEL
(Maximum Export Limit)

Module Load Point 5 95% MEL

Module Load Point 4

80% MEL
(Mid point of Operating Range)

Module Load Point 3 70% MEL

Module Load Point 2

MG
(Minimum Generation)

Module Load Point 1

DMOL
(Design Minimum Operating Level)

OC5.A.2.8.7 The tests are divided into the following two types;
(i) Frequency response volume tests as per OC5.A.2.8. Figure 1. These tests consist of
Frequency profile and ramp tests.
(ii) System islanding and step response tests as shown by OC5.A.2.8. Figure 2.
OC5.A.2.8.8 There should be sufficient time allowed between tests for control systems to reach steady
state. Where the diagram states ‘HOLD’ the current injection should be maintained until the
Active Power (MW) output of the Generating Unit or CCGT Module has stabilised or 90
seconds, which ever is the longer. The frequency response capability test (see Figure 1)
injection signal shall be returned to zero at the same rate at which it was applied. The
Company may require repeat tests should the tests give unexpected results. When witnessed
by The Company each test should be carried out as a separate injection; when not witnessed
by The Company there must be sufficient time allowed between tests for the Plant to have
reached a stable steady state operating condition or 90 seconds, whichever is the longer.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

33 of 58
 0.6
HOLD

0.4
Frequency (Hz)

HOLD
0.2
HOLD
0 10s 30s 60s 10s 10s 10s 0 10s 30s 60s
0
10s 10s 10s
HOLD
-0.2
HOLD

HOLD
-0.4
HOLD

HOLD
-0.6

-0.8
Response (MW)

+
Typical

HF Ramp
HF Ramp

HF Ramp
LF Ramp
LF Ramp

LF Ramp
LF Event

LF Event
Profile 1

Profile 2
+0.5Hz
+0.1Hz

+0.2Hz
-0.2Hz
-0.1Hz

-0.5Hz
Load
Point

MLP6 * * 1 2 3 * 4 *
MLP5 5 * * 6 * * 7 *
MLP4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 *
MLP3 15 * * * * * 16 17
MLP2 18 * * 19 20 21 * 22
MLP1 23 * * 24 25 * * 26

Figure 1: Frequency Response Capability Tests

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

34 of 58
 0.8 HOLD
*
HOLD
0.6 HOLD

0.4
Frequency (Hz)

HOLD
HOLD
0.2
0 1s (G) 31s
0 2s (A,J) 32s
0
0 1s 0 30s

HOLD
-0.2 HOLD

-0.4
HOLD HOLD
-0.6
-0.5Hz (K)
-2Hz (A,J)
-0.8
Response (MW)

+
Typical

Load Point +2.0* +0.02 -0.2 +0.2 -0.5 +0.5 +0.6 -0.5 -2.0 + 0**
MLP6 BC1 BC2 L
MLP6 LFSM BC3 BC4
MLP5 A
MLP4 D/E F G H I J M
*
MLP4 LFSM N
MLP3
MLP2
MLP1 K

Figure 2: System islanding and step response tests

* This will generally be +2.0Hz unless an injection of this size causes a reduction in plant output
that takes the operating point below Designed Minimum Operating Level in which case an
appropriate injection should be calculated in accordance with the following:
For example, 0.9Hz is needed to take an initial output 65% to a final output of 20%. If the
initial output was not 65% and the Designed Minimum Operating Level is not 20% then the
injected step should be adjusted accordingly as shown in the example given below

Initial Output 65%

Designed Minimum Operating Level 20%

Frequency Controller Droop 4%

Frequency to be injected = (0.65 - 0.20) x 0.04 x 50 = 0.9Hz

** Tests L and M in Figure 2 shall be conducted if in this range of tests the System Frequency
feedback signal is replaced by the injection signal rather than the injection signal being added
to the System Frequency signal. The tests will consist of monitoring the Generating Unit and
CCGT Module in Frequency Sensitive Mode during normal System Frequency variations
without applying any injection. Test N in figure 2 shall be conducted in all cases. All three tests
should be conducted for a period of at least 10 minutes.
OC5.A.2.8.9 The target frequency adjustment facility should be demonstrated from the normal Control
Point within the range of 49.9Hz to 50.1Hz by step changes to the target frequency setpoint
as indicated in OC5.A.2.8 Figure 3.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

35 of 58
OC5.A.2.8.10 Figure 3 – Target Frequency setting changes

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

36 of 58
OC5.A.2.9 Compliance with CC.6.3.3 Functionality Test
OC5.A.2.9.1 Where the plant design includes active control function or functions to deliver CC.6.3.3
compliance, the Generator will propose and agree a test procedure with The Company, which
will demonstrate how the Generating Unit Active Power output responds to changes in
System Frequency and ambient conditions (e.g. by Frequency and temperature injection
methods).
OC5.A.2.9.2 The Generator shall inform The Company if any load limiter control is additionally employed.
OC5.A.2.9.3 With reference to the signals specified in OC5.A.1, The Company will agree with the
Generator which additional control system parameters shall be monitored to demonstrate the
functionality of CC.6.3.3 compliance systems. Where The Company recording equipment is
not used, results shall be supplied to The Company in an electronic spreadsheet format.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

37 of 58
 APPENDIX 3 - COMPLIANCE TESTING OF POWER PARK MODULES
(AND OTSUA)

OC5.A.3.1 Scope
OC5.A.3.1.1 This Appendix outlines the general testing requirements for Power Park Modules and OTSUA
to demonstrate compliance with the relevant aspects of the Grid Code, Ancillary Services
Agreement and Bilateral Agreement and apply only to GB Generators. The testing
requirements applicable to EU Generators are specified in ECP.A.6. The tests specified in
this Appendix will normally be sufficient to demonstrate compliance however The Company
may:
(i) agree an alternative set of tests provided The Company deem the alternative set of tests
sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the Grid Code, Ancillary Services
Agreement and Bilateral Agreement; and/or
(ii) require additional or alternative tests if information supplied to The Company during the
compliance process suggests that the tests in this Appendix will not fully demonstrate
compliance with the relevant section of the Grid Code, Ancillary Services Agreement
or Bilateral Agreement; and/or
(ii) require additional tests if a Power System Stabiliser is fitted; and/or
(iv) agree a reduced set of tests if a relevant Manufacturer's Data & Performance Report
has been submitted to and deemed to be appropriate by The Company; and/or
(v) agree a reduced set of tests for subsequent Power Park Modules or OTSUA following
successful completion of the first Power Park Module or OTSUA tests in the case of a
Power Station comprised of two or more Power Park Modules or OTSUA which The
Company reasonably considers to be identical.
If:
(a) the tests performed pursuant to OC5.A.3.1.1(iv) do not replicate the results contained in
the Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Report or
(b) the tests performed pursuant to OC5.A.3.1.1(v) in respect of subsequent Power Park
Modules or OTSUA do not replicate the full tests for the first Power Park Module or
OTSUA, or
(c) any of the tests performed pursuant to OC5.A.3.1.1(iv) or OC5.A.3.1.1(v) do not fully
demonstrate compliance with the relevant aspects of the Grid Code, Ancillary Services
Agreement and / or Bilateral Agreement,
then notwithstanding the provisions above, the full testing requirements set out in this
Appendix will be applied.
OC5.A.3.1.2 The Generator is responsible for carrying out the tests set out in and in accordance with this
Appendix and the Generator retains the responsibility for the safety of personnel and plant
during the test. The Company will witness all of the tests outlined or agreed in relation to this
Appendix unless The Company decides and notifies the Generator owner otherwise.
Reactive Capability tests may be witnessed by The Company remotely from the The
Company control centre. For all on site during The Company witnessed tests, the Generator
must ensure suitable representatives from the Generator and / or Power Park Module
manufacturer (if appropriate) and/or OTSUA manufacturer (if appropriate) are available on site
for the entire testing period. In all cases and in addition to any recording of signals conducted
by The Company, the Generator shall record all relevant test signals as outlined in OC5.A.1.
OC5.A.3.1.3 In addition to the dynamic signals supplied in OC5.A.1, the Generator shall inform The
Company of the following information prior to the commencement of the tests and any
changes to the following, if any values change during the tests:
(i) All relevant transformer tap numbers; and
(ii) Number of Power Park Units in operation

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

38 of 58
OC5.A.3.1.4 The Generator shall submit a detailed schedule of tests to The Company in accordance with
CP.6.3.1, and this Appendix.
OC5.A.3.1.5 Prior to the testing of a Power Park Module or OTSUA, the Generator shall complete the
Integral Equipment Tests procedure in accordance with OC.7.5.
OC5.A.3.1.6 Partial Power Park Module or OTSUA testing as defined in OC5.A.3.2 and OC5.A.3.3 is to
be completed at the appropriate stage in accordance with CP.6.
OC5.A.3.1.7 Full Power Park Module or OTSUA testing as required by CP.7.2 is to be completed as
defined in OC5.A.3.4 through to OC5.A.3.7.
OC5.A.3.1.8 Where OTSDUW Arrangements apply and prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time, any relevant
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus shall be considered within the scope of testing described in
this Appendix. Performance shall be assessed against the relevant Grid Code requirements
for OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus at the Interface Point and other Generator Plant and
Apparatus at the Offshore Grid Entry Point. This Appendix should be read accordingly.
OC5.A.3.2 Pre 20% (or <50MW) Synchronised Power Park Module basic Voltage Control Tests
OC5.A.3.2.1 Before 20% of the Power Park Module (or 50MW if less) has commissioned, either voltage
control test OC5.A.3.5.6(i) or (ii) must be completed in accordance with CP.6.
OC5.A.3.2.2 In the case of an Offshore Power Park Module which provides all or a portion of the Reactive
Power capability as described in CC.6.3.2(e)(iii) and / or voltage control requirements as
described in CC.6.3.8(b)(ii) to enable an Offshore Transmission Licensee to meet the
requirements of STC Section K, the Generator is required to cooperate with the Offshore
Transmission Licensee to conduct the 20% voltage control test. The results in relation to the
Offshore Power Park Module will be assessed against the requirements in the Bilateral
Agreement. In the case of OTSUA prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time, the Generator shall
conduct the testing by reference to the entire control system responding to changes at the
Interface Point.
OC5.A.3.3 Pre 70% Power Park Module Tests
OC5.A.3.3.1 For Power Park Modules with Registered Capacity ≥100MW only. Before 70% but with at
least 50% of the Power Park Module commissioned, the following Limited Frequency
Sensitive tests as detailed in OC5.A.3.6.2 must be completed.
(a) BC3
(b) BC4
OC5.A.3.4 Reactive Capability Test
OC5.A.3.4.1 This section details the procedure for demonstrating the reactive capability of an Onshore
Power Park Module or an Offshore Power Park Module or OTSUA which provides all or a
portion of the Reactive Power capability as described in CC.6.3.2(e)(iii) (for the avoidance of
doubt, an Offshore Power Park Module which does not provide part of the Offshore
Transmission Licensee Reactive Power capability as described in CC6.3.2(e)(i) and
CC6.3.2(e)(ii) should complete the reactive power transfer / voltage control tests as per section
OC5.A.3.8). These tests should be scheduled at a time where there are at least 95% of the
Power Park Units within the Power Park Module in service. There should be sufficient MW
resource forecasted in order to generate at least 85% of Registered Capacity of the Power
Park Module.
OC5.A.3.4.2 The tests shall be performed by modifying the voltage set-point of the voltage control scheme
of the Power Park Module or OTSUA by the amount necessary to demonstrate the required
reactive range. This is to be conducted for the operating points and durations specified in
OC5.A.3.4.5.
OC5.A.3.4.3 Embedded Generators should liaise with the relevant Network Operator to ensure the
following tests will not have an adverse impact upon the Network Operator’s System as per
OC.7.5. In situations where the tests have an adverse impact upon the Network Operator’s
System, The Company will only require demonstration within the acceptable limits of the
Network Operator. For the avoidance of doubt, these tests do not negate the requirement to
produce a complete Power Park Module performance chart as specified in OC2.4.2.1
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024
39 of 58
OC5.A.3.4.4 In the case where the Reactive Power metering point is not at the same location as the
Reactive Power capability requirement, then an equivalent Reactive Power capability for the
metering point shall be agreed between the Generator and The Company.
OC5.A.3.4.5 The following tests shall be completed:
(i) Operation in excess of 50% Rated MW and maximum continuous lagging Reactive
Power for 60 minutes. For the avoidance of doubt this test must start with Active Power
output in excess of 85% of Registered Capacity of the Power Park Module as
OC5.A.3.4.1 and must not fall below 50% of Registered Capacity of the Power Park
Module during the 60 minutes.
(ii) Operation in excess of 50% Rated MW and maximum continuous leading Reactive
Power for 60 minutes. For the avoidance of doubt this test must start with Active Power
output in excess of 85% of Registered Capacity of the Power Park Module as
OC5.A.3.4.1 and must not fall below 50% of Registered Capacity of the Power Park
Module during the 60 minutes.
(iii) Operation at 50% Rated MW and maximum continuous leading Reactive Power for 5
minutes.
(iv) Operation at 20% Rated MW and maximum continuous leading Reactive Power for 5
minutes.
(v) Operation at 20% Rated MW and maximum continuous lagging Reactive Power for 5
minutes.
(vi) Operation at less than 20% Rated MW and unity Power Factor for 5 minutes. This test
only applies to systems which do not offer voltage control below 20% of Rated MW.
(vii) Operation at 0% Rated MW and maximum continuous leading Reactive Power for 5
minutes. This test only applies to systems which offer voltage control below 20% and
hence establishes actual capability rather than required capability.
(viii) Operation at 0% Rated MW and maximum continuous lagging Reactive Power for 5
minutes. This test only applies to systems which offer voltage control below 20% and
hence establishes actual capability rather than required capability.
OC5.A.3.4.6 Within this OC5 lagging Reactive Power is the export of Reactive Power from the Power
Park Module to the Total System and leading Reactive Power is the import of Reactive
Power from the Total System to the Power Park Module or OTSUA.
OC5.A.3.5 Voltage Control Tests
OC5.A.3.5.1 This section details the procedure for conducting voltage control tests on Onshore Power
Park Modules or OTSUA or an Offshore Power Park Module which provides all or a portion
of the voltage control capability as described in CC.6.3.8(b)(ii) (for the avoidance of doubt,
Offshore Power Park Modules which do not provide part of the Offshore Transmission
Licensee voltage control capability as described in CC6.3.8(b)(i) should complete the reactive
power transfer / voltage control tests as per section OC5.A.3.8). These tests should be
scheduled at a time when there are at least 95% of the Power Park Units within the Power
Park Module in service. There should be sufficient MW resource forecasted in order to
generate at least 65% of Registered Capacity of the Onshore Power Park Module. An
Embedded Generator should also liaise with the relevant Network Operator to ensure all
requirements covered in this section will not have a detrimental effect on the Network
Operator’s System.
OC5.A.3.5.2 The voltage control system shall be perturbed with a series of step injections to the Power
Park Module voltage reference, and where possible, multiple up-stream transformer taps. In
the case of an Offshore Power Park Module providing part of the Offshore Transmission
Licensee voltage control capability, this may require a series of step injections to the voltage
reference of the Offshore Transmission Licensee control system.
OC5.A.3.5.3 For steps initiated using network tap changers, the Generator will need to coordinate with The
Company or the relevant Network Operator as appropriate. The time between transformer
taps shall be at least 10 seconds as per OC5.A.3.5 Figure 1.
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024
40 of 58
OC5.A.3.5.4 For step injections into the Power Park Module or OTSUA voltage reference, steps of ±1%,
±2% and ±4% shall be applied to the voltage control system reference summing junction. The
injection shall be maintained for a minimum of 10 seconds as per OC5.A.3.5 Figure 2.
OC5.A.3.5.5 Where the voltage control system comprises of discretely switched Plant and Apparatus (eg.
mechanically switched shunt reactors or capacitors) additional tests will be required to
demonstrate that the overall performance of the voltage control system when switching these
devices as part of the response is in accordance with Grid Code and Bilateral Agreement
requirements.
OC5.A.3.5.6 Tests to be completed:
(i)

Voltage

Time
1 tap

10s
minimum

OC5.A.3.5 Figure 1 – Transformer tap sequence for voltage control tests

(ii)

Applied
Voltage
Step 4%
2%
1% Time

10s
minimum
OC5.A.3.5 Figure 2 – Step injection sequence for voltage control tests

OC5.A.3.5.7 In the case of OTSUA where the Bilateral Agreement specifies additional damping facilities,
additional testing to demonstrate these damping facilities may be required.

OC.A.3.5.8 In the case of Power Park Modules that do not provide voltage control down to zero Active
Power a test to demonstrate the smooth transition from voltage control mode to unity Power
Factor shall be carried out. The Power Park Module voltage setpoint should be altered to
produce lagging Reactive Power or absorbing leading Reactive Power at a low Active
Power level where voltage control is provided. The Power Park Module Active Power should
then be reduced to zero Active Power as a ramp over a short period (60 seconds is
suggested).

OC5.A.3.6 Frequency Response Tests

OC5.A.3.6.1 This section describes the procedure for performing frequency response testing on a Power
Park Module. These tests should be scheduled at a time where there are at least 95% of the
Power Park Units within the Power Park Module in service. There should be sufficient MW
resource forecasted in order to generate at least 65% of Registered Capacity of the Power
Park Module.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

41 of 58
OC5.A.3.6.2 The frequency controller shall be in Frequency Sensitive Mode or Limited Frequency
Sensitive Mode as appropriate for each test. Simulated frequency deviation signals shall be
injected into the frequency controller reference/feedback summing junction. If the injected
frequency signal replaces rather than sums with the real System Frequency signal then the
additional tests outlined in OC5.A.3.6.6 shall be performed with the Power Park Module or
Power Park Unit in normal Frequency Sensitive Mode monitoring actual System
Frequency, over a period of at least 10 minutes. The aim of this additional test is to verify that
the control system correctly measures the real System Frequency for normal variations over
a period of time.
OC5.A.3.6.3 In addition to the frequency response requirements, it is necessary to demonstrate the Power
Park Module ability to deliver a requested steady state power output which is not impacted
by power source variation as per CC.6.3.9 or ECC.6.3.9. This test shall be conducted in
Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode at a part-loaded output for a period of 10 minutes as per
OC5.A.3.6.6.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

42 of 58
 Preliminary Frequency Response Testing
OC5.A.3.6.4 Prior to conducting the full set of tests as per OC5.A.3.6.6, Generators are required to conduct
the preliminary set of tests below to confirm the frequency injection method is correct and the
plant control performance is within expectation. The test numbers refer to Figure 1 below. The
test should be conducted when sufficient MW resource is forecasted in order to generate at
least 65% of Registered Capacity of the Power Park Module. The following frequency
injections shall be applied when operating at module load point 4.

Test No Frequency Injection Notes

(Figure 1)
8 • Inject - 0.5Hz frequency fall over 10 sec
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal
14 • Inject +0.5Hz frequency rise over 10 sec
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal
13 • Inject -0.5Hz frequency fall over 10 sec
• Hold for a further 20 sec
• At 30 sec from the start of the test, Inject a
+0.3Hz frequency rise over 30 sec.
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal

OC5.A.3.6.5 The recorded results (e.g. Finj, MW and control signals) should be sampled at a minimum rate
of 1 Hz to allow The Company to assess the plant performance from the initial transients
(seconds) to the final steady state conditions (5-15 minutes depending on the plant design).
This is not witnessed by The Company. The Generator shall supply the recordings including
data to The Company in an electronic spreadsheet format. Results shall be legible, identifiable
by labelling, and shall have appropriate scaling.
Full Frequency Response Testing Schedule Witnessed by The Company
OC5.A.3.6.6 The tests are to be conducted at a number of different Module Load Points (MLP). In the case
of a Power Park Module the module load points are conducted as shown below unless agreed
otherwise by The Company.

Module Load Point 6

100% MEL
(Maximum Export Limit)

Module Load Point 5 90% MEL

Module Load Point 4

80% MEL
(Mid point of Operating Range)

Module Load Point 3 DMOL + 0.6 x (80%

MEL – DMOL)

Module Load Point 2 DMOL + 0.3 x (80%

(Minimum Generation) MEL – DMOL)

Module Load Point 1

(Designed Minimum Operating DMOL
Level)

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

43 of 58
OC5.A.3.6.7 The tests are divided into the following two types;
(i) Frequency response volume tests as per OC5.A.3.6. Figure 1. These tests consist of
frequency profile and ramp tests.
(ii) System islanding and step response tests as shown by OC5.A.3.6 Figure 2
OC5.A.3.6.8 There should be sufficient time allowed between tests for control systems to reach steady state
(depending on available power resource). Where the diagram states ‘HOLD’ the current
injection should be maintained until the Active Power (MW) output of the Power Park Module
has stabilised or 90 seconds, which ever is the longer. All frequency response tests should be
removed over the same timescale for which they were applied. The Company may require
repeat tests should the response volume be affected by the available power, or if tests give
unexpected results. When witnessed by The Company each test should be carried out as a
separate injection; when not witnessed by The Company there must be sufficient time allowed
between tests for the Active Power (MW) output of the Power Park Module to have stabilised
or 90 seconds, whichever is the longer.
0.6
HOLD

0.4
Frequency (Hz)

HOLD
0.2
HOLD
0 10s 30s 60s 10s 10s 10s 0 10s 30s 60s
0
10s 10s 10s
HOLD
-0.2
HOLD
HOLD

-0.4
HOLD

HOLD
-0.6

-0.8
Response (MW)

+
Typical

_
HF Ramp
HF Ramp

HF Ramp
LF Ramp
LF Ramp

LF Ramp
LF Event

LF Event
Profile 1

Profile 2
+0.5Hz
+0.1Hz

+0.2Hz
-0.2Hz
-0.1Hz

-0.5Hz

Load
Point

MLP6 * * 1 2 3 * 4 *
MLP5 5 * * 6 * * 7 *
MLP4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 *
MLP3 15 * * * * * 16 17
MLP2 18 * * 19 20 21 * 22
MLP1 23 * * 24 25 * * 26

OC5.A.3.6. Figure 1 – Frequency response volume tests

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

44 of 58
 0.8 HOLD
*
HOLD
0.6 HOLD

Frequency (Hz) 0.4

HOLD
HOLD
0.2
0 1s (G) 31s
0 2s (A,J) 32s
0
0 1s 0 30s

HOLD
-0.2 HOLD

-0.4
HOLD HOLD
-0.6
-0.5Hz (K)
-2Hz (A,J)
-0.8
Response (MW)

+
Typical

Load Point +2.0* +0.02 -0.2 +0.2 -0.5 +0.5 +0.6 -0.5 -2.0 + 0**
MLP6 BC1 BC2 L
MLP6 LFSM BC3 BC4
MLP5 A
MLP4 D/E F G H I J M
*
MLP4 LFSM N
MLP3
MLP2
MLP1 K

OC5.A.3.6. Figure 2 – System islanding and step response tests

* This will generally be +2.0Hz unless an injection of this size causes a reduction in plant output
that takes the operating point below Designed Minimum Operating Level in which case an
appropriate injection should be calculated in accordance with the following:
For example 0.9Hz is needed to take an initial output 65% to a final output of 20%. If the initial
output was not 65% and the Designed Minimum Operating Level is not 20% then the
injected step should be adjusted accordingly as shown in the example given below

Initial Output 65%

Designed Minimum Operating Level 20%

Frequency Controller Droop 4%

Frequency to be injected = (0.65 - 0.20) x 0.04 x 50 = 0.9Hz

** Tests L and M in Figure 2 shall be conducted if in this range of tests the System Frequency
feedback signal is replaced by the injection signal rather than the injection signal being added
to the System Frequency signal. The tests will consist of monitoring the Power Park Module
in Frequency Sensitive Mode during normal System Frequency variations without applying
any injection. Test N in Figure 2 shall be conducted in all cases. All three tests should be
conducted for a period of at least 10 minutes.
OC5.A.3.6.9 The Target Frequency adjustment facility should be demonstrated from the normal control
point within the range of 49.9Hz to 50.1Hz by step changes to the Target Frequency setpoint
as indicated in OC5.A.3.6 Figure 3.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

45 of 58
 OC5.A.3.6. Figure 3 – Target Frequency setting changes

OC5.A.3.7 Fault Ride Through Testing

OC5.A.3.7.1 This section describes the procedure for conducting fault ride through tests on a single Power
Park Unit.
OC5.A.3.7.2 The test circuit will utilise the full Power Park Unit (e.g. in the case of a wind turbine it would
include the full wind turbine nacelle structure, all inverters and converters along with step up
transformer to medium voltage, all control systems including pitch control emulation) and shall
be conducted with sufficient power input resource available to produce at least 95% of the
Registered Capacity of the Power Park Unit. The test will comprise of a number of controlled
short circuits applied to a test network to which the Power Park Unit is connected, typically
comprising of the Power Park Unit transformer and a test impedance or other decoupling
equipment to shield the connected network from voltage dips at the Power Park Unit
terminals.
OC5.A.3.7.3 In each case, the tests should demonstrate the minimum voltage at the Power Park Unit
terminals or High Voltage side of the Power Park Unit transformer which the Power Park
Unit can withstand for the length of time specified in OC5.A.3.7.5. Any test results provided to
The Company should contain sufficient data pre and post fault in order to determine steady
state values of all signals, and the power recovery timescales.
OC5.A.3.7.4 In addition to the signals outlined in OC5.A.1.2. the following signals from either the Power
Park Unit terminals or High Voltage side of the Power Park Unit transformer should be
provided for this test only:
(i) Phase voltages
(ii) Positive phase sequence and negative phase sequence voltages
(iii) Phase currents
(iv) Positive phase sequence and negative phase sequence currents
(v) Estimate of Power Park Unit negative phase sequence impedance
(vi) MW – Active Power at the generating unit.
(vii) MVAr – Reactive Power at the generating unit.
(viii) Mechanical Rotor Speed
(ix) Real / reactive, current / power reference as appropriate
(x) Fault ride through protection operation (e.g. a crowbar in the case of a doubly fed
induction generator)
(xi) Any other signals relevant to the control action of the fault ride through control deemed
applicable for model validation.
At a suitable frequency rate for fault ride through tests as agreed with The Company.
OC5.A.3.7.5 The tests should be conducted for the times and fault types indicated in OC5.A.3.7 Table 1.
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024
46 of 58
 3 Phase Phase to Phase 2 Phase to 1 Phase to Grid Code Ref
Earth Earth
0.14s 0.14s 0.14s 0.14s CC.6.3.15a
0.384s CC.6.3.15b
0.710s
2.5s
180.0s

OC5.A.3.7 Table 1 – Types of fault for fault ride through testing

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

47 of 58
OC5.A.3.8 Reactive Power Transfer / Voltage Control Tests for Offshore Power Park Modules
OC5.A.3.8.1 In the case of an Offshore Power Park Module which provides all or a portion of the Reactive
Power capability as described in CC.6.3.2(e)(iii) and / or voltage control requirements as
described in CC.6.3.8(b)(ii) to enable an Offshore Transmission Licensee to meet the
requirements of STC Section K, the testing, will comprise of the entire control system
responding to changes at the onshore Interface Point. Therefore the tests in this section
OC5.A.3.8 will not apply. The Generator shall cooperate with the relevant Offshore
Transmission Licensee to facilitate these tests as required by The Company. The testing
may be combined with testing of the corresponding Offshore Transmission Licensee
requirements under the STC. The results in relation to the Offshore Power Park Module will
be assessed against the requirements in the Bilateral Agreement.
OC5.A.3.8.2 In the case of an Offshore Power Park Module which does not provide part of the Offshore
Transmission Licensee Reactive Power capability the following procedure for conducting
reactive power transfer control tests on Offshore Power Park Modules and / or voltage
control system as per CC6.3.2(e)(i) and CC6.3.2(e)(ii) apply. These tests should be carried
out prior to 20% of the Power Park Units within the Offshore Power Park Module being
synchronised, and again when at least 95% of the Power Park Units within the Offshore
Power Park Module in service. There should be sufficient power resource forecast to
generate at least 85% of the Registered Capacity of the Offshore Power Park Module.
OC5.A.3.8.3 The Reactive Power control system shall be perturbed by a series of system voltage changes
and changes to the Active Power output of the Offshore Power Park Module.
OC5.A.3.8.4 System voltage changes should be created by a series of multiple upstream transformer taps.
The Generator should coordinate with The Company or the relevant Network Operator in
order to conduct the required tests. The time between transformer taps should be at least 10
seconds as per OC5.A.3.8 Figure 1.
OC5.A.3.8.5 The Active Power output of the Offshore Power Park Module should be varied by applying
a sufficiently large step to the frequency controller reference/feedback summing junction to
cause a 10% change in output of the Registered Capacity of the Offshore Power Park
Module in a time not exceeding 10 seconds. This test does not need to be conducted provided
that the frequency response tests as outlined in OC5.A.3.6 are completed.
OC5.A.3.8.6 The following diagrams illustrate the tests to be completed:

Voltage

Time
1 tap
>10s
OC5.A.3.8 Figure 1 – Transformer tap sequence for reactive transfer tests

<=10s

Time
Active
Power
10% of
Change
Registered Capacity

OC5.A.3.8 Figure 2 – Active Power ramp for reactive transfer tests

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

48 of 58
 APPENDIX 4 - COMPLIANCE TESTING FOR DC CONVERTERS AT A DC
CONVERTER STATION
OC5.A.4.1 Scope

OC5.A.4.1.1 This Appendix outlines the general testing requirements for DC Converter Station owners to
demonstrate compliance with the relevant aspects of the Grid Code, Ancillary Services
Agreement and Bilateral Agreement and apply only to DC Converter Station owners. The
testing requirements applicable to HVDC System Owners are specified in ECP.A.7. The tests
specified in this Appendix will normally be sufficient to demonstrate compliance however The
Company may:
(i) agree an alternative set of tests provided The Company deem the alternative set of tests
sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the Grid Code, Ancillary Services
Agreement and Bilateral Agreement; and/or
(ii) require additional or alternative tests if information supplied to The Company during the
compliance process suggests that the tests in this Appendix will not fully demonstrate
compliance with the relevant section of the Grid Code, Ancillary Services Agreement
or Bilateral Agreement; and/or
(iii) require additional tests if control functions to improve damping of power system
oscillations and/or subsynchronous resonance torsional oscillations required by the
Bilateral Agreement or included in the control scheme and active; and/or
(iv) agree a reduced set of tests for subsequent DC Converters following successful
completion of the first DC Converter tests in the case of a Power Station comprised of
two or more DC Converters which The Company reasonably considers to be identical.
If:
(a) the tests performed pursuant to OC5.A.4.1.1(iv) in respect of subsequent DC Converters
do not replicate the full tests for the first DC Converter, or
(b) any of the tests performed pursuant to OC5.A.4.1.1(iv) do not fully demonstrate
compliance with the relevant aspects of the Grid Code, Ancillary Services Agreement
and / or Bilateral Agreement,
then notwithstanding the provisions above, the full testing requirements set out in this
Appendix will be applied.
OC5.A.4.1.2 The DC Converter Station owner is responsible for carrying out the tests set out in and in
accordance with this Appendix and the DC Converter Station owner retains the responsibility
for the safety of personnel and plant during the test. The DC Converter Station owner is
responsible for ensuring that suitable arrangements are in place with the Externally
Interconnected System Operator to facilitate testing. The Company will witness all of the
tests outlined or agreed in relation to this Appendix unless The Company decides and notifies
the DC Converter Station owner otherwise. Reactive Capability tests if required, may be
witnessed by The Company remotely from the The Company control centre. For all on site
The Company witnessed tests the DC Converter Station owner must ensure suitable
representatives from the DC Converter Station owner and / or DC Converter manufacturer
(if appropriate) are available on site for the entire testing period. In all cases and in addition
to any recording of signals conducted by The Company the DC Converter Station owner
shall record all relevant test signals as outlined in OC5.A.1.
OC5.A.4.1.3 In addition to the dynamic signals supplied in OC5.A.1 the DC Converter Station owner shall
inform The Company of the following information prior to the commencement of the tests and
any changes to the following, if any values change during the tests:
(i) All relevant transformer tap numbers.
OC5.A.4.1.4 The DC Converter Station owner shall submit a detailed schedule of tests to The Company
in accordance with CP.6.3.1, and this Appendix.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

49 of 58
OC5.A.4.1.5 Prior to the testing of a DC Converter the DC Converter Station owner shall complete the
Integral Equipment Tests procedure in accordance with OC.7.5
OC5.A.4.1.6 Full DC Converter testing as required by CP.7.2 is to be completed as defined in OC5.A.4.2
through to OC5.A.4.5
OC5.A.4.1.7 The Company may agree a reduction from the requirements set out in CP.A.7.2 to CP.A.7.5
for on-site testing where suitable factory acceptance testing on a representative installation
with the same equipment and settings of the HVDC Equipment that can, in The Company’s
opinion, reasonably represent the performance of the installed HVDC Equipment at that site.
This is also conditional on The Company and the DC Converter Station owner agreeing
sufficient on site testing of the fully commissioned DC Converter Station to demonstrate that
the factory acceptance tests are valid. If in the reasonable opinion of The Company, the on-
site testing does not demonstrate the factory acceptance tests are valid then the full set of on-
site tests should be carried out.

OC5.A.4.2 Reactive Capability Test

OC5.A.4.2.1 This section details the procedure for demonstrating the reactive capability of an Onshore DC
Converter. These tests should be scheduled at a time where there are sufficient MW resource
forecasted in order to import and export full Registered Capacity of the DC Converter.
OC5.A.4.2.2 The tests shall be performed by modifying the voltage set-point of the voltage control scheme
of the DC Converter by the amount necessary to demonstrate the required reactive range.
This is to be conducted for the operating points and durations specified in OC5.A.4.2.5.
OC5.A.4.2.3 Embedded DC Converter Station owner should liaise with the relevant Network Operator
to ensure the following tests will not have an adverse impact upon the Network Operator’s
System as per OC.7.5. In situations where the tests have an adverse impact upon the
Network Operator’s System, The Company will only require demonstration within the
acceptable limits of the Network Operator. For the avoidance of doubt, these tests do not
negate the requirement to produce a complete DC Converter performance chart as specified
in OC2.4.2.1.
OC5.A.4.2.4 In the case where the Reactive Power metering point is not at the same location as the
Reactive Power capability requirement, then an equivalent Reactive Power capability for the
metering point shall be agreed between the DC Converter Station owner and The Company.
OC5.A.4.2.5 The following tests shall be completed for both importing and exporting of Active Power for a
DC Converter (excluding current source technology):
(i) Operation at Rated MW and maximum continuous lagging Reactive Power for 60
minutes.
(ii) Operation at Rated MW and maximum continuous leading Reactive Power for 60
minutes.
(iii) Operation at 50% Rated MW and maximum continuous leading Reactive Power for 5
minutes.
(iv) Operation at 20% Rated MW and maximum continuous leading Reactive Power for 5
minutes.
(v) Operation at 20% Rated MW and maximum continuous lagging Reactive Power for 5
minutes.
(vi) Operation at less than 20% Rated MW and unity Power Factor for 5 minutes. This test
only applies to systems which do not offer voltage control below 20% of Rated MW.
(vii) Operation at 0% Rated MW and maximum continuous leading Reactive Power for 5
minutes. This test only applies to systems which offer voltage control below 20% and
hence establishes actual capability rather than required capability.
(viii) Operation at 0% Rated MW and maximum continuous lagging Reactive Power for 5
minutes. This test only applies to systems which offer voltage control below 20% and
hence establishes actual capability rather than required capability.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

50 of 58
OC5.A.4.2.6 For the avoidance of doubt, lagging Reactive Power is the export of Reactive Power from
the DC Converter to the Total System and leading Reactive Power is the import of Reactive
Power from the Total System to the DC Converter.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

51 of 58
OC5.A.4.3 Reactive Control Testing For DC Converters (Current Source Technology)
OC5.A.4.3.1 The Reactive control testing for DC Converters employing current source technology shall
be for both importing and exporting of Active Power and shall demonstrate that the Reactive
Power transfer limits specified in the Bilateral Agreement are not exceeded. The Reactive
Power control system shall be perturbed by a series of system voltage changes to the Active
Power output of the DC Converter and changes of system voltage where possible. The DC
Converter Station owner is responsible for ensuring that suitable arrangements are in place
with the Externally Interconnected System Operator to facilitate the Active Power changes
required by these tests
OC5.A.4.3.2 The Active Power output of the DC Converter should be varied by applying a sufficiently
large step to the frequency controller reference/feedback summing junction to cause at least
a 10% change in output of the Registered Capacity of the DC Converter in a time not
exceeding 10 seconds. This test does not need to be conducted provided that the frequency
response tests as outlined in OC5.A.4.3 are completed.
OC5.A.4.3.3 Where possible, System voltage changes should be created by a series of multiple upstream
transformer taps. The DC Converter station owner should coordinate with The Company or
the relevant Network Operator in order to conduct the required tests. The time between
transformer taps should be at least 10 seconds as per OC5.A.4.3 Figure 1.
OC5.A.4.3.4 The following diagrams illustrate the tests to be completed:

Voltage

Time
1 tap
>10s
OC5.A.4.3 Figure 1 – Transformer tap sequence for reactive transfer tests

<=10s

Time
Active
Power
10% of
Change
Registered Capacity

OC5.A.4.3 Figure 2 – Active Power ramp for reactive transfer tests

OC5.A.4.4 Voltage Control Tests

OC5.A.4.4.1 This section details the procedure for conducting voltage control tests on DC Converters
(excluding current source technology). These tests should be scheduled at a time where there
is sufficient MW resource in order to import and export full Registered Capacity of the DC
Converter. An Embedded DC Converter Station owner should also liaise with the relevant
Network Operator to ensure all requirements covered in this section will not have a
detrimental effect on the Network Operator’s System.
OC5.A.4.4.2 The voltage control system shall be perturbed with a series of step injections to the DC
Converter voltage reference, and where possible, multiple up-stream transformer taps.
OC5.A.4.4.3 For steps initiated using network tap changers, the DC Converter Station owner will need to
coordinate with The Company or the relevant Network Operator as appropriate. The time
between transformer taps shall be at least 10 seconds as per OC5.A.4.4 Figure 1.
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024
52 of 58
OC5.A.4.4.4 For step injections into the DC Converter voltage reference, steps of ±1%, ±2% and ±4%
shall be applied to the voltage control system reference summing junction. The injection shall
be maintained for 10 seconds as per OC5.A.4.4 Figure 2.
OC5.A.4.4.5 Where the voltage control system comprises of discretely switched Plant and Apparatus,
additional tests will be required to demonstrate that its performance is in accordance with Grid
Code and Bilateral Agreement requirements.
OC5.A.4.4.6 Tests to be completed:
(i)

Voltage

Time
1 tap

10s
minimum

OC5.A.4.4 Figure 1 – Transformer tap sequence for voltage control tests

(ii)

Applied
Voltage
Step 4%
2%
1% Time

10s
minimum
OC5.A.4.4 Figure 2 – Step injection sequence for voltage control tests

OC5.A.4.5 Frequency Response Tests

OC5.A.4.5.1 This section describes the procedure for performing frequency response testing on a DC
Converter. These tests should be scheduled at a time where there is sufficient MW resource
in order to import and export full Registered Capacity of the DC Converter. The DC
Converter Station owner is responsible for ensuring that suitable arrangements are in place
with the Externally Interconnected System Operator to facilitate the Active Power changes
required by these tests
OC5.A.4.5.2 The frequency controller shall be in Frequency Sensitive Mode or Limited Frequency
Sensitive Mode as appropriate for each test. Simulated frequency deviation signals shall be
injected into the frequency controller reference/feedback summing junction. If the injected
frequency signal replaces rather than sums with the real System Frequency signal then the
additional tests outlined in OC5.A.4.5.6 shall be performed with the DC Converter in normal
Frequency Sensitive Mode monitoring actual system frequency, over a period of at least 10
minutes. The aim of this additional test is to verify that the control system correctly measures
the real System Frequency for normal variations over a period of time.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

53 of 58
OC5.A.4.5.3 In addition to the frequency response requirements it is necessary to demonstrate the DC
Converter ability to deliver a requested steady state power output which is not impacted by
power source variation as per CC.6.3.9. This test shall be conducted in Limited Frequency
Sensitive Mode at a part-loaded output for a period of 10 minutes as per OC5.A.4.5.6.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

54 of 58
 Preliminary Frequency Response Testing
OC5.A.4.5.4 Prior to conducting the full set of tests as per OC5.A.4.5.6, DC Converter Station owners are
required to conduct a preliminary set of tests below to confirm the frequency injection method
is correct and the plant control performance is within expectation. The test numbers refer to
Figure 1 below. These tests should be scheduled at a time where there is sufficient MW
resource in order to export full Registered Capacity from the DC Converter. The following
frequency injections shall be applied when operating at module load point 4.

Test No Frequency Injection Notes

(Figure 1)
8 • Inject - 0.5Hz frequency fall over 10 sec
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal
14 • Inject +0.5Hz frequency rise over 10 sec
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal
13 • Inject -0.5Hz frequency fall over 10 sec
• Hold for a further 20 sec
• At 30 sec from the start of the test, Inject a
+0.3Hz frequency rise over 30 sec.
• Hold until conditions stabilise
• Remove the injected signal

OC5.A.4.5.5 The recorded results (e.g. Finj, MW and control signals) should be sampled at a minimum rate
of 1 Hz to allow The Company to assess the plant performance from the initial transients
(seconds) to the final steady state conditions (5-15 minutes depending on the plant design).
This is not witnessed by The Company. The DC Converter Station owner shall supply the
recordings including data to The Company in an electronic spreadsheet format. Results shall
be legible, identifiable by labelling, and shall have appropriate scaling.
Full Frequency Response Testing Schedule Witnessed by The Company
OC5.A.4.5.6 The tests are to be conducted at a number of different Module Load Points (MLP). In the case
of a DC Converter the module load points are conducted as shown below unless agreed
otherwise by The Company.

Module Load Point 6

100% MEL
(Maximum Export Limit)

Module Load Point 5 90% MEL

Module Load Point 4 80% MEL

Module Load Point 3 DMOL + 0.6 x (80%

MEL – DMOL)

Module Load Point 2 DMOL + 0.3 x (80%

(Minimum Generation) MEL – DMOL)

Module Load Point 1

(Designed Minimum Operating DMOL
Level)

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

55 of 58
OC5.A.4.5.7 The tests are divided into the following two types;
(i) Frequency response volume tests as per OC5.A.4.5. Figure 1. These tests consist of
frequency profile and ramp tests.
(ii) System islanding and step response tests as shown by OC5.A.4.5 Figure 2
OC5.A.4.5.8 There should be sufficient time allowed between tests for control systems to reach steady state
(depending on available power resource). Where the diagram states ‘HOLD’ the current
injection should be maintained until the Active Power (MW) output of the DC Converter has
stabilised or 90 seconds whichever is the longer. All frequency response tests should be
removed over the same timescale for which they were applied. The Company may require
repeat tests should the response volume be affected by the available power, or if tests give
unexpected results. When witnessed by The Company each test should be carried out as a
separate injection, when not witnessed by The Company there must be sufficient time allowed
between tests for the Active Power (MW) output of the HVDC Equipment to have stabilised
or 90 seconds, whichever is the longer.

0.6
HOLD

0.4
Frequency (Hz)

HOLD
0.2
HOLD
0 10s 30s 60s 10s 10s 10s 0 10s 30s 60s
0
10s 10s 10s
HOLD
-0.2
HOLD
HOLD

-0.4
HOLD

HOLD
-0.6

-0.8
Response (MW)

+
Typical

_
HF Ramp
HF Ramp

HF Ramp
LF Ramp
LF Ramp

LF Ramp
LF Event

LF Event
Profile 1

Profile 2
+0.5Hz
+0.1Hz

+0.2Hz
-0.2Hz
-0.1Hz

-0.5Hz

Load
Point

MLP6 * * 1 2 3 * 4 *
MLP5 5 * * 6 * * 7 *
MLP4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 *
MLP3 15 * * * * * 16 17
MLP2 18 * * 19 20 21 * 22
MLP1 23 * * 24 25 * * 26

OC5.A.4.5. Figure 1 – Frequency response volume tests

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

56 of 58
 0.8 HOLD
*
HOLD
0.6 HOLD

0.4

Frequency (Hz)

HOLD
HOLD
0.2
0 1s (G) 31s
0 2s (A,J) 32s
0
0 1s 0 30s

HOLD
-0.2 HOLD

-0.4
HOLD HOLD
-0.6
-0.5Hz (K)
-2Hz (A,J)
-0.8
Response (MW)

+
Typical

Load Point +2.0* +0.02 -0.2 +0.2 -0.5 +0.5 +0.6 -0.5 -2.0 + 0**
MLP6 BC1 BC2 L
MLP6 LFSM BC3 BC4
MLP5 A
MLP4 D/E F G H I J M
*
MLP4 LFSM N
MLP3
MLP2
MLP1 K

OC5.A.4.5. Figure 2 – System islanding and step response tests

* This will generally be +2.0Hz unless an injection of this size causes a reduction in plant output
that takes the operating point below the Designed Minimum Operating Level in which case
an appropriate injection should be calculated in accordance with the following:
For example 0.9Hz is needed to take an initial output of 65% to a final output of 20%. If the
initial output was not 65% and the Designed Minimum Operating Level is not 20% then the
injected step should be adjusted accordingly as shown in the example given below

Initial Output 65%

Designed Minimum Operating Level 20%

Frequency Controller Droop 4%

Frequency to be injected = (0.65 - 0.20) x 0.04 x 50 = 0.9Hz

** Tests L and M in Figure 2 shall be conducted if in this range of tests the System Frequency
feedback signal is replaced by the injection signal rather than the injection signal being added
to the System Frequency signal. The tests will consist of monitoring the DC Converter in
Frequency Sensitive Mode during normal System Frequency variations without applying
any injection. Test N in Figure 2 shall be conducted in all cases. All three tests should be
conducted for a period of at least 10 minutes.
OC5.A.4.6.9 The Target Frequency adjustment facility should be demonstrated from the normal Control
Point within the range of 49.9Hz to 50.1Hz by step changes to the Target Frequency setpoint
as indicated in OC5.A.4.6 Figure 3.
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024
57 of 58
OC5.A.4.6. Figure 3 – Target Frequency setting changes

< END OF OPERATING CODE NO. 5 >

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC5 04 March 2024

58 of 58
 OPERATING CODE NO. 6
(OC6)

DEMAND CONTROL

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

OC6.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 2
OC6.2 OBJECTIVE ....................................................................................................................................... 3
OC6.3 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................... 3
OC6.4 PROCEDURE FOR THE NOTIFICATION OF DEMAND CONTROL INITIATED BY NETWORK
OPERATORS .................................................................................................................................................. 4
OC6.5 PROCEDURE FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION OF DEMAND CONTROL ON THE
INSTRUCTIONS OF THE COMPANY ............................................................................................................ 6
OC6.6 AUTOMATIC LOW FREQUENCY DEMAND DISCONNECTION ..................................................... 9
OC6.7 EMERGENCY MANUAL DISCONNECTION .................................................................................. 10
OC6.8 OPERATION OF THE BALANCING MECHANISM DURING DEMAND CONTROL ...................... 11
APPENDIX 1 - EMERGENCY MANUAL DEMAND REDUCTION/DISCONNECTION SUMMARY
SHEET ........................................................................................................................................................... 12

Issue 6 Revision 20 OC6 15 December 2023

i
OC6.1 INTRODUCTION
OC6.1.1 Operating Code No.6 ("OC6") is concerned with the provisions to be made by Network
Operators, and in relation to Non-Embedded Customers by The Company, to permit the
reduction of Demand in the event of insufficient Active Power generation being available to
meet Demand, or in the event of breakdown or operating problems (such as in respect of
System Frequency, System voltage levels or System thermal overloads) on any part of the
National Electricity Transmission System.
OC6.1.2 OC6 deals with the following:
(a) Customer voltage reduction initiated by Network Operators (other than following the
instruction of The Company);
(b) Customer Demand reduction by Disconnection initiated by Network Operators (other
than following the instruction of The Company);
(c) Demand reduction instructed by The Company;
(d) automatic low frequency Demand Disconnection; and
(e) emergency manual Demand Disconnection.
The term "Demand Control" is used to describe any or all of these methods of achieving a
Demand reduction.
OC6.1.3 The procedure set out in OC6 includes a system of warnings to give advance notice of
Demand Control that may be required by The Company under this OC6.
OC6.1.4 Data relating to Demand Control should include details relating to MW
OC6.1.5 The Electricity Supply Emergency Code as reviewed and published from time to time by the
appropriate government department for energy emergencies provides that in certain
circumstances consumers are given a certain degree of "protection" when rota disconnections
are implemented pursuant to a direction under the Energy Act 1976. No such protection can
be given in relation to Demand Control instructed by The Company under the Grid Code,
except in relation to those Demand Disconnection stages referred to in OC6.5 and where it
is technically feasible to provide such protection to pre-designated protected sites, although,
even in these situations, protection cannot be guaranteed.
To invoke the Electricity Supply Emergency Code the Secretary of State will issue direction(s)
to all Network Operators affected, exercising emergency powers under the Electricity Act
1989 or by virtue of an Order in Council under the Energy Act 1976. Following the issuance of
such direction, The Company will act to coordinate the implementation of an agreed schedule
of rota disconnections across all affected Network Operators’ licence area(s) and to
disseminate any information as necessary throughout the period of the emergency in
accordance with the instructions The Company receives from the Secretary of State or those
authorised on their behalf for this purpose.

The list of pre-designated protected sites is compiled and kept up to date by Network
Operators in accordance with the terms set out in the Electricity Supply Emergency Code.

OC6.1.6 Connections between Large Power Stations and the National Electricity Transmission
System and between such Power Stations and a User System will not, as far as possible,
be disconnected by The Company pursuant to the provisions of OC6 insofar as that would
interrupt supplies
(a) for the purposes of operation of the Power Station (including Start-Up and shutting
down);
(b) for the purposes of keeping the Power Station in a state such that it could be Started-up
when it is off-Load for ordinary operational reasons; or
(c) for the purposes of compliance with the requirements of a Nuclear Site Licence.

Issue 6 Revision 20 OC6 15 December 2023

2 of 12
 Demand Control pursuant to this OC6 therefore applies subject to this exception.

OC6.2 OBJECTIVE
OC6.2.1 The overall objective of OC6 is to require the provision of facilities to enable The Company to
achieve reduction in Demand that will either avoid or relieve operating problems on the
National Electricity Transmission System, in whole or in part, and thereby to enable The
Company to instruct Demand Control in a manner that does not unduly discriminate against,
or unduly prefer, any one or any group of Suppliers or Network Operators or Non-
Embedded Customers. It is also to ensure that The Company is notified of any Demand
Control utilised by Users other than following an instruction from The Company.
OC6.2.2 For certain Grid Supply Points in Scotland it is recognised that it may not be possible to meet
the requirements in OC6.4.5(b), OC6.5.3(b) (in respect of Demand Disconnection only),
OC6.5.6 (ii), OC6.6.2 (c) and OC6.7.2 (b). In these circumstances The Company and the
relevant Network Operator(s) will agree equivalent requirements covering a number of Grid
Supply Points. If The Company and the relevant Network Operator fail to agree equivalent
requirements covering a number of Grid Supply Points, then the relevant Network Operator
will apply the provisions of OC6.4.5(b), OC6.5.3(b) (in respect of Demand Disconnection
only), OC6.5.6(ii), OC6.6.2(c) and OC6.7.2(b) as evenly as reasonably practicable over the
relevant Network Operator’s entire System.

OC6.3 SCOPE
OC6.3.1 OC6 applies to The Company and to Users which in OC6 means:
(a) Generators; and
(b) Network Operators.
It also applies to The Company in relation to Non-Embedded Customers.
OC6.3.2 Explanation
OC6.3.2.1 (a) Although OC6 does not apply to Suppliers, the implementation of Demand Control may
affect their Customers.
(b) In all situations envisaged in OC6, Demand Control is exercisable:
(i) by reference to a Network Operator's System; or
(ii) by The Company in relation to Non-Embedded Customers.
(c) Demand Control in all situations relates to the physical organisation of the Total System,
and not to any contractual arrangements that may exist.
OC6.3.2.2 (a) Accordingly, Demand Control will be exercisable with reference to, for example, five per
cent (or such other figure as may be utilised under OC6.5) tranches of Demand by a
Network Operator.
(b) For a Supplier, whose Customers may be spread throughout a number of User
Systems (and the National Electricity Transmission System), to split its Customers
into five per cent (or such other figure as may be utilised under OC6.5) tranches of
Demand would not result in Demand Control being implemented effectively on the Total
System.

Issue 6 Revision 20 OC6 15 December 2023

3 of 12
 (c) Where Demand Control is needed in a particular area, The Company would not know
which Supplier to contact and (even if it were to) the resulting Demand Control
implemented, because of the diversity of contracts, may well not produce the required
result.
OC6.3.2.3 (a) Suppliers should note, however, that, although implementation of Demand Control in
respect of their Customers is not exercisable by them, their Customers may be affected
by Demand Control.
(b) This will be implemented by Network Operators where the Customers are within User
Systems directly connected to the National Electricity Transmission System and by
The Company where they are Non-Embedded Customers.
(c) The contractual arrangements relating to Customers being supplied by Suppliers will,
accordingly, need to reflect this.
(d) The existence of a commercial arrangement for the provision of Customer Demand
Management or Commercial Ancillary Services does not relieve a Network Operator
from the Demand Control provisions of OC6.5, OC6.6 and OC6.7, which may be
exercised from time to time.

OC6.4 PROCEDURE FOR THE NOTIFICATION OF DEMAND CONTROL INITIATED BY

NETWORK OPERATORS (OTHER THAN FOLLOWING THE INSTRUCTION OF THE
COMPANY)
OC6.4.1 Pursuant to the provisions of OC1, in respect of the time periods prior to 1100 hours each day,
each Network Operator will notify The Company of all Customer voltage reductions and/or
restorations and Demand Disconnection or reconnection, on a Grid Supply Point and half-
hourly basis, which will or may, either alone or when aggregated with any other Demand
Control planned by that Network Operator, result in a Demand change equal to or greater
than the Demand Control Notification Level averaged over any half hour on any Grid
Supply Point, which is planned to be instructed by the Network Operator other than following
an instruction from The Company relating to Demand reduction.
OC6.4.2 Under OC6, each Network Operator will notify The Company in writing by 1100 hours each
day (or such other time specified by The Company from time to time) for the next day (except
that it will be for the next 3 days on Fridays and 2 days on Saturdays and may be longer (as
specified by The Company at least one week in advance) to cover holiday periods) of
Customer voltage reduction or Demand Disconnection which will or may result in a Demand
change equal to or greater than the Demand Control Notification Level averaged over any
half hour on any Grid Supply Point, (or which when aggregated with any other Demand
Control planned by that Network Operator is equal to or greater than the Demand Control
Notification Level), planned to take place during the next Operational Day.
OC6.4.3 When the Customer voltage reduction or Demand Disconnection which may result in a
Demand change equal to or greater than the Demand Control Notification Level averaged
over any half hour on any Grid Supply Point (or which when aggregated with any other
Demand Control planned or implemented by that Network Operator is equal to or greater
than the Demand Control Notification Level) is planned after 1100 hours, each Network
Operator must notify The Company as soon as possible after the decision to implement has
been made. If the Customer voltage reduction or Demand Disconnection is implemented
immediately after the decision to implement is made, each Network Operator must notify The
Company within five minutes of implementation.
OC6.4.4 Where, after The Company has been notified, whether pursuant to OC1, OC6.4.2 or OC6.4.3,
the planned Customer voltage reduction or Demand Disconnection is changed, the
Network Operator will notify The Company as soon as possible of the new plans, or if the
Customer voltage reduction or Demand Disconnection implemented is different to that
notified, the Network Operator will notify The Company of what took place within five minutes
of implementation.

Issue 6 Revision 20 OC6 15 December 2023

4 of 12
OC6.4.5 Any notification under OC6.4.2, OC6.4.3 or OC6.4.4 will contain the following information on
a Grid Supply Point and half hourly basis:
(a) the proposed (in the case of prior notification) and actual (in the case of subsequent
notification) date, time and duration of implementation of the Customer voltage reduction
or Demand Disconnection; and
(b) the proposed reduction in Demand by use of the Customer voltage reduction or Demand
Disconnection.
OC6.4.6 Pursuant to the provisions of OC1.5.6, each Network Operator will supply to The Company
details of the amount of Demand reduction actually achieved by use of the Customer voltage
reduction or Demand Disconnection.

Issue 6 Revision 20 OC6 15 December 2023

5 of 12
OC6.5 PROCEDURE FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION OF DEMAND CONTROL ON THE
INSTRUCTIONS OF THE COMPANY
OC6.5.1 A National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Demand Reduction
will, where possible, be issued by The Company, as more particularly set out in OC6.5.4,
OC7.4.8 and BC1.5.4 when The Company anticipates that it will or may instruct a Network
Operator to implement Demand reduction. It will, as provided in OC6.5.10 and OC7.4.8.2,
also be issued to Non-Embedded Customers.
OC6.5.2 Where The Company expects to instruct Demand reduction within the following 30 minutes,
The Company will where possible, issue a National Electricity Transmission System
Warning - Demand Control Imminent in accordance with OC7.4.8.2(c) and OC7.4.8.6.
OC6.5.3 (a) Whether a National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Demand
Reduction or National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Demand Control
Imminent has been issued or not:
(i) provided the instruction relates to not more than 20 per cent of its total Demand;
and
(ii) if the instruction relates to less than 20 per cent of its total Demand, is in
• two voltage reduction stages of between 2 and 4 percent, each of which can
reasonably be expected to deliver around 1.5 percent Demand reduction; and

• up to three Demand Disconnection stages, each of which can reasonably

be expected to deliver between four and six percent Demand reduction,

each Network Operator will abide by the instructions of The Company, which
should specify whether a voltage reduction or Demand Disconnection stage is
required; or
(iii) if the instruction relates to less than 20 per cent of its total Demand, is in four
Demand Disconnection stages each of which can reasonably be expected to
deliver between four and six per cent Demand reduction,
each Network Operator will abide by the instructions of The Company with regard to
Demand reduction under OC6.5 without delay.
(b) The Demand reduction must be achieved within the Network Operator's System as far
as possible uniformly across all Grid Supply Points (unless otherwise specified in the
National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Demand
Reduction) either by Customer voltage reduction or by Demand Disconnection.
(c) Demand Control initiated by voltage reduction shall be initiated as soon as possible but
in any event no longer than two minutes from the instruction being received from The
Company, and completed within 10 minutes of the instruction being received from The
Company.

(d) Demand Control initiated by Demand Disconnection shall be initiated as soon as

possible but in any event no longer than two minutes from the instruction being received
from The Company, and completed within five minutes of the instruction being received
from The Company.

(e) Each Network Operator must notify The Company in writing by calendar week 24 each
year, for the succeeding Financial Year onwards, whether Demand Control is to be
implemented either:

i) by a combination of voltage reduction and Demand Disconnection; or

ii) Demand Disconnection alone;

together with the magnitude of the voltage reduction stages (where applicable) and for
Demand Disconnection stages, the demand reduction anticipated. Thereafter, any
changes must be notified in writing to The Company at least 10 Business Days prior to
Issue 6 Revision 20 OC6 15 December 2023
6 of 12
 the change coming into effect.

OC6.5.4 (a) Where The Company wishes to instruct a Demand reduction of more than 20 per cent
of a Network Operator's Demand, it shall, if it is able, issue a National Electricity
Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Demand Reduction to the Network
Operator by 1600 hours on the previous day. The warning will state the percentage level
of Demand reduction that The Company may want to instruct.
(b) The National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Demand
Reduction will specify the percentage of Demand reduction that The Company may
require in integral multiples of the percentage levels notified by Users under OC6.5.3(e)
up to (and including) 20 per cent and integral multiples of between 4 and 6 per cent above
20 per cent and will not relate to more than 40 per cent of Demand on the User System
of a Network Operator.
(c) If The Company has issued the National Electricity Transmission System Warning -
High Risk of Demand Reduction by 1600 hours on the previous day, on receipt of it,
the relevant Network Operator shall make available the percentage reduction in
Demand specified for use within the period of the National Electricity Transmission
System Warning.
(d) If The Company has not issued the National Electricity Transmission System
Warning - High Risk of Demand Reduction by 1600 hours the previous day, but after
that time, the Network Operator shall make available as much of the required Demand
reduction as it is able, for use within the period of the National Electricity Transmission
System Warning.

OC6.5.5 (a) If The Company has given a National Electricity Transmission System Warning -
High Risk of Demand Reduction to a Network Operator, and has issued it by 1600
hours on the previous day, it can instruct the Network Operator to reduce its Demand
by the percentage specified in the National Electricity Transmission System Warning.
(b) The Company accepts that if it has not issued the National Electricity Transmission
System Warning - High Risk of Demand Reduction by 1600 hours on the previous day
or if it has issued it by 1600 hours on the previous day, but it requires a further percentage
of Demand reduction (which may be in excess of 40 per cent of the total Demand on the
User System of the Network Operator from that set out in the National Electricity
Transmission System Warning), it can only receive an amount that can be made
available at that time by the Network Operator.
(c) Where the instruction relates to not more than 20 per cent of its total Demand each
Network Operator will implement the instruction, in accordance with OC6.5.3.
(d) Where a single instruction relates to more than 20 per cent of its total Demand each
Network Operator will:
(i) implement that part of the instruction relating to up to and including 20 per cent of
Demand Reduction in accordance with OC6.5.3.
(ii) once these instructions have been implemented by the Network Operator, any
further Demand Disconnection above those implemented in OC6.5.5(d)(i) shall take
up to 5 additional minutes from the instruction being received from The Company for
each extra 4 to 6 per cent of Demand being disconnected.
(e) Where The Company issues a Network Operator with consecutive instructions to
reduce Demand, the Network Operator will complete instructions in the order they were
issued by The Company and will not start to execute any instruction until any preceding
instruction has been completed, unless agreed with The Company.
OC6.5.6 Once a Demand reduction has been applied by a Network Operator at the instruction of The
Company, the Network Operator may interchange the Customers to whom the Demand
reduction has been applied provided that,
Issue 6 Revision 20 OC6 15 December 2023
7 of 12
 (i) the percentage of Demand reduction at all times within the Network Operator's System
does not change; and
(ii) at all times it is achieved within the Network Operator's System as far as possible
uniformly across all Grid Supply Points (unless otherwise specified in the National
Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Demand Reduction if one
has been issued),
until The Company instructs that Network Operator in accordance with OC6.
OC6.5.7 Each Network Operator will abide by the instructions of The Company with regard to the
restoration of Demand under OC6.5 without delay. It shall not restore Demand until it has
received such instruction. The restoration of Demand must be achieved as soon as possible
and the process of restoration must begin within 2 minutes of the instruction being given by
The Company.
OC6.5.8 In circumstances of protracted shortage of generation or where a statutory instruction has
been given (eg. a fuel security period) and when a reduction in Demand is envisaged by The
Company to be prolonged, The Company will notify the Network Operator of the expected
duration.
OC6.5.9 The Network Operator will notify The Company in writing that it has complied with The
Company's instruction under OC6.5, within five minutes of so doing, together with an
estimation of the Demand reduction or restoration achieved, as the case may be.
OC6.5.10 The Company may itself implement Demand reduction and subsequent restoration on Non-
Embedded Customers as part of a Demand Control requirement and it will organise the
National Electricity Transmission System so that it will be able to reduce Demand by
Disconnection of, or Customer voltage reduction to, all or any Non-Embedded Customers.
Equivalent provisions to those in OC6.5.4 shall apply to issuing a National Electricity
Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Demand Reduction to Non-Embedded
Customers, as envisaged in OC7.4.8.
OC6.5.11 Pursuant to the provisions of OC1.5.6, the Network Operator will supply to The Company
details of the amount of Demand reduction or restoration actually achieved.

Issue 6 Revision 20 OC6 15 December 2023

8 of 12
OC6.6 AUTOMATIC LOW FREQUENCY DEMAND DISCONNECTION
OC6.6.1 Each Network Operator will make arrangements that will enable automatic low Frequency
Disconnection of at least:
(i) 60 per cent of its total Demand (based on Annual ACS Conditions) at the time of
forecast National Electricity Transmission System peak Demand where such
Network Operator’s System is connected to the National Electricity Transmission
System in NGET’s Transmission Area
(ii) 40 per cent of its total Demand (based on Annual ACS Conditions) at the time of
forecast National Electricity Transmission System peak where such Network
Operator’s System is connected to the National Electricity Transmission System in
either SPT’s or SHETL’s Transmission Area
in order to seek to limit the consequences of a major loss of generation or an Event on the
Total System which leaves part of the Total System with a generation deficit. Where a
Network Operator’s System is connected to the National Electricity Transmission System
in more than one Transmission Area, the figure above for the Transmission Area in which
the majority of the Network Operator’s Demand is connected shall apply.
OC6.6.2 (a) The Demand of each Network Operator which is subject to automatic low Frequency
Disconnection will be split into discrete MW blocks.
(b) The number, size (% Demand) and the associated low Frequency settings of these
blocks, will be as specified in Table CC.A.5.5.1a and Table ECC.A.5.5.1a. The Company
will keep the settings under review.
(c) The distribution of the blocks will be such as to give a reasonably uniform Disconnection
within the Network Operator's System, as the case may be, across all Grid Supply
Points.
(d) Each Network Operator will notify The Company in writing by calendar week 24 each
year of the details of the automatic low Frequency Demand Disconnection on its User
System. The information provided should identify, for each Grid Supply Point at the date
and time of the annual peak of the National Electricity Transmission System Demand
at Annual ACS Conditions (as notified pursuant to OC1.4.2), the frequency settings at
which Demand Disconnection will be initiated and the amount of Demand disconnected
at each such setting.
OC6.6.3 Where conditions are such that, following automatic low Frequency Demand Disconnection,
and the subsequent Frequency recovery, it is not possible to restore a large proportion of the
total Demand so disconnected within a reasonable period of time, The Company may instruct
a Network Operator to implement additional Demand Disconnection manually, and restore
an equivalent amount of the Demand that had been disconnected automatically. The purpose
of such action is to ensure that a subsequent fall in Frequency will again be contained by the
operation of automatic low Frequency Demand Disconnection.
OC6.6.4 Once an automatic low Frequency Demand Disconnection has taken place, the Network
Operator on whose User System it has occurred, will not reconnect until The Company
instructs that Network Operator to do so in accordance with OC6.
OC6.6.5 Once the Frequency has recovered, each Network Operator will abide by the instructions of
The Company with regard to reconnection under OC6.6 without delay. Reconnection must be
achieved as soon as possible and the process of reconnection must begin within 2 minutes of
the instruction being given by The Company.
OC6.6.6 (a) Non-Embedded Customers and Pumped Storage Generators, must provide
automatic low Frequency disconnection, which shall be split into discrete blocks.

Issue 6 Revision 20 OC6 15 December 2023

9 of 12
 (b) The number and size of blocks and the associated low Frequency settings shall
be as specified by The Company by week 24 each calendar year following
discussion with the Non-Embedded Customer and Pumped Storage Generator
in accordance with the relevant Bilateral Agreement.
(c ) Generators, Defence Service Providers, Restoration Service Providers or
Non-Embedded Customers in respect of Electricity Storage Modules who have
agreed with The Company to satisfy the requirements of OC6.6.6 as provided for
in ECC.6.3.7.2.3.1 must provide automatic low Frequency disconnection, which
shall be split into discrete blocks. The number and size of blocks and the
associated low Frequency settings will be specified by The Company by week 24
each calendar year following discussion with the relevant parties in accordance
with the relevant Bilateral Agreement or other relevant Ancillary Services
agreement.
OC6.6.7 (a) In addition, Generators may wish to disconnect Power Generating Modules
and/or Generating Units from the System, either manually or automatically,
should they be subject to Frequency levels which could result in Power
Generating Module and/or Generating Unit damage.
(b) This Disconnection facility on such a Power Generating Module and/or
Generating Unit directly connected to the National Electricity Transmission
System, will be agreed with The Company in accordance with the Bilateral
Agreement.
(c) Any Embedded Power Stations will need to agree this Disconnection facility with
the relevant User to whose System that Power Station is connected, which will
then need to notify The Company of this.
OC6.6.8 The Network Operator or Non-Embedded Customer, as the case may be, will notify The
Company with an estimation of the Demand reduction which has occurred under automatic
low Frequency Demand Disconnection and similarly notify the restoration, as the case may
be, in each case within five minutes of the Disconnection or restoration.
OC6.6.9 Pursuant to the provisions of OC1.5.6 the Network Operator and Non-Embedded Customer
will supply to The Company details of the amount of Demand reduction or restoration actually
achieved.
OC6.6.10 (a) In the case of a User, it is not necessary for it to provide automatic low Frequency
disconnection under OC6.6 only to the extent that it is providing, at the time it would be
so needed, low Frequency disconnection at a higher level of Frequency as an Ancillary
Service, namely if the amount provided as an Ancillary Service is less than that required
under OC6.6 then the User must provide the balance required under OC6.6 at the time
it is so needed.
(b) The provisions of OC7.4.8 relating to the use of Demand Control should be borne in
mind by Users.

OC6.7 EMERGENCY MANUAL DISCONNECTION

OC6.7.1 Each Network Operator will make arrangements that will enable it, following an instruction
from The Company, to disconnect Customers on its User System under emergency
conditions irrespective of Frequency within 30 minutes. It must be possible to apply the
Demand Disconnections to individual or specific groups of Grid Supply Points, as
determined by The Company.
OC6.7.2 (a) Each Network Operator shall provide The Company in writing by week 24 in each
calendar year, in respect of the next following year beginning week 24, on a Grid Supply
Point basis, with the following information (which is set out in a tabular format in the
Appendix):
(i) its total peak Demand (based on Annual ACS Conditions); and
(ii) the percentage value of the total peak Demand that can be disconnected (and
Issue 6 Revision 20 OC6 15 December 2023
10 of 12
 must include that which can also be reduced by voltage reduction, where
applicable) within timescales of 5/10/15/20/25/30 minutes.
(b) The information should include, in relation to the first 5 minutes, as a minimum, the 20%
of Demand that must be reduced on instruction under OC6.5.
OC6.7.3 Each Network Operator will abide by the instructions of The Company with regard to
Disconnection under OC6.7 without delay, and the Disconnection must be achieved as
soon as possible after the instruction being given by The Company, and in any case, within
the timescale registered in OC6.7. The instruction may relate to an individual Grid Supply
Point and/or groups of Grid Supply Points.
OC6.7.4 The Company will notify a Network Operator who has been instructed under OC6.7, of what
has happened on the National Electricity Transmission System to necessitate the
instruction, in accordance with the provisions of OC7 and, if relevant, OC10.
OC6.7.5 Once a Disconnection has been applied by a Network Operator at the instruction of The
Company, that Network Operator will not reconnect until The Company instructs it to do so
in accordance with OC6.
OC6.7.6 Each Network Operator will abide by the instructions of The Company with regard to
reconnection under OC6.7 without delay, and shall not reconnect until it has received such
instruction and reconnection must be achieved as soon as possible and the process of
reconnection must begin within 2 minutes of the instruction being given by The Company.
OC6.7.7 The Company may itself disconnect manually and reconnect Non-Embedded Customers as
part of a Demand Control requirement under emergency conditions.
OC6.7.8 If The Company determines that emergency manual Disconnection referred to in OC6.7 is
inadequate, The Company may disconnect Network Operators and/or Non-Embedded
Customers at Grid Supply Points, to preserve the security of the National Electricity
Transmission System.
OC6.7.9 Pursuant to the provisions of OC1.5.6 the Network Operator will supply to The Company
details of the amount of Demand reduction or restoration actually achieved.

OC6.8 OPERATION OF THE BALANCING MECHANISM DURING DEMAND CONTROL

Demand Control will constitute an Emergency Instruction in accordance with BC2.9 and it
may be necessary to depart from normal Balancing Mechanism operation in accordance with
BC2 in issuing Bid-Offer Acceptances. The Company will inform affected BM Participants
in accordance with the provisions of OC7.

Issue 6 Revision 20 OC6 15 December 2023

11 of 12
 APPENDIX 1 - EMERGENCY MANUAL DEMAND
REDUCTION/DISCONNECTION SUMMARY SHEET
(As set out in OC6.7)
NETWORK OPERATOR: [YEAR] PEAK:

% OF GROUP DEMAND DISCONNECTION

GRID (AND/OR REDUCTION IN THE CASE OF
SUPPLY THE FIRST 5 MINUTES)
POINT PEAK (CUMULATIVE) REMARKS
MW
TIME (MINS)
(Name)
5 10 15 20 25 30

Notes:
1. Data to be provided annually by week 24 to cover the following year.

< END OF OPERATING CODE NO. 6 >

Issue 6 Revision 20 OC6 15 December 2023

12 of 12
 OPERATING CODE NO. 6B
(OC6B)

EMBEDDED GENERATION CONTROL

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

OC6B.1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................2
OC6B.2 OBJECTIVE ....................................................................................................................2
OC6B.3 SCOPE............................................................................................................................2
OC6B.4 PROCEDURE FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION OF EMBEDDED GENERATION CONTROL
ON THE INSTRUCTIONS OF THE COMPANY .............................................................................4
OC6B.5 PRIORITIES FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF EMBEDDED GENERATION CONTROL
INSTRUCTIONS .............................................................................................................................4
OC6B.6 OPERATION OF THE BALANCING MECHANISM DURING EMBEDDED GENERATION
CONTROL ......................................................................................................................................6

Issue 6 Revision 7 Page 1 of 6 04 October 2021

OC6B
 OC6B.1 INTRODUCTION
OC6B.1.1 Operating Code No.6B ("OC6B") is concerned with the provisions to be made by
Network
Operators to reduce the Active Power output from Embedded Power Stations;
a) at times when there is a large amount of Active Power on the System from
generation plant that has low (or no) inertia, to secure against the largest loss of
Load, as determined under BC1.5.5; and
b) in emergency circumstances including in the event of breakdown or operating
problems (such as in respect of System Frequency, System voltage levels or
System thermal overloads) on any part of the National Electricity
Transmission System.
OC6B.1.2 OC6B deals with Embedded Generation Control instructed by The Company.
The term "Embedded Generation Control" is used to describe a reduction in the
Active
Power output of Embedded Power Stations. Embedded Power Stations that may
be subject to Embedded Generation Control include Embedded Power Stations
connected to a Network Operator’s System and whose owners or operators are
not BM Participants.
OC6B.1.3 The procedure set out in OC6B includes a system of warnings to give advance
notice, where possible, of Embedded Generation Control that may be required by
The Company under this OC6B.
OC6B.1.4 Data relating to Embedded Generation Control should include details relating to
Active Power measured in Megawatts (MW).
OC6B.1.5 The Electricity Supply Emergency Code, as reviewed and published from time to
time by the appropriate government department for energy emergencies, provides
that in certain circumstances consumers are given a certain degree of "protection"
when rota disconnections are implemented pursuant to a direction under the Energy
Act 1976. Where relevant in terms of the incidental disconnection of demand as
part of Embedded Generation Control, no such protection can be given in relation
to Embedded Generation Control under the Grid Code.

OC6B.2 OBJECTIVE

OC6B.2.1 The overall objective of OC6B is concerned with the provisions to be made by
Network Operators to reduce the Active Power output from Embedded Power
Stations that will either avoid or relieve operational issues, in whole or in part, and
thereby to enable The Company to instruct Embedded Generation Control in a
manner that does not unduly discriminate against, or unduly prefer, any one or any
group of Generators or Suppliers or Network Operators.

OC6B.3 SCOPE
OC6B.3.1 OC6B applies to The Company and to Users which in OC6B means:
(a) Generators; and
(b) Network Operators.
OC6B.3.2 Explanation

Issue 6 Revision 7 Page 2 of 6 04 October 2021

OC6B
 OC6B.3.2.1
(a) In all situations envisaged in OC6B, Embedded Generation Control will be
implemented by one or more Network Operators; and
(b) Embedded Generation Control in all situations relates to the physical
organisation of the Total System, and not to any contractual arrangements that
may exist.
OC6B.3.2.2 Where Embedded Generation Control instructions are issued by The Company
these may:
a) require the Network Operator to achieve a reduction in Active
Power output at specified Embedded Power Station(s);
b) be for the Network Operator to achieve a reduction in Active
Power output of Embedded Power Stations, supplied via one or
more specified
Grid Supply Point(s), of a specified value; or
c) be for the Network Operator to achieve a reduction in Active
Power output of Embedded Power Stations, supplied via one or
more specified
Grid Supply Point(s), of a specified proportion of the
aggregate Active Power output compared to the Active Power
output before such an instruction was issued.

In any case, reasonable endeavours shall be employed by the Network Operator

to ensure that the reduction in Active Power output specified in the instruction is
achieved, considering also the principles relating to prioritisation set out in
OC6B.5.1 where appropriate. Even when instructed to do so by The Company, the
Network Operator will not be required to reduce the Active Power output from
one or more Embedded Power Stations by more than the Active Power output
from those Embedded Power Stations supplied via the specified Grid Supply
Point(s).

OC6B.3.2.3 Network Operators may where necessary (for example where timescales do not
allow otherwise) implement Embedded Generation Control instructions by
Embedded Generation De-energisation based on Registered Capacity so long
as reasonable endeavours are employed by the Network Operator to ensure that
the reduction in Active Power output specified in the instruction from The Company
is achieved.
OC6B.3.2.4 An instruction from The Company to the Network Operator will be given to allow
the Network Operator to arrange with Embedded Power Stations subject to
Embedded Generation Control to resume normal operation. Such arrangements
shall not commence until such an instruction has been received.
OC6B.3.2.5 The existence of any other arrangements for the management of Embedded Power
Stations by a Network Operator will not relieve a Network Operator from the
Embedded Generation Control provisions of this OC6B.

Issue 6 Revision 7 Page 3 of 6 04 October 2021

OC6B
 OC6B.4 PROCEDURE FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION OF EMBEDDED GENERATION CONTROL
ON THE INSTRUCTIONS OF THE COMPANY
OC6B.4.1 A National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Embedded
Generation Reduction will, where possible, be issued by The Company, as more
particularly set out in OC6B.4.4, OC7.4.8 and BC1.5.5 when The Company anticipates
that it will or may issue Embedded Generation Control instruction(s).
OC6B.4.2 When The Company anticipates that it will or may issue Embedded Generation Control
instruction(s) within the following 30 minutes, The Company will, where possible, issue a
National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Embedded Generation Control
Imminent in accordance with OC7.4.8.2 and OC7.4.8.11.
OC6B.4.3 (a) Whether a National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of
Embedded Generation Reduction or National Electricity Transmission System
Warning – Embedded Generation Control Imminent has been issued or not, each
Network Operator will abide by the instructions of The Company and will implement
the instructions received in the timescales specified and without delay.
(b) Unless specified otherwise, Embedded Generation Control instructions shall be
fulfilled within 30 minutes of an instruction being received from The Company.

OC6B.4.6 Once an Embedded Generation Control instruction has been implemented by a

Network Operator, the Network Operator may interchange the Embedded Generators
who have been subject to Embedded Generation Control provided that the percentage
or volume of Active Power reduction achieved at all times within the Network Operator's
System does not change.
OC6B.4.7 An instruction from The Company to the Network Operator will be given to allow the
Network Operator to arrange with a Generator owning or operating an Embedded
Power Stations subject to Embedded Generation Control to resume normal operation.
Such arrangements shall not commence until such an instruction has been received.
OC6B.4.8 Where Embedded Generation Control to manage events within the scope of OC6B is
envisaged by The Company to be a prolonged requirement, The Company will notify the
Network Operator of the expected duration.
OC6B.4.9 Each Network Operator will notify The Company in writing that it has complied with The
Company's instructions under OC6B.5, within five minutes of so doing, together with an
estimation of the Active Power output reduction achieved, in MWs, by the Embedded
Generation Control.
OC6B.4.10 Each Network Operator will supply to The Company a revised estimate of the Active
Power output reduction achieved, in MW, by the use of Embedded Generation Control
within 30 minutes of complying with the instruction.
OC6B.5 PRIORITIES FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF EMBEDDED GENERATION CONTROL
INSTRUCTIONS
OC6B.5.1 The implementation of an Embedded Generation Control instruction is at the reasonable
discretion of each Network Operator to whom an instruction is given by The Company.
In implementing an instruction and determining the order in which Embedded Power
Stations are affected by it, it is expected that a Network Operator would respect the
priority order set out in the table below unless it could be reasonably expected to be aware
of other issues that would influence the implementation order including:
a) whether the Embedded Generation Control has been issued following a National
Electricity Transmission System Warning – System NRAPM or a National Electricity
Transmission System Warning – Localised NRAPM, and therefore any specific local
circumstances that it is a requirement to address;

Issue 6 Revision 7 Page 4 of 6 04 October 2021

OC6B
 b) the effectiveness of Embedded Generation Control actions to address the
issues to be resolved;
c) Interactions with other network considerations such as the participation of
Embedded Power Stations in Active Network Management (ANM) or other
automatic switching schemes, or in the provision of other Ancillary Services; and
d) any other wider system issues and the potential consequences for Users,
including environmental and safety concerns, and where applicable taking account
of the incidence of such instructions.
All implementation decisions should be reasonable and based on the information
available to the Network Operator at the time taking into account the leadtime
available in the instruction issued by The Company

ORDER CATEGORY OF COMMENT

GENERATION
1 Non-synchronous Non-synchronous plant typically does not
generation contribute towards system inertia hence is
higher up the list due to the need to maintain
system inertia, particularly in the scenario
applicable to Embedded Generation Control
where a very low demand situation coincides
with high availability of non-synchronous
generation.
In the event that any alternatives to system
inertia are available this should also be taken
into account.
2 Synchronous generators Lower down the list due to the need to maintain
without any associated system inertia, particularly in a very low demand
demand situation.
3 Generation with For example, CHP installations, waste
associated demand management facilities, and other
industrial facilities with substantial on-site
demand.
4 Generation associated Never envisaged to be selected.
with critical national
infrastructure sites

Issue 6 Revision 7 Page 5 of 6 04 October 2021

OC6B
 OC6B.6 OPERATION OF THE BALANCING MECHANISM DURING EMBEDDED
GENERATION CONTROL
Instructions issued by The Company to carry out Embedded Generation Control will
constitute Emergency Instructions in accordance with BC2.9 and it may be necessary
to depart from normal Balancing Mechanism operation in accordance with BC2 in
issuing Bid-Offer Acceptances. The Company will inform affected BM Participants in
accordance with the provisions of OC7.

Issue 6 Revision 7 Page 6 of 6 04 October 2021

OC6B
 OPERATING CODE NO. 7
(OC7)

OPERATIONAL LIAISON

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

OC7.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................... 2
OC7.2 OBJECTIVE .......................................................................................................................................... 2
OC7.3 SCOPE .................................................................................................................................................. 3
OC7.4 PROCEDURE ....................................................................................................................................... 3
OC7.4.5 Requirement To Notify Operations ............................................................................................. 3
OC7.4.6 Requirements To Notify Events ................................................................................................. 6
OC7.4.7 Significant Incidents ................................................................................................................... 9
Oc7.4.8 National Electricity Transmission System Warnings ................................................................. 10
OC7.5 PROCEDURE IN RELATION TO INTEGRAL EQUIPMENT TESTS ................................................. 14
OC7.6 PROCEDURE IN RESPECT OF OPERATIONAL SWITCHING IN SCOTLAND AND
OFFSHORE ...................................................................................................................................................... 16
APPENDIX 1 - NATIONAL ELECTRICITY TRANSMISSION SYSTEM WARNINGS TABLE ......................... 20

Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021

1 of 22
OC7.1 INTRODUCTION
OC7.1.1 Operating Code No. 7 ("OC7") sets out the requirements for the exchange of information in
relation to Operations and/or Events on the Total System which have had (or may have had)
or will have (or may have) an Operational Effect:
(a) on the National Electricity Transmission System in the case of an Operation and/or
Event occurring on the System of a User or Users; and
(b) on the System of a User or Users in the case of an Operation and/or Event occurring
on the National Electricity Transmission System.
It also describes the types of National Electricity Transmission System Warning which may
be issued by The Company.
OC7.1.2 The requirement to notify in OC7 relates generally to notifying of what is expected to happen
or what has happened and not the reasons why. However, as OC7 provides, when an Event
or Operation has occurred on the National Electricity Transmission System which itself
has been caused by (or exacerbated by) an Operation or Event on a User's System, The
Company in reporting the Event or Operation on the National Electricity Transmission
System to another User can pass on what it has been told by the first User in relation to the
Operation or Event on the first User's System.
OC7.1.3 Where an Event or Operation on the National Electricity Transmission System falls to be
reported by The Company to an Externally Interconnected System Operator under an
Interconnection Agreement, OC7 provides that in the situation where that Event or
Operation has been caused by (or exacerbated by) an Operation or Event on a User's
System, The Company can pass on what it has been told by the User in relation to the
Operation or Event on that User's System.
OC7.1.4 OC7 also deals with Integral Equipment Tests.
OC7.1.5 To reconfigure the National Electricity Transmission System, The Company may
reasonably require the assistance of a User to reconfigure parts of the User System. To
reconfigure its User System a User may reasonably require the reasonable assistance of The
Company to direct the reconfiguration of parts of the National Electricity Transmission
System.
OC7.1.6 OC7.6 sets down the arrangements for the exchange of information required when configuring
Connection Sites (or in the case of OTSUA operational prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time,
Transmission Interface Sites) and parts of the National Electricity Transmission System
adjacent to those Connection Sites (or Transmission Interface Sites) in Scotland and
Offshore. It also covers the setting up of a Local Switching Procedure. The Company shall
procure that Relevant Transmission Licensees shall comply with section OC7.6 and any
relevant Local Switching Procedure where and to the extent that such matters apply to them.
OC7.2 OBJECTIVE
The objectives of OC7 are:
OC7.2.1 To provide for the exchange of information so that the implications of an Operation and/or
Event can be considered, possible risks arising from it can be assessed and appropriate action
taken by the relevant party in order to maintain the integrity of the Total System. OC7 does
not seek to deal with any actions arising from the exchange of information, but merely with
that exchange.
OC7.2.2 To provide for types of National Electricity Transmission System Warnings which may be
issued by The Company.
OC7.2.3 To provide the framework for the information flow and discussion between The Company and
certain Users in relation to Integral Equipment Tests.
OC7.2.4 To provide the procedure to be followed in respect of Operational Switching

Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021

2 of 22
OC7.3 SCOPE

OC7.3.1 OC7 applies to The Company and to Users, which in OC7 means:
(a) Generators (other than those which only have Embedded Small Power Stations or
Embedded Medium Power Stations) and including Generators undertaking OTSDUW;
(b) Network Operators;
(c) Non-Embedded Customers;
(d) Suppliers (for the purposes of National Electricity Transmission System Warnings);
(e) Externally Interconnected System Operators (for the purposes of National Electricity
Transmission System Warnings); and
(f) DC Converter Station owners and HVDC System Owners.
The procedure for operational liaison by The Company with Externally Interconnected
System Operators is set out in the Interconnection Agreement with each Externally
Interconnected System Operator.
OC7.6 also applies to Relevant Transmission Licensees.
OC7.4 PROCEDURE
OC7.4.1 The term "Operation" means a scheduled or planned action relating to the operation of a
System (including an Embedded Power Station).
OC7.4.2 The term "Event" means an unscheduled or unplanned (although it may be anticipated)
occurrence on, or relating to, a System (including an Embedded Power Station) including,
without limiting that general description, faults, incidents and breakdowns and adverse
weather conditions being experienced.
OC7.4.3 The term "Operational Effect" means any effect on the operation of the relevant other System
which causes the National Electricity Transmission System or the Systems of the other
User or Users, as the case may be, to operate (or be at a materially increased risk of
operating) differently to the way in which they would or may have normally operated in the
absence of that effect.
OC7.4.4 References in this OC7 to a System of a User or User's System shall not include Embedded
Small Power Stations or Embedded Medium Power Stations, unless otherwise stated.
OC7.4.5 Requirement To Notify Operations
OC7.4.5.1 Operation On The National Electricity Transmission System
In the case of an Operation on the National Electricity Transmission System, which will
have (or may have) an Operational Effect on the System(s) of a User or Users, The
Company will notify the User or Users whose System(s) will, or may, in the reasonable
opinion of The Company, be affected, in accordance with OC7.
OC7.4.5.2 Operation On a User's System
In the case of an Operation on the System of a User which will have (or may have) an
Operational Effect on the National Electricity Transmission System (including an
equivalent to an Operation on the equivalent of a System of a User or other person connected
to that User's System which, via that User System, will or may have an Operational Effect
on the National Electricity Transmission System), the User will notify The Company in
accordance with OC7. Following notification by the User, The Company will notify any other
User or Users on whose System(s) the Operation will have, or may have, in the reasonable
opinion of The Company, an Operational Effect, in accordance with OC7 and will notify any
Externally Interconnected System Operator on whose System the Operation will have, or
may have, in the reasonable opinion of The Company, an Operational Effect, if it is required
to do so by the relevant Interconnection Agreement.

OC7.4.5.3 Examples Of Situations Where Notification By The Company Or a User may be Required
Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021
3 of 22
 Whilst in no way limiting the general requirement to notify in advance set out in OC7.4.5.1 and
OC7.4.5.2, the following are examples of situations where notification in accordance with
OC7.4.5 will be required if they will, or may, have an Operational Effect:
(a) the implementation of a planned outage of Plant and/or Apparatus which has been
arranged pursuant to OC2;
(b) the operation (other than, in the case of a User, at the instruction of The Company) of
any circuit breaker or isolator/disconnector or any sequence or combination of the two; or
(c) voltage control.
OC7.4.5.4 Operations Caused By Another Operation Or By An Event
An Operation may be caused by another Operation or an Event on another's System
(including an Embedded Power Station) (or by the equivalent of an Event or Operation on
the System of an Externally Interconnected System Operator or Interconnector User) and
in that situation the information to be notified is different to that where the Operation arose
independently of any other Operation or Event, as more particularly provided in OC7.4.5.6.
OC7.4.5.5 Form
A notification and any response to any questions asked under OC7.4.5, of an Operation which
has arisen independently of any other Operation or of an Event, shall be of sufficient detail to
describe the Operation (although it need not state the cause) and to enable the recipient of
the notification reasonably to consider and assess the implications and risks arising (provided
that, in the case of an Operation on a User's System which The Company is notifying to
other Users under OC7.4.5.2, The Company will only pass on what it has been told by the
User which has notified it) and will include the name of the individual reporting the Operation
on behalf of The Company or the User, as the case may be. The recipient may ask questions
to clarify the notification and the giver of the notification will, insofar as it is able, answer any
questions raised, provided that, in the case of an Operation on a User's System which The
Company is notifying to other Users under OC7.4.5.2, in answering any question, The
Company will not pass on anything further than that which it has been told by the User which
has notified it. The Company may pass on the information contained in the notification as
provided in OC7.4.5.6.
OC7.4.5.6 (a) A notification by The Company of an Operation under OC7.4.5.1 which has been caused
by another Operation (the "first Operation") or by an Event on a User's System, will
describe the Operation and will contain the information which The Company has been
given in relation to the first Operation or that Event by the User. The notification and any
response to any questions asked (other than in relation to the information which The
Company is merely passing on from a User) will be of sufficient detail to enable the
recipient of the notification reasonably to consider and assess the implications and risks
arising from the Operation on the National Electricity Transmission System and will
include the name of the individual reporting the Operation on behalf of The Company.
The recipient may ask questions to clarify the notification and The Company will, insofar
as it is able, answer any questions raised, provided that in relation to the information
which The Company is merely passing on from a User, in answering any question The
Company will not pass on anything further than that which it has been told by the User
which has notified it.
(b) Where a User is reporting an Operation or an Event which itself has been caused by an
incident or scheduled or planned action affecting (but not on) its System, the notification
to The Company will contain the information which the User has been given by the
person connected to its System in relation to that incident or scheduled or planned action
(which the User must require, contractually or otherwise, the person connected to its
System to give to it) and The Company may pass on the information contained in the
notification as provided in this OC7.4.5.6.

Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021

4 of 22
OC7.4.5.7 Where an Operation on the National Electricity Transmission System falls to be reported
by The Company under an Interconnection Agreement and the Operation has been
caused by another Operation (the "first Operation") or by an Event on a User's System, The
Company will include in that report the information which The Company has been given in
relation to the first Operation or that Event by the User (including any information relating to
an incident or scheduled or planned action, as provided in OC7.4.5.6).
OC7.4.5.8 (a) A notification to a User by The Company of an Operation under OC7.4.5.1 which has
been caused by the equivalent of an Operation or of an Event on the equivalent of a
System of an Externally Interconnected System Operator or Interconnector User,
will describe the Operation on the National Electricity Transmission System and will
contain the information which The Company has been given, in relation to the equivalent
of an Operation or of an Event on the equivalent of a System of an Externally
Interconnected System Operator or Interconnector User, by that Externally
Interconnected System Operator or Interconnector User.
(b) The notification and any response to any question asked (other than in relation to the
information which The Company is merely passing on from that Externally
Interconnected System Operator or Interconnector User) will be of sufficient detail to
enable the recipient of the notification reasonably to consider and assess the implications
and risks arising from the Operation on the National Electricity Transmission System
and will include the name of the individual reporting the Operation on behalf of The
Company. The recipient may ask questions to clarify the notification and The Company
will, insofar as it is able, answer any questions raised, provided that, in relation to the
information which The Company is merely passing on from an Externally
Interconnected System Operator or Interconnector User, in answering any question
The Company will not pass on anything further than that which it has been told by the
Externally Interconnected System Operator or Interconnector User which has
notified it.
OC7.4.5.9 (a) A Network Operator may pass on the information contained in a notification to it from
The Company under OC7.4.5.1, to a Generator with a Power Generating Module
(including a DC Connected Power Park Module), Generating Unit or a Power Park
Module connected to its System, or to a DC Converter Station owner with a DC
Converter or to a HVDC System Owner with a HVDC System connected to its System,
or to the operator of another User System connected to its System (which, for the
avoidance of doubt, could be another Network Operator), in connection with reporting
the equivalent of an Operation under the Distribution Code (or the contract pursuant to
which that Power Generating Module (including a DC Connecting Power Generating
Module), and/or Generating Unit and/or Power Park Module or other User System, or
to a DC Converter Station or to an HVDC System is connected to the System of that
Network Operator) (if the Operation on the National Electricity Transmission System
caused it).
(b) A Generator may pass on the information contained in a notification to it from The
Company under OC7.4.5.1, to another Generator with a Power Generating Module
(including a DC Connected Power Park Module) and/or a Generating Unit or a Power
Park Module connected to its System, or to the operator of a User System connected
to its System (which, for the avoidance of doubt, could be a Network Operator), if it is
required (by a contract pursuant to which that Power Generating Module (including a
DC Connected Power Park Module) and/or Generating Unit and/or that Power Park
Module or that User System is connected to its System) to do so in connection with the
equivalent of an Operation on its System (if the Operation on the National Electricity
Transmission System caused it).

Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021

5 of 22
OC7.4.5.10 (a) Other than as provided in OC7.4.5.9, a Network Operator or a Generator may not pass
on any information contained in a notification to it from The Company under OC7.4.5.1
(and an operator of a User System or Generator receiving information which was
contained in a notification to a Generator or a Network Operator, as the case may be,
from The Company under OC7.4.5.1, as envisaged in OC7.4.5.9 may not pass on this
information) to any other person, but may inform persons connected to its System (or in
the case of a Generator which is also a Supplier, inform persons to which it supplies
electricity which may be affected) that there has been an incident on the Total System,
the general nature of the incident (but not the cause of the incident) and (if known and if
power supplies have been affected) an estimated time of return to service.
(b) In the case of a Generator which has an Affiliate which is a Supplier, the Generator
may inform it that there has been an incident on the Total System, the general nature of
the incident (but not the cause of the incident) and (if known and if power supplies have
been affected in a particular area) an estimated time of return to service in that area, and
that Supplier may pass this on to persons to which it supplies electricity which may be
affected).
(c) Each Network Operator and Generator shall use its reasonable endeavours to procure
that any Generator or operator of a User System receiving information which was
contained in a notification to a Generator or Network Operator, as the case may be,
from The Company under OC7.4.5.1, which is not bound by the Grid Code, does not
pass on any information other than as provided above.
OC7.4.5.11 The notification will, if either party requests, be recorded by the sender and dictated to the
recipient, who shall record and repeat each phrase as it is received and on completion of the
dictation shall repeat back the notification in full to the sender who shall confirm that it has
been accurately recorded.
OC7.4.5.12 Timing
A notification under OC7.4.5 will be given as far in advance as possible and in any event shall
be given in sufficient time as will reasonably allow the recipient to consider and assess the
implications and risks arising.
OC7.4.6 Requirements To Notify Events
OC7.4.6.1 Events On The National Electricity Transmission System
In the case of an Event on the National Electricity Transmission System which has had (or
may have had) an Operational Effect on the System(s) of a User or Users, The Company
will notify the User or Users whose System(s) have been, or may have been, in the
reasonable opinion of The Company, affected, in accordance with OC7.
OC7.4.6.2 Events On A User's System
In the case of an Event on the System of a User which has had (or may have had) an
Operational Effect on the National Electricity Transmission System, the User will notify
The Company in accordance with OC7.
OC7.4.6.3 Events Caused By Another Event Or By An Operation
An Event may be caused (or exacerbated by) another Event or by an Operation on another's
System (including on an Embedded Power Station) (or by the equivalent of an Event or
Operation on the equivalent of a System of an Externally Interconnected System Operator
or Interconnector User) and in that situation the information to be notified is different to that
where the Event arose independently of any other Event or Operation, as more particularly
provided in OC7.4.6.7.
OC7.4.6.4 The Company or a User, as the case may be, may enquire of the other whether an Event
has occurred on the other's System. If it has, and the party on whose System the Event has
occurred is of the opinion that it may have had an Operational Effect on the System of the
party making the enquiry, it shall notify the enquirer in accordance with OC7.
OC7.4.6.5 Examples Of Situations Where Notification By The Company or a User may be Required
Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021
6 of 22
 Whilst in no way limiting the general requirement to notify set out in OC7.4.6.1, OC7.4.6.2 and
OC7.4.6.3, the following are examples of situations where notification in accordance with
OC7.4.6 will be required if they have an Operational Effect:
(a) where Plant and/or Apparatus is being operated in excess of its capability or may
present a hazard to personnel;
(b) the activation of any alarm or indication of any abnormal operating condition;
(c) adverse weather conditions being experienced;
(d) breakdown of, or faults on, or temporary changes in the capabilities of, Plant and/or
Apparatus;
(e) breakdown of, or faults on, control, communication and metering equipment; or
(f) increased risk of inadvertent protection operation.
Form
OC7.4.6.6 A notification and any response to any questions asked under OC7.4.6.1 and OC7.4.6.2 of an
Event which has arisen independently of any other Event or of an Operation, will describe
the Event, although it need not state the cause of the Event, and, subject to that, will be of
sufficient detail to enable the recipient of the notification reasonably to consider and assess
the implications and risks arising and will include the name of the individual reporting the Event
on behalf of The Company or the User, as the case may be. The recipient may ask questions
to clarify the notification and the giver of the notification will, insofar as it is able (although it
need not state the cause of the Event) answer any questions raised. The Company may pass
on the information contained in the notification as provided in OC7.4.6.7.
OC7.4.6.7 (a) A notification (and any response to any questions asked under OC7.4.6.1) by The
Company of (or relating to) an Event under OC7.4.6.1 which has been caused by (or
exacerbated by) another Event (the "first Event") or by an Operation on a User's
System will describe the Event and will contain the information which The Company
has been given in relation to the first Event or that Operation by the User (but otherwise
need not state the cause of the Event). The notification and any response to any
questions asked (other than in relation to the information which The Company is merely
passing on from a User) will be of sufficient detail to enable the recipient of the notification
reasonably to consider and assess the implications and risks arising from the Event on
the National Electricity Transmission System and will include the name of the
individual reporting the Event on behalf of The Company. The recipient may ask
questions to clarify the notification and The Company will, insofar as it is able, answer
any questions raised, provided that in relation to the information which The Company is
merely passing on from a User, in answering any question The Company will not pass
on anything further than that which it has been told by the User which has notified it.
(b) Where a User is reporting an Event or an Operation which itself has been caused by (or
exacerbated by) an incident or scheduled or planned action affecting (but not on) its
System the notification to The Company will contain the information which the User has
been given by the person connected to its System in relation to that incident or scheduled
or planned action (which the User must require, contractually or otherwise, the person
connected to its System to give to it) and The Company may pass on the information
contained in the notification as provided in this OC7.4.6.7.
OC7.4.6.8 Where an Event on the National Electricity Transmission System falls to be reported by
The Company under an Interconnection Agreement and the Event has been caused by (or
exacerbated by) another Event (the "first Event") or by an Operation on a User's System,
The Company will include in that report the information which The Company has been given
in relation to the first Event or that Operation by the User (including any information relating
to an incident or scheduled or planned action on that User's System, as provided in
OC7.4.6.7).

Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021

7 of 22
OC7.4.6.9 (a) A notification to a User (and any response to any questions asked under OC7.4.6.1) by
The Company of (or relating to) an Event under OC7.4.6.1 which has been caused by
(or exacerbated by) the equivalent of an Event or of an Operation on the equivalent of a
System of an Externally Interconnected System Operator or Interconnector User,
will describe the Event on the National Electricity Transmission System and will
contain the information which The Company has been given, in relation to the equivalent
of an Event or of an Operation on the equivalent of a System of an Externally
Interconnected System Operator or Interconnector User, by that Externally
Interconnected System Operator or Interconnector User (but otherwise need not state
the cause of the Event).
(b) The notification and any response to any questions asked (other than in relation to the
information which The Company is merely passing on from that Externally
Interconnected System Operator or Interconnector User) will be of sufficient detail to
enable the recipient of the notification reasonably to consider and assess the implications
and risks arising from the Event on the National Electricity Transmission System and
will include the name of the individual reporting the Event on behalf of The Company.
The recipient may ask questions to clarify the notification and The Company will, insofar
as it is able (although it need not state the cause of the Event) answer any questions
raised, provided that, in relation to the information which The Company is merely passing
on from an Externally Interconnected System Operator or Interconnector User, in
answering any question The Company will not pass on anything further than that which
it has been told by the Externally Interconnected System Operator or Interconnector
User which has notified it.
OC7.4.6.10 (a) A Network Operator may pass on the information contained in a notification to it from
The Company under OC7.4.6.1, to a Generator with a Power Generating Module
(including a DC Connected Power Park Module) and/or Generating Unit and/or a
Power Park Module connected to its System or to a DC Converter Station owner with
a DC Converter or to an HVDC System Owner with an HVDC System connected to its
System or to the operator of another User System connected to its System (which, for
the avoidance of doubt, could be a Network Operator), in connection with reporting the
equivalent of an Event under the Distribution Code (or the contract pursuant to which
that Power Generating Module and/or Generating Unit and/or Power Park Module or
DC Converter or HVDC System or other User System is connected to the System of
that Network Operator) (if the Event on the National Electricity Transmission System
caused or exacerbated it).
(b) A Generator may pass on the information contained in a notification to it from The
Company under OC7.4.6.1, to another Generator with a Power Generating Module
and/or Generating Unit and/or a Power Park Module connected to its System or to the
operator of a User System connected to its System (which, for the avoidance of doubt,
could be a Network Operator), if it is required (by a contract pursuant to which that
Power Generating Module (including a DC Connected Power Park Module) and/or
Generating Unit and/or that Power Park Module or that User System is connected to
its System) to do so in connection with the equivalent of an Event on its System (if the
Event on the National Electricity Transmission System caused or exacerbated it).
OC7.4.6.11 (a) Other than as provided in OC7.4.6.10, a Network Operator or a Generator, may not
pass on any information contained in a notification to it from The Company under
OC7.4.6.1 (and an operator of a User System or Generator receiving information which
was contained in a notification to a Generator or a Network Operator, as the case may
be, from The Company under OC7.4.6.1, as envisaged in OC7.4.6.10 may not pass on
this information) to any other person, but may inform persons connected to its System
(or in the case of a Generator which is also a Supplier, inform persons to which it
supplies electricity which may be affected) that there has been an incident on the Total
System, the general nature of the incident (but not the cause of the incident) and (if known
and if power supplies have been affected) an estimated time of return to service.

Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021

8 of 22
 (b) In the case of a Generator which has an Affiliate which is a Supplier, the Generator
may inform it that there has been an incident on the Total System, the general nature of
the incident (but not the cause of the incident) and (if known and if power supplies have
been affected in a particular area) an estimated time of return to service in that area, and
that Supplier may pass this on to persons to which it supplies electricity which may be
affected).
(c) Each Network Operator and Generator shall use its reasonable endeavours to procure
that any Generator or operator of a User System receiving information which was
contained in a notification to a Generator or Network Operator, as the case may be,
from The Company under OC7.4.6.1, which is not bound by the Grid Code, does not
pass on any information other than as provided above.
OC7.4.6.12 When an Event relating to a Power Generating Module and/or Generating Unit and/or a
Power Park Module or a DC Converter or an HVDC System (or OTSUA operational prior to
the OTSUA Transfer Time), has been reported to The Company by a Generator or DC
Converter Station owner or HVDC System Owner under OC7.4.6 and it is necessary in order
for the Generator or DC Converter Station owner or HVDC System Owner to assess the
implications of the Event on its System more accurately, the Generator or DC Converter
Station owner or HVDC System Owner may ask The Company for details of the fault levels
from the National Electricity Transmission System to that Power Generating Module
and/or Generating Unit and/or Power Park Module or DC Converter or HVDC System (or
OTSUA operational prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time) at the time of the Event, and The
Company will, as soon as reasonably practicable, give the Generator or DC Converter
Station owner or HVDC System Owner that information provided that The Company has
that information.
OC7.4.6.13 Except in an emergency situation the notification of an Event will, if either party requests, be
recorded by the sender and dictated to the recipient, who shall record and repeat each phrase
as it is received and on completion of the dictation shall repeat the notification in full to the
sender who shall confirm that it has been accurately recorded.
Timing
OC7.4.6.14 A notification under OC7.4.6 shall be given as soon as possible after the occurrence of the
Event, or time that the Event is known of or anticipated by the giver of the notification under
OC7, and in any event within 15 minutes of such time.
OC7.4.7 Significant Incidents
OC7.4.7.1 Where a User notifies The Company of an Event under OC7 which The Company considers
has had or may have had a significant effect on the National Electricity Transmission
System, The Company will require the User to report that Event in writing in accordance
with the provisions of OC10 and will notify that User accordingly.
OC7.4.7.2 Where The Company notifies a User of an Event under OC7 which the User considers has
had or may have had a significant effect on that User's System, that User will require The
Company to report that Event in writing in accordance with the provisions of OC10 and will
notify The Company accordingly.
OC7.4.7.3 Events which The Company requires a User to report in writing pursuant to OC7.4.7.1, and
Events which a User requires The Company to report in writing pursuant to OC7.4.7.2, are
known as "Significant Incidents".
OC7.4.7.4 Without limiting the general description set out in OC7.4.7.1 and OC7.4.7.2, a Significant
Incident will include Events having an Operational Effect which result in, or may result in,
the following:
(a) operation of Plant and/or Apparatus either manually or automatically;
(b) voltage outside statutory limits;
(c) Frequency outside statutory limits; or
(d) System instability.
Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021
9 of 22
OC 7.4.8 National Electricity Transmission System Warnings
OC7.4.8.1 Role Of National Electricity Transmission System Warnings
National Electricity Transmission System Warnings as described below provide
information relating to System conditions or Events and are intended to:
(i) alert Users to possible or actual Plant shortage, System problems and/or Demand or
generation Active Power reductions;
(ii) inform of the applicable period;
(iii) indicate intended consequences for Users; and
(iv) enable specified Users to be in a state of readiness to react properly to instructions
received from The Company.
A table of National Electricity Transmission System Warnings, set out in Appendix 1 to
OC7, summarises the warnings and their usage. In the case of a conflict between the table
and the provisions of the written text of OC7, the written text will prevail.
OC7.4.8.2 Recipients Of National Electricity Transmission System Warnings
(a) Where National Electricity Transmission System Warnings,(except those relating to
Demand Control Imminent and Embedded Generation Control Imminent), are
applicable to System conditions or Events which have widespread effect, The Company
will notify all Users under OC7.
(b) Where in The Company’s judgement System conditions or Events may only have a
limited effect, the National Electricity Transmission System Warning will as a
minimum only be issued to those Users who are or may in The Company’s judgement
be affected.
(c) Where a National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Demand Control
Imminent is issued it will as a minimum only be sent to those Users who are likely to
receive Demand Control instructions from The Company.
(d) Where a National Electricity Transmission System Warning Embedded Generation
Control Imminent is issued it will as a minimum only be sent to those Network
Operators who are likely to receive Embedded Generation Control instructions.

OC7.4.8.3 Preparatory Action

(a) Where possible, and if required, recipients of the warnings should take such preparatory
action as they deem necessary taking into account the information contained in the
National Electricity Transmission System Warning. All warnings will be of a form
determined by The Company and will remain in force from the stated time of
commencement until the cancellation, amendment or re-issue, as the case may be, is
notified by The Company.
(b) Where a National Electricity Transmission System Warning has been issued to a
Network Operator and is current, Demand Control should not (subject as provided
below) be employed unless instructed by The Company. If Demand Control is, however,
necessary to preserve the integrity of the Network Operator's System, then the impact
upon the integrity of the Total System should be considered by the Network Operator
and where practicable discussed with The Company prior to its implementation.
Where a National Electricity Transmission System Warning has been issued to a
Supplier, further Customer Demand Management (in addition to that previously notified
under OC1 - Demand Forecasts) must only be implemented following notification to The
Company.

Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021

10 of 22
 (c) National Electricity Transmission System Warnings will be issued by such data
transmission facilities as have been agreed between The Company and Users. In the
case of Generators with Gensets this will normally be at their Trading Points (if they
have notified The Company that they have a Trading Point).
(d) Users may at times be informed by telephone of National Electricity Transmission
System Warnings and in these circumstances confirmation will be sent to those Users
so notified by such data transmission facilities as have been agreed between The
Company and Users, as soon as possible.
OC7.4.8.4 Types Of National Electricity Transmission System Warnings
National Electricity Transmission System Warnings consist of the following types:-
(i) National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Electricity Margin Notice
(ii) National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Demand
Reduction
(iii) National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Demand Control Imminent
(iv) National Electricity Transmission System Warning – System NRAPM
(v) National Electricity Transmission System Warning – Localised NRAPM
(vi) National Electricity Transmission System Warning – High Risk of Embedded
Generation Reduction
(vii) National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Embedded Generation Control
Imminent
(viii) National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Risk of System Disturbance
OC7.4.8.5 National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Electricity Margin Notice
A National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Electricity Margin Notice may be
issued to Users in accordance with OC7.4.8.2, at times when there is a reduced System
Margin, as determined under BC1.5.4. It will contain the following information:
(i) the period for which the warning is applicable; and
(ii) the availability shortfall in MW; and
(iii) intended consequences for Users, including notification that Maximum Generation
Service may be instructed.
OC 7.4.8.6 National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Demand Reduction
(a) A National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Demand
Reduction may be issued to Users in accordance with OC7.4.8.2 at times when there is
a reduced System Margin, as determined under BC1.5.4 and in The Company’s
judgement there is increased risk of Demand reduction being implemented under
OC6.5.1. It will contain the following information in addition to the required information in
a National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Electricity Margin Notice:
(i) the possible percentage level of Demand reduction required; and
(ii) Specify those Network Operators and Non Embedded Customers who may
subsequently receive instructions under OC6.5.1.
(b) A National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Demand
Reduction may also be issued by The Company to those Network Operators and Non
Embedded Customers who may subsequently receive instructions under OC6.5.1
relating to a Demand reduction in circumstances not related to System Margin (for
example Demand reduction required to manage System overloading).
The National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Demand
Reduction will specify the period during which Demand reduction may be required and
the part of the Total System to which it applies and any other matters specified in OC6.5.

Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021

11 of 22
OC7.4.8.6.1 Protracted Periods Of Generation Shortage
(a) Whenever The Company anticipates that a protracted period of generation shortage may
exist a National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Electricity Margin Notice
or High Risk of Demand Reduction may be issued, to give as much notice as possible
to those Network Operators and Non Embedded Customers who may subsequently
receive instructions under OC6.5.
(b) A National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Demand
Reduction will in these instances include an estimate of the percentage of Demand
reduction that may be required and the anticipated duration of the Demand reduction. It
may also include information relating to estimates of any further percentage of Demand
reduction that may be required.
(c) The issue of the National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Electricity
Margin Notice or High Risk of Demand Reduction is intended to enable recipients to
plan ahead on the various aspects of Demand reduction.
OC7.4.8.7 National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Demand Control Imminent
(a) A National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Demand Control Imminent,
relating to a Demand reduction under OC6.5, will be issued by The Company to Users
in accordance with OC7.4.8.2. It will specify those Network Operators who may
subsequently receive instructions under OC6.5.
(b) A National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Demand Control Imminent,
need not be preceded by any other National Electricity Transmission System Warning
and will be issued when a Demand reduction is expected within the following 30 minutes,
but will not cease to have effect after 30 minutes from its issue. However, The Company
will either reissue the National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Demand
Control Imminent or cancel the National Electricity Transmission System Warning -
Demand Control Imminent no later than 2 hours from first issue, or from re-issue, as the
case may be.
OC.7.4.8.8 National Electricity Transmission System Warning – System NRAPM
(a) Procedures for maintaining System NRAPM are defined in BC1.5.5 but where this is, in
the view of The Company and as set out in BC1.5.5, deemed likely to be insufficient this
will be communicated to all Users and will be treated as a System Warning.
(b) Such a System Warning will where possible include information on the likely reduction in
Active Power that will be required and the timing and duration of this.
(c) A System NRAPM refers to the margin of Active Power across the whole System.

OC.7.4.8.9 National Electricity Transmission System Warning – Localised NRAPM

(a) Procedures for maintaining Localised NRAPM are defined in BC1.5.5 but where this is, in
the view of The Company and as set out in BC1.5.5, deemed likely to be insufficient this
will be communicated to all Users and will be treated as a System Warning.
(b) Such a System Warning will where possible include information on the likely reduction in
Active Power that will be required and the timing and duration of this.
(c) A Localised NRAPM refers to the management of transfers to and from a System
Constraint Group.

Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021

12 of 22
OC 7.4.8.10 National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Embedded Generation
Reduction
(a) A National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Embedded
Generation Reduction may be issued to Users in accordance with OC7.4.8.2 at times
when in The Company’s judgement there is increased risk of Embedded Generation
Control being required as defined in OC6B.5.1.
(b) In addition to any information communicated through a System NRAPM or Localised
NRAPM, the National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of
Embedded Generation Reduction will specify the period during which Embedded
Generation Control may be required and the part of the Total System to which it applies
and any other matters specified in OC6B.5.

(c) The issue of the National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of
Embedded Generation Reduction is intended to enable recipients to plan ahead on the
various aspects of Embedded Generation Control.

OC7.4.8.11 National Electricity Transmission System Warning – Embedded Generation Control

Imminent
(a) A National Electricity Transmission System Warning – Embedded Generation
Control Imminent will be issued by The Company to Users in accordance with
OC7.4.8.2. It will specify those Network Operators who may subsequently receive
instructions under OC6B.5.
(b) A National Electricity Transmission System Warning – Embedded Generation
Control Imminent, need not be preceded by any other National Electricity
Transmission System Warning and will be issued when an Embedded Generation
Control instruction is expected within the following 30 minutes, but will not cease to have
effect after 30 minutes from its issue. However, The Company will either reissue the
National Electricity Transmission System Warning – Embedded Generation
Control Imminent or cancel the National Electricity Transmission System Warning
– Embedded Generation Control Imminent no later than 2 hours from first issue, or
from re-issue, as the case may be.

OC7.4.8.12 National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Risk of System Disturbance

(a) A National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Risk of System Disturbance
will be issued by The Company to Users who may be affected when The Company
knows there is a risk of widespread and serious disturbance to the whole or part of, the
National Electricity Transmission System;
(b) The National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Risk of System
Disturbance will contain such information as The Company deems appropriate;
(c) For the duration of the National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Risk of
System Disturbance, each User in receipt of the National Electricity Transmission
System Warning - Risk of System Disturbance shall take the necessary steps to warn
its operational staff and to maintain its Plant and/or Apparatus in the condition in which
it is best able to withstand the anticipated disturbance;
(d) During the period that the National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Risk
of System Disturbance is in effect, The Company may issue Emergency Instructions
in accordance with BC2 and it may be necessary to depart from normal Balancing
Mechanism operation in accordance with BC2 in issuing Bid-Offer Acceptances.
OC7.4.8.13 Cancellation of National Electricity Transmission System Warning
(a) The Company will give notification of a Cancellation of National Electricity
Transmission System Warning to all Users issued with the National Electricity
Transmission System Warning when in The Company’s judgement System
conditions have returned to normal.
Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021
13 of 22
 (b) A Cancellation of National Electricity Transmission System Warning will identify the
type of National Electricity Transmission System Warning being cancelled and the
period for which it was issued. The Cancellation of National Electricity Transmission
System Warning will also identify any National Electricity Transmission System
Warnings that are still in force.
OC7.4.8.14 General Management of National Electricity Transmission System Warnings
(a) National Electricity Transmission System Warnings remain in force for the period
specified unless superseded or cancelled by The Company.
(b) A National Electricity Transmission System Warning issued for a particular period
may be superseded by further related warnings. This will include National Electricity
Transmission System Warning - Electricity Margin Notice being superseded by
National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Demand
Reduction and vice-versa, and National Electricity Transmission System Warning –
System NRAPM being superseded by National Electricity Transmission System
Warning - High Risk of Embedded Generation Reduction.
(c) In circumstances where it is necessary for the period of a National Electricity
Transmission System Warning to be changed:
(i) the period applicable may be extended by the issue of a National Electricity
Transmission System Warning with a period which follows on from the original
period, or
(ii) revised or updated National Electricity Transmission System Warnings will be
issued where there is an overlap with the period specified in an existing National
Electricity Transmission System Warning, but only if the revised period also
includes the full period of the existing National Electricity Transmission System
Warning.
In any other case the existing National Electricity Transmission System Warning will
be cancelled and a new one issued.
(c) A National Electricity Transmission System Warning is no longer applicable once
the period has passed and to confirm this The Company will issue a Cancellation of
National Electricity Transmission System Warning.
OC7.4.8.15 Publication of Other System Alerts and Warnings
(a) All instructions, warnings, alerts and notifications upon being received or issued by The
Company (whether activating or deactivating an action) as per Appendix 2 of OC7 will be
published on the BMRS. Should the BMRS be unavailable, for example due to
communications or systems failures, other appropriate channels including email will be
utilised until the BMRS can be restored.
(b) The Company will employ reasonable endeavours to publish such information
within 15 minutes of issue or receipt, or if not possible within as short a time as is
reasonably practicable.

OC7.5 PROCEDURE IN RELATION TO INTEGRAL EQUIPMENT TESTS

OC7.5.1 This section of the Grid Code deals with Integral Equipment Tests. It is designed to provide
a framework for the exchange of relevant information and for discussion between The
Company and certain Users in relation to Integral Equipment Tests.
OC7.5.2 An Integral Equipment Test :
(a) is carried out in accordance with the provisions of this OC7.5 at:
(i) a User Site,
(ii) a Transmission Site,
(iii) an Embedded Large Power Station, or,
Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021
14 of 22
 (iv) an Embedded DC Converter Station; or
(v) an Embedded HVDC System
(b) will normally be undertaken during commissioning or re-commissioning of Plant and/or
Apparatus;
(c) may, in the reasonable judgement of the person wishing to perform the test, cause, or
have the potential to cause, an Operational Effect on a part or parts of the Total System
but which with prior notice is unlikely to have a materially adverse effect on any part of
the Total System; and
(d) may form part of an agreed programme of work.
In the case of OTSUA operation prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time, a User’s Site or
Transmission Site shall, for the purposes of this OC7, include a site at which there is an
Interface Point until the OTSUA Transfer Time and the provisions of this OC7.5 and
references to OTSUA shall be construed and applied accordingly until the OTSUA Transfer
Time.
OC7.5.3 A set of guidance notes is available from The Company on request, which provide further
details on suggested procedures, information flows and responsibilities.
Notification Of An IET
OC7.5.4 In order to undertake an Integral Equipment Test (and subject to OC7.5.8 below), the User
or The Company, as the case may be, (the proposer) must notify the other (the recipient) of
a proposed IET. Reasonable advance notification must be given, taking into account the
nature of the test and the circumstances which make the test necessary. This will allow
recipients time to adequately assess the impact of the IET on their System.
OC7.5.5 The notification of the IET must normally include the following information:-
(a) the proposed date and time of the IET;
(b) the name of the individual and the organisation proposing the IET;
(c) a proposed programme of testing; and
(d) such further detail as the proposer reasonably believes the recipient needs in order to
assess the effect the IET may have on relevant Plant and/or Apparatus.
OC7.5.6 In the case of an IET in connection with commissioning or re-commissioning, the test should
be incorporated as part of any overall commissioning programme agreed between The
Company and the User.
Response To Notification of an IET
OC7.5.7 The recipient of notification of an IET must respond within a reasonable timescale prior to the
start time of the IET and will not unreasonably withhold or delay acceptance of the IET
proposal.
OC7.5.8 (a) Where The Company receives notification of a proposed IET from a User, The
Company will consult those other Users whom it reasonably believes may be affected
by the proposed IET to seek their views. Information relating to the proposed IET may be
passed on by The Company with the prior agreement of the proposer. However it is not
necessary for The Company to obtain the agreement of any such User as IETs should
not involve the application of irregular, unusual or extreme conditions. The Company
may however consider any comments received when deciding whether or not to agree to
an IET.
(b) In the case of an Embedded Large Power Station or Embedded DC Converter
Station, or Embedded HVDC System, the Generator or DC Converter Station owner
or HVDC System Owner as the case may be, must liaise with both The Company and
the relevant Network Operator. The Company will not agree to an IET relating to such
Plant until the Generator or DC Converter Station owner or HVDC System Owner has
shown that it has the agreement of the relevant Network Operator.
Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021
15 of 22
 (c) A Network Operator will liaise with The Company as necessary in those instances
where it is aware of an Embedded Small Power Station or an Embedded Medium
Power Station which intends to perform tests which in the reasonable judgement of the
Network Operator may cause an Operational Effect on the National Electricity
Transmission System.
OC7.5.9 The response from the recipient, following notification of an IET must be one of the following:
(a) to accept the IET proposal;
(b) to accept the IET proposal conditionally subject to minor modifications such as date and
time;
(c) not to agree the IET, but to suggest alterations to the detail and timing of the IET that are
necessary to make the IET acceptable.
Final Confirmation Of an IET
OC7.5.10 The date and time of an IET will be confirmed between The Company and the User, together
with any limitations and restrictions on operation of Plant and/or Apparatus.
OC7.5.11 The IET may subsequently be amended following discussion and agreement between The
Company and the User.
Carrying Out an IET
OC7.5.12 IETs may only take place when agreement has been reached and must be carried out in
accordance with the agreed programme of testing.
OC7.5.13 The implementation of an IET will be notified in accordance with OC7.4.5.
OC7.5.14 Where elements of the programme of testing change during the IET, there must be discussion
between the appropriate parties to identify whether the IET should continue.
OC7.6 PROCEDURE IN RESPECT OF OPERATIONAL SWITCHING
OC7.6.1 This section OC7.6 of the Grid Code sets out the procedure to be followed for Operational
Switching. Its provisions are supplementary to the provisions of the rest of this OC7.
It is designed to set down the arrangements for The Company, Users and the Relevant
Transmission Licensees in respect of the Operational Switching of Plant and Apparatus
at a Connection Site and parts of the National Electricity Transmission System adjacent
to that Connection Site.
OC7.6.2 In general:
(i) The Company is responsible for directing the configuration of the National Electricity
Transmission System
(ii) Each Relevant Transmission Licensee is responsible for the instruction and operation
of its Plant and Apparatus on its Transmission System.
(iii) Each User is responsible for the configuration, instruction and operation of its Plant and
Apparatus.
Definitive schedules of these responsibilities for each Connection Site are contained in the
relevant Site Responsibility Schedules.
For the avoidance of doubt, where a User operates Transmission Plant and Apparatus on
behalf of a Relevant Transmission Licensee, The Company cannot instruct the User to
operate that Plant and Apparatus.
Planned Operational Switching

Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021

16 of 22
OC7.6.3 Following the notification of an Operation under OC7.4.5, The Company and the User shall
discuss the Operational Switching required. The Company will then discuss and agree the
details of the Operational Switching with the Relevant Transmission Licensee. The
Relevant Transmission Licensee shall then make contact with the User to initiate the
Operational Switching. For the avoidance of doubt, from the time that the Relevant
Transmission Licensee makes contact with the User, the Relevant Transmission Licensee
shall then become the primary point of operational contact with the User in relation to OC7 for
matters which would or could affect, or would or could be affected by the Operational
Switching.
OC7.6.4 The User shall be advised by the Relevant Transmission Licensee on the completion of the
Operational Switching, that The Company shall again become the primary point of
operational contact for the User in relation to OC7.
OC7.6.5 During Operational Switching, either the Relevant Transmission Licensee or the User may
need to unexpectedly terminate the Operational Switching. The Company may also need
to terminate the Operational Switching during the Operational Switching. In the event of
unexpected termination of the Operational Switching, The Company shall become the
primary point of operational contact for the User in relation to OC7. Following the termination
of the Operational Switching, it will not be permitted to restart that Operational Switching
without the parties again following the process described in OC7.6.3.
Emergencies
OC7.6.6 For Operations and/or Events that present an immediate hazard to the safety of personnel,
Plant or Apparatus, the Relevant Transmission Licensee may:
(i) as permitted by the STC, carry out Operational Switching of Plant and Apparatus on
its Transmission System without reference to The Company and the User, and
(ii) request a User to carry out Operational Switching without the User first receiving
notification from The Company.
In such emergency circumstances, communication between the Relevant Transmission
Licensee and the User shall normally be by telephone and will include an exchange of names.
The User shall use all reasonable endeavours to carry out Operational Switching on its Plant
and Apparatus without delay. Following completion of the requested Operational Switching,
the Relevant Transmission Licensee shall notify The Company of the Operational
Switching which has taken place. In such emergency circumstances, the User may only
refuse to carry out Operational Switching on safety grounds (relating to personnel or plant)
and this must be notified to the Relevant Transmission Licensee immediately by telephone.
OC7.6.7 For Operations and/or Events that present an immediate hazard to the safety of personnel,
Plant or Apparatus, and which require Operational Switching of Plant or Apparatus on a
Transmission System in order to remove the hazard, the User should contact the Relevant
Transmission Licensee directly to request Operational Switching of Plant or Apparatus
on its Transmission System.
In such emergency circumstances, communication between the Relevant Transmission
Licensee and the User shall normally be by telephone and will include an exchange of names.
The Relevant Transmission Licensee shall use all reasonable endeavours to carry out
Operational Switching on its Plant and Apparatus without delay. Following completion of
the requested Operational Switching, the User shall notify The Company of the Operational
Switching which has taken place. In such emergency circumstances, the Relevant
Transmission Licensee may only refuse to carry out Operational Switching on safety
grounds (relating to personnel or plant) and this must be notified to the User immediately by
telephone.
OC7.6.8 Establishment Of A Local Switching Procedure
(a) The Company, a User or a Relevant Transmission Licensee may reasonably require
a Local Switching Procedure to be established.

Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021

17 of 22
 (b) Where the need for a Local Switching Procedure arises the following provisions shall
apply:
(i) The Company, User(s) and the Relevant Transmission Licensee will discuss and
agree the detail of the Local Switching Procedure as soon as the requirement for
a Local Switching Procedure is identified. The Company will notify the Relevant
Transmission Licensee and the affected User(s) and will initiate these discussions.
(ii) Each Local Switching Procedure shall be in relation to either one or more
Connection Sites (or in the case of OTSUA operational prior to the OTSUA
Transfer Time, Transmission Interface Sites) and parts of the National
Electricity Transmission System adjacent to the Connection Site(s) (or in the
case of OTSUA operational prior to the OTSUA Transfer Time, Transmission
Interface Sites)
(iii) A draft Local Switching Procedure shall be prepared by the Relevant
Transmission Licensee to reflect the agreement reached and shall be sent to The
Company.
(iv) When a Local Switching Procedure has been prepared, it shall be sent by The
Company to the Relevant Transmission Licensee and User(s) for confirmation of
its accuracy.
(v) The Local Switching Procedure shall then be signed on behalf of The Company
and on behalf of each User and Relevant Transmission Licensee by way of written
confirmation of its accuracy.
(vi) Once agreed under this OC7.6.8, the procedure will become a Local Switching
Procedure under the Grid Code, and (subject to any change pursuant to this OC7)
will apply between The Company, Relevant Transmission Licensee and the
relevant User(s) as if it were part of the Grid Code.
(vii) Once signed, The Company will send a copy of the Local Switching Procedure
to the Relevant Transmission Licensee and the User(s).
(viii) An agreed Local Switching Procedure should be referenced by relevant Site
Responsibility Schedules.
(ix) The Company,the User(s) and the Relevant Transmission Licensee must make
the Local Switching Procedure readily available to the relevant operational staff.
(x) If the Relevant Transmission Licensee or the User(s) become aware that a
change is needed to a Local Switching Procedure, they must inform The
Company immediately. Where The Company has been informed of a need for a
change, or The Company proposes a change, The Company shall notify both the
affected User and the Relevant Transmission Licensee and will initiate
discussions to agree a change to the Local Switching Procedure. The principles
applying to the establishment of a new Local Switching Procedure shall then apply
to the discussion and agreement of any changes.

Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021

18 of 22
 APPENDIX 1 - NATIONAL ELECTRICITY TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
WARNINGS TABLE

Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021

19 of 22
 WARNING TYPE GRID FORMAT TO: FOR ACTION TO: FOR TIMESCALE WARNING OF/OR RESPONSE FROM RECIPIENTS
CODE INFORMATION CONSEQUENCE

NATIONAL OC7.4.8.5 Fax or Generators, Network All timescales when Insufficient generation Offers of increased availability from
ELECTRICITY other Suppliers, Operators, Non- at the time there is available to meet forecast Generators or DC Converter Station
TRANSMISSION electronic Externally Interconected Embedded not a high risk of Demand plus Operating owners. HVDC System Owners and

Issue 6 Revision 5
WARNING – means System Operators, DC Customers Demand reduction. Margin. Interconnector Users.
ELECTRICITY MARGIN Converter Station owners
NOTICE and HVDC System Primarily 1200 hours Notification that if not Suppliers notify The Company of any
Owners onwards for a future improved Demand additional Customer Demand Management
period. reduction may be that they will initiate.
instructed.

(Normal initial warning of

insufficient System Margin

NATIONAL OC7.4.8.6 Fax or Generators, All timescales where Insufficient generation Offers of increased availability from
ELECTRICITY other Suppliers, there is a high risk of available to meet forecast Generators or DC Converter Station owners
TRANSMISSION electronic Network Operators, Demand Reduction. Demand plus Operating or HVDC System Owners and
SYSTEM WARNING – means Non-Embedded Margin and/or a high risk of Interconnector Users.
High risk of Demand Customers, Primarily 1200 hours Demand Reduction being
Reduction Externally Interconnected onwards for a future instructed. Suppliers notify The Company of any
System Operators, DC period additional Customer Demand Management
Converter Station Owners, (May be issued locally as that they will initiate.
HVDC System Owners demand reduction risk only
for circuit overloads) Specified Network Operators and Non-

OC7
Embedded Customers to prepare their

20 of 22
Demand Reduction arrangements and take
actions as necessary to enable compliance
with The Company instructions that may
follow.

(Percentages of Demand Reduction above

20% may not be achieved if The Company
has not issued the warning by 16:00 hours
the previous day.)

NATIONAL OC7.4.8.7 Fax/Telep Specified Users only: (to None Within 30 minutes of Possibility of Demand Network Operators specified to prepare to
ELECTRICITY hone or whom an instruction is to anticipated Reduction within 30 take action as necessary to enable them to
TRANSMISSION other be given) instruction minutes comply with any subsequent The Company
SYSTEM WARNING – electronic Network Operators, Non- instruction for Demand reduction.
Demand Control means Embedded Customers
Imminent

NATIONAL OC7.4.8.12 Fax/Telep Generators, DC Converter Suppliers Control room time Risk of, widespread system Recipients take steps to warn operational
ELECTRICITY hone or Station owners, HVDC scales disturbance to whole or staff and maintain plant or apparatus such
TRANSMISSION other System Owners, part of the National that they are best able to withstand the
SYSTEM WARNING – electronic Network Operators, Non- Electricity Transmission disturbance.
Risk of System means Embedded Customers, System
Disturbance Externally Interconnected
System Operators who
may be affected.

23 August 2021
 Alert, Instruction, Notification or Warning Type Reference Warning ofor Consequence

Demand Control by Demand Disconnection instructed by The

Grid Code OC6.5 Demand Disconnection applied
Company

Demand Control by voltage reduction instructed by The

Grid Code OC6.5 Demand Reduction Applied
Company

Issue 6 Revision 5
Automatic Low Frequency Demand Disconnection Grid Code OC6.6 Automatic Demand Disconnection Applied

Demand Control (including voltage reduction and demand

Grid Code OC6.4 and DOC6.6 Network Operator Demand Control Activated
disconnection) - Network Operator activated

Grid Code Emergency Instruction (to Network Operator) Grid Code BC2.9.1.4 Emergency Instruction(s) issued.

Grid Code Emergency Instruction (to Generators & Demand –

Grid Code BC2.9.1.3 May require departure from normal Balancing Market Operation in accordance with BC2
BCA, BEGA, & BELLA)

Grid Code Emergency Instruction (to Interconnectors) Grid Code BC2.9.1.4 May require departure from normal Balancing Market Operation in accordance with BC2

System NRAPM Grid Code BC1.5.5 Inadequate Negative Reserve Active Power Margin (nationally)

OC7
21 of 22
Localised NRAPM Grid Code BC1.5.5 Inadequate Negative Reserve Active Power Margin (locally)

Cancellation of National Electricity System Warning Grid Code OC7.4.8.9 Noted warning no longer applicable.

STC Emergency Instruction to Transmission Owner¹ STC Section C Part Two (7) Discontinue Outage within Emergency Return to Service Time

ESEC Implementation Grid Code OC6.1.5 Commencing rota disconnection across affected Network Operators licence areas.

Demand Reduction Instruction/Emergency Manual Disconnection Instruction issued to Network

EMR Capacity Market Notifications Capacity Market Rules 8.4.6
APPENDIX 2 – Other System Alerts and Warnings per OC7.4.8.15

Operator(s), or Inadequate System Margin anticipated, or Automatic Low Frequency Demand

Disconnection occurred per Capacity Market Rules 8.4.6.

Request to increase Active Energy transferred into the NETS, or reduce Active Energy transferred into its
Emergency Assistance Requests Grid Code BC2.9.6
External System

23 August 2021
¹Identification of the specific equipment affected is not required to be included within the published alert.
 < END OF OPERATING CODE NO. 7 >

Issue 6 Revision 5 OC7 23 August 2021

22 of 22
 OPERATING CODE NO. 8
(OC8)

SAFETY CO-ORDINATION

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

OC8.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................ 2
OC8.2 OBJECTIVE ...................................................................................................................... 2
OC8.3 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................. 2
OC8.4 PROCEDURE .................................................................................................................... 2
OC8.4.1 Safety Co-Ordination In Respect Of The E&W Transmission Systems Or The Systems
Of E&W Users ........................................................................................................................ 2
OC8.4.2 Safety Co-Ordination In Respect Of The Scottish Transmission Systems Or The
Systems Of Scottish Users ....................................................................................................... 3

Issue 6 Revision 0 OC8 05 March 2021

i
OC8.1 INTRODUCTION
OC8.1.1 OC8 specifies the standard procedures to be used for the co-ordination, establishment and
maintenance of necessary Safety Precautions when work is to be carried out on or near the
National Electricity Transmission System or the System of a User and when t here is a
need for Safety Precautions on HV Apparatus on the other System for this work to be
carried out safely. OC8 Appendix 1 applies when work is to be carried out on or near to E&W
Transmission Systems or the Systems of E&W Users and OC8 Appendix 2 applies when
work is to be carried out on or near to Scottish Transmission Systems or the Syste m s of
Scottish Users.
OC8.1.2 OC8 also covers the co-ordination, establishment and maintenance of necessary safety
precautions on the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s System when work is to be
carried out at a User’s Site or a Transmission Site (as the case may be) on equipment of
the User or a Relevant Transmission Licensee as the case may be where the work or
equipment is near to HV Apparatus on the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s System.

OC8.2 OBJECTIVE
OC8.2.1 The objective of OC8 is to achieve:
(i) Safety From The System when work on or near a System necessitates the provis ion
of Safety Precautions on another System on HV Apparatus up to a Connection
Point; and
(ii) Safety From The System when work is to be carried out at a User’s Site or a
Transmission Site (as the case may be) on equipment of the User or a Relevant
Transmission Licensee (as the case may be) where the work or equipment is near t o
HV Apparatus on the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s System.

OC8.3 SCOPE
OC8.3.1 OC8 applies to The Company and to Users, which in OC8 means:
(a) Generators (including where undertaking OTSDUW);
(b) Network Operators; and
(c) Non-Embedded Customers.
OC8 also applies to Relevant Transmission Licensees.
The procedures for the establishment of safety co-ordination by The Company in relation t o
External Interconnections are set out in Interconnection Agreements with relevant
persons for the External Interconnections.

OC8.4 PROCEDURE
OC8.4.1 Safety Co-Ordination In Respect Of The E&W Transmission Systems Or The S y st ems Of
E&W Users
OC8.4.1.1 OC8 Appendix 1, OC8A, applies when work is to be carried out on or near to the E&W
Transmission System or the Systems of E&W Users or when Safety Precautions are
required to be established on the E&W Transmission System or the Systems of E&W
Users when work is to be carried out on or near to the Scottish Transmission S yste m or
the Systems of Scottish Users.

Issue 6 Revision 0 OC8 05 March 2021

2 of 4
OC8.4.2 Safety Co-Ordination In Respect Of The Scottish Transmission Systems Or The Systems Of
Scottish Users
OC8.4.2.1 OC8 Appendix 2, OC8B, applies when work is to be carried out on or near to t he S cotti sh
Transmission System or the Systems of Scottish Users or when Safety Precautions are
required to be established on the Scottish Transmission System or the Systems of
Scottish Users when work is to be carried out on or near to the E&W Transmission
System or the Systems of E&W Users.
OC8.4.3 Safety Co-ordination Offshore
OC8.4.3.1 For the purposes of OC8 Appendix 1, OC8A, OC8 Appendix 2 and OC8B, when work is t o
be carried out on or near to Offshore Transmission Systems Safety Precautions shall be
established by the Offshore Transmission Licensee and the Offshore User.

< END OF OPERATING CODE NO. 8 >

Issue 6 Revision 0 OC8 05 March 2021

3 of 4
 OPERATING CODE NO. 8 APPENDIX 1
(OC8A)

SAFETY CO-ORDINATION IN RESPECT OF THE E&W TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS OR

THE SYSTEMS OF E&W USERS

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

OC8A.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................................2
OC8A.2 OBJECTIVE ..........................................................................................................................................3
OC8A.3 SCOPE .................................................................................................................................................4
OC8A.4 PROCEDURE .......................................................................................................................................4
OC8A.4.1 Approval Of Local Safety Instructions ........................................................................................4
OC8A.4.2 Safety Co-ordinators ..................................................................................................................5
OC8A.4.3 RISSP ........................................................................................................................................5
OC8A.5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ON HV APPARATUS .................................................................................6
OC8A.5.1 Agreement Of Safety Precautions .............................................................................................6
OC8A.5.2 Implementation Of Isolation .......................................................................................................6
OC8A.5.3 Implementation Of Earthing .......................................................................................................7
OC8A.5.4 RISSP Issue Procedure .............................................................................................................8
OC8A.5.5 RISSP Cancellation Procedure ................................................................................................10
OC8A.5.6 RISSP Change Control ............................................................................................................10
OC8A.6 TESTING AFFECTING ANOTHER SAFETY CO-ORDINATOR’S SYSTEM ....................................10
OC8A.7 EMERGENCY SITUATIONS ..............................................................................................................11
OC8A.8 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS RELATING TO WORKING ON EQUIPMENT NEAR TO THE HV
SYSTEM .............................................................................................................................................................12
OC8A.8.1 Agreement of Safety Precautions ............................................................................................12
OC8A.8.2 Implementation of Isolation and Earthing ................................................................................12
OC8A.8.3 Permit For Work For Proximity Work Issue Procedure ............................................................13
OC8A.8.4 Permit For Work For Proximity Work Cancellation Procedure ................................................13
OC8A.9 LOSS OF INTEGRITY OF SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................13
OC8A.10 SAFETY LOG ...................................................................................................................................13
APPENDIX A - RISSP-R ....................................................................................................................................14
APPENDIX B - RISSP-I ......................................................................................................................................16
APPENDIX C- FLOWCHARTS ..........................................................................................................................18
APPENDIX C1 - RISSP ISSUE PROCESS ...............................................................................................18
APPENDIX C2 - TESTING PROCESS ......................................................................................................19
APPENDIX C3 - RISSP CANCELLATION PROCESS ...............................................................................20
APPENDIX C4 - PROCESS FOR WORKING NEAR TO SYSTEM EQUIPMENT ....................................21
APPENDIX D - NATIONAL GRID SAFETY CIRCULAR ....................................................................................22
APPENDIX E - FORM OF NGET'S PERMIT TO WORK ...................................................................................23

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

i
OC8A.1 INTRODUCTION
OC8A.1.1 OC8A specifies the standard procedures to be used by the Relevant E&W Transmission
Licensee, The Company and E&W Users for the co-ordination, establishment and
maintenance of necessary Safety Precautions when work is to be carried out on or near the
E&W Transmission System or the System of an E&W User and when there is a need for
Safety Precautions on HV Apparatus on the other's System for this work to be carried out
safely. OC8A applies to Relevant E&W Transmission Licensees and E&W Users only.
Where work is to be carried out on or near equipment on the Scottish Transmission
System or Systems of Scottish Users, but such work requires Safety Precautions to be
established on the E&W Transmission System or the Systems of E&W Users, OC8A
should be followed by the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee and E&W Users to
establish the required Safety Precautions.
OC8B specifies the procedures to be used by the Relevant Scottish Transmission
Licensees and Scottish Users.
The Company shall procure that the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensees shall comply
with OC8A where and to the extent that such section applies to them.
In this OC8A the term “work” includes testing, other than System Tests which are covered
by OC12.
OC8A.1.2 OC8A also covers the co-ordination, establishment and maintenance of necessary safety
precautions on the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s System when work is to be
carried out at an E&W User’s Site or a Transmission Site (as the case may be) on
equipment of the E&W User or the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee as the case
may be where the work or equipment is near to HV Apparatus on the Implementing Safety
Co-ordinator’s System. In the case of OTSUA, an E&W User’s Site or Transmission
Site shall, for the purposes of this OC8A, include a site at which there is a Transmission
Interface Point until the OTSUA Transfer Time and the provisions of this OC8A and
references to OTSUA shall be construed and applied accordingly until the OTSUA Transfer
Time at which time arrangements in respect of the Transmission Interface Site will have
been put in place between the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee and the Offshore
Transmission Licensee.
OC8A.1.3 OC8A does not apply to the situation where Safety Precautions need to be agreed solely
between E&W Users. OC8A does not apply to the situation where Safety Precautions
need to be agreed solely between Transmission Licensees.
OC8A.1.4 OC8A does not seek to impose a particular set of Safety Rules on the Relevant E&W
Transmission Licensee and E&W Users; the Safety Rules to be adopted and used by the
Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee and each E&W User shall be those chosen by
each.
OC8A.1.5 Site Responsibility Schedules document the control responsibility for each item of Plant
and Apparatus for each site.
OC8A.1.6 Defined Terms
OC8A.1.6.1 E&W Users should bear in mind that in OC8 only, in order that OC8 reads more easily with
the terminology used in certain Safety Rules, the term "HV Apparatus" is defined more
restrictively and is used accordingly in OC8A. E&W Users should, therefore, exercise
caution in relation to this term when reading and using OC8A.
OC8A.1.6.2 In OC8A only the following terms shall have the following meanings:
(1) "HV Apparatus" means High Voltage electrical circuits forming part of a System, on
which Safety From The System may be required or on which Safety Precautions may
be applied to allow work to be carried out on a System.
(2) "Isolation" means the disconnection of Apparatus from the remainder of the System in
which that Apparatus is situated by either of the following:
(a) an Isolating Device maintained in an isolating position. The isolating position must
Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022
2 of 24
 either be:
(i) maintained by immobilising and Locking the Isolating Device in the isolating
position and affixing a Caution Notice to it. Where the Isolating Device is
Locked with a Safety Key, the Safety Key must be secured in a Key Safe
and the Key Safe Key must be, where reasonably practicable, given to the
authorised site representative of the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator and is
to be retained in safe custody. Where not reasonably practicable the Key
Safe Key must be retained by the authorised site representative of the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator in safe custody; or
(ii) maintained and/or secured by such other method which must be in
accordance with the Local Safety Instructions of the Relevant E&W
Transmission Licensee or that E&W User, as the case may be; or
(b) an adequate physical separation which must be in accordance with, and
maintained by, the method set out in the Local Safety Instructions of the
Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee or that E&W User, as the case may be,
and, if it is a part of that method, a Caution Notice must be placed at the point of
separation;
or
(c) in the case where the relevant HV Apparatus of the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator is being either constructed or modified, an adequate physical separation
as a result of a No System Connection.
(3) “No System Connection” means an adequate physical separation (which must be in
accordance with, and maintained by, the method set out in the Local Safety
Instructions of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator) of the Implementing Safety
Co-ordinator’s HV Apparatus from the rest of the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator’s System where such HV Apparatus has no installed means of being
connected to, and will not for the duration of the Safety Precaution be connected to, a
source of electrical energy or to any other part of the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinators System.
(4) "Earthing" means a way of providing a connection between conductors and earth by an
Earthing Device which is either:
(i) immobilised and Locked in the earthing position. Where the Earthing Device is
Locked with a Safety Key, the Safety Key must be secured in a Key Safe and the
Key Safe Key must be, where reasonably practicable, given to the authorised site
representative of the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator and is to be retained in
safe custody. Where not reasonably practicable the Key Safe Key must be
retained by the authorised site representative of the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator in safe custody; or
(ii) maintained and/or secured in position by such other method which must be in
accordance with the Local Safety Instructions of the Relevant E&W
Transmission Licensee or that E&W User as the case may be.
OC8A.1.6.3 For the purpose of the co-ordination of safety relating to HV Apparatus the term “Safety
Precautions” means Isolation and/or Earthing.

OC8A.2 OBJECTIVE
OC8A.2.1 The objective of OC8A is to achieve:-
(i) Safety From The System when work on or near a System necessitates the provision
of Safety Precautions on another System on HV Apparatus up to a Connection
Point (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point); and

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

3 of 24
 (ii) Safety From The System when work is to be carried out at an E&W User’s Site or a
Transmission Site (as the case may be) on equipment of the User or the Relevant
E&W Transmission Licensee (as the case may be) where the work or equipment is
near to HV Apparatus on the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s System.
OC8A.2.2 A flow chart, set out in OC8A Appendix C, illustrates the process utilised in OC8A to
achieve the objective set out in OC8A.2.1. In the case of a conflict between the flow chart
and the provisions of the written text of OC8A, the written text will prevail.
OC8A.3 SCOPE
OC8A.3.1 OC8A applies to the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee and to E&W Users, which in
OC8A means:
(a) Generators (including where undertaking OTSDUW);
(b) Network Operators; and
(c) Non-Embedded Customers.
The procedures for the establishment of safety co-ordination by The Company in relation to
External Interconnections are set out in Interconnection Agreements with relevant
persons for the External Interconnections.

OC8A.4 PROCEDURE
OC8A.4.1 Approval of Local Safety Instructions
OC8A.4.1.1 (a) In accordance with the timing requirements of its Bilateral Agreement, each E&W
User will supply to the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee a copy of its Local
Safety Instructions relating to its side of the Connection Point at each Connection
Site, or in the case of OTSUA a copy of its Local Safety Instructions relating to its
side of the Transmission Interface Point at each Transmission Interface Site.
(b) In accordance with the timing requirements of each Bilateral Agreement, the Relevant
E&W Transmission Licensee will supply to each E&W User a copy of its Local Safety
Instructions relating to the Transmission side of the Connection Point at each
Connection Site, or in the case of OTSUA a copy of its Local Safety Instructions
relating to the Transmission side of the Transmission Interface Point at each
Transmission Interface Site.
(c) Prior to connection, the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee and the E&W User
must have approved each other's relevant Local Safety Instructions in relation to
Isolation and Earthing.
OC8A.4.1.2 Either party may require that the Isolation and/or Earthing provisions in the other party’s
Local Safety Instructions affecting the Connection Site (or, in the case of OTSUA,
Transmission Interface Site) should be made more stringent in order that approval of the
other party’s Local Safety Instructions can be given. Provided these requirements are not
unreasonable, the other party will make such changes as soon as reasonably practicable.
These changes may need to cover the application of Isolation and/or Earthing at a place
remote from the Connection Site (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Site),
depending upon the System layout. Approval may not be withheld because the party
required to approve reasonably believes the provisions relating to Isolation and/or Earthing
are too stringent.
OC8A.4.1.3 If, following approval, a party wishes to change the provisions in its Local Safety
Instructions relating to Isolation and/or Earthing, it must inform the other party. If the
change is to make the provisions more stringent, then the other party merely has to note the
changes. If the change is to make the provisions less stringent, then the other party needs to
approve the new provisions and the procedures referred to in OC8A.4.1.2 apply.

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

4 of 24
OC8A.4.2 Safety Co-ordinators
OC8A.4.2.1 For each Connection Point, (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point),
the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee and each E&W User will at all times have
nominated an available a person or persons (“Safety Co-ordinator(s)”) to be responsible for
the co-ordination of Safety Precautions when work is to be carried out on a System which
necessitates the provision of Safety Precautions on HV Apparatus pursuant to OC8A. A
Safety Co-ordinator may be responsible for the co-ordination of safety on HV Apparatus at
more than one Connection Point (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface
Point).
OC8A.4.2.2 Each Safety Co-ordinator shall be authorised by the Relevant E&W Transmission
Licensee or an E&W User, as the case may be, as competent to carry out the functions set
out in OC8A to achieve Safety From The System. Confirmation from the Relevant E&W
Transmission Licensee or an E&W User, as the case may be, that its Safety Co-
ordinator(s) as a group are so authorised is dealt with in CC.5.2 or in ECC.5.2. and for the
Relevant E&W Transmission Licensees in the STC. Only persons with such authorisation
will carry out the provisions of OC8A.
OC8A.4.2.3 Contact between Safety Co-ordinators will be made via normal operational channels, and
accordingly separate telephone numbers for Safety Co-ordinators need not be provided. At
the time of making contact, each party will confirm that they are authorised to act as a Safety
Co-ordinator, pursuant to OC8A.
OC8A.4.2.4 If work is to be carried out on a System, or on equipment of the Relevant E&W
Transmission Licensee or an E&W User near to a System, as provided in this OC8A,
which necessitates the provision of Safety Precautions on HV Apparatus in accordance
with the provisions of OC8A, the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator who requires the Safety
Precautions to be provided shall contact the relevant Implementing Safety Co-ordinator
to co-ordinate the establishment of the Safety Precautions.
OC8A.4.3 RISSP
OC8A.4.3.1 OC8A sets out the procedures for utilising the RISSP, which will be used except where
dealing with equipment in proximity to the other’s System as provided in OC8A.8. Sections
OC8A.4 to OC8A.7 inclusive should be read accordingly.
OC8A.4.3.2 The Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee will use the format of the RISSP forms set out
in Appendix A and Appendix B to OC8A. That set out in OC8A Appendix A and designated
as "RISSP-R", shall be used when the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee is the
Requesting Safety Co-ordinator, and that in OC8A Appendix B and designated as
"RISSP-I", shall be used when the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee is the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator. Proformas of RISSP-R and RISSP-I will be provided
for use by the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee staff.
OC8A.4.3.3 (a) E&W Users may either adopt the format referred to in OC8A.4.3.2, or use an equivalent
format, provided that it includes sections requiring insertion of the same information and
has the same numbering of sections as RISSP-R and RISSP-I as set out in Appendices
A and B respectively.
(b) Whether E&W Users adopt the format referred to in OC8A.4.3.2, or use the equivalent
format as above, the format may be produced and held in, and retrieved from an
electronic form by the E&W User.
(c) Whichever method E&W Users choose, each must provide proformas (whether in
tangible or electronic form) for use by its staff.
OC8A.4.3.4 All references to RISSP-R and RISSP-I shall be taken as referring to the corresponding parts
of the alternative forms or other tangible written or electronic records used by each E&W
User.
OC8A.4.3.5 RISSP-R will have an identifying number written or printed on it, comprising a prefix which
identifies the location at which it is issued, and a unique (for each E&W User or the
Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee, as the case may be) serial number which both
together uses up to eight characters (including letters and numbers) and the suffix "R".
Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022
5 of 24
OC8A.4.3.6 (a) In accordance with the timing requirements set out in CC.5.2 or in ECC.5.2 each E&W
User shall apply in writing to the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee for the
Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee’s approval of its proposed prefix.
(b) The Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee shall consider the proposed prefix to see
if it is the same as (or confusingly similar to) a prefix used by the Relevant E&W
Transmission Licensee or another User and shall, as soon as possible (and in any
event within ten days), respond in writing to the E&W User with its approval or
disapproval.
(c) If the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee disapproves, it shall explain in its
response why it has disapproved and will suggest an alternative prefix.
(d) If the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee has disapproved, then the E&W User
shall either notify the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee in writing of its
acceptance of the suggested alternative prefix or it shall apply in writing to the Relevant
E&W Transmission Licensee with revised proposals and the above procedure shall
apply to that application.
OC8A.4.3.7 The prefix allocation will be periodically circulated by NGET to all E&W Users, for
information purposes, using a National Grid Safety Circular in the form set out in OC8A
Appendix D.

OC8A.5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ON HV APPARATUS

OC8A.5.1 Agreement Of Safety Precautions
OC8A.5.1.1 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator who requires Safety Precautions on another
System(s) will contact the relevant Implementing Safety Co-ordinator(s) to agree the
Location of the Safety Precautions to be established. This agreement will be recorded in
the respective Safety Logs.
OC8A.5.1.2 It is the responsibility of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator to ensure that adequate
Safety Precautions are established and maintained, on their and/or another System
connected to their System, to enable Safety From The System to be achieved on the HV
Apparatus, specified by the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator which is to be identified in
Part 1.1 of the RISSP. Reference to another System in this OC8A.5.1.2 shall not include
the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator’s System which is dealt with in OC8A.5.1.3.
OC8A.5.1.3 When the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator is of the reasonable opinion that it is
necessary for Safety Precautions on the System of the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator,
other than on the HV Apparatus specified by the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator, which
is to be identified in Part 1.1 of the RISSP, they shall contact the Requesting Safety Co-
ordinator and the details shall be recorded in part 1.1 of the RISSP forms. In these
circumstances it is the responsibility of the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator to establish
and maintain such Safety Precautions.
OC8A.5.1.4 In The Event Of Disagreement
In any case where the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator and the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator are unable to agree the Location of the Isolation and (if requested) Earthing,
both shall be at the closest available points on the infeeds to the HV Apparatus on which
Safety From The System is to be achieved as indicated on the Operation Diagram.
OC8A.5.2 Implementation Of Isolation
OC8A.5.2.1 Following the agreement of the Safety Precautions in accordance with OC8A.5.1 the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall then establish the agreed Isolation.

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

6 of 24
OC8A.5.2.2 The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall confirm to the Requesting Safety Co-
ordinator that the agreed Isolation has been established, and identify the Requesting
Safety Co-ordinator's HV Apparatus up to the Connection Point (or, in the case of
OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point), for which the Isolation has been provided. The
confirmation shall specify:
(a) for each Location, the identity (by means of HV Apparatus name, nomenclature and
numbering or position, as applicable) of each point of Isolation;
(b) whether Isolation has been achieved by an Isolating Device in the isolating position,
by an adequate physical separation or as a result of a No System Connection;
(c) where an Isolating Device has been used whether the isolating position is either:
(i) maintained by immobilising and Locking the Isolating Device in the isolating
position and affixing a Caution Notice to it. Where the Isolating Device has been
Locked with a Safety Key, the confirmation shall specify that the Safety Key has
been secured in a Key Safe and the Key Safe Key has been given to the
authorised site representative of the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator where
reasonably practicable and is to be retained in safe custody. Where not
reasonably practicable (including where Earthing has been requested in
OC8A.5.1), the confirmation shall specify that the Key Safe Key will be retained by
the authorised site representative of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator in
safe custody; or
(ii) maintained and/or secured by such other method which must be in accordance
with the Local Safety Instructions of the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee
or that E&W User, as the case may be; and
(d) where an adequate physical separation has been used that it will be in accordance with,
and maintained by, the method set out in the Local Safety Instructions of the
Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee or that E&W User, as the case may be, and, if
it is a part of that method, that a Caution Notice has been placed at the point of
separation;
(e) where a No System Connection has been used, the physical position of the No
System Connection shall be defined and shall not be varied for the duration of Safety
Precaution and the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s relevant HV Apparatus will
not, for the duration of the Safety Precaution be connected to a source of electrical
energy or to any other part of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s System.
The confirmation of Isolation shall be recorded in the respective Safety Logs.
OC8A.5.2.3 Following the confirmation of Isolation being established by the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator and the necessary establishment of relevant Isolation on the Requesting Safety
Co-ordinators System, the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator will then request the
implementation of Earthing by the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator, if agreed in section
OC8A.5.1. If the implementation of Earthing has been agreed, then the authorised site
representative of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall retain any Key Safe Key in
safe custody until any Safety Key used for Earthing has been secured in the Key Safe.
OC8A.5.3 Implementation Of Earthing
OC8A.5.3.1 The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall then establish the agreed Earthing.
OC8A.5.3.2 The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall confirm to the Requesting Safety Co-
ordinator that the agreed Earthing has been established, and identify the Requesting
Safety Co-ordinator’s HV Apparatus up to the Connection Point (or, in the case of
OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point), for which the Earthing has been provided. The
confirmation shall specify:
(a) for each Location, the identity (by means of HV Apparatus name, nomenclature and
numbering or position, as is applicable) of each point of Earthing; and
(b) in respect of the Earthing Device used, whether it is:
(i) immobilised and Locked in the earthing position. Where the Earthing Device has
Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022
7 of 24
 been Locked with a Safety Key, that the Safety Key has been secured in a Key
Safe and the Key Safe Key has been given to the authorised site representative of
the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator where reasonably practicable and is to be
retained in safe custody. Where not reasonably practicable, that the Key Safe Key
will be retained by the authorised site representative of the Implementing Safety
Co-ordinator in safe custody; or
(ii) maintained and/or secured in position by such other method which is in
accordance with the Local Safety Instructions of the Relevant E&W
Transmission Licensee or the Relevant Transmission Licensee or that E&W
User, as the case may be.
The confirmation of Earthing shall be recorded in the respective Safety Logs.
OC8A.5.3.3. The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall ensure that the established Safety
Precautions are maintained until requested to be removed by the relevant Requesting
Safety Co-ordinator.
OC8A.5.3.4 Certain designs of gas insulated switchgear three position isolator and earth switches
specifically provide a combined Isolation and Earthing function within a single mechanism
contained within a single integral unit. Where Safety Precautions are required across
control boundaries and subject to the requirements of OC8A.5.1, it is permissible to earth
before Points of Isolation have been established provided that all interconnected circuits
are fully disconnected from live HV Apparatus.

OC8A.5.4 RISSP Issue Procedure

OC8A.5.4.1 Where Safety Precautions on another System(s) are being provided to enable work on the
Requesting Safety Co-ordinator’s System, before any work commences they must be
recorded by a RISSP being issued. The RISSP is applicable to HV Apparatus up to the
Connection Point (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point) identified in
section 1.1 of the RISSP-R and RISSP-I forms.
OC8A.5.4.2 Where Safety Precautions are being provided to enable work to be carried out on both
sides of the Connection Point (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point) a
RISSP will need to be issued for each side of the Connection Point (or, in the case of
OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point) with the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee
and the respective User each enacting the role of Requesting Safety Co-ordinator. This
will result in a RISSP-R and a RISSP-I form being completed by each of the Relevant E&W
Transmission Licensee and the E&W User, with each Requesting Safety Co-ordinator
issuing a separate RISSP number.
OC8A.5.4.3 Once the Safety Precautions have been established (in accordance with OC8A.5.2 and
OC8A.5.3), the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall complete parts 1.1 and 1.2 of a
RISSP-I form recording the details specified in OC8A.5.1.3, OC8A.5.2.2 and OC8A.5.3.2.
Where Earthing has not been requested, Part 1.2(b) will be completed with the words “not
applicable” or “N/A”. They shall then contact the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator to pass
on these details.
OC8A.5.4.4 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator shall complete Parts 1.1 and 1.2 of the RISSP-R,
making a precise copy of the details received. On completion, the Requesting Safety Co-
ordinator shall read the entries made back to the sender and check that an accurate copy
has been made.
OC8A.5.4.5 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator shall then issue the number of the RISSP, taken from
the RISSP-R, to the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator who will ensure that the number,
including the prefix and suffix, is accurately recorded in the designated space on the RISSP-I
form.
OC8A.5.4.6 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator and the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall
complete and sign Part 1.3 of the RISSP-R and RISSP-I respectively and then enter the time
and date. When signed, no alteration to the RISSP is permitted; the RISSP may only be
cancelled.

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

8 of 24
OC8A.5.4.7 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator is then free to authorise work (including a test that
does not affect the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator's System) in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant internal safety procedures which apply to the Requesting
Safety Co-ordinator’s System. This is likely to involve the issue of safety documents or
other relevant internal authorisations. Where testing is to be carried out which affects the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator's System, the procedure set out below in OC8A.6 shall
be implemented.

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

9 of 24
OC8A.5.5 RISSP Cancellation Procedure
OC8A.5.5.1 When the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator decides that Safety Precautions are no longer
required, they will contact the relevant Implementing Safety Co-ordinator to effect
cancellation of the associated RISSP.
OC8A.5.5.2 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator will inform the relevant Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator of the RISSP identifying number (including the prefix and suffix), and agree it is
the RISSP to be cancelled.
OC8A.5.5.3 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator and the relevant Implementing Safety Co-ordinator
shall then respectively complete Part 2.1 of their respective RISSP-R and RISSP-I forms and
shall then exchange details. The details being exchanged shall include their respective
names and time and date. On completion of the exchange of details, the respective RISSP is
cancelled. The removal of Safety Precautions is as set out in OC8A.5.5.4 and OC8A.5.5.5.
OC8A.5.5.4 Neither Safety Co-ordinator shall instruct the removal of any Isolation forming part of the
Safety Precautions as part of the returning of the HV Apparatus to service until it is
confirmed to each by each other that every earth on each side of the Connection Point (or,
in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point), within the points of isolation
identified on the RISSP, has been removed or disconnected by the provision of additional
Points of Isolation.
OC8A.5.5.5 Subject to the provisions in OC8A.5.5.4, the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator is then free
to arrange the removal of the Safety Precautions, the procedure to achieve that being
entirely an internal matter for the party the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator is
representing. Where a Key Safe Key has been given to the authorised site representative of
the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator, the Key Safe Key must be returned to the authorised
site representative of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator. The only situation in which
any Safety Precautions may be removed without first cancelling the RISSP in accordance
with OC8A.5.5 or OC8A.5.6 is when Earthing is removed in the situation envisaged in
OC8A.6.2(b).
OC8A.5.6 RISSP Change Control
Nothing in this OC8A prevents the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee and E&W
Users agreeing to a simultaneous cancellation and issue of a new RISSP, if both agree. It
should be noted, however, that the effect of that under the relevant Safety Rules is not a
matter with which the Grid Code deals.

OC8A.6 TESTING AFFECTING ANOTHER SAFETY CO-ORDINATOR'S SYSTEM

OC8A.6.1 The carrying out of the test may affect Safety Precautions on RISSPs or work being carried
out which does not require a RISSP. Testing can, for example, include the application of an
independent test voltage. Accordingly, where the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator wishes
to authorise the carrying out of such a test to which the procedures in OC8A.6 apply they
may not do so and the test will not take place unless and until the steps in (a)-(c) below have
been followed and confirmation of completion has been recorded in the respective Safety
Logs:
(a) confirmation must be obtained from the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator that:
(i) no person is working on, or testing, or has been authorised to work on, or test, any
part of its System or another System(s) (other than the System of the
Requesting Safety Co-ordinator) within the points of Isolation identified on the
RISSP form relating to the test which is proposed to be undertaken, and
(ii) no person will be so authorised until the proposed test has been completed (or
cancelled) and the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator has notified the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator of its completion (or cancellation);
(b) any other current RISSPs which relate to the parts of the System in which the testing is
to take place must have been cancelled in accordance with procedures set out in
OC8A.5.5;

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

10 of 24
 (c) the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator must agree with the Requesting Safety Co-
ordinator to permit the testing on that part of the System between the points of
Isolation identified in the RISSP associated with the test and the points of Isolation on
the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator's System.
OC8A.6.2 (a) The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator will inform the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator as soon as the test has been completed or cancelled and the confirmation
shall be recorded in the respective Safety Logs.
(b) When the test gives rise to the removal of Earthing which it is not intended to re-apply,
the relevant RISSP associated with the test shall be cancelled at the completion or
cancellation of the test in accordance with the procedure set out in either OC8A.5.5 or
OC8A.5.6. Where the Earthing is re-applied following the completion or cancellation of
the test, there is no requirement to cancel the relevant RISSP associated with the test
pursuant to this OC8A.6.2.
OC8A.7 EMERGENCY SITUATIONS
OC8A.7.1 There may be circumstances where Safety Precautions need to be established in relation
to an unintended electrical connection or situations where there is an unintended risk of
electrical connection between the National Electricity Transmission System and an E&W
User’s System, for example resulting from an incident where one line becomes attached or
unacceptably close to another.
OC8A.7.2 In those circumstances, if both the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee and the
respective E&W User agree, the relevant provisions of OC8A.5 will apply as if the electrical
connections or potential connections were, solely for the purposes of this OC8A, a
Connection Point (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point).
OC8A.7.3 (a) The relevant Safety Co-ordinator shall be that for the electrically closest existing
Connection Point (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point) to that
E&W User's System or such other local Connection Point (or, in the case of OTSUA,
Transmission Interface Point) as may be agreed between the Relevant E&W
Transmission Licensee and the E&W User, with discussions taking place between the
relevant local Safety Co-ordinators. The Connection Point (or, in the case of OTSUA,
Transmission Interface Point) to be used shall be known in this OC8A.7.3 as the
"relevant Connection Point" (or, in the case of OTSUA, “relevant Transmission
Interface Point”).
(b) The Local Safety Instructions shall be those which apply to the relevant Connection
Point (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point).
(c) The prefix for the RISSP will be that which applies for the relevant Connection Point
(or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point).

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

11 of 24
OC8A.8 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS RELATING TO WORKING ON EQUIPMENT NEAR TO THE HV
SYSTEM
OC8A.8 applies to the situation where work is to be carried out at an E&W User’s Site or a
Transmission Site (as the case may be) on equipment of the User or the Relevant E&W
Transmission Licensee as the case may be, where the work or equipment is near to HV
Apparatus on the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s System. It does not apply to other
situations to which OC8A applies. In this part of OC8A, a Permit for Work for proximity
work is to be used, rather than the usual RISSP procedure, given the nature and effect of
the work, all as further provided in the OC8A.8.
OC8A.8.1 Agreement Of Safety Precautions
OC8A.8.1.1 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator who requires Safety Precautions on another
System(s) when work is to be carried out at an E&W User’s Site or a Transmission Site
(as the case may be) on equipment of the User or the Relevant E&W Transmission
Licensee, as the case may be, where the work or equipment is near to HV Apparatus on
the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s System will contact the relevant Implementing
Safety Co-ordinator(s) to agree the location of the Safety Precautions to be established,
having as part of this process informed the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator of the
equipment and the work to be undertaken. The respective Safety Co-ordinators will ensure
that they discuss the request with their authorised site representative and that the respective
authorised site representatives discuss the request at the Connection Site (or, in the case
of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Site). This agreement will be recorded in the
respective Safety Logs.
OC8A.8.1.2 It is the responsibility of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator, working with their
authorised site representative as appropriate, to ensure that adequate Safety Precautions
are established and maintained, on their and/or another System connected to their System,
to enable Safety From The System to be achieved for work to be carried out at an E&W
User’s Site or a Transmission Site (as the case may be) on equipment and in relation to
work which is to be identified in the relevant part of the Permit for Work for proximity work
where the work or equipment is near to HV Apparatus of the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator’s System specified by the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator. Reference to
another System in this OC8A.8.1.2 shall not include the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator’s
System.
OC8A.8.1.3 In The Event Of Disagreement
In any case, where the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator and the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator are unable to agree the Location of the Isolation and (if requested) Earthing,
both shall be at the closest available points on the infeeds to the HV Apparatus near to
which the work is to be carried out as indicated on the Operation Diagram.
OC8A.8.2 Implementation Of Isolation And Earthing
OC8A.8.2.1 Following the agreement of the Safety Precautions in accordance with OC8A.8.1 the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall then establish the agreed Isolation and (if
required) Earthing.
OC8A.8.2.2 The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall confirm to the Requesting Safety Co-
ordinator that the agreed Isolation and (if required) Earthing has been established.
OC8A.8.2.3 The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall ensure that the established Safety
Precautions are maintained until requested to be removed by the relevant Requesting
Safety Co-ordinator.

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

12 of 24
OC8A.8.3 Permit For Work For Proximity Work Issue Procedure
OC8A.8.3.1 Where Safety Precautions on another System(s) are being provided to enable work to be
carried out at an E&W User’s Site or Transmission Site (as the case may be) on
equipment where the work or equipment is in proximity to HV Apparatus of the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator, before any work commences they must be recorded by
a Permit for Work for proximity work being issued. The Permit for Work for proximity
work shall identify the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s HV Apparatus in proximity to
the required work.
OC8A.8.3.2 Once the Safety Precautions have been established (in accordance with OC8A.8.2), the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall agree to the issue of the Permit for Work for
proximity work with the appropriately authorised site representative of the Requesting
Safety Co-ordinator’s Site. The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator will inform the
Requesting Safety Co-ordinator of the Permit for Work for proximity work identifying
number.
OC8A.8.3.3 The appropriately authorised site representative of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator
shall then issue the Permit for Work for proximity work to the appropriately authorised site
representative of the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator. The Permit for Work for proximity
work will in the section dealing with the work to be carried out, be completed to identify that
the work is near the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s HV Apparatus. No further
details of the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator’s work will be recorded, as that is a matter
for the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator in relation to their work.
OC8A.8.3.4 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator is then free to authorise work in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant internal safety procedures which apply to the Requesting
Safety Co-ordinator’s Site. This is likely to involve the issue of safety documents or other
relevant internal authorisations.
OC8A.8.4 Permit For Work For Proximity Work Cancellation Procedure
OC8A.8.4.1 When the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator decides that Safety Precautions are no longer
required, they will contact the relevant Implementing Safety Co-ordinator to effect
cancellation of the associated Permit for Work for proximity work.
OC8A.8.4.2 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator will inform the relevant Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator of the Permit for Work for proximity work identifying number, and agree that the
Permit for Work for proximity work can be cancelled. The cancellation is then effected by
the appropriately authorised site representative of the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator
returning the Permit for Work for proximity work to the appropriately authorised site
representative of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator.
OC8A.8.4.3 The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator is then free to arrange the removal of the Safety
Precautions, the procedure to achieve that being entirely an internal matter for the party the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator is representing.
OC8A.9 LOSS OF INTEGRITY OF SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
OC8A.9.1 In any instance when any Safety Precautions may be ineffective for any reason the relevant
Safety Co-ordinator shall inform the other Safety Co-ordinator(s) without delay of that
being the case and, if requested, of the reasons why.
OC8A.10 SAFETY LOG
OC8A.10.1 The Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee and E&W Users shall maintain Safety Logs
which shall be a chronological record of all messages relating to safety co-ordination under
OC8A sent and received by the Safety Co-ordinator(s). The Safety Logs must be retained
for a period of not less than one year.

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

13 of 24
 APPENDIX A - RISSP-R
[the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee] [__________________ CONTROL CENTRE/SITE]

RECORD OF INTER-SYSTEM SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (RISSP-R)

(Requesting Safety Co-ordinator's Record)

RISSP NUMBER
PART 1

1.1 HV APPARATUS IDENTIFICATION

Safety Precautions have been established by the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator (or by another User on that User's
System connected to the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator's System) to achieve (in so far as it is possible from that side of
the Connection Point/Transmission Interface Point) Safety From The System on the following HV Apparatus on the
Requesting Safety Co-ordinator's System: [State identity - name(s) and, where applicable, identification of the HV circuit(s)
up to the Connection Point/Transmission Interface Point]:

______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________
Further Safety precautions required on the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator’s System as notified by the Implementing
Safety Co-ordinator.

______________________________________________________________________________________________

1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ESTABLISHED

(a) ISOLATION

[State the Location(s) at which Isolation has been established (whether on the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator's System
or on the System of another User connected to the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator's System). For each Location,
identify each point of Isolation. For each point of Isolation, state the means by which the Isolation has been achieved, and
whether, immobilised and Locked, Caution Notice affixed, other safety procedures applied, as appropriate.]

______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________

(b) EARTHING

[State the Location(s) at which Earthing has been established (whether on the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator's System
or on the System of another User connected to the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator's System). For each Location,
identify each point of Earthing. For each point of Earthing, state the means by which Earthing has been achieved, and
whether, immobilised and Locked, other safety procedures applied, as appropriate].

______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________

1.3 ISSUE

I have received confirmation from _________________________________________ (name of Implementing Safety Co-

ordinator) at _________________________________________ (location) that the Safety Precautions identified in paragraph
1.2 have been established and that instructions will not be issued at their location for their removal until this RISSP is cancelled.

Signed ................................................................(Requesting Safety Co-ordinator)

at .......................................(time) on .................................................. (Date)

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

14 of 24
PART 2

2.1 CANCELLATION

l have confirmed to _________________________________________ (name of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator) at

________________________________________ (location) that the Safety Precautions set out in paragraph 1.2 are no longer
required and accordingly the RISSP is cancelled.

Signed ................................................................(Requesting Safety Co-ordinator)

at ........................................(time) on ................................................. (Date)

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

15 of 24
 APPENDIX B - RISSP-I
[the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee] [_________________ CONTROL CENTRE/SITE]

RECORD OF INTER-SYSTEM SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (RISSP-I)

(Implementing Safety Co-ordinator's Record)

PART 1 RISSP NUMBER

1.1 HV APPARATUS IDENTIFICATION

Safety Precautions have been established by the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator (or by another User on that User's
System connected to the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator's System) to achieve (in so far as it is possible from that side of
the Connection Point/Transmission Interface Point) Safety From The System on the following HV Apparatus on the
Requesting Safety Co-ordinator's System: [State identity - name(s) and, where applicable, identification of the HV circuit(s)
up to the Connection Point/Transmission Interface Point]:
______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________

Recording of notification given to the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator concerning further Safety Precautions required on the
Requesting Safety Co-ordinator’s System.

1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ESTABLISHED

(a) ISOLATION

[State the Location(s) at which Isolation has been established (whether on the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator's System
or on the System of another User connected to the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator's System). For each Location,
identify each point of Isolation. For each point of Isolation, state the means by which the Isolation has been achieved, and
whether, immobilised and Locked, Caution Notice affixed, other safety procedures applied, as appropriate.]

______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________

(b) EARTHING

[State the Location(s) at which Earthing has been established (whether on the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator's System
or on the System of another User connected to the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator's System). For each Location,
identify each point of Earthing. For each point of Earthing, state the means by which Earthing has been achieved, and
whether, immobilised and Locked, other safety procedures applied, as appropriate].

______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________

1.3 ISSUE

I have confirmed to ________________________________________ (name of Requesting Safety Co-ordinator) at

__________________________________________ (location) that the Safety Precautions identified in paragraph 1.2 have
been established and that instructions will not be issued at my location for their removal until this RISSP is cancelled.

Signed ...............................................................(Implementing Safety Co-ordinator)

at ...............................................(time) on ...................................................... (Date)

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

16 of 24
 PART 2

2.1 CANCELLATION

l have received confirmation from _________________________________________ (name of the Requesting Safety Co-
ordinator) at ________________________________________ (location) that the Safety Precautions set out in paragraph 1.2
are no longer required and accordingly the RISSP is cancelled.

Signed ................................................................(Implementing Safety Co-ordinator)

at ................................................(time) on ........................................................ (Date)

(Note: This form to be of a different colour from RISSP-R)

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

17 of 24
 APPENDIX C - FLOWCHARTS

APPENDIX C1 - RISSP ISSUE PROCESS

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

18 of 24
 APPENDIX C2 - TESTING PROCESS

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

19 of 24
 APPENDIX C3 - RISSP CANCELLATION PROCESS

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

20 of 24
 APPENDIX C4 - PROCESS FOR WORKING NEAR TO SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

21 of 24
 APPENDIX D - NATIONAL GRID SAFETY CIRCULAR

NGSC Number:
NGET Safety Circular (NGSC) ..........................

Date:
RISSP prefixes - Issue x Issued By:

Example

Pursuant to the objectives of The Grid Code, Operating Code 8A1 - Safety Co-ordination, this circular will be
used in relation to all cross boundary safety management issues with the Relevant E&W Transmission
Licensee customers. Of particular note will be the agreed prefixes for the Record of Inter System Safety
Precautions (RISSP) documents.

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

22 of 24
 APPENDIX E - FORM OF NGET’S PERMIT TO WORK

[Form of the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee Permit for Work]

No.
PERMIT FOR WORK
1. Location……………………………………………………………..………………………………………………………………

Equipment Identification………………………………….………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Work to be done
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

2. Precautions taken to achieve Safety from the System

Points of Isolation
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Primary Earths
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Actions taken to avoid Danger by draining, venting, purging and containment or dissipation of stored energy*
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Further precautions to be taken during the course of the work to avoid System derived hazards*
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

3. Precautions that may be varied*

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

4. Preparation Key Safe number*

Control Person(s) (Safety) giving Consent

State whether this Permit for Work must be personally retained yes no

Signed Time Date

Senior Authorised Person

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

23 of 24
5. Issue & Receipt
Key Safe Number* Safety Keys (No. off)*

Earthing Schedule Number* Portable Drain earths (No. off)*

Recommendations for General Approved (ROMP)#/Card Safe#/

Safety Report Number* Procedure Number*

Circuit Identification – Colours/ Flags (No. off)* Wristlets (No. off)*

Symbols*

Issued (Signed)

Senior Authorised Person

Received (Signed) Time Date

Competent Person

Name (Block letters) Company

# delete as appropriate *write N/A if not applicable February 1995

< END OF OPERATING CODE NO. 8 APPENDIX 1>

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8A 09 March 2022

24 of 24
 OPERATING CODE NO. 8 APPENDIX 2
(OC8B)

SAFETY CO-ORDINATION IN RESPECT OF THE SCOTTISH TRANSMISSION

SYSTEMS OR THE SYSTEMS OF SCOTTISH USERS

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

OC8B.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................................3
OC8B.2 OBJECTIVE ..........................................................................................................................................5
OC8B.3 SCOPE .................................................................................................................................................6
OC8B.4 PROCEDURE .......................................................................................................................................6
OC8B.4.1 Approval Of Safety Rules ..........................................................................................................6
OC8B.4.2 Safety Co-ordinators ..................................................................................................................6
OC8B.4.3 RISSP ........................................................................................................................................7
OC8B.5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ON HV APPARATUS .................................................................................8
OC8B.5.1 Agreement Of Safety Precautions .............................................................................................8
OC8B.5.2 Implementation Of Isolation .......................................................................................................8
OC8B.5.3 Implementation of Earthing ........................................................................................................9
OC8B.5.4 RISSP Issue Procedure ...........................................................................................................10
OC8B.5.5 RISSP Cancellation Procedure ................................................................................................11
OC8B.5.6 RISSP Change Control ............................................................................................................12
OC8B.6 TESTING ............................................................................................................................................12
OC8B.7 EMERGENCY SITUATIONS ..............................................................................................................12
OC8B.8 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS RELATING TO WORKING ON EQUIPMENT NEAR TO THE HV
SYSTEM .............................................................................................................................................................13
OC8B.8.1 Agreement Of Safety Precautions ...........................................................................................13
OC8B.8.2 Implementation Of Isolation And Earthing ...............................................................................13
OC8B.8.3 Permit For Work For Proximity Work Issue Procedure ............................................................14
OC8B.8.4 Permit For Work For Proximity Work .......................................................................................14
OC8B.9 LOSS OF INTEGRITY OF SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................15
OC8B.10 SAFETY LOG ...................................................................................................................................15
APPENDIX A - RISSP-R ....................................................................................................................................16
APPENDIX B - RISSP-I ......................................................................................................................................18
APPENDIX C- FLOWCHARTS ..........................................................................................................................20
APPENDIX C1 - RISSP ISSUE PROCESS ...............................................................................................20
APPENDIX C2 - TESTING PROCESS ......................................................................................................22
APPENDIX C3 - RISSP CANCELLATION PROCESS ...............................................................................24
APPENDIX C4 - PROCESS FOR WORKING NEAR TO SYSTEM EQUIPMENT ....................................26

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

i
APPENDIX D - NOT USED ............................................................................................................................... 28
APPENDIX E - FORM OF PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................ 29

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

ii
OC8B.1 INTRODUCTION
OC8B.1.1 OC8B specifies the standard procedures to be used by The Company, the Relevant
Scottish Transmission Licensees and Scottish Users for the co-ordination, establishment
and maintenance of necessary Safety Precautions when work is to be carried out on or
near the Scottish Transmission System or the System of a Scottish User and when there
is a need for Safety Precautions on HV Apparatus on the other's System for this work to
be carried out safely. OC8B applies to Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensees and
Scottish Users. Where work is to be carried out on or near equipment on an E&W
Transmission System or the Systems of E&W Users, but such work requires Safety
Precautions to be established on a Scottish Transmission System or the Systems of
Scottish Users, OC8B should be followed by the Relevant Scottish Transmission
Licensee and Scottish Users to establish the required Safety Precautions.
OC8A specifies the procedures to be used by the Relevant E&W Transmission Licensee
and E&W Users.
The Company shall procure that Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensees shall comply
with OC8B where and to the extent that such section applies to them.
In this OC8B, the term “work” includes testing, other than System Tests which are covered
by OC12.
OC8B.1.2 OC8B also covers the co-ordination, establishment and maintenance of necessary safety
precautions on the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s System when work is to be
carried out at a Scottish User’s Site or a Transmission Site (as the case may be) on
equipment of the Scottish User or the Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee as the
case may be where the work or equipment is near to HV Apparatus on the Implementing
Safety Co-ordinator’s System. In the case of OTSUA, a Scottish User’s Site or
Transmission Site shall, for the purposes of this OC8B, include a site at which there is a
Transmission Interface Point until the OTSUA Transfer Time and the provisions of this
OC8B and references to OTSUA shall be construed and applied accordingly until the
OTSUA Transfer Time at which time arrangements in respect of the Transmission
Interface Site will have been put in place between the Relevant Scottish Transmission
Licensee and the Offshore Transmission Licensee.
OC8B.1.3 OC8B does not apply to the situation where Safety Precautions need to be agreed solely
between Scottish Users. OC8B does not apply to the situation where Safety Precautions
need to be agreed solely between Transmission Licensees.
OC8B.1.4 OC8B does not seek to impose a particular set of Safety Rules on Relevant Scottish
Transmission Licensees and Scottish Users. The Safety Rules to be adopted and used
by the Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee and each Scottish User shall be those
chosen by each.
OC8B.1.5 Site Responsibility Schedules document the control responsibility for each item of Plant
and Apparatus for each site.
OC8B.1.6 (a) The Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee may agree alternative site-specific
operational procedures with Scottish Users for the co-ordination, establishment and
maintenance of Safety Precautions instead of the Record of Inter-System Safety
Precautions (“RISSP”) procedure detailed in this OC8B. Such operational procedures
shall satisfy the requirements of paragraphs OC8B.1.7, OC8B.2.1, OC8B.4.1,
OC8B.4.2, OC8B.9, OC8B.10. These alternative site-specific operational procedures
for the co-ordination, establishment and maintenance of Safety Precautions will be
referenced in the relevant Site Responsibility Schedule.

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

3 of 31
 (b) The Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee may agree with Scottish Users site-
specific procedures for the application of Safety Precautions across the interface
between the Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee and Scottish User in addition
to and consistent with either the RISSP procedure or the alternative site-specific
operational procedures described in OC8B.1.6 (a). These site-specific procedures will
be referenced in the relevant Site Responsibility Schedule.
(c) The Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee and the Scottish User shall comply
with the procedures agreed pursuant to OC8B.1.6 (a) and OC8B.1.6 (b).

OC8B.1.7 Defined Terms

OC8B.1.7.1 Scottish Users should bear in mind that in OC8 only, in order that OC8 reads more easily
with the terminology used in certain Safety Rules, the term "HV Apparatus" is defined more
restrictively and is used accordingly in OC8B. Scottish Users should, therefore, exercise
caution in relation to this term when reading and using OC8B.
OC8B.1.7.2 In OC8 only the following terms shall have the following meanings:
(1) "HV Apparatus" means High Voltage electrical circuits forming part of a System, on
which Safety From The System may be required or on which Safety Precautions may
be applied to allow work to be carried out on a System.
(2) "Isolation" means the disconnection of Apparatus from the remainder of the System in
which that Apparatus is situated by either of the following:
(a) an Isolating Device maintained in an isolating position. The isolating position must
either be:

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

4 of 31
 (i) maintained by immobilising and Locking the Isolating Device in the isolating
position and affixing a Caution Notice to it. Where the Isolating Device is
Locked with a Safety Key, the Safety Key must be secured in a Key Safe
and the Key Safe Key must be given to the authorised site representative of
the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator where reasonably practicable and is to
be retained in safe custody. Where not reasonably practicable, the Key Safe
Key must be retained by the authorised site representative of the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator in safe custody; or
(ii) maintained and/or secured by such other method which must be in
accordance with the Safety Rules of the Relevant Scottish Transmission
Licensee or that Scottish User, as the case may be; or
(b) an adequate physical separation which must be in accordance with, and
maintained by, the method set out in the Safety Rules of the Relevant Scottish
Transmission Licensee or that Scottish User, as the case may be, and, if it is a
part of that method, a Caution Notice must be placed at the point of separation; or
(c) in the case where the relevant HV Apparatus of the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator is being either constructed or modified, an adequate physical separation
as a result of a No System Connection.
(3) “No System Connection” means an adequate physical separation (which must be in
accordance with, and maintained by, the method set out in the Safety Rules of the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator) of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s HV
Apparatus from the rest of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s System where
such HV Apparatus has no installed means of being connected to, and will not for the
duration of the Safety Precaution be connected to, a source of electrical energy or to
any other part of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s System.
(4) "Earthing" means a way of providing a connection between conductors and earth by an
Earthing Device which is either:
(i) immobilised and Locked in the earthing position. Where the Earthing Device is
Locked with a Safety Key, the Safety Key must be secured in a Key Safe and the
Key Safe Key must be given to the authorised site representative of the
Requesting Safety Co-ordinator where reasonably practicable and is to be
retained in safe custody. Where not reasonably practicable, the Key Safe Key
must be retained by the authorised site representative of the Implementing Safety
Co-ordinator in safe custody; or
(ii) maintained and/or secured in position by such other method which must be in
accordance with the Safety Rules of the Relevant Scottish Transmission
Licensee or that Scottish User as the case may be.

OC8B.1.7.3 For the purpose of the co-ordination of safety relating to HV Apparatus the term “Safety
Precautions” means Isolation and/or Earthing.

OC8B.2 OBJECTIVE
OC8B.2.1 The objective of OC8B is to achieve:-
(i) Safety From The System when work on or near a System necessitates the provision
of Safety Precautions on another System on HV Apparatus up to a Connection
Point (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point); and
(ii) Safety From The System when work is to be carried out at a Scottish User’s Site or a
Transmission Site (as the case may be) on equipment of the Scottish User or the
Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee (as the case may be) where the work or
equipment is near to HV Apparatus on the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s
System.

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

5 of 31
OC8B.2.2 A flow chart, set out in OC8B Appendix C, illustrates the process utilised in OC8B to achieve
the objective set out in OC8B.2.1. In the case of a conflict between the flow chart and the
provisions of the written text of OC8B, the written text will prevail.

OC8B.3 SCOPE
OC8B.3.1 OC8B applies to The Company, Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensees and to
Scottish Users, which in OC8 means:-
(a) Generators (including where undertaking OTSDUW);
(b) Network Operators; and
(c) Non-Embedded Customers.
The procedures for the establishment of safety co-ordination by The Company in relation to
External Interconnections are set out in Interconnection Agreements with relevant
persons for the External Interconnections.

OC8B.4 PROCEDURE
OC8B.4.1 Approval Of Safety Rules
OC8B.4.1.1 (a) In accordance with the timing requirements of its Bilateral Agreement, each Scottish
User will supply to the Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee a copy of its Safety
Rules relating to its side of the Connection Point at each Connection Site or in the
case of OTSUA a copy of its Local Safety Instructions relating to its side of the
Transmission Interface Point at each Transmission Interface Site.
(b) In accordance with the timing requirements of each Bilateral Agreement, the Relevant
Scottish Transmission Licensee will supply to each Scottish User a copy of its
Safety Rules relating to the Transmission side of the Connection Point at each
Connection Site or in the case of OTSUA a copy of its Local Safety Instructions
relating to the Transmission side of the Transmission Interface Point at each
Transmission Interface Site.
(c) Prior to connection the Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee and the Scottish
User must have approved each other’s relevant Safety Rules in relation to Isolation
and Earthing.
OC8B.4.1.2 Either party may require that the Isolation and/or Earthing provisions in the other party’s
Safety Rules affecting the Connection Site (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission
Interface Site) should be made more stringent in order that approval of the other party’s
Safety Rules can be given. Provided these requirements are not unreasonable, the other
party will make such changes as soon as reasonably practicable. These changes may need
to cover the application of Isolation and/or Earthing at a place remote from the Connection
Site (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Site), depending upon the System
layout. Approval may not be withheld because the party required to approve reasonably
believes the provisions relating to Isolation and/or Earthing are too stringent.
OC8B.4.1.3 If, following approval, a party wishes to change the provisions in its Safety Rules relating to
Isolation and/or Earthing, it must inform the other party. If the change is to make the
provisions more stringent, then the other party merely has to note the changes. If the change
is to make the provisions less stringent, then the other party needs to approve the new
provisions and the procedures referred to in OC8B.4.1.2 apply.
OC8B.4.2 Safety Co-ordinators

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

6 of 31
OC8B.4.2.1 For each Connection Point (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point), the
Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee and each Scottish User will have nominated to
be available, to a timescale agreed in the Bilateral Agreement, a person or persons
(“Safety Co-ordinator(s)”) to be responsible for the co-ordination of Safety Precautions
when work is to be carried out on a System which necessitates the provision of Safety
Precautions on HV Apparatus pursuant to OC8B. A Safety Co-ordinator may be
responsible for the co-ordination of safety on HV Apparatus at more than one Connection
Point (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point).
OC8B.4.2.2 Each Safety Co-ordinator shall be authorised by the Relevant Scottish Transmission
Licensee or a Scottish User, as the case may be, as competent to carry out the functions
set out in OC8B to achieve Safety From The System. Confirmation from the Relevant
Scottish Transmission Licensee or a Scottish User, as the case may be, that its Safety
Co-ordinator(s) as a group are so authorised is dealt with, for Scottish Users, in CC.5.2 or
in ECC.5.2 and for Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensees in the STC. Only persons
with such authorisation will carry out the provisions of OC8B. Each User shall, prior to being
connected to the National Electricity Transmission System, give notice in writing to the
Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee of its Safety Co-ordinator(s) and will update
the written notice yearly and whenever there is a change to the identity of its Safety Co-
ordinators or to the Connection Points (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission
Interface Points). The Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee will, at the time of a
Scottish User being connected to the National Electricity Transmission System give
notice in writing to that Scottish User of the identity of its Safety Co-ordinator(s) and will
update the written notice whenever there is a change to the Connection Points (or, in the
case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Points) or Safety Co-ordinators.
OC8B.4.2.3 Contact between Safety Co-ordinators will be made via normal operational channels, and
accordingly separate telephone numbers for Safety Co-ordinators need not be provided.
OC8B.4.2.4 If work is to be carried out on a System, or on equipment of the Relevant Scottish
Transmission Licensee or a Scottish User near to a System, as provided in this OC8B,
which necessitates the provision of Safety Precautions on HV Apparatus in accordance
with the provisions of OC8B, the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator who requires the Safety
Precautions to be provided shall contact the relevant Implementing Safety Co-ordinator
to co-ordinate the establishment of the Safety Precautions.
OC8B.4.3 RISSP
OC8B.4.3.1 OC8B sets out the procedures for utilising the RISSP, which will be used except where
dealing with equipment in proximity to the other’s System as provided in OC8B.8. Sections
OC8B.4 to OC8B.7 inclusive should be read accordingly.
OC8B.4.3.2 The Relevant Transmission Licensee will use the format of the RISSP forms set out in
Appendix A and Appendix B to OC8B, or any other format which may be agreed between the
Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee and each User. That set out in OC8B Appendix
A and designated as "RISSP-R", shall be used when the Relevant Scottish Transmission
Licensee is the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator, and that in OC8B Appendix B and
designated as "RISSP-I", shall be used when the Relevant Transmission Licensee is the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator. Proformas of RISSP-R and RISSP-I will be provided
for use by Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensees staff.
OC8B.4.3.3 Scottish Users may either adopt the format referred to in OC8B.4.3.2 or any other format
which may be agreed between the Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee and the
Scottish User from time to time.
OC8B.4.3.4 All references to RISSP-R and RISSP-I shall be taken as referring to the corresponding parts
of the alternative forms or other tangible written or electronic records used by each Scottish
User or Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee.
OC8B.4.3.5 RISSP-R will have an identifying number written or printed on it, comprising a prefix which
identifies the location at which it is issued, and a unique (for each Scottish User or
Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee, as the case may be) serial number which both
together uses up to eight characters (including letters and numbers) and the suffix "R".
Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022
7 of 31
OC8B.4.3.6 (a) In accordance with the timing requirements set out in the Bilateral Agreement each
Scottish User shall apply in writing to the Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee
for the Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee’s approval of its proposed prefix.
(b) The Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee shall consider the proposed prefix to
see if it is the same as (or confusingly similar to) a prefix used by the Relevant Scottish
Transmission Licensee or another User and shall, as soon as possible (and in any
event within ten days), respond in writing to the Scottish User with its approval or
disapproval.
(c) If the Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee disapproves, it shall explain in its
response why it has disapproved and will suggest an alternative prefix.
(d) If the Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee has disapproved, then the Scottish
User shall either notify the Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee in writing of its
acceptance of the suggested alternative prefix or it shall apply in writing to the Relevant
Scottish Transmission Licensee with revised proposals and the above procedure
shall apply to that application.

OC8B.5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ON HV APPARATUS

OC8B.5.1 Agreement Of Safety Precautions
OC8B.5.1.1 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator who requires Safety Precautions on another
System(s) will contact the relevant Implementing Safety Co-ordinator(s) to agree the
Location of the Safety Precautions to be established. This agreement will be recorded in
the respective Safety Logs.
OC8B.5.1.2 It is the responsibility of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator to ensure that adequate
Safety Precautions are established and maintained, on their and/or another System
connected to their System, to enable Safety From The System to be achieved on the HV
Apparatus, specified by the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator which is to be identified in
Part 1.1 of the RISSP. Reference to another System in this OC8B.5.1.2 shall not include
the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator’s System which is dealt with in OC8B.5.1.3.
OC8B.5.1.3 When the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator is of the reasonable opinion that it is
necessary for Safety Precautions on the System of the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator,
other than on the HV Apparatus specified by the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator, which
is to be identified in Part 1.1 of the RISSP, they shall contact the Requesting Safety Co-
ordinator and the details shall be recorded in part 1.1 of the RISSP forms. In these
circumstances it is the responsibility of the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator to establish
and maintain such Safety Precautions.
OC8B.5.1.4 The location of the Safety Precautions should be indicated on each Scottish User’s
operational diagram and labelled as per the local instructions of each Scottish User.
OC8B.5.1.5 In The Event Of Disagreement
In any case where the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator and the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator are unable to agree the Location of the Isolation and (if requested) Earthing,
both shall be at the closest available points on the infeeds to the HV Apparatus on which
Safety From The System is to be achieved as indicated on the Operation Diagram.
OC8B.5.2 Implementation Of Isolation
OC8B.5.2.1 Following the agreement of the Safety Precautions in accordance with OC8B.5.1 the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall then establish the agreed Isolation.
OC8B.5.2.2 The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall confirm to the Requesting Safety Co-
ordinator that the agreed Isolation has been established, and identify the Requesting
Safety Co-ordinator's HV Apparatus up to the Connection Point (or, in the case of
OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point), for which the Isolation has been provided. The
confirmation shall specify:

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

8 of 31
 (a) for each Location, the identity (by means of HV Apparatus name, nomenclature and
numbering or position, as applicable) of each point of Isolation;
(b) whether Isolation has been achieved by an Isolating Device in the isolating position,
by an adequate physical separation or as a result of a No System Connection;
(c) where an Isolating Device has been used whether the isolating position is either :
(i) maintained by immobilising and Locking the Isolating Device in the isolating
position and affixing a Caution Notice to it. Where the Isolating Device has been
Locked with a Safety Key, the confirmation shall specify that the Safety Key has
been secured in a Key Safe and the Key Safe Key has been given to the
authorised site representative of the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator where
reasonably practicable and is to be retained in safe custody. Where not
reasonably practicable (including where Earthing has been requested in
OC8B.5.1), the confirmation shall specify that the Key Safe Key will be retained by
the authorised site representative of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator in
safe custody; or
(ii) maintained and/or secured by such other method which must be in accordance
with the Safety Rules of the Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee or that
Scottish User, as the case may be; and
(d) where an adequate physical separation has been used that it will be in accordance with,
and maintained by, the method set out in the Safety Rules of the Relevant Scottish
Transmission Licensee or that Scottish User, as the case may be, and, if it is a part
of that method, that a Caution Notice has been placed at the point of separation;
(e) where a No System Connection has been used, the physical position of the No
System Connection shall be defined and shall not be varied for the duration of the
Safety Precaution and the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s relevant HV
Apparatus will not, for the duration of the Safety Precaution be connected to a source
of electrical energy or to any other part of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s
System.
The confirmation of Isolation shall be recorded in the respective Safety Logs.
OC8B.5.2.3 Following the confirmation of Isolation being established by the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator and the necessary establishment of relevant Isolation on the Requesting Safety
Co-ordinators System, the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator will then request the
implementation of Earthing by the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator, if agreed in section
OC8B.5.1. If the implementation of Earthing has been agreed, then the authorised site
representative of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall retain any Key Safe Key in
safe custody until any Safety Key used for Earthing has been secured in the Key Safe.
OC8B.5.3 Implementation Of Earthing
OC8B.5.3.1 The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall then establish the agreed Earthing.
OC8B.5.3.2 The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall confirm to the Requesting Safety Co-
ordinator that the agreed Earthing has been established, and identify the Requesting
Safety Co-ordinator’s HV Apparatus up to the Connection Point (or, in the case of
OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point), for which the Earthing has been provided. The
confirmation shall specify:
(a) for each Location, the identity (by means of HV Apparatus name, nomenclature and
numbering or position, as is applicable) of each point of Earthing; and
(b) in respect of the Earthing Device used, whether it is:
(i) immobilised and Locked in the earthing position. Where the Earthing Device has
been Locked with a Safety Key, that the Safety Key has been secured in a Key
Safe and the Key Safe Key has been given to the authorised site representative of
the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator where reasonably practicable and is to be
retained in safe custody. Where not reasonably practicable, that the Key Safe Key

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

9 of 31
 will be retained by the authorised site representative of the Implementing Safety
Co-ordinator in safe custody; or
(ii) maintained and/or secured in position by such other method which is in
accordance with the Safety Rules of the Relevant Scottish Transmission
Licensee or that Scottish User, as the case may be.
The confirmation of Earthing shall be recorded in the respective Safety Logs.
OC8B.5.3.3 The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall ensure that the established Safety
Precautions are maintained until requested to be removed by the relevant Requesting
Safety Co-ordinator.
OC8B.5.3.4 Certain designs of gas insulated switchgear three position isolator and earth switches
specifically provide a combined Isolation and Earthing function within a single mechanism
contained within a single integral unit. Where Safety Precautions are required across
control boundaries and subject to the requirements of OC8B.5.1, it is permissible to earth
before Points of Isolation have been established provided that all interconnected circuits
are fully disconnected from live HV Apparatus.
OC8B.5.4 RISSP Issue Procedure
OC8B.5.4.1 Where Safety Precautions on another System(s) are being provided to enable work on the
Requesting Safety Co-ordinator’s System, before any work commences they must be
recorded by a RISSP being issued. The RISSP is applicable to HV Apparatus up to the
Connection Point (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point) identified in
section 1.1 of the RISSP-R and RISSP-I forms.
OC8B.5.4.2 Where Safety Precautions are being provided to enable work to be carried out on both
sides of the Connection Point (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point)
a RISSP will need to be issued for each side of the Connection Point (or, in the case of
OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point) with Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee
and the respective User each enacting the role of Requesting Safety Co-ordinator. This
will result in a RISSP-R and a RISSP-I form being completed by each of the Relevant
Scottish Transmission Licensee and the Scottish User, with each Requesting Safety
Co-ordinator issuing a separate RISSP number.
OC8B.5.4.3 Once the Safety Precautions have been established (in accordance with OC8B.5.2 and
OC8B.5.3), the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall complete parts 1.1 and 1.2 of a
RISSP-I form recording the details specified in OC8B.5.1.3, OC8B.5.2.2 and OC8B.5.3.2.
Where Earthing has not been requested, Part 1.2(b) will be completed with the words “not
applicable” or “N/A”. They shall then contact the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator to pass
on these details.
OC8B.5.4.4 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator shall complete Parts 1.1 and 1.2 of the RISSP-R,
making a precise copy of the details received. On completion, the Requesting Safety Co-
ordinator shall read the entries made back to the sender and check that an accurate copy
has been made.
OC8B.5.4.5 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator shall then issue the number of the RISSP, taken from
the RISSP-R, to the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator who will ensure that the number,
including the prefix and suffix (where applicable), is accurately recorded in the designated
space on the RISSP-I form.
OC8B.5.4.6 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator and the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall
complete and sign Part 1.3 of the RISSP-R and RISSP-I respectively and then enter the time
and date. When signed no alteration to the RISSP is permitted; the RISSP may only be
cancelled.
OC8B.5.4.7 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator is then free to authorise work, but not testing, in
accordance with the requirements of the relevant internal safety procedures which apply to
the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator’s System. This is likely to involve the issue of safety
documents or other relevant internal authorisations. Where testing is to be carried out, the
procedure set out below in OC8B.6 shall be implemented.
Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022
10 of 31
OC8B.5.5 RISSP Cancellation Procedure
OC8B.5.5.1 When the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator decides that Safety Precautions are no longer
required, they will contact the relevant Implementing Safety Co-ordinator to effect
cancellation of the associated RISSP.
OC8B.5.5.2 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator will inform the relevant Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator of the RISSP identifying number, including the prefix and suffix (where applicable),
and agree it is the RISSP to be cancelled.
OC8B.5.5.3 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator and the relevant Implementing Safety Co-ordinator
shall then respectively complete Part 2.1 of their respective RISSP-R and RISSP-I forms and
shall then exchange details. The details being exchanged shall include their respective
names and time and date. On completion of the exchange of details the respective RISSP is
cancelled. The removal of Safety Precautions is as set out in OC8B.5.5.4 and OC8B.5.5.5.
OC8B.5.5.4 Neither Safety Co-ordinator shall instruct the removal of any Isolation forming part of the
Safety Precautions as part of the returning of the HV Apparatus to service until it is
confirmed to each by each other that every earth on each side of the Connection Point (or,
in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point), within the points of isolation
identified on the RISSP, has been removed or disconnected by the provision of additional
Points of Isolation.
OC8B.5.5.5 Subject to the provisions in OC8B.5.5.4, the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator is then free
to arrange the removal of the Safety Precautions, the procedure to achieve that being
entirely an internal matter for the party the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator is
representing. Where a Key Safe Key has been given to the authorised site representative of
the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator, the Key Safe Key must be returned to the authorised
site representative of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator. The only situation in which
any Safety Precautions may be removed without first cancelling the RISSP in accordance
with OC8B.5.5 or OC8B.5.6 is when Earthing is removed in the situation envisaged in
OC8B.6.2(b).

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

11 of 31
OC8B.5.6 RISSP Change Control
Nothing in this OC8B prevents Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensees and Scottish
Users agreeing to a simultaneous cancellation and issue of a new RISSP, if both agree. It
should be noted, however, that the effect of that under the relevant Safety Rules is not a
matter with which the Grid Code deals.
OC8B.6 TESTING
OC8B.6.1 The carrying out of the test may affect Safety Precautions on RISSPs or work being carried
out which does not require a RISSP. Testing can, for example, include the application of an
independent test voltage. Accordingly, where the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator wishes
to authorise the carrying out of such a test to which the procedures in OC8B.6 apply, they
may not do so and the test will not take place unless and until the steps in (a)-(c) below have
been followed and confirmation of completion has been recorded in the respective Safety
Logs:
(a) confirmation must be obtained from the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator that:
(i) no person is working on, or testing, or has been authorised to work on, or test, any
part of its System or another System(s) (other than the System of the
Requesting Safety Co-ordinator) within the points of Isolation identified on the
RISSP form relating to the test which is proposed to be undertaken, and
(ii) no person will be so authorised until the proposed test has been completed (or
cancelled) and the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator has notified the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator of its completion (or cancellation);
(b) any other current RISSPs which relate to the parts of the System in which the testing is
to take place must have been cancelled in accordance with procedures set out in
OC8B.5.5;
(c) the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator must agree with the Requesting Safety Co-
ordinator to permit the testing on that part of the System between the points of
Isolation identified in the RISSP associated with the test and the points of Isolation on
the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator's System.
OC8B.6.2 (a) The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator will inform the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator as soon as the test has been completed or cancelled and the confirmation
shall be recorded in the respective Safety Logs.
(b) When the test gives rise to the removal of Earthing which it is not intended to re-apply,
the relevant RISSP associated with the test shall be cancelled at the completion or
cancellation of the test in accordance with the procedure set out in either OC8B.5.5 or
OC8B.5.6. Where the Earthing is re-applied following the completion or cancellation of
the test, there is no requirement to cancel the relevant RISSP associated with the test
pursuant to this OC8B.6.2.

OC8B.7 EMERGENCY SITUATIONS

OC8B.7.1 There may be circumstances where Safety Precautions need to be established in relation
to an unintended electrical connection or situations where there is an unintended risk of
electrical connection between the National Electricity Transmission System and a
Scottish User’s System, for example resulting from an incident where one line becomes
attached or unacceptably close to another.
OC8B.7.2 In those circumstances, if both the Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee and the
Scottish User agree, the relevant provisions of OC8B.5 will apply as if the electrical
connections or potential connections were, solely for the purposes of this OC8B, a
Connection Point (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point).

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

12 of 31
OC8B.7.3 (a) The relevant Safety Co-ordinator shall be that for the electrically closest existing
Connection Point (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point) to that
Scottish User's System or such other local Connection Point (or, in the case of
OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point) as may be agreed between the Relevant
Scottish Transmission Licensee and the Scottish User, with discussions taking
place between the relevant local Safety Co-ordinators. The Connection Point (or, in
the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point) to be used shall be known in this
OC8B.7.3 as the "relevant Connection Point" (or, in the case of OTSUA, relevant
“Transmission Interface Point”).
(b) The Safety Rules shall be those which apply to the relevant Connection Point (or, in
the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point).
(c) The prefix for the RISSP (where applicable) will be that which applies for the relevant
Connection Point (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Point).
OC8B.8 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS RELATING TO WORKING ON EQUIPMENT NEAR TO THE HV
SYSTEM
OC8B.8 applies to the situation where work is to be carried out at a Scottish User’s Site or
a Transmission Site (as the case may be) on equipment of the Scottish User or a
Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee as the case may be, where the work or
equipment is near to HV Apparatus on the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s System.
It does not apply to other situations to which OC8B applies. In this part of OC8B, a Permit
for Work for proximity work is to be used, rather than the usual RISSP procedure, given
the nature and effect of the work, all as further provided in the OC8B.8.
OC8B.8.1 Agreement Of Safety Precautions
OC8B.8.1.1 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator who requires Safety Precautions on another
System(s) when work is to be carried out at a Scottish User’s Site or a Transmission Site
(as the case may be) on equipment of the Scottish User or a Relevant Scottish
Transmission Licensee, as the case may be, where the work or equipment is near to HV
Apparatus on the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s System will contact the relevant
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator(s) to agree the Location of the Safety Precautions to
be established, having as part of this process informed the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator of the equipment and the work to be undertaken. The respective Safety Co-
ordinators will ensure that they discuss the request with their authorised site representative
and that the respective authorised site representatives discuss the request at the
Connection Site (or, in the case of OTSUA, Transmission Interface Site). This
agreement will be recorded in the respective Safety Logs.
OC8B.8.1.2 It is the responsibility of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator, working with their
authorised site representative as appropriate, to ensure that adequate Safety Precautions
are established and maintained, on their and/or another System connected to their System,
to enable Safety From The System to be achieved for work to be carried out at a Scottish
User’s Site or a Transmission Site (as the case may be) on equipment and in relation to
work which is to be identified in the relevant part of the Permit for Work for proximity work
where the work or equipment is near to HV Apparatus of the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator’s System specified by the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator. Reference to
another System in this OC8B.8.1.2 shall not include the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator’s
System.
OC8B.8.1.3 In The Event Of Disagreement
In any case where the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator and the Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator are unable to agree the Location of the Isolation and (if requested) Earthing,
both shall be at the closest available points on the infeeds to the HV Apparatus near to
which the work is to be carried out as indicated on the Operation Diagram.

OC8B.8.2 Implementation Of Isolation And Earthing

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

13 of 31
OC8B.8.2.1 Following the agreement of the Safety Precautions in accordance with OC8B.8.1, the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall then establish the agreed Isolation and (if
required) Earthing.
OC8B.8.2.2 The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall confirm to the Requesting Safety Co-
ordinator that the agreed Isolation and (if required) Earthing has been established.
OC8B.8.2.3 The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall ensure that the established Safety
Precautions are maintained until requested to be removed by the relevant Requesting
Safety Co-ordinator.
OC8B.8.3 Permit For Work For Proximity Work Issue Procedure
OC8B.8.3.1 Where Safety Precautions on another System(s) are being provided to enable work to be
carried out at a Scottish User’s Site or Transmission Site (as the case may be) on
equipment where the work or equipment is in proximity to HV Apparatus of the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator, before any work commences they must be recorded by
a Permit for Work for proximity work being issued. The Permit for Work for proximity
work shall identify the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s HV Apparatus in proximity to
the required work
OC8B.8.3.2 Once the Safety Precautions have been established (in accordance with OC8B.8.2), the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator shall agree to the issue of the Permit for Work for
proximity work with the appropriately authorised site representative of the Requesting
Safety Co-ordinator’s Site. The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator will inform the
Requesting Safety Co-ordinator of the Permit for Work for proximity work identifying
number.
OC8B.8.3.3 The appropriately authorised site representative of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator
shall then issue the Permit for Work for proximity work to the appropriately authorised site
representative of the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator. The Permit for Work for proximity
work will in the section dealing with the work to be carried out, be completed to identify that
the work is near the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator’s HV Apparatus. No further
details of the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator’s work will be recorded, as that is a matter
for the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator in relation to their work.
OC8B.8.3.4 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator is then free to authorise work in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant internal safety procedures which apply to the Requesting
Safety Co-ordinator’s Site. This is likely to involve the issue of safety documents or other
relevant internal authorisations.
OC8B.8.4 Permit For Work For Proximity Work Cancellation Procedure
OC8B.8.4.1 When the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator decides that Safety Precautions are no longer
required, they will contact the relevant Implementing Safety Co-ordinator to effect
cancellation of the associated Permit for Work for proximity work.
OC8B.8.4.2 The Requesting Safety Co-ordinator will inform the relevant Implementing Safety Co-
ordinator of the Permit for Work for proximity work identifying number, and agree that the
Permit for Work for proximity work can be cancelled. The cancellation is then effected by
the appropriately authorised site representative of the Requesting Safety Co-ordinator
returning the Permit for Work for proximity work to the appropriately authorised site
representative of the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator.
OC8B.8.4.3 The Implementing Safety Co-ordinator is then free to arrange the removal of the Safety
Precautions, the procedure to achieve that being entirely an internal matter for the party the
Implementing Safety Co-ordinator is representing.

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

14 of 31
OC8B.9 LOSS OF INTEGRITY OF SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
OC8B.9.1 In any instance when any Safety Precautions may be ineffective for any reason, the
relevant Safety Co-ordinator shall inform the other Safety Co-ordinator(s) without delay of
that being the case and, if requested, of the reasons why.

OC8B.10 SAFETY LOG

OC8B.10.1 Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensees and Scottish Users shall maintain Safety
Logs which shall be a chronological record of all messages relating to safety co-ordination
under OC8 sent and received by the Safety Co-ordinator(s). The Safety Logs must be
retained for a period of not less than six years.

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

15 of 31
 APPENDIX A - RISSP-R
RECORD OF INTER-SYSTEM SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (RISSP-R)
(Requesting Safety Co-ordinator's Record)

RISSP NUMBER __________

Part 1

1.1 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION

Safety Precautions have been established by the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator to

achieve Safety From The System on the following HV Apparatus:

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ESTABLISHED

(a) ISOLATION

State the Locations(s) at which Isolation has been established on the Implementing
Safety Co-ordinator's System. For each Location, identify each point of Isolation. For
each point of Isolation state, the means by which the Isolation has been achieved, and
whether, immobilised and Locked, Caution Notice affixed, other Safety Precautions
applied, as appropriate.

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

16 of 31
 (b) EARTHING

State the Locations(s) at which Earthing has been established on the Implementing
Safety Co-ordinator's System. For each Location, identify each point of Earthing. For
each point of Earthing state, the means by which the Earthing has been achieved, and
whether, immobilised and Locked, other Safety Precautions applied, as appropriate.

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

1.3 ISSUE

I have received confirmation from ____________________ (name of Implementing

Safety Co-ordinator) at ____________________ (Location) that the Safety Precautions
identified in paragraph 1.2 have been established and that instructions will not be
issued at their Location for their removal until this RISSP is cancelled.

Signed ................................................ (Requesting Safety Co-ordinator)

at ............................. (time) on ....................................... (date)

PART 2

2.1 CANCELLATION

I have confirmed to ____________________ (name of the Implementing Safety

Co-ordinator) at ____________________ (Location) that the Safety Precautions set
out in paragraph 1.2 are no longer required and accordingly the RISSP is cancelled.

Signed ................................................... (Requesting Safety Co-ordinator)

at ............................. (time) on .............................. (date).......................................

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

17 of 31
 APPENDIX B - RISSP-I
RECORD OF INTER-SYSTEM SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (RISSP-I)
(Implementing Safety Co-ordinator's Record)

RISSP NUMBER __________

PART 1

1.1 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION

Safety Precautions have been established by the Implementing Safety Co-ordinator to

achieve Safety From The System on the following HV Apparatus:

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ESTABLISHED

(a) ISOLATION

State the Location(s) at which isolation has been established on the Implementing
Safety Co-ordinator's System. For each Location, identify each point of Isolation. For
each point of Isolation state, the means by which the Isolation has been achieved, and
whether, immobilised and Locked, Caution Notice affixed, other Safety Precautions
applied, as appropriate.

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

18 of 31
 (b) EARTHING

State the Location(s) at which Earthing has been established on the Implementing
Safety Co-ordinator's System. For each Location, identify each point of Earthing. For
each point of Earthing state, the means by which the Earthing has been achieved, and
whether, immobilised and Locked, other Safety Precautions applied, as appropriate.

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

1.3 ISSUE

I confirmed to ____________________ (name of Requesting Safety Co-ordinator) at

____________________ (Location) that the Safety Precautions identified in paragraph
1.2 have been established and that instructions will not be issued at my Location for
their removal until this RISSP is cancelled.

Signed ......................................................... (Implementing Safety Co-ordinator)

at ............................. (time) on .............................. (date)

PART 2

2.1 CANCELLATION

I have received confirmation from ____________________ (name of the Requesting

Safety Co-ordinator) at ____________________ (Location) that the Safety Precautions
set out in paragraph 1.2 are no longer required and accordingly the RISSP is
cancelled.

Signed .................................................. (Implementing Safety Co-ordinator)

at ................................. (time) on ........................... (date)

(Note: This form to be of a different colour from RISSP-R.)

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

19 of 31
 APPENDIX C - FLOWCHARTS

APPENDIX C1 - RISSP ISSUE PROCESS

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

20 of 31
Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022
21 of 31
 APPENDIX C2 - TESTING PROCESS

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

22 of 31
Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022
23 of 31
 APPENDIX C3 - RISSP CANCELLATION PROCESS

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

24 of 31
Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022
25 of 31
 APPENDIX C4 - PROCESS FOR WORKING NEAR TO SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

26 of 31
Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022
27 of 31
 APPENDIX D - NOT USED

Not Used

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

28 of 31
 APPENDIX E - FORM OF PERMIT TO WORK

Scottish & Southern Energy plc

PERMIT-TO-WORK No. ……………………….
______________________________________________________________

1. ISSUE

To …………………………………………………………………………..………………….……………………………..

The following High Voltage Apparatus has been made safe in accordance with the Operational Safety Rules for the work detailed on this
Permit-to-Work to proceed:

……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………………….……..….

……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………………….……..….
……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………………….……..….

TREAT ALL OTHER APPARATUS AS LIVE

Circuit Main Earths are applied at: …………………..………………….………..……………………………………………..

……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………………….……..….

……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………………….……..….

……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………………….……..….
Other precautions (see Operational Safety Rules 3.2.1(b), 4.6.2(c) and 5.5.3), and any special instructions:

……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………………….……..….

……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………………….……..….
……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………………….……..….

The following work is to be carried out: …………………………..……………………………………...……………………..

……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………………….……..….

……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………………….……..….
……………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………………….……..….

Circuit Identification Issued: Colour …...…………. No. of wristlets …….………..… No. of step bolts ………..………

Name: (print): ………………..…..….. Signature: ………..…...………. Time: ……….………….. Date: …….…………….

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

2. RECEIPT

I accept responsibility for carrying out the work on the Apparatus detailed on this Permit-to-Work, applying additional earths as
necessary. No attempt will be made by me, or by the persons under my charge, to work on any other Apparatus.

Name: (print): ………………..…..….. Signature: ………..…...………. Time: ……….………….. Date: …….…………….

Circuit Identification Equipment Checked as above (Initials): ……………………

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

3. CLEARANCE
All persons under my control have been withdrawn and warned that it is no longer safe to work on the Apparatus detailed on this Permit-
to Work.

All gear, tools and additional earths have/have not* been removed. The works is/is not* complete.
All circuit identification equipment issued as above has been returned

Name: (print): ………………..…..….. Signature: ………..…...………. Time: ……….………….. Date: …….…………….

* Delete where not applicable

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. CANCELLATION

This Permit-to-Work is cancelled.

Name: (print): ………………..…..….. Signature: ………..…...………. Time: ……….………….. Date: …….…………….

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

29 of 31
Scottish Power

PERMIT FOR WORK No.

KEY SAFE No.

1. (i) LOCATION ………………………………………………………………………………………………..……………

………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………...

(ii) PLANT/APPARATUS IDENTIFICATION …………………………………………………………………………….

………………………………………………….…………………………………………………………………………
(iii) WORK TO BE DONE …………………………………………………………………………………….

……………………………………………………….…………………………………………………………………...

……………………………………………………….…………………………………………………………………...

……………………………………………………….…………………………………………………………………...

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

2. (i) PRECAUTIONS TAKEN TO ACHIEVE SAFETY FROM THE SYSTEM: State points at which Plant/Apparatus has been
Isolated and specify position(s) of Earthing Devices applied. State actions taken to avoid Danger by draining, venting,
purging and containment or dissipation of stored energy.

…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….………….
…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….………….
…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….………….

…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….………….
…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….………….
…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….………….
…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….………….

…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….………….
…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….………….
Caution Notices have been affixed to all points of isolation

(ii) FURTHER PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN DURING THE COURSE OF WORK TO AVOID SYSTEM DERIVED HAZARDS

…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….………….
…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….………….

…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….………….

…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….………….
…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….………….

I have confirmed with the Control Person(s)* …………………………………………………………………………………. that precautions

in Section 2(i) have been carried out and that the Control Person(s) will maintain these until this Permit for Work is cancelled. I certify
that the precautions in Section 2(i) together with the precautions in Section 2(ii) are adequate to provide Safety from the System in
respect of the work in Section 1.

This Permit for Work must only be transferred under the Personal Supervision of a Senior Authorised

Person* ………………………………………..

Signed …………………………………………. being a Senior Authorised Person. Time: ……….. Date: …………….
____________________________________________________________________________________________

3. ISSUE

(i) Key Safe Key (No.)* …..….. (ii) Earthing Schedule* …….... (iii) Portable Drain Earths (No. off)* ………………

(iv) Selected Person’s Report (No.)* ………………….. (v) Circuit Identification Flags (No. off)* ……………………

(vi) Circuit Identification Wristlets (No. off)* and Colours/Symbols ……………………………………………………….

Signed ……………………………………….. being the Senior Authorised Person responsible

for the issue of this Permit for Work Time: ……… Date: ………………

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022
30 of 31
4. RECEIPT
I understand and accept my responsibilities under the ScottishPower Safety Rules as recipient of this Permit for Work and
acknowledge receipt of the items in Section 3.
Signed ……………………………………….. Name (Block Letters) ………………………………………………………….

being a Competent Person in the employ of Firm/Dept …………………………………… Time ………. Date …………

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

TRANSFER RECORD

PART 1 PART 2 PART 3

Person Time Senior †Person receiving reissued Senior Time

surrendering Authorised Document Authorised
Date Date
Document Person receiving Person
suspended Signature Name (Block reissuing
Document * Letters) document

†Signature of Person receiving re-issued Document in accordance with conditions detailed in Section 4.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

5. CLEARANCE: I certify that all persons working under this Permit for Work have been withdrawn from, and warned not to work
on, the Plant/Apparatus in Section 1. All gears, tools, Drain Earths and loose material have been removed and guards and
access doors have been replaced, except for:

…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….…………………
…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….…………………
…………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….…………………

Signed ………………………………………being the Competent Person responsible for

clearing this Permit for Work Time ………… Date ………….

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

6. CANCELLATION: I certify that all items issued under Section 3 have been accounted for and the Control
Person(s)* …………………………………. informed of the cancellation and of any restrictions on returning
the Plant/Apparatus to service.

Signed …………………………………………. being the Senior Authorised Person responsible for

cancelling this Permit for Work. Time …………. Date ……….

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

*N/A if Not Applicable

< END OF OPERATING CODE NO. 8 APPENDIX 2 >

Issue 6 Revision 12 OC8B 09 March 2022

31 of 31
 OPERATING CODE NO. 9
(OC9)

CONTINGENCY PLANNING

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

OC9.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................ 2
OC9.2 OBJECTIVE ............................................................................................................................... 3
OC9.3 SCOPE ....................................................................................................................................... 3
OC9.4 SYSTEM RESTORATION 1 ...................................................................................................... 4
OC9.4.1 - OC9.4.4 Total Shutdown And Partial Shutdown ........................................................... 4
OC9.4.5 Contribution to System Restoration ................................................................................ 4
OC9.5 RE-SYNCHRONISATION OF DE-SYNCHRONISED ISLANDS ............................................. 15
OC9.5.2 Options .......................................................................................................................... 16
OC9.5.3 Choice Of Option ........................................................................................................... 17
OC9.5.4 Agreeing Procedures ..................................................................................................... 18
OC9.6 JOINT SYSTEM INCIDENT PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 20
APPENDIX 1 – SYSTEM RESTORATION REGIONS .......................................................................... 22

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024

i
OC9.1 INTRODUCTION
Operating Code No.9 ("OC9") covers the processes and procedures by which The Company
in coordination and liaison with Users, will restore the Total System or parts of the System
following a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown.
OC9.1.1 Approach to System Restoration
The Company is obliged through its Licence to achieve System Restoration within the
parameters of the Electricity System Restoration Standard.
Electricity System Demand in the context of the “Electricity System Restoration Standard”,
is considered by The Company to be the forecast peak National Demand which would have
occurred within the 24 hour period following the start of the Total Shutdown or Partial
Shutdown had the Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown not occurred. Under the Electricity
System Restoration Standard, 60% of peak National Demand is to be restored accross all
System Restoration Regions in 24 hours and 100% peak National Demand is to be restored
accross System Restoration Regions in 5 days.
Following a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown, there are two ways in which the Total
System (or the disconnected part of the System in the case of a Partial Shutdown) can be
re-established. These being a top-down approach using Local Joint Restoration Plans or a
bottom-up approach using Distribution Restoration Zone Plans.
Any Local Joint Restoration Plan and/or Distribution Restoration Zone Plan comprising
common Transmission Licensees’s, Network Operator’s or Restoration Contractor’s
assets cannot be activated at the same time. However, this would not preclude a Local Joint
Restoration Plan or Distributed Restoration Zone Plan from being activated at the same
site(s) where there is segregation between them.
OC9.1.2 Re-Synchronisation of Power Islands
Following the establishment of Power Islands (either through the implementation of Local
Joint Restoration Plans or Distribution Restoration Zone Plans), The Company will then
co-ordinate the Re-Synchronisation of parts of the Total System which have become Out
of Synchronism with each other irrespective of whether or not a Total Shutdown or Partial
Shutdown has occurred.
OC9.1.3 Joint System Incident Procedure
A Joint System Incident procedure requires the establishment of communication routes and
arrangements between senior management representatives of The Company and Users
involved in, or who may be involved in, an actual or potential serious or widespread disruption
to the Total System or a part of the Total System, which requires, or may require, urgent
managerial response, day or night, but which does not fall within the provisions of OC9.1.5.
OC9.1.4 Relevant Transmission Licensees shall comply with OC9.4 and OC9.5 as provided for in
STCP 06-1 and any relevant Local Joint Restoration Plan or Distribution Restoration
Zone Plan or OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure where and to the extent that such
matters apply to them.
OC9.1.5 Directions Issued by the Secretary of State
It should be noted that under section 96 of the Act, the Secretary of State may give directions
to The Company and/or any Generator and/or any Supplier, for the purpose of "mitigating
the effects of any civil emergency which may occur" (ie. for the purposes of planning for a civil
emergency); a civil emergency is defined in the Act as "any natural disaster or other
emergency which, in the opinion of the Secretary of State, is or may be likely to disrupt
electricity supplies". Under the Energy Act 1976, the Secretary of State has powers to make
orders and give directions controlling the production, supply, acquisition or use of electricity,
where an Order in Council under section 3 is in force declaring that there is an actual or
imminent emergency affecting electricity supplies. In the event that any such directions are
given, or orders made under the Energy Act 1976, the provisions of the Grid Code will be
suspended in so far as they are inconsistent with them.
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024
2 of 23
OC9.2 OBJECTIVE
The overall objectives of OC9 are:
OC9.2.1 To achieve the requirements of the Electricity System Restoration Standard, taking into
account the capability of Restoration Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus as well as other
Users’ Plant and Apparatus capabilities, including Embedded Generating Units and
External Interconnections and the operational constraints of the Total System.
OC9.2.2 To initiate the restoration process through the activation of Local Joint Restoration Plans
and/or Distribution Restoration Zone Plans followed by the subsequent Re-
Synchronisation and expansion of Power Islands.
OC9.2.3 To achieve the Re-Synchronisation of parts of the Total System which have become Out
of Synchronism with each other.
OC9.2.4 To ensure that communication routes and arrangements are available to enable senior
management representatives of The Company and Users, who are authorised to make
binding decisions on behalf of The Company or the relevant User, as the case may be, to
communicate with each other in the situation described in OC9.1.3.
OC9.2.5 To describe the role that The Company, Relevant Transmission Licensees, Network
Operators and Restoration Contractors may have in the restoration processes as detailed
in the relevant OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedures, Local Joint Restoration Plans
and Distribution Restoration Zone Plans.
OC9.2.6 To identify and address as far as possible the events and processes necessary to enable the
restoration of the Total System, after a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown. This is likely
to require the following key processes to be implemented, typically, but not necessarily, in the
order given below:
(i) Selectively implement Local Joint Restoration Plans
(ii) Selectively implement Distribution Restoration Zone Plans in conjunction with
Network Operators
(iii) Expand Power Islands to supply Power Stations
(iv) Expand and merge Power Islands leading to Total System energisation
(v) Selectively reconnect Demand
(vi) Facilitate and co-ordinate returning the Total System back to normal operation
(vii) Resumption of the Balancing Mechanism if suspended in accordance with the
provisions of the BSC.

OC9.3 SCOPE
OC9.3.1 OC9 applies to The Company and to Users, which in OC9 means:-
(a) Generators;
(b) Network Operators;
(c) Non-Embedded Customers;
(d) HVDC System Owners;
(e) DC Converter owners including DC Converter Station owners
(f) Restoration Contractors; and
(h) Relevant Transmission Licensees as provided for in the STC.
OC9.3.2 The procedure for the establishment of emergency support/contingency planning between
The Company and Externally Interconnected System Operators is set out in the
Interconnection Agreement with each Externally Interconnected System Operator.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024

3 of 23
OC9.4 SYSTEM RESTORATION
Total Shutdown and Partial Shutdown
OC9.4.1 A "Total Shutdown" is the situation existing when all generation has ceased and there is no
electricity supply from External Interconnections. Therefore, the Total System has
shutdown with the result that it is not possible for the Total System to begin to function again
without The Company's directions relating to System Restoration.
OC9.4.2 A "Partial Shutdown" is the same as a Total Shutdown except that all generation has ceased
in a separate part of the Total System and there is no electricity supply from External
Interconnections or other parts of the Total System to that part of the Total System.
Therefore, that part of the Total System is shutdown with the result that it is not possible for
that part of the Total System to begin to function again without The Company's directions
relating to System Restoration.
OC9.4.3 During a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown and during the subsequent recovery, the
Licence Standards may not apply and the Total System may be operated outside normal
voltage and Frequency standards.
OC9.4.4 In a Total Shutdown and in a Partial Shutdown and during the subsequent recovery, it is
likely to be necessary for The Company to issue Emergency Instructions in accordance
with BC2.9.
OC9.4.5 Contribution to System Restoration.
The Company will initially start to restore the System following a Total Shutdown or Partial
Shutdown by issuing instructions directly to Restoration Contractors through one or more
Local Joint Restoration Plans as provided for in OC9.4.5.1 and/or by instructing Network
Operators to activate one or more Distribution Restoration Zone Plans as provided for in
OC9.4.5.2.

OC9.4.5.1 Local Joint Restoration

OC9.4.5.1.1 Local Joint Restoration Plans are dependent upon Anchor Restoration Contractors who
upon instruction from The Company (or Relevant Transmission Licensee in Scotland), shall
Start-Up their Anchor Plant from Shutdown and energise a part of the Total System, within
two hours, without an external electrical power supply. Local Joint Restoration Plans may
also be dependent upon Top Up Restoration Contractors. A Local Joint Restoration Plan
may include more than one Restoration Contractor whose Plant has an Anchor Plant
Capability or Top Up Capability. When a Local Joint Restoration Plan is activated, only
one Restoration Contractor will operate as the Anchor Generator with the other
Restoration Contractors potentially taking roles as Top-Up Contractors. The Local Joint
Restoration Plan will detail how these responsibilities will be allocated.
OC9.4.5.1.2 Local Joint Restoration Plans will be produced jointly by The Company, Relevant
Transmission Licensees, relevant Restoration Contractors and relevant Network
Operators in accordance with the provisions of OC9.4.7.6.1(a). The Local Joint Restoration
Plan will detail the agreed method and procedure by which Anchor Plant will energise part of
the Total System and in combination with Top Up Restoration Plant (where necessary) to
meet complementary local Demand so as to form a Power Island.

OC9.4.5.2 Distribution Restoration Zones

OC9.4.5.2.1 Distribution Restoration Zone Plans are dependent upon Anchor Restoration
Contractors who, upon instruction from relevant Network Operators, shall Start-Up their
Anchor Plant from Shutdown and energise a part of a Network Operator’s System, , within
eight hours, without an external electrical power supply. A Distribution Restoration Zone
Plan may also be dependent upon Top Up Restoration Contractors.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024

4 of 23
OC9.4.5.2.2 For each Distribution Restoration Zone, a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan will be
produced jointly by the Network Operator, The Company, Relevant Transmission
Licensee, and Restoration Contractors in accordance with the provisions of OC9.4.7.6.1(b).
The Distribution Restoration Zone Plan will detail the agreed method and procedure by
which an Anchor Plant will energise part of the Total System and in combination with Top
Up Restoration Plant (where necessary) meet complementary local Demand so as to form
a Power Island. A Distribution Restoration Zone Plan may include more than one
Restoration Contractor whose Plant has an Anchor Plant Capability or Top Up
Restoration Capability. When a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan is activated, only one
Restoration Contractor will operate as the Anchor Restoration Contractor with the other
Restoration Contractors potentially taking roles as Top-Up Restoration Contractors. The
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan will detail how these responsibilities will be allocated.
OC9.4.6 Situations requiring System Restoration

In the event of a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown, The Company will, as soon as
reasonably practical, inform Users (or, in the case of a Partial Shutdown, Users which in
The Company's opinion need to be informed) and the BSCCo that a Total Shutdown, or, as
the case may be, a Partial Shutdown, exists and that The Company intends to implement
System Restoration. The Company shall (as soon as is practicable) determine, in its
reasonable opinion, the time and date with effect from which the Total Shutdown or Partial
Shutdown commenced and notify the BSCCo of that time and date.

In the event of a Total Shutdown and following such notification, in accordance with the
provisions of the BSC, the BSCCo will determine the Settlement Period with effect from
which the Balancing Mechanism is suspended.

In the event of a Partial Shutdown and following such notification, the Balancing Mechanism
will not be suspended until such time and date that the Market Suspension Threshold has
been met, or deemed to have been met, in accordance with the provisions of the BSC. The
Company shall carry out the monitoring activities required by paragraph G3.1 of the BSC.
Following determination by The Company pursuant to its obligations under the BSC that the
Market Suspension Threshold has been met, or deemed to have been met, The Company
shall (as soon as practicable) inform the BSCCo of that time and date at which the Market
Suspension Threshold was met, or deemed to have been met, and the BSCCo will
determine the Settlement Period in accordance with the provisions of the BSC with effect
from which the Balancing Mechanism will be suspended.

Should The Company determine that the Total System is capable of returning to normal
operation without meeting the Market Suspension Threshold, The Company will follow the
procedure given in OC9.4.7.11.

System Restoration will conclude with effect from the time and date determined in
accordance with OC9.4.7.6.3(d).
In respect of Scottish Transmission Systems, in exceptional circumstances, as specified in
the Local Joint Restoration Plan, SPT or SHETL, may invoke such Local Joint Restoration
Plan for its own Transmission System and Scottish Offshore Transmission Systems
connected to it and operate within its provisions. Scottish Transmission Licensees, may
instruct relevant Network Operators to activate one or more Distribution Restoration Zone
Plans.
OC9.4.7 SYSTEM RESTORATION PROCEDURE

OC9.4.7.1 The procedure necessary for a recovery from a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown is
known as a System Restoration. The procedure for a Partial Shutdown is the same as that
for a Total Shutdown except that it applies only to a part of the Total System. It should be
remembered that a Partial Shutdown may affect parts of the Total System which are not
themselves shutdown.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024

5 of 23
OC9.4.7.2 The complexities and uncertainties of recovery from a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown
require that OC9 is sufficiently flexible in order to accommodate the full range of User’s Plant
and Apparatus and Total System characteristics and operational possibilities, and this
precludes the setting out in the Grid Code itself of concise chronological sequences. The
overall strategy will, in general, include the overlapping phases of the use of generating Plant,
at an isolated Power Station, or isolated HVDC System or isolated DC Converter Station,
together with complementary local Demand, termed Power Islands, step by step integration
of these Power Islands into larger sub-systems which includes utilising the procedures in
OC9.5 (Re-Synchronisation of Power Islands) and eventually re-establishment of the
complete Total System.
The Company Instructions

OC9.4.7.3 The Company will determine and instruct relevant Users to start System Restoration. These
instructions will normally recognise any applicable Local Joint Restoration Plan and/or
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan. User’s shall abide by The Company's instructions
during System Restoration, even if these conflict with the general overall strategy outlined in
OC9.4.7.6.3 or any applicable Local Joint Restoration Plan and/or Distribution
Restoration Zone Plan although a User may still reject an Emergency Instruction but only
on safety grounds (relating to personnel or plant) and this must be notified to The Company
immediately by telephone in accordance with the requirements of BC2.9.2.1. The Company's
and/or Network Operator’s instructions may (although this list should not be regarded as
exhaustive) be issued to;-

(a) Restoration Contractors relating to the start of supplying Active Power and subsequent
pick up of Demand;
(b) Network Operators or Non-Embedded Customers relating to the restoration of
Demand;
(c) Generators or HVDC System Owners or DC Converter Station owners relating to the
preparations for starting to supply Active Power when an external power supply is made
available to it;
(d) Network Operators to activate a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan.

Each of the above cases may include the requirement to undertake switching.

In respect of Scottish Transmission Systems, SPT and SHETL will act on The Company’s
behalf in accordance with its duties under the relevant Local Joint Restoration Plan or
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan. Restoration Contractors in Scotland shall abide by
SPT’s or SHETL’s instructions given in accordance with the Local Joint Restoration Plan
or Network Operator’s instructions given in accordance with the Distribution Restoration
Zone Plan.
OC9.4.7.4 (a) System Restoration following a Total Shutdown or where the Balancing Mechanism
has been suspended following a Partial Shutdown

During System Restoration where the Balancing Mechanism has been suspended, all
instructions by The Company to Users will be deemed to be Emergency Instructions under
BC2.9.2.2 (iii). All such Emergency Instructions will recognise any differing operational
capabilities (however termed) set out in the relevant Ancillary Services Agreement in
preference to the declared operational capability as registered pursuant to BC1 (or as
amended from time to time in accordance with the BC).

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024

6 of 23
 Instructions issued to Network Operators in England and Wales to activate a Distribution
Restoration Zone Plan will be issued by The Company as Emergency Instructions.
Network Operators will then proceed in accordance with the provisions of the Distribution
Restoration Zone Plan. Such instructions will be deemed to be Emergency Instructions
under BC2.9.2.2 (iii). The Network Operator will be responsible for the operation of the
Distribution Restoration Zone which will take into account the capabilities of Restoration
Contractors’ Plant and Apparatus and other Plant and Apparatus within the Network
Operator’s System. A Restoration Contractor may reject an Emergency Instruction but
only on safety grounds (relating to personnel or plant) and this must be notified to The Network
Operator immediately. Such instructions shall be pursuant to the terms of the Distribution
Restoration Zone Plan.
Transmission Licensees in Scotland may issue instructions (which shall be deemed to be
Emergency Instructions) to relevant Scottish Network Operators to activate one or more
Distribution Restoration Zone Plans. Network Operators in Scotland will be responsible
for the operation of the relevant Distribution Restoration Zone which will take into account
the capabilities of Restoration Contractors’ Plant and Apparatus and other Plant and
Apparatus within the Network Operator’s System. A Restoration Contractor may reject an
Emergency Instruction but only on safety grounds (relating to personnel or plant) and this
must be notified to the relevant Scottish Network Operator immediately. Such instructions
shall be pursuant to the terms of the Distribution Restoration Zone Plan.

(b) System Restoration following a Partial Shutdown where the Balancing Mechanism
has not been suspended

During a Partial Shutdown where the Balancing Mechanism has not been suspended, all
instructions to Users connected to the Power Island will be deemed to be Emergency
Instructions under BC2.9.2.2 (iv). All such Emergency Instructions will recognise any
differing operational capabilities (however termed) set out in the relevant Ancillary Services
Agreement in preference to the declared operational capability as registered pursuant to BC1
(or as amended from time to time in accordance with the BC).

During System Restoration where the Balancing Mechanism has not been suspended, The
Company may issue instructions to Network Operators in England and Wales to activate a
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan. Such instructions will be deemed to be Emergency
Instructions under BC2.9.2.2 (iv). The Network Operator will be responsible for the
operation of the Distribution Restoration Zone which will take into account the capabilities
of Restoration Contractor’s Plant and other Plant and Apparatus within the Network
Operator’s System. Such instructions would be pursuant to the terms of the Distribution
Restoration Zone Plan.
In Scotland, Relevant Transmission Licensee’s may issue instructions (which would be
deemed to be Emergency Instructions) to Scottish Network Operators, to activate on one
or more Distribution Restoration Zone Plans.

OC9.4.7.5 Requirements to inform The Company and/or Network Operator where a Genset, HVDC
System, DC Converter or Restoration Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus cannot operate
within its safe operating limits during the Demand restoration process

OC9.4.7.5.1 If following the successful initiation and subsequent termination of a Local Joint Restoration
Plan or Distribution Restoration Zone Plan and during the wider System Restoration process,
any Genset or HVDC System or DC Converter Station or Restoration Contractor’s Plant and
Apparatus cannot, because of the Demand being experienced, keep within its safe operating
parameters, the Generator or HVDC System Owner or DC Converter Station owner or
Restoration Contractor shall, inform The Company and relevant Network Operator. The
Company or relevant Network Operator (as appropriate) will, where possible, either instruct
Demand to be altered or will re-configure the Total System or will instruct a User or Restoration
Contractors to re-configure its System in order to alleviate the problem being experienced by
the Genset or HVDC System or DC Converter or Restoration Contractor’s Plant and

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024

7 of 23
 Apparatus. If a Local Joint Restoration Plan or Distribution Restoration Zone Plan is in
operation, then the arrangements set out therein shall apply. In both scenarios, The Company
and/or Network Operator accepts that any decision to keep a Genset or HVDC System or DC
Converter Station or Restoration Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus operating, if outside its
safe operating parameters, is one for the User or Restoration Contractor concerned alone and
accepts that the User or Restoration Contractor may change output on that Genset or HVDC
System or DC Converter or Restoration Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus if it believes it is
necessary for safety reasons (whether relating to personnel or Plant and/or Apparatus). If such
a change is made without prior notice, then the User or Restoration Contractor shall inform The
Company and/or Network Operator as soon as reasonably practical (unless a Local Joint
Restoration Plan and/or Distribution Restoration Zone Plan is in operation in which case the
arrangements set out therein shall apply). In the case of a Distribution Restoration Zone, where
the Network Operator experiences situations where any Restoration Contractor’s Plant and
Apparatus is unable to keep within safe operating parameters and this is likely to affect the
integrity and progression of the Distribution Restoration Zone, the Network Operator shall
inform The Company without delay.

OC9.4.7.6 Local Joint Restoration Plan and Distribution Restoration Zone Plan Establishment, Testing
and Provisions

OC9.4.7.6.1 Restoration Plan Establishment

The following process shall apply for the establishment of Restoration Plans:
a) For a Local Joint Restoration Plan, The Company will identify the need to introduce
or modify a Local Joint Restoration Plan and coordinate with the relevant parties as
required in this OC9.4.7.6.1.
b) For a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan where The Company and a relevant
Network Operator agree that introducing or modifying a Distribution Restoration
Zone may be beneficial, The Company, the Relevant Transmission Licensee
(where appropriate) and the Network Operator shall explore the possibility of
establishing a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan as required in this OC9.4.7.6.1.
c) The Company, the Relevant Transmission Licensee (where appropriate) and the
Network Operator will discuss and agree the detail of a Restoration Plan as soon
as reasonably practicable after the potential requirement for a Restoration Plan is
identified. This may involve discussions between relevant potential Restoration
Contractors, The Company and the Network Operator.
d) For a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan an initial feasibility assessment carried out
jointly by The Company and Network Operator may result in The Company running
a procurement / tender process. If after discussions or analysis, The Company, the
Relevant Transmission Licensee (where appropriate) and Network Operator agree
a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan is not viable, then no further work to develop
the Distribution Restoration Zone Plan needs to be carried out.
e) Each Restoration Plan will be in relation to a specific Anchor Plant and may include
one of more Top Up Restoration Plants.
f) The preparation of each Restoration Plan shall include a check whether any network
assets cited in each Restoration Plan are included in any other Restoration Plan,
and if so, all the Local Joint Restoration Plans or Distribution Restoration Zone
Plans containing common assets shall include a specific step that prohibits more than
one of any of these Restoration Plans from being activated at any one point in time.
g) The Restoration Plan will record which Restoration Contractors and which
Restoration Contractor’s sites are covered by the Restoration Plan and set out
what is required from The Company, the Network Operator, each Relevant
Transmission Licensees and each Restoration Contractor should a System
Restoration situation arise.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024

8 of 23
 h) Restoration Plans will allow for one of several Restoration Contractors to take the
single role of Anchor Generator within the Restoration Plan and for others to provide
Top-Up Restoration Capabilities. When the Restoration Plan is activated, one of
the first tasks shall be the designation of the Anchor Generator and confirmation of
which parties are acting as Top Up Restoration Contractors.
i) Each Local Joint Restoration Plan shall be prepared by The Company. Each
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan shall be prepared by the relevant Network
Operator. In both cases the Restoration Plan will be agreed between Network
Operator, The Company, the Relevant Transmission Licensee and relevant
Restoration Contractors.
j) Each page of the Restoration Plan shall bear a date of issue and the issue number.
k) When a Restoration Plan has been prepared, it shall be sent to all parties involved
for confirmation of its accuracy.
l) The Restoration Plan shall then (if its accuracy has been confirmed) be signed on
behalf of The Company, the Network Operator, each Relevant Transmission
Licensee and each relevant Restoration Contractor by way of written confirmation
of its accuracy.
m) Once agreed under this OC9.4.7.6.1, the procedure will become a Restoration Plan
under the Grid Code and (subject to any change pursuant to this OC9) will apply to
The Company, the Network Operator, the Relevant Transmission Licensees and
the relevant Restoration Contractors as if it were part of the Grid Code.
n) A copy of each signed Local Joint Restoration Plan will be distributed by The
Company to the Network Operator, each Relevant Transmission Licensee and to
each Restoration Contractor accompanied by a note indicating the date of
implementation.
o) A copy of each signed Distribution Restoration Zone Plan will be distributed by the
Network Operator to The Company, each Relevant Transmission Licensee and
to each Restoration Contractor accompanied by a note indicating the date of
implementation.
p) The Company, Network Operators, the Relevant Transmission Licensees and
Restoration Contractors must make the Restoration Plan readily available to the
relevant operational staff.
q) Each Restoration Plan will include the test criteria to be satisfied by each
Restoration Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus when subject to the testing
requirements of OC5.7.
r) If any party to a Restoration Plan becomes aware that a change is needed to that
Restoration Plan, it shall, in the case of Local Joint Restoration Plan, contact The
Company or in the case of a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, the Network
Operator to initiate a discussion between The Company, or the Network Operator
and the relevant parties to seek to agree the relevant change. The principles applying
to establishing or modifying a Restoration Plan under this OC9.4.7.6.1 shall apply to
such discussions and to any consequent changes.
OC9.4.7.6.2 Restoration Plan Testing
The Company, Relevant Transmission Licensees, the Network Operator and the relevant
Restoration Contractors shall conduct regular joint exercises of the Restoration Plan to
which they are parties. The objectives of such exercises include:

• To test the effectiveness of the Restoration Plan;

• To provide for joint training of the parties in respect of the Restoration Plan;
• To maintain the parties’ awareness and familiarity of the Restoration Plan;
• To promote understanding of each party’s role under the Restoration Plan; and

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024

9 of 23
 • To identify any improvement areas which should be incorporated into the
Restoration Plan.

The Company shall propose to the parties to a Restoration Plan a date for the exercise to
take place. All the Restoration Plan parties will jointly share the task of planning, preparing,
participating in, and facilitating the exercises, which will normally be in desktop format or as
otherwise agreed. The precise timing of the exercise for each Restoration Plan will be agreed
by all parties, but will not be less than once every 3 years. These exercises shall be run as
part of the wider assurance activities as provided for under OC5.7.4

OC9.4.7.6.3 Restoration Plan Provisions

The following provisions in this OC9.4.7.6.3 apply in relation to Restoration Plans. For Local
Joint Restoration Plans, The Company (or in Scotland the relevant Transmission
Licensee as assigned by The Company under STCP 06-1) are designated as the lead
operator; for Distribution Restoration Zone Plans, the Network Operator is the lead
operator.
(a) Where the lead operator, issues instructions which conflict with a Restoration Plan these
instructions will take precedence over the requirements of the Restoration Plan (as set
out in OC9.4.7.6.1).
i.) When issuing such instructions, the lead operator will state whether or not it
wishes the remainder of the Restoration Plan to apply. Where the lead operator
has stated that it wishes the remainder of the Restoration Plan to apply, the
other parties to the plan may give notice that it is not possible to operate the
Restoration Plan to the lead operator and the other parties to plan.
ii.) The lead operator shall immediately consult with all parties to the Restoration
Plan. Unless all parties reach agreement as to how the Restoration Plan shall
operate in those circumstances, operation in accordance with the Restoration
Plan will terminate and parties will be relieved of their obligations under the
Restoration Plan in accordance with OC9.4.7.6.3(d) below.
(b) The preparation of each Restoration Plan shall include a check whether any network
assets cited in another Local Joint Restoration Plan or another Distribution
Restoration Zone Plan are included in the plan, and if so, all the Local Joint
Restoration Plans or Distribution Restoration Zone Plans containing common assets
shall include a specific step that prohibits more than one of any of these plans from being
activated at any one point in time.
(c) The lead operator will advise other relevant parties of the requirement to switch their User
Systems to segregate their Demand and to carry out such other actions as set out in the
Restoration Plan. The relevant party will then operate in accordance with the provisions
of the Restoration Plan.
(d) Operation of the Restoration Plan shall be terminated by the lead operator either when:
i.) the Restoration Plan has been successfully implemented and the resulting
Power Island has been synchronised to another Power Island following
instruction from The Company. In this case, the arrangements for
synchronising the Power Island to the System will be set out in the
Restoration Plan; or
ii.) the Restoration Plan has not been / is not being successfully implemented. In
this circumstance, provided for in OC9.4.7.6.3(a), if an agreement is not
reached on whether or not to apply the remainder of the plan or if The
Company, in coordination with the other parties, confirms that it does not wish
the remainder of the Restoration Plan to apply, the Restoration Plan shall be
terminated. In this case The Company and the Network Operator in
conjunction with the Restoration Contractors shall agree and implement the
most appropriate course of action which should aim to maintain supplies to as
many customers as possible.
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024
10 of 23
 In both cases the lead operator shall notify all parties to the Restoration Plan accordingly.
OC9.4.7.7 Local Joint Restoration Plan Operation
Following a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown the following shall apply:
OC9.4.7.7.1 Where The Company, as part of System Restoration, has given an instruction to a
Restoration Contractor to initiate Start-Up, the relevant Restoration Contractor will
prepare to Start-Up their Plant in accordance with the Local Joint Restoration Plan.

OC9.4.7.7.2 The Company will advise the relevant Network Operator of the requirement to switch its
User System so as to segregate its Demand and to carry out such other actions as set out in
the Local Joint Restoration Plan. The relevant Network Operator will then operate in
accordance with the provisions of the Local Joint Restoration Plan.

OC9.4.7.7.3 The Company, in coordination with Relevant Transmission Licensees, will ensure that
switching carried out on the National Electricity Transmission System and other actions
are as set out in the Local Joint Restoration Plan.
OC9.4.7.7.4 Following notification from the Anchor Restoration Contractor that their Anchor Plant is
ready to accept load and, where provided for in the Local Joint Restoration Plan, Top Up
Restoration Contractors are in a position to subsequently synchronise to the Total System
as soon as external site supplies are restored, The Company will instruct the Anchor
Restoration Contractor (as provided for in OC9.4.5.2.2) to energise part of the Total
System. The Anchor Restoration Contractor and the relevant Network Operator will then,
in accordance with the requirements of the Local Joint Restoration Plan, establish
communication and agree the output of the relevant Anchor Plant and the connection of
Demand so as to establish a Power Island. As part of establishing a Power Island, The
Company may instruct one or more Top Up Restoration Contractors to subsequently
synchronise their Plant and Apparatus to the System to facilitate supplying more Demand
in the Power Island in accordance with the requirements of the Local Joint Restoration
Plan. During this period, Restoration Contractors will be required to regulate the output of
their relevant Plant to the Demand prevailing in the Power Island in which it is situated, on
the basis that it will (where practicable) seek to maintain the Target Frequency. The
Restoration Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus will (where practical) also seek to follow the
requirements relating to Reactive Power (which may include the requirement to maintain a
target voltage) set out in the Local Joint Restoration Plan.
OC9.4.7.7.5 Operation in accordance with the Local Joint Restoration Plan will be terminated by The
Company or relevant Transmission Licensee in Scotland (by notifying the Network
Operator and relevant Restoration Contractors) immediately after successfully connecting
the Power Island to another Power Island, or to the User System of another Network
Operator, or to the synchronising of Gensets at other Power Stations (which are not owned
and operated by Restoration Contractors) or HVDC Systems or DC Converter Stations.
Operation in accordance with the Local Joint Restoration Plan will also terminate in the
circumstances provided for in OC9.4.7.6.3(d) if an agreement is not reached or if The
Company states that it does not wish the remainder of the Local Joint Restoration Plan to
apply. Users will then comply with the Bid-Offer Acceptances or Emergency Instructions
of The Company.

OC9.4.7.8 Distribution Restoration Zone Operation

Following a Total or Partial Shutdown the following shall apply:
OC9.4.7.8.1 Where The Company wishes a Network Operator to activate a Distribution Restoration
Zone Plan, The Company will issue an Emergency Instruction to that Network Operator
for it to activate the relevant Distribution Restoration Zone Plan whilst also informing the
Relevant Transmission Licensee. In Scotland the instruction to a Scottish Network
Operator to activate a Scottish Distribution Restoration Zone Plan would be given by the
relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee. For the avoidance of doubt, The Company will
issue instructions to initiate System Restoration in Scotland via STCP 06-1 which includes
arrangements for the activation of Scottish Distribution Restoration Zone Plans.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024

11 of 23
OC9.4.7.8.2 Upon receipt of an Emergency Instruction from The Company (or instruction from the
relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee), the Network Operator will confirm and
acknowledge receipt in accordance with the requirements of BC2.9.2 and activate a
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan as provided for in OC9.4.7.6.1(b). All instructions to
relevant Restoration Contractors party to the Distribution Restoration Zone Plan will be
issued by the Network Operator.
OC9.4.7.8.3 The operation of the Distribution Restoration Zone will then continue in accordance with the
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan until it is terminated in accordance with the requirements
of OC9.4.7.6.3(d).
OC9.4.7.8.4 Where The Company issues an Emergency Instruction (or in Scotland where a Relevant
Scottish Transmission Licensee issues an instruction) to a Network Operator to activate a
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, the Network Operator will first issue instructions to the
Restoration Contractor (as provided for in OC9.4.5.1.1) informing them of the requirement
to prepare their Anchor Plant to re-energise a Distribution Restoration Zone (or part
thereof) and will (if applicable) then consequently issue instructions to Restoration
Contractors in respect of their Top Up Restoration Plant informing them of the requirement
to prepare their Top Up Restoration Plant accordance with the Distribution Restoration
Zone Plan. The Network Operator shall also liaise with the Relevant Transmission
Licensee where they are party to the Distribution Restoration Zone Plan to ensure
switching can take place in the appropriate timescales. The Network Operator in liaison with
the Restoration Contractor(s) will discuss when their Anchor Plant and Top Up Plant are
expected to be available. For the avoidance of doubt, the Anchor Restoration Contractor
shall not start to re-energise the Distribution Restoration Zone until instructed by the
Network Operator in accordance with OC9.4.7.8.10 and this instruction shall only be given
once the Network Operator has configured its System and taken the necessary additional
actions to prepare the Distribution Restoration Zone to be re-energised. This may include
any automatic switching that takes place through the action of any Distribution Restoration
Zone Control System. It is only then, that once external site supplies have been restored,
and as appliable to the Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, that Network Operators will
give instructions (by manual or automatic means) to Restoration Contractors in respect of
Top Up Restoration Plant to synchronise to the Network Operator’s System in accordance
with OC9.4.7.8.10.
OC9.4.7.8.5 All relevant Restoration Contractors and where applicable Relevant Transmission
Licensees will inform the Network Operator of the indicative time when their Plant and
Apparatus will be ready to energise or synchronise to the Distribution Restoration Zone.
OC9.4.7.8.6 The Network Operator shall inform The Company (and the Relevant Scottish
Transmission Licensee in the case of a Scottish Distribution Restoration Zone) and
Transmission Licensees where they are party to the Distribution Restoration Zone Plan
advising that it has contacted the appropriate Restoration Contractors in accordance with
the Distribution Restoration Zone Plan and the expected time when the Anchor Generator
will energise the Distribution Restoration Zone.
OC9.4.7.8.7 In addition to the requirements of OC9.4.7.8.4 to OC9.4.7.8.6, and in accordance with the
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, the Network Operator shall start to reconfigure its
System (by manual or automatic means) such that it is ready to enable the Anchor
Restoration Contractor to re-energise the Distribution Restoration Zone (or part thereof),
and where provided for in the Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, the subsequent
synchronisation of Top Up Restoration Plant. To enable this process to take place, the
Network Operator may need to change the topology and status of its System which may
include but shall not be limited to changing the status of circuit breakers in addition to switching
between pre agreed control system and Protection settings. Reconfiguration of the Network
Operator’s System prior to re-energisation of the Distribution Restoration Zone, may be
achieved by instructions carried out manually, switching carried out remotely from the Network
Operators Control Centre or via fully automatic means which could include a Distribution
Restoration Zone Control System. Where a Transmission Licensee is party to the
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, the Network Operator shall liaise with the Relevant
Transmission Licensee as part of this process to ensure that parts of the Transmission
System can be energised from the Distribution Restoration Zone.
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024
12 of 23
OC9.4.7.8.8 Once the Network Operator (and where necessary in accordance with the Relevant
Transmission Licensee) has reconfigured its System and associated Plant and Apparatus
(including but not limited to Protection and control system settings) it will contact the Anchor
Restoration Contractor (be it by manual or automatic means) and agree a time for the
Anchor Plant to re-energise the Distribution Restoration Zone (or part thereof). Where the
Anchor Restoration Contractor or Network Operator needs to change the agreed proposed
re-energisation time as a result of an unforeseen event such as, but not limited to, a faulty item
of Plant or Apparatus, safety issue or unavailability of personnel, the Anchor Restoration
Contractor and/or Network Operator will agree a revised re-energisation time. The Anchor
Restoration Contractor and the relevant Network Operator will in accordance with the
requirements of the Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, establish communication and agree
the planned output of the relevant Anchor Plant and the connection of Demand to plan the
formation of the Power Island.
OC9.4.7.8.9 The Network Operator will inform The Company (or relevant Scottish Transmission
Licensee in the case of a Scottish Distribution Restoration Zone) or Relevant
Transmission Licensee where they are party to the Distribution Restoration Zone Plan of
the time when the Anchor Restoration Contractor is estimated to re-energise a section of
the Network Operator’s System. Should this estimated time vary, the Network Operator
will inform The Company (or relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee in the case of a
Scottish Distribution Restoration Zone) to state the revised estimated re-energisation time
and the reason for the change.
OC9.4.7.8.10 The Restoration Contractor shall contact the Network Operator once their Anchor Plant is
ready to re-energise the network. The Network Operator shall then assess their network
status, the estimated re-energisation time as detailed in OC9.4.7.8.8 and if conditions are
suitable, the Network Operator will issue an instruction to the Anchor Restoration
Contractor (by manual or automatic means) to re-energise the Distribution Restoration
Zone (or part thereof). Following the issue of instructions to the Anchor Restoration
Contractor, and successful re-energisation of the Distribution Restoration Zone (or part
thereof) the Network Operator will instruct (by manual or automatic means) Top Up
Restoration Contractors party to the Distribution Restoration Zone Plan to synchronise to
the Distribution Restoration Zone. The Network Operator shall also inform the Relevant
Transmission Licensee when an instruction has been issued to the Restoration Contractor
where they are party to the Distribution Restoration Zone Plan.
OC9.4.7.8.11 Once the Distribution Restoration Zone (or part thereof) has been re-energised and feeding
some local Demand or controllable Demand provided by a relevant Restoration Contractor,
they will be required to follow instructions from the Network Operator (by manual or automatic
means) in accordance with the Distribution Restoration Zone Plan. The Network Operator
and/or Distribution Restoration Zone Control System shall issue instructions to
Restoration Contractors as necessary to ensure the Distribution Restoration Zone
continues to run in a stable manner. As part of this process, the Network Operator, in
coordination with Restoration Contractors, shall ensure risks to the Network Operator’s
System or the Restoration Contractor’s Plant, that could arise through disturbances in the
Distribution Restoration Zone, are minimised as far as reasonably practicable. This may be
assisted through a planned series of re-energisation steps within the Distribution
Restoration Zone, taking account of the capability and performance of the Restoration
Contractor’s Plant at that time.
OC9.4.7.8.12 Demand within the Distribution Restoration Zone can be restored by manual or remote
controlled switching, or automatically by a Distribution Restoration Zone Control System.
If during the Demand restoration process, any relevant Restoration Contractor’s Plant or
Apparatus cannot keep within its safe operating parameters, because of the nature of the
Demand being supplied, the relevant Restoration Contractor shall inform the Network
Operator without undue delay who in turn shall inform The Company. In the case of a
Distribution Restoration Zone in Scotland, the Scottish Network Operator shall inform the
relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee.
In order to help alleviate issues the Network Operator or Distribution Restoration Zone
Control System will, where possible:

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024

13 of 23
 i. Instruct relevant Restoration Contractors to alter their Demand; or
ii. re-configure the topology of the Distribution Restoration Zone; or
iii. will instruct the relevant Restoration Contractor forming part of the Distribution
Restoration Zone to re-configure its System.
The Company and Network Operator (and Relevant Transmission Licensee in Scotland)
accepts that any decision to keep a relevant Restoration Contractor’s Plant or Apparatus
operating, if outside its safe operating parameters, is one for the Restoration Contractor
concerned alone. The Company, the Network Operator, and the Relevant Scottish
Transmission Licensee (for Distribution Restoration Zones in Scotland) accepts that the
relevant Restoration Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus may have its operating point
changed by the relevant Restoration Contractor if it believes it is necessary for safety
reasons (whether relating to personnel or Plant and/or Apparatus). If such a change is made
without prior notice, then the relevant Restoration Contractor shall inform the Network
Operator as soon as reasonably practical. A Restoration Contractor may also reject an
instruction issued by a Network Operator but only on safety grounds (relating to personnel
or plant) and this must be notified to Network Operator immediately.
OC9.4.7.8.13 To stabilise the voltage and Frequency of the Network Operator’s System and increase the
Demand supplied within the Distribution Restoration Zone, the Network Operator may
need to instruct (by manual or automatic means) additional relevant Restoration Contractors
to Synchronise their Plant to the Distribution Restoration Zone which would be part of the
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan. The Network Operator and/or the Distribution
Restoration Zone Control System shall ensure Restoration Contractors are able (where
applicable) to contribute to voltage and Frequency control and ensure that adequate positive
and negative headroom is maintained on Restoration Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus to
enable the management of Power Island contingences. For the avoidance of doubt, The
Company may require Transmission Licensees in Scotland to manage the Frequency and
voltage of Power Islands in Scotland as provided for in STCP 06-1 or Network Operators to
manage the Frequency and voltage of Distribution Restoration Zones whilst recognising
The Company has overall responsibility to the wider restoration process in the GB
Synchronous Area.
OC9.4.7.8.14 As the Distribution Restoration Zone supports increasing Demand, and as implementation
of the Distribution Restoration Zone Plan progresses, the Network Operator may need to
switch between predefined control and Protection settings as the need arises.
OC9.4.7.8.15 Expansion of a Distribution Restoration Zone to an unenergised Transmission busbar and
to wider parts of the unenergised Transmission System could be part of the Distribution
Restoration Zone Plan in addition to the requirements of OC9.5.
OC9.4.7.8.16 Operation in accordance with the Distribution Restoration Zone Plan will be terminated by
the Network Operator in accordance OC9.4.7.6.3(d).
OC9.4.7.9 Expansion of Power Islands
The Company will instruct relevant Users to expand Power Islands to achieve larger Power
Islands following the successful termination of Local Joint Restoration Plans and
Distribution Restoration Zone Plans.
OC9.4.7.10 Interconnection of Power Islands

The Company will subsequently interconnect the expanded Power Islands detailed in
OC9.4.7.9 to form larger Power Islands which will then be connected to form an integrated
system as detailed in OC9.5 which is a fundamental component of the Electricity System
Restoration Standard. This should eventually achieve the re-establishment of the Total
System or that part of the Total System subject to the Partial Shutdown, as the case may
be. The interconnection of Power Islands will utilise the provisions of all or part of OC9.5 (Re-
Synchronisation of De-synchronised Power Islands) and in such a situation such
provisions will be part of the System Restoration.

Return the Total System Back to Normal Operation

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024

14 of 23
OC9.4.7.11 The Company shall, as soon as reasonably practical, inform Users and the BSCCo when the
Total System could return to normal operation. Any such determination by The Company
does not mean that the provisions of Section G paragraph 3 (System Restoration) of the
BSC shall cease to apply.

In making the determination that the Total System could return to normal operation, The
Company, would consider, amongst other things, the following areas:

(a) the extent to which the National Electricity Transmission System is contiguous and
energised;

(b) the integrity and stability of the National Electricity Transmission System and its
ability to operate in accordance with the Licence Standards;

(c) the impact that returning to normal may have on transmission constraints and the
corresponding ability to maximise the Demand connected; and

(d) the volume of generation, Electricity Storage or Demand not connected to the
National Electricity Transmission System; and

(e) the functionality of normal communication systems (ie electronic data communication
facilities, Control Telephony, etc).

In the event that the Balancing Mechanism has been suspended, it will not resume until the
start of the Settlement Period determined by the BSC Panel in accordance with paragraph
G3.1.2(d)(i) of the BSC.

For the avoidance of doubt, until resumption of the Balancing Mechanism, The Company is
likely to continue to issue Emergency Instructions in accordance with BC2.9.

Users shall use reasonable endeavours to submit Physical notifications ten hours prior to
the start of the Settlement Period determined by the BSC Panel in accordance with
paragraph G3.1.2(d)(i) of the BSC and as notified by The Company to Users, in preparation
for a return to normal operations.

In the event that the Balancing Mechanism has not been suspended and The Company has
determined that the Total System has returned to normal operation, The Company shall
inform Users and the BSCCo as soon as possible of the time and date at which (in The
Company’s determination) the Total System returned to normal operation.

Conclusion of System Restoration

OC9.4.7.12 The provisions of this OC9 shall cease to apply with effect from either:

(a) Where the Balancing Mechanism was suspended, the start of the Settlement Period
that the Balancing Mechanism resumed normal operation, as determined by the BSC
Panel and notified by the BSCCo in accordance with the provisions of the BSC; or

(b) Where the Balancing Mechanism was not suspended, the end of the Settlement
Period determined and notified by the BSCCo (in accordance with the provisions of the
BSC) and corresponding to the time and date that The Company determined that the
Total System had returned to normal operation.

Externally Interconnected System Operators

OC9.4.7.13 Unless an Interconnector has an Anchor Restoration Contract, The Company will,
pursuant to the Interconnection Agreement with Externally Interconnected System
Operators, agree with Externally Interconnected System Operators when their
transmission systems can be Re-Synchronised, if they have become separated.

OC9.5 RE-SYNCHRONISATION OF POWER ISLANDS

The provisions in this OC9.5 do not apply to the parts of the Total System that normally
operate Out of Synchronism with the rest of the National Electricity Transmission System.
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024
15 of 23
 Further requirements, including the provision of information, applying to Re-synchronisation
of a Power Island following any Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown are detailed in
OC9.5.6.
OC9.5.1 (a) Where parts of the Total System are Out of Synchronism with each other (each such
part being termed a Power Island), but where there has been no Total Shutdown or
Partial Shutdown, The Company will instruct Users to regulate generation or Demand,
as the case may be, to enable the Power Islands to be Re-Synchronised and The
Company will inform those Users when Re-Synchronisation has taken place.
(b) As part of that process, there may be a need to deal specifically with Embedded
generation or storage in those Power Islands. This OC9.5 provides for how such
Embedded generation or storage should be dealt with. In Scotland, this OC9.5 also
provides for how Transmission connected generation in Power Islands should be dealt
with.
(c) In accordance with the provisions of the BC, The Company may decide that, to enable
Re-Synchronisation, it will issue Emergency Instructions in accordance with BC2.9
and it may be necessary to depart from normal Balancing Mechanism operation in
accordance with BC2 in issuing Bid-Offer Acceptances.
(d) The provisions of this OC9.5 shall also apply during System Restoration to the Re-
Synchronising of parts of the System following a Total or Partial Shutdown, as
indicated in OC9.4. In such cases, the provisions of OC9.5 shall apply when the relevant
Restoration Plan(s) referred to in OC9.4.7.6.3(d) are terminated.
OC9.5.2 Island loading and generation data management
Generation in those Power Islands may be dealt with as described in OC.9.5.2.1 and
OC9.5.2.2. The method deployed will vary in relation to any particular incident:-
OC9.5.2.1 Data Submission between Generators and Network Operators via The Company
(a) In this section, OC9.5.2.1, relevant loading and other operational parameters are
exchanged indirectly between Generators and/or HVDC System Owners and DC
Converter Station Owners and Network Operators via The Company.
(b) The Company, each Generator, HVDC Owner and/or DC Converter Station owner
with Synchronised (or connected and available to generate although not Synchronised)
Genset(s) in the Power Island and the Network Operator whose User System forms
all or part of the Power Island shall exchange information as set out in this OC9.5.2.1 to
enable The Company to issue a Bid-Offer Acceptance or an Emergency Instruction
to that Generator and/or HVDC System Owner and/or DC Converter Station Owner in
relation to its Genset(s) in the Power Island until Re-Synchronisation takes place, on
the basis that it will (where practicable) seek to maintain the Target Frequency.
(c) The information to The Company from the Generator and/or HVDC System Owner
and/or DC Converter Station owner will cover its relevant operational parameters as
outlined in the Balancing Codes (BC) and from The Company to the Generator and/or
HVDC System Owner and/or DC Converter Station owner will cover data on Demand
and changes in Demand in the Power Island.
(d) The information from the Network Operator to The Company will comprise data on
Demand in the Power Island, including data on any constraints within the Power Island.
(e) The Company will keep the Network Operator informed of the Bid-Offer Acceptances
or Emergency Instructions it is issuing to Embedded Genset(s) within the Network
Operator’s User System forming part of the Power Island.

OC9.5.2.2 Direct Data Submission between Generators, HVDC System Owners, DC Converter Station
Owners and Network Operators
(a) In this section, OC9.5.2.2, relevant loading and other operational parameters are
exchanged directly between Generators, and/or HVDC System Owners and DC
Converter Station Owners and Network Operators.
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024
16 of 23
 (b) The Company will issue an Emergency Instruction and/or a Bid-Offer Acceptance, to
the Generator and/or HVDC System Owner and/or DC Converter Station Owner to
"float" local Demand and maintain Frequency at Target Frequency. In this situation,
the Generator and/or HVDC System Owner and/or DC Converter Station owner will
be required to regulate the output of its Genset(s) at the Power Station in question to
the Demand prevailing in the Power Island in which it is situated, until Re-
Synchronisation takes place, on the basis that it will (where practicable) seek to maintain
the Target Frequency.
(c) The Network Operator is required to be in contact with the Generator and/or HVDC
System Operator and/or DC Converter Station owner so that the Network Operator
can supply data to the Generator and/or HVDC System Owner and/or DC Converter
Station owner on Demand changes within the Power Island.
(d) If more than one Generating Unit and/or HVDC System and/or DC Converter is
Synchronised to the Power Island, or is connected to the Power Island and available
to generate although not Synchronised, the Network Operator will need to liaise with
The Company to agree which Generating Units and/or HVDC Systems and/or DC
Converter stations will be utilised to accommodate changes in Demand in the Power
Island. The Network Operator will then maintain contact with the relevant Generator(s)
and/or HVDC System Owner(s) and/or DC Converter Station Owner(s) in relation to
that Plant.
(e) The Generator at the Power Station and/or HVDC System Owner and/or DC Converter
Station owner must contact the Network Operator if the level of Demand which it has
been asked to meet as a result of the Emergency Instruction and/or Bid-Offer
Acceptance to "float" and the detail on Demand passed on by the Network Operator,
is likely to cause problems for safety reasons (whether relating to personnel or Plant
and/or Apparatus) in the operation of its Generating Unit(s) or HVDC System(s) or DC
Converter Station(s), in order that the Network Operator can alter the level of Demand
which that Generator and/or HVDC System Owner and/or DC Converter Station owner
needs to meet. Any decision to operate outside any relevant parameters is one entirely
for the Generator and/or HVDC System Owner and/or DC Converter Station owner.
OC9.5.2.3 Control Features
(a) A system may be established in relation to a part of the National Electricity
Transmission System and a Network Operator’s User System, if agreed between The
Company and the Network Operator and any relevant Generator(s), HVDC System
Owner or DC Converter Station Owner, whereby upon a defined fault(s) occurring,
manual or automatic control features will operate to protect the National Electricity
Transmission System and relevant Network Operator’s User System and
Generator(s), HVDC System Owner(s) or DC Converter Station Owner(s) Plant and
simplify the restoration of Demand in the Power Island.
(b) In agreeing the establishment of such a system of control features, The Company will
need to consider its impact on the operation of the National Electricity Transmission
System.
(c) The Company will work with Network Operators involved in the wider System
Restoration process to help balance generation and Demand, and help ensure that it
does not have a destabilising effect on the Total System.

OC9.5.2.4 Absence of Control Features System

If a system of control features under OC9.5.2.3 has not been agreed as part of an OC9 De-
Synchronised Island Procedure under OC9.5.4 below, The Company may choose to utilise
the procedures set out in OC9.5.2.1 or OC9.5.2.2, or may instruct the Generators or HVDC
System Owner or DC Converter Station owners (or some of them in respect of the Plant
they own or operate) in the Power Island to De-Synchronise.
OC9.5.3 Choice of Option

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024

17 of 23
 In relation to each of the methods set out in OC9.5.2, where a Power Island has come into
existence and where an OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure under OC9.5.4 has been
agreed, The Company, the Network Operator and the relevant Generator(s), HVDC
System Owners or DC Converter Station owners will operate in accordance with that OC9
De-Synchronised Island Procedure unless The Company considers that the nature of the
De-Synchronised Island situation is such that either:-
(i) the OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure does not cover the situation; or
(ii) the provisions of the OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure are not appropriate,
in which case The Company will instruct the relevant Users and the Users will comply with
The Company's instructions (which in the case of Generators and/or HVDC System Owners
and/or DC Converter Station owners will relate to Active Power supplied to the Power
Island and in the case of Network Operators will relate to Demand).

OC9.5.4 Agreeing Procedures

In relation to each relevant part of the Total System, The Company, the Network Operator
and the relevant Generator and/or HVDC System Owner and/or DC Converter Station
owner will discuss and may agree a local procedure (an "OC9 De-Synchronised Island
Procedure").
Where the need for an OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure arises for the first time, the
following provisions shall apply:
(a) The Company, the Network Operator(s) and the relevant Generator(s) and/or HVDC
System Owners or DC Converter Station owners will discuss the need for, and the
detail of, the OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure. As soon as the need for an
OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure is identified by The Company or a User, and
the party which identifies such a need will notify all affected Users (and The Company,
if that party is a User), and The Company will initiate these discussions.
(b) Each OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure will be in relation to a specific Grid
Supply Point, but if there is more than one Grid Supply Point involved, then the OC9
De-Synchronised Island Procedure may cover all relevant Grid Supply Points. In
Scotland, the OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure may also cover parts of the
National Electricity Transmission System connected to the User’s System(s) and
Power Stations and HVDC Systems and DC Converter Station owners directly
connected to the National Electricity Transmission System which are also likely to
form part of the Power Island.
(c) The OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure will:
(i) record which Users and which User Sites are covered by the OC9 De-
Synchronised Island Procedure;
(ii) record which of the methods set out in OC9.5 shall apply, with any conditions as to
applicability being set out as well;
(iii) set out what is required from The Company and each User should a Power
Island arise;
(iv) set out what action should be taken if the OC9 De-Synchronised Island
Procedure does not cover a particular set of circumstances and will reflect that in
the absence of any specified action, the provisions of OC9.5.3 will apply;
(v) in respect of Scottish Transmission Systems, the OC9 De-Synchronised Island
procedure may be produced with and include obligations on the Relevant Scottish
Transmission Licensee(s); and
(vi) in respect of Scottish Transmission Systems, where the OC9 De-Synchronised
Island Procedure includes the establishment of a Power Island, describe the
route for establishment of the Power Island.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024

18 of 23
 (d) Each OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure shall be prepared by The Company to
reflect the above discussions.
(e) Each page of the OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure shall bear a date of issue
and the issue number.
(f) When an OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure is prepared, it shall be sent by The
Company to the Users involved for confirmation of its accuracy.
(g) The OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure shall then be signed on behalf of The
Company and on behalf of each relevant User by way of written confirmation of its
accuracy.
(h) Once agreed under this OC9.5.4, the procedure will become an OC9 De-Synchronised
Island Procedure under the Grid Code and (subject to any change pursuant to this OC9)
will apply between The Company, Relevant Transmission Licensee and the relevant
Users as if it were part of the Grid Code.
(i) Once signed, a copy will be distributed by The Company to each User which is a party
accompanied by a note indicating the issue number and the date of implementation.
(j) The Company and Users must make the OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure
readily available to the relevant operational staff.
(k) If a new User connects to the Total System and needs to be included with an existing
OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure, The Company will initiate a discussion with
that User and the Users which are parties to the relevant OC9 De-Synchronised Island
Procedure. The principles applying to a new OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure
under this OC9.5.4 shall apply to such discussions and to any consequent changes.
(l) If The Company, or any User which is a party to an OC9 De-Synchronised Island
Procedure, becomes aware that a change is needed to that OC9 De-Synchronised
Island Procedure, it shall (in the case of The Company) initiate a discussion between
The Company and the relevant Users to seek to agree the relevant change. The
principles applying to establishing a new OC9 De-Synchronised Island Procedure
under this OC9.5.4 shall apply to such discussions and to any consequent changes. If a
User becomes so aware, it shall contact The Company who will then initiate such
discussions.
(m) If in relation to any discussions, agreement cannot be reached between The Company
and the relevant Users, The Company will operate the System on the basis that it will
discuss which of the methods set out in OC9.5.2.1 or OC9.5.2.2 would be most
appropriate at the time, if practicable. The complexities and uncertainties of recovery
from a Power Island means that The Company will decide, having discussed the
situation with the relevant Users and taking into account the fact that the three methods
may not cover the situation or be appropriate, the approach which is to be followed. The
Company will instruct the relevant Users and the Users will comply with The Company's
instructions as provided in OC9.5.3.
OC9.5.5 Where the National Electricity Transmission System is Out of Synchronism with the
Transmission System of an Externally Interconnected System Operator, The Company
will, pursuant to the Interconnection Agreement with that Externally Interconnected
System Operator, agree with that Externally Interconnected System Operator when its
Transmission System can be Re-Synchronised to the National Electricity Transmission
System.
OC9.5.6 Further requirements regarding Re-synchronisation of De-synchronised Islands following
any Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown
Following any Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown, The Company expects that it will be
necessary to interconnect Power Islands utilising the provisions of OC9.5. The complexities
and uncertainties of recovery from a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown requires the
provisions of OC9.5 to be flexible, however, the strategies which The Company will, where
practicable, be seeking to follow when Re-synchronising Power Islands following any Total
Shutdown or Partial Shutdown, include the following:
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024
19 of 23
 (a) the provision of supplies to appropriate Power Stations to facilitate their synchronisation
as soon as practicable;
(b) energisation of a skeletal National Electricity Transmission System;
(c) the strategic restoration of Demand in co-ordination with relevant Network Operators.
As highlighted in OC9.4.3, during a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown and during the
subsequent recovery, which includes any period during which the procedures in this OC9.5
apply, the Licence Standards may not apply and the Total System may be operated outside
normal voltage and Frequency standards.
OC9.5.7 To manage effectively and co-ordinate the restoration strategies of the Total System (any Re-
Synchronisation of Power Islands) following any Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown,
requires The Company and relevant Users to undertake certain planning activities as set out
below:
(a) The Company and Network Operators shall review on a regular basis the processes by
which each Power Island will be interconnected. This is likely to cover an exchange of
information regarding the typical size, location and timing requirements for Demand to
be reconnected and also include details (ability to change/disable) of the low frequency
trip relay settings of the Demand identified.
(b) Each Generator shall provide to The Company information to assist The Company in
the formulation of the restoration strategies of Power Island expansion. This information
shall be provided in accordance with PC.A.5.7.
OC9.6 JOINT SYSTEM INCIDENT PROCEDURE
OC9.6.1 A "Joint System Incident" is
(a) an Event, wherever occurring (other than on an Embedded Small Power Station or
Embedded Medium Power Station), which, in the opinion of The Company or a User,
has or may have a serious and/or widespread effect.
(b) In the case of an Event on a User(s) System(s) (other than on an Embedded Small
Power Station or Embedded Medium Power Station), the effect must be on the
National Electricity Transmission System, and in the case of an Event on the National
Electricity Transmission System, the effect must be on a User(s) System(s) (other
than on an Embedded Small Power Station or Embedded Medium Power Station).
Where an Event on a User(s) System(s) has or may have no effect on the National
Electricity Transmission System, then such an Event does not fall within OC9 and
accordingly OC9 shall not apply to it.
OC9.6.2 (a) (i) Each User (other than Generators which only have Embedded Small Power
Stations and/or Embedded Medium Power Stations) will provide in writing to
The Company, and
(ii) The Company will provide in writing to each User (other than Generators which
only have Embedded Small Power Stations and/or Embedded Medium Power
Stations), a telephone number or numbers at which, or through which, senior
management representatives nominated for this purpose and who are fully
authorised to make binding decisions on behalf of The Company or the relevant
User, as the case may be, can be contacted day or night when there is a Joint
System Incident.
(b) The lists of telephone numbers will be provided in accordance with the timing
requirements of the Bilateral Agreement and/or Construction Agreement with that
User, prior to the time that a User connects to the National Electricity Transmission
System and must be up-dated (in writing) as often as the information contained in them
changes.
OC9.6.3 Following notification of an Event under OC7, The Company or a User, as the case may be,
will, if it considers necessary, telephone the User or The Company, as the case may be, on
the telephone number referred to in OC9.6.2, to obtain such additional information as it
requires.
Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024
20 of 23
OC9.6.4 Following notification of an Event under OC7, and/or the receipt of any additional information
requested pursuant to OC9.6.3, The Company or a User, as the case may be, will determine
whether or not the Event is a Joint System Incident, and, if so, The Company and/or the
User may set up an Incident Centre in order to avoid overloading the existing,
operational/control arrangements be they The Company’s or User’s.
OC9.6.5 Where The Company has determined that an Event is a Joint System Incident, The
Company shall, as soon as possible, notify all relevant Users that a Joint System Incident
has occurred and, if appropriate, that it has established an Incident Centre and the telephone
number(s) of its Incident Centre if different from those already supplied pursuant to OC9.6.2.
OC9.6.6 If a User establishes an Incident Centre it shall, as soon as possible, notify The Company
that it has been established and the telephone number(s) of the Incident Centre if different
from those already supplied pursuant to OC9.6.2.
OC9.6.7 The Company's Incident Centre and/or the User's Incident Centre will not assume any
responsibility for the operation of the National Electricity Transmission System or User's
System, as the case may be, but will be the focal point in The Company or the User, as the
case may be, for:
(a) the communication and dissemination of information between The Company and the
senior management representatives of User(s); or
(b) between the User and the senior management representatives of The Company, as the
case may be,
relating to the Joint System Incident. The term "Incident Centre" does not imply a specially
built centre for dealing with Joint System Incidents, but is a communications focal point.
During a Joint System Incident, the normal communication channels, for operational/control
communication between The Company and Users will continue to be used.
OC9.6.8 All communications between the senior management representatives of the relevant parties
with regard to The Company's role in the Joint System Incident shall be made via The
Company's Incident Centre if it has been established.
OC9.6.9 All communications between the senior management representatives of The Company and a
User with regard to that User's role in the Joint System Incident shall be made via that
User's Incident Centre if it has been established.
OC9.6.10 The Company will decide when conditions no longer justify the need to use its Incident
Centre and will inform all relevant Users of this decision.
OC9.6.11 Each User which has established an Incident Centre will decide when conditions no longer
justify the need to use that Incident Centre and will inform The Company of this decision.

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024

21 of 23
 APPENDIX 1 – SYSTEM RESTORATION REGIONS

< END OF OPERATING CODE NO. 9 >

Issue 6 Revision 21 OC9 04 March 2024

22 of 23
 OPERATING CODE NO. 10
(OC10)

EVENT INFORMATION SUPPLY

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

OC10.1 INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................................2
OC10.2 OBJECTIVE ..........................................................................................................................................2
OC10.3 SCOPE ..................................................................................................................................................2
OC10.4 PROCEDURE .......................................................................................................................................2
OC10.4.1 Reporting ....................................................................................................................................2
OC10.4.2 Joint Investigations .....................................................................................................................3
APPENDIX 1 - MATTERS TO BE INCLUDED IN A WRITTEN REPORT ...........................................................5

Issue 5 Revision 26 OC10 26 September 2018

i
OC10.1 INTRODUCTION
OC10.1.1. Operating Code No.10 ("OC10") sets out:
OC10.1.1.1 the requirements for the reporting in writing and, where appropriate, more fully, those Significant
Incidents which were initially reported to The Company or a User orally under OC7; and
OC10.1.1.2 the mechanism for the joint investigation of a Significant Incident or a series of Significant
Incidents if The Company and the relevant Users agree.

OC10.2 OBJECTIVE
The objective of OC10 is to facilitate the provision of more detailed information, in writing, of
Significant Incidents which were initially orally reported under OC7 and to enable joint
investigations to take place if The Company and the relevant Users agree.

OC10.3 SCOPE
OC10.3.1 OC10 applies to The Company and to Users, which in OC10 means:-
(a) Generators (other than those which only have Embedded Small Power Stations and/or
Embedded Medium Power Stations);
(b) Network Operators;
(c) Non-Embedded Customers;
(d) DC Converter Station owners; and
(e) HVDC System Owners.
The procedure for Event information supply between The Company and Externally
Interconnected System Operators is set out in the Interconnection Agreement with each
Externally Interconnected System Operator.

OC10.4 PROCEDURE
OC10.4.1 Reporting
OC10.4.1.1 Written Reporting Of Events By Users To The Company
In the case of an Event which was initially reported by a User to The Company orally and
subsequently determined by The Company to be a Significant Incident, and accordingly
notified by The Company to a User pursuant to OC7, the User will give a written report to The
Company, in accordance with OC10. The Company will not pass on this report to other
affected Users but may use the information contained therein in preparing a report under OC10
to another User (or in a report which The Company is required to submit under an
Interconnection Agreement) in relation to a Significant Incident (or its equivalent under an
Interconnection Agreement or STC) on the National Electricity Transmission System which
has been caused by (or exacerbated by) the Significant Incident on the User's System.
OC10.4.1.2 Written Reporting Of Events By The Company To Users
In the case of an Event which was initially reported by The Company to a User orally and
subsequently determined by the User to be a Significant Incident, and accordingly notified by
the User to The Company pursuant to OC7, The Company will give a written report to the
User, in accordance with OC10. The User will not pass on the report to other affected Users
but:

Issue 5 Revision 26 0C10 26 September 2018

2 of 5
 (a) a Network Operator may use the information contained therein in preparing a written report
to a Generator with a Power Generating Module and/or Generating Unit and/or a
Power Park Module connected to its System or to a DC Converter Station owner with a
DC Converter connected to its System or to an HVDC System Owner with a HVDC
System connected to its System or to another operator of a User System connected to its
System in connection with reporting the equivalent of a Significant Incident under the
Distribution Code (or other contract pursuant to which that Power Generating Module
and/or Generating Unit and/or that Power Park Module or that DC Converter or that
HVDC System or User System is connected to its System) (if the Significant Incident on
the National Electricity Transmission System caused or exacerbated it); and
(b) a Generator may use the information contained therein in preparing a written report to
another Generator with a Power Generating Module, Generating Unit or a Power Park
Module connected to its System or to the operator of a User System connected to its
System if it is required (by a contract pursuant to which that Power Generating Module
and/or Generating Unit and/or a Power Park Module or that is connected to its System)
to do so in connection with the equivalent of a Significant Incident on its System (if the
Significant Incident on the National Electricity Transmission System caused or
exacerbated it).
OC10.4.1.3 Form
A report under OC10.4.1 shall be sent to The Company or to a User, as the case may be, and
will contain a confirmation of the oral notification given under OC7 together with more details
relating to the Significant Incident although it (and any response to any question asked) need
not state the cause of the Event save to the extent permitted under OC7.4.6.7 and OC7.4.6.9,
and such further information which has become known relating to the Significant Incident since
the oral notification under OC7. The report should, as a minimum, contain those matters
specified in the Appendix to OC10. The Appendix is not intended to be exhaustive. The
Company or the User, as the case may be, may raise questions to clarify the notification and the
giver of the notification will, in so far as it is able, answer any questions raised.
OC10.4.1.4 Timing
A full written report under OC10.4.1 must, if possible, be received by The Company or the User,
as the case may be, within 2 hours of The Company or the User, as the case may be, receiving
oral notification under OC7. If this is not possible, the User or The Company, as the case may
be, shall, within this period, submit a preliminary report setting out, as a minimum, those matters
specified in the Appendix to OC10. As soon as reasonably practical thereafter, the User or The
Company, as the case may be, shall submit a full written report containing the information set
out in OC10.4.1.3.
OC10.4.2 Joint Investigations
OC10.4.2.1 Where a Significant Incident (or series of Significant Incidents) has been declared and a
report (or reports) under OC10 submitted, The Company or a User which has either given or
received a written report under OC10 may request that a joint investigation of a Significant
Incident should take place.
OC10.4.2.2 Where there has been a series of Significant Incidents (that is to say, where a Significant
Incident has caused or exacerbated another Significant Incident) the party requesting a joint
investigation or the recipient of such a request, may request that the joint investigation should
include an investigation into that other Significant Incident (or Significant Incidents).
OC10.4.2.3 The Company or a User may also request that:
(i) an Externally Interconnected System Operator and/or
(ii) Interconnector User or

Issue 5 Revision 26 0C10 26 September 2018

3 of 5
 (iii) (in the case of a Network Operator) a Generator with a Power Generating Module
and/or a Generating Unit and/or a Power Park Module or a DC Converter Station owner
with DC Converter connected to its System or an HVDC System Owner with a HVDC
System connected to its System or another User System connected to its System or
(iv) (in the case of a Generator) another Generator with a Power Generating Module and/or
a Generating Unit and/or a Power Park Module connected to its System or a User
System connected to its System.
be included in the joint investigation.
OC10.4.2.4 A joint investigation will only take place if The Company and the User or Users involved agree
to it (including agreement on the involvement of other parties referred to in OC10.4.2.3). The
form and rules of, the procedure for, and all matters (including, if thought appropriate, provisions
for costs and for a party to withdraw from the joint investigation once it has begun) relating to the
joint investigation will be agreed at the time of a joint investigation and in the absence of
agreement the joint investigation will not take place.
OC10.4.2.5 Requests relating to a proposed joint investigation will be in writing.
OC10.4.2.6 Any joint investigation under OC10 is separate to any investigation under the Disputes
Resolution Procedure.

Issue 5 Revision 26 0C10 26 September 2018

4 of 5
 APPENDIX 1 - MATTERS TO BE INCLUDED IN A WRITTEN REPORT

MATTERS, IF APPLICABLE TO THE SIGNIFICANT INCIDENT AND TO THE RELEVANT USER (OR THE
COMPANY, AS THE CASE MAY BE) TO BE INCLUDED IN A WRITTEN REPORT GIVEN IN
ACCORDANCE WITH OC10.4.1 AND OC10.4.2

1. Time and date of Significant Incident.

2. Location.

3. Plant and/or Apparatus directly involved (and not merely affected by the Event).

4. Description of Significant Incident.

5. Demand (in MW) and/or generation (in MW) interrupted and duration of interruption.

6. Power Generating Module, Generating Unit, Power Park Module, HVDC System or DC
Converter - Frequency response (MW correction achieved subsequent to the Significant
Incident).

7. Power Generating Module, Generating Unit, Power Park Module, HVDC System or DC
Converter - MVAr performance (change in output subsequent to the Significant Incident).

8. Estimated time and date of return to service.

< END OF OPERATING CODE NO. 10 >

Issue 5 Revision 26 0C10 26 September 2018

5 of 5
 OPERATING CODE NO. 11
(OC11)

NUMBERING AND NOMENCLATURE OF

HIGH VOLTAGE APPARATUS AT CERTAIN SITES

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

OC11.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................................ 2

OC11.2 OBJECTIVE ................................................................................................................................................................. 2

OC11.3 SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2

OC11.4 PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................................................................. 2

OC11.4.2 Transmission HV Apparatus Or OTSDUW HV Apparatus On Users' Sites ....................................... 3

OC11.4.3 User HV Apparatus Or OTSDUW HV Apparatus On Transmission Sites .......................................... 3

OC11.4.4 Changes .......................................................................................................................................................... 3

Issue 6 Revision 0 OC11 05 March 2021

i
OC11.1 INTRODUCTION

OC11.1.1 Operating Code No.11 ("OC11") sets out the requirement that:

(a) Transmission HV Apparatus on Users' Sites; and

(b) User HV Apparatus on Transmission Sites; and

(c) OTSDUW HV Apparatus on both Users’ Sites and the Transmission Sites;

shall have numbering and nomenclature in accordance with the system used from time to
time by The Company.

OC11.1.2 The numbering and nomenclature (if required under the system of numbering and nomenclature
used from time to time by The Company) of each item of HV Apparatus shall be included in the
Operation Diagram prepared for each Transmission Site or User Site, as the case may be.
Further provisions on Operation Diagrams are contained in the Connection Conditions or
European Connection Conditions and in each Bilateral Agreement.

OC11.1.3 In OC11, the term "HV Apparatus" includes any SF6 Gas Zones associated with any HV
Apparatus.

OC11.1.4 In OC11 the term "OTSDUW HV Apparatus" applies to any HV Apparatus installed by a User as
OTSDUW until it is accepted on to the National Electricity Transmission System at which time for
the purposes of OC11 it will be termed Transmission HV Apparatus.

OC11.2 OBJECTIVE

OC11.2.1 The overall objective of OC11 is to ensure, so far as possible, the safe and effective operation of
the Total System and to reduce the risk of human error faults by requiring, in certain
circumstances, that the numbering and nomenclature of Users’ HV Apparatus and OTSDUW HV
Apparatus shall be in accordance with the system used from time to time by The Company.

OC11.3 SCOPE

OC11.3.1 OC11 applies to The Company and to Users, which in OC11 means:-

(a) Generators;

(b) Generators undertaking OTSDUW;

(c) Network Operators;

(d) Non-Embedded Customers;

(e) DC Converter Station owners; and

(f) HVDC System Owners

OC11.4 PROCEDURE

OC11.4.1.1 The term "User Site" means a site owned (or occupied pursuant to a lease, licence or other
agreement) by a User in which there is a Connection Point (and in the case of OTSDUW, where
there is a Connection Point or an Interface Point). For the avoidance of doubt, where a site is
owned by a Relevant Transmission Licensee but occupied by a User (as aforesaid), the site is a
User Site.

OC11.4.1.2 The term "Transmission Site" means a site owned (or occupied pursuant to a lease, licence or
other agreement) by a Relevant Transmission Licensee in which there is a Connection Point (or
in the case of OTSDUW, an Interface Point). For the avoidance of doubt, where a site is owned by
a User but occupied by a Relevant Transmission Licensee (as aforesaid), the site is an
Transmission Site.
Issue 6 Revision 0 OC11 05 March 2021
2 of 4
OC11.4.2 Transmission HV Apparatus Or OTSDUW HV Apparatus On Users' Sites

(a) Transmission HV Apparatus or OTSDUW HV Apparatus on Users' Sites shall have

numbering and nomenclature in accordance with the system used from time to time by The
Company;

(b) when the Relevant Transmission Licensee is to install its HV Apparatus on a User’s Site,
The Company shall (unless it gives rise to a Modification under the CUSC, in which case the
provisions of the CUSC as to the timing apply) notify the relevant User of the numbering and
nomenclature to be adopted for that HV Apparatus at least eight months prior to proposed
installation. When OTSDUW HV Apparatus is to be installed on a User’s Site, The Company
shall notify the relevant User of the numbering and nomenclature to be adopted for that
OTSDUW HV Apparatus at least eight months prior to proposed installation;

(c) in the case of HV Apparatus, the notification will be made in writing to the relevant User and
will consist of both a proposed Operation Diagram incorporating the proposed new
Transmission HV Apparatus to be installed, its proposed numbering and nomenclature,
and the date of its proposed installation. In the case of OTSDUW HV Apparatus, the
notification will be provided as part of the OTSDUW Network Data and Information;

(d) the relevant User will respond in writing to The Company within one month of the receipt of
the notification, confirming receipt and confirming either that any other HV Apparatus of the
relevant User on such User Site does not have numbering and/or nomenclature which could
be confused with that proposed by The Company, or, to the extent that it does, that the
relevant other numbering and/or nomenclature will be changed before installation of the
Transmission HV Apparatus or OTSDUW HV Apparatus;

(e) the relevant User will not install, or permit the installation of, any HV Apparatus, including
OTSDUW HV Apparatus on such User Site which has numbering and/or nomenclature
which could be confused with Transmission HV Apparatus which is either already on that
User Site or which The Company has notified that User will be installed on that User Site.

OC11.4.3 User HV Apparatus Or OTSDUW HV Apparatus On Transmission Sites

(a) User HV Apparatus and any OTSDUW HV Apparatus on Transmission Sites shall have
numbering and nomenclature in accordance with the system used from time to time by The
Company;

(b) when a User is to install its HV Apparatus on an Transmission Site, or it wishes to replace
existing HV Apparatus on a Transmission Site and it wishes to adopt new numbering and
nomenclature for such HV Apparatus, the User shall (unless it gives rise to a Modification
under the CUSC in which case the provisions of the CUSC as to the timing apply) notify The
Company of the details of the HV Apparatus and the proposed numbering and nomenclature
to be adopted for that HV Apparatus, at least eight months prior to proposed installation;

(c) the notification will be made in writing to The Company and shall consist of both a proposed
Operation Diagram incorporating the proposed new HV Apparatus of the User to be
installed, its proposed numbering and nomenclature, and the date of its propose d
installation;

(d) The Company will respond in writing to the User within one month of the receipt of the
notification stating whether or not The Company accepts the User's proposed numbering
and nomenclature and, if they are not acceptable, it shall give details of the numbering and
nomenclature which the User shall adopt for that HV Apparatus;

(e) when a User is to install OTSDUW HV Apparatus on a Transmission Site, The Company
shall notify the relevant User of the numbering and nomenclature to be adopted for that HV
Apparatus at least eight months prior to proposed installation. This notification will be
provided as part of the OTSDUW Network Data and Information.

OC11.4.4 Changes
Issue 6 Revision 0 OC11 05 March 2021
3 of 4
 Where The Company in its reasonable opinion has decided that it needs to change the existing
numbering or nomenclature of Transmission HV Apparatus on a User’s Site or of Users’ HV
Apparatus on a Transmission Site:

(a) the provisions of paragraph OC11.4.2 shall apply to su ch change of numbering or

nomenclature of Transmission HV Apparatus with any necessary amendments to those
provisions to reflect that only a change is being made; and

(b) in the case of a change in the numbering or nomenclature of Users’ HV Apparatus on an

Transmission Site, The Company will (unless it gives rise to a Modification under the CUSC,
in which case the provisions of the CUSC as to the timing apply) notify the User of the
numbering and/or nomenclature the User shall adopt for that HV Apparatus (the notification
to be in a form similar to that envisaged under OC11.4.2) at least eight months prior to the
change being needed and the User will respond in writing to The Company within one month
of the receipt of the notification, confirming receipt.

In either case the notification shall indicate the reason for the proposed change.

OC11.4.5 Users will be provided upon request with details of The Company's then current numbering and
nomenclature system in order to assist them in planning the numbering and nomenclature for
their HV Apparatus or OTSDUW HV Apparatus on Transmission Sites and OTSDUW HV
Apparatus on Users’ Sites.

OC11.4.6 When a User installs HV Apparatus or OTSDUW HV Apparatus which is the subject of OC11, the
User shall be responsible for the provision and erection of clear and unambiguous labelling
showing the numbering and nomenclature. Where a User is required by OC11 to change the
numbering and/or nomenclature of HV Apparatus which is the subject of OC11, the User will be
responsible for the provision and erection of clear and unambiguous labelling by the required
date.

When a Relevant Transmission Licensee installs HV Apparatus which is the subject of OC11,
The Company shall be responsible for the provision and erection of a clear and unambiguous
labelling showing the numbering and nomenclature. Where The Company in coordination with
the Relevant Transmission Licensee changes the numbering and /or nomenclature of HV
Apparatus which is the subject of OC11, The Company in coordination with the Relevant
Transmission Licensee will be responsible for the provision and erection of clear and
unambiguous labelling showing the numbering and nome nclature by the required date.

OC11.4.7 For sites in England and Wales, The Company will not change its system of numbering and
nomenclature in use immediately prior to the Transfer Date (which is embodied in OM5
(Operation Memorandum No.5 - Numbering and Nomenclature of HV Apparatus on the CEGB
Grid System Issue 3 June 1987)), other than to reflect new or newly adopted technology or HV
Apparatus. For the avoidance of doubt, this OC11.4.7 refers to the system of numbering and
nomenclature, and does not preclude changes to the numbering and/or nomenclature of HV
Apparatus which are necessary to reflect newly installed HV Apparatus, or re-configuration of HV
Apparatus installed, and similar changes being made in accordance with that system of
numbering and nomenclature.

< END OF OPERATING CODE NO. 11 >

Issue 6 Revision 0 OC11 05 March 2021

4 of 4
 OPERATING CODE NO. 12
(OC12)

SYSTEM TESTS

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

OC12.1 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................2
OC12.2 OBJECTIVE ..............................................................................................................................2
OC12.3 SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................2
OC12.4 PROCEDURE ...........................................................................................................................3
OC12.4.1 Proposal Notice ..............................................................................................................3
OC12.4.2 Preliminary Notice And Establishment Of Test Panel ....................................................3
OC12.4.3 Test Panel ......................................................................................................................4
OC12.4.4 Proposal Report .............................................................................................................5
OC12.4.5 Test Programme .............................................................................................................6
OC12.4.6 Final Report ....................................................................................................................6
OC12.4.7 Timetable Reduction ......................................................................................................6

Issue 6 Revision 19 OC12 04 December 2023

i
OC12.1 INTRODUCTION
OC12.1.1 Operating Code No.12 ("OC12") relates to System Tests, which are tests which involve
simulating conditions or the controlled application of irregular, unusual or extreme conditions,
on the Total System or any part of the Total System, but which do not include commissioning
or recommissioning tests or any other tests of a minor nature.
OC12.1.2 OC12 deals with the responsibilities and procedures for arranging and carrying out System
Tests which have (or may have) an effect on the Systems of The Company and Users and/or
on the System of any Externally Interconnected System Operator. Where a System Test
proposed by a User will have no effect on the National Electricity Transmission System,
then such a System Test does not fall within OC12 and accordingly OC12 shall not apply to
it. A System Test proposed by The Company which will have an effect on the System of a
User will always fall within OC12.

OC12.2 OBJECTIVE
The overall objectives of OC12 are:
OC12.2.1 to ensure, so far as possible, that System Tests proposed to be carried out either by:
(a) a User (or certain persons in respect of Systems Embedded within a Network
Operator’s System) which may have an effect on the Total System or any part of the
Total System (in addition to that User's System) including the National Electricity
Transmission System; or
(b) by The Company which may have an effect on the Total System or any part of the Total
System (in addition to the National Electricity Transmission System)
do not threaten the safety of either their personnel or the general public, cause minimum threat
to the security of supplies and to the integrity of Plant and/or Apparatus, and cause minimum
detriment to The Company and Users;
OC12.2.2 to set out the procedures to be followed for establishing and reporting System Tests.

OC12.3 SCOPE
OC12 applies to The Company and to Users, which in OC12 means:-
(a) Generators other than in respect of Embedded Medium Power Stations and
Embedded Small Power Stations (and the term Generator in OC12 shall be
constructed accordingly);
(b) Network Operators;
(c) Non-Embedded Customers; and
(d) DC Converter Station owners other than in respect of Embedded DC Converter
Stations.
(e) HVDC System Owners other than in respect of Embedded HVDC Systems.
The procedure for the establishment of System Tests on the National Electricity
Transmission System, with Externally Interconnected System Operators which do not
affect any User, is set out in the Interconnection Agreement with each Externally
Interconnected System Operator. The position of Externally Interconnected System
Operators and Interconnector Users is also referred to in OC12.4.2.
OC12.3.2 Each Network Operator will liaise within The Company as necessary in those instances
where an Embedded Person intends to perform a System Test which may have an effect on
the Total System or any part of the Total System (in addition to that Generator’s or other
User’s System) including the National Electricity Transmission System. The Company is
not required to deal with such persons.
OC12.3.3 Each Network Operator shall be responsible for co-ordinating with the Embedded Person
or such other person and assessing the effect of any System Tests upon:
Issue 6 Revision 19 OC12 04 December 2023
2 of 6
 (a) any Embedded Medium Power Station, Embedded Small Power Stations,
Embedded HVDC System or Embedded DC Converter Station within the Network
Operator’s System; or
(b) any other User connected to or within the Network Operator’s System.
The Company is not required to deal with such persons.

OC12.4 PROCEDURE
OC12.4.1 Proposal Notice
OC12.4.1.1 Where a User (or in the case of a Network Operator, a person in respect of Systems
Embedded within its System, as the case may be) has decided that it would like to undertake
a System Test it shall submit a notice (a "Proposal Notice”) to The Company at least twelve
months in advance of the date it would like to undertake the proposed System Test.
OC12.4.1.2 The Proposal Notice shall be in writing and shall contain details of the nature and purpose of
the proposed System Test and shall indicate the extent and situation of the Plant and/or
Apparatus involved.
OC12.4.1.3 If The Company is of the view that the information set out in the Proposal Notice is
insufficient, it will contact the person who submitted the Proposal Notice (the "Test
Proposer") as soon as reasonably practicable, with a written request for further information.
The Company will not be required to do anything under OC12 until it is satisfied with the
details supplied in the Proposal Notice or pursuant to a request for further information.
OC12.4.1.4 If The Company wishes to undertake a System Test, The Company shall be deemed to
have received a Proposal Notice on that System Test
OC12.4.1.5 Where, under OC12, The Company is obliged to notify or contact the Test Proposer, The
Company will not be so obliged where it is The Company that has proposed the System
Test. Users and the Test Panel, where they are obliged under OC12 to notify, send reports
to or otherwise contact both The Company and the Test Proposer, need only do so once
where The Company is the proposer of the System Test.
OC12.4.2 Preliminary Notice And Establishment Of Test Panel
OC12.4.2.1 Using the information supplied to it under OC12.4.1 The Company will determine, in its
reasonable estimation, which Users, other than the Test Proposer, may be affected by the
proposed System Test. If The Company determines, in its reasonable estimation, that an
Externally Interconnected System Operator and/or Interconnector User (or Externally
Interconnected System Operators and/or Interconnector Users) may be affected by the
proposed System Test, then (provided that the Externally Interconnected System Operator
and/or Interconnector User (or each Externally Interconnected System Operator and/or
Interconnector User where there is more than one affected) undertakes to all the parties to
the Grid Code to be bound by the provisions of the Grid Code for the purposes of the System
Test) for the purposes of the remaining provisions of this OC12, that Externally
Interconnected System Operator and/or Interconnector User (or each of those Externally
Interconnected System Operators and/or Interconnector Users) will be deemed to be a
User and references to the Total System or to the Plant and/or Apparatus of a User will be
deemed to include a reference to the Transmission or distribution System and Plant and/or
Apparatus of that Externally Interconnected System Operator and/or Interconnector
User or (as the case may be) those Externally Interconnected System Operators and/or
Interconnector Users. In the event that the Externally Interconnected System Operator
and/or Interconnector User (or any of the Externally Interconnected System Operators
and/or Interconnector Users where there is more than one affected) refuses to so undertake,
then the System Test will not take place.
OC12.4.2.2 The Company will appoint a person to co-ordinate the System Test (a "Test Co-ordinator")
as soon as reasonably practicable after it has, or is deemed to have, received a Proposal
Notice and in any event prior to the distribution of the Preliminary Notice referred to below.
The Test Co-ordinator shall act as Chairperson of the Test Panel and shall be an ex-officio
member of the Test Panel.
Issue 6 Revision 19 OC12 04 December 2023
3 of 6
 (a) Where The Company decides, in its reasonable opinion, that the National Electricity
Transmission System will or may be significantly affected by the proposed System
Test, then the Test Co-ordinator will be a suitably qualified person nominated by The
Company after consultation with the Test Proposer and the Users identified under
OC12.4.2.1.
(b) Where The Company decides, in its reasonable opinion, that the National Electricity
Transmission System will not be significantly affected by the proposed System Test,
then the Test Co-ordinator will be a suitably qualified person nominated by the Test
Proposer after consultation with The Company.
(c) The Company will, as soon as reasonably practicable after it has received, or is deemed
to have received, a Proposal Notice, contact the Test Proposer where the Test Co-
ordinator is to be a person nominated by the Test Proposer and invite it to nominate a
person as Test Co-ordinator. If the Test Proposer is unable or unwilling to nominate a
person within seven days of being contacted by The Company then the proposed
System Test will not take place.
OC12.4.2.3 The Company will notify all Users identified by it under OC12.4.2.1 of the proposed System
Test by a notice in writing (a "Preliminary Notice”) and will send a Preliminary Notice to the
Test Proposer. The Preliminary Notice will contain:
(a) the details of the nature and purpose of the proposed System Test, the extent and
situation of the Plant and/or Apparatus involved and the identity of the Users identified
by The Company under OC12.4.2.1 and the identity of the Test Proposer;
(b) an invitation to nominate within one month a suitably qualified representative (or
representatives, if the Test Co-ordinator informs The Company that it is appropriate for
a particular User including the Test Proposer) to be a member of the Test Panel for the
proposed System Test;
(c) the name of the The Company representative (or representatives) on the Test Panel for
the proposed System Test; and
(d) the name of the Test Co-ordinator and whether they were nominated by the Test
Proposer or by The Company.
OC12.4.2.4 The Preliminary Notice will be sent within one month of the later of either the receipt by The
Company of the Proposal Notice, or of the receipt of any further information requested by
The Company under OC12.4.1.3. Where The Company is the proposer of the System Test,
the Preliminary Notice will be sent within one month of the proposed System Test being
formulated.
OC12.4.2.5 Replies to the invitation in the Preliminary Notice to nominate a representative to be a
member of the Test Panel must be received by The Company within one month of the date
on which the Preliminary Notice was sent to the User by The Company. Any User which
has not replied within that period will not be entitled to be represented on the Test Panel. If
the Test Proposer does not reply within that period, the proposed System Test will not take
place and The Company will notify all Users identified by it under OC12.4.2.1 accordingly.
OC12.4.2.6 The Company will, as soon as possible after the expiry of that one month period, appoint the
nominated persons to the Test Panel and notify all Users identified by it under OC12.4.2.1
and the Test Proposer, of the composition of the Test Panel.
OC12.4.3 Test Panel
OC12.4.3.1 A meeting of the Test Panel will take place as soon as possible after The Company has
notified all Users identified by it under OC12.4.2.1 and the Test Proposer of the composition
of the Test Panel, and in any event within one month of the appointment of the Test Panel.

OC12.4.3.2 The Test Panel shall consider:

(a) the details of the nature and purpose of the proposed System Test and other matters set
out in the Proposal Notice (together with any further information requested by The
Company under OC12.4.1.3);
Issue 6 Revision 19 OC12 04 December 2023
4 of 6
 (b) the economic, operational and risk implications of the proposed System Test;
(c) the possibility of combining the proposed System Test with any other tests and with Plant
and/or Apparatus outages which arise pursuant to the Operational Planning
requirements of The Company and Users; and
(d) implications of the proposed System Test on the operation of the Balancing
Mechanism, in so far as it is able to do so.
OC12.4.3.3 Users identified by The Company under OC12.4.2.1, the Test Proposer and The Company
(whether or not they are represented on the Test Panel) shall be obliged to supply that Test
Panel, upon written request, with such details as the Test Panel reasonably requires in order
to consider the proposed System Test.
OC12.4.3.4 The Test Panel shall be convened by the Test Co-ordinator as often as they deem necessary
to conduct its business.
OC12.4.4 Proposal Report
OC12.4.4.1 Within two months of first meeting, the Test Panel will submit a report (a "Proposal Report"),
which will contain:
(a) proposals for carrying out the System Test (including the manner in which the System
Test is to be monitored);
(b) an allocation of costs (including un-anticipated costs) between the affected parties (the
general principle being that the Test Proposer will bear the costs); and
(c) such other matters as the Test Panel considers appropriate.
The Proposal Report may include requirements for indemnities (including an indemnity from
the relevant Network Operator to The Company and other Users in relation to its Embedded
Persons) to be given in respect of claims and losses arising from the System Test. All System
Test procedures must comply with all applicable legislation.
OC12.4.4.2 If the Test Panel is unable to agree unanimously on any decision in preparing its Proposal
Report, the proposed System Test will not take place and the Test Panel will be dissolved.
OC12.4.4.3 The Proposal Report will be submitted to The Company, the Test Proposer and to each
User identified by The Company under OC12.4.2.1.
OC12.4.4.4 Each recipient will respond to the Test Co-ordinator with its approval of the Proposal Report
or its reason for non-approval within fourteen days of receipt of the Proposal Report. If any
recipient does not respond, the System Test will not take place and the Test Panel will be
dissolved.
OC12.4.4.5 In the event of non-approval by one or more recipients, the Test Panel will meet as soon as
practicable in order to determine whether the proposed System Test can be modified to meet
the objection or objections.
OC12.4.4.6 If the proposed System Test cannot be so modified, the System Test will not take place and
the Test Panel will be dissolved.
OC12.4.4.7 If the proposed System Test can be so modified, the Test Panel will, as soon as practicable,
and in any event within one month of meeting to discuss the responses to the Proposal
Report, submit a revised Proposal Report and the provisions of OC12.4.4.3 and OC12.4.4.4
will apply to that submission.
OC12.4.4.8 In the event of non-approval of the revised Proposal Report by one or more recipients, the
System Test will not take place and the Test Panel will be dissolved.

Issue 6 Revision 19 OC12 04 December 2023

5 of 6
OC12.4.5 Test Programme
OC12.4.5.1 If the Proposal Report (or, as the case may be, the revised Proposal Report) is approved
by all recipients, the proposed System Test can proceed and at least one month prior to the
date of the proposed System Test, the Test Panel will submit to The Company, the Test
Proposer and each User identified by The Company under OC12.4.2.1, a programme (the
"Test Programme") stating the switching sequence and proposed timings of the switching
sequence, a list of those staff involved in carrying out the System Test (including those
responsible for site safety) and such other matters as the Test Panel deems appropriate.
OC12.4.5.2 The Test Programme will, subject to OC12.4.5.3, bind all recipients to act in accordance with
the provisions of the Test Programme in relation to the proposed System Test.
OC12.4.5.3 Any problems with the proposed System Test which arise or are anticipated after the issue of
the Test Programme and prior to the day of the proposed System Test, must be notified to
the Test Co-ordinator as soon as possible in writing. If the Test Co-ordinator decides that
these anticipated problems merit an amendment to, or postponement of, the System Test,
they shall notify the Test Proposer (if the Test Co-ordinator was not appointed by the Test
Proposer), The Company and each User identified by The Company under OC12.4.2.1
accordingly.
OC12.4.5.4 If on the day of the proposed System Test, operating conditions on the Total System are
such that any party involved in the proposed System Test wishes to delay or cancel the start
or continuance of the System Test, they shall immediately inform the Test Co-ordinator of
this decision and the reasons for it. The Test Co-ordinator shall then postpone or cancel, as
the case may be, the System Test and shall, if possible, agree with the Test Proposer (if the
Test Co-ordinator was not appointed by the Test Proposer), The Company and all Users
identified by The Company under OC12.4.2.1 another suitable time and date. If they cannot
reach such agreement, the Test Co-ordinator shall reconvene the Test Panel as soon as
practicable, which will endeavour to arrange another suitable time and date for the System
Test, in which case the relevant provisions of OC12 shall apply.
OC12.4.6 Final Report
OC12.4.6.1 At the conclusion of the System Test, the Test Proposer shall be responsible for preparing
a written report on the System Test (the "Final Report") for submission to The Company and
other members of the Test Panel. The Final Report shall be submitted within three months
of the conclusion of the System Test unless a different period has been agreed by the Test
Panel prior to the System Test taking place.
OC12.4.6.2 The Final Report shall not be submitted to any person who is not a member of the Test Panel
unless the Test Panel, having considered the confidentiality issues arising, shall have
unanimously approved such submission.
OC12.4.6.3 The Final Report shall include a description of the Plant and/or Apparatus tested and a
description of the System Test carried out, together with the results, conclusions and
recommendations.
OC12.4.6.4 When the Final Report has been prepared and submitted in accordance with OC12.4.6.1, the
Test Panel will be dissolved.
OC12.4.7 Timetable Reduction
OC12.4.7.1 In certain cases a System Test may be needed on giving less than twelve months notice. In
that case, after consultation with the Test Proposer and User(s) identified by The Company
under OC12.4.2.1, The Company shall draw up a timetable for the proposed System Test
and the procedure set out in OC12.4.2 to OC12.4.6 shall be followed in accordance with that
timetable.

< END OF OPERATING CODE NO. 12 >

Issue 6 Revision 19 OC12 04 December 2023

6 of 6
 BALANCING CODE NO. 1
(BC1)

PRE GATE CLOSURE PROCESS

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

BC1.1 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................................3
BC1.2 OBJECTIVE .................................................................................................................................3
BC1.3 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................3
BC1.4 SUBMISSION OF DATA .............................................................................................................3
BC1.4.1 Communication With Users ..............................................................................................3
BC1.4.2 Day Ahead Submissions ...................................................................................................4
BC1.4.3 Data Revisions…………………………………………………………………………………. 8
BC1.4.4 Receipt Of BM Unit Data Prior To Gate Closure ..............................................................8
BC1.4.5 BM Unit Defaulting, Validity And Consistency Checking ..................................................7
BC1.4.6 Special Provisions Relating To Interconnector Users ......................................................7
BC1.5 INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE COMPANY ......................................................................9
BC1.5.1 Demand Estimates ...........................................................................................................9
BC1.5.2 Indicated Margin And Indicated Imbalance ................................................................... 10
BC1.5.3 Provision Of Updated Information ................................................................................. 10
BC1.5.4 Reserve And Inadequate System Margin ...................................................................... 10
BC1.5.5 System And Localised NRAPM (Negative Reserve Active Power Margin) ................... 11
BC1.6 SPECIAL PROVISIONS RELATING TO NETWORK OPERATORS ...................................... 12
BC1.6.1 User System Data From Network Operators ................................................................. 12
BC1.6.2 Notification Times To Network Operators ...................................................................... 14
BC1.7 SPECIAL ACTIONS ................................................................................................................. 14
BC1.8 PROVISION OF REACTIVE POWER CAPABILITY ................................................................ 14
APPENDIX 1 - BM UNIT DATA ............................................................................................................. 16
BC1.A.1.1 Physical Notifications ................................................................................................. 16
BC1.A.1.2 Not Used ................................................................................................................... 16
BC1.A.1.3 Export And Import Limits ............................................................................................ 16
BC1.A.1.4 Bid Offer Data ............................................................................................................. 17
BC1.A.1.5 Dynamic Parameters .................................................................................................. 18
BC1.A.1.6 CCGT Module Matrix .................................................................................................. 18
BC1.A.1.7 Cascade Hydro Scheme Matrix ................................................................................. 20
BC1.A.1.8 Power Park Module Availability Matrix ....................................................................... 20
BC1.A.1.6 CCGT Module Matrix .................................................................................................. 21
Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022
1 of 27
APPENDIX 2 - DATA TO BE MADE AVAILABLE BY THE COMPANY................................................ 24
BC1.A.2.1 Initial Day Ahead Demand Forecast ........................................................................... 24
BC1.A.2.2 Initial Day Ahead Market Information ......................................................................... 24
BC1.A.2.3 Current Day & Day Ahead Updated Market Information ............................................ 24

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

2 of 27
 BC1.1 INTRODUCTION
Balancing Code No1 (BC1) sets out the procedure for:
(a) the submission of BM Unit Data and/or Generating Unit Data (which could be part of a
Power Generating Module) by each BM Participant;
(b) the submission of certain System data by each Network Operator; and
(c) the provision of data by The Company,
in the period leading up to Gate Closure.

BC1.2 OBJECTIVE
The procedure for the submission of BM Unit Data and/or Generating Unit Data is intended
to enable The Company to assess which BM Units and Generating Units (which could be
part of a Power Generating Module) are expected to be operating in order that The Company
can ensure (so far as possible) the integrity of the National Electricity Transmission
System, and the security and quality of supply.
Where reference is made in this BC1 to Generating Units and/or Power Generating
Modules (unless otherwise stated) it only applies:
(a) to each Generating Unit which forms part of the BM Unit of a Cascade Hydro Scheme;
and
(b) at an Embedded Exemptable Large Power Station where the relevant Bilateral
Agreement specifies that compliance with BC1 is required:
(i) to each Generating Unit which could be part of a Synchronous Power Generating
Module, or
(ii) to each Power Park Module where the Power Station comprises Power Park
Modules.

BC1.3 SCOPE
BC1 applies to The Company and to Users, which in this BC1 means:-
(a) BM Participants;
(b) Externally Interconnected System Operators; and
(c) Network Operators.

BC1.4 SUBMISSION OF DATA

In the case of Additional BM Units or Secondary BM Units any data submitted by Users
under this BC1 must represent the value of the data at the relevant GSP Group.
In the case of all other BM Units or Generating Units Embedded in a User System, any
data submitted by Users under this BC1 must represent the value of the data at the relevant
Grid Supply Point.
BC1.4.1 Communication With Users

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

3 of 27
 (a) Submission of BM Unit Data and Generating Unit Data by Users to The Company
specified in BC1.4.2 to BC1.4.4 (with the exception of BC1.4.2(f)) is to be by use of
electronic data communications facilities, as provided for in CC.6.5.8 or ECC.6.5.8 (as
applicable). However, data specified in BC1.4.2(c) and BC1.4.2(e) only, may be
submitted by telephone or fax.
(b) In the event of a failure of the electronic data communication facilities, the data to apply
in relation to a pre-Gate Closure period will be determined in accordance with the Data
Validation, Consistency and Defaulting Rules, based on the most recent data received
and acknowledged by The Company.
(c) Planned Maintenance Outages will normally be arranged to take place during periods
of low data transfer activity.
(d) Upon any Planned Maintenance Outage, or following an unplanned outage described
in BC1.4.1(b) (where it is termed a "failure") in relation to a pre-Gate Closure period:
(i) BM Participants should continue to act in relation to any period of time in
accordance with the Physical Notifications current at the time of the start of the
Planned Maintenance Outage or the computer system failure in relation to each
such period of time subject to the provisions of BC2.5.1. Depending on when in
relation to Gate Closure the planned or unplanned maintenance outage arises such
operation will either be operation in preparation for the relevant output in real time,
or will be operation in real time. No further submissions of BM Unit Data and/or
Generating Unit Data (other than data specified in BC1.4.2(c) and BC1.4.2(e))
should be attempted. Plant failure or similar problems causing significant deviation
from Physical Notification should be notified to The Company by the submission
of a revision to Export and Import Limits in relation to the BM Unit and /or
Generating Unit so affected;
(ii) during the outage, revisions to the data specified in BC1.4.2(c) and BC1.4.2(e) may
be submitted. Communication between Users Control Points and The Company
during the outage will be conducted by telephone; and
(iii) no data will be transferred from The Company to the BMRA until the communication
facilities are re-established.
BC1.4.2 Day Ahead Submissions
Data for any Operational Day may be submitted to The Company up to several days in
advance of the day to which it applies, as provided in the Data Validation, Consistency and
Defaulting Rules. However, Interconnector Users must submit Physical Notifications, and
any associated data as necessary, each day by 11:00 hours in respect of the next following
Operational Day in order that the information used in relation to the capability of the respective
External Interconnection is expressly provided. The Company shall not by the inclusion of
this provision be prevented from utilising the provisions of BC1.4.5 if necessary.
The data may be modified by further data submissions at any time prior to Gate Closure, in
accordance with the other provisions of BC1. The data to be used by The Company for
operational planning will be determined from the most recent data that has been received by
The Company by 11:00 hours on the day before the Operational Day to which the data
applies, or from the data that has been defaulted at 11:00 hours on that day in accordance
with BC1.4.5. Any subsequent revisions received by The Company under the Grid Code will
also be utilised by The Company. In the case of all data items listed below, with the exception
of item (e), Dynamic Parameters (Day Ahead), the latest submitted or defaulted data, as
modified by any subsequent revisions, will be carried forward into operational timescales. The
individual data items are listed below:
(a) Physical Notifications

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

4 of 27
 Physical Notifications, being the data listed in BC1 Appendix 1 under that heading, are
required by The Company at 11:00 hours each day for each Settlement Period of the
next following Operational Day, in respect of;
(1) BM Units:
(i) with a Demand Capacity with a magnitude of 50MW or more in NGET’s
Transmission Area or 10MW or more in SHETL’s Transmission Area or
30MW or more in SPT’s Transmission Area; or
(ii) comprising Generating Units (as defined in the Glossary and Definitions and
not limited by BC1.2) and/or Power Generating Modules and/or CCGT
Modules and/or Power Park Modules in each case at Large Power Stations,
Medium Power Stations and Small Power Stations where such Small Power
Stations are directly connected to the Transmission System; or
(iii) where the BM Participant chooses to submit Bid-Offer Data in accordance
with BC1.4.2(d) for BM Units not falling within (i) or (ii) above,
and
(2) each Generating Unit where applicable under BC1.2.
Physical Notifications may be submitted to The Company by BM Participants, for the
BM Units, and Generating Units, specified in this BC1.4.2(a) at an earlier time, or BM
Participants may rely upon the provisions of BC1.4.5 to create the Physical
Notifications by data defaulting pursuant to the Grid Code utilising the rules referred to
in that paragraph at 11:00 hours in any day.
Physical Notifications (which must comply with the limits on maximum rates of change
listed in BC1 Appendix 1) must, subject to the following operating limits, represent the
User’s best estimate of expected input or output of Active Power, except where a BM
Unit is affected by a Stage 2 or higher Network Gas Supply Emergency load shedding
event. Physical Notifications shall be prepared in accordance with Good Industry
Practice. Physical Notifications for any BM Unit, and any Generating Units, should
normally be consistent with the Dynamic Parameters and Export and Import Limits
and must not reflect any BM Unit or any Generating Units, proposing to operate outside
the limits of its Demand Capacity and (and in the case of BM Units) Generation
Capacity and, in the case of a BM Unit comprising a Generating Unit (as defined in the
Glossary and Definitions and not limited by BC1.2) and/or Power Generating Module
and/or CCGT Module and/or Power Park Module, its Registered Capacity.
These Physical Notifications provide, amongst other things, indicative Synchronising
and De-Synchronising times to The Company in respect of any BM Unit comprising a
Generating Unit (as defined in the Glossary and Definitions and not limited by BC1.2)
and/or Power Generating Module and/or CCGT Module and/or Power Park Module,
and for any Generating Units, and provide an indication of significant Demand changes
in respect of other BM Units.
In the case where a BM Unit is affected by a Network Gas Supply Emergency load
shedding event, once Stage 2 or higher has been declared, then their Physical
Notifications shall represent the User's best estimate of the contracted power position
of the affected BM Unit at the time of the event, taking into account any mitigating actions
to reduce the difference between the contracted power position and the volume to be
shed.
(b) Not Used.
(c) Export and Import Limits

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

5 of 27
 Each BM Participant may, in respect of each of its BM Units and its Generating Units
submit to The Company for any part or for the whole of the next following Operational
Day the data listed in BC1 Appendix 1 under the heading of “Export and Import Limits”
to amend the data already held by The Company in relation to Export and Import
Limits, which would otherwise apply for those Settlement Periods.
Export and Import Limits respectively represent the maximum export to or import from
the National Electricity Transmission System for a BM Unit and a Generating Unit
and are the maximum levels that the BM Participant wishes to make available and must
be prepared in accordance with Good Industry Practice.
(d) Bid-Offer Data
Each BM Participant may, in respect of each of its BM Units, but must not in respect of
its Generating Units submit to The Company for any Settlement Period of the next
following Operational Day the data listed in BC1 Appendix 1 under the heading of “Bid-
Offer Data” to amend the data already held by The Company in relation to Bid-Offer
Data, which would otherwise apply to those Settlement Periods. The submitted Bid-
Offer Data will be utilised by The Company in the preparation and analysis of its
operational plans for the next following Operational Day. Bid-Offer Data may not be
submitted unless an automatic logging device has been installed at the Control Point for
the BM Unit in accordance with CC.6.5.8(b) or ECC.6.5.8(b) (as applicable).

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

6 of 27
 (e) Dynamic Parameters (Day Ahead)
Each BM Participant may, in respect of each of its BM Units, but must not in respect of
its Generating Units submit to The Company for the next following Operational Day
the data listed in BC1 Appendix 1 under the heading of “Dynamic Parameters” to amend
that data already held by The Company.
These Dynamic Parameters shall reasonably reflect the expected true operating
characteristics of the BM Unit and shall be prepared in accordance with Good Industry
Practice.
The Dynamic Parameters applicable to the next following Operational Day will be
utilised by The Company in the preparation and analysis of its operational plans for the
next following Operational Day and may be used to instruct certain Ancillary Services.
For the avoidance of doubt, the Dynamic Parameters to be used in the current
Operational Day will be those submitted in accordance with BC2.5.3.1.
(f) Other Relevant Data
By 11:00 hours each day, each BM Participant, in respect of each of its BM Units and
Generating Units for which Physical Notifications are being submitted, shall, if it has
not already done so, submit to The Company (save in respect of item (vi) and (vii) where
the item shall be submitted only when reasonably required by The Company), in respect
of the next following Operational Day the following:
(i) in the case of a CCGT Module and/or a Synchronous Power Generating Module,
a CCGT Module Matrix and/or a Synchronous Power Generating Module Matrix
as described in BC1 Appendix 1;
(ii) details of any special factors which in the reasonable opinion of the BM Participant
may have a material effect or present an enhanced risk of a material effect on the
likely output (or consumption) of such BM Unit(s). Such factors may include risks,
or potential interruptions, to BM Unit fuel supplies, or developing plant problems,
details of tripping tests, etc. This information will normally only be used to assist in
determining the appropriate level of Operating Margin that is required under
OC2.4.6;
(iii) in the case of Generators, any temporary changes, and their possible duration, to
the Registered Data of such BM Unit;
(iv) in the case of Suppliers, details of Customer Demand Management taken into
account in the preparation of its BM Unit Data;
(v) details of any other factors which The Company may take account of when issuing
Bid-Offer Acceptances for a BM Unit (e.g., Synchronising or De-Synchronising
Intervals);
(vi) in the case of a Cascade Hydro Scheme, the Cascade Hydro Scheme Matrix as
described in BC1 Appendix 1;
(vii) in the case of a Power Park Module, a Power Park Module Availability Matrix as
described in BC1 Appendix 1;
(viii) in the case of an Additional BM Unit or a Secondary BM Unit an Aggregator
Impact Matrix as described in BC1 Appendix 1.

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

7 of 27
BC1.4.3 Data Revisions
The BM Unit Data, and Generating Unit Data, derived at 1100 hours each day under BC1.4.2
above may need to be revised by the BM Participant for a number of reasons, including for
example, changes to expected output or input arising from revised contractual positions, plant
breakdowns, changes to expected Synchronising or De-Synchronising times, etc, occurring
before Gate Closure. BM Participants should use reasonable endeavours to ensure that the
data held by The Company in relation to its BM Units and Generating Units, is accurate at
all times. Revisions to BM Unit Data, and Generating Unit Data for any period of time up to
Gate Closure should be submitted to The Company as soon as reasonably practicable after
a change becomes apparent to the BM Participant. The Company will use reasonable
endeavours to utilise the most recent data received from Users, subject to the application of
the provisions of BC1.4.5, for its preparation and analysis of operational plans.
BC1.4.4 Receipt Of BM Unit Data Prior To Gate Closure
BM Participants submitting Bid-Offer Data, in respect of any BM Unit for use in the
Balancing Mechanism for any particular Settlement Period in accordance with the BSC,
must ensure that Physical Notifications and Bid-Offer Data for such BM Units are received
in their entirety and logged into The Company’s computer systems by the time of Gate
Closure for that Settlement Period. In all cases the data received will be subject to the
application under the Grid Code of the provisions of BC1.4.5.
For the avoidance of doubt, no changes to the Physical Notification or Bid-Offer Data for
any Settlement Period may be submitted to The Company after Gate Closure for that
Settlement Period.
BC1.4.5 BM Unit Data Defaulting, Validity And Consistency Checking
In the event that no submission of any or all of the BM Unit Data and Generating Unit Data
in accordance with BC1.4.2 in respect of an Operational Day, is received by The Company
by 11:00 hours on the day before that Operational Day, The Company will apply the Data
Validation, Consistency and Defaulting Rules, with the default rules applicable to Physical
Notifications and Export and Import Limits data selected as follows:
(a) for an Interconnector Users BM Unit, the defaulting rules will set some or all of the data
for that Operational Day to zero, unless the relevant Interconnector arrangements, as
agreed with The Company, state otherwise (in which case (b) applies); and
(b) for all other BM Units or Generating Units, the defaulting rules will set some or all of the
data for that Operational Day to the values prevailing in the current Operational Day.
A subsequent submission by a User of a data item which has been so defaulted under the
Grid Code will operate as an amendment to that defaulted data and thereby replace it. Any
such subsequent submission is itself subject to the application under the Grid Code of the
Data Validation, Consistency and Defaulting Rules.

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

8 of 27
 BM Unit Data and Generating Unit Data submitted in accordance with the provisions of
BC1.4.2 to BC1.4.4 will be checked under the Grid Code for validity and consistency in
accordance with the Data Validation, Consistency and Defaulting Rules. If any BM Unit
Data and Generating Unit Data so submitted fails the data validity and consistency checking,
this will result in the rejection of all data submitted for that BM Unit or Generating Unit
included in the electronic data file containing that data item and that BM Unit’s or Generating
Unit’s data items will be defaulted under the Grid Code in accordance with the Data
Validation, Consistency and Defaulting Rules. Data for other BM Units and Generating
Units included in the same electronic data file will not be affected by such rejection and will
continue to be validated and checked for consistency prior to acceptance. In the event that
rejection of any BM Unit Data and Generating Unit Data occurs, details will be made
available to the relevant BM Participant via the electronic data communication facilities. In
the event of a difference between the BM Unit Data for the Cascade Hydro Scheme and
sum of the data submitted for the Generating Units forming part of such Cascade Hydro
Scheme, the BM Unit Data shall take precedence.
BC1.4.6 Special Provisions Relating To Interconnector Users
(a) The total of the relevant Physical Notifications submitted by Interconnector Users in
respect of any period of time should not exceed the capability (in MW) of the respective
External Interconnection for that period of time. In the event that it does, then The
Company shall advise the Externally Interconnected System Operator accordingly. In
the period between such advice and Gate Closure, one or more of the relevant
Interconnector Users would be expected to submit revised Physical Notifications to
The Company to eliminate any such over-provision.
(b) In any case where, as a result of a reduction in the capability (in MW) of the External
Interconnection in any period during an Operational Day which is agreed between The
Company and an Externally Interconnected System Operator after 0900 hours on the
day before the beginning of such Operational Day, the total of the Physical
Notifications in the relevant period using that External Interconnection, as stated in
the BM Unit Data exceeds the reduced capability (in MW) of the respective External
Interconnection in that period then The Company shall notify the Externally
Interconnected System Operator accordingly.

BC1.5 INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE COMPANY

The Company shall provide data to the Balancing Mechanism Reporting Agent or BSCCo
each day in accordance with the requirements of the BSC in order that the data may be made
available to Users via the Balancing Mechanism Reporting Service (or by such other
means) in each case as provided in the BSC. Where The Company provides such information
associated with the secure operation of the System to the Balancing Mechanism Reporting
Agent, the provision of that information is additionally provided for in the following sections of
this BC1.5. The Company shall be taken to have fulfilled its obligations to provide data under
BC1.5.1, BC1.5.2, and BC1.5.3 by so providing such data to the Balancing Mechanism
Reporting Agent.
BC1.5.1 Demand Estimates
Normally by 0900 hours each day, The Company will make available to Users a forecast of
National Demand and the Demand for a number of pre-determined constraint groups (which
may be updated from time to time, as agreed between The Company and BSCCo) for each
Settlement Period of the next following Operational Day. Normally by 1200 hours each day,
The Company will make available to Users a forecast of National Electricity Transmission
System Demand for each Settlement Period of the next Operational Day. Further details
are provided in Appendix 2.

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

9 of 27
BC1.5.2 Indicated Margin And Indicated Imbalance
Normally by 1200 hours each day, The Company will make available to Users an Indicated
Margin and an Indicated Imbalance for each Settlement Period of the next following
Operational Day. The Company will use reasonable endeavours to utilise the most recent
data received from Users in preparing for this release of data. Further details are provided in
Appendix 2.
BC1.5.3 Provision Of Updated Information
The Company will provide updated information on Demand and other information at various
times throughout each day, as detailed in Appendix 2. The Company will use reasonable
endeavours to utilise the most recent data received from Users in preparing for this release of
data.
BC1.5.4 Reserve And System Margin
Contingency Reserve
(a) The amount of Contingency Reserve required at the day ahead stage and in subsequent
timescales will be decided by The Company on the basis of historical trends in the
reduction in availability of Large Power Stations and increases in forecast Demand up
to real time operation. Where Contingency Reserve is to be allocated to thermal
Gensets, The Company will instruct through a combination of Ancillary Services
instructions and Bid-Offer Acceptances, the time at which such Gensets are required
to synchronise, such instructions to be consistent with Dynamic Parameters and other
contractual arrangements.
Operating Reserve
(b) The amount of Operating Reserve required at any time will be determined by The
Company having regard to the Demand levels, Large Power Station availability
shortfalls and the greater of the largest secured loss of generation (ie, the loss of
generation against which, as a requirement of the Licence Standards, the National
Electricity Transmission System must be secured) or loss of import from or sudden
export to External Interconnections. The Company will allocate Operating Reserve to
the appropriate BM Units and Generating Units so as to fulfil its requirements according
to the Ancillary Services available to it and as provided in the BC.
System Margin
(c) In the period following 1200 hours each day and in relation to the following Operational
Day, The Company will monitor the total of the Maximum Export Limit component of the
Export and Import Limits received against forecast National Electricity Transmission
System Demand and the Operating Margin and will take account of Dynamic
Parameters to see whether the anticipated level of the System Margin for any period is
insufficient.
(d) Where the level of the System Margin for any period is, in The Company's reasonable
opinion, anticipated to be insufficient, The Company will send (by such data transmission
facilities as have been agreed) a National Electricity Transmission System Warning -
Electricity Margin Notice in accordance with OC7.4.8 to each Generator, Supplier,
Externally Interconnected System Operator, Network Operator and Non-Embedded
Customer.
(e) Where, in The Company’s judgement the System Margin at any time during the current
Operational Day is such that there is a high risk of Demand reduction being instructed,
a National Electricity Transmission System Warning - High Risk of Demand
Reduction will be issued, in accordance with OC7.4.8.

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

10 of 27
 (f) The monitoring will be conducted on a regular basis and a revised National Electricity
Transmission System Warning - Electricity Margin Notice or High Risk of Demand
Reduction may be sent out from time to time, including within the post Gate Closure
phase. This will reflect any changes in Physical Notifications and Export and Import
Limits which have been notified to The Company, and will reflect any Demand Control
which has also been so notified. This will also reflect generally any changes in the forecast
Demand and the relevant Operating Margin.
(g) To reflect changing conditions, a National Electricity Transmission System Warning -
Electricity Margin Notice may be superseded by a National Electricity Transmission
System Warning - High Risk of Demand Reduction and vice-versa.
(h) If the continuing monitoring identifies that the System Margin is anticipated, in The
Company's reasonable opinion, to be sufficient for the period for which previously a
National Electricity Transmission System Warning had been issued, The Company
will send (by such data transmission facilities as have been agreed) a Cancellation of
National Electricity Transmission System Warning to each User who had received a
National Electricity Transmission System Warning - Electricity Margin Notice or
High Risk of Demand Reduction for that period. The issue of a Cancellation of
National Electricity Transmission System Warning is not an assurance by The
Company that in the event, the System Margin will be adequate, but reflects The
Company's reasonable opinion that the insufficiency is no longer anticipated.
(i) If continued monitoring indicates the System Margin becoming reduced The Company
may issue further National Electricity Transmission System Warnings - Electricity
Margin Notice or High Risk of Demand Reduction.
(j) The Company may issue a National Electricity Transmission System Warning -
Electricity Margin Notice or High Risk of Demand Reduction for any period, not
necessarily relating to the following Operational Day, where it has reason to believe there
will be a reduced System Margin over a period (for example in periods of protracted
Plant shortage, the provisions of OC7.4.8.6 apply).
BC1.5.5 System And Localised NRAPM (Negative Reserve Active Power Margin)
(a) (i) System Negative Reserve Active Power Margin
Synchronised Gensets must at all times be capable of reducing output such that
the total reduction in output of all Synchronised Gensets is sufficient to offset the
loss of the largest secured demand on the System and must be capable of
sustaining this response;
(ii) Localised Negative Reserve Active Power Margin
Synchronised Gensets must at all times be capable of reducing output to allow
transfers to and from the System Constraint Group (as the case may be) to be
contained within such reasonable limit as The Company may determine and must
be capable of sustaining this response.
(b) The Company will monitor the total of Physical Notifications of exporting BM Units and
Generating Units (where appropriate) received against forecast Demand and, where
relevant, the appropriate limit on transfers to and from a System Constraint Group and
will take account of Dynamic Parameters and Export and Import Limits received to
see whether the level of System NRAPM or Localised NRAPM for any period is likely to
be insufficient. In addition, The Company may increase the required margin of System
NRAPM or Localised NRAPM to allow for variations in forecast Demand. In the case of
System NRAPM, this may be by an amount (in The Company's reasonable discretion)
not exceeding five per cent of forecast Demand for the period in question. In the case of
Localised NRAPM, this may be by an amount (in The Company's reasonable discretion)
not exceeding ten per cent of the forecast Demand for the period in question;

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

11 of 27
 (c) Where the level of System NRAPM or Localised NRAPM for any period is, in The
Company's reasonable opinion, likely to be insufficient, then this will be treated as
a National Electricity Transmission System Warning as defined in OC7.4.8. The
Company may contact all Generators in the case of low System NRAPM and may
contact Generators in relation to relevant Gensets in the case of low Localised NRAPM.
The Company will raise with each Generator the problems it is anticipating due to low
System NRAPM or Localised NRAPM and will discuss whether, in advance of Gate
Closure:-
(i) any change is possible in the Physical Notification of a BM Unit which has been
notified to The Company; or

(ii) any change is possible to the Physical Notification of a BM Unit within an Existing
AGR Plant within the Existing AGR Plant Flexibility Limit;
in relation to periods of low System NRAPM or (as the case may be) low Localised
NRAPM. The Company will also notify each Externally Interconnected System
Operator of the anticipated low System NRAPM or Localised NRAPM and request
assistance in obtaining changes to Physical Notifications from BM Units in that
External System.
(d) Following Gate Closure, the procedure of BC2.9.4 will apply. In this case The
Company will also endeavor, where time allows, to issue a National Electricity
Transmission System Warning – High Risk of Embedded Generation
Reduction and/or a National Electricity Transmission
System Warning Embedded Generation Control Imminent as applicable.

BC1.6 SPECIAL PROVISIONS RELATING TO NETWORK OPERATORS

BC1.6.1 User System Data From Network Operators
(a) By 1000 hours each day each Network Operator will submit to The Company in writing,
confirmation or notification of the following in respect of the next Operational Day:
(i) constraints on its User System which The Company may need to take into account
in operating the National Electricity Transmission System. In this BC1.6.1 the
term "constraints" shall include restrictions on the operation of Embedded Power
Generating Modules, and/or Embedded CCGT Units, and/or Embedded Power
Park Modules as a result of the User System to which the Power Generating
Module and/or CCGT Unit and/or Power Park Module is connected at the User
System Entry Point being operated or switched in a particular way, for example,
splitting the relevant busbar. It is a matter for the Network Operator and the
Generator to arrange the operation or switching, and to deal with any resulting
consequences. The Generator, after consultation with the Network Operator, is
responsible for ensuring that no BM Unit Data submitted to The Company can result
in the violation of any such constraint on the User System.
(ii) the requirements of voltage control and MVAr reserves which The Company may
need to take into account for System security reasons.
(iii) where applicable, updated best estimates of Maximum Export Capacity and
Maximum Import Capacity and Interface Point Target Voltage/Power Factor for
any Interface Point connected to its User System including any requirement for
post-fault actions to be implemented on the relevant Offshore Transmission
System by The Company.
(iv) constraints on its User System which The Company may need to take into account
when issuing Bid-Offer Acceptances to Additional BM units or Secondary BM
units.

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

12 of 27
 (b) The form of the submission will be:
(i) that of a BM Unit output or consumption (for MW and for MVAr, in each case a fixed
value or an operating range, on the User System at the User System Entry Point,
namely in the case of a BM Unit comprising a Generating Unit (as defined in the
Glossary and Definitions and not limited by BC1.2) on the higher voltage side of the
generator step-up transformer, and/or in the case of a Power Generating Module,
at the point of connection and/or in the case of a Power Park Module, at the point
of connection) required for particular BM Units (identified in the submission)
connected to that User System for each Settlement Period of the next Operational
Day;

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

13 of 27
 (ii) adjusted in each case for MW by the conversion factors applicable for those BM
Units to provide output or consumption at the relevant Grid Supply Points.
(c) At any time and from time to time, between 1000 hours each day and the expiry of the
next Operational Day, each Network Operator must submit to The Company in writing
any revisions to the information submitted under this BC1.6.1.
BC1.6.2 Notification Of Times To Network Operators
The Company will make available indicative Synchronising and De-Synchronising times to
each Network Operator, but only relating to BM Units comprising a Generating Unit (as
defined in the Glossary and Definitions and not limited by BC1.2) or a Power Park Module or
a CCGT Module and/or a Power Generating Module, Embedded within that Network
Operator’s User System and those Gensets directly connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System which The Company has identified under OC2 as being those which
may, in the reasonable opinion of The Company, affect the integrity of that User System. If
in preparing for the operation of the Balancing Mechanism, The Company becomes aware
that a BM Unit directly connected to the National Electricity Transmission System may, in
its reasonable opinion, affect the integrity of that other User System which, in the case of a
BM Unit comprising a Generating Unit (as defined in the Glossary and Definitions and not
limited by BC1.2) and/or a Power Generating Module and/or a CCGT Module and/or a
Power Park Module, it had not so identified under OC2, then The Company may make
available details of its indicative Synchronising and De-Synchronising times to that other
User and shall inform the relevant BM Participant that it has done so, identifying the BM Unit
concerned.
BC1.7 SPECIAL ACTIONS
BC1.7.1 The Company may need to identify special actions (either pre- or post-fault) that need to be
taken by specific Users in order to maintain the integrity of the National Electricity
Transmission System in accordance with the Licence Standards and The Company
Operational Strategy.
(a) For a Generator special actions will generally involve a Load change or a change of
required Notice to Deviate from Zero NDZ, in a specific timescale on individual or groups
of Gensets.
(b) For Network Operators these special actions will generally involve Load transfers
between Grid Supply Points or arrangements for Demand reduction by manual or
automatic means.
(c) For Externally Interconnected System Operators (in their co-ordinating role for
Interconnector Users using their External System) these special actions will generally
involve an increase or decrease of net power flows across an External Interconnection
by either manual or automatic means.
BC1.7.2 These special actions will be discussed and agreed with the relevant User as appropriate. The
actual implementation of these special actions may be part of an “emergency circumstances”
procedure described under BC2. If not agreed, generation or Demand may be restricted or
may be at risk.
BC1.7.3 The Company will normally issue the list of special actions to the relevant Users by 1700
hours on the day prior to the day to which they are to apply.
BC1.8 PROVISION OF REACTIVE POWER CAPABILITY
BC1.8.1 Under certain operating conditions The Company may identify through its Operational
Planning that an area of the National Electricity Transmission System may have
insufficient Reactive Power capability available to ensure that the operating voltage can be
maintained in accordance with The Company’s Licence Standards.
In respect of Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit(s) belonging to GB Code Users

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

14 of 27
 (i) that have a Connection Entry Capacity in excess of Rated MW (or the Connection
Entry Capacity of the CCGT Module exceeds the sum of Rated MW of the Generating
Units comprising the CCGT Module); and
(ii) that are not capable of continuous operation at any point between the limits 0.85 Power
Factor lagging and 0.95 Power Factor leading at the Onshore Synchronous
Generating Unit terminals at Active Power output levels higher than Rated MW; and
(iii) that have either a Completion Date on or after 1st May 2009, or where its Connection
Entry Capacity has been increased above Rated MW (or the Connection Entry
Capacity of the CCGT Module has increased above the sum of Rated MW of the
Generating Units comprising the CCGT Module) such increase takes effect on or after
1st May 2009 but only in respect of GB Generators that are classified as GB Code Users
; and
(iv) that are in an area of potentially insufficient Reactive Power capability as described in
this clause BC1.8.1,
The Company may instruct the Onshore Synchronous Generating Unit(s) to limit its
submitted Physical Notifications to no higher than Rated MW (or the Active Power output
at which it can operate continuously between the limits 0.85 Power Factor lagging to 0.95
Power Factor leading at its terminals if this is higher) for a period specified by The Company.
Such an instruction must be made at least 1 hour prior to Gate Closure, although The
Company will endeavour to give as much notice as possible. The instruction may require that
a Physical Notification is re-submitted. The period covered by the instruction will not exceed
the expected period for which the potential deficiency has been identified. Compliance with
the instruction will not incur costs to The Company in the Balancing Mechanism. The
detailed provisions relating to such instructions will normally be set out in the relevant Bilateral
Agreement.
BC1.8.2 BC1.8.1 shall not apply to EU Code Users where the obligations under CC.6.3.2(a) apply only
to GB Generators. For the avoidance of doubt, EU Code User’s are only required to satisfy
the requirements of the ECC’s and not the CC’s.

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

15 of 27
 APPENDIX 1 - BM UNIT DATA
BC1.A.1 More detail about valid values required under the Grid Code for BM Unit Data and
Generating Unit Data may be identified by referring to the Data Validation, Consistency
and Defaulting Rules. In the case of Embedded BM Units and Generating Units the BM
Unit Data and the Generating Unit Data shall represent the value at the relevant Grid Supply
Point. Where data is submitted on a Generating Unit basis, the provisions of this Appendix
1 shall in respect of such data submission apply as if references to BM Unit were replaced
with Generating Unit. Where The Company and the relevant User agree, submission on a
Generating Unit basis (in whole or in part) may be otherwise than in accordance with the
provisions of the Appendix 1.
BC1.A.1.1 Physical Notifications
For each BM Unit, the Physical Notification is a series of MW figures and associated times,
making up a profile of intended input or output of Active Power at the Grid Entry Point or
Grid Supply Point, as appropriate, except where a BM Unit is affected by a Stage 2 or higher
Network Gas Supply Emergency load shedding event. For each Settlement Period, the first
“from time” should be at the start of the Settlement Period and the last “to time” should be at
the end of the Settlement Period.
The input or output reflected in the Physical Notification for a single BM Unit (or the
aggregate Physical Notifications for a collection of BM Units at a Grid Entry Point or Grid
Supply Point or to be transferred across an External Interconnection, owned or controlled
by a single BM Participant) must comply with the following limits regarding maximum rates of
change, either for a single change or a series of related changes :

• for a change of up to 300MW no limit;

• for a change greater than 300MW and less than 1000MW 50MW per minute;

• for a change of 1000MW or more 40MW per minute,

unless prior arrangements have been discussed and agreed with The Company. This
limitation is not intended to limit the Run-Up or Run-Down Rates provided as Dynamic
Parameters.

In the case where a BM Unit is affected by a Network Gas Supply Emergency load shedding
event, once Stage 2 or higher has been declared, then their Physical Notifications shall
represent the User's best estimate of the contracted power position of the affected BM Unit
at the time of the event, taking into account any mitigating actions to reduce the difference
between the contracted power position and the volume to be shed.
An example of the format of Physical Notification is shown below. The convention to be
applied is that where it is proposed that the BM Unit will be importing, the Physical
Notification is negative.

From To
Data Name BMU name Time From
level Time To Level
(MW) MW)
PN , TAGENT , BMUNIT01 , 2001-11-03 06:30 , 77 , 2001-11-03 07:00 , 100
PN , TAGENT , BMUNIT01 , 2001-11-03 07:00 , 100 , 2001-11-03 07:12 , 150
PN , TAGENT , BMUNIT01 , 2001-11-03 07:12 , 150 , 2001-11-03 07:30 , 175

A linear interpolation will be assumed between the Physical Notification From and To
Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022
16 of 27
 levels specified for the BM Unit by the BM Participant.

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

17 of 27
BC1.A.1.2 Not Used.

BC1.A.1.3 Export And Import Limits

BC1.A.1.3.1 Maximum Export Limit (MEL)
A series of MW figures and associated times, making up a profile of the maximum level at
which the BM Unit may be exporting (in MW) to the National Electricity Transmission
System at the Grid Entry Point or Grid Supply Point or GSP Group, as appropriate.
For a Power Park Module, the Maximum Export Limit should reflect the maximum possible
Active Power output from each Power Park Module consistent with the data submitted within
the Power Park Module Availability Matrix as defined under BC.1.A.1.8. For the avoidance
of doubt, in the case of a Power Park Module this would equate to the Registered Capacity
less the unavailable Power Park Units within the Power Park Module and not include
weather corrected MW output from each Power Park Unit.

BC1.A.1.3.2 Maximum Import Limit (MIL)

A series of MW figures and associated times, making up a profile of the maximum level at
which the BM Unit may be importing (in MW) from the National Electricity Transmission
System at the Grid Entry Point or Grid Supply Point or GSP Group, as appropriate.
An example format of data is shown below. MEL must be positive or zero, and MIL must be
negative or zero.

From To
Data Name BMU name Time Fromlevel Time To level
(MW) (MW)
MEL , TAGENT , BMUNIT01 , 2001-11-03 05:00 , 410 , 2001-11-03 09:35 , 410
MEL , TAGENT , BMUNIT01 , 2001-11-03 09:35 , 450 , 2001-11-03 12:45 , 450

MIL , TAGENT , BMUNIT04 , 2001-11-03 06:30 , -200 , 2001-11-03 07:00 , -220

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

18 of 27
BC1.A.1.4 Bid-Offer Data

For each BM Unit for each Up to 10 Bid-Offer Pairs as defined in the BSC.
Settlement Period:

An example of the format of data is shown below.

Pair From To Offer Bid

Data Name BMU name Time from Time to
ID Level Level (£/ (£/
(MW) (MW) MWh) MWh)
BOD , TAGENT , BMUNIT01 , 2000-10-28 12:00 , 2000-10-28 13:30 , 4 , 30 , 30 , 40 , 35
BOD , TAGENT , BMUNIT01 , 2000-10-28 12:00 , 2000-10-28 13:30 , 3 , 20 , 20 , 35 , 30
BOD , TAGENT , BMUNIT01 , 2000-10-28 12:00 , 2000-10-28 13:30 , 2 , 40 , 40 , 32 , 27
BOD , TAGENT , BMUNIT01 , 2000-10-28 12:00 , 2000-10-28 13:30 , 1 , 50 , 50 , 30 , 25
BOD , TAGENT , BMUNIT01 , 2000-10-28 12:00 , 2000-10-28 13:30 , -1 , -40 , -40 , 25 , 20
BOD , TAGENT , BMUNIT01 , 2000-10-28 12:00 , 2000-10-28 13:30 , -2 , -30 , -30 , 23 , 17

This example of Bid-Offer data is illustrated graphically below:

Bid-Offer Pair No 4 30MW Offer £40 Bid £35

Bid-Offer Pair No 3 20MW Offer £35 Bid £30

Bid-Offer Pair No 2 40MW Offer £32 Bid £27

Bid-Offer Pair No 1 50MW Offer £30 Bid £25

Final Physical
Notification
Bid-Offer Pair No -1 -40MW Offer £25 Bid £20

Bid-Offer Pair No -2 -30MW Offer £23 Bid £17

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

19 of 27
BC1.A.1.5 Dynamic Parameters
The Dynamic Parameters comprise:
• Up to three Run-Up Rate(s) and up to three Run-Down Rate(s), expressed in MW/minute
and associated Run-Up Elbow(s) and Run-Down Elbow(s), expressed in MW for output
and the same for input. It should be noted that Run-Up Rate(s) are applicable to a MW
figure becoming more positive;
• Notice to Deviate from Zero (NDZ) output or input, being the notification time required for
a BM Unit to start importing or exporting energy, from a zero Physical Notification level
as a result of a Bid-Offer Acceptance, expressed in minutes;
• Notice to Deliver Offers (NTO) and Notice to Deliver Bids (NTB), expressed in minutes,
indicating the notification time required for a BM Unit to start delivering Offers and Bids
respectively from the time that the Bid-Offer Acceptance is issued. In the case of a BM
Unit comprising a Genset, NTO and NTB will be set to a maximum period of two minutes;
• Minimum Zero Time (MZT), being either the minimum time that a BM Unit which has
been exporting must operate at zero or be importing, before returning to exporting or the
minimum time that a BM Unit which has been importing must operate at zero or be
exporting before returning to importing, as a result of a Bid-Offer Acceptance, expressed
in minutes;
• Minimum Non-Zero Time (MNZT), expressed in minutes, being the minimum time that a
BM Unit can operate at a non-zero level as a result of a Bid-Offer Acceptance;
• Stable Export Limit (SEL) expressed in MW at the Grid Entry Point or Grid Supply Point
or GSP Group, as appropriate, being the minimum value at which the BM Unit can, under
stable conditions, export to the National Electricity Transmission System;
• Stable Import Limit (SIL) expressed in MW at the Grid Entry Point or Grid Supply Point
or GSP Group, as appropriate, being the minimum value at which the BM Unit can, under
stable conditions, import from the National Electricity Transmission System;
• Maximum Delivery Volume (MDV), expressed in MWh, being the maximum number of
MWh of Offer (or Bid if MDV is negative) that a particular BM Unit may deliver within the
associated Maximum Delivery Period (MDP), expressed in minutes, being the maximum
period over which the MDV applies.
• Last Time to Cancel Synchronisation, expressed in minutes with an upper limit of 60
minutes, being the notification time required to cancel a BM Unit’s transition from
operation at zero. This parameter is only applicable where the transition arises either from
a Physical Notification or, in the case where the Physical Notification is zero, a Bid-
Offer Acceptance. There can be up to three Last Time to Cancel Synchronisation(s)
each applicable for a range of values of Notice to Deviate from Zero.

BC1.A.1.6 CCGT Module Matrix

BC1.A.1.6.1 CCGT Module Matrix showing the combination of CCGT Units running in relation to any given
MW output, in the form of the diagram illustrated below. The CCGT Module Matrix is designed
to achieve certainty in knowing the number of CCGT Units synchronised to meet the Physical
Notification and to achieve a Bid-Offer Acceptance.
BC1.A.1.6.2 In the case of a Range CCGT Module, and if the Generator so wishes, a request for the
single Grid Entry Point at which power is provided from the Range CCGT Module to be
changed in accordance with the provisions of BC1.A.1.6.4 below:

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

20 of 27
 CCGT Module Matrix example form

CCGT MODULE CCGT GENERATING UNITS* AVAILABLE

ACTIVE POWER
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 1st 2nd 3rd
GT GT GT GT GT GT ST ST ST

ACTIVE POWER OUTPUT

MW
150 150 150 100

0MW to 150MW /

151MW to 250MW / /

251MW to 300MW / /

301MW to 400MW / / /

401MW to 450MW / / /

451MW to 550MW / / / /

* as defined in the Glossary and Definitions and not limited by BC1.2

BC1.A.1.6.3 In the absence of the correct submission of a CCGT Module Matrix the last submitted (or
deemed submitted) CCGT Module Matrix shall be taken to be the CCGT Module Matrix
submitted hereunder.
BC1.A.1.6.4 The data may also include in the case of a Range CCGT Module, a request for the Grid Entry
Point at which the power is provided from the Range CCGT Module to be changed with effect
from the beginning of the following Operational Day to another specified single Grid Entry
Point (there can be only one) to that being used for the current Operational Day. The
Company will respond to this request by 1600 hours on the day of receipt of the request. If
The Company agrees to the request (such agreement not to be unreasonably withheld), the
Generator will operate the Range CCGT Module in accordance with the request. If The
Company does not agree, the Generator will, if it produces power from that Range CCGT
Module, continue to provide power from the Range CCGT Module to the Grid Entry Point
being used at the time of the request. The request can only be made up to 1100 hours in
respect of the following Operational Day. No subsequent request to change can be made
after 1100 hours in respect of the following Operational Day. Nothing in this paragraph shall
prevent the busbar at the Grid Entry Point being operated in separate sections.
BC1.A.1.6.5 The principles set out in PC.A.3.2.3 apply to the submission of a CCGT Module Matrix and
accordingly the CCGT Module Matrix can only be amended as follows:
(a) Normal CCGT Module
if the CCGT Module is a Normal CCGT Module, the CCGT Units within that CCGT
Module can only be amended such that the CCGT Module comprises different CCGT
Units if The Company gives its prior consent in writing. Notice of the wish to amend the
CCGT Units within such a CCGT Module must be given at least 6 months before it is
wished for the amendment to take effect;
(b) Range CCGT Module

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

21 of 27
 if the CCGT Module is a Range CCGT Module, the CCGT Units within that CCGT
Module can only be amended such that the CCGT Module comprises different CCGT
Units for a particular Operational Day if the relevant notification is given by 1100 hours
on the day prior to the Operational Day in which the amendment is to take effect. No
subsequent amendment may be made to the CCGT Units comprising the CCGT Module
in respect of that particular Operational Day.
BC1.A.1.6.6 In the case of a CCGT Module Matrix submitted (or deemed to be submitted) as part of the
other data for CCGT Modules, the output of the CCGT Module at any given instructed MW
output must reflect the details given in the CCGT Module Matrix. It is accepted that in cases
of change in MW in response to instructions issued by The Company there may be a
transitional variance to the conditions reflected in the CCGT Module Matrix. In achieving an
instruction the range of number of CCGT Units envisaged in moving from one MW output level
to the other must not be departed from. Each Generator shall notify The Company as soon
as practicable after the event of any such variance. It should be noted that there is a provision
above for the Generator to revise the CCGT Module Matrix, subject always to the other
provisions of this BC1;
BC1.A.1.6.7 Subject as provided above, The Company will rely on the CCGT Units specified in such
CCGT Module Matrix running as indicated in the CCGT Module Matrix when it issues an
instruction in respect of the CCGT Module;
BC1.A.1.6.8 Subject as provided in BC1.A.1.6.5 above, any changes to the CCGT Module Matrix must be
notified immediately to The Company in accordance with the relevant provisions of BC1.
BC1.A.1.7 Cascade Hydro Scheme Matrix
BC1.A.1.7.1 A Cascade Hydro Scheme Matrix showing the performance of individual Generating Units
forming part of a Cascade Hydro Scheme in response to Bid-Offer Acceptance. An
example table is shown below:

Cascade Hydro Scheme Matrix example form

Plant Synchronises when offer is greater

than……..
Generating Unit 1 ......MW
Generating Unit 2 ......MW
Generating Unit 3 ......MW
Generating Unit 4 ......MW
Generating Unit 5 ......MW

BC1.A.1.8 Power Park Module Availability Matrix

BC1.A.1.8.1 Power Park Module Availability Matrix showing the number of each type of Power Park
Units expected to be available is illustrated in the example form below. The Power Park
Module Availability Matrix is designed to achieve certainty in knowing the number of Power
Park Units Synchronised to meet the Physical Notification and to achieve a Bid-Offer
Acceptance by specifying which BM Unit each Power Park Module forms part of. The Power
Park Module Availability Matrix may have as many columns as are required to provide
information on the different make and model for each type of Power Park Unit in a Power
Park Module and as many rows as are required to provide information on the Power Park
Modules within each BM Unit. The description is required to assist identification of the Power
Park Units within the Power Park Module and correlation with data provided under the
Planning Code.

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

22 of 27
 Power Park Module Availability Matrix example form

BM Unit Name
Power Park Module [unique identifier]
POWER PARK POWER PARK UNITS
UNIT AVAILABILITY Type A Type B Type C Type D
Description
(Make/Model)
Number of units
Power Park Module [unique identifier]
POWER PARK POWER PARK UNITS
UNIT AVAILABILITY Type A Type B Type C Type D
Description
(Make/Model)
Number of units

BC1.A.1.8.2 In the absence of the correct submission of a Power Park Module Availability Matrix the last
submitted (or deemed submitted) Power Park Module Availability Matrix shall be taken to
be the Power Park Module Availability Matrix submitted hereunder.
BC1.A.1.8.3 The Company will rely on the Power Park Units, Power Park Modules and BM Units
specified in such Power Park Module Availability Matrix running as indicated in the Power
Park Module Availability Matrix when it issues an instruction in respect of the BM Unit.
BC1.A.1.8.4 Subject as provided in PC.A.3.2.4 any changes to Power Park Module or BM Unit
configuration, or availability of Power Park Units which affects the information set out in the
Power Park Module Availability Matrix must be notified immediately to The Company in
accordance with the relevant provisions of BC1. Initial notification may be by telephone. In
some circumstances, such as a significant re-configuration of a Power Park Module due to
an unplanned outage, a revised Power Park Module Availability Matrix must be supplied on
The Company's request.

BC1.A.1.9 Synchronous Power Generating Module Matrix

BC1.A.1.9.1 Synchronous Power Generating Module Matrix showing the combination of Synchronous
Power Generating Units running in relation to any given MW output, in the form of the table
illustrated below. The Synchronous Power Generating Module Matrix is designed to
achieve certainty in knowing the number of Synchronous Power Generating Units
synchronised to meet the Physical Notification and to achieve a Bid-Offer Acceptance.
BC1.A.1.9.2 This data need not be provided where a submission has been made in respect of BC1.A.1.6,
BC1.A.1.7 or BC1.A.1.8

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

23 of 27
 Synchronous Power Generating Module Matrix example form

SYNCHRONOUS SYNCHRONOUS POWER GENERATING UNITS*

POWER GENERATING AVAILABLE
MODULE MATRIX
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 1st 2nd 3rd
GT GT GT GT GT GT ST ST ST

ACTIVE POWER OUTPUT

MW
150 150 150 100

0MW to 150MW /

151MW to 250MW / /

251MW to 300MW / /

301MW to 400MW / / /

401MW to 450MW / / /

451MW to 550MW / / / /

* as defined in the Glossary and Definitions and not limited by BC1.2

BC1.A.1.9.3 In the absence of the correct submission of a Synchronous Power Generating Module
Matrix the last submitted (or deemed submitted) Synchronous Power Generating Module
Matrix shall be taken to be the Synchronous Power Generating Module Matrix submitted
hereunder.
BC1.A.1.9.4 The principles set out in PC.A.3.2.5 apply to the submission of a Synchronous Power
Generating Module Matrix and accordingly the Synchronous Power Generating Module
Matrix can only be amended as if the Synchronous Power Generating Units within that
Synchronous Power Generating Module can only be amended such that the
Synchronous Power Generating Module comprises different Synchronous Power
Generating Units if The Company gives its prior consent in writing. Notice of the wish to
amend the Synchronous Power Generating Units within such a Synchronous Power
Generating Module must be given at least 6 months before it is wished for the amendment
to take effect;
BC1.A.1.9.5 In the case of a Synchronous Power Generating Module Matrix submitted (or deemed to
be submitted) as part of the other data for Synchronous Power Generating Modules, the
output of the Synchronous Power Generating Module at any given instructed MW output
must reflect the details given in the Synchronous Power Generating Module Matrix. It is
accepted that in cases of change in MW in response to instructions issued by The Company
there may be a transitional variance to the conditions reflected in the Synchronous Power
Generating Module Matrix. In achieving an instruction the range of number of Synchronous
Power Generating Units envisaged in moving from one MW output level to the other must
not be departed from. Each Generator shall notify The Company as soon as practicable after
the event of any such variance. It should be noted that there is a provision above for the
Generator to revise the Synchronous Power Generating Module Matrix, subject always to
the other provisions of this BC1;
BC1.A.1.9.6 Subject as provided above, The Company will rely on the Synchronous Power Generating
Units specified in such Synchronous Power Generating Module Matrix running as
indicated in the Synchronous Power Generating Module Matrix when it issues an
instruction in respect of the Synchronous Power Generating Module;

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

24 of 27
BC1.A.1.9.7 Subject as provided in BC1.A.1.9.4 above, any changes to the Synchronous Power
Generating Module Matrix must be notified immediately to The Company in accordance with
the relevant provisions of BC1.
BC1.A.10 Aggregator Impact Matrix

BC1.A.10.1 For each Additional BM Unit and Secondary BM Unit the relevant BM Participant
will submit data relating to the effect of a Bid-Off Acceptance on each Grid Supply
Point within the GSP Group over which the Additional BM Unit or Secondary BM
Unit was defined.
BC1.A.10.2 For each Additional BM Unit and Secondary BM Unit the relevant BM Participant
will also provide the post-codes and MSIDs that make up the Additional BM Unit or
Secondary BM Unit

Aggregator Impact Matrix example form

BMU Name
Operational Day from which values apply
Grid Supply Point % Impact Grid Supply Point % Impact

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

25 of 27
 APPENDIX 2 - DATA TO BE MADE AVAILABLE BY THE COMPANY

BC1.A.2.1 Initial Day Ahead Demand Forecast

Normally by 09:00 hours each day, values (in MW) for each Settlement Period of the next
following Operational Day of the following data items:-
(i) Initial forecast of National Demand;
(II) Initial forecast of Demand for a number of predetermined constraint groups.
BC1.A.2.2 Initial Day Ahead Market Information
Normally by 12:00 hours each day, values (in MW) for each Settlement Period of the next
following Operational Day of the following data items:-
(i) Initial National Indicated Margin
This is the difference between the sum of BM Unit MELs and the forecast of National
Electricity Transmission System Demand.
(ii) Initial National Indicated Imbalance
This is the difference between the sum of Physical Notifications for BM Units
comprising Generating Units (as defined in the Glossary and Definitions and not limited
by BC1.2) and/or Power Generating Modules and/or CCGT Modules and/or Power
Park Modules and the forecast of National Electricity Transmission System Demand.
(iii) Forecast of National Electricity Transmission System Demand.

BC1.A.2.3 Current Day And Day Ahead Updated Market Information

Data will normally be made available by the times shown below for the associated periods of
time:

Target Data
Release Time Period Start Time Period End Time
02:00 02:00 D0 05:00 D+1
10:00 10:00 D0 05:00 D+1
16:00 05:00 D+1 05:00 D+2
16:30 16:30 D0 05:00 D+1
22:00 22:00 D0 05:00 D+2

In this table, D0 refers to the current day, D+1 refers to the next day and D+2 refers to the day
following D+1.
In all cases, data will be ½ hourly average MW values calculated by The Company.
Information to be released includes:

National Information
(i) National Indicated Margin;
(ii) National Indicated Imbalance;
(iii) Updated forecast of National Electricity Transmission System Demand.

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

26 of 27
 Constraint Boundary Information (For Each Constraint Boundary)
(i) Indicated Constraint Boundary Margin;
This is the difference between the Constraint Boundary Transfer limit and the difference
between the sum of BM Unit MELs and the forecast of local Demand within the constraint
boundary.
(ii) Local Indicated Imbalance;
This is the difference between the sum of Physical Notifications for BM Units
comprising Generating Units (as defined in the Glossary and Definitions and not limited
by BC1.2) and/or Power Generating Modules and/or CCGT Modules and/or Power
Park Modules and the forecast of local Demand within the constraint boundary.
(iii) Updated forecast of the local Demand within the constraint boundary.

< END OF BALANCING CODE NO. 1 >

Issue 6 Revision 15 BC1 07 December 2022

27 of 27
 BALANCING CODE NO. 2
(BC2)

POST GATE CLOSURE PROCESS

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

BC2.1 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................................3
BC2.2 OBJECTIVE .................................................................................................................................3
BC2.3 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................3
BC2.4 INFORMATION USED .................................................................................................................3
BC2.5 PHYSICAL OPERATION OF BM UNITS ....................................................................................4
BC2.5.1 Accuracy Of Physical Notifications ...................................................................................4
BC2.5.2 Synchronising And De-Synchronising Times ...................................................................5
BC2.5.3 Revisions To BM Unit Data...............................................................................................6
BC2.5.4 Operation In The Absence Of Instructions From NGC .....................................................7
BC2.5.5 Commencement Or Termination Of Participation In The Balancing Mechanism .............9
BC2.6 COMMUNICATIONS ................................................................................................................ 10
BC2.6.1 Normal Communications With Control Points ............................................................... 10
BC2.6.2 Communication With Control Points In Emergency Circumstances.............................. 10
BC2.6.3 Communication With Network Operators In Emergency Circumstances ...................... 10
BC2.6.4 Communication With Externally Interconnected System Operators In Emergency
Circumstances ............................................................................................................................... 11
BC2.6.5 Communications During Planned Outages Of Electronic Data Communication Facilities
....................................................................................................................................................... 11
BC2.7 BID-OFFER ACCEPTANCES .................................................................................................. 11
BC2.7.1 Acceptance Of Bids And Offers By NGC ....................................................................... 11
BC2.7.2 Consistency With Export And Import Limits, Qpns And Dynamic Parameters ............. 12
BC2.7.3 Confirmation And Rejection Of Acceptances ................................................................ 12
BC2.7.4 Action Required From BM Participants ......................................................................... 12
BC2.7.5 Additional Action Required From Generators ................................................................ 13
BC2.8 ANCILLARY SERVICES .......................................................................................................... 13
BC2.8.1 Call-Off Of Ancillary Services By NGET ........................................................................ 13
BC2.8.2 Consistency With Export And Import Limits, Qpns And Dynamic Parameters ............. 14
BC2.8.3 Rejection Of Ancillary Service Instructions .................................................................... 14
BC2.8.4 Action Required From BM Units .................................................................................... 14
BC2.8.5 Reactive Despatch Network Restrictions ...................................................................... 14
BC2.9 EMERGENCY CIRCUMSTANCES .......................................................................................... 15
Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024
i of 39
 BC2.9.1 Emergency Actions ........................................................................................................ 15
BC2.9.2 Implementation Of Emergency Instructions ................................................................... 15
BC2.9.3 Examples of Emergency Instructions ............................................................................ 16
BC2.9.4 Maintaining Adequate System And Localised NRAPM (Negative Reserve Active Power
Margin) ........................................................................................................................................... 17
BC2.9.5 Maintaining Adequate Frequency Sensitive Generating Units ...................................... 18
BC2.9.6 Emergency Assistance To And From External Systems ............................................... 19
BC2.9.7 Unplanned Outages Of Electronic Communication And Computing Facilities .............. 19
BC2.10 OTHER OPERATIONAL INSTRUCTIONS AND NOTIFICATIONS ....................................... 21
BC2.11 LIAISON WITH GENERATORS FIR RISK OF TRIP AND AVR TESTING ............................ 21
BC2.12 LIAISON WITH EXTERNALLY INTERCONNECTED SYSTEM OPERATORS .................... 22
APPENDIX 1 - FORM OF BID-OFFER ACCEPTANCES ..................................................................... 23
APPENDIX 2 - TYPE AND FORM OF ANCILLARY SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS ................................ 25
APPENDIX 3 - SUBMISSION OF REVISED MVAr CAPABILITY ......................................................... 31
APPENDIX 3 ANNEXURE 1 .......................................................................................................... 32
APPENDIX 3 ANNEXURE 2 .......................................................................................................... 34
APPENDIX 3 ANNEXURE 3 .......................................................................................................... 35
APPENDIX 4 - SUBMISSION OF AVAILABILITY OF FREQUENCY SENSITIVE MODE ................... 37
APPENDIX 4 ANNEXURE 1 .......................................................................................................... 38

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

ii of 39
BC2.1 INTRODUCTION
Balancing Code No 2 (BC2) sets out the procedure for:
(a) the physical operation of BM Units and Generating Units (which could be part of a
Power Generating Module) in the absence of any instructions from The Company;
(b) the acceptance by The Company of Balancing Mechanism Bids and Offers,
(c) the calling off by The Company of Ancillary Services;
(d) the issuing and implementation of Emergency Instructions; and
(e) the issuing by The Company of other operational instructions and notifications.
In addition, BC2 deals with any information exchange between The Company and BM
Participants or specific Users that takes place after Gate Closure.
In this BC2, “consistent” shall be construed as meaning to the nearest integer MW level.
In this BC2, references to “a BM Unit returning to its Physical Notification” shall take account
of any Bid-Offer Acceptances already issued to the BM Unit in accordance with BC2.7 and
any Emergency Instructions already issued to the BM Unit or Generating Unit (which could
be part of a Power Generating Module) in accordance with BC2.9.

BC2.2 OBJECTIVE
The procedure covering the operation of the Balancing Mechanism and the issuing of
instructions to Users is intended to enable The Company as far as possible to maintain the
integrity of the National Electricity Transmission System together with the security and
quality of supply.
Where reference is made in this BC2 to Power Generating Modules or Generating Units
(unless otherwise stated) it only applies:
(a) to each Generating Unit which forms part of the BM Unit of a Cascade Hydro Scheme;
and
(b) at an Embedded Exemptable Large Power Station where the relevant Bilateral
Agreement specifies that compliance with BC2 is required:
(i) to each Generating Unit which could be part of a Synchronous Power Generating
Module, or
(ii) to each Power Park Module where the Power Station comprises Power Park
Modules.

BC2.3 SCOPE
BC2 applies to The Company and to Users, which in this BC2 means:-
(a) BM Participants;
(b) Externally Interconnected System Operators, and
(c) Network Operators.

BC2.4 INFORMATION USED

BC2.4.1 The information which The Company shall use, together with the other information available
to it, in assessing:
(a) which bids and offers to accept;

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

3 of 39
 (b) which BM Units and/or Generating Units to instruct to provide Ancillary Services;
(c) the need for and formulation of Emergency Instructions; and
(d) other operational instructions and notifications which The Company may need to issue
will be:
(a) the Physical Notification and Bid-Offer Data submitted under BC1;
(b) Export and Import Limits in respect of that BM Unit and/or Generating Unit
supplied under BC1 (and any revisions under BC1 and BC2 to the data); and
(c) Dynamic Parameters submitted or revised under this BC2.
BC2.4.2 As provided for in BC1.5.4, The Company will monitor the total of the Maximum Export Limit
component of the Export and Import Limits against forecast Demand and the Operating
Margin and will take account of Dynamic Parameters to see whether the anticipated level of
System Margin is insufficient. This will reflect any changes in Export and Import Limits
which have been notified to The Company, and will reflect any Demand Control which has
also been so notified. The Company may issue new or revised National Electricity
Transmission System Warnings – Electricity Margin Notice or High Risk of Demand
Reduction in accordance with BC1.5.4.

BC2.5 PHYSICAL OPERATION OF BM UNITS

BC2.5.1 Accuracy Of Physical Notifications
As described in BC1.4.2(a), Physical Notifications must represent the BM Participant’s best
estimate of expected input or output of Active Power, except where a BM Unit is affected by
a Stage 2 or higher Network Gas Supply Emergency load shedding event. Physical
Notifications shall be prepared in accordance with Good Industry Practice.

In the case where a BM Unit is affected by a Network Gas Supply Emergency load shedding
event, once Stage 2 or higher has been declared, then their Physical Notifications shall
represent the User's best estimate of the contracted power position of the affected BM Unit
at the time of the event, taking into account any mitigating actions to reduce the difference
between the contracted power position and the volume to be shed.
Each BM Participant must, applying Good Industry Practice, ensure that each of its BM
Units follows the Physical Notification in respect of that BM Unit, except where the
generation output of a BM Unit for an affected site only is reduced as a result of a Stage 2 or
higher Network Gas Supply Emergency load shedding event , (and each of its Generating
Units follows the Physical Notification in the case of Physical Notifications supplied under
BC1.4.2(a)(2)) that is prevailing at Gate Closure (the data in which will be utilised in producing
the Final Physical Notification Data in accordance with the BSC) subject to variations arising
from:
(a) the issue of Bid-Offer Acceptances which have been confirmed by the BM Participant;
or
(b) instructions by The Company in relation to that BM Unit (or a Generating Unit) which
require, or compliance with which would result in, a variation in output or input of that BM
Unit (or a Generating Unit); or
(c) compliance with provisions of BC1, BC2 or BC3 which provide to the contrary.

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

4 of 39
 Except where variations from the Physical Notification arise from matters referred to at (a),
(b) or (c) above, in respect only of BM Units (or Generating Units) powered by an
Intermittent Power Source, where there is a change in the level of the Intermittent Power
Source from that forecast and used to derive the Physical Notification, variations from the
Physical Notification prevailing at Gate Closure may, subject to remaining within the
Registered Capacity, occur providing that the Physical Notification prevailing at Gate
Closure was prepared in accordance with Good Industry Practice.
If variations and/or instructions as described in (a),(b) or (c) apply in any instance to BM Units
(or Generating Units) powered by an Intermittent Power Source (e.g. a Bid Offer
Acceptance is issued in respect of such a BM Unit and confirmed by the BM Participant)
then such provisions will take priority over the third paragraph of BC2.5.1 above such that the
BM Participant must ensure that the Physical Notification as varied in accordance with (a),
(b) or (c) above applies and must be followed, subject to this not being prevented as a result
of an unavoidance event as described below.
For the avoidance of doubt, this gives rise to an obligation on each BM Participant (applying
Good Industry Practice) to ensure that each of its BM Units (and Generating Units), follows
the Physical Notifications prevailing at Gate Closure as amended by such variations and/or
instructions unless in relation to any such obligation it is prevented from so doing as a result
of an unavoidable event (existing or anticipated) in relation to that BM Unit (or a Generating
Unit) which requires a variation in output or input of that BM Unit (or a Generating Unit).
Examples (on a non-exhaustive basis) of such an unavoidable event are:
 plant breakdowns;
 events requiring a variation of input or output on safety grounds (relating to
personnel or plant);
 events requiring a variation of input or output to maintain compliance with the
relevant Statutory Water Management obligations; and
 uncontrollable variations in output of Active Power.
Any anticipated variations in input or output post Gate Closure from the Physical Notification
for a BM Unit (or a Generating Unit) prevailing at Gate Closure (except for those arising
from instructions as outlined in (a), (b) or (c) above) must be notified to The Company without
delay by the relevant BM Participant (or the relevant person on its behalf). For the avoidance
of doubt, where a change in the level of the Intermittent Power Source from that forecast
and used to derive the Physical Notification results in the Shutdown or Shutdown of part
of the BM Unit (or Generating Unit), the change must be notified to The Company without
delay by the relevant BM Participant (or the relevant person on its behalf).
Implementation of this notification should normally be achieved by the submission of revisions
to the Export and Import Limits in accordance with BC2.5.3 below.
BC2.5.2 Synchronising And De-Synchronising Times
BC2.5.2.1 The Final Physical Notification Data provides indicative Synchronising and De-
Synchronising times to The Company in respect of any BM Unit which is De-Synchronising
or is anticipated to be Synchronising post Gate Closure.
Any delay of greater than five minutes to the Synchronising or any advancement of greater
than five minutes to the De-Synchronising of a BM Unit must be notified to The Company
without delay by the submission of a revision of the Export and Import Limits.
BC2.5.2.2 Except in the circumstances provided for in BC2.5.2.3, BC2.5.2.4, BC2.5.5.1 or BC2.9, no BM
Unit (nor a Generating Unit) is to be Synchronised or De-Synchronised unless:-
(a) a Physical Notification had been submitted to The Company prior to Gate Closure
indicating that a Synchronisation or De-Synchronisation is to occur; or

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

5 of 39
 (b) The Company has issued a Bid-Offer Acceptance requiring Synchronisation or De-
Synchronisation of that BM Unit (or a Generating Unit).
BC2.5.2.3 BM Participants must only Synchronise or De-Synchronise BM Units (or a Generating
Unit);
(a) at the times indicated to The Company, or
(b) at times consistent with variations in output or input arising from provisions described in
BC2.5.1,
(within a tolerance of +/- 5 minutes) or unless that occurs automatically as a result of
Operational Intertripping or Low Frequency Relay operations or an Ancillary Service
pursuant to an Ancillary Services Agreement
BC2.5.2.4 De-Synchronisation may also take place without prior notification to The Company as a
result of plant breakdowns or if it is done purely on safety grounds (relating to personnel or
plant). If that happens, The Company must be informed immediately that it has taken place
and a revision to Export and Import Limits must be submitted in accordance with BC2.5.3.3.
Following any De-Synchronisation occurring as a result of plant failure, no Synchronisation
of that BM Unit (or a Generating Unit) is to take place without The Company’s agreement,
such agreement not to be unreasonably withheld.
In the case of Synchronisation, following an unplanned De-Synchronisation within the
preceding 15 minutes, a minimum of 5 minutes notice of its intention to Synchronise should
normally be given to The Company (via a revision to Export and Import Limits). In the case
of any other unplanned De-Synchronisation where the User plans to Synchronise before
the expiry of the current Balancing Mechanism period, a minimum of 15 minutes notice of
Synchronisation should normally be given to The Company (via a revision to Export and
Import Limits). In addition, the rate at which the BM Unit is returned to its Physical
Notification is not to exceed the limits specified in BC1, Appendix 1 without The Company’s
agreement.
The Company will either agree to the Synchronisation or issue a Bid-Offer Acceptance in
accordance with BC2.7 to delay the Synchronisation. The Company may agree to an earlier
Synchronisation if System conditions allow.
BC2.5.2.5 Notification Of Times To Network Operators
The Company will make changes to the Synchronising and De-Synchronising times
available to each Network Operator, but only relating to BM Units Embedded within its User
System and those BM Units directly connected to the National Electricity Transmission
System which The Company has identified under OC2 and/or BC1 as being those which
may, in the reasonable opinion of The Company, affect the integrity of that User System and
shall inform the relevant BM Participant that it has done so, identifying the BM Unit
concerned.
Each Network Operator must notify The Company of any changes to its User System data
as soon as practicable in accordance with BC1.6.1(c).
BC2.5.3 Revisions To BM Unit Data
Following Gate Closure for any Settlement Period, no changes to the Physical Notification
or to Bid-Offer Data for that Settlement Period may be submitted to The Company.

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

6 of 39
BC2.5.3.1 At any time, any BM Participant (or the relevant person on its behalf) may, in respect of any
of its BM Units, submit to The Company the data listed in BC1, Appendix 1 under the heading
of Dynamic Parameters from the Control Point of its BM Unit to amend the data already
held by The Company (including that previously submitted under this BC2.5.3.1) for use in
preparing for and operating the Balancing Mechanism. The change will take effect from the
time that it is received by The Company. For the avoidance of doubt, the Dynamic
Parameters submitted to The Company under BC1.4.2(e) are not used within the current
Operational Day. The Dynamic Parameters submitted under this BC2.5.3.1 shall reasonably
reflect the true current operating characteristics of the BM Unit and shall be prepared in
accordance with Good Industry Practice.
Following the Operational Intertripping of a System to Generating Unit or a System to
CCGT Module and/or a System to Power Generating Module, the BM Participant shall as
soon as reasonably practicable re-declare its MEL to reflect more accurately its output
capability.
BC2.5.3.2 Revisions to Export and Import Limits or Other Relevant Data supplied (or revised) under
BC1 must be notified to The Company without delay as soon as any change becomes
apparent to the BM Participant (or the relevant person on its behalf) via the Control Point
for the BM Unit (or a Generating Unit) to ensure that an accurate assessment of BM Unit (or
a Generating Unit) capability is available to The Company at all times. These revisions
should be prepared in accordance with Good Industry Practice and may be submitted by
use of electronic data communication facilities or by telephone.
BC2.5.3.3 Revisions to Export and Import Limits must be made by a BM Participant (or the relevant
person on its behalf) via the Control Point in the event of any De-Synchronisation of a BM
Unit (or a Generating Unit) in the circumstances described in BC2.5.2.4 if the BM Unit (or a
Generating Unit) is no longer available for any period of time. Revisions must also be
submitted in the event of plant failures causing a reduction in input or output of a BM Unit (or
a Generating Unit) even if that does not lead to De-Synchronisation. Following the
correction of a plant failure, the BM Participant (or the relevant person on its behalf) must
notify The Company via the Control Point of a revision to the Export and Import Limits, if
appropriate, of the BM Unit (or a Generating Unit), using reasonable endeavours to give a
minimum of 5 minutes notice of its intention to return to its Physical Notification. The rate at
which the BM Unit (or a Generating Unit) is returned to its Physical Notification is not to
exceed the limits specified in BC1, Appendix 1 without The Company’s agreement.
BC2.5.4 Operation in the Absence of Instructions from The Company
In the absence of any Bid-Offer Acceptances, Ancillary Service instructions issued
pursuant to BC2.8 or Emergency Instructions issued pursuant to BC2.9:
(a) as provided for in BC3, each Synchronised Genset producing Active Power must
operate at all times in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode (unless instructed in
accordance with BC3.5.4 to operate in Frequency Sensitive Mode);
(b) (i) in the absence of any MVAr Ancillary Service instructions, the MVAr output of each
Synchronised Genset located Onshore should be 0 MVAr upon Synchronisation
at the circuit-breaker where the Genset is Synchronised. For the avoidance of
doubt, in the case of a Genset located Onshore comprising of Non-Synchronous
Generating Units, Power Park Modules, HVDC Systems or DC Converters, the
steady state tolerance allowed in CC.6.3.2(b) or ECC.6.3.2.4.4 may be applied;
(ii) In the absence of any MVAr Ancillary Service instructions, the MVAr output of each
Synchronised Genset comprising Synchronous Generating Units located
Offshore (which could be part of a Synchronous Power Generating Module)
should be 0MVAr at the Grid Entry Point upon Synchronisation. For the avoidance
of doubt, in the case of a Genset located Offshore comprising of Non-
Synchronous Generating Units, Power Park Modules, HVDC Systems or DC
Converters, the steady state tolerance allowed in CC.6.3.2(e) or ECC.6.3.2.5.1 or
Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024
7 of 39
 ECC.6.3.2.5.2 or ECC.6.3.2.5.3 or ECC.6.3.2.6.1 or ECC.6.3.2.6.3 or ECC.6.3.2.6.4
(as applicable) may be applied;
(c) (i) subject to the provisions of 2.5.4(c) (ii) and 2.5.4 (c) (iii) below, the excitation system
or the voltage control system of a Genset located Offshore which has agreed an
alternative Reactive Power capability range under CC.6.3.2 (e) (iii) or
ECC.6.3.2.5.2 or ECC.6.3.2.5.3 or ECC.6.3.2.6.1 or ECC.6.3.2.6.3 or ECC.6.3.2.6.4
(as applicable) or a Genset located Onshore, unless otherwise agreed with The
Company, must be operated only in its constant terminal voltage mode of operation
with VAR limiters in service, with any constant Reactive Power output control mode
or constant Power Factor output control mode always disabled, unless agreed
otherwise with The Company. In the event of any change in System voltage, a
Generator must not take any action to override automatic MVAr response which is
produced as a result of constant terminal voltage mode of operation of the automatic
excitation control system unless instructed otherwise by The Company or unless
immediate action is necessary to comply with Stability Limits or unless constrained
by plant operational limits or safety grounds (relating to personnel or plant);
(ii) In the case of all Gensets comprising Non-Synchronous Generating Units, DC
Converters, HVDC Systems and Power Park Modules that are located Offshore
and which have agreed an alternative Reactive Power capability range under
CC.6.3.2 (e) (iii), or ECC.6.3.2.5.2 or ECC.6.3.2.5.3 or ECC.6.3.2.6.1 or
ECC.6.3.2.6.3 or ECC.6.3.2.6.4 (as applicable) or that are located Onshore only
when operating below 20 % of the Rated MW output, the voltage control system
shall maintain the Reactive Power transfer at the Grid Entry Point (or User System
Entry Point if Embedded) to 0 MVAr. For the avoidance of doubt, the relevant
steady state tolerance allowed for GB Generators in CC.6.3.2(b) or CC.6.3.2 (e)
and for EU Generators in ECC.6.3.2.4.4, ECC.6.3.2.5.1, ECC.6.3.2.5.2, or
ECC.6.3.2.5.3 or ECC.6.3.2.6.1, ECC.6.3.2.6.2 or ECC.6.3.2.6.3 or ECC.6.3.2.6.4
may be applied. In the case of any such Gensets owned or operated by GB Code
Users comprising current source DC Converter technology or comprising Power
Park Modules connected to the Total System by a current source DC Converter
when operating at any power output, the voltage control system shall maintain the
Reactive Power transfer at the Grid Entry Point (or User System Entry Point if
Embedded) to 0 MVAr. For the avoidance of doubt, the relevant steady state
tolerance allowed in CC.6.3.2(b) or CC.6.3.2 (c) (i) or CC.6.3.2(e) may be applied.
(iii) In the case of all Gensets located Offshore which are not subject to the
requirements of BC2.5.4 (c) (i) or BC2.5.4 (c) (ii) the control system shall maintain
the Reactive Power transfer at the Offshore Grid Entry Point at 0MVAr. For the
avoidance of doubt the steady state tolerance allowed by CC.6.3.2 (e) or
ECC.6.3.2.4.4, ECC.6.3.2.5.1, or ECC.6.3.2.5.2 or ECC.6.3.2.5.3, or ECC.6.3.2.6.1
or ECC.6.3.2.6.3 or ECC.6.3.2.6.4 may be applied.
(d) In the absence of any MVAr Ancillary Service instructions,
(i) the MVAr output of each Genset located Onshore should be 0 MVAr immediately
prior to De-Synchronisation at the circuit-breaker where the Genset is
Synchronised, other than in the case of a rapid unplanned De-Synchronisation or
in the case of a Genset comprising of Power Generating Modules and/or Non-
Synchronous Generating Units and/or Power Park Modules and/or HVDC
Converters or DC Converters which is operating at less than 20% of its Rated MW
output where the requirements of BC2.5.4 (c) part (ii) apply, or;
(ii) the MVAr output of each Genset located Offshore should be 0MVAr immediately
prior to De-Synchronisation at the Offshore Grid Entry Point, other than in the
case of a rapid unplanned De-Synchronisation or in the case of a Genset
comprising of Non-Synchronous Generating Units, Power Park Modules, HVDC
Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024
8 of 39
 Converters or DC Converters which is operating at less than 20% of its Rated MW
output and which has agreed an alternative Reactive Power capability range (for
GB Code Users) under CC.6.3.2 (e) (iii) or ECC.6.3.2.4.4, ECC.6.3.2.5.1,
ECC.6.3.2.5.2, or ECC.6.3.2.5.3, or ECC.6.3.2.6.1 or ECC.6.3.2.6.3 or
ECC.6.3.2.6.4 (for EU Code Users ) where the requirements of BC2.5.4 (c) (ii) apply.
(e) a Generator should at all times operate its CCGT Units in accordance with the applicable
CCGT Module Matrix;
(f) in the case of a Range CCGT Module, a Generator must operate that CCGT Module
so that power is provided at the single Grid Entry Point (or User System Entry Point if
Embedded) identified in the data given pursuant to PC.A.3.2.1 or at the single Grid Entry
Point to which The Company has agreed pursuant to BC1.4.2(f);
(g) in the event of the System Frequency being above 50.3Hz or below 49.7Hz, BM
Participants must not commence any reasonably avoidable action to regulate the input
or output of any BM Unit in a manner that could cause the System Frequency to deviate
further from 50Hz without first using reasonable endeavours to discuss the proposed
actions with The Company. The Company shall either agree to these changes in input
or output or issue a Bid-Offer Acceptance in accordance with BC2.7 to delay the
change.
(h) a Generator should at all times operate its Power Park Units in accordance with the
applicable Power Park Module Availability Matrix.
BC2.5.5 Commencement or Termination of Participation in the Balancing Mechanism
BC2.5.5.1 In the event that a BM Participant in respect of a BM Unit with a Demand Capacity with a
magnitude of less than 50MW in NGET’s Transmission Area or less than 10MW in SHETL’s
Transmission Area or less than 30MW in SPT’s Transmission Area or comprising
Generating Units (as defined in the Glossary and Definitions and not limited by BC2.2) and/or
Power Generating Modules and/or CCGT Modules and/or Power Park Modules at a Small
Power Station, notifies The Company at least 30 days in advance that from a specified
Operational Day it will:
(a) no longer submit Bid-Offer Data under BC1.4.2(d), then with effect from that Operational
Day, that BM Participant no longer has to meet the requirements of BC2.5.1 nor the
requirements of CC.6.5.8(b) or ECC.6.5.8(b) (as applicable) in relation to that BM Unit.
Also, with effect from that Operational Day, any defaulted Physical Notification and
defaulted Bid-Offer Data in relation to that BM Unit arising from the Data Validation,
Consistency and Defaulting Rules will be disregarded and the provisions of BC2.5.2
will not apply;
(b) submit Bid-Offer Data under BC1.4.2(d), then with effect from that Operational Day that
BM Participant will need to meet the requirements of BC2.5.1 and the requirements of
CC.6.5.8(b) or ECC.6.5.8(b) (as applicable) in relation to that BM Unit.
BC2.5.5.2 In the event that a BM Participant in respect of a BM Unit with a Demand Capacity with a
magnitude of 50MW or more in NGET’s Transmission Area or 10MW or more in SHETL’s
Transmission Area or 30MW or more in SPT’s Transmission Area or comprising
Generating Units (as defined in the Glossary and Definitions and not limited by BC2.2) and/or
Power Generating Modules and/or CCGT Modules and/or Power Park Modules at a
Medium Power Station or Large Power Station notifies The Company at least 30 days in
advance that from a specified Operational Day it will:
(a) no longer submit Bid-Offer Data under BC1.4.2(d), then with effect from that Operational
Day that BM Participant no longer has to meet the requirements of CC.6.5.8(b) or
ECC.6.5.8(b) (as applicable) in relation to that BM Unit; also, with effect from that
Operational Day, any defaulted Bid-Offer Data in relation to that BM Unit arising from
the Data Validation, Consistency and Defaulting Rules will be disregarded;

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

9 of 39
 (b) submit Bid-Offer Data under BC1.4.2(d), then with effect from that Operational Day that
BM Participant will need to meet the requirements of CC.6.5.8(b) or ECC.6.5.8(b) (as
applicable) in relation to that BM Unit.

BC2.6 COMMUNICATIONS
Electronic communications are always conducted in GMT. However, the input of data and
display of information to Users and The Company and all other communications are
conducted in London time.
BC2.6.1 Normal Communication With Control Points
(a) With the exception of BC2.6.1(c) below, Bid-Offer Acceptances and, unless otherwise
agreed with The Company, Ancillary Service instructions shall be given by automatic
logging device and will be given to the Control Point for the BM Unit. For all Planned
Maintenance Outages the provisions of BC2.6.5 will apply. For Generating Units
(including DC Connected Power Park Modules (if relevant)) communications under
BC2 shall be by telephone unless otherwise agreed by The Company and the User.
(b) Bid-Offer Acceptances and Ancillary Service instructions must be formally
acknowledged immediately by the BM Participant (or the relevant person on its behalf)
via the Control Point for the BM Unit or Generating Unit in respect of that BM Unit or
that Generating Unit. The acknowledgement and subsequent confirmation or rejection,
within two minutes of receipt, is normally given electronically by automatic logging device.
If no confirmation or rejection is received by The Company within two minutes of the
issue of the Bid-Offer Acceptance, then The Company will contact the Control Point
for the BM Unit by telephone to determine the reason for the lack of confirmation or
rejection. Any rejection must be given in accordance with BC2.7.3 or BC2.8.3.
(c) In the event of a failure of the logging device or an outage of The Company’s computer
system, Bid-Offer Acceptances and instructions will be given, acknowledged, and
confirmed or rejected by telephone. The provisions of BC2.9.7 are also applicable.
(d) In the event that in carrying out the Bid-Offer Acceptances or providing the Ancillary
Services, or when operating at the level of the Final Physical Notification Data as
provided in BC2.5.1, an unforeseen problem arises, caused on safety grounds (relating
to personnel or plant), The Company must be notified without delay by telephone.
(e) The provisions of BC2.5.3 are also relevant.
(f) Submissions of revised MVAr capability may be made by facsimile transmission, using
the format given in Appendix 3 to BC2.
(g) Communication will normally be by telephone for any purpose other than Bid-Offer
Acceptances, in relation to Ancillary Services or for revisions of MVAr data.
(h) Submissions of revised availability of Frequency Sensitive Mode may be made by
facsimile transmission, using the format given in Appendix 4 to BC2. This process should
only be used for technical restrictions to the availability of Frequency Sensitive Mode.
BC2.6.2 Communication With Control Points In Emergency Circumstances
The Company will issue Emergency Instructions direct to the Control Point for each BM
Unit [or Generating Unit] in Great Britain. Emergency Instructions to a Control Point will
normally be given by telephone (and will include an exchange of operator names).
BC2.6.3 Communication With Network Operators In Emergency Circumstances

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

10 of 39
 The Company will issue Emergency Instructions direct to the Network Operator at each
Control Centre in relation to actions including special actions as set out in BC1.7, actions in
the categories set out under BC2.9.3.3, Embedded Generation Control and Demand
Control actions. Emergency Instructions to a Network Operator will normally be given by
telephone (and will include an exchange of operator names). OC6 contains further provisions
relating to Demand Control instructions; OC6B contains further provisions relating
to Embedded Generation Control instructions.
BC2.6.4 Communication with Externally Interconnected System Operators in Emergency
Circumstances
The Company will issue Emergency Instructions directly to the Externally Interconnected
System Operator at each Control Centre. Emergency Instructions to an Externally
Interconnected System Operator will normally be given by telephone (and will include an
exchange of operator names).
BC2.6.5 Communications during Planned Outages of Electronic Data Communication Facilities
Planned Maintenance Outages will normally be arranged to take place during periods of low
data transfer activity. Upon any such Planned Maintenance Outage in relation to a post Gate
Closure period:-
(a) BM Participants should operate in relation to any period of time in accordance with the
Physical Notification prevailing at Gate Closure current at the time of the start of the
Planned Maintenance Outage in relation to each such period of time. Such operation
shall be subject to the provisions of BC2.5.1, which will apply as if set out in this BC2.6.5.
No further submissions of BM Unit Data (other than data specified in BC1.4.2(c) and
BC1.4.2(e)) should be attempted or Generating Unit Data. Plant failure or similar
problems causing significant deviation from Physical Notification should be notified to
The Company by the submission of a revision to Export and Import Limits in relation
to the BM Unit or Generating Unit so affected;
(b) during the outage, revisions to the data specified in BC1.4.2(c) and BC1.4.2(e) may be
submitted. Communication between Users Control Points and The Company during
the outage will be conducted by telephone;
(c) The Company will issue Bid-Offer Acceptances by telephone; and
(d) no data will be transferred from The Company to the BMRA until the communication
facilities are re-established.
(e) The provisions of BC2.9.7 may also be relevant.

BC2.7 BID-OFFER ACCEPTANCES

BC2.7.1 Acceptance of Bids and Offers by The Company
Bid-Offer Acceptances may be issued to the Control Point at any time following Gate
Closure. Any Bid-Offer Acceptance will be consistent with the Dynamic Parameters and
Export and Import Limits of the BM Unit in so far as the Balancing Mechanism timescales
will allow (see BC2.7.2).
(a) The Company is entitled to assume that each BM Unit is available in accordance with
the BM Unit Data submitted unless and until it is informed of any changes.
(b) Bid-Offer Acceptances sent to the Control Point will specify the data necessary to
define a MW profile to be provided (ramp rate break-points are not normally explicitly sent
to the Control Point) and to be achieved consistent with the respective BM Unit's Export
and Import Limits provided or modified under BC1 or BC2, and Dynamic Parameters
given under BC2.5.3 or, if agreed with the relevant User, such rate within those Dynamic
Parameters as is specified by The Company in the Bid-Offer Acceptances.

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

11 of 39
 (c) All Bid-Offer Acceptances will be deemed to be at the current "Target Frequency",
namely where a Genset is in Frequency Sensitive Mode they refer to target output at
Target Frequency.
(d) The form of and terms to be used by The Company in issuing Bid-Offer Acceptances
together with their meanings are set out in Appendix 1 in the form of a non-exhaustive list
of examples.
BC2.7.2 Consistency With Export And Import Limits And Dynamic Parameters
(a) Bid-Offer Acceptances will be consistent with the Export and Import Limits provided
or modified under BC1 or BC2 and the Dynamic Parameters provided or modified under
BC2. Bid-Offer Acceptances may also recognise Other Relevant Data provided or
modified under BC1 or BC2
(b) In the case of consistency with Dynamic Parameters this will be limited to the time until
the end of the Settlement Period for which Gate Closure has most recently occurred. If
The Company intends to issue a Bid-Offer Acceptance covering a period after the end
of the Settlement Period for which Gate Closure has most recently occurred, based
upon the then submitted Dynamic Parameters, Export and Import Limits and Bid-
Offer Data applicable to that period, The Company will indicate this to the BM
Participant at the Control Point for the BM Unit. The intention will then be reflected in
the issue of a Bid-Offer Acceptance to return the BM Unit to its previously notified
Physical Notification after the relevant Gate Closure, provided the submitted data used
to formulate this intention has not changed and subject to System conditions which may
affect that intention. Subject to that, assumptions regarding Bid-Offer Acceptances may
be made by BM Participants for Settlement Periods for which Gate Closure has not
yet occurred when assessing consistency with Dynamic Parameters in Settlement
Periods for which Gate Closure has occurred. If no such subsequent Bid–Offer
Acceptance is issued, the original Bid-Offer Acceptance will include an instantaneous
return to Physical Notification at the end of the Balancing Mechanism period.
BC2.7.3 Confirmation and Rejection of Acceptances
Bid-Offer Acceptances may only be rejected by a BM Participant :
(a) on safety grounds (relating to personnel or plant) as soon as reasonably possible and in
any event within five minutes; or
(b) because they are not consistent with the Export and Import Limits or Dynamic
Parameters applicable at the time of issue of the Bid-Offer Acceptance.
A reason must always be given for rejection by telephone.
Where a Bid-Offer Acceptance is not confirmed within two minutes or is rejected, The
Company will seek to contact the Control Point for the BM Unit. The Company must then,
within 15 minutes of issuing the Bid-Offer Acceptance, withdraw the Bid-Offer Acceptance
or log the Bid-Offer Acceptance as confirmed. The Company will only log a rejected Bid-
Offer Acceptance as confirmed following discussion and if the reason given is, in The
Company’s reasonable opinion, not acceptable, The Company will inform the BM
Participant accordingly.

BC2.7.4 Action Required From BM Participants

(a) Each BM Participant in respect of its BM Units will comply in accordance with BC2.7.1
with all Bid-Offer Acceptances given by The Company with no more than the delay
allowed for by the Dynamic Parameters unless the BM Unit has given notice to The
Company under the provisions of BC2.7.3 regarding non-acceptance of a Bid-Offer
Acceptance.
Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024
12 of 39
 (b) Where a BM Unit’s input or output changes in accordance with a Bid-Offer Acceptance
issued under BC2.7.1, such variation does not need to be notified to The Company in
accordance with BC2.5.1.
(c) In the event that while carrying out the Bid-Offer Acceptance an unforeseen problem
arises caused by safety reasons (relating to personnel or plant), The Company must be
notified immediately by telephone and this may lead to revision of BM Unit Data in
accordance with BC2.5.3
BC2.7.5 Additional Action required when responding to Bid-Offer Acceptances
(a) When complying with Bid-Offer Acceptances for a CCGT Module, a Generator will
operate its CCGT Units in accordance with the applicable CCGT Module Matrix.
(b) When complying with Bid-Offer Acceptances for a CCGT Module which is a Range
CCGT Module, a Generator must operate that CCGT Module so that power is provided
at the single Grid Entry Point identified in the data given pursuant to PC.A.3.2.1 or at
the single Grid Entry Point to which The Company has agreed pursuant to BC1.4.2 (f).
(c) On receiving a new MW Bid-Offer Acceptance, no tap changing shall be carried out to
change the MVAr output unless there is a new MVAr Ancillary Service instruction issued
pursuant to BC2.8.
(d) When complying with Bid-Offer Acceptances for a Power Park Module, a Generator
will operate its Power Park Units in accordance with the applicable Power Park Module
Availability Matrix.
(e) When complying with Bid-Offer Acceptances for a Synchronous Power Generating
Module, a Generator will operate its Generating Units in accordance with the applicable
Synchronous Power Generating Module Availability Matrix.
(f) When complying with Bid-Offer Acceptances for an Additional BM Unit or Secondary
BM Unit they will operate in accordance with the applicable Aggregator Impact Matrix.

BC2.8 ANCILLARY SERVICES

This section primarily covers the call-off of System Ancillary Services. The provisions
relating to Commercial Ancillary Services will normally be covered in the relevant Ancillary
Services Agreement.
BC2.8.1 Call-Off of Ancillary Services by The Company
(a) Ancillary Service instructions may be issued at any time.
(b) The Company is entitled to assume that each BM Unit (or Generating Unit) is available
in accordance with the BM Unit Data (or the Generating Unit Data) and data contained
in the Ancillary Services Agreement unless and until it is informed of any changes.
(c) Frequency control instructions may be issued in conjunction with, or separate from, a
Bid-Offer Acceptance.
(d) The form of and terms to be used by The Company in issuing Ancillary Service
instructions together with their meanings are set out in Appendix 2 in the form of a non-
exhaustive list of examples including Reactive Power and associated instructions.
(e) In the case of Generating Units that do not form part of a BM Unit any change in Active
Power as a result of, or required to enable, the provision of an Ancillary Service will be
dealt with as part of that Ancillary Service Agreement and/or provisions under the
CUSC.
(f) A System to Generator Operational Intertripping Scheme will be armed in accordance
with BC2.10.2(a).

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

13 of 39
BC2.8.2 Consistency with Export and Import Limits and Dynamic Parameters
Ancillary Service instructions will be consistent with the Export and Import Limits provided
or modified under BC1 or BC2 and the Dynamic Parameters provided or modified under
BC2. Ancillary Service instructions may also recognise Other Relevant Data provided or
modified under BC1 or BC2.
BC2.8.3 Rejection of Ancillary Service Instructions
(a) Ancillary Service instructions may only be rejected, by automatic logging device or by
telephone, on safety grounds (relating to personnel or Plant) or because they are not
consistent with the applicable Export and Import Limits, Dynamic Parameters, Other
Relevant Data or data contained in the Ancillary Services Agreement and a reason
must be given immediately for non-acceptance.
(b) The issue of Ancillary Service instructions for Reactive Power will be made with due
regard to any resulting change in Active Power output. The instruction may be rejected
if it conflicts with any Bid-Offer Acceptance issued in accordance with BC2.7 or with the
Physical Notification.
(c) Where Ancillary Service instructions relating to Active Power and Reactive Power are
given together, and to achieve the Reactive Power output would cause the BM Unit to
operate outside Dynamic Parameters as a result of the Active Power instruction being
met at the same time, then the timescale of implementation of the Reactive Power
instruction may be extended to be no longer than the timescale for implementing the
Active Power instruction but in any case to achieve the MVAr Ancillary Service
instruction as soon as possible.
BC2.8.4 Action Required From BM Units
(a) Each BM Unit (or Generating Unit) will comply in accordance with BC2.8.1 with all
Ancillary Service instructions relating to Reactive Power properly given by The
Company within 2 minutes or such longer period as The Company may instruct, and all
other Ancillary Service instructions without delay, unless the BM Unit or Generating
Unit has given notice to The Company under the provisions of BC2.8.3 regarding non-
acceptance of Ancillary Service instructions.
(b) Each BM Unit may deviate from the profile of its Final Physical Notification Data, as
modified by any Bid-Offer Acceptances issued in accordance with BC2.7.1, only as a
result of responding to Frequency deviations when operating in Frequency Sensitive
Mode in accordance with the Ancillary Services Agreement.
(c) Each Generating Unit that does not form part of a BM Unit may deviate from the profile
of its Final Physical Notification Data where agreed by The Company and the User,
including but not limited to, as a result of providing an Ancillary Service in accordance
with the Ancillary Service Agreement.
(d) In the event that while carrying out the Ancillary Service instructions an unforeseen
problem arises caused by safety reasons (relating to personnel or plant), The Company
must be notified immediately by telephone and this may lead to revision of BM Unit Data
or Generating Unit Data in accordance with BC2.5.3.
BC2.8.5 Reactive Despatch Network Restrictions

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

14 of 39
 Where The Company has received notification pursuant to the Grid Code that a Reactive
Despatch to Zero MVAr Network Restriction is in place with respect to any Embedded
Power Generating Module and/or Embedded Generating Unit and/or Embedded Power
Park Module or HVDC Converter at an Embedded HVDC Converter Station or DC
Converter at an Embedded DC Converter Station, then The Company will not issue any
Reactive Despatch Instruction with respect to that Power Generating Module and/or
Generating Unit and/or Power Park Module or DC Converter or HVDC Converter until such
time as notification is given to The Company pursuant to the Grid Code that such Reactive
Despatch to Zero MVAr Network Restriction is no longer affecting that Power Generating
Module and/or Generating Unit and/or Power Park Module or DC Converter or HVDC
Converter.

BC2.9 EMERGENCY CIRCUMSTANCES

BC2.9.1 Emergency Actions
BC2.9.1.1 In certain circumstances (as determined by The Company in its reasonable opinion) it will be
necessary, in order to preserve the integrity of the National Electricity Transmission System
and any synchronously connected External System, for The Company to issue Emergency
Instructions. In such circumstances, it may be necessary to depart from normal Balancing
Mechanism operation in accordance with BC2.7 in issuing Bid-Offer Acceptances. BM
Participants must also comply with the requirements of BC3.
BC2.9.1.2 Examples of circumstances that may require the issue of Emergency Instructions include:-
(a) Events on the National Electricity Transmission System or the System of another
User; or
(b) the need to maintain adequate System and Localised NRAPM in accordance with
BC2.9.4 below; or
(c) the need to maintain adequate Frequency sensitive Gensets in accordance with BC2.9.5
below; or
(d) the need to implement Demand Control in accordance with OC6; or
(e) (i) the need to invoke the System Restoration process or the Re-Synchronisation of
Power Island process in accordance with OC9; or
(ii) the need to request provision of a Maximum Generation Service; or
(iii) the need to issue an Emergency Deenergisation Instruction in circumstances
where the condition or manner of operation of any Transmission Plant and/or
Apparatus is such that it may cause damage or injury to any person or to the
National Electricity Transmission System; or
(f) the need to implement Embedded Generation Control in accordance with OC6B.
BC2.9.1.3 In the case of BM Units and Generating Units in Great Britain, Emergency Instructions
will be issued by The Company direct to the User at the Control Point for the BM Unit or
Generating Unit and may require an action or response which is outside its Other Relevant
Data or Export and Import Limits submitted under BC1, or revised under BC1 or BC2, or
Dynamic Parameters submitted or revised under BC2.
BC2.9.1.4 In the case of a Network Operator or an Externally Interconnected System Operator,
Emergency Instructions will be issued to its Control Centre.
BC2.9.2 Implementation of Emergency Instructions

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

15 of 39
BC2.9.2.1 Users will respond to Emergency Instructions issued by The Company without delay and
using all reasonable endeavours to so respond. Emergency Instructions may only be
rejected by an User on safety grounds (relating to personnel or plant) and this must be notified
to The Company immediately by telephone.
BC2.9.2.2 Emergency Instructions will always be prefixed with the words “This is an Emergency
Instruction” except in the case of:

(i) Maximum Generation Service instructed by electronic data communication facilities

where the instruction will be issued in accordance with the provisions of the Maximum
Generation Service Agreement; and

(ii) an Emergency Deenergisation Instruction, where the Emergency Deenergisation

Instruction will be pre-fixed with the words ‘This is an Emergency Deenergisation
Instruction’; and

(iii) during System Restoration situation where the Balancing Mechanism has been
suspended, any instruction given by The Company will (unless The Company specifies
otherwise) be deemed to be an Emergency Instruction and need not be pre-fixed with
the words ‘This is an Emergency Instruction’; and
(iv) during System Restoration where the Balancing Mechanism has not been suspended,
any instruction issued to Restoration Contractors or to Network Operators which are
part of an invoked Local Joint Restoration Plan will (unless The Company specifies
otherwise) be deemed to be an Emergency Instruction and need not be prefixed with
the words ‘This is an Emergency Instruction’. Equally during a System Restoration
where the Balancing Mechanism has not been suspended, any instruction to Network
Operators which are part of an activated Distribution Restoration Zone Plan will
(unless The Company specifies otherwise) be deemed to be an Emergency Instruction
and need not be prefixed by the words “This is an Emergency Instruction”.

In Scotland, any instruction from the Relevant Transmission Licensee to Restoration

Contractors which are part of an invoked Local Joint Restoration Plan and are
instructed in accordance with the provisions of that Local Joint Restoration Plan, will
be deemed to be an Emergency Instruction and need not be prefixed with the words
‘This is an Emergency Instruction’. Equally any instruction from the Relevant
Transmission Licensee to Network Operators who are party to an activated
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan and are instructed in accordance with the
provisions of that Distribution Restoration Zone Plan will be deemed to be an
Emergency Instruction and need not be prefixed with the words “This is an Emergency
Instruction”.

BC2.9.2.3 In all cases under this BC2.9, except BC2.9.1.2 (e) where The Company issues an
Emergency Instruction to a BM Participant which is not rejected under BC2.9.2.1, the
Emergency Instruction shall be treated as a Bid-Offer Acceptance. For the avoidance of
doubt, any Emergency Instruction issued to a Network Operator or to an Externally
Interconnected System Operator or in respect of a Generating Unit that does not form part
of a BM Unit, will not be treated as a Bid-Offer Acceptance.
BC2.9.2.4 In the case of BC2.9.1.2 (e) (ii) where The Company issues an Emergency Instruction
pursuant to a Maximum Generation Service Agreement, payment will be dealt with in
accordance with the CUSC and the Maximum Generation Service Agreement.
BC2.9.2.5 In the case of BC2.9.1.2 (e) (iii) where The Company issues an Emergency Deenergisation
Instruction, payment will be dealt with in accordance with the CUSC, Section 5.
BC2.9.2.6 In the case of BC2.9.1.2 (e) (i), upon receipt of an Emergency Instruction by a Generator
during a System Restoration, the provisions of Section G of the BSC relating to
compensation shall apply.
BC2.9.3 Examples of Emergency Instructions
Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024
16 of 39
BC2.9.3.1 In the case of a BM Unit or a Generating Unit, Emergency Instructions may include an
instruction for the BM Unit or the Generating Unit to operate in a way that is not consistent
with the Dynamic Parameters and/or Export and Import Limits.
BC2.9.3.2 In the case of a Generator, Emergency Instructions may include:
(a) an instruction to trip one or more Gensets (excluding Operational Intertripping); or
(b) an instruction to trip Mills or to Part Load a Generating Unit (as defined in the Glossary
and Definitions and not limited by BC2.2); or
(c) an instruction to Part Load a Power Generating Module and/or CCGT Module or Power
Park Module; or
(d) an instruction for the operation of CCGT Units within a CCGT Module (on the basis of
the information contained within the CCGT Module Matrix) when emergency
circumstances prevail (as determined by The Company in The Company's reasonable
opinion); or
(e) an instruction to generate outside normal parameters, as allowed for in 4.2 of the CUSC;
or
(f) an instruction for the operation of Generating Units within a Cascade Hydro Scheme
(on the basis of the additional information supplied in relation to individual Generating
Units) when emergency circumstances prevail (as determined by The Company in The
Company’s reasonable opinion); or
(g) an instruction for the operation of a Power Park Module (on the basis of the information
contained within the Power Park Module Availability Matrix) when emergency
circumstances prevail (as determined by The Company in The Company's reasonable
opinion).
BC2.9.3.3 Instructions to Network Operators relating to the Operational Day may include:
(a) a requirement for Demand reduction and disconnection or restoration pursuant to OC6;
(b) an instruction to effect a load transfer between Grid Supply Points;
(c) an instruction to switch in a System to Demand Intertrip Scheme;
(d) an instruction to split a network;
(e) an instruction to disconnect an item of Plant or Apparatus from the System;
(f) requirement for Embedded Generation Control or restoration pursuant to OC6B; or
(g) an instruction to activate a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan as provided for in
OC9.4.7.8.1.
BC2.9.4 Maintaining Adequate System and Localised NRAPM (Negative Reserve Active Power
Margin)
BC2.9.4.1 Where The Company is unable to satisfy the required System NRAPM or Localised NRAPM
by following the process described in BC1.5.5, The Company will issue an Emergency
Instruction to exporting BM Units for De-Synchronising on the basis of Bid-Offer Data
submitted to The Company in accordance with BC1.4.2(d). If The Company is still unable to
satisfy the required System NRAPM or Localised NRAPM then The Company may issue
Emergency Instructions to Network Operator(s) as set out under OC6B to carry
out Embedded Generation Control.

BC2.9.4.2 In the event that The Company is unable to differentiate between exporting BM Units
according to Bid-Offer Data, The Company will instruct a BM Participant to Shutdown a
specified exporting BM Unit for such period based upon the following factors:
(a) effect on power flows (resulting in the minimisation of transmission losses);

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

17 of 39
 (b) reserve capability;
(c) Reactive Power worth;
(d) Dynamic Parameters;
(e) in the case of Localised NRAPM, effectiveness of output reduction in the management
of the System Constraint.
BC2.9.4.3 Where The Company is still unable to differentiate between exporting BM Units, having
considered all the foregoing, The Company will decide which exporting BM Unit to Shutdown
by the application of a quota for each BM Participant in the ratio of each BM Participant’s
Physical Notifications.
BC2.9.4.4 Other than as provided in BC2.9.4.5 and BC2.9.4.6 below, in determining which exporting BM
Units to De-Synchronise under this BC2.9.4, The Company shall not consider in such
determination (and accordingly shall not instruct to De-Synchronise) any Generating Unit
(as defined in the Glossary and Definitions and not limited by BC2.2) within an Existing Gas
Cooled Reactor Plant.
BC2.9.4.5 The Company shall be permitted to instruct a Generating Unit (as defined in the Glossary
and Definitions and not limited by BC2.2) within an Existing AGR Plant to De-Synchronise
if the relevant Generating Unit within the Existing AGR Plant has failed to offer to be flexible
for the relevant instance at the request of The Company within the Existing AGR Plant
Flexibility Limit.
BC2.9.4.6 Notwithstanding the provisions of BC2.9.4.5 above, if the level of System NRAPM (taken
together with System constraints) or Localised NRAPM is such that it is not possible to avoid
instructing a Generating Unit (as defined in the Glossary and Definitions and not limited by
BC2.2) within an Existing Magnox Reactor Plant and/or an Existing AGR Plant whether or
not it has met requests within the Existing AGR Flexibility Limit to De-Synchronise, The
Company may, provided the power flow across each External Interconnection is either at
zero or results in an export of power from the Total System, so instruct a Generating Unit
(as defined in the Glossary and Definitions and not limited by BC2.2) within an Existing
Magnox Reactor Plant and/or an Existing AGR Plant to De-Synchronise in the case of
System NRAPM, in all cases and in the case of Localised NRAPM, when the power flow
would have a relevant effect.
BC2.9.4.7 When instructing exporting BM Units which form part of an On-Site Generator Site to reduce
generation or export under this BC2.9.4, The Company will not issue an instruction which
would reduce generation or export below the reasonably anticipated Demand of the On-Site
Generator Site. For the avoidance of doubt, it should be noted that the term “On-Site
Generator Site” only relates to Trading Units which have fulfilled the Class 1 or Class 2
requirements.

BC2.9.5 Maintaining an adequate level of Frequency Sensitive Generation

BC2.9.5.1 If, post Gate Closure, The Company determines, in its reasonable opinion, from the
information then available to it (including information relating to a Generating Unit (as defined
in the Glossary and Definitions and not limited by BC2.2) breakdown) that the number of, and
level of Primary, Secondary and High Frequency Response available from Gensets (other
than those units within Existing Gas Cooled Reactor Plant, which are permitted to operate
in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode at all times under BC3.5.3) available to operate in
Frequency Sensitive Mode, is such that it is not possible to avoid De-Synchronising
Existing Gas Cooled Reactor Plant then provided that:

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

18 of 39
 (a) there are (or, as the case may be, that The Company anticipates, in its reasonable
opinion, that at the time that the instruction is to take effect there will be) no other Gensets
generating and exporting on to the Total System which are not operating in Frequency
Sensitive Mode (or which are operating with only a nominal amount in terms of level and
duration) (unless, in The Company's reasonable opinion, necessary to assist the relief
of System constraints or necessary as a result of other System conditions); and
(b) the power flow across each External Interconnection is (or, as the case may be, is
anticipated to be at the time that the instruction is to take effect) either at zero or results
in an export of power from the Total System,
then The Company may instruct such of the Existing Gas Cooled Reactor Plant to De-
Synchronise as it is, in The Company's reasonable opinion, necessary to De-Synchronise
and for the period for which the De-Synchronising is, in The Company's reasonable opinion,
necessary.
BC2.9.5.2 If in The Company's reasonable opinion it is necessary for both the procedure in BC2.9.4 and
that set out in BC2.9.5.1 to be followed in any given situation, the procedure in BC2.9.4 will be
followed first, and then the procedure set out in BC2.9.5.1. For the avoidance of doubt, nothing
in this sub-paragraph shall prevent either procedure from being followed separately and
independently of the other.
BC2.9.6 Emergency Assistance to and from External Systems
(a) An Externally Interconnected System Operator (in its role as operator of the External
System) may request that The Company takes any available action to increase the
Active Energy transferred into its External System, or reduce the Active Energy
transferred into the National Electricity Transmission System by way of emergency
assistance if the alternative is to instruct a demand reduction on all or part of its External
System (or on the system of an Interconnector User using its External System). Such
request must be met by The Company providing this does not require a reduction of
Demand on the National Electricity Transmission System, or lead to a reduction in
security on the National Electricity Transmission System.
(b) The Company may request that an Externally Interconnected System Operator takes
any available action to increase the Active Energy transferred into the National
Electricity Transmission System, or reduce the Active Energy transferred into its
External System by way of emergency assistance if the alternative is to instruct a
Demand reduction on all or part of the National Electricity Transmission System. Such
request must be met by the Externally Interconnected System Operator providing this
does not require a reduction of Demand on its External System (or on the system of
Interconnector Users using its External System), or lead to a reduction in security on
such External System or system.
BC2.9.7 Unplanned Outages of Electronic Communication and Computing Facilities
BC2.9.7.1 In the event of an unplanned outage of the electronic data communication facilities or of The
Company’s associated computing facilities or in the event of a Planned Maintenance
Outage lasting longer than the planned duration, in relation to a post-Gate Closure period
The Company will, as soon as it is reasonably able to do so, issue a The Company
Computing System Failure notification by telephone or such other means agreed between
Users and The Company indicating the likely duration of the outage.
BC2.9.7.2 During the period of any such outage, the following provisions will apply:
(a) The Company will issue further The Company Computing System Failure notifications
by telephone or such other means agreed between Users and The Company to all BM
Participants to provide updates on the likely duration of the outage;

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

19 of 39
 (b) (i) BM Participants, not subject to the provisions of BC2.9.7.2(b)(ii), should operate in
relation to any period of time in accordance with the last Physical Notification prevailing
at Gate Closure received prior to the computer system failure in relation to each such
period of time. Such operation shall be subject to the provisions of BC2.5.1, which will
apply as if set out in this BC2.9.7.2. No further submissions of BM Unit Data or
Generating Unit Data (other than data specified in BC1.4.2(c) (Export and Import
Limits) and BC1.4.2(e) (Dynamic Parameters) should be attempted. Plant failure or
similar problems causing significant deviation from Physical Notification should be
notified to The Company by telephone by the submission of a revision to Export and
Import Limits in relation to the BM Unit or Generating Unit Data so affected;
(ii) BM Participants, who are not required to have Control Telephony or System
Telephony staffed at all times as provided for in CC7.9 or ECC7.9, should during periods
when their telephones are not staffed operate in relation to any period of time in
accordance with the last Physical Notification prevailing at Gate Closure received at
the prior of the computer system failure in relation to each such period of time. Such
operation shall be subject to the provisions of BC2.5.1, which will apply as if set out in
this BC2.9.7.2. If the BM Participants automatic equipment identifies there has been a
computer system failure then no further submissions of BM Unit Data or Generating Unit
Data (other than data specified in BC1.4.2(c) (Export and Import Limits) and BC1.4.2(e)
(Dynamic Parameters) should be attempted. For the avoidance of doubt between 08:00
and 18:00 hours the provisions of BC2.9.7.2(b)(i) shall apply.
(c) Revisions to Export and Import Limits and to Dynamic Parameters should be notified
to The Company by telephone and will be recorded for subsequent use;
(d) The Company will issue Bid-Offer Acceptances by telephone which will be recorded
for subsequent use;
(e) No data will be transferred from The Company to the BMRA until the communication
facilities are re-established.
BC2.9.7.3 The Company will advise BM Participants of the withdrawal of The Company Computing
System Failure notification following the re-establishment of the communication facilities.

BC2.9.8 Market Suspension

BC2.9.8.1 Within the GB Synchronous Area, the National Electricity Transmission System shall
be determined to be in an emergency state when operational security analysis indicates one or
more of the following situations occurring:

a) A situation where there is (or could be) a violation of one or more operational criteria as
defined under the Security and Quality of Supply Standard (SQSS); or

b) A situation when Unacceptable Frequency Conditions as defined under the System

Security and Quality of Supply Standard (SQSS) have occurred; or

c) At least one measure of the System Defence Plan is activated; or

d) There is a failure of the computing facilities used to control and operate the National
Electricity Transmission System or unplanned outages of Electronic Communication
and Computing Facilities as provided for in BC2.9.7 or the loss of communication,
computing and data facilities with other Transmission Licensees as provided for in
STCP 06-4.

BC2.9.8.2 While the National Electricity Transmission System is in an emergency state if, after
issuing National Electricity Transmission System Warnings and Emergency Instructions in
Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024
20 of 39
 accordance with (but not limited to) the requirements under OC7.4 and BC2.9, the situation
deteriorates to such an extent that it results in:-

a) a Total Shutdown, The Company will suspend the market in accordance with the
provisions of OC9.4.6; or

b) a Partial Shutdown, The Company will suspend the market but only where
the Market Suspension Threshold has been met in accordance with OC9.4.6.

BC2.10 OTHER OPERATIONAL INSTRUCTIONS AND NOTIFICATIONS

BC2.10.1 The Company may, from time to time, need to issue other instructions or notifications
associated with the operation of the National Electricity Transmission System.
BC2.10.2 Such instructions or notifications may include:
Intertrips
(a) an instruction to arm or disarm an Operational Intertripping scheme;
Tap Positions
(b) a request for a Genset step-up transformer tap position (for security assessment);
Tests
(c) an instruction to carry out tests as required under OC5, which may include the issue of
an instruction regarding the operation of CCGT Units within a CCGT Module at a Large
Power Station;
Future BM Unit Requirements
(d) a reference to any implications for future BM Unit requirements and the security of the
National Electricity Transmission System, including arrangements for a change in
output to meet post fault security requirements;
Changes to Target Frequency
(e) a notification of a change in Target Frequency, which will normally only be 49.95, 50.00,
or 50.05Hz but in exceptional circumstances as determined by The Company in its
reasonable opinion, may be 49.90 or 50.10Hz.
BC2.10.3 Where an instruction or notification under BC2.10.2 (c) or (d) results in a change to the input
or output level of the BM Unit then The Company shall issue a Bid-Offer Acceptance or
Emergency Instruction as appropriate.

BC2.11 LIAISON WITH GENERATORS FOR RISK OF TRIP AND AVR TESTING
BC2.11.1 A Generator at the Control Point for any of its Large Power Stations may request The
Company's agreement for one of the Gensets at that Power Station to be operated under a
risk of trip. The Company's agreement will be dependent on the risk to the National
Electricity Transmission System that a trip of the Genset would constitute.
BC2.11.2 (a) Each Generator at the Control Point for any of its Large Power Stations will operate
its Synchronised Gensets (excluding Power Park Modules) with:
(i) AVRs in constant terminal voltage mode with VAR limiters in service at all times.
AVR constant Reactive Power or Power Factor mode should, if installed, be
disabled; and
(ii) its generator step-up transformer tap changer selected to manual mode,
unless released from this obligation in respect of a particular Genset by The Company.

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

21 of 39
 (b) Each Generator at the Control Point for any of its Large Power Stations will operate
its Power Park Modules with a Completion Date before 1st January 2006 at unity Power
Factor at the Grid Entry Point (or User System Entry Point if Embedded).
(c) Each Generator at the Control Point for any of its Large Power Stations will operate
its Power Park Modules with a Completion Date on or after 1st January 2006 in voltage
control mode at the Grid Entry Point (or User System Entry Point if Embedded).
Constant Reactive Power or Power Factor mode should, if installed, be disabled.
(d) Where a Power System Stabiliser is fitted as part of the excitation system or voltage
control system of a Genset, it requires on-load commissioning which must be witnessed
by The Company. Only when the performance of the Power System Stabiliser has
been approved by The Company, shall it be switched into service by a Generator and
then it will be kept in service at all times unless otherwise agreed with The Company.
Further reference is made to this in CC.6.3.8 or ECC.6.3.8.
BC2.11.3 A Generator at the Control Point for any of its Power Stations may request The Company's
agreement for one of its Gensets at that Power Station to be operated with the AVR in manual
mode, or Power System Stabiliser switched out, or VAR limiter switched out. The
Company's agreement will be dependent on the risk that would be imposed on the National
Electricity Transmission System and any User System. Provided that in any event a
Generator may take such action as is reasonably necessary on safety grounds (relating to
personnel or plant) .
BC2.11.4 Each Generator shall operate its dynamically controlled OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus to
ensure that the reactive capability and voltage control performance requirements as specified
in CC.6.3.2, CC.6.3.8, CC.A.7 or ECC.6.3.2, ECC.6.3.8, ECC.A.7, ECC.A.8 and the Bilateral
Agreement can be satisfied in response to the Setpoint Voltage and Slope as instructed by
The Company at the Transmission Interface Point.

BC2.12 LIAISON WITH EXTERNALLY INTERCONNECTED SYSTEM OPERATORS

BC2.12.1 Co-Ordination Role Of Externally Interconnected System Operators
(a) The Externally Interconnected System Operator will act as the Control Point for Bid-
Offer Acceptances on behalf of Interconnector Users and will co-ordinate instructions
relating to Ancillary Services and Emergency Instructions on behalf of
Interconnector Users using its External System in respect of each Interconnector
Users BM Units.
(b) The Company will issue Bid-Offer Acceptances and instructions for Ancillary Services
relating to Interconnector Users BM Units to each Externally Interconnected System
Operator in respect of each Interconnector User using its External System.
(c) If, as a result of a reduction in the capability (in MW) of the External Interconnection,
the total of the Physical Notifications and Bid-Offer Acceptances issued for the
relevant period using that External Interconnection, as stated in the BM Unit Data,
exceeds the reduced capability (in MW) of the respective External Interconnection in
that period, then The Company shall notify the Externally Interconnected System
Operator accordingly. The Externally Interconnected System Operator should seek a
revision of Export and Import Limits from one or more of its Interconnector Users for
the remainder of the Balancing Mechanism period during which Physical Notifications
cannot be revised.

BC2.13 LIAISON WITH INTERCONNECTOR OWNERS

(a) Calculate the Interconnector Scheduled Transfer
i) Interconnector Owners shall use best endeavours to deliver an updated

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

22 of 39
 Interconnector Scheduled Transfer to NGET by 10 minutes after each Intraday
Cross-Zonal Gate Closure Time.
ii) The updated Interconnector Scheduled Transfer shall fully reflect the results of
the Single Intraday Coupling.
iii) Interconnector Owners must ensure that the updated
Interconnector Scheduled Transfer is received in its entirety and logged into
NGET’s computer systems by the time of 10 minutes after each Intraday Cross-
zonal Gate Closure Time.

APPENDIX 1 - FORM OF BID-OFFER ACCEPTANCES

BC2.A.1.1 This Appendix describes the forms of Bid-Offer Acceptances. As described in BC2.6.1 Bid-
Offer Acceptances are normally given by an automatic logging device, but in the event of
failure of the logging device, Bid-Offer Acceptances will be given by telephone.
BC2.A.1.2 For each BM Unit the Bid-Offer Acceptance will consist of a series of MW figures and
associated times.
BC2.A.1.3 The Bid-Offer Acceptances relating to CCGT Modules will assume that the CCGT Units
within the CCGT Module will operate in accordance with the CCGT Module Matrix, as
required by BC1. The Bid-Offer Acceptances relating to Cascade Hydro Schemes will
assume that the Generating Unit forming part of the Cascade Hydro Scheme will operate,
where submitted, in accordance with the Cascade Hydro Scheme Matrix submitted under
BC1. The Bid-Offer Acceptances relating to Synchronous Power Generating Modules will
assume that the Synchronous Generating Units within the Synchronous Power
Generating Module will operate in accordance with the Synchronous Power Generating
Module Matrix, as required by BC1.
BC2.A.1.4 Bid-Offer Acceptances Given By Automatic Logging Device
(a) The complete form of the Bid-Offer Acceptance is given in the EDL Message Interface
Specification which can be made available to Users on request.
(b) Bid-Offer Acceptances will normally follow the form:
(i) BM Unit Name
(ii) Instruction Reference Number
(iii) Time of instruction
(iv) Type of instruction
(v) BM Unit Bid-Offer Acceptance number
(vi) Number of MW/Time points making up instruction (minimum 2, maximum 5)
(vii) MW value and Time value for each point identified in (vi)
The times required in the instruction are input and displayed in London time, but
communicated electronically in GMT.
BC2.A.1.5 Bid-Offer Acceptances Given By Telephone
(a) All run-up/run-down rates will be assumed to be constant and consistent with Dynamic
Parameters. Each Bid-Offer Acceptance will, wherever possible, be kept simple,
drawing as necessary from the following forms and BC2.7
(b) Bid-Offer Acceptances given by telephone will normally follow the form:
(i) an exchange of operator names;

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

23 of 39
 (ii) BM Unit Name;
(iii) Time of instruction;
(iv) Type of instruction;
(v) Number of MW/Time points making up instruction (minimum 2, maximum 5)
(vi) MW value and Time value for each point identified in (v)
The times required in the instruction are expressed in London time.

For example, for a BM Unit ABCD-1 acceptance logged with a start time at 1400 hours and
with a FPN at 300MW:
“BM Unit ABCD-1 Bid-Offer Acceptance timed at 1400 hours. Acceptance consists of 4
MW/Time points as follows:
300MW at 1400 hours
400MW at 1415 hours
400MW at 1450 hours
300MW at 1500 hours”

BC2.A.1.6 Submission Of Bid-Offer Acceptance Data To The BMRA

The relevant information contained in Bid-Offer Acceptances issued by The Company will
be converted into “from” and “to” MW levels and times before they are submitted to the BMRA
by The Company.

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

24 of 39
 APPENDIX 2 - TYPE AND FORM OF ANCILLARY SERVICE
INSTRUCTIONS
BC2.A.2.1 This part of the Appendix consists of a non-exhaustive list of the forms and types of instruction
for a Genset to provide System Ancillary Services. There may be other types of
Commercial Ancillary Services and these will be covered in the relevant Ancillary Services
Agreement. In respect of the provision of Ancillary Services by Generating Units the forms
and types of instruction will be in the form of this Appendix 2 unless amended in the Ancillary
Services Agreement.
As described in CC.8 or ECC.8, System Ancillary Services consist of Part 1 and Part 2
System Ancillary Services.
Part 1 System Ancillary Services Comprise:
(a) Reactive Power supplied other than by means of synchronous or static compensators.
This is required to ensure that a satisfactory System voltage profile is maintained and
that sufficient Reactive Power reserves are maintained under normal and fault
conditions. Ancillary Service instructions in relation to Reactive Power may include:
(i) MVAr Output
(ii) Target Voltage Levels
(iii) Tap Changes
(iv) Maximum MVAr Output (‘maximum excitation’)
(v) Maximum MVAr Absorption (‘minimum excitation’)
(b) Frequency Control by means of Frequency sensitive generation. Gensets may be
required to move to or from Frequency Sensitive Mode in the combinations agreed in
the relevant Ancillary Services Agreement. They will be specifically requested to
operate so as to provide Primary Response and/or Secondary Response and/or High
Frequency Response.
Part 2 System Ancillary Services Comprise:
(c) Frequency Control by means of Fast Start.
(d) Anchor Plant Capability or Top Up Restoration Capability
(e) System to Generator Operational Intertripping
BC2.A.2.2 As Ancillary Service instructions are not part of Bid-Offer Acceptances they do not need to
be closed instructions and can cover any period of time, not just limited to the period of the
Balancing Mechanism.
BC2.A.2.3 As described in BC2.6.1, unless otherwise agreed with The Company, Ancillary Service
instructions are normally given by automatic logging device, but in the absence of, or in the
event of failure of the logging device, instructions will be given by telephone.
BC2.A.2.4 Instructions given by Automatic Logging Device
(a) The complete form of the Ancillary Service instruction is given in the EDL Message
Interface Specification which is available to Users on request from The Company.
(b) Ancillary Service instructions for Frequency Control will normally follow the form:
(i) BM Unit Name
(ii) Instruction Reference Number
(iii) Time of instruction
(iv) Type of instruction
Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024
25 of 39
 (v) Reason Code
(vi) Start Time
(c) Ancillary Service instructions for Reactive Power will normally follow the form:
(i) BM Unit Name
(ii) Instruction Reference Number
(iii) Time of instruction
(iv) Type of instruction (MVAr, VOLT or TAPP)
(v) Target Value
(vi) Target Time
The times required in the instruction are input and displayed in London time, but
communicated electronically in GMT.
BC2.A.2.5 Instructions given by Telephone
(a) Ancillary Service instructions for Frequency Control will normally follow the form:
(i) an exchange of operator names;
(ii) BM Unit Name;
(iii) Time of instruction;
(iv) Type of instruction;
(v) Start Time.
The times required in the instruction are expressed in London time.
For example, for BM Unit ABCD-1 instructed at 1400 hours to provide Primary and High
Frequency response starting at 1415 hours:
“BM Unit ABCD-1 message timed at 1400 hours. Unit to Primary and High Frequency
Response at 1415 hours”

(b) Ancillary Service instructions for Reactive Power will normally follow the form:
(a) an exchange of operator names;
(b) BM Unit Name;
(c) Time of instruction;
(d) Type of instruction (MVAr, VOLT, SETPOINT, SLOPE or TAPP)
(e) Target Value
(f) Target Time.
The times required in the instruction are expressed as London time.
For example, for BM Unit ABCD-1 instructed at 1400 hours to provide 100MVAr by 1415
hours:
“BM Unit ABCD-1 message timed at 1400 hours. MVAr instruction. Unit to plus 100 MVAr
target time 1415 hours.”

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

26 of 39
BC2.A.2.6 Reactive Power
As described in BC2.A.2.4 and BC2.A.2.5 instructions for Ancillary Services relating to
Reactive Power may consist of any of several specific types of instruction. The following table
describes these instructions in more detail:

Instruction Type of
Description
Name Instruction

MVAr Output The individual MVAr output from the Genset onto the MVAr
National Electricity Transmission System at the Grid
Entry Point (or onto the User System at the User System
Entry Point in the case of Embedded Power Stations),
namely on the higher voltage side of the generator step-up
transformer or Grid Entry Point or User System Entry
Point in the case of a Power Generating Module. In
relation to each Genset, where there is no HV indication,
The Company and the Generator will discuss and agree
equivalent MVAr levels for the corresponding LV indication.

Where a Genset is instructed to a specific MVAr output, the

Generator must achieve that output within a tolerance of +/-
25 MVAr (for Gensets in England and Wales) or the lesser
of +/-5% of rated output or 25MVAr (for Gensets in
Scotland) (or such other figure as may be agreed with The
Company) by tap changing on the generator step-up
transformer, or adjusting the Genset terminal voltage,
subject to compliance with CC.6.3.8 (a) (v), or
ECC.6.3.8.3.3 (as applicable) to a value that is equal to or
higher than 1.0p.u. of the rated terminal voltage, or a
combination of both. Once this has been achieved, the
Generator will not tap again and will not readjust the
Genset terminal voltage without prior consultation with and
the agreement of The Company, on the basis that MVAr
output will be allowed to vary with System conditions.

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

27 of 39
 Instruction Type of
Description
Name Instruction

Target Voltage Target voltage levels to be achieved by the Genset on the VOLT
Levels National Electricity Transmission System at the Grid
Entry Point (or on the User System at the User System
Entry Point in the case of Embedded Power Stations,
namely on the higher voltage side of the generator step-
up transformer or Grid Entry Point or User System Entry
Point in the case of a Power Generating Module. Where
a Genset is instructed to a specific target voltage, the
Generator must achieve that target within a tolerance of
±1 kV (or such other figure as may be agreed with The
Company) by tap changing on the generator step-up
transformer, or adjusting the Genset terminal voltage,
subject to compliance with CC.6.3.8 (a) (v) or
ECC.6.3.8.3.3 (as applicable), to a value that is equal to
or higher than 1.0p.u. of the rated terminal voltage, or a
combination of both. In relation to each Genset, where
there is no HV indication, The Company and the
Generator will discuss and agree equivalent voltage
levels for the corresponding LV indication.

Under normal operating conditions, once this target voltage

level has been achieved the Generator will not tap again
and will not readjust the Genset terminal voltage without
prior consultation with, and with the agreement of, The
Company.

However, under certain circumstances, the Generator may

be instructed to maintain a target voltage until otherwise
instructed and this will be achieved by tap changing on the
generator step-up transformer, or adjusting the Genset
terminal voltage, subject to compliance with CC.6.3.8 (a) (v)
or ECC.6.3.8.3.3 (as applicable), to a value that is equal to
or higher than 1.0p.u. of the rated terminal voltage, or a
combination of both without reference to The Company.

Setpoint Where a Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, DC SETPOINT

Voltage Converter or Power Park Module or HVDC Converter is
instructed to a specific Setpoint Voltage, the Generator
must achieve that Setpoint Voltage within a tolerance of
±0.25% (or such other figure as may be agreed with The
Company).

The Generator must maintain the specified Setpoint

Voltage target until an alternative target is received from
The Company.

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

28 of 39
 Instruction Type of
Description
Name Instruction

Slope Where a Non-Synchronous Generating Unit, DC SLOPE

Converter or Power Park Module or HVDC Converter is
instructed to a specific Slope, the Generator must
achieve that Slope within a tolerance of ±0.5% (or such
other figure as may be agreed with The Company).

The Generator must maintain the specified Slope target

until an alternative target is received from The Company.

The Generator will not be required to implement a new

Slope setting in a time of less than 1 week from the time
of the instruction.

Tap Changes Details of the required generator step-up transformer tap TAPP
changes in relation to a Genset. The instruction for tap
changes may be a Simultaneous Tap Change
instruction, whereby the tap change must be effected by
the Generator in response to an instruction from The
Company issued simultaneously to relevant Power
Stations. The instruction, which is normally preceded by
advance notice, must be effected as soon as possible, and
in any event within one minute of receipt from The
Company of the instruction.
For a Simultaneous Tap Change, change Genset
generator step-up transformer tap position by one [two] taps
to raise or lower (as relevant) System voltage, to be
executed at time of instruction.

Maximum Under certain conditions, such as low System voltage, an

MVAr Output instruction to maximum MVAr output at instructed MW
(“maximum output ("maximum excitation") may be given, and a
excitation”) Generator should take appropriate actions to maximise
MVAr output unless constrained by plant operational limits
or safety grounds (relating to personnel or plant).

Maximum Under certain conditions, such as high System voltage, an

MVAr instruction to maximum MVAr absorption at instructed MW
Absorption output ("minimum excitation") may be given, and a
("minimum Generator should take appropriate actions to maximise
excitation") MVAr absorption unless constrained by plant operational
limits or safety grounds (relating to personnel or plant).

BC2.A.2.7 In addition, the following provisions will apply to Reactive Power instructions:
(a) In circumstances where The Company issues new instructions in relation to more than
one BM Unit at the same Power Station at the same time, tapping will be carried out by
the Generator one tap at a time either alternately between (or in sequential order, if more
than two), or at the same time on, each BM Unit.
(b) Where the instructions require more than two taps per BM Unit and that means that the
instructions cannot be achieved within 2 minutes of the instruction time (or such longer
period as The Company may have instructed), the instructions must each be achieved
with the minimum of delay after the expiry of that period.

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

29 of 39
 (c) It should be noted that should System conditions require, The Company may need to
instruct maximum MVAr output to be achieved as soon as possible, but (subject to the
provisions of paragraph (BC2.A.2.7(b) above) in any event no later than 2 minutes after
the instruction is issued.
(d) An Ancillary Service instruction relating to Reactive Power may be given in respect of
CCGT Units within a CCGT Module at a Power Station or Generating Units within a
Synchronous Power Generating Module at a Power Station where running
arrangements and/or System conditions require, in both cases where exceptional
circumstances apply and connection arrangements permit.
(e) In relation to MVAr matters, MVAr generation/output is an export onto the System and is
referred to as "lagging MVAr", and MVAr absorption is an import from the System and is
referred to as "leading MVAr".
(f) It should be noted that the excitation control system constant Reactive Power output
control mode or constant Power Factor output control mode will always be disabled,
unless agreed otherwise with The Company.

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

30 of 39
APPENDIX 3 - SUBMISSION OF REVISED MVAr CAPABILITY
BC2.A.3.1 For the purpose of submitting revised MVAr data the following terms shall apply:

Full Output In the case of a Synchronous Generating Unit (as defined in the
Glossary and Definitions ((which could be part of a Synchronous
Power Generating Module) and not limited by BC2.2) is the MW
output measured at the generator stator terminals representing the
LV equivalent of the Registered Capacity at the Grid Entry Point,
and in the case of a Non-Synchronous Generating Unit (excluding
Power Park Units), HVDC Converter or DC Converter or Power
Park Module is the Registered Capacity at the Grid Entry Point.

Minimum Output In the case of a Synchronous Generating Unit (as defined in the
Glossary and Definitions ((which could be part of a Synchronous
Power Generating Module) and not limited by BC2.2 ) is the MW
output measured at the generator stator terminals representing the
LV equivalent of the Minimum Generation or Minimum Stable
Operating Level at the Grid Entry Point, and in the case of a Non-
Synchronous Generating Unit (excluding Power Park Units),
HVDC Converter or DC Converter or Power Park Module is the
Minimum Generation or Minimum Stable Operating Level or
Minimum Active Power Transmission Capacity at the Grid Entry
Point.

BC2.A.3.2 The following provisions apply to faxed submission of revised MVAr data:
(a) The fax must be transmitted to The Company (to the relevant location in accordance with
GC6) and must contain all the sections from the relevant part of Annexure 1 and from
either Annexure 2 or 3 (as applicable) but with only the data changes set out. The
"notification time" must be completed to refer to the time of transmission, where the time
is expressed as London time.
(b) Upon receipt of the fax, The Company will acknowledge receipt by sending a fax back to
the User. The acknowledgement will either state that the fax has been received and is
legible or will state that it (or part of it) is not legible and will request re-transmission of
the whole (or part) of the fax.
(c) Upon receipt of the acknowledging fax the User will, if requested, re-transmit the whole
or the relevant part of the fax.
(d) The provisions of paragraphs (b) and (c) then apply to that re-transmitted fax.

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

31 of 39
 APPENDIX 3 - ANNEXURE 1

Optional
Logo

Company name REVISED REACTIVE POWER

CAPABILITY DATA

TO: National Electricity Transmission Fax telephone No.

System Control Centre

Number of pages inc. header:.............................

Sent By : ........................................................................................................

Return Acknowledgement Fax to ....................................................................

For Retransmission or Clarification ring..........................................................

Acknowledged by The Company: (Signature)

................................................................................

Acknowledgement time and date

....................................................................................

Legibility of FAX :

Acceptable

Unacceptable ( Resend FAX )

(List pages if appropriate)

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

32 of 39
Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024
33 of 39
 APPENDIX 3 - ANNEXURE 2

To: National Electricity Transmission System Control Centre

From : [Company Name & Location]

REVISED REACTIVE POWER CAPABILITY DATA – GENERATING UNITS EXCLUDING POWER PARK
MODULES AND DC CONVERTERS

Notification Time (HH:MM): Notification Date (DD/MM/YY):

Start Time (HH:MM): Start Date (DD/MM/YY):

Generating Unit*

* For a Synchronous Power Generating Module and/or CCGT Module and/or a Cascade Hydro Scheme,
the redeclaration is for a Generating Unit within a Synchronous Power Generating Module and/or CCGT
Module and/or Cascade Hydro Scheme. For BM Units, quote The Company BM Unit id, for other units
quote the Generating Unit id used for OC2.4.1.2 Outage Planning submissions. Generating Unit has the
meaning given in the Glossary and Definitions and is not limited by BC2.2.

REVISION TO THE REACTIVE POWER CAPABILITY AT THE GENERATING UNIT STATOR TERMINALS
(at rated terminal volts) AS STATED IN THE RELEVANT ANCILLARY SERVICES AGREEMENT:

MW MINIMUM (MVAr +ve MAXIUM (MVAr +ve

for lag, -ve for lead) for lag, -ve for lead)

AT RATED MW

AT FULL OUTPUT (MW)

AT MINIMUM
OUTPUT (MW)

COMMENTS e.g. generator transformer tap restrictions, predicted end time if known

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Redeclaration made by (Signature)

_________________________________________________

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

34 of 39
 APPENDIX 3 - ANNEXURE 3

To: National Electricity Transmission System Control Centre

From : [Company Name & Location]

REVISED REACTIVE POWER CAPABILITY DATA – POWER PARK MODULES, HVDC CONVERTERS
AND DC CONVERTERS

Notification Time (HH:MM): Notification Date (DD/MM/YY):

Start Time (HH:MM): Start Date (DD/MM/YY):

Power Park Module / DC Converter*

* For BM Units quote The Company BM Unit id, for other units quote the id used for OC2.4.1.2 Outage Planning
submissions

Start Time/Date (if not effective immediately)

REVISION TO THE REACTIVE POWER CAPABILITY AT THE COMMERCIAL BOUNDARY AS STATED

IN THE RELEVANT ANCILLARY SERVICES AGREEMENT:

MINIMUM (MVAr +ve MAXIMUM (MVAr +ve for

for lag, -ve for lead) lag, -ve for lead)

AT RATED MW

AT 50% OF RATED
MW
AT 20% OF RATED MW

BELOW 20% OF RATED MW

AT 0% OF RATED
MW

COMMENTS e.g. generator transformer tap restrictions, predicted end time if known

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Redeclaration made by (Signature)

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

35 of 39
_________________________________________________

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

36 of 39
APPENDIX 4 - SUBMISSION OF AVAILABILITY OF FREQUENCY
SENSITIVE MODE
BC2.A.4.1 For the purpose of submitting availability of Frequency Sensitive Mode, this process only
relates to the provision of response under the Frequency Sensitive Mode and does not cover
the provision of response under the Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode.
BC2.A.4.2 The following provisions apply to the faxed submission of the Frequency Sensitive Mode
availability;
(a) The fax must be transmitted to The Company (to the relevant location in accordance with
GC6) and must contain all the sections relevant to Appendix 4 - Annexure1 but with only
the data changes set out. The “notification time” must be completed to refer to the time
and date of transmission, where the time is expressed in London time.
(b) Upon receipt of the fax, The Company will acknowledge receipt by sending a fax back to
the User. This acknowledging fax should be in the format of Appendix 4 – Annexure 1.
The acknowledgement will either state that the fax has been received and is legible or
will state that it (or part of it) is not legible and will request re-transmission of the whole
(or part) of the fax.
(c) Upon receipt of the acknowledging fax the User will, if requested re-transmit the whole or
the relevant part of the fax.
(d) The provisions of paragraph (b) and (c) then apply to the re-transmitted fax.
BC2.A.4.3 The User shall ensure the availability of operating in Frequency Sensitive Mode is restored
as soon as reasonably practicable and will notify The Company using the format of Appendix
4 – Annexure 1. In the event of a sustained unavailability of Frequency Sensitive Mode, The
Company may seek to confirm compliance with the relevant requirements in the CC or ECC
through the process in OC5 or ECP.

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

37 of 39
 APPENDIX 4 - ANNEXURE 1

To: National Electricity Transmission System Control Centre

From : [Company Name & Location]

Submission of availability of Frequency Sensitive Mode

Notification Time (HH:MM): Notification Date (DD/MM/YY):

Start Time (HH:MM): Start Date (DD/MM/YY):

Genset or DC Converter

The availability of the above unit to operate in Frequency Sensitive Mode is as follows:

All contract modes: Available / Unavailable [delete as applicable]; or

Change to the availability of individual contract modes:

Contract Mode e.g. A Availability for operation in Frequency Sensitive Mode [Y/N]

COMMENTS e.g. reason for submission, predicted end time if known

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Redeclaration made by (Signature)______________________________________________

Receipt Acknowledgement from The Company

Legible (tick box) Illegible (tick box)

Explanation:

Time:
Date:
Signature:

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

38 of 39
 < END OF BALANCING CODE 2

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC2 04 March 2024

39 of 39
 BALANCING CODE NO. 3
(BC3)

FREQUENCY CONTROL PROCESS

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

BC3.1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................. 2
BC3.2 OBJECTIVE......................................................................................................................... 2
BC3.3 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................... 2
BC3.4 MANAGING SYSTEM FREQUENCY ....................................................................................... 3
BC3.4.1 Statutory Requirements ................................................................................................ 3
BC3.4.2 Target Frequency ........................................................................................................ 3
BC3.4.3 Electric Time............................................................................................................... 3
BC3.5 RESPONSE FROM GENSETS ............................................................................................... 3
BC3.5.1 Capability ................................................................................................................... 3
BC3.5.2 Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode................................................................................. 3
BC3.5.3 Existing Gas Cooled Reactor Plant /Power Park Modules before 1 January 2006 .................. 3
BC3.5.4 Frequency Sensitive Mode............................................................................................ 4
BC3.5.5 System Frequency Induced Change............................................................................... 4
BC3.6 RESPONSE TO LOW FREQUENCY ....................................................................................... 5
BC3.6.1 Low Frequency Relay Initiated Response From Gensets ................................................... 5
BC3.6.2 Low Frequency Relay Initiated Response From Demand ................................................... 5
BC3.7 RESPONSE TO HIGH FREQUENCY REQUIRED FROM SYNCHRONISED. GENSETS ................ 6
BC3.7.1 Plant In Frequency Sensitive Mode Instructed To Provide High Frequency Response............ 7
BC3.7.2 Plant In Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode ..................................................................... 7
BC3.7.3 Plant Operation To Below Minimum Generation ............................................................... 7
BC3.7.5 Information Update To The Company ............................................................................. 8
BC3.7.6 Existing Gas Cooled Reactor Plant /Power Park Modules Before 1 January 2006.................. 9
BC3.7.7 Externally Interconnected System Operators ................................................................... 9

Issue 6 Revision 0 BC3 05 March 2021

i
BC3.1 INTRODUCTION
BC3.1.1 BC3 sets out the procedure for The Company to use in relation to EU Code Users and GB
Code Users to undertake System Frequency control. System Frequency will be
controlled by response from Gensets (and DC Converters at DC Converter Stati ons and
HVDC Systems) operating in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode or Frequency Sensitive
Mode, by the issuing of instructions to Gensets (and DC Converters at DC Converter
Stations and HVDC Systems) and by control of Demand. The requirements for Frequency
control are determined by the consequences and effectiveness of the Balancing
Mechanism, and accordingly, BC3 is complementary to BC1 and BC2.
BC3.1.2 Inter-Relationship With Ancillary Services
The provision of response (other than by operation in Limited Frequency Sensiti ve Mode
or in accordance with BC3.7.1(c)) in order to contribute towards Frequency control, as
described in BC3, by Generators or DC Converter Station owners or HVDC System
Owners will be an Ancillary Service. Ancillary Services are divided into three categories,
System Ancillary Services Parts 1 and 2 and Commercial Ancillary Services. S yste m
Ancillary Services, Parts 1 and 2, are those Ancillary Services listed in CC.8.1 (as
applicable to GB Code Users) or ECC8.1 (as applicable to EU Code Users); those in Part 1
of CC.8.1 or Part 1 of ECC.8.1 are those for which the Connection Conditions or
European Connection Conditions (as applicable) require the capability as a c ondition of
connection and those in Part 2 are those which may be agreed to be provided by Users and
which can only be utilised by The Company if so agreed. Commercial Ancillary Servi ces
like those System Ancillary Services set out in Part 2 of CC.8.1 (as applicable to GB Code
Users) or Part 2 of ECC.8.1 (as applicable to EU Code Users), may be agreed to be
provided by Users and which can only be utilised by The Company if so agreed.
BC3.1.3 The provision of Frequency control services, if any, from an External System via a DC
Converter Station or HVDC System will be provided for in the Ancillary Services
Agreement and/or Bilateral Agreement with the DC Converter Stati on owner or HV DC
System Owner and/or any other relevant agreements with the relevant EISO.
BC3.1.4 The provision of Frequency control services, if any, from an Offshore Power Station
connected to an Offshore Transmission System that includes a Transmission DC
Converter will be facilitated (where necessary) through appropriate data signals provided t o
the Offshore Power Station by the Relevant Transmission Licensee in accordance wit h
the STC.

BC3.2 OBJECTIVE
The procedure for The Company to direct System Frequency control is intended to enable
(as far as possible) The Company to meet the statutory requirements of System
Frequency control.

BC3.3 SCOPE
BC3 applies to The Company and to GB Code Users and EU Code Users, whic h in t his
BC3 means:
(a) GB Generators with regard to their Large Power Stations (except those Large Power
Stations with a Registered Capacity less than 50MW comprising of Power Park
Modules),
(b) EU Generators with regard to their Large Power Stations,
(c) Network Operators,
(d) DC Converter Station owners and HVDC System Owners,
(e) other providers of Ancillary Services,
(f) Externally Interconnected System Operators.

Issue 6 Revision 0 BC3 05 March 2021

2 of 10
BC3.4 MANAGING SYSTEM FREQUENCY
BC3.4.1 Statutory Requirements
When The Company determines it is necessary (by having monitored the System
Frequency), it will, as part of the procedure set out in BC2, issue instructions (including
instructions for Commercial Ancillary Services) in order to seek to regulate System
Frequency to meet the statutory requirements of Frequency control. Gensets (except
those owned and/or operated by GB Generators comprising of a Power Park Modul e in a
Power Station with a Registered Capacity less than 50MW and those owned and/or
operated by GB Generators comprising of a Power Park Module in Scotland with a
Completion Date before 1 July 2004) and DC Converters at DC Converter Stations or
HVDC Systems when transferring Active Power to the Total System, operating in
Frequency Sensitive Mode will be instructed by The Company to operate taking due
account of the Target Frequency notified by The Company.
BC3.4.2 Target Frequency
The Company will give 15 minutes notice of variation in Target Frequency.
BC3.4.3 Electric Time
The Company will endeavour (in so far as it is able) to control electric clock t ime t o wit hin
plus or minus 10 seconds by specifying changes to Target Frequency, by acc ept ing bids
and offers in the Balancing Mechanism. Errors greater than plus or minus 10 seconds may
be temporarily accepted at The Company 's reasonable discretion.

BC3.5 RESPONSE FROM GENSETS (AND DC CONVERTERS AT DC CONVERTER STATIONS

AND HVDC SYSTEMS WHEN TRANSFERRING ACTIVE POWER TO THE TOTAL
SYSTEM)
BC3.5.1 Capability
Each Genset (except those owned and/or operated by GB Generators and c ompris ing of
Power Park Modules in a Power Station with a Registered Capacity less than 50MW and
those owned and/or operated by GB Generators and comprising of Power Park Modules in
Scotland with a Completion Date before 1 July 2004) and each DC Converter at a DC
Converter Station and HVDC System must at all times have the capability to operate
automatically so as to provide response to changes in Frequency in ac cordance wit h t he
requirements of CC.6.3.7 or ECC.6.3.7 (as applicable) in order to contribute to containing
and correcting the System Frequency within the statutory requirements of Frequency
control. For DC Converters at DC Converter Stations and HVDC Systems, BC3.1.3 als o
applies. In addition, each Genset (and each DC Converter at a DC Converter Station and
HVDC System) must at all times have the capability to operate in a Limited Frequency
Sensitive Mode.
BC3.5.2 Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode
Each Synchronised Genset producing Active Power (and each DC Converter at a DC
Converter Station and HVDC System) must operate at all times in a Limited Frequency
Sensitive Mode (unless instructed in accordance with BC3.5.4 below to operate in
Frequency Sensitive Mode). Operation in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode must
achieve the capability requirement described in CC.6.3.3 (in respect of GB Code Users) and
ECC.6.3.3 (in respect of EU Code Users) and for System Frequencies up t o 50. 4Hz and
shall be deemed not to be in contravention of CC.6.3.7 or ECC.6.3.7 (as applicable).
BC3.5.3 (a) Existing Gas Cooled Reactor Plant
The Company will permit Existing Gas Cooled Reactor Plant other than Frequency
Sensitive AGR Units to operate in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode at all times.

Issue 6 Revision 0 BC3 05 March 2021

3 of 10
 (b) Power Park Modules belonging to GB Generators In Operation Before 1 January
2006
The Company will permit Power Park Modules which were in operation before 1
January 2006 and owned and/or operated by GB Generators to operate in Limited
Frequency Sensitive Mode at all times. For the avoidance of doubt, Power Park
Modules owned and/or operated by GB Generators in England and Wales with a
Completion Date on or after 1 January 2006 and Power Park Modules owned and/ or
operated by GB Generators in operation in Scotland after 1 January 2006 with a
completion date after 1 July 2004 and in a Power Station with a Registered Capaci ty
of 50MW or more, will be required to operate in both Limited Frequency Sensitive
Mode and Frequency Sensitive Mode of operation depending on System condit ions .
For the avoidance of doubt, these requirements do not apply to EU Generators.
BC3.5.4 Frequency Sensitive Mode
(a) The Company may issue an instruction to a Genset (or DC Converter at a DC
Converter Station or HVDC System if agreed as described in BC3.1.3) to operat e so
as to provide Primary Response and/or Secondary Response and/or High
Frequency Response (in the combinations agreed in the relevant Ancillary S ervices
Agreement). When so instructed, the Genset or DC Converter at a DC Converter
Station or HVDC System must operate in accordance with the instruction and will no
longer be operating in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode, but by being so instructed
will be operating in Frequency Sensitive Mode.
(b) Frequency Sensitive Mode is the generic description for a Genset (or DC Conve rte r
at a DC Converter Station or HVDC System) operating in accordance with an
instruction to operate so as to provide Primary Response and/or Secondary
Response and/or High Frequency Response (in the combinations agreed in the
relevant Ancillary Services Agreement).
(c) The magnitude of the response in each of those categories instructed will be in
accordance with the relevant Ancillary Services Agreement with the Generator or DC
Converter Station owner or HVDC System Owner.
(d) Such instruction will continue until countermanded by The Company or until;
(i) the Genset is De-Synchronised; or
(ii) the DC Converter or HVDC System ceases to transfer Active Power to or from
the Total System subject to the conditions of any relevant agreement relating to
the operation of the DC Converter Station or HVDC System,
whichever is the first to occur.
(e) The Company will not so instruct Generators in respect of Existing Gas Cooled
Reactor Plant other than Frequency Sensitive AGR Units.
(f) The Company will not so instruct GB Generators in respect of Power Park Modules:
(i) in Scotland in a Power Station with a Completion Date before 1 July 2004; or,
(ii) in a Power Station with a Registered Capacity of less than 50MW.
(iii) in England and Wales with a Completion Date before 1 January 2006.
BC3.5.5 System Frequency Induced Change
A System Frequency induced change in the Active Power output of a Genset (or DC
Converter at a DC Converter Station or HVDC System) which assists recovery to Target
Frequency must not be countermanded by a Generator or DC Converter Station owner or
HVDC System Owner except where it is done purely on safety grounds (relat ing t o eit her
personnel or plant) or, where necessary, to ensure the integrity of the Power Station or DC
Converter Station or HVDC System.

Issue 6 Revision 0 BC3 05 March 2021

4 of 10
BC3.6 RESPONSE TO LOW FREQUENCY
BC3.6.1 Low Frequency Relay initiated Response From Gensets and DC Converters at DC
Converter Stations and HVDC Systems
(a) The Company may utilise Gensets (and DC Converters at DC Conve rte r S tati ons
and HVDC Systems) with the capability of Low Frequency Relay initiated res ponse
as:
(i) synchronisation and generation from standstill;
(ii) generation from zero generated output;
(iii) increase in generated output;
(iv) increase in DC Converter or HVDC System output to the Total System (if so
agreed as described in BC3.1.3);
(v) decrease in DC Converter or HVDC System input from the Total System (if so
agreed as described in BC3.1.3);
in establishing its requirements for Operating Reserve.

(b) (i) The Company will specify within the range agreed with Generators and/or EIS Os
and/or DC Converter Station owners or HVDC System Owners (if so agreed as
described in BC3.1.3), Low Frequency Relay settings to be applied to Gensets or
DC Converters at DC Converter Stations or HVDC Systems pursuant to
BC3.6.1 (a) and instruct the Low Frequency Relay initiated res ponse plac ed in
and out of service.
(ii) Generators and/or EISOs and/or DC Converter Station owners or HVDC System
Owners (if so agreed as described in BC3.1.3) will comply with The Company
instructions for Low Frequency Relay settings and Low Frequency Relay
initiated response to be placed in or out of service. Generators or DC Conve rte r
Station owners or HVDC System Owners or EISOs may not alter such Low
Frequency Relay settings or take Low Frequency Relay initiated response out of
service without The Company's agreement (such agreement not to be
unreasonably withheld or delayed), except for safety reasons.
BC3.6.2 Low Frequency Relay Initiated Response from Demand and other Demand Modification
arrangements (which may include a DC Converter Station or HVDC System when Importing
Active Power from the Total System)
(a) The Company may, pursuant to an Ancillary Services Agreement, ut ilis e De mand
with the capability of Low Frequency Relay initiated Demand reduction in establishing
its requirements for Frequency Control.
(b) (i) The Company will specify within the range agreed, the Low Frequency Relay
settings to be applied pursuant to BC3.6.2 (a), the amount of Demand reduction to
be available and will instruct the Low Frequency Relay initiated response to be
placed in or out of service.
(ii) Users will comply with The Company instructions for Low Frequency Relay
settings and Low Frequency Relay initiated Demand reduction to be placed in or
out of service. Users may not alter such Low Frequency Relay settings or take
Low Frequency Relay initiated response out of service without The Company's
agreement, except for safety reasons.
(iii) In the case of any such Demand which is Embedded, The Company will notify
the relevant Network Operator of the location of the Demand, the amount of
Demand reduction to be available, and the Low Frequency Relay settings.
(c) The Company may also utilise other Demand modification arrangements purs uant t o
an agreement for Ancillary Services, in order to contribute towards Operating
Reserve.

Issue 6 Revision 0 BC3 05 March 2021

5 of 10
BC3.7 RESPONSE TO HIGH FREQUENCY REQUIRED FROM SYNCHRONISED GENSETS
(AND DC CONVERTERS AT DC CONVERTER STATIONS AND HVDC SYSTEMS W HEN
TRANSFERRING ACTIVE POWER TO THE TOTAL SYSTEM)
BC3.7.1 Plant in Frequency Sensitive Mode instructed to provide High Frequency Response
(a) Each Synchronised Genset (or each DC Converter at a DC Converter Station or
HVDC System) in respect of which the Generator or DC Converter Station owner or
HVDC System Owner and/or EISO has been instructed to operate so as to provide
High Frequency Response, which is producing Active Power and which is operat ing
above the Designed Minimum Operating Level, is required to reduce Acti ve P ower
output in response to an increase in System Frequency above the Target Frequency
(or such other level of Frequency as may have been agreed in an Ancillary S ervi ces
Agreement). The Target Frequency is normally 50.00 Hz except where modified as
specified under BC3.4.2.
(b) (i) The rate of change of Active Power output with respect to Frequency up to 50.5
Hz shall be in accordance with the provisions of the relevant Ancillary Services
Agreement with each Generator or DC Converter Station owner or HVDC
System Owner. If more than one rate is provided for in the Ancillary Services
Agreement, The Company will instruct the rate when the instruction to operate to
provide High Frequency Response is given.
(ii) The reduction in Active Power output by the amount provided for in the relevant
Ancillary Services Agreement must be fully achieved within 10 seconds of the
time of the Frequency increase and must be sustained at no lesser reduction
thereafter.
(iii) It is accepted that the reduction in Active Power output may not be below the
Designed Minimum Operating Level.
(c) In addition to the High Frequency Response provided, the Genset (or DC Conve rter
at a DC Converter Station or HVDC System) must continue to reduce Acti ve P ower
output in response to an increase in System Frequency above 50.5 Hz at a minimum
rate of 2 per cent of output per 0.1 Hz deviation of System Frequency above that level,
such reduction to be achieved within five minutes of the rise to or above 50.5 Hz. For a
Power Station with a Completion Date after 1st January 2009, this reduction in Active
Power should be delivered in accordance with in (i) to (iv) below. For the avoidanc e of
doubt, the provision of this reduction in Active Power output is not an Ancillary
Service.
(i) The reduction in Active Power output must be continuously and linearly
proportional as far as practical, to the excess of Frequency above 50.5 Hz and
must be provided increasingly with time over the period specified in (iii) below.
(ii) As much as possible of the proportional reduction in Active Power output must
result from the frequency control device (or speed governor) action and must be
achieved within 10 seconds of the time of the Frequency increase above 50.5 Hz.
(iii) The residue of the proportional reduction in Active Power output which results
from automatic action of the Genset (or DC Converter at a DC Converter Station
or HVDC System) output control devices other than the frequency control devices
(or speed governors) must be achieved within 3 minutes from the time of the
Frequency increase above 50.5 Hz.
(iv) Any further residue of the proportional reduction which results from non-automatic
action initiated by the Generator or DC Converter Station owner or HVDC
System Owner shall be initiated within 2 minutes, and achieved within 5 minutes,
of the time of the Frequency increase above 50.5 Hz.

Issue 6 Revision 0 BC3 05 March 2021

6 of 10
BC3.7.2 Plant In Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode
BC.3.7.2.1 Plant in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode applicable to GB Code Users
The following requirements are applicable to GB Code Users in respect of Plant operat ing
in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode. For the avoidance of doubt, these requirements do
not apply to EU Generators and HVDC System Owners for whom the requirements of
BC.3.7.2.2 apply.
(a) Each Synchronised Genset (or DC Converter at a DC Converter Station) operat ing
in a Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode which is producing Active Power is also
required to reduce Active Power output in response to System Frequency when t his
rises above 50.4 Hz. In the case of DC Converters at DC Converter Stations, the
provisions of BC3.7.7 are also applicable. For the avoidance of doubt, the provis ion of
this reduction in Active Power output is not an Ancillary Service. Suc h provis ion is
known as "Limited High Frequency Response".

(b) (i) The rate of change of Active Power output must be at a minimum rate of 2 per
cent of output per 0.1 Hz deviation of System Frequency above 50.4 Hz.
(ii) The reduction in Active Power output must be continuously and linearly
proportional, as far as is practicable, to the excess of Frequency above 50. 4 Hz
and must be provided increasingly with time over the period specified in (iii) below.
(iii) As much as possible of the proportional reduction in Active P ower out put must
result from the frequency control device (or speed governor) action and must be
achieved within 10 seconds of the time of the Frequency increase above 50.4 Hz.
(iv) The residue of the proportional reduction in Active Power output which results
from automatic action of the Genset (or DC Converter at a DC Converter
Station) output control devices other than the frequency control devices (or speed
governors) must be achieved within 3 minutes from the time of the Frequency
increase above 50.4 Hz.
(v) Any further residue of the proportional reduction which results from non-automat ic
action initiated by the Generator or DC Converter Station owner shall be initiated
within 2 minutes, and achieved within 5 minutes, of the time of the Frequency
increase above 50.4 Hz.
(c) Each GB Code User in respect of a Genset (or DC Converter at a DC Converter
Station) which is providing Limited High Frequency Response in ac cordance wit h
BC3.7.2 must continue to provide it until the Frequency has returned to or below 50. 4
Hz or until otherwise instructed by The Company.
BC.3.7.2.2 Plant in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode applicable to EU Code Users
EU Code Users in respect of Gensets and HVDC Systems are required to operate in
Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode at all times unless ins truc ted by The Com pany t o
operate in Frequency Senstive Mode. Where EU Code Users Gensets and HVDC
Systems are required to operate in Limited Frequency Senstive Mode , then the
requirements of ECC.6.3.7.1 and ECC.6.3.7.2 shall apply. For the avoidance of doubt , t he
requirements defined in BC.3.7.2.1 do not apply to New Generators and HV DC S yste m
Owners.

BC3.7.3 Plant Operation to below Minimum Generation or Minimum Stable Operating Level

Issue 6 Revision 0 BC3 05 March 2021

7 of 10
 (a) As stated in CC.A.3.2 and ECC.A.3.2, steady state operation below Minimum
Generation or the Minimum Stable Operating Level or the Minimum Acti ve P ower
Transmission Capacity is not expected but if System operating conditions cause
operation below the Minimum Generation or Minimum Stable Operating Level or the
Minimum Active Power Transmission Capacity which gives rise to operational
difficulties for the Genset (or DC Converter at a DC Converter Station or HVDC
System) then The Company should not, upon request, unreasonably withhold iss uing
a Bid-Offer Acceptance to return the Power Generating Module and/or Generati ng
Unit and/or CCGT Module and/or Power Park Module or DC Converter or HVDC
System to an output not less than the Minimum Generation or the Mini mum S tabl e
Operating Level or the Minimum Active Power Transmission Capacity. In the c as e
of a DC Converter or HVDC System not participating in the Balancing Mechani sm ,
then The Company will, upon request, attempt to return the DC Converter or HV DC
System to an output not less than Minimum Generation or Minimum Stable
Operating Level or the Minimum Active Power Transmission Ca pacity or t o z ero
transfer or to reverse the transfer of Active Power.
(b) It is possible that a Synchronised Genset (or a DC Converter at a DC Converter
Station or HVDC System) which responded as required under BC3.7.1 or B C3. 7.2 t o
an excess of System Frequency, as therein described, will (if the output reduct ion is
large or if the Genset (or a DC Converter at a DC Converter Station or HVDC
System) output has reduced to below the Designed Minimum Operating Level or
Minimum Regulating Level or the Minimum Active Power Transmission Ca pacity
trip after a time.
(c) All reasonable efforts should in the event be made by the Generator or DC Converter
Station owner or HVDC System Owner to avoid such tripping, provided that the
System Frequency is below 52Hz.
(d) If the System Frequency is at or above 52Hz, the requirement to make all reas onable
efforts to avoid tripping does not apply and the Generator or DC Converter Station
owner or HVDC System Owner is required to take action to protect the Power
Generating Modules and/or Generating Units and/or Power P ark Modules or DC
Converters or HVDC Systems as specified in CC.6.3.13 or ECC.6.3.13.1.
(e) In the event of the System Frequency becoming stable above 50.5Hz, after all Genset
and DC Converter and HVDC System action as specified in BC3.7.1 and BC3.7.2 has
taken place, The Company will issue appropriate Bid-Offer Acceptances and/or
Ancillary Service instructions, which may include Emergency Instructions under BC2
to trip Gensets (or, in the case of DC Converters at DC Converter Stations or HV DC
Systems, to stop or reverse the transfer of Active Power) so that the Frequency
returns to below 50.5Hz and ultimately to Target Frequency.
(f) If the System Frequency has become stable above 52Hz, after all Genset and DC
Converter or HVDC System action as specified in BC3.7.1 and BC3.7.2 has taken
place, The Company will issue Emergency Instructions under BC2 to trip appropriate
Gensets (or in the case of DC Converters at DC Converter Stations or HVDC
Systems to stop or reverse the transfer of Active Power) to bring the System
Frequency to below 52Hz and follow this with appropriate Bid-Offer Acceptances or
Ancillary Service instructions or further Emergency Instructions under BC2 to ret urn
the System Frequency to below 50.5 Hz and ultimately to Target Frequency.
BC3.7.4 The Generator or DC Converter Station owner or HVDC System Owner will not be in
breach of any of the provisions of BC2 by following the provisions of BC3.7.1, BC3.7.2 or
BC3.7.3.
BC3.7.5 Information update to The Company
In order that The Company can deal with emergency conditions effectively, it needs as
much up to date information as possible and accordingly The Company must be informed of
the action taken in accordance with BC3.7.1(c) and BC3.7.2 as soon as possible and in any
event within 7 minutes of the rise in System Frequency, directly by telephone from the
Control Point for the Power Station or DC Converter Station or HVDC System.
Issue 6 Revision 0 BC3 05 March 2021
8 of 10
BC3.7.6 (a) Existing Gas Cooled Reactor Plant
For the avoidance of doubt, Generating Units within Existing Gas Cool ed Reactor
Plant are required to comply with the applicable provisions of this BC3.7 (which, for t he
avoidance of doubt, other than for Frequency Sensitive AGR Units, do not include
BC3.7.1).
(b) Power Park Modules In Operation Before 1 January 2006.
For the avoidance of doubt, GB Generators who own and/or operate Power Park
Modules which are in operation before 1 January 2006 (irrespective of their
Completion Date) are required to comply with the applicable provisions of t his B C3.7
(which, for the avoidance of doubt do not include BC3.7.1).

BC3.7.7 Externally Interconnected System Operators

The Company will use reasonable endeavours to ensure that, if System Frequency ris es
above 50.4Hz, and an Externally Interconnected System Operator (in its role as operat or
of the External System) is transferring power into the National Electricity Transm issi on
System from its External System, the amount of power transferred in to the National
Electricity Transmission System from the System of that Externally Interconnected
System Operator is reduced at a rate equivalent to (or greater than) that which applies for
Synchronised Gensets operating in Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode which are
producing Active Power. This will be done either by utilising existing arrangements whic h
are designed to achieve this, or by issuing Emergency Instructions under BC2.

< END OF BALANCING CODE 3 >

Issue 6 Revision 0 BC3 05 March 2021

9 of 10
Issue 6 Revision 0 BC3 05 March 2021
10 of 10
 BALANCING CODE NO. 4
(BC4)

TERRE PROCESSES

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

BC4.1 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................................2
BC4.2 OBJECTIVE .................................................................................................................................2
BC4.3 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................2
BC4.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR BM PARTICIPANTS WHO WISH TO PARTICIPATE IN TERRE ........2
BC4.4.1 RR Provider Prequalification Prequalification Timelines ..................................................2
BC4.4.2 Minimum Technical Requirements ...................................................................................2
BC4.4.3 Prequalification Timelines .................................................................................................3
BC4.4.4 Requalification criteria ......................................................................................................3
BC4.5 SUBMISSION OF TERRE RELATED DATA BY BM PARTICIPANTS .......................................3
BC4.5.1 Communication from BM Participants to The Company ..................................................3
BC4.5.2 RR Provider Data submissions before TERRE Gate Closure ..........................................4
BC4.5.3 Re-submission of parameters by BM Participants before TERRE Gate Closure .............5
BC4.5.4 Defaulting Rules for TERRE Bids .....................................................................................5
BC4.6 Processing of TERRE Bids before passing to the TERRE Central Platfom ...............................5
BC4.6.1 Cases where a TERRE Bid will be Restricted ..................................................................5
BC4.7 Instructing BM Participants ..........................................................................................................5
BC4.7.1 Communication from The Company to BM Participants ..................................................5
BC4.7.2 Creating RR Instructions from RR Acceptances ..............................................................5
BC4.7.3 Cases where RR Instructions may not be issued .............................................................6
BC4.7.4 Infeasibility of RR Acceptances ........................................................................................6
BC4.8 Publication of TERRE Data .........................................................................................................6
BC4.8.2 Publication of Data at the National Level ..........................................................................6
BC4.9 Outages of computer systems leading to the suspension of the TERRE market .......................6
BC4.10 TERRE Market Suspension .......................................................................................................7

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC4 04 March 2024

BC4.1 INTRODUCTION
Balancing Code No 4 (BC4) sets out the procedures for:
(a) prequalifation requirements for participation in TERRE by BM Participants;
(b) submission of data by BM Participants wishing to take part in TERRE;
(c) validation of data from BM Participants wishing to take part in TERRE;
(d) issuing of RR Instructions; and
(e) publication of TERRE related data.

BC4.2 OBJECTIVE
This procedure facilitates the participation of BM Participants in the TERRE market.
Particpation in TERRE is voluntary for BM Participants.

BC4.3 SCOPE
BC4 applies to :-
(a) The Company;
(b) BM Participants;
(b) Externally Interconnected System Operators; and
(c) Network Operators.

BC4.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR BM PARTICIPANTS WHO WISH TO PARTICIPATE IN TERRE

The Company shall ensure that each relevant Balancing Service prequalification process
shall, as a minimum, require the RR provider to submit a self-certification of the RR Minimum
Technical Requirements as defined in BC4.4.1 and BC4.4.2.
BC4.4.1 RR Provider Prequalification Prequalification Timelines

All BM Participants who wish to participate in TERRE must have successfully completed the
prequalification process to be a RR provider as detailed in BC5.
BC4.4.2 Minimum Technical Requirements

All BM Participants who wish to participate in TERRE must have the following
capabilities:
(a) BM Participants must have the ability to submit data and receive instructions by the use
of electronic data communication facilities as provided for in CC.6.5.8 or ECC.6.5.8.
(b) BM Participants must be capable of following an RR Instruction issued by The
Company.
(c) BM Participants must be able to provide Physical Notifications.
(d) BM Participants must be able to provide a subset of Dynamic Parameters (as detailed
in BC4.5.2).
(e) BM Participants must provide operational metering for their total output and for any
individual component that may have an output greater than 1MW. This metering must
have the following accuracy;
a. For a BM Unit with either a Generation Capacity greater than 100MW or
Demand Capacity greater than 100MW, a metering accuracy better than 0.5%.

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC4 04 March 2024

2 of 7
 b. For a BM Unit with a Generation Capacity greater than 10MW but less than or
equal to 100MW or Demand Capacity greater than 10MW but less than or
equal to 100MW, a metering accuracy better than 1%.
c. For all other BM Units, an accuracy better than 2.5% is required.
(f) BM Participants must have the ability to inform The Company if their availability
changes using Export and Import Limits.
(g) For BM Participants connected within a User System, BM Participants must be
capable of informing Network Operators of their availability and aciviation in realtime if
required.

BC4.4.3 Prequalification Timelines

The following minimum timescales for the prequalification process apply;-
(a) Within 8 weeks of a formal application from the BM Participant, The Company shall
confirm the application is complete (from the perspective of information provision).
(b) If the application is incomplete, the BM Participant shall provide the missing
evidence within 4 weeks of the a request from The Company or it will be presumed
that the application has been withdrawn.
(c) Within 3 months of confirming that all information has been provided, The Company
shall confirm if the potential BM Participant meets the requirements in BC4.4.2. For
the avoidance of doubt, The Company will not carry out independent tests but will
review the evidence provided.

BC4.4.4 Requalification criteria

Under certain conditions, an BM Participant must requailify.
(a) Every five years, a BM Participant must requalify to the technical requirements in
BC4.4.2 and according to the timescales in BC4.4.3.
(b) If at any time, a BM Participant becomes aware of changes to the configuration
forming the BM Unit, that means the minimum technical requirements in BC4.4.2
can no longer be met, then that BM Participant must withdraw from TERRE and
must requailify.

BC4.5 SUBMISSION OF TERRE RELATED DATA BY BM PARTICIPANTS

BC4.5.1 Communication from BM Participants to The Company

(a) Submission of data specified in BC4.5.2 will be by use of electronic data communications
facilities, as provided for in CC.6.5.8 or ECC.6.5.8.
(b) In the event of a failure of the electronic data communication facilities, the data used in
the TERRE auction will be based on the most recent data received and acknowledged by
The Company. In the event of missing data, it will be assumed the BM Participant did
not wish to submit data for the relevant TERRE Auction Period.
(c) Planned Maintenance Outages will normally be arranged to take place during periods
of low data transfer activity.
(d) Upon any Planned Maintenance Outage, or following an unplanned outage described
in BC4.5.1(b) (where it is termed a "failure") in relation to a pre-TERRE Gate Closure:
(i) If a BM Participant has submitted Physical Notifications and a TERRE
Bid for a TERRE Auction Period the BM Particpant should continue to act
in relation to any period of time in accordance with the Physical
Notifications current at the time of the start of the Planned Maintenance
Issue 6 Revision 21 BC4 04 March 2024
3 of 7
 Outage or the computer system failure in relation to each such period of
time subject to the provisions of BC2.5.1. Depending on when in relation to
TERRE Gate Closure the planned or unplanned maintenance outage
arises, such operation will either be operation in preparation for the relevant
output in real time, or will be operation in real time. No further submissions
of BM Participants data should be attempted. Plant failure or similar
problems causing significant deviation from the Physical Notification
should be notified to The Company by the submission of a revision to
Export and Import Limits in relation to the RR Provider so affected;
(ii) No data will be transferred from The Company to the Balancing
Mechanism Reporting Agent (BMRA) until the communication facilities are
re-established.
BC4.5.2 RR Provider Data submissions before TERRE Gate Closure
To participate in a TERRE auction, a BM Participant must have prequalified and must submit
a TERRE Bid covering at least one of the TERRE Activation Periods within the TERRE
Auction Period.
In addition to a valid TERRE Bid, a sub-set of Balancing Mechanism parameters are also
required covering the TERRE Auction Period and the Settlement Periods immediately
before and after the TERRE Auction Period (to allow ramping before and after).
If a BM Participant is active in the Balancing Mechanism the only additional data needed to
participate in a TERRE auction is a valid TERRE Bid covering the relevant times.
For a BM Participant that is not active in the Balancing Mechanism, the following subset of
parameters are required with exceptions as noted below:
(a) Physical Notifications
Physical Notifications follow the same format and rules as covered in BC1 and BC2
with the following exceptions;
(1) A BM Participant that is not active in the Balancing Mechanism but wishes to
participate in TERRE is only required to have submitted Physical Notifications
covering the TERRE Auction Period and the Settlement Periods immediately
before and after the TERRE Auction Period for which they have submitted a
TERRE Bid.
(2) Defaulting rules as described in the Data Validation, Consistency and Defaulting
Rules will only apply to Settlement Periods for which the BM Participant previously
submitted Physical Notifications for the previous Operational Day.
(b) Export and Import Limits
For a BM Participant that is not active in the Balancing Mechanism but wishes to
participate in TERRE, these are the same as described in BC1 and BC2.
(c) Run Up Rate and Run Down Rates
For a BM Participant that is not active in the Balancing Mechanism but wishes to
participate in TERRE these are the same as described in BC1 and BC2.
(d) For a BM Participant that is not active in the Balancing Mechanism but wishes to
participate in TERRE, the other Dynamic Parameters listed in BC1.A.1.5 are not
required.

TERRE Bids must follow the formats and rules in the TERRE Data Validation and
Consistency Rules.

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC4 04 March 2024

4 of 7
BC4.5.3 Re-submission of parameters by BM Participants before TERRE Gate Closure
The rules outlined in BC1 and BC2 for the revision of Physical Notifications, Export and
Import Limits, Run Up Rates and Run Down Rates also apply for TERRE.
TERRE Bids can be revised up to TERRE Gate Closure in order to be used in the TERRE
auction (as described in the TERRE Data Validation and Consistency Rules).
BC4.5.4 Defaulting rules for TERRE Bids
TERRE Bids will not be defaulted using previously submitted values. This is due to the ability
to link TERRE Bids and the re-use of sequence numbers. Hence a BM Participant wishing
to particpitate in a particular TERRE auction must submit RR Bids specifically covering the
relevant TERRE Activation Periods.
BC4.6 Processing of TERRE Bids before passing to the TERRE Central Platfom
BC4.6.1 Cases where a TERRE Bid will be Restricted
TERRE Bids will be passed to the TERRE Central Platform but will be flagged as Restricted
under the following cases:-
(a) Data within the submission does not conform to formats required as detailed in
the TERRE Data Validation and Consistency Rules (e.g. missing or incorrect
keywords, data in the wrong order, corrupted files etc).
(b) If a TERRE Bid does not have a corresponding Physical Notification, the
TERRE Bid will be flagged as Restricted.
(c) If a TERRE Bid will result in violating a System Constraint, it will be flagged as
Restricted.
(d) If a BM Participant has already been instructed for an Ancillary Service or for
Reserve, a TERRE Bid may need to be flagged as Restricted. For the avoidance
of doubt – participation in TERRE does not exclude an BM Participant from
offering other services to The Company but on occasions if there are conflicts
between services, The Company may have to flag these TERRE Bids as
Restricted.
BC4.7 Instructing BM Participants
BC4.7.1 Communication from The Company to BM Participants
For the purposes of communication, an RR Instruction will follow the same format as a Bid-
Offer Acceptance and so the rules of BC2.7 also apply for RR Instructions.
BC4.7.2 Creating RR Instructions from RR Acceptances
Results from the TERRE Central Platform are returned to The Company in the form of RR
Acceptances.
RR Acceptances do not include physical ramps and so Run Up Rates and Run Down Rates
will be used to create RR Instructions.
In order to comply with all of the RR Acceptances for a BM Participant, several RR
Instructions may be required.
RR instructions will ramp BM Participants from their Commtted Level, hold them at the
required output level, and then return the BM Participant back to the Commited Level.
The TERRE market wishes to incentivise RR Instructions which ramp within +/-5 minutes of
the start and end of the TERRE Activation Periods. Hence, where possible, Run Up Rates
and Run Down Rates will be applied so that ramping is symmetric around the start and end
of the TERRE Activiation Periods.
However the TERRE Product allows for up to 30 minute ramping to and from full activation
and so for the first and final ramps up to 30 minutes of ramping can be used for creating an
RR Instruction.
Details of how RR Instructions will be created can be found in the TERRE Instruction Guide.

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC4 04 March 2024

5 of 7
BC4.7.3 Cases where RR Instructions may not be issued
In the time between receiving TERRE Bids and the RR Acceptances being returned to The
Company, system conditions may require the issuing of a Bid Offer Acceptance to the BM
Participant for which the RR Acceptance applies.
In these cases, it may be necessary to not issue an RR Instruction to the BM Participant or
to modify the RR Instruction so that it is compatible with the Bid Offer Acceptance that has
been previously been issued to the BM Participant.
This situation can only arise for a BM Participant which is also active in the Balancing
Mechanism.
The following may apply:
(a) If the Bid Offer Acceptance is in the same direction as the RR Instruction but the MW
levels of the RR Instruction are less than the Commited Level after the Bid Offer
Acceptance is applied, the RR Instruction will not be issued.
(b) If the Bid Offer Acceptance is in the same direction as the RR Instruction but the MW
levels of the RR Instruction are greater than the Commited Level after the Bid Offer
Acceptance is applied the RR Instruction will be issued relative to the Commited Level.
(c) If the Bid Offer Acceptance is in the opposite direction to the RR Instruction the RR
instruction will not be issued.

BC4.7.4 Infeasibility of RR Acceptances

If the RR Acceptances for an BM Participant are not consistent with the Physical
Noifications and the Run Up Rates and Run Down Rates, then The Company will adjust
the MW levels so that RR Instructions can be created using the declared parameters.
Details of how these infeasibility rules will be applied are contained in the TERRE Instruction
Guide.

BC4.8 Publication of TERRE Data

BC4.8.1 Publication of Data at the National level

The Company shall provide data in accordance with the requirements of the BSC. The
following data items will be provided:
(a) TERRE Bids and details of those restricted
(b) Final Physical Notifications
(c) RR activations
(d) RR Instructions
(e) Interconnector Volumes per 15 minute period of the TERRE Activation Period
(f) The TERRE clearing price
(g) Volume of GB need met
BC4.9 Outages of computer systems leading to the suspension of the TERRE market

The TERRE market operates in short processing times meaning that Planned Maintenance
Outages or unplanned computer system failures can result in the suspension of the TERRE
market.
Suspension of the TERRE market in GB will occur in the following circumstances:

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC4 04 March 2024

6 of 7
 (a) Loss of communication from The Company to the TERRE Central Platform
(b) Failure of the TERRE Central Platform to produce RR Acceptances
(c) Loss of communication from the TERRE Central Platform to The Company
(d) Loss of electronic logging devices to a large number of BM Participants

BC4.10 TERRE Market Suspension

The TERRE market shall be suspended in GB when one of the following circumstances
arises:

(a) Suspension of the Balancing Mechanism in accordance with OC9.4.6; or

(b) Outages of computer systems leading to the suspension of the TERRE market as
provided for in BC4.9; or

(c) Operators of the TERRE Central Platform notify The Company that
the TERRE market has been or is to be suspended.

Where the TERRE market has been suspended as a result of item (a) above, or is to be or
has been suspended as a result of items (b) or (c) above, The Company will as soon as
reasonably practical, inform Users and the BSCCo that the TERRE market is to be or has
been suspended. The Company will notify Users and the BSSCo if
the TERRE market suspension arose as a result of a Total Shutdown or Partial
Shutdown event (which triggers System Restoration) or another condition in accordance
with the requirements of the BSC.

In the case of TERRE market suspension under BC4.10 (b) or (c), The Company shall (as
soon as is practicable) determine, in its reasonable opinion, the time and date from when
the TERRE market is to be suspended. The Company shall also
notify Users and the BSCCo of the time of TERRE market suspension and the reason for
the suspension.

Where the TERRE market has been suspended, it will not be resumed until the start of a
defined Settlement Period which shall be determined:-

i) by the BSC Panel in accordance with section G3.1.8 of the BSC (in the case of
a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown event (which triggers a System
Restoration); or
ii) by section Q.5.A of the BSC (in the case of TERRE market suspension for any other
reason other than System Restoration).

In the case of TERRE market suspension as a result of a Total Shutdown or Partial

Shutdown event (which triggers a System Restoration), as provided for under
BC4.10(a), Users shall use reasonable endeavours to submit TERRE Bids ten hours prior to
the start of the Settlement Period determined by the BSC Panel in accordance with
paragraph G3.1.8 of the BSC and as notified by The Company to Users in preparation
for the resumption of the TERRE market.

In the case of TERRE market suspension as a result of another event as provided for under
BC4.10(b) or BC4.10(c), Users shall use reasonable endeavours to submit TERRE Bids as
soon as possible after notification from The Company of the Settlement Period from when
the TERRE market is to be resumed.

< End of BC4 >

Issue 6 Revision 21 BC4 04 March 2024

7 of 7
 BALANCING CODE NO. 5
(BC5)

PREQUALIFICATION PROCESSES

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

BC5.1 PREQUALIFICATION................................................................................................... 2
BC5.1.1 Prequalification Timelines ................................................................................... 3
BC5.2 FCR PREQUALIFICATION PROCESS ........................................................................... 3
BC5.2.1 FCR Minimum Technical Requirements ................................................................. 3
BC5.3 FRR PREEQUALIFICATION PROCESS ........................................................................ 5
BC5.3.1 FRR Minimum Technical Requirements ................................................................ 5
BC5.4 RR PREQUALIFICATION PROCESS ............................................................................ 5
BC5.4.1 RR Minimum Technical Requirements .................................................................. 5

Issue 6 Revision 0 BC5 05 March 2021

BC5.1 PREQUALIFCATION

The Company shall list the current status and dates of potential status changes of
Balancing Services as Frequency Containment Reserves (FCR), Frequency
Restoration Reserves (FRR) or Replacement Reserves (RR) or existing GB.
Where a Balancing Service has been approved as a Standard Product or Specific
Product providing FCR, FRR or RR, The Company shall ensure that prequalification
processes for that Balancing Service follows the processes as set out here. The
Company shall ensure that each relevant Balancing Service requires a formal
application from the FCR, FRR or RR provider to prequalify.

Where the Connection Conditions or European Connection Conditions require the

capability as a condition of connection, the connection application may be understood to
fulfil this formal application if so requested by the connecting party. For the avoidance of
doubt, this does not compel a party to pre-qualify as part of their connection conditions.

BC5.1.1 Prequalification Timelines

BC5.1.1.1 The following minimum timescales shall be apply to the FCR, FRR and RR
prequalification processes;
(a) Within 8 weeks of a formal application from the FCR, FRR or RR provider The
Company shall confirm the application is complete or incomplete (from the
perspective of information provision)

(b) If the application is incomplete the FCR, FRR, or RR provider shall submit the
additional required information within 4 weeks of a request from The
Company or it will be presumed that the application has been withdrawn.

(c) For units connected to distribution networks, The Company shall liaise with
the relevant DNO(s) to identify potential limitations imposed on the proposed
Balancing Services Provider by the distribution networks.

(d) Within 3 months of confirming that all information has been provided, The
Company shall confirm if the potential FCR, FRR or RR provider meets the
requirements in BC5.2.1, BC5.3.1 or BC5.4.1 respectively.
BC5.1.1.2 The Company shall re-assess the qualification of FCR, FRR or RR
providing units or groups:

(a) at least once every 5 years;

(b) in case the technical or availability requirements or the equipment has
changed; and
(c) in the case of FCR providing units or groups, in case of modernisation
of the equipment related to FCR activation.

BC5.2 FCR PREQUALIFICATION PROCESS

The Company shall ensure that each relevant Balancing Service prequalification
Issue 6 Revision 0 BC5 05 March 2021
 process shall, as a minimum, require the FCR provider to submit a self-certification of
the FCR Minimum Technical Requirements as defined in BC5.2.1.
A transitional period for the introduction of FCR Minimum Technical Requirements, as
defined in BC5.2.1 and BC5.2.2, shall apply for those FCR providers who are not an
EU Code User.

BC5.2.1 FCR Minimum Technical Requirements

Each FCR provider shall have the right to aggregate the respective data for more than one
FCR providing unit if the maximum power of the aggregated units is below 1.5 MW and a
clear verification of activation of FCR is possible.
Each FCR providing unit and each FCR providing group shall;
(a) activate the agreed FCR by means of a proportional governor or load controller
reacting to Frequency deviations or alternatively based on a monotonic piecewise
linear power-frequency characteristic in case of relay activated FCR.
(b) be capable of activating FCR within the Frequency ranges specified in the in
CC.6.1.3 or ECC.6.1.2.1.2.
(c) and comply with the following properties
(i) Maximum combined effect of inherent Frequency Response Insensitivity
and possible intentional Frequency Response Deadband of the governor or
load controller of the FCR providing units or FCR providing groups of ±15
mHz

(ii) FCR full activation time of 10 s

(iii) FCR full activation Frequency deviation of ± 500 mHz
(d) Specify the limitations of the energy reservoir of its FCR providing units or FCR.
(e) Each FCR provider shall be capable of making available to The Company, for each
of its FCR providing units and FCR providing groups, at least the following
information:
(i) time-stamped status indicating if FCR is on or off;
(ii) time-stamped active power data needed to verify FCR activation, including
time-stamped instantaneous Active Power; and
(iii) droop of the governor or load controller for Type C Power Generating Modules
and Type D Power Generating Modules acting as FCR providing units, or its
equivalent parameter for FCR providing groups consisting of Type A Power-
Generating Modules and/or Type B Power Generating Modules, and/or
Demand Units with Demand Response Active Power.

(f) An FCR provider shall guarantee the continuous availability of FCR, with the exception
of a forced outage of a FCR providing unit, during the period of time in which it is
obliged to provide FCR.
(g) Each FCR provider shall inform The Company, as soon as possible, about any
changes in the actual availability of its FCR providing unit and/or its FCR providing
group, in whole or in part, relevant for the results of this prequalification.

BC5.2.2 In addition to the requirements in BC5.2.1, where a relevant Balancing

Issue 6 Revision 0 BC5 05 March 2021
 Service is provided by reserve providing groups or units located in the distribution
systems, The Company shall ensure that the prequalification process requires the
following to be specified;
(a) voltage levels and connection points of the reserve providing units or groups;
(b) the DNO(s) who operate the distribution systems to which the reserve providing
units or groups are connected;
(c) the type of Active Power reserves;
(d) the maximum reserve capacity provided by the reserve providing units or groups
at each connection point; and
(e) the maximum rate of change of Active Power for the reserve providing units or
groups.

The relevant DNOs will identify potential distribution network restrictions, based on
technical reasons, on the provision of the proposed Balancing Service by the reserve
providing groups or units.
BC 5.3 FRR PREQUALIFICATION PROCESS
The Company shall ensure that each relevant Balancing Service prequalification
process shall, as a minimum, require the FRR provider to submit a self-certification of
the FRR Minimum Technical Requirements as defined in BC5.3.1 and BC5.3.2.
BC5.3.1 FRR Minimum Technical Requirements
Each FRR providing unit and each FRR providing group shall;
(a) activate FRR in accordance with the setpoint received from The Company;
(b) ensure that the FRR activation of the FRR providing units within a reserve
providing group can be monitored. For that purpose the FRR provider shall be
capable of supplying to The Company real-time measurements of the
connection point or another point of interaction agreed with The Company
concerning:
(i) time-stamped scheduled Active Power output;
(ii) time-stamped instantaneous Active Power for:
— each FRR providing unit,

— each FRR providing group, and

— each Power Generating Module or Demand unit of a FRR providing
group with a maximum Active Power output larger than or equal to 1.5
MW;
(c) a FRR providing unit or FRR providing group for automatic FRR shall have an
automatic FRR activation delay not exceeding 30 seconds;

(d) be capable of activating its complete manual reserve capacity on FRR within the
FRR full activation time;
(e) fulfil the FRR availability requirements;
(f) fulfil the ramping rate requirements
(g) inform The Company about a reduction of the actual availability of its FRR
providing unit or its FRR providing group or a part of its FRR providing group
as soon as possible.
Issue 6 Revision 0 BC5 05 March 2021
 BC5.3.2 In addition to the requirements in BC5.3.1, where a relevant Balancing
Service is provided by reserve providing groups or units located in the distribution
systems, The Company shall ensure that the prequalification process requires the
following to be specified;
(a) voltage levels and connection points of the reserve providing units or groups;
(b) the DNO(s) who operate the distribution systems to which the reserve providing
units or groups are connected;
(c) the type of Active Power reserves;
(d) themaximum reserve capacity provided by the reserve providing units or groups at
each connection point; and
(e) the maximum rate of change of Active Power for the reserve providing units or
group
The relevant DNOs will identify potential distribution network restrictions, based on
technical reasons, on the provision of the proposed Balancing Service by the reserve
providing groups or units.

BC5.4 RR PREQUALIFICATION PROCESS

The Company shall ensure that each relevant Balancing Service prequalification
process shall, as a minimum, require the RR provider to submit a self-certification of
the RR Minimum Technical Requirements as defined in BC5.4.1 and BC5.4.2.

BC5.4.1 RR Minimum Technical Requirements

Each RR providing unit and each RR providing group shall;
(a) activate RR in accordance with the setpoint received from The Company;
(b) ensure activation of complete reserve capacity on RR within the activation time
defined by The Company;
(c) ensure de-activation of RR according to the setpoint received from The
Company;
(d) ensure that the RR activation of the RR providing units within a reserve providing
group can be monitored. For that purpose, the RR provider shall be capable of
supplying to The Company real-time measurements of the connection point or
another point of interaction agreed with The Company:

(i) the time-stamped scheduled a Active Power output, for each RR providing unit
and group and for each Power Generating Module or Demand unit of
a RR providing group with maximum Active Power output larger than or equal
to 1.5 MW;

(ii) the time-stamped instantaneous Active Power, for each RR providing unit
and group, and for each Power Generating Module or Demand unit of
a RR providing group with a maximum Active Power output greater than or
equal to 1.5 MW;

(e) ensure fulfilment of the RR availablity requirements

Issue 6 Revision 0 BC5 05 March 2021
 (f) inform The Company about a reduction of the actual availability or a forced outage
of its RR providing unit or its RR providing group or a part of its RR providing group
as soon as possible.

BC5.4.2 In addition to the requirements in BC5.4.1, where a relevant Balancing Service

is provided by a reserve providing groups or units located in the distribution systems,
The Company shall ensure that the prequalification process requires the following to
be specified;
(a) voltage levels and connection points of the reserve providing units or groups;
(b) the DNO(s) who operate the distribution systems to which the reserve providing
units or groups are connected;
(c) the type of Active Power reserves;
(d) the maximum reserve capacity provided by the reserve providing units or groups
at each connection point; and
(e) the maximum rate of change of Active Power for the reserve providing units or
groups.
The relevant DNOs will identify potential distribution network restrictions on the
provision of the proposed Balancing Service by the reserve providing groups or units.

< END OF BALANCING CODE 5 >

Issue 6 Revision 0 BC5 05 March 2021

Issue 6 Revision 0 BC4 05 March 2021
7 of 8
Issue 6 Revision 0 BC4 05 March 2021
8 of 8
 DATA REGISTRATION CODE
(DRC)

CONTENTS
(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

DRC.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................3
DRC.2 OBJECTIVE ................................................................................................................................3
DRC.3 SCOPE .......................................................................................................................................3
DRC.4 DATA CATEGORIES AND STAGES IN REGISTRATION ........................................................4
DRC.4.2 Standard Planning Data ...................................................................................................4
DRC.4.3 Detailed Planning Data ....................................................................................................4
DRC.4.4 Operational Data ..............................................................................................................4
DRC.5 PROCEDURES AND RESPONSIBILITIES ...............................................................................4
DRC.5.1 Responsibility For Submission And Updating Of Data ....................................................4
DRC.5.2 Methods Of Submitting Data ............................................................................................4
DRC.5.3 Changes To Users Data ..................................................................................................5
DRC.5.4 Data Not Supplied ............................................................................................................5
DRC.5.5 Substituted Data ..............................................................................................................5
DRC.6 DATA TO BE REGISTERED ......................................................................................................5
SCHEDULE 1 - POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT MODULE),
POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE, HVDC SYSTEM AND DC
CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA ...........................................................................................................9
SCHEDULE 2 - GENERATION PLANNING PARAMETERS ................................................................36
SCHEDULE 3 - LARGE POWER STATION OUTAGE PROGRAMMES, OUTPUT USABLE AND
INFLEXIBILITY INFORMATION .............................................................................................................40
SCHEDULE 4 - LARGE POWER STATION DROOP AND RESPONSE DATA ...................................41
SCHEDULE 5 - USERS SYSTEM DATA ...............................................................................................43
SCHEDULE 6 - USERS OUTAGE INFORMATION ...............................................................................55
SCHEDULE 7 - LOAD CHARACTERISTICS AT GRID SUPPLY POINTS ...........................................60
SCHEDULE 8 - DATA SUPPLIED BY BM PARTICIPANTS ..................................................................61
SCHEDULE 9 - DATA SUPPLIED BY THE COMPANY TO USERS ....................................................62
SCHEDULE 10 - DEMAND PROFILES AND ACTIVE ENERGY DATA ...............................................64
SCHEDULE 11 - CONNECTION POINT DATA .....................................................................................66
SCHEDULE 12 - DEMAND CONTROL .................................................................................................73
SCHEDULE 13 - FAULT INFEED DATA ...............................................................................................77
SCHEDULE 14 - FAULT INFEED DATA (GENERATORS INCLUDING UNIT TRANSFORMERS AND
STATION TRANSFORMERS) ...............................................................................................................79
SCHEDULE 15 – MOTHBALLED POWER GENERATING MODULE, MOTHBALLED GENERATING
UNIT, MOTHBALLED POWER PARK MODULE (INCLUDING MOTHBALLED DC CONNECTED
POWER PARK MODULES), MOTHBALLED HVDC SYSTEMS, MOTHBALLED HVDC CONVERTERS,
MOTHBALLED DC CONVERTERS AT A DC CONVERTER STATION AND ALTERNATIVE FUEL
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
i
DATA ..................................................................................................................................................... 85
SCHEDULE 16 - SYSTEM RESTORATION INFORMATION ............................................................... 88
SCHEDULE 17 - ACCESS PERIOD DATA ........................................................................................... 96
SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA ........................................................ 97
SCHEDULE 19 - USER DATA FILE STRUCTURE ............................................................................ 127
SCHEDULE 20 - GRID FORMING PLANT CAPABILITY DATA ......................................................... 129

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

ii
DRC.1 INTRODUCTION
DRC.1.1 The Data Registration Code ("DRC") presents a unified listing of all data required by The
Company from Users (including Restoration Contractors where they are not a User) and
by Users (including Restoration Contractors where they are not a User) from The
Company, from time to time under the Grid Code. The data which is specified in each section
of the Grid Code is collated here in the DRC. Where there is any inconsistency in the data
requirements under any particular section of the Grid Code and the Data Registration Code
the provisions of the particular section of the Grid Code shall prevail.
DRC.1.2 The DRC identifies the section of the Grid Code under which each item of data is required.
DRC.1.3 The Code under which any item of data is required specifies procedures and timings for the
supply of that data, for routine updating and for recording temporary or permanent changes to
that data. All timetables for the provision of data are repeated in the DRC.
DRC.1.4 Various sections of the Grid Code also specify information which Users will receive from The
Company. This information is summarised in a single schedule in the DRC (Schedule 9).
DRC.1.5 The categorisation of data into DPD I and DPD II is indicated in the DRC below.
DRC.1.6 For the purposes of this DRC, if a User is also a Restoration Contractor, they shall only need
to submit the data once stating on their data submission they are also a Restoration
Contractor. If a Restoration Contractor does not have a CUSC Contract then the data
required to be submitted shall be pursuant to the terms of the Anchor Plant Contract or Top
Up Restoration Contract.

DRC.2 OBJECTIVE
The objective of the DRC is to:
DRC.2.1 List and collate all the data to be provided by each category of User to The Company under
the Grid Code.
DRC.2.2 List all the data to be provided by The Company to each category of User under the Grid
Code.

DRC.3 SCOPE
DRC.3.1 The DRC applies to The Company, Users and Restoration Contractors, which in this DRC
means:-
(a) Generators (including those undertaking OTSDUW and/or those who own and/or
operate DC Connected Power Park Modules);
(b) Network Operators;
(c) DC Converter Station owners and HVDC System Owners;
(d) Suppliers;
(e) Non-Embedded Customers;
(f) Externally Interconnected System Operators;
(g) Interconnector Users;
(h) BM Participants; and
(i) Pumped Storage Generators and Generators in respect of Electricity Storage
Modules.
(j) Restoration Contractors (which would be pursuant to the requirements of their Anchor
Restoration Contract or Top Up Restoration Contract).
DRC.3.2 For the avoidance of doubt, the DRC applies to both GB Code Users and EU Code Users.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

3 of 126
DRC.4 DATA CATEGORIES AND STAGES IN REGISTRATION
DRC.4.1.1 Within the DRC each data item is allocated to one of the following three categories:
(a) Standard Planning Data (SPD)
(b) Detailed Planning Data (DPD)
(c) Operational Data

DRC.4.2 Standard Planning Data (SPD)

DRC.4.2.1 The Standard Planning Data listed and collated in this DRC is that data listed in Part 1 of the
Appendix to the PC.
DRC.4.2.2 Standard Planning Data will be provided to The Company in accordance with PC.4.4 and
PC.A.1.2.
DRC.4.3 Detailed Planning Data (DPD)
DRC.4.3.1 The Detailed Planning Data listed and collated in this DRC is categorised as DPD I and DPD
II and is that data listed in Part 2 of the Appendix to the PC.
DRC.4.3.2 Detailed Planning Data will be provided to The Company in accordance with PC.4.4, PC.4.5
and PC.A.1.2.
DRC.4.4 Operational Data
DRC.4.4.1 Operational Data is data which is required by the Operating Codes and the Balancing
Codes. Within the DRC, Operational Data is sub-categorised according to the Code under
which it is required, namely OC1, OC2, BC1 or BC2.
DRC.4.4.2 Operational Data is to be supplied in accordance with timetables set down in the relevant
Operating Codes and Balancing Codes and repeated in tabular form in the schedules to the
DRC.

DRC.5 PROCEDURES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

DRC.5.1 Responsibility For Submission And Updating Of Data
In accordance with the provisions of the various sections of the Grid Code, each User must
submit data as summarised in DRC.6 and listed and collated in the attached schedules.
DRC.5.2 Methods Of Submitting Data
DRC.5.2.1 Wherever possible, the data schedules to the DRC are structured to serve as standard formats
for data submission and such format must be used for the written submission of data to The
Company.
DRC.5.2.2 Data must be submitted to the Transmission Control Centre notified by The Company, or
to such other department or address as The Company may from time to time advise. The
name of the person at the User Site who is submitting each schedule of data must be included.
DRC.5.2.3 Where a computer data link exists between a User and The Company, data may be submitted
via this link. The Company will, in this situation, provide computer files for completion by the
User containing all the data in the corresponding DRC schedule.
Data submitted can be in an electronic format using a proforma to be supplied by The
Company or other format to be agreed annually in advance with The Company. In all cases
the data must be complete and relate to, and relate only to, what is required by the relevant
section of the Grid Code.
DRC.5.2.4 Other modes of data transfer, such as magnetic tape, may be utilised if The Company gives
its prior written consent.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

4 of 126
DRC.5.2.5 Generators, HVDC System Owners and DC Converter Station owners submitting data for
a Power Generating Module, Generating Unit, DC Converter, HVDC System, Power Park
Module (including DC Connected Power Park Modules) or CCGT Module before the issue
of a Final Operational Notification should submit the DRC data schedules and compliance
information required under the CP electronically using the User Data File Structure unless
otherwise agreed with The Company. Data required from Restoration Contractors where
not provided would be pursuant to the the terms of their Anchor Restoration Contract or Top
Up Restoration Contract.
DRC.5.3 Changes To User’s Data
DRC.5.3.1 Whenever a User becomes aware of a change to an item of data which is registered with The
Company, the User must notify The Company in accordance with each section of the Grid
Code. The method and timing of the notification to The Company is set out in each section
of the Grid Code. Data required from Restoration Contractors where not provided would be
pursuant to the the terms of their Anchor Restoration Contract or Top Up Restoration
Contract.
DRC.5.4 Data Not Supplied
DRC.5.4.1 Users and The Company are obliged to supply data as set out in the individual sections of
the Grid Code and repeated in the DRC. If a User fails to supply data when required by any
section of the Grid Code, The Company will estimate such data if and when, in The
Company's view, it is necessary to do so. If The Company fails to supply data when required
by any section of the Grid Code, the User to whom that data ought to have been supplied,
will estimate such data if and when, in that User's view, it is necessary to do so. Such
estimates will, in each case, be based upon data supplied previously for the same Plant or
Apparatus or upon corresponding data for similar Plant or Apparatus or upon such other
information as The Company or that User, as the case may be, deems appropriate.
DRC.5.4.2 The Company will advise a User in writing of any estimated data it intends to use pursuant to
DRC.5.4.1 relating directly to that User's Plant or Apparatus in the event of data not being
supplied.
DRC.5.4.3 A User will advise The Company in writing of any estimated data it intends to use pursuant
to DRC.5.4.1 in the event of data not being supplied.
DRC.5.4.4 Data requirements defined in DRC5.4.1 – DRC5.4.3 as applicable to a Restoration
Contractor where that Restoration Contractor is a not a User, would be pursuantto the the
terms of the Anchor Restoration Contract or Top Up Restoration Contract.
DRC.5.5 Substituted Data
DRC.5.5.1 In the case of PC.A.4 only, if the data supplied by a User does not in The Company’s
reasonable opinion reflect the equivalent data recorded by The Company, The Company
may estimate such data if and when, in the view of The Company, it is necessary to do so.
Such estimates will, in each case, be based upon data supplied previously for the same Plant
or Apparatus or upon corresponding data for similar Plant or Apparatus or upon such other
information as The Company deems appropriate.
DRC.5.5.2 The Company will advise a User in writing of any estimated data it intends to use pursuant to
DRC.5.5.1 relating directly to that User's Plant or Apparatus where it does not in The
Company’s reasonable opinion reflect the equivalent data recorded by The Company. Such
estimated data will be used by The Company in place of the appropriate data submitted by
the User pursuant to PC.A.4 and as such shall be deemed to accurately represent the User’s
submission until such time as the User provides data to The Company’s reasonable
satisfaction.

DRC.6 DATA TO BE REGISTERED

DRC.6.1 Schedules 1 to 20 attached cover the following data areas.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

5 of 126
DRC.6.1.1 Schedule 1 – Power Generating Module, Generating Unit (or CCGT Module), Power Park
Module (including DC Connected Power Park Module and Power Park Unit), HVDC System
and DC Converter Technical Data.
Comprising Power Generating Module, Generating Unit (and CCGT Module), Power Park
Module (including DC Connected Power Park Module and Power Park Unit) and DC
Converter fixed electrical parameters. Any data required under DRC Schedule 1 from
Restoration Contractors where not provided, would be pursuant to the terms of their Anchor
Restoration Contract or Top Up Restoration Contract.
DRC.6.1.2 Schedule 2 - Generation Planning Parameters
Comprising Genset parameters and Restoration Contractors parameters required for
Operational Planning studies.
DRC.6.1.3 Schedule 3 - Power Station Outage Programmes, Output Usable and Inflexibility Information.
Comprising generation and storage outage planning in respect of Large Power Stations,
Output Usable and inflexibility information at timescales down to the daily BM Unit Data
submission. In the case of Restoration Contractors, this data needs to only to be provided
where such a Resoration Contractor has an Anchor Restoration Contract or Top Up
Restoration Contract other than in respect of Large Power Stations where the data will
already be required.
DRC.6.1.4 Schedule 4 - Large Power Station Droop and Response Data.
Comprising data on governor Droop settings and Primary, Secondary and High Frequency
Response data for Large Power Stations.
DRC.6.1.5 Schedule 5 – User's System Data.
Comprising electrical parameters relating to Plant and Apparatus connected to the National
Electricity Transmission System.
DRC.6.1.6 Schedule 6 – Users Outage and Restoration Service Provider Outage Information.
Comprising the information required by The Company for outages on the User’s System,
including outages at Power Stations other than outages of Gensets. Outages of Plant and
Apparatus of Restoration Contractors and key Plant and Apparatus of a Network
Operator’s System associated with a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan also need to be
co-ordinated with outages on the National Electricity Transmission System. The data
submitted should therefore also include outages on Restoration Contractors Plant and
Apparatus and Network Operator’s Plant and Apparatus which would prevent the operation
of a Local Joint Restoration Plan or Distribution Restoration Zone Plan.
DRC.6.1.7 Schedule 7 - Load Characteristics.
Comprising the estimated parameters of load groups in respect of, for example, harmonic
content and response to frequency.
DRC.6.1.8 Schedule 8 - BM Unit Data.
DRC.6.1.9 Schedule 9 - Data Supplied by The Company to Users.
DRC.6.1.10 Schedule 10 - Demand Profiles and Active Energy Data
Comprising information relating to the Network Operators’ and Non-Embedded Customers’
total Demand and Active Energy taken from the National Electricity Transmission System
DRC.6.1.11 Schedule 11 - Connection Point Data
Comprising information relating to Demand, demand transfer capability and the Small Power
Station, Medium Power Station and Customer generation connected to the Connection
Point
DRC.6.1.12 Schedule 12 - Demand Control Data
Comprising information related to Demand Control
DRC.6.1.13 Schedule 13 - Fault Infeed Data

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

6 of 126
 Comprising information relating to the short circuit contribution to the National Electricity
Transmission System from Users other than Generators, HVDC System Owners and DC
Converter Station owners.
DRC.6.1.14 Schedule 14 - Fault Infeed Data (Generators Including Unit and Station Transformers)
Comprising information relating to the Short Circuit contribution to the National Electricity
Transmission System from Generators, HVDC System Owners and DC Converter Station
owners.
DRC.6.1.15 Schedule 15 – Mothballed Power Generating Module, Mothballed Generating Unit, Mothballed
Power Park Module (including Mothballed DC Connected Power Park Modules), Mothballed
HVDC Systems, Mothballed HVDC Converters, Mothballed DC Converters at a DC Converter
Station and Alternative Fuel Data
Comprising information relating to estimated return to service times for Mothballed Power
Generating Modules, Mothballed Generating Units, Mothballed Power Park Modules
(including Mothballed DC Connected Power Park Modules), Mothballed HVDC Systems,
Mothballed HVDC Converters and Mothballed DC Converters at a DC Converter Station
and the capability of gas-fired Generating Units to operate using alternative fuels.
DRC.6.1.16 Schedule 16 – System Restoration Information
Comprising information relating to System Restoration.
DRC.6.1.17 Schedule 17 – Access Period Schedule
Comprising Access Period information for Transmission Interface Circuits within an
Access Group.
DRC.6.1.18 Schedule 18 – Generators Undertaking OTSDUW Arrangements
Comprising electrical parameters relating to OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus between the
Offshore Grid Entry Point and Transmission Interface Point.
DRC.6.1.19 Schedule 19 – User Data File Structure
Comprising information relating to the User Data File Structure.
DRC.6.1.20 Schedule 20 – Grid Forming Plant Data
Comprising information relating to Grid Forming Plant

DRC.6.2 The Schedules applicable to each class of User are as follows:

User Schedule

Generators with Large Power Stations 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 14,

15, 16, 19

Generators with Medium Power Stations 1, 2 (part), 9,

(see notes 2, 3, 4) 14, 15, 19

Generators with Small Power Stations directly connected to 1, 6, 14, 15, 19

the National Electricity Transmission System

Generators undertaking OTSDUW 18, 19

(see note 5)

All Users connected directly to the National Electricity 5, 6, 9

Transmission System

All Users connected directly to the National Electricity 10,11,13,17

Transmission System other than Generators

All Users connected directly to the National Electricity 7, 9

Transmission System with Demand

A Pumped Storage Generator, a Generator in respect of one 12

or more Electricity Storage Modules and an Externally (as marked)
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
7 of 126
 Interconnected System Operator and Interconnector Users

All Suppliers 12

All Network Operators 12, 16

All BM Participants 8

All DC Converter Station owners 1, 4, 9, 14, 15, 19

Restoration Contractors 2, 3, 6, 16

Notes:
(1) Network Operators must provide data relating to Small Power Stations and/or
Customer Generating Plant Embedded in their Systems when such data is requested
by The Company pursuant to PC.A.3.1.4 or PC.A.5.1.4.
(2) The data in schedules 1, 14 and 15 need not be supplied in relation to Medium Power
Stations connected at a voltage level below the voltage level of the Subtransmission
System except in connection with a CUSC Contract or unless specifically requested by
The Company.
(3) Each Network Operator within whose System an Embedded Medium Power Station
not subject to a Bilateral Agreement or Embedded DC Converter Station not subject
to a Bilateral Agreement is situated shall provide the data to The Company in respect
of each such Embedded Medium Power Station or Embedded DC Converter Station
or HVDC System.
(4) In the case of Schedule 2, Generators, HVDC System Owners, DC Converter Station
owners or Network Operators in the case of Embedded Medium Power Stations not
subject to a Bilateral Agreement or Embedded DC Converter Stations not subject to
a Bilateral Agreement, would only be expected to submit data in relation to Standard
Planning Data as required by the Planning Code.
(5) In the case of Generators undertaking OTSDUW, the Generator will need to supply User
data in accordance with the requirements of Large or Small Power Stations (as defined
in DRC.6.2) up to the Offshore Grid Entry Point. In addition, the User will also need to
submit Offshore Transmission System data in between the Interface Point and its
Connection Points in accordance with the requirements of Schedule 18.
(6) In the case of Restoration Contractors, data only needs to be provided by a
Restoration Contractor where such a Restoration Contractor is not a CUSC Party
and the data has not been submitted. In this case the data to be submitted would be
would be pursuant to the the terms of the Anchor Restoration Contract or Top Up
Restoration Contract.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

8 of 126
SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE, HVDC
SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 1 OF 19

ABBREVIATIONS:
SPD = Standard Planning Data DPD = Detailed Planning Data

% on MVA = % on Rated MVA RC = Registered Capacity

MC = Maximum Capacity

% on 100 = % on 100 MVA OC1, BC1, etc = Grid Code

for which data is required

CUSC Contract = User data which may be CUSC App. Form = User data which may be
submitted to the Relevant submitted to the
Transmission Licensees Relevant
by The Company, Transmission
following the acceptance Licensees by The
by a User of a CUSC Company, following an
Contract. application by a User for
a CUSC Contract.

Note:
All parameters, where applicable, are to be measured at nominal System Frequency
+ these SPD items should only be given in the data supplied with the application for a CUSC
Contract.
* Asterisk items are not required for Small Power Stations and Medium Power Stations
Information is to be given on a Unit basis, unless otherwise stated. Where references to CCGT
Modules are made, the columns "G1" etc should be amended to read "M1" etc, as appropriate
□ These data items may be submitted to the Relevant Transmission Licensees from The
Company in respect of the National Electricity Transmission System. The data may be
submitted to the Relevant Transmission Licensees in a summarised form e.g. network model;
the data transferred will have been originally derived from data submitted by Users to The
Company.
■ these data items may be submitted to the Relevant Transmission Licensee from The Company
in respect to Relevant Units only. The data may be submitted to the Relevant Transmission
Licensee in a summarised form e.g. network model; the data transferred will have been originally
derived from data submitted by Users to The Company.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

9 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 2 OF 19

POWER STATION NAME: _________________________ DATE: _____________

DATA to DATA GENERATING UNIT OR STATION DATA

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS RTL CAT.
CUSC CUSC F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr.
Cont App.
ract Form 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
GENERATING STATION DEMANDS:
Demand associated with the Power
Station supplied through the National
Electricity Transmission System or
the Generator's User System
(PC.A.5.2)

- The maximum Demand that could MW □ DPD I

occur. MVAr □ DPD I
- Demand at specified time of annual MW □ DPD II
peak half hour of National Electricity MVAr □ DPD II
Transmission System Demand at
Annual ACS Conditions.

- Demand at specified time of annual MW DPD II

minimum half-hour of National MVAr □ DPD II
Electricity Transmission System □
Demand.

(Additional Demand supplied through

the unit transformers to be provided
below)

INDIVIDUAL GENERATING UNIT (OR G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 STN

AS THE CASE MAY BE,
SYNCHRONOUS POWER
GENERATING MODULE OR CCGT
MODULE) DATA

Point of connection to the National Text □ ■ SPD

Electricity Transmission System (or
the Total System if embedded) of the
Generating Unit or Synchronous
Power Generating Module (other than
a CCGT Unit) or the CCGT Module, as
the case may be in terms of
geographical and electrical location and
system voltage (PC.A.3.4.1)

If the busbars at the Connection Point Section □ ■ SPD

are normally run in separate sections Number
identify the section to which the
Generating Unit (other than a CCGT
Unit) or Synchronous Power
Generating Module or CCGT Module,
as the case may be is connected
(PC.A.3.1.5)

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

10 of 126
Type of Unit (steam, Gas Turbine □
Combined Cycle Gas Turbine Unit,
tidal, wind, storage type etc.)
(PC.A.3.2.2 (h), PC.A.3.4.4)

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

11 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 3 OF 19

INDIVIDUAL SYNCHRONOUS POWER G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 STN

GENERATING MODULE
GENERATING UNIT (OR AS THE
CASE MAY BE, CCGT MODULE) DATA

A list of the Generating Units and CCGT □ ■ SPD

Units within a Synchronous Power
Generating Module or CCGT Module,
identifying each CCGT Unit, and the
Power Generating Module or CCGT
Module of which it forms part,
unambiguously. In the case of a Range
CCGT Module, details of the possible
configurations should also be submitted.
(PC.A.3.2.2 (g))

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

12 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 4 OF 19

DATA to DATA GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT MODULE,

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS RTL CAT. AS THE CASE MAY BE)
CUSC CUSC G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 STN
Cont App.
ract Form
Rated MVA (PC.A.3.3.1) MVA □ ■ SPD+
Rated MW (PC.A.3.3.1) MW □ ■ SPD+
Rated terminal voltage (PC.A.5.3.2.(a) & kV □ DPD I
PC.A.5.4.2 (b))
*Performance Chart at Onshore SPD (see OC2 for specification)
Synchronous Generating Unit stator
terminals (PC.A.3.2.2(f)(i))
* Performance Chart of the Offshore
Synchronous Generating Unit at the
Offshore Grid Entry Point
(PC.A.3.2.2(f)(ii))
* Synchronous Generating Unit
Performance Chart (PC.A.3.2.2(f))
* Power Generating Module Performance
Chart of the Synchronous Power
Generating Module (PC.A.3.2.2(f))
* Maximum terminal voltage set point
DPD I
(PC.A.5.3.2.(a) & PC.A.5.4.2 (b)) kV □
* Terminal voltage set point step resolution
DPD I
– if not continuous (PC.A.5.3.2.(a) & kV □
PC.A.5.4.2 (b))
*Output Usable (on a monthly basis) MW SPD (except in relation to CCGT Modules when required
(PC.A.3.2.2(b)) on a unit basis under the Grid Code, this data item
may be supplied under Schedule 3)
Turbo-Generator inertia constant (for MW secs □ ■ SPD+
synchronous machines) (PC.A.5.3.2(a)) /MVA
Short circuit ratio (synchronous machines) □ ■ SPD+
(PC.A.5.3.2(a))
Normal auxiliary load supplied by the MW □ DPD II
Generating Unit at rated MW output MVAr □ DPD II
(PC.A.5.2.1)
Rated field current at rated MW and MVAr A □ DPD II
output and at rated terminal voltage
(PC.A.5.3.2 (a))

Field current open circuit saturation curve

(as derived from appropriate
manufacturers' test certificates):
(PC.A.5.3.2 (a))
120% rated terminal volts A □ DPD II
110% rated terminal volts A □ DPD II
100% rated terminal volts A □ DPD II
90% rated terminal volts A □ DPD II
80% rated terminal volts A □ DPD II
70% rated terminal volts A □ DPD II
60% rated terminal volts A □ DPD II
50% rated terminal volts A □ DPD II

IMPEDANCES:
(Unsaturated)
Direct axis synchronous reactance % on MVA □ DPD I
(PC.A.5.3.2(a))
Direct axis transient reactance % on MVA □ ■ SPD+
(PC.A.3.3.1(a)& PC.A.5.3.2(a)
Direct axis sub-transient reactance % on MVA □ DPD I
(PC.A.5.3.2(a))
Quad axis synch reactance (PC.A.5.3.2(a)) % on MVA □ DPD I
Quad axis sub-transient reactance % on MVA □ DPD I
(PC.A.5.3.2(a))
Stator leakage reactance (PC.A.5.3.2(a)) % on MVA □ DPD I
Armature winding direct current % on MVA □ DPD I
resistance. (PC.A.5.3.2(a))
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
13 of 126
In Scotland, negative sequence resistance % on MVA □ DPD I
(PC.A.2.5.6 (a) (iv)

Note:- the above data item relating to armature winding direct-current resistance need only be provided by Generators in relation to
Generating Units or Synchronous Generating Units within Power Generating Modules commissioned after 1st March
1996 and in cases where, for whatever reason, the Generator is aware of the value of the data item.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

14 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 5 OF 19

DATA to DATA GENERATING UNIT OR STATION DATA

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS RTL CAT.
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 STN
Form

TIME CONSTANTS
(Short-circuit and Unsaturated)
Direct axis transient time constant S □ DPD I
(PC.A.5.3.2(a))
Direct axis sub-transient time constant S □ DPD I
(PC.A.5.3.2(a))
Quadrature axis sub-transient time constant S □ DPD I
(PC.A.5.3.2(a))
Stator time constant (PC.A.5.3.2(a)) S □ DPD I

MECHANICAL PARAMETERS
(PC.A.5.3.2(a))
The number of turbine generator masses □ DPD II
Diagram showing the Inertia and Kgm2 □ DPD II
parameters for each turbine generator mass DPD II
for the complete drive train
Diagram showing Stiffness constants and Nm/rad □ DPD II
parameters between each turbine generator DPD II
mass for the complete drive train
Number of poles □ DPD II
Relative power applied to different parts of % □ DPD II
the turbine
Torsional mode frequencies Hz □ DPD II
Modal damping decrement factors for the □ DPD II
different mechanical modes

GENERATING UNIT STEP-UP

TRANSFORMER

Rated MVA (PC.A.3.3.1 & PC.A.5.3.2) MVA □ ■ SPD+

Voltage Ratio (PC.A.5.3.2) - □ DPD I
Positive sequence reactance: (PC.A.5.3.2)
Max tap % on MVA □ ■ SPD+
Min tap % on MVA □ ■ SPD+
Nominal tap % on MVA □ ■ SPD+
Positive sequence resistance: (PC.A.5.3.2)
Max tap % on MVA □ DPD II
Min tap % on MVA □ DPD II
Nominal tap % on MVA □ DPD II
Zero phase sequence reactance % on MVA □ DPD II
(PC.A.5.3.2)
Tap change range (PC.A.5.3.2) +% / -% □ DPD II
Tap change step size (PC.A.5.3.2) % □ DPD II
Tap changer type: on-load or off-circuit On/Off □ DPD II
(PC.A.5.3.2)

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

15 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 6 OF 19

DATA to DATA GENERATING UNIT OR STATION DATA

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS RTL CAT.
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 STN
Form
EXCITATION:

Note: The data items requested under Option 1 below may continue to be provided by Generators in relation to Generating
Units on the System at 9 January 1995 (in this paragraph, the "relevant date") or they may provide the new data items
set out under Option 2. Generators must supply the data as set out under Option 2 (and not those under Option 1) for
Generating Unit and Synchronous Power Generating Unit excitation control systems commissioned after the relevant
date, those Generating Unit or Synchronous Power Generating Unit excitation control systems recommissioned for
any reason such as refurbishment after the relevant date and Generating Unit or Synchronous Power Generating Unit
excitation control systems where, as a result of testing or other process, the Generator is aware of the data items listed
under Option 2 in relation to that Generating Unit or Synchronous Power Generating Unit.

Option 1

DC gain of Excitation Loop (PC.A.5.3.2(c)) □ DPD II

Max field voltage (PC.A.5.3.2(c)) V □ DPD II
Min field voltage (PC.A.5.3.2(c)) V □ DPD II
Rated field voltage (PC.A.5.3.2(c)) V □ DPD II
Max rate of change of field volts:
(PC.A.5.3.2(c))
Rising V/Sec □ DPD II
Falling V/Sec □ DPD II

Details of Excitation Loop (PC.A.5.3.2(c)) Diagram □ DPD II (please attach)

Described in block diagram form showing
transfer functions of individual elements

Dynamic characteristics of over- excitation □ DPD II

limiter (PC.A.5.3.2(c))
Dynamic characteristics of under-excitation □ DPD II
limiter (PC.A.5.3.2(c))

Option 2

Exciter category, e.g. Rotating Exciter, or Text □ ■ SPD

Static Exciter etc (PC.A.5.3.2(c))
Excitation System Nominal (PC.A.5.3.2(c))
Response Sec-1 □ DPD II
VE
Rated Field Voltage (PC.A.5.3.2(c)) UfN V □ DPD II
No-load Field Voltage (PC.A.5.3.2(c)) UfO V □ DPD II
Excitation System On-Load (PC.A.5.3.2(c)) □
Positive Ceiling Voltage UpL+ V DPD II
Excitation System No-Load (PC.A.5.3.2(c)) □
Positive Ceiling Voltage UpO+ V DPD II
Excitation System No-Load (PC.A.5.3.2(c)) □
Negative Ceiling Voltage UpO- V DPD II
Power System Stabiliser (PSS) fitted
(PC.A.3.4.2) Yes/No □ ■ SPD

Stator Current Limit (PC.A.5.3.2(c)) A □ DPD II

Details of Excitation System (PC.A.5.3.2(c))

(including PSS if fitted) described in block Diagram □ DPD II
diagram form showing transfer functions of
individual elements.

Details of Over-excitation Limiter

(PC.A.5.3.2(c))
□
described in block diagram form showing Diagram DPD II
transfer functions of individual elements.

Details of Under-excitation Limiter

(PC.A.5.3.2(c)) □
described in block diagram form showing Diagram DPD II
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
16 of 126
 transfer functions of individual elements.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

17 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 7 OF 19

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS DATA to DATA GENERATING UNIT OR STATION DATA

RTL CAT.
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 STN
Form

GOVERNOR AND ASSOCIATED PRIME MOVER PARAMETERS

Note: The data items requested under Option 1 below may continue to be provided by Generators in relation to Generating Units
on the System at 9 January 1995 (in this paragraph, the "relevant date") or they may provide the new data items set out
under Option 2. Generators must supply the data as set out under Option 2 (and not those under Option 1) for Generating
Unit and Synchronous Power Generating Unit governor control systems commissioned after the relevant date, those
Generating Unit and Synchronous Power Generating Unit governor control systems recommissioned for any reason
such as refurbishment after the relevant date and Generating Unit and Synchronous Power Generating Unit governor
control systems where, as a result of testing or other process, the Generator is aware of the data items listed under Option
2 in relation to that Generating Unit and Synchronous Power Generating Unit.

Option 1

GOVERNOR PARAMETERS (REHEAT

UNITS) (PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 1(i))

HP Governor average gain MW/Hz □ DPD II

Speeder motor setting range Hz □ DPD II
HP governor valve time constant S □ DPD II
HP governor valve opening limits □ DPD II
HP governor valve rate limits □ DPD II
Re-heat time constant (stored Active Energy S □ DPD II
in reheater)
IP governor average gain MW/Hz □ DPD II
IP governor setting range Hz □ DPD II
IP governor time constant S □ DPD II
IP governor valve opening limits □ DPD II
IP governor valve rate limits □ DPD II
Details of acceleration sensitive □ DPD II (please attach)
elements HP & IP in governor loop
Governor block diagram showing □ DPD II (please attach)
transfer functions of individual elements

GOVERNOR (Non-reheat steam and Gas

Turbines) (PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 1(ii))

Governor average gain MW/Hz □ DPD II

Speeder motor setting range □ DPD II
Time constant of steam or fuel governor valve S □ DPD II
Governor valve opening limits □ DPD II
Governor valve rate limits □ DPD II
Time constant of turbine S □ DPD II
Governor block diagram □ DPD II (please attach)

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

18 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 8 OF 19

DATA to DATA GENERATING UNIT OR STATION DATA

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS RTL CAT.
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 STN
Form

(PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 1(iii))

BOILER & STEAM TURBINE DATA*
Boiler time constant (Stored Active Energy) S DPD II
HP turbine response ratio: % DPD II
(Proportion of Primary Response arising from
HP turbine)
HP turbine response ratio: % DPD II
(Proportion of High Frequency Response
arising from HP turbine)
End of Option 1
Option 2
All Generating Units and Synchronous Power
Generating Units
Governor Block Diagram showing □ DPD II
transfer function of individual elements
including acceleration sensitive elements
Governor Time Constant Sec □ DPD II
(PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 2(i))
Governor Deadband
(PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 2(i))

- Maximum Setting Hz DPD II

- Normal Setting Hz DPD II
- Minimum Setting Hz DPD II
Speeder Motor Setting Range % □ DPD II
(PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 2(i))
Average Gain (PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 2(i)) MW/Hz □ DPD II
Steam Units
(PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 2(ii))
HP Valve Time Constant sec □ DPD II
HP Valve Opening Limits % □ DPD II
HP Valve Opening Rate Limits %/sec □ DPD II
HP Valve Closing Rate Limits %/sec □ DPD II
HP Turbine Time Constant sec □ DPD II
(PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 2(ii))
IP Valve Time Constant sec □ DPD II
IP Valve Opening Limits % □ DPD II
IP Valve Opening Rate Limits %/sec □ DPD II
IP Valve Closing Rate Limits %/sec □ DPD II
IP Turbine Time Constant sec □ DPD II
(PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 2(ii))
LP Valve Time Constant sec □ DPD II
LP Valve Opening Limits % □ DPD II
LP Valve Opening Rate Limits %/sec □ DPD II
LP Valve Closing Rate Limits %/sec □ DPD II
LP Turbine Time Constant sec □ DPD II
(PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 2(ii))
Reheater Time Constant sec DPD II
Boiler Time Constant sec DPD II
HP Power Fraction % DPD II
IP Power Fraction % DPD II
# Where the generating unit or synchronous power generating unit governor does not have a
selectable deadband facility, then the actual value of the deadband need only be provided.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

19 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 9 OF 19

DATA to DATA GENERATING UNIT OR STATION DATA

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS RTL CAT.
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 STN
Form

Gas Turbine Units

(PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 2(iii))
Inlet Guide Vane Time Constant sec □ DPD II
Inlet Guide Vane Opening Limits % □ DPD II
Inlet Guide Vane Opening Rate Limits %/sec □ DPD II
Inlet Guide Vane Closing Rate Limits %/sec □ DPD II
(PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 2(iii))
Fuel Valve Time Constant sec □ DPD II
Fuel Valve Opening Limits % □ DPD II
Fuel Valve Opening Rate Limits %/sec □ DPD II
Fuel Valve Closing Rate Limits %/sec □ DPD II
(PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 2(iii))
Waste Heat Recovery Boiler Time Constant

Hydro Generating Units

(PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 2(iv))
Guide Vane Actuator Time Constant sec □ DPD II
Guide Vane Opening Limits % □ DPD II
Guide Vane Opening Rate Limits %/sec □ DPD II
Guide Vane Closing Rate Limits %/sec □ DPD II

Water Time Constant sec □ DPD II

Synchronous Electricity Storage Units and

Modules
(PC.A.5.3.2(d) – Option 2(v)

Valve Actuator Time Constant sec □ DPD II

Valve Opening Limits % □ DPD II
Valve Opening Rate Limits %/sec □ DPD II
Valve Closing Rate Limits %/sec □ DPD II

For Synchronous Electricity Storage Modules

which are derived from compressed air energy
storage systems the above data should be
provided. For other Synchronous Electricity
Storage Modules data should be supplied as
required by The Company in accordance with
PC.A.7.

End of Option 2

UNIT CONTROL OPTIONS*

(PC.A.5.3.2(e)
Maximum droop % DPD II
Normal droop % □ DPD II
Minimum droop % DPD II

Maximum Governor Deadband DPD II

Normal Governor Deadband DPD II
Minimum Governor Deadband

Maximum Frequency Response Deadband1 ±Hz DPD II

Normal Frequency Response Deadband1 ±Hz DPD II
Minimum Frequency Response Deadband1 ±Hz DPD II

Maximum Frequency Response Insensitivity1 ±Hz DPDII

Normal Frequency Response Insensitivity1 ±Hz DPDII
Minimum Frequency Response Insensitivity1 ±Hz DPDII

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

20 of 126
 ±Hz
±Hz
±Hz

Frequency settings between which

Unit Load Controller droop applies:

Maximum Hz DPD II
Normal Hz DPD II
Minimum Hz DPD II

Sustained response normally selected Yes/No DPD II

1
Data required only in respect of Large Power
Stations comprising Type C and Type D Power
Generating Modules owned and operated by
EU Code Generators.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

21 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 10 OF 19

DATA to DATA POWER PARK UNIT (OR POWER PARK

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS RTL CAT. MODULE, AS THE CASE MAY BE)
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 STN
Form
Power Park Module Rated MVA MVA □ ■ SPD+
(PC.A.3.3.1(a))
Power Park Module Rated MW MW □ ■ SPD+
(PC.A.3.3.1(a))
*Performance Chart of a Power Park Module SPD (see OC2 for specification)
at the connection point (PC.A.3.2.2(f)(ii))

*Output Usable (on a monthly basis) MW SPD (except in relation to CCGT Modules when
(PC.A.3.2.2(b)) required on a unit basis under the Grid Code,
this data item may be supplied under Schedule
3)
Number & Type of Power Park Units within □ SPD
each Power Park Module (PC.A.3.2.2(k))
Number & Type of Offshore Power Park SPD
Units within each Offshore Power Park
String and the number of Offshore Power
Park Strings and connection point within
each Offshore Power Park Module
(PC.A.3.2.2.(k))
In the case where an appropriate Reference the SPD
Manufacturer’s Data & Performance Manufacturer’s
Report is registered with The Company then Data &
subject to The Company’s agreement, the Performance
report reference may be given as an Report
alternative to completion of the following
sections of this Schedule 1 to the end of page
11 with the exception of the sections marked
thus # below.

Power Park Unit Model (including Non Transfer function □ DPD II

Synchronous Electricity Storage Units) - A block diagram
validated mathematical model in accordance and algebraic
with PC.5.4.2 (a) equations,
simulation and
measured test
results

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

22 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 11 OF 19

DATA to DATA POWER PARK UNIT (OR POWER PARK

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS RTL CAT. MODULE, AS THE CASE MAY BE)
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 STN
Form
Power Park Unit Data (where applicable)
Rated MVA (PC.A.3.3.1(e)) MVA □ ■ SPD+
Rated MW (PC.A.3.3.1(e)) MW □ ■ SPD+
Rated terminal voltage (PC.A.3.3.1(e)) V □ ■ SPD+
Site minimum air density (PC.A.5.4.2(b)) kg/m3 □ ■ DPD II
Site maximum air density kg/m3 □ ■ DPD II
Site average air density kg/m3 □ ■ DPD II
Year for which air density data is submitted □ ■ DPD II
Number of pole pairs □ DPD II
Blade swept area m2 □ DPD II
Gear Box Ratio □ DPD II
Stator Resistance (PC.A.5.4.2(b)) % on MVA □ ■ SPD+
Stator Reactance (PC.A.3.3.1(e)) % on MVA □ ■ SPD+
Magnetising Reactance (PC.A.3.3.1(e)) % on MVA □ ■ SPD+
Rotor Resistance (at starting). % on MVA □ DPD II
(PC.A.5.4.2(b))
Rotor Resistance (at rated running) % on MVA □ ■ SPD+
(PC.A.3.3.1(e))
Rotor Reactance (at starting). % on MVA □ DPD II
(PC.A.5.4.2(b))
Rotor Reactance (at rated running) % on MVA □ ■ SPD
(PC.A.3.3.1(e))
Equivalent inertia constant of the first mass MW secs □ ■ SPD+
(e.g. wind turbine rotor and blades) at /MVA
minimum speed
(PC.A.5.4.2(b))
Equivalent inertia constant of the first mass MW secs □ ■ SPD+
(e.g. wind turbine rotor and blades) at /MVA
synchronous speed (PC.A.5.4.2(b))
Equivalent inertia constant of the first mass MW secs □ ■ SPD+
(e.g. wind turbine rotor and blades) at rated /MVA
speed
(PC.A.5.4.2(b))
Equivalent inertia constant of the second MW secs □ ■ SPD+
mass (e.g. generator rotor) at minimum speed /MVA
(PC.A.5.4.2(b))
Equivalent inertia constant of the second MW secs □ ■ SPD+
mass (e.g. generator rotor) at synchronous /MVA
speed (PC.A.5.4.2(b))
Equivalent inertia constant of the second MW secs □ ■ SPD+
mass (e.g. generator rotor) at rated speed /MVA
(PC.A.5.4.2(b))
Equivalent shaft stiffness between the two Nm / electrical □ ■ SPD+
masses (PC.A.5.4.2(b)) radian

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

23 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 12 OF 19

DATA to DATA POWER PARK UNIT (OR POWER PARK

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS RTL CAT. MODULE, AS THE CASE MAY BE)
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 STN
Form
Minimum generator rotor speed (Doubly Fed RPM □ ■ SPD+
Induction Generators) (PC.A.3.3.1(e))
Maximum generator rotor speed (Doubly Fed RPM □ ■ SPD+
Induction Generators) (PC.A.3.3.1(e))

The optimum generator rotor speed versus wind tabular □ DPD II

speed (PC.A.5.4.2(b)) format

Power Converter Rating (Doubly Fed Induction MVA □ ■ DPD II

Generators) (PC.A.5.4.2(b))

The rotor power coefficient (Cp) versus tip Diagram + □ DPD II

speed ratio () curves for a range of blade tabular
angles (where applicable) (PC.A.5.4.2(b)) format

# The electrical power output versus generator Diagram + □ DPD II

rotor speed for a range of wind speeds over the tabular
entire operating range of the Power Park Unit. format
(PC.A.5.4.2(b))

The blade angle versus wind speed curve Diagram + □ DPD II

(PC.A.5.4.2(b)) tabular
format

The electrical power output versus wind speed Diagram + □ DPD II

over the entire operating range of the Power tabular
Park Unit. format
(PC.A.5.4.2(b))

Transfer function block diagram, parameters Diagram □ DPD II

and description of the operation of the power
electronic converter including fault ride though
capability (where applicable). (PC.A.5.4.2(b))

For a Power Park Unit consisting of a □

synchronous machine in combination with a
back to back DC Converter or HVDC
Converter, or for a Power Park Unit not
driven by a wind turbine, the data to be
supplied shall be agreed with The Company in
accordance with PC.A.7. (PC.A.5.4.2(b))

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

24 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 13 OF 19

DATA to DATA POWER PARK UNIT (OR POWER PARK

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS RTL CAT. MODULE, AS THE CASE MAY BE)
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 STN
Form
Torque / Speed and blade angle control systems and Diagram □ DPD II
parameters (PC.A.5.4.2(c))

For the Power Park Unit, details of the torque /

speed controller and blade angle controller in the
case of a wind turbine and power limitation functions
(where applicable) described in block diagram form
showing transfer functions and parameters of
individual elements

# Voltage/Reactive Power/Power Factor control Diagram □ DPD II

system parameters (PC.A.5.4.2(d))

# For the Power Park Unit and Power Park Module

details of Voltage/Reactive Power/Power Factor
controller (and PSS if fitted) described in block
diagram form including parameters showing transfer
functions of individual elements.

# Frequency control system parameters Diagram □ DPD II

(PC.A.5.4.2(e))
# For the Power Park Unit and Power Park Module
details of the Frequency controller described in
block diagram form showing transfer functions and
parameters of individual elements.

As an alternative to PC.A.5.4.2 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) Diagram □ DPD II

and (f), is the submission of a single complete model
that consists of the full information required under
PC.A.5.4.2 (a), (b), (c), (d) (e) and (f) provided that
all the information required under PC.A.5.4.2 (a), b),
(c), (d), (e) and (f) individually is clearly identifiable.
(PC.A.5.4.2(g))

# Harmonic Assessment Information

(PC.A.5.4.2(h))
(as defined in IEC 61400-21 (2001)) for each Power
Park Unit:-
# Flicker coefficient for continuous operation □ DPD I
# Flicker step factor □ DPD I
# Number of switching operations in a 10 minute □ DPD I
window
# Number of switching operations in a 2 hour window □ DPD I
# Voltage change factor □ DPD I
# Current Injection at each harmonic for each Power Tabular □ DPD I
Park Unit and for each Power Park Module format
Note:- Generators who own or operate DC Connected Power Park Modules shall supply all data for their DC Connected Power Park
Modules as applicable to Power Park Modules.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

25 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 14 OF 19

HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER STATION TECHNICAL DATA

HVDC SYSTEM OR DC CONVERTER STATION NAME DATE:___________

Data Description Units DATA to Data DC Converter Station Data

RTL Category
CUSC CUSC
(PC.A.4) Contract App.
Form

HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER

STATION DEMANDS:

Demand supplied through Station

Transformers associated with the DC MW DPD II
Converter Station and HVDC System MVAr DPD II
[PC.A.4.1] □
□
- Demand with all DC Converters and MW DPD II
□
HVDC Converters within and HVDc MVAr DPD II
□
System operating at Rated MW import.

- Demand with all DC Converters and

HVDC Converters within an HVDC
System operating at Rated MW export.

Additional Demand associated with the DC MW DPD II

□
Converter Station or HVDC System MVAr DPD II
□
supplied through the National Electricity
Transmission System. [PC.A.4.1] □
MW □ DPD II
- The maximum Demand that could MVAr DPD II
occur. □
□
- Demand at specified time of annual MW DPD II
peak half hour of The Company MVAr DPD II
□
Demand at □
Annual ACS Conditions.

- Demand at specified time of annual □

minimum half-hour of The Company Text ■ SPD+
Demand.
□
■
DC CONVERTER STATION AND HVDC Text SPD+
SYSTEM DATA
□
□ ■ SPD+
Number of poles, i.e. number of DC ■
Converters or HVDC Converters within the ■
HVDC System ■
□ ■
■
Pole arrangement (e.g. monopole or bipole)
□
Details of each viable operating configuration Diagram ■ SPD
Diagram □
Configuration 1 Diagram
Configuration 2 Diagram □
Configuration 3 Diagram □
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
26 of 126
 Configuration 4 Diagram □
Configuration 5 □
Configuration 6 Diagram □

Remote ac connection arrangement □

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

27 of 126
SCHEDULE 1 – POWER PARK MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT MODULE),
POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE, HVDC SYSTEM
AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 15 OF 19

Data Description Units DATA to Data Operating Configuration

RTL Category
CUSC CUSC 1 2 3 4 5 6
Contract App.
Form

DC CONVERTER STATION AND HVDC

SYSTEM DATA (PC.A.3.3.1d)

DC Converter or HVDC Converter Type (e.g. Text □ ■ SPD

current or Voltage source)

□ ■
Point of connection to the National Electricity Text SPD
Transmission System (or the Total System
if Embedded) of the DC Converter Station or
HVDC System configuration in terms of
geographical and electrical location and
system voltage

If the busbars at the Connection Point are Section □ ■ SPD

normally run in separate sections identify the Number
section to which the DC Converter Station or
HVDC System configuration is connected MW SPD +

Rated MW import per pole [PC.A.3.3.1] MW □ ■ SPD +

Rated MW export per pole [PC.A.3.3.1] □ ■

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

28 of 126
 Data Description Units DATA to Data Operating Configuration
RTL Category
CUSC CUSC 1 2 3 4 5 6
Contract App.
Form
ACTIVE POWER TRANSFER CAPABILITY
(PC.A.3.2.2)

Registered Capacity MW □ ■ SPD

Registered Import Capacity MW □ ■

□ ■
Minimum Generation MW SPD
□ ■
Minimum Import Capacity MW

Maximum HVDC Active Power MW

Transmission Capacity □ SPD
MW
Minimum Active Power Transmission □
Capacity SPD
MW
Import MW available in excess of Registered □
Import Capacity and Maximum Active SPD
Power Transmission Capacity
Min
Time duration for which MW in excess of □ SPD
Registered Import Capacity is available
MW
Export MW available in excess of Registered □ SPD
Capacity and Maximum Active Power
Transmission Capacity.
Min
Time duration for which MW in excess of □ SPD
Registered Capacity is available

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

29 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 –POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 16 OF 19

Data Description Units DATA to Data Operating Configuration

RTL Category
CUSC CUSC 1 2 3 4 5 6
Contract App.
Form

DC CONVERTER AND HVDC CONVERTER

TRANSFORMER [PC.A.5.4.3.1]

Rated MVA MVA □ DPD II

Winding arrangement
□
Nominal primary voltage kV □
DPD II
Nominal secondary (converter-side) voltage(s) kV DPD II
Positive sequence reactance
Maximum tap % on MVA □ DPD II
Nominal tap % on MVA □ DPD II
Minimum tap % on MVA □ DPD II
Positive sequence resistance
□
Maximum tap % on MVA DPD II
□
Nominal tap % on MVA □
DPD II
Minimum tap % on MVA □ DPD II
Zero phase sequence reactance % on MVA □ DPD II
Tap change range +% / -% □ DPD II
Number of steps DPD II

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

30 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR
CCGT MODULE), DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE, HVDC SYSTEM,
POWER PARK MODULE AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 17 OF 19

Data Description Units DATA to RTL Data Operating configuration

Category
CUSC CUSC 1 2 3 4 5 6
Contract App.
Form

DC NETWORK [PC.A.5.4.3.1 (c)]

Rated DC voltage per pole kV □ DPD II

Rated DC current per pole A □ DPD II

Details of the DC Network

□
described in diagram form including resistance, Diagram DPD II
inductance and capacitance of all DC cables and/or DC
lines. Details of any line reactors (including line reactor
resistance), line capacitors, DC filters, earthing
electrodes and other conductors that form part of the
DC Network should be shown.

DC CONVERTER STATION AND HVDC SYSTEM AC

HARMONIC FILTER AND REACTIVE
COMPENSATION EQUIPMENT
[PC.A.5.4.3.1 (d)]
Diagram
For all switched reactive compensation equipment DPD II
Text □
Total number of AC filter banks Diagram ■ DPD II
■
Diagram of filter connections Text DPD II
□ ■
Type of equipment (e.g. fixed or variable) MVAr DPD II
□
Capacitive rating; or MVAr □
DPD II
Inductive rating; or MVAr □ DPD II
Operating range □ DPD II
Table □
Reactive Power capability as a function of various MW DPD II
transfer levels
□

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

31 of 126
 SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT
MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 18 OF 19

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

32 of 126
Data Description Units DATA to Data Operating
RTL Category configuration
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Form

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

33 of 126
CONTROL SYSTEMS [PC.A.5.4.3.2]

Static VDC – PDC (DC voltage – DC power) or

Static VDC – IDC (DC voltage – DC current) characteristic (as
appropriate) when operating as
–Rectifier
–Inverter

Details of rectifier mode control system, Diagram □ DPD II

in block diagram form together with parameters showing Diagram □ DPD II
transfer functions of individual elements.
□
Details of inverter mode control system, Diagram DPD II
in block diagram form showing transfer functions of individual
elements including parameters.

Details of converter transformer tap changer control system in block Diagram DPD II
diagram form showing transfer functions of individual elements □
including parameters. (Only required for DC Converters and
HVDC Systems connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System.)

Details of AC filter and reactive compensation equipment control Diagram DPD II

systems in block diagram form showing transfer functions of □
individual elements including parameters. (Only required for
DC Converters and HVDC Systems connected to the
National Electricity Transmission System.)

Details of any frequency and/or load control systems in block

diagram form showing transfer functions of individual elements Diagram
including parameters. DPD II
□
Details of any large or small signal modulating controls, such as
power oscillation damping controls or sub-synchronous Diagram
oscillation damping controls, that have not been submitted as DPD II
part of the above control system data.
□
Details of HVDC Converter unit models and/or control systems in
block diagram form showing transfer functions of individual Diagram
elements including parameters. DPD II

Details of AC component models and/or control systems in block Diagram

diagram form showing transfer functions of individual elements □ DPD II
including parameters. □
Details of DC Grid models and/or control systems in block diagram
form showing transfer functions of individual elements including Diagram □
parameters. DPD II

Details of Voltage and power controller and/or control systems in Diagram

block diagram form showing transfer functions of individual □ DPD II
elements including parameters.

Details of Special control features if applicable (e.g., power oscillation

Diagram □
damping (POD) function, subsynchronous torsional interaction
DPD II
(SSTI) control and/or control systems in block diagram form
showing transfer functions of individual elements including
parameters.
□
Details of Multi terminal control, if applicable and/or control systems Diagram
in block diagram form showing transfer functions of individual DPD II
elements including parameters.

Details of HVDC System protection models as agreed between The Diagram □

Company the HVDC System Owner and/or control systems in DPD II
block diagram form showing transfer functions of individual
elements including parameters.

Transfer block diagram representation of the reactive power control □

at converter ends for a voltage source converter Diagram
DPD II
Transfer block diagram representation of the reactive power control
at converter ends for a voltage source converter.
□

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

34 of 126
Data Description Units DATA to Data Operating
RTL Category configuration
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Form
□

SCHEDULE 1 – POWER GENERATING MODULE, GENERATING UNIT (OR CCGT

MODULE), POWER PARK MODULE, DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULE,
HVDC SYSTEM AND DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 19 OF 19

Data Description Units DATA to Data Operating configuration

RTL Category
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Form

LOADING PARAMETERS [PC.A.5.4.3.3]

MW Export
Nominal loading rate MW/s DPD I
Maximum (emergency) loading rate MW/s DPD I

MW Import
Nominal loading rate MW/s DPD I
Maximum (emergency) loading rate MW/s DPD I

Maximum recovery time, to 90% of pre-fault s □ DPD II

loading, following an AC system fault or
severe voltage depression.

Maximum recovery time, to 90% of pre-fault

loading, following a transient DC Network s □ DPD II
fault.

NOTE: Users are referred to Schedules 5 & 14 which set down data required for all Users directly
connected to the National Electricity Transmission System, including Power Stations. Generators
undertaking OTSDUW Arrangements and are utilising an OTSDUW DC Converter are referred to
Schedule 18.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

35 of 126
 SCHEDULE 2 - GENERATION PLANNING PARAMETERS
PAGE 1 OF 3

This schedule contains the Genset Generation Planning Parameters required by The Company to facilitate
studies in Operational Planning timescales.
For a Generating Unit including those within a Power Generating Module (other than a Power Park Unit)
at a Large Power Station, the information is to be submitted on a unit basis and for a CCGT Module or Power
Park Module at a Large Power Station the information is to be submitted on a module basis, unless otherwise
stated.
Where references to CCGT Modules or Power Park Modules at a Large Power Station are made, the
columns "G1" etc should be amended to read "M1" etc, as appropriate. 6Contractors, data only needs to be
provided by a Restoration Contractor where they are not a CUSC Party and the data has not been submitted.
In this case the data to be submitted would be would be pursant to the the terms of the Anchor Restoration
Contract or Top Up Restoration Contract if required.

Power Station: _________________________

Generation Planning Parameters

DATA to DATA GENSET OR STATION DATA
DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS RTL CAT.
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 STN
Form

OUTPUT CAPABILITY
(PC.A.3.2.2)
Registered Capacity on a station and unit basis
(on a station and module basis in the case of MW □ ■ SPD
a CCGT Module or Power Park Module at a
Large Power Station)

Maximum Capacity on a Power Generating MW □ ■ SPD

Module basis and Synchronous Generating
Unit basis and Registered Capacity on a
Power Station basis)

Minimum Generation (on a module

basis in the case of a CCGT Module or MW □ ■ SPD
Power Park Module at a Large Power
Station)
MW □ ■ SPD
Minimum Stable Operating Level (on a module
basis in the case of a Power Generating Module
at a Large Power Station

MW available from Power Generating Modules

and Generating Units or Power Park MW □ ■ SPD
Modules in excess of Registered Capacity
or Maximum Capacity

REGIME UNAVAILABILITY

These data blocks are provided to

allow fixed periods of unavailability to be
registered.
Expected Running Regime. Is Power Station
normally available for full output 24 hours per
day, 7 days per week? If No please provide □ ■ SPD
details of unavailability below.
(PC.A.3.2.2.)
Earliest Synchronising time: OC2.4.2.1(a)
Monday hr/min ■ OC2 -
Tuesday – Friday hr/min ■ OC2 -
Saturday – Sunday hr/min ■ OC2 -
Latest De-Synchronising time: OC2.4.2.1(a)
Monday – Thursday hr/min ■ OC2 -
Friday hr/min ■ OC2 -
Saturday – Sunday hr/min ■ OC2 -
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
36 of 126
SYNCHRONISING PARAMETERS
OC2.4.2.1(a)
Notice to Deviate from Zero (NDZ) after 48 hour Mins ■ OC2
Shutdown
Station Synchronising Intervals (SI) after Mins ■ - - - - - -
48 hour Shutdown
Synchronising Group (if applicable) 1 to 4 ■ OC2 -

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

37 of 126
 SCHEDULE 2 - GENERATION PLANNING PARAMETERS
PAGE 2 OF 3

DATA to DATA GENSET OR STATION DATA

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS RTL CAT.
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 STN
Form

Synchronising Generation (SYG) after MW ■ DPD II -

48 hour Shutdown &
PC.A.5.3.2(f) & OC2.4.2.1(a) OC2

De-Synchronising Intervals (Single value) Mins ■ OC2 - - - - - -

OC2.4.2.1(a)

RUNNING AND SHUTDOWN PERIOD

LIMITATIONS:

Minimum Non Zero time (MNZT) after 48 Mins ■ OC2

hour Shutdown OC2.4.2.1(a)

Minimum Zero time (MZT) OC2.4.2.1(a) Mins OC2

Existing AGR Plant Flexibility Limit No. OC2

(Existing AGR Plant only)

80% Reactor Thermal Power (expressed as MW OC2

Gross-Net MW) (Existing AGR Plant only)

Frequency Sensitive AGR Unit Limit No. OC2

(Frequency Sensitive AGR Units
only)

RUN-UP PARAMETERS
PC.A.5.3.2(f) & OC2.4.2.1(a)
Run-up rates (RUR) after 48 hour (Note that for DPD only a single value of run-up rate from Synch Gen to Registered
Shutdown: Capacity is required)
(See note 2 page 3)
MW Level 1 (MWL1) MW ■ DPD II -
OC2
MW Level 2 (MWL2) MW ■ DPD II -
OC2

RUR from Synch. Gen to MWL1 MW/Mins ■ DPD II

OC2
RUR from MWL1 to MWL2 MW/Mins ■ OC2
RUR from MWL2 to RC MW/Mins ■ OC2

Run-Down Rates (RDR): (Note that for DPD only a single value of run-down rate from Registered Capacity to de-
synch is required)

MWL2 MW ■ DPD II
OC2
RDR from RC to MWL2 MW/Min ■ DPD II
OC2
MWL1 MW ■ DPD II
OC2
RDR from MWL2 to MWL1 MW/Min ■ DPD II
OC2
RDR from MWL1 to de-synch MW/Min ■ DPD II
OC2

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

38 of 126
 SCHEDULE 2 - GENERATION PLANNING PARAMETERS
PAGE 3 OF 3

DATA to DATA
DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS RTL CAT. GENSET OR STATION DATA
CUSC CUSC G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 STN
Contract App.
Form
REGULATION PARAMETERS
OC2.4.2.1(a)
Regulating Range MW ■ DPD II
Load rejection capability while still MW ■ DPD II
Synchronised and able to supply Load.

GAS TURBINE LOADING PARAMETERS:

OC2.4.2.1(a)
Fast loading MW/Min ■ OC2
Slow loading MW/Min ■ OC2

CCGT MODULE PLANNING MATRIX OC2 (please attach)

POWER PARK MODULE PLANNING OC2 (please attach)

MATRIX

Power Park Module Active Power Output/ OC2 (please attach)

Intermittent Power Source Curve
(e.g., MW output / Wind speed)

NOTES:
(1) To allow for different groups of Gensets within a Power Station (e.g., Gensets with the same
operator) each Genset may be allocated to one of up to four Synchronising Groups. Within each
such Synchronising Group the single synchronising interval will apply but between
Synchronising Groups a zero synchronising interval will be assumed.
(2) The run-up of a Genset from synchronising block load to Registered Capacity or Maximum
Capacity is represented as a three stage characteristic in which the run-up rate changes at two
intermediate loads, MWL1 and MWL2. The values MWL1 & MWL2 can be different for each
Genset.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

39 of 126
 SCHEDULE 3 - LARGE POWER STATION OUTAGE PROGRAMMES, OUTPUT
USABLE AND INFLEXIBILITY INFORMATION
PAGE 1 OF 1

(Also outline information on contracts involving External Interconnections)

For a Generating Unit at a Large Power Station the information is to be submitted on a unit basis
and for a CCGT Module or Power Park Module at a Large Power Station the information is to be
submitted on a module basis, unless otherwise stated.
In the case of Restoration Contractors, data only needs to be provided by a Restoration
Contractor where such a Resoration Contractor is not a CUSC Party and the data has not been submitted
previously. In this case, the data to be submitted would be would be pursant to the the terms of the Anchor
Restoration Contract or Top Up Restoration Contract.

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS TIME UPDATE DATA DATA to

COVERED TIME CAT RTL

OUTPUT PROFILES
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
Form

In the case of Large Power Stations whose output MW F. yrs 1 - 7 Week 24 SPD
may be expected to vary in a random manner (e.g.,
wind power) or to some other pattern (e.g., Tidal)
sufficient information is required to enable an
understanding of the possible profile

Notes: 1. The week numbers quoted in the Update Time column refer to standard weeks in the
current year.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

40 of 126
 SCHEDULE 4 - LARGE POWER STATION DROOP AND RESPONSE DATA
PAGE 1 OF 1
GOVERNOR DROOP AND RESPONSE (PC.A.5.5 ■ CUSC Contract)
The Data in this Schedule 4 is to be supplied by Generators with respect to all Large Power Stations, HVDC System Owners and by DC Converter Station owners (where agreed),
whether directly connected or Embedded
DATA DATA DROOP% RESPONSE CAPABILITY
NORMAL VALUE MW
DESCRIPTION CAT Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Primary Secondary High Frequency
MLP1 Designed Minimum Operating Level or
Minimum Regulating Level (for a CCGT Module
or Power Park Module, on a modular basis
assuming all units are Synchronised)

MLP2 Minimum Generation or Minimum Stable

Operating Level (for a CCGT Module or Power
Park Module, or Power Generating Module on a
modular basis assuming all units are
Synchronised)

MLP3 70% of Registered Capacity or Maximum

Capacity

MLP4 80% of Registered Capacity or Maximum

Capacity

MLP5 95% of Registered Capacity or Maximum

Capacity

MLP6 Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity

Notes:
1. The data provided in this Schedule 4 is not intended to constrain any Ancillary Services Agreement.

2. Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity should be identical to that provided in Schedule 2.

3. The Governor Droop should be provided for each Generating Unit (excluding Power Park Units), Power Park Module, HVDC Converter or DC Converter. The Response Capability should be provided for each
Genset or DC Converter.

4. Primary, Secondary and High Frequency Response are defined in CC.A.3.2 or ECC.A.3.2 and are based on a frequency ramp of 0.5Hz over 10 seconds. Primary Response is the minimum value of response
between 10s and 30s after the frequency ramp starts, Secondary Response between 30s and 30 minutes, and High Frequency Response is the minimum value after 10s on an indefinite basis.

5. For plants which have not yet Synchronised, the data values of MLP1 to MLP6 should be as described above. For plants which have already Synchronised, the values of MLP1 to MLP6 can take any value
between Designed Operating Minimum Level or Minimum Regulating Level and Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity. If MLP1 is not provided at the Designed Minimum Operating Level, the value of
the Designed Minimum Operating Level should be separately stated.

6. For the avoidance of doubt Transmission DC Converters and OTSDUW DC Converters must be capable of providing a continuous signal indicating the real time frequency measured at the Transmission
Interface Point to the Offshore Grid Entry Point (as detailed in CC.6.3.7(e)(vii) and CC.6.3.7(e)(viii) or ECC.6.3..3.1.1(f) to enable Offshore Power Generating Modules, Offshore Generating Units, Offshore
Power Park Modules and/or Offshore DC Converters to satisfy the frequency response requirements of CC.6.3.7 or ECC.6.3.7.

7. Alternative governor settigs shall be supplied by Generators, HVDC System Owners and DC Converter Owners where operation is required as part of System Restoration - as required in CC.6.3.5 or
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
41 of 126
 ECC.6.3.5.2 and ECC.6.3.5.5(vii).

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

42 of 126
 SCHEDULE 5 - USERS SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 1 OF 11

The data in this Schedule 5 is required from Users who are connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System via a Connection Point (or who are seeking such a connection). Generators
undertaking OTSDUW should use DRC Schedule 18 although they should still supply data under Schedule 5
in relation to their User’s System up to the Offshore Grid Entry Point.
Table 5 (a)

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS DATA to RTL DATA

CATEGORY
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
Form
USERS SYSTEM LAYOUT (PC.A.2.2)

A Single Line Diagram showing all or part of the User’s System is SPD
required. This diagram shall include:-

(a) all parts of the User’s System, whether existing or ■ ■

proposed, operating at Supergrid Voltage, and in
Scotland and Offshore, also all parts of the User System
operating at 110kV and greater,
(b) all parts of the User’s System operating at a voltage of ■ ■
50kV and greater, and in Scotland and Offshore greater
than 30kV, or higher which can interconnect Connection
Points, or split bus-bars at a single Connection Point,
(c) all parts of the User’s System between Embedded ■ ■
Medium Power Stations or Large Power Stations or
Offshore Transmission Systems connected to the
User’s Subtransmission System and the relevant
Connection Point or Interface Point,
(d) all parts of the User’s System at a Transmission Site. ■ ■

The Single Line Diagram may also include additional details of the ■ ■
User’s Subtransmission System, and the transformers
connecting the User’s Subtransmission System to a lower
voltage. With The Company’s agreement, it may also include
details of the User’s System at a voltage below the voltage of the
Subtransmission System.

This Single Line Diagram shall depict the arrangement(s) of all of ■ ■

the existing and proposed load current carrying Apparatus relating
to both existing and proposed Connection Points, showing
electrical circuitry (i.e., overhead lines, underground cables, power
transformers and similar equipment), operating voltages. In
addition, for equipment operating at a Supergrid Voltage, and in
Scotland and Offshore also at 110kV and greater, circuit breakers
and phasing arrangements shall be shown.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

43 of 126
 SCHEDULE 5 - USERS SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 2 OF 11
Table 5(b)

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS DATA DATA

EXCH CATEGORY
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
Form
REACTIVE COMPENSATION (PC.A.2.4)

For independently switched reactive compensation equipment

not owned by a Relevant Transmission Licensee connected
to the User's System at 132kV and above, and also in Scotland
and Offshore, connected at 33kV and above, other than power
factor correction equipment associated with a customer’s Plant
or Apparatus:

Type of equipment (e.g., fixed or variable) Text ■ ■ SPD

Capacitive rating; or MVAr ■ ■ SPD
Inductive rating; or MVAr ■ ■ SPD
Operating range MVAr ■ ■ SPD

Details of automatic control logic to enable operating text and/or ■ ■ SPD

characteristics to be determined diagrams

Point of connection to User's System (electrical location and Text ■ ■ SPD

system voltage)

SUBSTATION INFRASTRUCTURE (PC.A.2.2.6(b))

For the infrastructure associated with any User’s equipment at

a Substation owned by a Relevant Transmission Licensee or
operated or managed by The Company:-

Rated 3-phase rms short-circuit withstand current kA ■ ■ SPD

Rated 1-phase rms short-circuit withstand current kA ■ ■ SPD
Rated Duration of short-circuit withstand s ■ ■ SPD
Rated rms continuous current A ■ ■ SPD

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

44 of 126
 SCHEDULE 5 – USERS SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 3 OF 11
Table 5 (c)

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS DATA DATA

EXCH CATEGORY
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
Form
LUMPED SUSCEPTANCES (PC.A.2.3)

Equivalent Lumped Susceptance required for all parts of the ■ ■

User’s Subtransmission System which are not included in the
Single Line Diagram.
This should not include: ■ ■
(a) independently switched reactive compensation ■ ■
equipment identified above.
(b) any susceptance of the User’s System inherent in the ■ ■
Demand (Reactive Power) data provided in Schedule
1 (Generator Data) or Schedule 11 (Connection
Point data).

Equivalent lumped shunt susceptance at nominal Frequency. % on 100 ■ ■ SPD

MVA

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

45 of 126
 SCHEDULE 5 – USERS SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 4 OF 11

USER’S SYSTEM DATA

Circuit Parameters (PC.A.2.2.4) (■ CUSC Contract & ■ CUSC Application Form)

The data below is all Standard Planning Data. Details are to be given for all circuits shown on the Single Line Diagram
Table 5 (d)

Years Node 1 Node 2 Rated Operating Positive Phase Sequence % on 100 Zero Phase Sequence (self) % on Zero Phase Sequence (mutual) % on
Valid Voltage Voltage kV MVA 100 MVA 100 MVA
kV

R X B R X B R X B

Notes
1. Data should be supplied for the current, and each of the seven succeeding Financial Years. This should be done by showing for which years the data is valid in
the first column of the Table.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

46 of 126
 SCHEDULE 5 – USERS SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 5 OF 11
USERS SYSTEM DATA
Transformer Data (PC.A.2.2.5) (■ CUSC Contract & ■ CUSC Application Form)

The data below is all Standard Planning Data, and details should be shown below of all transformers shown on the Single Line Diagram. Details of Winding Arrangement,
Tap Changer and earthing details are only required for transformers connecting the User’s higher voltage system with its Primary Voltage System.
Table 5 (e)

Name Positive Phase Sequence Positive Phase Sequence Zero

Voltage Ratio Tap Changer Earthing
of Node Reactance % on Rating Resistance % on Rating Sequence
Years Trans- Rating Winding Details
of Reactance Step
valid former MVA Max Nom Max Nom Arr Range +% Type (delete
Conne- HV LV Min Tap Min Tap % on size
Tap Tap Tap Tap to -% (delete) as app)*
ction Rating %
Direct/
ON/
Res/
OFF
Rea

Direct/
ON/
Res/
OFF
Rea

Direct/
ON/
Res/
OFF
Rea

Direct/
ON/
Res/
OFF
Rea

Direct/
ON/
Res/
OFF
Rea

Direct/
ON/
Res/
OFF
Rea
*If Resistance or Ractance please give impedance value
Notes
1. Data should be supplied for the current, and each of the seven succeeding Financial Years. This should be done by showing for which years the data is valid in the first
column of the Table
2. For a transformer with two secondary windings, the positive and zero phase sequence leakage impedances between the HV and LV1, HV and LV2, and LV1 and LV2
windings are required.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

47 of 126
 SCHEDULE 5 –USERS SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 6 OF 11

USER’S SYSTEM DATA

Switchgear Data (PC.A.2.2.6(a)) (■ CUSC Contract & CUSC Application Form ■)
The data below is all Standard Planning Data, and should be provided for all switchgear (i.e., circuit breakers, load disconnectors and disconnectors) operating
at a Supergrid Voltage, and also in Scotland and Offshore, operating at 132kV. In addition, data should be provided for all circuit breakers irrespective of
voltage located at a Connection Site which is owned by a Relevant Transmission Licensee or operated or managed by The Company.
Table 5(f)

Years Connection Switch No Rated Operating Rated short-circuit breaking Rated short-circuit peak Rated rms DC time constant
Valid Point Voltage kV Votage kV current making current continuous at testing of
rms rms current (A) asymmetrical
breaking ability
(s)
3 Phase kA 1 Phase kA
3 Phase kA 1 Phase kA
rms rms

Notes

1. Rated Voltage should be as defined by IEC 694.

2. Data should be supplied for the current, and each of the seven succeeding Financial Years. This should be done by showing for which years the data is valid in the first column of
the Table

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

48 of 126
 SCHEDULE 5 –USERS SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 7 OF 11
Table 5(g)

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS DATA to RTL DATA

CATEGORY
CUSC CUSC
PROTECTION SYSTEMS (PC.A.6.3) Contract App. Form

The following information relates only to Protection equipment

which can trip or inter-trip or close any Connection Point
circuit breaker or any Transmission circuit breaker. The
information need only be supplied once, in accordance with
the timing requirements set out in PC.A.1.4 (b) and need not
be supplied on a routine annual basis thereafter, although
The Company should be notified if any of the information
changes.

(a) A full description, including estimated settings, for all ■ DPD II

relays and Protection systems installed or to be installed
on the User's System;

(b) A full description of any auto-reclose facilities installed or ■ DPD II

to be installed on the User's System, including type and
time delays;

(c) A full description, including estimated settings, for all ■ DPD II

relays and Protection systems installed or to be
installed on the Power Generating Module, Power
Park Module or Generating Unit's generator
transformer, unit transformer, station transformer and
their associated connections;

(d) For Generating Units (other than Power Park Units) ■ DPD II
having a circuit breaker at the generator terminal voltage
clearance times for electrical faults within the
Generating Unit zone must be declared.

(e)Fault Clearance Times:

Most probable fault clearance time for electrical faults on msec ■ DPD II
any part of the Users System directly connected to the
National Electricity Transmission System.

(f) Alternative Protection data as submitted under (a) to (e) ■ DPD II

above in respect of System Restoration

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS DATA to RTL DATA

CATEGORY
POWER PARK MODULE/UNIT PROTECTION SYSTEMS CUSC CUSC
Contract App. Form
Details of settings for the Power Park Module/Unit protection relays
(to include): (PC.A.5.4.2(f))
(a) Under frequency, ■ DPD II
(b) Over Frequency, ■ DPD II
(c) Under Voltage, Over Voltage, ■ DPD II
(d) Rotor Over current, ■ DPD II
(e) Stator Over current, ■ DPD II
(f) High Wind Speed Shut Down Level, ■ DPD II
(g) Rotor Underspeed, ■ DPD II

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

49 of 126
(h) Rotor Overspeed. ■ DPD II

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

50 of 126
 SCHEDULE 5 - USERS SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 8 OF 11

Information for Transient Overvoltage Assessment (DPD I) (PC.A.6.2 ■ CUSC Contract)

The information listed below may be requested by The Company from each User with respect to any
Connection Site between that User and the National Electricity Transmission System. The impact of any
third party Embedded within the Users System should be reflected.
(a) Busbar layout plan(s), including dimensions and geometry showing positioning of any current and
voltage transformers, through bushings, support insulators, disconnectors, circuit breakers, surge
arresters, etc. Electrical parameters of any associated current and voltage transformers, stray
capacitances of wall bushings and support insulators, and grading capacitances of circuit breakers;
(b) Electrical parameters and physical construction details of lines and cables connected at that
busbar. Electrical parameters of all plant e.g., transformers (including neutral earthing impedance
or zig-zag transformers if any), series reactors and shunt compensation equipment connected at
that busbar (or to the tertiary of a transformer) or by lines or cables to that busbar;
(c) Basic insulation levels (BIL) of all Apparatus connected directly, by lines or by cables to the busbar;
(d) Characteristics of overvoltage Protection devices at the busbar and at the termination points of all
lines, and all cables connected to the busbar;
(e) Fault levels at the lower voltage terminals of each transformer connected directly or indirectly to the
National Electricity Transmission System without intermediate transformation;
(f) The following data is required on all transformers operating at Supergrid Voltage throughout Great
Britain and, in Scotland and Offshore, also at greater than 110kV: three or five limb cores or single
phase units to be specified, and operating peak flux density at nominal voltage.
(g) An indication of which items of equipment may be out of service simultaneously during Planned
Outage conditions.
Harmonic Studies (DPD I) (PC.A.6.4 ■ CUSC Contract)
The information given below, both current and forecast, where not already supplied in this Schedule 5 may be
requested by The Company from each User if it is necessary for The Company to evaluate the
production/magnification of harmonic distortion on the National Electricity Transmission System and User’s
systems. The impact of any third party Embedded within the User’s System should be reflected:
(a) Overhead lines and underground cable circuits of the User's Subtransmission System must be
differentiated and the following data provided separately for each type:
Positive phase sequence resistance
Positive phase sequence reactance
Positive phase sequence susceptance
(b) for all transformers connecting the User's Subtransmission System to a lower voltage:
Rated MVA
Voltage Ratio
Positive phase sequence resistance
Positive phase sequence reactance

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

51 of 126
 SCHEDULE 5 – USERS SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 9 OF 11

(c) at the lower voltage points of those connecting transformers:

Equivalent positive phase sequence susceptance
Connection voltage and MVAr rating of any capacitor bank and component design
parameters if configured as a filter
Equivalent positive phase sequence interconnection impedance with other lower voltage
points
The minimum and maximum Demand (both MW and MVAr) that could occur
Harmonic current injection sources in Amps at the Connection voltage points
Details of traction loads, e.g., connection phase pairs, continuous variation with time, etc.

(d) an indication of which items of equipment may be out of service simultaneously during Planned
Outage conditions

Voltage Assessment Studies (DPD I) (PC.A.6.5 ■ CUSC Contract)

The information listed below, where not already supplied in this Schedule 5, may be requested by The
Company from each User with respect to any Connection Site if it is necessary for The Company to
undertake detailed voltage assessment studies (e.g., to examine potential voltage instability, voltage control
co-ordination or to calculate voltage step changes). The impact of any third party Embedded within the Users
System should be reflected:
(a) For all circuits of the User’s Subtransmission System:
Positive Phase Sequence Reactance
Positive Phase Sequence Resistance
Positive Phase Sequence Susceptance
MVAr rating of any reactive compensation equipment

(b) for all transformers connecting the User's Subtransmission System to a lower voltage:
Rated MVA
Voltage Ratio
Positive phase sequence resistance
Positive Phase sequence reactance
Tap-changer range
Number of tap steps
Tap-changer type: on-load or off-circuit
AVC/tap-changer time delay to first tap movement
AVC/tap-changer inter-tap time delay

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

52 of 126
 SCHEDULE 5 – USERS SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 10 OF 11

(c) at the lower voltage points of those connecting transformers:-

Equivalent positive phase sequence susceptance
MVAr rating of any reactive compensation equipment
Equivalent positive phase sequence interconnection impedance with other lower voltage
points
The maximum Demand (both MW and MVAr) that could occur
Estimate of voltage insensitive (constant power) load content in % of total load at both
winter peak and 75% off-peak load conditions

Short Circuit Analyses:(DPD I) (PC.A.6.6 ■ CUSC Contract)

The information listed below, both current and forecast, and where not already supplied under this
Schedule 5, may be requested by The Company from each User with respect to any Connection
Site where prospective short-circuit currents on equipment owned by a Relevant Transmission
Licensee or operated or managed by The Company are close to the equipment rating. The impact
of any third party Embedded within the User’s System should be reflected:-
(a) For all circuits of the User’s Subtransmission System:
Positive phase sequence resistance
Positive phase sequence reactance
Positive phase sequence susceptance
Zero phase sequence resistance (both self and mutuals)
Zero phase sequence reactance (both self and mutuals)
Zero phase sequence susceptance (both self and mutuals)
(b) for all transformers connecting the User's Subtransmission System to a lower voltage:
Rated MVA
Voltage Ratio
Positive phase sequence resistance (at max, min and nominal tap)
Positive phase sequence reactance (at max, min and nominal tap)
Zero phase sequence reactance (at nominal tap)
Tap changer range
Earthing method: direct, resistance or reactance
Impedance if not directly earthed
(c) at the lower voltage points of those connecting transformers:-
The maximum Demand (in MW and MVAr) that could occur
Short-circuit infeed data in accordance with PC.A.2.5.6(a) unless the User’s lower voltage
network runs in parallel with the Subtransmission System, when to prevent double
counting in each node infeed data, a  equivalent comprising the data items of PC.A.2.5.6(a)
for each node together with the positive phase sequence interconnection impedance
between the nodes shall be submitted.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

53 of 126
 SCHEDULE 5 – USERS SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 11 OF 11

Dynamic Models:(DPD II) (PC.A.6.7 ■ CUSC Contract)

The information listed below, both current and forecast, and where not already supplied under this
Schedule 5, may be requested by The Company from each EU Code User or in respect of each EU
Grid Supply Point with respect to any Connection Site
(a) Dynamic model structure and block diagrams including parameters, transfer functions
and individual elements (as applicable)
(b) Power control functions and block diagrams including parameters, transfer functions
and individual elements (as applicable)
(c) Voltage control functions and block diagrams including parameters, transfer functions
and individual elements (as applicable)
(d) Converter control models and block diagrams including parameters, transfer
functions and individual elements (as applicable)

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

54 of 126
 SCHEDULE 6 – USERS OUTAGE INFORMATION
PAGE 1 OF 3
DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS DATA to TIMESCALE UPDATE DATA
RTL COVERED TIME CAT.
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
Form
Details are required from Network Operators of proposed ■ Years 2-5 Week 8 OC2
outages in their User Systems and from Generators with (Network
respect to their outages, which may affect the performance Operator etc)
of the Total System (e.g., at a Connection Point or Week 13 OC2
constraining Embedded Large Power Stations or (Generators) PC.A.5.7.2
constraints to the Maximum Import Capacity or Maximum
Export Capacity at an Interface Point) (OC2.4.1.3.2(a) &
(b)). Outages of Plant and Apparatus of Restoration
Contractors and key Plant and Apparatus of a Network
Operator’s System associated with a Distribution
Restoration Zone Plan also need to be co-ordinated with
outages on the National Electricity Transmission
System. Thisincludes data from Network Operators and
Restoration Contractors which would impact the ability to
operate a Local Joint Restoration Plan or Distribution
Restoration Zone Plan.

(The Company advises Network Operators of National Years 2-5 Week 28)
Electricity Transmission System outages affecting their
Systems)

Network Operator informs The Company if unhappy with ■ " Week 30 OC2
proposed outages)

(The Company draws up revised National Electricity " Week 34)

Transmission System
(outage plan advises Users of operational effects)

Generators and Non-Embedded Customers provide ■ Year 1 Week 13 OC2

Details of Apparatus owned by them (other than Gensets)
at each Grid Supply Point (OC2.4.1.3.3)

(The Company advises Network Operators of outages Year 1 Week 28)

affecting their Systems) (OC2.4.1.3.3)

Network Operator details of relevant outages affecting the ■ Year 1 Week 32 OC2
Total System (OC2.4.1.3.3)

Details of:- Year 1 Week 32 OC2

Maximum Import Capacity for each Interface Point MVA / MW
Maximum Export Capacity for each Interface Point MVA / MW
Changes to previously declared values of the Interface V (unless
Point Target Voltage/Power Factor (OC2.4.1.3.3(c )). power factor
control

(The Company informs Users of aspects that may affect Year 1 Week 34)
their Systems) (OC2.4.1.3.3)

Users inform The Company if unhappy with aspects as ■ Year 1 Week 36 OC2
notified
(OC2.4.1.3.3)

(The Company issues final National Electricity ■ Year 1 Week 49 OC2

Transmission System
(outage plan with advice of operational) (OC2.4.1.3.3)
(effects on Users System)

Generator, Network Operator and Non-Embedded Week 8 ahead As occurring OC2

Customers to inform The Company of changes to to year end
outages previously requested

Details of load transfer capability of 12MW or Within Yr 0 As The OC2

more between Grid Supply Points in England and Company
Wales and 10MW or more between Grid Supply Points request
in Scotland.
Details of:- MVA / MW Within Yr 0 As occurring OC2
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
55 of 126
 DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS DATA to TIMESCALE UPDATE DATA
RTL COVERED TIME CAT.
Maximum Import Capacity for each Interface Point MVA / MW
Maximum Export Capacity for each Interface Point V (unless
Changes to previously declared values of the Interface power factor
Point Target Voltage/Power Factor control
Note: Users should refer to OC2 for full details of the procedure summarised above and for the
information which The Company will provide on the Programming Phase.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

56 of 126
 SCHEDULE 6 – USERS OUTAGE INFORMATION
PAGE 2 OF 3

The data below is to be provided to The Company as required for compliance with the applicable Retained
EU Law (Commission Regulation (EU) No 543/2013 (OC2.4.2.3)). Data provided under Article Numbers
7.1(a), 7.1(b), 15.1(a), 15.1(b), and 15.1(c) and 15.1(d) is to be provided using MODIS.

ECR USERS
FREQUENCY OF
ARTICLE DATA DESCRIPTION PROVIDING
SUBMISSION
No. DATA

Planned unavailability of the Apparatus belonging to a Non- To be received by The

Embedded Customer where OC2.4.7 (a) applies Company as soon as
reasonably possible but
- Unavailable demand capacity during the event (MW) in any case, to facilitate
- Estimated start date and time (dd.mm.yy hh:mm) publication of data no
Non-Embedded
7.1(a) - Estimated end date and time (dd.mm.yy hh:mm) later than 1 hour after a
Customer
- Reason for unavailability from the list below: decision has been
. Maintenance made by the Non-
. Failure Embedded Customer
. Shutdown regarding the planned
. Other unavailability

Changes in actual availability of the Apparatus belonging to a

Non-Embedded Customer where OC2.4.7 (b) applies
To be received by The
Company as soon as
- Unavailable demand capacity during the event (MW)
reasonably possible but
- Start date and time (dd.mm.yy hh:mm)
Non-Embedded in any case, to facilitate
7.1(b) - Estimated end date and time (dd.mm.yy hh:mm)
Customer publication of data no
- Reason for unavailability from the list below :
later than 1 hour after the
. Maintenance
change in actual
. Failure
availability
. Shutdown
. Other

Year Ahead Forecast Margin information as provided in

accordance with OC2.4.1.2.2 In accordance with
8.1 Generator
OC2.4.1.2.2
- Output Usable

Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity for Generating

Units or Power Generating Modules with greater than 1 MW
Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity provided in
14.1(a) accordance with PC.4.3.1 and PC.A.3.4.3 or PC.A.3.1.4 Generator Week 24

- Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity (MW)

- Production type (from that listed under PC.A.3.4.3)

Power Station Registered Capacity for units with equal or

greater than 100 MW Registered Capacity provided in
accordance with PC.4.3.1 and PC.A.3.4.3

14.1(b) - Power Station name Generator Week 24

- Location of Generating Unit
- Production type (from that listed under PC.A.3.4.3)
- Voltage connection levels
- Registered Capacity or Maximum Capacity (MW)

Estimated output of Active Power of a BM Unit or Generating

Unit for each per Settlement Period of the next Operational
In accordance with
14.1(c) Day provided in accordance with BC1.4.2 Generator
BC1.4.2
- Physical Notification

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

57 of 126
 Planned unavailability of a Generating Unit where OC2.4.7(c)
applies

- Power Station name To be received by The

- Generating Unit and/or Power Generating Module name Company as soon as
- Location of Generating Unit and/or Power Generating reasonably possible but
Module in any case, to facilitate
- Generating Unit Registered Capacity (MW) publication of data no
15.1(a) Generator
- Production type (from that listed under PC.A.3.4.3) later than 1 hour after a
- Output Usable (MW) during the event decision has been made
- Start date and time (dd.mm.yy hh:mm) by the Generator
- Estimated end date and time (dd.mm.yy hh:mm) regarding the planned
- Reason for unavailability from the list below: unavailability
. Maintenance
. Shutdown
. Other

Changes in availability of a Generating Unit and/or Power

Generating Module where OC2.4.7 (d) applies

- Power Station name

- Generating Unit and/or Power Generating Module name
To be received by The
- Location of Generating Unit and/or Power Generating
Company as soon as
Module
reasonably possible but
- Generating Unit Registered Capacity and Power
in any case, to facilitate
15.1(b) Generating Module Maximum Capacity (MW) Generator
publication of data no
- Production type(from that listed under PC.A.3.4.3)
later than 1 hour after the
- Maximum Export Limit (MW) during the event
change in actual
- Start date and time (dd.mm.yy hh:mm)
availability
- Estimated end date and time (dd.mm.yy hh:mm)
- Reason for unavailability from the list below:
. Maintenance
. Shutdown
. Other

Planned unavailability of a Power Station where OC2.4.7(e)

applies
To be received by The
- Power Station name
Company as soon as
- Location of Power Station
reasonably possible but
- Power Station Registered Capacity (MW)
in any case, to facilitate
- Production type (from that listed under PC.A.3.4.3)
publication of data no
15.1(c) - Power Station aggregated Output Usable (MW) during the Generator
later than 1 hour after a
event
decision has been made
- Start date and time (dd.mm.yy hh:mm)
by the Generator
- Estimated end date and time (dd.mm.yy hh:mm)
regarding the planned
- Reason for unavailability from the list below:
unavailability
. Maintenance
. Shutdown
. Other

Changes in actual availability of a Power Station where

OC2.4.7 (f) applies

- Power Station name

To be received by The
- Location of Power Station
Company as soon as
- Power Station Registered Capacity (MW)
reasonably possible but
- Production type (from that listed under PC.A.3.4.3)
in any case, to facilitate
15.1(d) - Power Station aggregated Maximum Export Limit (MW) Generator
publication of data no
during the event
later than 1 hour after the
- Start date and time (dd.mm.yy hh:mm)
change in actual
- Estimated end date and time (dd.mm.yy hh:mm)
availability
- Reason for unavailability from the list below:
. Maintenance
. Shutdown
. Other

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

58 of 126
 Outage data from a Network Operator relating to an outage on
the Network Operator’s System or an outage of a
Restoration Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus (not already Network
supplied) which would prevent the operation of a Restoration Operators and
In accordance with the
15.1(e) Plan. Outages of Plant and Apparatus of Restoration Restoration
requirements of OC2
Contractors and key Plant and Apparatus of a Network Service
Operator’s System associated with a Distribution Contractors
Restoration Zone Plan also need to be co-ordinated with
outages on the National Electricity Transmission System

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

59 of 126
 SCHEDULE 7 - LOAD CHARACTERISTICS AT GRID SUPPLY POINTS
PAGE 1 OF 1

All data in this schedule 7 is categorised as Standard Planning Data (SPD) and is required for existing and
agreed future connections. This data is only required to be updated when requested by The Company.

DATA FOR FUTURE YEARS

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS DATA to Yr 1 Yr 2 Yr 3 Yr 4 Yr 5 Yr 6 Yr 7
RTL
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
Form
FOR ALL TYPES OF DEMAND FOR EACH GRID
SUPPLY POINT

The following information is required infrequently □

and should only be supplied, wherever possible,
when requested by The Company (PC.A.4.7)

Details of individual loads which have □ (Please Attach)

Characteristics significantly different from the
typical range of domestic or commercial and
industrial load supplied: (PC.A.4.7(a))

Sensitivity of demand to fluctuations in voltage □

And frequency on National Electricity
Transmission System at time of peak
Connection Point Demand (Active Power)
(PC.A.4.7(b))

Voltage Sensitivity (PC.A.4.7(b)) MW/kV □

MVAr/kV

Frequency Sensitivity (PC.A.4.7(b)) MW/Hz □

MVAr/Hz

Reactive Power sensitivity should relate to the □

Power Factor information given in Schedule 11
(or for Generators, Schedule 1) and note 6 on
Schedule 11 relating to Reactive Power therefore
applies: (PC.A.4.7(b))

Phase unbalance imposed on the National

Electricity Transmission System (PC.A.4.7(d))
- maximum % □
- average % □

Maximum Harmonic Content imposed on National % □

Electricity Transmission System (PC.A.4.7(e))

Details of any loads which may cause Demand □

Fluctuations greater than those permitted under
Engineering Recommendation P28, Stage 1 at
the Point of Common Coupling including
Flicker Severity (Short Term) and Flicker
Severity (Long Term) (PC.A.4.7(f))

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

60 of 126
 SCHEDULE 8 - DATA SUPPLIED BY BM PARTICIPANTS
PAGE 1 OF 1

CODE DESCRIPTION

BC1 Physical Notifications

BC1 & BC2 Export and Import Limits

BC1 Bid-Offer Data

BC1 Dynamic Parameters (Day Ahead)

BC2 Dynamic Parameters (For use in Balancing Mechanism)

BC1 & BC2 Other Relevant Data

- No information collated under this Schedule will be transferred to the Relevant Transmission Licensees

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

61 of 126
 SCHEDULE 9 - DATA SUPPLIED BY THE COMPANY TO USERS
PAGE 1 OF 1

(Example of data to be supplied)

CODE DESCRIPTION

CC or ECC Operation Diagram

CC or ECC Site Responsibility Schedules

PC Day of the peak National Electricity Transmission System Demand

Day of the minimum National Electricity Transmission System Demand

OC1.7 From 31 December 2026 and during normal system operation, The Company
shall publish on a daily basis, 60% and 100% of the peak National Demand,
under pre System shutdown conditions for the following day, based on the latest
forecast that would feed into the System Restoration Regional targets by means
of messages inputted by The Company to the Balancing Mechanism
Reporting Service (BMRS).

From 31 December 2026 and during System Restoration, The Company shall
publish for each System Restoration Region, the Demand that is used to
calculate the National Demand on an hourly basis on a reasonable endeavours
basis by means of messages inputted by The Company to the Balancing
Mechanism Reporting Service (BMRS).

OC2 Surpluses and Output Useable (OU) requirements for each Generator over
varying timescales

Equivalent networks to Users for Outage Planning

Negative Reserve Active Power Margins (when necessary)

Operating Reserve information

BC1 Demand Estimates, Indicated Margin and Indicated Imbalance, indicative

Synchronising and Desynchronising times of Embedded Power Stations to
Network Operators, special actions.

BC2 Bid-Offer Acceptances, Ancillary Services instructions to relevant Users,

Emergency Instructions

BC3 Location, amount, and Low Frequency Relay settings of any Low Frequency
Relay initiated Demand reduction for Demand which is Embedded.

- No information collated under this Schedule will be transferred to the Relevant Transmission
Licensees
- In respect of OC1, the data would also be supplied to Restoration Contractors

DATA TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE COMPANY TO USERS

PURSUANT TO THE TRANSMISSION LICENCE

1. The Transmission Licence requires The Company to publish annually the Seven Year
Statement which is designed to provide Users and potential Users with information to enable
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
62 of 126
 them to identify opportunities for continued and further use of the National Electricity
Transmission System.

When a User is considering a development at a specific site, certain additional information may
be required in relation to that site which is of such a level of detail that it is inappropriate to include
it in the Seven Year Statement. In these circumstances, the User may contact The Company
who will be pleased to arrange a discussion and the provision of such additional information
relevant to the site under consideration as the User may reasonably require.

2. The Transmission Licence also requires The Company to offer terms for an agreement for
connection to and use of the National Electricity Transmission System and further information
will be given by The Company to the potential User in the course of the discussions of the terms
of such an agreement.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

63 of 126
 SCHEDULE 10 - DEMAND PROFILES AND ACTIVE ENERGY DATA
PAGE 1 OF 2

The following information is required from each Network Operator and from each Non-Embedded Customer. The data
should be provided in calendar week 24 each year (although Network Operators may delay the submission until
calendar week 28).
DATA DESCRIPTION F. Yr. F. Yr. F. Yr. F. Yr. F. Yr. F. Yr. F. Yr. F. Yr. UPDATE DATA CAT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TIME

Demand Profiles (PC.A.4.2) (■ – CUSC Contract & ■ CUSC Application Form)

Total User's Day of User's annual Maximum demand at Annual ACS Conditions (MW)
system profile (please Day of annual peak of National Electricity Transmission System Demand at Annual ACS
delete as applicable) Conditions (MW)
Day of annual minimum National Electricity Transmission System Demand at average conditions
(MW)

0000 : 0030 Wk.24 SPD

0030 : 0100 :
0100 : 0130 :
0130 : 0200 : :
0200 : 0230 : :
0230 : 0300 : :
0300 : 0330 : :
0330 : 0400 : :
0400 : 0430 : :
0430 : 0500 : :
0500 : 0530 : :
0530 : 0600 : :
0600 : 0630 : :
0630 : 0700 : :
0700 : 0730 : :
0730 : 0800 : :
0800 : 0830 : :
0830 : 0900 : :
0900 : 0930 : :
0930 : 1000 : :
1000 : 1030 : :
1030 : 1100 : :
1100 : 1130 : :
1130 : 1200 : :
1200 : 1230 : :
1230 : 1300 : :
1300 : 1330 : :
1330 : 1400 : :
1400 : 1430 : :
1430 : 1500 : :
1500 : 1530 : :
1530 : 1600 : :
1600 : 1630 : :
1630 : 1700 : :
1700 : 1730 : :
1730 : 1800 : :
1800 : 1830 : :
1830 : 1900 : :
1900 : 1930 : :
1930 : 2000 : :
2000 : 2030 : :
2030 : 2100 : :
2100 : 2130 : :
2130 : 2200 : :
2200 : 2230 : :
2230 : 2300 : :
2300 : 2330 : :
2330 : 0000 : :

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

64 of 126
 SCHEDULE 10 - DEMAND PROFILES AND ACTIVE ENERGY DATA
PAGE 2 OF 2

DATA DESCRIPTION Out-turn F.Yr. Update Data Cat DATA to RTL

Actual Weather 0 Time
Corrected.
(PC.A.4.3) CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
Form
Active Energy Data Week 24 SPD ■ ■

Total annual Active Energy ■ ■

requirements under average
conditions of each Network
Operator and each Non-
Embedded Customer in the
following categories of Customer
Tariff:-

LV1 ■ ■
LV2 ■ ■
LV3 ■ ■
EHV ■ ■
HV ■ ■
Traction ■ ■
Lighting ■ ■
User System Losses ■ ■

Active Energy from Embedded ■ ■

Small Power Stations and
Embedded Medium Power
Stations

NOTES:

1. 'F. yr.' means 'Financial Year'

2. Demand and Active Energy Data (General)

Demand and Active Energy data should relate to the point of connection to the National Electricity
Transmission System and should be net of the output (as reasonably considered appropriate by the
User) of all Embedded Small Power Stations, Medium Power Stations and Customer Generating
Plant. Auxiliary demand of Embedded Power Stations should be included in the demand data
submitted by the User at the Connection Point. Users should refer to the PC for a full definition of
the Demand to be included.

3. Demand profiles and Active Energy data should be for the total System of the Network Operator,
including all Connection Points, and for each Non-Embedded Customer. Demand Profiles should
give the numerical maximum demand that in the User's opinion could reasonably be imposed on the
National Electricity Transmission System.

4. In addition the demand profile is to be supplied for such days as The Company may specify, but such
a request is not to be made more than once per calendar year.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

65 of 126
 SCHEDULE 11 - CONNECTION POINT DATA
PAGE 1 OF 5

The following information is required from each Network Operator and from each Non-Embedded Customer.
The data should be provided in calendar week 24 each year (although Network Operators may delay the
submission until calendar week 28).

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

66 of 126
Table 11(a)

Connection Point:

Connection Point Demand at the time of - a) maximum Demand

(select each one in turn) b) peak National Electricity Transmission System Demand (specified by The
(Provide data for each Access Period Company)
associated with the Connection Point) c) minimum National Electricity Transmission System Demand (specified by
The Company)
d) maximum Demand during Access Period
e) specified by either The Company or a User
Name of Transmission Interface Circuit out
PC.A.4.1.4.2
of service during Access Period (if reqd).

DATA DESCRIPTION Outturn Outturn F.Yr F.Yr F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr F.Yr F.Yr DATA CAT
(CUSC Contract □ & CUSC Application Form ■) Weather
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Corrected
Date of a), b), c), d) or e) as denoted above. PC.A.4.3.3
Time of a), b), c), d) or e) as denoted above. PC.A.4.3.3
Connection Point Demand (MW) PC.A.4.3.1
Connection Point Demand (MVAr) PC.A.4.3.1
Deduction made at Connection Point for
Small Power Stations, Medium Power
PC.A.4.3.2(a)
Stations and Customer Generating Plant
(MW)
Reference to valid Single Line Diagram PC.A.4.3.5
Reference to node and branch data. PC.A.2.2

Note: The following data block can be repeated for each post fault network revision that may impact on the Transmission System.

Reference to post-fault revision of Single

PC.A.4.5
Line Diagram
Reference to post-fault revision of the node
and branch data associated with the Single PC.A.4.5
Line Diagram
Reference to the description of the actions
and timescales involved in effecting the post-
fault actions (e.g. auto-switching, manual, PC.A.4.5
teleswitching, overload protection operation
etc)

Access Group:
Note: The following data block to be repeated for each Connection Point with the Access Group.
Name of associated Connection Point within
PC.A.4.3.1
the same Access Group:
Demand at associated Connection Point
PC.A.4.3.1
(MW)
Demand at associated Connection Point
PC.A.4.3.1
(MVAr)
Deduction made at associated Connection
Point for Small Power Stations, Medium
PC.A.4.3.2(a)
Power Stations and Customer Generating
Plant (MW)

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

67 of 126
 SCHEDULE 11 - CONNECTION POINT DATA
PAGE 2 OF 5
Table 11(b)
Embedded Generation Data
Connection
Point:
DATA Outtur Outtur F.Yr F.Yr F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr F.Yr F.Yr DATA CAT
DESCRIPTION
n n
Weather
Correcte 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
d
Small Power For each Connection Point where there are Embedded Small Power Stations, Medium
Station, Power Stations or Customer Generating Stations the following information is required:
Medium
Power
Station and
Customer
Generation
Summary
No. of Small PC.A.3.1
Power .4(a)
Stations,
Medium
Power
Stations or
Customer
Power
Stations
Number of PC.A.3.1
Generating .4(a)
Units within
these stations

Summated PC.A.3.1
Capacity of all .4(a)
these
Generating
Units

Where the Network Operator’s System places a constraint on the capacity of an Embedded Large Power
Station
PC.A.3.2
Station Name
.2(c)
Generating PC.A.3.2
Unit .2(c)
System PC.A.3.2
Constrained .2(c)(i)
Capacity
Reactive PC.A.3.2
Despatch .2(c)(ii)
Network
Restriction

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

68 of 126
Where the Network Operator’s System places a constraint on the capacity of an Offshore
Transmission System at an Interface Point
Offshore PC.A.3.2.2(c)
Transmission
System Name
Interface Point PC.A.3.2.2(c)
Name
Maximum Export PC.A.3.2.2(c)
Capacity
Maximum Import PC.A.3.2.2(c)
Capacity

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

69 of 126
 SCHEDULE 11 - CONNECTION POINT DATA
PAGE 3 OF 5

Table 11(c)

For each Embedded Small Power Station of 1MW and above, the following information is required, effective 2015 in line with the Week 24 data submissions.
DATA An Connection Generator Technology CHP (Y/N) Registered Lowest Where it Control Control mode Loss of Loss of mains
DESCRIPTION Embedded Date unit Type capacity in voltage exports mode voltage target mains protection
Small (Financial Reference / Production MW (as node on electricity and reactive protection settings
Power Year for type defined in the most from wind PV range or target pf type
Station generator the up-to-date or storage, (as appropriate)
reference connecting Distribution Single the
unique to after week Code) Line geographical
each 24 2015 Diagram to location of the
Network which it primary or
Operator connects or higher
where it will voltage
export most substation to
of its power which it
connects
DATA CAT PC.A.3.1.4 PC.A.3.1.4 PC.A.3.1.4 PC.A.3.1.4 PC.A.3.1.4 PC.A.3.1.4 PC.A.3.1.4 PC.A.3.1.4 PC.A.3.1.4 PC.A.3.1.4 PC.A.3.1.4
(a) (a) (a) (a) (a) (a) (a) (a) (a) (a)

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

70 of 126
 SCHEDULE 11 - CONNECTION POINT DATA
PAGE 4 OF 5

NOTES:

1. 'F.Yr.' means 'Financial Year'. F.Yr. 1 refers to the current financial year.

2. All Demand data should be net of the output (as reasonably considered appropriate by the User) of all Embedded
Small Power Stations, Embedded Medium Power Stations and Customer Generating Plant. Generation and /
or Auxiliary demand of Embedded Large Power Stations should not be included in the demand data submitted by
the User. Users should refer to the PC for a full definition of the Demand to be included.

3. Peak Demand should relate to each Connection Point individually and should give the maximum demand that in
the User's opinion could reasonably be imposed on the National Electricity Transmission System. Users may
submit the Demand data at each node on the Single Line Diagram instead of at a Connection Point as long as
the User reasonably believes such data relates to the peak (or minimum) at the Connection Point.

In deriving Demand any deduction made by the User (as detailed in note 2 above) to allow for Embedded Small
Power Stations, Embedded Medium Power Stations and Customer Generating Plant is to be specifically stated
as indicated on the Schedule.

4. The Company may at its discretion require details of any Embedded Small Power Stations or Embedded Medium
Power Stations whose output can be expected to vary in a random manner (e.g. wind power) or according to some
other pattern (e.g. tidal power)

5. Where more than 95% of the total Demand at a Connection Point is taken by synchronous motors, values of the
Power Factor at maximum and minimum continuous excitation may be given instead. Power Factor data should
allow for series reactive losses on the User's System but exclude reactive compensation network susceptance
specified separately in Schedule 5.

6. Where a Reactive Despatch Network Restriction is in place which requires the generator to maintain a target
voltage set point this should be stated as an alternative to the size of the Reactive Despatch Network Restriction.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

71 of 126
 SCHEDULE 11 - CONNECTION POINT DATA
PAGE 5 OF 5

Table 11 (d)

Embedded Small Power Stations <1MW

Network
Operator

Aggregate
Registered
Capacity Number of
Fuel Type Total MW PGMs Comments
Biomass
Fossil brown coal/lignite
Fossil coal-derived gas
Fossil gas
Fossil hard coal
Fossil oil
Fossil oil shale
Fossil peat
Geothermal
Hydro pumped storage
Hydro run-of-river and poundage
Hydro water reservoir
Marine
Nuclear
Other renewable
Solar
Waste
Wind offshore
Wind onshore
Other

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

72 of 126
 SCHEDULE 12 - DEMAND CONTROL
PAGE 1 OF 2

The following information is required from each Network Operator and where indicated with an
asterisk from Externally Interconnected System Operators and/or Interconnector Users and
a Pumped Storage Generator and Generators in respect of Electricity Storage Modules.
Where indicated with a double asterisk, the information is only required from Suppliers.

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS UPDATE TIME

Demand Control

Demand met or to be relieved by

Demand Control (averaging at the
Demand Control Notification Level
or more over a half hour) at each
Connection Point.

Demand Control at time of National

Electricity Transmission System
weekly peak demand
Amount MW )F.yrs 0 to 5 Week 24 OC1
Duration Min )

For each half hour MW Wks 2-8 ahead 1000 Mon OC1

For each half hour MW Days 2-12 ahead 1200 Wed OC1

For each half hour MW Previous calendar 0600 daily OC1

day

**Customer Demand Management

(at the Customer Demand
Management Notification Level or
more at the Connection Point)

For each half hour MW Any time in

Control Phase OC1

For each half hour MW Remainder of When

period changes OC1
occur to
previous plan

For each half hour MW Previous calendar 0600 daily OC1

day
**In Scotland, Load Management MW For the next day 11:00 OC1
Blocks
For each block of 5MW or more, for
each half hour

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

73 of 126
 SCHEDULE 12 - DEMAND CONTROL
PAGE 2 OF 2

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS TIME COVERED UPDATE DATA

TIME CAT.
*Demand Control or Pump
Tripping Offered as Reserve

Magnitude of Demand or pumping MW Year ahead from Week 24 DPD I

load or Electricity Storage charging week 24
load which is tripped

System Frequency at which Hz " " "

tripping is initiated

Time duration of System Frequency S " " "

below trip setting for tripping to be
initiated

Time delay from trip initiation to S " " "

Tripping

Electricity Storage Module data

Maximum Capacity MW " " "
" " "
Maximum Import Power MW " " "
Registered Import Capability MW " " "
Charge Time Min " " "
“ “ “
Discharge time Min “ “ “
Operating periods Min “ “ “

Emergency Manual Load

Disconnection

Method of achieving load Text Year ahead from Annual in OC6

disconnection week 24 week 24

Annual ACS Peak Demand MW " " "

(Active Power) at Connection
Point (requested under Schedule 11
- repeated here for reference)

Cumulative percentage of
Connection Point Demand
(Active Power) which can be
disconnected by the following times
from an instruction from The
Company

5 mins % " " "

10 mins % " " "
15 mins % " " "
20 mins % " " "
25 mins % " " "
30 mins % " " "

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

74 of 126
 Notes:
1. Network Operators may delay the submission until calendar week 28.
2. No information collated under this Schedule will be transferred to the Relevant
Transmission Licensees (or Generators undertaking OTSDUW).

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

75 of 126
 SCHEDULE 12A - AUTOMATIC LOW FREQUENCY DEMAND DISCONNECTION
PAGE 1 OF 1

Time Covered: Year ahead from week 24 Data Category: OC6

Update Time: Annual in week 24

GSP Low Frequency Demand Disconnection Blocks MW Residual

Demand 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 demand
Grid Supply Point MW 48.8Hz 48.75Hz 48.7Hz 48.6Hz 48.5Hz 48.4Hz 48.2Hz 48.0Hz 47.8Hz MW
GSP1
GSP2
GSP3

Total demand disconnected MW

per block %
Total demand disconnection MW ( % of aggregate demand of MW)

Note: All demand refers to that at the time of forecast National Electricity Transmission System
peak demand.
Network Operators may delay the submission until calendar week 28
No information collated under this schedule will be transferred to the Relevant Transmission
Licensees (or Generators undertaking OTSDUW).

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

76 of 126
 SCHEDULE 13 - FAULT INFEED DATA
PAGE 1 OF 2

The data in this Schedule 13 is all Standard Planning Data, and is required from all Users other than
Generators who are connected to the National Electricity Transmission System via a Connection Point
(or who are seeking such a connection). A data submission is to be made each year in Week 24 (although
Network Operators may delay the submission until Week 28). A separate submission is required for each
node included in the Single Line Diagram provided in Schedule 5.

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS F.Yr F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. DATA to
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RTL
SHORT CIRCUIT INFEED TO THE CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
NATIONAL ELECTRICITY Form
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FROM
USERS SYSTEM AT A CONNECTION
POINT
(PC.A.2.5)
□ ■
Name of node or
Connection Point

Symmetrical three phase

short-circuit current infeed

- at instant of fault kA □ ■

- after subtransient fault □ ■

current contribution has
substantially decayed Ka

Zero sequence source

impedances as seen from
the
Point of Connection or
node on the Single Line
Diagram (as appropriate)
consistent with the
maximum infeed above:

- Resistance % on 100 □ ■

- Reactance % on 100 □ ■

Positive sequence X/R ratio □ ■

at instance of fault

Pre-Fault voltage magnitude □ ■

at which the maximum fault
currents were calculated p.u.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

77 of 126
 SCHEDULE 13 - FAULT INFEED DATA
PAGE 2 OF 2

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS F.Yr F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. DATA to
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RTL
SHORT CIRCUIT INFEED TO THE CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
NATIONAL ELECTRICITY Form
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FROM
USERS SYSTEM AT A CONNECTION
POINT
Negative sequence
impedances
of User’s System as seen
from
the Point of Connection or
node on the Single Line
Diagram (as appropriate).
If no data is given, it will be
assumed that they are equal
to the positive sequence
values.

- Resistance % on □ ■
100
- Reactance % on □ ■
100

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

78 of 126
 SCHEDULE 14 - FAULT INFEED DATA (GENERATORS INCLUDING UNIT
TRANSFORMERS AND STATION TRANSFORMERS)
PAGE 1 OF 5

The data in this Schedule 14 is all Standard Planning Data, and is to be provided by Generators, with
respect to all directly connected Power Stations, all Embedded Large Power Stations and all
Embedded Medium Power Stations connected to the Subtransmission System. A data submission is
to be made each year in Week 24.
Fault infeeds via Unit Transformers
A submission should be made for each Generating Unit (including those which are part of a
Synchronous Power Generating Module) with an associated Unit Transformer. Where there is more
than one Unit Transformer associated with a Generating Unit, a value for the total infeed through all
Unit Transformers should be provided. The infeed through the Unit Transformer(s) should include
contributions from all motors normally connected to the Unit Board, together with any generation (e.g.
Auxiliary Gas Turbines) which would normally be connected to the Unit Board, and should be
expressed as a fault current at the Generating Unit terminals for a fault at that location.

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. DATA to
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RTL
CUSC CUSC
(PC.A.2.5) Contract App.
Form
Name of Power Station □ ■

Number of Unit Transformers □ ■

Symmetrical three phase short-

circuit current infeed through the
Unit Transformers(s) for a fault
at the Generating Unit
terminals

- at instant of fault kA □ ■

- after subtransient fault □ ■

current contribution has kA
substantially decayed

Positive sequence X/R ratio □ ■

at instance of fault

Subtransient time constant (if ms

significantly different from 40ms) □ ■

Pre-fault voltage at fault point (if

different from 1.0 p.u.) □ ■

The following data items need

only be supplied if the
Generating Unit Step-up
Transformer can supply zero
sequence current from the
Generating Unit side to the
National Electricity
Transmission System

Zero sequence source

impedances as seen from the
Generating Unit terminals
consistent with the maximum
infeed above:

- Resistance % on 100 □ ■

- Reactance % on 100 □ ■

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

79 of 126
 SCHEDULE 14 - FAULT INFEED DATA (GENERATORS INCLUDING UNIT
TRANSFORMERS AND STATION TRANSFORMERS)
PAGE 2 OF 5

Fault infeeds via Station Transformers

A submission is required for each Station Transformer directly connected to the National Electricity
Transmission System. The submission should represent normal operating conditions when the maximum
number of Gensets are Synchronised to the System, and should include the fault current from all motors
normally connected to the Station Board, together with any Generation (e.g. Auxiliary Gas Turbines) which
would normally be connected to the Station Board. The fault infeed should be expressed as a fault current at
the hv terminals of the Station Transformer for a fault at that location.
If the submission for normal operating conditions does not represent the worst case, then a separate
submission representing the maximum fault infeed that could occur in practice should be made.

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. DATA to
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RTL
CUSC CUSC
(PC.A.2.5) Contract App.
Form

Name of Power Station □ ■

Number of Station □ ■
Transformers

Symmetrical three phase

short-circuit current infeed for
a fault at the Connection
Point

- at instant of fault kA □ ■

- after subtransient □ ■
fault
current contribution kA
has substantially
decayed

Positive sequence X/R ratio □ ■

At instance of fault

Subtransient time constant (if □ ■

significantly different from ms
40ms)

Pre-fault voltage (if different □ ■

from 1.0 p.u.) at fault point
(See note 1)

Zero sequence source

Impedances as seen from
the Point of Connection
Consistent with the
maximum Infeed above:

- Resistance % on □ ■
100
- Reactance % on □ ■
100

Note 1. The pre-fault voltage provided above should represent the voltage within the range 0.95 to 1.05
that gives the highest fault current
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
80 of 126
Note 2. % on 100 is an abbreviation for % on 100 MVA

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

81 of 126
 SCHEDULE 14 - FAULT INFEED DATA (GENERATORS INCLUDING UNIT
TRANSFORMERS AND STATION TRANSFORMERS)
PAGE 3 OF 5

Fault infeeds from Power Park Modules

A submission is required for the whole Power Park Module and for each Power Park Unit type or
equivalent. The submission shall represent operating conditions that result in the maximum fault infeed.
The fault current from all motors normally connected to the Power Park Unit’s electrical system shall
be included. The fault infeed shall be expressed as a fault current at the terminals of the Power Park
Unit, or the Common Collection Busbar if an equivalent Single Line Diagram and associated data
as described in PC.A.2.2.2 is provided, and the Grid Entry Point, or User System Entry Point if
Embedded, for a fault at the Grid Entry Point, or User System Entry Point if Embedded.
Should actual data in respect of fault infeeds be unavailable at the time of the application for a CUSC
Contract or Embedded Development Agreement, a limited subset of the data, representing the
maximum fault infeed that may result from all of the plant types being considered, shall be submitted.
This data will, as a minimum, represent the root mean square of the positive, negative and zero
sequence components of the fault current for both single phase and three phase solid faults at the Grid
Entry Point (or User System Entry Point if Embedded) at the time of fault application and 50ms
following fault application. Actual data in respect of fault infeeds shall be submitted to The Company
as soon as it is available, in line with PC.A.1.2

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. DATA to
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RTL
CUSC CUSC
(PC.A.2.5) Contract App.
Form
Name of Power Station □ ■

Name of Power Park Module □ ■

Power Park Unit type □ ■

A submission shall be provided for the

contribution of the entire Power Park
Module and each type of Power Park
Unit or equivalent to the positive,
negative and zero sequence
components of the short circuit current
at the Power Park Unit terminals, or
Common Collection Busbar, and
Grid Entry Point or User System
Entry Point if Embedded for
(i) a solid symmetrical three phase
short circuit
(ii) a solid single phase to earth short □ ■
circuit
(iii) a solid phase to phase short □ ■
circuit
(iv) a solid two phase to earth short □ ■
circuit
at the Grid Entry Point or User
System Entry Point if Embedded. □ ■

If protective controls are used and

active for the above conditions, a
submission shall be provided in the
limiting case where the protective □ ■
control is not active. This case may
require application of a non-solid fault,
resulting in a retained voltage at the
fault point.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

82 of 126
 SCHEDULE 14 - FAULT INFEED DATA (GENERATORS INCLUDING UNIT
TRANSFORMERS AND STATION TRANSFORMERS)
PAGE 4 OF 5

DATA UNITS F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. DATA DATA
DESCRIPTION 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 to DESCRIPTION
RTL
CUSC CUSC App. Form
Contract
- A continuous time Graphical
trace and table and
showing the root tabular □ ■
mean square of
the positive, kA
negative and zero versus s
sequence
components of the
fault current from
the time of fault
inception to 140ms
after fault inception
at 10ms intervals

- A continuous pu versus
time trace and s
table showing □ ■
the positive,
negative and
zero sequence
components of
retained voltage
at the terminals
or Common
Collection
Busbar, if
appropriate

- A continuous pu versus
time trace and s
table showing □ ■
the root mean
square of the
positive,
negative and
zero sequence
components of
retained voltage
at the fault
point, if
appropriate

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

83 of 126
 SCHEDULE 14 - FAULT INFEED DATA (GENERATORS INCLUDING UNIT
TRANSFORMERS AND STATION TRANSFORMERS)
PAGE 5 OF 5

DATA UNITS F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. DATA DATA
DESCRIPTION 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 to DESCRIPTION
RTL
CUSC CUSC App. Form
Contract
For Power Park
Units that utilise a
protective control,
such as a crowbar
circuit,

- additional rotor % on □ ■
resistance MVA
applied to the
Power Park
Unit under a □ ■
fault situation

- additional rotor % on
reactance MVA
applied to the
Power Park
Unit under a
fault situation.

Positive sequence
X/R ratio of the □ ■
equivalent at time of
fault at the Common
Collection Busbar

Minimum zero
sequence impedance
of the equivalent at a □ ■
Common Collection
Busbar

Active Power MW
generated pre-fault □ ■

Number of Power
Park Units in □ ■
equivalent generator

Power Factor (lead □ ■

or lag)

Pre-fault voltage (if pu □ ■

different from 1.0 pu)
at fault point (See
note 1)

Items of reactive □ ■
compensation
switched in pre-fault

Note 1. The pre-fault voltage provided above should represent the voltage within the range 0.95 pu to 1.05
pu that gives the highest fault current

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

84 of 126
 SCHEDULE 15 – MOTHBALLED POWER GENERATING MODULE, MOTHBALLED
GENERATING UNIT, MOTHBALLED POWER PARK MODULE (INCLUDING
MOTHBALLED DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULES), MOTHBALLED HVDC
SYSTEMS, MOTHBALLED HVDC CONVERTERS, MOTHBALLED DC CONVERTERS
AT A DC CONVERTER STATION AND ALTERNATIVE FUEL DATA
PAGE 1 OF 3

MOTHBALLED POWER GENERATING MODULES, MOTHBALLED GENERATING UNIT,

MOTHBALLED POWER PARK MODULE (INCLUDING MOTHBALLED DC CONNECTED POWER PARK
MODULES), MOTHBALLED HVDC SYSTEMS, MOTHBALLED HVDC CONVERTERS OR
MOTHBALLED DC CONVERTER AT A DC CONVERTER STATION AND ALTERNATIVE FUEL DATA
The following data items must be supplied with respect to each Mothballed Power Generating Module,
Mothballed Generating Unit, Mothballed Power Park Module (including Mothballed DC Connected
Power Park Modules), Mothballed HVDC Systems, Mothballed HVDC Converters or Mothballed DC
Converters at a DC Converter station

Power Station__________________________________ Generating Unit, Power Park Module or DC Converter

Name (e.g. Unit 1) ______________________________

GENERATING UNIT DATA

DATA DATA Total
UNITS
DESCRIPTION CAT <1 1-2 2-3 3-6 6-12 >12 MW
month months months months months months being
returned
MW output that
can be DPD
MW
returned to II
service

Notes
1. The time periods identified in the above table represent the estimated time it would take to return the
Mothballed Power Generating Module, Mothballed Generating Unit, Mothballed Power Park Module
(Mothballed DC Connected Power Park Modules), Mothballed HVDC Systems, Mothballed HVDC
Converters or Mothballed DC Converter at a DC Converter Station to service once a decision to return has
been made.
2. Where a Mothballed Power Generating Module, Mothballed Generating Unit, Mothballed Power Park
Module (including a Mothballed DC Connected Power Park Module), Mothballed HVDC System,
Mothballed HVDC Converter or Mothballed DC Converter at a DC Converter Station can be physically
returned in stages covering more than one of the time periods identified in the above table then information
should be provided for each applicable time period.
3. The estimated notice to physically return MW output to service should be determined in accordance with Good
Industry Practice assuming normal working arrangements and normal plant procurement lead times.
4. The MW output values in each time period should be incremental MW values, e.g. if 150MW could be returned
in 2 – 3 months and an additional 50MW in 3 – 6 months then the values in the columns should be Nil, Nil, 150,
50, Nil, Nil, 200 respectively.
5. Significant factors which may prevent the Mothballed Power Generating Module, Mothballed Generating Unit,
Mothballed Power Park Module (Mothballed DC Connected Power Park Module). Mothballed HVDC
System, Mothballed HVDC Converter or Mothballed DC Converter at a DC Converter Station achieving the
estimated values provided in this table, excluding factors relating to Transmission Entry Capacity, should be
appended separately.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

85 of 126
 SCHEDULE 15 – MOTHBALLED POWER GENERATING MODULES, MOTHBALLED
GENERATING UNIT, MOTHBALLED POWER PARK MODULE (INCLUDING DC
CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULES), MOTHBALLED HVDC SYSTEMS,
MOTHBALLED HVDC CONVERTERS, MOTHBALLED DC CONVERTERS AT A DC
CONVERTER STATION AND ALTERNATIVE FUEL DATA
PAGE 2 OF 3

ALTERNATIVE FUEL INFORMATION

The following data items for alternative fuels need only be supplied with respect to each Generating Unit
whose primary fuel is gas including those which form part of a Power Generating Module.

Power Station ________________________________________ Generating Unit Name (e.g. Unit 1)

____________________________________________________

DATA GENERATING UNIT DATA

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS
CAT 1 2 3 4
Alternative Fuel Type Other
Text DPD II Oil distillate Other* Other*
(*please specify) gas*
CHANGEOVER TO
ALTERNATIVE FUEL
For off-line changeover:
Time to carry out off-line
Minutes DPD II
fuel changeover
Maximum output following
MW DPD II
off-line changeover
For on-line changeover:
Time to carry out on-line
Minutes DPD II
fuel changeover
Maximum output during on-
MW DPD II
line fuel changeover
Maximum output following
MW DPD II
on-line fuel changeover
Maximum operating time at full
load assuing:
Typical stock levels Hours DPD II
Maximum possible stock
Hours DPD II
levels
Maximum rate of replacement of
depleted stocks of alternative MWh
DPD II
fuels on the basis of Good (electrical)/day
Industry Practice
Is changeover to alternative fuel
used in normal operating Text DPD II
arrangements?
Number of successful 0 / 1-5 / 6-10
changeovers carried out in the 0 / 1-5 / 6-10 0 / 1-5 / 6-10
0 / 1-5 / 6-10 / /
last Financial Year Text DPD II / /
11-20 / >20 ** 11-20 / >20
11-20 / >20 ** 11-20 / >20 **
(**delete as appropriate) **

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

86 of 126
 SCHEDULE 15 – MOTHBALLED POWER GENERATING MODULES, MOTHBALLED
GENERATING UNIT, MOTHBALLED POWER PARK MODULE (INCLUDING
MOTHBALLED DC CONNECTED POWER PARK MODULES), MOTHBALLED HVDC
SYSTEMS, MOTHBALLED HVDC CONVERTERS MOTHBALLED DC CONVERTERS
AT A DC CONVERTER STATION AND ALTERNATIVE FUEL DATA
PAGE 3 OF 3

DATA GENERATING UNIT DATA

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS
CAT 1 2 3 4
CHANGEOVER BACK TO MAIN
FUEL

For off-line changeover:

Time to carry out off-line fuel Minutes

changeover

For on-line changeover

Time to carry out on-line fuel Minutes

changeover

Maximum output during on-line MW

fuel changeover

Notes
1. Where a Generating Unit has the facilities installed to generate using more than one
alternative fuel type details of each alternative fuel should be given.
2. Significant factors and their effects which may prevent the use of alternative fuels achieving the
estimated values provided in this table (e.g. emissions limits, distilled water stocks etc.) should
be appended separately.

- No information collated under this Schedule will be transferred to the Relevant Transmission Licensees

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

87 of 126
 SCHEDULE 16 – SYSTEM RESTORATION INFORMATION
PAGE 1 OF 2
PART I

SYSTEM RESTORATION INFORMATION (EXCLUDING PARTIES PARTICIPATING IN

DISTRIBUTION RESTORATION ZONES)

The following data/text items are required from each Generator for each BM Unit at a Large Power
Station as detailed in PC.A.5.7. Data is not required for Restoration Contractors Plant and Apparatus.
The data should be provided in accordance with PC.A.1.2 and also, where possible, upon request from
The Company during a System Restoration. For Restoration Contractors who are party to a
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan, the data submitted should be supplied as part of Schedule 16 Part
II of this Data Registration Code.

Data Description Units Data Category

(PC.A.5.7.1) (■ CUSC Contract)

Assuming all BM Units were running immediately prior to the Total

Shutdown or Partial Shutdown and in the event of loss of all
external power supplies, provide the following information:

a) Expected time for the first and subsequent BM Units to be Tabular or DPD II
Synchronised, at time intervals of 12 hours, 24 hours, 36 hours, Graphical
48 hours and 72 hours from the restoration of external power
supplies, assuming external power supplies are not available at
the User’s Site.

b) Describe any likely issues that would have a significant impact Text DPD II
on a BM Unit’s time to be Synchronised arising as a direct
consequence of the inherent design or operational practice of the
Power Station and/or BM Unit, e.g. limited barring facilities, time
from a Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown at which batteries
would be discharged or the availability of primary fuel supplies .

Block Loading Capability:

c) Provide estimated Block Loading Capability from 0MW to Tabular or DPD II

Registered Capacity and the time between each incremental step Graphical
of each BM Unit based on when the unit was running immediately
prior to the Shutdown) and at time intervals of 12 hours, 24 hours,
36 hours, 48 hours and 72 hours after the BM Unit had been
Shutdown. The Block Loading Capability should be valid for a
frequency deviation of 49.5Hz – 50.5Hz. The data should identify
any required ‘hold’ points.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

88 of 126
 SCHEDULE 16 – SYSTEM RESTORATION INFORMATION
PAGE 2 OF 2
PART I

SYSTEM RESTORATION INFORMATION (EXCLUDING PARTIES PARTICIPATING IN

DISTRIBUTION RESTORATION ZONES)
The following data/text items are required from each HVDC System Owner or DC Converter Station
Owner for each HVDC System and DC Converter as detailed in PC.A.5.7. Data is not required for
Restoration Contractors Plant and Apparatus. The data should be provided in accordance with
PC.A.1.2 and also, where possible, upon request from The Company during a System Restoration.
Data Description
Units Data Category
(PC.A.5.7.1) (■ CUSC Contract)

Assuming all BM Units were running immediately prior to the

Total Shutdown or Partial Shutdown and in the event of loss
of all external power supplies, provide the following
information:

a) Expected time for the first and subsequent BM Units to Tabular or DPD II
be Synchronised, at time intervals of 12 hours, 24 hours, Graphical
36 hours, 48 hours and 72 hours from the restoration of
external power supplies, assuming external power supplies
are not available at the User’s Site.

b) Describe any likely issues that would have a significant Text DPD II
impact on a BM Units time to be Synchronised arising as a
direct consequence of the inherent design or operational
practice of the HVDC System or DC Converter Station
and/or BM Unit, e.g. time from a Total Shutdown or Partial
Shutdown at which batteries would be discharged.

Block Loading Capability:

c) Provide estimated incremental Active Power steps, from no Tabular or DPD II

load to Rated MW and the time between each incremental Graphical
step which an HVDC System or DC Converter Station can
instantaneously supply without causing it to trip or go outside
the Frequency range of 47.5Hz – 52Hz (or an otherwise
agreed Frequency range). The time between each
incremental step shall also be provided. In addition data shall
be provided from 0MW to Registered Capacity for each BM
Unit which was running immediately prior to the Shutdown)
and at time intervals of 12 hours, 24 hours, 36 hours, 48 hours
and 72 hours after the BM Unit had been Shutdown. The data
supplied should be valid for a Frequency deviation of 49.5Hz –
50.5Hz and should identify any required ‘hold’ points.

Governor Setting Information

From 2025 onwards, Generators, HVDC System Owners and DPD II

DC Converter owners, shall supply the governor setting
information in accordance with the applicable requirements of
CC.6.3.7 (h) or ECC.6.3.7.3.8.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

89 of 126
 SCHEDULE 16 – SYSTEM RESTORATION INFORMATION
PAGE 1 OF 1
PART II

DISTRIBUTION RESTORATION ZONE INFORMATION (PC.A.5.7.2 – DPD)

Where a Network Operator has a Distribution Restoration Zone Plan in place, the following data
specified shall be submitted by Network Operators and Restoration Contractors, party to a
Distribution Restoration Zone Plan. Restoration Contractors shall, where reasonably practicable,
submit the relevant information to the Network Operator who shall then supply that information to The
Company.
Data Description
Units Data Category
(PC.A.5.7.2)

The expected time for each Restoration Contractor’s Plant to Tabular or DPD II
connect to the Network Operator’s System following a Total Graphical
Shutdown or Partial Shutdown. The assessment should include
the Restoration Contractor’s ability to reconnect or re-
synchronise all their Plant, to the Total System at time intervals of
12 hours, 24 hours, 36 hours, 48 hours and 72 hours from the
restoration of external power supplies.

Additionally, the data and supporting text should highlight any Tabular or DPD II
specific issues (eg those that would affect the time before which Graphical
the Restoration Contractor’s Plant could be energised) that
may arise as time progresses from Shutdown without external
supplies being restored or the availability of primary fuel supplies.

Block Loading Capability

Provide estimated Block Loading Capability from 0MW to Tabular or DPD II

Registered Capacity and the time between each incremental step Graphical
of each Restoration Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus based on
when the Restoration Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus was
running immediately prior to the Shutdown) and at time intervals of
12 hours, 24 hours, 36 hours, 48 hours and 72 hours after the
Restoration Contractor’s Plant and Apparatus had been
Shutdown. The Block Loading Capability should be valid for a
frequency deviation of 49.5Hz – 50.5Hz. The data should identify
any required ‘hold’ points.

Governor Setting Information

From 2025 onwards, Restoration Contractors, Generators, Tabular or DPD II

HVDC System Owners and DC Converter owners, shall supply Graphical
the governor setting information in accordance with the applicable
requirements of CC.6.3.7 (h) or ECC.6.3.7.3.8.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

90 of 126
 SCHEDULE 16 – SYSTEM RESTORATION INFORMATION
PAGE 1 OF 5
PART III
All Users and Restoration Contractors are required to confirm annually they comply with the applicable
requirements of OC5.7. In the case of Generators, HVDC System Owners, DC Converter owners, Non-
Embedded Customers, and Network Operators this confirmation shall be provided in their Week 24
submission.
Assurance Activity Grid Code Parties Frequency of The Date of test Annual
Reference Involved Assurance Company result Statement
Activity Witness submission/visit of
required Compliance
(Y/N/Not
applicable)
OC9.4.7.6 Relevant Not
OC5.7.4.2(iv) Transmission applicable
System Licensees,
Restoration Power Network Every 3 years
Island review Operators
and The
Company
OC9.4.7.6 Relevant Not
OC5.7.4.2(iv) Transmission applicable
System
Licensees,
Restoration Power
Network Yearly
Island availability
Operators
assessment
and The
Company
OC5.7.2.1(g) Relevant No
OC5.7.2.3 (d) Transmission
Licensees,
relevant
Remote
Network
Synchronisation test Every 3 years
Operators,
- TO/DNO
Restoration
Contractors
and The
Company
CC.A.5.4.3 / Relevant Every 3 years No
ECC.A.5.4.3 Transmission although this
Licences, may be
relevant extended to no
Low Frequency
Network more than
Demand
Operators, every five
Disconnection
Non- years if
Relay test
Embedded considered to
Customers be required for
and The operational
Company purposes
OC5.7.2.1 Relevant Yes
/OC5.7.2.2 Transmission
/ OC5.7.2.3 Licensees,
Network
Anchor
Operators,
Restoration Every 3 years
Anchor
Contractor test
Restoration
Contractors
and The
Company
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
91 of 126
 PAGE 2 OF 5
PART III
Assurance Activity Grid Code Parties Frequency of The Date of test result Annual
Reference Involved Assurance Company submission/visit Statement of
Activity Witness Compliance
required (Y/N/Not
applicable)
OC.5.7.2.4 Relevant Yes
Transmission
Licensees,
Network
Top Up
Operators,
Restoration Every 3 years
Top Up
Contractor test
Restoration
Contractors
and The
Company
Resilience to OC9.4.7.6.2 Restoration No
Partial Shutdown OC5.7.4.2(iii) Contractors
or Total Shutdown CC/ECC.7.11 and The Yearly
of Restoration Company
Contractor
OC5.7.2.5 EU Yes
Generators in
respect of
Type C and
Type D
Quick Power
Resynchronisation Generating Yearly
Unit Test Modules,
relevant
Network
Operators
and The
Company
OC5.7.2.6 Network Yes
Distribution Operators,
Restoration Zone Restoration
Every 3 years
Control System Contractors
test and The
Company
OC5.7.2.1(g)(a) Transmission Yes
OC5.7.2.3(d)(a) Licensees,
relevant
Network
Dead Line Charge Operators
Every 3 years
test Anchor
Restoration
Contractors
and The
Company
OC5.7.2.1(g)(b) Relevant Yes
OC5.7.2.3(d)(b) Transmission
Licensees,
Remote
relevant
Synchronisation test
Network Every 3 years
-Restoration
Operators,
Contractor
Restoration
Contractors
and The
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
92 of 126
 PAGE 3 OF 5
PART III
Company
Assurance Activity Grid Code Parties Frequency of The Date of test result Annual
Reference Involved Assurance Company submission/visit Statement of
Activity Witness Compliance
required (Y/N/Not
applicable)
OC5.7.4 The Yes
OC5.7.5 Company,
Relevant
Transmission
Licensees,
Assurance Visits relevant Every 3 years
Network
Operators to
visit
Restoration
Contractors
OC5.7.4.2(vi) CUSC No
Parties,
relevant
Network
Operators,
Voice Systems
Relevant
Resilience test or Yearly
Transmission
equivalent
Licensees
Restoration
Contractors
and The
Company
Critical Tools and OC.5.7.4.2(iii) CUSC No
Facilities OC5.7.4.2(ix) Parties,
control systems OC5.7.4.3 relevant
resilience CC.7.10.7 Network
demonstration – ECC.7.10.7 Operators,
power resilience Relevant
Every 3 years
including power Transmission
resilience Licensees,
demonstration & Restoration
connectivity and Contractors
alarm event and The
handling Company
OC5.7.2.6 CUSC No
Parties,
relevant
Network
Control systems Operators, Every 3 years
resilience Relevant (as set out in
demonstration – Transmission the DRZCS
diagram & topology Licensees, RES)'
Restoration
Contractors
and The
Company
CC.7.10.6 CUSC No
ECC.7.10.6 Parties,
Cyber-Security OC.5.7.4.2(iii) relevant Yearly
OC5.7.4.2(x) Network
Operators,
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
93 of 126
 PAGE 4 OF 5
PART III
Relevant
Transmission
Licensees,
Restoration
Contractors
and The
Company
Assurance Activity Grid Code Parties Frequency of The Date of test result Annual
Reference Involved Assurance Company submission/visit Statement of
Activity Witness Compliance
required (Y/N/Not
applicable)
CC.6.5.1 – CUSC No
CC.6.5.5 Parties,
ECC.6.5.1 – relevant
ECC.6.5.5 Network
OC.5.7.4.2(vi) Operators, Yearly (or as in
Telephony services
OC5.7.4.2(xi) relevant accordance
test as per
OC5.7.4.2(xii) Transmission with
CC/ECC.6.5.4.
Licensees, CC/ECC.6.5.4.)
Restoration
Contractors
and The
Company
Resilience to OC5.7.4 CUSC Parties No
Partial Shutdown OC5.7.5 and The
Yearly
or Total Shutdown Company
of CUSC Parties
OC9.4.7.6.2 The Not
OC5.7.4.2(iv) Company, applicable
Relevant
Transmission
Licensees,
Restoration relevant
Every 3 years
Procedure review Network
Operators,
CUSC Parties
and
Restoration
Contractors
OC9.4.7.6 The Not
OC5.7.4.2(iv) Company, applicable
Network
Operators,
LJRP & DRZP Transmission
Every 3 years
reviews Licensees
and
Restoration
Plan
signatories
OC9.4.7.6.2 The Not
OC5.7.4 Company, applicable
Awareness training relevant
for Restoration Network
Every 3 years
Contractor and Operators,
CUSC Parties Transmission
Licensees,
CUSC Parties
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
94 of 126
 PAGE 5 OF 5
PART III
and
Restoration
Contractors
Assurance Activity Grid Code Parties Frequency of The Date of test result Annual
Reference Involved Assurance Company submission/visit Statement of
Activity Witness Compliance
required (Y/N/Not
applicable)
OC9.4.7.6.2 The Not
OC5.7.4 Company, applicable
Network
Operators,
Cross industry Transmission
Every 3 years
training Licensees,
CUSC Parties
and
Restoration
Contractors

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

95 of 126
 SCHEDULE 17 - ACCESS PERIOD DATA
PAGE 1 OF 1

(PC.A.4 - CUSC Contract ■)

Submissions by Users using this Schedule 17 shall commence in 2011 and shall then continue in each
year thereafter

Access Group

Asset Start End Maintenance Potential Concurrent

Duration
Identifier Week Week Year (1, 2 or 3) Outage (Y/N)

Comments

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

96 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 1 OF 24

The data in this Schedule 18 is required from Generators who are undertaking OTSDUW and connecting
to a Transmission Interface Point.

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS DATA to DATA GENERATING UNIT OR STATION DATA

RTL CAT.
CUSC CUSC F.Yr0 F.Yr1 F.Yr2 F.Yr3 F.Yr4 F.Yr5 F.Yr 6
Cont App.
ract Form
INDIVIDUAL OTSDUW DATA

Interface Point Capacity (PC.A.3.2.2 MW □ ■

(a)) MVAr

Performance Chart at the □ ■

Transmission Interface Point for
OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus
(PC.A.3.2.2(f)(iv)

OTSDUW DEMANDS

Demand associated with the OTSDUW

Plant and Apparatus (excluding
OTSDUW DC Converters – see Note
1)) supplied at each Interface Point.
The User should also provide the
Demand supplied to each Connection
Point on the OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus. (PC.A.5.2.5)

- The maximum Demand that could MW □ DPD I

occur. MVAr □ DPD I
- Demand at specified time of annual MW □ DPD II
peak half hour of National Electricity MVAr □ DPD II
Transmission System Demand at
Annual ACS Conditions.

- Demand at specified time of annual MW □ DPD II

minimum half-hour of National MVAr □ DPD II
Electricity Transmission System
Demand.

(Note 1 – Demand required from

OTSDUW DC Converters should be
supplied under page 2 of Schedule 18).

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

97 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 2 OF 24

OTSDUW USERS SYSTEM DATA

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS DATA to RTL DATA

CATEGORY
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
Form
OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM LAYOUT
(PC.A.2.2.1, PC.A.2.2.2 and P.C.A.2.2.3)

A Single Line Diagram showing connectivity of all of the Offshore ■ ■ SPD

Transmission System including all Plant and Apparatus between the
Interface Point and all Connection Points is required.

This Single Line Diagram shall depict the arrangement(s) of all of the ■ ■ SPD
existing and proposed load current carrying Apparatus relating to both
existing and proposed Interface Points and Connection Points,
showing electrical circuitry (i.e. overhead lines, underground cables
(including subsea cables), power transformers and similar equipment),
operating voltages, circuit breakers and phasing arrangements

Operational Diagrams of all substations within the OTSDUW Plant and ■ ■ SPD
Apparatus

SUBSTATION INFRASTRUCTURE (PC.A.2.2.6)

For the infrastructure associated with any OTSDUW Plant and

Apparatus

Rated 3-phase rms short-circuit withstand current kA ■ ■ SPD

Rated 1-phase rms short-circuit withstand current kA ■ ■ SPD
Rated Duration of short-circuit withstand s ■ ■ SPD
Rated rms continuous current A ■ ■ SPD

LUMPED SUSCEPTANCES (PC.A.2.3)

Equivalent Lumped Susceptance required for all parts of the User’s ■ ■

Subtransmission System (including OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus) which
are not included in the Single Line Diagram.

This should not include: ■ ■

(a) independently switched reactive compensation equipment ■ ■
identified above.
(b) any susceptance of the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus ■ ■
inherent in the Demand (Reactive Power) data provided on
Page 1 and 2 of this Schedule 14.

Equivalent lumped shunt susceptance at nominal Frequency. % on 100 ■ ■

MVA

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

98 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 3 OF 24

OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA

Branch Data (PC.A.2.2.4)

PPS PARAMETERS ZPS PARAMETERS Maximum Continuous Ratings

Node Node Rated Operating

Circuit Length (km)
1 2 Voltage (kV) Voltage (kV) R1 X1 B1 R0 X0 B0 Spring
Winter Summer
%100 %100 %100 %100 %100 %100 Autumn
(MVA) (MVA)
MVA MVA MVA MVA MVA MVA (MVA)

Notes
1. For information equivalent STC Reference: STCP12-1m Part 3 – 2.1 Branch Data
2. In the case where an overhead line exists within the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus the Mutual inductances should also be provided.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

99 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 4 OF 24

OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA

2 Winding Transformer Data (PC.A.2.2.5)

The data below is Standard Planning Data, and details should be shown below of all transformers shown on the Single Line Diagram

Positive Phase Positive Phase

Sequence Sequence Earthing
Tap Changer Earthing
HV HV LV LV Rating Reactance % on Resistance % on Winding method (Direct/
Transformer Impedance
Node (kV) Node (kV) (MVA) 100MVA 100MVA Arr Res/
method
Max Min Nom Max Min Nom Range Step Reac)
Type
Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap +% to -% size %

Notes

1 For information the corresponding STC Reference is STCP12-1: Part 3 – 2.4 Transformers

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

100 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 5 OF 24

USERS SYSTEM DATA (OTSUA)

Auto Transformer Data 3-Winding (PC.A.2.2.5)

The data below is all Standard Planning Data, and details should be shown below of all transformers shown on the Single Line Diagram

HV VH LV VL PSS/E Rating Tran Positive Phase Positive Phase EQUIVALENT ZPS PARAMETERS (FLIP) The The
NODE (kV) NODE (kV) Circuit (MVA) s- Sequence Sequence Com- Com
Taps
form Reactance % on Resistance % on pany -
Earth-
er 100MVA 100MVA Win- Shee pany
ing
ding
Impe- ZOH ZOL ZOT t Code
Type Arra Dflt X/R=20
dance
Range Step (Onlo nge
Max Min Nom Max Min Nom metho
+% to - size ad ment ROH XOH ROL XOL ROT XOT
Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap d
% % Offlo % % % % % %
ad) 100 100 100 100 100 100
MVA MVA MVA MVA MVA MVA

Notes

1.For information STC Reference: STCP12-1: Part 3 - 2.4 Transformers

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

101 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 6 OF 24
OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA

Circuit Breaker Data (PC.A.2.2.6(a))

The data below is all Standard Planning Data, and should be provided for all OTSUA switchgear (i.e. circuit breakers, load disconnectors and disconnectors)

Circuit Breaker Data Assumed Operating Times 3 Phase 1 Phase DC time

Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault constant
Fault Fault
Conti- Break Break Make Break Break Make at testing
Rating Rating
Minimum nuos Rating Rating Rating Rating Rating Rating of
Oper- Year Circuit Total (RMS (RMS
Rated Protection Rating (RMS (Peak (Peak (RMS (Peak (Peak asymmet
Location Name ating Make Model Type Comm- Breaker Time Symmeric Symmeric
Voltage & Trip (A) Symmertri Asymmetri Asymmetri Symmertri Asymmetri Asymmetri rical
Voltage issioed (ms) (ms) al) (3 al) (1
Relay (ms) cal) (3 cal) (3 cal) (3 cal) (1 cal) (1 cal) (1 breaking
phase phase
phase) phase) phase) phase) phase) phase) ability (s)
MVA) MVA)
(kA) (kA) (kA) (kA) (kA) (kA)

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

102 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 7 OF 24

OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA

REACTIVE COMPENSATION EQUIPMENT (PC.A.2.4(e))

Item Node kV Device No. Rating P Loss Tap range Connection

(MVAr) (kW) Arrangement

Notes:

1.For information STC Reference: STCP12-1: Part 3 - 2.5 Reactive Compensation Equipment

2. Data relating to continuously variable reactive compensation equipment (such as statcoms or SVCs)
should be entered on the SVC Modelling table.

3. For the avoidance of doubt this includes any AC Reactive Compensation equipment included within the
OTSDUW DC Converter other than harmonic filter data which is to be entered in the harmonic filter data
table.

PC.A.2.4.1(e) A mathematical representation in block diagram format to model the control of any
dynamic compensation plant. The model should be suitable for RMS dynamic stability
type studies in which the time constants used should not be less than 10ms.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

103 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 8 OF 24

OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA

REACTIVE COMPENSATION - SVC Modelling Data (PC.A.2.4.1(e)(iii))

HV Node LV Node Control Nominal Target Max Min MVAr Slope % Voltage Normal R1 X1 R0 Z0 Trasnf Connection
Node Voltage Voltage MVAr at at HV Dependent Running PPS_R PPS_X ZPS_R ZPS_X Winding (Direct/
(kV) (kV) HV Q Limit Mode Type Tertiary)

Notes:

1.For information the equivalent STC Reference is: STCP12-1: Part 3 - 2.7 SVC Modelling Data

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

104 of 126
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
105 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 9 OF 24

OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA

Harmonic Filter Data (including OTSDUW DC Converter harmonic Filter Data)
(PC.A.5.4.3.1(d) and PC.A.6.4.2)

Site Name SLD Reference Point of Filter Connection

Filter Description
Manufacturer Model Filter Type Filter connection Notes
type (Delta/Star,
Grounded/
Ungrounded)

Bus Voltage Rating Q factor Tuning Frequency Notes

Component Parameters (as per SLD)

Parameter as applicable
Filter Capacitance Inductance (milli- Resistance Notes
Component (R, (micro-Farads) Henrys) (Ohms)
C or L)

Filter frequency characteristics (graphs) detailing for frequency range up to 10kHz and higher

1. Graph of impedance (ohm) against frequency (Hz)

2. Graph of angle (degree) against frequency (Hz)
3. Connection diagram of Filter & Elements

Notes:
1. For information STC Reference: STCP12-1: Part 3 - 2.8 Harmonic Filter Data

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

106 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 10 OF 24

Information for Transient Overvoltage Assessment (DPD I) (PC.A.6.2 ■ CUSC Contract)

The information listed below may be requested by The Company from each User undertaking OTSDUW with
respect to any Interface Point or Connection Point to enable The Company to assess transient overvoltage
on the National Electricity Transmission System.

(a) Busbar layout plan(s), including dimensions and geometry showing positioning of any current and
voltage transformers, through bushings, support insulators, disconnectors, circuit breakers, surge
arresters, etc. Electrical parameters of any associated current and voltage transformers, stray
capacitances of wall bushings and support insulators, and grading capacitances of circuit breakers;

(b) Electrical parameters and physical construction details of lines and cables connected at that busbar.
Electrical parameters of all plant e.g., transformers (including neutral earthing impedance or zig-zag
transformers if any), series reactors and shunt compensation equipment connected at that busbar (or
to the tertiary of a transformer) or by lines or cables to that busbar;

(c) Basic insulation levels (BIL) of all Apparatus connected directly, by lines or by cables to the busbar;

(d) Characteristics of overvoltage Protection devices at the busbar and at the termination points of all
lines, and all cables connected to the busbar;

(e) Fault levels at the lower voltage terminals of each transformer connected to each Interface Point or
Connection Point without intermediate transformation;

(f) The following data is required on all transformers within the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus.

(g) An indication of which items of equipment may be out of service simultaneously during Planned
Outage conditions.

Harmonic Studies (DPD I) (PC.A.6.4 ■ CUSC Contract)

The information given below, both current and forecast, where not already supplied in this Schedule 14 may
be requested by The Company from each User if it is necessary for The Company to evaluate the
production/magnification of harmonic distortion on National Electricity Transmission System. The impact
of any third party Embedded within the User’s System should be reflected:-

(a) Overhead lines and underground cable circuits (including subsea cables) of the User's OTSDUW
Plant and Apparatus must be differentiated and the following data provided separately for each type:-

Positive phase sequence resistance

Positive phase sequence reactance
Positive phase sequence susceptance

(b) for all transformers connecting the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus to a lower voltage:-

Rated MVA
Voltage Ratio
Positive phase sequence resistance
Positive phase sequence reactance

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

107 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 11 OF 24

(c) at the lower voltage points of those connecting transformers:-

Equivalent positive phase sequence susceptance

Connection voltage and MVAr rating of any capacitor bank and component design parameters if
configured as a filter

Equivalent positive phase sequence interconnection impedance with other lower voltage points
The minimum and maximum Demand (both MW and MVAr) that could occur
Harmonic current injection sources in Amps at the Connection Points and Interface Points

(d) an indication of which items of equipment may be out of service simultaneously during Planned
Outage conditions

Voltage Assessment Studies (DPD I) (PC.A.6.5 ■ CUSC Contract)

The information listed below, where not already supplied in this Schedule 14, may be requested by The
Company from each User undertaking OTSDUW with respect to any Connection Point or Interface Point if
it is necessary for The Company to undertake detailed voltage assessment studies (e.g. to examine potential
voltage instability, voltage control co-ordination or to calculate voltage step changes on the National
Electricity Transmission System).

(a) For all circuits of the User’s OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus:-

Positive Phase Sequence Reactance

Positive Phase Sequence Resistance
Positive Phase Sequence Susceptance
MVAr rating of any reactive compensation equipment

(b) for all transformers connecting the User's OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus to a lower voltage:-

Rated MVA
Voltage Ratio
Positive phase sequence resistance
Positive Phase sequence reactance
Tap-changer range
Number of tap steps
Tap-changer type: on-load or off-circuit
AVC/tap-changer time delay to first tap movement
AVC/tap-changer inter-tap time delay

(c) at the lower voltage points of those connecting transformers

Equivalent positive phase sequence susceptance

MVAr rating of any reactive compensation equipment
Equivalent positive phase sequence interconnection impedance with other lower voltage points
The maximum Demand (both MW and MVAr) that could occur
Estimate of voltage insensitive (constant power) load content in % of total load at both winter peak and
75% off-peak load conditions

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

108 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 12 OF 24

Short Circuit Analyses:(DPD I) (PC.A.6.6 ■ CUSC Contract)

The information listed below, both current and forecast, and where not already supplied under this Schedule
14, may be requested by The Company from each User undertaking OTSDUW with respect to any
Connection Point or Interface Point where prospective short-circuit currents on Transmission equipment
are close to the equipment rating.

(a) For all circuits of the User’s OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus:-
Positive phase sequence resistance
Positive phase sequence reactance
Positive phase sequence susceptance
Zero phase sequence resistance (both self and mutuals)
Zero phase sequence reactance (both self and mutuals)
Zero phase sequence susceptance (both self and mutuals)

(b) For all transformers connecting the User's OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus to a lower voltage:-
Rated MVA
Voltage Ratio
Positive phase sequence resistance (at max, min and nominal tap)
Positive Phase sequence reactance (at max, min and nominal tap)
Zero phase sequence reactance (at nominal tap)
Tap changer range
Earthing method: direct, resistance or reactance
Impedance if not directly earthed

(c) At the lower voltage points of those connecting transformers:-

The maximum Demand (in MW and MVAr) that could occur

Short-circuit infeed data in accordance with PC.A.2.5.6(a) unless the User’s OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus runs in parallel with the Subtransmission System, when to prevent double counting in each
node infeed data, a  equivalent comprising the data items of PC.A.2.5.6(a) for each node together with
the positive phase sequence interconnection impedance between the nodes shall be submitted

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

109 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 13 OF 24

Fault infeed data to be submitted by OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus providing a fault infeed (including
OTSDUW DC Converters) (PC.A.2.5.5)

A submission is required for OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus (including OTSDUW DC Converters at each
Transmission Interface Point and Connection Point. The submission shall represent operating conditions
that result in the maximum fault infeed. The fault current from all auxiliaries of the OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus at the Transmission Interface Point and Connection Point shall be included. The fault infeed
shall be expressed as a fault current at the Transmission Interface Point and also at each Connection
Point.

Should actual data in respect of fault infeeds be unavailable at the time of the application for a CUSC Contract
or Embedded Development Agreement, a limited subset of the data, representing the maximum fault infeed
that may result from the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus, shall be submitted. This data will, as a minimum,
represent the root mean square of the positive, negative and zero sequence components of the fault current
for both single phase and three phase solid faults at each Connection Point and Interface Point at the time
of fault application and 50ms following fault application. Actual data in respect of fault infeeds shall be
submitted to The Company as soon as it is available, in line with PC.A.1.2.

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. F.Yr. DATA to RTL
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CUSC CUSC
(PC.A.2.5) Contract App.
Form
Name of OTSDUW Plant and
Apparatus

OTSDUW DC Converter type (i.e.

voltage or current source)

A submission shall be provided for

the contribution of each OTSDUW
Plant and Apparatus to the positive,
negative and zero sequence
components of the short circuit
current at the Interface Point and
each Connection Point for
(i) a solid symmetrical three phase
short circuit
(ii) a solid single phase to earth short
circuit
(iii) a solid phase to phase short
circuit
(iv) a solid two phase to earth short
circuit □ ■

If protective controls are used and □ ■

active for the above conditions, a
submission shall be provided in the □ ■
limiting case where the protective
control is not active. This case may
require application of a non-solid □ ■
fault, resulting in a retained voltage at
the fault point.

□ ■

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

110 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 14 OF 24

DATA DESCRIPTION UNITS F. F. F. F. F. F. F. F. DATA to

Yr. Yr. Yr. Yr. Yr. Yr. Yr. Yr. RTL
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
Form

- A continuous time trace and Graphical

table showing the root mean and tabular
square of the positive, negative □ ■
and zero sequence components kA
of the fault current from the time versus s
of fault inception to 140ms after
fault inception at 10ms intervals

- A continuous time trace and p.u. versus

table showing the positive, s
negative and zero sequence □ ■
components of retained
voltage at the Interface Point
and each Connection Point,
if appropriate

- A continuous time trace and p.u. versus

table showing the root mean s
square of the positive, □ ■
negative and zero sequence
components of retained
voltage at the fault point, if
appropriate

Positive sequence X/R ratio of the □ ■

equivalent at time of fault at the
Interface Point and each
Connection Point

Minimum zero sequence

impedance of the equivalent at the
Interface Point and each □ ■
Connection Point

Active Power transfer at the MW

Interface Point and each □ ■
Connection Point pre-fault

Power Factor (lead or lag) □ ■

Pre-fault voltage (if different from p.u. □ ■

1.0 p.u.) at fault point (See note 1)

Items of reactive compensation □ ■

switched in pre-fault

Note 1. The pre-fault voltage provided above should represent the voltage within the range 0.95 to 1.05 that
gives the highest fault current

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

111 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 15 OF 24

Thermal Ratings Data (PC.A.2.2.4)

CIRCUIT RATING SCHEDULE

Voltage Offshore TO Name Issue Date

132kV
CIRCUIT Name from Site A – Site B

Winter Spring/Autumn Summer

OVERALL CCT RATINGS %Nom Limit Amps MVA %Nom Limit Amps MVA %Nom Limit Amps MVA
Pre-Fault Continuous 84% Line 485 111 84% Line 450 103 84% Line 390 89
Post-Fault Continuous 100% Line 580 132 100% Line 540 123 100% Line 465 106

Prefault load 6hr 95% Line 580 132 95% Line 540 123 95% Line 465 106
exceeds line 20m Line 580 132 Line 540 123 Line 465 106
prefault
10m mva Line 580 132 mva Line 540 123 mva Line 465 106
continuous rating
5m 125 Line 580 132 116 Line 540 123 100 Line 465 106
3m Line 580 132 Line 540 123 Line 465 106

6hr 90% Line 580 132 90% Line 540 123 90% Line 465 106
20m Line 580 132 Line 540 123 Line 465 106
Short Term 10m mva Line 580 132 mva Line 540 123 mva Line 465 106
Overloads 5m 118 Line 580 132 110 Line 540 123 95 Line 465 106
3m Line 580 132 Line 540 123 Line 465 106

Limiting Item 6hr 84% Line 580 132 84% Line 540 123 84% Line 465 106
and permitted 20m Line 590 135 Line 545 125 Line 470 108
overload 10m mva Line 630 144 mva Line 580 133 mva Line 495 113
values 5m 110 Line 710 163 103 Line 655 149 89 Line 555 126
for different 3m Line 810 185 Line 740 170 Line 625 143
times and
pre-fault loads 6hr 75% Line 580 132 75% Line 540 123 75% Line 465 106
20m Line 595 136 Line 555 126 Line 475 109
10m mva Line 650 149 mva Line 600 137 mva Line 510 116
5m 99 Line 760 173 92 Line 695 159 79 Line 585 134
3m Line 885 203 Line 810 185 Line 685 156

6hr 60% Line 580 132 60% Line 540 123 60% Line 465 106
20m Line 605 138 Line 560 128 Line 480 110
10m mva Line 675 155 mva Line 620 142 mva Line 530 121
5m 79 Line 820 187 73 Line 750 172 63 Line 635 145
3m Line 985 226 Line 900 206 Line 755 173

6hr 30% Line 580 132 30% Line 540 123 30% Line 465 106
20m Line 615 141 Line 570 130 Line 490 112
10m mva Line 710 163 mva Line 655 150 mva Line 555 127
5m 39 Line 895 205 36 Line 820 187 31 Line 690 158
3m Line 1110 255 Line 1010 230 Line 845 193

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

112 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 16 OF 24

6hr
20m
10m
5m
3m

6hr
20m
10m
5m
3m

Notes or
Restrictions
Detailed
Notes: 1. For information the equivalent STC Reference: STCP12-1: Part 3 - 2.6 Thermal Ratings
2. The values shown in the above table is example data.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

113 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 17 OF 24

Protection Policy (PC.A.6.3)

To include details of the protection policy

Protection Schedules(PC.A.6.3)

Data schedules for the protection systems associated with each primary plant item including:
Protection, Intertrip Signalling & operating times
Intertripping and protection unstabilisation initiation
Synchronising facilities
Delayed Auto Reclose sequence schedules

Automatic Switching Scheme Schedules (PC.A.2.2.7)

A diagram of the scheme and an explanation of how the system will operate and what plant will be affected
by the scheme’s operation.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

114 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 18 OF 24

GENERATOR INTERTRIP SCHEMES (PC.A.2.2.7(b))

Substation: _______________________________

Details of Generator Intertrip Schemes:

A diagram of the scheme and an explanation of how the system will operate and what plant will be effected
by the schemes operation.

DEMAND INTERTRIP SCHEMES (PC.A.2.2.7(b))

Substation:________________________________

Details of Demand Intertrip Schemes:

A diagram of the scheme and an explanation of how the system will operate and what plant will be effected
by the schemes operation

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

115 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 19 OF 24

Specific Operating Requirements (CC.5.2.1 or ECC.5.2.1)

SUBSTATION OPERATIONAL GUIDE

Substation: __________________________

Location Details:

Postal Address: Telephone Nos. Map Ref.

Transmission Interface

Generator Interface

1. Substation Type:

2. Voltage Control: (short description of voltage control system. To include mention of modes i.e.
Voltage, manual etc. Plus control step increments i.e. 0.5% or 0.33kV)

3. Energisation Switching Information: (The standard energisation switching process from dead.)

4. Intertrip Systems:

5. Reactive Plant Outage: (A short explanation of any system re-configurations required to facilitate
the outage of any reactive plant which form part of the OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus equipment.
Also any generation restrictions required).

6. Harmonic Filter Outage: (An explanation as to any OTSDUW Plant and Apparatus reconfigurations
required to facilitate the outage and maintain the system within specified Harmonic limits, also any
generation restrictions required).

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

116 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 20 OF 24

OTSDUW DC CONVERTER TECHNICAL DATA

OTSDUW DC CONVERTER NAME DATE:___________

Data Description Units DATA to Data DC Converter Station Data

RTL Category
CUSC CUSC
(PC.A.4 and PC.A.5.2.5) Contract App.
Form

OTSDUW DC CONVERTER (CONVERTER

DEMANDS):

Demand supplied through Station

Transformers associated with the
OTSDUW DC Converter at each Interface
Point and each Offshore Connection
Point Grid Entry Point [PC.A.4.1]

- Demand with all OTSDUW DC MW □ DPD II

Converters operating at Interface Point MVAr □ DPD II
Capacity .
□
- Demand with all OTSDUW DC MW □
DPD II
Converters operating at maximum MVAr DPD II
Interface Point flow from the Interface
Point to each Offshore Grid Entry Point
.

- The maximum Demand that could occur. MW □ DPD II

□
MVAr DPD II
□
- Demand at specified time of annual MW □ DPD II
peak half hour of The Company Demand MVAr DPD II
at
Annual ACS Conditions.
MW □ DPD II
- Demand at specified time of annual MVAr □
minimum half-hour of The Company
Demand.

■
OTSDUW DC CONVERTER DATA Text □ SPD+

Number of poles, i.e. number of OTSDUW DC ■

Converters Text □ SPD+
□
Pole arrangement (e.g. monopole or bipole) Diagram

Return path arrangement

Details of each viable operating configuration ■

□
■
Configuration 1 Diagram □ SPD+
■
□
Configuration 2 Diagram ■
□
Configuration 3 Diagram ■
□
Configuration 4 Diagram ■
□
Configuration 5 Diagram
Configuration 6 Diagram

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

117 of 126
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
118 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 21 OF 24

Data Description Units DATA to Data Operating Configuration

RTL Category
CUSC CUSC 1 2 3 4 5 6
Contract App.
Form

OTSDUW DC CONVERTER DATA

(PC.A.3.3.1(d))

OTSDUW DC Converter Type (e.g. current or Text □ ■ SPD

Voltage source)

□ ■
If the busbars at the Interface Point or Section SPD
Connection Point are normally run in separate Number
sections identify the section to which the
OTSDUW DC Converter configuration is □ ■
connected MW SPD+

Rated MW import per pole (PC.A.3.3.1)

MW □ ■ SPD+
Rated MW export per pole (PC.A.3.3.1)
ACTIVE POWER TRANSFER CAPABILITY
(PC.A.3.2.2)
Interface Point Capacity
MW □ ■ SPD
MVAr □ ■ SPD

OTSDUW DC CONVERTER
TRANSFORMER
(PC.A.5.4.3.1)
MVA □ DPD II
Rated MVA
□
Winding arrangement kV DPD II
□
Nominal primary voltage kV DPD II
Nominal secondary (converter-side) voltage(s) □
Positive sequence reactance % on □ DPD II
Maximum tap MVA □ DPD II
Nominal tap % on DPD II
Minimum tap MVA
Positive sequence resistance % on □ DPD II
□
Maximum tap MVA DPD II
□
Nominal tap □
DPD II
Minimum tap % on □ DPD II
Zero phase sequence reactance MVA □ DPD II
Tap change range % on DPD II
Number of steps MVA
% on
MVA
% on
MVA
+% / -%

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

119 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 22 OF 24

Data Description Units DATA to Data Operating configuration

RTL Category
CUSC CUSC 1 2 3 4 5 6
Contract App.
Form
OTSDUW DC CONVERTER
NETWORK DATA
(PC.A.5.4.3.1 (c))
kV □ DPD II
Rated DC voltage per pole A □ DPD II
Rated DC current per pole
□
Details of the OTSDUW DC Network Diagram DPD II
described in diagram form including
resistance, inductance and capacitance
of all DC cables and/or DC lines.
Details of any line reactors (including
line reactor resistance), line capacitors,
DC filters, earthing electrodes and other
conductors that form part of the
OTSDUW DC Network should be
shown.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

120 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 23 OF 24

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

121 of 126
 Data Description Units DATA to Data Operating configuration
RTL Category
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Form

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

122 of 126
 OTSDUW DC CONVERTER CONTROL
SYSTEMS
(PC.A.5.4.3.2)

Static VDC – PDC (DC voltage – DC power) or

Static VDC – IDC (DC voltage – DC current)
Diagram □
Diagram □
DPD II
characteristic (as appropriate) when DPD II
operating as
–Rectifier
Diagram □
–Inverter
DPD II

Details of rectifier mode control system,

in block diagram form together with
parameters showing transfer functions of
Diagram □
DPD II
individual elements.

Diagram □ DPD II
Details of inverter mode control system,
in block diagram form showing transfer
functions of individual elements including
parameters (as applicable).

Details of OTSDUW DC Converter transformer DPD II

tap changer control system in block diagram form
Diagram □
showing transfer functions of individual elements
including parameters.

Details of AC filter control systems in block

diagram form showing transfer functions of
Diagram □ DPD II
individual elements including parameters

Details of any frequency and/or load control

systems in block diagram form showing
Diagram □
DPD II
transfer functions of individual elements
including parameters.

Details of any large or small signal modulating

controls, such as power oscillation damping
Diagram □ DPD II
controls or sub-synchronous oscillation
damping controls, that have not been
submitted as part of the above control
system data.
Diagram □ DPD II
Transfer block diagram representation of the
reactive power control at converter ends for a
voltage source converter.

For Generators in respect of OTSDUW who are

also EU Code Users details of OTSDUW DC
Diagram □ DPD II
Converter unit models and/or control systems in
block diagram form showing transfer functions of
individual elements including parameters.

For Generators in respect of OTSDUW who are □

also EU Code Users details of AC component Diagram DPD II
models and/or control systems in block diagram
form showing transfer functions of individual
elements including parameters. □

For Generators in respect of OTSDUW who are

also EU Code Users details of DC Grid models
and/or control systems in block diagram form Diagram □ DPD II
showing transfer functions of individual elements
including parameters.

For Generators in respect of OTSDUW who are

also EU Code Users details of Voltage and power
controller and/or control systems in block diagram Diagram □
form showing transfer functions of individual DPD II
elements including parameters.

For Generators in respect of OTSDUW who are □

also EU Code Users details of Special control Diagram DPD II

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

123 of 126
 Data Description Units DATA to Data Operating configuration
RTL Category
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Form
features if applicable (e.g. power oscillation
damping (POD) function, subsynchronous
torsional interaction (SSTI) control and/or control
systems in block diagram form showing transfer
functions of individual elements including
parameters.

For Generators in respect of OTSDUW who are □

Diagram DPD II
also EU Code Users details of Multi terminal
control, if applicable and/or control systems in
block diagram form showing transfer functions of
individual elements including parameters.

For Generators in respect of OTSDUW who are

Diagram □
also EU Code Users details of OTSDUW DC DPD II
Converter protection models as agreed between
The Company and the Generator (in respect of
OTSDW) and/or control systems in block diagram
form showing transfer functions of individual
elements including parameters.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

124 of 126
 SCHEDULE 18 - OFFSHORE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA
PAGE 24 OF 24

Data Description Units DATA to Data Operating configuration

RTL Category
CUSC CUSC
Contract App.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Form

LOADING PARAMETERS (PC.A.5.4.3.3)

MW Export from the Offshore Grid Entry

Point to the Transmission Interface □ DPD I
MW/s □
Point MW/s
DPD I
Nominal loading rate
Maximum (emergency) loading rate
DPD II
s □
Maximum recovery time, to 90% of pre-fault
loading, following an AC system fault or
severe voltage depression.

Maximum recovery time, to 90% of pre-fault s

DPD II
□
loading, following a transient DC
Network fault.

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

125 of 126
Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024
126 of 126
 SCHEDULE 19 – USER DATA FILE STRUCTURE
PAGE 1 OF 2

The structure of the User Data File Structure is given below.

i.d. Folder name Description of contents

Part A: Commercial & Legal
A2 Commissioning Commissioning & Test Programmes
A3 Statements Statements of Readiness
A9 AS Monitoring Ancillary Services Monitoring
A10 Self-Certification User Self Certification of Compliance
A11 Compliance statements Compliance Statement
Part 1: Safety & System Operation
1.1 Interface Agreements Interface Agreements
1.2 Safety Rules Safety Rules
1.3 Switching Procedures Local Switching Procedures
1.4 Earthing Earthing
1.5 SRS Site Responsibility Schedules
1.6 Diagrams Operational and Gas Zone Diagrams
1.7 Drawings Site Common Drawings
1.8 Telephony Control Telephony
1.9 Safety Procedures Local Safety Procedures
1.10 Co-ordinators Safety Co-ordinators
1.11 RISSP Record of Inter System Safety Precautions
1.12 Tel Numbers Telephone Numbers for Joint System
Incidents
1.13 Contact Details Contact Details (fax, tel, email)
1.14 Restoration Plan Local Joint Restoration Plan (incl. System
Restoration if applicable)
1.15 Maintenance Maintenance Standards
Part 2: Connection Technical Data
2.1 DRC Schedule 5 DRC Schedule 5 – Users System Data
2.2 Protection Report Protection Settings Reports
2.3 Special Automatic Special Automatic Facilities e.g. intertrip
Facilities
2.4 Operational Metering Operational Metering
2.5 Tariff Metering Tariff Metering
2.6 Operational Comms Operational Communications
2.7 Monitoring Performance Monitoring
2.8 Power Quality Power Quality Test Results (if required)

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

127 of 126
 SCHEDULE 19 – USER DATA FILE STRUCTURE
PAGE 2 OF 2

Part 3: Generator Technical Data

3.1 DRC Schedule 1 DRC Schedule 1 - Generating Unit, Power
Generating Module, HVDC System and DC
Converter Technical Data
3.2 DRC Schedule 2 DRC Schedule 2 - Generation Planning Data
3.3 DRC Schedule 4 DRC Schedule 4 – Frequency Droop &
Response
3.4 DRC Schedule 14 DRC Schedule 14 – Fault Infeed Data –
Generators
3.5 Special Generator Special Generator Protection e.g. Pole
Protection slipping; islanding
3.6 Compliance Tests Compliance Tests & Evidence
3.7 Compliance Studies Compliance Simulation Studies
3.8 Site Specific Bilateral Connections Agreement Technical
Data & Compliance
3.9 DRC Schedule 20 DRC Schedule 20 - Grid Forming Plant Data
Part 4: General DRC Schedules
4.1 DRC Schedule 3 DRC Schedule 3 – Large Power Station
Outage Information
4.2 DRC Schedule 6 DRC Schedule 6 – Users Outage
Information
4.3 DRC Schedule 7 DRC Schedule 7 – Load Characteristics
4.4 DRC Schedule 8 DRC Schedule 8 – BM Unit Data (if
applicable)
4.5 DRC Schedule 10 DRC Schedule 10 –Demand Profiles
4.6 DRC Schedule 11 DRC Schedule 11 – Connection Point Data
Part 5: OTSDUW Data and Information
(if applicable and prior to OTSUA Transfer Time)
Diagrams
Circuits Plant and Apparatus
Circuit Parameters
Protection Operation and Autoswitching
Automatic Control Systems
Mathematical model of dynamic
compensation plant

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

128 of 126
 SCHEDULE 20 – GRID FORMING PLANT CAPABILITY DATA

The following data need only be supplied by Users (be they a GB Code User or EU Code User) or Non-
CUSC Parties who wish to offer a Grid Forming Capability as provided for ECC.6.3.19.3. Where such a
Grid Forming Capability is provided then the following data items and models are to be supplied in respect
of each Grid Forming Plant.

DATA DESCRIPTION GRID FORMING PLANT DATA

1 2 3
Submission of Network Graphs
Frequency
Perturbation Plot and
Nichols Chart for each
GBGF-I (PC.A.5.8.1)
High level equivalent Diagram
architecture diagram of
Grid Forming Plant
(PC.A.5.8.1)
GBGF-I Grid Forming Block Diagram
Plant Block Diagram (Laplace Operator)
(Laplace Operator) in
the general form shown
in Figure PC.A.5.8.1 or Documentation
as agreed with The
Company.

When submitting either

Figure PC.A.5.8.1 (a) or
Figure PC.A.5.8.1 (b),
each User or Non-
CUSC Party can use
their own design, that
may be very different to
Figures PC.A.5.8.1 (a)
or PC.A.5.8.1 (b), but
should contain all
relevant functions that
can include simulation
models and other
equivalent data and
documentation
Each User or Non-CUSC Model and
Party shall provide a documentation –
model of their Grid format to be
Forming Plant which agreed with The
provides a true and Company
accurate reflection of its
Grid Forming
Capability.

In order to participate in the Grid Forming Capability market, User’s and Non-CUSC Parties are required to
provide data of their GBGF-I in accordance with Figures PC.A.5.8.1(a) and PC.A.5.8.1(b) Users and Non-
CUSC Parties in respect of Grid Forming Plants should indicate if the data is submitted on a unit or
aggregated basis. Table 1 below defines the notation used in Figure PC.5.8.1

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

129 of 126
 Parameter Symbol Units

The primary reactance of the Grid Xin or pu on MVA Rating of Grid

Forming Unit, in pu. Xts Forming Unit

The additional reactance, in pu, Xtr pu on MVA Rating of Grid

between the terminals of the Grid Forming Unit
Forming Unit and the Grid Entry
Point or User System Entry Point
(if Embedded).

The rated angle between the radians

Internal Voltage Source and the
input terminals of the Grid Forming
Unit.
The rated angle between the radians
Internal Voltage Source and Grid
Entry Point or User System Entry
Point (if Embedded).
The rated voltage and phase of the Voltage - pu
Internal Voltage Source of the Grid
Phase - radians
Forming Unit.
The rated electrical angle between radians
current and voltage at the input to
the Grid transformer.

Table 1

In order to participate in a Grid Forming Capability market, User’s and Non-CUSC Parties are also required
to provide the data of their GBGF-I in accordance with the Table below to The Company. The details and
arrangements for Users and Non-CUSC Parties participating in this market shall be published on The
Company’s Website.

Quantity Units Range User Defined Parameter

(where
Applicable)
Type of Grid form Plant (eg N/A
Generating Unit,
Electricity Storage
Module, Dynamic
Reactive Compensation
Equipment

Maximum Continuous MVA

Rating at Registered
Capacity or Maximum
Capacity
Primary reactance Xin or pu on
Xts(see Table 1) MVA

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

130 of 126
 Additional reactance Xtr pu on
(See Table 1) MVA
Maximum Capacity MW
Active ROCOF Response MW
Power (MW) supplied or
absorbed at 1Hz/s System
Frequency change (which
is the maximum frequency
change for linear operation
of the Grid Forming Plant)
Phase Jump Angle degrees 60 degrees specified
Withstand
Phase Jump Angle limit degrees 5 degrees recommended
Phase Jump Power (MW) MW
at the rated angle
Defined Active Damping MW
Power for a Grid
Oscillation Value of 0.05
Hz peak to peak at 1 Hz
The cumulative energy MWs or
delivered for a 1Hz/s MJ
System Frequency fall
from 52 Hz to 47 Hz This is
the total Active Power
transient output of the Grid
Forming Plant
Inertia Constant (H) using MWs/MVA
equation 1 or declared in
accordance with the
simulation results of
ECP.A.3.9.4
Inertia Constant (He) MWs/MVA
using equation 2 or
declared in accordance
with the simulation results
of ECP.A.3.9.4
Continuous Overload % on MVA
Capability
Short Term duration
Overload capability
Duration of Short Term s
Overload Capability
Peak Current Rating pu
Nominal Grid Entry Point kV
or User System Entry
Point voltage
Grid Entry Point or User - Location
System Entry Point
Continuous or defined time MVA
duration MVA Rating

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

131 of 126
 Continuous or defined time MW
duration MW Rating
For a GBGF-I the inverters pu
maximum Internal Voltage
Source (IVS) for the worst
case condition – for
example operation at
maximum exporting
Reactive Power at the
maximum AC System
voltage
Maximum Three Phase kA
Short Circuit Infeed at Grid
Entry Point or User
System Entry Point
Maximum Single Phase kA
Short Circuit Infeed at Grid
Entry Point or User
System Entry Point
Will the Grid Forming Details to
Plant contribute to any be
other form of commercial provided
service – for example
Dynamic Containment, Firm
Frequency Response,
Equivalent Damping ζ 0.2 to 5.0 allowed
Factor.

Table 2
H = Installed MWs / Rated installed MVA
(equation 1)
He = (Active ROCOF Response Power at 1 Hz / s x System Frequency) / ( Installed MVA x 2 )
(equation 2)

<END OF DATA REGISTRATION CODE>

Issue 6 Revision 21 DRC 04 March 2024

132 of 126
 GENERAL CONDITIONS
(GC)

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

GC.1 INTRODUCTION ...........................................................................................................................2
GC.2 SCOPE ..........................................................................................................................................2
GC.3 UNFORESEEN CIRCUMSTANCES .............................................................................................2
GC.4 GRID CODE REVIEW PANEL ......................................................................................................2
GC.5 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN NGET AND USERS ...................................................................2
GC.6 MISCELLANEOUS........................................................................................................................3
GC.7 OWNERSHIP OF PLANT AND/OR APPARATUS .......................................................................3
GC.8 SYSTEM CONTROL .....................................................................................................................3
GC.9 EMERGENCY SITUATIONS ........................................................................................................4
GC.10 MATTERS TO BE AGREED .......................................................................................................4
GC.11 GOVERNANCE OF ELECTRICAL STANDARDS ......................................................................4
GC.12 CONFIDENTIALITY ....................................................................................................................5
GC.13 RELEVANT TRANSMISSION LICENSEES ...............................................................................6
GC.14 BETTA TRANSITION ISSUES ...................................................................................................6
GC.15 EMBEDDED EXEMPTABLE LARGE AND MEDIUM POWER STATIONS ...............................6
GC.16 SYSTEM DEFENCE PLAN SYSTEM RESTORATION AND TEST PLAN ................................6
ANNEX TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS .............................................................................................9
APPENDIX TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS .................................................................................... 12

Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024

i
GC.1 INTRODUCTION
GC.1.1 The General Conditions contain provisions which are of general application to all provisions
of the Grid Code. Their objective is to ensure, to the extent possible, that the various sections
of the Grid Code work together and work in practice for the benefit of all Users.

GC.2 SCOPE
GC.2.1 The General Conditions apply to all Users (including, for the avoidance of doubt, The
Company).

GC.3 UNFORESEEN CIRCUMSTANCES

GC.3.1 If circumstances arise which the provisions of the Grid Code have not foreseen, The Company
shall, to the extent reasonably practicable in the circumstances, consult promptly and in good
faith all affected Users in an effort to reach agreement as to what should be done. If
agreement between The Company and those Users as to what should be done cannot be
reached in the time available, The Company shall determine what is to be done. Wherever
The Company makes a determination, it shall do so having regard, wherever possible, to the
views expressed by Users and, in any event, to what is reasonable in all the circumstances.
Each User shall comply with all instructions given to it by The Company following such a
determination provided that the instructions are consistent with the then current technical
parameters of the particular User's System registered under the Grid Code. The Company
shall promptly refer all such unforeseen circumstances and any such determination to the
Panel for consideration in accordance with GC.4.2(e).

GC.4 NOT USED

GC.5 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE COMPANY AND USERS

GC.5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the Grid Code, all instructions given by The Company and
communications (other than relating to the submission of data and notices) between The
Company and Users (other than Generators, DC Converter Station owners or Suppliers)
shall take place between the The Company Control Engineer based at the Transmission
Control Centre notified by The Company to each User prior to connection, and the relevant
User Responsible Engineer/Operator, who, in the case of a Network Operator, will be
based at the Control Centre notified by the Network Operator to The Company prior to
connection.
GC.5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the Grid Code, all instructions given by The Company and
communications (other than relating to the submission of data and notices) between The
Company and Generators and/or DC Converter Station owners and/or Suppliers, shall take
place between the The Company Control Engineer based at the Transmission Control
Centre notified by The Company to each Generator or DC Converter Station owner prior to
connection, or to each Supplier prior to submission of BM Unit Data, and either the relevant
Generator's or DC Converter Station owner’s or Supplier’s Trading Point (if it has
established one) notified to The Company or the Control Point of the Supplier or the
Generator's Power Station or DC Converter Station, as specified in each relevant section
of the Grid Code. In the absence of notification to the contrary, the Control Point of a
Generator’s Power Station will be deemed to be the Power Station at which the Generating
Units or Power Park Modules are situated.
GC.5.3 Unless otherwise specified in the Grid Code, all instructions given by The Company and
communications (other than relating to the submission of data and notices) between The
Company and Users will be given by means of the Control Telephony referred to in
CC.6.5.2.
Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024
2 of 18
GC.5.4 If the Transmission Control Centre notified by The Company to each User prior to
connection, or the User Control Centre, notified in the case of a Network Operator to The
Company prior to connection, is moved to another location, whether due to an emergency or
for any other reason, The Company shall notify the relevant User or the User shall notify The
Company, as the case may be, of the new location and any changes to the Control
Telephony or System Telephony necessitated by such move, as soon as practicable
following the move.
GC.5.5 If any Trading Point notified to The Company by a Generator or DC Converter Station
owner prior to connection, or by a Supplier prior to submission of BM Unit Data, is moved to
another location or is shut down, the Generator, DC Converter Station owner or Supplier
shall immediately notify The Company.
GC.5.6 The recording (by whatever means) of instructions or communications given by means of
Control Telephony or System Telephony will be accepted by The Company and Users as
evidence of those instructions or communications.

GC.6 MISCELLANEOUS
GC.6.1 Data and Notices
GC.6.1.1 Data and notices to be submitted either to The Company or to Users under the Grid Code
(other than data which is the subject of a specific requirement of the Grid Code as to the
manner of its delivery) shall be delivered in writing either by hand or sent by first-class pre-
paid post, or by facsimile transfer or by electronic mail to a specified address or addresses
previously supplied by The Company or the User (as the case may be) for the purposes of
submitting that data or those notices.
GC.6.1.2 References in the Grid Code to “in writing” or “written” include typewriting, printing, lithography,
and other modes of reproducing words in a legible and non-transitory form and in relation to
submission of data and notices includes electronic communications.
GC.6.1.3 Data delivered pursuant to paragraph GC.6.1.1, in the case of data being submitted to The
Company, shall be addressed to the Transmission Control Centre at the address notified
by The Company to each User prior to connection, or to such other Department within The
Company or address, as The Company may notify each User from time to time, and in the
case of notices to be submitted to Users, shall be addressed to the chief executive of the
addressee (or such other person as may be notified by the User in writing to The Company
from time to time) at its address(es) notified by each User to The Company in writing from
time to time for the submission of data and service of notices under the Grid Code (or failing
which to the registered or principal office of the addressee).
GC.6.1.4 All data items, where applicable, will be referenced to nominal voltage and Frequency unless
otherwise stated.

GC.7 OWNERSHIP OF PLANT AND/OR APPARATUS

References in the Grid Code to Plant and/or Apparatus of a User include Plant and/or
Apparatus used by a User under any agreement with a third party.

GC.8 SYSTEM CONTROL

Where a User's System (or part thereof) is, by agreement, under the control of The
Company, then for the purposes of communication and co-ordination in operational
timescales The Company can (for those purposes only) treat that User's System (or part
thereof) as part of the National Electricity Transmission System, but, as between The
Company and Users, it shall remain to be treated as the User's System (or part thereof).

Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024

3 of 18
GC.9 EMERGENCY SITUATIONS
Users should note that the provisions of the Grid Code may be suspended, in whole or in part,
during a Security Period, as more particularly provided in the Fuel Security Code, or pursuant
to any directions given and/or orders made by the Secretary of State under section 96 of the
Act or under the Energy Act 1976.

GC.10 MATTERS TO BE AGREED

Save where expressly stated in the Grid Code to the contrary where any matter is left to The
Company and Users to agree and there is a failure so to agree the matter shall not without
the consent of both The Company and Users be referred to arbitration pursuant to the rules
of the Electricity Supply Industry Arbitration Association.

GC.11 GOVERNANCE OF ELECTRICAL STANDARDS

GC.11.1 In relation to the Electrical Standards the following provisions shall apply.
GC.11.2 (a) If a User, or in respect of the Electrical Standards in (b) to the annex, The Company,
or in respect of the Electrical Standards in (a) to the annex, or in respect of the Electrical
Standards in (c) or (d) to the annex, the Relevant Scottish Transmission Licensee,
wishes to:-
(i) raise a change to an Electrical Standard;
(ii) add a new standard to the list of Electrical Standards;
(iii) delete a standard from being an Electrical Standard,
it shall activate the Electrical Standards procedure.
(b) The Electrical Standards procedure is the notification to the secretary to the Panel of
the wish to so change, add or delete an Electrical Standard. That notification must
contain details of the proposal, including an explanation of why the proposal is being
made.
GC.11.3 Ordinary Electrical Standards Procedure
(a) Unless it is identified as an urgent Electrical Standards proposal (in which case GC.11.4
applies) or unless the notifier requests that it be tabled at the next Panel meeting, as soon
as reasonably practicable following receipt of the notification, the Panel secretary shall
forward the proposal, with a covering paper, to Panel Members.
(b) If no objections are raised within 20 Business Days of the date of the proposal, then it
shall be deemed approved pursuant to the Electrical Standards procedure, and The
Company shall make the change to the relevant Electrical Standard or the list of
Electrical Standards contained in the Annex to this GC.11.
(c) If there is an objection (or if the notifier had requested that it be tabled at the next Panel
meeting rather than being dealt with in writing), then the proposal will be included in the
agenda for the next following Panel meeting.
(d) If there is broad consensus at the Panel meeting in favour of the proposal, The Company
will make the change to the Electrical Standard or the list of Electrical Standards
contained in the Annex to this GC.11.
(e) If there is no such broad consensus, including where the Panel believes that further
consultation is needed, The Company will establish a Panel working group if this was
thought appropriate and in any event The Company shall undertake a consultation of
Authorised Electricity Operators liable to be materially affected by the proposal.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024

4 of 18
 (f) Following such consultation, The Company will report back to Panel Members, either in
writing or at a Panel meeting. If there was broad consensus in the consultation, then The
Company will make the change to the Electrical Standard or the list of Electrical
Standards contained in the Annex to this GC.11.
(g) Where following such consultation there is no broad consensus, the matter will be referred
to the Authority who will decide whether the proposal should be implemented and will
notify The Company of its decision. If the decision is to so implement the change, The
Company will make the change to the Electrical Standard or the list of Electrical
Standards contained in the Annex to this GC.11.
(h) In all cases where a change is made to the list of Electrical Standards, The Company
will publish and circulate a replacement page for the Annex to this GC covering that list
and reflecting the change.
GC.11.4 Urgent Electrical Standards Procedure
(a) If the notification is marked as an urgent Electrical Standards proposal, the Panel
secretary will contact Panel Members in writing to see whether a majority who are
contactable agree that it is urgent and in that notification the secretary shall propose a
timetable and procedure which shall be followed.
(b) If such members do so agree, then the secretary will initiate the procedure accordingly,
having first obtained the approval of the Authority.
(c) If such members do not so agree, or if the Authority declines to approve the proposal
being treated as an urgent one, the proposal will follow the ordinary Electrical Standards
procedure as set out in GC.11.3 above.
(d) If a proposal is implemented using the urgent Electrical Standards procedure, The
Company will contact all Panel Members after it is so implemented to check whether
they wish to discuss further the implemented proposal to see whether an additional
proposal should be considered to alter the implementation, such proposal following the
ordinary Electrical Standards procedure.
GC.12 CONFIDENTIALITY
GC.12.1 Users should note that although the Grid Code contains in certain sections specific provisions
which relate to confidentiality, the confidentiality provisions set out in the CUSC apply generally
to information and other data supplied as a requirement of or otherwise under the Grid Code.
To the extent required to facilitate the requirements of the EMR Documents, Users that are
party to the Grid Code but are not party to the CUSC Framework Agreement agree that the
confidentiality provisions of the CUSC are deemed to be imported into the Grid Code.
GC.12.2 The Company has obligations under the STC to inform Relevant Transmission Licensees
of certain data. The Company may pass on User data to a Relevant Transmission
Licensee where:
(a) The Company is required to do so under a provision of Schedule 3 of the STC; and/or
(b) permitted in accordance with PC.3.4, PC.3.5 and OC2.3.2.

GC.12.3 The Company has obligations under the EMR Documents to inform EMR
Administrative Parties of certain data. The Company may pass on User data to an EMR
Administrative Party where The Company is required to do so under an EMR
Document.

GC.12.4 The Company may use User data for the purpose of carrying out its EMR Functions.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024

5 of 18
GC.13 RELEVANT TRANSMISSION LICENSEES
GC.13.1 It is recognised that the Relevant Transmission Licensees are not parties to the Grid Code.
Accordingly, notwithstanding that Operating Code No. 8 Appendix 1 (“OC8A”) and Appendix
2 ("OC8B"), OC7.6, OC9.4 and OC9.5 refer to obligations which will in practice be performed
by the Relevant Transmission Licensees in accordance with relevant obligations under the
STC, for the avoidance of doubt all contractual rights and obligations arising under OC8A,
OC8B, OC7.6, OC9.4 and OC9.5 shall exist between The Company and the relevant User
and in relation to any enforcement of those rights and obligations OC8A, OC8B, OC7.6, OC9.4
and OC9.5 shall be so read and construed. The Relevant Transmission Licensees shall
enjoy no enforceable rights under OC8A, OC8B, OC7.6, OC9.4 and OC9.5 nor shall they be
liable (other than pursuant to the STC) for failing to discharge any obligations under OC8A,
OC8B, OC7.6, OC9.4 and OC9.5.
GC.13.2 For the avoidance of doubt nothing in this Grid Code confers on any Relevant Transmission
Licensee any rights, powers or benefits for the purpose of the Contracts (Rights of Third
Parties) Act 1999.

GC.14 BETTA TRANSITION ISSUES

GC.14.1 The provisions of Part A of the Appendix to the General Conditions apply in relation to issues
arising out of the transition associated with the designation of GC Modification Proposals by
the Secretary of State in accordance with the provisions of the Energy Act 2004 for the
purposes of Condition C14 of The Company’s Transmission Licence.

GC.15 EMBEDDED EXEMPTABLE LARGE AND MEDIUM POWER STATIONS

GC.15.1 This GC.15.1 shall have an effect until and including 31st March 2007.
(i) CC.6.3.2, CC.6.3.7, CC.8.1 and BC3.5.1; and
(ii) Planning Code obligations and other Connection Conditions; shall apply to a User who
owns or operates an Embedded Exemptable Large Power Station, or a Network
Operator in respect of an Embedded Exemptable Medium Power Station, except
where and to the extent that, in respect of that Embedded Exemptable Large Power
Station or Embedded Exemptable Medium Power Station, The Company agrees or
where the relevant User and The Company fail to agree, where and to the extent that
the Authority consents.
GC.16 SYSTEM DEFENCE PLAN, SYSTEM RESTORATION AND TEST PLAN

GC.16.1 In relation to the System Defence Plan, System Restoration Plan and Test Plan the
following provisions shall apply.
GC.16.2 If a User or The Company, wishes to raise a change to the System Defence Plan, System
Restoration Plan or Test Plan, they shall notify the Panel Secretary of the proposed change
to the System Defence Plan, System Restoration Plan or Test Plan.
In respect of the System Defence Plan the proposal shall not change the characteristics of
the service to be provided or the conditions for aggregation, as any such changes that relate
to the terms and conditions for Defence Service Providers; as set out in Article 4 paragraph
4 of Retained EU Law (Commission Regulation (EU) 2017/2196), as amended by Statutory
Instrument 533 (2019); is subject to a separate change procedure. That notification must
contain details of the proposal, including an explanation of why the proposal is being made.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024

6 of 18
 In respect of the System Restoration Plan, the proposal shall not change the characteristics
of the service to be provided or conditions for aggregation or the target geographical
distribution of power sources with Black Start and island operation capabilities, as any such
changes that relate to the terms and conditions for Restoration Service Providers; as set
out in Article 4 paragraph 4 of Retained EU Law (Commission Regulation (EU) 2017/2196),
as amended by Statutory Instrument 533 (2019); is subject to a separate change procedure.
That notification must contain details of the proposal, including an explanation of why the
proposal is being made.
In respect of the Test Plan, the proposal shall include an explanation of why the proposal is
being made.
Any such change proposals shall take into account the legitimate expectations, where
necessary, of User’s, Defence Service Providers or Restoration Service Providers based
on the initially specified or agreed requirements or methodologies.

GC.16.3 Ordinary Procedure

(a) Unless it is identified as an urgent proposal (in which case GC.16.4 applies) or unless the
notifier requests that it be tabled at the next Panel meeting, as soon as reasonably
practicable following receipt of the notification, the Panel Secretary shall forward the
proposal, with a covering paper, to Panel Members and a consultation of not less than
one month shall be undertaken.
(b) For the System Defence Plan and the System Restoration Plan if no objections are
raised following the consultation, then the modification shall be deemed approved, and
The Company shall make the change to the System Defence Plan or the System
Restoration Plan, and the Panel Secretary shall as soon as reasonably possible,
publish it on The Company’s Website and inform Users and other persons who may be
interested.
(c) If there is an objection (or if the notifier had requested that it be tabled at the next Panel
meeting rather than being dealt with in writing), then the proposal to change the System
Defence Plan or System Restoration Plan or Test Plan will be included on the agenda
for the next Panel meeting.
(d) For the System Defence Plan and the System Restoration Plan if there is a majority
consensus at the Panel meeting in favour of the proposal, The Company will make the
change to the System Defence Plan or the System Restoration Plan as soon as
reasonably possible and the Panel Secretary shall publish it on The Company’s
Website and inform Users and other persons who may be interested.
(e) If there is no such majority consensus in respect of the System Defence Plan or the
System Restoration Plan or the Test Plan, The Company will request guidance from
the Panel on an appropriate way forward. If the Panel decides a working group is required
then the procedure under GR15 shall apply unless otherwise directed by The Authority.
(f) In the case of a modification to the Test Plan, it shall be submitted to The Authority for
approval. If approved The Company will make the change to the Test Plan as soon as
reasonably possible and the Panel Secretary shall publish it on The Company’s Website
and inform Users and other persons who may be interested.

GC.16.4 Urgent Procedure

(a) If the notification to change the System Defence Plan or System Restoration Plan is
marked as an urgent proposal, the Panel Secretary will contact Panel Members in
writing to see whether a majority who are contactable agree that it is urgent and in that
case the Panel Secretary shall propose a timetable and procedure which shall be
followed. The Panel Secretary shall as soon as reasonably possible, publish the
proposal on The Company’s Website and inform User’s and other persons who may be
interested.
Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024
7 of 18
 (b) If such Panel Members do so agree, then the Panel Secretary will initiate the procedure
accordingly, having first obtained the approval of The Authority that urgency is warranted
in accordance with the criteria set out in The Authority’s published guidance.
(c) If such Panel Members do not so agree, or if The Authority declines to approve the
proposal being treated as an urgent one, the proposal will follow the ordinary procedure
as set out in GC.16.3.
(d) If a proposal to change the System Defence Plan or System Restoration Plan is
developed using the urgent procedure, The Company will contact all Panel Members
after it is agreed as being urgent to check whether they wish to discuss further the
proposal to see whether an additional proposal should be considered to alter the
implementation, such proposal following the ordinary procedure as provided for in
GC.16.3 or, if agreed by The Authority, urgency as provided for in GC16.4.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024

8 of 18
 ANNEX TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS

The Electrical Standards are as follows:

(a) Electrical Standards applicable for NGET’s Transmission System

The Relevant Electrical Standards Document (RES) Reference Issue Date

Parts 1 to 3 3.0 March 2018

Part 4 – Specific Requirements
1 Back-Up Protection Grading PS(T)044(RES) 1.0 September 2014
across NGET's and other
Network Operator Interfaces
2 Ratings and General TS 1 (RES) 1.0 February 2018
Requirements for Plant,
Equipment, Apparatus and
Services for the National Grid
System and Connections Points
to it.
3 Substations TS 2.01 (RES) 1.0 February 2018
4 Switchgear TS 2.02 (RES) 1.0 October 2014
5 Substation Auxiliary Supplies TS 2.12 (RES) 1.0 October 2014
6 Ancillary Light Current TS 2.19 (RES) 1.0 October 2014
Equipment
7 Substation Interlocking TS 3.01.01 (RES) 1.0 February 2018
Schemes
8 Earthing Requirements TS 3.01.02 (RES) 1.0 October 2014
9 Circuit Breakers TS 3.02.01 (RES) 2.0 February 2018
10 Disconnectors and Earthing TS 3.02.02 (RES) 1.0 October 2014
Switches
11 Current Transformers for TS 3.02.04 (RES) 1.0 October 2014
Protection and General Use on
the 132kV, 275kV and 400kV
Systems
12 Voltage Transformers TS 3.02.05 (RES) 1.0 September 2016
13 Bushings TS 3.02.07 (RES) 1.0 October 2014
14 Solid Core Post Insulators for TS 3.02.09 (RES) 1.0 October 2014
Substations
15 Voltage Dividers TS 3.02.12 (RES) 1.0 September 2016
16 Gas Insulated Switchgear TS 3.02.14 (RES) 1.0 October 2014
17 Environmental and Test TS 3.24.15 (RES) 1.0 October 2014
Requirements for Electronic
Equipment
18 Busbar Protection TS 3.24.34 (RES) 1.0 October 2014
19 Circuit Breaker Fail Protection TS 3.24.39 (RES) 1.0 October 2014
20 Synchronising And Voltage TS.3.24.60 (RES) 2.0 January 2018
Selection
21 System Monitor – Dynamic TS 3.24.70 (RES) 2.0 February 2018
System Monitoring (DSM)
22 System Monitoring – Fault TS 3.24.71 (RES) 1.0 February 2018
Recording
23 Protection & Control for HVDC TS 3.24.90 (RES) 1.0 October 2014
Systems
24 Ancillary Services Business TS 3.24.95 (RES) 2.0 February 2018
Monitoring

Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024

9 of 18
 25 Operational Data Transmission TS 3.24.100 (RES) 1.0 February 2018
26 Guidance for Working in TGN(E)186 (RES) 1.0 October 2018
Proximity to Live Conductors

Additional Requirements

(b) Electronic data communications facilities and other requirements applicable in all
Transmission Areas.

Communications Standards for Electronic Data Issue 5

Communication Facilities and Automatic Logging
Devices

EDT Interface Specification Issue 4 18th Dec 2000

EDT Submitter Guidance Note Issue 1 21st Dec 2001

EDL Message Interface Specification Issue 4 20th Jun 2000

EDL Instruction Interface Valid Reason Codes Issue 5 20th Jan 2022

MODIS Interface Specification Version 4 26th May 2015

Control Telephony Electrical Standard 2.0 TBA

Distribution Restoration Zone Control System High 1.0 TBA

Level Functional Requirements

(c) Scottish Electrical Standards applicable for SPT's Transmission System.

RES-01-100 Relevant Electrical Standards for Plant, Issue 1

Equipment and Apparatus for connection to the
SP Transmission System

Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024

10 of 18
 (d) Scottish Electrical Standards applicable for SHETL's Transmission System.

1. NGTS 1: Rating and General Requirements for

Plant, Equipment, Apparatus and Services
for the National Grid System and Direct
Connection to it. Issue 3 March 1999.
2. NGTS 2.1: Substations
Issue 2 May 1995
3. NGTS 3.1.1: Substation Interlocking Schemes.
Issue 1 October 1993.
4. NGTS 3.2.1: Circuit Breakers and Switches.
Issue 1 September 1992.
5. NGTS 3.2.2: Disconnectors and Earthing Switches.
Issue 1 March 1994.
6. NGTS 3.2.3: Metal-Oxide surge arresters for use on
132, 275 and 400kV systems.
Issue 2 May 1994.
7. NGTS 3.2.4: Current Transformers for protection and
General use on the 132, 275 and 400kV
systems.
Issue 1 September 1992.
8. NGTS 3.2.5: Voltage Transformers for use on the 132,
275 and 400 kV systems.
Issue 2 March 1994.
9. NGTS 3.2.6: Current and Voltage Measurement
Transformers for Settlement Metering of
33, 66, 132, 275 and 400kV systems.
Issue 1 September 1992.
10. NGTS 3.2.7: Bushings for the Grid Systems.
Issue 1 September 1992.
11. NGTS 3.2.9: Post Insulators for Substations.
Issue 1 May 1996.
12. NGTS 2.6: Protection
Issue 2 June 1994.
13. NGTS 3.11.1: Capacitors and Capacitor Banks.
Issued 1 March 1993.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024

11 of 18
 APPENDIX TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART A
GC.A.1 Introduction
GC.A.1.1 This Appendix Part A to the General Conditions deals with issues arising out of the transition
associated with the designation of amendments to the Grid Code by the Secretary of State
in accordance with the provisions of the Energy Act 2004 for the purposes of Condition C14
of The Company’s Transmission Licence at that time. For the purposes of this Appendix to
the General Conditions, the version of the Grid Code as amended by the changes designated
by the Secretary of State and as further amended from time to time shall be referred to as
the “GB Grid Code”. The process and amendments referred to in this Appendix Part A took
place before the separation of The Company from NGET and the introduction into the Grid
Code of Offshore Transmission Licencees and this Part A shall be construed accordingly.
GC.A.1.2 The provisions of this Appendix Part A to the General Conditions shall only apply to Users
(as defined in GC.A.1.4) and The Company after Go-Live for so long as is necessary for the
transition requirements referred to in GC.A.1.1 and cut-over requirements (as further detailed
in GC.A.3.1) to be undertaken.
GC.A.1.3 In this Appendix Part A to the General Conditions:
(a) Existing E&W Users and E&W Applicants are referred to as “E&W Users”;
(b) Users who as at 1 January 2005 have entered into an agreement or have accepted an
offer for connection to and/or use of the Transmission System of NGET are referred to
as “Existing E&W Users”;
(c) Users (or prospective Users) other than Existing E&W Users who apply during the
Transition Period for connection to and/or use of the Transmission System of NGET
are referred to as “E&W Applicants”;
(d) Existing Scottish Users and Scottish Applicants are referred to as “Scottish Users”;
(e) Users who as at 1 January 2005 have entered into an agreement or have accepted an
offer for connection to and/or use of the Transmission System of either SPT or SHETL
are referred to as “Existing Scottish Users”;
(f) Users (or prospective Users) other than Existing Scottish Users who apply during the
Transition Period for connection to and/or use of the Transmission System of either
SPT or SHETL are referred to as “Scottish Applicants”;
(g) the term “Transition Period” means the period from Go-Active to Go-Live (unless it is
provided to be different in relation to a particular provision), and is the period with which
this AppendixPart A to the General Conditions deals;
(h) the term “Interim GB SYS” means the document of that name referred to in Condition
C11 of The Company’s Transmission Licence;
(i) the term “Go-Active” means the date on which the amendments designated by the
Secretary of State to the Grid Code in accordance with the Energy Act 2004 come into
effect; and
(j) the term “Go-Live” means the date which the Secretary of State indicates in a direction
shall be the BETTA go-live date.
GC.A.1.4 The provisions of GC.2.1 shall not apply in respect of this Appendix to the General
Conditions, and in this Appendix Part A to the General Conditions the term “Users” means:
(a) Generators;
(b) Network Operators;
(c) Non-Embedded Customers;
(d) Suppliers;

Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024

12 of 18
 (e) BM Participants;
(f) Externally Interconnected System Operators; and
(g) DC Converter Station owners
to the extent that the provisions of this Appendix Part A to the General Conditions affect the
rights and obligations of such Users under the other provisions of the GB Grid Code.
GC.A.1.5 The GB Grid Code has been introduced with effect from Go-Active pursuant to the relevant
licence changes introduced into The Company’s Transmission Licence. The Company is
required to implement and comply, and Users to comply, with the GB Grid Code subject as
provided in this Appendix Part A to the General Conditions, which provides for the extent to
which the GB Grid Code is to apply to The Company and Users during the Transition Period.
GC.A.1.6 This Appendix Part A to the General Conditions comprises:
(a) this Introduction;
(b) GB Grid Code transition issues; and
(c) Cut-over issues.
GC.A.1.7 Without prejudice to GC.A.1.8, the failure of any User or The Company to comply with this
Appendix Part A to the General Conditions shall not invalidate or render ineffective any part
of this Appendix Part A to the General Conditions or actions undertaken pursuant to this
Appendix to the General Conditions.
GC.A.1.8 A User or The Company shall not be in breach of any part of this Appendix Part A to the
General Conditions to the extent that compliance with that part is beyond its power by reason
of the fact that any other User or The Company is in default of its obligations under this
Appendix Part A to the General Conditions.
GC.A.1.9 Without prejudice to any specific provision under this Appendix Part A to the General
Conditions as to the time within which or the manner in which a User or The Company should
perform its obligations under this Appendix to the General Conditions, where a User or The
Company is required to take any step or measure under this Appendix Part A to the General
Conditions, such requirement shall be construed as including any obligation to:
(a) take such step or measure as quickly as reasonably practicable; and
(b) do such associated or ancillary things as may be necessary to complete such step or
measure as quickly as reasonably practicable.
GC.A.1.10 The Company shall use reasonable endeavours to identify any amendments it believes are
needed to the GB Grid Code in respect of the matters referred to for the purposes of Condition
C14 of The Company’s Transmission Licence and in respect of the matters identified in
GC.A.1.11, and, having notified the Authority of its consultation plans in relation to such
amendments, The Company shall consult in accordance with the instructions of the Authority
concerning such proposed amendments.
GC.A.1.11 The following matters potentially require amendments to the GB Grid Code:
(a) The specific detail of the obligations needed to manage implementation in the period up
to and following (for a temporary period) Go-Live to achieve the change to operation
under the GB Grid Code (to be included in GC.A.3).
(b) Information (including data) and other requirements under the GB Grid Code applicable
to Scottish Users during the Transition Period (to be included in GC.A.2).
(c) The conclusions of Ofgem/DTI in relation to small and/or embedded generator issues
under BETTA and allocation of access rights on a GB basis.
(d) Any arrangements required to make provision for operational liaison, including System
Restoration and islanding arrangements in Scotland.
(e) Any arrangements required to make provision for cascade hydro BM Units.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024

13 of 18
 (f) Any consequential changes to the safety co-ordination arrangements resulting from STC
and STC procedure development.
(g) Any arrangements required to reflect the Electrical Standards for the Transmission
Systems of SPT and SHETL.
(h) The conclusions of Ofgem/DTI in relation to planning and operating standards.
GC.A.1.12 The Company shall notify the Authority of any amendments that The Company identifies as
needed pursuant to GC.A.1.10 and shall make such amendments as the Authority approves.
GC.A.2 GB Grid Code Transition
General Provisions
GC.A.2.1 The provisions of the GB Grid Code shall be varied or suspended (and the requirements of
the GB Grid Code shall be deemed to be satisfied) by or in accordance with, and for the period
and to the extent set out in this GC.A.2, and in accordance with the other applicable provisions
in this Appendix Part A to the General Conditions.
GC.A.2.2 E&W Users:
In furtherance of the licence provisions referred to in GC.A.1.5, E&W Users shall comply with
the GB Grid Code during the Transition Period, but shall comply with and be subject to it
subject to this Appendix to the General Conditions, including on the basis that:
(a) during the Transition Period the Scottish Users are only complying with the GB Grid
Code in accordance with this Appendix Part A to the General Conditions; and
(b) during the Transition Period the National Electricity Transmission System shall be
limited to the Transmission System of NGET, and all rights and obligations of E&W
Users in respect of the National Electricity Transmission System under the GB Grid
Code shall only apply in respect of the Transmission System of NGET, and all the
provisions of the GB Grid Code shall be construed accordingly.
GC.A.2.3 Scottish Users:
In furtherance of the licence provisions referred to in GC.A.1.5, Scottish Users shall comply
with the GB Grid Code and the GB Grid Code shall apply to or in relation to them during the
Transition Period only as provided in this Appendix Part A to the General Conditions.
GC.A.2.4 THE COMPANY:
In furtherance of the licence provisions referred to in GC.A.1.5, The Company shall implement
and comply with the GB Grid Code during the Transition Period, but shall implement and
comply with and be subject to it subject to, and taking into account, all the provisions of this
Appendix Part A to the General Conditions, including on the basis that:
(a) during the Transition Period The Company’s rights and obligations in relation to E&W
Users in respect of the National Electricity Transmission System under the GB Grid
Code shall only apply in respect of the Transmission System of NGET, and all the
provisions of the GB Grid Code shall be construed accordingly; and
(b) during the Transition Period The Company’s rights and obligations in relation to
Scottish Users in respect of the National Electricity Transmission System under the
GB Grid Code shall only be as provided in this Appendix Part A to the General
Conditions.
Specific Provisions
GC.A.2.5 Definitions:
The provisions of the GB Grid Code Glossary and Definitions shall apply to and for the
purposes of this Appendix Part A to the General Conditions except where provided to the
contrary in this Appendix Part A to the General Conditions.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024

14 of 18
GC.A.2.6 Identification of Documents:
In the period beginning at Go-Active, Scottish Users will work with The Company to identify
and agree with The Company any documents needed to be in place in accordance with the
GB Grid Code, to apply from Go-Live or as earlier provided for under this Appendix Part A to
the General Conditions, including (without limitation) Site Responsibility Schedules, Gas
Zone Diagrams and OC9 Desynchronised Island Procedures.

GC.A.2.7 Data:
Each Scottish User must provide, or enable a SPT or SHETL to provide, The Company, as
soon as reasonably practicable upon request, with all data which The Company needs in
order to implement, with effect from Go-Live, the GB Grid Code in relation to Scotland. This
data will include, without limitation, the data that a new User is required to submit to The
Company under CC.5.2. The Company is also entitled to receive data on Scottish Users
over SPT or SHETL’s SCADA links to the extent that The Company needs it for use in testing
and in order to implement, with effect from Go-Live, the GB Grid Code in relation to Scotland.
After Go-Live such data shall, notwithstanding GC.A.1.2, be treated as though it had been
provided to The Company under the enduring provisions of the GB Grid Code.
GC.A.2.8 Verification of Data etc:
The Company shall be entitled to request from a Scottish User (which shall comply as soon
as reasonably practicable with such a request) confirmation and verification of any information
(including data) that has been received by SPT or SHETL under an existing Grid Code and
passed on to The Company in respect of that Scottish User. After Go-Live such information
(including data) shall, notwithstanding GC.A.1.2, be treated as though provided to The
Company under the enduring provisions of the GB Grid Code.
GC.A.2.9 Grid Code Review Panel:
(a) The individuals whose names are notified to The Company by the Authority prior to Go-
Active as Panel Members (and Alternate Members, if applicable) are agreed by Users
(including Scottish Users) and The Company to constitute the Panel Members and
Alternate Members of the Grid Code Review Panel as at the first meeting of the Grid Code
Review Panel after Go-Active as if they had been appointed as Panel Members (and
Alternate Members) pursuant to the relevant provisions of the Constitution and Rules of the
Grid Code Review Panel incorporating amendments equivalent to the amendments to GC.4.2
and GC.4.3 designated by the Secretary of State in accordance with the provisions of the
Energy Act 2004 for the purposes of Condition C14 of The Company’s Transmission
Licence.
(b) The provisions of GC.4 of the GB Grid Code shall apply to, and in respect of, Scottish Users
from Go-Active.
GC.A.2.10 Interim GB SYS:
Where requirements are stated in, or in relation to, the GB Grid Code with reference to the
Seven Year Statement, they shall be read and construed as necessary as being with
reference to the Interim GB SYS.
GC.A.2.11 General Conditions:
The provisions of GC.4, GC.12 and GC.13.2 of the GB Grid Code shall apply to and be
complied with by Scottish Users in respect of this Appendix Part A to the General
Conditions.
GC.A.3 Cut-over
GC.A.3.1 It is anticipated that it will be appropriate for arrangements to be put in place for final transition
to BETTA in the period up to and following (for a temporary period) Go-Live, for the purposes
of:

Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024

15 of 18
 (a) managing the transition from operations under the Grid Code as in force immediately prior
to Go-Active to operations under the GB Grid Code and the BSC as in force on and after
Go-Active;
(b) managing the transition from operations under the existing Grid Code applicable to
Scottish Users as in force immediately prior to Go-Active to operations under the GB
Grid Code as in force on and after Go-Active;
(c) managing the transition of certain data from operations under the existing grid code
applicable to Scottish Users before and after Go-Active; and
(d) managing GB Grid Code systems, processes and procedures so that they operate
effectively at and from Go-Live.
GC.A.3.2 (a) The provisions of BC1 (excluding BC1.5.1, BC1.5.2 and BC1.5.3) shall apply to and be
complied with by Scottish Users and by The Company in respect of such Scottish
Users with effect from 11:00 hours on the day prior to Go-Live
(b) Notwithstanding (a) above, Scottish Users may submit data for Go-Live 3 days in
advance of Go-Live on the basis set out in the Data Validation, Consistency and
Defaulting Rules which shall apply to Scottish Users and The Company in respect of
such Scottish Users on that basis and for such purpose.
(c) The Operational Day for the purposes of any submissions by Scottish Users prior to
Go-Live under a) and b) above for the day of Go-Live shall be 00:00 hours on Go Live
to 05:00 hours on the following day.
(d) The provisions of BC2 shall apply to and be complied with by Scottish Users and by The
Company in respect of such Scottish Users with effect from 23:00 hours on the day
prior to Go-Live.
(e) The provisions of OC7.4.8 shall apply to and be complied with by Scottish Users and by
The Company in respect of such Scottish Users with effect from 11:00 hours on the day
prior to Go-Live.
(f) In order to facilitate cut-over, Scottish Users acknowledge and agree that The Company
will exchange data submitted by such Scottish Users under BC1 prior to Go-Live with
the Scottish system operators to the extent necessary to enable the cut-over.
(g) Except in the case of Reactive Power, Scottish Users should only provide Ancillary
Services from Go-Live where they have been instructed to do so by The Company. In
the case of Reactive Power, at Go-Live a Scottish User’s MVAr output will be deemed
to be the level instructed by The Company under BC2, following this Scottish Users
should operate in accordance with BC2.A.2.6 on the basis that MVAr output will be
allowed to vary with system conditions.

PART B
GC.B.1 Introduction
GC.B.1.1 This Appendix Part B to the General Conditions deals with issues arising out of the transition
associated with the approval and implementation of Grid Code Modification Proposal
GC0112 (Modifications relating to the separation of System operations and Transmission
Owner roles).
GC.B.1.2 This Appendix Part B sets out the arrangements such that:

B.1.2.1 the Post GC0112 Grid Code reflects the Transfer of the System Operator
Role;

B.1.2.2 certain amendments are made to Grid Code Related Agreements/Documents to

reflect the Transfer of the System Operator Role,

B.1.2.2 arrangements can be put in place prior to the SO Transfer Date to enable the
Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024
16 of 18
 transition of the operations with NGET under the Pre GC0112 Grid Code to
operations with The Company under the Post GC0112 Grid Code; and

B.1.2.3 each User co-operates in relation to the transition.

GC.B.1.3 The provisions of the Post GC0112 Grid Code shall be suspended until the SO Transfer
Date except for this Appendix Part B (and any related definitions within it) which will take
immediate effect on the Implementation Date for GC0112.
GC.B.1.4 In this (and solely for the purposes of this) Appendix Part B the following terms have the
following meaning:

B.1.4.1 the term “Grid Code Related Agreements/Documents" shall mean each or any of those
agreements or documents entered into under or envisaged by the Pre GC0112 Grid Code
prior to the SO Transfer Date which continue on and after the SO Transfer Date;

B.1.4.2 the term “GC0112" shall mean Grid Code Modification Proposal 0112 (Amendments
relating to the transfer of the system operator functions from NGET to NGESO);

B.1.4.3 the term “NGET” shall mean National Grid Electricity Transmission plc;

B.1.4.4 the term “NGESO” shall mean National Grid Electricity System Operator Limited;

B.1.4.5 the term “Post GC0112 Grid Code" means the version of the Grid Code as amended by
GC0112;

B.1.4.6 the term “Pre GC Grid Code” means the version of the Grid Code prior to amendment by
GC0112;

B.1.4.7 the term “SO Transfer Date” means the date on which NGET’s Transmission Licence is
transferred in part to NGESO to reflect the Transfer of the System Operator Role; and

B.1.4.8 the term “Transfer of the System Operator Role” means the the transfer, by means of the
transfer in part of NGET’s Transmission Licence, of the system operator role to NGESO.

GC.B.1.5 Without prejudice to any specific provision under this Appendix Part B as to the time within
which or the manner in which any party should perform its obligations under this Appendix
Part B, where a party is required to take any step or measure under this Appendix Part B,
such requirement shall be construed as including any obligation to:

B.1.5.1 take such step or measure as quickly as reasonably practicable; and

B.1.5.2 do such associated or ancillary things as may be necessary to complete such step
or measure as quickly as reasonably practicable.

GC.B.2 GC0112: Amendments to Existing Agreements and Documents

GC.B.2.1 Each Grid Code Related Agreement/Document in place or issued by a party in accordance
with the terms of the Pre GC0112 Grid Code shall be read and construed, with effect from the
SO Transfer Date, as if it (and any defined terms within it and the effect of it and those defined
terms) recognise and reflect the Transfer of the SO Functions and as if any references in it
to NGET in the context of its system operator role were references to NGESO/The Company
as appropriate.

Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024

17 of 18
GC.B.2.2 In the context of any Site Responsibility Schedule in existence at the SO Transfer Date and
which would require, following the Transfer of the System Operator Role, the signature of
either NGESO instead of NGET or both the signature of NGESO and NGET, NGESO and
NGET acknowledge and the Users agree that the signature of NGET on such Site
Responsibility Schedule shall be considered to be the signature of NGESO and/or NGET as
appropriate.
GC.B.3 GC0112: Transition
GC.B.3.1 Each party shall take such steps and do such things in relation to the Grid Code and the Grid
Code Related Agreements/Documentation as are within its power and as are reasonably
necessary or appropriate in order to give full and timely effect to the Transfer of the SO Role
and the transition of the operations, systems, process and procedures and the rights and
obligations relating to the Transfer of the SO Role under the Grid Code from NGET to
NGESO.
GC. B.3.2 Each party agrees that (a) all things done by NGET pursuant to the Grid Code in its system
operator role prior to the SO Transfer Date shall be deemed to have been done by NGESO
and (b) all things received by NGET pursuant to the Grid Code in its system operator role
(including but not limited to notices) shall be deemed to have been received by NGESO and
(c) all things issued by NGET (including but not limited to notices) shall be deemed to have
been issued by NGESO.
GC.B.3.3 In particular:
B.1.5.1 Users acknowledge and agree that NGET can exchange information and data
submitted by Users under the Grid Code prior to the SO Transfer Date with NGESO
to the extent necessary to enable the transition of the system operator role from NGET
to NGESO;
B.1.5.2 NGET will identify and publish as soon as practicable and in any event prior to 31
January 2019 any specific requirements (such requirements being reasonable and
recognising the timescale) on Users necessary to manage the transition of the
operations, systems, process and procedures and the rights and obligations relating
to the Transfer of the SO Role under the Grid Code from NGET to NGESO;
B.1.5.2 Users acknowledge that under the Pre GC0112 Grid Code NGET received certain
data and information from Users which is no longer “live” data or information (“Legacy
Data”) that if it was new data and information of that type would not be available to
NGET as a Relevant Transmisison Licence from the SO Transfer Date consent to
the retention of such Legacy Data by NGET where embedded in NGET systems or
models.

< END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS >

Issue 6 Revision 21 GC 04 March 2024

18 of 18
 GOVERNANCE RULES
(GR)

CONTENTS

(This contents page does not form part of the Grid Code)

Paragraph No/Title Page Number

PART A
GR.1 INTRODUCTION...........................................................................................................................2

PART B
GR.2 CODE ADMINISTRATOR .............................................................................................................2
GR.3 GRID CODE REVIEW PANEL ......................................................................................................2
GR.4 APPOINTMENT OF PANEL MEMBERS ......................................................................................4
GR.5 TERM OF OFFICE ........................................................................................................................5
GR.6 REMOVAL FROM OFFICE ..........................................................................................................5
GR.7 ALTERNATES..............................................................................................................................6
GR.8 MEETINGS ..................................................................................................................................7
GR.9 PROCEEDINGS AT MEETINGS .................................................................................................9
GR.10 QUORUM .....................................................................................................................................9
GR.11 VOTING .................................................................................................................................... 10
GR.12 PROTECTIONS FOR PANEL MEMBERS ............................................................................... 10

PART C
GR.13 GRID CODE MODIFICATION REGISTER ............................................................................... 11
GR.14 CHANGE CO-ORDINATION .................................................................................................... 11
GR.15 GRID CODE MODIFICATION PROPOSALS ........................................................................... 12
GR.16 SIGNIFICANT CODE REVIEW ................................................................................................. 15
GR.17 AUTHORITY LET MODIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 17
GR.18 GRID CODE MODIFICATION PROPOSAL EVALUATION...................................................... 19
GR.19 PANEL PROCEEDINGS ........................................................................................................... 19
GR.20 WORKGROUPS ....................................................................................................................... 21
GR.21 THE CODE ADMINISTRATOR CONSULTATION ................................................................... 25
GR.22 GRID CODE MODIFICATION REPORTS ................................................................................ 27
GR.23 URGENT MODIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................... 28
GR.24 SELF-GOVERNANCE .............................................................................................................. 33
GR.25 IMPLEMENTATION .................................................................................................................. 36
GR.26 FAST TRACK ............................................................................................................................ 37
ANNEX GR.A ELECTION OF USERS' PANEL MEMBERS ................................................................ 39
ANNEX GR.B REGULATED SECTIONS MAPPING OF EGBL ARTICLE 18 TERMS AND CONDITIONS
FOR BALANCING SERVICE PROVIDERS AND BALANCING RESPONSIBLE PARTIES TO THE GRID
CODE…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 40

Page i of 44
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
PART A

GR.1 INTRODUCTION
GR.1.1 This section of the Grid Code sets out how the Grid Code is to be amended and the
procedures set out in this section, to the extent that they are dealt with in the Code
Administration Code of Practice, are consistent with the principles contained in the Code
Administration Code of Practice. Where inconsistencies or conflicts exist between the Grid
Code and the Code Administration Code of Practice, the Grid Code shall take precedence.
GR.1.2 There is a need to bring proposed amendments to the attention of Users and others, to
discuss such proposals and to report on them to the Authority and in furtherance of this,
the Governance Rules set out the functions of a Grid Code Review Panel and
Workgroups and for consultation by the Code Administrator.
GR.1.3 For the purpose of these Governance Rules the term “User” shall mean any person who
is under any obligation or granted any rights under the Grid Code.

PART B

GR.2 CODE ADMINISTRATOR

GR.2.1 The Company shall establish and maintain a Code Administrator function, which shall
carry out the roles referred to in GR.2.2 and GR.3.2. The Company shall ensure the
functions are consistent with the Code Administration Code of Practice.

GR.2.2 The Code Administrator shall in conjunction with other code administrators, maintain,
publish, review and (where appropriate) amend from time to time the Code Administration
Code of Practice approved by the Authority provided that any amendments to the Code
Administration Code of Practice proposed by the Code Administrator are approved by
the Grid Code Review Panel prior to being raised by the Code Administrator, and any
amendments to be made to the Code Administration Code of Practice are approved by
the Authority.

GR.3 THE GRID CODE REVIEW PANEL

GR.3.1 Establishment and Composition

GR.3.1.1 The Grid Code Review Panel shall be the standing body to carry out the functions
referred to in GR.3.2

GR.3.1.2 The Grid Code Review Panel shall comprise the following members:

(a) the person appointed as the chairperson of the Grid Code Review Panel (the
“Panel Chairperson”) in accordance with GR.4.1, who shall (subject to GR.11.4) be
a voting member unless they are an employee of The Company in which case they
will be a non-voting member;

(b) the following members, appointed in accordance with GR.4.2 (a), who shall be non-
voting members:

(i) a representative of the Code Administrator;

(ii) a representative of the Authority appointed in accordance with GR.4.3;
(iii) a person representing the BSC Panel appointed in accordance with GR.4.2(d);
and
(iv) the chairperson of the GCDF;

(c) the following members who shall be voting Panel Members:

Page 2 of 44
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 (i) a representative of The Company appointed in accordance with
GR.4.2(c);
(ii) two representatives of the Network Operators;
(iii) a representative of Suppliers;
(iv) a representative of the Onshore Transmission Licensees;
(v) a representative of the Offshore Transmission Licensees;
(vi) four representatives of the Generators;
(vii) the Consumer Representative, appointed in accordance with GR.4.2(b);
(viii) the person appointed (if the Authority so decides) by the Authority in
accordance with GR.4.4;

(d) a secretary (the “Panel Secretary”), who shall be a person appointed and provided by
the Code Administrator to assist the Grid Code Review Panel and who shall be
responsible for the administration of the Grid Code Review Panel and Grid Code
Modification Proposals. The Panel Secretary will be a non-voting member of the
Grid Code Review Panel.

GR.3.2 Functions of the Grid Code Review Panel and the Code Administrator’s Role

(a) The Grid Code Review Panel shall have the functions assigned to it in these
Governance Rules.

(b) Without prejudice to GR.3.2(a) and to the further provisions of these Governance
Rules, the Grid Code Review Panel shall endeavour at all times to operate:

(i) in an efficient, economical and expeditious manner, taking account of the

complexity, importance and urgency of particular Grid Code Modification
Proposals; and
(ii) with a view to ensuring that the Grid Code facilitates achievement of the Grid
Code Objectives.

(c) The Company shall be responsible for implementing or supervising the

implementation of Approved Modifications and Approved Grid Code Self
Governance Proposals and Approved Grid Code Fast Track Proposals in
accordance with the provisions of the Grid Code which shall reflect the production of
the revised Grid Code. The Code Administrator and The Company shall be
responsible for implementing and supervising the implementation of any amendments
to their respective systems and processes necessary for the implementation of the
Approved Modification and the Approved Grid Code Self-Governance Proposals
provided there is no successful appeal and the Approved Grid Code Fast Track
Proposals provided no objections are received in accordance with GR.26. However,
it will not include the implementation of Users’ systems and processes. The Code
Administrator will carry out its role in an efficient, economical and expeditious manner
and (subject to any extension granted by the Authority where the Code Administrator
has applied for one in accordance with GR.3.2(d) or (e) in accordance with the
Implementation Date.

(d) Subject to notifying Users, the Code Administrator will, with the Authority’s
approval, apply to the Authority for a revision or revisions to the Implementation Date
where the Code Administrator becomes aware of any circumstances which is likely
to mean that the Implementation Date is unachievable, which shall include as a result
of a Legal Challenge, at any point following the approval of the Grid Code
Modification Proposal.

(e) In the event that the Authority’s decision to approve or not to approve a Grid Code
Modification Proposal is subject of Legal Challenge (and the party raising such
Legal Challenge has received from the relevant authority the necessary permission to
proceed) then the Code Administrator will, with the Authority’s approval, apply to
the Authority for a revision or revisions to the Proposed Implementation Date in the
Grid Code Modification Report in respect of such Grid Code Modification Proposal
as necessary such that if such Grid Code Modification Proposal were to be approved
following such Legal Challenge the Proposed Implementation Date would be
achievable.
Page 3 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 (f) Prior to making any request to the Authority for any revision pursuant to
GR.3.2(d) (including where it is necessary as a result of a Legal Challenge) or
GR.3.2(e) the Code Administrator shall consult on the revision with Users and
such other person who may properly be considered to have an appropriate
interest in it in accordance with GR.21.2 and GR.21.8. The request to the
Authority shall contain copies of (and a summary of) all written representations
or objections made by consultees during the consultation period.

GR.3.3 Duties of Panel Members

(a) A person appointed as a Panel Member, or an Alternate Member, by Users under

GR.3.1 or GR.7.2, by the Authority under GR.4.3 and the person appointed as Panel
Chairperson under GR.4.1, and each of their alternates when acting in that capacity:

(i) shall act impartially and in accordance with the requirements of the Grid
Code; and
(ii) shall not be representative of, and shall act without undue regard to the
particular interests of the persons or body of persons by whom they were
appointed as Panel Member and any Related Person from time to time.

(b) Such a person shall not be appointed as a Panel Member or an Alternate Member
(as the case may be) unless they shall have first:

(i) confirmed in writing to the Code Administrator for the benefit of all Users that
they agree to act as a Panel Member or Alternate Member in accordance
with the Grid Code and acknowledges the requirements of GR.3.3 (a) and
GR.3.3(c);
(ii) where that person is employed, provided to the Panel Secretary a letter from
their employer agreeing that they may act as Panel Member or Alternate
Member, and that the requirement in GR.3.3(a)(ii) shall prevail over their
duties as an employee.

(c) A Panel Member or Alternate Member shall, at the time of appointment and upon any
change in such interests, disclose (in writing) to the Panel Secretary any such interests
(in relation to the Grid Code) as are referred to in GR.3.3(a)(ii).

(d) Upon a change in employment of a Panel Member or Alternate Member, they shall
so notify the Panel Secretary and shall endeavour to obtain from their new employer
and provide to the Panel Secretary a letter in the terms required in GR.3.3(b)(ii); and
they shall be removed from office if they do not do so within a period of sixty (60) days
after such change in employment.

GR.4 APPOINTMENT OF PANEL MEMBERS

GR.4.1 Panel Chairperson

(a) The Panel Chairperson shall be a person appointed (or re-appointed) by The
Company, having particular regard to the views of the Grid Code Review Panel, and
shall act independently of The Company.

(b) A person shall be appointed or re-appointed as the Panel Chairperson where the
Authority has approved such appointment or reappointment and The Company has
given notice to the Panel Secretary of such appointment, with effect from the date of
such notice or (if later) with effect from the date specified in such notice.

GR.4.2 Other Panel Members:

(a) the Network Operators, Suppliers, Onshore Transmission Licensees, Offshore

Transmission Licensees and Generators may appoint Panel Members by election
in accordance with Annex GR.A.

Page 4 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 (b) The Citizens Advice or the Citizens Advice Scotland may appoint one person as a
Panel Member representing customers by giving notice of such appointment to the
Panel Secretary, and may remove and re-appoint by notice.

(c) The Company shall appoint the The Company representative referred to at
GR.3.1.2(c)(i) and shall give notice of the identity of such person to the Panel
Secretary, and may remove and re-appoint by notice to the Panel Secretary.

(d) The BSC Panel shall appoint a representative to be the member of the Grid Code
Review Panel referred to at GR.3.1.2(c) (iii) and shall give notice of the identity of such
person to the Panel Secretary, and may remove and re-appoint by notice to the Panel
Secretary.

GR.4.3. The Authority shall from time to time notify the Panel Secretary of the identity of the
Authority representative referred to at GR.3.1.2(b)(ii).

GR.4.4 Appointment of Further Member:

(a) If in the opinion of the Authority there is a class or category of person (whether or not
a User) who have interests in respect of the Grid Code but whose interests:

(i) are not reflected in the composition of Panel Members for the time being
appointed; but
(ii) would be so reflected if a particular person was appointed as an additional
Panel Member, then the Authority may at any time appoint (or re-appoint)
that person as a Panel Member by giving notice of such appointment to the
Panel Secretary but in no event shall the Authority be able to appoint more
than one person so that there could be more than one such Panel Member.

(b) A person appointed as a Panel Member pursuant to this GR.4.4 shall remain
appointed, subject to GR.5 and GR.6, notwithstanding that the conditions by virtue of
which they were appointed (for example that the interests they reflect are otherwise
reflected) may cease to be satisfied.

GR.4.5 Natural Person

No person other than an individual shall be appointed a Panel Member or their alternate.

GR.5 TERM OF OFFICE

The term of office of a Panel Member, the Panel Chairperson and Alternate Members
shall be a period expiring on 31 December every second year. A Panel Member, the Panel
Chairperson and Alternate Member shall be eligible for reappointment on expiry of their
term of office.

GR.6 REMOVAL FROM OFFICE

GR.6.1 A person shall cease to hold office as the Panel Chairperson, a Panel Member or an
Alternate Member:

(a) upon expiry of their term of office unless re-appointed;

(b) if they:

(i) resign from office by notice delivered to the Panel Secretary;

(ii) become bankrupt or makes any arrangement or composition with their creditors
generally;
(iii) are or may be suffering from a mental disorder and either are admitted to hospital in
pursuance of an application under the Mental Health Act 1983 or the Mental Health
(Scotland) Act 1960 or an order is made by a court having jurisdiction in matters
concerning mental disorder for their detention or for the appointment of a receiver,
curator bonis or other person with respect to their property or affairs;
(iv) become prohibited by law from being a director of a company under the
Companies Act 1985;

Page 5 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 (v) die; or
(vi) are convicted on an indictable offence; or

(c) as provided for in GR.3.3(d);

(d) if the Grid Code Review Panel resolves (and the Authority does not veto such resolution
by notice in writing to the Panel Secretary within fifteen (15) Business Days) that they
should cease to hold office on grounds of their serious misconduct;

(e) if the Grid Code Review Panel resolves (and the Authority does not veto such resolution
by notice in writing to the Panel Secretary within fifteen (15) Business Days) that they
should cease to hold office due to a change in employer notwithstanding compliance with
GR.3.3(d).

GR.6.2 A Grid Code Review Panel resolution under GR.6.1(d) or (e) shall, notwithstanding any other
paragraph, require the vote in favour of at least all Panel Members less one (other than the
Panel Member or Alternate Member who is the subject of such resolution) and for these
purposes an abstention shall count as a vote cast in favour of the resolution. A copy of any such
resolution shall forthwith be sent to the Authority by the Panel Secretary.

GR.6.3 A person shall not qualify for appointment as a Panel Member or Alternate Member if at the
time of the proposed appointment they would be required by the above to cease to hold that
office.

GR.6.4 The Panel Secretary shall give prompt notice to The Company, all Panel Members, all Users
and the Authority of the appointment or re-appointment of any Panel Member or Alternate
Member or of any Panel Member or Alternate Member ceasing to hold office and publication
on the Website and (where relevant details are supplied to the Panel Secretary) despatch by
electronic mail shall fulfil this obligation.

GR.7 ALTERNATES

GR.7.1 Alternate: Panel Chairperson

The Panel Chairperson shall preside at every meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel at
which they are present. If they are unable to be present at a meeting, they may appoint an
alternate (who shall be a senior employee of The Company) to act as the Panel Chairperson,
who may or may not be a Panel Member. If neither the Panel Chairperson nor their alternate
is present at the meeting within half an hour of the time appointed for holding the meeting, the
Panel Members present may appoint one of their number to be the chairperson of the meeting.

GR.7.2 Alternate(s): other Panel Members

(a) At the same time that the parties entitled to vote in the relevant election appoint Elected
Panel Members under GR.4.2(a), they shall appoint the following Alternate Members:
(i) one alternate representative of the Suppliers;
(ii) one alternate representative of the Onshore Transmission Licensees;
(iii) one alternate representative of the Offshore Transmission Licensees; and
(iv) two alternate representatives of the Generators.

In the event that the election process fails to appoint an Alternate Member for any of the
Elected Panel Members, each Elected Panel Member shall be entitled (but not obligated)
to each at their own discretion nominate their own Alternate Member.

(b) Any Panel Member that is not an Elected Panel Member shall be entitled (but not
obligated) to each at their own discretion nominate their own Alternate Member.

(c) A Panel Member shall give notice to the Panel Secretary in the event it will be represented
by an Alternate Member for any one Grid Code Review Panel meeting.

(d) Where a Panel Member has nominated an Alternate Member in accordance with
GR.7.2(a) or (b), they may remove such Alternate Member, by giving notice of such
removal, and any nomination of a different Alternate Member, to the Panel Secretary. A
Page 6 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 Panel Member may not choose as their Alternate Member: any party who is already
acting as an Alternate Member for another Panel Member; or another Panel Member.

(e) All information to be sent by the Panel Secretary to Panel Members pursuant to these
Governance Rules shall also be sent by the Panel Secretary to each Alternate Member by
electronic mail (where relevant details shall have been provided by each Alternate Member).

GR.7.3 Alternates: General Provisions

(a) The appointment or removal by a Panel Member of an Alternate Member shall be

effective from the time when such notice is given to the Panel Secretary or (if later)
the time specified in such notice.

(b) The Panel Secretary shall promptly notify all Panel Members and Users of
appointment or removal by any Panel Member of any alternate and publication on the
Website and (where relevant details have been provided to the Panel Secretary)
despatch by electronic mail shall fulfil this obligation.

GR.7.4 Alternates: Rights, Cessation and References

(a) Where the Panel Chairperson or a Panel Member has appointed an alternate:

(i) the alternate shall be entitled:

i. unless the appointing Panel Member shall otherwise notify the Panel
Secretary, to receive notices of meetings of the Grid Code Review
Panel;
ii. to attend, speak and vote at any meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel
at which the Panel Member by whom they were appointed is not present,
and at such meeting to exercise and discharge all of the functions, duties
and powers of such Panel Member;

(ii) the Alternate Member shall have the same voting rights the Panel Member
in whose place they are attending;

(iii) GR.8, GR.9, GR.10, GR.11 and GR.12 shall apply to the Alternate Member
as if they were the appointing Panel Member and a reference to a Panel
Member elsewhere in the Grid Code shall, unless the context otherwise
requires, include their duly appointed Alternate Member.

(iv) for the avoidance of doubt, the appointing Panel Member shall not enjoy any
of the rights transferred to the Alternate Member at any meeting at which, or
in relation to any matter on which, the Alternate Member acts on their behalf.

(b) A person appointed as an Alternate Member shall automatically cease to be such

Alternate Member:

(i) if the appointing Panel Member ceases to be a Panel Member;

(ii) if any of the circumstances in GR.6.1(b) applies in relation to such person, but,
in the case of a person elected as an Alternate Member, they shall continue
to be an Alternate Member available for appointment under GR.7.2.

GR.8 MEETINGS

GR.8.1 Meetings of the Grid Code Review Panel shall be held at regular intervals and at least
every 2 months at such time and such place as the Grid Code Review Panel shall decide.

GR.8.2 A regular meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel may be cancelled if:

(a) the Panel Chairperson considers, having due regard to the lack of business in the
agenda, that there is insufficient business for the Grid Code Review Panel to conduct
and requests the Panel Secretary to cancel the meeting;

(b) the Panel Secretary notifies all Panel Members, not less than five (5) Business Days
Page 7 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 before the date for which the meeting is to be convened, of the proposal to cancel the
meeting; and

(c) by the time three (3) Business Days before the date for which the meeting is or
is to be convened, no Panel Member has notified the Panel Secretary that they object
to such cancellation.

GR.8.3 If any Panel Member wishes, acting reasonably, to hold a special meeting (in addition to
regular meetings under GR.8.1) of the Grid Code Review Panel:

(a) they shall request the Panel Secretary to convene such a meeting and inform the
Panel Secretary of the matters to be discussed at the meeting;

(b) the Panel Secretary shall promptly convene the special meeting for a day as soon as
practicable but not less than five (5) Business Days after such request.

GR.8.4 Any meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel shall be convened by the Panel Secretary
by notice (which will be given by electronic mail if the relevant details are supplied to the
Panel Secretary) to each Panel Member (and to the Authority):

(a) setting out the date, time and place of the meeting and (unless the Grid Code Review
Panel has otherwise decided) given at least five (5) Business Days before the date of
the meeting;

(b) accompanied by an agenda of the matters for consideration at the meeting and any
supporting papers available to the Panel Secretary at the time the notice is given (and
the Panel Secretary shall circulate to Panel Members any late papers as and when
they are received by them).

GR.8.5 The Panel Secretary shall send a copy of the notice convening a meeting of the Grid Code
Review Panel, and the agenda and papers accompanying the notice, to the Panel
Members and Alternate Members, and publication on the Website and despatch by
electronic mail (if the relevant details are supplied to the Panel Secretary) shall fulfil this
obligation.

GR.8.6 Any Panel Member (or, at the Panel Member’s request, the Panel Secretary) may notify
matters for consideration at a meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel in addition to those
notified by the Panel Secretary under GR.8.4 by notice to all Panel Members and persons
entitled to receive notice under GR.8.5, not less than three (3) Business Days before the
date of the meeting.

GR.8.7 The proceedings of a meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel shall not be invalidated by
the accidental omission to give or send notice of the meeting or a copy thereof or any of
the accompanying agenda or papers to, or failure to receive the same by, any person
entitled to receive such notice, copy, agenda or paper.

GR.8.8 A meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel may consist of a conference between Panel
Members who are not all in one place but who are able (by telephone or otherwise) to
speak to each of the others and to be heard by each of the others simultaneously.

GR.8.9 With the consent of all Panel Members (whether obtained before, at or after any such
meeting) the requirements of this GR.8 as to the manner in and notice on which a meeting
of the Grid Code Review Panel is convened may be waived or modified provided that no
meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel shall be held unless notice of the meeting and its
agenda has been sent to the persons entitled to receive the same under GR.8.5 at least 24
hours before the time of the meeting.

GR.8.10 Subject to GR.8.11, no matter shall be resolved at a meeting of the Grid Code Review
Panel unless such matter was contained in the agenda accompanying the Panel
Secretary’s notice under GR.8.4 or was notified in accordance with GR.8.6.

GR.8.11 Where:

Page 8 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 (a) any matter (not contained in the agenda and not notified pursuant to GR.8.4 and
GR.8.6) is put before a meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel, and

(b) in the opinion of the Grid Code Review Panel it is necessary (in view of the urgency of the
matter) that the Grid Code Review Panel resolve upon such matter at the meeting, the
Grid Code Review Panel may so resolve upon such matter, and the Grid Code Review
Panel shall also determine at such meeting whether the decision of the Grid Code Review
Panel in relation to such matter should stand until the following meeting of the Grid Code
Review Panel, in which case (at such following meeting) the decision shall be reviewed
and confirmed or (but not with effect earlier than that meeting, and only so far as the
consequences of such revocation do not make implementation of the Grid Code or
compliance by Users with it impracticable) revoked.

GR.9 PROCEEDINGS AT MEETINGS

GR.9.1 Subject as provided in the Grid Code, the Grid Code Review Panel may regulate the
conduct of and adjourn and reconvene its meetings as it sees fit.

GR.9.2 Meetings of the Grid Code Review Panel shall be open to attendance by a representative
of any User (including any Authorised Electricity Operator; The Company or a
Materially Affected Party), the Citizens Advice or the Citizens Advice Scotland and
any person invited by the Panel Chairperson and/or any other Panel Member.

GR.9.3 The Panel Chairperson and any other Panel Member may invite any person invited by
them under GR.9.2, and/or any attending representative of a User, to speak at the meeting
(but such person shall have no vote).

GR.9.4 As soon as practicable after each meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel, the Panel
Secretary shall prepare and send (by electronic mail or otherwise) to Panel Members the
minutes of such meeting, which shall be (subject to GR.9.5) approved (or amended and
approved) at the next meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel after they were so sent,
and when approved (excluding any matter which the Grid Code Review Panel decided
was not appropriate for such publication) shall be placed on the Website.

GR.9.5 If, following the circulation of minutes (as referred to in GR.9.4), the meeting of the Grid
Code Review Panel at which they were to be approved is cancelled pursuant to GR.8.2,
such minutes (including any proposed changes thereto which have already been received)
shall be recirculated with the notification of the cancellation of the meeting of the Grid Code
Review Panel. Panel Members shall confirm their approval of such minutes to the Panel
Secretary (by electronic mail) no later than five (5) Business Days following such minutes
being re-circulated. If no suggested amendments are received within such five (5)
Business Days period, the minutes will be deemed to have been approved. If the minutes
are approved, or deemed to have been approved, (excluding any matter which the Grid
Code Review Panel decided was not appropriate for such publication) they shall be placed
on the Website. If suggested amendments are received within such five (5) Business
Days period, the minutes shall remain unapproved and the process for approval (or
amendment and approval) of such minutes at the next meeting of the Grid Code Review
Panel, as described in GR.9.4, shall be followed.

GR.10 QUORUM

GR.10.1 No business shall be transacted at any meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel unless a
quorum is present throughout the meeting.

GR.10.2 Subject to GR.10.4, a quorum shall be 6 Panel Members who have a vote present (subject
to GR.8.8) in person or by their alternates, of whom at least one shall be appointed by The
Company. Where a Panel Member is represented by an Alternate Member, that
Alternate Member cannot represent any other Panel Member at the same meeting.

GR.10.3 If within half an hour after the time for which the meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel
has been convened a quorum is not present (and provided the Panel Secretary has not
been notified by Panel Members that they have been delayed and are expected to arrive
within a reasonable time):

Page 9 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 (a) the meeting shall be adjourned to the same day in the following week (or, if that day is
not a Business Day the next Business Day following such day) at the same time;
(b) the Panel Secretary shall give notice of the adjourned meeting as far as practicable in
accordance with GR.8.

GR.10.4 If at the adjourned meeting there is not a quorum present within half an hour after the time
for which the meeting was convened, those present shall be a quorum.

GR.11 VOTING

GR.11.1 At any meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel any matter to be decided which shall
include the Grid Code Review Panel Recommendation Vote shall be put to a vote of
those Panel Members entitled to vote in accordance with these Governance Rules upon
the request of the Panel Chairperson or any Panel Member.

GR.11.2 Subject to GR.11.4, in deciding any matter at any meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel
each Panel Member other than the Panel Chairperson shall cast one vote.

GR.11.3 Except as otherwise expressly provided in the Grid Code, and in particular GR.6.2, any
matter to be decided at any meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel shall be decided by
simple majority of the votes cast at the meeting (an abstention shall not be counted as a
cast vote).

GR11.4 The Panel Chairperson shall not cast a vote as a Panel Member but shall have a casting
vote on any matter where votes are otherwise cast equally in favour of and against the
relevant motion. Where the vote is in respect of a Grid Code Modification Proposal the
Panel Chairperson may only use such casting vote to vote against such Grid Code
Modification Proposal. The Panel Chairperson will have a free vote in respect of any
other vote. Where any person other than the actual Panel Chairperson is acting as
chairperson they shall not have a casting vote.

GR.11.5 Any resolution in writing signed by or on behalf of all Panel Members shall be valid and
effectual as if it had been passed at a duly convened and quorate meeting of the Grid Code
Review Panel. Such a resolution may consist of several instruments in like form signed by
or on behalf of one or more Panel Members.

GR.12 PROTECTIONS FOR PANEL MEMBERS

GR.12.1 Subject to GR.12.2 all CUSC Parties shall jointly and severally indemnify and keep
indemnified each Panel Member, the Panel Secretary and each member of a Workgroup
(“Indemnified Persons”) in respect of all costs (including legal costs), expenses, damages
and other liabilities properly incurred or suffered by such Indemnified Persons when acting
in or in connection with their office under the Grid Code, or in what they in good faith
believe to be the proper exercise and discharge of the powers, duties, functions and
discretions of that office in accordance with the Grid Code, and all claims, demands and
proceedings in connection therewith other than any such costs, expenses, damages or
other liabilities incurred or suffered as a result of the wilful default or bad faith of such
Indemnified Person.

GR.12.2 The indemnity provided in GR.12.1 shall not extend to costs and expenses incurred in the
ordinary conduct of being a Panel Member or Panel Secretary, or member of a
Workgroup including, without limitation, accommodation costs and travel costs or any
remuneration for their services to the Grid Code Review Panel or Workgroup.

GR.12.3 The Users agree that no Indemnified Person shall be liable for anything done when acting
properly in or in connection with their office under the Grid Code, or anything done in what
they in good faith believe to be the proper exercise and discharge of the powers, duties,
functions and discretions of that office in accordance with the Grid Code. Each CUSC
Party hereby irrevocably and unconditionally waives any such liability of any Indemnified
Person and any rights, remedies and claims against any Indemnified Person in respect
thereof.

Page 10 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
GR.12.4 Without prejudice to GR.12.2, nothing in GR.12.3 shall exclude or limit the liability of an
Indemnified Person for death or personal injury resulting from the negligence of such
Indemnified Person.

PART C

GR.13 GRID CODE MODIFICATION REGISTER

GR.13.1 The Code Administrator shall establish and maintain a register (“Grid Code Modification
Register”) in a form as may be agreed with the Authority from time to time, which shall
record the matters set out in GR.13.3.

GR.13.2 The purpose of the Grid Code Modification Register shall be to assist the Grid Code
Review Panel and to enable the Grid Code Review Panel, Users and any other persons
who may be interested to be reasonably informed of the progress of Grid Code
Modification Proposals and Approved Modifications from time to time.

GR.13.3 The Grid Code Modification Register shall record in respect of current outstanding Grid
Code Review Panel business:

(a) details of each Grid Code Modification Proposal (including the name of the
Proposer, the date of the Grid Code Modification Proposal and a brief description
of the Grid Code Modification Proposal);

(b) whether such Grid Code Modification Proposal is an Urgent Modification;

(c) the current status and progress of each Grid Code Modification Proposal, if
appropriate the anticipated date for reporting to the Authority in respect thereof, and
whether it has been withdrawn, rejected or implemented for a period of three (3) months
after such withdrawal, rejection or implementation or such longer period as the
Authority may determine;

(d) the current status and progress of each Approved Modification, each Approved Grid
Code Self-Governance Proposal, and each Approved Fast Track Proposal; and

(e) such other matters as the Grid Code Review Panel may consider appropriate from
time to time to achieve the purpose of GR.13.2.

GR.13.4 The Grid Code Modification Register (as updated from time to time and indicating the
revisions since the previous issue) shall be published on the Website or (in the absence,
for whatever reason, of the Website) in such other manner and with such frequency (being
not less than once per month) as the Code Administrator may decide in order to bring it
to the attention of the Grid Code Review Panel, Users and other persons who may be
interested.

GR.14 CHANGE CO-ORDINATION

GR.14.1 The Code Administrator shall establish (and, where appropriate, revise from time to time)
joint working arrangements for change co-ordination with each Core Industry Document
Owner and with the STC Modification Panel to facilitate the identification, co-ordination,
making and implementation of change to Core Industry Documents and the STC
consequent on a Grid Code Modification Proposal, including, but not limited to, changes
that are appropriate in order to avoid conflict or inconsistency as between the Grid Code
and any Core Industry Document and the STC, in a full and timely manner.

GR.14.2 The working arrangements referred to in GR.14.1 shall be such as to enable the
consideration, development and evaluation of Grid Code Modification Proposals, and
the implementation of Approved Modifications, to proceed in a full and timely manner
and enable changes to Core Industry Documents and the STC consequent on an
amendment to be made and given effect wherever possible (subject to any necessary
consent of the Authority) at the same time as such Grid Code Modification Proposal is
made and given effect.
Page 11 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
GR.15 GRID CODE MODIFICATION PROPOSALS

GR.15.1 A proposal to modify the Grid Code may be made:

(a) by any User; any Authorised Electricity Operator liable to be materially affected by
such a proposal; the Citizens Advice or the Citizens Advice Scotland;

(b) under GR.25.5, by the Grid Code Review Panel; or

(c) by the Authority:

(i) following publication of its Significant Code Review conclusions; or

(ii) under GR.17; or
(iii) in order to comply with or implement the Electricity Regulation and/or any
relevant Legally Binding Decisions of the European Commission and/or
the Agency.

GR.15.2 A Standard Modification shall follow the procedure set out in GR.18 to GR.22.

GR.15.3 A Grid Code Modification Proposal shall be submitted in writing to the Panel Secretary and,
subject to the provisions of GR.15.4 below, shall contain the following information in relation to
such proposal:

(a) the name of the Proposer;

(b) the name of the representative of the Proposer who shall represent the Proposer in
person for the purposes of this GR.15;

(c) a description (in reasonable but not excessive detail) of the issue or defect which the
proposed modification seeks to address;

(d) a description (in reasonable but not excessive detail) of the proposed modification and
of its nature and purpose;

(e) where possible, an indication of those parts of the Grid Code which would require
amendment in order to give effect to (and/or would otherwise be affected by) the
proposed modification and an indication of the nature of those amendments or effects;

(f) the reasons why the Proposer believes that the proposed modification would better
facilitate achievement of the Grid Code Objectives as compared with the current
version of the Grid Code together with background information in support thereof;

(g) the reasoned opinion of the Proposer as to why the proposed modification should not
fall within a current Significant Code Review, whether the proposed modification
should be treated as a Self-Governance Modification or whether the proposed
modification fails to meet the Self- Governance Criteria and as a result should
proceed along the Standard Modification route;

(h) the reasoned opinion of the Proposer as to whether that impact is likely to be material
and if so an assessment of the quantifiable impact of the proposed modification on
greenhouse gas emissions, to be conducted in accordance with such current guidance
on the treatment of carbon costs and evaluation of the greenhouse gas emissions as
may be issued by the Authority from time to time;

(i) where possible, an indication of the impact of the proposed modification on Core
Industry Documents and the STC;

(j) where possible, an indication of the impact of the proposed modification on relevant
computer systems and processes used by Users.

Page 12 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 (k) whether or not (and to the extent) that in the proposer’s view the Grid Code
Modification Proposal constitutes an amendment to the Regulated Sections of the
Grid Code.

GR.15.4 The Proposer of a Grid Code Fast Track Proposal is not required to provide the items
referenced at GR.15.3 (f) – (j) inclusive, unless either:

(a) the Grid Code Review Panel has, pursuant to GR.26.5 or GR.26.6, not agreed
unanimously that the Grid Code Fast Track Proposal meets the Fast Track Criteria,
or has not unanimously approved the Grid Code Fast Track Proposal; or

(b) there has been an objection to the Approved Fast Track Proposal pursuant to
GR.26.12, whereupon the Proposer shall be entitled to provide the additional
information required pursuant to GR.15.3 for a Grid Code Modification Proposal
within 28 days of the Panel Secretary’s request. Where the Proposer fails to provide
the additional information in accordance with such timescales, the Panel Secretary
may reject such proposal in accordance with GR.15.5.

GR.15.5 If a proposal fails in any material respect to provide the information in GR.15.3 (excluding (e), (i)
and (j) thereof), the Panel Secretary may reject such proposal provided that:

(a) the Panel Secretary shall furnish the Proposer with the reasons for such rejection;

(b) the Panel Secretary shall report such rejection to the Grid Code Review Panel at
the next Grid Code Review Panel meeting, with details of the reasons;

(c) if the Grid Code Review Panel decides or the Authority directs to reverse the Panel
Secretary’s decision to refuse the submission, the Panel Secretary shall notify the
Proposer accordingly and the proposal shall be dealt with in accordance with these
Governance Rules;

(d) nothing in these Governance Rules shall prevent a Proposer from submitting a
revised proposal in compliance with the requirements of GR.15.3 in respect of the same
subject-matter.

GR.15.6 Without prejudice to the development of a Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s)
pursuant to GR.20.13 and GR.20.18, the Grid Code Review Panel shall direct in the case of (a),
and may direct in the case of (b), the Panel Secretary to reject a proposal pursuant to GR.15,
other than a proposal submitted by The Company pursuant to a direction issued by the Authority
following a Significant Code Review in accordance with GR.16.4, or an Authority Led
modification, if and to the extent that such proposal has, in the opinion of the Grid Code Review
Panel, substantially the same effect as:

(a) a Pending Grid Code Modification Proposal; or

(b) a Rejected Grid Code Modification Proposal, where such proposal is made at any
time within two (2) months after the decision of the Authority not to direct The
Company to modify the Grid Code pursuant to the Transmission Licence in the
manner set out in such Grid Code Modification Proposal, and the Panel Secretary
shall notify the Proposer accordingly.

GR.15.7 Promptly upon receipt of a Grid Code Modification Proposal, the Panel Secretary
shall:

(a) allocate a unique reference number to the Grid Code Modification Proposal;

(b) enter details of the Grid Code Modification Proposal on the Grid Code
Modification Register;

(c) reserve the right to modify the title or summary of the Grid Code Modification
Proposal to better reflect the content or intent of the proposal. If such changes are
made these shall be agreed by the Proposer, or where this cannot be achieved by the
Page 13 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 Grid Code Review Panel at their next meeting; and

(d) note whether in the proposer’s view the Grid Code Modification Proposal
constitutes an amendment to the Regulated Sections of the Grid Code.

GR.15.8 Subject to GR.8.6 and GR.26, where the Grid Code Modification Proposal is received
more than ten (10) Business Days prior to the next Grid Code Review Panel meeting,
the Panel Secretary shall place the Grid Code Modification Proposal on the agenda of
the next Grid Code Review Panel meeting and otherwise shall place it on the agenda of
the next succeeding Grid Code Review Panel meeting.

GR.15.9 It shall be a condition to the right to make a proposal to modify the Grid Code under this
GR.15 that the Proposer:

(a) grants a non-exclusive royalty free licence to all Users who request the same covering
all present and future rights, IPRs and moral rights it may have in such proposal (as
regards use or application in Great Britain); and

(b) warrants that, to the best of its knowledge, information and belief, no other person has
asserted to the Proposer that such person has any IPRs or normal rights or rights of
confidence in such proposal, and, in making a proposal, a Proposer which is a Grid
Code Party shall be deemed to have granted the licence and given the warranty in (a)
and (b) above.

(c) The provisions of this GR.15.9 shall apply to any WG Consultation Alternative
Request, and also to a Relevant Party supporting a Grid Code Modification
Proposal in place of the original Proposer in accordance with GR.15.10 (a) for these
purposes the term Proposer shall include any such Relevant Party or a person
making such a WG Consultation Alternative Request.

GR.15.10 Subject to GR.16.1, which deals with the withdrawal of a Grid Code Modification
Proposal made pursuant to a direction following a Significant Code Review, a Proposer
may withdraw their support for a Standard Modification by notice to the Panel Secretary
at any time prior to the Grid Code Review Panel Recommendation Vote undertaken in
relation to that Standard Modification pursuant to GR.22.4, and a Proposer may withdraw
their support for a Grid Code Modification Proposal that meets the Self-Governance
Criteria by notice to the Panel Secretary at any time prior to the Grid Code Review Panel
Self-Governance Vote undertaken in relation to that Grid Code Modification Proposal
pursuant to GR.24.9, and a Proposer may withdraw their support for a Grid Code Fast
Track Proposal by notice to the Panel Secretary at any time prior to the Panel’s vote on
whether to approve the Grid Code Fast Track Proposal pursuant to GR.26 in which case
the Panel Secretary shall forthwith:

(a) notify those parties specified in GR.15.1 as relevant in relation to the Grid Code
Modification Proposal in question (a “Relevant Party”) that they have been notified
of the withdrawal of support by the Proposer by publication on the Website and (where
relevant details are supplied) by electronic mail. A Relevant Party may within five (5)
Business Days notify the Panel Secretary that it is prepared to support the Grid Code
Modification Proposal in place of the original Proposer. If such notice is received,
the name of such Relevant Party shall replace that of the original Proposer as the
Proposer, and the Grid Code Modification Proposal shall continue. If more than one
notice is received, the first received shall be utilised;

(b) if no notice of support is received under (a), the matter shall be discussed at the next
Grid Code Review Panel meeting. If the Grid Code Review Panel so agrees, it may
notify Relevant Parties that the Grid Code Modification Proposal is to be withdrawn,
and a further period of five (5) Business Days shall be given for support to be indicated
by way of notice;

(c) if no notice of support is received under (a) or (b), the Grid Code Modification
Proposal shall be marked as withdrawn on the Grid Code Modification Register;
Code Administrator as Critical Friend.
Page 14 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
GR.15.11 The Code Administrator shall provide assistance insofar as is reasonably practicable and
on reasonable request to parties with an interest in the Grid Code Modification Proposal
process that request it in relation to the Grid Code, as provided for in the Code
Administration Code of Practice, including, but not limited to, assistance with:

(a) Drafting a Grid Code Modification Proposal;

(b) Understanding the operation of the Grid Code;

(c) Their involvement in, and representation during, the Grid Code Modification
Proposal process (including but not limited to Grid Code Review Panel, and/or
Workgroup meetings) as required or as described in the Code Administration Code
of Practice;

(d) Helping the Proposer and Workgroup by producing draft legal text once a clear
solution has been developed to support the discussion and understanding of a Grid
Code Modification Proposal; and

(e) accessing information relating to Grid Code Modification Proposals and/or

Approved Modifications.

GR.16 SIGNIFICANT CODE REVIEW

GR.16.1 If any party specified under GR.15.1 (other than the Authority) makes a Grid Code
Modification Proposal during a Significant Code Review Phase, unless exempted by
the Authority or unless GR.16.4(b) applies, the Grid Code Review Panel shall assess
whether the Grid Code Modification Proposal falls within the scope of a Significant
Code Review and the applicability of the exceptions set out in GR.16.4 and shall notify the
Authority of its assessment, its reasons for that assessment and any representations
received in relation to it as soon as practicable.

GR.16.2 The Grid Code Review Panel shall proceed with the Grid Code Modification Proposal
made during a Significant Code Review Phase in accordance with GR.18
(notwithstanding any consultation undertaken pursuant to GR.16.5 and its outcome),
unless directed otherwise by the Authority pursuant to GR.16.3.

GR.16.3 Subject to GR.16.4, the Authority may at any time direct that a Grid Code Modification
Proposal made during a Significant Code Review Phase falls within the scope of a
Significant Code Review and must not be made during the Significant Code Review
Phase. If so directed, the Grid Code Review Panel will not proceed with that Grid Code
Modification Proposal, and the Proposer shall decide whether the Grid Code
Modification Proposal shall be withdrawn or suspended until the end of the Significant
Code Review Phase. If the Proposer fails to indicate its decision whether to withdraw or
suspend the Grid Code Modification Proposal within twenty-eight (28) days of the
Authority’s direction, it shall be deemed to be suspended. If the Grid Code Modification
Proposal is suspended, it shall be open to the Proposer at the end of the Significant
Code Review Phase to indicate to the Grid Code Review Panel that it wishes that Grid
Code Modification Proposal to proceed, and it shall be considered and taken forward in
the manner decided upon by the Grid Code Review Panel at the next meeting, and it is
open to the Grid Code Review Panel to take into account any work previously undertaken
in respect of that Grid Code Modification Proposal. If the Proposer makes no indication
to the Grid Code Review Panel within twenty-eight (28) days of the end of the Significant
Code Review Phase as to whether or not it wishes the Grid Code Modification Proposal
to proceed, it shall be deemed to be withdrawn.

GR.16.4 A Grid Code Modification Proposal that falls within the scope of a Significant Code
Review may be made where:

(a) the Authority so determines, having taken into account (among other things)
the urgency of the subject matter of the Grid Code Modification Proposal;
or

Page 15 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 (b) the Grid Code Modification Proposal is made by The Company pursuant
to a direction from the Authority; or

(c) it is raised by the Authority pursuant to GR15.1(c)(i) who reasonably

considers the Grid Code Modification Proposal to be necessary to comply
with or implement the Electricity Regulation and/or any relevant Legally
Binding Decisions of the European Commission and/or the Agency;

(d) it is raised by the Authority and is in respect of a Significant Code Review.

GR.16.5 Where a direction under GR.16.3 has not been issued, GR.16.4 does not apply
and the Grid Code Review Panel considers that a Grid Code Modification
Proposal made during a Significant Code Review Phase falls within the scope
of a Significant Code Review, the Grid Code Review Panel may consult on its
suitability as part of the Standard Modification route set out in GR.19, GR.20,
GR.21 and GR.22.

GR.16.6 If, within twenty eight (28) days after the Authority has published its Significant
Code Review conclusions:

(a) the Authority issues directions to The Company, including directions to The
Company to make a Grid Code Modification Proposal, The Company
shall comply with those directions and The Company and all Users shall
treat the Significant Code Review Phase as ended on the date on which
The Company makes a Grid Code Modification Proposal in accordance
with the Authority’s directions;

(b) the Authority issues to the The Company a statement that no directions
under sub-paragraph (a) will be issued in relation to a Grid Code
Modification Proposal, The Company and all Users shall treat the
Significant Code Review Phase as ended on the date of such statement;

(c) the Authority raises a Grid Code Modification Proposal in accordance with
GR.15.1(c) or GR.17 The Company and all Users shall treat the Significant
Code Review Phase as ended;

(d) the Authority issues a statement that it will continue work on the Significant
Code Review, The Company and all Users shall treat the Significant Code
Review Phase as continuing until it is brought to an end in accordance with
GR.16.7;

(e) neither directions under sub-paragraph (a) nor a statement under sub-
paragraphs (b) or (d) have been issued, nor a Grid Code Modification
Proposal under sub-paragraph (c) has been made, the Significant Code
Review Phase will be deemed to have ended.The Authority's published
conclusions and directions to The Company will not fetter any voting rights
of the Panel Members or the procedures informing the Grid Code
Modification Report.

GR.16.7 If the Authority issues a statement under GR.16.6(d) and/or a direction in

accordance with GR.16.10, the Significant Code Review Phase will be deemed
to have ended when:

(a) the Authority issues a statement that the Significant Code Review Phase
has ended;

(b) one of the circumstances in sub-paragraphs GR.16.6(a) or (c) occurs

(irrespective of whether such circumstance occurs within twenty-eight (28)
days after the Authority has published its Significant Code Review
conclusions); or

(c) the Authority makes a decision consenting, or otherwise, to an Authority-

Led Modification following the Grid Code Review Panel’s submission of
Page 16 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 its Grid Code Modification Report.

GR.16.8 Any Grid Code Modification Proposal in respect of a Significant Code Review
that is not an Authority-Led Modification raised pursuant to GR.17 shall be
treated as a Standard Modification and shall proceed through the process for
Standard Modifications set out in GR.18, GR.19, GR.20, GR.21 and GR.22.

GR.16.9 The Company may not, without the prior consent of the Authority, withdraw a
Grid Code Modification Proposal made pursuant to a direction issued by the
Authority pursuant to GR.16.4(b)).

GR.16.10 Where a Grid Code Modification Proposal has been raised in accordance with
GR.16.4(b) or GR.15.1(a), or by the Authority under GR.15.1(c) and it is in
respect of a Significant Code Review, the Authority may issue a direction (a
“backstop direction”), which requires such proposal(s) and any alternatives to be
withdrawn and which causes the Significant Code Review Phase to
recommence.

GR.17 AUTHORITY LED MODIFICATIONS

Power to develop a proposed modification

GR.17.1 The Authority may develop an Authority-Led Modification in respect of a Significant

Code Review, in accordance with the procedures set out in this GR.17.

GR.17.2 An Authority-led Modification may be submitted where the Significant Code Review
Phase is extended by a statement issued by the Authority as described in GR.16.6(d), or
where a direction is issued under GR.16.10.

Authority-Led Modification Report

GR.17.3 The Authority may submit its proposed Authority-Led Modification to the Code
Administrator, together with such supplemental information as the Authority considers
appropriate.

GR.17.4 Upon receipt of the Authority’s proposal under GR.17.3, the Code Administrator shall
prepare a written report on the proposal (the "Authority-Led Modification Report").
Where the Code Administrator does not reasonably believe the information provided by
the Authority under 17.3 to be sufficient for it to prepare an Authority-Led Modification
Report the Code Administrator will notify the Authority as soon as reasonably practical.
The Authority-Led Modification Report must be consistent with the information provided
by the Authority under GR.17.3, and shall:

(a) be addressed and delivered to the Grid Code Review Panel;

(b) set out the legal text of the proposed Authority-Led Modification;

(c) include a description of the proposed Authority-Led Modification;

(d) include a summary of the views (including any recommendations) from parties
consulted in respect of the proposed Authority-Led Modification;

(e) include an analysis of whether (and, if so, to what extent) the proposed Authority-Led
Modification would better facilitate achievement of the Grid Code Objective(s) with
a detailed explanation of the Authority’s reasons for its assessment, including, where
the impact is likely to be material, an assessment of the quantifiable impact of the
proposed Authority-Led Modification on greenhouse gas emissions, to be conducted
in accordance with such current guidance on the treatment of carbon costs and
evaluation of the greenhouse gas emissions as may be issued by the Authority from
time to time, and providing a detailed explanation of the Authority’s reasons for that
assessment;

Page 17 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 (f) specify the proposed implementation timetable (including the Proposed
Implementation Date);

(g) provide an assessment of:

(i) the impact of the proposed Authority-Led Modification on the Core Industry
Documents and the STC;
(ii) the changes which would be required to the Core Industry Documents and
the STC in order to give effect to the proposed Authority-Led Modification;
(iii) the mechanism and likely timescale for the making of the changes referred to
in (ii);
(iv) the changes and/or developments which would be required to central computer
systems and, if practicable, processes used in connection with the operation of
arrangements established under the Core Industry Documents and the STC;
(v) the mechanism and likely timescale for the making of the changes referred to
in (iv);
(vi) an estimate of the costs associated with making and delivering the changes
referred to in (ii) and (iv), such costs are expected to relate to: for (ii) the costs
of amending the Core Industry Document(s) and STC and for (iv) the costs
of changes to computer systems and possibly processes which are established
for the operation of the Core Industry Documents and the STC, together with
an analysis and a summary of representations in relation to such matters,
including any made by Small Participants, the Citizens Advice and the
Citizens Advice Scotland;

(h) contain, to the extent such information is available to the Code Administrator, an
assessment of the impact of the proposed Authority-Led Modification on Users in
general (or classes of Users), including the changes which are likely to be required to
their internal systems and processes and an estimate of the development, capital and
operating costs associated with implementing the changes to the Grid Code and to
Core Industry Documents and the STC;

(i) include copies of (and a summary of) all written representations or objections made by
parties consulted by the Authority in respect of the proposed Authority-Led
Modification and subsequently maintained; and

(j) have appended a copy of any impact assessment prepared by Core Industry
Document Owners and the STC committee and the views and comments of the Code
Administrator in respect thereof.

GR.17.5 Where the Authority-Led Modification Report is received more than ten (10) Business
Days prior to the next Grid Code Review Panel meeting, the Panel Secretary shall place
the proposed Authority-Led Modification on the agenda of the next Grid Code Review
Panel meeting and otherwise shall place it on the agenda of the next succeeding Grid
Code Review Panel meeting.

Grid Code Review Panel Decision

GR.17.6 In the case of Authority-Led Modifications GR.22 shall apply, save for GR.22.1 and
GR.22.2 and the Authority-Led Modification Report shall be used as the draft Grid Code
Modification Report.

GR.17.7 Where an Authority-Led Modification has been approved in accordance with Section
GR.22, GR.25 (Implementation) shall apply.

GR.18 GRID CODE MODIFICATION PROPOSAL EVALUATION

GR.18.1 This GR.18 is subject to the Urgent Modification procedures set out in GR.23 and the
Significant Code Review procedures set out in GR.16.

GR.18.2 A Grid Code Modification Proposal shall, subject to GR.15.8, be discussed by the Grid
Code Review Panel at the next following Grid Code Review Panel meeting convened.

Page 18 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
GR.18.3 The Proposer’s representative shall attend such Grid Code Review Panel meeting and
the Grid Code Review Panel may invite the Proposer’s representative to present their
Grid Code Modification Proposal to the Grid Code Review Panel.

GR.18.4 The Grid Code Review Panel shall evaluate each Grid Code Modification Proposal
against the Self-Governance Criteria.

GR.18.5 The Grid Code Review Panel shall follow the procedure set out in GR.24 in respect of any
Modification that the Grid Code Review Panel considers meets the Self-Governance
Criteria unless the Authority makes a direction in accordance with GR.24.2 and in such a
case that Modification shall be a Standard Modification and shall follow the procedure
set out in GR.19, GR.20, GR.21 and GR.22.

GR.18.6 Unless the Authority makes a direction in accordance with GR.24.4, a Modification that
the Grid Code Review Panel considers does not meet the Self-Governance Criteria shall
be a Standard Modification and shall follow the procedure set out in GR.19, GR.20,
GR.21 and GR.22.

GR.18.7 The Grid Code Review Panel shall evaluate each Grid Code Fast Track Proposal
against the Fast Track Criteria.

GR.18.8 The Grid Code Review Panel shall follow the procedure set out in GR.26 in respect of any
Grid Code Fast Track Proposal. The provisions of GR.19 to GR.24 shall not apply to a
Grid Code Fast Track Proposal.

GR.18.9 The Grid Code Review Panel shall evaluate each Grid Code Modification Proposal
and determine whether the Grid Code Modification Proposal constitutes an
amendment to the Regulated Sections of the Grid Code and, if a change to the areas
set out in Table 1 of the GR.B annex which details the Regulated Sections, its expected
impact on the objectives of Retained EU Law (Commission Regulation (EU) 2017/2195)
(and in the event of disagreement The Company’s view shall prevail).

GR.19 PANEL PROCEEDINGS

GR.19.1
(a) The Code Administrator and the Grid Code Review Panel shall together establish a
timetable to apply for the Grid Code Modification Proposal process. That timetable
must comply with any direction(s) issued by the Authority setting and/or amending a
timetable in relation to a Grid Code Modification Proposal that is in the respect of a
Significant Code Review.

(b) The Grid Code Review Panel shall establish the part of the timetable for the
consideration by the Grid Code Review Panel and by a Workgroup (if any) which
shall be no longer than six months unless in any case the particular circumstances of
the Grid Code Modification Proposal (taking due account of its complexity,
importance and urgency) justify an extension of such timetable, and provided the
Authority, after receiving notice, does not object, taking into account all those issues.

(c) The Code Administrator shall establish the part of the timetable for the consultation
to be undertaken by the Code Administrator under these Governance Rules and
separately the preparation of a Grid Code Modification Report to the Authority.
Where the particular circumstances of the Grid Code Modification Proposal (taking
due account of its complexity, importance and urgency) justify an extension of such
timescales and provided the Authority, after receiving notice, does not object, taking
into account all those issues, the Code Administrator may revise such part of the
timetable.

(d) In setting such a timetable, the Grid Code Review Panel and the Code Administrator
shall exercise their respective discretions such that, in respect of each Grid Code
Modification Proposal, a Grid Code Modification Report may be submitted to the
Authority as soon after the Grid Code Modification Proposal is made as is
consistent with the proper evaluation of such Grid Code Modification Proposal,
Page 19 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 taking due account of its complexity, importance and urgency.

(e) Having regard to the complexity, importance and urgency of particular Grid Code
Modification Proposals, the Grid Code Review Panel may determine the priority of
Grid Code Modification Proposals and may (subject to any objection from the
Authority taking into account all those issues) adjust the priority of the relevant Grid
Code Modification Proposal accordingly.

GR.19.2 In relation to each Grid Code Modification Proposal, the Grid Code Review Panel shall
determine at any meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel whether to:

(a) amalgamate the Grid Code Modification Proposal with any other Grid Code
Modification Proposal;

(b) invite the Proposer to further develop their Grid Code Modification Proposal before
presenting it to a subsequent meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel or to withdraw
their modification proposal;

(c) establish a Workgroup of the Grid Code Review Panel, to consider the Grid Code
Modification Proposal;

(d) review the evaluation made pursuant to GR.18.4, taking into account any new
information received; or

(e) proceed directly to wider consultation (in which case the Proposer’s right to vary their
Grid Code Modification Proposal shall lapse).

GR.19.3 The Grid Code Review Panel may decide to amalgamate a Grid Code Modification
Proposal with one or more other Grid Code Modification Proposals where the subject-
matter of such Grid Code Modification Proposals is sufficiently proximate to justify
amalgamation on the grounds of efficiency and/or where such Grid Code Modification
Proposals are logically dependent on each other. Such amalgamation may only occur with
the consent of the Proposers of the respective Grid Code Modification Proposals. The
Authority shall be entitled to direct that a Grid Code Modification Proposal is not
amalgamated with one or more other Grid Code Modification Proposals.

GR.19.4 Without prejudice to each Proposer’s right to withdraw their Grid Code Modification
Proposal prior to the amalgamation of their Grid Code Modification Proposal where Grid
Code Modification Proposals are amalgamated pursuant to GR.19.3:

(a) such Grid Code Modification Proposals shall be treated as a single Grid Code
Modification Proposal;

(b) references in these Governance Rules to a Grid Code Modification Proposal shall
include and apply to a group of two or more Grid Code Modification Proposals so
amalgamated; and

(c) the Proposers of each such Grid Code Modification Proposal shall cooperate in
deciding which of them is to provide a representative for any Workgroup in respect of
the amalgamated Grid Code Modification Proposal and, in default of agreement, the
Panel Chairperson shall nominate one of the Proposers for that purpose.

GR.19.5 In respect of any Grid Code Modification Proposal that the Grid Code Review Panel
determines to proceed directly to wider consultation in accordance with GR.19.2, the Grid
Code Review Panel, may at any time prior to the Grid Code Review Panel
Recommendation Vote having taken place decide to establish a Workgroup of the Grid
Code Review Panel and the provisions of GR.20 shall apply. In such case the Grid Code
Review Panel shall be entitled to adjust the timetable referred to at GR.19.1(b) and the
Code Administrator shall be entitled to adjust the timetable referred to at GR.19.1(c),
provided that the Authority, after receiving notice, does not object.

GR.19.6 Where the Grid Code Review Panel according to GR.19.2(b) invites the Proposer to
further develop their Grid Code Modification Proposal, on presenting this to a
Page 20 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 subsequent meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel, the Panel will determine a way
forward from the options in GR.19.2 (a), (c), (d) and (e) or invite the Proposer to withdraw
their modification proposal.

GR.19.7 Where the Grid Code Review Panel according to GR.19.2(b) or GR.19.6 invites the
Proposer to further develop or withdraw their modification and this is declined, the Panel
will determine a way forward from the options in GR.19.2 (a), (c), (d) or (e).

GR.20 WORKGROUPS

GR.20.1 If the Grid Code Review Panel has decided not to proceed directly to wider consultation
(or where the provisions of GR.19.5, GR.23.10 or GR.25.5 apply), a Workgroup will be
established by the Grid Code Review Panel to assist the Grid Code Review Panel in
evaluating whether a Grid Code Modification Proposal better facilitates achieving the
Grid Code Objectives and whether a Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s)
would, as compared with the Grid Code Modification Proposal, better facilitate achieving
the Grid Code Objectives in relation to the issue or defect identified in the Grid Code
Modification Proposal.

GR.20.2 A single Workgroup may be responsible for the evaluation of more than one Grid Code
Modification Proposal at the same time, but need not be so responsible.

GR.20.3 A Workgroup shall comprise at least five (5) persons (who may be Panel Members)
selected by the Grid Code Review Panel from those nominated by Users, the Citizens
Advice or the Citizens Advice Scotland for their relevant experience and/or expertise in
the areas forming the subject-matter of the Grid Code Modification Proposal(s) to be
considered by such Workgroup (and the Grid Code Review Panel shall ensure, as far as
possible, that an appropriate cross-section of representation, experience and expertise is
represented on such Workgroup) provided that there shall always be at least one member
representing The Company and if, and only if, the Grid Code Review Panel is of the view
that a Grid Code Modification Proposal is likely to have an impact on the STC, the Grid
Code Review Panel may invite the STC committee to appoint a representative to become
a member of the Workgroup. A representative of the Authority may attend any meeting
of a Workgroup as an observer and may speak at such meeting.

GR.20.4 The Code Administrator shall in consultation with the Grid Code Review Panel appoint
the chairperson of the Workgroup who shall act impartially and as an independent
chairperson.

GR.20.5 No Workgroup or meeting of a Workgroup will be considered quorate with less than five
(5) persons, not including the Code Administrator representative or the chairperson of the
Workgroup. Where insufficient persons are nominated to a Workgroup for it to be quorate,
the Code Administrator will report this to the next meeting of the Grid Code Review
Panel. The Panel may:

(a) Request the Code Administrator to seek further nominations;

(b) Reconsider their decision on how to progress the Grid Code Modification Proposal
as allowed under GR.19.2; or

(c) Request that those parties that have nominated themselves to a Workgroup which is
less than quorate should proceed as a Limited Membership Workgroup, subject to
the following additional checks and balances:
(i) A Limited Membership Workgroup shall always hold a Workgroup
Consultation in addition to the mandatory Code Administrator
Consultation.
(ii) Prior to the Workgroup Consultation, a draft of this shall be circulated to
the Grid Code Review Panel for five (5) days or another timescale as
agreed by the Panel for approval.
(iii) At the same time as the Workgroup Consultation is initiated, the Code
Administrator shall again formally seek nominations and if quoracy is not

Page 21 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 established then again seek advice from the Panel on how to proceed from
the options set out in GR.20.5.

Where a Workgroup remains non-quorate, and with the permission of the Panel, a
Limited Membership Workgroup may continue following a Workgroup
Consultation as if it were a standard Workgroup.

GR.20.6 A Limited Membership Workgroup may at any point be instructed by the

Authority to either:

(a) Stop work; or

(b) To provide a report on progress to the next meeting of the Grid Code
Review Panel.

The Authority may also at any point instruct the Code Administrator to seek
further nominations for membership.

GR.20.7 Where a specific meeting of an otherwise quorate Workgroup is not quorate, or

where member(s) of a Limited Membership Workgroup are unable to attend a
meeting:

(a) A member of the Workgroup unable to attend will be invited by the Code
Administrator to send an alternate;
(b) All members will be invited to participate by telephone, webinar or other
equivalent if not able to attend in person;
(c) A meeting may proceed as a Workgroup meeting as long as none of the
members either present or absent raise an objection to this, however no voting
can take place unless the Code Administrator has obtained enough votes to
be quorate from members not in attendance or from all members of a Limited
Membership Workgroup. This shall include where there has not been an
opportunity to check with all Workgroup members to see if they have an
objection (typically where a change of plans or circumstances has occurred
too late to achieve this);
(d) If any Workgroup member objects to the progressing of a Workgroup without
them, they must communicate this to the Code Administrator at least 24
hours before the meeting indicating that they will not be present and do not
wish the meeting to take place. The Code Administrator will then endeavour
to rearrange the meeting to accommodate such a member’s availability;
(e) Where a Workgroup member is repeatedly unavailable, as guidance on 3
consecutive occasions, and does not give permission for the Workgroup to
proceed without them as in (d), under GR.20.7 the Grid Code Review Panel
may choose to replace or remove them.

GR.20.8 The Grid Code Review Panel may add further members or the Workgroup chairperson
may add or vary members to a Workgroup.

GR.20.9 The Grid Code Review Panel may (but shall not be obliged to) replace or remove any
member or observer of a Workgroup appointed pursuant to GR.20.3 at any time if such
member is unwilling or unable for whatever reason to fulfil that function and/or is
deliberately and persistently disrupting or frustrating the work of the Workgroup.

GR.20.10 The Grid Code Review Panel shall determine the terms of reference of each Workgroup
and may change those terms of reference from time to time as it sees fit.

GR.20.11 The terms of reference of a Workgroup must include provision in respect of the following
matters:

(a) those areas of a Workgroup’s powers or activities which require the prior approval of
the Grid Code Review Panel;

(b) the seeking of instructions, clarification or guidance from the Grid Code Review Panel,
Page 22 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 including on the suspension of a Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s)
during a Significant Code Review Phase;

(c) the timetable for the work to be done by the Workgroup, in accordance with the
timetable established pursuant to GR.19.1 (save where GR.19.5 applies); and

(d) the length of any Workgroup Consultation.

In addition, prior to the taking of any steps which would result in the undertaking of a
significant amount of work (including the production of draft legal text to modify the Grid
Code in order to give effect to a Grid Code Modification Proposal and/or Workgroup
Alternative Grid Code Modification(s), with the relevant terms of reference setting out
what a significant amount of work would be in any given case), the Workgroup shall seek
the views of the Grid Code Review Panel as to whether to proceed with such steps and,
in giving its views, the Grid Code Review Panel may consult the Authority in respect
thereof.

GR.20.12 Subject to the provisions of this GR.20.12 and unless otherwise determined by the Grid
Code Review Panel, the Workgroup shall develop and adopt its own internal working
procedures for the conduct of its business and shall provide a copy of such procedures to
the Panel Secretary in respect of each Grid Code Modification Proposal for which it is
responsible. Unless the Grid Code Review Panel otherwise determines, meetings of each
Workgroup shall be open to attendance by a representative of any User, (including any
Authorised Electricity Operator; The Company or a Materially Affected Party), the
Citizens Advice, the Citizens Advice Scotland, the Authority and any person invited by
the chairperson, and the chairperson of a Workgroup may invite any such person to speak
at such meetings, other than the Authority who may speak at any time as per GR.20.3.

GR.20.13 After development by the Workgroup of the Grid Code Modification Proposal, and (if
applicable) after development of any draft Workgroup Alternative Grid Code
Modification(s), the Workgroup may (subject to the provisions of GR.20.19) consult
(“Workgroup Consultation”) on the Grid Code Modification Proposal and, if applicable,
on any draft Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) with:

(a) Users; and

(b) such other persons who may properly be considered to have an appropriate interest in
it.

GR.20.14 The Workgroup Consultation will be undertaken by issuing a Workgroup Consultation

paper (and its provision in electronic form on the Website and in electronic mails to Users
and such other persons, who have supplied relevant details, shall meet this requirement).

Such Workgroup Consultation paper will include:

(a) Issues which arose in the Workgroup discussions;

(b) Details of any draft Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s);

(c) The date proposed by the Code Administrator as the Proposed Implementation
Date.

GR.20.15 Workgroup Consultation papers will be copied to Core Industry Document Owners and
the secretary of the STC committee.

GR.20.16 Any Authorised Electricity Operator; the Citizens Advice or the Citizens Advice
Scotland, The Company or a Materially Affected Party may (subject to GR.20.20) raise
a Workgroup Consultation Alternative Request in response to the Workgroup
Consultation. Such Workgroup Consultation Alternative Request must include:

(a) the information required by GR.15.3 (which shall be read and construed so that any
references therein to “amendment proposal” or “proposal” shall be read as “request”
and any reference to “Proposer” shall be read as “requester”); and

Page 23 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 (b) sufficient detail to enable consideration of the request including details as to how the
request better facilitates the Grid Code Objectives than the current version of the Grid
Code, than the Grid Code Modification Proposal and than any draft Workgroup
Alternative Grid Code Modification(s).

GR.20.17 The Workgroup shall consider and analyse any comments made or any Workgroup
Consultation Alternative Request made by any User (including any Authorised
Electricity Operator; The Company or a Materially Affected Party), the Citizens Advice
and the Citizens Advice Scotland in response to the Workgroup Consultation.

GR.20.18 If a majority of the members of the Workgroup or the chairperson of the Workgroup
believe that the Workgroup Consultation Alternative Request may better facilitate the
Grid Code Objectives than the Grid Code Modification Proposal, the Workgroup shall
develop it as a Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) or, where the
chairperson of the Workgroup agrees, amalgamate it with one or more other draft
Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) or Workgroup Consultation
Alternative Request(s);

GR.20.19 Unless the Grid Code Review Panel directs the Workgroup otherwise pursuant to
GR.20.20, and provided that a Workgroup Consultation has been undertaken in respect
of the Grid Code Modification Proposal, no further Workgroup Consultation will be
required in respect of any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) developed
in respect of such Grid Code Modification Proposal.

GR.20.20 The Grid Code Review Panel may, at the request of the chairperson of the Workgroup,
direct the Workgroup to undertake further Workgroup Consultation(s). At the same time
as such direction the Grid Code Review Panel shall adjust the timetable referred to at
GR.19.1(b) and the Code Administrator shall be entitled to adjust the timetable referred
to at GR.19.1 (c), provided that the Authority, after receiving notice, does not object. No
Workgroup Consultation Alternative Request may be raised by any User (including any
Authorised Electricity Operator; The Company or a Materially Affected Party), the
Citizens Advice and the Citizens Advice Scotland during any second or subsequent
Workgroup Consultation.

GR.20. 21 The Workgroup shall finalise the Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s)
for inclusion in the report to the Grid Code Review Panel.

(a) Each Workgroup chairperson shall prepare a report to the Grid Code Review
Panel responding to the matters detailed in the terms of reference in accordance
with the timetable set out in the terms of reference.

(b) If a Workgroup is unable to reach agreement on any such matter, the report must
reflect the views of the members of the Workgroup.

(c) The report will be circulated in draft form to Workgroup members and a period of
not less than five (5) Business Days or if all Workgroup members agree three (3)
Business Days given for comments thereon. Any unresolved comments made
shall be reflected in the final report.

GR.20.23 The chairperson or another member (nominated by the chairperson) of the Workgroup shall
attend the next Grid Code Review Panel meeting following delivery of the report and may
be invited to present the findings and/or answer the questions of Panel Members in respect
thereof. Other members of the Workgroup may also attend such Grid Code Review Panel
meeting.

GR.20.24 At the meeting referred to in GR.20.23 the Grid Code Review Panel shall consider the
Workgroup’s report and shall determine whether to:-

(a) refer the proposed Grid Code Modification Proposal back to the Workgroup for
further analysis (in which case the Grid Code Review Panel shall determine the
timetable and terms of reference to apply in relation to such further analysis); or

(b) proceed then to wider consultation as set out in GR.21; or

Page 24 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 (c) decide on another suitable course of action.

GR.20.25 Subject to GR.16.4 if, at any time during the assessment process carried out by the
Workgroup pursuant to this GR.20, the Workgroup considers that a Grid Code
Modification Proposal or any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) falls
within the scope of a Significant Code Review, it shall consult on this as part of the
Workgroup Consultation and include its reasoned assessment in the report to the Grid
Code Review Panel prepared pursuant to GR.20.22. If the Grid Code Review Panel
considers that the Grid Code Modification Proposal or the Workgroup Alternative Grid
Code Modification(s) falls within the scope of a Significant Code Review, it shall consult
with the Authority. If the Authority directs that the Grid Code Modification Proposal or
Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) falls within the scope of the Significant
Code Review, the Grid Code Modification Proposal and any Workgroup Alternative
Grid Code Modification(s) shall be suspended or withdrawn during the Significant Code
Review Phase, in accordance with GR.16.3.

GR.20.26 The Proposer may, at any time prior to the final evaluation by the Workgroup (in
accordance with its terms of reference and working practices) of that Grid Code
Modification Proposal against the Grid Code Objectives, vary their Grid Code
Modification Proposal on notice (which may be given verbally) to the chairperson of the
Workgroup provided that such varied Grid Code Modification Proposal shall address the
same issue or defect originally identified by the Proposer in their Grid Code Modification
Proposal.

GR.20.27 The Grid Code Review Panel may (but shall not be obliged to) require a Grid Code
Modification Proposal to be withdrawn if, in the Panel’s opinion, the Proposer of that Grid
Code Modification Proposal is deliberately and persistently disrupting or frustrating the
work of the Workgroup and that Grid Code Modification Proposal shall be deemed to
have been so withdrawn. In the event that a Grid Code Modification Proposal is so
withdrawn, the provisions of GR.15.10 shall apply in respect of that Grid Code Modification
Proposal.

GR.21 THE CODE ADMINISTRATOR CONSULTATION

GR.21.1 In respect of any Grid Code Modification Proposal where a Workgroup has been
established GR.21.2 to GR.21.6 shall apply.

GR.21.2 After consideration of any Workgroup report on the Grid Code Modification Proposal and
if applicable any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) by the Grid Code
Review Panel and a determination by the Grid Code Review Panel to proceed to wider
consultation, the Code Administrator shall bring to the attention of and consult on the Grid
Code Modification Proposal and if applicable any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code
Modification(s) with:

(i) Users; and

(ii) such other persons who may properly be considered to have an
appropriate interest in it, including Small Participants, the Citizens
Advice and the Citizens Advice Scotland.

GR.21.3 The consultation will be undertaken by issuing a Consultation Paper (and its provision in
electronic form on the Website and in electronic mails to Users and such other persons,
who have supplied relevant details, shall meet this requirement). The consultation shall last
for a minimum of one month unless it is deemed to be an Urgent Modification. For Urgent
Modifications the Grid Code Review Panel shall confirm the proposed drafting for the Grid
Code Modification Proposal and any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s)
do not include changes to Regulated Sections; provided there are no proposed changes to
a Regulated Section then a shorter consultation duration can be applied if approved by the
Authority, otherwise the standard one month consultation will apply.

GR.21.4 The Consultation Paper will contain:

Page 25 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 (a) the proposed drafting for the Grid Code Modification Proposal and any Workgroup
Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) (unless the Authority decides none is needed in
the Grid Code Modification Report under GR.21.5) and will indicate the issues which arose
in the Workgroup discussions, where there has been a Workgroup and will incorporate
The Company’s and the Grid Code Review Panel’s initial views on the way forward; and

(b) the date proposed by the Code Administrator as the Proposed Implementation
Date and, where the Workgroup terms of reference require and the dates proposed
by the Workgroup are different from those proposed by the Code Administrator,
those proposed by the Workgroup. In relation to a Grid Code Modification Proposal
that meets the Self-Governance Criteria, the Code Administrator may not propose
an implementation date earlier than the sixteenth (16) Business Day following the
publication of the Grid Code Review Panel’s decision to approve or reject the Grid
Code Modification Proposal. Views will be invited on these dates.

GR.21.5 Where the Grid Code Review Panel is of the view that the proposed text to amend the
Grid Code for a Grid Code Modification Proposal or Workgroup Alternative Grid Code
Modification(s) is not needed in the Grid Code Modification Report, the Grid Code
Review Panel shall consult (giving its reasons as to why it is of this view) with the Authority
as to whether the Authority would like the Grid Code Modification Report to include the
proposed text to amend the Grid Code. If it does not, no text needs to be included. If it
does, and no detailed text has yet been prepared, the Code Administrator shall prepare
such text to modify the Grid Code in order to give effect to such Grid Code Modification
Proposal or Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) and shall seek the
conclusions of the relevant Workgroup before consulting those identified in GR.21.2.

GR.21.6 Consultation Papers will be copied to Core Industry Document Owners and the
secretary of the STC committee.

GR.21.7 In respect of any Grid Code Modification Proposal where a Workgroup has not been
established GR.21.8 to GR.21.11 shall apply.

GR.21.8 After determination by the Grid Code Review Panel to proceed to wider consultation, such
consultation shall be conducted by the Code Administrator on the Grid Code
Modification Proposal with:

(i) Users; and

(ii) such other persons who may properly be considered to have an appropriate interest in
it, including Small Participants, the Citizens Advice and the Citizens Advice
Scotland.

GR.21.9 The consultation will be undertaken by issuing a Consultation Paper (and its provision in
electronic form on the Website and in electronic mails to Users and such other persons,
who have supplied relevant details, shall meet this requirement). The consultation shall last
for a minimum of one month unless it is deemed to be an Urgent Modification. For Urgent
Modifications the Grid Code Review Panel shall confirm the proposed drafting for the
Grid Code Modification Proposal and any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code
Modification(s) do not include changes to Regulated Sections; provided there are no
proposed changes to a Regulated Section then a shorter consultation duration can be
applied if approved by the Authority, otherwise the standard one month consultation will
apply.

GR.21.10 The Consultation Paper will contain:

(a) the proposed drafting for the Grid Code Modification Proposal (unless the Authority
decides none is needed in the Grid Code Modification Report under GR.21.11) and
will incorporate The Company’s and the Grid Code Review Panel’s initial views on
the way forward; and

(b) the date proposed by the Code Administrator as the Proposed Implementation
Date. Views will be invited on this date.

Page 26 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
GR.21.11 Where the Grid Code Review Panel is of the view that the proposed text to amend the
Grid Code for a Grid Code Modification Proposal is not needed, the Grid Code Review
Panel shall consult (giving its reasons to why it is of this view) with the Authority as to
whether the Authority would like the Grid Code Modification Report to include the
proposed text to amend the Grid Code. If it does not, no text needs to be included. If it
does, and no detailed text has yet been prepared, the Code Administrator shall prepare
such text to modify the Grid Code in order to give effect to such Grid Code Modification
Proposal and consult those identified in GR.21.2.

GR.22 GRID CODE MODIFICATION REPORTS

GR.22.1 Subject to the Code Administrator’s consultation having been completed, the Grid Code
Review Panel shall prepare and submit to the Authority a report (the "Grid Code
Modification Report") in accordance with this GR.22 for each Grid Code Modification
Proposal which is not withdrawn.

GR.22.1A Where a Grid Code Modification Proposal or any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code
Modification constitutes an amendment to the Regulated Sections, the Panel will
consider any consultation responses received and any further work required to assess
these as required under GR.18.9.

GR.22.2 The matters to be included in a Grid Code Modification Report shall be the following (in
respect of the Grid Code Modification Proposal):

(a) A description of the Grid Code Modification Proposal and any Workgroup
Alternative Grid Code Modification(s), including the details of, and the rationale for,
any variations made (or, as the case may be, omitted) by the Proposer together with
the views of the Workgroup;

(b) the Panel Members’ Recommendation;

(c) a summary (agreed by the Grid Code Review Panel) of the views (including any
recommendations) from Panel Members in the Grid Code Review Panel
Recommendation Vote and the conclusions of the Workgroup (if there is one) in
respect of the Grid Code Modification Proposal and of any Workgroup Alternative
Grid Code Modification(s);

(d) an analysis of whether (and, if so, to what extent) the Grid Code Modification
Proposal and any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) would better
facilitate achievement of the Grid Code Objective(s) with a detailed explanation of the
Grid Code Review Panel’s reasons for its assessment, including, where the impact is
likely to be material, an assessment of the quantifiable impact of the Grid Code
Modification Proposal and any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s)
on greenhouse gas emissions, to be conducted in accordance with such current
guidance on the treatment of carbon costs and evaluation of the greenhouse gas
emissions as may be issued by the Authority from time to time, and providing a
detailed explanation of the Grid Code Review Panel’s reasons for that assessment;

(e) an analysis of whether (and, if so, to what extent) any Workgroup Alternative Grid
Code Modification(s) would better facilitate achievement of the Grid Code
Objective(s) as compared with the Grid Code Modification Proposal and any other
Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) and the current version of the
Grid Code, with a detailed explanation of the Grid Code Review Panel’s reasons for
its assessment, including, where the impact is likely to be material, an assessment of
the quantifiable impact of the Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) on
greenhouse gas emissions, to be conducted in accordance with such current guidance
on the treatment of carbon costs and evaluation of the greenhouse gas emissions as
may be issued by the Authority from time to time, and providing a detailed explanation
of the Grid Code Review Panel’s reasons for that assessment;

(f) the Proposed Implementation Date taking into account the views put forward during
the process described at GR.21.4 (b) such date to be determined by the Grid Code
Page 27 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 Review Panel in the event of any disparity between such views and those of the Code
Administrator;

(g) an assessment of:

(i) the impact of the Grid Code Modification Proposal and any Workgroup
Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) on the Core Industry Documents
and the STC;
(ii) the changes which would be required to the Core Industry Documents and
the STC in order to give effect to the Grid Code Modification Proposal and
any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s);
(iii) the mechanism and likely timescale for the making of the changes referred to
in (ii);
(iv) the changes and/or developments which would be required to central computer
systems and, if practicable, processes used in connection with the operation
of arrangements established under the Core Industry Documents and the
STC;
(v) the mechanism and likely timescale for the making of the changes referred to
in (iv);
(vi) an estimate of the costs associated with making and delivering the changes
referred to in (ii) and (iv), such costs are expected to relate to: for (ii) the costs
of amending the Core Industry Document(s) and STC and for (iv) the costs
of changes to computer systems and possibly processes which are
established for the operation of the Core Industry Documents and the STC,
together with an analysis and a summary of representations in relation to such
matters, including any made by Small Participants, the Citizens Advice and
the Citizens Advice Scotland;

(h) to the extent such information is available to the Code Administrator, an assessment
of the impact of the Grid Code Modification Proposal and any Workgroup
Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) on Users in general (or classes of Users in
general), including the changes which are likely to be required to their internal systems
and processes and an estimate of the development, capital and operating costs
associated with implementing the changes to the Grid Code and to Core Industry
Documents and the STC;

(i) copies of (and a summary of) all written representations or objections made by
consultees during the consultation in respect of the Grid Code Modification Proposal
and any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) and subsequently
maintained;

(j) a copy of any impact assessment prepared by Core Industry Document Owners and
the STC committee and the views and comments of the Code Administrator in respect
thereof;

(k) whether or not, in the opinion of The Company, the Grid Code Modification Proposal
(or any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s)) should be made.

(l) The Company’s justification for including or not including the views resulting from the
relevant consultation in the Grid Code Modification Report.

(m) where a Grid Code Modification Proposal or any Workgroup Alternative Grid
Code Modification(s) constitutes an amendment to the areas set out in table 1 of
the GR.B annex which details the Regulated Sections, the expected impact on the
objectives of Retained EU Law (Commission
Regulation (EU) 2017/2195).

GR.22.3 A draft of the Grid Code Modification Report will be circulated by the Code
Administrator to Users, Panel Members and such other persons who may properly be
considered to have an appropriate interest in it (and its provision in electronic form on the
Website and in electronic mails to Users and Panel Members, who must supply relevant
details, shall meet this requirement) and a period of no less than five (5) Business Days
given for comments to be made thereon. Any unresolved comments made shall be
Page 28 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 reflected in the final Grid Code Modification Report.

GR.22.4 A draft of the Grid Code Modification Report shall be tabled at a meeting of the Grid
Code Review Panel prior to submission of that Grid Code Modification Report to the
Authority as set in accordance with the timetable established pursuant to GR.19.1, and at
which the Panel may consider any minor changes to the legal drafting, which may include
any issues identified through the Code Administrator consultation, and:

(i) if the change required is a typographical error the Grid Code Review Panel may
instruct the Code Administrator to make the appropriate change and the Panel
Chairperson will undertake the Grid Code Review Panel Recommendation
Vote; or

(ii) if the change required is not considered to be a typographical error then the Grid
Code Review Panel may direct the Workgroup to review the change. If the
Workgroup unanimously agree that the change is minor the Grid Code Review
Panel may instruct the Code Administrator to make the appropriate change and
the Panel Chairperson will undertake the Grid Code Review Panel
Recommendation Vote, otherwise for changes that are not considered to be
minor the Code Administrator shall issue the Grid Code Modification
Proposal for further Code Administrator consultation, after which the Panel
Chairperson will undertake the Grid Code Review Panel Recommendation
Vote; or

(iii) In the case of a modification that had been directed pursuant to GR.19.2(e) to
proceed directly to wider consultation without the formation of a Workgroup, and
if the change required is not considered to be a typographical error, then the Grid
Code Review Panel may direct the Code Administrator in conjunction with the
Proposer to review the change. If the Grid Code Review Panel, the Code
Administrator and the Proposer agree that the change is minor the Grid Code
Review Panel may instruct the Code Administrator to make the appropriate
change and the Panel Chairperson will undertake the Grid Code Review Panel
Recommendation Vote, otherwise for changes that are not considered to be
minor the Code Administrator shall issue the Grid Code Modification
Proposal for further Code Administrator consultation after which the Panel
Chairperson will undertake the Grid Code Review Panel Recommendation
Vote. In the case of a change that is not considered to be minor, the Grid Code
Review Panel may also consider whether to establish a Workgroup of the Grid
Code Review Panel, to further consider the Grid Code Modification Proposal,
in which case the procedures set out within GR.20 will be followed as required;
or

(iv) if a change is not required after consideration, the Panel Chairperson will
undertake the Grid Code Review Panel Recommendation Vote.

GR.22.5 A draft of the Grid Code Modification Report following the Grid Code Review Panel
Recommendation Vote will be circulated by the Code Administrator to Panel Members
(and in electronic mails to Panel Members, who must supply relevant details, shall meet this
requirement) and a period of no less than five (5) Business Days given for comments to be
made on whether the Grid Code Modification Report accurately reflects the views of the
Panel Members as expressed at the Grid Code Review Panel Recommendation Vote. Any
unresolved comments made shall be reflected in the final Grid Code Modification Report.

GR.22.6 Each Grid Code Modification Report shall be addressed and furnished to the Authority
and none of the facts, opinions or statements contained in such may be relied upon by any
other person.

GR.22.7 Subject to GR.22.9 to GR.22.12, in accordance with the Transmission Licence, the
Authority may approve the Grid Code Modification Proposal or a Workgroup Alternative
Grid Code Modification(s) contained in the Grid Code Modification Report (which shall
then be an "Approved Modification" until implemented).

GR.22.8 The Code Administrator shall copy (by electronic mail to those persons who have supplied

Page 29 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 relevant details to the Code Administrator) the Grid Code Modification Report to:

(i) each Panel Member; and

(ii) any person who may request a copy, and shall place a copy on
the Website.

GR.22.9 Revised Fixed Proposed Implementation Date

GR.22.9.1 Where the Proposed Implementation Date included in a Grid Code Modification Report
is a Fixed Proposed Implementation Date and the Authority considers that the Fixed
Proposed Implementation Date is or may no longer be appropriate or might otherwise
prevent the Authority from making such decision by reason of the effluxion of time the
Authority may direct the Grid Code Review Panel to recommend a revised Proposed
Implementation Date.

GR.22.9.2 Such direction may:

(a) specify that the revised Proposed Implementation Date shall not be prior
to a specified date;

(b) specify a reasonable period (taking into account a reasonable period for
consultation) within which the Grid Code Review Panel shall be requested
to submit its recommendation; and

(c) provide such reasons as the Authority deems appropriate for such request
(and in respect of those matters referred to in GR.22.9.2 (a) and (b) above).

GR.22.9.3 Before making a recommendation to the Authority, the Grid Code Review Panel will
consult on the revised Proposed Implementation Date, and may in addition consult on
any matters relating to the Grid Code Modification Report which in the Grid Code
Review Panel’s opinion have materially changed since the Grid Code Modification
Report was submitted to the Authority and where it does so the Grid Code Review
Panel shall report on such matters as part of its recommendation under Grid Code
GR.22.9.4, with:

(a) Users; and

(b) such other persons who may properly be considered to have an

appropriate interest in it. Such consultation will be undertaken in
accordance with GR.21.3 and GR.21.6.

GR.22.9.4 Following the completion of the consultation held pursuant to GR.22.9.3 the Grid Code
Review Panel shall report to the Authority with copies of all the consultation responses
and recommending a Revised Proposed Implementation Date.

GR.22.9.5 The Authority shall notify the Grid Code Review Panel as to whether or not it intends to
accept the Revised Proposed Implementation Date and where the Authority notifies the
Grid Code Review Panel that it intends to accept the Revised Proposed Implementation
Date, the Revised Proposed Implementation Date shall be deemed to be the Proposed
Implementation Date as specified in the Grid Code Modification Report.

GR.22.10 Authority Approval

If:

(a) the Authority has not given notice of its decision in respect of a Grid Code
Modification Report within two (2) calendar months (in the case of an Urgent
Modification), or four (4) calendar months (in the case of all other Grid Code
Modification Proposals) from the date upon which the Grid Code Modification
Report was submitted to it; or

(b) the Grid Code Review Panel is of the reasonable opinion that the circumstances
relating to the Grid Code Modification Proposal and/or Workgroup Alternative Grid
Page 30 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 Code Modification which is the subject of a Grid Code Modification Report have
materially changed, the Grid Code Review Panel may request the Panel Secretary
to write to the Authority requesting the Authority to give an indication of the likely
date by which the Authority’s decision on the Grid Code Modification Proposal will
be made.

GR.22.11 If the Authority determines that the Grid Code Modification Report is such that the
Authority cannot properly form an opinion on the Grid Code Modification Proposal and
any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s), or where the Grid Code
Modification Proposal and/or any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s)
constitutes an amendment to the Regulated Sections of the code, where the Authority
requires an amendment to the Grid Code Modification Proposal and/or any Workgroup
Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) in order to approve it, it may issue a direction to
the Grid Code Review Panel:

(a) specifying the additional steps (including drafting or amending existing drafting
associated with the Grid Code Modification Proposal and any Workgroup
Alternative Grid Code Modification(s), revision (including revision to the timetable),
analysis or information that it requires in order to form such an opinion; and

(b) requiring the Grid Code Modification Report to be revised and to be resubmitted.

GR.22.12 If a Grid Code Modification Report is to be revised and re-submitted in accordance with
a direction issued pursuant to GR.22.11, it shall be re-submitted as soon after the
Authority’s direction as is appropriate (and in the case of an amendment to the areas set
out in table 1 of the GR.B annex which details the Regulated Sections of the code within
2 months), taking into account the complexity, importance and urgency of the Grid Code
Modification Proposal and any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s). The
Grid Code Review Panel shall decide on the level of analysis and consultation required in
order to comply with the Authority’s direction and shall agree an appropriate timetable for
meeting its obligations. Once the Grid Code Modification Report is revised, the Grid
Code Review Panel shall carry out its Grid Code Review Panel Recommendation Vote
again in respect of the revised Grid Code Modification Report and re-submit it to the
Authority in compliance with GR.22.4 to GR.22.6.

GR.23 URGENT MODIFICATIONS

GR.23.1 If a Relevant Party recommends to the Panel Secretary that a proposal should be treated
as an Urgent Modification in accordance with this GR.23, the Panel Secretary shall notify
the Panel Chairperson who shall then, in accordance with GR.23.2 (a) to (e) inclusive,
and notwithstanding anything in the contrary in these Governance Rules, endeavour to
obtain the views of the Grid Code Review Panel as to the matters set out in GR.23.3. If
for any reason the Panel Chairperson is unable to do that, the Panel Secretary shall
attempt to do so (and the measures to be undertaken by the Panel Chairperson in the
following paragraphs shall in such case be undertaken by the Panel Secretary).

GR.23.2 (a) The Panel Chairperson shall determine the time by which, in their opinion, a decision
of the Grid Review Panel is required in relation to such matters, having regard to the
degree of urgency in all circumstances, and references in this GR.23.1 to the “time
available” shall mean the time available, based on any such determination by the Panel
Chairperson;

(b)The Panel Secretary shall, at the request of the Panel Chairperson, convene a
meeting or meetings (including meetings by telephone conference call, where
appropriate) of the Grid Code Review Panel in such manner and upon such notice as
the Panel Chairperson considers appropriate, and such that, where practicable within
the time available, as many Panel Members as possible may attend;

(c) Each Panel Member shall be deemed to have consented, for the purposes of GR.8.9.
to the convening of such meeting or meetings in the manner and on the notice
determined by the Panel Chairperson. GR.8.10 shall not apply to any such business.

(d) Where:
Page 31 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 (i) it becomes apparent, in seeking to convene a meeting of the Grid Code
Review Panel within the time available, that quorum will not be present; or
(ii) it transpires that the meeting of the Grid Code Review Panel is not quorate
and it is not possible to rearrange such meeting within the time available, the
Panel Chairperson shall endeavour to contact each Panel Member
individually in order to ascertain such Panel Member’s vote, and (subject to
GR.23.2 (e)) any matter to be decided shall be decided by a majority of those
Panel Members who so cast a vote. Where, for whatever reason no decision
is reached, the Panel Chairperson shall proceed to consult with the
Authority in accordance with GR.23.5;

(e) Where the Panel Chairperson is unable to contact at least four Panel
Members within the time available and where:

(i) It is only The Company, who has recommended that the proposal should
be treated as an Urgent Modification, then those Panel Members
contacted shall decide such matters, such decision may be a majority
decision. Where in such cases no decision is made for whatever reason, the
Panel Chairperson shall proceed to consult with the Authority in
accordance with GR.23.5; or

(ii) any User (including any Authorised Electricity Operator; The Company
or a Materially Affected Party), the Citizens Advice or the Citizens
Advice Scotland has recommended that the proposal should be treated as
an Urgent Modification, then the Panel Chairperson may decide the
matter (in consultation with those Panel Members (if any) which they
manage to contact) provided that the Panel Chairperson shall include
details in the relevant Grid Code Modification Report of the steps which
they took to contact other Panel Members first.

GR.23.3 The matters referred to in GR.23.1 are:

(a) whether such proposal should be treated as an Urgent Modification in accordance

with this GR.23 and

(b) the procedure and timetable to be followed in respect of such Urgent Modification.

GR.23.4 The Panel Chairperson or, in their absence, the Panel Secretary shall forthwith provide
the Authority with the recommendation (if any) ascertained in accordance with GR.23.2
(a) to (e) inclusive, of the Grid Code Review Panel as to the matters referred to in GR.23.2,
and shall consult the Authority as to whether such Grid Code Modification Proposal is
an Urgent Modification and, if so, as to the procedure and timetable which should apply
in respect thereof.

GR.23.5 If the Grid Code Review Panel has been unable to make a recommendation in
accordance with GR.23.2.(d) or GR.23.2(e) as to the matters referred to in GR.23.3 then
the Panel Chairperson or, in their absence, the Panel Secretary may recommend
whether they consider that such proposal should be treated as an Urgent Modification
and shall forthwith consult the Authority as to whether such Grid Code Modification
Proposal is an Urgent Modification and, if so, as to the procedure and timetable that
should apply in respect thereof.

GR.23.6 The Grid Code Review Panel shall:

(a) not treat any Grid Code Modification Proposal as an Urgent Modification except
with the prior consent of the Authority;

(b) comply with the procedure and timetable in respect of any Urgent Modification
approved by the Authority; and

(c) comply with any direction of the Authority issued in respect of any of the matters on
which the Authority is consulted pursuant to GR.23.4 or GR.23.5.
Page 32 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
GR.23.7 For the purposes of this GR.23.7, the procedure and timetable in respect of an Urgent
Modification may (with the approval of the Authority pursuant to GR.23.4 or GR.23.5)
deviate from all or part of the Grid Code Modification Procedures or follow any other
procedure or timetable approved by the Authority except for the duration of the Code
Administrator consultation for modifications relating to Regulated Sections which shall
be for one month. Where the procedure and timetable approved by the Authority in respect
of an Urgent Modification do not provide for the establishment (or designation) of a
Workgroup the Proposer’s right to vary the Grid Code Modification Proposal pursuant
to GR.15.10 and GR.20.26 shall lapse from the time and date of such approval.

GR.23.8 The Grid Code Modification Report in respect of an Urgent Modification shall include:

(a) a statement as to why the Proposer believes that such Grid Code
Modification Proposal should be treated as an Urgent Modification;

(b) any statement provided by the Authority as to why the Authority believes
that such Grid Code Modification Proposal should be treated as an Urgent
Modification;

(c) any recommendation of the Grid Code Review Panel (or any
recommendation of the Panel Chairperson) provided in accordance with
GR.23 in respect of whether any Grid Code Modification Proposal should
be treated as an Urgent Modification; and

(d) the extent to which the procedure followed deviated from the process for
Standard Modifications (other than the procedures in this GR.23).

GR.23.9 Each Panel Member shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that an Urgent Modification
is considered, evaluated and (subject to the approval of the Authority) implemented as
soon as reasonably practicable, having regard to the urgency of the matter and, for the
avoidance of doubt, an Urgent Modification may (subject to the approval of the Authority)
result in the Grid Code being amended on the day on which such proposal is submitted.

GR.23.10 Where an Urgent Modification results in an amendment being made in accordance with
GR.25, the Grid Code Review Panel may or (where it appears to the Grid Code Review
Panel that there is a reasonable level of support for a review amongst Users) shall
following such amendment, establish a Workgroup on terms specified by the Grid Code
Review Panel to consider and report as to whether any alternative amendment could, as
compared with such amendment better facilitate achieving the Grid Code Objectives in
respect of the subject matter of that Urgent Modification.

GR.24 SELF-GOVERNANCE

GR.24.1 If the Grid Code Review Panel, having evaluated a Grid Code Modification Proposal
against the Self-Governance Criteria, pursuant to GR.18.4, considers that the Grid Code
Modification Proposal meets the Self-Governance Criteria, the Grid Code Review
Panel shall submit to the Authority a Self-Governance Statement setting out its
reasoning in reasonable detail.

GR.24.2 The Authority may, at any time prior to the Grid Code Review Panel’s determination
made pursuant to GR.24.9, give written notice that it disagrees with the Self-Governance
Statement and may direct that the Grid Code Modification Proposal proceeds through
the process for Standard Modifications set out in GR.19, GR.20, GR.21 and GR.22.

GR.24.3 Subject to GR.24.2, after submitting a Self-Governance Statement, the Grid Code
Review Panel shall follow the procedure set out in GR.19, GR.20, GR.21 and GR.22.

GR.24.4 The Authority may issue a direction to the Grid Code Review Panel in relation to a
Modification to follow the procedure set out for Modifications that meet the Self-
Governance Criteria, notwithstanding that no Self-Governance Statement has been
submitted or a Self-Governance Statement has been retracted.

Page 33 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
GR.24.5 Subject to the Code Administrator’s consultation having been completed pursuant to
GR.21, the Grid Code Review Panel shall prepare a report (the “Grid Code Modification
Self-Governance Report”).

GR.24.6 The matters to be included in a Grid Code Modification Self-Governance Report shall
be the following (in respect of the Grid Code Modification Proposal):

(a) details of its analysis of the Grid Code Modification Proposal against the Self-
Governance Criteria;

(b) copies of all consultation responses received;

(c) the date on which the Grid Code Review Panel Self-Governance Vote shall take
place, which shall not be earlier than seven (7) days from the date on which the Grid
Code Modification Self- Governance Report is furnished to the Authority in
accordance with GR.24.8; and

(d) such other information that is considered relevant by the Grid Code Review Panel.

GR.24.7 A draft of the Grid Code Modification Self-Governance Report will be circulated by the
Code Administrator to Users and Panel Members (and its provision in electronic form on
the Website and in electronic mails to Users and Panel Members, who must supply
relevant details, shall meet this requirement) and a period of no less than five (5) Business
Days given for comments to be made thereon. Any unresolved comments made shall be
reflected in the final Grid Code Modification Self-Governance Report.

GR.24.8 Each Grid Code Modification Self-Governance Report shall be addressed and furnished
to the Authority and none of the facts, opinions or statements contained in such Grid Code
Modification Self-Governance Report may be relied upon by any other person.

GR.24.9 Subject to GR.24.11, if the Authority does not give written notice that its decision is
required pursuant to GR.24.2, or if the Authority determines that the Self-Governance
Criteria are satisfied in accordance with GR.24.4, then the Grid Code Modification Self-
Governance Report shall be tabled at the Panel Meeting following submission of that
Grid Code Modification Self-Governance Report to the Authority at which the Panel
Chairperson will undertake the Grid Code Review Panel Self-Governance Vote and
the Code Administrator shall give notice of the outcome of such vote to the Authority
as soon as possible thereafter.

GR.24.10 If the Grid Code Review Panel vote to approve the Grid Code Modification Proposal
pursuant to GR.24.9 (which shall then be an “Approved Grid Code Self-Governance
Proposal”) until implemented).

GR.24.11 The Grid Code Review Panel may at any time prior to the Grid Code Review Panel’s
determination retract a Self-Governance Statement subject to GR.24.4, or if the
Authority notifies the Grid Code Review Panel that it has determined that a Grid Code
Modification Proposal does not meet the Self-Governance Criteria the Grid Code
Review Panel shall treat the Grid Code Modification Proposal as a Standard
Modification and shall comply with GR.22, using the Grid Code Modification Self-
Governance Report as a basis for its Grid Code Modification Report.

GR.24.12 The Code Administrator shall make available on the Website and copy (by electronic
mail to those persons who have supplied relevant details to the Code Administrator) the
Grid Code Modification Self-Governance Report prepared in accordance with GR.24 to:

(i) each Panel Member; and

(ii) any person who may request a copy, and shall place a copy on the
Website.

GR.24.13 A User (including any Authorised Electricity Operator; The Company or a Materially
Affected Party), the Citizens Advice or the Citizens Advice Scotland may appeal to the
Authority the approval or rejection by the Grid Code Review Panel of a Grid Code
Page 34 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 Modification Proposal and any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) in
accordance with GR.24.9, provided that the Panel Secretary is also notified, and the
appeal has been made up to and including fifteen (15) Business Days after the Grid Code
Review Panel Self-Governance Vote has been undertaken pursuant to GR.24.9. If such
an appeal is made, implementation of the Grid Code Modification Proposal shall be
suspended pending the outcome. The appealing User (including any Authorised
Electricity Operator; The Company or a Materially Affected Party), the Citizens Advice
or the Citizens Advice Scotland must notify the Panel Secretary of the appeal when the
appeal is made.

GR.24.14 The Authority shall consider whether the appeal satisfies the following criteria:

(a) The appealing party is, or is likely to be, unfairly prejudiced by the implementation
or non-implementation of that Grid Code Modification Proposal or Workgroup
Alternative Grid Code Modification(s); or

(b) The appeal is on the grounds that, in the case of implementation, the Grid Code
Modification Proposal or Workgroup Alternative; or

(c) Grid Code Modification(s) may not better facilitate the achievement of at least
one of the Grid Code Objectives; or

(d) The appeal is on the grounds that, in the case of non-implementation, the Grid
Code Modification Proposal or Workgroup Alternative Grid Code
Modification(s) may better facilitate the achievement of at least one of the Grid
Code Objectives; and

(e) It is not brought for reasons that are trivial, vexatious or have no reasonable
prospect of success and if the Authority considers that the criteria are not
satisfied, it shall dismiss the appeal.

GR.24.15 Following any appeal to the Authority, a Grid Code Modification Proposal or
Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) shall be treated in accordance with
any decision and/or direction of the Authority following that appeal.

GR.24.16 If the Authority quashes the Grid Code Review Panel’s determination in respect of a Grid
Code Modification Proposal or Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s)
made in accordance with GR.24.9 and takes the decision on the relevant Grid Code
Modification Proposal and any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s)
itself, following an appeal to the Authority, the Grid Code Review Panel’s determination
of that Grid Code Modification Proposal and any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code
Modification(s) contained in the relevant Grid Code Modification Self Governance
Report shall be treated as a Grid Code Modification Report submitted to the Authority
pursuant to GR.22.6 (for the avoidance of doubt, subject to GR.22.8 to GR.22.12) and the
Grid Code Review Panel’s determination shall be treated as its recommendation pursuant
to GR.22.4.

GR.24.17 If the Authority quashes the Grid Code Review Panel’s determination in respect of a Grid
Code Modification Proposal or Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s)
made in accordance with GR.24.9, the Authority may, following an appeal to the
Authority, refer the Grid Code Modification Proposal back to the Grid Code Review
Panel for further re-consideration and a further Grid Code Review Panel Self-
Governance Vote.

GR.24.18 Following an appeal to the Authority, the Authority may confirm the Grid Code Review
Panel’s determination in respect of a Grid Code Modification Proposal or Workgroup
Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) made in accordance with GR.24.9.

GR.25 IMPLEMENTATION

GR.25.1 The Grid Code shall be modified either in accordance with the terms of the direction by the
Authority relating to, or other approval by the Authority of, the Grid Code Modification
Page 35 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 Proposal or any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) contained in the
relevant Grid Code Modification Report, or in respect of Grid Code Modification
Proposals or any Workgroup Alternative Grid Code Modification(s) that are subject to
the determination of the Grid Code Review Panel pursuant to GR.24.9, in accordance with
the relevant Grid Code Modification Self-Governance Report subject to the appeal
procedures set out in GR.24.13 to GR.24.18.

GR.25.2 The Code Administrator shall forthwith notify (by publication on the Website and, where
relevant details are supplied by electronic mail):

(a) each User;

(b) each Panel Member;
(c) the Authority;
(d) each Core Industry Document Owner;
(e) the secretary of the STC committee;
(f) each Materially Affected Party; and
(g) the Citizens Advice and the Citizens Advice Scotland of the change so made
and the effective date of the change.

GR.25.3 A modification of the Grid Code shall take effect from the time and date specified in the
direction, or other approval, from the Authority referred to in GR.25.1 or, in the absence
of any such time and date in the direction or approval, from 00:00 hours on the day falling
ten (10) Business Days after the date of such direction, or other approval, from the
Authority. A modification of the Grid Code pursuant to GR.24.9 shall take effect, subject
to the appeal procedures set out in GR.24.13 to GR.24.18, from the time and date specified
by the Code Administrator in its notice given pursuant to GR.25.2, which shall be given
after the expiry of the fifteen (15) Business Day period set out in GR.24.13 to allow for
appeals, or where an appeal is raised in accordance with GR.24.13, on conclusion of the
appeal in accordance with GR.24.15 or GR.24.18 but where conclusion of the appeal is
earlier than the fifteen (15) Business Day period set out in GR.24.13, notice shall be given
after the expiry of this period. A modification of the Grid Code pursuant to GR.26 shall take
effect from the date specified in the Grid Code Modification Fast Track Report.

GR.25.4 A modification made pursuant to and in accordance with GR.25.1 shall not be impaired or
invalidated in any way by any inadvertent failure to comply with or give effect to this Section.

GR.25.5 If a modification is made to the Grid Code in accordance with the Transmission Licence
but other than pursuant to the other Grid Code Modification Procedures in these
Governance Rules, the Grid Code Review Panel shall determine whether or not to submit
the modification for review by a Workgroup established on terms specified by the Grid
Code Review Panel to consider and report as to whether any alternative modification
could, as compared with such modification better facilitate achieving the Grid Code
Objectives in respect of the subject matter of the original modification. Where such a
Workgroup is established the provisions of GR.20 shall apply as if such a modification
were a Grid Code Modification Proposal.

Transitional Issues

GR.25.6 Notwithstanding the provisions of GR.25.3, Modification GC0132 changes the Grid Code
process for Grid Code Modification Proposals and therefore may affect other Grid Code
Modification Proposals which have not yet become Approved Modifications.
Consequently, this GR.25.6 deals with issues arising out of the implementation of
Modification GC0132. In particular this deals with which version of the Grid Code process
for Grid Code Modification Proposals will apply to Grid Code Modification Proposal(s)
which were already instigated prior to the implementation of Modification GC0132.

Any Grid Code Modification Proposal in respect of which a Grid Code Modification
Report has been sent to the Authority prior to the date and time of implementation of
Modification GC0132 is known as an “Old Modification”. Any Grid Code Modification
Proposal in respect of which a Grid Code Modification Report has not been sent to the
Authority as at the date and time of implementation of Modification GC0132 is known as
a “New Modification”. The Grid Code provisions which will apply to any Old
Modification(s) are the provisions of the Grid Code in force immediately prior to the

Page 36 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 implementation of GC0132. The provisions of the Grid Code which will apply to any New
Modifications are the provisions of the Grid Code in force and as amended from time to
time.

GR.25.7 Notwithstanding the provisions of GR.25.3, Modification GC0131 changes the Grid Code
process for Grid Code Modification Proposals and therefore may affect other Grid Code
Modification Proposals which have not yet become Approved Modifications.
Consequently, this GR.25.7 deals with issues arising out of the implementation of
Modification GC0131. In particular this deals with which version of the Grid Code process
for Grid Code Modification Proposals will apply to Grid Code Modification Proposal(s)
which were already instigated prior to the implementation of Modification GC0131.

Any Grid Code Modification Proposal in respect of which a Grid Code Modification
Report has been sent to the Authority prior to the date and time of implementation of
Modification GC0131 is known as an “Old GC0131 Modification”. Any Grid Code
Modification Proposal in respect of which a Grid Code Modification Report has not
been sent to the Authority as at the date and time of implementation of Modification
GC0131 is known as a “New GC0131 Modification”. The Grid Code provisions which will
apply to any Old GC0131 Modification(s) are the provisions of the Grid Code in force
immediately prior to the implementation of GC0131. The provisions of the Grid Code which
will apply to any New GC0131 Modifications are the provisions of the Grid Code in force
from time to time.

GR.26 FAST TRACK

GR.26.1 Where a Proposer believes that a modification to the Grid Code which meets the Fast
Track Criteria is required, a Grid Code Fast Track Proposal may be raised. In such case
the Proposer is only required to provide the details listed in GR.15.3 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e)
and (k).

GR.26.2 Provided that the Panel Secretary receives any modification to the Grid Code which the
Proposer considers to be a Grid Code Fast Track Proposal, not less than ten (10)
Business Days (or such shorter period as the Panel Secretary may agree, provided that
the Panel Secretary shall not agree any period shorter than five (5) Business Days) prior
to the next Grid Code Review Panel meeting, the Panel Secretary shall place the Grid
Code Fast Track Proposal on the agenda of the next Grid Code Review Panel meeting,
and otherwise, shall place it on the agenda of the next succeeding Grid Code Review
Panel meeting.

GR.26.3 To facilitate the discussion at the Grid Code Review Panel meeting, the Code
Administrator will circulate a draft of the Grid Code Modification Fast Track Report to
Users, the Authority and Panel Members (and its provision in electronic form on the
Website and in electronic mails to Users, the Authority and Panel Members, who must
supply relevant details, shall meet this requirement) for comment not less than five (5)
Business Days ahead of the Grid Code Review Panel meeting which will consider
whether or not the Fast Track Criteria are met and whether or not to approve the Grid
Code Fast Track Proposal.

GR.26.4 It is for the Grid Code Review Panel to decide whether or not a Grid Code Fast Track
Proposal meets the Fast Track Criteria and if it does, to determine whether or not to
approve the Grid Code Fast Track Proposal.

GR.26.5 The Grid Code Review Panel’s decision that a Grid Code Fast Track Proposal meets
the Fast Track Criteria pursuant to GR.26.4 must be unanimous.

GR.26.6 The Grid Code Review Panel’s decision to approve the Grid Code Fast Track Proposal
pursuant to GR.26.4 must be unanimous.

GR.26.7 If the Grid Code Review Panel vote unanimously that the Grid Code Fast Track
Proposal meets the Fast Track Criteria and to approve the Grid Code Fast Track
Proposal (which shall then be an “Approved Fast Track Proposal”) until implemented,
or until an objection is received pursuant to GR.26.12), then subject to the objection

Page 37 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 procedures set out in GR.26.12 the Grid Code Fast Track Proposal will be implemented
by The Company without the Authority’s approval. If the Grid Code Review Panel do
not unanimously agree that the Grid Code Modification Proposal meets the Fast Track
Criteria and/or do not unanimously agree that the Grid Code Fast Track Proposal should
be made, then the Panel Secretary shall, in accordance with GR.15.4(a) notify the
Proposer that additional information is required if the Proposer wishes the Grid Code
Modification Proposal to continue.

GR.26.8 Provided that the Grid Code Review Panel have unanimously agreed to treat a Grid Code
Modification Proposal as a Grid Code Fast Track Proposal and unanimously approved
that Grid Code Fast Track Proposal, the Grid Code Review Panel shall prepare and
approve the Grid Code Modification Fast Track Report for issue in accordance with
GR.26.11.

GR.26.9 The matters to be included in a Grid Code Modification Fast Track Report shall be the
following (in respect of the Grid Code Fast Track Proposal):

(a) a description of the proposed modification and of its nature and purpose;

(b) details of the changes required to the Grid Code, including the proposed legal text to
modify the Grid Code to implement the Grid Code Fast Track Proposal;

(c) details of the votes required pursuant to GR.26.5 and GR.26.6;

(d) the intended implementation date, from which the Approved Fast Track Proposal will
take effect, which shall be no sooner than fifteen (15) Business Days after the date of
notification of the Grid Code Review Panel’s decision to approve; and

(e) details of how to object to the Approved Fast Track Proposal being made

GR.26.10 Upon approval by the Grid Code Review Panel of the Grid Code Modification Fast Track
Report, the Code Administrator will issue the report in accordance with GR.26.11.

GR.26.11 The Code Administrator shall copy (by electronic mail to those persons who have
supplied relevant details to the Code Administrator) the Grid Code Modification Fast
Track Report prepared in accordance with GR.26 to:

(i) each Panel Member;

(ii) the Authority; and
(iii) any person who may request a copy, and shall place a copy on the Website.

GR.26.12 A User, any Authorised Electricity Operator; The Company or a Materially Affected
Party, the Citizens Advice, the Citizens Advice Scotland or the Authority may object to
the Approved Fast Track Proposal being implemented, and shall include with such
objection the reasons for the objection. Any such objection must be made in writing
(including by email) and be clearly stated to be an objection to the Approved Fast Track
Proposal in accordance with this GR.26 of the Grid Code and be notified to the Panel
Secretary by the date up to and including fifteen (15) Business Days after notification of
the Grid Code Review Panel’s decision to approve the Grid Code Fast Track Proposal.
If such an objection is made the Approved Fast Track Proposal shall not be implemented.
The Panel Secretary will notify each Panel Member and the Authority of the objection.
The Panel Secretary shall notify the Proposer, in accordance with GR.15.4A that
additional information is required if the Proposer wishes the Grid Code Modification
Proposal to continue.

Page 38 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 ANNEX GR.A - ELECTION OF USERS' PANEL MEMBERS

Grid Code Review Panel Election Process

1. The election process has two main elements: nomination and selection.
2. The process will be used to appoint Panel Members in the category of Supplier, Generator, Offshore
Transmission Owner and Onshore Transmission Owner.
3. The Code Administrator will publish the Election timetable by [September] in the year preceding the start
of each term of office of Panel Members.
4. Each step of the process set out below will be carried out in line with the published timetable.
5. The Code Administrator will establish an Electoral Roll from representatives of parties listed on CUSC
Schedule 1 or designated by the Authority as a Materially Affected Party as at 31st August in the year
preceding the start of each term of office of Panel Members.
6. The Code Administrator will keep the Electoral Roll up to date.

Nomination Process

7. Each party on the Electoral Roll may nominate a candidate to stand for election for the Grid Code Review
Panel.
8. Parties may only nominate a candidate for their own category; a Supplier may nominate a candidate for
the Supplier Panel Member seat and a Generator may nominate a candidate for the Generator Panel
Member seats. If a party able to nominate a candidate is both a Supplier and a Generator, they may
nominate a candidate in each category.
9. The nominating party must complete the nomination form which will be made available by the Code
Administrator and return it to the Code Administrator by the stated deadline.
10. The Code Administrator will draw up a list of candidates for each category of election.
11. Where there are fewer candidates than seats available or the same number of candidates as seats
available, no election will be required and the nominated candidate(s) will be elected. The Code
Administrator will publish a list of the successful candidates on the Grid Code website and circulate the
results by email to the Grid Code circulation list.

Selection Process

12. The Code Administrator will send a numbered voting paper to each party on the electoral roll for each of
the elections in which they are eligible to vote. The voting paper will contain a list of candidates for each
election and will be sent by email.
13. Each eligible party may vote for one [1] candidate for each of the Supplier, Offshore Transmission
Owner and Onshore Transmission Owner seats and four [4] candidates for the Generator seats.
14. Panel Members will be elected using the First Past the Post method.
15. In the event of two or more candidates receiving the same number of votes, the Code Administrator will
draw lots to decide who is elected.
16. The Code Administrator will publish the results of the election on the Grid Code website and circulate
the results by email to the Grid Code circulation list.
17. The Code Administrator will send an Election Report to Ofgem after the election is complete.

Page 39 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 ANNEX GR.B Regulated Sections

The Grid Code sections identified in Tables 1 and 2 are considered to be Regulated Sections.

Table 1 - Mapping of Electricity Balancing Regulation Article 18 Terms and Conditions for Balancing
Service Providers and BalancingResponsible Parties to the Grid Code

Commission
Regulation
(EU) Grid Code
Description
2017/2195 Reference
Reference
(Retained EU
Law)

The terms and conditions pursuant to paragraph 1 shall also

include the rules for suspension and restoration of market
activities pursuant to Article 36 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2196
18.2 and rules for settlement in case of market suspension OC9.4
pursuant to Article 39 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2196 once
approved in accordance with Article 4 of Regulation (EU)
2017/2196.

define reasonable and justified requirements for the provisions BC1, BC2, BC3 &
18.4.a
of balancing services; BC4

allow the aggregation of demand facilities, energy storage

facilities and power generating facilities in a scheduling area to
18.4.b DRSC 4.2, BC1.4
offer balancing services subject to conditions referred to in
paragraph 5 (c);

the rules for the qualification process to become a balancing

18.5.a BC5, BC4.4.2
service provider pursuant to Article 16;

the rules and conditions for the aggregation of demand

facilities, energy storage facilities and power generating BC1.4 and
18.5.c
facilities in a scheduling area to become a balancing service BC1.A.10
provider;

the requirements on data and information to be delivered to

the connecting TSO and, where relevant, to the reserve
18.5.d DRC, BC5 BC1.4,
connecting DSO during the prequalification process and
operation of the balancing market;

the requirements on data and information to be delivered to

the connecting TSO and, where relevant, to the reserve
connecting DSO to evaluate the provisions of balancing
18.5. f BC1.4, BC1.A.10,
services pursuant to Article 154(1), Article 154(8),
Article 158(1)(e), Article 158(4)(b), Article 161(1)(f) and Article
161(4)(b) of Regulation (EU) 2017/1485;

the definition of a location for each standard product and each

18.5. g BC1.4
specific product taking into account paragraph 5 (c);

Page 40 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 BC1.4.2,3,4, BC1
the requirements on data and information to be delivered to
18.6. d Appendix 1
the connecting TSO to calculate the imbalances;
BC2.5.1,

the rules for balance responsible parties to change their

18.6. e schedules prior to and after the intraday energy gate closure BC1.4.3,4,
time pursuant to paragraphs 3 and 4 of Article 17;

Table 2 - Mapping of Network Code on Emergency and Restoration (NCER) Article 4(4) Terms and
Conditions for System Defence and System Restoration Service Providers to the Grid Code

Commission Description Grid Code Reference

Regulation
(EU)
2017/2196
Reference
(Retained EU
Law)
The terms and conditions to act as Restoration services:
4(4)(a) defence service provider and as Re-energisation procedure- OC.9.2.5,
restoration service provider shall be OC.9.4.7
established either in the national Re-synchronisation procedure- OC9.4.7,
legal framework or on a contractual BC2.9.2.2(iii))
basis. If established on a Frequency deviation management -BC3.4,
contractual basis, each TSO shall BC.3.5, BC3.6, BC3.7 BC2.5.4
develop by 18 December 2018 a Defence services:
proposal for the relevant terms and Frequency deviation management- BC3.4,
conditions, which shall define at BC.3.5, BC3.6, BC3.7 BC2.5.4,
least: Fast Start- CC/ECC.6.3.14
(a) the characteristics of the service Limited Frequency Sensitive Mode-
to be provided ECC.6.3.7.1, ECC.6.3.7.2, BC3.7.2
Low Frequency Demand disconnection–
CC/ECC.6.4.3, CC/ECC.A.5, OC6.5, OC6.6
Over Frequency control- ECC.6.3.7.1,
ECC.6.3.7.3, BC.3.7.1, BC.3.7.2
Frequency deviation management- BC3.4,
BC.3.5, BC3.6, BC3.7, CC/ECC.6.3.3,
CC.6.3.7(a), ECC.6.3.7.3,
CC.6.3.6(a)/ECC.6.3.6, CC/ECC.6.3.9,
DRSC 5.1, DRSC
6.1, DRSC 7.1, BC.1.4.2, BC1. A.1.1,
BC2.6.1, BC2.7, BC.2.9, OC7.4.5, OC6.7,
OC6.5, OC.10,
Voltage deviation management-
CC/ECC.6.1.4, CC/ECC.6.3.2, CC.6.3.6(b),
ECC.6.3.6.3, ECC.6.4.5, BC2.8, BC2. A.2,
DRSC.5,
Power flow management- CC.6.3.7(a),
ECC.6.3.7.3.1, CC/ECC.6.3.9, BC.1.4.2,
BC1.5.5, BC1.7, BC1. A.1.1, BC.2.6.1,
BC2.7, BC2.9, OC7.4.5, OC6.7, OC10,
DRSC 5.1,
Assistance for active power- BC2.7, BC2.9.
OC9.4, OC9.5, OC7.4.8
Manual Demand disconnection- OC6.5,
OC6.7, BC2.9

Page 41 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 4(4) (b) the possibility of and conditions DRSC1, DRSC2, DRSC4
(b) for aggregation; and ECC/CC 6.5
BC1.4
BC1. A.10
BC

< END OF GOVERNANCE RULES >

Page 42 of 42
Issue 6 Revision 19 04 December 2023
 REVISIONS
(R)

(This section does not form part of the Grid Code)

R.1 The Company’s Transmission Licence sets out the way in which changes to the Grid Code
are to be made and reference is also made to The Company's obligations under the General
Conditions.
R.2 All pages re-issued have the revision number on the lower left hand corner of the page and
date of the revision on the lower right hand corner of the page.
R.3 The Grid Code was introduced in March 1990 and the first issue was revised 31 times. In
March 2001 the New Electricity Trading Arrangements were introduced and Issue 2 of the
Grid Code was introduced which was revised 16 times. At British Electricity Trading and
Transmission Arrangements (BETTA) Go-Active Issue 3 of the Grid Code was introduced
and subsequently revised 35 times. At Offshore Go-active Issue 4 of the Grid Code was
introduced and has been revised 13 times since its original publication. Issue 5 of the Grid
Code was published to accommodate the changes made by Grid Code Modification A/10
which has incorporated the Generator compliance process into the Grid Code, which was
revised 47 times. Issue 6 was published to incorporate all the non-material amendments as a
result of modification GC0136.

R.4 This Revisions section provides a summary of the sections of the Grid Code changed by each
revision to Issue 6.
R.5 All enquiries in relation to revisions to the Grid Code, including revisions to Issues 1, 2, 3, 4
and 5 should be addressed to the Grid Code development team at the following email address:
[email protected]
Revision Section Related Effective Date
Modification

GC0136 05 March 2021

0 Glossary Definitions

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Planning Code

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Connection Conditions

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

European Connection Conditions

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Demand Response Services

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Compliance Processes

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Europeans Compliance Processes

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Operating Code 1

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Operating Code 2

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Operating Code 5

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Operating Code 6

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Operating Code 7

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Operating Code 8

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Operating Code 8A

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Operating Code 8B

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Operating Code 9

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Operating Code 11

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Operating Code 12

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Balancing Code 2
Revision Section Related Effective Date
Modification

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Balancing Code 3

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Balancing Code 4

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Balancing Code 5

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Data Registration Code

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

General Conditions

0 GC0136 05 March 2021

Governance Rules

1 GC0130 18 March 2021

Glossary Definitions

1 GC0130 18 March 2021

Operating Code 2

1 GC0130 18 March 2021

Data Registration Code

1 GC0130 18 March 2021

General Conditions

2 GC0147 17 May 2021

Glossary Definitions

2 GC0147 17 May 2021

Operating Code 6B

2 GC0147 17 May 2021

Operating Code 7

2 GC0147 17 May 2021

Balancing Code 1

2 GC0147 17 May 2021

Balancing Code 2

3 GC0144 26 May 2021

Balancing Code 2

3 GC0144 26 May 2021

Balancing Code 4

4 GC0149 03 August 2021

Preface

4 GC0149 03 August 2021

Glossary Definitions

4 GC0149 03 August 2021

Planning Code
Revision Section Related Effective Date
Modification

4 GC0149 03 August 2021

European Connection Conditions

4 GC0149 03 August 2021

European Compliance Processes

4 GC0149 03 August 2021

Demand Response Services Code

4 GC0149 03 August 2021

Operating Code 2

4 GC0149 03 August 2021

Balancing Code 4

4 GC0149 03 August 2021

Data Registration Code

4 GC0149 03 August 2021

Governance Rules

5 GC0109 23 August 2021

Operating Code 7

6 GC0134 01 September 2021

Connection Conditions

6 GC0134 01 September 2021

European Connection Conditions

6 GC0134 01 September 2021

Balancing Code 2

7 GC0150 04 October 2021

Operating Code 6B

8 GC0151 08 November 2021

Operating Code 2

8 GC0151 08 November 2021

Operating Code 3

8 GC0151 08 November 2021

Operating Code 5

9 GC0152 29 December 2021

Governance Rules

10 Electrical 20 January 2022

General Conditions
Standards - EDL
Instruction
Interface Valid
Reason Codes

11 GC0137 14 February 2022

Glossary Definitions

11 GC0137 14 February 2022

Planning Code
Revision Section Related Effective Date
Modification

11 GC0137 14 February 2022

Connection Conditions

11 GC0137 14 February 2022

European Connection Conditions

11 GC0137 14 February 2022

European Compliance Processes

11 GC0137 14 February 2022

Data Registration Code

12 GC0153 09 March 2022

Glossary Definitions

12 GC0153 09 March 2022

Connection Conditions

12 GC0153 09 March 2022

European Connection Conditions

12 GC0153 09 March 2022

Operating Code 6

12 GC0153 09 March 2022

Operating Code 8A

12 GC0153 09 March 2022

Operating Code 8B

12 GC0153 09 March 2022

Operating Code 12

12 GC0153 09 March 2022

Balancing Code 2

12 GC0153 09 March 2022

Governance Rules

13 GC0138 24 June 2022

Compliance Processes

13 GC0138 24 June 2022

European Compliance Processes

13 GC0138 24 June 2022

Operating Code 5

14 GC0157 06 October 2022

Glossary & Definitions

14 GC0157 06 October 2022

European Connection Conditions

14 GC0157 06 October 2022

Operating Code 2

14 GC0157 06 October 2022

Operating Code 5
Revision Section Related Effective Date
Modification

14 GC0157 06 October 2022

Data Registration Code

14 GC0158 06 December 2022

No changes to published Grid Code

15 GC0160 07 December 2022

Glossary & Definitions

15 GC0160 07 December 2022

Balancing Code 1

15 GC0160 07 December 2022

Balancing Code 2

16 GC0141 05 January 2023

Planning Code

16 GC0141 05 January 2023

Connection Conditions

16 GC0141 05 January 2023

European Connection Conditions

16 GC0141 05 January 2023

Compliance Processes

16 GC0141 05 January 2023

European Compliance Processes

17 GC0148 4 September 2023

Connection Conditions

17 GC0148 4 September 2023

European Compliance Processes

17 GC0148 4 September 2023

European Connection Conditions

17 GC0148 4 September 2023

General Conditions

17 GC0148 4 September 2023

Glossary & Definitions

17 GC0148 4 September 2023

Operating Code 5

17 GC0148 4 September 2023

Operating Code 6

17 GC0148 4 September 2023

Planning Code

18 GC0161 2 October 2023

Operating Code 6

19 GC0165 4 December 2023

European Connection Conditions
Revision Section Related Effective Date
Modification

19 GC0165 4 December 2023

Operating Code 12

19 GC0165 4 December 2023

Data Registration Code

19 GC0165 4 December 2023

Governance Rules

20 GC0162 15 December 2023

Operating Code 6

21 GC0156 4 March 2024

Glossary & Definitions

21 GC0156 4 March 2024

Planning Code

21 GC0156 4 March 2024

Connection Conditions

21 GC0156 4 March 2024

European Connection Conditions

21 GC0156 4 March 2024

Operating Code 1

21 GC0156 4 March 2024

Operating Code 2

21 GC0156 4 March 2024

Operating Code 5

21 GC0156 4 March 2024

Operating Code 9

21 GC0156 4 March 2024

Balancing Code 2

21 GC0156 4 March 2024

Balancing Code 4

21 GC0156 4 March 2024

Data Registration Code

21 GC0156 4 March 2024

General Conditions

< END OF REVISIONS >